UNITED STATES

SECURITIES AND EXCHANGE COMMISSION

WASHINGTON, D.C. 20549

 

 

FORM20-F

(Mark One)

REGISTRATION STATEMENT PURSUANT TO SECTION 12(b) OR (g) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

OR

 

ANNUAL REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the fiscal year endedDecember 31, 20182019

OR

 

TRANSITION REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

For the transition period from                        to                        

OR

 

SHELL COMPANY REPORT PURSUANT TO SECTION 13 OR 15(d) OF THE SECURITIES EXCHANGE ACT OF 1934

Date of event requiring this shell company report                        to                        

Commission file number001-14928

Santander UK plc

(Exact name of Registrant as specified in its charter)

England

(Jurisdiction of incorporation or organization)

2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, England

(Address of principal executive offices)

Julian Curtis

2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, England

Tel: +44 (0) 20 7756 4272

E-mail: julian.curtis@santander.co.uk

(Name, Telephone,E-mail and/or Facsimile number and Address of Company Contact Person)

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(b) of the Act.

 

2.500% Notes due March 14, 2019, issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc*

Title of each class

 New York Stock Exchange
Floating Rate Notes due March 14, 2019, issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc *

Trading

Symbol(s)

 New York Stock Exchange
2.350% Notes due September 10, 2019, issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc *New York Stock Exchange

Name of each exchange

on which registered

2.375% Notes due March 16, 2020, issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc *SAN/20A New York Stock Exchange
2.125% Notes due November 3, 2020, issued by Santander UK plcSAN/20C New York Stock Exchange
Floating Rate Notes due November 3, 2020, issued by Santander UK plc SAN/20DNew York Stock Exchange
2.500% Notes due January 5, 2021, issued by Santander UK plcSAN/21B New York Stock Exchange
3.400% Notes due June 1, 2021, issued by Santander UK plc SAN/21CNew York Stock Exchange
Floating Rate Notes due June 1, 2021, issued by Santander UK plcSAN/21D New York Stock Exchange
3.750% Notes due 2021 due November 15, 2021, issued by Santander UK plc SAN/21FNew York Stock Exchange
Floating Rate Notes due November 15, 2021, issued by Santander UK plcSAN/21G New York Stock Exchange
4.000% Notes due March 13, 2024, issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc *SAN/24New York Stock Exchange
2.875% Notes due June 18, 2024, issued by Santander UK plcSAN/24DNew York Stock Exchange
2.100% Notes due January 13, 2023, issued by Santander UK plcSAN/23B New York Stock Exchange

 

*

From June 1, 2016 Santander UK plc became the issuer in respect of the outstanding notes issued by Abbey National Treasury Services plc under its US SEC registered debt shelf. All notes transferred to Santander UK plc by Abbey National Treasury Services plc under its US SEC registered debt shelf and all notes issued by Santander UK plc in the future under its US SEC registered debt shelf will be the sole liability of Santander UK plc and are not guaranteed by any other entity.

Securities registered or to be registered pursuant to Section 12(g) of the Act.

None

Securities for which there is a reporting obligation pursuant to Section 15(d) of the Act.

7.95% Term Subordinated Securities due October 26, 2029

Indicate the number of outstanding shares of each of the issuer’s classes of capital or common stock as of the close of the period covered by the annual report.

 

Ordinary shares of nominal value of £0.10 each*

 31,051,768,866

10 3/8%Non-cumulative Preference Shares of nominal value of £1 each

 200,000,000

8 5/8%Non-cumulative Preference Shares of nominal value of £1 each

 125,000,000
Series A Fixed/Floating RateNon-cumulative Preference Shares of nominal value of £1 each 13,780

* All of the issued and outstanding ordinary shares of Santander UK plc are held by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

*

All of the issued and outstanding ordinary shares of Santander UK plc are held by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Indicate by check mark if the registrant is a well-known seasoned issuer, as defined in Rule 405 of the Securities Act.    Yes      No  

If this report is an annual or transition report, indicate by check mark if the registrant is not required to file reports pursuant to Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934.    Yes      No  

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant: (1) has filed all reports required to be filed by Section 13 or 15(d) of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934 during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to file such reports), and (2) has been subject to such filing requirements for the past 90 days.    Yes      No  

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant has submitted electronically every Interactive Data File required to be submitted pursuant to Rule 405 of RegulationS-T (§232.405 of this chapter) during the preceding 12 months (or for such shorter period that the registrant was required to submit such files).    Yes      No  

Indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a large accelerated filer, an accelerated filer, anon-accelerated filer or an emerging growth company. See definition of “large accelerated filer,” “accelerated filer,” and “emerging growth company” in Rule12b-2 of the Exchange Act.

 

Large accelerated filerAccelerated filerNon-accelerated filer
 Large accelerated filer     Accelerated filer   Non-accelerated filer   Emerging growth company

If an emerging growth company that prepares its financial statements in accordance with U.S. GAAP, indicate by check mark if the registrant has elected not to use the extended transition period for complying with any new or revised financial accounting standards† provided pursuant to Section 13(a) of the Exchange Act.

The term “new or revised financial accounting standard” refers to any update issued by the Financial Accounting Standards Board to its Accounting Standards Codification after April 5, 2012.

Indicate by check mark which basis of accounting the registrant has used to prepare the financial statements included in this filing:

 

U.S. GAAP   International Financial Reporting Standards as issuedOther  ☐
        by the International Accounting Standards Board   Other  

If “Other” has been checked in response to the previous question, indicate by check mark which financial statement item the registrant has elected to follow.    Item 17      Item 18  

If this is an annual report, indicate by check mark whether the registrant is a shell company (as defined inRule 12b-2 of the Exchange Act).    Yes      No  

 

 

 


 

2018

2019 Annual Report

 

 

 

Santander UK plc

Part of the Banco Santander group


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

    


This pagePage intentionally blank


Santander UK plc

Annual Report 2018

 

 

 

Strategic report

 

 2

Financial review

 5

Governance

 18

Board of Directors

 19

Corporate governance report

 22

Directors’ remuneration report

 41

Directors’ report

 48

Risk review

 52

Financial statements

 127

Auditor’s report

 128

Primary financial statements

 134

Notes to the financial statements

 142

Shareholder information

 215

Selected financial data

 216

Subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates

 218

Forward-looking statements

 220

Other information for US investors

 221


Santander UK plc

Annual Report 2019

 

 

 

Important information for readers

None of the websites referred to in this Annual Report on Form 20-F for the year ended 31 December 2019 (the Form 20-F) including where a link is provided, nor any of the information contained on such websites is incorporated by reference in the Form 20-F.

Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries (collectively Santander UK or the Santander UK group) operate primarily in the UK, and are part of the Banco Santander group (comprising Banco Santander SA and its subsidiaries). Santander UK plc is regulated by the UK Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA) and the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA) and certain other companies within the Santander UK group are regulated by the FCA.FCA and the PRA. This Annual Report contains forward-looking statements that involve inherent risks and uncertainties. Actual results may differ materially from those contained in such forward-looking statements. See Forward-looking statements on page 220.in the Shareholder information section.

Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate parent company of Santander UK plc. The two companies operate on the basis of a unified business strategy, and have common Boards, albeit the principal business activities of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are carried on by Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries.

The Santander UK Group Holdings plc Corporate Governance and Risk Frameworks have been adopted by the Company and its subsidiaries to ensure consistency of application. Prior to November 2018, the Corporate Governance and Risk Frameworks were applied from the level of Santander UK plc across the Santander UK group and adopted by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

As a result, the review of the business and principal risks and uncertainties facing the Company, and the description of the Company’s Corporate Governance, including the activities of the Board and risk management arrangements, are integrated with those of Santander UK Group Holdings plc and are reported in this Annual Report as operating within the Company for all periods presented.

None of the websites referred to in this Annual Report on Form20-F for the year ended 31 December 2018 (the Form20-F), including where a link is provided, nor any of the information contained on such websites is incorporated by reference in the Form20-F.

 

Santander UK plc 1


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Strategic report

Strategic report

Santander UK plc (the Company and together with its subsidiaries, Santander UK or the Santander UK group) is a subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc (together with its subsidiaries, the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group). The Company is required to set out inAbout this report a fair review of its business and a description of its principal risks and uncertainties, including a balanced and comprehensive analysis

The Strategic Report outlines the key elements of the developmentAnnual Report and performanceprovides context for the related financial statements. It is also designed to help members of the business in the year and of its position at the end of the year. This information can be found below and in the following sections of this Annual Report, which are incorporated into and form part of this Strategic report.

Under the UK Companies Act 2006, a safe harbour limits the liability of Directors in respect of statements in and omissions from the Directors’ Report (for which see page 48), the Strategic report and the Remuneration report. Under English lawcompany assess how the Directors would be liable to the company, but not to any third party, if one or more of these reports contained errors as a result of recklessness or knowing misstatement or dishonest concealment of a material fact, but would otherwise not be liable. Pages 48 to 51 inclusive comprise the Directors’ Report, pages 2 to 4 inclusive comprise the Strategic report and pages 41 to 47 inclusive comprise the Remuneration report, each of which have been drawn up and presented in accordance with and in reliance upon English company law and the liabilities of the Directors in connection with these reports shall be subject to the limitations and restrictions provided by such law.

The Directors, in preparing this Strategic report, have complied withperformed their duty under section 414C172 of the Companies Act 2006.

Principal activitiesThe report highlights key financial andnon-financial metrics which help to explain the business’s performance over the past year. It also highlights the external environmental factors affecting the business review

Who we are

We are uniquely placed as a leading scale challenger. We have a simple and straightforward business model which focuses on retail and commercial banking customers. We are a large UK ring-fenced bankalong with the scale and breadth of proposition to challenge the big four UK banks. With our omni-channel approach we serve our customers through digital channels, in particular mobile, alongside a network of 755 branches and 64 Corporate Business Centres supported by telephone call centres.

We play an important roleSantander UK’s position in the UK economy and in the communities in which we operate. We help people finance their home, save for the future and support business growth.

What we do

Most of what we do can be described as lending money to borrowers, taking deposits from savers, providing bank accounts and payment services. We also offer a wide range of investment and insurance products to households and other more specialised services and products to companies.

We are here to help our customers prosperbanking market.

We are heretry at all times to help our customers prosper and by doing so we create and protect sustainable value fortreat all our stakeholders.

We do things The Santander Way: Simple, Personal and Fair

Our customers are at the heart of everything we do.

We have a culture of personal responsibility.

Development and performance of our business in 2018

Information on the developmentstakeholders fairly and performance ofmeet our business in the year is set out in the ‘Income statement review’ section of the Financial review.

Our position at 31 December 2018

Information onenvironmental responsibilities. Sustainability and our position at the end of the year is set out in the ‘Balance sheet review’ section of the Financial review.

Our ring-fence structure

In 2013, UK legislation established a new requirement for certain UK banks to ring-fence their retail activities by 1 January 2019. The intention was to enhance the resilience of the largest UK banksstrategic direction are inseparable, and to reduce the possibility of essential banking services being disrupted in the event of a large bank getting into financial difficulty. In line with this legislation, we have now completed the establishment of our ring-fence bank. This follows the conclusion in 2018 of the required transfers from Santander UK to Banco Santander London Branch.

Under our current model, Santander UK plc is the ring-fenced bank of the Santander UK group. It serves all our personal customers in the UK and the vast majority of our business customers. Any service or products which cannot be offered, or customers that cannot be served by the ring-fenced bank, are now catered to through Banco Santander London Branch.

Additionally, in 2018 Abbey National Treasury Services plc (ANTS) became a subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc (formerly a subsidiary of Santander UK plc). ANTS holds only a small number of legacy positions and the business of our Jersey and Isle of Man branches.

Ring-fencing has been the biggest project that we have ever undertaken, involving significant effort over a number of years. In total, it has cost c£240m and at its peak around 1,000 people were working to ensure the business was ready in time. We have now successfully completed all the required transfers and operational changes without disruption for our customers.

For more information on ring-fencing, see Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2    Santander UK plc


> Strategic report

Uncertain economic environment

The UK economy has experienced moderate growth over the past three years, coupled with record low levels of unemployment. Inflation was very low in 2016, but has since risen above 2% which prompted the Bank of England to increase the Bank Rate twice by 25bps, in both 2017 and 2018, to 0.75%. House price growth has also slowed from high single digit figures to a much more modest level, withBuy-to-Let (BTL) lending in particular slowing largely due to changes in tax legislation.

We have a track record of consistent profitability, a resilient balance sheet and a relentless focus on customers. We believe that we are well-placed to manage any potential uncertainties and deliver for our stakeholders.

Over the last few years, in addition to the significant changes we implemented for ring-fence compliance, we have taken a number of actions to position the bank for the uncertain environment. We believe these actions together with our prudent approach to risk leave us well placed for the future.

Demanding regulatory change agenda

UK banks have undergone significant structural change and invested considerable resources to ensure compliance with ring-fencing legislation, ahead of the deadline of 1 January 2019. Digital advances have opened up opportunities for bothstart-ups and established technology companies. Open Banking has opened up the door of financial services for bothstart-ups and established technology companies, that will leverage customer data and improve competition, efficiency and stimulate innovation.

We have also seen in 2018 the implementation of three major regulatory items in General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR), Second Payment Services Directive (PSD2) and Markets in Financial Instruments Directive (MiFID II), and received confirmation of two more:non-binding indicative minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) requirements and the final rules and guidance on Payment Protection Insurance (PPI) from the FCA.

We expect our returns to continue to be impacted by increased regulatory compliance costs and the demanding banking regulation regime, including the transfer of business for ring-fencing. However, we remain confident that we continue to embed sustainability across our business. We have a profitableincluded information to demonstrate this within our Strategic Report and resilient business and plan to further develop loyal relationships by living up toinformation is also available in our commitment to be Simple, Personal and Fair.ESG Supplement.

By order of the Board.

Shriti Vadera

Chair

2019 outlook remains uncertainhighlights

We expect global economic activity to continue to expand in 2019, albeit at a slower pace with a number of heightened risks to the outlook from the ongoing imposition of trade restrictions, geopolitical tensions and slower growth in developed economies. These risks, together with the uncertain environment, highly competitive banking market and demanding regulatory agenda in the UK, mean we are cautious in our outlook.

In our core lending markets, we anticipate modest growth, with mortgage market growth of c3%, with weaker buyer demand and subdued house price growth likely to continue. Corporate borrowing market growth is expected to slow to c2%, as uncertainty continues to dampen investment intentions, particularly in the short term.

Our base case anticipates a slight improvement in economic growth, predicated on the UK’s orderly exit from the European Union. The low levels of unemployment should continue with inflation on a downward path which, coupled with rising wages, should result in real earnings growth. Extrapolating from the economic outlook at the end of 2018, our assumption is that there will be a 25bps rise in base rate in H219.

Net interest margin is expected to be lower than in 2018, as a result of competition in new mortgage pricing, SVR attrition and limited capacity for further liability margin improvement. SVR attrition is expected to be lower than the net £4.9bn reduction in 2018.

We expect costs to increase slightly as we invest further in our business transformation, face an intensifying regulatory change agenda and manage inflationary pressures. Incremental digital and strategic investments in process automation as well as system and platform rationalisation are also planned. These actions, together with global Banco Santander group initiatives, will improve our customer experience and deliver operational efficiencies over time. We expect to provide further guidance on cost management initiatives in the next few months.

We expect our net mortgage lending to be broadly in line with 2018, as we focus on quality customer service, retention and improved proposition for first-time buyers. We will continue to actively manage our CRE exposures while our lending growth tonon-CRE trading business customers is expected to remain robust.

Our principal risks and uncertainties

Information on our principal risks and uncertainties is set out in the Risk review by type of risk, with more detail by business segment. When reading the Risk review and the other sections of the Annual Report, you should refer to the ‘Forward-looking statements’ section in the Shareholder information.

 

LOGO

14.4 million  1,700  £165.4bn  £1,012m  14.3%  100%
active customers
(2018: 14.7 million)
  new active mobile
users per day
(2018:1,400)
  UK mortgage loans
(2018: £158.0bn)
  Profit before tax
(2018: £1,545m)
  CET1 capital ratio
(2018: 13.2%)
  

renewable electricity
used

(2018: 100%)

 

Santander UK plc3


Annual Report 2018 | Strategic report

5.8 million  60%  £22.3bn  £155m  1.15%  99.6%
digital customers
(2018: 5.5 million)
  mortgage loans
refinanced online
(2018: 55%)
  UK corporate loans
(2018 £24.1bn)
  Transformation
investment in 2019
  Stage 3 ratio
(2018: 1.29%)
  of waste recycled or
diverted from landfill
(2018: 99.8%

KeyStrategy and key performance indicators

The directors of the Company’s immediate parent, Santander UK Group Holdings plc, manage the operations of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group (which includes the Santander UK group) on a business division basis. Key performance indicators are not set, monitored or managed at the Santander UK group level. As a result, the Company’s Directors believe that analysis using key performance indicators for the Company is not necessary or appropriate for an understanding of the development, performance or position of the Company. The development performance and position of the business of the Santander UK group, mainly at a consolidated level, is set out in the Financial Review.

The key performance indicators of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group can be found on pages 1216 and 1317 of its 20182019 Annual Report, which does not form part of this report.

ManagingSantander UK at a glance

We are uniquely placed as a leading scale challenger bank. Our business model focuses on customer loyalty and our environmental impact efficientlycore business franchise. We are a large customer-focused bank and possess the scale and breadth of proposition to challenge the big four UK banks. We serve our customers through digital channels, alongside a network of branches and Corporate Business Centres.

We play an important role in the UK economy and in the communities in which we operate. We help people purchase their home, save for the future and support business growth. We employ 23,500 people and we paid £292m of corporation tax and £90m through the UK Bank Levy in 2019.

2Santander UK plc


2019 results

Our Environment & Energy2019 results, with 34% reduction in profit before tax, further reflect the ongoing income pressure on mortgages and PPI charges, alongside the important investment we are making in transforming our bank for the future. In recent years, we have purposefully operated a low risk strategy; making prudent investments in our core competencies, and embedding sustainable, long-term value across all our business activities. In doing this, we will enhance our standing as a responsible and resilient choice for our retail customers, and also position ourselves well to support the growth and trading strategies of our business customers.

Our cautious approach to risk has been affirmed by the Bank of England’s stress tests, which illustrate our bank’s resilience to a significant economic downturn. We remain focused on improving our return on tangible equity over the medium-term and our CET1 capital ratio has increased to 14.3% through capital accretion and strong capital discipline. This has been done without compromising dividend payments or our credit quality, while delivering our strategy of selective growth.

Business model

What we do

Provide financial products and services

Mortgages, consumer auto finance, unsecured loans, credit cards, banking and savings accounts, investment and insurance products for individuals and specialised services for companies

How we do it

Build strong customer relationships

Leveraging our experience and scale to drive customer loyalty

Offer a differentiated proposition

Anticipating customer needs and tailoring our products and services to be more meaningful and relevant

Take a prudent approach to risk

Making the right lending decisions. Identifying, assessing, managing and reporting the risks which could impact our business, results, reputation or sustainability

Do things The Santander Way

Living the Santander behaviours in how we interact with all our stakeholders ensuring everything we do is simple, personal and fair

Our competitive advantage

Leading scale challenger bank

An optimised footprint and scale in our core banking businesses combined with an innovative mindset

Resilient balance sheet and prudent approach

Strength of capital and liquidity demonstrated by the lowest CET1 drawdown in the annual Bank of England stress tests

International expertise for UK companies

Helping UK companies expand into overseas markets

Santander UK plc3


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

Strategic reportcontinued

Market overview: five major forces continue to shape the UK banking market

Changing customer behaviour

What we have seen

As customer behaviours change, banks arere-evaluating their service and operating models. The move away from traditionalin-branch banking towards online24-hour service continues. Customers are demanding more customised products and, with more information to hand, are increasingly likely to shop around for products that meet a particular need, rather than relying on their main bank to provide everything. This in turn creates the need for banks to be competitive across all areas of their offering, ensuring they create a range of products that meet a variety of customer needs.

Our response and looking ahead

We aim to serve our customers through the most suitable channel, whether that be through mobile, online, branch or telephone.

The number of transactions carried out via Santander branches has fallen by 41% over the past three years, while transactions via digital channels have grown by 93% over the same period. In response to the changes in how customers are choosing to carry out their banking, this year we havere-shaped our branch network and closed 140 branches. We have also begun to refurbish 100 branches with a focus on personal service, convenience and community engagement.

For our corporate customers we have a network of Corporate Business Centres (CBCs) across the UK and have recently opened our first Work Café, offering an innovative space for clients andnon-customers, which brings a bank,co-working area and coffee house together in a single place.

Strong market competition

What we have seen

The UK banking sector remains highly competitive with continuing pressure on margins experienced throughout the year. Competition in the mortgage market has continued to be intense with rates for fixed term products decreasing since the start of the year.

There have been new entrants into the banking market, challenging existing providers in areas such as current accounts and savings products. This has put pressure onnon-interest generated income along with rates paid on savings accounts.

Our response and looking ahead

As a leading scale challenger we are well-positioned despite a competitive market. We are focusing on our core franchises and in mortgages delivered our best net mortgage lending for a decade. This year we launched an innovative advertising campaign featuring Ant and Dec, initially focused on mortgage lending and raising brand awareness.

We understand the importance of knowing our customers and responding to their changing needs through continuous innovation of products and services.

We have begun a multi-year transformation programme to reduce costs and improve returns. Decisive actions will translate into improved efficiency in the medium-term along with a better customer experience.

Rapid technological change

What we have seen

Technology continues to advance rapidly across the financial services sector. Offering digital platforms has become essential, not only forday-to-day banking but for all banking needs, including mortgage applications and investment advice and servicing.

Disruptors are challenging the way banks traditionally serve their customers. They are increasing digital interaction through the use of innovative technology and data from multiple sources such as Open Banking.

Cyber security remains a key priority as customers move towards more digital activity. The ability to adapt to new risks is essential to meet new challenges faced across the industry.

Our response and looking ahead

Recognising the changing behaviour of customers, we are focused on digitally transforming the business. By utilising innovative digital solutions allied with our customer-centric approach, we aim to deliver excellence in customer experience.

We collaborate with FinTech companies through open IT architecture to help bring greater personalisation to our services. We benefit from our relationships with a number of innovative technology companies which Banco Santander’s $200m Santander InnoVentures fund invests in.

4Santander UK plc


Demanding regulatory agenda

What we have seen

Regulation in the UK remains focused on promoting positive customer outcomes by raising awareness, encouraging the financial education of customers and promoting competition. By removing barriers to exit for customers they can more easily change products and services to suit their needs.

The changes in the UK banking sector bring both risks and opportunities to existing providers. Advances in technology enable bothstart-ups and established banks to better tailor their offerings to their customers.

In 2019, the FCA announced measures to change the way banks and building societies charge their customers for using overdrafts. They will no longer be able to charge higher fees for unarranged overdrafts than for arranged overdrafts. The new rules will come into force in 2020.

Our response and looking ahead

We expect the regulatory agenda to continue to evolve and encourage more competition in the banking sector, opening it up further to new entrants. We also expect increased regulatory compliance costs as new regulation is implemented.

In 2020 we announced changes to the way we charge our customers for using overdrafts. From 6 April 2020, we will introduce a single interest rate for an arranged overdraft on all adult accounts, making the cost of using an overdraft more proportionate to the amount borrowed.

Uncertain economic environment

What we have seen

The UK economy has experienced volatile activity due topre-Brexit preparations with an average 0.2% quarterly growth in 2019, roughly half the pace seen in the previous two years. In January 2020, the UK left the EU and has entered a period of negotiation on a future trading relationship.

The Bank of England base rate remained flat in 2019 at 0.75%, due to slower global growth and Brexit uncertainties. The rate rose 25bps in both 2017 and 2018.

The Company is closely monitoring an outbreak of respiratory illness, known as COVID-19, which has spread from Asia into the UK and across the world. The situation remains complex and is evolving rapidly.

Our response and looking ahead

Prior to the COVID-19 outbreak, we expected UK growth to remain relatively subdued in 2020, with continued Brexit uncertainty and a weaker global economy. UK inflation is expected to remain below the 2% target in the near-term, with lower energy price inflation the main driver.

In early 2020 we announced changes to the 1I2I3 Current Account as a result of a number of factors, including a persistently low interest rate environment.

In our core lending markets we were anticipating modest growth, with the mortgage market continuing to grow at c3%, with weaker buyer demand and subdued house price growth likely to continue. The corporate borrowing market was also expected to grow by c4%, as uncertainty continued to dampen investment intentions.

While it is too early to accurately predict the financial and business impact of the COVID-19 outbreak, we expect a negative effect on UK economic growth and hence, our 2020 financial results.

Strategic review

Our refined priorities are aligned to Banco Santander’s European strategy announced in April 2019. We are focused on customer loyalty, simplification, improved efficiency and sustainable growth, while being the best bank for all our stakeholders. Our four strategic priorities are set out below.

Our strategic priorities

1. Grow customer loyalty by providing an outstanding customer experience

2. Simplify and digitise the business for improved efficiency and returns

3. Invest in our people and ensure they have the skills and knowledge to thrive

4. Further embed sustainability across our business

Becoming a more responsible bank

At Santander UK we understand that the decisions we take have an impact on society, the UK economy, and our environment. We continue to embed sustainability across our business, focusing on four pillars, which are explained below. To find out more, see our 2019 ESG Supplement.

1. Create a thriving workplace that attracts, retains and rewards the most talented and committed people

2. Drive sustainable economic growth, financial inclusion and positive socio-economic impact

3. Drive inclusive digitalisation and use technology in a way that creates value for all of our stakeholders

4. Uphold the highest ethical standards and fight financial crime

Santander UK plc5


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

Strategic reportcontinued

Risk management overview

Information on our principal risks and uncertainties is set out in the Risk review by type of risk, with more detail by business segment. When reading the Risk review and the other sections of the Annual Report, you should refer to the ‘Forward-looking statements’ section in the Shareholder information.

Sound risk management is at the centre of ourday-to-day activities. It benefits our business and our customers by helping to ensure balanced and responsible growth.

Top risks

We regularly review the top risks that could impact our customers and shareholders. Risks actively monitored over 2019 include:

Brexit

We continue to monitor Brexit as a top risk, following the UK’s exit from the EU on 31 January 2020. Our Brexit planning is now focused on the potential outcomes of the UK and EU negotiations in respect of a Free Trade Agreement (FTA) and equivalence in financial services, by the end of 2020. We are also maintaining and refining existing plans to address a number of areas requiring cross-divisional communication including financial markets infrastructure, data, payments, third-party services, cyber, and internal and external communications.

Ring-fencing implementation

We executed our ring-fencing plans, in order to meet the 1 January 2019 legislative deadline. The majority of customer assets and liabilities remain within the ring-fenced bank, providing longer-term flexibility with minimal disruption for our customers. Corporate and wholesale markets business, which is prohibited from inclusion in the ring-fenced bank, was transferred to Banco Santander London Branch. Ring-fencing resulted in significant change to our structure, people and operations, and we have retained it as a top risk to ensure continued focus on the ongoing embedding of ring-fencing culture throughout our governance and operations. This has included continued emphasis on related controls, procedures, reporting, and additional internal communications and staff training.

Building and maintaining capital strength

Regulatory uncertainty arising from decisions made by regulators on the implementation and interpretation of capital rules and on macro-prudential issues can impact upon our capital management. We continuously review our capital position on a forward looking basis, and it is also subject to the Bank of England’s stress testing regime. Publication of the 2019 stress test results showed that we passed the stress tests, and were not required to undertake any capital actions.

For the fourth year in a row, we had the lowest stressed CET1 capital ratio impact of all participating firms, demonstrating our resilient balance sheet and prudent approach to risk, in an extremely competitive and uncertain environment. On both IFRS 9 transitional andnon-transitional bases, our lowest post-stressend-point CET1 capital ratio, before and after management actions, was in excess of the CET1 hurdle rates established by the Bank of England. On both IFRS 9 bases, but after management actions, our lowest post-stressend-point leverage ratio also exceeded the Bank of England hurdle rates. Given the composition of our balance sheet, the leverage ratio is growing in importance, in terms of the binding capital constraint for our business.

Pension risk

Over the course of the past two years a number ofde-risking actions have been undertaken including execution of various hedging strategies and strategic asset reallocation which has reduced the fund’s exposure topro-cyclical assets, and improved the fund’s resilience. Despite falls in long term interest rates, the funding deficit position (2016 valuation basis) was broadly stable over the year as long term inflation also fell and asset values increased. The IAS 19 accounting position did however worsen, as in addition to these factors credit spreads narrowed, increasing the value of the liabilities. During the year we completed and agreed the Triennial Valuation process with the Trustees, which resulted in a lower funding deficit on the updated valuation basis. We have also continued to take actions to improve risk management and control, along with the associated governance procedures.

Financial crime

We recognise that financial crime activities can have a significant impact on our customers. Criminals are also increasingly using the financial system to launder the profits of illegal activity such as human trafficking and terrorism. Significant investment in ongoing enhancement continues to be made to our financial crime control framework, and to key controls including anti-bribery and corruption measures, customer risk assessment, and screening and transaction monitoring.

Managing a complex change agenda

As part of our business planning strategy we have continued to invest in a project portfolio that supports risk, regulatory and growth requirements. In order to effectively manage our complex change agenda, we have established robust processes and controls that allow us to track any potential issues and mitigate implementation risk. In delivering key projects, we keep pace with developments in the regulatory environment and technological advances, whilst focusing on maintaining our market position and remaining competitive.

6Santander UK plc


Cyber-attacks

In 2019, threats from the external cyber environment continued to evolve, due to heightened geopolitical tension, and active well-established cyber-crime groups. We monitor a range of cyber threats including attacks on payment systems, ATM networks and customer data where insider threat and network intrusion are the most common attack methods; an emerging threat from a new method, aimed at breaching organisations’on-line customer services, (such as internet banking) and causing denial of service. In addition, Data Security and General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) compliance continue to be key areas of concern. We have taken mitigating actions against these various threats including deployment of a cyber threat intelligence platform, increased intelligence through chairing the Geopolitical Financial Services working group and robust online service access construction utilising anti Distributed Denial of Service (DDoS) techniques. The mitigants implemented in our Cyber Security Plans are proving effective and we have experienced no significant disruption to date.

Conduct risks

Like all UK banks we continue to see a demanding regulatory agenda focused on fair customer outcomes, avoiding customer harm (including from inertia), vulnerability and consumer protection in general. We aim to comply with all applicable regulatory requirements and we have no appetite to operate in a way that leads to unfair outcomes for our customers or that negatively impacts the market or breaches regulatory or legislative requirements. A major conduct issue that has impacted UK banks over the past few years related to Payment Protection Insurance (PPI). A deadline for customer complaints at the end of August 2019 was set by the FCA, and in the run up to this date we saw an uplift in the volume of claims to unprecedented levels, which resulted in us making an additional provision of £70m in Q2 2019 and £99m in Q3 2019 to cover this. When implementing regulatory change we are focused on ensuring that our strategy, leadership, governance arrangements, and approach to managing and rewarding staff does not lead to a detrimental impact on our customers, competition, or to market integrity. We expect all people in our organisation to take responsibility for managing risk through our I AM Risk programme.

Third party risks

Like other banks, we rely on a number of major suppliers, in order to continue to deliver products and services to our customers. The complexity and criticality of services provided by third-parties to the industry is a key operational risk that has been recognised by us, our peers, and the regulators. We carefully assess and monitor the degree of risk associated with our suppliers on an ongoing basis, supported by key operational risk indicators and monthly dashboards submitted by our business units. We place emphasis on a carefully controlled and managed Third Party Supplier Risk Framework, and we are enhancing resources in this area in order to manage this risk. This framework ensures that those with whom we intend to conduct business meet our risk and control standards throughout the life of our relationship with them. We monitor and manage our ongoing supplier relationships to ensure our standards and contracted service performance continues to be met.

Emerging risks in 2019

We regularly review emerging risks that could impact our business and our customers. We maintain an active dialogue with key Corporate customers to aid our overall understanding of the issues that could arise. As well as those risks identified below, we also consider the potential impacts of various economic scenarios that could arise from other factors, for example a global health emergency (such as the recent coronavirus outbreak), geopolitical conflicts or other significant global events. During the year we reviewed a range of risks associated with LIBOR transition, which are being actively managed at the Asset and Liability Committee (ALCO).

Changing customer behaviour

Customer loyalty is diluting across the Banking industry, as expectations are shifting and population demographics evolve. Increasingly customers require first class digital experiences when interacting with their banking services provider, as their expectations are increasingly defined by experiences outside of banking. This is causing disruption to the banking sector with higher demands for: digital product offerings and solutions to manage customer finances; data security and trustworthiness; immediacy and convenience; tailored value products in return for loyalty; price transparency and comparisons across providers. Santander’s customer-centric transformation is well underway, with further digital enhancements planned for deployment in 2020, truly designed around customer needs.

Rapid technological change

Successful financial service providers will be those that invest in platforms that satisfy customer expectations and at the same time deliver substantial cost reduction in order to sustain profitability. Santander UK continues to increase its number of digital customers, develop new digital channels, and improve existing digital services, as well as automating existing physical channels. We also place a high priority on technology risk management, especially cyber security, in order to protect our customers and our reputation.

Strong market competition

The UK banking market continues to be highly competitive, with an increasing concentration of revenues in mortgages. At present, our main competition comes from incumbent banks who have strengthened and restructured their activity, and also from building societies. Margins across the industry, particularly in mortgages, continue to come under pressure as a result of this competitive environment, and this trend is expected to continue for several years ahead. Competition for deposits also remains intense and may escalate as many challenger and specialist banks need to replace funding from Government schemes in the near future. In the longer term, there is also potential for new types of competitors, such as scale digital players, to gain market presence by leveraging their large customer bases and digital customer interfaces. Digital banks are emerging globally, with many targeting the UK, as London is seen as Europe’s FinTech hub. We are focused on delivering sustainable, predictable growth in a responsible manner, and achieving consistent profitability through balance sheet strength.

Santander UK plc7


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

Strategic reportcontinued

Demanding regulatory agenda

We continue to face a complex regulatory change agenda. The FCA, PRA and other regulatory bodies have been progressing industry reviews across a number of areas during the year. Some key areas of focus include: PPI; High Cost of Credit Review involving the reform of overdraft charges and contingent reimbursement model for authorised push payment fraud. We are focused on managing our regulatory risks, coordinated and prioritised through specific project groups with both risk and regulatory oversight.

Uncertain economic and geopolitical environment

UK economic growth was lower in 2019, compared to 2018, as uncertainty over Brexit continued to subdue business confidence and investment. However, unemployment remains at historical lows and strong real wage growth has continued to support consumption. UK Housing market indicators have generally shown signs of improvement, in the early part of this year, including the level of transactions and price growth. The performance of the broader UK economy during the year, and the government’s housing policies, will likely have an impact upon the full extent and duration of these improvements.

Various global institutions have cited potential emerging risks to the global economic and financial system during the year, including: increasing levels of Corporate Sector Debt; a tightening of financial conditions in repo markets; China’s financial imbalances; and limited capacity of central banks going forward to prevent a fall in economic growth. Many of the risks regularly cited by these institutions may not have a direct impact on Santander UK, however they could result in an increase in the cost of funding generally in the wholesale markets.

Global institutions are now closely monitoring an outbreak of respiratory illness, known as COVID-19, which has spread from Asia into the UK and across the world. The situation remains complex and is evolving rapidly.

While it is too early to predict the financial and business impact of this crisis, we expect a negative effect on the UK and global economic environment as well as our 2020 financial results. As set out under ‘Building and maintaining capital strength’ on page 6 of this report, the 2019 Bank of England stress results demonstrated our resilient balance sheet and prudent approach to risk. We also maintain prudent and resilient Funding and Liquidity Policies to protect the bank and our customers.

LIBOR transition

In Q4 2018, we launched our LIBOR transition programme, which includes identified Senior Managers within the bank who oversee the implementation of our transition plans. The Project has the full support of the Board and Executive Management across the bank. We recognise that there are potential risks to our customers as we transition from LIBOR to risk free rates going forward. Our LIBOR transition programme is in place to ensure a smooth transition, and to anticipate and address any potential customer and conduct related issues that could arise from the change. There are also a number of other thematic risks involved including; legal and compliance; reputational; operational and financial accounting and control. There is also some uncertainty about the likely path of evolution for the set ofnon-LIBOR benchmarks and markets fornon-LIBOR products (including liquidity or illiquidity related issues).

In January 2020, the Working Group on Sterling Risk-Free Reference Rates set targets for 2020, including ceasing the issuance of sterling LIBOR-based cash products maturing beyond 2021 by the end of Q3 2020. The FCA and Bank of England have stated their support for these targets. We have established detailed plan timelines and milestones, including a Project Governance structure, to enable the transition to alternative rates ahead of the end of 2021.

Climate change risk

Reflecting the significant potential risks posed by Climate Change to the economy and to the financial system, in April 2019, the PRA became the first regulator in the world to publish supervisory expectations setting out how banks need to develop an enhanced approach to managing the financial risks from Climate Change. In 2019, our programme of work focused on enhancing our understanding of the most material climate change related drivers of our business model, and producing an implementation plan to fully deliver the PRA’s expectations under Supervisory Statement (SS) 3/19 ‘Enhancing banks’ and insurers’ approaches to managing the financial risks from climate change’. We are addressing climate change related risk issues through ongoing engagement across our business and support functions,co-ordinated and led by the Risk Division. Our focus will be on implementation of the plan that we delivered to the PRA in October 2019.

Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures

As a group, Banco Santander supports the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures (TCFD), which were published with the aim of improving disclosure of climate financial risk and opportunities. As part of our strategy in the UK we have prioritised embedding sustainability in everything we do and welcome the developments of the PRA and FCA to improve management and disclosure of climate change related risks.

In October 2019, we submitted an initial UK implementation plan to the PRA to address the expectations set out in SS 3/19. Alongside this plan, responsibility for climate related financial risks was added to the Statement of Responsibility of the Chief Risk Officer (CRO) as Senior Management Function (SMF) holder. Delivering on our plan will be a multi-year programme. We are targeting the end of 2022 to achieve full adoption, aligned to the implementation path as set out in the TCFD recommendations. We are working alongside Banco Santander with a shared ambition of being a leading global bank for tackling climate change.

In 2019, we have developed a high-level analysis of our credit portfolios based on various climate scenarios: abusiness-as-usual (BAU) scenario (which trends towards 3.7°C of average global warming by 2100) and alow-carbon transition scenario (which trends towards 2°C of warming). This analysis is referred to as the ‘Climate Portfolio Screen’. The aim of the Climate Portfolio Screen was to identify sectors and segments of the Santander UK lending book where there could be greater potential opportunities and risks associated with both the transition to a lower carbon economy and changes in physical climatic conditions. According to this analysis, the sectors of most concern based on exposure and or potential risks are mortgages, real estate, consumer finance and automotives. For the mortgage portfolio, we are working on a project that will help us understand the physical and transition risks in our mortgage book under different climate scenarios.

8Santander UK plc


Sustainability review

We believe that the performance of our business cannot be considered separately from the prosperity of all our stakeholders and sustainability of the wider environment.

Customers

Inclusive digitalisation

We continue to innovate to make our digital offerings more customer-friendly, secure and accessible. In 2019, Santander became the first UK high street bank to introduce tailored fraud warnings on our mobile app. We’ve also introduced customer-friendly authentication, including the ability to authorise online shopping transactions using a fingerprint or facial recognition. We have extended these authentication capabilities to customers initiating payment requests via Online Banking.

In 2020, we’ll launch a quicker online banking logon experience. Following the launch of Voice ID in April 2019, 226,490 customers have registered with over 1.4m Voice ID verifications during 2019. Our mobile banking app scores highly with users, ranking 4.8 on iOS and 4.5 on Android, both out of 5.0. In Q4 2019 we completed the work to deliver card controls to our mobile app, including the ability for customers to temporarily block their card when lost or stolen. This was piloted in 2019 and will be fully rolled out in the first quarter of 2020. Customers can also apply blocks to online, contactless, international and gambling transactions.

In 2019, we launched Santander Chat to all Online Banking customers, made up of an automated virtual assistant ‘Bot’ and messaging via a live agent. This provides an authenticated platform for secure conversations and transactions. In 2020, we plan to bring this service to our mobile app, and increase theend-to-end transactions that the Bot can perform on behalf of customers.

Cyber security collaboration

We recognise that, in parallel with the increase in digital banking, we must continually improve our cyber defences and data protection. Our response to the cyber threat is to continue to implement a global, multilayered and agile resilience framework.

Improved awareness is the foundation of cyber defence so we engage with customers, regulators, partners and everyone across the organisation to enhance their understanding of cyber security. We hosted nine Cyber Awareness workshop sessions across our branch network in 2019 to help educate our customers on the threats they face online. We continued to invest in emerging cyber security talent, and the first cohort of our Digital Apprentices will graduate in 2020 with the skills to become the next generation of cyber experts.

Transforming our branch network

The way customers are choosing to bank with us is changing. With more people choosing to engage through our digital platforms, there’s been an impact on the use of our branch network. We conducted an extensive review of the network to reshape it to meet our customer needs. Our network is evolving, made up of a combination of larger branches offering community facilities to support local businesses and customers as well as smaller branches using the latest technology to offer customers more convenient access to banking services. As part of this, we’ve refurbished 87% of our network.

The introduction of Work Café demonstrates how we’re exploring different ways to use our branches to meet customer needs. Santander opened its first UK Work Café in Leeds in July 2019. Since launch we’ve had 30,000 customer visits to use theco-working and bookable rooms, attend an event, or talk to our specialists.

We’re a signatory to the Access to Banking Standard which ensures open and fair communication where banks close branches. In 2019, we closed 140 branches in line with this standard, following reviews to ensure our resources are targeted to meet the changing needs of customers. We’ve signed up to the Banking Framework 2, an agreement that allows customers to access 11,000 Post Office outlets to take out or pay in cash and cheques and obtain a balance. We’re also working with UK Finance and other banks to support communities’ access to cash.

Supporting our vulnerable customers

Building capability across the bank to better support vulnerable customers is a focus of our Vulnerable Customer Strategy. In 2019, we launched an award-winning internal training programme, ‘Perspectives’, featuring real customer stories. This covers dementia, autism, PTSD, financial abuse and confusion and aims to raise awareness, reduce stigma and equip colleagues to better identify and respond to those who need support. Since launch in May 2019 these films were viewed 46,755 times.

We have been working with Alzheimer’s Society to become a more dementia-friendly bank, auditing our branches and improving our products and services for people living with dementia.

We’ve also been working with charities and industry forums to respond to challenges such as harmful gambling and financial abuse. Our approach to tackling harmful gambling is informed by a bespoke social insights approach in collaboration with gambling charities, the gambling industry and people with first-hand experience. This allows us to better understand our role in this area and how we can be effective in the detection and prevention of gambling-related financial harm.

Throughout 2020 we will continue our work on the underlying initiatives that support our overall Vulnerable Customer Strategy, providing colleagues the tools and support they need to deliver for all our customers.

Santander UK plc9


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

Strategic reportcontinued

Championing ambitious SMEs

SMEs are at the heart of our country’s economy, but starting and running a business presents a wide range of challenges. Santander Breakthrough is designed to provide support at every step through events, insights and partnerships. In 2019, we supported over 5,600 businesses from their light bulb moment through to starting up, scaling up and beyond. Our Growth Capital Team provided financial support with £24.3m of growth capital and £90.8m of senior debt to 27 companies. The launch of our Breakthrough online platform gives business owners better access to support and insights. It also provides the ability to find local Breakthrough business events, of which we ran 188 in 2019. We also launched our Trade Club Alliance, a new digital platform to help businesses boost global trade with market data on over 180 countries. We supported over 650 businesses in 2019 in trade events. We entered a three year partnership with the British Library’s Business and IP Centre network, aimed at supporting early stage businesses with key skills such as marketing and managing finances. We are a proud signatory to the Investing in Women Code and support female entrepreneurs with initiatives such as our national mentoring programme.

Supporting first time buyers

First time buyers (FTBs) are a key strategic focus for us, and in 2019 we were proud to win Your Mortgage’s Best First-Time Buyer lender. In 2019, we helped over 37,000 customers into their new home by lending £5.5bn, supporting 37% more customers than the year before. In 2019, Santander was the first lender to launch a free home condition report that helps FTBs identify any potential issues with the home before they buy, avoiding unexpected costs. We also continued to improve our online mortgage servicing hub, including the retention service, with 60% of customers choosing to change their deal online, an increase of 10% from 2018. The convenience of online mortgage services means over 50% of regular overpayments are now made online. Our ambition is for branches to become an integral part of the local community providing unbiased financial education. Since launch in September 2019, we’ve completed over 1,000 FTB events in our branches, providing unbiased advice for those interested in buying their first home.

Shareholders

Part of a global bank

We are a subsidiary of Banco Santander SA and part of the Banco Santander group, a leading retail and commercial bank headquartered in Spain. Our ordinary shares are all held by Banco Santander group companies and are not listed, although our preference shares are listed on the London Stock Exchange.

Under the subsidiary model operated by Banco Santander, autonomous subsidiaries are responsible for their own liquidity, capital management and funding. This not only mitigates the risk of difficulties in one subsidiary affecting another, it allows local market knowledge and expertise to be utilised and provides considerable operational flexibility. We benefit from the strong Santander brand along with experience and expertise from a global banking group. Systems development capacity can be shared along with common technology platforms and innovations, creating a significant competitive advantage.

People

Culture

Our culture of Simple, Personal and Fair is underpinned by our nine behaviours, enabling our colleagues to thrive. In 2019, we were again recognised as a Top Employer by the Top Employers Institute. Our goal to be a high-performing and responsible business is reflected in the 2019 Global Engagement Survey (GES) with 85% of colleagues feeling ‘We act responsibly and make a positive contribution to society’, 13% above the external benchmark(1). In 2020, we will focus on transformation through simplification, driving a learning culture and being an inclusive and responsible organisation.

Employee engagement

We foster an open dialogue between employees and our Executive Committee. In 2019, we held a series of internal roadshows and a virtual ‘Santander Conversation’, reaching over 2,800 employees. This gave the Executive Committee the opportunity to discuss our vision and roadmap and hear from colleagues. Colleague engagement levels remained relatively stable in a period of transformation and change. Additionally, 992 colleagues participated in virtual focus groups in 2019 to help better understand employee experience.

Building a bank for everyone

Our approach to Inclusion and Diversity is to be a workplace where anyone and everyone can learn, grow and succeed, while being themselves. In 2019, our employee survey results showed that 88% of employees felt positive that their line manager is open and inclusive, promoting diversity. We have sevenemployee-led diversity networks, which collectively have over 10,000 members across the bank. This year we launched our network for Social Mobility to help create a level playing field for all colleagues irrespective of their background. We are a signatory to the Social Mobility Pledge and benchmark as a top 20 employer in the Social Mobility Index (up from 49th in 2018).

We continued with a number of targeted actions to improve our gender diversity. Our progress is detailed in our latest Gender Pay Gap report. Women made up 32.1% of senior managers, 26.7% of our Executive Committee and 35.7% of our Board (including Executive andNon-Executive Directors) at 31 December 2019. For the Business in the Community (BiTC) ‘Race at Work Charter, One Year on’, we continue to make good progress, having achieved two actions. We also were the headline sponsor of Pride:MK, the first Pride event in Milton Keynes, and were classed as a Top Ten Employer at the British LGBT Awards.

(1)

Financial sector benchmark taken from the survey provider Mercer Sirota. The financial services sector norms are based on more than one million employees answering 114 surveys over the last five years.

10Santander UK plc


We support a range of apprenticeship schemes up to degree level and provide a frameworkgraduate development programme ‘Accelerating Capability’. We have 421 apprentices, of which 46% are female, and recruited 97 graduates, of which 59% are female, through partnerships with 86 UK universities.

Learning

In 2019, our people undertook 144,703 training days and we invested £10.6m, equipping them with the skills they need for defining responsibilitiesnow and processes in relationthe future, including digital skills. We launched a new learning platform, MIO, which is a key enabler of a continuous learning environment. MIO provides a variety of training styles, from2-3 minute bursts to themed box set content to support colleagues. In 2019, 484 people managers completed our new ‘Leading our Future’ toolkit for building inclusive and resilient teams. Our Leadership Development focus was on digital knowledge and skills, leading change and transformation capability and driving collaboration, with initiatives including a Digital Leaders Academy for senior leaders.

Prioritising wellbeing

In a time of change at Santander and in financial services, we aim to help colleagues build personal resilience and feel supported. In 2019, we repositioned our wellbeing proposition to cover Physical, Mental, Financial and Social Wellbeing and held a number of wellbeing events. We supported Public Health England’s Every Mind Matters Campaign and signed the BiTC Mental Health at Work Commitment at launch. We’re building a Wellbeing Hub that brings all of our support into one place. This will help colleagues to proactively access support and information across diverse topics such as nutrition, sleep, stress, finances, body image and more. Our Mental Wellbeing colleague network now has over 2,190 members.

Working in partnership

During 2019, we consulted our recognised trade unions Advance and Communication Workers Union (CWU) on restructuring proposals as the bank simplifies to become more efficient. Our mutual focus is to minimise job losses by prioritising redeployment orre-training of colleagues affected. Outplacement support is offered to all colleagues affected by change.

Communities

Helping our communities prosper

We’re changing the way we partner with charities to ensure strategic collaborations which help us to become a more responsible bank. On top of employee fundraising and volunteering, we have developed joint strategic initiatives to address pressing challenges. For instance, in January 2019 we appointed Alzheimer’s Society as our new charity partner for 2019-2021. Our aim is to leverage the charity’s expertise to help us become a digitally dementia-friendly bank.

Financial inclusion and literacy

Financial inclusion and literacy are critical elements of our strategy. Santander colleagues supported over 25,000 students through ourin-school mentoring programme focused on money management, digital skills and careers. We also reached almost 200,000 young people during My Money Week, helping 4 – 19 year olds to gain confidence in money matters.

We used our UEFA Champions League flagship sponsorship and partnered with National Numeracy to bring the power of football and education together and tackle the fact that 40% of people in the UK don’t feel ‘fully confident’ with everyday budgeting and money management. We created The Numbers Game: 13UK-wide roadshows through which we engaged over 20,000 children, families and young adults, resulting in over 11,900 people completing the experience. Use of National Numeracy online learning materials increased 31% since we started our tour, doubling their engagement rate. Ouron-site research showed that 85% of people gained a better understanding of the importance of numbers in everyday life, while 87% believed that being confident with numbers helped them to manage their money better.

Innovative fraud and scams education

In June 2019, Santander teamed up with Kurupt FM from BAFTA-winning BBC TV show People Just Do Nothing to create its latest fraud awareness campaign, ‘MC Grindah’s Deadliest Dupes’. Statistics show that Generation Z are among the most likely to fall victim to scams, and their behaviours online can make them vulnerable to fraudsters. In the last year, identity theft among people under 21 has risen by 26% while 50% of money mules are aged 26 or under and 27% are aged 21 or under.

We partnered with Barnardo’s to deliver the content we created with Kurupt FM to some of the most vulnerable young people, reaching approximately 220,000 in their network. We ran seven workshops with Barnardo’s, resulting in 83% of attendees saying they now felt more confident on how to avoid these scams.

In 2019, the Santander Foundation, a separate legal entity that operates independently from Santander UK, reviewed its strategy and explored how to deliver a greater positive impact within our communities. Following this, the Foundation will launch a new Grants Giving programme in 2020 to support digital and financial skills. During 2019, the Foundation continued to support local charities via the Matched Donations programme, approving 1,694 in employee-submitted requests.

Santander UK plc11


Annual Report 2019| Strategic report

Strategic reportcontinued

Ethics and Environment – we are committed to upholding the highest ethical standards

Responsible lending

As part of the Banco Santander group, we comply with the Equator Principles, factoring social, ethical and environmental impacts into our risk analysis and decision making process for financial transactions. These principles address climate change, prevention of pollution and toxic waste energy, water, travelemissions, biodiversity, indigenous peoples and supply chain management athuman rights.

Our policy on Aerospace and Defence, Energy, Mining & Metals and Soft Commodities and our 15 mainSensitive Social and Ethical Sectors policy continue to define our approach towards creating long-term value while managing reputational, social and environmental risks. In 2019, we further improved these policies by introducing prohibitions and strengthening restrictions on a range of activities. Prohibited activities now include the provision of products or services for new Coal Fired Power Plant (CFPP) projects and taking on new clients with existing CFPPs. Restricted activities include transactions specific to CFPPs for existing clients which do not significantly improve environmental impacts, such as a significant reduction of CO2. Our Reputational Risk Forum reviews and approves all restricted activities to ensure that they fall within our risk appetite. This forum reviews, monitors and escalates key decisions around financial andnon-financial reputational risks to the Board.

Environmental performance

We strive to reduce our operational impact on the environment. In 2019, our offices and data centres in the UK. In 2018, we successfully recertified thefor ISO 14001 &and transitioned to the new ISO 50001 accreditationstandard. Our energy data platforms allow us to accurately manage each of our properties that have a smart meter installed, and we reduced electricity use by 6.6% and gas usage by 10.7% in 2019. We also use lifecycle assessment to maximise energy saving opportunities when upgrading facilities. Our water use also reduced by 8.3% in 2019 with installation of efficient water fittings in three offices. We have a network of over 2,800 Green Champions to embed sustainability and green behaviour into site culture. These Champions ran 12 roadshows across all of these properties.our offices in 2019.

Ethical supply chain

Managing our supply chain responsibly

We want to do business with like-minded companies who share our values and ambition to be a driver of prosperity and who therefore meet our risk and control standards as outlined in our Third Party Supplier Risk Framework.

We continually review our supply chain management policies and processes to comply with the 2015 Modern Slavery Act requirements. We require our suppliers to comply with explicit requirements to respect human rights and adhere to ethical labour practices.

We meet the Living Wage requirement for employees of suppliers who work at Santander UK sites, and ourvalues. Our standard supplier contracts include specific requirements to respect human rights and ethical labour practice based on the principles of the UN Global Compact.

In 2019 we improved our Third-Party Risk Management (TPRM) framework, processes and policies, including enhancements to meet new European Banking Authority outsourcing requirements. Our third-party policy reflects our Board-approved Risk Appetite Statements, including specific provisions on forced labour. Our Third-Party Code of Conduct was launched this year, with reference to Banco Santander group Human Rights Policy and International Labor Organization (ILO) standards. We are committedcompleted a full review and update of our third-party supplier control assessment approach as part of improvements to high ethical standardsthird-party due diligence. The new framework was effective in August 2019 and with an external partner we completed 15on-site suppliers assessments in 2019, with further assessments scheduled for 2020.

EthicsAnti-Financial Crime, Anti-Bribery and integrity are atCorruption

Our Anti-Financial Crime (AFC) strategy is set around the heartthree principles of ‘Deter, Detect and Disrupt’. In 2019, we continued to drive a prosperousculture of AFC across the business and society. Corruption, bribery,with partners. We ran 10 events for the UK’s Regional Organised Crime Units to better work with law enforcement to protect customers. We also held 8 AFC Culture roadshows with 510 colleagues attending, of which 96% better understood the AFC Vision and 69% said they will change behaviour.

We enhanced our governance of AFC by launching a Strategy & Policy forum in September covering strategy, anti-money laundering, counter-terrorism financing and sanctions. We also engaged with government and law enforcement stakeholders to shape the reforms that are part of the government’s Economic Crime Plan, which aims to improve the resilience of the UK’s overall defences against financial crime.

Tackling modern slavery and human trafficking

This year we worked withnon-profit ‘Stop the Traffik’ to raise awareness and expertise in Santander on modern slavery and human trafficking (MSHT). As a financial crime erodeinstitution, we are uniquely placed to deter, detect and disrupt those profiting from this criminal industry. We ran a targeted campaign with Stop the value that business createsTraffik to raise awareness and divert precious resources awaycapability in branch staff in a location at high risk for MSHT. Stop the Traffik also held masterclasses at our AFC roadshows. We work closely with law enforcement and the Joint Money Laundering Intelligence Taskforce (JMLIT). In 2019 our Financial Crime team were actively involved in cases, including one which resulted in the arrest of suspects after migrants were found in the back of a lorry. Our Modern Slavery Statement is published online and subject to approval from the socio-economic growthBoard and Responsible Banking Committee.

12Santander UK plc


Page intentionally blank

Santander UK plc13


Annual Report 2019| Financial review

Financial review

Critical factors affecting results

The preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements requires management to make judgements and accounting estimates that affect the reported amount of assets and liabilities at the date of the Consolidated Financial Statements and the reported amount of income and expenses during the reporting period. Management evaluates its judgements and accounting estimates, which are based on historical experience and on various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, on an ongoing basis. Actual results may differ from these accounting estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

Estimates and judgements that are considered important to the portrayal of our financial condition including, where applicable, quantification of the effects of reasonably possible ranges of such estimates are set out in ‘Critical Judgements and Accounting Estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 Contents

Income statement review

15

Summarised Consolidated Income Statement

15

Profit before tax by segment

16

Balance sheet review

17

Summarised Consolidated
Balance Sheet

17

Customer balances

19

Cash flows

20

Summarised Consolidated Cash
Flow Statement

20

Capital and funding

21

Liquidity

21

Selected financial data

22

14Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Income statement review

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

   

                  2019

£m

  

                  2018(2)

£m

 
Net interest income   3,292   3,603 
Non-interest income(1)   881   931 
Total operating income   4,173   4,534 
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges   (2,499  (2,579
Credit impairment losses   (221  (153
Provisions for other liabilities and charges   (441  (257
Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges   (662  (410
Profit before tax   1,012   1,545 
Tax on profit   (279  (399
Profit after tax   733   1,146 
Attributable to:   
Equity holders of the parent   714   1,124 
Non-controlling interests   19   22 
Profit after tax   733   1,146 

(1)

Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income.

(2)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

A more detailed Consolidated Income Statement is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2019 compared to 2018

Profit before tax was down 34% to £1,012m due to the factors outlined below. By income statement line item, the movements were:

Net interest income was down 9%, largely impacted by mortgage back book pressure and £3.9bn of SVR attrition (2018: £4.9bn).

Non-interest income was down 5%, largely due to £58m of ring-fencing perimeter changes in 2018 and the closure of trading businesses following ring-fencing implementation, partially offset by £15m additional Vocalink consideration received in Q2 2019.

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges were down 3%, with the absence of £48m of ring-fencing perimeter changes, £40m of GMP equalisation costs and £38m of Banking Reform costs all incurred in 2018. This was partially offset by £50m(3) transformation costs in 2019 and £40m higher operating lease depreciation. Higher depreciation costs and inflationary pressures were offset by lower staff costs and efficiency savings.

Credit impairment losses were up 44% to £221m, largely due to lower mortgage releases as well as a few single name corporate exposures.

Provisions for other liabilities and charges were up £184m to £441m, largely due to additional PPI provisions of £169m and £105m of transformation programme charges(3) (predominantly restructuring costs) as well as an additional £10m other provision charge in 2019 pertaining to our retail credit business operations. Other adjustments to provisions amounted to £80m in 2018. The 2019 increase was also offset by £21m, which was the net effect of a number of items, most notably the release of property provisions.

The £169m charged in respect of PPI comprised:

In Q219 we reported an additional provision of £70m reflecting an increase in PPI claim volumes, additional industry activities and having considered guidance provided by the FCA and our specific approach to PPI claims, in advance of the PPI claims deadline on 29 August 2019.

In Q319, and in line with industry experience, we received unprecedented volumes of information requests in August 2019 and saw a significant spike in both these requests and complaints in the final days prior to the complaint deadline. Our best estimate of the additional provision required was £99m.

Tax on profit decreased £120m to £279m, as a result of lower taxable profits in 2019, partially offset by the tax effect of additional PPI remediation charges which are not tax deductible.

Please refer to the Financial review section of our country. We wantAnnual Report on Form20-F for the year ended 31 December 2018 for a comparative discussion of 2018 financial results compared to protect2017.

(3)

Transformation programme investment of £155m, of which £50m is operating expenses and £105m is provisions for other liabilities and charges.

Santander UK plc15


Annual Report 2019| Financial review

PROFIT BEFORE TAX BY SEGMENT

The segmental information in this Annual Report reflects the reporting structure in place at the reporting date in accordance with which the segmental information in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements has been presented.

  2019  

Retail
        Banking

£m

  

Corporate &
        Commercial
Banking

£m

  

Corporate &
        Investment
Banking

£m

  

        Corporate
Centre

£m

          Total
£m
 

Net interest income/(expense)

   2,876   359   63   (6  3,292 

Non-interest income/(expense)(1)

   698   78   112   (7  881 

Total operating income/(expense)

   3,574   437   175   (13  4,173 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

   (1,994  (264  (171  (70  (2,499

Credit impairment losses

   (160  (37  (22  (2  (221

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

   (292  (20  (17  (112  (441

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

   (452  (57  (39  (114  (662

Profit/(loss) before tax

   1,128   116   (35  (197  1,012 
      
  2018(2)                

Net interest income

   3,126   403   69   5   3,603 

Non-interest income(1)

   638   82   183   28   931 

Total operating income

   3,764   485   252   33   4,534 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

   (1,929  (258  (250  (142  (2,579

Credit impairment (losses)/releases

   (124  (23  (14  8   (153

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

   (230  (14  (8  (5  (257

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases

   (354  (37  (22  3   (410

Profit/(loss) before tax

   1,481   190   (20  (106  1,545 

(1)

Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income.

(2)

Restated to reflect the resegmentation of our short term markets business to Corporate Centre as described in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2019 compared to 2018

For Retail Banking, profit before tax decreased, largely due to pressure from the mortgage back book, including £3.9bn of SVR attrition as well as additional PPI provision charges and lower credit impairment releases. Higher operating lease volumes and a change in accounting treatment(3) of residual value risk resulted in increasednon-interest income, partially offset by higher depreciation in operating expenses.

For Corporate & Commercial Banking, profit before tax reduced 39%, largely due to lower net interest income following the 2018 and 2019 significant risk transfer (SRT) securitisations. Credit impairment losses increased as a result of single name exposures and lower write-backs.

For Corporate & Investment Banking, loss before tax increased to £35m driven by the 2018 changes in the statutory perimeter, following the transfers of activities to Banco Santander London Branch as part of ring-fencing implementation as well as higher credit impairment losses due to single name exposures.

For Corporate Centre, loss before tax increased. This was largely due to £155m transformation programme investment including £105m reported as provisions for other liabilities and charges and £50m reported as operating expenses. In addition, yields onnon-core assets were lower in 2019 andnon-interest income was impacted by the closure of trading businesses, while operating expenses related to Banking Reform and GMP equalisation in 2018 were not repeated.

(3)

In 2019, our accounting treatment for residual value (RV) risk changed. This resulted in a £24m reversal of RV provisions recognised in other income (of which £22m relates to charges taken in prior periods) which was partially offset by £7.5m accelerated depreciation of the underlying asset (prior periods: £2.3m).

16Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Balance sheet review

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

   

                         2019

£m

   

                         2018

£m

 

Assets

    

Cash and balances at central banks

   21,180    19,747 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   3,702    10,876 

Financial assets at amortised cost

   239,834    232,444 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

   9,747    13,302 

Interest in other entities

   117    88 

Property, plant and equipment

   1,967    1,832 

Retirement benefit assets

   669    842 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

   4,486    4,241 

Total assets

   281,702    283,372 

Liabilities

    

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   3,161    7,655 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

   259,179    256,514 

Retirement benefit obligations

   280    114 

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

   3,065    3,180 

Total liabilities

   265,685    267,463 

Equity

    

Total shareholders’ equity

   15,857    15,758 

Non-controlling interests

   160    151 

Total equity

   16,017    15,909 

Total liabilities and equity

   281,702    283,372 

A more detailed Consolidated Balance Sheet is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2019 compared to 2018

Assets

Cash and maintainbalances at central banks

Cash and balances at central banks increased by 7% to £21,180m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £19,747m). This was driven by cash inflows generated from profits in the year, higher customer deposits and the net disposal of certain asset backed securities, offset by additional retail lending and net cash outflows relating to debt securities in issue.

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss decreased by 66% to £3,702m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £10,876m), mainly due to:

£2.1bn of senior tranches of credit linked notes, which were previously classified as other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, are now presented on a net basis as a result of changes to legal agreements. For more information see Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The maturity ofnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements held at FVTPL, which totalled £2.3bn at 31 December 2018.

Financial assets at amortised cost:

Financial assets at amortised cost increased by 3% to £239,834m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £232,444m), mainly due to:

An increase in customer loans, with mortgage lending in Retail Banking up £7.4bn. This was partially offset by a reduction in corporate lending which included managed reductions in Commercial Real Estate of £1.1bn.

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading increasing by £2.5bn, reflecting the classification of all newnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements at amortised cost in line with our ring-fenced model and as part of normal liquidity risk management.

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income decreased by 27% to £9,747m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £13,302m) mainly due to the disposal of certain asset backed securities as part of normal liquid asset portfolio management.

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment increased by 7% to £1,967m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £1,832m) mainly due to an increase in operating lease assets and the recognition ofright-of-use assets following the adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2019.

Retirement benefit assets

Retirement benefit assets decreased by 21% to £669m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £842m), reflecting a decrease in the overall accounting surplus of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the Scheme). This was mainly due to a decrease in corporate bond yields, resulting in a higher value being placed on the liabilities in the Scheme. This was partially offset by asset growth, mainly driven by the decrease in corporate bond yields.

Tax, intangibles and other assets

Tax, intangibles and other assets increased by 6% to £4,486m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £4,241m), mainly due to an increase in the carrying value of the macro hedge of interest rate risk.

Santander UK plc17


Annual Report 2019| Financial review

Liabilities

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss decreased by 59% to £3,161m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £7,655m), mainly due to:

£2.1bn of cash deposits, which were previously classified as other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss, are now presented on a net basis as a result of changes to legal agreements. For more information see Note 21 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The maturity ofnon-trading repurchase agreements held at FVTPL, which totalled £2.1bn at 31 December 2018.

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

Financial liabilities at amortised cost increased by 1% to £259,179m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £256,514m). This was mainly due to:

Repurchase agreements – non trading increasing by £7.4bn reflecting the classification of all newnon-trading repurchase agreements at amortised cost in line with our ring-fenced model and as part of normal liquidity risk management.

An increase in customer deposits, with £3.0bn growth in Retail Banking supported by a successful ISA campaign and 1I2I3 Business Current Account inflows. Corporate deposits also increased as we focused on building strong customer relationships.

Deposits by banks decreasing by £2.9bn due to a reduction in time deposits with other banks, including deposits placed with Banco Santander, and lower balances held as cash collateral.

Debt securities in issue decreasing by £5.6bn, reflecting maturities in the period, partially offset by covered bond issuances of £1bn in February 2019,1bn in May 2019 and £1bn in November 2019, along with a senior unsecured issuance of $1bn in June 2019.

Retirement benefit obligations

Retirement benefit obligations increased by 146% to £280m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £114m), reflecting a decrease in the overall accounting surplus of the Scheme. This was mainly due to a decrease in corporate bond yields, resulting in a higher value being placed on the liabilities in the Scheme. This was partially offset by asset growth, mainly driven by the decrease in corporate bond yields.

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

Tax, other liabilities and provisions decreased by 4% to £3,065m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £3,180m) mainly due to changes in unsettled financial transactions as well as tax balances.

Equity

Total shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity increased by 1% to £15,857m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £15,758m). This was principally due to the profit after tax for the year and a net increase in other equity instruments being offset by downward defined benefit pension remeasurements and dividend payments.

18Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

CUSTOMER BALANCES

Consolidated

   

                     2019

£bn

   

                     2018

£bn

 

Customer loans

   205.0    199.6 

Other assets

   76.7    83.8 

Total assets

   281.7    283.4 

Customer deposits

   171.7    167.3 

Total wholesale funding

   65.2    70.8 

Other liabilities

   28.7    29.3 

Total liabilities

   265.6    267.4 

Shareholders’ equity

   15.9    15.8 

Non-controlling interest

   0.2    0.2 

Total liabilities and equity

   281.7    283.4 

Further analyses of credit risk on customer loans, and on our licencefunding strategy, are included in the Credit risk and Liquidity risk sections of the Risk review.

2019 compared to operate2018

Customer loans increased £5.4bn, with mortgage lending in Retail Banking up £7.4bn. This was partially offset by a reduction in corporate lending which included managed reductions in CRE of £1.1bn.

Customer deposits increased £4.4bn, with £3.0bn growth in Retail Banking supported by a successful ISA campaign and 1I2I3 Business Current Account inflows. Corporate deposits also increased as we focused on building strong customer relationships.

Retail Banking

   

                     2019

£bn

   

                     2018

£bn

 

Mortgages

   165.4    158.0 

Business banking

   1.8    1.8 

Consumer (auto) finance

   7.7    7.3 

Other unsecured lending

   5.5    5.7 

Customer loans

   180.4    172.8 

Current accounts

   68.7    68.4 

Savings

   57.2    56.0 

Business banking accounts

   12.9    11.9 

Other retail products

   6.3    5.8 

Customer deposits

   145.1    142.1 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   

                     2019

£bn

   

                     2018

£bn

 

Non-Commercial Real Estate trading businesses

   11.2    11.5 

Commercial Real Estate

   5.1    6.2 

Customer loans

   16.3    17.7 

Customer deposits

   18.2    17.6 

Corporate & Investment Banking

   

                     2019

£bn

   

                     2018

£bn

 

Customer loans

   4.1    4.6 

Customer deposits

   6.1    4.8 

Corporate Centre

   

                     2019

£bn

   

                     2018

£bn

 

Social Housing

   3.6    3.8 

Non-core

   0.6    0.7 

Customer loans

   4.2    4.5 
           

Customer deposits

   2.3    2.8 

Santander UK plc19


Annual Report 2019| Financial review

Cash flows

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

   

                     2019

£m

  

                     2018

£m

 

Net cash flows from operating activities

   3,077   (15,405

Net cash flows from investing activities

   2,890   (3,682

Net cash flows from financing activities

   (4,126  2,730 

Change in cash and cash equivalents

   1,841   (16,357

A more detailed Consolidated Cash Flow Statement is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The major activities and transactions that affected cash flows during 2019 and 2018 were as follows:

In 2019, the net cash inflows from operating activities of £3,077m resulted from net cash inflows generated from profits in the year and higher customer deposits, offset by acting responsiblyadditional retail lending. The net cash inflows from investing activities of £2,890m mainly reflected the net disposal of certain asset backed securities as part of normal liquid asset portfolio management. The net cash outflows from financing activities mainly reflected net cash outflows relating to debt securities in issue. These resulted in cash and demonstratingcash equivalents increasing by £1,841m in the year.

In 2018, the net cash outflows from operating activities of £15,405m resulted from net cash outflows relating to trading and derivative assets and liabilities. The net cash outflows from investing activities of £3,682m mainly reflected purchases of financial investments in the year as part of normal liquidity management. The net cash inflows from financing activities of £2,730m reflected the net inflows from debt securities following thepre-funding of our 2019 requirements. This was offset by payments of dividends on ordinary shares, preference shares, other equity instruments andnon-controlling interests. Cash and cash equivalents decreased by £16,357m principally from the decrease in cash held at central banks.

20Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Capital and funding

                   2019
£bn
                   2018
£bn
 

Capital and leverage

    

CET1 capital

   10.4    10.4 

Total qualifying regulatory capital

   15.8    15.9 

CET1 capital ratio

   14.3%    13.2% 

Total capital ratio

   21.7%    20.3% 

RWAs

   72.6    78.5 

Funding

    

Total wholesale funding

   67.4    72.8 

– of which with a residual maturity of less than one year

   22.5    16.5 

Further analysis of capital and funding is included in the Capital risk and Liquidity risk sections of the Risk review.

2019 compared to 2018

CET1 capital was stable at £10.4bn, with ongoing capital accretion through profits retained after dividend payment, offset by market-driven pension movements.

RWAs reduced largely as a result of SRT securitisations and lower corporate lending as we continue to focus on risk-weighted returns. This was partially offset by increased RWAs in Retail Banking in line with mortgage lending growth.

CET1 capital ratio increased 110bps to 14.3%, through active RWA management.

Total wholesale funding decreased, reflecting maturities in the period, partially offset by covered bond issuances of £1bn in February 2019,1bn in May 2019 and £1bn in November 2019, along with senior unsecured issuance of $1bn in June 2019. In August 2019, we increased our AT1 outstanding by £200m via the issuance of a new £500m 6.3% AT1 and the repurchase of the £300m 7.6% AT1.

Liquidity

                   2019
£bn
                   2018
£bn
 

Santander UK Domestic Liquidity Sub Group (RFB DoLSub)

    

Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)

   142%    164% 

LCR eligible liquidity pool

   42.0    54.1 

Further analysis of liquidity is included in the Liquidity risk section of the Risk review.

2019 compared to 2018

While LCR remains high at 142%, it is lower than 2018 reflecting reduced uncertainty.

The RFB DoLSub LCR and LCR eligible liquidity pool both decreased following the transfer of our Isle of Man and Jersey businesses (Crown Dependencies) into SFS in 2018 as part of ring-fencing implementation.

Santander UK plc21


Annual Report 2019| Financial review

Selected financial data

The financial information set forth below for the years ended 31 December 2019, 2018 and 2017 and at 31 December 2019 and 2018 has been derived from the audited Consolidated Financial Statements of Santander UK plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together, the Santander UK group) prepared in accordance with IFRS included elsewhere in this Annual Report. The information should be read in connection with, and is qualified in its entirety by reference to, the Santander UK group’s Consolidated Financial Statements and the Notes thereto.

BALANCE SHEETS

   

2019(1)

£m

   

2018(2,3)

£m

   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 

Assets

          

Cash and balances at central banks

   21,180    19,747    32,771    17,107    16,842 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   3,702    10,876    52,593    57,646    47,270 

Financial assets at amortised cost

   239,834    232,444    205,417    204,086    201,593 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

   9,747    13,302       

Financial investments

       17,611    17,466    9,064 

Interests in other entities

   117    88    73    61    48 

Intangible assets

   1,766    1,808    1,742    1,685    1,600 

Property, plant and equipment

   1,967    1,832    1,598    1,491    1,597 

Current tax assets

   200    153            49 

Retirement benefit assets

   669    842    449    398    556 

Other assets

   2,520    2,280    2,511    2,571    2,156 

Total assets

           281,702            283,372            314,765            302,511            280,775 

Liabilities

          

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   3,161    7,655    51,037    41,103    36,246 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost

   259,179    256,514    243,858    241,590    225,852 

Other liabilities

   2,344    2,448    2,730    3,221    2,445 

Provisions

   572    509    558    700    870 

Current tax liabilities

           3    54    1 

Deferred tax liabilities

   149    223    88    128    223 

Retirement benefit obligations

   280    114    286    262    110 

Total liabilities

   265,685    267,463    298,560    287,058    265,747 

Equity

          

Total shareholders’ equity

   15,857    15,758    16,053    15,303    14,893 

Non-controlling interests

   160    151    152    150    135 

Total equity

   16,017    15,909    16,205    15,453    15,028 

Total liabilities and equity

   281,702    283,372    314,765    302,511    280,775 

(1)

On 1 January 2019, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 16 (2015-2018: IAS 17).

(2)

On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9 (2015-2017: IAS 39).

(3)

In 2018, the Santander UK group completed the implementation of its ring-fencing plans.

INCOME STATEMENTS

   

2019(1)

£m

   

2018(2,3,4)

£m

  

2017(2)

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 

Net interest income

               3,292                3,603               3,803               3,582               3,575 

Net fee and commission income

   686    749   807   770   715 

Net trading and other income

   195    182   302   443   283 

Total operating income

   4,173    4,534   4,912   4,795   4,573 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

   (2,499   (2,579  (2,499  (2,414  (2,400

Credit impairment losses

   (221   (153  (203  (67  (66

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

   (441   (257  (393  (397  (762

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

   (662   (410  (596  (464  (828

Profit before tax

   1,012    1,545   1,817   1,917   1,345 

Tax on profit

   (279   (399  (515  (598  (381

Profit after tax

   733    1,146   1,302   1,319   964 

(1)

On 1 January 2019, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 16 (2015-2018: IAS 17).

(2)

Adjusted to reflect amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(3)

On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9 (2015-2017: IAS 39).

(4)

In 2018, the Santander UK group completed the implementation of its ring-fencing plans.

22Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Page intentionally blank

Santander UK plc23


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Governance

Our governance

The UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code) sets out the framework for premium listed companies in the UK. The Code is the corporate governance code applied by the Company, with appropriate amendments as a fully owned subsidiary, and the standard against which we measure ourselves.

This Governance section (including the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance, the Committee Chair Reports and the Remuneration Policy and Remuneration Implementation reports) detail how we live upthe Company has applied and complied with the principles and provisions of the Code.

Any principles and provisions of the Code that are not precisely followed are detailed in the Directors’ Report on page 62.

How our governance supports the delivery of our strategy

All Directors are collectively responsible for the success of the Company. TheNon-Executive Directors exercise objective judgement in respect of Board decisions, and scrutinise and challenge management. They also have various responsibilities concerning the integrity of financial information, internal controls and risk management.

The Board is responsible for setting our strategy and policies, overseeing risk and corporate governance, and monitoring progress towards meeting our objectives and annual plans. It is accountable to our values in everything we do. We are determined to upholdshareholder for the highest standards and promote human rights, sound business ethics and corporate culture.

See the Director’s report for more on our Code of Ethical Conduct and Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy.

By Orderproper conduct of the business and our long-term success, and seeks to represent the interests of all stakeholders.

24Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Board of Directors

Shriti Vadera

Chair

Appointed as Chair in March 2015, previously IndependentNon-Executive Director and Deputy Chair from 1 January 2015

Skills and experience

Shriti was an investment banker with SG Warburg/UBS from 1984 to 1999, on the Council of Economic Advisers, HM Treasury from 1999 to 2007, Minister in the UK Government from 2007 to 2009 (Cabinet Office, Business Department and International Development Department), G20 Adviser from 2009 to 2010, and advised governments, banks and investors on the Eurozone crisis, banking sector, debt restructuring and markets from 2010 to 2014. She was aNon-Executive Director of AstraZeneca plc between 2011 and 2018.

Other principal appointments

Chair of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Senior Independent Director of BHP.

Board Committee memberships

Board Nomination Committee

Garrett Curran

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Appointed 7 May 2019

Skills and experience

Garrett has spent over 20 years in investment banking in a variety of positions, predominantly in global markets, capital markets and investment banking in London and New York. Most recently, he was CEO of Credit Suisse in the UK and the bank’s Chief Client Officer in EMEA. Since leaving Credit Suisse in 2016, Garrett has been an active advisor and investor specialising in financial services, technology and real estate. He brings extensive financial services experience, and knowledge of the UK regulatory environment and risk management.

Other principal appointments

Director of Les Trois Rocs SA, Senior Adviser to Quant Insight and Cambridge Machines Asset Management.

Board Committee memberships

Board Audit Committee

Board Responsible Banking Committee

Board Risk Committee

Annemarie Durbin

IndependentNon-Executive Director Employee Designated Director

Appointed 13 January 2016

Skills and experience

Annemarie has 30 years’ international retail, commercial, corporate and institutional banking experience culminating in membership of Standard Chartered’s Group Executive Committee where she was Group Company Secretary. She was a member of the Listing Authority Advisory Panel from 2015, and Chair between 2016 and 2018.

Annemarie is an executive coach and mentor.

Other principal appointments

Chair of Cater Allen Limited*.Non-Executive Director of WH Smith PLC. Chair of Merryk & Co. EMEA, a global mentoring group.

Board Committee memberships

Board Remuneration Committee

Board Responsible Banking Committee

Board Risk Committee

Santander UK plc25


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board of Directorscontinued

Ed Giera

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Appointed 19 August 2015

Skills and experience

Ed is currently Principal of EJ Giera LLC, providing corporate finance advisory and fiduciary services, and the Manager of Boscobel Place Capital LLC, a private investment partnership focused on the global financial services sector. Formerly, his executive career was with JP Morgan Securities, the investment banking affiliate of JP Morgan Chase & Co.

Ed also previously served as aNon-Executive Director at Pension Corporation Group Limited, ICBC Standard Bank plc, the Renshaw Bay Structured Finance Opportunity Fund, NovaTech LLC and the Life and Longevity Markets Association.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*.Non-Executive Director of the Renshaw Bay Real Estate Finance Fund.

Board Committee memberships

Board Audit Committee

Board Responsible Banking Committee

Board Risk Committee

Chris Jones

IndependentNon-Executive Director Santander UK’s Whistleblower’s Champion

Appointed 30 March 2015

Skills and experience

Chris was a partner at PwC from 1989 to 2014 and was a Senior Audit Partner specialising in the audit of banks and other financial services companies. He also led PwC’s EMEA Financial Services practice. He is a past president of the Association of Corporate Treasurers and a former Chairman of the Advisory Board of the Association of Corporate Treasurers.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Audit and Risk Committee member of the Wellcome Trust.Non-Executive Director of Redburn (Europe) Limited. Board member of the Audit Committee Chairs’ Independent Forum.

Board Committee memberships

Board Audit Committee

Board Remuneration Committee

Board Risk Committee

Genevieve Shore

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Appointed 18 May 2015

Skills and experience

Genevieve brings digital, technology and commercial expertise to Santander UK from a career in the media, publishing and technology sectors, most recently as Chief Product and Marketing Officer of Pearson plc, and previously as Director of Digital Strategy and CIO. Genevieve has also advised and invested in Education Technologystart-ups. She was a member of the Advisory Board of Lego Education. She also works with female executives as a coach and mentor.

Genevieve has also served as aNon-Executive Director of Moneysupermarket.com Group plc, Next Fifteen Communications Group plc, Arup Group Limited and STV Group plc.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of the Rugby Football Union.

Board Committee memberships

Board Audit Committee

Board Nomination Committee

Board Remuneration Committee

Board Responsible Banking Committee

Board Risk Committee

*

Part of the Banco Santander group.

26Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Scott Wheway

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Senior Independent Director

Appointed 1 October 2013

Skills and experience

Scott brings extensive retail and consumer knowledge to the Board, having formerly held senior roles at Tesco plc, including Operations Director and CEO, Tesco Japan. He was then CEO of Best Buy Europe and Managing Director and Retail Director of The Boots Company plc and Managing Director of Boots the Chemist at Alliance Boots plc. Scott is also a formerNon-Executive Director of Aviva plc and Chairman of Aviva Insurance Limited.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Interim Chairman of Centrica plc. Chairman of AXA UK plc.

Board Committee memberships

Board Nomination Committee

Board Remuneration Committee

Board Responsible Banking Committee

Board Risk Committee

Ana Botín

Banco Santander Nominated

Non-Executive Director

Appointed 1 December 2010, NED from 29 September 2014

Skills and experience

Ana joined the Banco Santander group in 1988 and was appointed Executive Chair of Banco Santander SA in September 2014. She has been a member of Banco Santander SA’s Board and Executive Committee since 1989 and previously served as CEO of Santander UK plc between 2010 and 2014. Ana directed Banco Santander SA’s Latin American expansion in the 1990s.

Other principal appointments

Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Executive Chair of Banco Santander SA* and Director.Non-Executive Director of The Coca-Cola Company. Vice-Chair of the Empresa y Crecimiento Foundation. Vice-Chair of the World Business Council for Sustainable Development. Member of the MIT’s CEO Advisory Board.

Board Committee memberships

Board Nomination Committee

Bruce Carnegie-Brown

Banco Santander Nominated

Non-Executive Director

Appointed 16 September 2019

Skills and experience

Bruce is a Vice Chairman and Lead Independent Director of Banco Santander SA* and Chairman of Lloyd’s of London.

Bruce has served asNon-Executive Chairman of Moneysupermarket.com Group plc anda Non-Executive Director of JLT Group plc. He was alsoNon-Executive Chairman of Aon UK Ltd, and was Senior Independent Director at Close Brothers Group plc and Catlin Group Ltd. As an executive, he wasco-founder and managing partner of the listed private equity division of 3i Group plc, President and CEO of Marsh Europe and a managing director of JP Morgan.

He was previously aNon-Executive Director of Santander UK plc* between 2012 and 2017, and aNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* between 2014 and 2017.

Other principal appointments

Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since September 2019. Vice Chairman and Lead Independent Director of Banco Santander SA*. Chairman of Lloyd’s of London, and of Cuvva Limited.

*

Part of the Banco Santander group.

Santander UK plc27


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board of Directorscontinued

Gerry Byrne

Banco Santander Nominated

Non-Executive Director

Appointed 1 December 2017

Skills and experience

Gerry has been Chairman of the Supervisory Board of Santander Bank Polska SA* (SBP) since 2011 having joined the SBP Board as Deputy Chairman in 2001. He was appointed Head of Europe for the Banco Santander group in April 2019. Gerry held several senior management roles at AIB Group, both in Ireland and in Poland, latterly as Managing Director of the Central Eastern Europe Division in 2009-2010. He is a member of the Irish Institute of Bankers, Irish Management Institute and an alumnus of Harvard Business School.

Other principal appointments

Chairman of the Supervisory Board of SBP* since 2011. Head of Europe, Banco Santander Group.

Dirk Marzluf

Banco Santander Nominated

Non-Executive Director

Appointed 7 May 2019

Skills and experience

Dirk joined Banco Santander as Group Head of Technology and Operations in September 2018. He joined Banco Santander from AXA Group, where he served as Group Chief Information Officer leading the insurance group’s technology and information security transformation, its overall project portfolio and asco-sponsor of its digital strategy.

As Banco Santander Group Head of Technology and Operations, Dirk is responsible for leading the information technology and operations function and its strategic development.

Other principal appointments

Chairman of Santander Global Operations SA* and Santander Global Technology SL.*

*

Part of the Banco Santander group.

28Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Nathan Bostock

Executive Director

26 FebruaryChief Executive Officer

Appointed 19 August 2014

Skills and experience

Nathan joined Santander UK from RBS, where he was an Executive Director and Group Finance Director. He joined RBS in 2009 as Head of Restructuring and Risk, and Group Chief Risk Officer. He previously spent eight years with Abbey National plc (now Santander UK plc*) and served on the Board as an Executive Director from 2005. During his time with Abbey National plc, he held other senior positions including Chief Financial Officer.

He was also at RBS from 1991 to 2001 in a number of senior positions and spent seven years before that with Chase Manhattan Bank, having previously qualified as a Chartered Accountant at Coopers & Lybrand (now PwC).

Other principal appointments

Chief Executive Officer of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*. Member of the Financial Services Trade Investment Board.

Susan Allen

Executive Director

Head of Retail and Business Banking

Appointed 1 January 2019

Skills and experience

Susan has substantial experience in the banking sector following a career spanning over 25 years. She joined Santander UK in 2015 as MD, Retail Banking before being appointed as Chief Transformation Officer the same year. In March 2017 she was appointed as Head of Retail Distribution. Prior to joining Santander UK, she held a number of senior roles at RBS including CEO: Customer Solutions Group Corporate Banking and MD: UK Retail.

Other principal appointments

Director of Cater Allen Limited*. Director of UK Finance Limited.

Madhukar (Duke) Dayal

Executive Director

Chief Financial Officer

Appointed 16 September 2019

Skills and experience

Duke has extensive financial services experience in a wide range of areas. Before joining Santander UK*, he worked for Santander US* in Boston as CFO of Santander Holdings* between April 2016 and July 2019, and President and CEO of Santander Bank NA* between September 2017 and July 2019.

Prior to joining Santander, Duke was with BNP Paribas for six years, where he served as Chief Financial Officer for BNP Paribas USA Holdings, BancWest and Bank of the West. Before that he helped lead a private equitystart-up for JP Morgan Chase & Co., Brysam Global Partners. Prior to that, he spent eight years with Citi.

Duke also served as a member of the Executive Committee on the Board of Trustees for the Institute of International Banking in New York as a Board member of the Federal Home Loan Bank of Pittsburgh.

Other principal appointments

Chief Financial Officer of Santander UK Group Holdings plc*.

*

Part of the Banco Santander group.

 

4Santander UK plc29


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Chair’s report on corporate governance

My report describes the roles, responsibilities

and activities of the Board and its Committees.

     

LOGO

The Board focuses on supporting and challenging management to achieve our strategy and transformation programme.

LOGO

Shriti Vadera

Chair

24 March 2020

LOGO

(1)  In addition, ad hoc Board Committee meetings were held to consider the Company’s application for the RBS Alternative Remedies Incentivised Switching Scheme and conduct matters.

Board activities

Read more onp33

Board and Committee

membership and attendance

Read more onp59

Our governance

Maintaining high standards of corporate governance is an essential element underpinning the long-term sustainable success of the Company.

In addition to the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the standard against which we measure ourselves), our governance practices and rules are set out in a number of our key documents, principally:

The UK Group Framework, which defines clearly our responsibilities and relationship with Banco Santander SA, our shareholder, taking account of our fiduciary and regulatory responsibilities. This provides us with the autonomy to discharge our responsibilities in the UK in line with best practice as an independent board while providing Banco Santander SA with the oversight and controls it needs. Clarity of roles and responsibilities is key to ensuring proper accountability for decisions and outcomes; and

The Corporate Governance Framework, which is designed to assist the Board of Directors in discharging their responsibilities and ensuring an appropriate scheme of delegation throughout the Santander UK plcgroup.


The Board’s schedule and activities are planned to ensure that directors have regard to the matters necessary to promote the success of the Company, including the broader implications of their decisions for all the Company’s stakeholders including its shareholder.

Ring-fencing implementation

Following ring-fencing requirements which came into force on 1 January 2019, the Boards and Committees of Santander UK Group Holdings plc and Santander UK plc operated simultaneously with 100% common director membership because the substantive business of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group was conducted by Santander UK plc, our ring-fenced bank. The Boards consisted of 7 IndependentNon-Executive Directors (INEDs) including the Chair, 3 Executive Directors (EDs) and 4 Group-appointedNon-Executive Directors (GNEDs). These arrangements were agreed by our regulators, and ensured the efficient management of Board activities, promoting the effective oversight of the business, and

were enabled by means of compliance with various ring-fencing rule modifications granted by the PRA. Under the UK Group Framework, in light of the fact that Santander UK Group Holdings plc is fully owned by Banco Santander and that the Chair is independent of the shareholder, the Chair is counted as an INED. This does not comply with Code provisions.

During the year, we developed a revised strategy to optimise the business of Santander Financial Services plc (formerly Abbey National Treasury Services plc), in effect ournon-ring-fenced bank, which will be completed in 2020. In order to comply with regulatory requirements to ensure the integrity of ring-fencing in Santander UK plc, our ring-fenced bank, we are required to make changes to the Santander UK Group Holdings plc Board, such that it will no longer have complete membership in common with Santander UK plc. Three INEDs stepped down from the Santander UK Group Holdings plc Board with effect from 31 December 2019 and will therefore be Directors of the ring-fenced bank only (Double INEDs). At the same time, in order to ensure that its Board continues to comprise 50:50 INEDs andnon-independent directors, in accordance with the UK Group Framework, one ED and two GNEDs also stood down and serve only the ring-fenced bank. These changes are summarised opposite.

The Board and Committees of the two companies continue to be run substantially simultaneously to ensure efficiency and effectiveness whilst ensuring the independence and autonomy of our ring-fenced bank are appropriately protected. We shadow ran these arrangements in December 2019 to ensure efficient parallel running upon implementation in January 2020.

We appointed Annemarie Durbin (Double INED) as Senior Ring-fencing Director (SRD) of Santander UK plc in order to comply with additional ring-fencing requirements set by the PRA. These relate primarily to ensuring that processes to identify and manage any conflicts of interest between the ring-fenced bank group and other members of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are operating effectively.

30 Santander UK plc


Financial review

    
   

Contents

 
   

Income statement review

  6
   

Summarised Consolidated Income Statement

   6
   

Profit before tax by segment

  8
   

– Retail Banking

Strategic Report   9Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 

LOGO

*

Santander UK Group Holdings plc Directors stepped down on 31 December 2019.

Board membership

Through the Board Nomination Committee, we ensure we have the right composition of individuals on the Board, providing an appropriate balance of knowledge, skills, experience and perspectives. Our aim of ensuring orderly succession for Board positions is supported by continuous and proactive processes. We take into account our strategic priorities and the main trends and factors affecting the sustainability and success of the business. We oversee and regularly review the development of a diverse pipeline for succession.

Changes to Board membership are set out on page 59. These appointments maintain valuable skill and experience of financial services, digital and innovation, strategy development and execution and transformation. On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank Lindsey Argalas, Julie Chakraverty and Antonio Roman who stepped down during 2019 for their invaluable service to the Board and the Company.

As was announced on 30 January 2020, I will be stepping down before the end of the year as Chair after five years. A search has been initiated by Scott Wheway, as the Senior Independent Director, allowing for an orderly transition with my successor.

All aspects of diversity form part of our Board succession planning process, which is explained in the Board Nomination Committee Chair’s report. In 2016 we set

an aspirational target of having 33% women on the Board by 2020. As anticipated in last year’s report, the level we achieved at that time (54%) reduced during 2019 as a result of Julie Chakraverty and Lindsey Argalas stepping down from the Board, and we ended the year at 36%.

Board Committees

The Board delegates certain responsibilities to Board Committees to help discharge its duties, as set out later in this section. The Committees play an essential role in supporting the Board in these duties, providing focused oversight of key areas and aspects of the business. The role and responsibilities of the Board and Board Committees are set out in formal Terms of Reference. These are reviewed at least annually as part of the review of the Corporate Governance Framework. Except for the Board Nomination Committee which has one GNED, all Committees are composed of INEDs only.

Board activities

The Board considered a range of options for implementing the Code requirement that boards must engage with employees to ensure that the views of the workforce are appropriately represented in discussions and decision-making and appointed Annemarie Durbin as INED with this responsibility.

During 2019, in addition to extensive reporting on people issues to the Board, Annemarie Durbin participated in focus

groups, management fora and development workshops covering simplification, employee engagement and leadership.

The Chair, with the CEO and Company Secretary, supported by the Directors and senior management, ensure that the Board has an appropriate schedule, which is focused on the opportunities and risks to the future success of the business, business performance and risk mitigation, and ensuring that the Company’s culture is aligned with its purpose, values and strategy. The Board regularly monitors progress against the strategic priorities and performance targets of the business. In June we held an offsite meeting that focused on future retail business models in the context of the medium-term strategy, our longer-term plans and aspirations, recognising the internal and external challenges faced in light of our competitive and uncertain external operating environment.

To ensure the most effective use of the time at Board meetings, in addition to the delegation of certain responsibilities to the Board Committees, the Board holds Board dinners, lunches and external speaker workshops to consider important topics in depth and engage with key stakeholders. The Board ensures regular contact with management and colleagues through a number of means. These include inviting relevant business and function heads to present to the Board or its Committees on

Santander UK plc31


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Chair’s report on corporate governancecontinued

     Board Committee responsibilities
Key responsibilities

Board

Nomination Committee

Chair’s report

Read more on p34

Board Nomination Committee

–  Review the Board’s structure, size and composition, including skills, knowledge, experience and diversity.

–  Consider succession planning for Directors and Senior Executives.

–  Identify and nominate candidates to fill Board vacancies as and when they arise.

–  Assess the performance of the Board.

–  Review each year whether NEDs have dedicated enough time to their duties to have been effective.

–  Oversee governance arrangements.

Board Risk

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp36

Board Risk Committee

–  Advise the Board on the enterprise wide risk profile, Risk Appetite and strategy.

–  Review the enterprise wide risk profile through business updates from the First Line of Defence and regular reports and updates on each key risk type from the Second Line of Defence.

–  Provide advice, oversight and challenge to embed and maintain a supportive risk culture.

–  Review the Risk Framework and recommend it to the Board for approval.

–  Review and approve the key risk type and risk activity frameworks identified in the Risk Framework.

–  Review the capability to identify and manage new risks and risk types.

–  Oversee and challenge theday-to-day risk management actions and oversight arrangements and adherence to risk frameworks and policies.

Board Audit

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp42

Board Audit Committee

–  Monitor and review the integrity of the financial reporting.

–  Keep under review the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal financial controls.

–  Review the adequacy of Whistleblowing arrangements.

–  Monitor and review the effectiveness of the Internal Audit function.

–  Assess the performance of the External Auditors and oversight of their independence.

Board

Responsible

Banking

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp48

Board

Responsible Banking Committee

–  Oversee culture and operational risks relating to conduct, compliance, competition, financial crime and legal matters set within the Risk Appetites and Risk Framework.

–  Ensure adequate and effective control processes and policies for conduct and compliance risk, fair customer treatment and customer outcomes.

–  Monitor, challenge and support management in its efforts to evolve conduct, culture and ethical standards through sustained effectiveness of Santander UK’s values and nine behaviours.

–  Oversee the reputation of Santander UK and how it impacts its brand and market positioning, and the Corporate and Social Responsibility Programme.

Board

Remuneration Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp50

Board

Remuneration

Committee

–  Approve and oversee the remuneration governance framework.

–  Oversee implementation of remuneration policies, ensuring they promote sound, effective risk management.

–  Consider and approve specific remuneration packages for EDs and other senior management.

–  Review and approve regulatory submissions in relation to remuneration.

–  Approve the variable pay pools for EDs and other senior management, including the application of risk adjustment as appropriate.

current developments; permitting observers as part of individual senior managers’ development plans; scheduling regular meetings for Committee Chairs to meet with relevant senior managers; site visits by one or more NEDs; and topical or technical workshops. In addition, senior leaders are available to the NEDs throughout the year.

Director inductions and training

The Company Secretary supports the Chair in designing individual inductions for NEDs, which include site visits and cover topics such as strategy, key risks and current issues including the legal and regulatory landscape. The delivery of our tailored NED induction programmes for our new appointments continued through 2019. Garrett Curran

and Dirk Marzluf benefited from tailored induction programmes phased over an initial period of 12 months, which includes meeting with senior management and a number of site visits. All other NEDs have ongoing development plans.

Throughout 2019, we continued to deliver workshops for all NEDs to further develop their knowledge and understanding of key business issues including model risks, regulatory challenges and stress testing; technological transformation opportunities and intervention; cyber risks; and recovery planning, strategies and tools.

Following a discussion arising from the publication of Slaughter and May’s report into

TSB’s April 2018 new IT platform migration, the Board will receive a detailed briefing on lessons that can be learned from TSB Board’s handling of that situation. These activities were supplemented with visits to corporate sites (including Banco Santander group headquarters) and branches. A summary of the Board’s activities in 2019 is set out above.

32Santander UK plc


   

– Corporate  & Commercial Banking

  11
   

– Corporate  & Investment Banking

   12
   

– Corporate Centre

  13
   

Balance sheet review

   14
   

Cash flows

  16
   
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Summary of Board activities in 2019

The Board endeavoured to consider the views of all impacted stakeholders, whilst acting in the best interests of the Company and its members as a whole. The Board’s activities in 2019 included the following themes:

 ThemeActions taken by the Board and outcomes

 Business and

 customer

–  Reviewed, challenged and remained apprised of the performance of the business divisions and functions, strategic business opportunities and developments with customer experience.

–  Reviewed, challenged and remained apprised of all aspects of the Company’s transformation programme.

–  Reviewed, challenged and approved the3-year business plan (2020-2022) and the annual Budget, including cost efficiencies and associated risk assessments.

–  Conducted strategic reviews of loyalty products and digital developments, including approval of new strategies and monitoring of progress.

 Strategy

–  Reviewed, challenged and approved a refined business strategy focusing on mortgages and core products.

–  Considered options and approved a refined strategy to develop the business of Santander Financial Services plc.

–  Received regular updates on the competitive landscape, the UK economy and banking sector including changes resulting from regulatory change requirements and digital developments.

–  Following an off site strategy meeting in June, considered an overview of the UK banking market including banking trends, competition and Santander UK’s position in the current banking market, the future of Banking in the UK market (including technological developments and simplification), an in depth review of Mortgages; and M&A market opportunities.

–  Regularly reviewed progress in delivering the strategic priorities of Santander UK including the future Retail business model and technological journey and associated investments required (for example, people skills required to achieve the technological journey).

–  Regularly reviewed organic and inorganic growth opportunities.

 Regulation,

 Balance Sheet

 and capital

–  Reviewed, challenged and approved the ICAAP, ILAAP, and the Recovery Plan; adequacy and effectiveness of stress-testing and capital management; Dividends and AT1 Payments.

–  Provided an attestion to the PRA on effective implementation of ring-fencing.

–  Received regular updates on capital planning.

–  Considered asset and liability management activities and was appraised of regulatory developments.

–  Approved policies including the Volcker Policy, Modern Slavery Statement, Money Laundering, climate change and ring-fencing related policies.

–  Agreed key assumptions and capabilities and approved the final 2019 BoE Concurrent Stress Test submission.

–  Approved the Annual Report and Accounts and otheryear-end related matters.

–  Received and discussed regular updates on ring-fencing implementation.

–  Approved the Surplus Capital Allocation Framework and Dividend Policy.

 Risk and

 control

–  Received regular enterprise wide risk updates from the CRO, together with updates on specific risks, such as pensions, cyber security, financial crime, climate change and Brexit.

 People and

 Culture

–  Received updates on issues including talent management and succession planning, gender pay, and diversity and inclusion.

–  Received updates on culture, considering our long-term strategic direction and assessment findings from the Banking Standards Board.

–  Considered Succession Planning across all key control and support functions.

 Governance

–  Considered the impact of ring-fencing legislation on governance arrangements, and made consequential changes to Board and Board Committee composition.

–  Considered and approved revisions to the Corporate Governance Framework and UK Group Framework arising from implementation of ring-fencing.

–  Approved the appointment of new directors and the Company Secretary.

–  Reviewed, challenged and approved Santander UK’s Annual Report.

–  Received regular updates from Board Committees, via the Chairs.

–  Approved revised Board strategic priorities and terms of reference for the Board and its committees.

Santander UK plc33


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Nomination Committee Chair’s report

The Committee has focused

on succession planning and

governance throughout the year

LOGO

We continue to ensure
that diversity of thinking
and skills remain
front of mind in our
succession planning.

LOGO

Shriti Vadera

Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Business development highlightsCommittee membership
and attendance

Read more onp59

  

Overview of the year

During 2019, the Committee’s work included: leading the process for several appointments to the Board and for orderly Board succession planning; continuing to develop our long-term Board and management succession planning; reviewing the collective skills and experience of the Board; Board Committee membership and the Board’s Diversity & Inclusion Policy and reviewing various governance arrangements as set out on page 30, including for ring-fencing rule modifications granted by the PRA resulting from changes to the business strategy. In addition, the Committee has ensured arrangements relating to Directors, such as Directors’ interests, terms of appointment and fee and time commitments remain appropriate and take account of good governance standards.

The Committee met on eight occasions in 2019. Detail’s of the Committee’s members and meeting attendance are set out on page 59.

Board changes and Succession planning

The Committee leads the process for Board appointments and ensures plans are in place for orderly succession to both the Board and senior management positions. Board appointments follow a structured, rigorous and transparent procedure designed to ensure they are based on merit and objective criteria and they promote broad diversity to complement and strengthen the Board’s and its Committees’ combination of skills, experience and knowledge. The Committee takes account of views of all the Company’s stakeholders in the recommendations it makes to the Board. The Board retains responsibility for and approves final decisions on these matters.

The Committee instructed Russell Reynolds(1) to lead a search for Julie Chakraverty’s replacement, resulting in its recommendation to the Board to appoint Garrett Curran as an INED.

As I will have completed five years as Chair in 2020, the Senior Independent Director commenced a planned search for my successor, assisted by Spencer Stuart(1), in order to ensure an orderly transition.

To support orderly succession planning for Board and senior management positions, the Committee assesses the challenges and opportunities facing the Company and evaluates the skills and expertise that will be needed in the future alongside internal capabilities, including board evaluation feedback. Increasing diversity in all respects in the boardroom and executive pipeline is a key factor we consider. Board appointments and succession planning during 2019 were conducted consistently with this approach, tailored as appropriate in each case.

The Committee reviewed executive succession planning, including a thorough assessment of the skill sets that would be required in light of the strategic direction of the business, together with development planning for identified talent, to ensure a strong and diverse leadership pipeline.

In order to ensure Santander UK plc’s continued compliance with ring-fencing requirements, the Committee reviewed and recommended changes to the Board and Committee memberships of Santander UK Group Holdings plc which took effect from 1 January 2020.

(1)

Russell Reynolds and Spencer Stuart do not have any connection with Santander UK.

34Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial review 17GovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

It also considered and recommended designation of specific roles to Santander UK plc INEDs as required by the regulator. Full details are set out on page 30 of my report on corporate governance.

With effect from 1 January 2020, and following changes described on page 30, Genevieve Shore (Double INED) became a member of the Committee.

Board Effectiveness

During 2019, the Committee considered feedback gained from the 2018 performance evaluations, which concluded that the performance of the Board, its Committees, the Chair and each of the Directors continues to be effective. The Committee reviewed with the Board the areas identified for greater focus in 2019 (monitoring business performance, efficiency,in- depth strategic consideration of digital and technological disruption on business strategy, customers, people and wider engagement with management) and recommended a series of actions which were then led by the Board and its Committees in meeting agendas and activities arranged accordingly. Individual Directors’ assessments were also conducted, and the Senior Independent Director undertook his twice-yearly assessment of my performance as Chair.

Having just implemented the changes in Board membership, as described on page 31 in order to continue to comply with ring-fencing requirements, the Committee determined that an external evaluation of the operation of the Board and Board Committees towards the end of 2020, following the implementation of new governance arrangements in January 2020, would provide more meaningful observations for the ongoing operation effectiveness of the Board. As a consequence, an internal Board Effectiveness review during the first quarter of 2020 will provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Diversity, inclusion and engagement with stakeholders

In 2016, we set an aspirational target of having 33% women on the Board by 2020. As anticipated in last year’s report, the level we achieved at that time (54%) reduced during 2019 as a result of Julie Chakraverty and Lindsey Argalas stepping down from the Board, and we ended the year at 36%. Our Senior Manager female population (Executive Committee) is 26.7%. 30.1% of the Executive Committee’s direct reports are female as at 31 December 2019. We are a signatory to the Women in Finance Charter, setting a target of 50%(+\-10%) by 2021 for our wider senior manager female population of which this forms a part.

We will also continue to ensure that gender and all aspects of diversity remain front of mind in our succession planning. The Board has signed the Business in the Community ‘Race at Work’ Charter and made good progress, having achieved two of our five actions with good progress on the other three. In February 2019, the Board confirmed our ambition to increase senior manager representation of Black, Asian and Minority Ethnic (BAME) employees to 14%(+/-2%) across mid to senior manager roles by 2025.

Governance

During the year, the Committee focused on changes to ring-fencing arrangements described on page 30 and on ensuring that governance arrangements continued to be efficient and effective.

We also conducted our annual review of our Corporate Governance Framework and of the terms of reference for the Board and its Committees. On the Committee’s recommendation, the Board endorsed changes to these documents and to the UK Group Framework described in my report on Corporate Governance to ensure continued compliance with ring-fencing rules.

Annual review of director interests, fees and conflicts of interest

During the year, the Committee continued to review Directors’ interests and to ensure any conflicts are managed appropriately and in compliance with CRD IV and ring-fencing requirements. The Company’s Articles of Association contain provisions that allow the Board to consider and, if it sees fit, to authorise situational conflicts. The Board confirms that such powers have operated effectively and that a formal system for Directors to declare their interests and for thenon-conflicted Directors to authorise situational conflicts continues to be in place. Any authorisations given are recorded by the Company Secretary.

The Chair, CEO and Group NED (who does not get paid a Board fee) reviewed the level of fees paid to INEDs for Board and Board Committee chairmanship and membership, together with the role of the SID. In doing so, they considered whether NED fees were at an appropriate level, having regard to a number of factors including the challenge of recruiting INEDs into the sector and the increasing regulatory and ring-fencing-related expectations and the associated time commitments for INEDs. In light of this, increases to the INED base fee, the Board Risk Committee Chair and member fee and an increase to the SID fee were approved. Further details are contained in the Remuneration Implementation Report on page 58.

Priorities for 2020

Over the next year we will continue to work on talent and succession planning, in particular on executive and senior management succession and NEDs’ continuing development and embedding revised governance arrangements in compliance with ring-fencing requirements. We will also undertake an external evaluation of the Board and Board Committees’ effectiveness.

Santander UK plc35


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Risk Committee Chair’s report

The Committee supports the Board

in ensuring that the business operates

within agreed Risk Appetite while reviewing

the capability to identify and manage

new and emerging risks.

LOGO

We challenged management as to
whether the investment,
prioritisation and pace
of change relating
to digitisation and
systems improvement
was appropriate.

LOGO

Ed Giera

Board Risk Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership
and attendance

Read more onp59

Overview of the year

The Committee considered a wide range of risks to our customers and our business in 2019, including:

Operational risks, resilience of systems to fraud and cyber risks, data integrity and security, and third party risks

Capital and liquidity

Credit, both retail and commercial

Embedding ring-fencing

Contingency planning in respect of Brexit.

We reviewed the top risks at each meeting and also received regular updates on specific matters such as stress testing, market risk, pension risk and business risk reviews.

The Board Risk Committee maintains a holistic view of Enterprise-Wide risks and, to help achieve this, there is appropriate cross-membership between this Committee and both the Board Responsible Banking Committee and the Board Audit Committee.

Whilst the Board Responsible Banking Committee has oversight of financial crime risk, the Board Risk Committee retains ultimate oversight of risk appetite with respect to conduct and regulatory, reputational and financial crime risks.

Membership

There have been two changes to the membership of the Committee during the year: Garrett Curran became a member in May and Julie Chakraverty left the Committee on her retirement from the Board in May. Julie had been a member of the Committee since June 2018. I would like to take this opportunity to thank Julie, on behalf of the Committee, for her contributions to our discussions. I would also like to welcome Garrett.

I believe that the Committee retains an appropriate balance of skills and expertise to carry out its role effectively. The Terms of Reference require the majority of the members to be Independent Non-Executive Directors. This criterion was met throughout the year.

LOGO

*

Reporting includes Enterprise-Wide Risk Management, Top Risks and Risk Disclosures.

36Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Meeting our key responsibilities in 2019

The Committee addressed our key responsibilities relating to Risk Appetite and the Risk Framework, our oversight of stress testing and liquidity, as well as a selection of challenges raised relating to certain risk categories. For more on our responsibilities relating to risk management and internal controls see page 41.

Significant areas of focus

Area of focusAction taken by the Board Risk CommitteeOutcome
Risk Appetite

– Considered a number of changes proposed to the Board’s Risk Appetite Statement as part of the Annual Risk Appetite Review.

– Noted changes to certain concentration limits either as a consequence of asset migrations to the Banco Santander London Branch, as part of ring-fencing, or as a result of continued portfolio rebalancing.

– Challenged management in relation to making changes in single name management framework.

– Requested the introduction of metrics to improve the Committee’s oversight and monitoring of the capital planning risk associated with significant risk transfer (SRT) securitisations.

– Queried proposed revisions to operational risk appetite and asked for a clearer, more consistent recommendation for monitoring utilisation of risk appetite.

– Received management’s proposal for additional controls and limitations intended to mitigate financial crime risk relative to risk appetite and continued to monitor progress on addressing financial crime risk exposure relative to risk appetite.

– Discussed the PRA expectations for implementing the recommendations of the Task Force on Climate-related Financial Disclosures relating to managing financial and strategic risks from climate change.

– Noted and were satisfied that a more detailed single name exposure framework had been implemented.

– Management developed a metric to monitor the maximum potential fall in the CET1 capital ratio if regulatory or execution risks arose with current or planned SRTs.

– Following challenge, recommended management’s proposed changes to Risk Appetite to the Board for approval.

– Monitored and provided ongoing challenge to management in relation to financial crime risk exceeding tolerance, and received updates on management actions to return to within Risk Appetite.

– Received a recalibration of Operational and Financial Crime risk appetite after challenge to management.

– Continued to assess management’s progress relative to Risk Appetite in the context of the Financial Crime Transformation Programme.

For more, see ‘Risk Appetite’ in the ‘Risk governance’ section of the Risk review.

Risk Framework    

– Received an update following the annual certification process, and assessed the extent to which the Risk Framework had been effectively implemented and embedded across the business.

– Further to updates made to the Risk Framework in H2 2018, to reflect the implementation of ring-fencing, received management’s proposals for the introduction of new minimum standards intended to strengthen the controls around independence of decision making and management of conflicts of interest.

– Received management’s proposal for changes to the suite of Risk Type and Risk Activity Frameworks and their delineation between Santander UK Group Holdings plc and Santander UK plc.

– Received the Risk function’s confirmation that the Risk Framework had embedded the ring-fencing changes

– Noted there was transparency and ownership of areas for improved compliance.

– Recommended the proposed changes to the Board for approval.

For more, see ‘Risk Framework’ in the ‘Risk governance’ section of the Risk review.

Stress testing

– Monitored the 2019 Bank of England Concurrent Stress Test exercise, and received updates throughout the process. We questioned the ability of our systems to process data seamlessly and discussed the additional complexity created by the IFRS 9 model implementation.

– Considered the results of the stress test both on an IFRS 9 transitional basis and on an IFRS 9 basis without transitional arrangements.

– Received a specific paper, produced by the Risk team, with details of risk management in stress testing.

– Noted that risks associated with Santander UK’s suite of stress testing models had generally improved across the last year.

– Questioned whether sufficient resource was planned and available for the ongoing multi-year effort to improve stress testing models.

– Recommended the governance, process, controls and stress test results to the Board for approval and onward submission to the PRA.

– Committee members were provided with greater insight to review the most significant models.

– Supported management on the allocation of resources for planned stress testing model enhancements and requested a holistic view of the resource requirements as part of the next update.

For more, see ‘Stress testing’ in the ‘Risk governance’ section of the Risk review.

Santander UK plc37


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Risk Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

Area of focusAction taken by the Board Risk CommitteeOutcome

Santander

Services

– Challenged management as to whether the investment, prioritisation and pace of change relating to digitisation and systems improvement was appropriate, and requested timely escalation of material changes and responses to material incidents.

– Sought management’s assurance that investment was aligned with trade-offs in commercial benefits and improvements in risk infrastructure.

– Requested further detail on management’s risk acceptance in respect of projects that were deferred or unfunded and the corresponding steps being taken to mitigate the risk.

– Received updates on cyber risk and the strategy and risk management relating to cloud usage.

– Continued discussions with management about the execution risks, and benefits, associated with a migration away from existing technology and risk infrastructure. Emphasised the need for Board-level involvement as well as alignment with Banco Santander group in the associated debate and decisions impacting data management and key systems architecture.

– Received updates from management and noted an increased number of escalated events and incidents, many of which were time sensitive or regulatory change driven.

– Considered reports on the strengthening of due diligence controlsfor new-to-bank high risk suppliers and the development of improved assessments for suppliers that required reviews or revalidation.

– Received updates on third party supplier risks, noted the additional governance and mandatory training programme, and supported management’s efforts to ensure successful embedding and awareness of third party risk management across the workforce.

– Received regular updates from the Chief Data Officer.

– Noted the progress made by management to improve risk management capability within Santander Services and the improved clarity of management’s reporting to the Committee more generally.

– Took comfort from the process by management to distribute ownership and accountability for data integrity and observed that data structure and legacy systems architecture were key areas of focus to improve data quality.

Brexit

– Received regular updates on management’s contingency plans.

– Continued to monitor the risks and potential impact to Santander UK of the negotiation of terms for the Withdrawal Agreement setting out the basis for the UK’s departure from the EU.

– Noted management actions to enhance infrastructure, improve data and respond dynamically to reflect local regulations in overseas jurisdictions.

– Requested a report on controls over cross-border financial promotions.

– Discussed access to financial markets infrastructure, derivatives clearing and the significant risks in respect of the treatment of EEA back-book derivatives in the event that London-based clearing is not recognised by the European authorities.

– Emphasised the need for coordination with Banco Santander on any actions taken impacting customers and our employees working in the UK as EU nationals, in particular.

– We continue to monitor political developments, and to review and challenge management’s contingency plans for Brexit.

For more, see the ‘Operational risk’ section of the Risk Review.

Ring-fencing

– Received frequent updates on the ring-fencing programme both as part of the Enterprise Wide Risk Management Reports and separately. These updates focused on the programme’s top risks and mitigating actions, including operational, legal, execution and regulatory risks related to completion of the programme.

– Considered further proposals for how both the Risk Framework and Risk Appetite would need to be updated to reflect ring-fencing.

– Received the annual Ring-Fenced Body Permitted Exceptions and Arm’s Length policies and associated reports from Internal Audit. We noted the governance and waterfall of attestation processes and management’s increasing awareness of ring-fencing related compliance obligations. We challenged the pace of implementing certain recommendations from the audit reports on the Arm’s Length Policy.

– In the course of monitoring progress on the execution of the ring-fencing programme, we:

– Recommended further the changes to the Risk Appetite and Risk Framework to the Board.

– Agreed for expediency to delegate to the Committee Chair certain out of cycle permitted exceptions

– Recommended the Ring-Fenced Body Permitted Exceptions Policy and the Arm’s Length Policy to the Board for approval.

38Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Oversight and advice to the Board on Santander UK’s current risk exposure and future risk strategy

In 2019, we reviewed Santander UK’s exposure to the risks outlined below and analysed emerging themes, including regulatory, macroeconomic and global risks, which could affect Santander UK’s ability to achieve its strategic goals.

Risk

Action taken by the Board Risk CommitteeOutcome
Credit risk

– Received regular credit risk updates across Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Investment Banking businesses.

– Received updates on the retail mortgage book, including interest-only andbuy-to-let mortgages.

– Monitored concentration risks, reviewed growth strategies and challenged management in relation to the Consumer Finance business.

– In relation to the construction and associated support sectors, we noted the progress made by management to implement risk management, including control enhancements, adjustments to limits and exposures, corporate credit monitoring and approval processes, and operational procedures for delivering supply chain financing and receivables purchase products.

– Continued to monitor utilisation of existing risk appetite and requested that the Committee has early and comprehensive assessments from Line 2 of any material adjustments to credit policy or risk limits recommended by management in connection with the update of the three year plan.

– Counselled management on the need for a comprehensive approach with the Banco Santander Risk function, and to recognise the broader credit risks, including concentrations, which might evolve from industry or market responses to emerging risks, including climate change.

For more, see the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

Strategic risk

– Considered strategic risk as part of risk reports on M&A opportunities, Data, Change and Operational Risk.

– Noted the critical importance of data and systems to ensuring the long term success of the Company and encouraged management to ensure appropriate prioritisation.

– Discussed the strategic threats to Santander UK’s capacity to defend and build further franchise value.

– Requested a substantive update on Strategic risk in Q1 2020.

For more, see the ‘Strategic risk’ section of the Risk review.

Pension risk

– Considered papers on pension investment strategy and governance.

– Sought assurance around the continued effectiveness of the pension governance arrangements.

– Noted the company and the pension trustees had reached agreement on the triennial valuation, the approach to which was consistent with continuing tode-risk and appropriately fund the pension schemes.

– Received updates on the transition to new investment managers and improvements in the transparency of manager reporting for risk management purposes.

– Confirmed and supported the outcome of the triennial valuation, the continued development of the pension investment portfolio transition and risk management strategies, and ongoing enhancements of the governance arrangements with the trustees.

For more, see the ‘Pension risk’ section of the Risk review.

Liquidity risk

– Reviewed the Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP) and noted material enhancements to the previous process made by management.

– Questioned management about material liquidity stress test assumptions, and the flexibility and timeliness of our liquidity reporting.

– Received half yearly updates on asset and liability management activities and confirmed the liquid asset buffer portfolio remained within risk appetite, and appropriately hedged against duration risks and LIBOR decommissioning risks, respectively.

– Agreed to recommend the 2019 ILAAP to the Board for approval following review and challenge.

For more, see the ‘Liquidity risk’ section of the Risk review.

Santander UK plc39


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Risk Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

RiskAction taken by the Board Risk CommitteeOutcome
Capital risk

– Considered, from a capital risk perspective, dividends payable on AT1 securities, and the ordinary dividends proposed to be paid by Santander UK plc for theyear-end.

– Requested management develop a framework to address and provide additional rigour to the consideration of and allocation of surplus available capital.

– Approved this Surplus Capital Allocation Framework.

– Reviewed the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and noted material enhancements to the previous process made by management.

– Sought clarity on the key drivers to the CET1 capital and leverage ratios and considered management’s proposals for various risk and capital management initiatives.

– Received updates on model risk including the evolution of the approach to a new internal ratings based (IRB) regulatory capital model for the mortgage book, as well as the securitisation of certain assets.

– Received updates on progress in respect of the capital management initiatives proposed in the year, and challenged management on execution, operating, and regulatory risks.

– Recommended the payment of dividends to the Board for approval. Comments and challenges received from Committee members were considered by management and incorporated into the final draft ICAAP.

– Agreed to recommend the ICAAP to the Board for approval following review and challenge.

– Agreed to recommend the plans for potential risk and capital management actions to the Board for approval.

– Arranged a workshop on SRTs and sought clarity from management on the future SRT strategy.

For more, see the ‘Capital risk’ section of the Risk review.

Operational risk

– Noted the design and implementation of the Operational Risk Framework, the downward trend of operational losses excluding PPI and management’s shift in focus toward business continuity as opposed to appetite for financial loss in respect of operational resiliency.

– Received Operational Risk updates within Enterprise-wide Risk Management as well as Operational Resiliency, Data Centre Resilience and Change Risk.

– Received regular updates on management’s strategies for mitigating cyber risk and third party risk.

– Considered crystallised operational risk incidents impacting other companies, and how these had impacted our own customers, as well as any lessons that could be learned.

– Noted the enhancements to programme management disciplines around change and considered third party risk and dependance on key suppliers.

– Highlighted the elevated risk presented by the confluence of regulatory change requirements, change risk more generally and organisational capacity and capability programme.

– Considered and noted good progress on the LIBOR transition.

– Monitored the impacts on operational risk and key controls associated with management’s execution of the high volume of significant transformation and remediation programmes.

For more, see the ‘Operational risk’ section of the Risk review.

For more on our LIBOR transition, see the ‘Managing LIBOR transition’ case study in the ‘Market risk’ section of the Risk review.

Model risk

– Considered an update on the regular monitoring of capital adequacy models.

– Received an update on the regulatory review of key mortgage and corporate IRB models.

– Considered the implications of differing regulatory perspectives onthrough-the-cycle capital requirements of the Bank of England and the ECB, respectively.

– The Committee will continue to monitor progress in respect of regulatory initiatives for IRB models, and request evidence of appropriate model types, assumptions and calibration.

For more, see the ‘Model risk’ section of the Risk review.

40Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Effectiveness of risk management system and internal controls

The Committee considered, as part of the Operational Risk Profile & Analysis update, the results of the 2018 year end Risk and Control Self Assessment (RCSA). This highlighted the risk and exposure issues reported through the RCSA processes. Based on our assessments of the risk and exposure issues reported, we considered that there had been an increase in critical and high risks versus the prior year’s assessment, however, overall critical and high risks were well managed via risk mitigation and reassessment process, respectively. The remaining high risks related mainly to IT risks, relating to legacy systems and data management, and new operational risks resulting from ring-fencing requirements. Whilst the self-assessment acknowledged a number of control weaknesses, in particular for Financial Crime, we were satisfied that appropriate actions were planned and being progressed by management to address these. We continue to monitor the position, including with respect to overall risk appetite. Notwithstanding these considerations, the Committee subsequently requested, and management implemented, additional controls and limitations on certain activities intended to further mitigate exposure to Financial Crime risk relative to risk appetite.

We noted an increase in reported risks, partly due to the result of a dynamic transformation and change risk profile, increased reporting across the business as a result of improved systems, and noted further the need for additional classification improvements. Management also advised the Committee that overall operational controls improved following system enhancements, however, the Committee highlighted the need to make further progress.

The Committee reaffirmed its view and concurred with the regulator’s expectation of a comprehensive approach reflecting appropriate prioritisation of investment in management’s strategic plan, particularly with reference to the plan for bank-wide risk infrastructure. The Committee will continue to review management’s reports on the execution of the overall bank-wide risk infrastructure investment programme, as well as the status of management’s regulatory dialogue, and will continue to request management to evidence the effectiveness of controls and improvements driven by the programme over the investment period.

Change Programme

The Committee maintained its oversight of the changing scale, scope and critical nature of the various change initiatives undertaken by Santander UK to meet regulatory and other requirements that continued to pose significant risk in 2019.

Reports from the Transformation Office and Operational Risk identified similar themes with respect to root cause issues underpinning the execution of change programmes. The Committee expressed concern at management’s capacity to effectively resource and execute the number of strategic transformation programmes in progress concurrently with the execution of regulatory change requirements including customer alerts and the high cost of credit review.

The Committee considered that improved management information would assist management to better plan and sequence the implementation of complex and often time critical and interdependent deliverables.

Effectiveness of the Committee

As noted above, the Committee membership saw one member leave and one member join during the year. I believe that the Committee has an appropriate mix of skills to enable it to operate effectively and to offer appropriate challenge and support to management.

In December 2019, we reviewed the Committee’s responsibilities as set out in the Terms of Reference and confirmed that the Committee had discharged its responsibilities in full in 2019.

An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020 to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Full terms of reference can be found on our website at www.aboutsantander.co.uk and a summary is given on page 32.

We continued to receive regular reports on enterprise wide risk and to call risk owners to our meetings to account for their progress.

We have benefited from the perspectives of each of the three lines of defence to gain assurance and confirm progress in respect of material initiatives intended to mitigate key risk exposures.

These actions are examples of how we have looked to inform our debate and decision making in the year and contribute to our effectiveness as a Committee.

Priorities for 2020

In 2020, we will monitor Santander UK’s capital and liquidity adequacy and assess credit risk in changing economic conditions and extremely competitive operating environment including the risks and uncertainties surrounding Brexit and the UK regulatory landscape.

Data, cyber, third party, operational resilience and otherIT-related operational risks will continue to be a priority, including the adoption of cloud services.

We expect to review continuing developments in areas such as model risk, pension risk, enhancements to Santander UK’s risk infrastructure and management of transformation risks.

In accordance with the additional responsibilities of the CRO, we also will monitor and review Santander UK’s climate-related financial and strategy risks.

Santander UK plc41


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Audit Committee Chair’s report

Our responsibilities include oversight of

the integrity of financial reporting and

controls, the effectiveness of our internal

audit function, the relationship with the

external auditors and the adequacy of

our whistleblowing arrangements.

LOGO

In 2019, we monitored our exposure to PPI in the context of the time bar, reviewed the provisions and disclosures for other conduct and operational matters, performed oversight of management’s responses to Internal Audit reviews and reviewed the weights of economic scenarios in respect of IFRS 9 ECL calculations given political and economic uncertainties, including Brexit.

LOGO

Chris Jones

Board Audit Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership

and attendance

Read more onp59

Overview of the year

In 2019, the main activities of the Committee included:

Assessing the appropriateness of key management judgements and related reporting each quarter.

Considering our exposure to, provisioning for and disclosure of PPI related matters given a number of factors including claims volumes and the expiration of the PPI deadline.

Monitoring the embedding of IFRS 9, including operation of, and key changes to, models and methodologies, impacts and related controls with a particular focus on the weights applied to the economic scenarios given political and economic uncertainties, including Brexit, as well as Year 2 disclosure enhancements.

Reviewing our contingent liability disclosures, including those relating to conduct.

Considering the adequacy of comfort on our risk-weighted assets reporting.

Reviewing the actuarial assumptions of the pension scheme accounting valuation as well as the triennial valuation.

Monitoring management’s responses to various industry reviews of the UK statutory audit market and Financial Reporting Council.

Providing oversight on the adequacy and effectiveness of internal controls over financial reporting.

Overseeing the performance of the Internal Audit function.

Continuing oversight of interaction with our External Auditors.

Overseeing Santander UK’s whistleblowing arrangements, including further enhancements in line with FCA guidance and rules on whistleblowing.

Reviewing Santander UK’s Recovery Plan and management’s plans in respect of the incoming Resolvability Assessment Framework.

Monitoring the transition for the incoming CFO as well as changes to key management in the Finance function.

We also addressed other responsibilities delegated to the Committee by the Board.

Committee Membership

Julie Chakraverty retired on 7 May 2019 and I would like to thank her for her service on behalf of the Committee. We welcomed Garrett Curran, who joined the Committee in May 2019. Garrett brings extensive financial services experience and strong risk management credentials.

At 31 December 2019, all four members of the Committee were IndependentNon-Executive Directors. The Committee also met the necessary requirements of independence throughout the year, in accordance with the requirements of Rule10A-3 under the US Securities Exchange Act 1934.

LOGO

42Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Significant financial reporting issues and judgements

The use of assumptions or estimates and the application of management judgement is an essential part of financial reporting. In 2019, we focused on the following significant reporting matters in relation to financial accounting and disclosures:

   Financial reporting

   issue or judgement

Action taken by the Board Audit CommitteeOutcome

Conduct provisions

The provision for conduct remediation activities for PPI and other products continued to be highly judgemental and requires significant assumptions including claim volumes and Plevin in scope rates.

– Continued to scrutinise the level and adequacy of conduct provisions and challenged the reasonableness of management’s assumptions throughout the year.

– In respect of PPI including Plevin, the Committee:

– Reviewed the judgements and estimates in respect of the provision considering management’s assumptions around changes in claim volumes, uphold rates and average cost of redress. This was in the context of key developments in the year, taking into account the implementation of the FCA’s consumer deadline ‘time bar’ on PPI complaints of 29 August 2019, our specific approach to auto conversion and the appointment of Deloitte to assist the Official Receiver for certain individuals subject to bankruptcy court orders.

– Noted the very significant increase in the levels of customer information requests and complaints in the time leading up to the implementation of the time bar, and its impact on the provision.

– Inquired as to the methodology management had adopted in determining the top end of the range of their estimates of the additional charge that should be made for PPI as a result of the increase in complaints.

– Noted that the PPI model is an expert judgement model and therefore had not gone through the standard model governance process. Requested that management explain the governance and controls in place around the model to ensure the accuracy of its financial outputs, and invited the Head of Internal Audit to comment.

– In respect of other products, the Committee reviewed management’s judgements and estimates in respect of the provision.

– Endorsed management’s recommendation that additional charges of £70m in Q2 2019 and £99m in Q3 2019 should be made for PPI.

– Considered the classification and disclosure of provisions related to a specific PPI related portfolio which is the subject of litigation, together with an associated contingent liability.

– Received a report from management on the governance and controls in place around the PPI model, including controls that are tested as part of the Sarbanes-Oxley compliance process. Noted that Internal Audit had reviewed the PPI model but had not identified any significant concerns.

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of conduct provisions and disclosures, including PPI and other products.

– We continued to monitor the provisioning levels in light of any changes to claims volumes, inflows and average redress costs.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See Note 27 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Credit provisions

Ensuring appropriate application and embedding of IFRS 9 is a significant area of judgement given its technical complexity, the number of judgements needed, and their potential impact. Determining the appropriateness of credit provisions is also highly judgemental, requiring management to make a number of assumptions.

Embedding of IFRS 9

– Monitored the embedding of IFRS 9, including changes to the controls environment, throughout the year.

– Reviewed management decisions and challenged key assumptions.

– Reviewed the operation of, and key changes to, models and methodologies and their impacts. We placed particular focus on the weights applied to the economic scenarios given political and economic risks, including Brexit.

– Reviewed the proposed approach toyear-end disclosures, including the Year 2 recommendations of the PRA’s Taskforce on Disclosures about ECL.

– Satisfied ourselves that management continued to have a robust methodology for evaluating the results of the models given their complexity and a clear trail of their workings, particularly due to the models’ key outputs.

– Obtained comfort on the adequacy of data in the context of the evolving control environment.

– Noted that model and methodology changes had been approved by the Model Risk Management Forum.

– Endorsed the proposedyear-end disclosures.

See the ‘Credit risk’ section in the Risk review.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Santander UK plc43


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

   Financial reporting

   issue or judgement

Action taken by the Board Audit CommitteeOutcome

Credit provisions continued

Retail credit provisions

– Reviewed detailed reports from management throughout the year analysing the proposed provisions by key product.

– Considered management’s proposals to apply Post Model Adjustments (PMAs) to the mortgage model to address interest-only maturity default risk,buy-to-let and long-term indeterminate arrears.

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of retail credit provisions, concluding that provisions remain robust and assumptions were appropriate.

– Agreed with management’s recommendations for the continued application of PMAs in relation to the mortgage model, including changes and updates to the PMA population.

– We will continue to monitor retail credit provisions.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See Note 13 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Corporate credit provisions

– Reviewed reports from management throughout the year, including consideration of individually assessed impairments and PMAs, to satisfy ourselves as to the completeness of the provision requirements.

– Noted that corporate credit provisions can be more volatile than retail credit provisions, and may be supported by more limited data.

– Considered reports on specific cases, as well as a review of the rest of the portfolio, to identify other cases or industry sectors that could potentially be at risk, including the retail sector.

– Discussed other exposures and satisfied ourselves that no material adjustments to provision levels were required.

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of corporate credit provisions, concluding that provisions remain robust and assumptions were appropriate.

– We will continue to monitor corporate credit provisions.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See Note 13 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Pension obligations

Significant judgement is required on the key assumptions underlying defined benefit pension obligation calculations. Outcomes remain inherently uncertain.

– Reviewed detailed reports throughout the year on key assumptions underlying the defined benefit pension obligation calculations. We recognised that, although some assumptions are based on observable data, others continue to require significant judgement.

– Considered the best estimate of our pension liabilities under IAS 19, recognising the inputs of external actuaries who generate financial assumptions and propose liabilities.

– Reviewed the results of the triennial funding valuation agreed in August 2019.

– Reviewed changes proposed as the result of a review of experience analysis by the Trustee, which informed the choice of demographic assumptions.

– Reviewed the regulatory capital impact of the changes.

– Monitored the continued appropriateness of the methodology and reviewed the inflation, discount and mortality rates applied at theyear-end.

– Noted that the proposed changes to demographic assumptions had been reviewed at the Pension Risk Forum and reviewed by Independent Model Risk Review.

– Agreed with management’s approach to the assumptions applied, including changes made in 2019.

– Endorsed the proposed quantitative and qualitativeyear-end disclosures in respect of pension obligations.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See ‘Pension risk management’ in the Risk Review.

See Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Other areas

– Reviewed the appropriateness of the provision, and considered the disclosures required, in relation to i) a specific PPI portfolio of complaints and ii) our consumer credit business operations.

– Considered disclosures relating to the Cologne CPO and German FTO ongoing investigations of our historical involvement in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions.

– Reviewed the appropriateness of the accounting, and considered the disclosures required, relating to certain leases that are currently under review by HMRC in connection with claims for tax allowances.

– Endorsed management’s recommended provision and level of disclosure in these regards, including an additional provision of £10m for our consumer credit business operations.

– Endorsed the proposedyear-end disclosures relating to German dividend tax arbitrage transactions.

– Endorsed management’s recommended accounting and level of disclosure relating to the leases under review by HMRC.

See Notes 27 and 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

44Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

The Committee’s focus continues to be on areas of significant judgement which pose the greatest risk of a material financial statement misstatement. In addition to the areas set out in the preceding table, the Committee also considers other higher risk items. During the 2019year-end process, these included the identification and assessment of risks of material misstatement due to fraud or error and the controls over calculation of risk-weighted assets. We also received regular reports on any material litigation cases and their progress, as part of our consideration of provisions and contingent liabilities.

External Auditor

We continued to develop and oversee the interaction with PwC and with Mr Holloway in his fourth year as the audit partner, following PwC’s appointment in 2016. The independence and objectivity of PwC was considered and monitored throughout the year.

Oversight of the relationship with our External Auditors

As part of our review of our relationship with PwC, our activities included:

Consideration of their work and opinion relating to management judgements.

Review of the summary of misstatements not corrected by management. The Committee was satisfied that they were not quantitatively or qualitatively material, either individually or in the aggregate.

Discussion on the level of disclosure in the Annual Report and Half Yearly Financial Report to satisfy ourselves that it is appropriate.

Discussion of developments in financial reporting including changes to accounting standards, statute and best practice.

A review of PwC’s reports on findings and recommendations on internal control and financial reporting matters identified during their audit and their view of management’s progress in resolving them.

Interactions, including meetings in private session during each Committee meeting, and at other times throughout the year.

Reviewed the latest results of the FRC’s

quality inspections and our auditors’ response to the FRC’s challenge on the general quality of banking audits as well as enquired into the results of any audit quality reviews of Santander UK.

Based on the above inputs, which were captured in a formalised assessment, the Committee satisfied itself as to the rigour and quality of PwC’s audit process.

Non-audit fees

We have a robust policy onnon-audit services provided by our External Auditors, which was updated in 2016 in the context of the Revised Ethical Standard issued by the FRC on auditor independence requirements resulting from the European Audit Regulation and Directive.

Non-audit services were under continuous review throughout 2019 to determine that they were permitted by reference to their nature, assessing potential threats and safeguards to auditor independence as well as the overall ratio of audit tonon-audit fees.

All assignments require advance approval, either by the Chair (or in his absence his alternate), under delegated authority for amounts under £250,000 plus VAT or, if larger, by the full Committee. This process is in addition to the requirement for allnon-audit fees to be approved by the Banco Santander Audit Committee.

The fees fornon-audit work performed by PwC in the year, which are disclosed in Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, mainly comprised audit-related assurance services relating to the review of interim financial information of Santander UK, reporting in connection with the group’s regulators and support of various debt issuance programmes. We ensured that these met the external and internal tests for maintaining their independence.

In 2019, PwC’snon-audit related fees were 22% of their total audit fees, well within the internal cap of 70% approved by the Committee.

Fees fornon-audit work performed by PwC in the year, other than those in relation to audit related assurance services, were approximately 2% of the average of the fees approved for Deloitte, EY and KPMG.

The Committee considered the findings of the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) market study into the UK Statutory Audit market and subsequent Business Energy & Industrial Strategy (BEIS) consultation as well as the Kingman independent review of the Financial Reporting Council and noted management’s responses to the CMA and BEIS consultations.

Internal controls

The Board Risk Committee has overall responsibility for the effectiveness of the internal control systems. However, due to the nature of internal control matters, there is a degree of overlap in responsibilities with those of this Committee, particularly regarding financial reporting controls.

Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires management to report on the design and effectiveness of its internal controls over financial reporting (ICFR) framework. During 2019, further enhancements have been introduced to the framework.

We considered the financial control environment in the year. Finance and our External and Internal Auditors provided regular reports to the Committee on ICFR, including key systems, and provided feedback on remediation and overall improvements required to ensure that the relevant controls were appropriately designed and operating effectively. This included access management, end user computing, controls over IFRS 9 and the Client Assets control environment.

Santander UK plc45


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

Disclosure in the Annual Report

We received regular reports from the Disclosure Committee, a senior executive committee chaired by the CFO. Its remit is to advise the Committee on the completeness and accuracy of disclosures in Santander UK’s external reporting. This, together with other reports received in the year, and a review of best practice and the approach of our peers, enabled us to conclude that we were satisfied with the disclosures in this Annual Report.

Management also engaged the Board and Committee early on concerning the approach to the report which enabled them to provide input into the overall tone and messaging in a timely manner.

Fair, balanced and understandable

The Disclosure Committee also reports on whether the Annual Report is fair, balanced, and understandable, aligns with the quarterly results and whether it provides the information necessary for readers to assess Santander UK’s position and performance, business model and strategy:

Key messages remained consistent throughout the document, relating both to financial performance and progress against strategic priorities.

All key judgements, significant risks and issues are reported and explained clearly and adequately.

There is a clear framework to the document with good signposting and a complete picture of performance and events.

In addition to the above review process, the Committee’s assessment of fair, balanced and understandable is underpinned by the understanding it gains through the reporting made to it throughout the year of management judgements, internal control matters, Internal Audit activities and the reports of the External Auditors.

The Committee’s assessment also considers the robustness and outcomes of the assurance, review and verification processes conducted by management and considers whether the key risks reflected those that were of a concern to the Committee and were consistent with those reported by management.

Following our assessment we concluded that the 2019 Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable.

Financial Reporting Council (FRC) Annual Review of Corporate Reporting 2019/20

In October 2019, the FRC issued a report which sets out its perspective on key developments for 2019/20 annual reports. As part of our oversight of this area, we received and reviewed a report from management on its work in respect of the areas of interest to the FRC. We are satisfied that management addressed the areas identified by the FRC in the preparation of this Annual Report to the extent appropriate to our ownership structure.

Going Concern

We satisfied ourselves that it is appropriate to use the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements, supported by a detailed analysis provided to the Committee by senior finance management.

As part of the assessment, we considered whether there are sufficient financial resources, including liquidity and capital, available to continue the operations of Santander UK. We considered Santander UK’s resilience in the face of potential stress and prominent events. In making our assessment, we took into account all information of which we were aware about the future, which was at least, but not limited to, 12 months from the date that the balance sheet was signed.

Internal Audit

The Internal Audit plan, based on a comprehensive risk assessment, was presented in draft and then final form for challenge and approval by the Committee. The plan has been updated at regular intervals throughout the year in response to changes in the business and the regulatory environment and at the request of the Committee.

All unsatisfactory audit reports issued were subject to additional scrutiny by the Committee with the relevant business areas being required to present their action plans to the Committee.

We chose to invite management to present on progress with the implementation of Internal Audit’s recommendations, issues encountered, key milestones and key dependencies.

We received regular reports on audit recommendations from our Chief Internal Auditor (the Head of Internal Audit), quarterly Internal Audit reports and monitored findings as part of our oversight. We considered the total number of recommendations, the rationale for any of them becoming overdue, and broader root cause analyses. The Committee also requested that the Chief Internal Auditor highlight recommendations becoming due and any that were past due.

We noted a strong engagement between Internal Audit and the business in 2019.

We also oversaw the objective setting and performance evaluation of the Chief Internal Auditor.

Internal Audit External Quality Assessment

Throughout 2019, the Committee reviewed progress implementing the improvement opportunities identified in the External Quality Assessment of the Internal Audit function that was conducted in 2018. This review is conducted every five years and evaluates the Internal Audit function in respect of its conformance with the standards of the Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors (CIIA), as well as its performance and effectiveness in comparison to industry peers and good practice. The outcome of the review had been favourable with the function being compliant with the CIIA’s Guidance on Effective Internal Audit in Financial Services – Second Edition and also benchmarked well against peers.

Whistleblowing

Santander UK recognises the importance of a culture where colleagues feel able to speak up.

In 2019, management continued to make improvements to its whistleblowing framework and arrangements under our oversight. This included management changes within the whistleblowing teams as well as a change of management reporting line from legal to conduct and compliance within the Legal & Regulatory function, further embedding of operating procedures, expanded data analytics capability, targeted training and a reporting line more closely aligned to that used by the Banco Santander group in its whistleblowing programme. There has been significant senior management engagement and expanded staff whistleblowing communications and awareness events.

46Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

The Committee is responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Santander UK’s whistleblowing procedures. It received and consideredbi-annual reports on Santander UK’s whistleblowing arrangements. The reporting included oversight and progress of concerns, outcomes, identifiable trends, observable risks, the regulatory environment, changes to proposed legislation and activities to promote and enhance the arrangements to support the culture of speaking up. The Committee also reviewed the annual Whistleblowing Report prepared for the Board to consider. The Committee is satisfied that Santander UK has complied with the FCA and PRA regulations on whistleblowing in the year.

I continued to act as the Whistleblowers’ Champion to oversee the integrity, independence, and effectiveness of the whistleblowing arrangements. I remained focused on procedures and governance to prevent victimisation of those employees raising a whistleblowing concern. I meet regularly with management and I have been involved in overseeing the implementation of suggested enhancements to continuously improve the arrangements.

Effectiveness of the Committee

The Board has determined that I have the necessary qualifications and skills to qualify as a Board Audit Committee financial expert as defined in Item 16A of Form20-F and by reference to the NYSE listing standards.

In respect of the Revised Statutory Audit Directive, the Board satisfied itself that at least one member of the Committee had competence in accounting and auditing, and the members of the Committee as a whole had competence in the banking sector, in which we are operating.

In my capacity as Committee Chair, I meet with key members of the management team and the External Auditors in advance of each Committee meeting. I ensure that the Committee meets with management, the Internal Auditors and the External Auditors in private sessions. I also attend meetings with the PRA, the FCA and the FRC.

In line with an assessment of the Committee’s forward-looking agenda and the Board programme, it has been agreed that the number of scheduled meetings of the Committee will be ten in 2020.

Terms of Reference

The Committee reviews its Terms of Reference annually. Following the 2019 review, they were revised primarily to reflect the requirements of ring-fencing. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at www.aboutsantander.co.uk

Priorities for 2020

Areas of focus for the Committee for 2020 will include:

Monitoring any likely financial impact and disclosure consequences of conduct and litigation related issues.

The ongoing monitoring and reviewing of the operation of IFRS 9, including reviewing our enhanced disclosures in response to the recommendations of the PRA’s Taskforce on Disclosure about ECL.

The financial control and reporting implications of any change in the economy, including any arising from economic or political risks including Brexit.

Monitoring changes to the Resolvability Assessment Framework.

Assessing the impact of the Financial Reporting Council’s Revised Ethical Standard (due to take effect from March 2020) on the work that can be undertaken by PwC.

Monitoring the rotation of audit partners who have completed their term of service on the audit engagement team.

Succession planning in respect of the Chief Internal Auditor role.

Santander UK plc47


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Responsible Banking Committee Chair’s report

The Committee supports the Board with

oversight of culture, diversity and inclusion,

reputation, customer outcomes and the

wellbeing of our employees

LOGO

We have challenged management on delivering appropriate financial crime controls, managing regulatory change and maintaining focus on continuously improving our customers’ experiences.

LOGO

Scott Wheway

Responsible Banking Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership
and attendance

Read more onp59

Role and responsibilities

The purpose of the Committee is to strengthen focus on culture, conduct and customer outcomes. It monitors, challenges and supports actions taken by management to ensure that the business is run in a responsible way, in the interests of all of our stakeholders including customers, our people and communities in order to promote Santander UK’s long-term success.

The Committee supports the Board with shaping Santander UK’s culture, reputation and customer propositions through oversight of matters related to conduct, compliance, culture, diversity and inclusion, sustainability, corporate social responsibility, reputation, brand and financial crime. The oversight of financial crime includes anti-money laundering, sanctions, terrorist financing, anti-bribery and corruption and a key transformation programme of our controls and systems. In December, the Committee’s Terms of Reference were updated to include oversight of reputational aspects of climate change.

The Committee Chairs collaborate to prevent any gaps in coverage and to ensure that any areas of overlap are addressed in the appropriate forum. Committee Chairs are members of other Board Committees to ensure breadth of visibility and open channels of communication.

Overview of the year

In 2019, the Committee considered, monitored and challenged a range of matters, including:

Customers and Customer Outcomes

The Committee focused on:

Vulnerable customers;

Fair customer treatment and outcomes;

Fraud prevention and detection;

Themes arising from customer complaints, whistleblowing and satisfaction metrics, including referrals to the FOS;

Changes to overdraft charges;

GDPR requirements;

Open Banking implementation;

Resourcing; and

Enhancing technology to support our customer contact colleagues.

Reputational risk

The Committee ensured that adequate and effective control processes were in place to identify and manage reputational risks.

It received and considered reports detailing ongoing and possible reputational, brand and franchise risks, including media and public policy issues. The reports also included any key decisions or key risk events that may give rise to reputational risk issues.

Financial crime

The Committee:

Received regular updates on Financial Crime from the Money Laundering Reporting Officer, including his annual report, and endorsed the proposed recommendations;

Monitored progress of Santander UK in developing and implementing effective systems, processes and controls to combat financial crime;

LOGO

48Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
��

Received regular updates on financial crime from the retail and corporate businesses; and

Reviewed potential financial crime risks and any actions required in response, including in respect of international sanctions compliance.

Conduct and Compliance

The Committee:

Ensured that adequate and effective control processes and policies were in place to manage and measure Conduct and Compliance risk;

Considered key emerging Conduct and Compliance risk issues, lessons learned and anticipated risks via horizon scanning and investigations;

Received first and second line reporting against Conduct and Compliance risk metrics and reports on conduct-related regulatory interaction matters;

Considered the FCA Firm-Wide Evaluation and appropriate response plans;

Considered the 2019 Compliance Programme, including resourcing in the 2019 Compliance Monitoring Plan; and

Considered any actions in response to regulatory developments, including individual and market developments, on Conduct and Compliance risk matters which may have a material impact on the business.

People and Culture

The Committee:

Received regular updates on culture, including risk culture, as part of an holistic culture update;

Considered thematic culture and conduct trends, including management-identified cultural drivers, changes in policy and working practices;

LOGO

Monitored the culture strategy and management efforts to embed and maintain the desired culture throughout the business in line with the Company’s purpose, vision, values and the nine Santander behaviours;

Reviewed programmes relating to the responsible treatment of employees, including diversity and inclusion and wellbeing;

Monitored the approach to diversity and inclusion, including progress against gender targets to support reducing the gender pay gap; and approved the approach to increasing senior level BAME representation; and

Reviewed key themes arising from employee surveys, focus groups and people metrics in order to evaluate the impact on conduct, brand and culture, including the external Banking Standards Board Assessment and the internal Global Engagement Survey results.

Brand, Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility

The Committee:

Considered and guided on brand purpose;

Considered the reputation of Santander UK and how reputational risk impacts its brand and market positioning;

Received updates on reputation tracker metrics; and

Monitors the embedding of Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility in our business strategy and helps the bank deliver value to all stakeholders, protecting its reputation and brand. It also oversees alignment to international frameworks, such as the Sustainable Development Goals and the UN Principles for Responsible Banking.

Committee membership

All five members of the Committee, including the Chair, are IndependentNon-Executive Directors. A list of members, details of their experience, qualifications and attendance at Committee meetings during the year are shown in the Board of Directors section.

In addition to the Committee members, during 2019, regular attendees at Committee meetings included the Board Chair, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Head of Retail and Business Banking, Chief HR Officer, Director of Corporate Communications and the Director of Conduct and Compliance.

Committee’s Effectiveness Review

An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020 to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Terms of Reference

In December 2019, the Committee adopted updated Terms of Reference following the annual review of its role and responsibilities. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at www.aboutsantander.co.uk.

Priorities for 2020

In 2020, the Committee will continue to take an holistic approach to gain greater understanding and oversight of all of the key areas that contribute to the experiences of our customers, our people and wider stakeholders.

Key priorities will be:

Enforcement of Financial Crime and Fraud prevention;

Monitoring the delivery of the Financial Crime Transformation Programme;

Oversight of the wide ranging programme of Regulatory change, including timelines, complexity, customer impact and outcomes;

Enhancement of fraud prevention;

Monitoring reputational risks;

Ensuring the highest standards of conduct and fair outcomes for our customers;

Oversight of the impact of digital transformation of the UK banking landscape on our people, customers and wider stakeholders;

Monitoring Sustainability initiatives, embedding, measurement and reporting progress; and

Oversight of management efforts to embed and maintain the desired culture through the cultural priorities of supporting transformation through simplification, driving a learning culture and being an inclusive and responsible organisation.

Santander UK plc49


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Remuneration Committee Chair’s Report

The objective is to ensure that remuneration

practices are aligned to Santander UK’s

strategic priorities and reinforce the right

culture and behaviours by our colleagues.

LOGO

Following ring-fencing, the Committee remains dynamic in its approach, as we continue to enhance remuneration governance to reflect our evolving strategy, control environment and the latest governance developments in the UK.

LOGO

Annemarie Durbin

Board Remuneration Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership
and attendance

Read more onp59

I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for 2019. Santander UK continues to undergo significant transformational change, following ring-fencing and other strategic priorities. Against this backdrop, the role of the Committee evolved in 2019.

Role and responsibility

The purpose of the Committee is to maintain oversight of the application and implementation of remuneration policies and frameworks for the Santander UK group. The Committee is also responsible for the remuneration arrangements of employing entities within the Ring-Fenced Bank perimeter.

Overview of the year

Business Performance in 2019 and Impact on Remuneration

Taking into account financial andnon-financial performance achieved in 2019 together with an assessment of current and future risks, the Committee approved the overall bonus pools for Santander UK, Santander Corporate & Investment Bank (for employees in the Ring-Fenced Bank only) and Santander Consumer UK. When determining reward outcomes the Committee was mindful of the overall performance of the bank. Details on remuneration received by the Executive Directors in 2019 are set out on page 56.

Governance

We have undertaken a review of our over- arching remuneration governance frameworks and policies in the context of ring-fencing requirements, whilst considering the wider obligations of the Banco Santander group. As part of this review, we approved a new set of remuneration principles which govern the operation of the Committee and the extent to which it interacts with Santander UK Group Holdings plc (which sits outside the Ring-fenced Bank) for 2020.

New Executive members

The Committee considered remuneration packages for two new Executive Directors who joined the Board in 2019. Susan Allen was appointed as Head of Retail and Business Banking with effect from 1 January 2019. Duke Dayal replaced Antonio Roman as Chief Financial Officer with effect from 16 September 2019. Antonio Roman stepped down from the Santander UK Board to return to Madrid as Head of Retail, Corporate and Commercial of Banco Santander SA. Details of Susan’s and Duke’s remuneration for 2019 are set out in this report.

LOGO

50Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Pension contributions

As reported last year, following developments in corporate governance and best practice, the Committee decided to align pension contributions for new Executive Director appointments to 9% of salary, being the average contribution available to the wider workforce. This pension level applied for both Susan Allen and Duke Dayal on their appointment to the Board. In 2019 we decided to extend this approach to existing Executive Directors, namely our Chief Executive Officer. This will result in a reduction of the Chief Executive Officer’s pension provision from 35% to 9% of salary. This will be phased over a two-year period, with an initial reduction to 22% of salary effective 1 January 2020.

Variable pay

We continuously evaluate the structure and metrics of our variable reward schemes to ensure continued alignment between metrics and strategic priorities, that performance targets are stretching and robust and that our framework reflects the evolving views of our various stakeholders.

For 2019, variable pay was based on a balanced scorecard of metrics across Customers, Shareholders and People. Communities, the fourth element of the Santander UK Compass, formed part of our risk adjustment and will form part of the scorecard for 2020, reflecting our goals on sustainability. Please see the Sustainability Review on pages 9 to 12 for more details on our sustainability goals.

Risk adjustment

Our risk adjustment procedures, which are applicable to all colleagues, are robust and well embedded within our remuneration policy. We used a series of risk adjustment mechanisms includingin-year individual adjustments to performance rating/reward outcomes; individual adjustment as a result of accountability reviews; and collective adjustments at a bonus pool level. During 2019, the Committee further enhanced our risk adjustment process to ensure a more comprehensive review of relevant metrics.

Inclusion, Diversity and Gender Pay

Diversity in the workforce and a commitment to ensuring an inclusive culture remains a key strategic priority of our Bank. Our Gender Pay reporting for 2019 (published in December 2019) demonstrates our progress to date in this area, although it is recognised that change will take time. We recognise the contribution of a diverse workforce to the success of our organisation and look forward to building on progress made in 2019. For more information refer to the Sustainability Review on pages 9 to 12.

Wider workforce

Our objective is to ensure that all employees at Santander UK are treated fairly and that we provide competitive remuneration which is linked to performance. During the year, the Committee reviewed the broader remuneration policies and practices across the organisation, and considered these when determining remuneration for our senior population. The Committee has also continued its work on developing our employee value proposition and work in this area will continue in 2020.

This year, for the first time, we have chosen to voluntarily disclose the CEO pay ratio compared to the wider workforce. This can be found on page 57.

Committee membership

During 2019, there was no change to the Committee’s membership. The Committee met eight times during 2019, reflecting the level of strategic activity during the year. The Committee is satisfied that its composition and operation complies with our ring-fencing obligations.

Effectiveness of the Committee

The Committee has a process to solicit feedback at the end of each meeting in the spirit of continuous improvement. An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020, to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Terms of reference

The terms of reference were reviewed and revised during the year to reflect the scope of the Committee’s role with respect to colleagues within the Santander UK group. Full terms of reference are available at www. aboutsantander.co.uk.

Priorities for 2020

Review incentive measures to ensure they continue to align with our strategic aims and drive the right culture and behaviours; balancing the needs of our people, customers, communities and shareholders.

Continue to comply with ring-fencing obligations, ensuring adherence to the operational parameters in the terms of reference of the Committee and Santander UK Group Holdings plc’s Board Remuneration Committee.

Monitor the effectiveness of our overall remuneration framework, including the structure of our current variable pay plans and determine whether any changes should be made.

Continue to monitor developments in executive remuneration best practices within the industry, and broader market taking into account the regulatory landscape and corporate governance, both from a European and UK perspective, and consider whether any changes to the Policy are necessary.

Monitor and review the remuneration policies and trends across the Santander UK group, considering how executive pay relates to the broader employee remuneration arrangements.

Review our disclosures to ensure alignment with our commitment to be Simple, Personal and Fair.

Monitor and review any risks and mitigants in relation to remuneration.

Continue to enhance our employee value proposition with the view of attracting and retaining a new generation of colleagues to support the Company in its transformation journey.

Santander UK plc51


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration policy report

Basis of preparation

This report has been prepared on behalf of the Board by the Board Remuneration Committee. We comply with the statutory reporting obligations for large private companies. In addition, we follow the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code) and other listed disclosure requirements to the extent considered appropriate given our

ownership structure, save for some factors. These relate to remuneration policy (see below with regard to post-employment shareholdings) and certain descriptions of the Committee’s work as provided under provision 41. Accordingly, several voluntary disclosures relating to remuneration have been presented in this report.

Forward-looking remuneration policy for Executive Directors

Our forward-looking remuneration policy is outlined below. Remuneration is structured into two main elements: fixed pay and variable pay. Fixed pay is set at market competitive levels appropriate for the role so that inappropriate risk taking is not encouraged. Variable pay rewards the delivery of financial targets, key strategic priorities and individual performance.

Executive Directors’ remuneration structure

Fixed PayPrinciple and descriptionPolicy
Base salary

– To attract and retain Executive Directors of sufficient calibre and with the requisite skills to deliver the strategy taking into account the demands and complexity of the role.

– Base salaries are normally reviewed annually. In reviewing base salaries the Committee considers a number of factors, including:

– The skills and responsibilities of the role alongside the market value of these attributes;

– Set at a level to avoid inappropriate risk taking;

– Base salary increases awarded across the wider employee population; and

– Prevailing market and economic conditions.

Pension

arrangements

– To provide a discrete element of the package to contribute towards retirement.

– All Executive Directors receive a cash allowance in lieu of pension.

– Unless determined otherwise, pension arrangements for new appointments to the Board will be in line with the average level of pension provision available to the broader workforce, currently 9% of salary.

– Our approach to current Executive Director pension allowances is set out on page 53.

Other benefits

– Benefits are offered to Executive Directors as part of a competitive remuneration package and to support the wellbeing of employees.

– Including but not limited to: private medical insurance for Executive Directors and their dependants, life assurance, health screening, relocation allowances and expatriate allowances where relevant.

– Access to Santander UK’sall-employee share schemes on the same terms as all UK employees.

Variable PayPrinciple and descriptionPolicy
Variable pay plan

– To motivate Executive Directors to achieve and exceed annual financial and strategic targets within Santander UK’s Risk Appetite and in alignment with our business strategy and values.

– Multi-year deferral, further performance testing and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares aligns Executive Directors’ interests to the long-term interests of Santander UK.

– Deferral of part of the award is applied in accordance with the requirements of the PRA Remuneration Code.

– Awards are discretionary and determined by reference to performance against a scorecard of financial and strategic goals based on Company and individual performance.

– 40% of the bonus awarded is paid upfront after the performance year ends (year one), delivered half in cash and half in shares.

– 60% of the bonus awarded is deferred and delivered in equal tranches over years three to seven, with each tranche delivered half in cash and half in shares.

– For Executives, the first three of five deferred award tranches are subject to further performance testing, which may reduce the level of payout, but not increase the deferred award.

– Share based awards are subject to a minimum twelve-month retention period following the relevant vesting date.

– Malus and clawback provisions apply to variable pay for up to ten years following the grant of an award.

– The structure of variable pay awards ensures that Executives acquire a meaningful shareholding in Banco Santander SA which may extend for a significant period post-employment. As such, a formal post-employment shareholding requirement is not in place at this time.

52Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Our remuneration policy continues to meet regulatory requirements. Santander UK applies a 2:1 variable to fixed pay cap in line with approvals granted to Banco Santander SA. For control function colleagues, a lower operational ratio of 1:1 is applied, save for in exceptional circumstances.

Executive remuneration policies and principles

Our core values of Simple, Personal and Fair drive our remuneration policy. We focus on delivering a reward framework that is simple to understand, tailored to individual roles and competitive yet fair.

The key drivers of our Remuneration Policy

Alignment to culture

To design policies aligned to the long-term success of the business which support the delivery of our strategy and reinforce our values.

To base variable pay on a balanced scorecard of quantitative and qualitative metrics which reflect our KPIs across Customers, Shareholders and People. For 2020, Communities has beenre-introduced into the bonus scorecard (previously considered as part of risk adjustment). This ensures that ourday-to-day activities align with Santander UK’s over-arching strategy and our aim of being the best bank.

Simplicity

To ensure our approach to remuneration is transparent and easily understood.

To operate simple and clear structures for all Santander UK colleagues.

Risk

To apply a consistent approach to reward for all our employees which upholds our prudent approach to Risk Appetite set as part of a SantanderUK-wide Risk Framework. Risk adjustment occurs at both an individual and bonus pool level.

To provide a balanced package between fixed and variable pay, and short-term and long-term pay horizons to align with our strategic goals whilst promoting prudent risk management.

To ensure remuneration is compliant with applicable regulations and legislation.

Fairness

To take into account an assessment of the Executive Director’s performance against a performance management framework set at the start of the year covering a range of financial,non-financial, quantitative and qualitative criteria.

To set robust and stretching targets which reward exceptional performance.

To attract, retain and motivate employees of the highest calibre by providing total remuneration which reflects individual and Company performance, is competitive, reflects the responsibilities of the role and drives the organisation’s growth.

To consider wider employee pay when determining pay of our Executives.

Clarity

The Committee reviews remuneration reporting on an annual basis against principles of best practice and developments in corporate governance, including the Code. Our reporting is designed to be transparent to promote effective stakeholder engagement but reflective of our subsidiary structure.

Predictability

The Committee reviews the variable pay opportunity for individuals annually and the basis of the pool calculation. However, due to commercial sensitivity , these are not disclosed as per the requirements of the Code. Directors’ remuneration is within the variable pay cap as approved by Banco Santander SA shareholders and set out above on this page.

Executive Director pension alignment

In 2018, following developments in corporate governance and best practice, the Committee took the decision to reduce pension allowances for new Executive Directors to 9% of salary, in line with the wider workforce average. This pension level applied on the appointment to the Board of Susan Allen, Head of Retail and Business Banking, on 1 January 2019 and Duke Dayal, Chief Financial Officer, on 16 September 2019.

In 2019, the Committee decided to extend this approach to existing Executive Directors, namely the Chief Executive Officer. This reduction shall be phased with the Chief Executive Officer’s allowance reducing from 35% to 22% of salary, effective 1 January 2020. From 1 January 2021, the Chief Executive Officer’s pension will be reduced further to the employee average of 9% of salary p.a.. No other changes to the Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration are proposed for 2020.

On recruitment

When appointing a new Executive Director, base salary is set at a market competitive level appropriate for the role, taking into

consideration a range of factors including scope and responsibilities of the role, internal relativities, the individual’s previous remuneration, relevant experience, and an assessment against relevant comparator groups and cost.

Unless determined otherwise, any new Executive Director will receive a pension allowance in line with the wider workforce average, being 9% of salary. Benefits available will typically be aligned to the wider employee population.

Other elements of remuneration will be established in line with the Remuneration Policy, set out in the Executive Directors’ remuneration structure table on page 52.

Relocation support and international mobility benefits may also be provided. Where provided, relocation assistance will normally be for a capped amount and/or limited time. For an overseas appointment, the Committee will have discretion to offer cost effective benefits and pension provisions which reflect local market practice and relevant legislation.

Buy-out awards

Compensation may be provided to Executive Directors recruited externally for the forfeiture of any award on leaving their previous employer. The Committee retains discretion to make such compensation as deemed appropriate to secure the relevant Executive Director’s employment and ensure any such payments align with the long-term interests of Santander UK and the prevailing regulatory framework.

Such payments will be in line with the benefits foregone from leaving the previous employer taking into account value, vesting dates and the extent to which performance conditions applied to the original awards.

Service agreements

Terms and conditions of employment are set out in individual service agreements which include a notice period of six months from both the Executive Director and the Company.

The agreements may be terminated immediately with payment of fixed pay in lieu of notice. In the event of termination for gross misconduct, neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is required, and any deferred awards are forfeited.

Santander UK plc53


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration policy reportcontinued

Termination payments

The impact on remuneration of an Executive Director leaving the Company under various scenarios reflects the service agreements, the relevant scheme rules, and the Committee’s policy in this area.

With respect to outstanding variable pay awards, these generally lapse on termination, other than where an individual is considered a ‘good leaver’. The Committee determines whether an Executive Director is a good leaver under certain circumstances including but not limited to: injury,ill-health, disability, redundancy, retirement, death, or any other reason at the Committee’s discretion.

There is a framework in place which is intended to guide the Committee to determine the discretionary circumstances when good leaver status is appropriate. Other than a payment in the event of redundancy, there are generally no other payments upon termination of employment for Executive Directors.

In the event of a change in control, variable pay awards may continue to be paid in respect of the full financial year (pre and post change of control), or an award may be made in respect of the portion of the year that has elapsed at the point of change in control. Exceptionally the Committee may exercise its discretion to waivepro-rating. In the event of a change in control, outstanding share awards may lapse and be replaced with equivalent awards over shares in a new company, subject to Committee discretion. Alternatively, outstanding awards may vest on a change in control, subject to the assessment of performance andpro-rating of awards where appropriate.

Risk and Performance adjustment

We continue to ensure that the requirements of the Remuneration Code on risk and performance adjustment are met for our employees. All variable remuneration is subject to adjustment for current and future risks through our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard which is linked to our Board approved Risk Appetite.

Our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard (the Standard) provides both a formula-based assessment against Santander UK’s Risk Appetite and an additional qualitative risk event assessment overlay that can reduce the bonus pool or individual awards to nil at the Committee’s discretion. The Standard also

considers a range of factors deemed relevant by the Committee such as evolution of complaints, progress on remediation projects, ring-fencing compliance and people, culture and communities metrics. Given commercial sensitivity, the Committee does not provide annual detail on the application of discretion as required by the Code.

Our Individual Remuneration Adjustment Standard provides a framework for the process, governance and standards relevant for decisions in relation to individual performance adjustments following an incident, including the application of malus and clawback.

Performance adjustments may include, but are not limited to:

Reducing a bonus for the current year;

Reducing the amount of any unvested deferred variable remuneration;

Requiring a bonus which has been awarded (but not yet paid) to be forfeited; and

Requiring repayment on demand (on a net basis) of any cash and share awards received at any time for a period of up to ten years following the date of award.

The Committee has full discretion to prevent vesting of all or part of an amount of deferred remuneration and/or to freeze an award during an ongoing investigation in a number of circumstances, including:

Employee misbehaviour or material error;

Material downturn in the performance of Santander UK or a relevant business unit’s performance;

Santander UK or a relevant business unit suffers a material failure of risk management;

Significant changes in Santander UK’s economic or regulatory capital base and the qualitative assessment of risk; and

Material restatement of the Santander UK’s financial statements (except when required due to modification of the accounting rules).

When determining variable pay awards for individuals performing roles across Santander UK plc and Santander UK Group Holdings, the Holdings Remuneration Committee will apply any necessary discretion based on factors related to UK Group entities outside of Santander UK plc. This discretion is subject to validation by the Santander UK plc Remuneration Committee.

The Committee seeks input from the Chair of the Board Risk Committee, Chief Risk Officer, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer, Chief HR Officer, Chair of the Board Audit Committee, Chair of the Board and Chief Internal Auditor when determining whether any performance or risk adjustments are required.

Policy for all employees

Our performance, reward and benefits approach across the Company supports and drives our business strategy, rewards strong performance and reinforces our values within the approved risk management framework. The general principles of the Remuneration Policy broadly apply across all colleagues where appropriate and are designed to facilitate recruitment, motivation and retention whilst driving performance.

The composition of remuneration packages for the Executive Directors is aligned with the broader colleague population, comprising salary, pensions and benefits and eligibility for discretionary variable pay dependent on role and responsibility. The level of pension allowance for newly appointed Executives is aligned with the average employer contribution for the wider workforce.

The Remuneration Committee annually approve the operation of all of our variable reward schemes for our customer-facing colleagues to ensure that all our plans reward appropriate behaviour and do not incentivise unnecessary risk taking.

54Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Remuneration implementation report

Introduction

This section of the report outlines how our Remuneration Policy was implemented for 2019.

Variable Pay Plan

To incentivise and reward Executive Directors for achieving superior and sustained performance, our Directors participate in a single variable incentive plan. A balance of financial andnon-financial performance metrics are selected annually by the Committee and are aligned with our strategy as measured over the financial year. Multi-year deferral, further performance testing and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares ensures that Executive Directors’ interests are aligned to the long-term interests of the business. Both upfront and deferred awards are made half in cash and half in shares. The deferred element is delivered over seven years, with the first three deferred tranches of awards subject to further performance testing against long-term metrics which can reduce but not increase the level of awards. Awards delivered in shares are subject to an additionalone-year retention period from the point of delivery.

The structure of the plan is illustrated below. The 2019 Variable Pay Plan pool was determined based on a range of metrics using a balanced scorecard approach as follows:

Quantitative assessment

A quantitative assessment is undertaken against a balanced scorecard of financial andnon-financial metrics that are key to Santander UK’s 2019 strategy:

Customers (Net Promotor Score and loyal customers)

Shareholders

Risk (Cost of credit ratio and Stage 3 ratio)

Capital (Contribution to Banco Santander group capital)

Profitability (Net profit and RoTE)

Employees (Employee Engagement).

Performance metrics are reviewed annually to ensure continued alignment with KPIs and strategy.

Qualitative assessment

A qualitative assessment adds context to the quantitative assessment and ensures a balanced view of performance has been made.

Banco Santander Group Multiplier

The Committee has the discretion to adjust the pool upwards or downwards to reflect overall Banco Santander performance if appropriate.

Exceptional Adjustment

Intended to cover unexpected factors or additional targets not covered by the quantitative or qualitative assessments. This may also include adjustments not covered in the qualitative assessments, including major risk events. No exceptional metrics were applied to the 2019 variable pay awards.

UK-focused risk adjustment

Linked to Santander UK’s Risk Appetite, this provides both a formula-based assessment against Risk Appetite and an additional qualitative risk event assessment overlay (including consideration of people, culture, contribution to communities, conduct and other relevant factors) that can result in a downward risk adjustment of up to 100% of the bonus pool or individual awards at the discretion of the Committee.

The Committee has considered, reviewed and approved changes required to remuneration governance and frameworks in order to comply with the relevant regulatory rules, including for ring-fencing and these have applied from the 2019 performance year.

Deferred long-term awards

The payment of the first three deferred tranches of the 2019 awards (36% of the total award), payable in 2023, 2024 and 2025, is conditional on the achievement of long-term objectives measured over the three-year period 2020 to 2022. The performance measures for 2019 awards are EPS, relative TSR and compliance with the fully-loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital. Following performance assessment, the level of awards will be adjusted accordingly. The measures can reduce but not increase the value of the deferred awards. The payment of the final two deferred tranches (24% of the total award), payable in 2026 and 2027 are subject to continued employment only.

LOGO

Santander UK plc55


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

2019 Business Performance and Impact on Remuneration

Santander UK delivered a strong balance sheet in 2019 despite results being impacted by a challenging banking environment. Whilst competitive pressures on mortgages and PPI charges coupled with continued investment in our transformation programme impacted on profit, we are continuing to support customers whilst growing and operating a sustainable business. Santander UK achieved its strongest net mortgage growth in a decade, reinforcing its position as the UK’s third largest mortgage lender. Our drive to deliver tailored products and customer service with an enhanced digital offering was reflected in the growth of customer deposits.

The Committee approved payments to Executive Directors under the Santander UK Variable Pay Plan in the context of this performance.

In addition the Committee confirmed that the remuneration policy operated as intended, demonstrating pay for performance alignment.

Context for decision making

The Committee ensures that broader remuneration policies and practices for employees across the Santander UK group are taken into account when setting the policy for Executive Director remuneration. The Committee annually reviews remuneration trends across the Santander UK group including the relationship between Executive remuneration and the remuneration of other Santander UK group employees as well as remuneration in the wider UK market when making decisions on Executive pay.

The Committee oversees the broader workforce remuneration policies and practices, the implementation of remuneration and related employment policies across the Santander UK group and the salary and variable pay awards for all MRTs. It also approves the design of any material performance-related pay plans.

As part of the monitoring of pay, the following is considered:

Santander UK’s engagement with its recognised trade unions on matters relating to pay and benefits for all employees;

Annual pay reviews for the general employee population;

Santander UK group-wide pension and other benefit provisions;

The design of and overall spend on variable incentive arrangements; and

An assessment of conduct across the business.

The Committee is focused on ensuring that employees are not unduly stretched or inappropriately incentivised. This is monitored using existing employee engagement indicators via the Global Engagement Survey, and The Santander Way survey which provides an indication of our progress in performance against the nine Santander behaviours.

Executive Directors’ remuneration

Total remuneration of each Executive Director for the years ended 31 December 2019 and 2018.

  Executive rewards      Nathan Bostock(3)                 Susan Allen(4)                Antonio Roman(5)(7)                 Duke Dayal(6)(8)             Total 
   2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018
        £000
 

Salary and fees

   1,680     1,680      800     –      367     629      268     –      3,115     2,309 

Taxable benefits(1)

   56     50          –      21          489     –      570     55 

Pension

   588     588       72     –       92     157       24     –       776     745 

Total fixed pay

   2,324     2,318       875     –       480     791       781     –       4,460     3,109 

Bonus (paid and deferred)(2)

   1,990     2,317       859     –       672     1,077       344     –       3,865     3,394 

Total remuneration

   4,314     4,635       1,734     –       1,152     1,868       1,125     –       8,325     6,503 

(1)

Taxable Benefits for the Executive Directors comprises a range of benefits including private health care, life and critical illness cover, health insurance, car allowance and relocation allowances where applicable. Included in the benefits figure for Duke Dayal is a relocation allowance of £500,000.

(2)

The bonus value shown is the total variable pay award made in respect of 2019. As set out in this report, a portion of this award (36% of the value shown) is subject to further performance testing which may reduce, but not increase, the value delivered.

(3)

As detailed in the Remuneration Policy report, the pension contribution received by Nathan Bostock will be reduced from 35% to 22% of salary, effective 1 January 2020 and to 9% of salary effective 1 January 2021.

(4)

Susan Allen was appointed as an Executive Director on 1 January 2019.

(5)

Antonio Roman left the Board on 15 September 2019 and returned to a Group role with Banco Santander. His remuneration is shown in respect of his service in the UK.

(6)

Duke Dayal was appointed as an Executive Director on 16 September 2019 and his remuneration is shown from this date.

(7)

This represents an allocation of 97% (2018: 97%) of Antonio Roman’s remuneration (for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year) as he spent 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% £35,621 (2018: 3% and £57,785) has been allocated to Santander Financial Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,187,359.

(8)

This represents an allocation of 97% of Duke Dayal’s remuneration for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year, given he spends 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% £34,803 has been allocated to Santander Financial Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,160,085.

Relative importance of spend on pay

               2019 
£m 
   

            2018

£m

   

            Change  

%  

 

Profit before tax

   1,012     1,545    -34%   

Total employee costs

   1,263     1,369    -8%   

56Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Stakeholder views

During 2019, Santander UK continued to engage with key stakeholders on remuneration related matters including its main regulators the PRA and FCA.

As detailed on page 31, Annemarie Durbin has been appointed designatedNon-Executive Director with responsibility to further enhance the employee voice in the boardroom. Employee opinion surveys are undertaken annually on employee engagement, and discussion on remuneration matters generally takes place with union representatives during the annual pay review cycle and on relevant employee reward matters. The Committee receives updates on these discussions during the year.

CEO pay ratio

Santander UK is committed to delivering fair pay which attracts, retains and motivates employees of the highest calibre across all grades. In line with this commitment, the Remuneration Committee has oversight of compensation across the organisation, including pay ratios,

and considers fair pay when determining reward outcomes. For the first time this year, Santander UK is voluntarily disclosing the pay ratio of the CEO’s total remuneration to the remuneration of UK employees.

In assessing the pay ratio, the Committee is confident that the Company’s policy on remuneration is fair and that improvements to pay progression will continue to ensure that lower paid colleagues receive a greater share of pay awards. A summary of our approach to Fair Pay is included on page 51.

Advice and support provided to the Committee

As permitted by its Terms of Reference, the Committee has engaged the advice and support of Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) as independent remuneration consultants at the expense of the Company. Total fees (excluding VAT) for advice and support provided to the Committee during 2019 were £157,500 (2018: £192,600). Deloitte is a founding member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and voluntarily operates

under the Code of Conduct in relation to Executive remuneration consulting in the UK.

The Committee is comfortable that the Deloitte engagement partner and team that provides remuneration advice to the Committee do not have connections with Santander UK that may impair their independence.

In 2019, Deloitte also provided unrelated tax, financial and advisory, risk, assurance and consulting services to Santander UK.

The Chair, Chief Executive Officer, Chief HR Officer, Performance & Reward Director, Company Secretary, Chair of the Board, Chair of the Board Audit Committee, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer and Chief Risk Officer attended Committee meetings by invitation in order to support the discussion of the agenda items as appropriate. The Committee Chair also engages with the Chair of the Board Risk Committee when required. No individual participates in discussions regarding their own remuneration.

CEO pay ratio

   

 

CEO

Pay

 

   

25th Percentile

 

   

Median

 

   

75th  

Percentile  

 

 

2019 pay ratio

        183.1    132.1    77.3   

Total salary £

   1,680,000    20,030    26,368    42,708   

Total pay £

   4,313,993    23,562    32,662    55,786   

(1)

Employee pay is calculated based on ‘Methodology A,’ calculating a comparable single figure for each employee, as set out in the reporting requirements.

(2)

Employee pay data is based on full time equivalent pay for Santander UK plc employees at 31 December 2019. For each employee, total pay is calculated based on fixed pay accrued during the financial year whilst variable pay is based on the previous financial year (i.e. paid in 2019 in respect of 2018 performance).

(3)

The CEO’s total remuneration is aligned to that disclosed in the Executive Directors’ remuneration table on the previous page.

Santander UK plc57


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

Chair andNon-Executive Director remuneration

The Chair’s fee is reviewed and approved by the Committee. The fees paid toNon-Executive Directors are reviewed and approved by the Chief Executive Officer and the Chair. Fees are reviewed annually taking into account the market rate and time commitment for the role. The Chair is paid anall-inclusive base fee.Non-Executive Directors are paid a base fee, with a supplement for serving on or chairing a Board Committee. GroupNon-Executive Directors do not receive fees in respect of their Santander UK duties.

An increase to the Board Chair’s fees of 3.8% was approved in 2019. This reflects the increased complexity of the role, particularly in the context of Banking Reform, greater time commitment and that no increase has been awarded since her appointment in 2015.

Additionally, in recognition of the increasing regulatory expectation ofNon-Executive Directors and the associated time commitment, targeted increases toNon-Executives’ fees were awarded. TheNon-Executive Directors base fee was increased from £90,000 to £95,000 and the fee for the Senior Independent Director fee increased from £30,000 to £35,000. Targeted increases were made to the Board Risk Committee Chair fee and membership fee, each increased by £5,000 to £65,000 and £30,000 respectively. No other changes to fees were made during the year.

AllNon-Executive Directors and the Chair serve under letters of appointment and either party can terminate on three months’ written notice, except in the case of the Chair where twelve months’ written notice is required.

Neither the Chair nor theNon-Executive Directors have the right to compensation on the early termination of their appointment beyond payments in lieu of notice at the option of Santander UK. In addition, neither the Chair nor theNon-Executive Directors are eligible for pension scheme membership, bonus or other incentive arrangements.

Chair and Board Committee member fees

 

 Fees effective from 1 May 2019

          

Board 

£000 

 

   

Board 
Nomination 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 

Risk 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 
Audit 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

 

Board 
Responsible 
Banking 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 

Remuneration 
Committee 
£000 

 

 

Chair (inclusive of membership fee)

             675     –     65     60     60     60  

Senior Independent Director

             35     –     –     –     –     –  

Member

             95     –     30     25     25     25  
                
 Non-Executive Directors  

2019 

Fees 

£000 

   

2018 

Fees 

£000 

   2019 
  Expenses 
£000
(6) 
   2018 
Expenses 
£000 
   2019 
    Benefits 
£000 
   2018 
    Benefits 
£000 
   

2019 

Total 

£000 

   

2018 

Total 

£000 

 

Chair

                

Shriti Vadera(1)

   667     650     –     –     22     17     689     667  

IndependentNon-Executive Directors

                

Garrett Curran(2)

   114     –         –     –     –     116     –  

Annemarie Durbin(7)

   222     200     –     –     –     –     222     200  

Ed Giera

   207     200     29     –     –     –     236     200  

Chris Jones

   207     200     –         –     –     207     203  

Genevieve Shore

   197     198             –     –     200     199  

Scott Wheway

   240     230             –     –     248     232  

Julie Chakraverty(3)

   58     92     –         –     –     58     93  

Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors(4)

                

Ana Botin

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Lindsey Argalas

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Bruce Carnegie-Brown(5)

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Dirk Marzluf(2)

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Gerry Byrne

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Total

           1,912             1,770     42         22     17     1,976             1,794  

(1)

As detailed above, 2019 full year fees for the Board Chair reflect the increase on 1 May 2019 from £650,000 to £675,000. Shriti Vadera was entitled to taxable benefits as follows: private medical cover of £626 (2018: £733) and transportation of £20,752 (2018: £15,931).

(2)

Garrett Curran and Dirk Marzluf were appointed on 7 May 2019. Fees received are in respect of services from this date.

(3)

Julie Chakraverty and Lindsey Argalas resigned on 7 May 2019. Fees received are in respect of services to this date.

(4)

None of the Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors received any fees or expenses, except as shown.

(5)

Bruce Carnegie-Brown was appointed on 16 September 2019.

(6)

Directors’ expenses are disclosed above in relation to the period in which they were accrued. 2018 expenses have been restated to reflect this approach. Expenses for Ed Giera include international travel as he does not reside in the UK.

(7)

Annemarie Durbin’s fees include £15,000 in relation to her services as Chair of Cater Allen Ltd.

(8)

The 2018 total shown above has been restated to reflect the fees received by those directors who served in 2019.

58Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Board and Committee membership and attendance

      Board   

 

Nomination

Committee

   

Risk

Committee

   

Audit

Committee

   

Responsible Banking

Committee

   Remuneration
Committee
 
    

Scheduled

meetings

attended

 

 

 

   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled

meetings

attended

 

 

 

   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc 
meetings 
attended 
 
 
 

 

  Chair

 

 

Shriti Vadera

   8/8    3/3    6/6    2/2                                –  

  Independent

  Non-Executive  

  Directors

 Julie Chakraverty(1)   3/3    0/0            3/3    0/0    3/3    0/0    2/2    0/0        –  
 Garrett Curran(2)   5/5    3/3            6/6    0/0    6/6    0/0    3/3    0/0        –  
 Annemarie Durbin   8/8    3/3            7/9    0/0            5/5    0/0    6/6    2/2  
 Ed Giera   8/8    3/3            9/9    0/0    9/9    0/0    5/5    0/0        –  
 Chris Jones(3)   8/8    3/3            9/9    0/0    9/9    0/0            6/6    2/2  
 Genevieve Shore   7/8    3/3            8/9    0/0    8/9    0/0    5/5    0/0    5/6    2/2  
 Scott Wheway(4)   8/8    2/3    6/6    2/2    8/9    0/0            5/5    0/0    5/6    2/2  

  Banco

  Santander

  nominated

  Non-Executive

  Directors

 Lindsey Argalas(5)   2/3    0/0                                        –  
 Ana Botín   5/8    1/3    2/6    0/2                                –  
 Gerry Byrne   7/8    1/3                                        –  
 Bruce Carnegie-Brown(6)   3/3    0/0                                        –  
 Dirk Marzluf(7)   5/5    3/3                                        –  

  Executive

  Directors

 Nathan Bostock   8/8    3/3                                        –  
 Susan Allen(8)   8/8    3/3                                        –  
 Duke Dayal(9)   3/3    0/0                                        –  
 

Antonio Roman(10)

 

   

 

5/5

 

 

 

   

 

2/3

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

– 

 

 

 

(1)

Resigned as a director on 7 May 2019

(2)

Appointed as a director on 7 May 2019

(3)

Deemed financial expert

(4)

Senior Independent Director

(5)

Resigned as a director on 7 May 2019

(6)

Appointed as a director on 16 September 2019

(7)

Appointed as a director on 7 May 2019

(8)

Appointed as a director on 1 January 2019

(9)

Appointed as a director on 16 September 2019

(10)

Resigned as a director on 15 September 2019

Santander UK plc59


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Directors’ report

Introduction

The Directors submit their report together with the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019. The information in the Directors’ Report is unaudited, except where marked.

History and corporate structure

Santander UK plc (incorporated on 12 September 1988) is a subsidiary of Banco Santander SA, a Spanish retail and commercial bank with a meaningful market share in ten core countries in Europe and the Americas. Santander UK was formed from the acquisition of two former building societies, Abbey National and Alliance & Leicester together with the branch network of Bradford & Bingley, and has operated under a single brand since 2010. The ordinary shares of the Company are not traded.

In 2018, certain subsidiaries and portfolios were transferred as part of the implementation of the ring-fence arrangements required under the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013. Following these transfers, Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries comprise only entities whose business is permitted under the Act as a ring-fenced bank. Other entities including Santander Financial Services plc (previously named Abbey National Treasury Services plc) are now directly or indirectly owned by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Result and dividends

The audited consolidated profit after tax for the year was £733m (2018: £1,146m). The Directors do not recommend the payment of a final dividend for 2019 (2018: £nil). Twointerim dividends were declared on the Company’s ordinary shares in issue in the year. The first dividend of £164m was declared on 18 June 2019 and the second dividend of £151m was declared on 5 December 2019. Both interim dividends were paid in 2019.

Details of Santander UK’s activities and business performance in 2019, together with an indication of future outlook, are set out in the Strategic report and the Financial review.

Events after the balance sheet date

There have been no material post balance sheet events, except as set out in Note 40.

Directors

The names and biographical details of the current Directors are shown in the Board of Directors section. Details of their emoluments and interests in shares are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration

implementation report. Changes to the composition of the Board can be found in the Board of Directors section with more details in the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance, and the relevant Committee Chairs’ reports.

Appointment and retirement of Directors

All Directors are appointed and retired in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association, the UK Companies Act 2006 and the UK Group Framework. The following appointments took place in 2019: Bruce Carnegie-Brown, Garrett Curran, Dirk Marzluf, Susan Allen and Duke Dayal. The following resignations took place in 2019: Julie Chakraverty, Lindsey Argalas and Antonio Roman. Further details are outlined on page 59.

A resolution was passed at the last Annual General Meeting, on 2 May 2019 to amend the Articles of Association to require Directors to retire every year, with those wishing to serve again submitting themselves for election orre-election.

Directors’ indemnities

In addition to Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover in place throughout 2019, individual deeds of indemnity were also in place to provide cover to the Directors for liabilities to the maximum extent permitted by law. These remain in force for the duration of the Directors’ period of office from the date of appointment until such time as any limitation periods for bringing claims against the Directors have expired. The Directors including former Directors who resigned in the year, benefit from these deeds of indemnity.

They constitute as qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the purposes of the Companies Act 2006. Deeds for existing Directors are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

Santander UK Group Holdings plc has also granted an indemnity which constitutes ‘qualifying third party indemnity provisions’ to the Directors of its subsidiary and affiliated companies, including former Directors who resigned in the year and since theyear-end. Qualifying pension scheme indemnities were also granted to the Trustees of Santander UK’s pension schemes.

Executive Management

Day-to-day management of the Company’s business is delegated by the Directors to certain executives, principally the Chief Executive Officer. In support of the discharge of the Chief Executive Officer’s responsibilities

to the Directors and the Company’s external regulators, executive management decisions are informed and taken by the Senior Management Committee (SMC). The SMC is made up of the Chief Executive Officer (as Chair) and those members of Santander UK plc executive management who also hold Senior Management Functions (SMF) under the Senior Managers & Certification Regime. The Executive Committee comprises members of the SMC plus additional management executives who do not hold SMF accountabilities.

Employees

We continue to ensure that Santander UK’s remuneration policies are consistent with its strategic objectives and are designed with its long-term success in mind. In doing so, we aim to attract and retain the most talented and committed people.

Communication

Santander UK wants to involve and inform employees on matters that affect them. The intranet is a focal point for communications and the ‘We are Santander’ website connects staff to all the information they need about working for Santander UK. We also useface-to-face communication, such as team meetings, regional roadshows and annual staff conventions for strategic updates.

Santander UK considers employees’ opinions and asks for their views on a range of issues through regular SantanderUK-wide surveys.

Consultation

Santander UK has a successful history of working in partnership with its recognised trade unions, Advance and the Communication Workers Union (CWU). Both trade unions are affiliated to the Trades Union Congress. We consult Advance and the CWU on significant proposals and change initiatives in the business at national and local levels.

Employee share ownership

Santander UK continues to operate twoall-employee, HMRC-approved share schemes: aSave-As-You-Earn (Sharesave) Scheme and a Share Incentive Plan (SIP), the latter of which allows employees to purchase Banco Santander SA shares from gross salary. Eligible senior management participated in a Banco Santander long-term incentive plan. See Note 35 for a description of the plans and the related costs and obligations.

Disability

Santander UK is committed to equality of access and quality of service for disabled people and embraces the spirit of the UK

60Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Equality Act 2010 throughout its business operations. Santander UK has processes in place to help train, develop, retain and promote employees with disabilities. We are committed to giving full and fair consideration to employment applications by disabled people, having regard to their particular aptitudes and abilities, and for continuing the employment of employees who have become disabled by arranging appropriate training and making reasonable adjustment within the workplace.

CO2 emissions

In 2019 CO2 emissions, measured in CO2 equivalent tonnes, decreased by 15% to 8,297 tonnes. CO2 from fuel decreased by 13% to 4,453 tonnes, CO2 from business travel decreased by 17% to 3,796 tonnes and output per employee reduced by 8% to 0.38 tonnes.

Ethical Code of Conduct

Santander UK is committed to maintaining high ethical standards – adhering to laws and regulations, conducting business in a responsible way, and treating all stakeholders with honesty and integrity. These principles are further reflected in Santander UK’s Ethical Code of Conduct, which sets out the standard expected of all employees. Under their terms and conditions of employment, staff are required to act at all times with the highest standards of business conduct in order to protect Santander UK’s reputation and ensure a Company culture which is free from any risk of corruption, compromise or conflicts of interest.

Staff are also required to comply with all Company policies, which require them to:

Abide by all relevant laws and regulations

Act with integrity in all their business actions on behalf of Santander UK

Not use their authority or office for personal gain

Conduct business relationships in a transparent manner

Reject all improper practices or dealings to which they may be exposed.

The SEC requires companies to disclose whether they have a code of ethics that applies to the Chief Executive Officer and senior financial officers which promotes honest and ethical conduct, full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosures, compliance with applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations, prompt internal reporting of violations, and accountability for adherence to such a code of ethics.

The Santander UK group meets these requirements through its Ethical Code of Conduct, the Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy, the Whistleblowing Policy, the FCA’s Principles for Businesses, and the FCA’s Statements of Principle and Code of Practice for Approved Persons, with which the CEO and senior financial officers must comply.

These include requirements to manage conflicts of interest appropriately and to disclose any information the FCA may want to know about. Copies of these documents are available to anyone, free of charge, on application to Santander UK plc, 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN.

Political contributions

In 2019 and 2018, no contributions were made by the Company for political purposes and no political expenditure was incurred.

Share capital

Details about the structure of the Company’s capital can be found in Note 30.

For details of employee share schemes and how rights are exercisable, see Note 35.

The powers of the Directors in relation to share capital are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association as determined by the Companies Act 2006.

Subsidiaries and branches

The Santander UK group consists of a parent company, Santander UK plc, incorporated in England and Wales, and a number of directly and indirectly held subsidiaries and associates. The Company directly or indirectly holds 100% of the issued ordinary share capital of its principal subsidiaries. All companies operate principally in their country of incorporation or registration. For more information, see Note 19.

Financial instruments

The financial risk management objectives and policies of Santander UK, the policy for hedging, and the exposure of Santander UK to credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk are outlined in the Risk review.

Research and development

Santander UK has a comprehensive product approval process and policy. New products, campaigns and business initiatives are reviewed by Santander UK’s Proposition Approval Forum.

Supervision and regulation

The Company is authorised by the PRA and regulated by the FCA and the PRA. Some of its subsidiaries and associates are also authorised by the PRA or the FCA, and regulated by the FCA or both the FCA and the PRA.

As a financial services group, Santander UK is subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK, the EU and in each other location In which Santander UK operates. This intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the United Kingdom by the PRA and the FCA. Santander UK complies with the FCA Conduct rules and the Senior Managers Certification Regime.

As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also affected by other regulators, such as Banco de Espana and the ECB, as well as various legal and regulatory regimes (including the US) that have extra-territorial effect. Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US, the EU and other jurisdictions.

Internal controls

Risk management and internal controls

The Board and its Committees are responsible for reviewing and ensuring the effectiveness of management’s system of risk management and internal controls.

We have carried out a robust assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing Santander UK including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

Details of our principal risks, our procedures to identify emerging risks, and an explanation of how these are being managed or mitigated are set out in the Risk review. A summary of our Top and Emerging Risks is also set out in the Strategic report.

For more details, see the Strategic report and the Risk review.

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

As a registrant under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, Santander UK Plc’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining an adequate system of internal control over financial reporting in

Santander UK plc61


Annual Report 2019 | Governance

Directors’ reportcontinued

order to ensure the accuracy and reliability of Santander UK plc’s Financial Statements and the Form20-F submitted to the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over the financial reporting of Santander UK. Management assessed the effectiveness of Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting at 31 December 2019 based

on the criteria established in the Internal Control- Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in May 2013.

Internal control over financial reporting is a component of an overall system of internal control. Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting, and the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and endorsed by the EU and in order to comply with its obligations under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting includes:

Policies and procedures that relate to the maintenance of records that fairly and accurately reflect transactions and dispositions of assets

Controls providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS, and that receipts and expenditures are being made only as authorised by management

Controls providing reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. In addition, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or because the degree of compliance with policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In line with COSO and SEC requirements, those controls recognised as Sarbanes-Oxley applicable are subject to annual testing and certification by management including an attestation by the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) that the controls are operating effectively and that the internal control over financial reporting can be relied on.

Any Sarbanes-Oxley control weaknesses identified are captured, assessed and included within the year end assessment of the reliability of the Internal Control environment. These weaknesses are reported on an ongoing basis to the Audit Committee to ensure continuous improvements to the control environment are achieved.

Based on this assessment, Management concluded, at 31 December 2019, that Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting was effective.

Disclosure controls and procedures over financial reporting

Santander UK’s management has evaluated, with the participation of its CEO and CFO, the effectiveness of its disclosure controls at 31 December 2019. There are inherent limitations to the effectiveness of any system of disclosure controls and procedures, including the possibility of human error, and the circumvention or overriding of the controls and procedures. Accordingly, even effective disclosure controls and procedures can only provide reasonable assurance of achieving their control objectives.

Based upon this evaluation, the CEO and the CFO have concluded that, at 31 December 2019, Santander UK’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by Santander UK in the reports that it files and submits under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms, and that it is accumulated and communicated to Santander UK’s management, including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding disclosure.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There were no changes to our internal control over financial reporting during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.

Going concern

The going concern of Santander UK is reliant on preserving a sufficient level of capital and adequately funding the balance sheet. Santander UK’s business activities and financial position, together with the factors likely to affect its future development and performance, are set out in the Financial review. Santander UK’s objectives, policies and processes for managing the financial risks to which it is exposed, including capital, funding and liquidity, are described in the Risk review.

In making their going concern assessment, the Directors consider a wide range of information that including Santander UK’s long-term business and strategic plans, forecasts and projections, estimated capital, funding and liquidity requirements, contingent liabilities and the reasonably possible changes in trading performance arising from potential economic, market and product developments.

For capital, funding and liquidity purposes, Santander UK operates on a standalone basis and is subject to regular and rigorous monitoring by external parties. For capital purposes, from 1 January 2019 the Company operates as part of the ring-fenced bank sub group Capital Support Deed. For funding and liquidity purposes, the Company operates as part of the Domestic Liquiditysub-group. The Directors review the outputs of stress testing as part of the approval processes for the ICAAP, the ILAAP, our Risk Appetite and regulatory stress tests.

The Directors are satisfied that the Santander UK group has adequate resources to continue operations for a period of at least twelve months from that date of this report and therefore consider it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements.

62Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Statements of Compliance

The UK Corporate Governance Code

The Board confirms that, for the year ended 31 December 2019, Santander UK has applied those principles and provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code), as appropriate, and has provided an explanation where there has been an omission in compliance with the Code. Further information on how the Code was complied with can be found in the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance on page 30.

Santander UK has applied those principles and complied with those provisions of provisions of the Code as appropriate, with the exception of:

Provision 11: The Company does not comply with the requirement for at least half the Board, excluding the Chair, to beNon-executive Directors whom the Board considers to be independent. For details see page 30;

Provision 36: The development of a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements – whilst Directors have a meaningful interest in Banco Santander SA Shares, we do not intend to introduce a formal policy (for details see page 52);

Provision 40: When determining remuneration policy, a range of factors are considered although not all are publicly disclosed (for details see page 53); and

Provision 41: The Remuneration Committee’s activities are set out in the Remuneration report although not all Committee decisions are disclosed (see Remuneration Policy Report).

UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Santander UK’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019 have been prepared in compliance with the principles of the UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure.

Engagement with stakeholders and employees

Santander UK recognises the importance of fostering relationships with their principal stakeholders and how this is key to the long term success of our business. The Directors understand the importance to act fairly and responsibly between members of the company.

Disclosure of information to Auditors

Each of the Directors at the date of approval of this report confirms that:

So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which Santander UK’s auditor is unaware

The Director has taken all steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to make himself or herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that Santander UK’s auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the UK Companies Act 2006.

Auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have expressed their willingness to continue in the office of auditor and a resolution to reappoint them will be proposed at the Company’s forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

By Order of the Board

Katie Jackson-Turner

Company Secretary

24 March 2020

2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place,

London NW1 3AN

Santander UK plc63


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Risk review

This Risk review consists of audited financial information except where it is marked as unaudited. The audited financial information is an integral part of our Consolidated Financial Statements.

We aim to continually enhance our disclosures and their usefulness to readers in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. As a result, our disclosures go beyond the minimum required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

We support the recommendations and guidance made by the Taskforce on Disclosures about ECL (DECL Taskforce) and have adopted its recommendations where it is practical to do so. The DECL Taskforce was formed in 2017 by the FCA, FRC and PRA with a remit to help encourage high-qualityECL-related disclosures following adoption of IFRS 9

64Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 
    

Risk governance

    

Santander UK plc

5  

 

LOGORisk governance

INTRODUCTION(UNAUDITED)

Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate parent company of Santander UK plc. The two companies operate on the basis of a unified business strategy with some overlap in membership, albeit the principal business activities of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are carried on by Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries. The Santander UK Group Holdings plc Risk Frameworks have been adopted by the Company and its subsidiaries to ensure consistency of application.

As a financial services provider, managing risk is a core part of ourday-to-day activities. To be able to manage our business effectively, it is critical that we understand and control risk in everything we do. We aim to use a prudent approach and advanced risk management techniques to help us deliver robust financial performance and build sustainable value for our stakeholders. We aim to keep a predictablemedium-low risk profile, consistent with our business model. This is key to achieving our strategic priorities.

RISK FRAMEWORK

How we define risk(unaudited)

Risk is any uncertainty about us being able to achieve our business objectives. It can be split into a set of key risk types, each of which could affect our results and our financial resources. Enterprise wide risk is the aggregate view of all the key risk types described below:

 

 


Annual Report 2018 | Financial review   Key risk types Description

Income statement review

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED INCOME STATEMENT

     

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

 

Net interest income

     3,603    3,803    3,582 

Non-interest income(1)

     931    1,109    1,213 

 

Total operating income

     4,534    4,912    4,795 

 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (2,579   (2,499   (2,414

Credit impairment losses(2)

     (153   (203   (67

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (257   (393   (397

 

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (410   (596   (464

Profit before tax

     1,545    1,817    1,917 

Tax on profit

     (441   (561   (598

 

Profit after tax

     1,104    1,256    1,319 

Attributable to:

        

Equity holders of the parent

     1,082    1,235    1,292 

Non-controlling interests

     22    21    27 

 

Profit after tax

     1,104    1,256    1,319 

(1)

ComprisedCredit

The risk of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income.

(2)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this change in methodology see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44loss due to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

default or credit quality deterioration of a customer or counterparty to which we have provided credit, or for which we have assumed a financial obligation.

A more detailed Consolidated Income Statement is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2018 compared to 2017

As described in more detail below, and in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the financial results reflect the changes in our statutory perimeter that we made in the third quarter of 2018, following the ring-fence transfers to Banco Santander London Branch. Prior periods have not been restated. Profit before tax was down 15% at £1,545m. By income statement line, the movements were:

 

Net interest income was down 5%, impacted by lower new mortgage margins, SVR attrition and the £39m accrued interest release in the second quarter of 2017, which was not repeated this year. These were partially offset by management pricing actions on customer deposits and strong mortgage lending volumes.Market

 

Non-interestBanking market risk– the risk of loss of income was down 16%, largelyor economic value due to the £48m gain on sale of Vocalink Holdings Limited shareholdingschanges to interest rates in the second quarter of 2017, which was not repeated this year, and reflecting regulatorybanking book or to changes in overdrafts. This was partially offsetexchange rates, where such changes would affect our net worth through an adjustment to revenues, assets, liabilities andoff-balance sheet exposures in the banking book.

Trading market risk– the risk of changes in market factors that affect the value of positions in the trading book.

Liquidity

The risk that we do not have sufficient liquid financial resources available to meet our obligations as they fall due, or we can only secure such resources at excessive cost.

Capital

The risk that we do not have an adequate amount or quality of capital to meet our internal business objectives, regulatory requirements, market expectations and dividend payments, including AT1 coupons.

Pension

The risk caused by increased income in consumer (auto) financeour contractual or other liabilities with respect to a pension scheme (whether set up for our employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It also refers to the risk that we will need to make payments or other contributions with respect to a pension scheme due to a moral obligation or for some other reason.

Conduct and asset finance.regulatory

 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisionsConduct risk– the risk that our decisions and charges increased 3%. The impactbehaviours lead to a detriment or poor outcome for our customers. It also refers to the risk that we fail to maintain high standards of higher regulatory, riskmarket behaviour and control costs and £40m of costs relating to guaranteed minimum pension (GMP) equalisation were partially offset by cost management programmes and operational and digital efficiencies. Banking Reform costs were lower at £38m in 2018 (2017: £81m).integrity.

 

Credit impairment losses were down 25%, with Carillion plc charges in 2017 partially offset by a numberRegulatory risk– the risk of charges and lower releases across portfolios in 2018. All portfolios continue to perform well, supported by our prudent approach to risk and the resilience of the UK economy.

Provisions for other liabilities and charges were down 35%, largely due to £109m PPI and £35m other conduct provision charges relating to the sale of interest rate derivatives in 2017, which were not repeated this year. These were partially offset by provision charges in the fourth quarter of 2018 of £58m in relation to our consumer credit business operations and £33m relating to historical probate and bereavement processes. Additionally, there was an £11m release in other conduct provisions in the second quarter of 2018 relating to the sale of interest rate derivatives.

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs was £246m. We made no additional PPI charges in the year, based on our recent claims experience, and having considered the FCA’s Consultation Paper 18/33 issued on 7 November 2018. We will continue to monitor our provision levels, and take account of the impact of any further change in claims received and FCA guidance.

The remaining provision for other conduct issues was £30m, which primarily relates to the sale of interest rate derivatives, following an ongoing review of the regulatory classification of customers potentially eligible for redress. Following further analysis, management assessed the provision requirements resulting in a release of £11m in the second quarter of 2018.

In the fourth quarter of 2018 we were fined £32.8m by the FCA in relation to an investigation into our historical probate and bereavement practices. We acknowledged the findings of the FCA and apologised to the families and beneficiaries of deceased customers affected by these failings. We have completed a comprehensive tracing exercise and transferred the majority of funds in deceased customers’ accounts to their rightful beneficiaries, with compensatory interest where appropriate.

In the fourth quarter of 2018 we made a £58m provision in relation to our consumer credit business operations. This charge is management’s current best estimate as we continue to assess the scope of this issue.

Taxfinancial or reputational loss, or imposition or conditions on profit decreased 21% to £441m, largelyregulatory permission, as a result of lower taxable profits in 2018failing to comply with applicable codes, regulator’s rules, guidance and the impact of lower conduct provisions that are disallowed for tax purposes. The effective tax rate was 28.5% (2017: 30.9%).

regulatory expectations.

6

Operational risk

     Santander UK plc

The risk of loss due to inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events. We give a particular focus to the following risks which we mitigate through our management of operational risk:


 > Income statement review

2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax was down 5% at £1,817m, primarily impacted by a large credit impairment charge and higher operating expenses. By income statement line, the movements were:

Process and change management risk– A key part of our business strategy is to develop and deliver new banking channels and products. We are also implementing a large number of regulatory and legal changes, impacting all areas of our business.

 

Net interest income was up 6%, driven by retail liability margin improvement, partially offset by pressure on new lending margins.

Third party risk– We rely extensively on third parties, both within the Banco Santander group and outside of it, for a range of services and goods.

Non-interest income was down 9%,Cyber risk– We rely extensively on the use of technology across our business. It is critically important that we give our customers a secure environment in which to deal with us, especially when the absencethreat from cyber criminals is so prevalent and more sophisticated than ever. Failure to protect the data assets of Santander UK and its customers against theft, damage or destruction from cyber-attacks could result in damage to our reputation and direct financial losses.

Other key risk types

Financial crime riskthe £119m gain on sale of Visa Europe Limitedrisk that we are used to further financial crime, including money laundering, sanctions evasion, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption. Failure to meet our legal and regulatory obligations could result in Q2 2016 andmark-to-market movements on economic hedges and hedge inefficiencies. There was good momentum in Retail Banking and CIBcriminal or civil penalties against Santander UK or individuals, as well as affecting our customers and the £48m gain on sale of Vocalink Holdings Limited in Q2 2017.communities we serve.

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges were up 4%. Higher strategic investment costs in business transformation, regulatory compliance costs and inflationary pressures offset operational and digital efficiencies.

Credit impairment losses increased to £203m, primarily relating to CIB exposures to Carillion plc. Impairment charges in the year for other customer loan books were not material and mortgage releases were lower at £40m (2016: £120m).

Provisions for other liabilities and charges were broadly flat at £393m, including charges for PPI of £109m and other conduct matters of £35m.

 

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs amounted to £356m, including an additional net provision of £40m in Q4 2017 bringing the total charge for the year to £109m. The Q4 2017 provision relates to an increase in estimated future claims driven by the start of the FCA advertising campaign for PPI, offset by an expected decline pertaining to a specific PPI portfolio review.

 

The remainingnon-PPI related conduct provisions amountedLegal risk– the risk of an impact arising from legal deficiencies in contracts; failure to £47m, includingprotect assets; failure to manage legal disputes appropriately; failure to assess or implement the Q2 2017 provisionrequirements of £35m outlined above, relatinga change of law; or failure to comply with law or regulation or to discharge duties or responsibilities created by law or regulation.

Strategic and business risk– the risk of significant loss or damage arising from strategic decisions that impact the long-term interests of our key stakeholders or from an inability to adapt to external developments.

Reputational risk– the risk of damage to the saleway our reputation and brand are perceived by the public, clients, government, colleagues, investors or any other interested party.

Model risk– the risk that the results of interest rate derivatives. This charge followed an ongoing review regarding regulatory classification of certain customers potentially eligible for redress.our models may be inaccurate, causing us to makesub-optimal decisions, or that a model may be used inappropriately.

Top and emerging risks

Tax on profit decreased 6% to £561m with lower profits. The effective tax rate was stable at 31%.

Critical factors affecting results

The preparationSeveral of our Consolidated Financial Statements requires management to make estimatesrisk types also have top risks associated with them. We regularly review the top risks that could impact our business, customers and judgements that affect the reported amount of assets and liabilities at the balance sheet date and the reported amount of income and expenses during the reporting period. Management evaluates its estimates and judgements on an ongoing basis. Management bases its estimates and judgements on historical experience and other factors believed to be reasonable under the circumstances. Actual results may differ from these estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

Estimates and judgements that are considered important to the portrayal of our financial condition including, where applicable, quantification of the effects of reasonably possible ranges of such estimatesshareholders. Top risks actively monitored over 2019 are set out in ‘Critical Judgements and Accounting Estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The restrelevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the ‘Top Risks’ section contains a summaryin the Strategic report. We also regularly review emerging risks that could impact our business, customers and shareholders. The identification of Emerging Risks isco-ordinated by the results, and commentary thereon, by income statement line item for each segment.

Basis of results presentation

The segmental information in this Annual Report reflects the reporting structure in place at the reporting date in accordance with which the segmental information in Note 2 to the Consolidated Financial Statements has been presented.

The basis of presentation in this Annual Report has been changed, and the prior periods restated, to report our Jersey and Isle of Man branches in Corporate Centre rather than in Retail Banking as in previous years, as a result of their transfer from Santander UK plc to ANTS in December 2018 asRisk Division. A key part of the implementationprocess is continual scanning of ring-fencing.the external environment, focusing on emerging risk drivers such as regulation, markets, technology, competition, customers,geo-politics, climate change and the economy. Emerging risks actively monitored over 2019 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the ‘Emerging Risks’ section in the Strategic report.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 765


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Key elements(unaudited)

Our Risk Framework sets out how we manage and control risk. In 2019, we updated our Risk Framework with the introduction of new minimum standards to strengthen controls around independence of decision-making following the introduction of ring-fencing on 1 January 2019.

As a group, Banco Santander supports the recommendations of the TCFD, which were published with the aim of improving disclosure of climate financial risk and opportunities. We also welcome the UK developments of the PRA and FCA to improve management and disclosure of climate change related risks. In October 2019, we submitted an initial implementation plan to the PRA to address the expectations set out Supervisory Statement 3/19 ‘Enhancing banks’ and insurers’ approaches to managing the financial risks from climate change’. Alongside this plan, responsibility for climate related financial risks was added to the Statement of Responsibility of the CRO as SMF holder. Delivering on our plan will be a multi-year programme. We are targeting the end of 2022 to achieve full adoption, aligned to the implementation path as set out in the TCFD recommendations. For more, see the case study ‘Addressing climate risk’ in the Risk appetite section that follows.

In addition, in 2020, we introduced a new standard to consider the impact of risks related to climate change.

How we approach risk – our culture and principles(unaudited)

The complexity and importance of the financial services industry demands a strong risk culture. We have extensive systems, controls and safeguards in place to manage and control the risks we face, but it is also crucial that everyone takes personal responsibility for managing risk. Our risk culture plays a key role in our aim to be the best bank for our customers, shareholders, people and communities by acting responsibly. It is vital that everyone in our business understands this. To achieve this, our people have a strong, shared understanding of what risk is, and what their role is in helping to control it. We express this in our Risk Culture Statement:

   Risk Culture Statement

Santander UK will only take risks that it understands and will always remain prudent in identifying, assessing, managing and reporting all risks. We proactively encourage our people to take personal responsibility for doing the right thing and to challenge without fear. We ensure decisions and actions take account of the best interests of all our stakeholders and are in line with The Santander Way.

The Board reviews and approves our Risk Culture Statement every year. Senior executives are responsible for promoting our risk culture from the top. They drive cultural change and increased accountability across the business. We reinforce our Risk Culture Statement and embed our risk culture in all our business units through our Risk Framework, Risk Certifications and other initiatives. This includes highlighting that:

It is everyone’s personal responsibility to play their part in managing risk

We must Identify, Assess, Manage and Report risk quickly and accurately

We make risk part of how we assess our people’s performance and how we recruit, develop and reward them

Our internal control system is essential to ensure we manage and control risk in line with our principles, standards, Risk Appetite and policies.

We use Risk Certifications to confirm how we manage and control risks in line with our Risk Framework and within our Risk Appetite. As an example, every year, each member of our Executive Committee confirms that they have managed risk in line with the Risk Framework in the part of the business for which they are responsible. Their certification lists any exceptions and the agreed actions to be taken to correct them. This is a tangible sign of the personal responsibility that is such a key part of our risk culture.

Our risk culture programme – I AM Risk

I AM Risk continues to play a key part in our aim to be the best bank for our people, customers, shareholders and communities. Our I AM Risk approach aims to make sure our people:

Annual

  Identifyrisks and opportunities

  Assesstheir probability and impact

  Managethe risks and suggest alternatives

–  Report 2018 | Financial, challenge, review, learn and ‘speak up’.

  LOGO             

I AM Risk is how we make risk management part of everyone’s life as a Santander UK employee from how we recruit them and manage their performance to how we develop and reward them. It is also how we encourage people to take personal responsibility for risk to speak up and to come up with ideas. We use I AM Risk in our risk certifications, policies, frameworks and governance, and risk-related communications. We also include it in reward arrangements and in mandatory training and induction courses for our staff. To support this, our learning website includese-learning videos and factsheets.

PROFIT BEFORE TAX BY SEGMENTAs part of I AM Risk, we include mandatory risk objectives for all our people in our performance management processes – from our Executive Committee to branch staff. The Executive Committee leads our culture initiatives under the CEO’s sponsorship. In our most recent employment engagement survey, over 90% of employees recognised their personal responsibility for the risks they face in theirday-to-day work. This demonstrates how we have embedded risk management in our culture.

I AM Risk Month

  2018

 

 

Retail
      Banking
£m

 

  

 

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

 

  

 

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

 

  

      Corporate
Centre

£m

 

  

      Total

£m

 

 

 

Net interest income

 

 

 

 

3,126

 

 

 

 

 

 

403

 

 

 

 

 

 

69

 

 

 

 

 

 

5

 

 

 

 

 

 

3,603

 

 

Non-interest income(1)

  638   82   272   (61  931 

 

Total operating income

 

 

 

 

3,764

 

 

 

 

 

 

485

 

 

 

 

 

 

341

 

 

 

 

 

 

(56

 

 

 

 

 

4,534

 

 

 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

  (1,929  (258  (262  (130  (2,579

 

Credit impairment (losses)/releases(2)

  (124  (23  (14  8   (153

Provisions for other liabilities and (charges)/releases

  (230  (14  (8  (5  (257

 

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases

  (354  (37  (22  3   (410

 

Profit/(loss) before tax

  1,481   190   57   (183  1,545 

2017

                    

 

Net interest income

  3,270   391   74   68   3,803 

Non-interest income(1)

  615   74   364   56   1,109 

 

Total operating income

  3,885   465   438   124   4,912 

 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

  (1,856  (223  (304  (116  (2,499

 

Credit impairment (losses)/releases

  (36  (13  (174  20   (203

Provisions for other liabilities and (charges)/releases

  (342  (55  (11  15   (393

 

Total credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases

  (378  (68  (185  35   (596

 

Profit/(loss) before tax

  1,651   174   (51  43   1,817 

2016

                    

 

Net interest income

  3,117   380   73   12   3,582 

Non-interest income(1)

  559   76   312   266   1,213 

 

Total operating income

  3,676   456   385   278   4,795 

 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

  (1,785  (215  (281  (133  (2,414

 

Credit impairment (losses)/releases

  (21  (29  (21  4   (67

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

  (338  (26  (11  (22  (397

 

Total credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases

  (359  (55  (32  (18  (464

 

Profit before tax

  1,532   186   72   127   1,917 

In November 2019, we once again joined colleagues from across the Banco Santander group to celebrate our risk culture, with an emphasis on what I AM Risk means to each of us. As a business, we are going through a significant period of transformation, whilst dealing with a highly competitive financial services sector and a challenging political and regulatory environment. At times of change, it is natural for people to feel under more pressure; to act quickly, to deliver and to succeed. We know that we need to deliver, but how we make the decisions that help us achieve our goals is also critical, and considering the risks involved is a key part of that process. We also recognise that managing our risks can result in broader benefits for the business.

Simplifying our processes, reducing the number of systems we use, improving the quality of our data or automating controls; these are all examples of ways we can reduce the risks we face, whilst also making things more efficient and simpler, for both our customers and our colleagues. We recognise that we need to remain vigilant in identifying, assessing, managing and reporting all risks. We need to speak up when we see a risk, so we can work together to do the right thing for our colleagues, customers and shareholders. It is by working together across the business that we can get the best from each other, be confident in the decisions we make and help the business achieve its goals.

Over the four weeks of I AM Risk Month, we encouraged our colleagues to use our I AM Risk resources to:

 

(1)

Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading andJoin our new I AM Risk Hub to help each other income.become more risk aware

(2)

Credit impairment lossesRecognise a colleague for 2018 are calculated ongood risk behaviour

Share a story of how an IFRS 9 basis andindividual or team have taken personal accountability for 2017 and 2016 on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this change in methodology seerisk

Use our Speak Up Matrix to help find the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44right channels to the Consolidated Financial Statements.raise any concerns.

 

866 Santander UK plc


> Income statement review

RETAIL BANKING

Retail Banking offers a wide range of products and financial services to individuals and small businesses through a network of branches and ATMs, as well as through telephony, digital and intermediary channels. Retail Banking includes business banking customers, small businesses with an annual turnover up to £6.5m, and Santander Consumer Finance, predominantly a vehicle finance business.

Summarised income statement

     

2018

£m

     

2017

£m

     

2016

£m

 

Net interest income

     3,126      3,270      3,117 

Non-interest income(1)

     638      615      559 

 

Total operating income

     3,764      3,885      3,676 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (1,929     (1,856     (1,785

Credit impairment losses(2)

     (124     (36     (21

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (230     (342     (338

 

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (354     (378     (359

 

Profit before tax

     1,481      1,651      1,532 

(1)

Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income.

(2)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and 2016 on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this change in methodology see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2018 compared to 2017

Profit before tax decreased by £170m to £1,481m in 2018 (2017: £1,651m). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income was down 4%, driven by pressure on new mortgage lending margins and SVR attrition partially offset by management pricing actions on customer deposits and strong mortgage lending volumes.
Non-interest income was up 4%, due to stronger consumer finance income partially offset by lower overdraft fees, reflecting regulatory changes.
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges increased 4%, with higher regulatory, risk and control costs, strategic investment in business transformation, digital enhancements and growth initiatives.
Credit impairment losses were up at £124m, due to lower releases in mortgages and other unsecured lending portfolios.
Provisions for other liabilities and charges were down at £230m, due to £109m PPI conduct provision charges and £35m other conduct provision charges relating to the sale of interest rate derivatives in 2017 which were not repeated. We had provision charges in the fourth quarter of 2018 of £58m in relation to our consumer credit business operations and £33m relating to historical probate and bereavement processes.

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs was £246m. We made no additional PPI charges in the year, based on our recent claims experience, and having considered the FCA’s Consultation Paper 18/33 issued on 7 November 2018. We will continue to monitor our provision levels, and take account of the impact of any further change in claims received and FCA guidance.

The remaining provision for other conduct issues was £30m, which primarily relates to the sale of interest rate derivatives, following an ongoing review of the regulatory classification of customers potentially eligible for redress. Following further analysis, management assessed the provision requirements resulting in a release of £11m in the second quarter of 2018.

In the fourth quarter of 2018 we were fined £32.8m by the FCA in relation to an investigation into our historical probate and bereavement practices. We acknowledged the findings of the FCA and apologised to the families and beneficiaries of deceased customers affected by these failings. We have completed a comprehensive tracing exercise and transferred the majority of funds in deceased customers’ accounts to their rightful beneficiaries, with compensatory interest where appropriate.

In the fourth quarter of 2018 we made a £58m provision in relation to our consumer credit business operations. This charge is management’s current best estimate as we continue to assess the scope of this issue.

2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax increased by £119m to £1,651m in 2017 (2016: £1,532m). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income increased 5%, driven by liability margin improvement offsetting pressure on new lending margins and SVR attrition.

Non-interest income increased 10%, due to higher current account and wealth management fees.

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges were up 4%, with investment in business growth, digital enhancements and software write-offs, partially offset by operational efficiency.

Credit impairment losses increased to £36m, predominantly driven by lower mortgage impairment releases of £40m in 2017 (2016: £120m). The loan book continues to perform well, supported by the ongoing resilience of the UK economy and our strong risk management practices.

Provisions for other liabilities and charges were broadly flat at £342m, including charges for PPI and other conduct matters during the year.

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs amounted to £356m, including an additional net provision of £40m in Q4 2017 bringing the total charge for the year to £109m. The Q4 2017 provision relates to an increase in estimated future claims driven by the start of the FCA advertising campaign for PPI, offset by an expected decline pertaining to a specific PPI portfolio review.

The remainingnon-PPI related conduct provisions amounted to £47m, including the Q2 2017 provision of £35m, relating to the sale of interest rate derivatives. This charge followed an ongoing review regarding regulatory classification of certain customers potentially eligible for redress.

LOGO

Santander UK plc9


Annual Report 2018 | Financial review

Customer balances

     

 

2018 

£bn 

 

     

 

2017 

£bn 

 

 

Mortgages

     158.0       154.7  

Business banking

     1.8       1.9  

Consumer (auto) finance

     7.3       7.0  

Other unsecured lending

     5.7       5.1  

Customer loans

             172.8               168.7  

Current accounts(3)

     68.4       67.5  

Savings(3)

     56.0       59.3  

Business banking accounts

     11.9       11.2  

Other retail products(3)

     5.8       5.8  

Customer deposits

     142.1       143.8  

Risk-weighted assets (RWAs)

     46.2       44.1  

(3)Balances for ‘Savings’ and ‘Other retail products’ have been restated to reflect the transfer of the Crown Dependencies balances to Corporate Centre and cahoot current account and savings balances from ‘Other retail products’ to ‘Current accounts’ and ‘Savings’.

2018 compared to 2017

Mortgage lending increased £3.3bn, through a combination of well positioned service and product pricing, as well as our ongoing focus on customer retention. In 2018, mortgage gross lending was £28.8bn (2017: £25.5bn) and consumer (auto) finance gross lending was £3.8bn (2017: £3.1bn). Credit cards balances also increased £0.5bn with competitive pricing strategy in late 2018.

Customer deposits decreased, primarily due to a decline of £3.3bn in savings balances, partially offset by a £0.9bn increase in current account balances and a £0.7bn increase in business banking deposits.

RWAs increased in line with customer loan growth.

10    Santander UK plc


> Income statement review

CORPORATE & COMMERCIAL BANKING

To better align reporting to the nature of the business segment following ring-fence transfers, Commercial Banking has beenre-branded as Corporate & Commercial Banking. Corporate & Commercial Banking covers businesses with an annual turnover of £6.5m to £500m. Corporate & Commercial Banking offers a wide range of products and financial services provided by relationship teams that are based in a network of regional CBCs and through telephony and digital channels.

Summarised income statement

     

 

    2018
£m

 

   

 

    2017
£m

 

   

 

    2016
£m

 

 

Net interest income

    

 

 

 

403

 

 

   391    380 

Non-interest income(1)

     82    74    76 

Total operating income

     485    465    456 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (258   (223   (215

Credit impairment losses(2)

     (23   (13   (29

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (14   (55   (26

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (37   (68   (55

Profit before tax

     190    174    186 

(1)

Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income.

(2)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and 2016 on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this change in methodology see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2018 compared to 2017

Profit before tax increased by £16m to £190m in 2018 (2017: £174m). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income was up 3%, driven by improved liability margins.
Non-interest income was up 11%, with growth in asset restructuring fees up 27%, digital and payment fees up 22%, cash management up 13% and international up 4%, partially offset by a decline in rates management income.
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges were up 16%, driven by higher regulatory costs, business transformation, digital enhancements and expansion of our asset finance business.
Credit impairment losses were up at £23m primarily due to lower releases, partially offset by risk management initiatives. All portfolios continue to perform well.
Provisions for other liabilities and charges improved largely due to a partial release in the second quarter of 2018 of a charge in respect of a charge made in the second quarter of 2017 relating to the sale of interest rate derivatives.

2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax decreased by £12m to £174m in 2017 (2016: £186m). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income increased 3%, driven by an increase in customer deposits as we continued to focus on deepening customer relationships.
Non-interest income was down £2m, with lower rates management fees, partially offset by growth in asset restructuring, up 4%, international, up 20%, and digital and payment fees, up 16%.
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges were up 4%, driven by enhancements to our digital channels.
Credit impairment losses were lower at £13m. The loan book continues to perform well and is supported by our prudent lending policy.
Provisions for other liabilities and charges increased to £55m, mainly due to conduct charges in the second quarter of 2017.

Customer balances

     

 

      2018
£bn

 

     

 

    2017
£bn

 

 

Non-Commercial Real Estate trading businesses

    

 

 

 

11.5

 

 

     11.5 

Commercial Real Estate(3)

     6.2      7.9 

Customer loans

     17.7      19.4 

Customer deposits

     17.6      17.8 

RWAs

     17.0      19.4 

(3)Excludes Commercial Real Estate loans totalling £0.2bn (2017: £0.2bn) to small business customers that are managed by Business banking in the Retail Banking business segment.

2018 compared to 2017

Customer loans were down £1.7bn, largely due to ring-fence transfers and a risk management initiative, as well as a £1.1bn managed reduction in Commercial Real Estate lending, as well as customer repayments.

Alongside the ring-fence transfers and a risk management initiative, we have continued our solid lending growth tonon-Commercial Real Estate trading businesses of £0.5bn, ahead of the market.

Customer deposits were down £0.2bn, driven by management pricing actions and working capital use by customers.
RWAs decreased 12%, largely as a result of ring-fence implementation and risk management initiatives, including significant risk transfer (SRT) securitisations. These actions have positioned the bank prudently, though they will have an economic impact in 2019.

LOGO

Santander UK plc11


Annual Report 2018 | Financial review

CORPORATE & INVESTMENT BANKING

As part of a rebrand across the Banco Santander group, Global Corporate Banking (the UK segment of Santander Global Corporate Banking) has been branded as Corporate & Investment Banking (CIB). CIB services corporate clients with an annual turnover of £500m and above. CIB clients require specially tailored solutions and value-added services due to their size, complexity and sophistication. We provide these clients with products to manage currency fluctuations, protect against interest rate risk, and arrange capital markets finance and specialist trade finance solutions, as well as providing support to the rest of Santander UK’s business segments.

Summarised income statement

     

 

        2018
£m

 

   

        2017
£m

 

   

 

        2016
£m

 

 

Net interest income

     69    74    73 

Non-interest income(1)

     272    364    312 

Total operating income

     341    438    385 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (262   (304   (281

Credit impairment losses(2)

     (14   (174   (21

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (8   (11   (11

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (22   (185   (32

Profit/(loss) before tax

     57    (51   72 
(1)Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income.
(2)Credit impairment losses for 2018 are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and 2016 on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this change in methodology see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements

2018 compared to 2017

As described in more detail below, and in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the financial results reflect the changes in our statutory perimeter that we made in the third quarter of 2018, following the ring-fence transfers to Banco Santander London Branch which principally impacted Corporate & Investment Banking. Prior periods have not been restated. Profit before tax increased by £108m to £57m in 2018 (2017: £51m loss). By income statement line, the movements were:

Operating income was down predominantly due to ring-fence transfers.

We have continued our strategic investment in business transformation, digital enhancements and growth initiatives in our core business areas.

Credit impairment losses were down, due to charges for Carillion plc in 2017.

2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax decreased by £123m to a loss of £51m in 2017 (2016: £72m). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income was up £1m, due to lending growth in project and acquisition finance, securitisation and transactional services, offset by continued asset margin pressures.

Non-interest income increased 17% to £364m, driven by security financing, derivative sales, and market making.

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges increased 8% to £304m, due to aone-off charge for services provided by Banco Santander SA. Going forward, the majority of these charges will be allocated to the Banco Santander London Branch under our new ring-fence structure.

Credit impairment losses increased to £174m, primarily relating to Carillion plc exposures.

Provisions for other liabilities and charges remained at £11m.

Customer balances

     

 

        2018
£bn

 

     

 

        2017
£bn

 

 

Customer loans

    

 

 

 

4.6

 

 

     6.0 

Customer deposits

     4.8      4.5 

RWAs

     7.2      16.5 

2018 compared to 2017

Customer loans decreased to £4.6bn, largely as a result of ring-fence transfers and a risk management initiative.

Customer deposits increased to £4.8bn, largely as a result of higher instant access deposit balances.

RWAs decreased 56% to £7.2bn largely as a result of ring-fence transfers and a risk management initiative. Other assets and liabilities of £21.5bn and £20.7bn, primarily relating to derivative contracts, were transferred to Banco Santander London Branch in July 2018. RWAs attributable to customer loans were £5.2bn (2017: £7.2bn). These actions will result in significantly lower future profits for this segment.

12    Santander UK plc


> Income statement review

CORPORATE CENTRE

Corporate Centre mainly includes the treasury,non-core corporate and legacy portfolios, including Crown Dependencies. Corporate Centre is also responsible for managing capital and funding, balance sheet composition, structure, pension and strategic liquidity risk. To enable a more targeted and strategically aligned apportionment of capital and other resources, revenues and costs incurred in Corporate Centre are allocated to the three business segments. Thenon-core corporate and legacy portfolios are beingrun-down and/or managed for value.

Summarised income statement

     

    2018

£m

   

    2017

£m

   

    2016

£m

 

Net interest income

     5    68    12 

Non-interest (expense)/income(1)

     (61   56    266 

Total operating (expense)/income

     (56   124    278 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (130   (116   (133

Credit impairment releases(2)

     8    20    4 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (5   15    (22

Total operating credit impairment releases/(losses), provisions and charges

     3    35    (18

(Loss)/profit before tax

     (183   43    127 

(1)

Comprised of Net fee and commission income and Net trading and other income

(2)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and 2016 on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this change in methodology see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2018 compared to 2017

Corporate Centre made a loss before tax of £183m in 2018 (2017: £43m profit). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income was down largely due to the £39m accrued interest release in the second quarter of 2017, which was not repeated this year, and lower yields onnon-core assets.
Non-interest expense was up largely due to the £48m gain on sale of Vocalink Holdings Limited shareholdings in the second quarter of 2017 and positivemark-to-market movements on asset portfolios in 2017, which were not repeated this year.
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges were up 12%, with lower regulatory and project costs relating to Banking Reform of £38m (2017: £81m) offset by £40m of costs relating to GMP equalisation.
Credit impairment releases were down 60%, largely driven by our exit strategy fromnon-core customer loans.
Provisions for other liabilities and charges were up at £8m, largely due to releases in 2017 which were not repeated this year.

2017 compared to 2016

Profit before tax decreased by £84m to £43m in 2017 (2016: £127m). By income statement line, the movements were:

Net interest income increase was primarily due to a £39m release of accrued interest on a foreign tax liability no longer payable after the second quarter of 2017. Net interest income from the structural hedge was broadly in line with 2016, with a hedge position of c£80bn and average duration of c2.5years. The majority of new mortgage flows were leftun-hedged.
Non-interest income was impacted by the absence of the £119m gain on sale of Visa Europe Limited in 2016 andmark-to-market movements on economic hedges and hedge inefficiencies in 2017. This was partially offset by the £48m gain on sale of Vocalink Holdings Limited in the second quarter of 2017.
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges, represent regulatory compliance and project costs relating to ring-fencing of £81m as well as costs pertaining to strategic investment in business growth.
Credit impairment releases increased to £20m, driven by our exit strategy fromnon-core customer loans.
Provisions for other liabilities and charges improved to £15m, predominantly due to a provision release for a historical operational risk closure.

Customer balances

     

        2018

£bn

     

        2017

£bn

 

Customer loans(3)

     4.5      6.2 

– of which Social Housing

     3.8      5.1 

– of which Crown Dependencies

           0.3 

– of whichnon-core

     0.7      0.8 

Customer deposits(3)

     2.8      9.8 

– of which Crown Dependencies

           6.4 

RWAs

     8.1      7.0 

(3)Balances for ‘Customer loans’ and ‘Customer deposits’ have been restated to reflect the transfer of Crown Dependencies from Retail Banking.

2018 compared to 2017

Customer loans decreased £1.7bn, as we continue to implement our exit strategy fromnon-core customer loans, predominantly our legacy Social Housing portfolio.
Customer deposits decreased to £2.8bn, largely due to the sale of the Crown Dependencies to ANTS in December 2018.
RWAs were higher at £8.1bn, due to increases in counterparty risk with more concentrated exposures to Banco Santander London Branch, following derivative business transfers as part of ring-fence implementation. RWAs attributable tonon-core customer loans amounted to £1.7bn (2017: £1.0bn) following an increase in Social Housing risk-weights.
Our structural hedge position has remained stable at c£89bn (2017: c£80bn), with an average duration of c2.2 years (2017: c2.5 years). The majority of new mortgage flows were leftun-hedged.

LOGO

Santander UK plc13


Annual Report 2018 | Financial review

Balance sheet review

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

     

 

          2018

£m

 

     

 

          2017

£m

 

 

Assets

        

Cash and balances at central banks

     19,747      32,771 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

        

– Trading assets

           30,555 

– Derivative financial instruments

     5,259      19,942 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

     5,617      2,096 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

        

– Loans and advances to customers(1)

     201,289      199,340 

– Loans and advances to banks(1)

     2,799      3,463 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     21,127      2,614 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost(2)

     7,229     

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(2)

     13,302     

Financial investments(2)

         17,611 

Interest in other entities

     88      73 

Property, plant and equipment

     1,832      1,598 

Retirement benefit assets

     842      449 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

     4,241      4,253 

Total assets

     283,372      314,765 

Liabilities

        

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

        

– Trading liabilities

           31,109 

– Derivative financial instruments

     1,369      17,613 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

     6,286      2,315 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

        

– Deposits by customers

     178,090      183,648 

– Deposits by banks(1)

     17,221      12,708 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     10,910      1,076 

– Debt securities in issue

     46,692      42,633 

– Subordinated liabilities

     3,601      3,793 

Retirement benefit obligations

     114      286 

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

     3,180      3,379 

Total liabilities

     267,463      298,560 

Equity

        

Total shareholders’ equity

     15,758      16,053 

Non-controlling interests

     151      152 

Total equity

     15,909      16,205 

Total liabilities and equity

     283,372      314,765 

(1)From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives are represented accordingly.
(2)On adoption of IFRS 9, the Santander UK group split the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income’. This approach aligns the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position.

A more detailed Consolidated Balance Sheet is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2018 compared to 2017

As described in more detail below, and in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, the balances at 31 December 2018 excluded assets and liabilities transferred outside of the Santander UK group as part of ring-fencing implementation.

Assets

Cash and balances at central banks

Cash and balances at central banks decreased by 40% to £19,747m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £32,771m) due to no balances being held with US Federal Reserve following the closure of the ANTS branch office in the US, and lower balances with the Bank of England, in accordance with our liquidity and funding plans. In addition, cash and balances at central banks decreased due to the sale of the business of the Jersey and Isle of Man branches of Santander UK plc to ANTS.

Trading assets

Trading assets decreased to £nil at 31 December 2018 (2017: £30,555m). This reflected therun-down or transfer of our trading business, including the transfer of our gilt-edged market making business to Banco Santander London Branch, as part of our transition to our ring-fenced model.

Derivative financial instruments – assets

Derivative assets decreased by 74% to £5,259m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £19,942m). This mainly related to the transfer of the prohibited part of our derivatives business with certain corporates and financial institutions to Banco Santander London Branch as part of the transition to our ring-fenced model.

14    Santander UK plc


> Balance sheet review

Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss increased to £5,617m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £2,096m), due to the following:

On adoption of IFRS 9, certain financial investments and loans and advances to customers, previously measured at amortised cost oravailable-for-sale under IAS 39, were reclassified at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL), as they did not have solely payment of principal and interest (SPPI) characteristics. These reclassifications were partially offset by the Santander UK group electing tore-measure Social Housing loans from FVTPL to amortised cost to reflect the hold to collect business model.
As part of the establishment of a credit protection vehicle in the year, Santander UK acquired £2.5bn of credit linked notes (classified as debt securities), which were measured at FVTPL.
In addition, Santander UK elected to classify certainnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements totalling £2.2bn at FVTPL to minimise accounting mismatches during our ring-fencing transition.

Loans and advances to customers

Loans and advances to customers at amortised cost increased slightly to £201,289m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £199,340m). This was mainly due to:

Increases related to £3.3bn of lending growth in mortgages and £0.5bn lending growth tonon-CRE trading businesses, £0.8bn in lending to other group entities and £1.0bn due to there-classification of Social Housing loans from FVTPL to amortised cost on adoption of IFRS 9.
Decreases largely due to managed reductions of £1.1bn in CRE and £1.4bn innon-core loans, as well as £1.4bn of ring-fence transfers. In September 2018, we also transferred £1.3bn of customer loans to Banco Santander London Branch as part of a risk management initiative.

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

Non trading reverse repurchase agreements increased to £21,127m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £2,614m), which reflected the revised classification of the majority of our permitted non trading reverse repurchase agreements at amortised cost, in line with our ring-fenced business model for managing these assets as part of our overall funding and liquidity plans.

Other financial assets at amortised cost

On adoption of IFRS 9, the Santander UK group split the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at FVOCI. This aligned the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position. At 1 January 2018, this resulted in £7,776m of other financial assets at amortised cost beingre-classified from financial investments measured at amortised cost. When compared to 1 January 2018, the balance reduced slightly to £7,229m at 31 December 2018.

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

At 1 January 2018 and on adoption of IFRS 9, financial investments of £8,743m that were previously measured atavailable-for-sale under IAS 39 werere-classified at FVOCI. When compared to 1 January 2018, the balance increased to £13,302m at 31 December 2018 due to higher volumes of short-dated bonds within the eligible liquidity pool.

Retirement benefit assets

Retirement benefit assets increased by 88% to £842m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £449m). This was mainly due to actuarial gains in the year driven by rising corporate bond yields, partially offset by a higher assumed inflation rate, which when combined reduced the value placed on Scheme liabilities.

Liabilities

Trading liabilities

Trading liabilities decreased to £nil at 31 December 2018 (2017: £31,109m). This reflected therun-down or transfer of the majority of our trading business, including the transfer of our gilt-edged market making business to Banco Santander London Branch, as part of our transition to our ring-fenced model.

Derivative financial instruments – liabilities

Derivative liabilities decreased to £1,369m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £17,613m). This mainly related to the transfer of the prohibited part of our derivatives business with certain corporates and financial institutions to Banco Santander London Branch, as part of the transition to our ring-fenced model.

Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss increased to £6,286m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £2,315m), due to the classification of £1.7bn ofnon-trading repurchase agreements at FVTPL to minimise accounting mismatches during our ring-fencing transition, and also higher structured deposit balances following the establishment of a new credit protection vehicle in the year.

Deposits by customers

Deposits by customers at amortised cost decreased by 3% to £178,090m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £183,648m), with lower corporate deposits and management pricing actions driving a reduction in retail savings products. In addition, £4.8bn of customer deposits were transferred as part of the sale of the business of the Jersey and Isle of Man branches of Santander UK plc to ANTS. This was partially offset by a £0.9bn increase in personal current account balances.

Deposits by banks

Deposits by banks increased by 36% to £17,221m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £12,708m), driven by further drawdowns of the Term Funding Scheme with the Bank of England, and higher deposits held as collateral.

Repurchase agreements – non trading

Non trading repurchase agreements increased to £10,910m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £1,076m), which reflected the revised classification of the majority of our permitted non trading repurchase agreements at amortised cost, in line with our ring-fenced business model for managing these liabilities as part of our overall funding and liquidity plans.

Debt securities in issue

Debt securities in issue increased by 10% to £46,692m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £42,633m) reflecting thepre-funding of our 2019 requirements.

Retirement benefit obligations

Retirement benefit obligations decreased by 60% to £114m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £286m). This was principally due to actuarial gains in the year driven by widening credit spreads on the discount rate used to value scheme liabilities.

Equity

Total shareholders’ equity

Total shareholders’ equity decreased by 2% to £15,758m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £16,053m). Total comprehensive income in the period was offset by dividend payments, including £668m associated with ring-fencing transfers to Banco Santander London Branch. In addition, as part of a capital management exercise, Santander UK plc purchased and redeemed £290m of 6.475% Perpetual Capital securities.

LOGO

Santander UK plc15


Annual Report 2018 | Financial review

Cash flows

SUMMARISED CONSOLIDATED CASH FLOW STATEMENT

     2018      2017     2016 
     £m      £m     £m 

Net cash flows from operating activities

     (15,405)      23,976      18,005 

Net cash flows from investing activities

     (3,682)      816      (7,340

Net cash flows from financing activities

     2,730       (7,637     (6,388

Change in cash and cash equivalents

     (16,357)      17,155      4,277 

A more detailed Consolidated Cash Flow Statement is contained in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The major activities and transactions that affected cash flows during 2018, 2017 and 2016 were as follows:

In 2018, the net cash outflows from operating activities of £15,405m resulted from net cash outflows relating to trading and derivative assets and liabilities. The net cash outflows from investing activities of £3,682m mainly reflecting purchases of financial investments in the year as part of normal liquidity management. The net cash inflows from financing activities of £2,730m reflected the net inflows from debt securities following thepre-funding of our 2019 requirements. This was offset by payments of dividends on ordinary shares, preference shares, other equity instruments andnon-controlling interests. Cash and cash equivalents decreased by £16,357m principally from the decrease in cash held at central banks.

In 2017, the net cash inflows from operating activities of £23,976m resulted from the increase in trading balances, increased customer lending and customer savings and deposits from other banks. The net cash inflows from investing activities of £816m mainly reflected sale and redemption of financial investments offset by purchases of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets. The net cash outflows from financing activities of £7,637m principally reflected the repayment of debt securities maturing in the year of £13,763 offset by new issues of debt securities of £6,645m, the payment of interim dividends on ordinary shares, preference shares, other equity instruments andnon-controlling interests of £1,000m. Cash and cash equivalents increased by £17,155m principally from the increase in cash and balances at central banks, which is held as part of the liquidity pool. This increase was mainly due to a change in the mix of assets held for liquidity purposes as part of normal portfolio management activity.

In 2016, the net cash inflows from operating activities of £18,005m resulted from the increase in trading balances, increased customer lending and customer savings and deposits from other banks. The net cash outflows from investing activities of £7,340m principally reflected the purchase ofheld-to-maturity investments. The net cash outflows from financing activities of £6,388m principally reflected the repayment of debt securities maturing in the year of £11,352m offset by new issues of debt securities of £5,547m, the payment of interim dividends on ordinary shares, preference shares, other equity instruments andnon-controlling interests of £559m. Cash and cash equivalents increased by £4,277m principally from the increase in cash held at central banks and also debt securities, both of which are held as part of the liquidity pool. This has increased due to an increase in wholesale funding with a maturity of less than 30 days.

16    Santander UK plc


> Balance sheet review

2018 business development highlights

Retail Banking

We announced plans to reshape our branch network and close 140 branches in response to changes in how customers are choosing to carry out their banking. Our future branch network, with c615 branches, will be made up of a combination of larger branches offering improved community facilities to support local businesses and customers, and smaller branches using the latest technology to offer customers more convenient access to banking services. Furthermore, in order to deliver a branch network for the future, 100 branches will be refurbished over the next two years through an investment of £55m.
Our Wealth Management strategy continues to focus on expanding our multi-channel proposition to make investments accessible for our customers. In the second half of 2018 we launched the Digital Investment Advisor, offering customers low cost online investments advice. This complements our growing online platform, the Investment Hub, which now serves over 254,000 accounts (up 12% from 2017), as well as ourface-to-face advice services for customers.
We aim to help our customers manage their money and improve our customer experience by providing real-time support in their channel of choice. In November 2018 we launched the Santander ChatBot for our online banking customers. It has been designed to support their questions and queries using machine learning, giving instant answers to basic types of queries often raised.
SMEs have traditionally been underserved by banks in the UK, and we aim to change this. In October 2018 we launched the 1I2I3 Business Current Account alongside the 1I2I3 Business World for small businesses and expanded our support by providing access to our branch network for account holders. The 1I2I3 Business Current Account has been rated ‘Outstanding’ by Business Moneyfacts since launch.
We have successfully applied to be part of the Incentivised Switching Scheme (branded Business Banking Switch), which covers eligible RBS business customers (formerly known as customers of Williams & Glyn), with an annual credit turnover of up to £25m. These customers will be incentivised to switch their primary business current accounts and loans to participating challenger banks, including Santander UK, when the scheme launches on 25 February. Under the scheme, participating banks will receive aone-off payment for each switching customer that they attract.
In April 2018, we launched ‘Santander One Pay FX’, a new blockchain-based international payments service which enables our customers to have the majority of their euro transfers complete on the same day. This was part of a Banco Santander initiative for retail customers across UK, Spain, Brazil and Poland.
Throughout 2018, we have been making improvements to our mobile banking app which resulted in our iOS rating improving to 4.8 in December 2018, based on 181,000 reviews.
We have made improvements to our mortgage offering throughout 2018, including exclusive rates for First Time Buyers holding a Help to Buy ISA, and our gifted deposit scheme promotion. We also added the ability to make a single mortgage overpayment online at any time, offering customers more control over their mortgage.

Corporate & Commercial Banking

Our Growth Capital team continues to provide high growth SMEs with innovative funding solutions to support investment, with over £21m of growth capital and £101m of senior debt provided to 36 companies as part of our Breakthrough programme. In 2018, we supported 478 companies who benefited from international events focused on helping create international connections and achieving their global ambitions.
We are also building primacy banking customer relationships with a growing number of international trade initiatives, which complements existing services like the Santander Trade Club, which is part of the Trade Club Alliance. The Alliance currently has 12 members, formed of international banking groups, with 10 already offering global access to our customers looking to find new trading partners.

We are developing these initiatives in collaboration with the Banco Santander group and key strategic partners to leverage global expertise and contacts to help our customers grow their businesses.

We have established 3 trade corridors in 2018 to connect our UK customers, helping UK businesses to establish the necessary contacts and local support services to open up new markets and successfully grow trade overseas.

Corporate & Investment Banking

We have made progress in completing the roll out of our client management service to all our customers, to simplify the clienton-boarding process and improve customer experience.

LOGO

Santander UK plc17


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Governance

   
Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate parent company of Santander UK plc. The two companies operate on the basis of a unified business strategy and have common Boards, albeit the principal business activities of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are carried on by Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries.    

The Santander UK Group Holdings plc Corporate Governance and Risk Frameworks have been adopted by the Company and its subsidiaries to ensure consistency of application. Prior to November 2018, the Corporate Governance and Risk Frameworks were applied from the level of Santander UK plc across the Santander UK group and adopted by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

As a result, the review of the business and principal risks and uncertainties facing the Company, and the description of the Company’s Corporate Governance, including the activities of the Board and risk management arrangements, are integrated with those of Santander UK Group Holdings plc and are reported in this Annual Report as operating within the Company for all periods presented.

Contents

 
 

Board of Directors

19 

Corporate Governance report

22 

Chair’s report on corporate governance

22 

Board Nomination Committee Chair’s report

25 

Board Risk Committee Chair’s report

27 

Board Audit Committee Chair’s report

33 

Board Responsible Banking Committee Chair’s report

39 

Directors’ Remuneration report

41 

Board Remuneration Committee
Chair’s report

41 
   

Remuneration report and
remuneration policies

 43 
   

Remuneration implementation report

 45  
   

Directors’ report

Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernance  48 Risk review  Financial statementsShareholder information
     

18            Santander UK plc

Risk governance

    

Our risk governance structure

We are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance in every part of our business. This includes risk management. For details of our governance, including the Board and its Committees, see the ‘Governance’ section of this Annual Report. The Board delegates certain responsibilities to Board Level Committees as needed and where appropriate. Our risk governance structure strengthens our ability to identify, assess, manage and report risks, as follows:

Committees:A number of Board and Executive committees are responsible for specific parts of our Risk Framework

Key senior management roles:A number of senior roles have specific responsibilities for riskmanagement

Risk organisational structure:We have the ‘three lines of defence’ model built into the way we run our business.

Committees

The Board Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

 

 
   Board Level CommitteeMain risk responsibilities

The Board

-  Has overall responsibility for business execution and for managing risk

-  Reviews and approves the Risk Framework and Risk Appetite.

Board Risk Committee

-  Assesses the Risk Framework and recommends it to the Board for approval

-  Advises the Board on our overall Risk Appetite, tolerance and strategy

-  Oversees our exposure to risk and our strategy and advises the Board on both

-  Reviews the effectiveness of our risk management systems and internal controls.

Board Responsible Banking Committee

-  Responsible for culture and operational risk from conduct, compliance, competition, financial crime & legal matters

-  Reviews reports from the CLRO on the adequacy and effectiveness of the compliance function

-  Ensures that adequate and effective control processes are in place to identify and manage reputational risks

-  Oversees our Corporate Social Responsibility programme and how it impacts on employees, communities, the environment including sustainability and climate change, reputation, brand and market positioning.

Board Audit Committee

-  Monitors and reviews the financial statements integrity, and any formal announcements on financial performance

-  Reviews the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal financial controls and whistleblowing arrangements

-  Monitors and reviews the effectiveness of the internal audit function.

Board Remuneration Committee

-  Oversees implementation of remuneration policies, ensuring they promote sound, effective risk management.


The Executive Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

 > Directors

Board of Directors

LOGO Shriti Vadera

Chair

Skills and experience

Shriti was an investment banker with SG Warburg/UBS from 1984 to 1999, on the Council of Economic Advisers, HM Treasury from 1999 to 2007, Minister in the UK Government from 2007 to 2009 (Cabinet Office, Business Department and International Development Department), G20 Adviser from 2009 to 2010, and advised governments, banks and investors on the Eurozone crisis, banking sector, debt restructuring and markets from 2010 to 2014. She was aNon-Executive Director of AstraZeneca plc between 2011 and 2018.

Other principal appointments

Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since January 2015 and Chair since March 2015,Non-Executive Director of BHP Group Plc (formerly BHP Billiton plc) since 2011 and Senior Independent Director since 2015.

LOGO Julie Chakraverty

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Julie brings extensive experience and knowledge in financial services, digital and innovation, business leadership and in risk management. She was aNon-Executive Director of Standard Life Aberdeen plc between 2017 and 2018.

Julie was aNon-Executive Director of Aberdeen Asset Management plc from 2011 and its Senior Independent Director from October 2016 until her retirement from the Board in 2018. She chaired its Risk and Innovation committees.

She has served on the Boards of MS Amlin plc (where she chaired their Remuneration Committee), Spirit Pub Company Limited and Paternoster Limited. Her executive career was spent with UBS, where she held a number of global leadership positions, and JP Morgan.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since 11 June 2018. Founder and Chief Executive of Rungway Limited.

LOGO Annemarie Durbin

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Annemarie has 30 years’ international retail, commercial, corporate and institutional banking experience culminating in membership of Standard Chartered’s Group Executive Committee. She was Group Company Secretary at Standard Chartered and an independentNon-Executive Director on the board of Fleming Family and Partners Limited. She was a member of the Listing Authority Advisory Panel from 2015, and Chair between 2016 and 2018.

Annemarie is an executive leadership coach and a Board governance consultant. She brings broad based international banking, executive remuneration, internal audit, crisis management and governance capabilities to the Board.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since January 2016. Chair of Cater Allen Limited* since 15 November 2018.Non-Executive Director of WH Smith PLC since 2012.

LOGO Ed Giera

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Ed is an experiencedNon-Executive Director, having held a number of Board roles following his career with JP Morgan Securities, the investment banking affiliate of JP Morgan Chase & Co. He provided corporate finance advisory and fiduciary services as Principal of EJ Giera LLC and was formerly aNon-Executive Director for the Renshaw Bay Structured Finance Opportunity Fund, NovaTech LLC, and the Life and Longevity Markets Association. Ed was also a director of Pension Corporation Group Ltd from 2012 to 2015, and Pension Insurance Corporation Holdings Ltd from 2008 to 2012. He was aNon-Executive Director of ICBC Standard Bank Plc and aNon-Executive Director of Pension Insurance Corporation Group Limited from 2015 to 2018, respectively.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since August 2015.Non-Executive Director of the Renshaw Bay Real Estate Finance Fund since 2012.

LOGO

Santander UK plc   Executive Level Committee 19Main risk responsibilities


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Executive Committee

 

-  Reviews business plans in line with our Risk Framework and Risk Appetite before they are recommended to the Board to approve.

-  Receives updates on key risk issues managed byCEO-level committees and monitors the actions taken.

Senior Management Committee

-  Focuses on the responsibilities of the Executive Committee Senior Management Function holders and how they are discharged

-  Reviews updates on key risk issues, customer, reputational and conduct matters.

Executive Risk Control Committee (ERCC)

-  Reviews Risk Appetite proposals before they are sent to the Board Risk Committee and the Board to approve

-  Ensures that we comply with our Risk Framework, Risk Appetite and risk policies

-  Reviews and monitors our risk exposures and approves any corrective steps we need to take.

Asset and Liability Committee (ALCO)

-  Reviews liquidity risk appetite (LRA) proposals

-  Ensures we measure and control structural balance sheet risks, including capital, funding and liquidity, in line with the policies, strategies and plans set by the Board

-  Reviews and monitors our key asset and liability management activities to ensure we keep our exposure in line with our Risk Appetite.

Pensions Committee

-  Reviews pension risk appetite proposals

-  Approves actuarial valuations and reviews the impact they may have on our contributions, capital and funding

-  Consults with the pension scheme trustees on the scheme’s investment strategy.

Capital Committee

-  Puts in place reporting systems and risk control processes to make sure capital risks are managed within our Risk Framework

-  Reviews capital adequacy and capital plans, including the ICAAP, before they are sent to the Board to approve.

Incident Accountability Committee

-  Considers, calibrates, challenges and agrees any appropriate individual remuneration adjustments

-  Presents recommendations to the Board Remuneration Committee.

Credit Approval Committee

-  Approves corporate and wholesale credit transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level approval forums or individuals.

Investment Approval Committee

-  Approves equity type investment transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level approval forums or individuals.

Key senior management roles

Board of Directorscontinued

LOGO Chris Jones

IndependentNon-Executive Director Santander UK’s Whistleblower’s Champion

Skills and experience

Chris was a partner at PwC from 1989 to 2014. He focused on the financial services industry from themid-1980s and was a Senior Audit Partner specialising in the audit of banks and other financial services companies. He also led PwC’s EMEA Financial Services practice and was a member of their Financial Services global leadership team. He is a past president of the Association of Corporate Treasurers and was Chairman of the Advisory Board of the Association of Corporate Treasurers between January 2010 and July 2018.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since March 2015. Audit Committee member of the Wellcome Trust since 2016.Non-Executive Director of Redburn (Europe) Ltd since 2014. Investment Trustee of the Civil Service Benevolent Fund since 2015. Board member of the Audit Committee Chair’s Independent Forum since January 2019.

LOGO Genevieve Shore

IndependentNon-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Genevieve brings digital, technology and commercial expertise to Santander UK from a career in the media, publishing and technology sectors, most recently as Chief Product and Marketing Officer of Pearson plc, and previously as Director of Digital Strategy and Chief Information Officer. Genevieve has also advised and invested in Education Technologystart-ups and worksroles with female executives as a coach and mentor.

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since May 2015.Non-Executive Director of Next Fifteen Communications Group plc since 2015.Non-Executive Director of Moneysupermarket.com Group plc since 2014.Non-Executive Director of Arup Group Limited since 2017. IndependentNon-Executive Director of the Rugby Football Union since 2017.

LOGO Scott Wheway

IndependentNon-Executive Director Senior Independent Director

Skills and experience

Scott brings extensive retail and consumer knowledge to the Board, having formerly held various senior roles at Tesco plc, including Operations Director and CEO, Tesco Japan. Following this, he was CEO of Best Buy Europe and Managing Director and Retail Director of The Boots Company plc and Managing Director of Boots the Chemist at Alliance Boots plc. Scott also has experience of the financial services sector through his past roles at Aviva plc(Non-Executive Director from 2007 to 2016) and Aviva Insurance Limited (Chairman from 2015 to 2017).

Other principal appointments

IndependentNon-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since 2014.Non-Executive Director of Centrica plc since 2016. Chairman of AXA UK plc since 2017.

LOGO Ana Botín

Banco Santander Nominated

Non-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Ana joined the Banco Santander group in 1988 and was appointed Executive Chair of Banco Santander SA in September 2014. Ana has been a member of Banco Santander SA’s Board and Executive Committee since 1989 and previously served as Chief Executive Officer and Executive Director of Santander UK plc between 2010 and 2014. She has extensive financial services experience. She directed Banco Santander SA’s Latin American expansion in the 1990s and was responsiblespecific responsibilities for the Latin American Corporate Banking, Asset Management and Treasury divisions.

Other principal appointments

Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* in 2014.Non-Executive Director of Santander UK plc* since September 2014. Executive Chair of Banco Santander SA* since 2014 and Director since 1989.Non-Executive Director of The Coca-Cola Company since 2013. Vice-Chair of the Empresa y Crecimiento Foundation since 2000. Vice-Chair of the World Business Council for Sustainable Development since 2016. Member of the MIT’s CEO Advisory Board since 2015.

* Part of the Banco Santander group.risk management are:

 

20
   Role     Santander UK plc


Main risk responsibilities
 > Directors

LOGO

For Board Committee membership, see Board and Committee membership, tenure, attendance and remuneration. For full bios visit
www.santander.co.uk/uk/about-santander-uk/about-us/non-executive-directors

LOGO Lindsey Argalas

Banco Santander NominatedNon-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Lindsey joined Banco Santander SA in 2017 as Chief Digital and Innovation Officer in charge of digital transformation and innovation. She joined from the Silicon Valley-based software company Intuit Inc, where she held a number of senior positions from 2008 to 2017, most recently as Chief of Staff to the CEO. Prior to that, Lindsey worked as a Principal at the Boston Consulting Group for 10 years.

Lindsey brings extensive international experience of driving growth and leading transformational change with particular expertise in new market entry, customer-driven innovation and digital experiences.

Other principal appointments

Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since 1 January 2018. Director of Santander Fintech Limited* since September 2017.

LOGO Gerry Byrne

Banco Santander NominatedNon-Executive Director

Skills and experience

Gerry has been Chairman of the Supervisory Board of Santander Bank Polska SA* (SBP) since 2011 having joined the SBP Board as Deputy Chairman in 2001. He held several senior management roles at AIB Group, both in Ireland (from 1973 to 2000) and in Poland (from 2001 to 2010), latterly as Managing Director of the Central Eastern Europe Division in 2009-2010. He is a member of the Irish Institute of Bankers, Irish Management Institute and an alumnus of Harvard Business School.

Other principal appointments

Non-Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since December 2017. Chairman of the Supervisory Board of SBP since 2011.

LOGO Nathan Bostock

Executive Director

Chief Executive OfficerChange Programme

SkillsThe Committee maintained its oversight of the changing scale, scope and experience

Nathan joinedcritical nature of the various change initiatives undertaken by Santander UK to meet regulatory and other requirements that continued to pose significant risk in 2019.

Reports from RBS, where he wasthe Transformation Office and Operational Risk identified similar themes with respect to root cause issues underpinning the execution of change programmes. The Committee expressed concern at management’s capacity to effectively resource and execute the number of strategic transformation programmes in progress concurrently with the execution of regulatory change requirements including customer alerts and the high cost of credit review.

The Committee considered that improved management information would assist management to better plan and sequence the implementation of complex and often time critical and interdependent deliverables.

Effectiveness of the Committee

As noted above, the Committee membership saw one member leave and one member join during the year. I believe that the Committee has an Executive Directorappropriate mix of skills to enable it to operate effectively and Group Finance Director. He joined RBSto offer appropriate challenge and support to management.

In December 2019, we reviewed the Committee’s responsibilities as set out in 2009 as Headthe Terms of RestructuringReference and Risk,confirmed that the Committee had discharged its responsibilities in full in 2019.

An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020 to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and Group Chief Risk Officer. He previously spent eight years with Abbey National plc (now Santander UK plc*)to keep areas for development in focus.

Full terms of reference can be found on our website at www.aboutsantander.co.uk and serveda summary is given on page 32.

We continued to receive regular reports on enterprise wide risk and to call risk owners to our meetings to account for their progress.

We have benefited from the Board as an Executive Director from 2005. During his timeperspectives of each of the three lines of defence to gain assurance and confirm progress in respect of material initiatives intended to mitigate key risk exposures.

with Abbey National plc, he held other senior positions including Chief Financial Officer. He was also at RBS from 1991These actions are examples of how we have looked to 2001inform our debate and decision making in a number of senior positionsthe year and spent seven years before that with Chase Manhattan Bank, having previously qualifiedcontribute to our effectiveness as a Chartered Accountant at Coopers & Lybrand (now PwC).Committee.

Other principal appointmentsPriorities for 2020

Chief Executive OfficerIn 2020, we will monitor Santander UK’s capital and liquidity adequacy and assess credit risk in changing economic conditions and extremely competitive operating environment including the risks and uncertainties surrounding Brexit and the UK regulatory landscape.

Data, cyber, third party, operational resilience and otherIT-related operational risks will continue to be a priority, including the adoption of cloud services.

We expect to review continuing developments in areas such as model risk, pension risk, enhancements to Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since September 2014. MemberUK’s risk infrastructure and management of transformation risks.

In accordance with the additional responsibilities of the PRA Practitioner Panel since 2014CRO, we also will monitor and a Member of the Financial Services Trade Investment Board (FSTIB) since 2015.

LOGO Susan Allen

Executive Director

Head of Retailreview Santander UK’s climate-related financial and Business Banking

Skills and experience

Susan has substantial experience in the banking sector following a career spanning over 25 years. She joined Santander UK in 2015 as MD, Retail Banking before being appointed as Chief Transformation Officer the same year. In March 2017 she was appointed as Head of Retail Distribution. Prior to joining Santander UK, she held a number of senior roles at RBS including CEO, Customer Solutions Group Corporate Banking and MD, UK Retail.

Other principal appointments

Executive Director of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since 1 January 2019. Director of Cater Allen Limited* since December 2017.

LOGO Antonio Roman

Executive Director

Chief Financial Officer

Skills and experience

Antonio has extensive financial services experience across a wide range of areas including Finance, Investor Relations and Retail Banking. He was appointed Treasurer of Santander UK plc in 2014, with responsibility for the management of interest risk, liquidity, funding, economics and investor relations. Antonio joined Santander UK plc in 2013 as Deputy Treasurer and prior to that held the position of Head of Financial Management at Banco Español de Credito SA*. He also worked for Grupo Caja Madrid where he served as Financial Controller from 2007 to 2010.

Other principal appointments

Chief Financial Officer of Santander UK Group Holdings plc* since 2015 and Executive Director since August 2017. Director of Cater Allen Limited* since December 2017 and Abbey National Treasury Services plc* since July 2014. Member of UK Finance’s Financial and Risk Policy Committee since 2015.

*

Part of the Banco Santander group.

LOGOstrategy risks.

 

 

Santander UK plc 2141


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Chair’s report on corporate governance

My report describes the roles, responsibilities

and activities of the Board and its Committees.

Our governance

Santander UK voluntarily complies with the UK Corporate Governance Code (the Code) wherever applicable in order to practice best standards of corporate governance. Although, as anon-listed subsidiary of a European banking group, we are not required to comply with the Code. In addition to the Code, our governance practices and rules are set out in a number of key documents, principally:

The UK Group Framework, which defines clearly our responsibilities and relationship with Banco Santander SA, our shareholder. This provides us with the autonomy to discharge our responsibilities in the UK in line with best practice as an independent board while providing Banco Santander SA with the oversight and controls it needs. Clarity of roles and responsibilities is key to ensuring proper accountability for decisions and outcomes
The Corporate Governance Framework, which is designed to assist the Board of Directors in discharging their responsibilities, by ensuring an appropriate scheme of delegation throughout the Santander UK group.

Ring-fencing

As the substantive business of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group is currently conducted by Santander UK plc, our ring-fenced

bank under our currrent business model, the PRA has granted a number of rule modifications to enable Santander UK plc and Santander UK Group Holdings plc to operate simultaneous boards and board committees with common director membership. This enables them to run efficiently and supports effective oversight of the business.

We have reviewed our governance arrangements to ensure full compliance with the Banking Reform Act. This included elevating the Corporate Governance Framework to operate at the level of Santander UK Group Holdings plc, whereas previously it operated at the Santander UK plc level. This provides coverage to entities within the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group that sit outside of the ring-fence. Further details are set out in the Board NominationAudit Committee Chair’s report.

Board membershipreport

Through Our responsibilities include oversight of

the Board Nomination Committee, we ensure we haveintegrity of financial reporting and

controls, the right composition of individuals on the Board, providing an appropriate balance of skills, experience and perspectives and regularly review succession planning in order to maintain a strong Board and executive talent pipeline. Board and senior management succession was also the focus of a number of Board dinners during the year.

We have appointed Susan Allen as Executive Director and Head of Retail and Business Banking with effect from 1 January 2019, in place of Javier San Felix who returned to a Group role at Banco Santander SA. We also appointed Julie Chakraverty as an IndependentNon-Executive Director (INED) on 11 June 2018. The appointments add to the Board’s skills and experience in financial services, digital and innovation and risk management.

During 2018, two of ourNon-Executive Directors stepped down from the Board. Alain Dromer, an INED, resigned with effect from 31 August 2018 after five years and Juan Inciarte, oneeffectiveness of our Group NEDs, retired on 31 December 2018 after fourteen years oninternal

audit function, the Board.relationship with the

On behalf of the Board, I would like to thank Javier San Felix, Juan Inciarte and Alain Dromer for their invaluable service to the Boardexternal auditors and the Company.adequacy of

As a Board, we set ourselves a diversity target of 33% female representation on the Board by 2020. We have exceeded this target, well in advance of the deadline, with a current female representation of 54%.

LOGO

(1) In addition, ad hoc Board Committee meetings were held to consider the Company’s application for the RBS Alternative Remedies Incentivised Switching Scheme and conduct matters.

(2) 2018 data reflects total Board time spent in Board meetings, Board workshops, Board lunches and the Board Strategy Day to give a more complete view of how the Board spent its time in 2018. This is a change from 2017, where the data reflects time spent in Board meetings only.

LOGO

The Board aspires to become the best governed bank, supporting Santander UK’s aim to be the best bank for our people, customers, shareholder and communities.”

LOGO

Shriti Vadera

Chair

26 February 2019

Board activities

Read more onp23

Board membership,

tenure and

attendance

Read more onp47

22    Santander UK plc


> Corporate governance report

our whistleblowing arrangements.

 

 

We anticipate this ratio will decline this year as

LOGO

In 2019, we lookmonitored our exposure to return our Board size to 14 Directors. I am pleased that the ratio will remain at or close to target and represents a significant improvement from the 13% female representation in 2015. All aspects of diversity form part of our Board succession planning process, which is explainedPPI in the context of the time bar, reviewed the provisions and disclosures for other conduct and operational matters, performed oversight of management’s responses to Internal Audit reviews and reviewed the weights of economic scenarios in respect of IFRS 9 ECL calculations given political and economic uncertainties, including Brexit.

LOGO

Chris Jones

Board NominationAudit Committee Chair’s report.Chair

24 March 2020

  

LOGO

*  Board and Committee meetings held concurrently with Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Board Committees

The Board delegates certain responsibilities to Board Committees to help discharge its duties, as set out later in this section. The Committees play an essential role in supporting the Board in these duties, providing focused oversight of key areas and aspects of the business.

The role and responsibilities of the Board and Board Committees are set out in formal Terms of Reference. These are reviewed at least annually as part of the review of the Corporate Governance Framework.

During 2018, the annual review focused on considering the impacts of ring-fencing legislation, as well as assessing the consequences of changes to the Code.

Board activities

The Chair, with the CEO and Company Secretary, and with the support of all Directors and senior management, ensure that the Board has an appropriate schedule so that its time is focused on matters of strategic importance to the business and monitoring of risks and controls.

The Board monitors progress against the strategic priorities on a regular basis. it also held its annual Strategy Offsite in June where it gave particular focus to the three year strategy, together with our longer-term plans and aspirations, recognising the internal and external challenges faced in light of our competitive and uncertain operating environment.

To ensure the most effective use of the time at Board meetings, in addition to the delegation of certain responsibilities to the Board Committees, the Board has Board dinners, external speaker lunches and workshops.

Summary of Board activities in 2018

The Board’s activities in 2018 included the following themes:

    

ThemeResponsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

 

Committee membership

and attendance

Read more onp59

 

Actions taken by the Board and outcomes

 

Overview of the year

In 2019, the main activities of the Committee included:

Business and Customer

– Reviewed, challengedAssessing the appropriateness of key management judgements and remained apprisedrelated reporting each quarter.

Considering our exposure to, provisioning for and disclosure of PPI related matters given a number of factors including claims volumes and the expiration of the performancePPI deadline.

Monitoring the embedding of IFRS 9, including operation of, and strategykey changes to, models and methodologies, impacts and related controls with a particular focus on the weights applied to the economic scenarios given political and economic uncertainties, including Brexit, as well as Year 2 disclosure enhancements.

Reviewing our contingent liability disclosures, including those relating to conduct.

Considering the adequacy of comfort on our risk-weighted assets reporting.

Reviewing the actuarial assumptions of the business divisionspension scheme accounting valuation as well as the triennial valuation.

Monitoring management’s responses to various industry reviews of the UK statutory audit market and functions, strategic business opportunities and developments with customer experience.Financial Reporting Council.

– Reviewed, challenged and approvedProviding oversight on the3-year business plan (2018-2021) and the Budget for 2019, including cost efficiencies and associated risk assessments.

– Received and discussed regular updates on ring-fencing, including considering options in relation to the Jersey and Isle of Man branches.

Strategy

– The Board held its annual Strategy Day in June 2018. They discussed: a comprehensive industry overview including banking trends and competitors, the Banco Santander-wide strategy and synergies between Banco Santander and Santander UK; M&A market opportunities; the three year business plan; strategies for Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking, Santander Services and Property; Strategic workforce planning; and digital and transformation programmes.

Regulation, Balance Sheet and capital

– Reviewed, challenged and approved the ICAAP, ILAAP, and Recovery and Resolution Plan; adequacy and effectiveness of stress-testing and capital management; Ring-Fencing Programme; Dividends and AT1 Payments.internal controls over financial reporting.

– Received regular updates on capital planning.

– Considered asset and liability management activities and was appraised of regulatory developments.

– Approved policies including the Volcker Policy, Modern Slavery Statement, Money Laundering policy and Ring-Fencing related policies.

– Participated in the 2018 BoE Concurrent Stress Test, agreeing key assumptions and capabilities and approved the final submission.

Risk and control

– Reviewed, challenged and approved the update to the Risk Appetite and monitored performance across all risk types.

– Received regular enterprise wide risk updates from the CRO, together with updates on specific risks, such as pensions, cyber security, Brexit.

People and Culture

– Received updates on issues including HR strategy, talent management and succession planning, gender pay, and diversity and inclusion.

– Considered the annual Whistleblowing Report.

– Received updates on culture, considering our long-term strategic direction and assessment findings from the Banking Standards Board.

Governance

– Considered the impact of Ring-Fencing legislation on governance arrangements, and made consequential revisions to the Corporate Governance Framework and UK Group Framework.

– Approved the appointment of a new INED and executive director.

– Reviewed, challenged and approved Santander UK’s Annual Report.

– AssessedOverseeing the performance of the Board, its CommitteesInternal Audit function.

Continuing oversight of interaction with our External Auditors.

Overseeing Santander UK’s whistleblowing arrangements, including further enhancements in line with FCA guidance and the Chair. Received regular updates from Board Committees, via the Chairs.rules on whistleblowing.

Reviewing Santander UK’s Recovery Plan and management’s plans in respect of the incoming Resolvability Assessment Framework.

 Approved revised Board strategic priorities.

Monitoring the transition for the incoming CFO as well as changes to key management in the Finance function.

We also addressed other responsibilities delegated to the Committee by the Board.

LOGOCommittee Membership

Julie Chakraverty retired on 7 May 2019 and I would like to thank her for her service on behalf of the Committee. We welcomed Garrett Curran, who joined the Committee in May 2019. Garrett brings extensive financial services experience and strong risk management credentials.

At 31 December 2019, all four members of the Committee were IndependentNon-Executive Directors. The Committee also met the necessary requirements of independence throughout the year, in accordance with the requirements of Rule10A-3 under the US Securities Exchange Act 1934.

LOGO

 

 

42Santander UK plc23


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Chair’s report on corporate governancecontinued

The Board ensures regular contact with senior management through a number of means. These include inviting relevant business and function heads to present to the Board or its Committees on current developments; permitting observers as part of individual senior managers’ development plans; scheduling regular meetings for Committee Chairs to meet with relevant senior managers; site visits by one or more Directors; and topical or technical workshops.

In addition, senior leaders make themselves available to the NEDs throughout the year. The Board also held one of its meetings in our Milton Keynes office where it met with local staff to understand further the work they were doing in relation to Innovation, Keep It Simple Santander (KISS), Financial Crime and Complaints.

Board strategic priorities

The Board aspires to become the best governed bank, supporting Santander UK’s aim to be the best retail and commercial bank in the UK for our people, customers, shareholder and communities, helping people and business prosper and earning their lasting loyalty. In order to achieve this aspiration, the Board revised its strategic priorities including its focus on strategy and transformation, performance monitoring, management succession and responsibility to our stakeholders.

Director inductions and training

The delivery of our tailored NED induction programmes for our new appointments continued through 2018. As a new INED, Julie Chakraverty benefited from a tailored induction programme.

This included meetings with senior management and a number of site visits. All other NEDs have ongoing development plans. The Company Secretary supports the Chair in designing individual inductions for NEDs, which include site visits and cover topics such as strategy, key risks and current issues including the legal and regulatory landscape.

Throughout 2018, we continued to deliver regular workshops for all NEDs to further develop their knowledge and understanding of key business issues including the use of data in financial services, platforms & systems architecture, financial crime, ring-fencing, significant risk transfers and risk models. In 2018 this was supplemented with visits to corporate sites and branches. A summary of the Board’s activities in 2018 is set on page 23.

  

Board Committee responsibilities

 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
    

Key responsibilities

Board

Nomination

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more on p25

  Board Nomination Committee

– Review the Board’s structure, size and composition, including skills, knowledge, experience and diversity.

– Consider succession planning for Directors and Senior Executives.

– Identify and nominate candidates to fill Board vacancies as and when they arise.

– Assess the performance of the Board.

– Review each year whether NEDs have dedicated enough time to their duties to have been effective.

– Oversee governance arrangements.

Board Risk

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp27

  Board Risk Committee

– Advise the Board on the enterprise wide risk profile, Risk Appetite and strategy.

– Review the enterprise wide risk profile through business updates from the First Line of Defence and regular reports and updates on each key risk type from the Second Line of Defence.

– Provide advice, oversight and challenge to embed and maintain a supportive risk culture.

– Review the Risk Framework and recommend it to the Board for approval.

– Review and approve the key risk type and risk activity frameworks identified in the Risk Framework.

– Review the capability to identify and manage new risks and risk types.

– Oversee and challenge theday-to-day risk management actions and oversight arrangements and adherence to risk frameworks and policies.

Board Audit

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp33

  Board Audit Committee

– Monitor and review the integrity of the financial reporting.

– Keep under review the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal financial controls.

– Review the adequacy of Whistleblowing arrangements.

– Monitor and review the effectiveness of the Internal Audit function.

– Assess the performance of the External Auditors and oversight of their independence.

Board

Responsible

Banking

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp39

Board Responsible Banking Committee

– Oversee culture and operational risks relating to conduct, compliance, competition, financial crime and legal matters set within the Risk Appetites and Risk Framework.

– Ensure adequate and effective control processes and policies for conduct and compliance risk, fair customer treatment and customer outcomes.

– Monitor, challenge and support management in its efforts to evolve conduct, culture and ethical standards through sustained effectiveness of Santander UK’s values and nine behaviours.

– Oversee the reputation of Santander UK and how it impacts its brand and market positioning, and the Corporate and Social Responsibility Programme.

Board

Remuneration

Committee

Chair’s report

Read more onp41

Board Remuneration Committee

– Approve and oversee the remuneration governance framework.

– Oversee implementation of remuneration policies, ensuring they promote sound, effective risk management.

– Consider and approve specific remuneration packages for EDs and other senior management.

– Review and approve regulatory submissions in relation to remuneration.

– Approve the variable pay pools for EDs and other senior management, including the application of risk adjustment as appropriate.

24    Santander UK plc


> Corporate governance report

Board Nomination Committee Chair’s report

The Committee has focused on Succession Planning

and Governance throughout the year

Overview of the year

The Committee met on four occasions in 2018. The majority of its time was spent overseeing changes in the membership of the Board and Board Committees and on senior management succession planning and most of its business was conducted virtually.

The Committee also reviewed the collective skills of the Board, time commitments and Directors’ conflicts of interest and reviewed governance arrangements in light of ring-fencing and changes to the UK Corporate Governance Code.

Furthermore, the Committee also undertook an internal review of the Board and its Committees’ Effectiveness.

Committee membership, Board changes and Succession Planning

There have been no changes to the Committee’s membership in 2018.

During the year, Alain Dromer (INED), Juan Inciarte (a Banco Santander nominated NED) and Javier San Felix (Executive Director (ED)) stepped down from the Board.

As referred to in my report on Corporate Governance on page 22, following assessment by the Committee as to suitability, the Committee recommended to the Board the appointments of Julie Chakraverty (INED) and Susan Allen (ED). Between them, Susan and Julie add a wealth of experience in financial services, digital and innovation, risk management and retail banking. In making the appointments, the Committee considered the overall mix of skills, experience and diversity on the Board.

The Committee continued to review the membership of the Board’s Committees during the course of the year. This resulted in certain Committee membership changes as explained in the respective Committee reports.

All Committees continue to be chaired by INEDs and have only INEDs as members, other than the Board Nomination Committee and Board Risk Committee where the membership has included one Group nominated NED. The membership of the Committees is set out on page 47.

The Committee also kept under review executive succession planning with a number of changes being made during the year to the CEO’s direct reports.

Diversity and inclusion

In 2016, we set an aspirational target of having 33% women on the Board by 2020. Following the appointment of Julie Chakraverty in June 2018 and Susan Allen in January 2019 we achieved a ratio of 54%, ahead of target, although we anticipate that this will decline during the year.

We also signed up to the HM Treasury Women in Finance Charter and aim to create gender balance by setting a target of 50%(+/-10%) women in senior roles (excluding Board members) – by 2021.

LOGO

Responsibilities
of the Committee

Read more on p24

We continue to ensure
that gender and all aspects
of diversity remain front
of mind in our succession
planning.”

Committee
membership,
tenure and
attendance

Read more onp47

LOGO

Shriti Vadera

Chair

26 February 2019

LOGO

Santander UK plc25


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

 

Board Nomination Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

We will continue to strive toward gender balance. Santander UK has committed to gender targets for our senior female management population,Significant financial reporting issues and we have embedded these into our Executive Committee annual performance objectives.

We will continue to ensure that gender and all aspects of diversity remain front of mind in our succession planning. In this regard, the Board have signed up to the Business in the Community ‘Race at Work’ Charter.

Governancejudgements

DuringThe use of assumptions or estimates and the year, the Committee has beenapplication of management judgement is an essential part of financial reporting. In 2019, we focused on governance including monitoring corporate governance developments, considering the impacts of ring-fencingfollowing significant reporting matters in relation to financial accounting and conducting the annual review of our Corporate Governance Framework.

In 2018, the Committee considered the changes to the 2016 UK Corporate Governance Code and gave particular focus to the recommendations in respect of Employee engagement methods. Plans are being developed to enable the Board to have more dialogue with employees on topics requiring direct feedback such as the Board exploring emerging subjects of interest with a group of volunteer employees via virtual orface-to-face focus groups.

The Committee also considered changes to our Corporate Governance Framework and UK Group Framework to ensure compliance with ring-fencing rules.

Annual review of director interests, time commitment, conflicts of interest and fees

During the year, the Committee continued to review any potential conflicts of interest to ensure any conflicts are managed appropriately and in compliance with CRD IV and ring-fencing requirements. The time commitments of the Directors were also reviewed to ensure they have sufficient time available to discharge their responsibilities and to be effective members of the Board. The review of time commitments showed that Directors are able to dedicate sufficient time to their commitments on the Board and Board Committees.

Santander UK’s Articles of Association contain provisions that allow the Board to consider and, if it sees fit, to authorise situational conflicts. The Board confirms that such powers have operated effectively and that a formal system for Directors to declare their interests and for thenon-conflicted Directors to authorise situational conflicts continues to be in place. Any authorisations given are recorded by the Company Secretary.

Board Effectiveness (actions and review)

During 2018, the Committee continued to review progress against the actions from the 2016 and 2017 evaluations, which concluded that the performance of the Board, its Committees, the Chair and each of the Directors continues to be effective.

In addition, during the year, the Board conducted an internally facilitated evaluation of its own performance and that of its Committees. Individual Directors’ assessments were also conducted and the Senior Independent Director undertook his twice-yearly assessment of the performance of the Chair.

The performance assessment results show that the Committee, the Board and its Committees continue to operate effectively. The actions arising from the review include rebalancing time spent on strategic, business performance, regulatory and other matters following implementation of ring-fencing, together with further enhancement of Board reporting andco-ordination of Board Committee agendas.

The Board intends to comply with the UK Corporate Governance Code guidance that the evaluation should be externally facilitated at least every three years and expects to commission the next externally facilitated review in 2020.

Priorities for 2019

Over the next year we will continue to work on talent and succession planning, in particular on executive and senior management succession and NEDs’ continuing development.

26    Santander UK plc


> Corporate governance report

Board Risk Committee Chair’s report

The Committee supports the Board in ensuring that the business operates within agreed Risk Appetite while reviewing the capability to identify and manage new and emerging risks.

Overview of the year

The Committee considered a wide range of risks to our customers and our business in 2018, including:

The execution of the ring-fencing programme
Contingency planning in respect of Brexit
Credit, both retail and commercial
Capital and liquidity
Operational risks; and
The resilience of our systems to fraud, data and cyber risks.

LOGO

We reviewed the top risks at each meeting and also received regular updates on specific matters such as stress testing, market risk and pension risk.

The Board Risk Committee maintains a holistic view of Enterprise-Wide risks and, to help achieve this, there is appropriate cross-membership between this Committee and both the Board Responsible Banking Committee and the Board Audit Committee.

Responsibility for oversight of financial crime risk transitioned to the Board Responsible Banking Committee in Q3 2017; however, the Board Risk Committee retains ultimate oversight, including oversight of risk appetite with respect to conduct and regulatory, reputational and financial crime risks considered by the Board Responsible Banking Committee.

Membership

There have been three changes to the membership of the Committee during the year: Julie Chakraverty became a member in June, Alain Dromer left the Committee on his retirement from the Board in August, and Juan Inciarte stepped down on his retirement from the Board at the end of the year.

Alain had been a member of the Committee since January 2016 and Juan since September 2015. I would like to take this opportunity to thank both Alain and Juan, on behalf of the Committee, for their valuable contributions to our discussions. I would also like to welcome Julie.

I believe that the Committee retains an appropriate balance of skills and expertise to carry out its role effectively.

The Terms of Reference require the majority of the members to be IndependentNon-Executive Directors. This criterion was met throughout the year.

LOGOResponsibilities
of the Committee

Read more onp24

The Committee supported
management’s strategic
approach to Santander
Services in preference
to implementing interim
tactical solutions.”

LOGO

Ed Giera

Board Risk Committee Chair
26 February 2019

Committee
membership,
tenure and
attendance

Read more on p47

LOGO

Santander UK plc27


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Board Risk Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

Meeting our key responsibilities in 2018

The Committee addressed our key responsibilities relating to Risk Appetite and the Risk Framework, as well as our oversight of stress testing and liquidity, as set out below, together with a selection of challenges raised relating to certain risk categories. For more on our responsibilities relating to risk management and internal controls see page 32.

Significant areas of focusdisclosures:

 

   Area of focusFinancial reporting

   issue or judgement

 Action taken by the Board RiskAudit Committee Outcome
   Risk Appetite

–  Considered a number of changes proposed to the Board’s Risk Appetite Statement as part of the Annual Risk Appetite Review.Conduct provisions

–  Noted some material reductions to certain credit limitsThe provision for conduct remediation activities for PPI and challenged management on its proposal to increase the appetite in respect of the renewable energy portfolio, and requested assurance in respect of asset valuations given the lack of history in the sector.

–  Received management’s proposals for how the Risk Appetite would needother products continued to be updated to reflect ring-fencing implementation.

–  Reviewed management’s minor adjustments to underwriting criteria to enable greater utilisation of existing risk appetite.

–  Monitored management’s progress on addressing Financial Crime risk exposure relative to risk appetite.highly judgemental and requires significant assumptions including claim volumes and Plevin in scope rates.

 

– Following challenge, we expressed confidence that management was cognisantContinued to scrutinise the level and adequacy of conduct provisions and challenged the reasonableness of management’s assumptions throughout the year.

– In respect of PPI including Plevin, the Committee:

– Reviewed the judgements and estimates in respect of the risksprovision considering management’s assumptions around changes in claim volumes, uphold rates and issues relating to the renewables sector.

–  Recommended management’s proposed amendments to Risk Appetite to the Board for approval.

–  Asked management to progress recalibrationaverage cost of risk appetite and return in H1 2019.

–  Confirmed that utilisation of mortgage credit risk capacity remained within risk appetite.

–  Assessed management’s progress relative to Risk Appetiteredress. This was in the context of key developments in the Financial Crime Transformation Programme.year, taking into account the implementation of the FCA’s consumer deadline ‘time bar’ on PPI complaints of 29 August 2019, our specific approach to auto conversion and the appointment of Deloitte to assist the Official Receiver for certain individuals subject to bankruptcy court orders.

– Noted the very significant increase in the levels of customer information requests and complaints in the time leading up to the implementation of the time bar, and its impact on the provision.

– Inquired as to the methodology management had adopted in determining the top end of the range of their estimates of the additional charge that should be made for PPI as a result of the increase in complaints.

– Noted that the PPI model is an expert judgement model and therefore had not gone through the standard model governance process. Requested that management explain the governance and controls in place around the model to ensure the accuracy of its financial outputs, and invited the Head of Internal Audit to comment.

– In respect of other products, the Committee reviewed management’s judgements and estimates in respect of the provision.

– Endorsed management’s recommendation that additional charges of £70m in Q2 2019 and £99m in Q3 2019 should be made for PPI.

– Considered the classification and disclosure of provisions related to a specific PPI related portfolio which is the subject of litigation, together with an associated contingent liability.

– Received a report from management on the governance and controls in place around the PPI model, including controls that are tested as part of the Sarbanes-Oxley compliance process. Noted that Internal Audit had reviewed the PPI model but had not identified any significant concerns.

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of conduct provisions and disclosures, including PPI and other products.

– We continued to monitor the provisioning levels in light of any changes to claims volumes, inflows and average redress costs.

 

For moresee page 57See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

See Note 27 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

   Risk Framework

–  Received an update followingCredit provisions

Ensuring appropriate application and embedding of IFRS 9 is a significant area of judgement given its technical complexity, the annual certification process,number of judgements needed, and assessedtheir potential impact. Determining the extentappropriateness of credit provisions is also highly judgemental, requiring management to which the Risk Framework had been effectively implemented and embedded across the business.

–  Received management’s proposals for how the Risk Framework would need to be updated to reflect the implementationmake a number of Banking Reform in 2019.assumptions.

 

–  Noted the Risk function’s confirmation that the Risk Framework was sufficiently understood and implemented across the business and that there was transparency and ownershipEmbedding of any areas for improved compliance.IFRS 9

– RecommendedMonitored the proposedembedding of IFRS 9, including changes to the Board for approval.controls environment, throughout the year.

– Reviewed management decisions and challenged key assumptions.

– Reviewed the operation of, and key changes to, models and methodologies and their impacts. We placed particular focus on the weights applied to the economic scenarios given political and economic risks, including Brexit.

For moresee pages 53– Reviewed the proposed approach to 56year-end disclosures, including the Year 2 recommendations of the PRA’s Taskforce on Disclosures about ECL.

   Stress testing 

–  Monitored the 2018 Bank of England Concurrent Stress Test exercise, and received updates throughout the process. We questioned the ability of our systems to process data seamlessly and discussed the additional complexity created by the IFRS 9 model implementation.

– ConsideredSatisfied ourselves that management continued to have a robust methodology for evaluating the results of the stress test both on an IFRS 9 transitional basismodels given their complexity and on an IFRS 9 basis without transitional arrangements.a clear trail of their workings, particularly due to the models’ key outputs.

– Received a specific paper, produced byObtained comfort on the Risk team, with detailsadequacy of risk managementdata in stress testing.the context of the evolving control environment.

– Noted that risks associated with Santander UK’s suite of stress testing models had generally improved across the last year; however, the introduction of IFRS 9model and methodology changes had been a material driver of stress, and management alignedapproved by the models, approaches and judgements as far as possible withModel Risk Management Forum.

– Endorsed the approach in 2017, to assess the impact of IFRS 9.

–  Questioned whether sufficient resource was planned and available for the ongoing multi-year effort to improve Santander UK’s suite of stress testing models.

–  Recommended the governance arrangements, process, controls and stress test results to the Board for approval and onward submission to the PRA.

–  Committee members were provided with greater insight to review the most significant models.

–  Supported management on the allocation of resources for planned stress testing model enhancements and requested a holistic view of the resource requirements as part of the next update.proposedyear-end disclosures.

 

For moresee page 58

28    Santander UK plc


> Corporate governance report

    Area of focusAction taken bySee the Board Risk CommitteeOutcome
   Ring-fencing

–  Received frequent updates on the ring-fencing programme both as part of the Enterprise Wide Risk Management Reports and separately. These updates focused on the ring-fencing programme’s top risks and mitigating actions, including operational, legal, execution and regulatory risks related to completion of the programme.

–  Reviewed the options in respect of the Crown Dependencies business comprising branches in Jersey and Isle of Man and their relative merits from a regulatory perspective.

–  Considered proposals for how both the Risk Framework and Risk Appetite would need to be updated to reflect ring-fencing.

–  Sought assurance that management would conduct shadow monitoring of the proposed changes to the Risk Appetite in therun-up to formal implementation of ring-fencing.

–  Considered the Ring-Fenced Body Permitted Exceptions Policy, focusing on the governance and waterfall of attestation processes. We questioned management on the challenges of applying the policy in practice, including how the process for transaction monitoring could be ‘dry run’. We also noted the risk of complacency developing should the policy have to be applied too frequently on the introduction of ring-fencing in 2019.

–  In the course of monitoring progress on the execution of the ring-fencing programme, we:

–  Recommended the changes to the Risk Appetite and Risk Framework to the Board.

–  Recommended the Ring-Fenced Body Permitted Exceptions Policy to the Board for approval.

For moresee page 211

   Santander Services

–  Sought assurance from management that the pace of change relating to digitalisation and systems improvement was appropriate, and requested timely escalation of material changes and responses to material incidents.

–  Discussed Santander UK’s role with other firms in working with the regulator to develop the technology for blockchain reporting.

–  Received updates on cyber risk and the strategy and risk management relating to cloud usage.

–  Considered the execution risks, and benefits, associated with a migration away from the existing technology infrastructure and emphasised the need for both Board-level involvement as well as alignment with Banco Santander group in the associated debate and decisions impacting data management and key systems architecture.

–  Questioned management on the risks to the execution of the transformation programme related to recruitment of skilled staff.

–  Considered the increased third party risks that might arise as partnering arrangements increased on infrastructure, data and cloud migration.

–  Received updates from the Chief Data Officer who advised that progress continued in aligning data strategy with the increased focus on efficiency, robustness and risk management and noted the need for ongoing investment.

–  Agreed that this additional information would be included in the Enterprise- Wide Risk Management Report in future.

–  Requested a further update on the risks of significant projects, such as the transition to new architectures so that the Committee had a holistic view of significant risks.

–  Supported management’s strategic approach to Santander Services in preference to implementing interim tactical solutions.

   Brexit

–  Received updates on management’s contingency plans as we continued to monitor the risks and potential impact to Santander UK of the negotiation of terms for the Withdrawal Agreement setting out the basis on which the UK intends to leave the EU.

–  Discussed access to financial markets infrastructure, most notably derivatives clearing. In particular, we discussed the significant risks in respect of the treatment of back-book derivatives in the event that London-based clearing is not recognised by the European authorities.

–  Considered data transmission, processing and storage, access to payment services and contract continuity.

–  Questioned management on any actions that may be needed in the relatively short term, including contractre-papering, as well as the potential macro-economic risks.

–  Emphasised the need for coordination with Banco Santander on any actions taken impacting customers and our employees working in the UK as EU nationals, in particular.

–  We continue to monitor political developments and to review and challenge management’s contingency plans for Brexit, including a scenario for UK withdrawal without Parliament supporting a negotiated Withdrawal Agreement to mitigate risk exposures.

For more, see Our Key Operational Risks‘Credit risk’ section in the Risk Review.review.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 2943


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Annual Report 2019Board Risk Committee Chair’s report|continued Governance

    

 

Oversight and advice to the Board on Santander UK’s current risk exposure and future risk strategyAudit Committee Chair’s report

In 2018, we reviewed Santander UK’s exposure to the risks outlined below and analysed emerging themes, including regulatory, macro-economic and global risks, which could affect Santander UK’s ability to achieve its strategic goals.

    RiskcontinuedAction taken by the Board Risk CommitteeOutcome
   Pension risk

–  Considered papers on investment strategy and governance and confirmed the status of all the governance actions presented to the Committee in September 2017.

–  Sought assurance around the effectiveness of the new pension governance arrangements.

–  Noted the agreement in principle with the trustees to continue along the path ofde-risking the pension plans, inclusive of adjusting asset allocation over time, and increasing hedging of interest rate risk, and adjusting the hedge portfolio for inflation and equity risks, respectively.

–  Queried management’s confidence in the changes in strategy intended to reduce the funding deficit at risk given a decrease in market risk and an increase in manager risk.

–  Confirmed and supported the continued development of the pension investment portfolio transition and risk management strategies, and governance arrangements with the pension trustees. Management noted the initial phase of the portfolio transition strategy had been negotiated with the trustees, and also noted the manager selection process involved.

For moresee pages 114 to 116

   Credit risk

–  Received updates on various corporate exposures and, in relation to Carillion plc, noted the key learning points from management’s assessment of corporate credit monitoring and approval processes, operational procedures in the delivery of supply chain financing and receivables purchase programme products.

–  Reviewed Santander UK’s exposure to corporate leveraged loans in accordance with regulatory concerns in the UK and internationally with respect to the status of the credit cycle, market conditions, and the risk of potential economic shocks.

–  In respect of retail unsecured credit, we considered the status and management of regulatory, operational and conduct risks in connection with the delivery of positive customer journeys and outcomes.

–  Received updates on the retail mortgage book, including Interest Only mortgages, and we questioned the basis for management’s decision making in light of the credit cycle, as well as in relation to tactical competitive adjustments in the ordinary course of business.

–  Noted management’s plans to introduce new retail mortgage products in response to market and regulatory developments.

–  Monitored utilisation of existing risk appetite and requested that the Committee has early and comprehensive assessments from Line 2 of any material adjustments to credit policy or risk limits recommended by management in connection with the update of the three year plan.

–  Counselled management on the need for a comprehensive approach with the Banco Santander Risk function, and also to recognise the broader credit risks, including concentrations, which might evolve from industry or market responses to emerging risks, including climate change.

For moresee pages 59 to 95

   Strategic risk

–  Discussed the strategic threats to Santander UK’s capacity to defend and build further franchise value.

–  Considered the advantages and benefits of developing specific scenarios around certain strategic risks, in addition to assigning risk metrics.

–  Challenged management to include a longer term perspective in developing the ‘Top Risk’ log for each Enterprise- Wide Risk Management Report, and to avoid responding to long-term risks with short-term solutions.

For moresee page 125

   Liquidity risk

–  Considered the 2018 Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP) and questioned management about the flexibility and alacrity of our liquidity reporting.

–  Agreed to recommend the 2018 ILAAP to the Board for approval.

For moresee pages 103 to 105

30    Santander UK plc


> Corporate governance report

    

 

   RiskFinancial reporting

   issue or judgement

 Action taken by the Board RiskAudit Committee Outcome

   Capital riskCredit provisions continued

 

–  Considered, from a capital risk perspective, dividends payable on AT1 securities, and the ordinary dividends proposed to be paid by Santander UK plc atmid-year andyear-end respectively.Retail credit provisions

– Reviewed detailed reports from management throughout the Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP) and noted material enhancementsyear analysing the proposed provisions by key product.

– Considered management’s proposals to apply Post Model Adjustments (PMAs) to the previous process made by management.

–  Noted the impacts of the application of IFRS 9.

–  Sought clarity on the key driversmortgage model to volatility in the CET1 ratioaddress interest-only maturity default risk,buy-to-let and considered management’s proposals for various risk and capital management initiatives, including an application for a new internal ratings based (IRB) regulatory capital model for the mortgage book, as well as the securitisation of certain assets.

–  Received updates on progress in respect of the risk management initiatives proposed during the year, and challenged management on execution, operating, and regulatory risks.

long-term indeterminate arrears.

 

– RecommendedAgreed with management’s judgement on the paymentlevel of dividends to the Board for approval.

–  Commentsretail credit provisions, concluding that provisions remain robust and challenges received from Committee membersassumptions were considered by management and incorporated into the final draft ICAAP.appropriate.

– Agreed to recommendwith management’s recommendations for the ICAAPcontinued application of PMAs in relation to the Board for approval.mortgage model, including changes and updates to the PMA population.

– AgreedWe will continue to recommend the plans for potential risk and capital management actions to the Board for approval.

–  Requested that management develop an aggregate risk assessment of the entire securitisation programme for regular review.monitor retail credit provisions.

 

For moresee pages 111See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to 113the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See Note 13 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

   Operational risk 

Corporate credit provisions

– NotedReviewed reports from management throughout the designyear, including consideration of individually assessed impairments and implementationPMAs, to satisfy ourselves as to the completeness of the Operational Risk Framework, the downward trend of operational losses and management’s shift in focus toward business continuity as opposed to appetite for financial loss in respect of operational resiliency.provision requirements.

– Noted management’s development of a risk appetite measure for change capacity, including appropriate metrics to define the boundaries for acceptable practice when working to an ‘agile’ change methodology.that corporate credit provisions can be more volatile than retail credit provisions, and may be supported by more limited data.

– Received regular updatesConsidered reports on management’s strategies for mitigating cyber risk and third party risk,specific cases, as well as on crystallised operational risk incidents impactinga review of the rest of the portfolio, to identify other companies, and considered how these had impacted our own customers, as well as any lessonscases or industry sectors that could potentially be learned.at risk, including the retail sector.

– Highlighted the need for strong programme management disciplines around change, considered how well our key suppliers might hold up under stress,Discussed other exposures and commented on the usefulness of KPIs and service availability indices.

–  Noted an update on the status of the General Data Protection Regulation (GDPR) Programme.

satisfied ourselves that no material adjustments to provision levels were required.

 

– Monitored the impacts on operational risk and key controls associatedAgreed with management’s executionjudgement on the level of the high volume of significant transformationcorporate credit provisions, concluding that provisions remain robust and remediation programmes.assumptions were appropriate.

– We will continue to monitor corporate credit provisions.

 

For moresee pages 120See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to 123the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See Note 13 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

   Model risk

–  Considered an updatePension obligations

Significant judgement is required on the regular monitoring of capital adequacy models.

–  Received a paper on the regulatory review of our proposed new mortgage IRB model. We debated the challenges associated with differing regulatory perspectives on the best approach to tacklethrough-the-cycle capital requirements, as well as the possibility of having to run two approaches in tandem.

key assumptions underlying defined benefit pension obligation calculations. Outcomes remain inherently uncertain.

 

– The Committee willReviewed detailed reports throughout the year on key assumptions underlying the defined benefit pension obligation calculations. We recognised that, although some assumptions are based on observable data, others continue to monitor progressrequire significant judgement.

– Considered the best estimate of our pension liabilities under IAS 19, recognising the inputs of external actuaries who generate financial assumptions and propose liabilities.

– Reviewed the results of the triennial funding valuation agreed in August 2019.

– Reviewed changes proposed as the result of a review of experience analysis by the Trustee, which informed the choice of demographic assumptions.

– Reviewed the regulatory capital impact of the changes.

– Monitored the continued appropriateness of the methodology and reviewed the inflation, discount and mortality rates applied at theyear-end.

– Noted that the proposed changes to demographic assumptions had been reviewed at the Pension Risk Forum and reviewed by Independent Model Risk Review.

– Agreed with management’s approach to the assumptions applied, including changes made in 2019.

– Endorsed the proposed quantitative and qualitativeyear-end disclosures in respect of regulatory approvalpension obligations.

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

See ‘Pension risk management’ in the Risk Review.

See Note 28 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Other areas

– Reviewed the appropriateness of the provision, and considered the disclosures required, in relation to i) a specific PPI portfolio of complaints and ii) our consumer credit business operations.

– Considered disclosures relating to the Cologne CPO and German FTO ongoing investigations of our historical involvement in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions.

– Reviewed the appropriateness of the accounting, and considered the disclosures required, relating to certain leases that are currently under review by HMRC in connection with claims for tax allowances.

– Endorsed management’s recommended provision and level of disclosure in these regards, including an additional provision of £10m for our consumer credit business operations.

– Endorsed the mortgage IRB model,proposedyear-end disclosures relating to German dividend tax arbitrage transactions.

– Endorsed management’s recommended accounting and request evidencelevel of appropriate model types, assumptionsdisclosure relating to the leases under review by HMRC.

See Notes 27 and calibration.29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

44Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

The Committee’s focus continues to be on areas of significant judgement which pose the greatest risk of a material financial statement misstatement. In addition to the areas set out in the preceding table, the Committee also considers other higher risk items. During the 2019year-end process, these included the identification and assessment of risks of material misstatement due to fraud or error and the controls over calculation of risk-weighted assets. We also received regular reports on any material litigation cases and their progress, as part of our consideration of provisions and contingent liabilities.

External Auditor

We continued to develop and oversee the interaction with PwC and with Mr Holloway in his fourth year as the audit partner, following PwC’s appointment in 2016. The independence and objectivity of PwC was considered and monitored throughout the year.

Oversight of the relationship with our External Auditors

As part of our review of our relationship with PwC, our activities included:

Consideration of their work and opinion relating to management judgements.

Review of the summary of misstatements not corrected by management. The Committee was satisfied that they were not quantitatively or qualitatively material, either individually or in the aggregate.

Discussion on the level of disclosure in the Annual Report and Half Yearly Financial Report to satisfy ourselves that it is appropriate.

Discussion of developments in financial reporting including changes to accounting standards, statute and best practice.

A review of PwC’s reports on findings and recommendations on internal control and financial reporting matters identified during their audit and their view of management’s progress in resolving them.

Interactions, including meetings in private session during each Committee meeting, and at other times throughout the year.

Reviewed the latest results of the FRC’s

quality inspections and our auditors’ response to the FRC’s challenge on the general quality of banking audits as well as enquired into the results of any audit quality reviews of Santander UK.

Based on the above inputs, which were captured in a formalised assessment, the Committee satisfied itself as to the rigour and quality of PwC’s audit process.

Non-audit fees

We have a robust policy onnon-audit services provided by our External Auditors, which was updated in 2016 in the context of the Revised Ethical Standard issued by the FRC on auditor independence requirements resulting from the European Audit Regulation and Directive.

Non-audit services were under continuous review throughout 2019 to determine that they were permitted by reference to their nature, assessing potential threats and safeguards to auditor independence as well as the overall ratio of audit tonon-audit fees.

All assignments require advance approval, either by the Chair (or in his absence his alternate), under delegated authority for amounts under £250,000 plus VAT or, if larger, by the full Committee. This process is in addition to the requirement for allnon-audit fees to be approved by the Banco Santander Audit Committee.

The fees fornon-audit work performed by PwC in the year, which are disclosed in Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, mainly comprised audit-related assurance services relating to the review of interim financial information of Santander UK, reporting in connection with the group’s regulators and support of various debt issuance programmes. We ensured that these met the external and internal tests for maintaining their independence.

In 2019, PwC’snon-audit related fees were 22% of their total audit fees, well within the internal cap of 70% approved by the Committee.

LOGOFees fornon-audit work performed by PwC in the year, other than those in relation to audit related assurance services, were approximately 2% of the average of the fees approved for Deloitte, EY and KPMG.

The Committee considered the findings of the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) market study into the UK Statutory Audit market and subsequent Business Energy & Industrial Strategy (BEIS) consultation as well as the Kingman independent review of the Financial Reporting Council and noted management’s responses to the CMA and BEIS consultations.

Internal controls

The Board Risk Committee has overall responsibility for the effectiveness of the internal control systems. However, due to the nature of internal control matters, there is a degree of overlap in responsibilities with those of this Committee, particularly regarding financial reporting controls.

Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires management to report on the design and effectiveness of its internal controls over financial reporting (ICFR) framework. During 2019, further enhancements have been introduced to the framework.

We considered the financial control environment in the year. Finance and our External and Internal Auditors provided regular reports to the Committee on ICFR, including key systems, and provided feedback on remediation and overall improvements required to ensure that the relevant controls were appropriately designed and operating effectively. This included access management, end user computing, controls over IFRS 9 and the Client Assets control environment.

 

 

Santander UK plc 3145


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

 


Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

Disclosure in the Annual Report

We received regular reports from the Disclosure Committee, a senior executive committee chaired by the CFO. Its remit is to advise the Committee on the completeness and accuracy of disclosures in Santander UK’s external reporting. This, together with other reports received in the year, and a review of best practice and the approach of our peers, enabled us to conclude that we were satisfied with the disclosures in this Annual Report.

Management also engaged the Board and Committee early on concerning the approach to the report which enabled them to provide input into the overall tone and messaging in a timely manner.

Fair, balanced and understandable

The Disclosure Committee also reports on whether the Annual Report is fair, balanced, and understandable, aligns with the quarterly results and whether it provides the information necessary for readers to assess Santander UK’s position and performance, business model and strategy:

Key messages remained consistent throughout the document, relating both to financial performance and progress against strategic priorities.

All key judgements, significant risks and issues are reported and explained clearly and adequately.

There is a clear framework to the document with good signposting and a complete picture of performance and events.

In addition to the above review process, the Committee’s assessment of fair, balanced and understandable is underpinned by the understanding it gains through the reporting made to it throughout the year of management judgements, internal control matters, Internal Audit activities and the reports of the External Auditors.

The Committee’s assessment also considers the robustness and outcomes of the assurance, review and verification processes conducted by management and considers whether the key risks reflected those that were of a concern to the Committee and were consistent with those reported by management.

Following our assessment we concluded that the 2019 Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable.

Financial Reporting Council (FRC) Annual Review of Corporate Reporting 2019/20

In October 2019, the FRC issued a report which sets out its perspective on key developments for 2019/20 annual reports. As part of our oversight of this area, we received and reviewed a report from management on its work in respect of the areas of interest to the FRC. We are satisfied that management addressed the areas identified by the FRC in the preparation of this Annual Report to the extent appropriate to our ownership structure.

Going Concern

We satisfied ourselves that it is appropriate to use the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements, supported by a detailed analysis provided to the Committee by senior finance management.

As part of the assessment, we considered whether there are sufficient financial resources, including liquidity and capital, available to continue the operations of Santander UK. We considered Santander UK’s resilience in the face of potential stress and prominent events. In making our assessment, we took into account all information of which we were aware about the future, which was at least, but not limited to, 12 months from the date that the balance sheet was signed.

Internal Audit

The Internal Audit plan, based on a comprehensive risk assessment, was presented in draft and then final form for challenge and approval by the Committee. The plan has been updated at regular intervals throughout the year in response to changes in the business and the regulatory environment and at the request of the Committee.

All unsatisfactory audit reports issued were subject to additional scrutiny by the Committee with the relevant business areas being required to present their action plans to the Committee.

We chose to invite management to present on progress with the implementation of Internal Audit’s recommendations, issues encountered, key milestones and key dependencies.

We received regular reports on audit recommendations from our Chief Internal Auditor (the Head of Internal Audit), quarterly Internal Audit reports and monitored findings as part of our oversight. We considered the total number of recommendations, the rationale for any of them becoming overdue, and broader root cause analyses. The Committee also requested that the Chief Internal Auditor highlight recommendations becoming due and any that were past due.

We noted a strong engagement between Internal Audit and the business in 2019.

We also oversaw the objective setting and performance evaluation of the Chief Internal Auditor.

Internal Audit External Quality Assessment

Throughout 2019, the Committee reviewed progress implementing the improvement opportunities identified in the External Quality Assessment of the Internal Audit function that was conducted in 2018. This review is conducted every five years and evaluates the Internal Audit function in respect of its conformance with the standards of the Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors (CIIA), as well as its performance and effectiveness in comparison to industry peers and good practice. The outcome of the review had been favourable with the function being compliant with the CIIA’s Guidance on Effective Internal Audit in Financial Services – Second Edition and also benchmarked well against peers.

Whistleblowing

Santander UK recognises the importance of a culture where colleagues feel able to speak up.

In 2019, management continued to make improvements to its whistleblowing framework and arrangements under our oversight. This included management changes within the whistleblowing teams as well as a change of management reporting line from legal to conduct and compliance within the Legal & Regulatory function, further embedding of operating procedures, expanded data analytics capability, targeted training and a reporting line more closely aligned to that used by the Banco Santander group in its whistleblowing programme. There has been significant senior management engagement and expanded staff whistleblowing communications and awareness events.

46Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

The Committee is responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Santander UK’s whistleblowing procedures. It received and consideredbi-annual reports on Santander UK’s whistleblowing arrangements. The reporting included oversight and progress of concerns, outcomes, identifiable trends, observable risks, the regulatory environment, changes to proposed legislation and activities to promote and enhance the arrangements to support the culture of speaking up. The Committee also reviewed the annual Whistleblowing Report prepared for the Board to consider. The Committee is satisfied that Santander UK has complied with the FCA and PRA regulations on whistleblowing in the year.

I continued to act as the Whistleblowers’ Champion to oversee the integrity, independence, and effectiveness of the whistleblowing arrangements. I remained focused on procedures and governance to prevent victimisation of those employees raising a whistleblowing concern. I meet regularly with management and I have been involved in overseeing the implementation of suggested enhancements to continuously improve the arrangements.

Effectiveness of the Committee

The Board has determined that I have the necessary qualifications and skills to qualify as a Board Audit Committee financial expert as defined in Item 16A of Form20-F and by reference to the NYSE listing standards.

In respect of the Revised Statutory Audit Directive, the Board satisfied itself that at least one member of the Committee had competence in accounting and auditing, and the members of the Committee as a whole had competence in the banking sector, in which we are operating.

In my capacity as Committee Chair, I meet with key members of the management team and the External Auditors in advance of each Committee meeting. I ensure that the Committee meets with management, the Internal Auditors and the External Auditors in private sessions. I also attend meetings with the PRA, the FCA and the FRC.

In line with an assessment of the Committee’s forward-looking agenda and the Board programme, it has been agreed that the number of scheduled meetings of the Committee will be ten in 2020.

Terms of Reference

The Committee reviews its Terms of Reference annually. Following the 2019 review, they were revised primarily to reflect the requirements of ring-fencing. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at www.aboutsantander.co.uk

Priorities for 2020

Areas of focus for the Committee for 2020 will include:

Monitoring any likely financial impact and disclosure consequences of conduct and litigation related issues.

The ongoing monitoring and reviewing of the operation of IFRS 9, including reviewing our enhanced disclosures in response to the recommendations of the PRA’s Taskforce on Disclosure about ECL.

The financial control and reporting implications of any change in the economy, including any arising from economic or political risks including Brexit.

Monitoring changes to the Resolvability Assessment Framework.

Assessing the impact of the Financial Reporting Council’s Revised Ethical Standard (due to take effect from March 2020) on the work that can be undertaken by PwC.

Monitoring the rotation of audit partners who have completed their term of service on the audit engagement team.

Succession planning in respect of the Chief Internal Auditor role.

Santander UK plc47


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Responsible Banking Committee Chair’s report

The Committee supports the Board with

oversight of culture, diversity and inclusion,

reputation, customer outcomes and the

wellbeing of our employees

LOGO

We have challenged management on delivering appropriate financial crime controls, managing regulatory change and maintaining focus on continuously improving our customers’ experiences.

LOGO

Scott Wheway

Responsible Banking Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership
and attendance

Read more onp59

Role and responsibilities

The purpose of the Committee is to strengthen focus on culture, conduct and customer outcomes. It monitors, challenges and supports actions taken by management to ensure that the business is run in a responsible way, in the interests of all of our stakeholders including customers, our people and communities in order to promote Santander UK’s long-term success.

The Committee supports the Board with shaping Santander UK’s culture, reputation and customer propositions through oversight of matters related to conduct, compliance, culture, diversity and inclusion, sustainability, corporate social responsibility, reputation, brand and financial crime. The oversight of financial crime includes anti-money laundering, sanctions, terrorist financing, anti-bribery and corruption and a key transformation programme of our controls and systems. In December, the Committee’s Terms of Reference were updated to include oversight of reputational aspects of climate change.

The Committee Chairs collaborate to prevent any gaps in coverage and to ensure that any areas of overlap are addressed in the appropriate forum. Committee Chairs are members of other Board Committees to ensure breadth of visibility and open channels of communication.

Overview of the year

In 2019, the Committee considered, monitored and challenged a range of matters, including:

Customers and Customer Outcomes

The Committee focused on:

Vulnerable customers;

Fair customer treatment and outcomes;

Fraud prevention and detection;

Themes arising from customer complaints, whistleblowing and satisfaction metrics, including referrals to the FOS;

Changes to overdraft charges;

GDPR requirements;

Open Banking implementation;

Resourcing; and

Enhancing technology to support our customer contact colleagues.

Reputational risk

The Committee ensured that adequate and effective control processes were in place to identify and manage reputational risks.

It received and considered reports detailing ongoing and possible reputational, brand and franchise risks, including media and public policy issues. The reports also included any key decisions or key risk events that may give rise to reputational risk issues.

Financial crime

The Committee:

Received regular updates on Financial Crime from the Money Laundering Reporting Officer, including his annual report, and endorsed the proposed recommendations;

Monitored progress of Santander UK in developing and implementing effective systems, processes and controls to combat financial crime;

LOGO

48Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
��

Received regular updates on financial crime from the retail and corporate businesses; and

Reviewed potential financial crime risks and any actions required in response, including in respect of international sanctions compliance.

Conduct and Compliance

The Committee:

Ensured that adequate and effective control processes and policies were in place to manage and measure Conduct and Compliance risk;

Considered key emerging Conduct and Compliance risk issues, lessons learned and anticipated risks via horizon scanning and investigations;

Received first and second line reporting against Conduct and Compliance risk metrics and reports on conduct-related regulatory interaction matters;

Considered the FCA Firm-Wide Evaluation and appropriate response plans;

Considered the 2019 Compliance Programme, including resourcing in the 2019 Compliance Monitoring Plan; and

Considered any actions in response to regulatory developments, including individual and market developments, on Conduct and Compliance risk matters which may have a material impact on the business.

People and Culture

The Committee:

Received regular updates on culture, including risk culture, as part of an holistic culture update;

Considered thematic culture and conduct trends, including management-identified cultural drivers, changes in policy and working practices;

LOGO

Monitored the culture strategy and management efforts to embed and maintain the desired culture throughout the business in line with the Company’s purpose, vision, values and the nine Santander behaviours;

Reviewed programmes relating to the responsible treatment of employees, including diversity and inclusion and wellbeing;

Monitored the approach to diversity and inclusion, including progress against gender targets to support reducing the gender pay gap; and approved the approach to increasing senior level BAME representation; and

Reviewed key themes arising from employee surveys, focus groups and people metrics in order to evaluate the impact on conduct, brand and culture, including the external Banking Standards Board Assessment and the internal Global Engagement Survey results.

Brand, Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility

The Committee:

Considered and guided on brand purpose;

Considered the reputation of Santander UK and how reputational risk impacts its brand and market positioning;

Received updates on reputation tracker metrics; and

Monitors the embedding of Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility in our business strategy and helps the bank deliver value to all stakeholders, protecting its reputation and brand. It also oversees alignment to international frameworks, such as the Sustainable Development Goals and the UN Principles for Responsible Banking.

Committee membership

All five members of the Committee, including the Chair, are IndependentNon-Executive Directors. A list of members, details of their experience, qualifications and attendance at Committee meetings during the year are shown in the Board of Directors section.

In addition to the Committee members, during 2019, regular attendees at Committee meetings included the Board Chair, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Head of Retail and Business Banking, Chief HR Officer, Director of Corporate Communications and the Director of Conduct and Compliance.

Committee’s Effectiveness Review

An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020 to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Terms of Reference

In December 2019, the Committee adopted updated Terms of Reference following the annual review of its role and responsibilities. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at www.aboutsantander.co.uk.

Priorities for 2020

In 2020, the Committee will continue to take an holistic approach to gain greater understanding and oversight of all of the key areas that contribute to the experiences of our customers, our people and wider stakeholders.

Key priorities will be:

Enforcement of Financial Crime and Fraud prevention;

Monitoring the delivery of the Financial Crime Transformation Programme;

Oversight of the wide ranging programme of Regulatory change, including timelines, complexity, customer impact and outcomes;

Enhancement of fraud prevention;

Monitoring reputational risks;

Ensuring the highest standards of conduct and fair outcomes for our customers;

Oversight of the impact of digital transformation of the UK banking landscape on our people, customers and wider stakeholders;

Monitoring Sustainability initiatives, embedding, measurement and reporting progress; and

Oversight of management efforts to embed and maintain the desired culture through the cultural priorities of supporting transformation through simplification, driving a learning culture and being an inclusive and responsible organisation.

Santander UK plc49


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Board Remuneration Committee Chair’s Report

The objective is to ensure that remuneration

practices are aligned to Santander UK’s

strategic priorities and reinforce the right

culture and behaviours by our colleagues.

LOGO

Following ring-fencing, the Committee remains dynamic in its approach, as we continue to enhance remuneration governance to reflect our evolving strategy, control environment and the latest governance developments in the UK.

LOGO

Annemarie Durbin

Board Remuneration Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership
and attendance

Read more onp59

I am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Report for 2019. Santander UK continues to undergo significant transformational change, following ring-fencing and other strategic priorities. Against this backdrop, the role of the Committee evolved in 2019.

Role and responsibility

The purpose of the Committee is to maintain oversight of the application and implementation of remuneration policies and frameworks for the Santander UK group. The Committee is also responsible for the remuneration arrangements of employing entities within the Ring-Fenced Bank perimeter.

Overview of the year

Business Performance in 2019 and Impact on Remuneration

Taking into account financial andnon-financial performance achieved in 2019 together with an assessment of current and future risks, the Committee approved the overall bonus pools for Santander UK, Santander Corporate & Investment Bank (for employees in the Ring-Fenced Bank only) and Santander Consumer UK. When determining reward outcomes the Committee was mindful of the overall performance of the bank. Details on remuneration received by the Executive Directors in 2019 are set out on page 56.

Governance

We have undertaken a review of our over- arching remuneration governance frameworks and policies in the context of ring-fencing requirements, whilst considering the wider obligations of the Banco Santander group. As part of this review, we approved a new set of remuneration principles which govern the operation of the Committee and the extent to which it interacts with Santander UK Group Holdings plc (which sits outside the Ring-fenced Bank) for 2020.

New Executive members

The Committee considered remuneration packages for two new Executive Directors who joined the Board in 2019. Susan Allen was appointed as Head of Retail and Business Banking with effect from 1 January 2019. Duke Dayal replaced Antonio Roman as Chief Financial Officer with effect from 16 September 2019. Antonio Roman stepped down from the Santander UK Board to return to Madrid as Head of Retail, Corporate and Commercial of Banco Santander SA. Details of Susan’s and Duke’s remuneration for 2019 are set out in this report.

LOGO

50Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Pension contributions

As reported last year, following developments in corporate governance and best practice, the Committee decided to align pension contributions for new Executive Director appointments to 9% of salary, being the average contribution available to the wider workforce. This pension level applied for both Susan Allen and Duke Dayal on their appointment to the Board. In 2019 we decided to extend this approach to existing Executive Directors, namely our Chief Executive Officer. This will result in a reduction of the Chief Executive Officer’s pension provision from 35% to 9% of salary. This will be phased over a two-year period, with an initial reduction to 22% of salary effective 1 January 2020.

Variable pay

We continuously evaluate the structure and metrics of our variable reward schemes to ensure continued alignment between metrics and strategic priorities, that performance targets are stretching and robust and that our framework reflects the evolving views of our various stakeholders.

For 2019, variable pay was based on a balanced scorecard of metrics across Customers, Shareholders and People. Communities, the fourth element of the Santander UK Compass, formed part of our risk adjustment and will form part of the scorecard for 2020, reflecting our goals on sustainability. Please see the Sustainability Review on pages 9 to 12 for more details on our sustainability goals.

Risk adjustment

Our risk adjustment procedures, which are applicable to all colleagues, are robust and well embedded within our remuneration policy. We used a series of risk adjustment mechanisms includingin-year individual adjustments to performance rating/reward outcomes; individual adjustment as a result of accountability reviews; and collective adjustments at a bonus pool level. During 2019, the Committee further enhanced our risk adjustment process to ensure a more comprehensive review of relevant metrics.

Inclusion, Diversity and Gender Pay

Diversity in the workforce and a commitment to ensuring an inclusive culture remains a key strategic priority of our Bank. Our Gender Pay reporting for 2019 (published in December 2019) demonstrates our progress to date in this area, although it is recognised that change will take time. We recognise the contribution of a diverse workforce to the success of our organisation and look forward to building on progress made in 2019. For more information refer to the Sustainability Review on pages 9 to 12.

Wider workforce

Our objective is to ensure that all employees at Santander UK are treated fairly and that we provide competitive remuneration which is linked to performance. During the year, the Committee reviewed the broader remuneration policies and practices across the organisation, and considered these when determining remuneration for our senior population. The Committee has also continued its work on developing our employee value proposition and work in this area will continue in 2020.

This year, for the first time, we have chosen to voluntarily disclose the CEO pay ratio compared to the wider workforce. This can be found on page 57.

Committee membership

During 2019, there was no change to the Committee’s membership. The Committee met eight times during 2019, reflecting the level of strategic activity during the year. The Committee is satisfied that its composition and operation complies with our ring-fencing obligations.

Effectiveness of the Committee

The Committee has a process to solicit feedback at the end of each meeting in the spirit of continuous improvement. An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020, to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Terms of reference

The terms of reference were reviewed and revised during the year to reflect the scope of the Committee’s role with respect to colleagues within the Santander UK group. Full terms of reference are available at www. aboutsantander.co.uk.

Priorities for 2020

Review incentive measures to ensure they continue to align with our strategic aims and drive the right culture and behaviours; balancing the needs of our people, customers, communities and shareholders.

Continue to comply with ring-fencing obligations, ensuring adherence to the operational parameters in the terms of reference of the Committee and Santander UK Group Holdings plc’s Board Remuneration Committee.

Monitor the effectiveness of our overall remuneration framework, including the structure of our current variable pay plans and determine whether any changes should be made.

Continue to monitor developments in executive remuneration best practices within the industry, and broader market taking into account the regulatory landscape and corporate governance, both from a European and UK perspective, and consider whether any changes to the Policy are necessary.

Monitor and review the remuneration policies and trends across the Santander UK group, considering how executive pay relates to the broader employee remuneration arrangements.

Review our disclosures to ensure alignment with our commitment to be Simple, Personal and Fair.

Monitor and review any risks and mitigants in relation to remuneration.

Continue to enhance our employee value proposition with the view of attracting and retaining a new generation of colleagues to support the Company in its transformation journey.

Santander UK plc51


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration policy report

Basis of preparation

This report has been prepared on behalf of the Board by the Board Remuneration Committee. We comply with the statutory reporting obligations for large private companies. In addition, we follow the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code) and other listed disclosure requirements to the extent considered appropriate given our

ownership structure, save for some factors. These relate to remuneration policy (see below with regard to post-employment shareholdings) and certain descriptions of the Committee’s work as provided under provision 41. Accordingly, several voluntary disclosures relating to remuneration have been presented in this report.

Forward-looking remuneration policy for Executive Directors

Our forward-looking remuneration policy is outlined below. Remuneration is structured into two main elements: fixed pay and variable pay. Fixed pay is set at market competitive levels appropriate for the role so that inappropriate risk taking is not encouraged. Variable pay rewards the delivery of financial targets, key strategic priorities and individual performance.

Executive Directors’ remuneration structure

Fixed PayPrinciple and descriptionPolicy
Base salary

– To attract and retain Executive Directors of sufficient calibre and with the requisite skills to deliver the strategy taking into account the demands and complexity of the role.

– Base salaries are normally reviewed annually. In reviewing base salaries the Committee considers a number of factors, including:

– The skills and responsibilities of the role alongside the market value of these attributes;

– Set at a level to avoid inappropriate risk taking;

– Base salary increases awarded across the wider employee population; and

– Prevailing market and economic conditions.

Pension

arrangements

– To provide a discrete element of the package to contribute towards retirement.

– All Executive Directors receive a cash allowance in lieu of pension.

– Unless determined otherwise, pension arrangements for new appointments to the Board will be in line with the average level of pension provision available to the broader workforce, currently 9% of salary.

– Our approach to current Executive Director pension allowances is set out on page 53.

Other benefits

– Benefits are offered to Executive Directors as part of a competitive remuneration package and to support the wellbeing of employees.

– Including but not limited to: private medical insurance for Executive Directors and their dependants, life assurance, health screening, relocation allowances and expatriate allowances where relevant.

– Access to Santander UK’sall-employee share schemes on the same terms as all UK employees.

Variable PayPrinciple and descriptionPolicy
Variable pay plan

– To motivate Executive Directors to achieve and exceed annual financial and strategic targets within Santander UK’s Risk Appetite and in alignment with our business strategy and values.

– Multi-year deferral, further performance testing and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares aligns Executive Directors’ interests to the long-term interests of Santander UK.

– Deferral of part of the award is applied in accordance with the requirements of the PRA Remuneration Code.

– Awards are discretionary and determined by reference to performance against a scorecard of financial and strategic goals based on Company and individual performance.

– 40% of the bonus awarded is paid upfront after the performance year ends (year one), delivered half in cash and half in shares.

– 60% of the bonus awarded is deferred and delivered in equal tranches over years three to seven, with each tranche delivered half in cash and half in shares.

– For Executives, the first three of five deferred award tranches are subject to further performance testing, which may reduce the level of payout, but not increase the deferred award.

– Share based awards are subject to a minimum twelve-month retention period following the relevant vesting date.

– Malus and clawback provisions apply to variable pay for up to ten years following the grant of an award.

– The structure of variable pay awards ensures that Executives acquire a meaningful shareholding in Banco Santander SA which may extend for a significant period post-employment. As such, a formal post-employment shareholding requirement is not in place at this time.

52Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Our remuneration policy continues to meet regulatory requirements. Santander UK applies a 2:1 variable to fixed pay cap in line with approvals granted to Banco Santander SA. For control function colleagues, a lower operational ratio of 1:1 is applied, save for in exceptional circumstances.

Executive remuneration policies and principles

Our core values of Simple, Personal and Fair drive our remuneration policy. We focus on delivering a reward framework that is simple to understand, tailored to individual roles and competitive yet fair.

The key drivers of our Remuneration Policy

Alignment to culture

To design policies aligned to the long-term success of the business which support the delivery of our strategy and reinforce our values.

To base variable pay on a balanced scorecard of quantitative and qualitative metrics which reflect our KPIs across Customers, Shareholders and People. For 2020, Communities has beenre-introduced into the bonus scorecard (previously considered as part of risk adjustment). This ensures that ourday-to-day activities align with Santander UK’s over-arching strategy and our aim of being the best bank.

Simplicity

To ensure our approach to remuneration is transparent and easily understood.

To operate simple and clear structures for all Santander UK colleagues.

Risk

To apply a consistent approach to reward for all our employees which upholds our prudent approach to Risk Appetite set as part of a SantanderUK-wide Risk Framework. Risk adjustment occurs at both an individual and bonus pool level.

To provide a balanced package between fixed and variable pay, and short-term and long-term pay horizons to align with our strategic goals whilst promoting prudent risk management.

To ensure remuneration is compliant with applicable regulations and legislation.

Fairness

To take into account an assessment of the Executive Director’s performance against a performance management framework set at the start of the year covering a range of financial,non-financial, quantitative and qualitative criteria.

To set robust and stretching targets which reward exceptional performance.

To attract, retain and motivate employees of the highest calibre by providing total remuneration which reflects individual and Company performance, is competitive, reflects the responsibilities of the role and drives the organisation’s growth.

To consider wider employee pay when determining pay of our Executives.

Clarity

The Committee reviews remuneration reporting on an annual basis against principles of best practice and developments in corporate governance, including the Code. Our reporting is designed to be transparent to promote effective stakeholder engagement but reflective of our subsidiary structure.

Predictability

The Committee reviews the variable pay opportunity for individuals annually and the basis of the pool calculation. However, due to commercial sensitivity , these are not disclosed as per the requirements of the Code. Directors’ remuneration is within the variable pay cap as approved by Banco Santander SA shareholders and set out above on this page.

Executive Director pension alignment

In 2018, following developments in corporate governance and best practice, the Committee took the decision to reduce pension allowances for new Executive Directors to 9% of salary, in line with the wider workforce average. This pension level applied on the appointment to the Board of Susan Allen, Head of Retail and Business Banking, on 1 January 2019 and Duke Dayal, Chief Financial Officer, on 16 September 2019.

In 2019, the Committee decided to extend this approach to existing Executive Directors, namely the Chief Executive Officer. This reduction shall be phased with the Chief Executive Officer’s allowance reducing from 35% to 22% of salary, effective 1 January 2020. From 1 January 2021, the Chief Executive Officer’s pension will be reduced further to the employee average of 9% of salary p.a.. No other changes to the Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration are proposed for 2020.

On recruitment

When appointing a new Executive Director, base salary is set at a market competitive level appropriate for the role, taking into

consideration a range of factors including scope and responsibilities of the role, internal relativities, the individual’s previous remuneration, relevant experience, and an assessment against relevant comparator groups and cost.

Unless determined otherwise, any new Executive Director will receive a pension allowance in line with the wider workforce average, being 9% of salary. Benefits available will typically be aligned to the wider employee population.

Other elements of remuneration will be established in line with the Remuneration Policy, set out in the Executive Directors’ remuneration structure table on page 52.

Relocation support and international mobility benefits may also be provided. Where provided, relocation assistance will normally be for a capped amount and/or limited time. For an overseas appointment, the Committee will have discretion to offer cost effective benefits and pension provisions which reflect local market practice and relevant legislation.

Buy-out awards

Compensation may be provided to Executive Directors recruited externally for the forfeiture of any award on leaving their previous employer. The Committee retains discretion to make such compensation as deemed appropriate to secure the relevant Executive Director’s employment and ensure any such payments align with the long-term interests of Santander UK and the prevailing regulatory framework.

Such payments will be in line with the benefits foregone from leaving the previous employer taking into account value, vesting dates and the extent to which performance conditions applied to the original awards.

Service agreements

Terms and conditions of employment are set out in individual service agreements which include a notice period of six months from both the Executive Director and the Company.

The agreements may be terminated immediately with payment of fixed pay in lieu of notice. In the event of termination for gross misconduct, neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is required, and any deferred awards are forfeited.

Santander UK plc53


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration policy reportcontinued

Termination payments

The impact on remuneration of an Executive Director leaving the Company under various scenarios reflects the service agreements, the relevant scheme rules, and the Committee’s policy in this area.

With respect to outstanding variable pay awards, these generally lapse on termination, other than where an individual is considered a ‘good leaver’. The Committee determines whether an Executive Director is a good leaver under certain circumstances including but not limited to: injury,ill-health, disability, redundancy, retirement, death, or any other reason at the Committee’s discretion.

There is a framework in place which is intended to guide the Committee to determine the discretionary circumstances when good leaver status is appropriate. Other than a payment in the event of redundancy, there are generally no other payments upon termination of employment for Executive Directors.

In the event of a change in control, variable pay awards may continue to be paid in respect of the full financial year (pre and post change of control), or an award may be made in respect of the portion of the year that has elapsed at the point of change in control. Exceptionally the Committee may exercise its discretion to waivepro-rating. In the event of a change in control, outstanding share awards may lapse and be replaced with equivalent awards over shares in a new company, subject to Committee discretion. Alternatively, outstanding awards may vest on a change in control, subject to the assessment of performance andpro-rating of awards where appropriate.

Risk and Performance adjustment

We continue to ensure that the requirements of the Remuneration Code on risk and performance adjustment are met for our employees. All variable remuneration is subject to adjustment for current and future risks through our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard which is linked to our Board approved Risk Appetite.

Our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard (the Standard) provides both a formula-based assessment against Santander UK’s Risk Appetite and an additional qualitative risk event assessment overlay that can reduce the bonus pool or individual awards to nil at the Committee’s discretion. The Standard also

considers a range of factors deemed relevant by the Committee such as evolution of complaints, progress on remediation projects, ring-fencing compliance and people, culture and communities metrics. Given commercial sensitivity, the Committee does not provide annual detail on the application of discretion as required by the Code.

Our Individual Remuneration Adjustment Standard provides a framework for the process, governance and standards relevant for decisions in relation to individual performance adjustments following an incident, including the application of malus and clawback.

Performance adjustments may include, but are not limited to:

Reducing a bonus for the current year;

Reducing the amount of any unvested deferred variable remuneration;

Requiring a bonus which has been awarded (but not yet paid) to be forfeited; and

Requiring repayment on demand (on a net basis) of any cash and share awards received at any time for a period of up to ten years following the date of award.

The Committee has full discretion to prevent vesting of all or part of an amount of deferred remuneration and/or to freeze an award during an ongoing investigation in a number of circumstances, including:

Employee misbehaviour or material error;

Material downturn in the performance of Santander UK or a relevant business unit’s performance;

Santander UK or a relevant business unit suffers a material failure of risk management;

Significant changes in Santander UK’s economic or regulatory capital base and the qualitative assessment of risk; and

Material restatement of the Santander UK’s financial statements (except when required due to modification of the accounting rules).

When determining variable pay awards for individuals performing roles across Santander UK plc and Santander UK Group Holdings, the Holdings Remuneration Committee will apply any necessary discretion based on factors related to UK Group entities outside of Santander UK plc. This discretion is subject to validation by the Santander UK plc Remuneration Committee.

The Committee seeks input from the Chair of the Board Risk Committee, Chief Risk Officer, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer, Chief HR Officer, Chair of the Board Audit Committee, Chair of the Board and Chief Internal Auditor when determining whether any performance or risk adjustments are required.

Policy for all employees

Our performance, reward and benefits approach across the Company supports and drives our business strategy, rewards strong performance and reinforces our values within the approved risk management framework. The general principles of the Remuneration Policy broadly apply across all colleagues where appropriate and are designed to facilitate recruitment, motivation and retention whilst driving performance.

The composition of remuneration packages for the Executive Directors is aligned with the broader colleague population, comprising salary, pensions and benefits and eligibility for discretionary variable pay dependent on role and responsibility. The level of pension allowance for newly appointed Executives is aligned with the average employer contribution for the wider workforce.

The Remuneration Committee annually approve the operation of all of our variable reward schemes for our customer-facing colleagues to ensure that all our plans reward appropriate behaviour and do not incentivise unnecessary risk taking.

54Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Remuneration implementation report

Introduction

This section of the report outlines how our Remuneration Policy was implemented for 2019.

Variable Pay Plan

To incentivise and reward Executive Directors for achieving superior and sustained performance, our Directors participate in a single variable incentive plan. A balance of financial andnon-financial performance metrics are selected annually by the Committee and are aligned with our strategy as measured over the financial year. Multi-year deferral, further performance testing and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares ensures that Executive Directors’ interests are aligned to the long-term interests of the business. Both upfront and deferred awards are made half in cash and half in shares. The deferred element is delivered over seven years, with the first three deferred tranches of awards subject to further performance testing against long-term metrics which can reduce but not increase the level of awards. Awards delivered in shares are subject to an additionalone-year retention period from the point of delivery.

The structure of the plan is illustrated below. The 2019 Variable Pay Plan pool was determined based on a range of metrics using a balanced scorecard approach as follows:

Quantitative assessment

A quantitative assessment is undertaken against a balanced scorecard of financial andnon-financial metrics that are key to Santander UK’s 2019 strategy:

Customers (Net Promotor Score and loyal customers)

Shareholders

Risk (Cost of credit ratio and Stage 3 ratio)

Capital (Contribution to Banco Santander group capital)

Profitability (Net profit and RoTE)

Employees (Employee Engagement).

Performance metrics are reviewed annually to ensure continued alignment with KPIs and strategy.

Qualitative assessment

A qualitative assessment adds context to the quantitative assessment and ensures a balanced view of performance has been made.

Banco Santander Group Multiplier

The Committee has the discretion to adjust the pool upwards or downwards to reflect overall Banco Santander performance if appropriate.

Exceptional Adjustment

Intended to cover unexpected factors or additional targets not covered by the quantitative or qualitative assessments. This may also include adjustments not covered in the qualitative assessments, including major risk events. No exceptional metrics were applied to the 2019 variable pay awards.

UK-focused risk adjustment

Linked to Santander UK’s Risk Appetite, this provides both a formula-based assessment against Risk Appetite and an additional qualitative risk event assessment overlay (including consideration of people, culture, contribution to communities, conduct and other relevant factors) that can result in a downward risk adjustment of up to 100% of the bonus pool or individual awards at the discretion of the Committee.

The Committee has considered, reviewed and approved changes required to remuneration governance and frameworks in order to comply with the relevant regulatory rules, including for ring-fencing and these have applied from the 2019 performance year.

Deferred long-term awards

The payment of the first three deferred tranches of the 2019 awards (36% of the total award), payable in 2023, 2024 and 2025, is conditional on the achievement of long-term objectives measured over the three-year period 2020 to 2022. The performance measures for 2019 awards are EPS, relative TSR and compliance with the fully-loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital. Following performance assessment, the level of awards will be adjusted accordingly. The measures can reduce but not increase the value of the deferred awards. The payment of the final two deferred tranches (24% of the total award), payable in 2026 and 2027 are subject to continued employment only.

LOGO

Santander UK plc55


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

2019 Business Performance and Impact on Remuneration

Santander UK delivered a strong balance sheet in 2019 despite results being impacted by a challenging banking environment. Whilst competitive pressures on mortgages and PPI charges coupled with continued investment in our transformation programme impacted on profit, we are continuing to support customers whilst growing and operating a sustainable business. Santander UK achieved its strongest net mortgage growth in a decade, reinforcing its position as the UK’s third largest mortgage lender. Our drive to deliver tailored products and customer service with an enhanced digital offering was reflected in the growth of customer deposits.

The Committee approved payments to Executive Directors under the Santander UK Variable Pay Plan in the context of this performance.

In addition the Committee confirmed that the remuneration policy operated as intended, demonstrating pay for performance alignment.

Context for decision making

The Committee ensures that broader remuneration policies and practices for employees across the Santander UK group are taken into account when setting the policy for Executive Director remuneration. The Committee annually reviews remuneration trends across the Santander UK group including the relationship between Executive remuneration and the remuneration of other Santander UK group employees as well as remuneration in the wider UK market when making decisions on Executive pay.

The Committee oversees the broader workforce remuneration policies and practices, the implementation of remuneration and related employment policies across the Santander UK group and the salary and variable pay awards for all MRTs. It also approves the design of any material performance-related pay plans.

As part of the monitoring of pay, the following is considered:

Santander UK’s engagement with its recognised trade unions on matters relating to pay and benefits for all employees;

Annual pay reviews for the general employee population;

Santander UK group-wide pension and other benefit provisions;

The design of and overall spend on variable incentive arrangements; and

An assessment of conduct across the business.

The Committee is focused on ensuring that employees are not unduly stretched or inappropriately incentivised. This is monitored using existing employee engagement indicators via the Global Engagement Survey, and The Santander Way survey which provides an indication of our progress in performance against the nine Santander behaviours.

Executive Directors’ remuneration

Total remuneration of each Executive Director for the years ended 31 December 2019 and 2018.

  Executive rewards      Nathan Bostock(3)                 Susan Allen(4)                Antonio Roman(5)(7)                 Duke Dayal(6)(8)             Total 
   2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018
        £000
 

Salary and fees

   1,680     1,680      800     –      367     629      268     –      3,115     2,309 

Taxable benefits(1)

   56     50          –      21          489     –      570     55 

Pension

   588     588       72     –       92     157       24     –       776     745 

Total fixed pay

   2,324     2,318       875     –       480     791       781     –       4,460     3,109 

Bonus (paid and deferred)(2)

   1,990     2,317       859     –       672     1,077       344     –       3,865     3,394 

Total remuneration

   4,314     4,635       1,734     –       1,152     1,868       1,125     –       8,325     6,503 

(1)

Taxable Benefits for the Executive Directors comprises a range of benefits including private health care, life and critical illness cover, health insurance, car allowance and relocation allowances where applicable. Included in the benefits figure for Duke Dayal is a relocation allowance of £500,000.

(2)

The bonus value shown is the total variable pay award made in respect of 2019. As set out in this report, a portion of this award (36% of the value shown) is subject to further performance testing which may reduce, but not increase, the value delivered.

(3)

As detailed in the Remuneration Policy report, the pension contribution received by Nathan Bostock will be reduced from 35% to 22% of salary, effective 1 January 2020 and to 9% of salary effective 1 January 2021.

(4)

Susan Allen was appointed as an Executive Director on 1 January 2019.

(5)

Antonio Roman left the Board on 15 September 2019 and returned to a Group role with Banco Santander. His remuneration is shown in respect of his service in the UK.

(6)

Duke Dayal was appointed as an Executive Director on 16 September 2019 and his remuneration is shown from this date.

(7)

This represents an allocation of 97% (2018: 97%) of Antonio Roman’s remuneration (for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year) as he spent 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% £35,621 (2018: 3% and £57,785) has been allocated to Santander Financial Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,187,359.

(8)

This represents an allocation of 97% of Duke Dayal’s remuneration for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year, given he spends 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% £34,803 has been allocated to Santander Financial Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,160,085.

Relative importance of spend on pay

               2019 
£m 
   

            2018

£m

   

            Change  

%  

 

Profit before tax

   1,012     1,545    -34%   

Total employee costs

   1,263     1,369    -8%   

56Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Stakeholder views

During 2019, Santander UK continued to engage with key stakeholders on remuneration related matters including its main regulators the PRA and FCA.

As detailed on page 31, Annemarie Durbin has been appointed designatedNon-Executive Director with responsibility to further enhance the employee voice in the boardroom. Employee opinion surveys are undertaken annually on employee engagement, and discussion on remuneration matters generally takes place with union representatives during the annual pay review cycle and on relevant employee reward matters. The Committee receives updates on these discussions during the year.

CEO pay ratio

Santander UK is committed to delivering fair pay which attracts, retains and motivates employees of the highest calibre across all grades. In line with this commitment, the Remuneration Committee has oversight of compensation across the organisation, including pay ratios,

and considers fair pay when determining reward outcomes. For the first time this year, Santander UK is voluntarily disclosing the pay ratio of the CEO’s total remuneration to the remuneration of UK employees.

In assessing the pay ratio, the Committee is confident that the Company’s policy on remuneration is fair and that improvements to pay progression will continue to ensure that lower paid colleagues receive a greater share of pay awards. A summary of our approach to Fair Pay is included on page 51.

Advice and support provided to the Committee

As permitted by its Terms of Reference, the Committee has engaged the advice and support of Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) as independent remuneration consultants at the expense of the Company. Total fees (excluding VAT) for advice and support provided to the Committee during 2019 were £157,500 (2018: £192,600). Deloitte is a founding member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and voluntarily operates

under the Code of Conduct in relation to Executive remuneration consulting in the UK.

The Committee is comfortable that the Deloitte engagement partner and team that provides remuneration advice to the Committee do not have connections with Santander UK that may impair their independence.

In 2019, Deloitte also provided unrelated tax, financial and advisory, risk, assurance and consulting services to Santander UK.

The Chair, Chief Executive Officer, Chief HR Officer, Performance & Reward Director, Company Secretary, Chair of the Board, Chair of the Board Audit Committee, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer and Chief Risk Officer attended Committee meetings by invitation in order to support the discussion of the agenda items as appropriate. The Committee Chair also engages with the Chair of the Board Risk Committee when required. No individual participates in discussions regarding their own remuneration.

CEO pay ratio

   

 

CEO

Pay

 

   

25th Percentile

 

   

Median

 

   

75th  

Percentile  

 

 

2019 pay ratio

        183.1    132.1    77.3   

Total salary £

   1,680,000    20,030    26,368    42,708   

Total pay £

   4,313,993    23,562    32,662    55,786   

(1)

Employee pay is calculated based on ‘Methodology A,’ calculating a comparable single figure for each employee, as set out in the reporting requirements.

(2)

Employee pay data is based on full time equivalent pay for Santander UK plc employees at 31 December 2019. For each employee, total pay is calculated based on fixed pay accrued during the financial year whilst variable pay is based on the previous financial year (i.e. paid in 2019 in respect of 2018 performance).

(3)

The CEO’s total remuneration is aligned to that disclosed in the Executive Directors’ remuneration table on the previous page.

Santander UK plc57


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

Chair andNon-Executive Director remuneration

The Chair’s fee is reviewed and approved by the Committee. The fees paid toNon-Executive Directors are reviewed and approved by the Chief Executive Officer and the Chair. Fees are reviewed annually taking into account the market rate and time commitment for the role. The Chair is paid anall-inclusive base fee.Non-Executive Directors are paid a base fee, with a supplement for serving on or chairing a Board Committee. GroupNon-Executive Directors do not receive fees in respect of their Santander UK duties.

An increase to the Board Chair’s fees of 3.8% was approved in 2019. This reflects the increased complexity of the role, particularly in the context of Banking Reform, greater time commitment and that no increase has been awarded since her appointment in 2015.

Additionally, in recognition of the increasing regulatory expectation ofNon-Executive Directors and the associated time commitment, targeted increases toNon-Executives’ fees were awarded. TheNon-Executive Directors base fee was increased from £90,000 to £95,000 and the fee for the Senior Independent Director fee increased from £30,000 to £35,000. Targeted increases were made to the Board Risk Committee Chair fee and membership fee, each increased by £5,000 to £65,000 and £30,000 respectively. No other changes to fees were made during the year.

AllNon-Executive Directors and the Chair serve under letters of appointment and either party can terminate on three months’ written notice, except in the case of the Chair where twelve months’ written notice is required.

Neither the Chair nor theNon-Executive Directors have the right to compensation on the early termination of their appointment beyond payments in lieu of notice at the option of Santander UK. In addition, neither the Chair nor theNon-Executive Directors are eligible for pension scheme membership, bonus or other incentive arrangements.

Chair and Board Committee member fees

 

 Fees effective from 1 May 2019

          

Board 

£000 

 

   

Board 
Nomination 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 

Risk 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 
Audit 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

 

Board 
Responsible 
Banking 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 

Remuneration 
Committee 
£000 

 

 

Chair (inclusive of membership fee)

             675     –     65     60     60     60  

Senior Independent Director

             35     –     –     –     –     –  

Member

             95     –     30     25     25     25  
                
 Non-Executive Directors  

2019 

Fees 

£000 

   

2018 

Fees 

£000 

   2019 
  Expenses 
£000
(6) 
   2018 
Expenses 
£000 
   2019 
    Benefits 
£000 
   2018 
    Benefits 
£000 
   

2019 

Total 

£000 

   

2018 

Total 

£000 

 

Chair

                

Shriti Vadera(1)

   667     650     –     –     22     17     689     667  

IndependentNon-Executive Directors

                

Garrett Curran(2)

   114     –         –     –     –     116     –  

Annemarie Durbin(7)

   222     200     –     –     –     –     222     200  

Ed Giera

   207     200     29     –     –     –     236     200  

Chris Jones

   207     200     –         –     –     207     203  

Genevieve Shore

   197     198             –     –     200     199  

Scott Wheway

   240     230             –     –     248     232  

Julie Chakraverty(3)

   58     92     –         –     –     58     93  

Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors(4)

                

Ana Botin

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Lindsey Argalas

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Bruce Carnegie-Brown(5)

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Dirk Marzluf(2)

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Gerry Byrne

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Total

           1,912             1,770     42         22     17     1,976             1,794  

(1)

As detailed above, 2019 full year fees for the Board Chair reflect the increase on 1 May 2019 from £650,000 to £675,000. Shriti Vadera was entitled to taxable benefits as follows: private medical cover of £626 (2018: £733) and transportation of £20,752 (2018: £15,931).

(2)

Garrett Curran and Dirk Marzluf were appointed on 7 May 2019. Fees received are in respect of services from this date.

(3)

Julie Chakraverty and Lindsey Argalas resigned on 7 May 2019. Fees received are in respect of services to this date.

(4)

None of the Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors received any fees or expenses, except as shown.

(5)

Bruce Carnegie-Brown was appointed on 16 September 2019.

(6)

Directors’ expenses are disclosed above in relation to the period in which they were accrued. 2018 expenses have been restated to reflect this approach. Expenses for Ed Giera include international travel as he does not reside in the UK.

(7)

Annemarie Durbin’s fees include £15,000 in relation to her services as Chair of Cater Allen Ltd.

(8)

The 2018 total shown above has been restated to reflect the fees received by those directors who served in 2019.

58Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Board and Committee membership and attendance

      Board   

 

Nomination

Committee

   

Risk

Committee

   

Audit

Committee

   

Responsible Banking

Committee

   Remuneration
Committee
 
    

Scheduled

meetings

attended

 

 

 

   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled

meetings

attended

 

 

 

   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc 
meetings 
attended 
 
 
 

 

  Chair

 

 

Shriti Vadera

   8/8    3/3    6/6    2/2                                –  

  Independent

  Non-Executive  

  Directors

 Julie Chakraverty(1)   3/3    0/0            3/3    0/0    3/3    0/0    2/2    0/0        –  
 Garrett Curran(2)   5/5    3/3            6/6    0/0    6/6    0/0    3/3    0/0        –  
 Annemarie Durbin   8/8    3/3            7/9    0/0            5/5    0/0    6/6    2/2  
 Ed Giera   8/8    3/3            9/9    0/0    9/9    0/0    5/5    0/0        –  
 Chris Jones(3)   8/8    3/3            9/9    0/0    9/9    0/0            6/6    2/2  
 Genevieve Shore   7/8    3/3            8/9    0/0    8/9    0/0    5/5    0/0    5/6    2/2  
 Scott Wheway(4)   8/8    2/3    6/6    2/2    8/9    0/0            5/5    0/0    5/6    2/2  

  Banco

  Santander

  nominated

  Non-Executive

  Directors

 Lindsey Argalas(5)   2/3    0/0                                        –  
 Ana Botín   5/8    1/3    2/6    0/2                                –  
 Gerry Byrne   7/8    1/3                                        –  
 Bruce Carnegie-Brown(6)   3/3    0/0                                        –  
 Dirk Marzluf(7)   5/5    3/3                                        –  

  Executive

  Directors

 Nathan Bostock   8/8    3/3                                        –  
 Susan Allen(8)   8/8    3/3                                        –  
 Duke Dayal(9)   3/3    0/0                                        –  
 

Antonio Roman(10)

 

   

 

5/5

 

 

 

   

 

2/3

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

– 

 

 

 

(1)

Resigned as a director on 7 May 2019

(2)

Appointed as a director on 7 May 2019

(3)

Deemed financial expert

(4)

Senior Independent Director

(5)

Resigned as a director on 7 May 2019

(6)

Appointed as a director on 16 September 2019

(7)

Appointed as a director on 7 May 2019

(8)

Appointed as a director on 1 January 2019

(9)

Appointed as a director on 16 September 2019

(10)

Resigned as a director on 15 September 2019

Santander UK plc59


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Directors’ report

Introduction

The Directors submit their report together with the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019. The information in the Directors’ Report is unaudited, except where marked.

History and corporate structure

Santander UK plc (incorporated on 12 September 1988) is a subsidiary of Banco Santander SA, a Spanish retail and commercial bank with a meaningful market share in ten core countries in Europe and the Americas. Santander UK was formed from the acquisition of two former building societies, Abbey National and Alliance & Leicester together with the branch network of Bradford & Bingley, and has operated under a single brand since 2010. The ordinary shares of the Company are not traded.

In 2018, certain subsidiaries and portfolios were transferred as part of the implementation of the ring-fence arrangements required under the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013. Following these transfers, Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries comprise only entities whose business is permitted under the Act as a ring-fenced bank. Other entities including Santander Financial Services plc (previously named Abbey National Treasury Services plc) are now directly or indirectly owned by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Result and dividends

The audited consolidated profit after tax for the year was £733m (2018: £1,146m). The Directors do not recommend the payment of a final dividend for 2019 (2018: £nil). Twointerim dividends were declared on the Company’s ordinary shares in issue in the year. The first dividend of £164m was declared on 18 June 2019 and the second dividend of £151m was declared on 5 December 2019. Both interim dividends were paid in 2019.

Details of Santander UK’s activities and business performance in 2019, together with an indication of future outlook, are set out in the Strategic report and the Financial review.

Events after the balance sheet date

There have been no material post balance sheet events, except as set out in Note 40.

Directors

The names and biographical details of the current Directors are shown in the Board of Directors section. Details of their emoluments and interests in shares are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration

implementation report. Changes to the composition of the Board can be found in the Board of Directors section with more details in the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance, and the relevant Committee Chairs’ reports.

Appointment and retirement of Directors

All Directors are appointed and retired in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association, the UK Companies Act 2006 and the UK Group Framework. The following appointments took place in 2019: Bruce Carnegie-Brown, Garrett Curran, Dirk Marzluf, Susan Allen and Duke Dayal. The following resignations took place in 2019: Julie Chakraverty, Lindsey Argalas and Antonio Roman. Further details are outlined on page 59.

A resolution was passed at the last Annual General Meeting, on 2 May 2019 to amend the Articles of Association to require Directors to retire every year, with those wishing to serve again submitting themselves for election orre-election.

Directors’ indemnities

In addition to Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover in place throughout 2019, individual deeds of indemnity were also in place to provide cover to the Directors for liabilities to the maximum extent permitted by law. These remain in force for the duration of the Directors’ period of office from the date of appointment until such time as any limitation periods for bringing claims against the Directors have expired. The Directors including former Directors who resigned in the year, benefit from these deeds of indemnity.

They constitute as qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the purposes of the Companies Act 2006. Deeds for existing Directors are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

Santander UK Group Holdings plc has also granted an indemnity which constitutes ‘qualifying third party indemnity provisions’ to the Directors of its subsidiary and affiliated companies, including former Directors who resigned in the year and since theyear-end. Qualifying pension scheme indemnities were also granted to the Trustees of Santander UK’s pension schemes.

Executive Management

Day-to-day management of the Company’s business is delegated by the Directors to certain executives, principally the Chief Executive Officer. In support of the discharge of the Chief Executive Officer’s responsibilities

to the Directors and the Company’s external regulators, executive management decisions are informed and taken by the Senior Management Committee (SMC). The SMC is made up of the Chief Executive Officer (as Chair) and those members of Santander UK plc executive management who also hold Senior Management Functions (SMF) under the Senior Managers & Certification Regime. The Executive Committee comprises members of the SMC plus additional management executives who do not hold SMF accountabilities.

Employees

We continue to ensure that Santander UK’s remuneration policies are consistent with its strategic objectives and are designed with its long-term success in mind. In doing so, we aim to attract and retain the most talented and committed people.

Communication

Santander UK wants to involve and inform employees on matters that affect them. The intranet is a focal point for communications and the ‘We are Santander’ website connects staff to all the information they need about working for Santander UK. We also useface-to-face communication, such as team meetings, regional roadshows and annual staff conventions for strategic updates.

Santander UK considers employees’ opinions and asks for their views on a range of issues through regular SantanderUK-wide surveys.

Consultation

Santander UK has a successful history of working in partnership with its recognised trade unions, Advance and the Communication Workers Union (CWU). Both trade unions are affiliated to the Trades Union Congress. We consult Advance and the CWU on significant proposals and change initiatives in the business at national and local levels.

Employee share ownership

Santander UK continues to operate twoall-employee, HMRC-approved share schemes: aSave-As-You-Earn (Sharesave) Scheme and a Share Incentive Plan (SIP), the latter of which allows employees to purchase Banco Santander SA shares from gross salary. Eligible senior management participated in a Banco Santander long-term incentive plan. See Note 35 for a description of the plans and the related costs and obligations.

Disability

Santander UK is committed to equality of access and quality of service for disabled people and embraces the spirit of the UK

60Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Equality Act 2010 throughout its business operations. Santander UK has processes in place to help train, develop, retain and promote employees with disabilities. We are committed to giving full and fair consideration to employment applications by disabled people, having regard to their particular aptitudes and abilities, and for continuing the employment of employees who have become disabled by arranging appropriate training and making reasonable adjustment within the workplace.

CO2 emissions

In 2019 CO2 emissions, measured in CO2 equivalent tonnes, decreased by 15% to 8,297 tonnes. CO2 from fuel decreased by 13% to 4,453 tonnes, CO2 from business travel decreased by 17% to 3,796 tonnes and output per employee reduced by 8% to 0.38 tonnes.

Ethical Code of Conduct

Santander UK is committed to maintaining high ethical standards – adhering to laws and regulations, conducting business in a responsible way, and treating all stakeholders with honesty and integrity. These principles are further reflected in Santander UK’s Ethical Code of Conduct, which sets out the standard expected of all employees. Under their terms and conditions of employment, staff are required to act at all times with the highest standards of business conduct in order to protect Santander UK’s reputation and ensure a Company culture which is free from any risk of corruption, compromise or conflicts of interest.

Staff are also required to comply with all Company policies, which require them to:

Abide by all relevant laws and regulations

Act with integrity in all their business actions on behalf of Santander UK

Not use their authority or office for personal gain

Conduct business relationships in a transparent manner

Reject all improper practices or dealings to which they may be exposed.

The SEC requires companies to disclose whether they have a code of ethics that applies to the Chief Executive Officer and senior financial officers which promotes honest and ethical conduct, full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosures, compliance with applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations, prompt internal reporting of violations, and accountability for adherence to such a code of ethics.

The Santander UK group meets these requirements through its Ethical Code of Conduct, the Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy, the Whistleblowing Policy, the FCA’s Principles for Businesses, and the FCA’s Statements of Principle and Code of Practice for Approved Persons, with which the CEO and senior financial officers must comply.

These include requirements to manage conflicts of interest appropriately and to disclose any information the FCA may want to know about. Copies of these documents are available to anyone, free of charge, on application to Santander UK plc, 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN.

Political contributions

In 2019 and 2018, no contributions were made by the Company for political purposes and no political expenditure was incurred.

Share capital

Details about the structure of the Company’s capital can be found in Note 30.

For details of employee share schemes and how rights are exercisable, see Note 35.

The powers of the Directors in relation to share capital are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association as determined by the Companies Act 2006.

Subsidiaries and branches

The Santander UK group consists of a parent company, Santander UK plc, incorporated in England and Wales, and a number of directly and indirectly held subsidiaries and associates. The Company directly or indirectly holds 100% of the issued ordinary share capital of its principal subsidiaries. All companies operate principally in their country of incorporation or registration. For more information, see Note 19.

Financial instruments

The financial risk management objectives and policies of Santander UK, the policy for hedging, and the exposure of Santander UK to credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk are outlined in the Risk review.

Research and development

Santander UK has a comprehensive product approval process and policy. New products, campaigns and business initiatives are reviewed by Santander UK’s Proposition Approval Forum.

Supervision and regulation

The Company is authorised by the PRA and regulated by the FCA and the PRA. Some of its subsidiaries and associates are also authorised by the PRA or the FCA, and regulated by the FCA or both the FCA and the PRA.

As a financial services group, Santander UK is subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK, the EU and in each other location In which Santander UK operates. This intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the United Kingdom by the PRA and the FCA. Santander UK complies with the FCA Conduct rules and the Senior Managers Certification Regime.

As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also affected by other regulators, such as Banco de Espana and the ECB, as well as various legal and regulatory regimes (including the US) that have extra-territorial effect. Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US, the EU and other jurisdictions.

Internal controls

Risk management and internal controls

The Board and its Committees are responsible for reviewing and ensuring the effectiveness of management’s system of risk management and internal controls.

We have carried out a robust assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing Santander UK including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

Details of our principal risks, our procedures to identify emerging risks, and an explanation of how these are being managed or mitigated are set out in the Risk review. A summary of our Top and Emerging Risks is also set out in the Strategic report.

For more details, see the Strategic report and the Risk review.

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

As a registrant under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, Santander UK Plc’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining an adequate system of internal control over financial reporting in

Santander UK plc61


Annual Report 2019 | Governance

Directors’ reportcontinued

order to ensure the accuracy and reliability of Santander UK plc’s Financial Statements and the Form20-F submitted to the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over the financial reporting of Santander UK. Management assessed the effectiveness of Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting at 31 December 2019 based

on the criteria established in the Internal Control- Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in May 2013.

Internal control over financial reporting is a component of an overall system of internal control. Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting, and the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and endorsed by the EU and in order to comply with its obligations under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting includes:

Policies and procedures that relate to the maintenance of records that fairly and accurately reflect transactions and dispositions of assets

Controls providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS, and that receipts and expenditures are being made only as authorised by management

Controls providing reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. In addition, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or because the degree of compliance with policies or procedures may deteriorate.

In line with COSO and SEC requirements, those controls recognised as Sarbanes-Oxley applicable are subject to annual testing and certification by management including an attestation by the Chief Executive Officer (CEO) and the Chief Financial Officer (CFO) that the controls are operating effectively and that the internal control over financial reporting can be relied on.

Any Sarbanes-Oxley control weaknesses identified are captured, assessed and included within the year end assessment of the reliability of the Internal Control environment. These weaknesses are reported on an ongoing basis to the Audit Committee to ensure continuous improvements to the control environment are achieved.

Based on this assessment, Management concluded, at 31 December 2019, that Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting was effective.

Disclosure controls and procedures over financial reporting

Santander UK’s management has evaluated, with the participation of its CEO and CFO, the effectiveness of its disclosure controls at 31 December 2019. There are inherent limitations to the effectiveness of any system of disclosure controls and procedures, including the possibility of human error, and the circumvention or overriding of the controls and procedures. Accordingly, even effective disclosure controls and procedures can only provide reasonable assurance of achieving their control objectives.

Based upon this evaluation, the CEO and the CFO have concluded that, at 31 December 2019, Santander UK’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by Santander UK in the reports that it files and submits under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms, and that it is accumulated and communicated to Santander UK’s management, including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding disclosure.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There were no changes to our internal control over financial reporting during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting.

Going concern

The going concern of Santander UK is reliant on preserving a sufficient level of capital and adequately funding the balance sheet. Santander UK’s business activities and financial position, together with the factors likely to affect its future development and performance, are set out in the Financial review. Santander UK’s objectives, policies and processes for managing the financial risks to which it is exposed, including capital, funding and liquidity, are described in the Risk review.

In making their going concern assessment, the Directors consider a wide range of information that including Santander UK’s long-term business and strategic plans, forecasts and projections, estimated capital, funding and liquidity requirements, contingent liabilities and the reasonably possible changes in trading performance arising from potential economic, market and product developments.

For capital, funding and liquidity purposes, Santander UK operates on a standalone basis and is subject to regular and rigorous monitoring by external parties. For capital purposes, from 1 January 2019 the Company operates as part of the ring-fenced bank sub group Capital Support Deed. For funding and liquidity purposes, the Company operates as part of the Domestic Liquiditysub-group. The Directors review the outputs of stress testing as part of the approval processes for the ICAAP, the ILAAP, our Risk Appetite and regulatory stress tests.

The Directors are satisfied that the Santander UK group has adequate resources to continue operations for a period of at least twelve months from that date of this report and therefore consider it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements.

62Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Statements of Compliance

The UK Corporate Governance Code

The Board confirms that, for the year ended 31 December 2019, Santander UK has applied those principles and provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code), as appropriate, and has provided an explanation where there has been an omission in compliance with the Code. Further information on how the Code was complied with can be found in the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance on page 30.

Santander UK has applied those principles and complied with those provisions of provisions of the Code as appropriate, with the exception of:

Provision 11: The Company does not comply with the requirement for at least half the Board, excluding the Chair, to beNon-executive Directors whom the Board considers to be independent. For details see page 30;

Provision 36: The development of a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements – whilst Directors have a meaningful interest in Banco Santander SA Shares, we do not intend to introduce a formal policy (for details see page 52);

Provision 40: When determining remuneration policy, a range of factors are considered although not all are publicly disclosed (for details see page 53); and

Provision 41: The Remuneration Committee’s activities are set out in the Remuneration report although not all Committee decisions are disclosed (see Remuneration Policy Report).

UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Santander UK’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019 have been prepared in compliance with the principles of the UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure.

Engagement with stakeholders and employees

Santander UK recognises the importance of fostering relationships with their principal stakeholders and how this is key to the long term success of our business. The Directors understand the importance to act fairly and responsibly between members of the company.

Disclosure of information to Auditors

Each of the Directors at the date of approval of this report confirms that:

So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which Santander UK’s auditor is unaware

The Director has taken all steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to make himself or herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that Santander UK’s auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the UK Companies Act 2006.

Auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have expressed their willingness to continue in the office of auditor and a resolution to reappoint them will be proposed at the Company’s forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

By Order of the Board

Katie Jackson-Turner

Company Secretary

24 March 2020

2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place,

London NW1 3AN

Santander UK plc63


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Risk review

This Risk review consists of audited financial information except where it is marked as unaudited. The audited financial information is an integral part of our Consolidated Financial Statements.

We aim to continually enhance our disclosures and their usefulness to readers in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. As a result, our disclosures go beyond the minimum required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

We support the recommendations and guidance made by the Taskforce on Disclosures about ECL (DECL Taskforce) and have adopted its recommendations where it is practical to do so. The DECL Taskforce was formed in 2017 by the FCA, FRC and PRA with a remit to help encourage high-qualityECL-related disclosures following adoption of IFRS 9

64Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Risk governance

 

 

Risk governance

INTRODUCTION(UNAUDITED)

Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate parent company of Santander UK plc. The two companies operate on the basis of a unified business strategy with some overlap in membership, albeit the principal business activities of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are carried on by Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries. The Santander UK Group Holdings plc Risk Frameworks have been adopted by the Company and its subsidiaries to ensure consistency of application.

As a financial services provider, managing risk is a core part of ourday-to-day activities. To be able to manage our business effectively, it is critical that we understand and control risk in everything we do. We aim to use a prudent approach and advanced risk management techniques to help us deliver robust financial performance and build sustainable value for our stakeholders. We aim to keep a predictablemedium-low risk profile, consistent with our business model. This is key to achieving our strategic priorities.

RISK FRAMEWORK

How we define risk(unaudited)

Risk is any uncertainty about us being able to achieve our business objectives. It can be split into a set of key risk types, each of which could affect our results and our financial resources. Enterprise wide risk is the aggregate view of all the key risk types described below:

 

   Key risk typesDescription

Credit

The risk of loss due to the default or credit quality deterioration of a customer or counterparty to which we have provided credit, or for which we have assumed a financial obligation.

Market

Banking market risk– the risk of loss of income or economic value due to changes to interest rates in the banking book or to changes in exchange rates, where such changes would affect our net worth through an adjustment to revenues, assets, liabilities andoff-balance sheet exposures in the banking book.

Trading market risk– the risk of changes in market factors that affect the value of positions in the trading book.

Liquidity

The risk that we do not have sufficient liquid financial resources available to meet our obligations as they fall due, or we can only secure such resources at excessive cost.

Capital

The risk that we do not have an adequate amount or quality of capital to meet our internal business objectives, regulatory requirements, market expectations and dividend payments, including AT1 coupons.

Pension

The risk caused by our contractual or other liabilities with respect to a pension scheme (whether set up for our employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It also refers to the risk that we will need to make payments or other contributions with respect to a pension scheme due to a moral obligation or for some other reason.

Conduct and regulatory

Conduct risk– the risk that our decisions and behaviours lead to a detriment or poor outcome for our customers. It also refers to the risk that we fail to maintain high standards of market behaviour and integrity.

Regulatory risk– the risk of financial or reputational loss, or imposition or conditions on regulatory permission, as a result of failing to comply with applicable codes, regulator’s rules, guidance and regulatory expectations.

Operational risk

The risk of loss due to inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events. We give a particular focus to the following risks which we mitigate through our management of operational risk:

Process and change management risk– A key part of our business strategy is to develop and deliver new banking channels and products. We are also implementing a large number of regulatory and legal changes, impacting all areas of our business.

Third party risk– We rely extensively on third parties, both within the Banco Santander group and outside of it, for a range of services and goods.

Cyber risk– We rely extensively on the use of technology across our business. It is critically important that we give our customers a secure environment in which to deal with us, especially when the threat from cyber criminals is so prevalent and more sophisticated than ever. Failure to protect the data assets of Santander UK and its customers against theft, damage or destruction from cyber-attacks could result in damage to our reputation and direct financial losses.

Other key risk types

Financial crime risk– the risk that we are used to further financial crime, including money laundering, sanctions evasion, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption. Failure to meet our legal and regulatory obligations could result in criminal or civil penalties against Santander UK or individuals, as well as affecting our customers and the communities we serve.

Legal risk– the risk of an impact arising from legal deficiencies in contracts; failure to protect assets; failure to manage legal disputes appropriately; failure to assess or implement the requirements of a change of law; or failure to comply with law or regulation or to discharge duties or responsibilities created by law or regulation.

Strategic and business risk– the risk of significant loss or damage arising from strategic decisions that impact the long-term interests of our key stakeholders or from an inability to adapt to external developments.

Reputational risk– the risk of damage to the way our reputation and brand are perceived by the public, clients, government, colleagues, investors or any other interested party.

Model risk– the risk that the results of our models may be inaccurate, causing us to makesub-optimal decisions, or that a model may be used inappropriately.

Top and emerging risks

BoardSeveral of our risk types also have top risks associated with them. We regularly review the top risks that could impact our business, customers and shareholders. Top risks actively monitored over 2019 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk Committee Chair’s reportreview and summarised in the ‘Top Risks’ section in the Strategic report. We also regularly review emerging risks that could impact our business, customers and shareholders. The identification of Emerging Risks iscontinuedco-ordinated by the Risk Division. A key part of the process is continual scanning of the external environment, focusing on emerging risk drivers such as regulation, markets, technology, competition, customers,geo-politics, climate change and the economy. Emerging risks actively monitored over 2019 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the ‘Emerging Risks’ section in the Strategic report.

Santander UK plc65


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 

EffectivenessKey elements(unaudited)

Our Risk Framework sets out how we manage and control risk. In 2019, we updated our Risk Framework with the introduction of new minimum standards to strengthen controls around independence of decision-making following the introduction of ring-fencing on 1 January 2019.

As a group, Banco Santander supports the recommendations of the TCFD, which were published with the aim of improving disclosure of climate financial risk and opportunities. We also welcome the UK developments of the PRA and FCA to improve management and disclosure of climate change related risks. In October 2019, we submitted an initial implementation plan to the PRA to address the expectations set out Supervisory Statement 3/19 ‘Enhancing banks’ and insurers’ approaches to managing the financial risks from climate change’. Alongside this plan, responsibility for climate related financial risks was added to the Statement of Responsibility of the CRO as SMF holder. Delivering on our plan will be a multi-year programme. We are targeting the end of 2022 to achieve full adoption, aligned to the implementation path as set out in the TCFD recommendations. For more, see the case study ‘Addressing climate risk’ in the Risk appetite section that follows.

In addition, in 2020, we introduced a new standard to consider the impact of risks related to climate change.

How we approach risk – our culture and principles(unaudited)

The complexity and importance of the financial services industry demands a strong risk culture. We have extensive systems, controls and safeguards in place to manage and control the risks we face, but it is also crucial that everyone takes personal responsibility for managing risk. Our risk culture plays a key role in our aim to be the best bank for our customers, shareholders, people and communities by acting responsibly. It is vital that everyone in our business understands this. To achieve this, our people have a strong, shared understanding of what risk is, and what their role is in helping to control it. We express this in our Risk Culture Statement:

   Risk Culture Statement

Santander UK will only take risks that it understands and will always remain prudent in identifying, assessing, managing and reporting all risks. We proactively encourage our people to take personal responsibility for doing the right thing and to challenge without fear. We ensure decisions and actions take account of the best interests of all our stakeholders and are in line with The Santander Way.

The Board reviews and approves our Risk Culture Statement every year. Senior executives are responsible for promoting our risk culture from the top. They drive cultural change and increased accountability across the business. We reinforce our Risk Culture Statement and embed our risk culture in all our business units through our Risk Framework, Risk Certifications and other initiatives. This includes highlighting that:

It is everyone’s personal responsibility to play their part in managing risk

We must Identify, Assess, Manage and Report risk quickly and accurately

We make risk part of how we assess our people’s performance and how we recruit, develop and reward them

Our internal control system is essential to ensure we manage and control risk in line with our principles, standards, Risk Appetite and policies.

We use Risk Certifications to confirm how we manage and control risks in line with our Risk Framework and within our Risk Appetite. As an example, every year, each member of our Executive Committee confirms that they have managed risk in line with the Risk Framework in the part of the business for which they are responsible. Their certification lists any exceptions and the agreed actions to be taken to correct them. This is a tangible sign of the personal responsibility that is such a key part of our risk culture.

Our risk culture programme – I AM Risk

I AM Risk continues to play a key part in our aim to be the best bank for our people, customers, shareholders and communities. Our I AM Risk approach aims to make sure our people:

  Identifyrisks and opportunities

  Assesstheir probability and impact

  Managethe risks and suggest alternatives

–  Report, challenge, review, learn and ‘speak up’.

LOGO             

I AM Risk is how we make risk management systempart of everyone’s life as a Santander UK employee from how we recruit them and internal controlsmanage their performance to how we develop and reward them. It is also how we encourage people to take personal responsibility for risk to speak up and to come up with ideas. We use I AM Risk in our risk certifications, policies, frameworks and governance, and risk-related communications. We also include it in reward arrangements and in mandatory training and induction courses for our staff. To support this, our learning website includese-learning videos and factsheets.

FollowingAs part of I AM Risk, we include mandatory risk objectives for all our people in our performance management processes – from our Executive Committee to branch staff. The Executive Committee leads our culture initiatives under the H2 2017CEO’s sponsorship. In our most recent employment engagement survey, over 90% of employees recognised their personal responsibility for the risks they face in theirday-to-day work. This demonstrates how we have embedded risk management in our culture.

I AM Risk Month

In November 2019, we once again joined colleagues from across the Banco Santander group to celebrate our risk culture, with an emphasis on what I AM Risk means to each of us. As a business, we are going through a significant period of transformation, whilst dealing with a highly competitive financial services sector and Control Self Assessment (RCSA),a challenging political and regulatory environment. At times of change, it is natural for people to feel under more pressure; to act quickly, to deliver and to succeed. We know that we need to deliver, but how we make the Committee received updates on the risk and exposure issues reported through the 2018 RCSA processes. Based on those assessments, we considereddecisions that overallhelp us achieve our goals is also critical, and highconsidering the risks had decreased (viainvolved is a mitigation and reassessment process) andkey part of that process. We also recognise that managing our risks can result in broader benefits for the remaining high risks related primarily to addressing residual IT obsolescence. Whilebusiness.

Simplifying our processes, reducing the self-assessment acknowledged a number of control weaknesses,systems we use, improving the quality of our data or automating controls; these are all examples of ways we can reduce the risks we face, whilst also making things more efficient and simpler, for both our customers and our colleagues. We recognise that we need to remain vigilant in particularidentifying, assessing, managing and reporting all risks. We need to speak up when we see a risk, so we can work together to do the right thing for Financial Crime, we were satisfied that appropriate actions were plannedour colleagues, customers and being progressedshareholders. It is by management to address these. We will continue to monitor the position.

We noted an increase in reported risks, partly due to increased reportingworking together across the business as a resultthat we can get the best from each other, be confident in the decisions we make and help the business achieve its goals.

Over the four weeks of improved systems, and noted further the need for additional classification improvements. The Committee was also advised that all operational controls improved following system enhancements but noted the needI AM Risk Month, we encouraged our colleagues to make further progress.use our I AM Risk resources to:

In addition

Join our new I AM Risk Hub to help each other become more risk aware

Recognise a colleague for good risk behaviour

Share a story of how an individual or team have taken personal accountability for risk

Use our Speak Up Matrix to help find the right channels to raise any concerns.

66Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Risk governance

Our risk governance structure

We are committed to the RCSA updates, during 2018highest standards of corporate governance in every part of our business. This includes risk management. For details of our governance, including the Board and its Committees, see the ‘Governance’ section of this Annual Report. The Board delegates certain responsibilities to Board Level Committees as needed and where appropriate. Our risk governance structure strengthens our ability to identify, assess, manage and report risks, as follows:

Committees:A number of Board and Executive committees are responsible for specific parts of our Risk Framework

Key senior management roles:A number of senior roles have specific responsibilities for riskmanagement

Risk organisational structure:We have the ‘three lines of defence’ model built into the way we run our business.

Committees

The Board Level Committee also reviewed and discussed the continuation of management’s dialogueresponsibilities for risk are:

   Board Level CommitteeMain risk responsibilities

The Board

-  Has overall responsibility for business execution and for managing risk

-  Reviews and approves the Risk Framework and Risk Appetite.

Board Risk Committee

-  Assesses the Risk Framework and recommends it to the Board for approval

-  Advises the Board on our overall Risk Appetite, tolerance and strategy

-  Oversees our exposure to risk and our strategy and advises the Board on both

-  Reviews the effectiveness of our risk management systems and internal controls.

Board Responsible Banking Committee

-  Responsible for culture and operational risk from conduct, compliance, competition, financial crime & legal matters

-  Reviews reports from the CLRO on the adequacy and effectiveness of the compliance function

-  Ensures that adequate and effective control processes are in place to identify and manage reputational risks

-  Oversees our Corporate Social Responsibility programme and how it impacts on employees, communities, the environment including sustainability and climate change, reputation, brand and market positioning.

Board Audit Committee

-  Monitors and reviews the financial statements integrity, and any formal announcements on financial performance

-  Reviews the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal financial controls and whistleblowing arrangements

-  Monitors and reviews the effectiveness of the internal audit function.

Board Remuneration Committee

-  Oversees implementation of remuneration policies, ensuring they promote sound, effective risk management.

The Executive Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

   Executive Level CommitteeMain risk responsibilities

Executive Committee

-  Reviews business plans in line with our Risk Framework and Risk Appetite before they are recommended to the Board to approve.

-  Receives updates on key risk issues managed byCEO-level committees and monitors the actions taken.

Senior Management Committee

-  Focuses on the responsibilities of the Executive Committee Senior Management Function holders and how they are discharged

-  Reviews updates on key risk issues, customer, reputational and conduct matters.

Executive Risk Control Committee (ERCC)

-  Reviews Risk Appetite proposals before they are sent to the Board Risk Committee and the Board to approve

-  Ensures that we comply with our Risk Framework, Risk Appetite and risk policies

-  Reviews and monitors our risk exposures and approves any corrective steps we need to take.

Asset and Liability Committee (ALCO)

-  Reviews liquidity risk appetite (LRA) proposals

-  Ensures we measure and control structural balance sheet risks, including capital, funding and liquidity, in line with the policies, strategies and plans set by the Board

-  Reviews and monitors our key asset and liability management activities to ensure we keep our exposure in line with our Risk Appetite.

Pensions Committee

-  Reviews pension risk appetite proposals

-  Approves actuarial valuations and reviews the impact they may have on our contributions, capital and funding

-  Consults with the pension scheme trustees on the scheme’s investment strategy.

Capital Committee

-  Puts in place reporting systems and risk control processes to make sure capital risks are managed within our Risk Framework

-  Reviews capital adequacy and capital plans, including the ICAAP, before they are sent to the Board to approve.

Incident Accountability Committee

-  Considers, calibrates, challenges and agrees any appropriate individual remuneration adjustments

-  Presents recommendations to the Board Remuneration Committee.

Credit Approval Committee

-  Approves corporate and wholesale credit transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level approval forums or individuals.

Investment Approval Committee

-  Approves equity type investment transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level approval forums or individuals.

Key senior management roles

Senior roles with the regulator regarding enhancements to core areas of the corporate creditspecific responsibilities for risk management infrastructure in the wake of the regulator’s reviews of certain corporate credit portfolios and the corporate credit risk management function in 2017 and 2018, respectively.are:

The Committee concurred with the regulator’s expectation of a comprehensive approach reflecting appropriate prioritisation of investment in management’s strategic plan. The Committee will continue to review management’s reports on the execution of the overall risk infrastructure investment programme, as well as the status of management’s regulatory dialogue, and will request management to evidence the effectiveness of controls and improvements driven by the programme over the investment period.

   RoleMain risk responsibilities

Change Programme

The Committee maintained its oversight of the changing scale, scope and critical nature of the various change initiatives undertaken by Santander UK to meet regulatory and other requirements that continued to pose significant risk.risk in 2019.

Reports from the Transformation Office and Operational Risk identified similar themes with respect to root cause issues underpinning the execution of change programmes. The Committee expressed concern at management’s capacity to effectively resource and execute the number of strategic transformation programmes in progress concurrently with the execution of Banking Reformregulatory change requirements including customer alerts and a rangethe high cost of other mandatory regulatory initiatives. credit review.

The Committee considered thatin-house project improved management improvements mitigated this riskinformation would assist management to better plan and sequence the developmentimplementation of an agile work environment is continuing to enhance the organisation’s capacity to adapt.complex and often time critical and interdependent deliverables.

Effectiveness of the Committee

As noted above, the Committee membership saw two membersone member leave and one member join during the year. I believe that the Committee has an appropriate mix of skills to enable it to operate effectively and to offer appropriate challenge and support to management.

In JanuaryDecember 2019, we reviewed the Committee’s responsibilities as set out in the Terms of Reference and confirmed that the Committee had discharged its responsibilities in full in 2018.2019.

An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness during 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020 to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in focus.

Full terms of reference can be found on our website at www.aboutsantander.co.uk and a summary is given on page 24.32.

We continued to receive regular reports on enterprise wide risk and to call risk owners to our meetings to account for their progress.

We have benefited from the perspectives of each of the three lines of defence to gain assurance and confirm progress in respect of material initiatives intended to mitigate key risk exposures.

These actions are examples of how we have looked to inform our debate and decision making in the year and contribute to our effectiveness as a Committee.

Priorities for 20192020

The CommitteeIn 2020, we will continue to focus on the risks and uncertainties surrounding Brexit. We will also continue to monitor Santander UK’s capital and liquidity adequacy and to assess credit risk in changing economic conditions.conditions and extremely competitive operating environment including the risks and uncertainties surrounding Brexit and the UK regulatory landscape.

Cyber,Data, cyber, third party, operational resilience and otherIT-related operational risks will continue to be a priority, including the adoption of cloud services.

We also expect to monitor closelyreview continuing developments in areas such as model risk, pension risk, and enhancements to Santander UK’s risk infrastructure.infrastructure and management of transformation risks.

In accordance with the additional responsibilities of the CRO, we also will monitor and review Santander UK’s climate-related financial and strategy risks.

 

 

32Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report41


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

Board Audit Committee Chair’s report

Our responsibilities include oversight of

the integrity of financial reporting and

controls, the effectiveness of our internal

audit function, the relationship with the

external auditors and the adequacy of

our whistleblowing arrangements.

 

LOGO

In 2019, we monitored our exposure to PPI in the context of the time bar, reviewed the provisions and disclosures for other conduct and operational matters, performed oversight of management’s responses to Internal Audit reviews and reviewed the weights of economic scenarios in respect of IFRS 9 ECL calculations given political and economic uncertainties, including Brexit.

LOGO

Chris Jones

Board Audit Committee Chair

24 March 2020

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp32

Committee membership

and attendance

Read more onp59

Overview of the year

In 2018,2019, the main activities of the Committee included:

Assessing the appropriateness of key management judgements and related reporting each quarter.

Considering our exposure to, and provisioning for and disclosure of PPI related matters given a number of factors including claims volumes publication of additional FCA guidance and the impactexpiration of the FCA’s PPI advertising campaign.deadline.

Overseeing

Monitoring the embedding of IFRS 9, including operation of, and key changes to, models and methodologies, impacts and related controls.

LOGO

Considering other key areas of provision,controls with a particular focus on the weights applied to the economic scenarios given political and economic uncertainties, including for our consumer credit business operations,Brexit, as well as contingent liability disclosures for both this matter and our historical role in dividend arbitrage transactions.Year 2 disclosure enhancements.

Considering the

Reviewing our contingent liability disclosures, required dueincluding those relating to an FCA investigation and fine for historical bereavement and probate practices.conduct.

Considering the disclosure implicationsadequacy of Santander UK’s ring-fencing arrangements.comfort on our risk-weighted assets reporting.

Considering

Reviewing the impactactuarial assumptions of IFRS 16 upon its introduction on 1 January 2019.the pension scheme accounting valuation as well as the triennial valuation.

Monitoring management’s responses to various industry reviews of the UK statutory audit market and Financial Reporting Council.

Providing oversight on the adequacy and effectiveness of internal controls over financial reporting.

Overseeing the performance of the Internal Audit function, including reviewing the findings arising from an External Quality Assessment (EQA) of the function.

Continuing oversight of interaction with our External Auditors.

Overseeing Santander UK’s whistleblowing arrangements, including an increase in specialist whistleblowing resources and further enhancements in line with FCA guidance and rules on whistleblowing.

Reviewing Santander UK’s Recovery Plan and Resolution Pack.management’s plans in respect of the incoming Resolvability Assessment Framework.

Monitoring the transition for the incoming CFO as well as changes to key management in the Finance function.

We also addressed other responsibilities delegated to the Committee by the Board.

Committee Membership

Alain DromerJulie Chakraverty retired on 31 August 2018, having served on the Committee for nearly five years. Alain made a valuable contribution during his tenure7 May 2019 and I would like to take this opportunity to thank himher for her service on behalf of the Committee. We welcomed Julie ChakravertyGarrett Curran, who joined the Committee in June 2018. JulieMay 2019. Garrett brings extensive financial services experience digital and innovation knowledge, and a background in risk.

In respect of the Revised Statutory Audit Directive, the Board satisfied itself that at least one member of the Committee had competence in accounting and auditing, and the members of the Committee as a whole had competence in the banking sector, in which we are operating.strong risk management credentials.

At 31 December 2018,2019, all four members of the Committee were IndependentNon-Executive Directors. The Committee also met the necessary requirements of independence throughout the year, in accordance with the requirements of Rule10A-3 ofunder the US Securities Exchange Act 1934.

LOGO

In 2018, we considered our exposure to PPI, reviewed the provisions and disclosures for other conduct and operational matters, oversaw the embedding of IFRS 9 and reviewed the findings of an External Review of Internal Audit.”

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more on p24

Committee membership, tenure and attendance

Read more on p47

LOGO

Chris Jones

Board Audit Committee Chair

26 February 2019

 

LOGOLOGO

 

 

42Santander UK plc33


Annual Report 2018 | Governance 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

 

Significant financial reporting issues and judgements

The use of assumptions or estimates and the application of management judgement is an essential part of financial reporting. In 2018,2019, we focused on the following significant reporting matters in relation to financial accounting and disclosures:

 

   Financial reporting

   issue or judgement

 Action taken by the Board Audit Committee Outcome

Conduct provisions

The provision for conduct remediation activities for PPI and other products continued to be highly judgemental and requires significant assumptions including claim volumes and Plevin in scope rates, and determination of liability with respect to a specific portfolio of claims.rates.

 

– Continued to scrutinise the level and adequacy of conduct provisions and challenged the reasonableness of management’s assumptions throughout the year.

– In respect of PPI including Plevin, the Committee:

– Reviewed the judgements and estimates in respect of the provision considering management’s assumptions around changes in claim volumes, uphold rates and average cost of redress. This was in the context of key developments in the year, including:taking into account the implementation of the FCA’s consumer deadline ‘time bar’ on PPI complaints of 29 August 2019, our specific approach to auto conversion and the appointment of Deloitte to assist the Official Receiver for certain individuals subject to bankruptcy court orders.

– The FCA’s publicationNoted the very significant increase in the levels of Consultation Paper (CP) 18/33customer information requests and complaints in the time leading up to the implementation of the time bar, and its impact on the treatment of PPI complaints withinprovision.

– Inquired as to the scopemethodology management had adopted in determining the top end of the Supreme Court judgementrange of their estimates of the additional charge that should be made for PPI as a result of the increase in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Limited.complaints.

– The FCA’s second advertising campaign onNoted that the PPI which commencedmodel is an expert judgement model and therefore had not gone through the standard model governance process. Requested that management explain the governance and controls in April 2018.

–  Reviewed updatesplace around the model to ensure the provision model inaccuracy of its financial outputs, and invited the lightHead of increased PPI enquiries and complaint inflow levels driven by the media advertising campaign and proactive mailingsInternal Audit to customers potentially eligible to make a further complaint.

–  Reviewed the appropriateness of a provision in relation to a specific PPI portfolio.comment.

– In respect of other products, the Committee evaluatedreviewed management’s judgements and estimates in respect of a provision release relating to the sale of interest rate derivatives, following a client contact and sales review exercise.

provision.

 

– Endorsed management’s recommendation that no additional chargecharges of £70m in Q2 2019 and £99m in Q3 2019 should be made for PPI.

– Considered the classification and disclosure of provisions related to a specific PPI related portfolio which is the subject of litigation, together with an associated contingent liability.

– Received a report from management on the governance and controls in place around the PPI model, including controls that are tested as part of the Sarbanes-Oxley compliance process. Noted that Internal Audit had reviewed the PPI model but had not identified any significant concerns.

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of conduct provisions and disclosures, including PPI and other products.

– We continued to monitor the provisioning levels in light of any changes to claims volumes, inflows and average redress costs.

 

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

See Note 3027 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

IFRS 9 creditCredit provisions

Ensuring appropriate application and embedding of IFRS 9 is a significant area of judgement given its technical complexity, the number of judgements needed, and their potential impact. Determining the appropriateness of credit provisions is also highly judgemental, requiring management to make a number of assumptions.

 

Embedding of IFRS 9

– Monitored the embedding of IFRS 9, including changes to the controls environment, throughout the year.

– Reviewed management decisions and challenged key assumptions.

– Reviewed the operation of, and key changes to, models and methodologies and their impacts. We placed specialparticular focus on the evolution of post-model adjustments as models were enhanced,weights applied to the economic scenarios given political and the internal governance around forward-looking macroeconomic scenarios and weights, as well as the approach to setting them.economic risks, including Brexit.

– Reviewed the proposed approach toyear-end disclosures, including the Year 2 recommendations of the PRA’s Taskforce on Disclosures about ECL.

 

    

– Satisfied ourselves that management hadcontinued to have a robust methodology for evaluating the results of the models given their complexity and a clear trail of their workings, particularly due to the models’ key outputs.

– Obtained comfort on the adequacy of data in the context of the evolving control environment.

– Noted that model and methodology changes had been approved by the Model Risk Management Forum.

–  Requested and received further clarity around the process and timelines for reviewing assumptions underlying the economic scenarios.

– Endorsed the proposedyear-end disclosures.

–  We will continue to monitor how adoption of IFRS 9 is embedded in internal governance and business processes.

 

See the ‘Credit risk’ section in the Risk review.

 

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

34Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report43


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

 

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

    

 

   Financial reporting

   issue or judgement

 Action taken by the Board Audit Committee Outcome

IFRS 9 creditCredit provisions continued

continued

 

Retail credit provisions

– Reviewed detailed reports from management throughout the year analysing the proposed provisions.provisions by key product.

– Considered management’s proposals on refinementsto apply Post Model Adjustments (PMAs) to the assumptions underpinning the mortgage provision modelsmodel to address interest-only maturity default risk,buy-to-let and the impacts on the provisions required.long-term indeterminate arrears.

 

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of retail credit provisions, concluding that provisions remain robust and assumptions were appropriate.

– Agreed with management’s recommendations for the continued application of PMAs in relation to the mortgage model, including changes and updates to the PMA population.

– We will continue to monitor retail credit provisions.

 

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

See Note 1413 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

  

Corporate credit provisions

– Reviewed detailed reports from management throughout the year, including consideration of individually assessed impairments and PMAs, to satisfy ourselves as to the completeness of the provision requirements.

– Noted that any impairment triggers had been correctly identified.corporate credit provisions can be more volatile than retail credit provisions, and may be supported by more limited data.

– Considered reports on specific cases, as well as a review of the rest of the portfolio, to identify other cases or industry sectors that could potentially be at risk.risk, including the retail sector.

– Discussed other exposures and satisfied ourselves that there had been no impairment triggers in the year that warranted significant adjustmentmaterial adjustments to provision levels.

levels were required.

 

    

– Agreed with management’s judgement on the level of corporate credit provisions, concluding that provisions remain robust and assumptions were appropriate.

– We will continue to monitor corporate credit provisions.

 

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

See Note 1413 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Pension obligations

Significant judgement is required on the key assumptions underlying defined benefit pension obligation calculations. Outcomes remain inherently uncertain.

 

– Reviewed detailed reports throughout the year on the key assumptions underlying the defined benefit pension obligation calculations. We recognised that, although some assumptions are based on observable data, others continue to require significant judgement.

– Noted that actuaries continue to help assessConsidered the best estimate of our pension obligations due toliabilities under IAS 19, recognising the calculations’ complexity.

–  Reviewed enhancements to the discount rate assumption methodology.

–  Reviewed the controls in place around the qualityinputs of some key data used to calculate pensionexternal actuaries who generate financial assumptions and propose liabilities.

– Reviewed the proposed change in respect of equalising pension benefits for men and women in relation to Guaranteed Minimum Pensions (GMP) in the contextresults of the High Court judgementtriennial funding valuation agreed in October 2018 concluding that defined benefit schemes should equalise pension benefits in this regard.August 2019.

– Reviewed changes proposed as the result of a review of experience analysis by the Trustee, which informed the choice of demographic assumptions.

– Reviewed the regulatory capital impact of the changes.

– Monitored the continued appropriateness of the methodology and reviewed the inflation, discount and mortality rates applied at theyear-end.

 

–  Requested and received information on the level of debate and challenge concerning the pension models and proposed changes to the actuarial assumptions.

– Noted that the discount rate assumption methodologyproposed changes to demographic assumptions had been reviewed at the Pension Risk Forum and reviewed by Independent Model Risk Review.

– Agreed with management’s approach to the assumptions applied, including changes made in 2018.

–  Agreed with management’s approach to recognising the impact of GMP equalisation and noted that the full exercise is expected to take time due to its complexity.2019.

– Endorsed the proposed quantitative and qualitativeyear-end disclosures in respect of pension obligations.

 

See ‘Critical judgements and accounting estimates’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

See ‘Pension risk management’ in the Risk Review.

 

See Note 3128 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Ring-fencing

Ensuring appropriate implementation of UK ring-fencing legislation is a significant area of judgement given its technical complexity and potential impact.

–  Monitored the implementation of Santander UK’s ring-fencing plans throughout the year, with a specific focus on the financial reporting implications.

–  Reviewed the proposed approach toyear-end disclosures.

Other areas

 

– NotedReviewed the successful implementation of UK ring-fencing legislation in advanceappropriateness of the legal deadline.

–  Endorsedprovision, and considered the proposedyear-end disclosures.

See Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Other areas

–  Considered the provisiondisclosures required, in relation to i) a specific PPI portfolio of complaints and ii) our consumer credit business operations.

– Considered the disclosures required duerelating to the FCA investigation and fine for historical bereavement and probate practices, and the Cologne Criminal Prosecution OfficeCPO and German Federal Tax Office investigation intoFTO ongoing investigations of our historical roleinvolvement in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions.

– Reviewed the appropriateness of the accounting, and considered the disclosures required, relating to certain leases that are currently under review by HMRC in connection with claims for tax allowances.

 

– Endorsed management’s recommendation that arecommended provision and level of disclosure in these regards, including an additional provision of £58m should be made in the year in relation to£10m for our consumer credit business operations.

– Endorsed the proposedyear-end disclosures in this regard.relating to German dividend tax arbitrage transactions.

– Endorsed management’s recommended accounting and level of disclosure relating to the leases under review by HMRC.

 

See Note 30Notes 27 and 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

LOGO

 

44Santander UK plc35


Annual Report 2018 | Governance 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

 

The Committee’s focus continues to be on areas of significant judgement which pose the greatest risk of a material financial statement misstatement. In addition to the areas set out in the preceding table, the Committee also considers other higher risk items. During the 20182019year-end process, these included the identification and assessment of risks of material misstatement due to fraud or error.error and the controls over calculation of risk-weighted assets. We also received regular reports on any material litigation cases and their progress, as part of our consideration of provisions and contingent liabilities.

External Auditor

We continued to develop and oversee the interaction with PwC and with Mr Jonathan Holloway in his thirdfourth year as the audit partner, following PwC’s appointment in 2016 resulting from there-tendering of the global external audit.2016. The independence and objectivity of PwC was considered and monitored throughout the year.

Oversight of the relationship with our External Auditors

As part of our review of our relationship with PwC, our activities included:

 

Consideration of their work and opinion relating to management judgements.

Review of the summary of misstatements not corrected by management. The Committee was satisfied that they were not quantitatively or qualitatively material, either individually or in the aggregate.

Discussion on the level of disclosure in the Annual Report and Half Yearly Financial Report to satisfy ourselves that it is appropriate.

Discussion of developments in financial reporting including changes to accounting standards, statute and best practice.

A review of PwC’s reports on findings and recommendations on internal control and financial reporting matters identified during their audit and their view of management’s progress in resolving them.

Interactions, including meetings in private session during each Committee meeting, and at other times throughout the year.

Reviewed the latest results of the FRC’s

quality inspections and our auditors’ response to the FRC’s challenge on the general quality of banking audits as well as enquired into the results of any audit quality reviews of Santander UK.

Based on the above inputs, which were captured in a formalised assessment, the Committee satisfied itself as to the rigour and quality of PwC’s audit process.

Non-audit fees

We have a robust policy onnon-audit services provided by our External Auditors, which was updated in 2016 in the context of the Revised Ethical Standard issued by the FRC on auditor independence requirements resulting from the new European Audit Regulation and Directive.

Non-audit services were under continuous review throughout 20182019 to determine that they were permitted by reference to their nature, assessing potential threats and safeguards to auditor independence as well as the overall ratio of audit tonon-audit fees.

All assignments require advance approval, either by the Chair (or in his absence his alternate), under delegated authority for amounts under £250,000 plus VAT or, if larger, by the full Committee. This process is in addition to the requirement for allnon-audit fees to be approved by the Banco Santander Audit Committee.

The fees fornon-audit work performed by PwC in the year, which are disclosed in Note 7 other thanto the Consolidated Financial Statements, mainly comprised audit-related assurance services relating principally to the review of interim financial information of Santander UK, reporting in connection with the group’s regulators and support of various debt issuance programmes, mainly comprised services in respect of enhancing Santander UK culture and

behaviours and the evolution of the responsibility and sustainability strategy.programmes. We ensured that these met the external and internal tests for maintaining their independence, including evidenceindependence.

In 2019, PwC’snon-audit related fees were 22% of their professional scepticism.

We also monitored othertotal audit fees, in respectwell within the internal cap of work performed70% approved by EY, to ensure they remained unconflicted in their role as our appointed Independent Expert in relation to the ring-fencing requirements.Committee.

Fees fornon-audit work performed by PwC in the year, other than those in relation to audit related assurance services, were approximately 5%2% of the average of the fees approved for Deloitte, EY and KPMG.

The Committee considered the findings of the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA) market study into the UK Statutory Audit market and subsequent Business Energy & Industrial Strategy (BEIS) consultation as well as the Kingman independent review of the Financial Reporting Council and respondednoted management’s responses to the CMA consultation.and BEIS consultations.

Internal controls

The Board Risk Committee has overall responsibility for the effectiveness of the internal control systems. However, due to the nature of internal control matters, there is a degree of overlap in responsibilities with those of this Committee, particularly regarding financial reporting controls.

Section 404 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act requires management to report on the design and effectiveness of its internal controls over financial reporting (ICFR) framework. During 2018,2019, further enhancements have been introduced to the framework including commencing a review of the internal control set to ensure they remain appropriate in light of structural changes within the organisation during the course of the year.framework.

We considered the financial control environment in the year. Finance and our External and Internal Auditors provided regular reports to the Committee on ICFR, including key systems, and provided feedback on remediation and overall improvements required to ensure that the relevant controls were appropriately designed and operating effectively. This included addressing weaknesses inaccess management, end user computing, controls, controls over IFRS 9 and the Client Assets control environment.

 

 

36Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report45


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

 

Disclosure in the Annual Report

We received regular reports from the Disclosure Committee, a senior executive committee chaired by the CFO. Its remit is to advise the Committee on the completeness and accuracy of disclosures in Santander UK’s external reporting. This, together with other reports received in the year, and a review of best practice and the approach of our peers, enabled us to conclude that we were satisfied with the disclosures in this Annual Report.

Management also engaged the Board and Committee early on concerning the approach to the report which enabled them to provide input into the overall tone and messaging in a timely manner.

Fair, balanced and understandable

The Disclosure Committee also reports on whether the Annual Report is fair, balanced, and understandable, aligns with the quarterly results and whether it provides the information necessary for readers to assess Santander UK’s position and performance, business model and strategy:

 

Disclosure in the Annual Report

We received regular reports from the Disclosure Committee, a senior executive committee chaired by the CFO. Its remit is to advise the Committee on the completeness and accuracy of disclosures in Santander UK’s external reporting. This, together with other reports received in the year, and a review of best practice and the approach of our peers, enabled us to conclude that we were satisfied with the disclosures in this Annual Report.

Management also engaged the Board and Committee early on concerning the approach to the report which enabled them to provide input into the overall tone and messaging in a timely manner.

Fair, balanced and understandable

The Disclosure Committee also reports on whether the Annual Report is fair, balanced, and understandable and whether it provides the information necessary for readers to assess Santander UK’s position and performance, business model and strategy. In this context, the Disclosure Committee considered and advised us whether:

–  Key messages remained consistent throughout the document, relating both to financial performance and progress against strategic objectives.priorities.

–  All key judgements, significant risks and issues are reported and explained clearly and adequately.

–  There is a clear framework to the document with good signposting and a complete picture of performance and events.

In addition to the above review process, the Committee’s assessment of fair, balanced and understandable is underpinned by the understanding it gains through the reporting made to it throughout the year of management judgements, internal control matters, Internal Audit activities and the reports of the External Auditors.

The Committee’s assessment also considers the robustness and outcomes of the assurance, review and verification processes conducted by management and considers whether the key risks reflected those that were of a concern to the Committee and were consistent with those reported by management.

Following our assessment we concluded that the 2018 Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable.

Financial Reporting Council (FRC) Annual Review of Corporate Reporting 2018/19

In October 2018, the FRC issued a report which sets out its perspective on key developments for 2018/19

In addition to the above review process, the Committee’s assessment of fair, balanced and understandable is underpinned by the understanding it gains through the reporting made to it throughout the year of management judgements, internal control matters, Internal Audit activities and the reports of the External Auditors.

The Committee’s assessment also considers the robustness and outcomes of the assurance, review and verification processes conducted by management and considers whether the key risks reflected those that were of a concern to the Committee and were consistent with those reported by management.

Following our assessment we concluded that the 2019 Annual Report is fair, balanced and understandable.

Financial Reporting Council (FRC) Annual Review of Corporate Reporting 2019/20

In October 2019, the FRC issued a report which sets out its perspective on key developments for 2019/20 annual reports. As part of our oversight of this area, we received and reviewed a report from management on its work in respect of the areas of interest to the FRC. We are satisfied that management addressed the areas identified by the FRC in the preparation of this Annual Report to the extent appropriate to our ownership structure.

Going Concern

We satisfied ourselves that it is appropriate to use the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements, supported by a detailed analysis provided to the Committee by senior finance management.

As part of the assessment, we considered whether there are sufficient financial resources, including liquidity and capital, available to continue the operations of Santander UK. We considered Santander UK’s resilience in the face of potential stress and prominent events. In making our assessment, we took into account all information of which we were aware about the future, which was at least, but not limited to, 12 months from the date that the balance sheet was signed.

LOGO

Santander UK plc37


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Board Audit Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

Internal Audit

The Internal Audit plan, based on a comprehensive risk assessment, was presented in draft and then final form for challenge and approval by the Committee. The plan has been updated at regular intervals throughout the year in response to changes in the business and the regulatory environment and at the request of the Committee.

In 2018, there was an improvement in the overall distribution of audit ratings, in part due to continued focus on building a stronger control environment. All unsatisfactory audit reports issued were subject to additional scrutiny by the Committee with the relevant business areas being required to present their action plans to the Committee.

We chose to invite management to present on progress with the implementation of Internal Audit’s recommendations, issues encountered, key milestones and key dependencies.

We received regular reports on audit recommendations from our Chief Internal Auditor (the Head of Internal Audit (QuarterlyAudit), quarterly Internal Audit Reports)reports and monitored findings as part of our oversight. We considered the total number of recommendations, the rationale for any of them becoming overdue, and broader root cause analyses. The Committee also requested that the Head ofChief Internal AuditAuditor highlight recommendations becoming due and any that were past due.

We noted a strong engagement between Internal Audit and the business in 2018.2019.

We also oversaw the objective setting and performance evaluation of the Head ofChief Internal Audit.Auditor.

Internal Audit External Quality Assessment

TheThroughout 2019, the Committee reviewed progress implementing the conclusions and recommendations arising from an EQAimprovement opportunities identified in the External Quality Assessment of the Internal Audit function.function that was conducted in 2018. This review is conducted every five years and evaluates the Internal Audit function in respect of its conformance with the standards of the Chartered Institute of Internal Auditors (CIIA), as well as its performance and effectiveness in comparison to industry peers and good practice. The outcome of the review washad been favourable with the function being compliant with the CIIA’s Guidance on Effective Internal Audit in Financial Services – Second Edition and also benchmarked well against peers.

Whilst there were no material weaknesses, as expected improvement opportunities were identified, which have been included in the function’s Continuous Improvement Plan.

Whistleblowing

Santander UK recognises the importance of a culture where colleagues feel able to speak up.

In 2018,2019, management continued to make improvements to its whistleblowing framework and arrangements under our oversight. This included increased resource for bothmanagement changes within the whistleblowing teams as well as a change of management reporting line from legal to conduct and investigation teams, improvedcompliance within the Legal & Regulatory function, further embedding of operating procedures, strengthened controls testingexpanded data analytics capability, targeted training and targeted training.a reporting line more closely aligned to that used by the Banco Santander group in its whistleblowing programme. There has been significant senior management engagement with the CEO sponsoring and opening anexpanded staff whistleblowing communications and awareness event in June 2018.events.

46Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

The Committee is responsible for reviewing and monitoring the effectiveness of Santander UK’s whistleblowing procedures. It received and consideredbi-annual reports on Santander UK’s whistleblowing arrangements. The reporting included oversight and progress of concerns, outcomes, identifiable trends, observable risks, the regulatory environment, changes to proposed legislation and activities to promote and enhance the arrangements to support the culture of speaking up.

The Committee also reviewed the annual Whistleblowing Report prepared for the Board to consider. The Committee is satisfied that Santander UK has complied with the FCA and PRA regulations on whistleblowing in the year.

I continued to act as the Whistleblowers’ Champion to oversee the integrity, independence, and effectiveness of the whistleblowing arrangements. I remained focused on procedures and governance to prevent victimisation of those employees raising a whistleblowing concern. I meet regularly with management and I have been involved in overseeing the implementation of suggested enhancements to continuously improve the arrangements.

Effectiveness of the Committee

The Board has determined that I have the necessary qualifications and skills to qualify as a Board Audit Committee financial expert as defined in Item 16A of Form20-F and by reference to the NYSE listing standards.

In respect of the Revised Statutory Audit Directive, the Board satisfied itself that at least one member of the Committee had competence in accounting and auditing, and the members of the Committee as a whole had competence in the banking sector, in which we are operating.

In my capacity as Committee Chair, I meet with key members of the management team and the External Auditors in advance of each Committee meeting. I ensure that the Committee meets with management, the Internal Auditors and the External Auditors in private sessions. I also attend meetings with the PRA, the FCA and the FRC.

In line with an assessment of the Committee’s forward-looking agenda and the Board programme, it has been agreed that the number of scheduled meetings of the Committee will increase to ninebe ten in 2019.2020.

Committee’s Effectiveness Review

In accordance with good governance, the Committee’s effectiveness was considered as part of the Board’s annual evaluation exercise. Further information, including conclusions, have been provided in the Board Nomination Committee Chair’s Report.

Terms of Reference

The Committee reviews its Terms of Reference annually. Following the 20182019 review, they were revised primarily to reflect the requirements of Banking Reform.ring-fencing. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at www.santander.co.ukwww.aboutsantander.co.uk

Planned activitiesPriorities for 20192020

Areas of focus for the Committee for 20192020 will include:

 

Monitoring any likely financial impact and disclosure consequences of conduct and litigation related issues.

The ongoing monitoring and reviewing of the operation of IFRS 9, including reviewing our enhanced disclosures in response to the recommendations of the PRA’s Taskforce on Disclosure about ECL.

The financial and disclosure consequences of historical conduct issues including PPI.

The financial control and reporting implications of any change in the economy, including any arising from the impact ofeconomic or political risks including Brexit.

Embedding of IFRS 16.

Monitoring changes to the Resolvability Assessment Framework.

Assessing the impact of the Financial Reporting Council’s Revised Ethical Standard (due to take effect from March 2020) on the work that can be undertaken by PwC.

Reporting

Monitoring the rotation of audit partners who have completed their term of service on the audit engagement team.

Succession planning in line with Santander UK’s ring-fencing requirements.respect of the Chief Internal Auditor role.

 

38Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report47


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

Board Responsible Banking Committee Chair’s report

The Committee supports the Board with oversight

oversight of culture, diversity and inclusion,

reputation, customer

outcomes and the

wellbeing of our employees

 

Role and responsibilities

The Committee was established in July 2017 to strengthen Santander UK’s focus on culture, conduct and customer outcomes. Its purpose is to monitor, challenge and support actions taken by management to ensure that the business is run in a socially responsible way, in the interests of Santander UK’s customers, people, stakeholders and communities in order to promote Santander UK’s long-term success.

The Committee assists the Board with shaping Santander UK’s culture, reputation and customer propositions through oversight of matters related to conduct, compliance, culture, diversity, sustainability, corporate social

LOGO

responsibility, reputation, brand and financial crime (including anti-money laundering, sanctions, terrorist financing and anti-bribery and corruption).

Interconnectivity between Board Committees

The respective Committee Chairs agreed the timing and transition of various items, either in part or whole, from the Board Remuneration Committee (RemCo) and the Board Risk Committee (BRC) to the Board Responsible Banking Committee (RBC). The phased transition took place between July 2017 and February 2018.

The Committee Chairs continue to collaborate to prevent any gaps in coverage and to ensure that any areas of overlap are addressed in the appropriate forum. Collaboration is further enhanced by cross-membership of the three respective Committee Chairs. The Committee has oversight for Conduct and Compliance risk within the Risk Appetite and Risk Framework, set by the BRC and will notify the BRC of any material Conduct and Compliance risk matters that require its consideration.

Overview of the year

The Committee’s first full year of operation was 2018, during which it considered, monitored and challenged a range of matters, including:

Customers and customer outcomes

The Committee focused on:

Vulnerable customers
Fair customer treatment and outcomes
Fraud prevention and detection
SME customer experience
Probate and bereavement, including oversight of the process improvements driven by management during the last two years
Changes to overdraft charges
Themes arising from customer complaints whistleblowing and satisfaction metrics including referrals to the Financial Ombudsman Service
GDPR requirements
Open Banking implementation, and
Recruitment,up-skilling our people and enhancing technology to support our customer contact colleagues.

Reputational risk

The Committee ensured that adequate and effective control processes were in place to identify and manage reputational risks.

LOGO

LOGO

 

“During its first full year of operation, the Committee has ensured thatWe have challenged management on delivering appropriate financial crime controls, managing regulatory change and maintaining focus has been given to the issues of responsible banking and how Santander UK’s actions have impacted all ofon continuously improving our stakeholders.”customers’ experiences.

 

LOGOLOGO

 

Scott Wheway

Responsible Banking Committee Chair

24 March 2020

26 February 2019

 

 

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp24p32

 

Committee membership tenure
and attendance

Read more onp47p59

 

LOGORole and responsibilities

The purpose of the Committee is to strengthen focus on culture, conduct and customer outcomes. It monitors, challenges and supports actions taken by management to ensure that the business is run in a responsible way, in the interests of all of our stakeholders including customers, our people and communities in order to promote Santander UK’s long-term success.

The Committee supports the Board with shaping Santander UK’s culture, reputation and customer propositions through oversight of matters related to conduct, compliance, culture, diversity and inclusion, sustainability, corporate social responsibility, reputation, brand and financial crime. The oversight of financial crime includes anti-money laundering, sanctions, terrorist financing, anti-bribery and corruption and a key transformation programme of our controls and systems. In December, the Committee’s Terms of Reference were updated to include oversight of reputational aspects of climate change.

The Committee Chairs collaborate to prevent any gaps in coverage and to ensure that any areas of overlap are addressed in the appropriate forum. Committee Chairs are members of other Board Committees to ensure breadth of visibility and open channels of communication.

Overview of the year

In 2019, the Committee considered, monitored and challenged a range of matters, including:

Customers and Customer Outcomes

The Committee focused on:

Vulnerable customers;

Fair customer treatment and outcomes;

Santander UK plc

Fraud prevention and detection;

39

Themes arising from customer complaints, whistleblowing and satisfaction metrics, including referrals to the FOS;

Changes to overdraft charges;

GDPR requirements;

Open Banking implementation;

Resourcing; and

Enhancing technology to support our customer contact colleagues.

Reputational risk


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Board Responsible BankingThe Committee Chair’s reportcontinuedensured that adequate and effective control processes were in place to identify and manage reputational risks.

It received and considered reports detailing ongoing and possible reputational, brand and franchise risks, including media and public policy issues. The reports also included any key decisions or key risk events that may give rise to reputational risk issues.

Financial crime

The Committee:

Received regular updates on Financial Crime from the UK Money Laundering Reporting Officer, including his annual report, and endorsed the proposed recommendations.recommendations;

Monitored progress of Santander UK in developing and implementing effective systems, processes and controls to combat financial crime.crime;

LOGO

48Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
��

Received regular updates on financial crime from the retail and corporate businesses,businesses; and

Reviewed potential financial crime risks and any actions required in response, including in respect of international sanctions compliance.

Conduct and Compliance

The Committee:

Ensured that adequate and effective control processes and policies were in place to manage and measure Conduct and Compliance risk.risk;

Considered key emerging Conduct and Compliance risk issues, lessons learned and anticipated risks via horizon scanning and investigations.investigations;

Received first and second line reporting against Conduct and Compliance risk metrics and reports on conduct-related regulatory interaction matters.matters;

Considered the FCA Firm-Wide Evaluation and appropriate response plans.plans;

Considered the 20182019 Compliance Programme, including resourcing in the 20182019 Compliance Monitoring Plan,Plan; and

LOGO

Considered any actions in response to regulatory developments, including individual and market developments, on Conduct and Compliance risk matters which may have a material impact on the business.

Culture, DiversityPeople and InclusionCulture

The Committee:

Received regular updates on culture. Risk culture, previously considered by the BRC, transitioned to the Committee and was consideredincluding risk culture, as part of an holistic culture update;

Considered thematic culture and conduct trends, including management-identified cultural drivers, and changes in policy and working practices and the Annual Banking Standards Board assessment;practices;

LOGO

Monitored the culture strategy and monitored management efforts to embed and maintain the desired culture throughout the business in line with Santander UK’sthe Company’s purpose, vision, values and the nine Santander behaviours;

Monitored the approach to Diversity and Inclusion, including progress towards gender targets which support reducing the gender pay gap. More information can be found on our website;

Reviewed programmes relating to the responsible treatment of employees, including diversity and inclusion and wellbeing; and

Monitored the approach to diversity and inclusion, including progress against gender targets to support reducing the gender pay gap; and approved the approach to increasing senior level BAME representation; and

Reviewed key themes arising from employee surveys, focus groups and people metrics in order to evaluate the impact on conduct, brand and culture.culture, including the external Banking Standards Board Assessment and the internal Global Engagement Survey results.

Brand, Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility

The Committee:

Considered and guided on brand purpose.purpose;

Considered the reputation of Santander UK and how reputational risk impacts its brand and market positioning, andpositioning;

Received reportsupdates on brand and reputation tracker metrics.metrics; and

Monitors the embedding of Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility in our business strategy and helps the bank deliver value to all stakeholders, protecting its reputation and brand. It also oversees alignment to international frameworks, such as the Sustainable Development Goals and the UN Principles for Responsible Banking.

Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility

The Committee oversees Santander UK’s alignment to the UN Principles for Responsible Banking and monitors that the Sustainability and Corporate Social Responsibility strategy helps the bank deliver value to all stakeholders and protects its reputation and brand.

A separate Sustainability Report will be issued during the first half of 2019.

Membershipmembership

All five members of the Committee, including the Chair, are IndependentNon-Executive Directors (INEDs).Directors. A list of members, details of their experience, qualifications and attendance at Committee meetings during the year are shown on pages 19 and 20, and 47.in the Board of Directors section.

In addition to the Committee members, during 2019, regular attendees at Committee meetings includeincluded the Board Chair, Chief Executive Officer, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Head of Retail and Business Banking, Company Secretary, Chief HR Officer, Director of Corporate Communications and the Director of Conduct and Compliance.

Committee’s Effectiveness Review

In accordance with good governance,An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness was considered as partduring 2019 will take place during the first quarter of 2020 to provide the Board’s annual evaluation exercise. Further information, including conclusions, have been providedfeedback mechanism for continuous improvement and to keep areas for development in the Board Nomination Committee Chair’s Report.focus.

Terms of Reference

TheIn December 2019, the Committee reviews itsadopted updated Terms of Reference annually. Followingfollowing the 2018annual review they were revised primarily to reflect the requirements of Banking Reform.its role and responsibilities. The Committee’s Terms of Reference are available at www.santander.co.ukwww.aboutsantander.co.uk.

2019 prioritiesPriorities for 2020

In 2019,2020, the Committee will continue to take an holistic approach to gain greater understanding and oversight of all of the key areas that contribute to the experiences felt byof our customers, our people and wider stakeholders.

Key priorities within this will be:

Ensuring that our customer propositions are ever more Simple, Personal

Enforcement of Financial Crime and Fair.Fraud prevention;

Enhancing fraud protection and financial crime prevention and detection processes.

Monitoring the delivery of the Financial Crime Transformation Programme;

Managing conduct

Oversight of the wide ranging programme of Regulatory change, including timelines, complexity, customer impact and compliance risk.outcomes;

Ensuring that our change and transformation programmes are delivered in a way that enhances the strength

Enhancement of the organisation and the environment for our people;fraud prevention;

Managing and enhancing our Brand and reputation.

Monitoring reputational risks;

Ensuring the highest standards of conduct and fair outcomes for our customers;

Considering

Oversight of the impact of digital disruption threatstransformation of the UK banking landscape on our customers;people, customers and wider stakeholders;

Monitoring Sustainability initiatives, embedding, measurement and reporting progress; and

Enhancing

Oversight of management efforts to embed and maintain the wellbeingdesired culture through the cultural priorities of our employees.supporting transformation through simplification, driving a learning culture and being an inclusive and responsible organisation.

 

 

40Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report49


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

Board Remuneration Committee Chair’s reportReport

Underlying our approachThe objective is to ensure that remuneration

is Santander UK’s aspiration to be Simple,

Personal and Fair in all that we do.

This year the Committee has reviewed our overall approach to remuneration, whilst also continuing to embed and enhance our underlying remuneration governance processes. The review of our approach to remuneration focused on whether the current framework remainspractices are aligned to Santander UK’s strategy as well as considering

strategic priorities and reinforce the recent changes to the UK Corporate Governance Code.right

In addition, in light of the structural changes due to Banking Reform, we reviewedculture and behaviours by our remuneration policies and practices to ensure they are appropriate in advance of 2019.colleagues.

 

LOGO

*

Oversight for Culture transferred to the Board Responsible Banking Committee in 2018.

Our approach to remuneration

Underlying our approach to remuneration is Santander UK’s aspiration to be Simple, Personal and Fair in all that we do. We therefore focus on delivering a reward framework that is simple to understand, tailored to individual roles and competitive to attract, retain and motivate employees of the highest calibre.

Whilst encouraging a high performance culture, we also focus on employees displaying conduct and behaviours aligned to Santander UK’s strategic objectives, culture and values, The Santander Way.

A significant proportion of our performance related pay is deferred over the long-term and remains ‘at risk’. Provisions within our Regulated Remuneration Governance Framework (RRGF) allow Santander UK to reduce or cancel variable pay awards for up to ten years and seven years after they are awarded for Senior Management Functions (SMFs) and Material Risk Takers (MRTs) respectively.

Overview of the year

Remuneration philosophy

The Committee and the Board considered whether our approach to remuneration continues to support our business strategy and align management’s interests with those of our shareholder.

A full action plan has been developed, setting out when the Committee will consider key areas for review over 2019. This includes a review of our local retail reward schemes and consideration of how our variable pay frameworks could be enhanced to more appropriately reflect individual and collective performance whilst remaining aligned to our risk appetite. The Committee will also review our current Employee Value Proposition, covering reward plus broader considerations at all levels of the organisation.

New UK Corporate Governance Code provisions

The Committee considered the requirements of the new UK Corporate Governance Code and its implications for Santander UK. Over the coming year we will continue to monitor evolving market practice and consider how we can improve the Committee’s understanding of the broader workforce policies and practices in order to support decisions on executive pay.

LOGO

LOGO

 

Whilst encouraging a high performance culture,Following ring-fencing, the Committee remains dynamic in its approach, as we also focus on employees displaying conductcontinue to enhance remuneration governance to reflect our evolving strategy, control environment and behaviours aligned to Santander UK’s strategic objectives, culture and values, The Santander Way.”the latest governance developments in the UK.

 

LOGO

LOGO

 

Annemarie Durbin

Board Remuneration Committee Chair

26 February 201924 March 2020

 

Responsibilities of the Committee

Read more onp24p32

 

Committee membership tenure
and attendance

Read more onp47p59

LOGO

Santander UK plc41


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

BoardI am pleased to present the Directors’ Remuneration Committee Chair’s reportcontinued

Performance management framework

The Committee reviewedReport for 2019. Santander UK continues to undergo significant transformational change, following ring-fencing and other strategic priorities. Against this backdrop, theend-to-end performance management process for MRTs and approved enhancements to our current process which applied for 2018 pay decisions.

Risk adjustment

We further embedded the processes to support our risk adjustment frameworks. This included enhancements to the individual remuneration adjustment governance through which role of the Committee receives recommendations fromevolved in 2019.

Role and responsibility

The purpose of the Individual Accountability Committee (IAC) maintainingis to maintain oversight of management’s approach toin-year risk adjustments.

Structural changes

Following the acquisitionapplication and implementation of Santander Services from Banco Santander SA on 1 January 2018 we sought to align their remuneration policy, governancepolicies and frameworks and processes with our RRGF, and where appropriate looked to harmonise arrangements. Additionally, in light of the changes tofor the Santander UK Group due to Banking Reform and in order to ensure compliance with the relevant PRA ring-fencing rules under the Banking Reform Act, we reviewed our remuneration governance, policies and processes during the year. This included anend-to-end review of our RRGF to ensure it was appropriate in advance of 2019.

Gender pay

As agroup. The Committee we considered our inaugural Gender Pay Gap (GPG) report, which was issued in the first quarter of 2018. We published our second GPG report in the final quarter of 2018. Following its establishment in 2017, the Board Responsible Banking Committee has oversight of the programmes aimed at improving diversity across the bank including closing the gender pay gap.

Senior appointments

During the year the Committee approvedis also responsible for the remuneration arrangements for a number of senior appointments. This includedemploying entities within the remuneration package for Susan Allen who was appointed as an Executive Director from 1 January 2019.Ring-Fenced Bank perimeter.

Variable PayOverview of the year

We reviewedBusiness Performance in 2019 and Impact on Remuneration

Taking into account financial andnon-financial performance achieved in 2019 together with an assessment of current and future risks, the structure and metrics for our variable reward and our local reward schemes, with a focus on enhancing differentiation, simplification and harmonisation. We sought assurance that any proposed changes to our incentive plans rewarded appropriate conduct and did not reward behaviours that could lead to unnecessary risk taking.

Bonus pool approval

The Committee approved with appropriate adjustments, the overall bonus pools for Santander UK, Santander Corporate & Investment Bank (UK)(for employees in the Ring-Fenced Bank only) and Santander Consumer UK, taking into accountUK. When determining reward outcomes the financialCommittee was mindful of the overall performance of the bank. Details on remuneration received by the Executive Directors in 2019 are set out on page 56.

Governance

We have undertaken a review of our over- arching remuneration governance frameworks andnon-financial performance achieved together with an assessment policies in the context of current and future risks.

Membership

All four membersring-fencing requirements, whilst considering the wider obligations of the Banco Santander group. As part of this review, we approved a new set of remuneration principles which govern the operation of the Committee includingand the Committee Chair are IndependentNon-Executive Directors (INEDs).extent to which it interacts with Santander UK Group Holdings plc (which sits outside the Ring-fenced Bank) for 2020.

Regular attendees include the Board Chair, CEO, Chief HR Officer, Performance & Reward Director, Company Secretary, Chief Legal & Regulatory Officer, Chief Risk Officer, Deloitte LLP, as appointed independent Remuneration Committee advisers.New Executive members

The Committee satisfied itself that Deloitte do not have connectionsconsidered remuneration packages for two new Executive Directors who joined the Board in 2019. Susan Allen was appointed as Head of Retail and Business Banking with effect from 1 January 2019. Duke Dayal replaced Antonio Roman as Chief Financial Officer with effect from 16 September 2019. Antonio Roman stepped down from the Santander UK Board to return to Madrid as Head of Retail, Corporate and Commercial of Banco Santander SA. Details of Susan’s and Duke’s remuneration for 2019 are set out in this report.

LOGO

50Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Pension contributions

As reported last year, following developments in corporate governance and best practice, the Committee decided to align pension contributions for new Executive Director appointments to 9% of salary, being the average contribution available to the wider workforce. This pension level applied for both Susan Allen and Duke Dayal on their appointment to the Board. In 2019 we decided to extend this approach to existing Executive Directors, namely our Chief Executive Officer. This will result in a reduction of the Chief Executive Officer’s pension provision from 35% to 9% of salary. This will be phased over a two-year period, with an initial reduction to 22% of salary effective 1 January 2020.

Variable pay

We continuously evaluate the structure and metrics of our variable reward schemes to ensure continued alignment between metrics and strategic priorities, that may impair their independence.performance targets are stretching and robust and that our framework reflects the evolving views of our various stakeholders.

For 2019, variable pay was based on a balanced scorecard of metrics across Customers, Shareholders and People. Communities, the fourth element of the Santander UK Compass, formed part of our risk adjustment and will form part of the scorecard for 2020, reflecting our goals on sustainability. Please see the Sustainability Review on pages 9 to 12 for more details on our sustainability goals.

Risk adjustment

2018 Business PerformanceOur risk adjustment procedures, which are applicable to all colleagues, are robust and Impactwell embedded within our remuneration policy. We used a series of risk adjustment mechanisms includingin-year individual adjustments to performance rating/reward outcomes; individual adjustment as a result of accountability reviews; and collective adjustments at a bonus pool level. During 2019, the Committee further enhanced our risk adjustment process to ensure a more comprehensive review of relevant metrics.

Inclusion, Diversity and Gender Pay

Diversity in the workforce and a commitment to ensuring an inclusive culture remains a key strategic priority of our Bank. Our Gender Pay reporting for 2019 (published in December 2019) demonstrates our progress to date in this area, although it is recognised that change will take time. We recognise the contribution of a diverse workforce to the success of our organisation and look forward to building on Remunerationprogress made in 2019. For more information refer to the Sustainability Review on pages 9 to 12.

Wider workforce

Our management team has delivered solid business performance thisobjective is to ensure that all employees at Santander UK are treated fairly and that we provide competitive remuneration which is linked to performance. During the year, deliveringthe Committee reviewed the broader remuneration policies and practices across the organisation, and considered these when determining remuneration for our shareholders, people, customerssenior population. The Committee has also continued its work on developing our employee value proposition and communities.work in this area will continue in 2020.

This year, for the first time, we have chosen to voluntarily disclose the CEO pay ratio compared to the wider workforce. This can be found on page 57.

Committee membership

During 2019, there was no change to the Committee’s membership. The continued progress made towardsCommittee met eight times during 2019, reflecting the level of strategic activity during the year. The Committee is satisfied that its composition and operation complies with our strategic and operational goals (including the establishment of the ring-fence bank) was achieved despite the competitive and uncertain environment.ring-fencing obligations.

Effectiveness of the Committee

In accordance with good governance,The Committee has a process to solicit feedback at the end of each meeting in the spirit of continuous improvement. An internal review of the Committee’s effectiveness was considered. This concluded thatduring 2019 will take place during the Committee retains an appropriate balancefirst quarter of skills2020, to provide the feedback mechanism for continuous improvement and expertise to carry out its role effectively.keep areas for development in focus.

The Committee also takes the opportunity at the conclusion of each meeting to reflect, together with management, on the quality of papers, meeting management and any other observations of relevance.

Terms of reference

The terms of reference were reviewed and revised during the year to reflect the scope of the Committee’s role with respect to employees ofcolleagues within the Santander UK.UK group. Full terms of reference are available at www.aboutsantander.co.uk.www. aboutsantander.co.uk.

Priorities for 20192020

In 2019, we will:

Implement the changes agreed to our remuneration policies and governance structures due to the structural changes as a result of the Banking Reform legislation, and monitor their implementation

Review incentive measures to ensure they are operating effectively incontinue to align with our strategic aims and drive the contextright culture and behaviours; balancing the needs of the new structure of the Santander UK Group.our people, customers, communities and shareholders.

Continue to monitorcomply with ring-fencing obligations, ensuring adherence to the operational parameters in the terms of reference of the Committee and Santander UK Group Holdings plc’s Board Remuneration Committee.

Monitor the effectiveness of our overall remuneration framework, including the structure of our current variable pay plans and determine whether any changes should be made for future years.made.

Review

Continue to monitor developments in executive remuneration best practices within the balanced scorecard of quantifiable measuresindustry, and broader market taking into account the regulatory landscape and corporate governance, both from a European and UK perspective, and consider whether any changes to ensure they drive the right culture and behaviours balancing the needs of our people, customers, communities and shareholders.Policy are necessary.

In

Monitor and review the spirit of recent changes toremuneration policies and trends across the Santander UK Corporate Governance Code and market practice, considergroup, considering how executive pay in relationrelates to the broader employee remuneration arrangements. This includes setting the pensions arrangements of new Executive Director hires in line with those of the general employee population. We will continue to monitor changes in market practice as others respond to the new Code.

Review our disclosures to ensure alignment with our commitment to be Simple, Personal and Fair.

Implement

Monitor and review any risks and mitigants in relation to remuneration.

Continue to enhance our employee value proposition with the view of attracting and retaining a new reward scheme for our broader employee populationgeneration of colleagues to incentivisesupport the delivery of Santander UK’s key strategic priorities.Company in its transformation journey.

 

 

42Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report51


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    

Remuneration policy report and remuneration policies

 

Basis of preparation

This report has been prepared on behalf of the Board by the Board Remuneration Committee. We comply with the statutory reporting obligations for large private companies. In addition, we follow the UK corporate governance regulations, guidelinesCorporate Governance Code 2018 (the Code) and codesother listed disclosure requirements to the extent considered appropriate taking into accountgiven our

ownership structure.structure, save for some factors. These relate to remuneration policy (see below with regard to post-employment shareholdings) and certain descriptions of the Committee’s work as provided under provision 41. Accordingly, a number ofseveral voluntary disclosures relating to remuneration have been presented in this report.

Executive remuneration policies and principles

Our core values of Simple, Personal and Fair drive our remuneration policy.

Our policies are designed with the long-term success of the business in mind, to deliver our business strategy and reinforce our values.

We apply a consistent approach to the reward of all our employees which upholds our prudent approach to Risk Appetite which is set as part of a SantanderUK-wide Risk Framework.

The structure of our variable pay plan for our Executive Directors ensures that there is a clear link between the Company’s strategy and remuneration. Awards under the variable pay plan are based on a balanced scorecard of quantitative and qualitative metrics taking into account Santander UK Group Holding plc’s KPIs in the areas of Customers, Shareholders and People. This ensures that ourday-to-day activities align with the over-arching strategy of the bank and helps us to measure progress towards our strategic priorities and our aim of being the best bank.

The allocation of awards under the variable pay plan takes into account an assessment of the Executive Director’s performance against a performance management framework set at the start of the year covering a range of financial,non-financial, quantitative and qualitative criteria.

Forward-looking remuneration policiespolicy for Executive Directors

Our forward-looking remuneration policies arepolicy is outlined in the table below. Remuneration is structured into two main elements: fixed pay and our single variable pay. Fixed pay plan. The aim is to set fixed pay at market competitive levels appropriate for the role. The level of fixed pay aims to be sufficientrole so that inappropriate risk taking is not encouraged. Variable pay rewards the delivery of financial targets, key strategic priorities and individual performance.

 

 

Executive Directors’ remuneration structure

Fixed Pay

 

Fixed Pay  Principle and description  Policy
Base salary  

– Reviewed annuallyTo attract and retain Executive Directors of sufficient calibre and with the requisite skills to ensure market competitive pay appropriate fordeliver the role.

–  Set at an appropriate level so that inappropriate riskstrategy taking is not encouraged.

–  Reflectsinto account the demands and complexity of each role and the responsibilities and experience of each individual.

role.

  

– SalariesBase salaries are setnormally reviewed annually. In reviewing base salaries the Committee considers a number of factors, including:

– The skills and responsibilities of the role alongside the market value of these attributes;

– Set at a level to reflect prevailingavoid inappropriate risk taking;

– Base salary increases awarded across the wider employee population; and

– Prevailing market and economic conditions.

Pension

arrangements

  

– Post-retirement benefits for participants are offered inTo provide a cost-efficient manner.discrete element of the package to contribute towards retirement.

  

– All Executive Directors receive a cash allowance in lieu of pension.

– Unless determined otherwise, pension arrangements for new appointments to the Board will be in line with the average level of pension provision available to the broader workforce.workforce, currently 9% of salary.

– Our approach to current Executive Director pension allowances is set out on page 53.

Other benefits  

– Benefits are offered to Executive Directors as part of a competitive remuneration package.package and to support the wellbeing of employees.

  

– IncludesIncluding but not limited to: private medical insurance for Executive Directors and their dependants, life assurance, health screening, relocation allowances and expatriate allowances where relevant.

– Access to Santander UK’sall-employee share schemes on the same terms as all UK employees.

Variable Pay

Variable Pay  Principle and description  Policy
Variable pay plan  

– To motivate Executive Directors to achieve and exceed annual financial and strategic targets within Santander UK’s Risk Appetite and in alignment with our business strategy and values.

– Multi-year deferral, further performance testing and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares aligns Executive Directors’ interests to the long-term interests of Santander UK.

– Deferral of part of the award is applied in accordance with the requirements of the PRA Remuneration Code.

  

– Awards are discretionary and determined by reference to performance against a scorecard of financial and strategic goals.goals based on Company and individual performance.

– 40% of the bonus awarded is paid upfront after the performance year ends (year one), delivered half in cash and half in shares.

– 60% of the bonus awarded is deferred and delivered in equal tranches over years three to seven, with each tranche delivered half in cash and half in shares.

– The finalFor Executives, the first three of five deferred award tranches are subject to further performance testing, which may reduce the level of payout, but not increase the deferred payout.award.

– Share-basedShare based awards are subject to a minimum twelve monthtwelve-month retention period following the relevant vesting date.

– Malus and clawback provisions apply to all elements of variable pay for up to ten years following the grant of an award.

– The structure of variable pay awards ensures that Executives acquire a meaningful shareholding in Banco Santander SA which may extend for a significant period post-employment. As such, a formal post-employment shareholding requirement is not in place at this time.

LOGO

 

52Santander UK plc


 43
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

 


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Remuneration report and remuneration policiescontinued

The variable pay plan rewards financial andnon-financial performance over the year with additional long-term metrics applied to the deferred element which can reduce, but not increase, the deferred award.

Our remuneration structures, which incorporate significant long-term deferral and use of Banco Santander SA shares align the interests of Executive Directors with shareholders and encourage the building of a long-term shareholding in Banco Santander SA.

Our remuneration policy continues to meet regulatory requirements. Santander UK applies a 2:1 variable to fixed pay cap in line with approvals granted to Banco Santander SA. For control function staff,colleagues, a lower operational ratio of 1:1 is applied, save for in exceptional circumstances.

Executive remuneration policies and principles

Our core values of Simple, Personal and Fair drive our remuneration policy. We focus on delivering a reward framework that is simple to understand, tailored to individual roles and competitive yet fair.

The key drivers of our Remuneration Policy

Alignment to culture

To design policies aligned to the long-term success of the business which support the delivery of our strategy and reinforce our values.

To base variable pay on a balanced scorecard of quantitative and qualitative metrics which reflect our KPIs across Customers, Shareholders and People. For 2020, Communities has beenre-introduced into the bonus scorecard (previously considered as part of risk adjustment). This ensures that ourday-to-day activities align with Santander UK’s over-arching strategy and our aim of being the best bank.

Simplicity

To ensure our approach to remuneration is transparent and easily understood.

To operate simple and clear structures for all Santander UK colleagues.

Risk

To apply a consistent approach to reward for all our employees which upholds our prudent approach to Risk Appetite set as part of a SantanderUK-wide Risk Framework. Risk adjustment occurs at both an individual and bonus pool level.

To provide a balanced package between fixed and variable pay, and short-term and long-term pay horizons to align with our strategic goals whilst promoting prudent risk management.

To ensure remuneration is compliant with applicable regulations and legislation.

Fairness

To take into account an assessment of the Executive Director’s performance against a performance management framework set at the start of the year covering a range of financial,non-financial, quantitative and qualitative criteria.

To set robust and stretching targets which reward exceptional performance.

To attract, retain and motivate employees of the highest calibre by providing total remuneration which reflects individual and Company performance, is competitive, reflects the responsibilities of the role and drives the organisation’s growth.

To consider wider employee pay when determining pay of our Executives.

Clarity

The Committee reviews remuneration reporting on an annual basis against principles of best practice and developments in corporate governance, including the Code. Our reporting is designed to be transparent to promote effective stakeholder engagement but reflective of our subsidiary structure.

Predictability

The Committee reviews the variable pay opportunity for individuals annually and the basis of the pool calculation. However, due to commercial sensitivity , these are not disclosed as per the requirements of the Code. Directors’ remuneration is within the variable pay cap as approved by Banco Santander SA shareholders and set out above on this page.

Executive Director pension alignment

In 2018, following developments in corporate governance and best practice, the Committee took the decision to reduce pension allowances for new Executive Directors to 9% of salary, in line with the wider workforce average. This pension level applied on the appointment to the Board of Susan Allen, Head of Retail and Business Banking, on 1 January 2019 and Duke Dayal, Chief Financial Officer, on 16 September 2019.

In 2019, the Committee decided to extend this approach to existing Executive Directors, namely the Chief Executive Officer. This reduction shall be phased with the Chief Executive Officer’s allowance reducing from 35% to 22% of salary, effective 1 January 2020. From 1 January 2021, the Chief Executive Officer’s pension will be reduced further to the employee average of 9% of salary p.a.. No other changes to the Chief Executive Officer’s remuneration are proposed for 2020.

On recruitment

When appointing a new Executive Director, base salary is set at a market competitive level appropriate for the role, taking into

consideration a range of factors including scope and responsibilities of the role, internal relativities, the individual’s previous remuneration, relevant experience, and an assessment against relevant comparator groups and cost. In line with the requirements of the new UK Corporate Governance Code and in particular the guidance on executive director pension levels, unless

Unless determined otherwise, any new Executive Director will receive a pension benefits at a levelallowance in line with the wider workforce average, being 9% of salary. Benefits available will typically be aligned to the wider employee population.

Other elements of remuneration will be established in line with the Remuneration Policy, set out in the Executive Directors’ remuneration structure table on page 45. 52.

Relocation support and international mobility benefits may also be provided. Where provided, relocation assistance will normally be for a capped amount and/or limited time. For an overseas appointment, the Committee will have discretion to offer cost effective benefits and pension provisions which reflect local market practice and relevant legislation.

Buy-out awards

Compensation may be provided to Executive Directors recruited externally for the forfeiture of any award on leaving their previous employer. The Committee retains discretion to make such compensation as it deems necessary anddeemed appropriate to secure the relevant Executive Director’s employment and ensure any such payments align with the long-term interests of Santander UK and the prevailing regulatory framework.

Such payments will be in line with the benefits foregone from leaving the previous employer taking into account value, vesting dates and the extent to which performance conditions applied to the original awards.

Service agreements

Terms and conditions of employment are set out in individual service agreements which include a notice period of six months from both the Executive Director and the Company.

The agreements may be terminated immediately with payment of fixed pay in lieu of notice. In the event of termination for gross misconduct, neither notice nor payment in lieu of notice is required, and any deferred awards are forfeited.

Santander UK plc53


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration policy reportcontinued

Termination payments

The impact on remuneration of an Executive Director leaving the Company on remuneration under various scenarios reflects the service agreements, and the relevant scheme rules, and the Committee’s policy in this area.

With respect to outstanding variable pay awards, these generally lapse on termination, other than where an individual is considered to be a ‘good leaver’. The Committee determines whether an Executive Director is a good leaver should their employment end due tounder certain circumstances including but not limited to: injury,ill-health, disability, redundancy, retirement, death, or any other reason at the Committee’s discretion. In 2018, the Committee reviewed its approach to determining good leaver status and has approved

There is a framework in place which is intended to guide the Committee to determine the discretionary circumstances when good leaver status is appropriate. Other than a payment in the event of redundancy, there are generally no other payments upon termination of employment for Executive Directors anticipatedDirectors.

In the event of a change in control, variable pay awards may continue to be paid in respect of the policy.full financial year (pre and post change of control), or an award may be made in respect of the portion of the year that has elapsed at the point of change in control. Exceptionally the Committee may exercise its discretion to waivepro-rating. In the event of a change in control, outstanding share awards may lapse and be replaced with equivalent awards over shares in a new company, subject to Committee discretion. Alternatively, outstanding awards may vest on a change in control, subject to the assessment of performance andpro-rating of awards where appropriate.

Risk and Performance adjustment

We will continue to ensure that the requirements of the Remuneration Code on risk and performance adjustment are met for our employees. All variable remuneration is subject to adjustment for current and future risks through our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard which is linked to our Board approved Risk Appetite and our Individual Remuneration Adjustment Standard.Appetite.

Our Additional Risk Adjustment Standard (the Standard) provides both a formula-based assessment against Santander UK’s Risk Appetite and an additional qualitative risk event assessment overlay that can result in a downward risk adjustment of up to 100% ofreduce the bonus pool or individual awards to nil at the Committee’s discretion. The Standard also

considers a range of factors deemed relevant by the Committee such as evolution of complaints, progress on remediation projects, ring-fencing compliance and people, culture and communities metrics. Given commercial sensitivity, the Committee does not provide annual detail on the application of discretion ofas required by the Committee.Code.

Our Individual Remuneration Adjustment Standard provides a framework for the process, governance and standards relevant for making decisions in relation to individual performance adjustments following an Incident,incident, including the application of malus and clawback.

Performance adjustments may include, but are not limited to:

 

Reducing a bonus for the current yearyear;

Reducing the amount of any unvested deferred variable remuneration (including historical LTIP awards)remuneration;

Requiring a bonus which has been awarded (but not yet paid) to be forfeited; and

Requiring repayment on demand (on a net basis) of any cash and share awards received at any time during thefor a period of up to ten year period afteryears following the date of award

Requiring a bonus which has been awarded (but not yet paid) to be forfeited.award.

The Committee has full discretion to prevent vesting of all or part of an amount of deferred remuneration and/or to freeze an award during an ongoing investigation in anya number of the following circumstances:circumstances, including:

 

Employee misbehaviour or material errorerror;

Material downturn in the performance of Santander UK or a relevant business unit’s performanceperformance;

Santander UK or a relevant business unit suffers a material failure of risk managementmanagement;

Significant changes in the Banco Santander Group’s or Santander UK’s economic or regulatory capital base and the qualitative assessment of riskrisk; and

Material restatement of the Banco Santander Group’s or Santander UK’s financial statements (except when required due to modification of the accounting rules).

When determining variable pay awards for individuals performing roles across Santander UK plc and Santander UK Group Holdings, the Holdings Remuneration Committee will apply any necessary discretion based on factors related to UK Group entities outside of Santander UK plc. This discretion is subject to validation by the Santander UK plc Remuneration Committee.

The Committee seeks input from the Chair of the Board Risk Committee, the Chief Risk Officer, the Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer, Chief HR Officer, Chair of the Board Audit Committee, Chair of the Board and the Chief Internal Auditor when determining whether any performance or risk adjustments are required.

Policy for all employees

Our performance, reward and benefits approach across the Company supports and drives our business strategy, rewards strong performance and reinforces our values inwithin the contextapproved risk management framework. The general principles of a clearly articulated Risk Appetite. Wethe Remuneration Policy broadly apply a consistent approachacross all colleagues where appropriate and are designed to rewardfacilitate recruitment, motivation and retention whilst driving performance.

The composition of remuneration packages for all employees. Employees are entitled to a basethe Executive Directors is aligned with the broader colleague population, comprising salary, pensions and benefits and have the opportunity to receive an element of performance-related compensation, subject to theireligibility for discretionary variable pay dependent on role and reward band.responsibility. The opportunitylevel of performance-rated compensation availablepension allowance for newly appointed Executives is based onaligned with the seniority and responsibility ofaverage employer contribution for the role. wider workforce.

The Remuneration Committee annually approve the operation of all of our variable reward schemes for our customer-facing colleagues to ensure that all our plans reward appropriate behaviour and do not incentivise unnecessary risk taking.

 

 

4454 Santander UK plc


 > Corporate governance report
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

    

 

Remuneration implementation report

 

Introduction

This section of the report outlines how our Remuneration Policy was implemented for 2018.2019.

Variable Pay Plan

OurTo incentivise and reward Executive Directors for achieving superior and sustained performance, our Directors participate in a single variable incentive plan. The purposeA balance of the plan is to align participants’ reward with the financial andnon-financial performance of Santander UKmetrics are selected annually by the Committee and are aligned with our strategy as measured over the financial year. Multi-year deferral, further performance testing and delivery in Banco Santander SA shares ensures that Executive Directors’ interests are aligned to the long-term interestinterests of the Santander UK Group. Payments to our Executive Directorsbusiness. Both upfront and deferred awards are made half in cash and half in shares, spreadshares. The deferred element is delivered over seven years, with the finalfirst three deferred tranches of awards subject to further performance testing against long-term metrics which can reduce but not increase the level of awards. Awards delivered in shares are subject to an additionalone-year retention period from the point of delivery.

The 2018structure of the plan is illustrated below. The 2019 Variable Pay Plan pool was determined based on a range of metrics using a balanced scorecard approach (explained further below):as follows:

Quantitative assessment

QuantitativeA quantitative assessment

Measured using is undertaken against a balanced scorecard approach of financial andnon-financial measures. The measuresmetrics that are based onkey to Santander UK’s strategy and for 2018 were:2019 strategy:

Customers (Satisfaction(Net Promotor Score and loyal customers)

Shareholders

 

Risk (Cost of Credit Ratiocredit ratio and NPLStage 3 ratio)

 

Capital (Contribution to Banco Santander Groupgroup capital)

 

Profitability (Net Profitprofit and Return on Risk Weighted Assets)RoTE)

Employees (Employee Engagement and Enablement Scores)Engagement).

Threshold performance under the CustomerPerformance metrics are reviewed annually to ensure continued alignment with KPIs and Shareholder categories must be achieved in order to access payout under the Employee category. Similarly, the Committee considers a discretionary downward adjustment to the Customer and Shareholder categories if satisfactory performance under the Employee category is not achieved.strategy.

Qualitative assessment

ThisA qualitative assessment adds context to the quantitative assessment of financial andnon-financial measures to ensure ensures a balanced assessmentview of performance has been made.

Banco Santander Group Multiplier

This adjustsThe Committee has the discretion to adjust the pool upwards or downwards to reflect overall Banco Santander performance.performance if appropriate.

Exceptional Adjustment

Intended to cover unexpected factors or additional targets not covered by the quantitative or qualitative assessments. This may also include adjustments not covered in the qualitative assessments, including major risk events. AnNo exceptional adjustment, including additional targets, may be requested at a Banco Santander or Santander UK level.metrics were applied to the 2019 variable pay awards.

UK-focused risk adjustment

Linked to Santander UK’s Risk Appetite, this provides both a formula-based assessment against Risk Appetite and an additional qualitative risk event assessment overlay (including consideration of people, culture, contribution to communities, conduct and other relevant factors) that can

result in a downward risk adjustment of up to 100% of the bonus pool or individual awards at the discretion of the Committee. The 2018 Variable Pay Plan operated under our remuneration governance and frameworks applicable prior to the changes required as a result of the ring-fencing rules under the Banking Reform Act.

The Committee has considered, reviewed and approved changes required to remuneration governance and frameworks in order to comply with the relevant regulatory rules, including for ring-fencing and these will applyhave applied from the 2019 performance year.

Deferred long-term awards

The payment of the first three deferred tranches of the 2019 awards (36% of the total award), payable in 2023, 2024 and 2025, is conditional on the achievement of long-term objectives measured over the three-year period 2020 to 2022. The performance measures for 2019 awards are EPS, relative TSR and compliance with the fully-loaded Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital. Following performance assessment, the level of awards will be adjusted accordingly. The measures can reduce but not increase the value of the deferred awards. The payment of the final two deferred tranches (24% of the total award), payable in 2026 and 2027 are subject to continued employment only.

LOGO

Santander UK plc55


Annual Report 20192018| Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

2019 Business Performance and Impact on Remuneration

Our management team hasSantander UK delivered solid business performance this year, delivering fora strong balance sheet in 2019 despite results being impacted by a challenging banking environment. Whilst competitive pressures on mortgages and PPI charges coupled with continued investment in our shareholders, people,transformation programme impacted on profit, we are continuing to support customers whilst growing and communities.

Our business performance in 2018 showed selectiveoperating a sustainable business. Santander UK achieved its strongest net mortgage growth in a decade, reinforcing its position as the UK’s third largest mortgage lender. Our drive to deliver tailored products and customer service with an uncertain and competitive operating environment.enhanced digital offering was reflected in the growth of customer deposits.

The Committee approved payments to Executive Directors under the Santander UK Variable Pay Plan in the context of this performance.

Executive Directors’In addition the Committee confirmed that the remuneration (audited)

Total remuneration of each Executive Directorpolicy operated as intended, demonstrating pay for the years ended 31 December 2018 and 2017.

  Executive rewards

 

    

 

Nathan Bostock(1)  

 

       

Antonio Roman(2) (3)    

 

     

Javier San Felix(3)    

 

     

Total      

 

 
     

 

2018 

     2017         2018      2017       2018      2017       2018      2017   
     £000      £000         £000      £000       £000      £000       £000      £000   

Salary and fees

     1,680       1,653         629       243       725       302       3,034       2,198   

Taxable benefits (cash andnon-cash)

     50       55               17       632       329       687       401   

Pension

     588       581         157       61       –       –       745       642   

Bonus (paid and deferred)

     2,317       2,425         1,077       400       1,800       861       5,194       3,686   

Total remuneration

         4,635           4,714          1,868           721            3,157           1,492            9,660           6,927   

(1)

Nathan Bostock’s remuneration does not include £1,800,000 (2017: £1,800,000) relating to a share basedbuy-out of deferred awards in respect of his previous employment. This was the final payment under this award.

(2)

This represents an allocation of 97% (2017: 90%) of Antonio Roman’s remuneration (for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year) as he spends 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% (£57,785) (2017: 10% and £175,866) has been allocated to Abbey National Treasury Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,926,181.

(3)

Antonio Roman and Javier San Felix were appointed as Directors on 1 August 2017 and therefore 2017 remuneration is in respect of a part year. To facilitate his move to the UK, Javier San Felix’s package includes certain expatriate benefits, including a housing allowance, life and accident insurance and death and disability benefits, the costs of which are shared with Banco Santander. During 2018, Javier San Felix’s remuneration package was restructured following his transfer out of the Banco Santander defined benefit pension scheme. Banco Santander contributed £231,922 into its defined benefit pension scheme on his behalf in the period in 2017 in which he served as a Santander UK Executive Director. In 2018, Banco Santander paid £215,403 in defined benefit pension scheme contributions, £205,669 to him in lieu of defined benefit pension contributions, and £243,673 other payments in connection with the restructuring.

(4)

Susan Allen was appointed as an Executive Director on 1 January 2019. Her remuneration will be disclosed in next year’s annual report.

performance alignment.

LOGO

Santander UK plc45


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

Context for decision making

The Committee ensures that broader remuneration policies and practices for employees across the Santander UK Groupgroup are taken into account when setting the policy for Executive Director remuneration. The Committee annually reviews remuneration trends across the Santander UK Groupgroup including the relationship between executiveExecutive remuneration and the remuneration of other Santander UK Groupgroup employees as well as remuneration in the wider UK market when making decisions on executiveExecutive pay.

The Committee oversees the broader workforce remuneration policies and practices, the implementation of remuneration and related employment policies across the Santander UK Groupgroup and the salary and variable pay awards for all MRTs. It also approves the design of any material performance-related pay plans.

As part of the monitoring of pay, the following is considered:

 

Santander UK’s engagement with its recognised trade unions on matters relating to pay and benefits for all employeesemployees;

Annual pay reviews for the general employee populationpopulation;

Santander UK Group-widegroup-wide pension and other benefit provisionsprovisions;

The design of and overall spend on variable incentive arrangementsarrangements; and

An assessment of conduct across the bank.business.

The Committee is focused on ensuring that employees are not unduly stretched or inappropriately incentivised. This is monitored using existing employee engagement indicators via the Global Engagement Survey, and

The Santander Way survey which provides an indication of our progress in performance against the nine Santander behaviours.

Executive Directors’ remuneration

Total remuneration of each Executive Director for the years ended 31 December 2019 and 2018.

  Executive rewards      Nathan Bostock(3)                 Susan Allen(4)                Antonio Roman(5)(7)                 Duke Dayal(6)(8)             Total 
   2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018 
        £000 
     2019 
        £000 
   2018
        £000
 

Salary and fees

   1,680     1,680      800     –      367     629      268     –      3,115     2,309 

Taxable benefits(1)

   56     50          –      21          489     –      570     55 

Pension

   588     588       72     –       92     157       24     –       776     745 

Total fixed pay

   2,324     2,318       875     –       480     791       781     –       4,460     3,109 

Bonus (paid and deferred)(2)

   1,990     2,317       859     –       672     1,077       344     –       3,865     3,394 

Total remuneration

   4,314     4,635       1,734     –       1,152     1,868       1,125     –       8,325     6,503 

(1)

Taxable Benefits for the Executive Directors comprises a range of benefits including private health care, life and critical illness cover, health insurance, car allowance and relocation allowances where applicable. Included in the benefits figure for Duke Dayal is a relocation allowance of £500,000.

(2)

The bonus value shown is the total variable pay award made in respect of 2019. As set out in this report, a portion of this award (36% of the value shown) is subject to further performance testing which may reduce, but not increase, the value delivered.

(3)

As detailed in the Remuneration Policy report, the pension contribution received by Nathan Bostock will be reduced from 35% to 22% of salary, effective 1 January 2020 and to 9% of salary effective 1 January 2021.

(4)

Susan Allen was appointed as an Executive Director on 1 January 2019.

(5)

Antonio Roman left the Board on 15 September 2019 and returned to a Group role with Banco Santander. His remuneration is shown in respect of his service in the UK.

(6)

Duke Dayal was appointed as an Executive Director on 16 September 2019 and his remuneration is shown from this date.

(7)

This represents an allocation of 97% (2018: 97%) of Antonio Roman’s remuneration (for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year) as he spent 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% £35,621 (2018: 3% and £57,785) has been allocated to Santander Financial Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,187,359.

(8)

This represents an allocation of 97% of Duke Dayal’s remuneration for his time spent as a Director of the Company in the year, given he spends 97% of his time on Company business. The remaining 3% £34,803 has been allocated to Santander Financial Services plc. This results in total remuneration of £1,160,085.

Relative importance of spend on pay

               2019 
£m 
   

            2018

£m

   

            Change  

%  

 

Profit before tax

   1,012     1,545    -34%   

Total employee costs

   1,263     1,369    -8%   

56Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Stakeholder views

During 2018,2019, Santander UK continued to engage with key stakeholders on remuneration-relatedremuneration related matters including its main regulators the PRA and FCA. During 2018, management and

As detailed on page 31, Annemarie Durbin has been appointed designatedNon-Executive Director with responsibility to further enhance the Committee Chair maintained dialogue withemployee voice in the PRA and FCA.boardroom. Employee opinion surveys are undertaken annually on employee engagement, and discussion on remuneration matters generally takes place with union representatives during the annual pay review cycle and on relevant employee reward matters. The Committee receives updates on these discussions during the year.

During 2018,CEO pay ratio

Santander UK is committed to delivering fair pay which attracts, retains and motivates employees of the highest calibre across all grades. In line with this commitment, the Remuneration Committee has oversight of compensation across the organisation, including pay ratios,

and considers fair pay when determining reward outcomes. For the first time this year, Santander UK is voluntarily disclosing the pay ratio of the CEO’s total remuneration to the remuneration of UK employees.

In assessing the pay ratio, the Committee reviewed itsis confident that the Company’s policy on remuneration is fair and that improvements to pay progression will continue to ensure that lower paid colleagues receive a greater share of pay awards. A summary of our approach to engaging with stakeholdersFair Pay is included on executive remuneration in light of the outcomes of the new UK Corporate Governance Code. This is set out in the Governance section of the Board Nomination Committee Chair’s Report.page 51.

Advice and support provided to the Committee

As permitted by its Terms of Reference, the Committee has engaged the advice and support of Deloitte LLP (Deloitte) as independent remuneration consultants at the expense of the Company. Total fees (excluding VAT) for advice and support provided to the Committee during 20182019 were £192,600.£157,500 (2018: £192,600). Deloitte is a founding member of the Remuneration Consultants Group and voluntarily operates

under the Code of Conduct in relation to executiveExecutive remuneration consulting in the UK.

The Committee is comfortable that the Deloitte engagement partner and team that provides remuneration advice to the Committee do not have connections with Santander UK that may impair their independence.

In 2018,2019, Deloitte also provided unrelated tax, financial and advisory, risk, assurance and consulting services to Santander UK.

The Chair, CEO,Chief Executive Officer, Chief HR Officer, Performance & Reward Director, Company Secretary, Chair of the Board, Chair of the Board Audit Committee, Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer and Chief Risk Officer attended Committee meetings by invitation in order to support the discussion of the agenda items as appropriate. The Committee Chair also engages with the Chair of the Board Risk Committee when required.

No individual participates in discussions regarding their own remuneration.

CEO pay ratio

   

 

CEO

Pay

 

   

25th Percentile

 

   

Median

 

   

75th  

Percentile  

 

 

2019 pay ratio

        183.1    132.1    77.3   

Total salary £

   1,680,000    20,030    26,368    42,708   

Total pay £

   4,313,993    23,562    32,662    55,786   

(1)

Employee pay is calculated based on ‘Methodology A,’ calculating a comparable single figure for each employee, as set out in the reporting requirements.

(2)

Employee pay data is based on full time equivalent pay for Santander UK plc employees at 31 December 2019. For each employee, total pay is calculated based on fixed pay accrued during the financial year whilst variable pay is based on the previous financial year (i.e. paid in 2019 in respect of 2018 performance).

(3)

The CEO’s total remuneration is aligned to that disclosed in the Executive Directors’ remuneration table on the previous page.

Santander UK plc57


Annual Report 2019| Governance

Remuneration implementation reportcontinued

Chair andNon-Executive Directors’Director remuneration

The Chair’s fee is reviewed and approved by the Committee. The fees paid toNon-Executive Directors are reviewed and approved by the Chief Executive DirectorsOfficer and the Chair. Fees are reviewed annually taking into account information on fees paid in similar companies, as well as the market rate and time commitment for the role. The Chair is paid anall-inclusive base fee.Non-Executive Directors are paid a base fee, with a supplement for serving on or chairing a Board Committee. Three of the four Group NEDs whoNon-Executive Directors do not receive no fees in respect of their Santander UK duties.

No changesAn increase to the Board Chair’s fees of 3.8% was approved in 2019. This reflects the increased complexity of the role, particularly in the context of Banking Reform, greater time commitment and that no increase has been awarded since her appointment in 2015.

Additionally, in recognition of the increasing regulatory expectation ofNon-Executive Directors and the associated time commitment, targeted increases toNon-Executives’ fees were awarded. TheNon-Executive Directors base fee was increased from £90,000 to £95,000 and the fee for the Senior Independent Director fee increased from £30,000 to £35,000. Targeted increases were made to the Board Risk Committee Chair fee and Board Committeemembership fee, each increased by £5,000 to £65,000 and £30,000 respectively. No other changes to fees in 2018. The 2018 fee structure is shown inwere made during the table below.year.

AllNon-Executive Directors and the Chair serve under letters of appointment and either party can terminate on three months’ written notice, except in the case of the Chair where twelve months’ written notice is required.

Neither the Chair nor theNon-Executive Directors have the right to compensation on the early termination of their appointment beyond payments in lieu of notice at the option of Santander UK. In addition, neither the Chair nor theNon-Executive Directors are eligible for pension scheme membership, bonus or other incentive arrangements.

 

Relative importance of spend on pay

                                    
     

 

2018  
£m  

 

     

 

2017
£m

 

     

 

Change  
%  

 

Profit before tax

     1,545        1,817     (15) 

Total employee costs

     1,369        1,134     21  

Chair and Board Committee member fees

 

                                                                                                
  

Board
£000

 

  

Board
Nomination
Committee
£000

 

  

Board
Risk
Committee
£000

 

  

Board
Audit
Committee
£000

 

  

 

Board
Responsible
Banking
Committee
£000

 

  

Board 

Remuneration 
Committee 
£000 

 

 

Chair (inclusive of membership fee)

  650      60   60   60   60  

Senior Independent Director

  30               –  

Member

  90      25   25   25   25  

46    Santander UK plc


> Corporate governance report

Board and Committee membership, tenure, attendance and remuneration

    

 

Board

 

  

 

Nomination
Committee

 

  

 

Risk

Committee

 

  

 

Audit

Committee

 

  

 

Responsible
Banking
Committee

 

  

 

Remuneration
Committee

 

 
     
      Scheduled
meetings
attended
  Ad hoc
meetings
attended
  Scheduled
meetings
attended
  Ad hoc
meetings
attended
  Scheduled
meetings
attended
  Ad hoc
meetings
attended
  Scheduled
meetings
attended
  Ad hoc
meetings
attended
  Scheduled
meetings
attended
  Ad hoc
meetings
attended
  Scheduled
meetings
attended
  Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 

 

Chair

 Shriti Vadera  9/9   3/3   4/4   1/1                         

Independent

Non-Executive  

Directors

 Julie Chakraverty(1)  5/5   3/3         5/5      4/4   2/2   4/4          
 Annemarie Durbin  9/9   3/3         9/9            6/6   1/1   6/6   3/3 
 Ed Giera  9/9   3/3         9/9      8/8   2/2   6/6   1/1       
 Chris Jones(2)  9/9   3/3         9/9      8/8   2/2         6/6   3/3 
 Genevieve Shore(3)  8/9   2/3         9/9      8/8   2/2   5/6   1/1   1/2   0/1 
 Scott Wheway(4)  9/9   3/3   4/4   1/1   9/9            6/6   1/1   6/6   3/3 
 Alain Dromer(5)  6/6   1/1         5/6      5/6   1/2         4/4   2/2 

Banco

Santander

nominated

Non-Executive

Directors

 Lindsey Argalas(6)  9/9   2/3                               
 Ana Botín  6/9   0/3   3/4   0/1                         
 Gerry Byrne  9/9   2/3                               
 Juan RodríguezInciarte(7)  9/9   1/3         7/9                      

Executive

Directors

 Nathan Bostock  9/9   3/3                               
 Antonio Roman  9/9   2/3                               
 Javier San Felix(7)  9/9   3/3                               

 

 Fees effective from 1 May 2019

          

Board 

£000 

 

   

Board 
Nomination 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 

Risk 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 
Audit 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

 

Board 
Responsible 
Banking 
Committee 
£000 

 

   

Board 

Remuneration 
Committee 
£000 

 

 

Chair (inclusive of membership fee)

             675     –     65     60     60     60  

Senior Independent Director

             35     –     –     –     –     –  

Member

             95     –     30     25     25     25  
                
 Non-Executive Directors  

2019 

Fees 

£000 

   

2018 

Fees 

£000 

   2019 
  Expenses 
£000
(6) 
   2018 
Expenses 
£000 
   2019 
    Benefits 
£000 
   2018 
    Benefits 
£000 
   

2019 

Total 

£000 

   

2018 

Total 

£000 

 

Chair

                

Shriti Vadera(1)

   667     650     –     –     22     17     689     667  

IndependentNon-Executive Directors

                

Garrett Curran(2)

   114     –         –     –     –     116     –  

Annemarie Durbin(7)

   222     200     –     –     –     –     222     200  

Ed Giera

   207     200     29     –     –     –     236     200  

Chris Jones

   207     200     –         –     –     207     203  

Genevieve Shore

   197     198             –     –     200     199  

Scott Wheway

   240     230             –     –     248     232  

Julie Chakraverty(3)

   58     92     –         –     –     58     93  

Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors(4)

                

Ana Botin

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Lindsey Argalas

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Bruce Carnegie-Brown(5)

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Dirk Marzluf(2)

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Gerry Byrne

   –     –     –     –     –     –     –     –  

Total

           1,912             1,770     42         22     17     1,976             1,794  

 

(1)

Appointed a director, and member ofAs detailed above, 2019 full year fees for the Board Audit Committee, Board Responsible Banking Committee and Board Risk Committee on 11 June 2018

(2)

Deemed financial expert

(3)

Appointed a member ofChair reflect the Remuneration Committee on 2 September 2018

(4)

Senior Independent Director

(5)

Resigned as a director on 31 August 2018

(6)

Appointed a directorincrease on 1 January 2018

(7)

Resigned as a director on 31 December 2018

(8)

Of the nine scheduled Board meetings in 2018, one was the annual Board Strategy Day, which took place on 19 June 2018

(9)

Committees have an open invitationMay 2019 from £650,000 tonon-member directors. Therefore, from time to time directors attend committees of which they are not members. This attendance is not formally recorded in the attendance table above.

Non-Executive Directors 

 Date of

 appointment
 as Director

  

2018

Fees

£000

  

2017

Fees

£000

  

2018   

      Expenses   

£000   

 

2017   

  Expenses   

£000   

 

2018

Total

£000

  

2017

Total

£000

 
Chair       

Shriti Vadera(1)

  1 January 2015   650   650  (1) (1)  650   650 
IndependentNon-Executive Directors       

Julie Chakraverty

  11 June 2018   92     1    –     93    

Annemarie Durbin

  13 January 2016   200   180  –    –     200   180 

Ed Giera

  19 August 2015   200   202  –    3     200   205 

Chris Jones

  30 March 2015   200   200  3    1     203   201 

Genevieve Shore

  18 May 2015   198   180  1    1     199   181 

Scott Wheway

  1 October 2013   230   234  2    25     232   259 

Alain Dromer

  1 October 2013   110   165  12    17     122   182 
Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors(2)       

Juan Rodríguez Inciarte

  1 December 2004   115   115  22    38     137   153 
Total              1,995           1,926  41    85             2,036           2,011 

(1)

In addition to the above fees, £675,000. Shriti Vadera was entitled to taxable benefits as follows: private medical cover of £733 (2017: £564)£626 (2018: £733) and transportation of £15,931 (2017: £24,227)£20,752 (2018: £15,931).

(2)

Garrett Curran and Dirk Marzluf were appointed on 7 May 2019. Fees received are in respect of services from this date.

(3)

Julie Chakraverty and Lindsey Argalas resigned on 7 May 2019. Fees received are in respect of services to this date.

(4)

None of the Banco Santander nominatedNon-Executive Directors received any fees or expenses, except as shown.

(3)(5)

2017 fees disclosed above for Annemarie Durbin and Scott Wheway arere-stated from those in the prior year accounts to reflect the timing of the adjustment of fee payments following the transfer of Chairmanship of the Board Remuneration CommitteeBruce Carnegie-Brown was appointed on 16 September 2019.

(4)(6)

Directors’ expenses are disclosed above when paid. These will be disclosed on an accruals basis in next year’s accounts.relation to the period in which they were accrued. 2018 expenses have been restated to reflect this approach. Expenses for Ed Giera include international travel as he does not reside in the UK.

(7)

Annemarie Durbin’s fees include £15,000 in relation to her services as Chair of Cater Allen Ltd.

(8)

The 2018 total shown above has been restated to reflect the fees received by those directors who served in 2019.

 

58Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

LOGO

Board and Committee membership and attendance

      Board   

 

Nomination

Committee

   

Risk

Committee

   

Audit

Committee

   

Responsible Banking

Committee

   Remuneration
Committee
 
    

Scheduled

meetings

attended

 

 

 

   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled

meetings

attended

 

 

 

   

Ad hoc
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Scheduled
meetings
attended
 
 
 
   

Ad hoc 
meetings 
attended 
 
 
 

 

  Chair

 

 

Shriti Vadera

   8/8    3/3    6/6    2/2                                –  

  Independent

  Non-Executive  

  Directors

 Julie Chakraverty(1)   3/3    0/0            3/3    0/0    3/3    0/0    2/2    0/0        –  
 Garrett Curran(2)   5/5    3/3            6/6    0/0    6/6    0/0    3/3    0/0        –  
 Annemarie Durbin   8/8    3/3            7/9    0/0            5/5    0/0    6/6    2/2  
 Ed Giera   8/8    3/3            9/9    0/0    9/9    0/0    5/5    0/0        –  
 Chris Jones(3)   8/8    3/3            9/9    0/0    9/9    0/0            6/6    2/2  
 Genevieve Shore   7/8    3/3            8/9    0/0    8/9    0/0    5/5    0/0    5/6    2/2  
 Scott Wheway(4)   8/8    2/3    6/6    2/2    8/9    0/0            5/5    0/0    5/6    2/2  

  Banco

  Santander

  nominated

  Non-Executive

  Directors

 Lindsey Argalas(5)   2/3    0/0                                        –  
 Ana Botín   5/8    1/3    2/6    0/2                                –  
 Gerry Byrne   7/8    1/3                                        –  
 Bruce Carnegie-Brown(6)   3/3    0/0                                        –  
 Dirk Marzluf(7)   5/5    3/3                                        –  

  Executive

  Directors

 Nathan Bostock   8/8    3/3                                        –  
 Susan Allen(8)   8/8    3/3                                        –  
 Duke Dayal(9)   3/3    0/0                                        –  
 

Antonio Roman(10)

 

   

 

5/5

 

 

 

   

 

2/3

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

– 

 

 

 

(1)

Resigned as a director on 7 May 2019

(2)

Appointed as a director on 7 May 2019

(3)

Deemed financial expert

(4)

Senior Independent Director

(5)

Resigned as a director on 7 May 2019

(6)

Appointed as a director on 16 September 2019

(7)

Appointed as a director on 7 May 2019

(8)

Appointed as a director on 1 January 2019

(9)

Appointed as a director on 16 September 2019

(10)

Resigned as a director on 15 September 2019

 

Santander UK plc 4759


Annual Report 2019| Governance

    


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

 

Directors’ report

 

Introduction

The Directors submit their report together with the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2018.2019. The information in the Directors’ Report is unaudited, except where marked.

History and corporate structure

Santander UK plc (incorporated on

12 September 1988) is a subsidiary of Banco Santander SA, a Spanish retail and commercial bank with a meaningful market share in nineten core countries in Europe and the Americas. Santander UK was formed from the acquisition of threetwo former building societies, Abbey National and Alliance & Leicester andtogether with the branch network of Bradford & Bingley, and has operated under a single brand since 2010. The ordinary shares of the Company are not traded.

As described in the CFO Review and elsewhere in this report,In 2018, certain subsidiaries and portfolios were transferred in 2018, as part of the implementation of the ring-fence arrangements required under the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013. Following these transfers, the CompanySantander UK plc and its subsidiaries comprisedcomprise only entities whose business is permitted under the Act as a ring-fenced bank. Other group entities including Santander Financial Services plc (previously named Abbey National Treasury Services plcplc) are now directly or indirectly owned by Santander UK Group Holdings plc. Further details of the transfers are set out in Note 43.

Result and dividends

The audited consolidated profit after tax for the year was £1,104m (2017: £1,256m)£733m (2018: £1,146m). The Directors do not recommend the payment of a final dividend for 2018 (2017:2019 (2018: £nil). Three interimTwointerim dividends were declared on the Company’s ordinary shares in issue in the year. The first dividend of £250m£164m was declared on 618 June 20182019 and the second dividend of £221m£151m was declared on 185 December 2018. Pursuant to Banking Reform, an additional interim dividend of £668m was declared on 18 September 2018. All three2019. Both interim dividends were paid in 2018.2019.

Details of Santander UK’s activities and business performance in 2018,2019, together with an indication of future outlook, are set out in the Strategic report and the Financial review.

Events after the balance sheet date

There have been no material post balance sheet events, except as set out in Note 45.40.

Directors

The names and biographical details of the current Directors are shown in the Board of Directors section. Details of their emoluments and interests in shares are set out in the Directors’ Remuneration

implementation report. Changes to the composition of the Board can be found in the Board of Directors section with more details in the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance, and the relevant Committee Chairs’ reports.

Appointment and retirement of Directors

All Directors are appointed and retired in accordance with the Company’s Articles of Association, the UK Companies Act 2006 and the UK Group Framework. The appointment offollowing appointments took place in 2019: Bruce Carnegie-Brown, Garrett Curran, Dirk Marzluf, Susan Allen and Duke Dayal. The following resignations took place in 2019: Julie Chakraverty, Lindsey Argalas in January 2018 was proposed by Banco Santander.and Antonio Roman. Further details are outlined on page 59.

A resolution will be proposedwas passed at the nextlast Annual General Meeting, on 2 May 2019 to amend the Articles of Association to require Directors to retire every year, with those wishing to serve again submitting themselves for election orre-election.

Directors’ indemnities

In addition to Directors’ and Officers’ liability insurance cover in place throughout 2018,2019, individual deeds of indemnity were also in place to provide cover to the Directors for liabilities to the maximum extent permitted by law. These remain in force for the duration of the Directors’ period of office from the date of appointment until such time as any limitation periods for bringing claims against the Directors have expired. The Directors of the Company, including former Directors who resigned in the year, benefit from these deeds of indemnity.

They constitute as qualifying third party indemnity provisions for the purposes of the Companies Act 2006. Deeds for existing Directors are available for inspection at the Company’s registered office.

The CompanySantander UK Group Holdings plc has also granted an indemnity which constitutes ‘qualifying third party indemnity provisions’ to the Directors of its subsidiary and affiliated companies, including former Directors who resigned in the year and since theyear-end. Qualifying pension scheme indemnities were also granted to the Trustees of Santander UK’s pension schemes.

Executive Management

Day-to-day management of the Company’s business is delegated by the Directors to certain executives, principally the Chief Executive Officer. In support of the discharge of the Chief Executive Officer’s responsibilities

to the Directors and the Company’s external regulators, executive management decisions are informed and taken by the Senior Management Committee (SMC). The SMC is made up of the Chief Executive Officer (as Chair) and those members of Santander UK group’s pension schemes.plc executive management who also hold Senior Management Functions (SMF) under the Senior Managers & Certification Regime. The Executive Committee comprises members of the SMC plus additional management executives who do not hold SMF accountabilities.

Employees

We continue to ensure that Santander UK’s remuneration policies are consistent with its strategic objectives and are designed with its long-term success in mind. In doing so, we aim to attract and retain the most talented and committed people.

Communication

Santander UK wants to involve and inform employees on matters that affect them. The intranet is a focal point for communications and the ‘We are Santander’ website connects staff to all the information they need about working for Santander UK. Santander UKWe also usesuseface-to-face communication, such as team meetings, regional roadshows and annual staff conventions for strategic updates.

Santander UK considers employees’ opinions and asks for their views on a range of issues through regular SantanderUK-wide surveys.

Consultation

Santander UK has a successful history of working in partnership with its recognised trade unions, Advance and the Communication Workers Union (CWU). Both trade unions are affiliated to the Trades Union Congress. We consult Advance and the CWU on significant proposals and change initiatives withinin the business at both national and local levels.

Employee share ownership

Santander UK continues to operate twoall-employee, HMRC-approved share schemes: aSave-As-You-Earn (Sharesave) Scheme and a Share Incentive Plan (SIP), the latter of which allows employees to purchase Banco Santander SA shares from gross salary. Eligible senior management participated in a Banco Santander long-term incentive plan. See Note 3835 for a description of the plans and the related costs and obligations.

Disability

Santander UK is committed to equality of access and quality of service for disabled people and embraces the spirit of the UK

60Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Equality Act 2010 throughout its business operations. Santander UK has processes in place to help train, develop, retain and promote employees with disabilities. We are committed to giving full and fair consideration to employment applications by disabled people, having regard to their particular aptitudes and abilities, and for continuing the employment of employees who have become disabled by arranging appropriate training and making reasonable adjustment within the workplace.

48    Santander UK plc


> Directors’ report

CO2 emissions

In 20182019 CO2 emissions, measured in CO2 equivalent tonnes, decreased by 11%15% to 9,7188,297 tonnes. CO2 from fuel decreased by 3%13% to 5,1214,453 tonnes, CO2 from business travel decreased by 19%17% to 4,5983,796 tonnes and output per employee reduced by 12%8% to 0.390.38 tonnes.

Ethical Code of Conduct

Santander UK is committed to maintaining high ethical standards – adhering to laws and regulations, conducting business in a responsible way, and treating all stakeholders with honesty and integrity. These principles are further reflected in Santander UK’s Ethical Code of Conduct, which sets out the standard expected of all employees. Under their terms and conditions of employment, staff are required to act at all times with the highest standards of business conduct in order to protect Santander UK’s reputation and ensure a Company culture which is free from any risk of corruption, compromise or conflicts of interest.

Staff are also required to comply with all Company policies, which require employeesthem to:

 

Abide by all relevant laws and regulations

Act with integrity in all their business actions on behalf of Santander UK

Not use their authority or office for personal gain

Conduct business relationships in a transparent manner

Reject all improper practices or dealings to which they may be exposed.

The SEC requires companies to disclose whether they have a code of ethics that applies to the Chief ExectiveExecutive Officer and senior financial officers which promotes honest and ethical conduct, full, fair, accurate, timely and understandable disclosures, compliance with applicable governmental laws, rules and regulations, prompt internal reporting of violations, and accountability for adherence to such a code of ethics.

The Santander UK group meets these requirements through its Ethical Code of Conduct, the Anti-Bribery and Corruption Policy, the Whistleblowing Policy, the FCA’s Principles for Businesses, and the FCA’s Statements of Principle and Code of Practice for Approved Persons, with which the CEO and senior financial officers must comply.

These include requirements to manage conflicts of interest appropriately and to disclose any information the FCA may want to know about.

Copies of these documents are available to anyone, free of charge, on application to Santander UK plc, 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN.

Political contributions

In 20182019 and 2017,2018, no contributions were made by the Company for political purposes and no political expenditure was incurred.

Share capital

Details about the structure of the Company’s capital can be found in Note 33.30.

For details of employee share schemes and how rights are exercisable, see Note 38.35.

The powers of the Directors in relation to share capital are set out in the Company’s Articles of Association as determined by the Companies Act 2006.

Subsidiaries and branches

The Santander UK group consists of a parent company, Santander UK plc, incorporated in England and Wales, and a number of directly and indirectly held subsidiaries and associates. The Company directly or indirectly holds 100% of the issued ordinary share capital of its principal subsidiaries.

All companies operate principally in their country of incorporation or registration. For more information, see Note 21.19.

Financial instruments

The financial risk management objectives and policies of Santander UK, the policy for hedging, and the exposure of Santander UK to credit risk, market risk and liquidity risk are outlined in the Risk review.

Research and development

Santander UK has a comprehensive product approval process and policy. New products, campaigns and business initiatives are reviewed by Santander UK’s Proposition Approval Forum.

Supervision and regulation

Santander UKThe Company is authorised by the PRA and regulated by the FCA and the PRA. Some of its subsidiaries and associates are also authorised by the PRA or the FCA, and regulated by the FCA or both the FCA and the PRA.

WhileAs a financial services group, Santander UK operates primarilyis subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK, itthe EU and in each other location In which Santander UK operates. This intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the United Kingdom by the PRA and the FCA. Santander UK complies with the FCA Conduct rules and the Senior Managers Certification Regime.

As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also subject to the laws and regulations of theaffected by other jurisdictions in which it operates,regulators, such as Banco de Espana and the requirements ofECB, as well as various legal and regulatory regimes (including the SEC for its activitiesUS) that have extra-territorial effect. Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US.US, the EU and other jurisdictions.

Internal controls

Risk management and internal controls

The Board and its Committees are responsible for reviewing and ensuring the effectiveness of management’s system of risk management and internal controls.

We have carried out a robust assessment of the principal and emerging risks facing Santander UK (as set out in ‘How we define our risks’ in the Risk governance section of the Risk review) including those that would threaten its business model, future performance, solvency or liquidity.

Details of our principal risks, our procedures to identify emerging risks, and an explanation of how these are being managed or mitigated are set out in the Risk review. A summary of our Top and Emerging Risks is also set out in the Strategic report.

For more details, see the Strategic report and the Risk review.

Management’s report on internal control over financial reporting

As a registrant under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, Santander UK Plc’s management is responsible for establishing and maintaining an adequate system of internal control over financial reporting in

Santander UK plc61


Annual Report 2019 | Governance

Directors’ reportcontinued

order to ensure the accuracy and reliability of Santander UK plc’s Financial Statements and the Form20-F submitted to the US Securities and Exchange Commission.

Management is responsible for establishing and maintaining adequate internal control over the financial reporting of Santander UK. Management assessed the effectiveness of Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting at 31 December 2019 based

on the criteria established in the Internal Control- Integrated Framework issued by the Committee of Sponsoring Organizations of the Treadway Commission (COSO) in May 2013.

Internal control over financial reporting is a component of an overall system of internal control. Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting is designed to provide reasonable assurance regarding the reliability of financial reporting, and the preparation and fair presentation of financial statements for external purposes in accordance with International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS) as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board (IASB) and endorsed by the EU.EU and in order to comply with its obligations under the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002.

Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting includes:

 

Policies and procedures that relate to the maintenance of records that fairly and accurately reflect transactions and dispositions of assets

Controls providing reasonable assurance that transactions are recorded as necessary to permit the preparation of financial statements in accordance with IFRS, and that receipts and expenditures are being made only as authorised by management

Controls providing reasonable assurance regarding prevention or timely detection of unauthorised acquisition, use or disposition of assets that could have a material effect on the financial statements.

Because of its inherent limitations, internal control over financial reporting may not prevent or detect misstatements. In addition, projections of any evaluation of effectiveness to future periods are subject to the risk that controls may become inadequate because of changes in conditions, or because the degree of compliance with policies or procedures may deteriorate.

LOGO

Santander UK plc49


Annual Report 2018 | Governance

Directors’ reportcontinued

Management is responsible for establishingIn line with COSO and maintaining adequate internal control overSEC requirements, those controls recognised as Sarbanes-Oxley applicable are subject to annual testing and certification by management including an attestation by the financial reporting of Santander UK. Management assessedChief Executive Officer (CEO) and the effectiveness of Santander UK’sChief Financial Officer (CFO) that the controls are operating effectively and that the internal control over financial reporting at 31 December 2018 based oncan be relied on.

Any Sarbanes-Oxley control weaknesses identified are captured, assessed and included within the criteria established inyear end assessment of the reliability of the Internal Control – Integrated Framework issued byenvironment. These weaknesses are reported on an ongoing basis to the Audit Committee of Sponsoring Organizations ofto ensure continuous improvements to the Treadway Commission (COSO) in May 2013.control environment are achieved.

Based on this assessment, managementManagement concluded, at 31 December 2018,2019, that Santander UK’s internal control over financial reporting was effective.

Disclosure controls and procedures over financial reporting

Santander UK’s management has evaluated, with the participation of its CEO and CFO, the effectiveness of its disclosure controls at 31 December 2018.2019. There are inherent limitations to the effectiveness of any system of disclosure controls and procedures, including the possibility of human error, and the circumvention or overriding of the controls and procedures. Accordingly, even effective disclosure controls and procedures can only provide reasonable assurance of achieving their control objectives.

Based upon this evaluation, the CEO and the CFO have concluded that, at 31 December 2018,2019, Santander UK’s disclosure controls and procedures were effective to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by Santander UK in the reports that it files and submits under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934 is recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the applicable rules and forms, and that it is accumulated and communicated to Santander UK’s management, including the CEO and CFO, as appropriate, to allow timely decisions regarding disclosure.

Changes in internal control over financial reporting

There were no changes to our internal control over financial reporting during the period covered by this report that have materially affected, or are reasonably likely to materially affect, our internal control over financial reporting. The Directors oversaw the implementation of IFRS 9 and the embedding of changes to processes, internal controls and governance to ensure they remain appropriate for use.

Going concern

The going concern of Santander UK is reliant on preserving a sufficient level of capital and adequately funding the balance sheet. Santander UK’s business activities and financial position, together with the factors likely to affect its future development and performance, are set out in the Financial review. Santander UK’s objectives, policies and processes for managing the financial risks to which it is exposed, including capital, funding and liquidity, are described in the Risk review.

In assessing going concern, the Directors take account of all information of which they are aware about the future, which is at least, but is not limited to, 12 months from the date that the financial statements are approved.

In making their going concern assessment, the Directors consider a wide range of information considered by the Directors includesthat including Santander UK’s long-term business and strategic plans, forecasts and projections, estimated capital, funding and liquidity requirements, contingent liabilities ring-fencing, and possible economic, market and product developments, taking account ofthe reasonably possible changes in trading performance.performance arising from potential economic, market and product developments.

For capital, funding and liquidity purposes, Santander UK operates on a standalone basis and is subject to regular and rigorous monitoring by external parties. For capital purposes, from 1 January 2019 the Company operates as part of the ring-fenced bank sub-groupsub group Capital Support Deed. FundingFor funding and liquidity purposes, the Company operates as part of the Domestic Liquiditysub-group. The Directors review the outputs of stress testing as part of the approval processes for the ICAAP, the ILAAP, our Risk Appetite and regulatory stress tests.

The Directors have a reasonable expectationare satisfied that the Santander UK will be ablegroup has adequate resources to continue in operationoperations for a period of at least twelve months from that date of this report and meet its liabilities as they fall due over the next three years.

The Directorstherefore consider it appropriate to adopt the going concern basis of accounting in preparing the financial statements.

62Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

StatementStatements of Compliance

The UK Corporate Governance Code

The Board confirms that, for the year ended 31 December 2018,2019, Santander UK has applied those principles and provisions of the UK Corporate Governance Code 2016,2018 (the Code), as appropriate, given its ownership structure.and has provided an explanation where there has been an omission in compliance with the Code. Further information on how the Code was complied with can be found in the Chair’s report on Corporate Governance on page 30.

Santander UK has applied those principles and complied with those provisions of provisions of the Code as appropriate, with the exception of:

Provision 11: The Company does not comply with the requirement for at least half the Board, excluding the Chair, to beNon-executive Directors whom the Board considers to be independent. For details see page 30;

Provision 36: The development of a formal policy for post-employment shareholding requirements – whilst Directors have a meaningful interest in Banco Santander SA Shares, we do not intend to introduce a formal policy (for details see page 52);

Provision 40: When determining remuneration policy, a range of factors are considered although not all are publicly disclosed (for details see page 53); and

Provision 41: The Remuneration Committee’s activities are set out in the Remuneration report although not all Committee decisions are disclosed (see Remuneration Policy Report).

UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure

Santander UK’s financial statements for the year ended 31 December 20182019 have been prepared in compliance with the principles of the UK Finance Code for Financial Reporting Disclosure.

50    Santander UK plc


> Directors’ report

Engagement with stakeholders and employees

Santander UK recognises the importance of fostering relationships with their principal stakeholders and how this is key to the long term success of our business. The Directors understand the importance to act fairly and responsibly between members of the company.

Disclosure of information to Auditors

Each of the Directors at the date of approval of this report confirms that:

 

So far as the Director is aware, there is no relevant audit information of which Santander UK’s auditor is unaware

The Director has taken all steps that they ought to have taken as a Director to make himself or herself aware of any relevant audit information and to establish that Santander UK’s auditor is aware of that information.

This confirmation is given and should be interpreted in accordance with the provisions of Section 418 of the UK Companies Act 2006.

Auditor

PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP have expressed their willingness to continue in the office of auditor and a resolution to reappoint them will be proposed at the Company’s forthcoming Annual General Meeting.

By Order of the Board

LOGO

Marc BostonKatie Jackson-Turner

Company Secretary

26 February 201924 March 2020

2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place,

London NW1 3AN

    

LOGO

 

 

Santander UK plc 5163


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Risk review

    

Risk review

This Risk review consists of audited financial information except where it is marked as unaudited.

The audited financial information is an integral part of our Consolidated Financial Statements.

We aim to continually enhance our disclosures and their usefulness to readers in the light of developing market practice and areas of focus. As a result, our disclosures go beyond the minimum required by accounting standards and other regulatory requirements.

We support the recommendations and guidance made by the Taskforce on Disclosures about ECL (DECL Taskforce) and have adopted its recommendations where it is practical to do so. The DECL Taskforce was formed in 2017 by the FCA, FRC and PRA with a remit to help encourage high-qualityECL-related disclosures following adoption of IFRS 9

 

64Santander UK plc


  

Contents

  
  Risk governance 53
  

Introduction (unaudited)

 

53

  

Risk Framework

53

 
  

Risk Appetite (unaudited)

 

57

  

Stress Testing (unaudited)

 

58

  

How risk is distributed across our business (unaudited)

58

 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
  Credit risk59
  

Santander UK group level

59

Retail Banking

74

Other business segments

86

Market risk96

Banking market risk

97

Trading market risk

100

Liquidity risk103
Capital risk111
Pension risk(unaudited)114
Conduct and regulatory risk(unaudited)117
Other key risks(unaudited)120

Operational risk

120

Financial crime risk

123

Legal risk

125

Strategic risk

125

Reputational risk

126

Model risk

126

    

Risk governance

 
    

     52

    Santander UK plc


> Risk governance

 

Risk governance

INTRODUCTION(UNAUDITED)

Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate parent company of Santander UK plc. The two companies operate on the basis of a unified business strategy and have common Boards,with some overlap in membership, albeit the principal business activities of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group are carried on by Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries.

The Santander UK Group Holdings plc Risk Frameworks have been adopted by the Company and its subsidiaries to ensure consistency of application. Prior to November 2018, the Risk Frameworks were applied from the level of Santander UK plc across the Santander UK group and adopted by Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

As a result, the review of the principal risks and uncertainties facing the Company, and the description of the Company’s risk management arrangements, are integrated with those of Santander UK Group Holdings plc and are reported in this Annual Report as operating within the Company for all periods presented.

As a financial services provider, managing risk is a core part of ourday-to-day activities. To be able to manage our business effectively, it is critical that we understand and control risk in everything we do. We aim to use a prudent approach and advanced risk management techniques to help us deliver robust financial performance and build sustainable value for our stakeholders.

We aim to keep a predictablemedium-low risk profile, consistent with our business model. This is key to achieving our strategic objectives.priorities.

RISK FRAMEWORK

Key elements(unaudited)

Our Risk Framework sets out how we manage and control risk. In 2018, we updated our Risk Framework partly in preparation for ring-fencing to ensure it remains comprehensive and to improve our focus on key risk issues. This update reflected the establishment of a Senior Management Committee, under the authority of the CEO, to focus on the responsibilities of the Executive Committee Senior Management Function holders and how they are discharged.

How we define risk(unaudited)

Risk is any uncertainty about us being able to achieve our business objectives. It can be split into a set of key risk types, each of which could affect our results and our financial resources. Enterprise wide risk is the aggregate view of all the key risk types described below:

 

   Key risk types

 

Description

Credit

 

The risk of loss due to the default or credit quality deterioration of a customer or counterparty to which we have provided credit, or for which we have assumed a financial obligation.

Market

 

Banking market risk– the risk of loss of income or economic value due to changes to interest rates in the banking book or to changes in exchange rates, where such changes would affect our net worth through an adjustment to revenues, assets, liabilities andoff-balance sheet exposures in the banking book.

 

Trading market risk– the risk incurred as a result of changes in market factors that affect the value of positions in the trading book.

Liquidity

 

The risk that we do not have sufficient liquid financial resources available to meet our obligations as they fall due, or we can only secure such resources at excessive cost.

Capital

 

The risk that we do not have an adequate amount or quality of capital to meet our internal business objectives, regulatory requirements, market expectations and dividend payments, including AT1 coupons.

Pension

 

The risk caused by our contractual or other liabilities with respect to a pension scheme (whether establishedset up for our employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It also refers to the risk that we will need to make payments or other contributions with respect to a pension scheme due to a moral obligation or for some other reason.

Conduct and

regulatory

 

Conduct risk– the risk that our decisions and behaviours lead to a detriment or poor outcome for our customers. It also refers to the risk that we fail to maintain high standards of market behaviour and integrity.

 

Regulatory risk– the risk of financial or reputational loss, or imposition or conditions on regulatory permission, as a result of failing to comply with applicable codes, regulator’s rules, guidance and regulatory expectations.

Other keyOperational risk types

 

Operational risk – theThe risk of loss due to inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events. We give a particular focus to process and change management risk, third party risk and cyber riskthe following risks which we mitigate through our management of operational risk.risk:

 

Process and change management risk– A key part of our business strategy is to develop and deliver new banking channels and products. We are also implementing a large number of regulatory and legal changes, impacting all areas of our business.

Third party risk– We rely extensively on third parties, both within the Banco Santander group and outside of it, for a range of services and goods.

Cyber risk– We rely extensively on the use of technology across our business. It is critically important that we give our customers a secure environment in which to deal with us, especially when the threat from cyber criminals is so prevalent and more sophisticated than ever. Failure to protect the data assets of Santander UK and its customers against theft, damage or destruction from cyber-attacks could result in damage to our reputation and direct financial losses.

Other key risk types

Financial crime risk– the risk that we are used to further financial crime, including money laundering, sanctions evasion, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption. Failure to meet our legal and regulatory obligations could result in criminal or civil penalties against Santander UK or individuals, as well as negatively affecting our customers and the communities we serve.

 

Legal risk– the risk of an impact arising from legal deficiencies in contracts; failure to take appropriate measures to protect assets; failure to manage legal disputes appropriately; failure to assess or implement the requirements of a change of law; or failure to comply with law or regulation or to discharge duties or responsibilities created by law or regulation.

 

Strategic and business risk– the risk of significant loss or damage arising from strategic decisions that impact the long-term interests of our key stakeholders or from an inability to adapt to external developments.

 

Reputational risk– the risk of damage to the way our reputation and brand are perceived by the public, clients, government, colleagues, investors or any other interested party.

 

Model risk– the risk that the results of our models may be inaccurate, causing us to makesub-optimal decisions, or that a model may be used inappropriately.

 

Top and emerging risks

LOGOSeveral of our risk types also have top risks associated with them. We regularly review the top risks that could impact our business, customers and shareholders. Top risks actively monitored over 2019 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the ‘Top Risks’ section in the Strategic report. We also regularly review emerging risks that could impact our business, customers and shareholders. The identification of Emerging Risks isco-ordinated by the Risk Division. A key part of the process is continual scanning of the external environment, focusing on emerging risk drivers such as regulation, markets, technology, competition, customers,geo-politics, climate change and the economy. Emerging risks actively monitored over 2019 are set out in the relevant section of this Risk review and summarised in the ‘Emerging Risks’ section in the Strategic report.

 

Santander UK plc 5365


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Key elements(unaudited)

Our Risk Framework sets out how we manage and control risk. In 2019, we updated our Risk Framework with the introduction of new minimum standards to strengthen controls around independence of decision-making following the introduction of ring-fencing on 1 January 2019.

As a group, Banco Santander supports the recommendations of the TCFD, which were published with the aim of improving disclosure of climate financial risk and opportunities. We also welcome the UK developments of the PRA and FCA to improve management and disclosure of climate change related risks. In October 2019, we submitted an initial implementation plan to the PRA to address the expectations set out Supervisory Statement 3/19 ‘Enhancing banks’ and insurers’ approaches to managing the financial risks from climate change’. Alongside this plan, responsibility for climate related financial risks was added to the Statement of Responsibility of the CRO as SMF holder. Delivering on our plan will be a multi-year programme. We are targeting the end of 2022 to achieve full adoption, aligned to the implementation path as set out in the TCFD recommendations. For more, see the case study ‘Addressing climate risk’ in the Risk appetite section that follows.

In addition, in 2020, we introduced a new standard to consider the impact of risks related to climate change.

How we approach risk – our culture and principles(unaudited)

The complexity and importance of the financial services industry demands a strong risk culture. We have extensive systems, controls and safeguards in place to manage and control the risks we face, but it is also crucial that everyone takes personal responsibility for managing risk. Our risk culture plays a key role in our aim to be the best bank for our customers, shareholders, people and communities by acting responsibly. It is vital that everyone in our business understands this. To achieve this, our people have a strong, shared understanding of what risk is, and what their role is in helping to control it. We express this in our Risk Culture Statement:

 

   Risk Culture Statement

Santander UK will only take risks that it understands and will always remain prudent in identifying, assessing, managing and reporting all risks. We proactively encourage our people to take personal responsibility for doing the right thing and to challenge without fear. We ensure decisions and actions take account of the best interests of all our stakeholders and are in line with The Santander Way.

The Board reviews and approves our Risk Culture Statement every year. The CEO, CRO, CLRO and other seniorSenior executives are responsible for promoting our risk culture from the top. They drive cultural change and increased accountability across the business. We reinforce our Risk Culture Statement and embed our risk culture in all our business units through our Risk Framework, Risk Certifications and other initiatives. This includes highlighting that:

 

It is everyone’s personal responsibility to play their part in managing risk

We must Identify, Assess, Manage and Report risk quickly and accurately

We make risk part of how we assess our people’s performance and how we recruit, develop and reward them

Our internal control system is essential to make sureensure we manage and control risk in line with our principles, standards, Risk Appetite and policies.

We use Risk Certifications to confirm how we manage and control risks in line with our Risk Framework and within our Risk Appetite. As an example, every year, each member of our Executive Committee confirms in writing that they have managed risk in line with the Risk Framework in the part of the business for which they are responsible. Their certification lists any exceptions and the agreed actions to be taken to correct them. This is a tangible sign of the personal responsibility that is such a key part of our risk culture.

Our Risk Culturerisk culture programme – I AM Risk

I AM Risk continues to play a key part in our aim to be the best bank for our people, customers, shareholders and communities. Our I AM Risk approach aims to make sure our people:

Identifyrisks and opportunities

Assesstheir probability and impact

Managethe risks and suggest alternatives

–  Report, challenge, review, learn and ‘speak up’.

  LOGOLOGO             

We use I AM Risk in our risk certifications, policies, frameworks and governance, and risk-related communications. We also include it in mandatory training and induction courses for our staff, in our codes of conduct and in reward arrangements. We embed behaviours we want to encourage in key processes and documents.

I AM Risk is how we make risk management part of everyone’s life as a Santander UK employee from how we recruit them and manage their performance to how we develop and reward them. It is also how we encourage people to take personal responsibility for risk to speak up and to come up with ideas. We use I AM Risk in our risk certifications, policies, frameworks and governance, and risk-related communications. We also include it in reward arrangements and in mandatory training and induction courses for our staff. To support this, our learning website includese-learning videos and factsheets.

As part of I AM Risk, we include mandatory risk objectives for all our people in our performance management processes – from our Executive Committee to branch staff. The Executive Committee leads all our culture initiatives under the sponsorship of the CEO.

CEO’s sponsorship. In our most recent employment engagement survey, over 90% of employees acknowledgedrecognised their personal responsibility for the risks they face in theirday-to-day work. This demonstrates how we have embedded risk management in our culture.

I AM Risk Month

In November 2019, we once again joined colleagues from across the Banco Santander group to celebrate our risk culture, with an emphasis on what I AM Risk means to each of us. As a business, we are going through a significant period of transformation, whilst dealing with a highly competitive financial services sector and a challenging political and regulatory environment. At times of change, it is natural for people to feel under more pressure; to act quickly, to deliver and to succeed. We know that we need to deliver, but how we make the decisions that help us achieve our goals is also critical, and considering the risks involved is a key part of that process. We also recognise that managing our risks can result in broader benefits for the business.

Simplifying our processes, reducing the number of systems we use, improving the quality of our data or automating controls; these are all examples of ways we can reduce the risks we face, whilst also making things more efficient and simpler, for both our customers and our colleagues. We recognise that we need to remain vigilant in identifying, assessing, managing and reporting all risks. We need to speak up when we see a risk, so we can work together to do the right thing for our colleagues, customers and shareholders. It is by working together across the business that we can get the best from each other, be confident in the decisions we make and help the business achieve its goals.

Over the four weeks of I AM Risk Month, we encouraged our colleagues to use our I AM Risk resources to:

Join our new I AM Risk Hub to help each other become more risk aware

Recognise a colleague for good risk behaviour

Share a story of how an individual or team have taken personal accountability for risk

Use our Speak Up Matrix to help find the right channels to raise any concerns.

66Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Risk governance

Our risk governance structure

We are committed to the highest standards of corporate governance in every part of our business. This includes risk management. For details of our governance, including the Board and its Committees, see the ‘Governance’ section of this Annual Report. The Board delegates certain responsibilities to Board Level Committees as needed and where appropriate. Our risk governance structure strengthens our ability to identify, assess, manage and report risks, as follows:

 

Committees:A number of Board and Executive committees are responsible for specific parts of our Risk Framework

Key senior management roles:A number of senior roles with risk management responsibilities: Senior roles withhave specific responsibilities for riskriskmanagement

Risk organisational structure:We have the ‘three lines of defence’ model built into the way we run our business.

Committees

The Board Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

 

 
   Board Level Committee Main risk responsibilities

The Board

 

-  Has overall responsibility for business execution and for managing risk

-  Reviews and approves the Risk Framework and Risk Appetite.

Board Risk Committee

 

-  Assesses the Risk Framework and recommends it to the Board for approval

-  Advises the Board on our overall Risk Appetite, tolerance and strategy

-  Oversees our exposure to risk and our strategy and advises the Board on both

-  Reviews the effectiveness of our risk management systems and internal controls.

Board Responsible Banking Committee

 

-  Responsible for culture and operational risks relating torisk from conduct, compliance, competition, financial crime and& legal matters

-  Reviews reports from the CLRO on the adequacy and effectiveness of the compliance function

-  Ensures that adequate and effective control processes are in place to identify and manage reputational risks

-  Oversees our reputationCorporate Social Responsibility programme and how thisit impacts ouron employees, communities, the environment including sustainability and climate change, reputation, brand and market positioning.

Board Audit Committee

 

-  Monitors and reviews the integrity of the financial statements integrity, and any formal announcements relating to theon financial performance

-  Reviews the adequacy and effectiveness of the internal financial controls and whistleblowing arrangements

-  Monitors and reviews the effectiveness of Santander UK’sthe internal audit function.

54    Santander UK plc


 
> Risk governance

Board Remuneration Committee

-  Oversees implementation of remuneration policies, ensuring they promote sound, effective risk management.

The Executive Level Committee responsibilities for risk are:

 

 
   Executive Level Committee Main risk responsibilities

Executive Committee

 

-  Reviews and approves business plans in line with our Risk Framework and Risk Appetite before they are recommended to the Board for approvalto approve.

-  Receives updates on key risk issues managed byCEO-level committees and monitors the actions taken.

Senior Management

Committee

 

-  Focuses on the responsibilities of the Executive Committee Senior Management Function holders and how they are discharged

-  Reviews updates on key risk issues, customer, reputational and conduct matters.

Executive Risk Control Committee (ERCC)

 

-  Reviews Risk Appetite proposals before they are sent to the Board Risk Committee and the Board to approve

-  Ensures that we comply with our Risk Framework, Risk Appetite and risk policies

-  Reviews and monitors our risk exposures and approves any corrective steps we need to take.

Asset and Liability

Committee (ALCO)

 

-  Reviews liquidity risk appetite (LRA) proposals

-  Ensures we measure and control structural balance sheet risks, including capital, funding and liquidity, in line with the policies, strategies and plans set by the Board

-  Reviews and monitors our key asset and liability management activities to ensure we keep our exposure in line with our Risk Appetite.

Pensions Committee

 

-  Reviews pension risk appetite proposals

-  Approves actuarial valuations and reviews the impact they may have on our contributions, capital and funding

-  Consults with the pension scheme trustees on the scheme’s investment strategy.

Capital Committee

 

-  Puts in place reporting systems and risk control processes to make sure capital risks are managed within our Risk Framework

-  Reviews capital adequacy and capital plans, including the ICAAP, before they are sent to the Board to approve.

Incident Accountability Committee

 

-  Considers, calibrates, challenges and agrees any appropriate individual remuneration adjustments

-  Presents recommendations to the Board Remuneration Committee.

Executive Credit Approval Committee

 

-  Approves corporate and wholesale credit transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level approval forums or individuals.

Executive Investment

Approval Committee

 

-  Approves equity type investment transactions which exceed levels delegated to lower level approval forums or individuals.

 

Key senior management roles

Senior roles with specific responsibilities for risk management responsibilities

Chief Executive Officer

The Board delegates responsibility for our business activities and managing risk on a day-to-day basis to the CEO. The CEO proposes our strategy and business plan, puts them into practice and manages the risks involved. The CEO also has to ensure that we have a suitable system of controls to manage risks and report to the Board on it.

Chief Risk Officer

As the leader of the Risk Division, the CRO oversees and challenges risk activities, and ensures new lending decisions are made within our Risk Appetite. The CRO is accountable for the control and oversight of credit, market, liquidity, capital, pension, strategic, operational and model risk.

Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer

The CLRO is accountable for the control and oversight of legal, conduct and regulatory, reputational and financial crime risk, and is responsible for reporting on these risks to the CRO to provide them with a holistic enterprise wide view of all risks.

Chief Financial Officer

The CFO is responsible for the development of strategy, leadership and management of the CFO Division. In supporting Santander UK’s corporate goals within the constraints of risk appetite, the CFO is responsible for the management of interest rate, liquidity, pension and capital risks.

Chief Internal Auditor

The Chief Internal Auditor (CIA) designs and uses an audit system that identifies key risks and evaluates controls. The CIA also develops an audit plan to assess existing risks that involve producing audit, assurance and monitoring reports.

Money Laundering Reporting Officer

The Money Laundering Reporting Officer (MLRO) is responsible to the CLRO for control and oversight of Financial crime risk but has regulatory responsibility to report on this risk type to Executive and Board Committees and the FCA.are:

 

LOGO

   RoleMain risk responsibilities

Chief Executive Officer

The Board delegates responsibility for our business activities and managing risk on aday-to-day basis to the CEO. The CEO proposes our strategy and business plan, puts them into practice and manages the risks involved. The CEO must also ensure we have a suitable system of controls to manage risks and report to the Board on it.

Chief Risk Officer (CRO)

As the Risk Division leader, oversees and challenges risk activities, and ensures new lending decisions are made within our Risk Appetite. Accountable for the control and oversight of credit, market, liquidity, capital, pension, strategic and business, operational and model risks.

Chief Legal and Regulatory Officer (CLRO)

Accountable for the control and oversight of legal, conduct and regulatory, reputational and financial crime risk, and is responsible for reporting on these risks to the CRO to provide them with a holistic enterprise wide view of all risks.

Chief Financial Officer

Responsible for developing strategy, leadership and management of the CFO and Financial Accounting & Control Divisions. In supporting our corporate goals within our risk appetite, the CFO is responsible for managing interest rate, liquidity, pension and capital risks.

Chief Internal Auditor (CIA)

Designs and uses an audit system that identifies key risks and evaluates controls. The CIA also develops an audit plan to assess existing risks that involve producing audit, assurance and monitoring reports.

Money Laundering Reporting Officer (MLRO)

Responsible to the CLRO for control and oversight of financial crime risk but has regulatory responsibility to report on this risk type to Executive and Board Committees and the FCA.

 

Santander UK plc 5567


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Risk organisational structure(unaudited)

We use the ‘three lines of defence’ model to manage risk. This model is widely used in the banking industry and has a clear set of principles to put in place a cohesive operating model across an organisation. It does this by separating risk management, risk control and risk assurance.

The diagram below shows the reporting lines to the Board with respect to risk:

 

LOGOLOGO

Internal control system(unaudited)

Our Risk Framework is an overarching view of our internal control system that helps us manage risk across the business. It sets out at a high level the principles, minimum standards, roles and responsibilities, and governance for internal control. Our Risk Framework covers the categories below:

 

Category

 

Description

Risk Frameworks

 

Set out how we should manage and control risk foracross the Santander UK groupbusiness (overall framework), our key risk types (risk type frameworks) and our key risk activities (risk activity frameworks).

Risk Management Responsibilities

 

Set out the Line 1 risk management responsibilities for Business Units and Business Support Units.

Strategic Commercial Plans

 

Plans produced by business areas, at least annually, which describe the forecasted objectives, volumes and risk profile of new and existing business, within the limits defined in our Risk Appetite.

Risk Appetite

 

See our Risk Appetite section that follows.

Delegated Authorities/Mandates

 

Define who can do what under the authority delegated to the CEO by the Board.

Risk Certifications

 

Business Units, Business Support Units or Risk Control Units set out how they have managed and/or controlled risks in line with our Risk Frameworksrisk frameworks and within our Risk Appetite. They are completed at least once a year. They alsoyear and explain action to be taken. This process helps ensure people can be held personally accountable.

 

5668 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Risk governance

 

RISK APPETITE(UNAUDITED)

How we control the risks we are prepared to take

When our Board sets our strategic objectives, it is important that we are clear about the risks we are prepared to take to achieve them. We express this through our Risk Appetite Statement, which defines the amount and kind of risk we are willing to take. Our Risk Appetite and strategy are closely linked, and our strategy must be achievable within the limits set out in our Risk Appetite.

The principles of our Risk Appetite

Our Risk Appetite Statement lists ten principles that we use to set our Risk Appetite.

 

We always aim to have enough financial resources to continue to do business in severeadverse but plausible stressed economic and business conditions, as well as to survive a very severe stress that would deplete our capital reserves

We should be able to predict how our income and losses might vary – that is, how volatile they are. That applies to all our risks and lines of business

Our earnings and dividend payments should be stable, and in line with the return we aim to achieve

We are an autonomous business, so we always aim to have strong capital and liquidity resources

The way we fund our business should be based on diverse funding sources and duration. This helps us avoid relying too much on wholesale markets

We set controls on large concentrations of risk, like single customers or specific industries

There are some key risks we take, but for which we do not actively seek any reward, like operational, conduct and regulatory, financial crime, legal and reputational risk. We take a risk-averse approach to these risks

We comply with all regulations – and aim to exceed the standards they set

Our pay and bonus schemes should support these principles and our risk culture

We always aim to earn the trust of our people, customers, shareholders and communities.

How we describe the limits in our Risk Appetite

Our Risk Appetite sets out detailed limits for different types of risk, using metrics and qualitative statements.

Metrics

We use metrics to set limits on losses, capital, liquidity and concentration. We set:

 

Limits for losses for our most important risks, including credit, market, operational and conduct risk

Capital limits, reflecting both the capital that regulators expect us to hold (regulatory capital) and our own internal measure economic capital (EC)

Liquidity limits according to the mosta range of plausible stress scenarioscenarios for our business

Concentration limits, to determine the maximum concentration level that we are willing to accept.

These limits apply in normal business conditions, but also when we might be experiencing a far more difficult economic environment. A good example of this might be when the UK economy is performing much worse than we expected. We refer to conditions like this as being under stress. There is more on EC and stress scenarios later in this section.

Qualitative statements

For some types of risk we also use qualitative statements that describe in words the appetite we want to set. For example, in conductoperational risk, we use them to describe our Risk Appetiterisk-averse appetite for products, sales, after-sales service, and culture.cyber risk. We also use them to prohibit or restrict exposure to certain sectors, types of customer and activities.

How we set our Risk Appetite, and stay within it

We control our Risk Appetite through our Risk Appetite Framework. Our Board approves and oversees our Risk Appetite Statement every year. This ensures it is consistent with our strategy and reflects the markets in which we operate. Our ERCC is responsible for ensuring that our risk profile (the level of risk we are prepared to accept) is consistent with our Risk Appetite Statement. To do this they monitor our performance against our Risk Appetite, business plans and budgets each month.

We also use stress testing to review how our business plan performs against our Risk Appetite Statement. This shows us if we would stay within our Risk Appetite under stress conditions. It also helps us to identify any adverse trends or inconsistencies.

We embed our Risk Appetite by setting more detailed risk limits for each business unit and key portfolio. These are set in a way so that if we stay within each detailed limit, we will stay within our overall Risk Appetite. When we use qualitative statements to describe our appetite for a risk, we link them to lower-level key risk indicators, so that we can monitor and report our performance against them.

We provide a programme of communication and training for our staff, including new joiners, which helps ensure that our Risk Appetite is well understood.

 

LOGO

LOGO

The CRO, as the SMF holder, is responsible for climate-related financial risks. The management of these risks lies in the first line of defence. It is therefore expected that the CRO will be supported by the business division heads to fulfil these responsibilities. To address TCFD recommendations and PRA expectations a Climate Change Working Group (CCWG) was launched in 2019 andre-launched in Q1 2020. This CCWGco-ordinates the efforts to deliver the implementation plan and will report on progress to the CRO, ERCC and Board Risk Committee.

The first half of 2020 will see the documentation of firm-wide climate change risk management governance arrangements. This will articulate the roles and responsibilities and the committees involved across the three lines of defence. During the second half of 2020, the link between climate change related metrics and remuneration will be defined.

Climate-related risks could eventually manifest in credit, market and operational risks for financial institutions. We are reviewing the appropriate parts of the Risk Framework, Risk Type Frameworks (in particular Credit and Operational risk) and the Risk Appetite Statement to explicitly include climate-related risks.

 

Santander UK plc 5769


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

STRESS TESTING(UNAUDITED)

Stress testing helps us understand how different events and economic conditions could affect our business plan, earnings and risk profile. This helps us plan and manage our business better.business.

Scenarios for stress testing

To see how we might cope with difficult conditions, we regularly develop challenging scenarios that we might face. We consult a broad range of internal stakeholders, including Board members, when we design and choose our most important scenarios. The scenarios cover a wide range of outcomes, risk factors, time horizons and market conditions. They are designed to test:

 

The impact of shocks affecting the economy as a whole or the markets we operate in

Key potential vulnerabilities of our business model, and the processes and systems which support it

Potential impacts on specific risk types.

We describe each scenario using a narrative setting out how events might unfold, as well as a market and/or economic context. For example, the key economic factors we reflect in our ICAAP scenarios include house prices, interest rates, unemployment levels and the size of the UK economy. One scenario looks at what might happen in a recession where the output of the economy shrinks by around 5%, unemployment reaches over 9%, and house prices fall by around 30% in a context of high inflation and interest rates rising rapidly. We use a comprehensive suite of stress scenarios to explore sensitivities to market risk, including those based on historical market events.

How we use stress testing

We use stress testing to estimate the effect of these scenarios on our business and financial performance, including:

 

Our business plan, and its assessment against our Risk Appetite

Our capital strength, through our ICAAP

Our liquidity position, through our ILAAP

Impacts on other risk types.

We use a wide range of models, approaches and assumptions. These help us interpret the links between factors in markets and the economy, and our financial performance. For example, one model looks at how changes to key macroeconomic variables like unemployment rates might affect the number of customers who might fall into arrears on their mortgage.

Our stress testing models are subject to a formal review, independent validation and approval process. We highlight the key weaknesses and related model assumptions in the approval process for each stress test. In some cases, we overlay expert judgement onto the results of our models. Where this is material to the outcome of the stress test, the approving governance committee reviews it. We take a multi-layered approach to stress testing to capture risks at various levels. This ranges from sensitivity analysis of a single factor to a portfolio, to wider exercises that cover all risks across our entire business. We use stress test outputs to design plans that aim to mitigate damaging effects.

We also conduct reverse stress tests. These are tests in which we identify and assess scenarios that are most likely to cause our business model to fail.

Board oversight of stress testing

The ERCC approves the design of the scenarios in our ICAAP and ILAAP. The Board Risk Committee approves the stress testing framework. The Board reviews stress test outputs as part of the approval processes for the ICAAP, ILAAP, Recovery and Resolution, our Risk Appetite and regulatory stress tests.

Regulatory stress tests

We take part in a number of external stress testing exercises. These can include stress tests of the UK banking system conducted by the PRA. We also contribute to stress tests of Banco Santander conducted by the European Banking Authority (EBA).

For more on capital and liquidity stress testing, see the ‘Capital risk’ and ‘Liquidity risk’ sections.

HOW RISK IS DISTRIBUTED ACROSS OUR BUSINESS(UNAUDITED)

Economic capital

As well as assessing how much regulatory capital we need to hold, we use an internal EC model to measure our risk. We use EC to get a consistent measure across different risk types. EC also takes account of how concentrated our portfolios are, and how much diversification there is between our various businesses.businesses and risk types. As a consequence, we can use EC for a range of risk management activities. For example, we can use it to help us compare requirements in our ICAAP or to get a risk-adjusted comparison of income from different activities.

Regulatory capital – risk-weighted assets

We hold regulatory capital against our credit, market and operational risks. In 2018,2019, the largest category continued to be credit risk in Retail Banking, which accounted for aroundmore than half of our risk-weighted assets. This reflects our business strategy and balance sheet. Market risk decreased in 2018 as most of our trading book activities were transferred to the Banco Santander London Branch as part of our ring-fencing plans.

 

5870 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

Credit risk

 

Overview(unaudited)

Key metrics(unaudited)

 

Credit risk is the risk of loss due to the default or credit quality deterioration of a customer or counterparty to which we provided credit, or for which we assumed a financial obligation.

 

Santander UK group level

We start by discussing credit risk at a Santander UK group level. We set out how our exposures arise, our types of customer and how we manage them, and our approach to credit risk across the credit risk lifecycle. We provide an introduction into how climate change could impact credit risk. We also discuss our ECL methodologyapproach and the key inputs to our ECL model. We then analyse our key metrics, as well as credit performance and forbearance.

 

Business segments

Then we cover Retail Banking separately from our other business segments – Corporate & Commercial Banking, Corporate & Investment Banking and Corporate Centre – in more detail.

 

Key metrics (unaudited)

NPL

Stage 3 ratio improved to 1.21% (2017: 1.42%1.15% (2018: 1.29%), partly due to the write-off of the Carillion plc exposures..

 

Loss allowances decreasedincreased to £807m (2017: £940m)£863m (2018: £807m). Loss allowance increased by £211m to £1,151m on transition to IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018.

 

Average LTV of 65% (2018: 63% (2017: 62%) on new mortgage lending.

Credit risk – Santander UK group level

SANTANDER UK GROUP LEVEL – CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT

Exposures

Exposures to credit risk arise in our business segments from:

 

  Retail Banking

 

  Retail BankingCorporate & Commercial Banking

 

Corporate & Investment Banking

 

Corporate Centre

–  Residential mortgages, business banking, consumer (auto) finance and other unsecured lending (credit cards, personal loans and overdrafts).

 

–  Loans, bank accounts, treasury services, invoice discounting, cash transmission, trade finance and asset finance.

 

–  Loans, bank accounts, treasury products, andservices, treasury markets activities.activities, trade finance, receivables discounting and cash transmission.

 

–  Asset and liability management of our balance sheet, as well as ournon-core and Legacy Portfolios being run down.

–  We provide these to individuals and small businesses.

 

–  We provide these to SMEs and mid corporates, Commercial Real Estate and Social Housing associations.

 

–  We provide these to large corporates as well as sovereigns and other international organisations.financial institutions.

 

–  Exposures include sovereign and other international organisation assets that we hold for liquidity.

The segmental basis of presentation in this Annual Report has been changed, and the prior periods restated, to report our Jersey and Isle of Man branchesshort term markets business in Corporate Centre rather than in Retail Banking as in previous years, as a result of their transfer from Santander UK plc to ANTS in 2018.Corporate & Investment Banking. See Note 2 for more information.

Our types of customers and how we manage them

We manage credit risk across all our business segments in line with the credit risk lifecycle that we show in the next section. We tailor the way we manage risk across the lifecycle to the type of customer. We classify our customers as standardised ornon-standardised:

 

Standardised

 

Non-standardised

–  Mainly individuals and small businesses. Their transactions are for relatively small amounts of money and share similar credit characteristics.

 

–  Mainly medium and large corporate customers. Their transactions are for larger values and have more diverse credit characteristics.

–  In Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking (for some small,non-complex corporate clients) and Corporate Centre (for ournon-core portfolios).

 

–  In Retail Banking (for some business banking transactions), Corporate & Commercial Banking, Corporate & Investment Banking and Corporate Centre.

–  We manage risk using automated decision-making tools. These are backed by teams of analysts who specialise in this type of risk.expert analysts.

 

–  We manage risk through expert analysis. We support this with decision-making tools based on internal risk assessment models.

 

LOGO

  

 

The adoptionIn 2019, we developed a high-level analysis of IFRS 9

LOGO

On 1 January 2018, IFRS 9 replaced IAS 39, and introduced new rules on how to classify and measure financial assets, as well as new concepts, principles and measures for credit impairment charges. Throughout 2018, we enhanced and refined our accounting processes and procedures, internal controls and governance framework to embed the new requirements of IFRS 9 into our business. IFRS 9 was a significant challenge to our Risk and Finance divisions as they had to analyse large volumes of data from various systems, as well as enhance their skills and expertise.

As IFRS 9 affects the timing of when we recognise credit impairment charges, but not the amount of credit write-offs, its adoption did not materially change our credit risk policies. Our Retail collectionsportfolios based on various climate scenarios: abusiness-as usual (BAU) scenario (which trends towards 3.7°C of average global warming by 2100) and recoveries procedures were unchanged, and we reviewed our risk-adjusted hurdle rates for Corporate lending, but this didn’t leadalow-carbon transition scenario (which trends towards 2°C of warming). This analysis is referred to a significant change in our credit policy. Our credit risk appetite in terms of target markets, market share andas the credit quality of customers we want to lend to, were also not directly impacted.‘Climate Portfolio Screen’.

 

The main impacts wereaim of the Climate Portfolio Screen was to identify sectors and segments of the Santander UK lending book where there could be greater potential opportunities and risks associated with both the transition to a lower carbon economy and changes in physical climatic conditions.

According to this analysis, the sectors of most concern based on howexposure and or potential risks are mortgages, real estate, consumer finance and automotives. For the mortgage portfolio, we monitor credit risk. As part of this, we began to monitor IFRS 9 metrics. These mainly centreare working on ECLa project that will help us understand the physical and classification of exposures as Stages 1, 2 and 3. We expect to develop our metrics further in 2019 as how we embed IFRS 9transition risks in our business continues to evolve. We also continued to monitor NPLs in 2018. Our disclosures reflect recommendations made by the DECL Taskforce where it is practical to do so, and we expect to enhance them further in future.

mortgage book under different climate scenarios.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 5971


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Our approach to credit risk

 

LOGOLOGO

We manage our portfolios across the credit risk lifecycle (above), from drawing up our risk strategy, plans, budgets and limits to making sure the actual risk profile of our exposures stays in line with our business plans and within our Risk Appetite. We further tailor the way we manage risk across the lifecycle to the type of product. We say more on this in the Credit risk – Retail Banking and the Credit risk – otherOther business segments sections.

1. Risk strategy and planning

All relevant areas of the business work together to create our business plans. We aim to balance our strategy, business goals, and financial and technical resources with our attitude to risk (our Risk Appetite).Appetite. To do this, we focus particularly on economic and market conditions and forecasts, regulations, conduct considerations,matters, profitability, returns and market share. The result is an agreed set of targets and limits that help us direct our business.

2. Assessment and origination

Managing credit risk begins with lending responsibly. That means only lending to customers who can afford to pay us back, even if things get tighter for them, and are committed to paying us back. We undertakeperform a thorough risk assessment to make sure customers can meet their obligations before we approve a credit application. We make these decisions with authority from the Board and we consider:

 

The credit quality of the customer

The underlying risk – and anything that mitigateshow we can mitigate it, such as through netting or collateral

Our risk policy, limits and appetite

Whether we can balance the amount of risk we face with the returns we expect.expect, and

Assessment of customer affordability.

We also use stress testing, for example to estimate how a customer might be able to cope if interest rates increase.rise.

3. Monitoring

We measure and monitor changes in our credit risk profile on a regular and systematic basis against our budgets, limits and benchmarks. We monitor credit performance by portfolio, segment, customer or transaction. If our portfolios do not perform as we expect, we investigate to understand the reasons. Then we take action to mitigate it as far as possible and bring performance back on track. We monitor and review our risk profile through a formal structure of governance forums and forums/committees across our business segments.business. These agree and track any steps we need to take to manage our portfolios, to make sure the impact is prompt and effective. This structure is a vital feedback tool to coordinate issues, trends and developments across each part of the credit risk lifecycle.

Credit concentrations

A core part of our monitoring and management is a focus on credit concentrations, such as the proportion of our lending that goes to specific borrowers, groups or industries. We set concentration limits in line with our Risk Appetite and review them on a regular basis. We track how concentrated our portfolios are using a range of criteria. These include geographies, economic sectors, products and groups of customers.

Geographical concentrations

We set exposure limits to countries and geographies, with reference to the country limits set by Banco Santander. These are determined according to how the country is classified (whether it is a developed OECD country or not), its credit rating, its gross domestic product, and the products and services we or Banco Santander wantswant to offer in that country. For more geographical information, see ‘Country risk exposures’.

Industry concentrations

We also set exposure limits by industry sector. TheseWe set these limits are set based on the industry outlook, our strategic aims and desired level of concentration, and relevant limits set by Banco Santander. We analyse committed exposures in the ‘Credit risk review’.

4. Arrears management

Sometimes our customers face financial difficulty and they may fall into payment arrears or breach the conditions of their credit facility. If this happens, we work with them to get their account back on track. We aim to support our customers and keep our relationship with them. To do this, we:

 

Find affordable and sustainable ways of repaying to fit their circumstances

Monitor their finances and use models to predict how they will cope financially.cope. This helps us put in place the right strategy to manage their debt

Work with them to get their account back to normalon track as soon as possible in a way that works for them and us

Monitor agreements we make to manage their debt, so we know they are working.

For more, see the Forbearance section on the next page.

5. Debt recovery

Sometimes, even when we have taken all reasonable and responsible steps we can to manage arrears, they prove ineffective.are not effective. If this happens, we have to end our relationshipagreement with the customer and try to recover the whole debt, or as much of it as we can.

 

6072 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

Loan modifications

We sometimes change the terms of a loan when a customer gets into financial difficulty (this is known as forbearance), or for other commercial reasons.

Forbearance

When a customer gets into financial difficulties, we can change the terms of their loan, either temporarily or permanently. We do this to help customers through temporary periods of financial difficulty so they can get back on to sustainable terms and fully pay off the loan over its lifetime, with support if needed. We try to do this before the customer defaults. Whatever we offer, we assess it to make sure the customer can afford the repayments. Forbearance improves our customer relationships and our credit risk profile. We review our approach regularly to make sure it is still effective. In a few cases, we can help a customer in this way more than once. This can happen if the plan to repay their debt doesn’t work and we have to draw up another one. When this happens more than once in a year, or more than three times in five years, we call it multiple forbearance. We only use foreclosure or repossession as a last resort.

When we agree to forbearance, we consider that the account has suffered a Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR), as we explain later on. We review our loss allowance for it and report the account separately as forborne. For retail accounts, if an account is in Stage 1 (a12-month ECL) when we agree forbearance, we transfer it to Stage 2.2 (a lifetime ECL). For all accounts, if an account is already in Stage 2 when we agree forbearance, we keep it in Stage 2 unless the forbearance arrangement involves the forgiveness of fees and interest which would put the case into Stage 3.3 (a lifetime ECL). If an account is already in Stage 3 when we agree forbearance, we keep it in Stage 3. We monitor the performance of all forborne loans. A loan moves from a lifetime ECL (Stages 2 or 3) to a12-month ECL (Stage 1) once the criteria to exit forbearance have been met, as set out below.

Exit from forbearance or cure

For a loan to exit forbearance, all the following conditions must be met:

 

The loan has been forborne for at least two years or, if forbearance was temporary, must have returned to performing under normal terms for at least two years

The loan has been performing under the forborne terms for at least two years

The account is no longer in arrears, and the customer has no other material debts with us which are more than 30 days in arrears.

Other modifications

When a customer is not showing any signs of financial difficulties, we can also change the terms of their loan. We do this to keep a good relationship with them.

Risk measurement and control

We measure and control credit risk at all stages across the credit risk lifecycle. We have a range of tools, processes and approaches, but we rely mainly on:

 

Credit control:as a core part of risk management we generate, extract and store accurate, comprehensive and timely data to monitor credittrackcredit limits. We do this using internal datause internaldata and data from third parties like credit bureauxbureaux.

Models:we use models widely to measure credit risk and capital needs. They range from statistical and expert models to benchmarksbenchmarks.

Review:we use formal and informal forums to approve, validate, review and challenge our risk management. We do this to help us predict if our credit risk will worsen.willworsen.

Key metrics

We use a number of key metrics to measure and control credit risk, as follows:

 

   Metric Description

ECLExpected Credit Loss (ECL)

 

ECL tells us what credit risk is likely to cost us either over the next 12 months on qualifying exposures, or defaults over the lifetime of the exposure where there is evidence of a SICR since origination. We explain how we calculate ECL below.

Stages 1, 2 and 3

 

We assess each facility’s credit risk profile to determine which stage to allocate them to, and we monitor where there is a SICR and transfers between the Stages including monitoring of coverage ratios for each stage. We explain how we allocate a facility to Stage 1, 2 or 3 below.

Stage 3 ratio

The Stage 3 ratio is total Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of customer loans plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. We changed our definition of the Stage 3 ratio in 2019 and restated 2018 for consistency. The Stage 3 ratio was previously calculated as Stage 3 exposures as a percentage of customer loans. The Stage 3 ratio at 31 December 2018 using the new definition was 1.29%, compared to 1.20% using the previous definition.

Following the introduction of IFRS 9 in 2018, the Stage 3 ratio became the main indicator of credit quality performance and replaces the NPL ratio which is no longer reported.

Expected Loss (EL)

 

EL is based on the regulatory capital rules of CRD IV and gives us another view of credit risk. It is the product of the probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default. We calculate each factor in accordance with CRD IV and include direct and indirect costs. We base them on our risk models and our assessment of each customer’s credit quality. There are differences between regulatory EL and IFRS 9 ECL, which we set out below. For the rest of our Risk review, impairments, losses and loss allowances refer to calculations in accordance with IFRS, unless we specifically say they relate to CRD IV. For our IFRS accounting policy on impairment, see Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Non-Performing Loans (NPLs)

We use NPLs to monitor how our portfolios behave. We classify loans as NPLs when customers do not make a payment for three months or more, or if we have data to make us doubt they can keep up with their payments. There are differences between NPL and Stage 3, which we set out in the ‘Definition of default used for NPL’ section below. Although we adopted IFRS 9 from 1 January 2018, we continued to monitor NPLs as a key metric in 2018.

We also assess risks from other perspectives, such as geography, business area, product and process. We do thisprocess to identify areas we need to focus on. We also use stress testing to establish vulnerabilities to economic deterioration. Our business segments tailor their approach to credit risk to their own customers, as we explain later on.

Key differences between regulatory EL and IFRS 9 ECL models (unaudited)

There are differences between the regulatory EL and the IFRS 9 ECL approaches. Although our IFRS 9 models leverageuse the existing Basel advanced IRB risk components, we need to make several significant adjustments to ensure the outcome is in line with the IFRS 9 requirements, as follows.

 

  Basel advanced IRB EL IFRS 9 ECL

Rating philosophy

 

Mix ofpoint-in-time,through-the-cycle or hybrid

 

Point-in-time, forward-looking. Considers a range of economic scenarios

Parameters calibration

 

Contains regulatory floors and downturn calibration

 

Unbiased estimate, based on conditions known at the balance sheet date

Calculation timing

Considers aggregation of possible default events in the next 12 monthsConsiders monthly calculation of parameters, for all possible future default dates. First 12 months are used for Stage 1, full lifetime for Stages 2 and 3.

Probability of Default (PD)

 

Probability of defaultPD in the next 12 months

 

Includes forward-looking economic informationdata and removes conservatism and bias. Adjusted to convert from 12 months to lifetime for Stages 2 and 3

Loss Given Default (LGD)

 

Lifetime LGD for defaults in the next 12 months

 

Removal ofModelled without regulatory floors and exclusion of indirect costs

Exposure at Default (EAD)

 

Exposure at the point of default if the customer defaults in the next 12 months

 

Floored at amount owed, except on some revolving facilities. Recognises ability for the exposure to reduce from the balance sheet date to default date

SICR

 

Does not include SICR concept

 

Includes SICR concept

Discounting applied

 

At the weighted average cost of capital to the default date

 

At the effective interest rate (EIR) to the balance sheet date

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 6173


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

Recognising ECL

The ECL approach estimates the credit losses arising from defaults in the next 12 months on qualifying exposures, or defaults over the lifetime of the exposure where there is evidence of a SICR risk since the origination date. The ECL approach estimate takes into account forward-looking data, including a range of possible outcomes, which should be unbiased and probability-weighted in order to reflect the likelihoodrisk of a loss being incurred even when it is considered unlikely.

Multiple economic scenarios and probability weights

For all our portfolios, except CIB (which we cover in more depth below), we use five forward-looking economic scenarios. They consist of a central base case, two upside scenarios and two downside scenarios. We use five scenarios to reflect a wide range of possible outcomes in the performance of the UK economy. For example, the Downside 2 scenario reflects the possibility of a recession occurring. We believe that our five scenarios, in particular Downside 1 and Downside 2, reflect the range of outcomes that Brexit may take, including a deal with a transition period or a no-deal Brexit.

Base case

Our scenarios are also in line with a number of scenarios that have been produced by, for example, the Bank of England and its disruptive scenario, and other economic forecasters no deal scenarios. As such our scenarios and weights reflect the range of possible outcomesbase case assumes that the UK may face in 2019.will negotiate a trade deal with the EU and that there will be an orderly exit.

 

   Base case

key macroeconomic assumptions for 2019

–  House price growth: House price growth is forecast to remain at 1% for 2020 with growth pushing up over the subsequent years to 2%. This reflects the subdued nature of the housing market over the last few years, which has led, on average, to low levels of house price growth.

–  Our base case assumes thatGDP: GDP is forecast to follow a similar growth path to last year over 2020 as uncertainty over the UK will negotiate an orderly exitUK’s future trading relationship with the EU that avoidscontinues. However, moving forward growth is expected by 2021 to follow a so-called ‘cliff-edge’ event whenstronger growth path as the uncertainties from Brexit start to fall away and the economy adjusts to its new position outside the EU, but with a free trade agreement between the UK leavesand the EU and that there will be a relatively smooth transition period.

in place.

–  GDP forecast for 2018 was lowered in AugustUnemployment rate: Unemployment is expected to reflect disappointing Q1 results, which results in slower growth in the following years until reverting to the long run annual growth of 1.6% in 2024.

 –  Unemployment continuescontinue its current trend at approximately 4% over the forecast period, tightening labour markets further and pushing up average earnings growth. This growth alongin line with the expected fall in inflation result in positive real earnings growth for 2019 onwards.

consensus view.

–  The UK’s net trade position is expected to fall back as sterling rallies against the dollar reducing the competitivenessBank of UK exports. Even though the Brexit negotiations are likely to result in some increased trade costs between the EU and UK, these are not projected to significantly impact the downwards trend in the share of UK exports going to the EU.

 –England Base Rate (BaseRate): For Bank Rate,of England base rate forecast, the base case currently assumes one bank rate rise in 2019 and another in 2020.

 –  Ina flat profile of 75bps for our planning horizon. This is based on the medium term, the forecast projections assumeview that current demographic and productivity trends will continue, causingwe have a reduction in the UK’s growth potential which is reflected in an average annual growth expectation of less than 2%.

 –  In summary, the base case assumes that activity will continue to run at this relatively sluggish pace. With CPI inflation likely to slow as we move through 2019,deal and a positive increase in wage growth predicted, thissmooth transition, providing some stability to the economy. With inflation expected to remain near target, the Monetary Policy Committee will provide a boostwait to household spending power. However,understand how the effect of this will be softened byeconomy responds to the continued impact ofnew economic environment before changing the UK Government’s welfare reforms and the projected slowing of employment growth. In addition, with the household savings ratio at low levels and with credit conditions starting to tighten these two areas are unlikely to be able to compensate for any downside effects to growth.Bank Rate.

In the medium-term, the projections assume that current demographic and productivity trends will continue, causing a reduction in the UK’s growth potential. This is reflected in an average growth expectation of less than 1.6% pa, the OBR’s latest estimate of the UK’s long run average growth rate.

We expect the low value of sterling to continue into 2020. However, we would expect some improvement if the economic data continues to recover and there is constructive dialogue between the UK and the EU on agreeing the terms of a future trade deal. Even though the continuing Brexit negotiations on a future trade deal are likely to result in some increased trade costs between the EU and UK, these are not expected to significantly impact the downwards trend in the share of UK exports going to the EU.

CPI inflation is forecast to remain around the 2% target rate and nominal earnings growth of approximately 3% is expected to continue over the forecast horizon. This implies positive real earnings growth, which in turn will support household spending power. However, the effect of limited business investment on growth will continue until the final outcome of Brexit is known. Furthermore, with the household savings ratio stabilising and consumer credit growth slowing, consumer demand will be driven increasingly by the fundamentals of household income growth.

In summary, the base case assumes that activity will continue to run at a relatively slow pace as we move through 2020 but will pick up further in subsequent years.

Key changes to our base case in 2019

The key changes to our base case assumptions in 2019 were that we lowered our GDP forecasts for 2019, 2020 and 2021 to reflect the slower growth we have been seeing given the continuing Brexit uncertainty and the decline in global growth. We also reduced house price growth slightly for 2020 and 2021 and the unsecured lending path was amended to reflect Bank of England revisions to historic estimates.

(i) For all our portfolios, except CIB

Our methodology toforecasting approach

We derive theour scenarios relies onin part by using a set of parameters embodied in GDP fan charts published by the Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR) twice a year. To avoid major changes to the scenarios due to changes in the OBR fan charts, we place more weight on what thelong-run trend outlook of the fan charts are rather than relying solely on each individual release.release as this can create large swings in the scenarios which may not be appropriate. We use the OBR fan charts to calculate our GDP paths for each individual scenario. These fan charts reflect the probability distribution of a deviation from the OBR’s central forecast to illustrate the uncertainty regarding the outcome of a variable, in this case GDP.

We use the 0.6 and 0.7 fan chart paths for the upsideour Upside scenarios, and the 0.3 path for Downside 1. However, for Downside 2 we use a blend of the Downside 1 scenario and the recession of the early 1980s as this1980s. We believe that a recession was less extremeof that order of magnitude is more likely than a repeat of the 2008/09 recession and more in line with what we think could happen.recession. This means that in the longer run the GDP levels in our Downside 1 and 2 scenarios converge. In order toTo ensure that Downside 2 is kept consistent with any changes to the OBR fan charts, we calculate the Downside 2 GDP by taking the percentage difference between Downside 2 and Downside 1 GDP in the original forecast and applying this difference to the new Downside 1.

Our use of five scenarios is designed to reflect different possible outcomes to the base case forecast highlighting the upside and downside risks associated with the central scenario. The downside risks include unfavourable developments for Brexit, a further and sharper downturn in global growth, continuation of the very low productivity growth seen in the UK, and a move to a more protectionist agenda for trade. The upside risks are more muted at present and include the quick implementation of a new free trade agreement with the EU and an upturn in global growth, coupled with a move to more open trade.

The two upside scenarios are based on a faster global recovery and the UK quickly concluding trade agreements with a number of countries after leaving the EU, along with minimum effective tariffs. It is also based on productivity growth recovering. If this is combined with a strong supply side response, interest rate normalisation can occur in a gradual and well managed fashion. The difference between the two scenarios is how quickly the recovery happens and the strength of global recovery.

74Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Regarding the two downside scenarios, Downside 1 reflects slower growth for longer, representing a period of continued uncertainty as the Brexit process continues to mute expectations. It also assumes ‘lower for longer’ global growth. With sterling under continuing pressure, this causes the Monetary Policy Committee (the MPC) to raise rates to quell further inflation even though a looser stance would be more beneficial to growth. Business and household confidence continue to be negative and business investment struggles. In terms of trade, the UK defaults to WTO rules with the EU but maintains an open trade policy pursuing bilateral trade agreements with countries rather than pure free trade agreements. Downside 2 assumes the UK economy goes into outright recession. Here global growth is undermined by further weakness among the advanced economies and the emerging markets slowing more markedly than expected. This scenario also assumes that the UK leaves the EU without a trade deal and that business investment contracts further given the continued uncertainty over future trading arrangements. There is also widespread and substantial capital flight as overseas investors sell UK assets, which in turn leads to a tightening in domestic financial conditions. As overseas investors’ appetite for UK assets diminishes, this causes asell-off in sterling and pushes up inflation, with the MPC forced to raise rates to mitigate this. Rising interest rates trigger an increase in debt-servicing costs for households with variable rate mortgages. This combined with the additional negative shock of higher unemployment leads to rising impairments, with some borrowers forced to sell their properties which leads to a fall in property values. The UK continues to negotiate trade deals with other countries, including the EU, and the successful implementation of these goes some way to restoring stability and business confidence with the UK returning to trend growth in the outer years.

Given the above, our scenarios and weights reflect the range of possible outcomes that the UK may face in 2020 and beyond.

Once we have established the GDP paths have been forecast,for each scenario, we run them through the Oxford Global Economic Model (OGEM) to derive the other macroeconomic variables, such as unemployment and house prices,prices. These variables are the product of the GDP growth paths we have forecast and the output of the OGEM for these particular growth paths. We then impose a Bank Rate profile for each scenario using expert judgement. We determine the Bank Rate for each scenario. The forecasting period for GDP is 5 yearsby using the base case Bank Rate profile and then we revert back to the average trend growth over 3 years based on the OBR’s long-run GDP forecast.

The annual growth rates over the 5 year forecastadjusting this for each of the four scenarios. To do this, we firstly consider what each of the scenarios is trying to achieve.

For the upside scenarios which have a higher growth path and rising productivity growth, a strengthening of sterling keeps CPI inflation low and allows for a managed tightening of the monetary stance. In contrast, the downside scenarios show monetary policy forced into a reactive stance to contain CPI inflation at a time of weakening output growth, so we assume the Bank of England would raise rates in this scenario in order to bring the inflation rate back to its target rate. The rising Bank Rate profiles are based on forward guidance from the Bank of England where increases are assumed to be gradual and incremental.

We update the baseline in our economic scenarios are:at least twice a year in line with our annual budgeting and three-year planning processes, or sooner if there is a material change in current or expected economic conditions. We refresh all our economic scenarios each quarter to reflect the latest data and OBR fan charts if these have changed, which are then reviewed and approved by ALCO. ALCO also assess the probability weights at least once a quarter. We avoid embedding new economic scenarios into our models on aquarter-end month. Instead, we aim to run the model with the new scenarios for two months before thequarter-end to ensure that we can fully validate the output.

We do not use consensus forecasts as inputs to our models, but we do compare the outputs of our models against consensus views for the base case, to make sure that we understand any significant differences and address them, where needed. In 2019, there were no significant differences between our base case forecasts and the consensus views.

  Assumption

 

    

Upside 2
%

 

     

Upside 1
%

 

     

Base case

%

 

     

Downside 1
%

 

   

Downside 2
%

 

 

 

House price index(1)

    

 

 

 

3.40

 

 

    

 

 

 

2.30

 

 

    

 

 

 

2.00

 

 

    

 

 

 

(2.00

 

  

 

 

 

(9.50

 

GDP(1)

     2.50      2.10      1.60      0.70    0.30 

Unemployment rate

     2.80      3.80      4.30      6.90    8.60 

Interest rate

     1.00      1.25      1.50      2.50    2.25 

Key changes to our forecasting approach in 2019

(1)

Compound annual growth rate

In 2019, there were no significant changes in our forecasting approach, except that for the two upside scenarios we have changed the Bank Rate profiles. Initially, we had a falling Bank Rate profile for the upside scenarios to maintain symmetry with the downside scenarios, which showed a rising Bank Rate. However, it was later decided that symmetrical outcomes were no longer required for the upside and downside scenarios; rather it was more logical to have Bank Rate rising when the economy is growing strongly, and inflation is picking up.

Scenario weights

To determine our initial scenario probability weightings,weights, we give the highest weight to the base case, whilst the extremeouter scenarios typically attract lower weights than the more moderate ones. In addition,We also consider how the GDP five-year average growth rates for each scenario fits with the average growth rates over the last 10 years in helping to determine the weights to apply. We use a10-year period as we consider this more reflective of the current UK economic environment. For example, our recent analysis shows that the likelihood that growth is positive occurs 90% of the time, so there could be negative growth 10% of the time. Therefore, using this approach would suggest we apply a 10% weight to the scenario with negative growth, in this case Downside 2. We also consider changes in the economic and political environment and whether such forces suggest further small changes to the weights would be appropriate. For example, due to the current economic position both in the UK and globally and policy concerns evidencedaround securing a trade deal with the EU by the PRA and Financial Policy Committee (FPC), and due to political concernsend of 2020, we have applied a higher weightingweight to the downside scenarios.scenarios than focusing on historical experience as a guide would suggest. We consider this appropriate in light of the consensus view of the future performance of the UK economy including projectionsand the balance of risks, which are currently more heavily weighted to the downside.

As part of our review of the scenarios and weights that we use, we perform statistical analysis to assess whether their use ensures that we capture thenon-linearity of losses implied by the results. The outcome of this analysis, which modelled several additional scenarios, showed that there is anon-linear relationship between the ECLs based on the GDP growth paths for the individual scenarios for mortgages. In addition, the trend line modelled showed that our Base case, Downside 1 and Downside 2 scenarios provided a good fit for the loss distribution profile. For example, the base case scenario provides a good fit for losses in distribution for GDP growth.between1-2%; that Downside 1 does this for0-1% and Downside 2 does this for less than 0%.

In terms of applying scenario weights to this for, say, Downside 1 we consider how much weight should be attached to an outcome where GDP is between0-1%. To determine this, we run the GDP five-year average growth rates, as discussed above. Taking this approach and applying it to Downside 1, where GDP is between0-1%, would be considered to happen between20-40% of the time. Then using the actual GDP five-year average growth rate for the Downside 1 scenario (0.70%) this fits with a 30% likelihood which aligns with the current weight. However, as discussed above, we then review the outcome of the analysis against the global and domestic economic back drop which may mean making small changes to the weights profile to encompass the upside or downside risks associated with these events.

The probabilityscenario weights we applied for 2019 and 2018 were:

 Scenario weights                Upside 2
%
           Upside 1
%
           Base case
%
         Downside 1
%
         Downside 2
%
 

 2019

    5    10    40    30    15 

 2018

     5    15    40    30    10 

Key changes to our scenario weights in 2019

The key changes to our scenario weights were made in Q3 2019 to reduce the Upside 1 weight by 5% to reflect the lower upside risk to the scenarios are:base case forecast from global economic conditions and increase the Downside 2 weight by 5% to reflect the higher downside risks relating to Brexit and the risk of global recession.

 

Santander UK plc75


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period

Our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period for 2019 and 2018 were:

 2019     Upside 2
%
   Upside 1
%
   Base case
%
   Downside 1
%
   Downside 2
%
 

 House price growth

  5-year average increase/decrease   4.90    3.70    1.60    (1.20   (9.30
  Peak/(trough) (1) at   8.10    5.80    2.00    (2.80   (13.50

 GDP

  5-year average increase/decrease   2.40    2.00    1.60    0.70    0.20 
  Cumulative growth/(fall) to peak/(trough)(2)   1.50    1.00    0.70    (1.10   (5.60

 Unemployment rate

  5-year end period   1.90    2.70    4.00    5.60    7.40 
  Peak/(trough) at   1.88    2.73    4.10    5.64    7.84 

 Bank of England base rate

  5-year end period   2.00    2.00    0.75    2.00    2.25 
  Peak/(trough) at   2.00    2.00    0.75    2.00    3.00 
            
 2018                       

 House price growth

  5-year average increase/decrease   3.40    2.30    2.00    (2.00   (9.50
  Peak/(trough) at   7.40    4.60    2.00    (5.80   (15.60

 GDP

  5-year average increase/decrease   2.50    2.10    1.60    0.70    0.30 
  Cumulative growth/(fall) to peak/(trough)   1.60    1.10    0.60    (0.60   (6.10

 Unemployment rate

  5-year end period   2.80    3.80    4.30    6.90    8.60 
  Peak/(trough) at   2.58    3.71    4.39    7.30    8.65 

 Bank of England base rate

  5-year end period   1.00    1.25    1.50    2.50    2.25 
   Peak/(trough) at   2.00    2.00    1.50    2.50    3.00 

(1)

Peak/(trough) refers to the peak that the variable will reach in the upside scenario and the trough that the variable will reach in the downside scenario.

(2)

Cumulative growth/(fall) refers to the cumulative change from the last historical data point for GDP growth to the peak (for Upside scenarios) or to the trough (for Downside scenarios).

The historical and forecast growth rates for the GDP assumptions we use for scenario modelling

The evolution of the historical and forecast growth rates for the GDP assumptions we used for scenario modelling at 31 December 2019 was:

LOGO

Our forecasting period for GDP is five years and then we revert to the average trend growth over three years based on the OBR’slong-run GDP forecast.

In the Upside 1 and Upside 2 scenarios, the economy is assumed to peak by the end of Q4 2022, after which GDP declines. In the Downside 1 the trough occurs in Q4 2020 and in Downside 2 a trough is assumed to occur in Q2 2020. In all scenarios, we assume that GDP will have reverted to the OBR’slong-run forecast rate after Q4 2027. The reversion to mean for all macroeconomic variables is expected to take three years after the initial five-year forecast period.

Key changes to our alternative scenarios in 2019

In terms of key changes to our alternative scenarios in 2019, these only related to changes to the base case, historic data for each variable, OBR fan charts and the OGEM. We did not make any methodological changes to the scenarios. The combination of these different inputs will mean differences across the variables for each of the alternative scenarios when we update them each quarter. As such it is not possible topin-point a specific reason for each change as we do not run the inputs in isolation. However, we compare the variables between each quarter and review any large changes to ensure they are not erroneous.

76Santander UK plc


 Scenario type
Strategic Report   Financial review   Probability %  

Upside 2

5  

Upside 1

15  

Base case

40  

Downside 1

30  

Downside 2

Governance   10  Risk review

As part of our review of the scenarios and weights that we use, we performed statistical analysis to assess whether the scenarios and weights we use capture the non-linearity of losses implied by the results. The outcome of this analysis, which modelled a number of different scenarios, demonstrated that there is a non-linear relationship between the ECLs based on the GDP growth paths for individual scenarios. In addition, the trend line modelled showed that our base case, Downside 1 and Downside 2 scenarios provide a reasonable fit for the loss distribution.

62  Santander UK plcFinancial statementsShareholder information


 >

Credit risk

 

(ii) For our CIB portfolios

Our forecasting approach

For our CIB portfolio, ourportfolios, we adopted the approach was developed centrally by Banco Santander to ensure consistent treatment of these large and/or international counterparties across the organisation.Banco Santander group. For CIB, we use three scenarios (base, upside(Base case, Upside and downside)Downside). Similar toLike the UK scenarios, the base case uses the base scenario that has been developed and is used in other work that Banco Santander undertakesperforms for planning and stress testing purposes. To develop the downsideDownside scenario, the path of GDP for each country is calculated using the distribution probability of GDP estimated using a Monte Carlo simulation. The path used is the one that falls into a percentile that sits half wayhalfway between the baseline and global stress we use for our ICAAP. For the upside,Upside, the distribution probability of GDP is again used, for each country the GDP path is consistent with the symmetric percentile selected on the downside.Downside. This means that the scenarios maintain the asymmetry that comes with the probabilities of distribution.

The average annual growth rates over a 4 year forecast for eachKey changes to our forecasting approach in 2019

In 2019, there were no significant changes in our forecasting approach.

Scenario weights

For our CIB portfolios, to determine our initial scenario weights, we give the highest weight to the base case. As set out above, we base the GDP path associated with the Upside scenario on the distribution probability of GDP consistent with the symmetric percentile selected on the Downside. This allows us to maintain the asymmetry of the scenarios for our CIB portfolio are:that has been introduced in the probabilities of distribution. It also enables us to assign centred weights.

  Assumption

 

 

Upside
%

 

  

Base case
%

 

  

Downside  

%  

 

 

GDP

  4.2   3.6   2.7   

The probabilityscenario weights we applied to the scenarios for our CIB portfolio are:for 2019 and 2018 were:

 Scenario weights                 Upside
%
               Base case
%
               Downside
%
 

 2019

     30    40    30 

 2018

      20    60    20 

 

Our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period

      

Our macroeconomic assumptions and their evolution throughout the forecast period for our CIB portfolio for 2019 and 2018 were:

 

 

 GDP assumption                     

Upside

%

   

Base case

%

   

Downside

%

 

 2019

  5 year average increase/decrease   3.7    3.5    3.0 
  Cumulative growth/(fall) to peak/(trough)(1)   0.3    0.5    (1.2

 2018

  5 year average increase/decrease   4.2    3.6    2.7 
   Cumulative growth/(fall) to peak/(trough)   0.4    0.3    (0.8

 

(1)
  Scenario type    Probability %  

UpsideCumulative growth/(fall) refers to the cumulative change from the last historical data point for GDP growth to the peak (for upside scenarios) or to the trough (for downside scenarios).

20  

Base case

60  

Downside

20  

We update the baselineKey changes to our alternative scenarios in 2019

There were no key changes to our economicalternative scenarios at least twice a year in line with our annual budgeting and three year planning processes, or sooner if there is a material change in current or expected economic conditions. We refresh all our economic scenarios each quarter to reflect the latest available data and OBR fan charts, which are then reviewed and approved by ALCO. Probability weights are reassessed by ALCO at least quarterly. We aim to avoid embedding new economic scenarios into our models on a quarter-end month. Instead, we aim to run the model with the new scenarios for two months before the quarter-end to ensure that we can fully validate the output.2019.

Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR)

Loans which have suffered a SICR since origination are subject to a lifetime ECL assessment which extends to a maximum of the contractual maturityterm of the loan, or the behavioural term for a revolving facilities.facility. Loans which have not experienced a SICR are subject to 12 month ECL. We assess each facility’sthe credit risk profile of each facility to determine which of three stages to allocate them to:

 

Stage 1: when there has been no SICR since initial recognition. We apply a loss allowance equal to a 12 month ECL i.e. the proportion of lifetime expected losses that relate to that default event expected in the next 12 months

Stage 2: when there has been a SICR since initial recognition, but no credit impairment has materialised. We apply a loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL i.e. lifetime expected loss resulting from all possible defaults throughout the residual life of a facility

Stage 3: when the exposure is considered credit impaired. We apply a loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL. Objective evidence of credit impairment is required. The definition of default (credit impaired) we use to identify an exposure as Stage 3 or NPL are different, although the differences are not material. For more, see the section ‘Definition of default (Credit impaired)’ that follows. These criteria are under review in parallel with the ongoing regulatory changes to the default definition.

We use a range of quantitative, qualitative and backstop criteria to identify exposures that have experienced a SICR. The Credit Risk Provisions Forum (CRPF) reviews and approves our SICR thresholds periodically. The Board Audit Committee reviews and approveschallenges the appropriateness of them each year, or more often if we change them.

Quantitative criteria

We use quantitative criteria to identify where an exposure has increased in credit risk. The quantitative criteria we apply are based on whether any increase in the lifetime PD since the recognition date exceeds a set threshold both in relative and absolute terms. We base the value anticipated from the initial recognition on a similar set of assumptions and data to the ones we used at the reporting date, adjusted to reflect the account surviving to that date. The comparison uses either an annualised lifetime PD, where the lifetime PD is divided by the forecast period, or the absolute change in lifetime PD since initial recognition. For each portfolio, the quantitative criteria are:we used for 2019 were:

 

Retail Banking(1)

     
 Mortgages  

Consumer (auto)

finance(2)

 

Other unsecured

  Corporate & 

Corporate &

Investment Banking  

Mortgages 
Personal loans(2)    Credit cards Overdrafts Commercial Banking(2)Investment Banking

30bps

 300bps 400bps30bps 340bps 260bps 400bps30bps Internal rating method 

 

(1)

In Business banking, for larger customers we apply the same criteria that we use for Corporate & Commercial Banking.

(2)

Consumer (auto) finance Personal loans and Corporate & Commercial Banking use the comparison of lifetime PDs to determine Stage allocation, unlike other products which first turn the lifetime PD into an average yearly PD (annualised) and then do the comparison.

The criteria above are absolute (rather than relative) increases in lifetime PD since initial recognition. These are all absolute values.

We also applyapplied a relative threshold of 100% (doubling the PD) across all portfolios except CIB.

In 2019, there were no changes to the way that we measure SICR, except that we changed the absolute thresholds for unsecured personal loans and Corporate & Commercial Banking exposures to be calculated on an annualised basis to bring them into line with our other portfolios with no material impact on Stage allocation or ECL.

Santander UK plc77


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Qualitative criteria

We also use qualitative criteria to identify where an exposure has increased in credit risk, independent of any changes in PD. For each portfolio, the qualitative criteria are:we used for 2019 and 2018 were:

 

Retail Banking(1)

      
  Mortgages  

Consumer (auto)

finance

 

Other unsecured

  Corporate &  

Corporate &  

Investment Banking  

Mortgagesfinance  Personal loans  Credit cards  Overdrafts Commercial BankingInvestment Banking  

In forbearance

  In forbearance  In Collections  In forbearance  Fees suspended In forbearance  

Default in last 24m

  Deceased or Insolvent  Default in last 12m  Default in last 12m  Default in last 12m Watchlist – proactive management  Watchlist – proactive   managementDefault in last 12m 

>30 Days past due
(DPD) in last 12m

  Court ‘Return of goods’ order or Police watchlist NPL in last 12m  In Collections  Debit dormant >35 days NPL in last 12m  Watchlist – proactive management

Watchlist – proactive  

management  

Bankrupt

  Agreement terminatedDefault at proxy
          Default at proxy origination   

£100+ arrears

  Payment holiday  £50+ arrears  £100+ arrears  Any excess in month     
   Cash Collection    Behaviour score <565        

 

(1)

In Business banking,Banking, for larger customers we apply the same criteria that we use for Corporate & Commercial Banking.

Backstop criteria

As a backstop, we classify all exposures more than 30 or 90 DPD in at least Stage 2 or in Stage 3, respectively. This means that we do not rebut the backstop presumptions in IFRS 9 (i.e. credit risk has significantly increased if contractual payments are more than 30 days past due)DPD) relating to either a SICR or default.

LOGO

Santander UK plc63


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Improvement in credit risk or cure

In some cases, instruments with a lifetime ECL (in Stage 2 or 3) may be transferred back to 12 month ECL (Stage 1). Financial assets in Stage 3 can only be transferred to Stage 2 or Stage 1 when they are no longer considered to be credit impaired, as defined in the next section.below. Financial assets in Stage 2 can only be transferred to Stage 1 when they are no longer considered to have experienced a SICR. Where we identified a SICR using quantitative criteria, the instruments automatically transfer back to Stage 1 when the originalPD-based transfer criteria are no longer met. Where we identified a SICR using qualitative criteria, the issues that led to the transfer must be cured before the instruments can be reclassified to Stage 1. For a loan in forbearance to cure, it must meet the exit conditions set out in the earlier section ‘Forbearance’.

Definition of default (Credit impaired)

We define a financial instrument as in default (i.e. credit impaired) for purposes of calculating ECL if it is more than three months past due, or if we have data to make us doubt theythe customer can keep up with their payments i.e. they are unlikely to pay. The data we have on customers varies across our business segments. It typically includes where:

 

   Retail Banking

–  They have been reported bankrupt or insolvent

insolvent. This excludes accounts which are up to date and are not defaulted.

–  Their loan term has ended, but they still owe us money more than three months later

–  They have had forbearance while in default, but have not caught up with the payments they had missed before that, or they have had multiple forbearance

–  We have suspended their fees and interest because they are in financial difficulties

–  We have repossessed the property.

   Other business segments: Corporate & Commercial Banking, Corporate & Investment Banking and Corporate Centre

–  They have had a winding up notice issued, or something happens that is likely to trigger insolvency – such as another lender calls in a loan

–  Something happens that makes them less likely to be able to pay us – such as they lose an important client or contract

–  They have regularly missed or delayed payments, even though they have not gone over the three-month limit for default

–  Their loan is unlikely to be refinanced or repaid in full on maturity

–  Their loan has an excessive LTV that is unlikely to be resolved, such as by a change in planning policy,pay-downs, or increasesincrease in market values.

value.

Where we use the advanced internal ratings-based basis for a portfolio in our capital calculations, we use the same default definitions for ECL purposes. We reviewThe CRPF reviews and approveapproves the definition of default each quarter.at least annually. The Board Audit Committee reviews and approveschallenges the appropriateness of the definition each year, or more often if we change it.

Definition of default used for NPL

The definition of default we use to identify NPLs is not significantly different to the definition of default we use to identify Stage 3 exposures. The only difference relates to mortgages. For NPL, we classify a mortgage customer as bankrupt for at least two years after first being declared bankrupt before we reassess their position. For Stage 3, the equivalent period is at least seven years before we reassess their position.

Measuring ECL

For accounts not in default at the reporting date, we estimate a monthly ECL for each exposure and for each month over the forecast period. The lifetime ECL is the sum of the monthly ECLs over the forecast period, while the12-month ECL is limited to the first 12 months. We calculate each monthly ECL as the discounted value for the relevant forecast month of the product of the following factors:

 

   Factor

 

Description

 

Survival rate (SR)

 

The probability that the exposure has not closed or defaulted since the reporting date.

PD

 

The likelihood of a borrower defaulting in the following month, assuming it has not closed or defaulted since the reporting date. For each month in the forecast period, we estimate the monthly PD from a range of factors. These include the current risk grade for the exposure, which becomes less relevant further into the forecast period, as well as the expected evolution of the account risk with maturity and factors for changing economics. We support this with historical data analysis.

EAD

 

The amount we expect to be owed if a default event was to occur. We determine EAD for each month of the forecast period by the expected payment profile, which varies by product type. For amortising products, we base it on the borrower’s contractual repayments over the forecast period. We adjust this for any expected overpayments on Stage 1 accounts that the borrower may make and for any arrears we expect if the account was to default. For revolving products, or amortising products with anoff-balance sheet element, we determine EAD using the balance at default and the contractual exposure limit. We vary these assumptions by product type and base them on analysis of recent default data.

LGD

 

Our expected loss if a default event were to occur. We express it as a percentage and calculate it as the expected loss divided by EAD for each month of the forecast period. We base LGD on factors that impact the likelihood and value of any subsequent write-offs, which vary according to whether the product is secured or unsecured. If the product is secured, we take into account collateral values as well as the historical discounts to market/book values due to forced sales type.

We use the original effective interest rate as the discount rate. For accounts in default, we use the EAD as the reporting date balance. We also calculate an LGD to reflect the default status of the account, considering the current DPD and loan to value. PD and SR are not required for accounts in default.

78Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Forecast period

We base the forecast period for amortising facilities on the remaining contractualcontract term. For revolving facilities, we use an analytical approach based on the behavioural, rather than contractual, characteristics of the facility type. In some cases, we shorten the period to simplify the calculation. If we do this, we apply a post model adjustment to reflect our view of the full lifetime ECL.

Forward-looking information

Our assessments of a SICR and the calculation of ECL both incorporate forward-looking information.data. We perform historical analysis and identify the key economic variables that impact credit risk and ECL for each portfolio. These can include the house price growth, GDP, house pricesunemployment rate and unemployment.Bank of England base rate. Where applicable, we incorporate these economic variables and their associated impacts into our models.

Economic forecasts have the most impact on the measurement of ECL for residential mortgages and, to a lesser extent, corporate loans. This is due to the long behavioural lives and large sizes of these portfolios. Economic forecasts have less impact on the measurement of ECL for our other portfolios. This is due to the shorter behavioural lives and smaller sizes of these portfolios.

Grouping of instruments for losses measured on a collective basis

We measure ECL at the individual financial instrument level. However, we typically group instruments and assess them for impairment collectively where they share risk characteristics (as described in Retail Banking – credit risk management) using one or more statistical models. Where we have used internal capital or similar models as the basis for our IFRS 9ECL models, this typically results in a large number of relatively small homogenous groups which are determined by the permutations of the underlyinggroups. We typically group instruments where they share risk characteristics in theusing one or more statistical models. models and assess them for impairment collectively.

We use this approach for:

all our Retail Banking portfolios (as described in Retail Banking – credit risk management)

SME customers in Corporate & Commercial Banking

Legacy Portfolios inrun-off in Corporate Centre.

We calculate separate collective provisions for instruments in Stages 1, 2 and 3 where the instrument is not individually assessed.

As described above, for our CIB portfolios (whether we assess them for impairment individually or collectively) we use three forward-looking economic scenarios for forecasting. For all our other portfolios (whether we assess them for impairment individually or collectively) we use five forward-looking economic scenarios.

64    Santander UK plc


> Credit risk

Management judgement applied in calculating ECL

IFRS 9 recognises that expert management judgement is an essential part of calculating ECL. Specifically, where the historical informationdata that we use in our models does not reflect current or future expected conditions, or the data we have does not cover a sufficient period or is not robust enough. We consider the significant management judgements in calculating ECL to be:

 

Definition of default:We define a financial instrument as in default (i.e. credit impaired) for purposes of calculating ECL if it is more than three months past due, or if we have data to make us doubt they can keep up with their payments. The data we have on customers varies across our business segments.

Forward-looking multiple economic scenarios: We use five scenarios, consisting of a central base case, two upside scenarios and two downside scenarios except for our CIB portfolio, where we use three scenarios – a central and a single upside and downside scenario. This symmetry meets the ‘unbiased’ requirement and we consider these scenarios sufficient to account for anynon-linear relationships.

Probability weights: In determining the initial scenario probability weightings,weights, we assign the highest probability to the base case, whilst the extreme casesouter scenarios typically attract lower probabilities than the more moderate ones.

SICR thresholds: We use a combination of quantitative (both absolute and relative), qualitative and backstop criteria to identify exposures that we consider have shown a SICR since initial recognition.

Post Model Adjustments: These relate to adjustments which we need to account for identified model limitations – such as those that have arisen due to challenges in obtaining historical data. We expect these to gradually become redundantbe incorporated into the underlying models as we build up more comparative data over future reporting periods. We also apply temporary adjustments for immaterial portfolio exposures still needing ECL models to be built.

Post Model Adjustments (PMAs)

We use a range of methods to identify whether we need a PMA. These include regular review of model monitoring tools,period-to-period movement and trend analysis, comparison against forecasts, and input from expert teams who monitor and manage key portfolio risks. We only recognise a PMA if the ECL is over £1m. We keep PMAs in place until we no longer need them. This will typically be when they are built into our core credit model or the conditions that impacted the historical data no longer exist.

The Risk Provisions & Forecasting team calculates PMAs to ensure they are incremental to the core credit model and to ensure the calculation is performed in a consistent and controlled manner. We apply standardend-user computing controls to material and long-standing PMAs i.e. those expected to be in place for more than six months. Our Independent Validations Team may also review significant PMAs at their discretion. The CRPF approves all new PMAs. It delegates authority to approve temporary PMAs not expected to last beyond aquarter-end to the CFO. The Consolidated Reporting team reviews all new PMAs to ensure they comply with IFRS 9. We record all PMAs on a central log maintained by the Consolidated Reporting team which documents the justification, IFRS 9 compliance assessment, expected life, recalibration frequency, calculation methodology and value of each PMA. The CRPF reviews and approves the log each quarter.

The CRPF reviews and approves changes in all key management judgements at least each quarter. The Board Audit Committee reviews and challenges the appropriateness of changes in all key management judgements at least each quarter. The creation of new PMAs is a joint responsibility between the Risk Provisions & Forecasting team, as model owners who may identify issues with the historical data, and the Consolidated Reporting team who may identify changes in portfolio or credit quality performance.

Santander UK plc79


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

The most significant PMAs that we apply are:applied at 31 December 2019 and 2018 were:

  PMAs              2019
£m
               2018
£m
 

  Interest-only maturity default risk

   51    69 

   Buy-to-Let

   21    20 

  Long-term indeterminate arrears

   19    23 

  12+ months in arrears

   23    11 

 

Interest-only maturity default risk: When an interest-only mortgage reaches contractual maturity and the capital payment becomes due, there is a risk that the customer won’t be able to repay the full capital balance. Our model estimates the likelihood of a customer missing a monthly payment, rather than the capital repayment. We hold an incremental provision to address the risk of default on capital repayments on maturity.maturity ultimately leading towrite-off. We use historical evidencecalculate it using a Judgement Model which uses historically observed experience and expert judgement to determine the proportion of loss experiencecustomers who won’t be able to estimaterepay. Over time, as we continue to enhance our model, we expect the adjustment. At 31 December 2018,need for this increased ECL by £69m (1 January 2018: £74m).PMA will diminish. This PMA increases our ECL.

Buy-to-Let:Buy-to-Let (BTL): Historical data shows that the risk of default on a buy-to-letBTL mortgage is higher than on a residential mortgage particularly in a downturn. However, our IFRS 9 models have been calibrated over a period of favourable and relatively benign economic conditions during which our buy-to-letBTL mortgage portfolio has continued to grow with limited loss events. To avoid underestimating ECL in an economic downturn, we adjust the loss allowance for our BTL accounts to increase the ECL. We use market data from the last economic crisis to estimate the adjustment. At 31 December 2018,Over time, as our historical data grows and covers a wider range of economic conditions, we expect the need for this increased ECL by £20m (1 January 2018: £15m).PMA will diminish. This PMA increases our ECL.

Long-term indeterminate arrears:To mitigate the risk of model underestimation, we fully provide for accounts in arrears which have neither repaid (cured) or beenwritten-off after a period of 2 years180 days for unsecured portfolios or 5 years for secured portfolios, are fully provided for.portfolios. For our secured portfolios, we use expected security valuations at the point of repossession to estimate the adjustment. At 31 December 2019 and 2018, we only needed to make an adjustment for mortgages, andmortgages. Over the medium term, as we continue to address long term arrears in the portfolio, we expect the need for this increasedPMA will diminish. This PMA increases our ECL.

12+ months in arrears: To mitigate the risk of underestimating ECL, by £23m (1 January 2018: £25m).mortgage accounts which are more than 12 months past due are fully provided for after deducting a historically observed self-cure rate. Over the medium term, as we continue to address long term arrears in the portfolio, we expect the need for this PMA will diminish. This PMA increases our ECL.

The CRPF and the Board Audit Committee review and approve changes in all key management judgements at least each quarter. The creation of new PMAs is a joint responsibility between the Risk Provisions & Forecasting team, as model owners who may identify issues with the historical data, and the Financial Accounting & Control Division, who may identify changes in portfolio or credit quality performance.

We use a range of methods to identify whether we need a PMA. These include regular review of model monitoring tools, end-user computing controls monitoring, period-to-period movement and trend analysis, comparison against forecasts, and input from expert teams who monitor and manage key portfolio risks. We only recognise a PMA if the ECL is over £1m. We keep PMAs in place until we no longer need them. This will typically be when they are built into our core credit model or the conditions that impacted the historical data no longer exist.

The Risk Provisions & Forecasting team calculates PMAs to ensure they are incremental to the core credit model and to ensure the calculation is performed in a consistent and controlled manner. We apply standard end-user computing controls to material and long-standing PMAs i.e. those expected to be in place for more than six months. Our Independent Validations Team may also review material PMAs at their discretion. The CRPF approves all new PMAs. It delegates authority to approve temporary PMAs not expected to last beyond a quarter-end to the Director of Financial Accounting & Control. The Financial Accounting & Control Division reviews all new PMAs to ensure they comply with IFRS 9. We record all PMAs on a central log maintained by the Financial Accounting & Control Division which documents the justification, IFRS 9 compliance assessment, expected life, recalibration frequency, calculation methodology and value of each PMA. The CRPF reviews and approves the log each quarter.

Governance around ECL impairment allowances

Our Risk Methodology team developed our ECL impairment models (except for the OGEM)external models we use, such as OGEM which we described earlier in ‘Our forecasting approach’), and all material models are independently reviewed by our Independent Validations Team.Team independently reviews all material models. As model owners, our Risk Provisioning & Forecasting team run the models to calculate our ECL impairment allowances each month. The models are sensitive to changes in credit conditions and reflect various management judgements that give rise to measurement uncertainty in our reportable ECL as set out above. The following committees and forums review the provision drivers and ensure that the management judgements we apply remain appropriate:

 

Model Risk Control Forum (MRCF) reviews and approves new models and required model changes. It also reviews the use of OGEM as a reliable model on which to base our other forecast macroeconomic variables. It is used across all stress testing and planning so it is subject to model risk criteria. MRCF will delegate responsibility of approvals to Model Risk Management Forum (MRMF) for changes of low risk materiality or less complex changes.

ALCO reviews and approves the economic scenarios and probability weights we use to calculate forward-looking scenarios.

CRPF reviews management judgements and approves ECL impairment allowances.

Board Audit Committee reviews and challenges the appropriateness of the estimates and judgements made by management.

For more on the governance around specific elements of the ECL impairment allowances, including the frequency of, and thresholds for, reviews, including by these committees and forums, see the detailed sections above.

How we assess the performance of our ECL estimation process

We assess the reasonableness of our ECL provisions and the results of our Staging analysis using a range of methods. These include:

 

Benchmarking:we compare our coverage levels with our peers.

Stand-back testing:we monitor the level of our coverage against actual write-offs.

Back-testing: we compare key drivers periodically as part of model monitoring practices.

Monitoring trends: we track ECL and Staged assets over time and against our internal budgets and forecasts, with triggers set accordingly.

LOGO

 

80Santander UK plc65


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

SANTANDER UK GROUP LEVEL – CREDIT RISK REVIEW

The introduction of IFRS 9

As set out in Note 44 ‘Transition to IFRS 9’ in the Consolidated Financial Statements, IFRS 9 replaced IAS 39 on 1 January 2018. IFRS 9 introduced a new impairment methodology and rules around classification and measurement of financial assets. As a result of the change from IAS 39 to IFRS 9, some 2018 disclosures in this section are not comparable with prior periods because the methodologies for calculating incurred losses under IAS 39 and ECLs under IFRS 9 are fundamentally different. This means that some IFRS 9 disclosures do not have prior period comparatives and some IAS 39 disclosures are no longer relevant from 1 January 2018. We have included comparative tables at 1 January 2018 reflecting the adoption of IFRS 9, where available and appropriate.

Our maximum and net exposure to credit risk

The tables below show the main differences between our maximum and net exposure to credit risk. They show the effects of collateral, netting, and risk transfer to mitigate our exposure. The tables only show the financial assets that credit risk affects and to which the impairment requirements in IFRS 9 (2017: IAS 39) are applied.

For balance sheet assets, the maximum exposure to credit risk is the carrying value after impairment loss allowances.Off-balance sheet exposures are mortgage offers, guarantees, formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments. Foroff-balance sheet guarantees, the maximum exposure is the maximum amount that we would have to pay if the guarantees were called on. For formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments that are irrevocable over the life of the facility, the maximum exposure is the total amount of the commitment.

 

  Maximum exposure           
  Balance sheet asset   Off-balance sheet   Collateral(1)     
2019  Gross
amounts
£bn
   Loss
allowance
£bn
 Net
amounts
£bn
   Gross
amounts
£bn
   Loss
allowance
£bn
 Net
amounts
£bn
   Cash
£bn
 Non-cash
£bn
 Netting(2)
£bn
 Net
exposure
£bn
 

Cash and balances at central banks

   21.2      21.2                       21.2 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

               

– Loans and advances to customers:(3)

               

– Loans secured on residential properties(4)

   165.4    (0.2 165.2    13.4      13.4      (168.7    9.9 

– Corporate loans

   27.0    (0.2 26.8    14.3    (0.1) (5)  14.2    (0.1 (19.4    21.5 

– Finance leases

   6.3    (0.2 6.1    0.3      0.3    (0.1 (6.3      

– Other unsecured loans

   7.1    (0.2 6.9    12.4      12.4            19.3 

– Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander group subsidiaries and joint ventures

   2.4      2.4                       2.4 

Total loans and advances to customers

   208.2    (0.8 207.4    40.4    (0.1 40.3    (0.2 (194.4    53.1 

– Loans and advances to banks

   1.9      1.9    1.2      1.2            3.1 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

   23.6      23.6                 (23.1 (0.5   

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

   7.1      7.1                       7.1 

Total financial assets at amortised cost

   240.8    (0.8 240.0    41.6    (0.1 41.5    (0.2 (217.5 (0.5 63.3 

Financial assets at fair value at FVOCI:

               

– Loans and advances to customers

   0.1      0.1                       0.1 

– Debt securities

   9.6      9.6                       9.6 

Total financial assets at FVOCI

   9.7      9.7                       9.7 

Total

   271.7    (0.8 270.9    41.6    (0.1 41.5    (0.2 (217.5 (0.5 94.2 
 Maximum exposure                        
 Balance sheet asset Off-balance sheet Collateral(1)     

2018

 

Gross
  amounts
£bn

 

 

Loss
allowance(2)

£bn

 

 

Net
amounts
£bn

 

 

Gross
amounts
£bn

 

 

Loss
allowance(2)

£bn

 

 

Net
amounts
£bn

 

 

Cash
£bn

 

 

Non-cash
£bn

 

 

Netting(3)
£bn

 

 

Net

exposure
£bn

 

                               

Cash and balances at central banks

 19.7     19.7                    19.7    19.7       19.7                        19.7 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                   

– Loans and advances to customers:(4)

          

– Loans secured on residential properties(5)

 157.9  (0.2 157.7  11.2     11.2     (163.8    5.1 

– Loans and advances to customers:(3)

               

– Loans secured on residential properties(4)

   157.9    (0.2  157.7    11.2       11.2       (163.8     5.1 

– Corporate loans

 27.8  (0.2 27.6  17.0     17.0     (20.2    24.4    27.8    (0.2  27.6    17.0       17.0       (20.2     24.4 

– Finance leases

 6.8  (0.1 6.7  0.2     0.2  (0.1 (6.1    0.7    6.8    (0.1  6.7    0.2       0.2    (0.1  (6.1     0.7 

– Other unsecured loans

 7.6  (0.2 7.4  11.6  (0.1 11.5           18.9    7.6    (0.2  7.4    11.6    (0.1  11.5             18.9 

– Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander group subsidiaries and joint ventures

  2.0      2.0               (0.6     1.4    2.0       2.0                  (0.6     1.4 

– Total loans and advances to customers

 202.1  (0.7 201.4  40.0  (0.1 39.9  (0.1 (190.7    50.5 

Total loans and advances to customers

   202.1    (0.7  201.4    40.0    (0.1  39.9    (0.1  (190.7     50.5 

– Loans and advances to banks

 2.8     2.8  1.6     1.6           4.4    2.8       2.8    1.6       1.6             4.4 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(6)

 21.1     21.1              (18.4 (2.7   

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

   21.1       21.1                  (18.4  (2.7   

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

 7.2     7.2                    7.2    7.2       7.2                        7.2 

Total financial assets at amortised cost:

 233.2  (0.7 232.5  41.6  (0.1 41.5  (0.1 (209.1 (2.7 62.1 

Financial assets at FVOCI

                    

Total financial assets at amortised cost

   233.2    (0.7  232.5    41.6    (0.1  41.5    (0.1  (209.1  (2.7  62.1 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

               

– Loans and advances to customers

 0.1     0.1  0.1     0.1           0.2    0.1       0.1    0.1       0.1             0.2 

– Debt securities

 13.2     13.2                    13.2    13.2       13.2                        13.2 

Total financial assets at FVOCI

 13.3     13.3  0.1     0.1           13.4    13.3       13.3    0.1       0.1             13.4 

Total

 266.2  (0.7 265.5  41.7  (0.1 41.6  (0.1 (209.1 (2.7 95.2    266.2    (0.7  265.5    41.7    (0.1  41.6    (0.1  (209.1  (2.7  95.2 
          

2017

                     

Cash and balances at central banks

  32.8      32.8                   32.8 

Loans and advances to customers:(4) (6)

          

– Advances secured on residential property(5)

  155.4   (0.2  155.2   12.4        (167.4     0.2 

– Corporate loans

  30.9   (0.5  30.4   17.1        (21.8     25.7 

– Finance leases

  6.7      6.7   0.6     (0.1  (5.8     1.4 

– Other unsecured loans

  6.2   (0.2  6.0   11.1        (0.1     17.0 

– Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander group subsidiaries and joint ventures

  1.2      1.2                   1.2 

Total loans and advances to customers(6)

  200.4   (0.9  199.5   41.2       (0.1  (195.1     45.5 

Loans and advances to banks(6)

  3.5      3.5   1.6                5.1 

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(6)

  2.6      2.6             (2.5     0.1 

Financial investments:

          

– Loans and receivables securities(4)

  2.2      2.2   0.7              2.9 

– Available–for–sale debt securities

  8.8      8.8                 8.8 

– Held–to–maturity debt securities

  6.5      6.5                   6.5 

Total financial investments

  17.5      17.5   0.7                18.2 

Total

  256.8   (0.9  255.9   43.5       (0.1  (197.6     101.7 

 

(1)

The forms of collateral we take to reduce credit risk include: residential and commercial property; other physical assets, including motor vehicles; liquid securities, including those transferred under reverse repurchase agreements; cash, including cash used as collateral for derivative transactions; and receivables. Charges on residential property are most of the collateral we take.

(2)

Loss allowances for 2017 were on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on an ECL basis per IFRS 9. The loss allowance for off–balance sheet assets is classified in the balance sheet in provisions – other liabilities.

(3)

We can reduce credit risk exposures by applying netting. We do this mainly for derivative and repurchase transactions with financial institutions. For derivatives, we use standard master netting agreements. They allow us to set off our credit risk exposure to a counterparty from a derivative against our obligations to the counterparty in the event of default. This gives us a lower net credit exposure. They may also reduce settlement exposure. For more on this, see ‘Credit risk mitigation’ in the ‘Other business segments – credit risk management’ section.

(4)(3)

Balances include interest we have charged to the customer’s account and accrued interest that we have not charged to the account yet.

(5)(4)

The collateral value we have shown against advances secured on residential property is limited to the balance of each associated individual loan. It does not include the impact of over–collateralisation (where the collateral has a higher value than the loan balance) and includes collateral we would receive on draw down of certain off–balance sheet commitments.

(6)(5)

From 1 January 2018,The total rounds to £0.1bn and is split across all portfolios. In this table, it has been allocated in full to Corporate loans for presentational purposes. For the non-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines infull detail, see the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives are re-presented accordingly.‘Credit Quality’ section.

 

66Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk81


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 

The tables below show the main differences between our maximum and net exposure to credit risk on the financial assets that credit risk affects and to which the impairment requirements in IFRS 9 are not applied.

 

  

Balance

sheet asset

gross

amount

£bn

                   
     Collateral(1)         
                 

Net

        exposure

£bn

 
               Cash   Non–cash           Netting(2) 
 2018    £bn   £bn   £bn 

Financial assets at FVTPL

                          

– Derivative financial instruments

  5.3          (2.1   (0.9   2.3 

– Other financial assets at FVTPL

  5.6          (2.3       3.3 

Total

  10.9          (4.4   (0.9   5.6 
           
 2017                     

Financial assets designated at fair value

                          

– Trading assets:

           

– Securities repurchased under resale agreements

  8.9          (8.5   (0.4    

– Debt securities

  5.2                  5.2 

– Cash collateral

  6.2                  6.2 

– Short–term loans

  0.7                  0.7 

– Total trading assets

  21.0          (8.5   (0.4   12.1 

– Derivative financial instruments

  19.9      (2.8       (14.8   2.3 

– Financial assets designated at fair value:

           

– Loans and advances to customers

  1.6          (1.6        

– Debt securities

  0.5                  0.5 

Total financial assets designated at fair value

  2.1          (1.6       0.5 

Total

  43.0      (2.8   (10.1   (15.2   14.9 
   Balance
sheet asset
           Collateral(1)
               
  2019  gross
amount
£bn
              Cash
£bn
   Non–cash
£bn
      Netting(2)
£bn
      Net
exposure
£bn
 

Financial assets at FVTPL:

             

– Derivative financial instruments

   3.3         (1.9    (0.8    0.6 

– Other financial assets at FVTPL

   0.4                            0.4 

Total

   3.7            (1.9       (0.8       1.0 
             
  2018                             

Financial assets at FVTPL:

             

– Derivative financial instruments

   5.3         (2.1    (0.9    2.3 

– Other financial assets at FVTPL

   5.6            (2.3               3.3 

Total

   10.9            (4.4       (0.9       5.6 

 

(1)

The forms of collateral we take to reduce credit risk include: liquid securities, including those transferred under reverse repurchase agreements; cash, including cash used as collateral for derivative transactions; and receivables.

(2)

We can reduce credit risk exposures by applying netting. We do this mainly for derivative and repurchase transactions with financial institutions. For derivatives, we use standard master netting agreements. They allow us to set off our credit risk exposure to a counterparty from a derivative against our obligations to the counterparty in the event of default. This gives us a lower net credit exposure. They may also reduce settlement exposure. For more on this, see ‘Credit risk mitigation’ in the ‘Other business segments – credit risk management’ section.

Single credit rating scale(unaudited)

In the table below, we have used a single rating scale to ensure we are consistent across all our credit risk portfolios in how we report the risk of default. It has eight grades for non–defaulted exposures, from 9 (lowest risk) to 2 (highest risk). We define each grade by an upper and lower PD value and we scale the grades so that the default risk increases by a factor of ten every time the grade number drops by two steps. For example, grade 9 has an average PD of 0.010%, and grade 7 has an average PD of 0.100%. We give defaulted exposures a grade 1 and a PD value of 100%. In the final column of the table we show the approximate equivalent credit rating grade used by Standard & Poor’s Ratings Services (S&P).

 

    PD range         PD range     
    Mid     Lower     Upper         
Santander UK risk grade    %     %     %       S&P equivalent   

Mid

%

   

Lower

%

   

Upper

%

   S&P equivalent 

9

     0.010      0.000      0.021        AAA to AA+    0.010    0.000    0.021    AAA to AA+ 

8

     0.032      0.021      0.066        AA to AA–    0.032    0.021    0.066    AA to AA– 

7

     0.100      0.066      0.208        A+ to BBB    0.100    0.066    0.208    A+ to BBB 

6

     0.316      0.208      0.658        BBB– to BB    0.316    0.208    0.658    BBB– to BB 

5

     1.000      0.658      2.081        BB–    1.000    0.658    2.081    BB– 

4

     3.162      2.081      6.581        B+ to B    3.162    2.081    6.581    B+ to B 

3

     10.000      6.581      20.811        B–    10.000    6.581    20.811    B– 

2

     31.623      20.811      99.999        CCC to C    31.623    20.811    99.999    CCC to C 

1 (Default)

                 100.000      100.000      100.000        D            100.000                100.000            100.000    D 

The PDs in the table above are based on Economic Capital (EC) PD mappings which are calculated based on the average probability of default over an economic cycle. This is different to the IFRS 9 PDs which are calculated at a point in time using forward looking economic scenarios. Where possible, the EC PD values are largely aligned to the regulatory capital models however any regulatory floors are removed and PDs are defined at every possible rating rather than categorised into rating buckets.

 

LOGO

82Santander UK plc67


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

Rating distribution

The tables below show the credit rating of our financial assets to which the impairment requirements in IFRS 9 (2017: IAS 39) are applied. For more on the credit rating profiles of key portfolios, see the ‘Credit risk – Retail Banking’ and ‘Credit risk – other business segments’ sections.

 

     Santander UK risk grade         
                                                   Loss     
     9     8     7     6     5     4     3 to 1     Other(1)   allowance(2)   Total 
 2018    £bn     £bn     £bn     £bn     £bn     £bn     £bn     £bn   £bn   £bn 

Cash and balances at central banks

     19.7                                                  19.7 

– Stage 1

     19.7                                                  19.7 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                                                  

– Loans and advances to customers(3)

     10.0      27.4      72.3      51.5      20.3      11.4      6.3      2.9    (0.7   201.4 

– Stage 1

     10.0      27.4      72.1      50.2      17.6      6.9      1.1      2.8    (0.1   188.0 

– Stage 2

                 0.2      1.3      2.7      4.5      2.8      0.1    (0.3   11.3 

– Stage 3

                                         2.4          (0.3   2.1 

– Loans and advances to banks

     0.8      0.2      0.8                              1.0        2.8 

– Stage 1

     0.8      0.2      0.8                              1.0        2.8 

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading(4)

     15.2      3.8      1.3      0.4                        0.4        21.1 

– Stage 1

     15.2      3.8      1.3      0.4                        0.4        21.1 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

     7.2                                                  7.2 

– Stage 1

     7.2                                                  7.2 

Total financial assets at amortised cost

     33.2      31.4      74.4      51.9      20.3      11.4      6.3      4.3    (0.7   232.5 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

     6.6      5.8      0.7                              0.2        13.3 

– Stage 1

     6.6      5.8      0.7                              0.2        13.3 

Total on balance sheet exposures

     59.5      37.2      75.1      51.9      20.3      11.4      6.3      4.5    (0.7   265.5 
                                                                   

Off–balance sheet exposures

     0.7      8.0      8.9      9.0      5.4      1.3      0.5      7.9    (0.1)(5)    41.6 

– Stage 1

     0.7      8.0      8.9      8.9      5.3      1.2      0.3      7.9    (0.1   41.1 

– Stage 2

                       0.1      0.1      0.1      0.1              0.4 

– Stage 3

                                         0.1              0.1 
                                                                   

Total

     60.2      45.2      84.0      60.9      25.7      12.7      6.8      12.4    (0.8   307.1 
                                    
 2017                                                        

Cash and balances at central banks

     31.8                                          1.0        32.8 

Loans and advances to banks

     1.3      0.2      0.7                              1.3        3.5 

Loans and advances to customers:(3)

                                    

– Loans secured on residential property

     3.2      26.7      75.2      35.2      6.2      4.5      4.4          (0.2   155.2 

– Corporate loans

     1.7      5.1      2.1      4.6      9.6      5.1      1.5      1.3    (0.5   30.5 

– Finance leases

                 0.4      1.3      2.0      1.8      1.1      0.1    (0.1   6.6 

– Other unsecured loans

           0.1      0.8      1.6      1.6      0.7      0.5      0.9    (0.2   6.0 

– Amounts due from fellow Banco

                                               1.2        1.2 

 Santander group subsidiaries and JVs

                                                                  

Total loans and advances to customers

     4.9      31.9      78.5      42.7      19.4      12.1      7.5      3.5    (1.0   199.5 

Reverse repo agreements – non trading(4)

           1.5      0.4      0.4                        0.1        2.4 

Financial investments:

                                    

– Loans and receivables securities(2)

     1.9      0.1      0.2                                      2.2 

– Available–for–sale debt securities

     6.5      1.9      0.4                                      8.8 

– Held–to–maturity debt securities

     6.5                                                  6.5 

Total financial investments

     14.9      2.0      0.6                                      17.5 

Total

     52.9      35.6      80.2      43.1      19.4      12.1      7.5      5.9    (1.0   255.7 
             Santander UK risk grade               Loss    
  2019  9
            £bn
   8
            £bn
   7
            £bn
   6
            £bn
   5
            £bn
   4
            £bn
           3 to 1
£bn
           Other(1)
£bn
       allowance
£bn
      Total
£bn
 

Exposures

                   

On balance sheet

                   

Cash and balances at central banks

   21.2                                   21.2 

– Stage 1

   21.2                                   21.2 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                                 

– Loans and advances to customers(2)

   11.4    30.6    75.4    52.1    18.8    10.9    6.2    2.8    (0.8  207.4 

– Stage 1

   11.4    30.6    75.0    50.9    16.1    6.2    1.2    2.8    (0.1  194.1 

– Stage 2

           0.4    1.2    2.7    4.7    2.7        (0.3  11.4 

– Stage 3

                           2.3        (0.4  1.9 

Of which mortgages:

   9.8    25.0    71.9    42.9    7.7    4.2    3.9        (0.2  165.2 

– Stage 1

   9.8    25.0    71.7    42.0    5.7    1.1    0.2           155.5 

– Stage 2

           0.2    0.9    2.0    3.1    2.0        (0.1  8.1 

– Stage 3

                           1.7        (0.1  1.6 

– Loans and advances to banks

       0.2    0.4                    1.3       1.9 

– Stage 1

       0.2    0.4                    1.3       1.9 

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading

   15.3    2.4    4.2    1.5                0.2       23.6 

– Stage 1

   15.3    2.4    4.2    1.5                0.2       23.6 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

   7.1                                   7.1 

– Stage 1

   7.1                                   7.1 

Total financial assets at amortised cost

   33.8    33.2    80.0    53.6    18.8    10.9    6.2    4.3    (0.8  240.0 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

   6.1    3.2    0.4                           9.7 

– Stage 1

   6.1    3.2    0.4                           9.7 

Total on balance sheet

   61.1    36.4    80.4    53.6    18.8    10.9    6.2    4.3    (0.8  270.9 
                                                  

Total off–balance sheet

   0.9    8.5    8.4    8.1    5.0    1.1    0.5    9.1    (0.1) (3)   41.5 

– Stage 1

   0.9    8.5    8.4    8.0    4.7    1.0    0.3    9.1       40.9 

– Stage 2

               0.1    0.3    0.1    0.2        (0.1  0.6 

– Stage 3

                                       
                                                  

Total exposures

   62.0    44.9    88.8    61.7    23.8    12.0    6.7    13.4    (0.9  312.4 
                   

ECL

                   

On balance sheet

                   

Cash and balances at central banks

                                        

– Stage 1

                                        

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                                 

– Loans and advances to customers(2)

                   0.1    0.2    0.5            0.8 

– Stage 1

                       0.1             0.1 

– Stage 2

                   0.1    0.1    0.1         0.3 

– Stage 3

                           0.4            0.4 

Of which mortgages:

                       0.1    0.1         0.2 

– Stage 1

                                     

– Stage 2

                       0.1             0.1 

– Stage 3

                           0.1            0.1 

– Loans and advances to banks

                                        

– Stage 1

                                        

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading

                                        

– Stage 1

                                        

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

                                        

– Stage 1

                                        

Total financial assets at amortised cost

                   0.1    0.2    0.5            0.8 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

                                        

– Stage 1

                                        

Total on balance sheet

                   0.1    0.2    0.5            0.8 
                                                  

Total off–balance sheet

                           0.1            0.1 

– Stage 1

                                     

– Stage 2

                           0.1         0.1 

– Stage 3

                                        
                                                  

Total ECL

                   0.1    0.2    0.6            0.9 

Santander UK plc83


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

  2019

  

Santander UK risk grade

   

                         Total
%

 
  9
                %
   8
                %
   7
                %
   6
                %
   

5

                %

   

4

                %

   3 to 1
                %
           Other(1)
%
 

Coverage ratio

                  

On balance sheet

                  

Cash and balances at central banks

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                             

– Loans and advances to customers(2)

                   0.5    1.8    8.1        0.4 

– Stage 1

                       1.6            0.1 

– Stage 2

                   3.7    2.1    3.7        2.6 

– Stage 3

                           17.4        21.1 

Of which mortgages:

                       2.4    2.6        0.1 

– Stage 1

                                    

– Stage 2

                       3.2            1.2 

– Stage 3

                           5.9        6.3 

– Loans and advances to banks

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Total financial assets at amortised cost

                   0.5    1.8    8.1        0.3 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Total on balance sheet

                   0.5    1.8    8.1        0.3 
                                              

Total off–balance sheet

                           20.0        0.2 

– Stage 1

                                    

– Stage 2

                           50.0        16.7 

– Stage 3

                                    
                                              

Total coverage ratio

                   0.4    1.7    9.0        0.3 

 

(1)

Includes cash at hand and smaller cases mainly in the consumer (auto) finance and commercial mortgages portfolios. We use scorecards for these items, rather than rating models.

(2)

Loss allowancesIncludes interest we have charged to the customer’s account and accrued interest we have not charged to the account yet.

  2018

  Santander UK risk grade   Loss  

        Total
£bn

 
  

9

              £bn

   

8

              £bn

   

7

              £bn

   

6

              £bn

   

5

          £bn

   

4

          £bn

           3 to 1
£bn
         Other(1)
£bn
       allowance
£bn
 

Exposures

                   

On balance sheet

                   

Cash and balances at central banks

   19.7                                   19.7 

– Stage 1

   19.7                                   19.7 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                                 

– Loans and advances to customers(2)

   10.0    27.4    72.3    51.5    20.3    11.4    6.3    2.9    (0.7  201.4 

– Stage 1

   10.0    27.4    72.1    50.2    17.6    6.9    1.1    2.8    (0.1  188.0 

– Stage 2

           0.2    1.3    2.7    4.5    2.8    0.1    (0.3  11.3 

– Stage 3

                           2.4        (0.3  2.1 

Of which mortgages:

   7.7    21.8    69.0    42.8    7.8    4.7    4.2        (0.2  157.8 

– Stage 1

   7.7    21.8    68.8    41.6    5.5    1.2    0.2           146.8 

– Stage 2

           0.2    1.2    2.3    3.5    2.1        (0.1  9.2 

– Stage 3

                           1.9        (0.1  1.8 

– Loans and advances to banks

   0.8    0.2    0.8                    1.0       2.8 

– Stage 1

   0.8    0.2    0.8                    1.0       2.8 

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading

   15.2    3.8    1.3    0.4                0.4       21.1 

– Stage 1

   15.2    3.8    1.3    0.4                0.4       21.1 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

   7.2                                   7.2 

– Stage 1

   7.2                                   7.2 

Total financial assets at amortised cost

   33 2    31.4    74.4    51.9    20.3    11.4    6.3    4.3    (0.7  232.5 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

   6.6    5.8    0.7                    0.2       13.3 

– Stage 1

   6.6    5.8    0.7                    0.2       13.3 

Total on balance sheet

   59.5    37.2    75.1    51.9    20.3    11.4    6.3    4.5    (0.7  265.5 
                                                  

Total off–balance sheet

   0.7    8.0    8.9    9.0    5.4    1.3    0.5    7.9    (0.1)(4)   41.6 

– Stage 1

   0.7    8.0    8.9    8.9    5.3    1.2    0.3    7.9    (0.1  41.1 

– Stage 2

               0.1    0.1    0.1    0.1           0.4 

– Stage 3

                           0.1           0.1 
                                                  

Total exposures

   60.2    45.2    84.0    60.9    25.7    12.7    6.8    12.4    (0.8  307.1 

84Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

   Santander UK risk grade     
  2018  9
            £bn
   8
            £bn
   7
            £bn
   6
            £bn
   5
            £bn
   4
            £bn
   3 to 1
            £bn
           Other(1)
£bn
   

                         Total

£bn

 

ECL

                  

On balance sheet

                  

Cash and balances at central banks

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                             

– Loans and advances to customers(2)

                   0.1    0.2    0.4        0.7 

– Stage 1

                       0.1            0.1 

– Stage 2

                   0.1    0.1    0.1        0.3 

– Stage 3

                           0.3        0.3 

Of which mortgages:

                       0.1    0.1        0.2 

– Stage 1

                                    

– Stage 2

                       0.1            0.1 

– Stage 3

                           0.1        0.1 

– Loans and advances to banks

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Total financial assets at amortised cost

                   0.1    0.2    0.4        0.7 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Total on balance sheet

                   0.1    0.2    0.4        0.7 
                                              

Total off–balance sheet

                           0.1        0.1 

– Stage 1

                           0.1        0.1 

– Stage 2

                                    

– Stage 3

                                    
                                      

Total ECL

                   0.1    0.2    0.5        0.8 
                  
                   %   %   %   %   %   %   %   %   % 

Coverage ratio

                  

On balance sheet

                  

Cash and balances at central banks

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                                             

– Loans and advances to customers(2)

                   0.5    1.8    6.3        0.3 

– Stage 1

                       1.4            0.1 

– Stage 2

                   3.7    2.2    3.6        2.7 

– Stage 3

                           12.5        14.3 

Of which mortgages:

                       2.1    2.4        0.1 

– Stage 1

                                    

– Stage 2

                       2.9            1.1 

– Stage 3

                           5.3        5.6 

– Loans and advances to banks

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

– Reverse repo agreements – non trading

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Total financial assets at amortised cost

                   0.5    1.8    6.3        0.3 

Financial assets at FVOCI:

                                    

– Stage 1

                                    

Total on balance sheet

                   0.5    1.8    6.3        0.3 
                                              

Total off–balance sheet

                           20.0        0.2 

– Stage 1

                           33.3        0.2 

– Stage 2

                                    

– Stage 3

                                    
                                              

Total coverage ratio

                   0.4    1.6    7.4        0.3 

(1)

Includes cash at hand and smaller cases mainly in the consumer (auto) finance and commercial mortgages portfolios. We use scorecards for 2017 were on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on an ECL basis per IFRS 9.these items, rather than rating models.

(3)(2)

Includes interest we have charged to the customer’s account and accrued interest we have not charged to the account yet.

(4)(3)

From 1 January 2018,The total rounds to £0.1bn and is split across all three Stages. In this table, it has been allocated in full to Stage 2 for presentational purposes. For the non-trading repurchase agreements and non-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines infull detail, see the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives are represented accordingly.‘Credit Quality’ section.

(5)(4)

The total rounds to £0.1bn and is split across all three Stages. In this table, it has been allocated in full to Stage 1 for presentational purposes. For the full detail, see the ‘IFRS 9 Credit‘Credit Quality’ section.

 

68Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk85


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 

Credit performance

The customer loans in the tables below and in the remainderrest of the ‘Credit risk’ section are presented differently from the balances in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The main difference is that customer loans exclude interest we have accrued but not charged to customers’ accounts yet.

 

2019  

      Customer
loans

£bn

   

Stage 3

drawn
     exposure(1)(2)
£m

   Stage 3
undrawn
      exposure
£m
   Stage 3
            ratio(3)
%
   Gross
    write–offs
£m
   

Total 

loss 
    allowances 
£m 

 

Retail Banking:

   180.4    1,936    38    1.09    206    591  

– of which mortgages

   165.4    1,722    12    1.05    14    218  

– of which business banking

   1.8    78    1    4.28    24    52  

– of which consumer (auto) finance

   7.7    42        0.55    34    88  

– of which other unsecured lending

   5.5    94    25    2.15    134    233  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   16.3    335    27    2.22    41    210  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   4.1        15    0.36        50  

Corporate Centre

   4.2    17        0.40    2    12  
   205.0    2,288    80    1.15    249    863  
    Customer                 Gross write–     Loss             
    loans     NPLs(1)(2)     NPL ratio(3)     offs     allowances(4) 
2018    £bn     £m     %     £m     £m                         

Retail Banking:

     172.8      2,126      1.23      182      594    172.8    2,211    43    1.30    182    594  

– of which mortgages

     158.0      1,907      1.21      18      237    158.0    1,982    17    1.27    18    237  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

     17.7      264      1.49      97      182 

Corporate & Investment Banking

     4.6                  252      18 

Corporate Centre

     4.5      16      0.36      3      13 
     199.6      2,406      1.21      534      807 
                    
2017                              

Retail Banking:

     168.7      2,104      1.25      195      491 

– of which mortgages

     154.7      1,867      1.21      22      225 

– of which business banking

   1.8    89        4.99    15    53  

– of which consumer (auto) finance

   7.3    43        0.58    24    85  

– of which other unsecured lending

   5.7    97    26    2.17    125    219  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

     19.4      383      1.97      35      195    17.7    264    12    1.56    97    182  

Corporate & Investment Banking

     6.0      340      5.67            236    4.6        26    0.56    
252(4)
 
   18  

Corporate Centre

     6.2      21      0.34      23      18    4.5    16        0.36    3    13  
     200.3      2,848      1.42      253      940    199.6    2,491    81    1.29    534    807  
                    

Of which: Corporate lending

                                           

2019

   22.3    413    43    2.04    65    311  

2018

     24.1      353      1.46      364      253    24.1    353    38    1.62    364    253  

2017

     27.3      838      3.07      56      485 

 

(1)

We define NPLsStage 3 in the ‘Credit risk management’– Santander UK group level’ section.

(2)

All NPLs (excluding personal bank accounts) continue accruing interest.Interest on Stage 3 exposures is derecognised in line with the requirements of IFRS 9.

(3)

NPLsTotal Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of customer loans.loans plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. The way we calculate the Stage 3 ratio was changed from 1 January 2019, and 2018 restated for consistency. See ‘Key metrics’ in the ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’ section.

(4)

Loss allowances for 2017 were on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on an ECL basis per IFRS 9. The ECL allowance is for both on and off–balance sheet exposures.Related to Carillion plcwrite-off in Q1 2018.

Corporate lending comprises the business banking portfolio ofin our Retail Banking segment, and our Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate & Investment Banking segments.

86Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Credit quality

2018 comparedTotalon-balance sheet exposures at 31 December 2019 comprised £205.0bn of customer loans, L&A to 2017(unaudited)banks of £1.9bn, £30.7bn of sovereign assets measured at amortised cost, £9.7bn of assets measured at FVOCI, and £21.2bn of cash and balances at central banks.

Our financial results now reflect the changes in the statutory perimeter, following the ring-fence transfers of activities to Banco Santander London Branch. Prior periods have not been restated. The NPL ratio improved 21bps to 1.21%, with credit quality remaining strong supported by our prudent approach to risk, proactive management actions and the ongoing resilience of the UK economy. The improvement was also driven by the write-off of the Carillion plc exposures.

  2019  

Stage 1

£m

   

Stage 2

£m

               Stage 3
£m
   

Total 

£m 

 

Exposures

        

On-balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

   169,003    9,459    1,936    180,398  

– of which mortgages

   155,477    8,157    1,722    165,356  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   14,068    1,894    335    16,297  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   3,916    198        4,114  

Corporate Centre

   67,608    126    17    67,751  

Totalon-balance sheet

           254,595                11,677    2,288            268,560  

Off–balance sheet

        

Retail Banking(1)

   25,849    194    38    26,081  

– of which mortgages(1)

   13,353    67    12    13,432  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   5,249    282    27    5,558  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   9,129    198    15    9,342  

Corporate Centre

   614            614  

Total off–balance sheet(2)

   40,841    674    80    41,595  

Total exposures

   295,436    12,351    2,368    310,155  

    

                    

ECL

        

On-balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

   85    255    224    564  

– of which mortgages

   11    100    103    214  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   34    35    126    195  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   2    12        14  

Corporate Centre

   3    3    6    12  

Totalon-balance sheet

   124    305    356    785  

Off–balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

   13    13    1    27  

– of which mortgages

   3    1         

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   7    6    2    15  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   3    24    9    36  

Total off–balance sheet

   23    43    12    78  

Total ECL

   147    348    368    863  
        
   %   %   %    

Coverage ratio(3)

        

On-balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

   0.1    2.7    11.6    0.3  

– of which mortgages

       1.2    5.9    0.1  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   0.2    1.8    37.6    1.2  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   0.1    6.1        0.3  

Corporate Centre

       2 4    37.5    –  

Totalon-balance sheet

       2.6    15.6    0.3  

Off–balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

   0.1    6.7    2.6    0.1  

– of which mortgages

       1.5        –  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   0.1    2.1    7.4    0.3  

Corporate & Investment Banking

       12.1    60.0    0.4  

Totaloff-balance sheet

   0.1    6.4    15.0    0.2  

Total coverage

       2.8    15.5    0.3  

 

(1)The Retail Banking NPL ratio decreased to 1.23%. Retail Banking loan loss allowances increased from

Off-balance sheet exposures include £7.6bn of retail mortgage offers in the application of IFRS 9.pipeline.

(2)The Corporate & Commercial Banking NPL ratio improved

Off-balance sheet amounts consist of contingent liabilities and commitments. For more, see Note 29 to 1.49%, largely due to a number of small loans which were written-off, without material concentrations across sectors or portfolios.the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(3)CIB had no loans in non-performance, predominantly driven by

ECL as a percentage of the loans write-off for Carillion plc and another CIB customer, both of which moved to non-performing in 2017.related exposure.

The Corporate Centre NPL ratio increased slightly to 0.36%.

For more on the credit performance of our key portfolios by business segment, see the ‘Retail Banking – credit risk review’ and ‘Other business segments – credit risk review’ sections.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 6987


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

IFRS 9 credit qualityTotalon-balance

Total on-balance sheet exposures at 31 December 2018 comprisecomprised £199.5bn of customer loans, L&A to banks of £2.8bn, (reported in CIB) and £28.4bn of sovereign assets measured at amortised cost, £13.3bn of assets measured at fair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI),FVOCI, and £19.7bn of cash and balances at central banks (all reported in Corporate Centre).banks.

 

  (unaudited)                 Stage 2             
  Average PD(1)              Stage 1     £ 30  DPD     >30 DPD     Sub total     Stage 3(2)     Total 
31 December 2018  %           £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m 
2018  

 

Stage 1
£m

               Stage 2
£m
               Stage 3
£m
                       Total 
£m 
 

Exposures

                                      

On-balance sheet

                                      

Retail Banking

   0.53          160,212      9,375      949      10,324      2,211      172,747    160,212    10,324    2,211    172,747  

– of which mortgages

   0.48          146,619      8,466      890      9,356      1,982      157,957    146,619    9,356    1,982    157,957  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   0.92          16,394      1,044            1,044      264      17,702    16,394    1,044    264    17,702  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   0.36          28,461      78            78            28,539    4,535    78        4,613  

Corporate Centre

   0.14           44,609      120      11      131      15      44,755    68,535    131    15    68,681  

Total on-balance sheet

             249,676      10,617      960      11,577      2,490          263,743    249,676    11,577    2,490    263,743  

Off-balance sheet

                              

Retail Banking(3)

           22,819      196            196      43      23,058 

– of which mortgages(3)

           11,120      76            76      17      11,213 

Off–balance sheet

        

Retail Banking1)

   22,819    196    43    23,058  

– of which mortgages(1)

   11,120    76    17    11,213  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

           4,939      182            182      12      5,133    4,939    182    12    5,133  

Corporate & Investment Banking

           12,923      56            56      26      13,005    12,923    56    26    13,005  

Corporate Centre

             525                              525    525            525  

Total off-balance sheet(4)

             41, 206      434            434      81      41,721 

Total off–balance sheet(2)

   41,206    434    81    41,721  

Total exposures

             290,882      11,051      960      12,011      2,571      305,464    290,882    12,011    2,571    305,464  
                                                  

ECL

                                      

On-balance sheet

                                      

Retail Banking

           84      217      39      256      228      568    84    256    228    568  

– of which mortgages

           10      98      20      118      106      234    10    118    106    234  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

           31      26            26      111      168    31    26    111    168  

Corporate & Investment Banking

           1      1            1            2    1    1         

Corporate Centre

             5      3            3      5      13    5    3    5    13  

Total on-balance sheet

             121      247      39      286      344      751    121    286    344    751  

Off-balance sheet

                              

Off–balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

           12      13            13      1      26    12    13    1    26  

– of which mortgages

           2      1            1            3    2    1         

Corporate & Commercial Banking

           6      6            6      2      14    6    6    2    14  

Corporate & Investment Banking

             4      2            2      10      16    4    2    10    16  

Total off-balance sheet

             22      21            21      13      56 

Total off–balance sheet

   22    21    13    56  

Total ECL

             143      268      39      307      357      807    143    307    357    807  
                                      
Coverage ratio(5)              %     %     %     %     %     % 
  %   %   %    

Coverage ratio(3)

        

On-balance sheet

                                      

Retail Banking

           0.1      2.3      4.1      2.5      10.3      0.3    0.1    2.5    10.3    0.3  

– of which mortgages

                 1.2      2.2      1.3      5.3      0.1        1.3    5.3    0.1  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

           0.2      2.5            2.5      42.0      0.9    0.2    2.5    42.0    0.9  

Corporate & Investment Banking

                 1.3            1.3                    1.3        –  

Corporate Centre

                   2.5            2.3      33.3              2.3    33.3    –  

Total on-balance sheet

                   2.3      4.1      2.5      13.8      0.3        2.5    13.8    0.3  

Off-balance sheet

                              

Off–balance sheet

        

Retail Banking

           0.1      6.6            6.6      2.3      0.1    0.1    6.6    2.3    0.1  

– of which mortgages

                 1.3            1.3                    1.3        –  

Corporate & Commercial Banking

           0.1      3.3            3.3      16.7      0.3    0.1    3.3    16.7    0.3  

Corporate & Investment Banking

                   3.6            3.6      38.5      0.1        3.6    38.5    0.1  

Total off-balance sheet

             0.1      4.8            4.8      16.0      0.1 

Total off–balance sheet

   0.1    4.8    16.0    0.1  

Total coverage

                   2.4      4.1      2.6      13.9      0.3        2.6    13.9    0.3  

 

(1)

Average IFRS 9 PDs are 12-month, scenario-weighted PDs. Weighted averages are determined using EAD for the first year. Financial assets in default are excluded from the calculation, given they are allocated a PD of 100%.

(2)

Stage 3 exposures under IFRS 9 and NPLs used in our NPL ratio metric are subject to different criteria. These criteria are under review in parallel with the ongoing regulatory changes to the default definition.

(3)

Off-balance sheet exposures include £5.2bn£6.2bn of retail mortgage offers in the pipeline.

(4)(2)

Off-balance sheet amounts consist of contingent liabilities and commitments. For more, see Note 3229 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(5)(3)

ECL as a percentage of the related exposure.

Stage 2 analysis

Exposure
 31 December 2018£m

Currently in arrears

960

Currently up–to–date:

– PD deterioration

8,509

– Other(1)

2,542

Total Stage 2

12,011

(1)

Mainly due to forbearance.

70    Santander UK plc


> Credit risk

Total on-balance sheet exposures at 1 January 2018 comprise £200.3bn of customer loans, L&A to banks of £3.5bn (reported in CIB) and £11.3bn of sovereign assets measured at amortised cost, £8.9bn of assets measured at FVOCI, and £32.8bn of cash and balances at central banks (all reported in Corporate Centre).

     (unaudited)                Stage 2             
     Average PD(1)          Stage 1     £ 30  DPD     >30 DPD     Sub total     Stage 3(2)     Total 
 1 January 2018    %          £m     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m 

Exposures

                                

On-balance sheet

                                

Retail Banking

     0.61          155,845      9,537      1,120      10,657      2,222      168,724 

– of which mortgages

     0.55          142,940      8,765      991      9,756      1,986      154,682 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

     0.79          18,362      575      71      646      383      19,391 

Corporate & Investment Banking

     0.17          11,684      93            93      340      12,117 

Corporate Centre

     0.07           56,325      172      38      210      20      56,555 

Total on-balance sheet

                 242,216      10,377      1,229      11,606      2,965      256,787 

Off-balance sheet

                                

Retail Banking(3)

             23,133      223      5      228      41      23,402 

– of which mortgages(3)

             12,215      126      2      128      18      12,361 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

             4,055      211      9      220      5      4,280 

Corporate & Investment Banking

             14,899      16            16      32      14,947 

Corporate Centre

                 830      40            40            870 

Total off–balance sheet(4)

                 42,917      490      14      504      78      43,499 

Total exposures

                 285,133      10,867      1,243      12,110      3,043      300,286 
                                                       

ECL

                                

On-balance sheet

                                

Retail Banking

             97      206      28      234      266      597 

– of which mortgages

             20      113      16      129      121      270 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

             38      17      8      25      173      236 

Corporate & Investment Banking

             8                        242      250 

Corporate Centre

                 7      2      2      4      8      19 

Total on-balance sheet

                 150      225      38      263      689      1,102 

Off-balance sheet

                                

Retail Banking

             13      13            13      2      28 

– of which mortgages

                   2            2            2 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

             5      8            8            13 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                 8                              8 

Total off-balance sheet

                 26      21            21      2      49 

Total ECL

                 176      246      38      284      691      1,151 
                                
 Coverage ratio(5)               %     %     %     %     %     % 

On-balance sheet

                                

Retail Banking

             0.1      2.2      2.5      2.2      12.0      0.4 

– of which mortgages

                   1.3      1.6      1.3      6.1      0.2 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

             0.2      3.0      11.3      3.9      45.2      1.2 

Corporate & Investment Banking

             0.1                        71.2      2.1 

Corporate Centre

                       1.2      5.3      1.9      40.0       

Total on-balance sheet

                 0.1      2.2      3.1      2.3      23.2      0.4 

Off-balance sheet

                                

Retail Banking

             0.1      5.8            5.7      4.9      0.1 

– of which mortgages

                   1.6            1.6             

Corporate & Commercial Banking

             0.1      3.8            3.6            0.3 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                 0.1                              0.1 

Total off-balance sheet

                 0.1      4.3            4.2      2.6      0.1 
                                                       

Total coverage

                 0.1      2.3      3.1      2.3      22.7      0.4 

(1)

Average IFRS 9 PDs are 12-month, scenario-weighted PDs. Weighted averages are determined using EAD for the first year. Financial assets in default are excluded from the calculation, given they are allocated a PD of 100%.

(2)

Stage 3 exposures under IFRS 9 and NPLs used in our NPL ratio metric are subject to different criteria. These criteria are under review in parallel with the ongoing regulatory changes to the default definition.

(3)

Off-balance sheet exposures include £6.2bn of retail mortgage offers in the pipeline.

(4)

Off-balance sheet amounts consist of contingent liabilities and commitments. For more, see Note 32 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(5)

ECL as a percentage of the related exposure.

31 December 20182019 compared to 1 January 2018 (unaudited)

Key movements in exposures and ECL in the year by Stage were:

The increase in Stage 1 exposures was largely driven by reverse repurchase agreements – non trading in CIB. As part of our ring-fencing implementation, reverse repurchase agreements – non trading are now accounted for at amortised cost, in line with our business model for managing these assets as part of our overall funding and liquidity plans. Previously, similar transactions were mainly classified as trading assets and accounted for at FVTPL. As the impairment requirements in IFRS 9 do not apply to FVTPL assets, they are not included in this table and the change in treatment led to an increase in the Stage 1 CIB exposures. Reverse repurchase agreements carry very low credit risk and the ECL at 31 December 2018 was not material. Stage 1 exposures also increased due to lending growth in mortgages. The increase was partially offset by a decrease inthe mortgage portfolio, with further growth coming from the reverse repos, and cash and balances at central banks (reportedheld in Corporate Centre) for which the ECL was also not material, and transfers as part of our ring-fencing plans.Centre. Stage 1 ECLs decreased, reflecting our prudent approachincreased to lending.reflect this lending growth.

Stage 2 exposures marginally increased due to a single name CIB case moving onto our Watchlist and an update to our economics scenarios to reflect lower Commercial Property Index impacting corporate accounts, offset by a reduction in mortgages due to improved HPI economic scenarios. Stage 2 ECLs increased reflecting the corresponding ECLs were broadly unchanged from 1 January 2018, with a steady inflow and cure through proactive management action.increase in Stage 2 exposures.

Stage 3 exposures decreased in partreduced due to cures in the write-off ofmortgage portfolio mainly due to Term Extension Forbearance activity. Stage 3 ECLs increased as the Carillion plc exposures and the corresponding ECL, alongside successful refinancing and restructuring of several largereduction in mortgage ECLs was more than offset by an increase in ECLs mainly from single name cases in Corporate &and Commercial Banking, but also as a result of our prudent approach to risk, proactive management actions and the ongoing resilience of the UK economy.Banking.

LOGO

 

88Santander UK plc71


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

Stage 2 analysis

The following table analyses our Stage 2 exposures and ECL by the reason the exposure is classified as Stage 2.

 

   Retail Banking       Other business segments                           Total            
  2019      Exposure
£m
   

                ECL

£m

   

        Coverage

%

   

                Exposure

£m

   

        ECL

£m

   

        Coverage

%

   

      Exposure

£m

   

        ECL

£m

   

    Coverage 

 

PD deterioration

   6,844    194    2.8    1,998    25    1.3    8,842    219    2.5  

Forbearance

   516    4    0.8    45    1    2.2    561    5    0.9  

Other

   1,239    24    1.9    496    52    10.5    1,735    76    4.4  

30 DPD

   1,054    46    4.4    159    2    1.3    1,213    48    4.0  
    9,653    268    2.8    2,698    80    3.0    12,351    348    2.8  
                  
  2018                                    

PD deterioration

   7,854    196    2.5    655    15    2.3    8,509    211    2.5  

Forbearance

   450    3    0.7    12    1    8.3    462    4    0.9  

Other

   1,267    31    2.4    813    22    2.7    2,080    53    2.5  

30 DPD

   949    39    4.1    11            960    39    4.1  
    10,520    269    2.6    1,491    38    2.5    12,011    307    2.6  

Where balances satisfy more than one of the criteria above for determining a significant increase in credit risk, we have assigned the corresponding gross carrying amount and ECL in order of the categories presented.

The following table analyses our Stage 2 exposures and the related ECL by whether or not they are in a cure period at the balance sheet date.

   2019      2018 
       Exposure
£m
               ECL
£m
       Coverage 
         Exposure
£m
               ECL
£m
       Coverage 
 

Stage 2 not in cure period

   12,017    342    2.8      11,837    301    2.5  

Stage 2 in cure period (for transfer to Stage 1)

   334    6    1.8       174    6    3.4  
    12,351    348    2.8       12,011    307    2.6  

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In 2019, total Stage 2 accounts triggered by PD deterioration increased slightly. This was due to an increase in ‘Other business segments’ mainly driven by single name cases entering Stage 2, which was partly offset by an improvement in Retail Banking led by Stage 2 mortgages.

We do not have any cure period criteria for exiting Stage 3.

Reconciliation of exposures, loss allowance and net carrying amounts

The table below shows the relationships between disclosures in this Credit risk review section which refer to drawn exposures and the associated ECL, and the total assets as presented in the Consolidated Balance Sheet.

 

  On-balance sheet      Off-balance sheet  
2019          Exposures
£m
   Loss
    allowance
£m
   

        Net carrying 
amount 

£m 

       Exposures
£m
   Loss 
    allowance 
£m 
 

Retail Banking

   180,398    564    179,834      26,081    27  

– of which mortgages

   165,356    214    165,142      13,432     

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   16,297    195    16,102      5,558    15  

Corporate & Investment Banking

   4,114    14    4,100      9,342    36  

Corporate Centre

   67,751    12    67,739       614    –  

Total exposures presented in Credit Quality tables

   268,560    785    267,775       41,595    78  

Other items(1)

         2,986          

Adjusted net carrying amount

         270,761          

Assets classified at FVTPL

       3,702       

Non–financial assets

         7,239          

Total assets per the Consolidated Balance Sheet

         281,702          
           
 

 

On-balance sheet

 Off-balance sheet 
2018 

Exposures

£m

 

Loss

    allowance

£m

 

    Net carrying 

amount 

£m 

 

    Exposures

£m

 

Loss

    allowance

£m

                     

Retail Banking

 172,747  568  172,179   23,058  26    172,747    568    172,179      23,058    26 

– of which mortgages

 157,957  234  157,723   11,213  3    157,957    234    157,723      11,213    3 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

 17,702  168  17,534   5,133  14    17,702    168    17,534      5,133    14 

Corporate & Investment Banking

 28,539  2  28,537   13,005  16    4,613    2    4,611      13,005    16 

Corporate Centre

 44,755  13  44,742   525       68,681    13    68,668       525     

Total exposures presented in IFRS 9 Credit Quality tables

     263,743  751  262,992   41,721  56 

Total exposures presented in Credit Quality tables

   263,743    751    262,992       41,721    56 

Other items(1)

     2,501               2,501          

Adjusted net carrying amount

     265,493               265,493          

Assets classified at FVTPL

   10,876           10,876       

Non–financial assets

     7,003               7,003          

Total assets per the Consolidated Balance Sheet at 31 December 2018

     283,372      

Total assets per the Consolidated Balance Sheet

         283,372          

 

(1)

These assets mainly relate to loans as part of a JV agreement and the accrued interest on them. They carry low credit risk and therefore have an immaterial ECL.

Santander UK plc89


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL

The following table shows changes in total on andoff-balance sheet exposures, subject to ECL assessment, and the corresponding ECL, duringin the year. The table presents total gross carrying amounts and ECLs at a Santander UK group level. We present segmental views in the sections below.

 

   

 

Non–credit impaired

  Credit impaired    
   Stage 1
Subject to 12–month ECL
  Stage 2
Subject to lifetime ECL
  Stage 3
Subject to lifetime ECL
  Total 
   

Exposures(1)

£m

  

ECL

£m

  

Exposures(1)

£m

  

ECL

£m

  

Exposures(1)

£m

  

ECL

£m

  

Exposures(1)

£m

  

ECL

£m

 

At 1 January 2018

   285,133   176   12,110   284   3,043   691   300,286   1,151 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      4      (12     (8     (16

Changes to model

      (1     2      (8     (7

Transfer to lifetime ECL (not–credit impaired)(3)

   (4,190  (11  4,190   11             

Transfer to credit impaired(3)

   (445  (8  (603  (23  1,048   31       

Transfer to 12–month ECL(3)

   3,325   68   (3,325  (68            

Transfer from credit impaired(3)

   17   6   443   27   (460  (33      

Transfers of financial instruments

   (1,293  55   705   (53  588   (2      

Net remeasurement of ECL on stage transfer(4)

      (63     83      79      99 

New assets originated or purchased (5)

   85,933   43   1,087   34   19   12   87,039   89 

Other(6)

   (24,306  (20  (295  (11  52   171   (24,549  140 

Assets derecognised – closed good(7)

   (54,585  (51  (1,596  (20  (475  (44  (56,656  (115

Assets derecognised – written off(7)

               (656  (534  (656  (534

At 31 December 2018

   290,882   143   12,011   307   2,571   357   305,464   807 

Net movement in the year

   5,749   (33  (99  23   (472  (334  5,178   (344
                                  

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (33      23       200       190 

Recoveries net of collection costs

                     (36      (36

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       (33      23       164       154 
   Stage 1                   Stage 2     Stage 3         Total  
   Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
     Exposures(1)
£m
              ECL
£m
     Exposures(1)
£m
              ECL
£m
     Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL 
£m 
 
At 1 January 2019   290,882   143      12,011   307      2,571   357      305,464   807  
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)   (4,101  (11    4,101   11                –  
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1(3)   3,458   74     (3,458  (74               –  
Transfers to Stage 3(3)   (361  (2    (595  (24    956   26        –  
Transfers from Stage 3(3)   10   1      516   23      (526  (24        –  
Transfers of financial instruments   (994  62      564   (64     430   2         –  
Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)      (66       130        96        160  
Change in economic scenarios(2)      5        (15       (9       (19) 
Changes to model                      13        13  
New lending and assets purchased(5) (8)   42,415   29     827   32     15   9     43,257   70  
Other(6)   3,514   6     294   (14    172   191     3,980   183  
Redemptions and repayments(7)   (40,380  (32    (1,344  (28    (459  (42    (42,183  (102) 
Assets written off(7)   (1        (1        (361  (249     (363  (249) 
At 31 December 2019   295,436   147      12,351   348      2,368   368      310,155   863  
Net movement in the year   4,554   4      340   41      (203  11      4,691   56  
                                           
ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement       4          41          260          305  
Less: ECL relating to derecognised income                (13     (13) 
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs       (10         (15         (46         (71) 
Total ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement       (6         26          201          221  
               
  2018                                  
At 1 January 2018   285,133   176      12,110   284      3,043   691      300,286   1,151  
Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)   (4,190  (11    4,190   11                –  
Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1(3)   3,325   68     (3,325  (68               –  
Transfers to Stage 3(3)   (445  (8    (603  (23    1,048   31        –  
Transfers from Stage 3(3)   17   6      443   27      (460  (33        –  
Transfers of financial instruments   (1,293  55      705   (53     588   (2        –  
Net remeasurement of ECL on stage transfer(4)      (63       83        79        99  
Change in economic scenarios(2)      4        (12       (8       (16) 
Changes to model      (1       2        (8       (7) 
New lending and assets purchased(5) (8)   57,280   43     1,085   33     17   13     58,382   89  
Other(6)   5,540   (27    (175  (15    266   207     5,631   165  
Redemptions and repayments(7)   (55,778  (44    (1,714  (15    (687  (81    (58,179  (140) 
Assets written off(7)                     (656  (534     (656  (534) 
At 31 December 2018   290,882   143      12,011   307      2,571   357      305,464   807  
Net movement in the year   5,749   (33     (99  23      (472  (334     5,178   (344) 
                                           
ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement    (33     23      200      190  
Less: Recoveries net of collection costs                           (36         (36) 
Total credit impairment charge/(release)       (33         23          164          154  

 

(1)

Exposures that have attracted an ECL, and as reported in the IFRS 9 Credit Quality table above.

(2)

Changes to assumptions from the start of the year to the end ofin the year. Isolates the impact on ECL from changes to the economic variables for each scenario, changes to the scenarios themselves as well as changes in the probability weights from all other movements. The impact of changes in economics on exposure Stage allocations are shown within Transfers of financial instruments.

(3)

Total impact of facilities that moved Stage(s) in the year. This means, for example, that where risk parameter changes (model inputs) or model changes (methodology) result in a facility moving Stage, the full impact is reflected here (rather than in Other). Stage flow analysis only applies to facilities that existed at both the start and end of the year. Transfers between each StageStages are based on opening balances and ECL at the start of the period.

(4)

Relates to the revaluation of ECL following the transfer of an exposure from one Stage to another.

(5)

Exposures and ECL at reporting date of facilities that did not exist at the start of the year but did at the end. Amounts in Stage 2 and 3 represent assets which have deteriorated duringin the year subsequent toafter origination in Stage 1.

(6)

Residual movements on facilities that did not change Stage in the year, and which were neither acquired nor purchased in the year. Includes the impact of changes in risk parameters in the year, repayments, draw downs on accounts open at the start and end of the year, unwind of discount rates and increases in ECL requirements of accounts which ultimately were written off in the period.

(7)

Exposures and ECL for facilities that existed at the start of the year, but not at the end.

(8)

Basis of preparation for this line item is changed to report new lending for corporate loans at the opening balance rather than theyear-end closing balance andnon-customer assets in Corporate Centre on a net basis rather than a gross basis.

 

7290 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

COUNTRY RISK EXPOSURES

We manage our country risk exposure under our global limits framework. Within this framework, we set our Risk Appetite for each country, taking into account factors that may affect its risk profile. These can include political events, macroeconomics and the nature of the risk. We actively manage exposures if we think we need to. We consider Banco Santander related risk separately.

The tables below show our total exposures, which are the total of balance sheet and off–balance sheet values. We calculate balance sheet values in accordance with IFRS (i.e. after netting allowed under IAS 32) except for credit provisions which we add back. Off–balance sheet values are undrawn facilities and letters of credit. We classify location by country of risk – the country where each client has its main business or assets. That is unless there is a full risk transfer guarantee in place, in which case we use the guarantor’s country of domicile. If a client has operations in many countries, we use their country of incorporation. The tables below exclude balances with other Banco Santander companies. We show them separately in the ‘Balances with other Banco Santander companies’ section.

 

    2019                    2018             
 2018 2017 
     Financial
institutions
           Financial
institutions
          Government  Financial
institutions
          Government  Financial
institutions
        
 Governments
£bn
 Government
guaranteed
£bn
 Banks(1)
£bn
 Other
£bn
 Retail
£bn
 Corporate
£bn
 Total(2)
£bn
 Governments
£bn
 Government
guaranteed
£bn
 Banks(1)
£bn
 Other
£bn
 Retail
£bn
 Corporate
£bn
 Total(2)
£bn
 
 Governments
£bn
 guaranteed
£bn
 Banks(1)
£bn
 Other
£bn
 Retail
£bn
 Corporate
£bn
 Total(2)
£bn
 Governments
£bn
 guaranteed
£bn
 Banks(1)
£bn
 Other
£bn
 Retail
£bn
 Corporate
£bn
 Total(2)
£bn
 

Eurozone

                             

Ireland

          12.3     0.4  12.7         0.2   1.1      0.8   2.1           7.5     0.1  7.6             12.3      0.4   12.7  

Italy

          0.1     0.2  0.3   0.4         0.1      0.1   0.6           0.1        0.1             0.1      0.2   0.3  
Spain (excl. Santander)          0.2        0.2         0.3   0.1      0.1   0.5 

Portugal

                             0.1            0.1 

Spain

                                 0.2         0.2  

France

       1.0           1.0      0.3   2.0   0.2      2.2   4.7  0.1     0.6  0.5        1.2          1.0            1.0  

Germany

       1.6           1.6         2.8         0.1   2.9        1.3        0.1  1.4          1.6            1.6  

Luxembourg

          0.9     0.2  1.1            1.3      0.4   1.7        0.1  2.7     0.1  2.9             0.9      0.2   1.1  

Other(3)

 0.3     1.2  0.2     1.1  2.8   0.3      1.1   0.2      1.4   3.0  0.3     1.0  0.1        1.4     0.3      1.2   0.2      1.1   2.8  
 0.3     3.8  13.7     1.9  19.7   0.7   0.3   6.5   3.0      5.1   15.6  0.4     3.0  10.9     0.3  14.6     0.3      3.8   13.7      1.9   19.7  
Other countries                                

UK

 27.7     3.8  15.7  194.3  37.4  278.9   44.7      9.1   13.0   191.3   42.9   301.0  28.3     3.1  15.0  204.5  38.2  289.1    27.7      3.8   15.7   194.3   37.4   278.9  

US

 1.1     1.5  1.5     0.2  4.3   6.3   0.1   8.2   2.3      0.1   17.0  1.0     1.1        0.2  2.3    1.1      1.5   1.5      0.2   4.3  

Japan(4)

 3.8     2.6           6.4   3.0      2.6   0.2      0.8   6.6  2.2     1.6           3.8    3.8      2.6            6.4  

Switzerland

                0.1  0.1   0.2      0.2         0.2   0.6                                        0.1   0.1  

Denmark

       0.2        0.5  0.7         0.1         0.4   0.5                 0.5  0.5          0.2         0.5   0.7  

Other

 0.1     1.9  0.4     1.0  3.4   0.1      2.3   0.9      1.9   5.2  0.2     0.5  0.1     0.8  1.6     0.1      1.9   0.4      1.0   3.4  
 32.7     10.0  17.6  194.3  39.2  293.8   54.3   0.1   22.5   16.4   191.3   46.3   330.9  31.7     6.3  15.1  204.5  39.7  297.3     32.7      10.0   17.6   194.3   39.2   293.8  

Total

 33.0     13.8  31.3  194.3  41.1  313.5   55.0   0.4   29.0   19.4   191.3   51.4   346.5  32.1     9.3  26.0  204.5  40.0  311.9     33.0      13.8   31.3   194.3   41.1   313.5  

 

(1)

Excludes balances with central banks.

(2)

Excludes cash at hand, interests in other entities, intangible assets, property, plant and equipment, tax assets, retirement benefit assets and other assets. Loans are included gross of credit provisions.

(3)

Includes The Netherlands of £1.2bn (2017: £1.8bn)£0.2bn (2018: £1.2bn), Belgium of £0.9bn (2017: £nil)£0.6bn (2018: £0.9bn), Greece of £nil (2017:(2018: £nil).

(4)

Mainly equity instruments listed in Japan and reverse repos with Japanese banks, held as part of our Short Term Markets business. The equity exposures are hedged using derivatives and the additional reverse repos are fully collateralised.

2018 compared to 2017:

The increase in the Ireland exposure and the decrease in the US exposure are a result of ring-fencing.

Balances with other Banco Santander companies

We deal with other Banco Santander companies in the ordinary course of business. We do this where we have a particular business advantage or expertise and where they can offer us commercial opportunities. This is done on the same terms as for similar transactions with third parties. These transactions also arise where we support the activities of, or with, larger multinational corporate clients and financial institutions which may deal with other Banco Santander companies. We also dealt with Banco Santander SA as part of implementing our ring–fencing plans as described in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.plans. We conduct these activities on the same terms as for similar transactions with third parties, and in a way that manages the credit risk within limits acceptable to the PRA.

At 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, we had gross balances with other Banco Santander companies as follows:

 

   

2018

   2017 
   

      Financial institutions      

                 Financial institutions               
   

Banks

£bn

  

Other  

£bn  

   Corporate
£bn
               Total 
£bn 
   

Banks

£bn

   

Other  

£bn  

   Corporate
£bn
               Total
£bn
 

Assets

                

Spain

  2.5   –          2.5     4.4    –          4.4 

UK

     2.0          2.0         1.3          1.3 
   2.5   2.0          4.5     4.4    1.3          5.7 

Liabilities

                       

Spain

  3.6   0.1          3.7     5.1    0.3      0.1    5.5 

UK

     11.5          11.5     0.1    7.6      0.1    7.8 

Uruguay

  0.2   –          0.2     0.1    –          0.1 

Other <£100m

     –          –         0.1          0.1 
   3.8   11.6          15.4     5.3    8.0      0.2    13.5 

We consider the dissolution of the eurozone and widespread redenomination of our euro–denominated assets and liabilities to be highly improbable. However, we have analysed the redenomination risk that might arise from an exit of a member state from the euro or a total dissolution of the euro and how that would be implemented. It is not possible to predict what the total financial impact on us might be. Determining which balances would be legally redenominated is complex and depends on a number of factors, including the precise exit scenario. This is because the effects on contracts of a disorderly exit or one sanctioned under EU law may differ. We monitor these risks and have taken steps to mitigate them.

LOGO

        2019                     2018           
   Financial institutions                 Financial institutions             
       Banks
£bn
       Other
£bn
       Corporate
£bn
           Total
£bn
             Banks
£bn
           Other
£bn
       Corporate
£bn
           Total 
£bn 
 

Assets

                 

Spain

   1.6            1.6     2.5            2.5  

UK

       2.4        2.4          2.0        2.0  
    1.6    2.4        4.0      2.5    2.0        4.5  

Liabilities

                    

Spain

   2.1    0.1        2.2     3.6    0.1        3.7  

UK

       11.2        11.2         11.5        11.5  

Uruguay

   0.2            0.2      0.2            0.2  
    2.3    11.3        13.6      3.8    11.6        15.4  

 

Santander UK plc 7391


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Credit risk – Retail Banking

 

Overview

 

Overview

  

We offer a full range of retail products and services through our branches, the internet, digital devices and over the phone, as well as through intermediaries.

 

Retail Banking – credit risk management

In this section, we explain how we manage and mitigate credit risk.

 

Retail Banking – credit risk review

In this section, we analyse our credit risk exposures and how they are performing. We also focus on forbearance and portfolios of particular interest. Our main portfolios are:

  

Residential mortgages– This is our largest portfolio. We lend to customerstocustomers of good credit quality (prime lending). Most of our mortgages are for owner-occupied homes. We also have somebuy-to-let mortgages where we focus onnon-professional landlords with small portfolios.

 

Business banking – This portfolio is comprised of small businesses with an annual turnover of up to £6.5m per annum.

Consumer (auto) finance and other unsecured lendingConsumer (auto)Consumer(auto) finance includes financing for cars, vans, motorbikes and caravans – so long as they are privately bought. Other unsecured lending includes personal loans, credit cards and bank account overdrafts.

 

Business banking– This portfolio consists of small businesses with anannual turnover of up to £6.5m.

The segmental basis of presentation in this Annual Report has been changed, and the prior periods restated, to report our Jersey and Isle of Man branchesshort term markets business in Corporate Centre rather than in Retail Banking as in previous years, as a result of their transfer from Santander UK plc to ANTS in 2018.Corporate & Investment Banking. See Note 2 for more information.

RETAIL BANKING – CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT

 

LOGO
LOGO

For more on our approach to

credit risk at a Santander UK

group level

See pages 72 to 80

In Retail Banking, our customers are individuals and small businesses. We have a high volume of customers and transactions and they share similar credit characteristics, such as their credit score or LTV. As a result, we manage our overall credit risk by looking at portfolios or groups of customers who share similar credit characteristics. Where we take this approach, we call them ‘standardised’ customers.

Exactly how we group customers into segments depends on the portfolio and the stage of the credit risk lifecycle. For example, we may segment customers at origination by their credit score. For accounts in arrears, we may segment them by how fast they improve or worsen. We regularly review each segment compared with our expectations for its performance, budget or limit.

1. Risk strategy and planning

For more on how we set our risk strategy and plans for Retail Banking, see the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk management’ section.

2. Assessment and origination

We undertake a thorough risk assessment to make sure a customer can meet their obligations before we approve a credit application. We do this mainly by looking at affordability and the customer’s credit profile:

Affordability

We take proportionate steps to make sure that the customer will be able to make all the repayments on the loan over its full term. As part of this, we assess the risk that they will not pay us back. We do this by a series of initial affordability and credit risk assessments. If the loan is secured, we assess affordability by reviewing the customer’s income and spending, their other credit commitments, and what would happen if interest rates went up. During 2018, for Unsecured Personal LoansFor unsecured personal loans and Credit Cards the affordability review was enhanced to include the stressing ofcredit cards, we stress accommodation costs on a proportionate basis.basis as part of the affordability assessment. We regularly review the way we calculate affordability and refine it when we need to. This can be due to changes in regulations, the economy or our risk profile.

Credit profile

We look at each customer’s credit profile and signs of how reliable they are at repaying credit. When they apply, we use the data they give us, and:

 

Credit policy:these are our rules and guidelines. We review them regularly to make sure our decisions are consistent and fair and align to the risk profile we want. Forwant.For secured lending, we look at the property and the LTV as well as the borrower

Credit scores:based on statistics about the factors that makereasons people fail to pay off debt. We use them to build models of what is likely to happen in the future. These modelsThesemodels give a credit score to the customer for the loan they want, to show how likely it is to be repaid. We regularly review them

Credit reference agencies:data from credit reference agencies about how the borrower has handled credit in the past

Other Santander accounts:we look at how the customer is using their other accounts with us.

 

7492 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

How we make the decision

Many of our decisions are automated as our risk systems contain data about affordability and credit history. We tailor the process and how we assess the application based on the type of product being taken. More complex transactions often need greater manual assessment. This means we have to rely more on our credit underwriters’ skill and experience in making the decision. This is particularly true for secured lending, where we might need to do more checks on the customer’s income, or get a property valuation from an approved surveyor, for example.

Credit risk mitigation

The types of credit risk mitigation, including collateral, across each of our portfolios is:

 

Portfolio Description

Residential mortgages

 

Collateral is in the form of a first legal charge over the property. Before we grant a mortgage, we have the property valued. We have our own guidelines for surveyor valuations, which build on guidance from the Royal Institution of Chartered Surveyors (RICS). But we also make use of automated valuation methodologies where our confidence in the accuracy of this method is high.

 

Business bankingUnsecured lending

 

Includes secured and unsecured lending. WeUnsecured lending means there is no collateral or security tied to the loan that can take mortgage debentures as collateralbe used to mitigate any potential loss if the business is incorporated. These are charges over a company’s assets. We can also take guarantees, but we docustomer does not treat them as collateral, and we do not put a cash value on them unless they are secured against a tangible asset. If a customer defaults, we work with them to consider debt restructuring options. We generally do not enforce our security over their assets except as a last resort. In which case we might appoint an administrator or receiver.pay us back.

 

Consumer (auto) finance

 

Collateral is in the form of legal ownership of the vehicle for most consumer (auto) finance loans, with the customer being the registered keeper. Only a very small proportion of the consumer (auto) finance business is underwritten as a personal loan. In these cases, there is no collateral or security tied to the loan. We use a leading vehicle valuation company to assess the LTV at the proposal stage.

 

Unsecured lending

 

In addition, from time to time at a portfolio level we execute significant risk transfer transactions, which typically reduce RWAs.

Unsecured lending means there is no

Business banking

Includes secured and unsecured lending. We can take mortgage debentures as collateral or security tied to the loan that can be used to mitigate any potential loss if the business is incorporated. These are charges over a company’s assets. We can also take guarantees, but we do not treat them as collateral and we do not put a cash value on them unless they are supported by a tangible asset which is charged to us. If a customer doesdefaults, we work with them to consider debt restructuring options. We generally do not pay us back.enforce our security over their assets except as a last resort. In which case we might appoint an administrator or receiver.

 

3. Monitoring

Our risk assessment does not end once we have made the decision to lend. We monitor credit risk across the credit risk lifecycle, mainly using IT systems. There are three main parts:

 

Behaviour scoring:we use statistical models that help to predict whether the customer will have problems repaying, based on data about how they use their accountstheyuse theiraccounts

Credit reference agencies:we often use data from agencies on how the borrower is handling credit from other lenders in our behaviour scoring models. We also buyalsobuy services like proprietary scorecards or account alerts, which tell us as soon as the customer does something that concerns us, such as missing a payment to another lender

Other Santander accounts: everyeach month, we also look at how the customer is usinguses their other accounts with us, so we can identify problems early.

For secured lending, our monitoring also takes account of changes in property prices. We estimate the property’s current value every three months. WeIn most cases, we use statistical models based on recent sales prices and valuations in that local area. AUse of this model is subject to Model Risk Governance. Where a lack of data can mean our confidence inmeans the model’s valuation drops below a certain minimum level, and in that caseis not available, we use the original surveyor valuation with a House Price Index (HPI) instead.adjustment as appropriate.

The way we use our monitoring to manage risk varies by product. For revolving credit facilities like credit cards and overdrafts, it might lead us to raise or lower credit limits. Our monitoring can also mean we change our minds about whether a product is still right for a customer. This can influence whether we approve a refinancing application. In these ways we can balance a customer’s needs and their ability to manage credit. If we find evidence that a customer is in financial difficulties, we contact them about arrears management including forbearance, which we explain in more detail below.

Ourday-to-day retail credit risk monitoring relies on a mix of product, customer and portfolio performance measures as described above. However, changes in the wider UK macro-economy also have an impact on our retail portfolios. To reflect this, since 2017 we have used a Retail Risk Playbook tolerance framework to enhance ourday-to-day risk monitoring. This is a formal, structured framework that sets out the macroeconomic variables that are most relevant to retail portfolio performance. We monitor these variables against the related forecasts that we have used in our business plans. If the economy deviates materially from our forecasts, we will formally review and reconsider our retail risk management policy and strategy. This framework remains in place and will continue to do so for as long as we consider isit necessary.

4. Arrears management

We have several strategies for managing arrears and these can be used before the customer has formally defaulted, or as early as the day after a missed payment. We assess the problems a customer is having, so we can offer them the right help to bring their accountup-to-date up to date as soon as possible. The most common way to bring an accountup-to-date up to date is to agree an affordable repayment plan with the customer.

The strategy we use depends on the risk and the customer’s circumstances. We have a range of tools to help customers to reach an affordable and acceptable solution. This could mean visiting the customer or offering debt counselling by a third party, or paying off the debt using money from their other accounts with us, where we have the right to do so.party.

5. Debt recovery

When a customer cannot or will not keep to an agreement for paying off their arrears, we consider recovery options. We only do this once we have tried to get the account back in order. To recover what we are owed, we may use a debt collection agency, sell the debt, or take the customer to court.

For secured retail mortgage loans, (most of which are mortgages), we can delay legal action. That can happen if the customer shows that they will be able to pay off the loan or the arrears. We aim to repossess only as a last resort or, if necessary, to protect the property from damage or third partythird-party claims.

We make sure our estimated losses from repossessed properties are realistic by getting two independent valuations on each property, as well as the estimated cost of selling it. These form the basis of our loss allowances calculations. Where we do enforce the possession of properties held as collateral, we use external agents to realise the value and settle the debt. During this process we do not own the property, but we do administer the sale process. Any surplus funds are returned to the borrower or are otherwise dealt with in accordance with insolvency regulations.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 7593


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

Loan modifications

Forbearance

If a customer lets us know they are having financial difficulty, we aim to come to an arrangement with them before they actually default. Their problems can be the result of losing their job, falling ill, a relationship breaking down, or the death of someone close to them.

Forbearance is mainly for mortgages and unsecured loans. We offer forbearance in line with our risk policies, and on acase-by-case basis to ensure we continue to lend responsibly and help customers be able to continue to afford their payments.

We may offer the following types of forbearance, but only if our assessments show the customer can meet the revised payments:

 

Action

  

Description

Capitalisation

  

We offer two main types, which are often combined with term extensions and, in the past, interest-only concessions:

–  If the customer cannot afford to increase their monthly payment enough to pay off their arrears in a reasonable time but has been making their monthly payments (usually for at least six months), then we can add the arrears to the mortgage balance.

–  We can also add to the mortgage balance at the time of forbearance unpaid property charges which are due to a landlord and which we pay on behalf of the customer to avoid the lease being forfeited.

Term extension

  

We can extend the term of the loan, making each monthly payment smaller. At a minimum, we expect the customer to pay the interest in the short-term and have a realistic chance of repaying the full balance in the long-term. We may offer this option if the customer isup-to-date up to date with their payments but showing signs of financial difficulties. For mortgages, the customer must also meet our policies for maximum loan term and age when they finish repaying (usually no more than 75).

 

Customers with interest-only mortgages have to make arrangements to repay the principal at the end of the mortgage. If customers know they will not be able to repay their mortgage in full when it ends, or if their mortgage has already passed the date when it should have ended, we talk to them, and if we think it is in the customer’s interests (and they can afford it) we look at other ways of managing it, such as term extensions.

Interest-only

  

In the past, if it was not possible or affordable for a customer to have a term extension, we may have agreed to let them pay only the interest on the loan for a short time – usually less than a year. We only agreed to this where we believed their financial problems were temporary and they were likely to recover. Since March 2015 we no longer provide this option. Instead, interest-only is only offered as a short-term standard collections arrangement. We now record any related shortfall in monthly payments as arrears and report them to the credit reference agencies. As a result, we no longer classify new interest-only arrangements agreed since March 2015 as forbearance. We continue to manage and report all interest-only arrangements offered before this date as forbearance.

 

Reduced payment arrangements

We can suspend overdraft fees and charges while the customer keeps to a plan to reduce their overdraft each month.

Other modifications

Apart from forbearance, we have sometimes changed the contract terms to keep a good relationship with a customer. These customers showed no signs of financial difficulties at the time, so we do not classify the contract changes as forbearance, and most of the loans were repaid without any problems. We do not classify insolvency solutions for any unsecured retail customers as forbearance. This is in line with industry guidelines on the treatment of customers in insolvency or bankruptcy.

Risk measurement and control

Retail Banking involves managing large numbers of accounts, so it produces a huge amount of data. This allows us to take a more analytical and data intense approach to measuring risk. This is reflected in the wide range of statistical models we use across the credit risk lifecycle. We use:

 

Risk strategy and planning:econometric models

Assessment and origination:application scorecards, and attrition, pricing, loss allowance and capital models

Monitoring:behavioural scorecards and profitability models

Arrears management:models to estimate the proportion of cases that will result in possession (known as roll rates)

Debt recovery:recovery models.

We assess and review our loss allowances regularly and have them independently reviewed. We look at a number of factors, including the cash flow available to service debt. We also use an agency to value any collateral – mainly mortgages.

 

7694 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

RETAIL BANKING – CREDIT RISK REVIEW

Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL

The following table shows changes in total on andoff-balance sheet exposures subject to ECL assessment, and the corresponding ECL in the period.year. The footnotes to the Santander UK group level table on page 7290 also apply to this table.

 

  Non-credit impaired     Credit impaired       
  

Stage 1

Subject to 12-month ECL

  

Stage 2

Subject to lifetime ECL

      

Stage 3

Subject to lifetime ECL

  Total 
  

Exposures(1)

£m

  

    ECL

£m

  

    Exposures(1)

£m

  

    ECL

£m

     

    Exposures(1)

£m

  

    ECL

£m

  

    Exposures(1)

£m

  

    ECL

£m

 
                            

At 1 January 2018

  178,978   110   10,885   247       2,263   268   192,126   625 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

     (1     (9         (8     (18

Changes to model

     (1     2          1      2 

Transfer to lifetime ECL(not-credit impaired)(3)

  (3,407  (7  3,407   7              

Transfer to credit impaired(3)

  (403  (7  (569  (22   972   29       

Transfer to12-month ECL(3)

  2,992   58   (2,992  (58             

Transfer from credit impaired(3)

  15   5   438   26       (453  (31      

Transfers of financial instruments

  (803  49   284   (47      519   (2      

Net remeasurement of ECL on stage transfer(4)

     (54     73       60      79 

New assets originated or purchased (5)

  33,366   26   670   26    15   11   34,051   63 

Other(6)

  (8,253  (15  (312  (10   97   104   (8,468  79 

Assets derecognised – closed good(7)

  (20,257  (18  (1,007  (13   (390  (23  (21,654  (54

Assets derecognised – written off(7)

                  (250  (182  (250  (182

At 31 December 2018

  183,031   96   10,520   269       2,254   229   195,805   594 

Net movement in the year

  4,053   (14  (365  22       (9  (39  3,679   (31
                                     

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

      (14      22           143       151 

Recoveries net of collection costs

                        (27      (27

Income Statement charge/(release) for the year

      (14      22           116       124 
         Stage 1        Stage 2        Stage 3      Total 
           Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
          Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
          Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
          Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
 

At 1 January 2019

   183,031   96   10,520   269   2,254   229   195,805   594 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (3,132  (8  3,132   8             

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   3,289   69   (3,289  (69            

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   (322  (2  (500  (20  822   22       

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

   11   1   509   23   (520  (24      

Transfers of financial instruments

   (154  60   (148  (58  302   (2      

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (61     76      63      78 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      (3     (24     (9     (36

Changes to model

                  13      13 

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   37,230   23   479   27   14   9   37,723   59 

Other(6)

   2,670   6   68   (2  128   162   2,866   166 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (27,924  (23  (1,265  (20  (449  (34  (29,638  (77

Assets written off(7)

   (1     (1     (275  (206  (277  (206

At 31 December 2019

   194,852   98   9,653   268   1,974   225   206,479   591 

Net movement in the year

   11,821   2   (867  (1  (280  (4  10,674   (3
         

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       2       (1      202       203 

Less: ECL relating to derecognised income

            (9   (9

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

       (2             (32      (34

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

              (1      161       160 

    

         
  2018                         

At 1 January 2018

   178,978   110   10,885   247   2,263   268   192,126   625 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (3,407  (7  3,407   7             

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1(3)

   2,992   58   (2,992  (58            

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   (403  (7  (569  (22  972   29       

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

   15   5   438   26   (453  (31      

Transfers of financial instruments

   (803  49   284   (47  519   (2      

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (54     73      60      79 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      (1     (9     (8     (18

Changes to model

      (1     2      1      2 

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   33,366   26   670   26   15   11   34,051   63 

Other(6)

   (27  (19  (125  (14  143   100   (9  67 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (28,483  (14  (1,194  (9  (436  (19  (30,113  (42

Assets written off(7)

               (250  (182  (250  (182

At 31 December 2018

   183,031   96   10,520   269   2,254   229   195,805   594 

Net movement in the year

   4,053   (14  (365  22   (9  (39  3,679   (31
                                  

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

    (14   22    143    151 

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                     (27      (27

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (14      22       116       124 

(1)

Exposures that have attracted an ECL, and as reported in the Credit Quality table above.

(2)

Changes to assumptions from the start of the year to the end of the year. Includes changes to the economic variables for each scenario, changes to the scenarios themselves as well as changes in the probability weightings. Also includes changes in risk parameters and model changes.

(3)

Total impact of facilities that moved stage(s) in the year. This means, for example, that where risk parameter changes (model inputs) or model changes (methodology) result in a facility moving stage, the full impact is reflected here (rather than in Other). Stage flow analysis only applies to facilities that existed at both the start and end of the year. Transfers from each stage are based on opening balances, and transfers in are based on closing balances, giving rise to a net movement on transfer.

(4)

Relates to the revaluation of ECL following the transfer of an exposure from one stage to another.

(5)

Exposures and ECL at reporting date of facilities that did not exist at the start of the year, but did at the end. Amounts in Stage 2 and 3 represent assets which have deteriorated during the year subsequent to origination in Stage 1.

(6)

Residual movements on facilities that did not change stage in the year, and which were neither acquired nor purchased in the year.

(7)

Exposures and ECL for facilities that existed at the start of the year, but not at the end.

Santander UK plc95


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGES

We offer mortgages to people who want to buy a property and offer additional borrowing (known as further advances) to existing mortgage customers. The property must be in the UK.

20182019 compared to 20172018 (unaudited)

Credit risk is at very low levels historically. The benign credit environment has supported our customers and helped to reduce credit risk. From our experience we know that unemployment is one of the most important factors in defaults on mortgages, our biggest loan book. Whilst the UK market continues to show resilience, we are cautious on the outlook in light of recent economic uncertainty. Mortgage lending increased £3.3bn£7.4bn net mortgage growth in 2018 (2017: £0.6bn), through2019 (2018: £3.3bn) was our strongest for a combination of well positioned service and product pricing, as well as our ongoingdecade, with a focus on pricing, customer retention. Mortgage gross lending was £28.8bn (2017: £25.5bn)retention and 78% of mortgages reaching the end of their incentive period were retained.service.

Borrower profile

In this table, ‘home movers’ include both existing customers moving house and taking out a new mortgage with us, and customers who switch their mortgage to us when they move house. ‘Remortgagers’ are externalnew customers who are remortgagingtaking a new mortgage with us.

 

 Stock New business   Stock   New business 
 2018 2017 2018 2017    2019         2018         2019         2018 
 £m      £m     % £m      £m     %  £m   %       £m   %     £m   %       £m   % 

Home movers

 69,198      44    68,752      44  10,854      39    10,704      44    70,860    43      69,198    44     11,192    38      10,854    39 

Remortgagers

 51,272      32    50,424      33  9,237      34    8,065      33    52,480    32      51,272    32     9,197    31      9,237    34 

First-time buyers

 29,235      19    28,704      19  4,848      18    4,034      17    32,112    19      29,235    19     6,952    23      4,848    18 

Buy-to-let

 8,252         6,802      4  2,335         1,371      6    9,904    6       8,252    5     2,473    8       2,335    9 
         157,957              100            154,682              100          27,274              100            24,174              100              165,356              100                 157,957              100               29,814              100                 27,274              100 

In addition toAs well as the new business included in the table above, there were £27.2bn (2017: £26.0bn)£31.6bn (2018: £27.2bn) of internal remortgages where we keptmoved existing customers with maturing products ononto new mortgages. We also provided £1.5bn (2017: £1.3bn)£1.3bn (2018: £1.5bn) of further advances and flexible mortgage drawdowns.

20182019 compared to 20172018 (unaudited)

The mortgage borrower mixprofile of stock remained broadly unchanged, reflecting underlying stabilityunchanged. The change in target market segments,borrower profile of new business reflected product pricinginitiatives designed to help first-time buyers and distribution strategy. Wechanges to credit policy in 2019 to increase the maximum loan term from 35 to 40 years. In 2019, we helped 27,200 (2017: 24,000) first-time buyers purchase their new home with £4.8bn£7.0bn of gross lending (2017: £4.0bn)(2018: £4.8bn).

LOGO

Santander UK plc77


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Interest rate profile

The interest rate profile of our mortgage asset stock was:

 

     2018        2017 
     £m     %          £m     %   

Fixed rate

     115,178      73         102,036      66   

Variable rate

     24,396      15         29,370      19   

Standard Variable Rate (SVR)

     18,383      12            23,276      15   
      157,957      100            154,682      100   

 

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

The SVR balances, which includes balances relating to our Follow-on-Rate product, declined by £4.9bn (2017: £5.5bn). We continue to see increased customer refinancing into fixed rate products influenced by low mortgage rates and the competitive mortgage market.

 

Geographical distribution

The geographical distribution of our mortgage asset stock was:

 

 

 

 

 

     Stock        New business 
     2018     2017         2018     2017  
  UK region    £bn     £bn         £bn     £bn  

London

     39.0      37.6        7.1      5.8  

Midlands and East Anglia

     21.1      20.6        3.8      3.4  

North

     22.2      22.2        3.4      3.0  

Northern Ireland

     3.4      3.6        0.2      0.2  

Scotland

     6.7      6.8        1.0      1.0  

South East excluding London

     48.7      47.2        9.0      8.2  

South West, Wales and other

     16.9      16.7           2.8      2.6  
     158.0      154.7        27.3      24.2  
  Average loan size for new business                   £’000     £’000  

South East including London

              270      260  

Rest of the UK

              150      146  

UK as a whole

                       203      196  

 

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

The geographical distribution of the portfolio continued to represent a broad footprint across the UK, whilst maintaining a concentration around London and the South East, in line with the distribution of the population across the UK. Theloan-to-income multiple of mortgage lending during the year, representing average earnings of new business at inception, was 3.24 (2017: 3.16).

 

Larger loans

The mortgage asset stock of larger loans was:

 

 

 

 

 

     South East including London           UK 
  Individual mortgage loan size    2018  £m      

2017 

£m 

        2018 
£m 
     2017 
£m 
 

<£0.25m

     45,851       46,766        105,181       106,838  

£0.25m to £0.50m

     30,488       27,562        39,841       36,036  

£0.50m to £1.0m

     10,103       9,214        11,551       10,532  

£1.0m to £2.0m

     1,168       1,046        1,236       1,111  

>£2.0m

     146       163           148       165  
      87,756       84,751           157,957       154,682  
     2019        2018 
  £m   %       £m   % 

Fixed rate

   128,798    78     115,178    73 

Variable rate

   22,116    13     24,396    15 

Standard Variable Rate (SVR)

   14,442    9        18,383    12 
              165,356              100                  157,957              100 

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In 2019, we continued to see customer refinancing from SVR products into fixed rate products influenced by low mortgage rates and the competitive mortgage market.

Geographical distribution

The geographical distribution of our mortgage asset stock was:

 Region

  Stock      New business 
  

2019

£bn

   

2018

£bn

       

2019

£bn

   

2018

£bn

 

London

   41.4    39.0     7.5    7.1 

Midlands and East Anglia

   22.1    21.1     4.3    3.8 

North

   22.7    22.2     3.8    3.4 

Northern Ireland

   3.3    3.4     0.3    0.2 

Scotland

   6.8    6.7     1.2    1.0 

South East excluding London

   51.7    48.7     9.7    9.0 

South West, Wales and other

   17.4    16.9        3.0    2.8 
              165.4              158.0                  29.8              27.3 
         
 Average loan size for new business             £’000   £’000 

South East including London

        277    270 

Rest of the UK

        154    150 

UK as a whole

                 207    203 

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

The geographical distribution of the portfolio continued to represent a broad footprint across the UK, whilst maintaining a concentration around London and the South East. Theloan-to-income multiple of mortgage lending during the year, representing average earnings of new business at inception, was 3.27 (2018: 3.24).

96Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Larger loans

The mortgage asset stock of larger loans was:

 Individual mortgage loan size

  South East including London      UK 
  

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

      

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

<£0.25m

   45,828    45,851         105,855    105,181 

£0.25m to £0.50m

   34,027    30,488     44,549    39,841 

£0.50m to £1.0m

   11,471    10,103     13,114    11,551 

£1.0m to £2.0m

   1,538    1,168     1,644    1,236 

>£2.0m

   186    146        194    148 
              93,050              87,756                  165,356              157,957 

At 31 December 2018,2019, there were 57 (2017: 64)76 (2018: 57) individual mortgages greater thanover £2.0m. In 2018,2019, there were 9 (2017: 13)32 (2018: 9) new mortgages over £2.0m.

Loan-to-value analysis

This table shows the LTV distribution for the gross carrying amount and the related ECL of our total mortgage portfolio and Stage 3 mortgages, as well as the LTV distribution for new business. We also show the collateral value and simple average LTV for our mortgage stock, NPLStage 3 stock and new business. We use our estimate of the property value at the balance sheet date. We include fees that have been added to the loan in the LTV calculation. For flexible products, we only include the drawn amount, not undrawn limits.

 

    2018       2017
          Of which:                     Of which:        
    Stock     NPL stock    New business        Stock     NPL stock    New business 
LTV    %     %           %     %      2019      2018 

LTV

Stock   Stage 3   New      Stock   Stage 3   New 

Total

£m

   

ECL

£m

   Total
£m
   

ECL

£m

   business
£m
     

Total

£m

   ECL
£m
   Total
£m
   

ECL

£m

   business
£m
 
     45     43    20       49     44    19    70,714    24    743    11    5,113     72,613    25    872    11    5,124 

>50-75%

     41     35    41       39     34    43    67,311    65    626    24    11,876     63,505    67    698    24    11,512 

>75-85%

     9     8    22       7     8    19 

>75- 85%

   17,436    31    136    13    6,130     14,191    32    156    13    5,955 

>85-100%

     4     7    17       4     7    19    9,011    34    110    17    6,650     6,508    36    125    16    4,648 

>100%

     1     7    –        1     7    –    884    64    107    38    45      1,140    77    131    42    35 
     100     100    100        100     100    100    165,356            218        1,722            103            29,814          157,957        237        1,982            106        27,274 

Collateral value of residential properties(1)

    £157,787m     £1,850m    £27,274m       £154,459m     £1,823m    £24,174m    165,229      1,702      29,813     157,787      1,850      27,274 
                                              
    %     %           %     %    
  %       %       %     %       %       % 

Simple average(2) LTV (indexed)

     42     43    63        42     44    62    43       42       65      42       43       63 

Valuation weighted average(3) LTV (indexed)

     39     38    59        38     38    58 

 

(1)

Collateral value shown is limited to the balance of each associatedrelated loan. Excludes the impact of over-collateralisation (where the collateral is higher than the loan balance)loan). Includes collateral against loans in negative equity of £969m (2017: £1,248m)£757m (2018: £969m).

(2)

Total of all LTV% divided by the total of all accounts.

(3)

Total of all loan values divided by the total of all valuations.

At 31 December 2018,2019, the parts of loans in negative equity which were effectively uncollateralised before deducting loss allowances reduced to £170m (2017: £223m)£127m (2018: £170m).

In 2019, the simple average LTV of mortgage total new lending in London was 61% (2018: 58%).

 

78Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk97


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

Credit performance

 

                            

2018

£m

  

2017  

£m  

 

Mortgage loans and advances to customers of which:

 

                       157,957           154,682   

– Stage 1

                   146,619  

– Stage 2

                   9,356  

– Stage 3

                   1,982  

Performing(1)

                    151,688   

Early arrears:

                    1,126   

– 31 to 60 days

                    700   

– 61 to 90 days

                                    426   

NPLs:(2)

                   1,907   1,868   

– By arrears

                   1,392   1,427   

– By bankruptcy

                   18   14   

– By maturity default

                   392   303   

– By forbearance

                   80   95   

– By properties in possession (PIPs)

                                25   29   

Loss allowances(3)

                                234   225   

Stage 2 ratio

                   5.92%  

Stage 3 ratio

                   1.25%  

Early arrears ratio(4)

                    0.73%   

NPL ratio(5)

                                                                                            1.21%   1.21%   
   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

Mortgage loans and advances to customers of which:

               165,356                157,957 

– Stage 1

   155,477    146,619 

– Stage 2

   8,157    9,356 

– Stage 3

   1,722    1,982 

Loss allowances(3)

   218    234 
    
   %   % 

Stage 1 ratio(1)

   94.03    92.82 

Stage 2 ratio(1)

   4.93    5.92 

Stage 3 ratio(2)

   1.05    1.27 

 

(1)

Excludes mortgages where theStage 1/Stage 2 exposures as a percentage of customer did not pay for between 31 and 90 days, arrears, bankruptcy, maturity default, forbearance and PIPs NPLs. Includes £2,661m of mortgages at 31 December 2017 where the customer did not pay for 30 days or less.loans.

(2)

We define NPLsTotal Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of customer loans plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. The way we calculate the Stage 3 ratio was changed from 1 January 2019, and 2018 restated for consistency. See ‘Key metrics’ in the ‘Credit risk management’– Santander UK group level’ section. All NPLs are in the UK and continue accruing interest. Our Stage 3 exposures under IFRS 9 and NPLs are subject to different criteria. These criteria are under review in parallel with the ongoing regulatory changes to the default definition.

(3)

Loss allowances for 2017 were on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on anThe ECL basis per IFRS 9. The loss allowance is for both on andoff-balance off–balance sheet exposures.

(4)

Mortgages in early arrears as a percentage of mortgages.

(5)

Mortgage NPLs as a percentage of mortgages.

Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL

The following table shows changes in total on andoff-balance sheet exposures subject to ECL assessment, and the corresponding ECL, for residential mortgages in the period.year. The footnotes to the Santander UK group level analysis on page 7290 are also applicable to this table.

 

  Non-credit impaired     Credit impaired       
  Stage 1
Subject to 12-month ECL
  

 

  

Stage 2
Subject to lifetime ECL

     

Stage 3

Subject to lifetime ECL

    
  Mortgages 

Exposures(1)

£m

  

ECL

£m

     

Exposures(1) 

£m 

  ECL 
£m 
     

Exposures(1)

£m

  ECL 
£m 
  Exposures(1)
£m
  

ECL

  £m

 

At 1 January 2018

  155,155   20       9,884   131       2,004   121   167,043           272 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

     (6         (7         (8     (21

Changes to model

               2          2      4 

Transfer to lifetime ECL(not-credit impaired)(3)

  (2,941  (1   2,941   1              

Transfer to credit impaired(3)

  (329  (6   (512  (12   841   18       

Transfer to12-month ECL(3)

  2,628   21    (2,628  (21             

Transfer from credit impaired(3)

  4          405   14       (409  (14      

Transfers of financial instruments

  (638  14       206   (18      432   4       

Net remeasurement of ECL on stage transfer(4)

     (20      20       14      14 

New assets originated or purchased (5)

  28,330   2    446   5    3   1   28,779   8 

Other(6)

  (7,327  6    (244  (4   (36  3   (7,607  5 

Assets derecognised – closed good(7)

  (17,781  (4   (860  (10   (327  (13  (18,968  (27

Assets derecognised – written off(7)

                      (77  (18  (77  (18

At 31 December 2018

  157,739   12       9,432   119       1,999   106   169,170   237 

Net movement in the year

  2,584   (8      (452  (12      (5  (15  2,127   (35
                                         

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

      (8          (12          3       (17

Recoveries net of collection costs

                            (4      (4

Income Statement charge/(release) for the year

      (8          (12          (1      (21

LOGO

  Mortgages

  Stage 1       Stage 2       Stage 3            
  

Exposures(1)

£m

  ECL
£m
      

Exposures(1)

£m

  ECL
£m
      

Exposures(1)

£m

  ECL
£m
      

Exposures(1)

£m

  ECL
£m
 

At 1 January 2019

         157,739         12              9,432         119              1,999         106            169,170         237 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (2,345  (1    2,345   1                 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   2,921   24     (2,921  (24                

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   (231       (429  (8    660   8         

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

   5   (1       485   16        (490  (15           

Transfers of financial instruments

   350   22        (520  (15       170   (7           

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (23       16        12        5 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      (5       (22       (9       (36

Changes to model

                      13        13 

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   31,090   5     198   3     2        31,290   8 

Other(6)

   2,090   4     153   6     31   14     2,274   24 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (22,439  (1    (1,039  (6    (396  (12    (23,874  (19

Assets written off(7)

                         (72  (14       (72  (14

At 31 December 2019

   168,830   14        8,224   101        1,734   103        178,788   218 

Net movement in the year

   11,091   2        (1,208  (18       (265  (3       9,618   (19
                                                 

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       2            (17           11            (4

Less: ECL relating to derecognised income

                (2     (2

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                               (2           (2

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       2            (17           7            (8
               
  2018                                     

At 1 January 2018

   155,155   20        9,884   131        2,004   121        167,043   272 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (2,941  (1    2,941   1                 

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   (329  (6    (512  (12    841   18         

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   2,628   21     (2,628  (21                

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

   4           405   14        (409  (14           

Transfers of financial instruments

   (638  14        206   (18       432   4            

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (20       20        14        14 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      (6       (7       (8       (21

Changes to model

              2        2        4 

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   28,330   2     446   5     3   1     28,779   8 

Other(6)

   (249  6     (81  (5    (5  1     (335  2 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (24,859  (4    (1,023  (9    (358  (11    (26,240  (24

Assets written off(7)

                         (77  (18       (77  (18

At 31 December 2018

   157,739   12        9,432   119        1,999   106        169,170   237 

Net movement in the year

   2,584   (8       (452  (12       (5  (15       2,127   (35
                                                 

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

    (8     (12     3      (17

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                               (4           (4

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (8           (12           (1           (21

 

98Santander UK plc79


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

Loan modifications

The following tables provide information ontable sets out the financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL.

 

      £m 
   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

Financial assets modified in the year:

    

– Amortised cost before modification

               384                207 

– Net modification loss

   7    3 

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

    

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12m ECL in the year

   89    158 

Financial assets modified during the period:

– Amortised cost before modification

207 

– Net modification loss

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the ECL allowance has changed to12-month measurement during the year

158 

Forbearance(1)

The balances at 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, analysed by their staging (2017: payment status) at theyear-end and the forbearance we applied, were:

 

2019  Capitalisation
£m
   Term
extension
£m
   Interest-
only £m
   Concessionary
interest rate
£m
   Total £m   Loss
allowance
£m
 

Stage 2

   405    338    342    1    1,086    12 

Stage 3

   197    91    97    10    395    24 
   602    429    439    11    1,481    36 

Proportion of portfolio

           0.4%            0.3%            0.3%            0.0%            0.9%   
            
    

Capitalisation

   Term extension     Interest-only     Total   Loss allowance  
2018    £m   £m     £m     £m   £m                          

Stage 2

     375    161      389      925        375    161    389        925    9 

Stage 3

     212    95      113      420    20     212    95    113        420    20 
     587    256      502              1,345    29     587    256    502        1,345    29 

Proportion of portfolio

     0.4%    0.2%      0.3%      0.9%       0.4%    0.2%    0.3%    0.0%    0.9%   
                
2017                          

In arrears

     260    63      175      498    22  

Performing

     392    178      407      977     
     652    241      582      1,475    27  

Proportion of portfolio

     0.4%    0.2%      0.4%      1.0%    

 

(1)

We base forbearance type on the first forbearance on the accounts.

20182019 compared to 20172018 (unaudited)

In 2018,2019, the accounts in forbearance decreased, with theincreased due to a new term extension forbearance solution we introduced in August 2018 that is applied to interest-only past maturity customers. The proportion of the mortgage portfolio in forbearance reducing slightly toremained flat at 0.9% (2017: 1.0%(2018: 0.9%).

 

At 31 December 2018,2019, the proportion of accounts in forbearance for more than six months that had made their last six months’ contractual payments increased slightly to 81% (2018: 79% (2017: 78%).

The weighted average LTV of all accounts in forbearance was 35% (2017:(2018: 35%) compared to the weighted average portfolio LTV of 39% (2017: 38%(2018: 39%).

At 31 December 2018,2019, the carrying value of mortgages classified as multiple forbearance increased slightly to £126m (2017: £123m).£137m (2018: £126m)

Other loan modifications

At 31 December 2018,2019, there were £4.5bn (2017: £4.7bn)(2018: £4.5bn) of other mortgages on the balance sheet that we had modified since January 2008. At 31 December 2018:2019:

 

The average LTV was 32% (2017: 33%(2018: 32%) and 95% (2017:96% (2018: 95%) of accounts had made their last six months’ contractual payments

The proportion of accounts that were 90 days or more in arrears was 1.30% (2018: 1.50% (2017: 1.52%).

 

80Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk99


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

RESIDENTIAL MORTGAGES – PORTFOLIOS OF PARTICULAR INTEREST

Introduction(unaudited)

We are mainly a residential prime lender and we do not originatesub-prime or second charge mortgages. Despite that, some types of mortgages have higher risks and others stand out for different reasons. These are:

 

   Product Description

Interest-only loans and part interest-only, part repayment loans

 

With an interest-only mortgage, the customer pays interest every month but does not repay the money borrowed (the principal)principal until the end of the mortgage. Some mortgages have a part that is interest-only, with the rest being a normal repayment mortgage. Customers with part interest-only, part repayment mortgages still have to pay back a lump sum at the end of their mortgage for the interest-only part. This means there is a higher credit risk on these loans as we depend on the customers to pay back a lump sum. We design new account LTV maximums to mitigate this credit risk. We also make sure the customer has a plausible repayment plan before we lend to them and remains on track for the life of the loan.

Since 2009, we have reduced the risk from new interest-only mortgages by lowering the maximum LTV (itLTV. It has been 50% since 2012).2012. When a customer plans to repay their mortgage by selling the property, we now only allow that if they own more than a set proportion of the equity.

Customers with interest-only mortgages have to make arrangements to repay the principal at the end of the mortgage. We have a strategy to make sure that we tell these customers that they have to do this. We send them messages with their annual mortgage statements, and we run contact campaigns to encourage them to tell us how they plan to repay.

In 2013, we contacted all our customers whose mortgages were due to mature before 2020. Since 2016, we have extended these campaigns to periodically contact all interest-only customers. We increase our contact frequency as customers approach term maturity. Outside of sending out annual mortgage statements, we contact more than 100,000 interest-only customers per year.

If customers know they will not be able to repay their mortgage in full when it ends, or if their mortgage has already passed the date when it should have ended, we talk to them. If we think it is in the customer’s interests (andand they can afford it),it, we look at other ways of managing it. That can mean turning the mortgage into a standard repayment one and extending it. Or, if the customer is waiting for their means of repaying it, (suchsuch as an investment plan or bonds)bonds, to mature, it can just mean extending it.

Flexible loans

 

Flexible mortgages allow customers to pay more or less than their usual amount each month, or even to take ‘payment holidays’ when they pay nothing at all. Customers do not have to take (oror draw down)down the whole loan all at once – so if they took out a mortgage big enough to allow them to build a home extension after three years, they do not have to start paying interest on that extra money until they are ready to spend it. There are conditions on when and how much customers can draw down:

–  There are often limits on how much can be drawn down in any month

–  The customer cannot be in payment arrears

–  The customer cannot have insolvency problems, such as a county court judgement, bankruptcy, an individual voluntary arrangement, an administration order or a debt relief order.

A customer can ask us to increase their credit limit, but that means we will go through our full standard credit approval process. We can also lower the customer’s credit limit at any time, so it never goes above 90% of the property’s current market value.

We no longer offer flexible loan products for new mortgages.

This is an area of interest in order to identify customers who might be using these facilities to self-forbear, such as regularly drawing down small amounts. If there is any sign that the credit risk has significantly increased, we reflect this in our provision calculations.

Loans with an LTV >100%

 

Where the mortgage balance is more than the property is now worth, we cannot recover the full value of the loan by repossessing and selling the property. This means there is a higher credit risk on these loans. In some cases, property prices have fallen, so mortgages we gave in the past with lower LTVs now have LTVs greater than 100%. Before 2009, we sometimes allowed customers to borrow more than the price of the property.

We monitor existing accounts with LTVs >100% as part of our assessment of ongoing portfolio performance. We design new account LTV maximums to mitigate an increase in the volume of accounts with an LTV >100%.

Buy-to-Let (BTL) loans

 

In recent years, we have refined our BTL proposition to appeal to a wider catchment, and we have improved our systems to cater for this segment with a particular focus onnon-professional landlords. We have prudent lending criteria, and specific policies for BTL. We only lend to a maximum 75% LTV. The first applicant must earn a minimum income of £25,000 per year, and we require evidence of income in all cases. We also use a BTL affordability rate as part of our assessment about whether or not to lend. This means that the rental income must cover the monthly mortgage interest payments by a prescribed amount when calculated using a stressed interest rate. We regularly review the prescribed amount and adjust it as needed.

 

 

LOGO

100Santander UK plc81


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

Credit performance

 

       Portfolio of particular interest(1)     
 2018  

Total

£m

   

Interest-only

£m

   

Part interest-

only, part

repayment(2) (3)

£m

   

Flexible(3)

£m

   

LTV >100%

£m

   

Buy-to-let

£m

   

Other 

portfolio 

£m 

 

Mortgage portfolio

         157,957    38,035    13,201    12,926    1,140    8,252    101,158  

– Stage 1

   146,619    33,001    11,824    11,558    740    7,906    96,767  

– Stage 2

   9,356    4,029    1,115    1,082    273    317    3,802  

– Stage 3

   1,982    1,005    262    286    127    29    589  

Stage 3 ratio

   1.25%    2.64%    1.98%    2.21%    11.14%    0.35%    0.58%  

PIPs

   25    12    5    3    8         
              

 

 2017

 

                            

Mortgage portfolio

   154,682    38,885    13,785    14,785    1,471    6,802    95,535  

Performing

   151,688    37,497    13,372    14,438    1,302    6,768    94,530  

Early arrears:

              

– 31 to 60 days

   700    317    93    67    22    9    295  

– 61 to 90 days

   426    203    57    35    15    4    167  

NPLs

   1,868    868    263    245    132    21    543  

NPL ratio

   1.21%    2.23%    1.91%    1.66%    8.97%    0.31%    0.57%  

PIPs

   29    17    5    3    10    1     

 

(1)  Where a loan falls into more than one category, we have included it in all the categories that apply. As a result, the sum of the mortgages in the segments of particular interest and the other portfolio does not agree to the total mortgage portfolio.

(2)  Mortgage balance includes both the interest-only part of £9,756m (2017: £10,116m) and thenon-interest-only part of the loan.

(3)  Includes legacy Alliance & Leicester flexible loans that work in a more limited way than our current Flexi loan product.

 

2018 compared to 2017(unaudited)

– In 2018, the value and proportion of interest-only loans together with part interest-only, part repayment and flexible loans reduced, reflecting our strategy to manage down the overall exposure to these lending profiles.

– Buy-to-Let (BTL) mortgage balances increased £1.5bn to £8.3bn (2017: £6.8bn). We continue to focus our BTL book onnon-professional landlords, as this segment is closely aligned with mortgages and accounts for the majority of the volume in the BTL market. In 2018, we completed 11,400 BTL mortgages (2017: 7,500), representing 9% of the value of our new business flow (2017: 6%), at an average LTV of 62% (2017: 61%).

 

Interest-only sub analysis(unaudited)

Full interest-only new business in the year

 

   

   

   

 

  

  

 

 

                       2018   2017  
                       £m   £m  

Full interest-only loans

                            3,810    2,698  

Full interest-only maturity profile

 

 

    
       Term
expired
   Within
2 years
   Between
2-5 years
   Between
5-15 years
   Greater than
15 years
   Total  
 2018      £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m  

Full interest-only portfolio

     541    1,346    3,761    21,711    10,676    38,035  

of which value weighted average LTV (indexed) is >75%

        43    110    265    2,029    642    3,089  
              
 2017         

Full interest-only portfolio

     508    1,586    3,508    21,795    11,488    38,885  

of which value weighted average LTV (indexed) is >75%

        47    147    255    2,318    948    3,715  

 

2018 compared to 2017(unaudited)

For full interest-only mortgages, of the total £541m that was term expired at 31 December 2018, 89% continued to pay the interest due under the expired contract terms. Interest-only mortgages that matured in 2018 totalled £830m, of which: £418m was subsequently repaid, £5m was refinanced under normal credit terms, £73m was refinanced under forbearance arrangements and £334m remained unpaid and was classified as term expired at 31 December 2018.

 

At 31 December 2018, there were 84,773 (2017: 93,779) flexible mortgage customers, with undrawn facilities of £6,000m (2017: £6,192m). The portfolio’s value weighted LTV (indexed) was 28% (2017: 28%).

 

Forbearance(1)

The balances at 31 December 2018 and 2017 were:

 

 

 

 

 

 

               Interest-only(2)   Flexible   LTV >100%   Buy-to-Let 
               £m   £m   £m   £m 

 

2018

         229    32    10    9 

 

– Stage 2

         136    18    3    6 

 

– Stage 3

         93    14    7    3 

2017

                  208    34    13    8 
       Portfolio of particular interest(1)     
  2019  

Total

£m

   Interest-only
£m
   Part interest-
only, part
repayment(2) (3)
£m
   Flexible(3)
£m
   LTV >100%
£m
   Buy-to-let
£m
   

Other
portfolio

£m

 

Mortgage portfolio

           165,356            38,062            13,247            11,273            884            9,904            109,234 

– Stage 1

   155,477    33,739    12,112    10,183    594    9,593    105,114 

– Stage 2

   8,157    3,502    888    873    183    285    3,526 

– Stage 3

   1,722    821    247    217    107    26    594 

Stage 3 ratio(4)

   1.05%    2.17%    1.87%    2.03%    12.11%    0.26%    0.54% 

PIPs

   32    14    9    2    13    1    8 

Simple average LTV (indexed)

   43%    45%    45%    28%    117%    60%    44% 
              
  2018                            

Mortgage portfolio

   157,957    38,035    13,201    12,926    1,140    8,252    101,158 

– Stage 1

   146,619    33,001    11,824    11,558    740    7,906    96,767 

– Stage 2

   9,356    4,029    1,115    1,082    273    317    3,802 

– Stage 3

   1,982    1,005    262    286    127    29    589 

Stage 3 ratio(4)

   1.27%    2.67%    1.99%    2.34%    11.18%    0.35%    0.58% 

PIPs

   25    12    5    3    8        7 

Simple average LTV (indexed)

   42%    44%    44%    29%    118%    58%    43% 

(1)

Where a loan falls into more than one category, we include it in all the categories that apply. As a result, the sum of the mortgages in the segments of particular interest and the other portfolio does not agree to the total mortgage portfolio.

(2)

Mortgage balance includes both the interest-only part of £9,823m (2018: £9,756m) and thenon-interest-only part of the loan.

(3)

Includes legacy Alliance & Leicester flexible loans that work in a more limited way than our current Flexi loan product.

(4)

Total Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of customer loans plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. The way we calculate the Stage 3 ratio was changed from 1 January 2019, and 2018 restated for consistency. See ‘Key metrics’ in the ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’ section.

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In 2019, the proportion of interest-only loans together with part interest-only, part repayment and flexible loans reduced, reflecting our strategy to manage down the overall exposure to these lending profiles.

BTL mortgage balances increased £1.6bn to £9.9bn (2018: £8.3bn) driven by continued focus in growing this portfolio. In 2019, the simple average LTV of mortgage total new lending in the form of BTL was 64% (2018: 62%).

Interest-only sub analysis(unaudited)

Full interest-only new business in the year

   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

Full interest-only loans

           4,000            3,810 

Full interest-only maturity profile

 2019  Term
expired
£m
   Within
2 years
£m
   Between
2-5 years
£m
   Between
5-15 years
£m
   

Greater than
15 years

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Full interest-only portfolio

           338            1,541            3,706            20,984            11,493            38,062 

– of which value weighted average LTV (indexed) is > 75%

   11    111    219    1,793    1,051    3,185 
            
 2018                        

Full interest-only portfolio

   541    1,346    3,761    21,711    10,676    38,035 

– of which value weighted average LTV (indexed) is > 75%

   43    110    265    2,029    642    3,089 

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

For full interest-only mortgages, of the total £338m that was term expired at 31 December 2019, 84% continued to pay the interest due under the expired contract terms. Interest-only mortgages that matured in 2019 totalled £731m, of which: £314m was subsequently repaid, £5m was refinanced under normal credit terms, £213m was refinanced under forbearance arrangements and £199m remained unpaid and was classified as term expired at 31 December 2019.

At 31 December 2019, there were 76,767 (2018: 84,773) flexible mortgage customers, with undrawn facilities of £5,841m (2018: £6,000m). The portfolio’s value weighted LTV (indexed) was 27% (2018: 28%).

Forbearance(1)

The balances at 31 December 2019 and 2018 were:

 2019  Interest-only(2)
£m
               Flexible
£m
           LTV >100%
£m
           Buy-to-Let
£m
 

Total

   392    73    17    10 

– Stage 2

   285    56    8    8 

– Stage 3

   107    17    9    2 
        
 2018                

Total

   229    32    10    9 

– Stage 2

   136    18    3    6 

– Stage 3

   93    14    7    3 

 

(1)

Where a loan falls into more than one category, we have included it in all the categories that apply.

(2)

Comprises full interest-only loans and part interest-only, part repayment loans.

 

82Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk101


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

CONSUMER (AUTO) FINANCE AND OTHER UNSECURED LENDING

Consumer (auto) finance

Retail Banking provides auto finance through Santander Consumer (UK) plc (SCUK). SCUK provides a range of wholesale finance facilities (stock finance) and retail products designed for the purchase of new and used personal, business and commercial vehicles, motorcycles, bicycles and caravans through an extensive network of motor dealers and manufacturer partners. SCUK’s products are mainly distributed through intermediary introducers at the point of sale, and through partnerships with selected car and motorcycle manufacturers. At 31 December 2018,2019, the business operated with 1314 Original Equipment Manufacturer partners which includes two joint venture arrangements.

Through SCUK’s Hyundai Capital UK Ltd (HCUK) and PSA Finance UK Ltd (PSAF) joint ventures, we provide retail point of sale customer finance as well as wholesale finance facilities (Stock Finance)(stock finance) for Hyundai and Kia, managed by HCUK, as well as Peugeot, Citroën and DS, managed by PSAF. SCUK holds a 50% share in each of these joint ventures. However, due to the varying structures of the joint ventures, we equity account for HCUK and consolidate PSAF.

Residual Value (RV) risk remains the top risk for SCUK. We monitor the RV portfolio on a monthly basis, and we use key risk triggers to identify any material change in trends. We have a conservative approach to setting RV amounts and maintain a prudent provisioning policy to mitigate potential losses on disposal of the asset. We use a leading independent vehicle valuation company to assess the estimated future value of the asset, prior to inception and periodically throughout the life of the agreement.

Other unsecured lending

Retail Banking also provides other unsecured lending, which includes:

 

Personal loans: we offer personal loans for most purposes, such as debt consolidation, home improvement, and to support significant life events such as weddings

Credit cards: we offer a wide range of credit cards designed to suit a variety of customers, including balance transfer cards and cards that offer rewards

Overdrafts: we also offer arranged overdrafts for customers who have a bank account with us. We evaluate our customers’ circumstances to decide how much they can borrow. In other cases, a customer may have overdrawn their bank account without arranging it with us first.

For both Consumer (auto) finance and Other unsecured lending, we maintain rigorous credit scoring and affordability assessment criteria that we monitor and report regularly. There were no significant changes to our risk policy or appetite in these portfolios. This approach continued to result in stable, good credit quality consumer credit portfolios.

We use a combination of internal, Credit Reference Agencycredit reference agency and application data in our credit assessments. Scorecards supported by policy rules give us confidence that customers are creditworthy and can afford their repayments. We closely monitor and manage the performance of our consumer credit portfolios using a range of data that includes portfolio and key segments performance, macroeconomic indicators and customer risk data. Nonetheless, we are not complacent about the prospect for future risk events and are always lookinglook at ways to strengthen our approach.

Credit performance

 

      Other unsecured     
 2018 Consumer
(auto) finance
£m
   Personal
loans
£m
   Credit
cards
£m
   Overdrafts
£m
   Total other
unsecured
£m
   

Total 

£m 

 

Loans and advances to customers of which:

  7,347    2,182    2,865    593    5,640    12,987  

– Stage 1

  6,950    2,113    2,560    422    5,095    12,045  

– Stage 2

  354    48    256    144    448    802  

– Stage 3

  43    21    49    27    97    140  

NPLs(1)

  43    16    49    22    87    130  

Loss allowances

  85    47    112    61    220    305  

Stage 3 ratio(2)

  0.59%          1.72%    1.08%  

NPL ratio(3)

  0.59%          1.54%    1.00%  

Gross write-offs

  24                   125    149  

 

(1)  We define NPLs in the ‘Credit risk management’ section.

(2)  Stage 3 as a percentage of loans and advances to customers.

(3)  NPLs as a percentage of loans and advances to customers.

 

   

   

   

    
      Other unsecured     
 2017 Consumer
(auto) finance
£m
   

Personal
loans

£m

   Credit
cards
£m
   Overdrafts
£m
   Total other
unsecured
£m
   

Total 

£m 

 

Loans and advances to customers of which:

  6,957    2,169    2,444    565    5,178    12,135  

– Performing(1)

  6,861    2,129    2,377    516    5,022    11,883  

– Early arrears

  62    24    19    25    68    130  

– NPLs(2)

  34    16    48    24    88    122  

Loss allowances

  77    44    62    29    135    212  

NPL ratio(3)

  0.49%          1.69%    1.00%  

Gross write-offs

  32                   120    152  
       Other unsecured     
 2019  Consumer
(auto) finance
£m
   

Personal
loans

£m

   

Credit
cards

£m

   Overdrafts
£m
     Total other
unsecured
£m
   

Total

£m

 

Loans and advances to customers of which:

           7,684            2,135            2,788            590            5,513            13,197 

– Stage 1

   7,038    2,020    2,473    404    4,897    11,935 

– Stage 2

   604    95    267    160    522    1,126 

– Stage 3

   42    20    48    26    94    136 

Loss allowances(2)

   88    51    120    62    233    321 

Stage 3 undrawn exposures

             25   

Stage 3 ratio(1)

   0.55%          2.15%    1.21% 

Gross write-offs

   34                   134    168 
            
 2018                        

Loans and advances to customers of which:

   7,347    2,182    2,865    593    5,640    12,987 

– Stage 1

   6,950 ��  2,113    2,560    422    5,095    12,045 

– Stage 2

   354    48    256    144    448    802 

– Stage 3

   43    21    49    27    97    140 

Loss allowances(2)

   85    47    112    61    220    305 

Stage 3 undrawn exposures

             26   

Stage 3 ratio(1)

   0.58%          2.17%    1.28% 

Gross write-offs

   24                   125    149 

 

(1)

Excludes loans and advances to customers where the customer did not pay for between 0 and 90 days and NPLs.

(2)

We define NPLs in the ‘Credit risk management’ section.

(3)

NPLsTotal Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of loans and advances to customers.customers plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. The way we calculate the Stage 3 ratio was changed from 1 January 2019, and 2018 restated for consistency. See ‘Key metrics’ in the ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’ section.

At 31 December 2018, the average consumer finance loan size was £11,400 (2017: £12,500) and the NPL ratio increased slightly to 0.59% (2017: 0.49%). The average unsecured loan and credit card balances in 2018 were broadly stable at £9,500 (2017: £9,300) and £1,500 (2017: £1,200), respectively.

LOGO

(2)

The ECL allowance is for both on and off–balance sheet exposures.

 

102Santander UK plc83


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

Loan modifications

The following table provides information onsets out the financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL.

 

    

    Credit

cards

£m

     Overdrafts
£m
   

    Total other 

unsecured 

£m 

 

Financial assets modified during the period:

 

   
2019  

        Credit
cards

£m

       Overdrafts
£m
       Total other
unsecured
£m
 

Financial assets modified in the year:

      

– Amortised cost before modification

     26  17    43     23    15    38 

– Net modification loss

     12  8    20     12    8    20 

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

      

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12m ECL in the year

   3    2    5 
      
2018            

Financial assets modified in the year:

      

– Amortised cost before modification

   26    17    43 

– Net modification loss

   12    8    20 

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

 

           

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the ECL allowance has changed to12-month measurement during the year

     2  3     

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12m ECL in the year

   2   ��3    5 

Forbearance

The balances at 31 December 20182019 and 20172018 were:

 

       

Other unsecured

     
 Consumer
(auto) finance
£m
     Personal
loans
£m
     Credit
cards
£m
     Overdrafts
£m
     Total other
unsecured
£m
   

    Total 

£m 

       Other unsecured     

2018

              53      26      79    79  
2019  Consumer
(auto) finance
£m
   

    Personal
loans

£m

   

            Credit
cards

£m

       Overdrafts
£m
       Total other
unsecured
£m
           Total
£m
 

Total

   7        51    25    76    83 

– Stage 2

              10      7      17    17     5        10    7    17    22 

– Stage 3

              43      19      62    62     2        41    18    59    61 
            

2017

        1      48      28      77    77  
2018                        

Total

   6        53    26    79    85 

– Stage 2

   4        10    7    17    21 

– Stage 3

   2        43    19    62    64 

20182019 compared to 20172018 (unaudited)

We maintained our prudent Consumer (auto) finance underwriting criteria through the year. TheIn 2019, the product mix was broadly unchanged in the year.unchanged. This reflected underlying stability in target market segments, product pricing and distribution strategy. ThereThe car finance market saw challenges in 2019 mainly due to Brexit and changing emission standards, and there was a slight shiftfall in the year fromsupply of new car loans into second hand (used) car loans, both reflecting reduced consumer confidence linked to the underlying economic uncertainty in the UK and a reduction in new car registrations in the UK, driven by manufacturer strategic supply plans for the UK and Europe.vehicles.

At 31 December 2018,2019, Consumer (auto) finance balances represented 4% (2017:(2018: 4%) of our total Retail Banking loans and 4% (2017: 3%(2018: 4%) of total customer loans. In 2018,2019, Consumer (auto) finance balances increased by £390m (6%£337m (5%) on 2017.. In 2018,2019, Consumer (auto) finance gross lending (new business) was £3,444m (2017: £3,133m)£3,308m (2018: £3,444m). Wholesale loans (Stock finance) to car dealerships at 31 December 20182019 were approximately 18%16.8% of the Consumer loan book, an increasea decrease of £124m£33m on 2017. NPLs remain within Risk Appetite limit, increasing to £43m (2017: £34m).2018. The portfolio continues to perform satisfactorily with the overall risk profile remaining broadly stable.

Other unsecured lending increased in 2018, with credit cards growth of £421m whichAt 31 December 2019, the average Consumer (auto) finance loan size was ahead of the market.£13,900 (2018: £11,400).

Forbearance levels were broadly stable in 2018.2019.

 

84Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk103


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

BUSINESS BANKING

We provide business banking services through the Santander Business franchise to small businesses with a turnover of up to £6.5m per annum. Our risk management is tailored to the complexity of the customer and their product holdings.

We review applications from customers who have more straightforward borrowing needs and lower debt exposures on an automated basis. We do this by using an application scorecard to ensure an efficient customer journey, combined with a cost-effective credit decisioning process. Post approval, we review revolving credit facilities each year to ensure the customer’s facilities remain appropriate for their financial circumstances. We perform a full manual underwriting process for applications from customers who have more complex borrowing needs or who wish to borrow larger amounts. This is due to the levels of credit exposure and other considerations, such as the need for security to support the facilities requested. In line with our risk management framework and standard policies for this more complex segment, we review exposures above certain values and relating to certain product types at least each year, or more often where the borrower shows signs of financial distress.

Our aim is to help businesses prosper through the provision of Simple, Personal and Fair banking solutions to existing, new and prospective customers. We believe in building lasting relationships and take time to understand our customers’ banking needs. This sets us apart from others as, no matter how small or large a business, we have people available in our branch network and our CBCs to provide aface-to-face relationship management service to our customers.

In order to improve our offering in the business current account market, we recently launched our innovative 1I2I3 Business Current Account. This is the only business current account in the market to offer regular cashback to businesses. By basing the cashback on business turnover, we are incentivising and rewarding business growth.Start-ups and switching businesses benefit from a reduced monthly fee for 12 months and, as part of our 1I2I3 Business World, customers have access to preferential loan and deposit rates. In this way, we continue to support new businesses at an important time in their lifecycle.

We aim to support businesses with all their financial needs through our range of lending products from overdrafts and credit cards, to invoice finance and asset finance.

Credit performance

 

     

        2018

£m

     

        2017

£m

 

Loans and advances to customers of which:

     1,802      1,912 

– Stage 1

     1,548     

– Stage 2

     165     

– Stage 3

     89     

– Performing(1)

         1,793 

– Early arrears

         4 

– NPLs(2)

     89      115 

Loss allowances(3)

     53      54 
               

Stage 3 ratio(4)

     4.94%     

NPL ratio(5)

     4.94%      6.01% 

Gross write offs

     15      21 
   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

Loans and advances to customers of which:

               1,845                1,802 

– Stage 1

   1,590    1,548 

– Stage 2

   177    165 

– Stage 3

   78    89 

Loss allowances(2)

   52    53 

Stage 3 undrawn exposures

   1     

Stage 3 ratio(1)

   4.28%    4.99% 

Gross write offs

   24    15 

 

(1)

ExcludesTotal Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of customer loans plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. The way we calculate the Stage 3 ratio was changed from 1 January 2019, and advances to customers where2018 restated for consistency. See ‘Key metrics’ in the customer did not pay for between 0 and 90 days and NPLs.‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’ section

(2)

We define NPLs in the ‘Credit risk management’ section.

(3)

Loss allowancesThe ECL allowance is for 2017 wereboth on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on an ECL basis per IFRS 9.

(4)

Stage 3 as a percentage of loans and advances to customers.

(5)

NPLs as a percentage of loans and advances to customers.off–balance sheet exposures.

Loan modifications

The following table provides information on financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL.

 

        £m

Financial assets modified during the period:

– Amortised cost before modification

14

– Net modification loss

1

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the ECL allowance has changed to12-month measurement during the year

3
               2019
£m
               2018
£m
 

Financial assets modified in the year:

    

– Amortised cost before modification

                    15                     14 

– Net modification loss

       1 

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

    

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the ECL allowance changed to12-month measurement in the year

   2    3 

Forbearance

The balances at 31 December 20182019 and 20172018 were:

 

            £m               2019
£m
               2018
£m
 

2018

     74 

Total

                    67                     74 

– Stage 2

     20    26    20 

– Stage 3

     54    41    54 

2017

     85 

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

LOGOBusiness banking balances remained broadly flat and Stage 3 exposures decreased slightly.

 

104Santander UK plc85


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

 

Credit risk – other business segments

 

 

Overview

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, we are exposed to credit risk through providing overdraft, loan, invoice discounting, trade finance, asset finance and treasury products. We offer bank accounts and cash transmission services to further support clients.

 

In Corporate & Investment Banking, we are mainly exposed to credit risk through lending and selling treasury products to large corporates.

 

In 2018, we sold our treasury market activities, and the Crown Dependencies branches as part of our ring-fencing implementation. For more, see Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

In Corporate Centre, our exposures come from asset and liability management of our balance sheet and ournon-core and Legacy Portfolios inrun-off.

 

Credit risk management

In this section, we explain how we manage and mitigate credit risk.

 

Credit risk review

In this section, we analyse our credit risk exposures and how they are performing. We also focus on forbearance and portfolios of particular interest.

Our main portfolios are:

 

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

  

Corporate & Investment Banking

  

Corporate Centre

–  SME and mid corporate– banking, lending and treasury services mainly to enterprises with an annual turnover of up to £500m.

 

–  Commercial Real Estate– lending to experienced, professional landlords mainly secured by tenanted UK property in the office, retail, industrial and residentialsub-sectors.

 

–  Social Housing– lending and treasury services for UK housing association groups secured by tenanted UK residential property. Borrowers are mainly charitable entities and registered with the appropriate regulator for the part of the UK in which they operate.

  

Sovereign and Supranational – securities issued by local and central governments, and government guaranteed counterparties.

– Large Corporate– loans and treasury products for large corporates to support their working capital and liquidity needs.

 

–  Financial Institutions– mainly derivatives repurchaseunder approved ring-fenced bank exceptions policy to facilitate hedging, and reverse repurchase transactions (known as repos and reverse repos), and stock borrowing/lending.trade finance instruments.

  

–  Sovereign and Supranational– securities issued by local and central governments, and government guaranteed counterparties. We hold some of them to help meet our liquidity needs.

 

  Structured Products– we have two portfolios. The ALCOHigh Quality Liquid Assets (HQLA) portfolio is high quality assets, chosen for diversification and liquidity. The Legacy Treasury asset portfolio is mainly asset-backed securities.

 

–  Social Housing– legacy Social Housingsocial housing loans that do not fit with our strategy.

 

–  Financial Institutions– mainly derivatives, repurchase and reverse repurchase transactions (known as repos and reverse repos), and stock borrowing/lending, under approved ring-fenced bank exceptions policy to facilitate hedging or liquidity management.

–  Legacy Portfolios inrun-off– assets from acquisitions that do not fit with our strategy. These include some commercial mortgages.

 

–  Derivatives– older total return swaps we held for liquidity, that we are running down.

– Crown Dependencies – mainly residential mortgages to individuals in Jersey and the Isle of Man.

 

The segmental basis of presentation in this Annual Report has been changed, and the prior periods restated, to report our Jersey and Isle of Man branchesshort term markets business in Corporate Centre rather than in Retail Banking as in previous years, as a result of their transfer from Santander UK plc to ANTS in 2018.Corporate & Investment Banking. See Note 2 for more information.

OTHER BUSINESS SEGMENTS – CREDIT RISK MANAGEMENT

 

LOGO
LOGO

For more on our approach to

credit risk at a Santander UK

group level

See pages 72 to 80

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, we classify most of our customers asnon-standardised. We also have some SME customers, which we mainly classify as standardised as it is a high volumehigh-volume portfolio with smaller exposures. In CIB and Corporate Centre, we classify all our customers asnon-standardised, except for the commercial mortgages in our Legacy Portfolios inrun-off.

We set out how we manage the credit risk on our standardised customers in the previous section ‘Credit risk – Retail Banking’. We manage the credit risk on our standardised customers in Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre in the same way, except that we do not use scorecards or credit reference agencies. In the rest of this section, we explain how we manage the credit risk on ournon-standardised customers.

 

86Santander UK plc


 > Credit risk105


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

1. Risk strategy and planning

For details of how we set risk strategy and plans, see the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk management’ section. For treasury products, we take credit risk up to limits for each client. We control, manage and report risks on a counterparty basis, regardless of which part of our business takes the risk.

2. Assessment and origination

We do a thorough risk assessment to make sure customers can meet their obligations before we approve a credit application. We do this mainly by assigning each customer a credit rating, using our internal rating scale (see ‘Credit quality’ in ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section). To do this, we look at the customer’s financial history and trends in the economy – backed up by the expert judgement of a risk analyst. We review our internal ratings at least every year. We also assess the underlying risk of the transaction, taking into account any mitigating factors (see the following tables) –tables below) and how it fits with our risk policies, limits and Risk Appetite, as set by the Board.Board and lower level committees and fora. We consider transactions in line with credit limits approved by the relevant credit authority. Our Executive Credit Approval Committee is responsible for setting those limits. In CIB and Corporate Centre, a specialist analyst usually reviews a transaction at the start and over its life. They base their review on the financial strength of the client, its position in its industry, and its management strengths.

We lend to a wide range of sectors and industries, including those that are intrinsic or of strategic importance to the economy of the UK or another country or territory. As part of lending responsibly, we comply with the Equator Principles, factoring social, ethical and environmental impacts into our risk analysis and decision-making process for financial transactions. These principles address climate change, prevention of pollution and toxic waste emissions, biodiversity, indigenous peoples and human rights. Our policy on Aerospace and Defence, Energy, Mining & Metals and Soft Commodities and our Sensitive Social and Ethical Sectors policy continue to define our approach towards creating long-term value while managing reputational, social and environmental risks. In 2019, we further improved these policies by introducing prohibitions and strengthening restrictions on a range of activities. Prohibited activities now include the provision of products or services for new Coal Fired Power Plant (CFPP) projects and taking on new clients with existing CFPPs. Restricted activities include transactions specific to CFPPs for existing clients which do not significantly improve environmental impacts, such as a significant reduction of CO2. Our Reputational Risk Forum reviews and approves all restricted activities to ensure that they fall within our risk appetite. This forum reviews, monitors and escalates key decisions around financial andnon-financial reputational risks to the Board

Credit risk mitigation

The types of credit risk mitigation, including collateral, across each of our portfolios are as follows. In addition, from time to time at a portfolio level we execute significant risk transfer transactions, which typically reduce RWAs.

Corporate & Commercial Banking:

 

 
   Portfolio Description
 

SME and mid corporate

 

Includes secured and unsecured lending. We can use covenants (financial ornon-financial) to support a customer’s credit rating. For example, we can set limits on how much they can spend or borrow, or how they operate as a business. We can take mortgage debentures as collateral. These are charges over a company’s assets.assets, almost always first charges. We can also take a first legal charge on commercial property as collateral. Before agreeing the loan, we get an independent professional valuation which assesses the property. We can also take guarantees, but we do not treat them as collateral and we do not put a cash value on them unless they are secured againstsupported by a tangible asset.asset which is charged to us. If a customer defaults, we will work with them to consider debt restructuring options. We generally do not take control ofenforce our security over their assets except when restructuring options have been exhausted or to protect our position in relation to third party claims. In this case, we might appoint an administrator.

 

We also lend against assets (like vehicles and equipment) and invoices for some customers. For assets, we value them before we lend. For invoices, we review the customer’s ledgers regularly and lend against debtors that meet agreed criteria. If the customer defaults, we repossess and sell their assets or collect on their invoices.

Commercial Real Estate

We take a first legal charge on commercial property as collateral. The loan is subject to strict criteria, including the property condition, age and location, tenant quality, lease terms and length, and the sponsor’s experience and creditworthiness. Before agreeing the loan, we visit the property and get an independent professional valuation which assesses the property, the tenant and future demand (such as comparing market rent to current rent). Loan agreements typically allow us to get revaluations every two to three years, or more often if it is likely covenants may be breached, and to view the property each year.

Social Housing

We take a first legal charge on portfolios of residential real estate owned and let by UK Housing Associations as collateral, in most cases. We revalue this every three to five years (in line with industry practice), using the standard methods for property used for Social Housing. The value would be considerably higher if we based it on normal residential use. On average, the loan balance is 25% to 50% of the implied market value, using our LGD methodology. We have not had a default, loss or repossession on Social Housing. Older Social Housing loans that do not fit our current business strategy are managed and reported in Corporate Centre.

Corporate & Investment Banking:

 
 PortfolioDescription

Sovereign and Supranational

In line with market practice, there is no collateral against these assets.

Large Corporate

Most of these loans and products are unsecured, but we attach covenants to our credit agreements. We monitor whether borrowers keep in line with them so we detect any financial distress early. We also have a small structured finance portfolio, where we hold legal charges over the assets we finance.

Financial Institutions

We use standard legal agreements to reduce credit risk on derivatives, repos and reverse repos, and stock borrowing/lending. We also hold collateral and trade through central counterparties (CCPs) to reduce risk.

Netting – We use netting agreements where they have legal force – mainly in the UK, the rest of Europe and the US. This means that if a counterparty defaults, we can legally offset what we owe them and what they owe us, and settle the net amount. However, netting arrangements often do not mean we can offset assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis. In line with market practice, we use standard legal agreements. For derivatives, we use ISDA Master Agreements; for repos and reverse repos, we use Global Master Repurchase Agreements; and for stock borrowing/lending and other securities financing, we use Global Master Securities Lending Agreements.

Collateral – We use the Credit Support Annex with the ISDA Master Agreement. This gives us collateral for our net exposures. The collateral can be cash, securities or equities. For stock borrowing/lending and repos and reverse repos, it includes high quality liquid debt securities and highly liquid equities listed on major developed markets. We revalue our exposures and collateral daily, adjusting the collateral to reflect deficits or surpluses. We have processes to control how we value and manage collateral, including documentation reviews and reporting. Collateral has to meet our‘eligible collateral, haircuts and margining’ policy which controls the quality and how much of any one kind of collateral we can hold. That gives us confidence we will be able to cash in the collateral if a client defaults. We have these controls for equities and debt securities. The collateral held for reverse repos is worth at least 100% of our exposure.

CCPs – These are intermediaries between a buyer and a seller – generally a clearing house. We use CCPs as a way to reduce counterparty credit risk in derivatives.

LOGO

Santander UK plc87


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Corporate Centre:

Portfolio

Description

Sovereign and SupranationalIn line with market practice, there is no collateral against these assets.

Structured Products

These are our ALCO and Legacy Treasury asset portfolios. These assets are unsecured, but benefit from senior positions in the creditor hierarchy. Their credit rating reflects the over-collateralisation in the structure, and the assets that underpin their cash flows and repayment schedules. We use a detailed expected cash flow analysis to assess the portfolios and we consider the structure and assets backing each individual security.

Social Housing

We manage the risk on this portfolio in the same way as for the Social Housing portfolio in Corporate & Commercial Banking.

Legacy Portfolios

inrun-off

We often hold collateral through a first legal charge over the underlying asset or cash.

We get independent third party valuations on fixed charge security like aircraft or ships in line with industry guidelines. We then decide if we need to set up an impairment loss allowance. To do that, we bear in mind:

–  The borrower’s ability to generate cash flow

–  The age of the assets

–  Whether the loan is still performing satisfactorily

–  Whether or not the reduction in value is likely to be temporary

–  Whether there are other ways to solve the problem.

Where a borrower gets into difficulty we look to dispose of the collateral, either with agreement or through the insolvency process. We do this as early as possible, to minimise any loss. We rarely take ownership of collateral.

Derivatives

We manage the risk on this portfolio in the same way as for the derivatives in CIB.

Crown Dependencies  

We managed the risk on this portfolio in the same way as for mortgages in Retail Banking. This portfolio was sold in 2018.

3. Monitoring

We regularly monitor and report our credit risk by portfolio, segment, industry, location and customer. We give our ERCC a detailed analysis of our credit exposures and risk trends every month. We also report our larger exposures and risks to the Board Risk Committee every month.

Our Watchlist

We also use a Watchlist to help us identify potential problem debt early. Just because a customer is on our Watchlist does not mean they have defaulted. It just means that something has happened that has increased the probability of default. There are several reasons we might put customers on this list. For example, if they suffer a downturn in trade, breach a covenant, lose a major contract, slip into early arrears, or their key management resign. Whatever the trigger, we review the case to assess the potential financial impact.

We classify Watchlist cases as:

Enhanced monitoring: for less urgent cases. If they are significant, we monitor them more often

Proactive management: for more urgent or serious cases. We may take steps to restructure debt including extending the term, taking more collateral, agreeing a lower credit limit or seeking repayment of the loan through refinancing or other means.

We assess cases on the Watchlist for impairment collectively, unless they are in the hands of our Restructuring & Recoveries team at which point we assess them individually. If a case transfers to Stage 3 (previously, becomes NPL), we take it off the Watchlist and assess it for impairment individually.

When a customer is included in enhanced monitoring, we do not consider that it has suffered a SICR for ECL purposes, so it remains in Stage 1 for purposes of our loss allowance calculations. When a customer is included in proactive management, we consider that it has suffered a SICR. This means we transfer it to Stage 2 and subject it to a lifetime ECL assessment to calculate the new loss allowance. We take into account any forbearance we offer. This includes whether any extra security or guarantees are available, the likelihood of more equity and the potential to enhance value through asset management.

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, as part of our annual review process, for CRE loans approaching maturity, we look at the prospects of refinancing the loan on current market terms and applicable credit policy. Where this seems unlikely, we put the case on our Watchlist.

In CIB and Corporate Centre, we monitor the credit quality of our portfolios of treasury products daily. We use both internal and third-party data to detect any potential credit deterioration.

4. Arrears management

We identify problem debt by close monitoring, supported by our Watchlist process. When there is a problem, our relationship managers are the first to act, supported by the relevant credit risk expert. If a case becomes more urgent or needs specialist attention, and if it transfers to Stage 3 (previously, to NPL), we transfer it to our Restructuring & Recoveries team.

We aim to act before a customer actually defaults (to prevent it, if possible). The strategy we use depends on the type of customer, their circumstances and the level of risk. We use restructuring and rehabilitation tools to try to help our customers find their own way out of financial difficulty and agree on a plan that works for both of us.

We aim to identify warning signs early by monitoring customers’ financial and trading data, checking to make sure they are not breaching any covenants, and by having regular dialogue with them. We hold regular Watchlist meetings to agree a strategy for each portfolio.

Our Restructuring & Recoveries team attend these meetings for CIB cases and a quarterly forum for other cases, and we may hand over more serious cases to them.

88    Santander UK plc


> Credit risk

5. Debt recovery

Consensual arrangements

Where we cannot find a solution like any of the ones we describe above, we look for an exit. If we can, we aim to do this by agreeing with the borrower that they will sell some or all of their assets on a voluntary basis or agreeing to give them time to refinance their debt with another lender.

Enforcement and recovery

Where we cannot find a way forward or reach a consensual arrangement, we consider recovery options. This can be through:

The insolvency process

Enforcing over any collateral

Selling the debt on the secondary market

Considering other legal action available to recover what we are owed from debtors and guarantors.

If there is a shortfall, we write it off against loss allowances we hold, once the sale has gone through. In certain very rare instances we may act as mortgagee in possession of assets held as collateral againstnon-performing commercial lending. In such cases the assets are carried on our balance sheet and are classified according to our accounting policies.

Loan modifications

Forbearance

If a customer is having financial difficulty, we will work with them before they actually default to see if the difficulty can be addressed through forbearance. Their problems might be clear from the results of covenant testing, reviews of trading and other data they give us under the terms of their loan or as part of our ongoing conversations with them.

We may offer the following types of forbearance. We only do this if our assessments indicate the customer can meet the revised payments:

Action

Description

Term extension

We can extend the term of the loan. At a minimum, we expect the customer to be able to pay the interest in the short-term and have a realistic chance of repaying the full balance in the long-term. We may offer this option if the customer isup-to-date with their payments, but showing signs of financial difficulties. We may also offer this option where the loan is about to mature and near-term refinancing is not possible on market terms.

Interest-only

We can agree to let a customer pay only the interest on the loan for a short time – usually less than a year. We only agree to this if we believe their financial problems are temporary and they are going to recover. After the interest-only period, we expect the customer to go back to making full payments of interest and capital once they are in a stronger financial position. We regularly look at the customer’s financial situation to see when they can afford to do that.

Other payment rescheduling

(including

capitalisation)

If a customer is having cash flow issues, we may agree to lower or stop their payments until they have had time to recover. We may:

– Reschedule payments to better match the customer’s cash flow – for example if the business is seasonal

– Provide a temporary increase in facilities to cover peak demand ahead of the customer’s trading improving.

We might do this by adding their arrears to their loan balance (we call this arrears capitalisation) or drawing from an overdraft. We may also offer other types of forbearance, including providing new facilities, interest rate concessions, seasonal profiling and interestroll-up. In rare cases, we agree to forgive or reduce part of the debt.

Other forms of debt management

When customers are in financial difficulty we can also manage debt in other ways, depending on the facts of the specific case:

Action

Description

Waiving or changing covenants

If a borrower breaks a covenant, we can either waive it or change it, taking their latest and future financial position into account. We may also add a condition on the use of any surplus cash (after operating costs) to pay down their debt to us.

Asking for more collateral or guarantees

If a borrower has unencumbered assets, we may accept new or extra collateral in return for revised financing terms. We may also take a guarantee from other companies in the same group and/or major shareholders. We only do this where we believe the guarantor will be able to meet their commitment.

Asking for more equity

Where a borrower can no longer pay the interest on their debt, we may accept fresh equity capital from new or existing investors to change the capital structure in return for better terms on the existing debt.

Risk measurement and control

We measure the credit risk on treasury products by adding their potential future exposure to market movements over their lives to their fair value. Then we add it to any other exposure and measure the total against our credit limits for each client.

We assess our loss allowances regularly and have them independently reviewed. We look at a number of factors, including the:

Cash flow available to service debt

Value of collateral, based on third-party professional valuations.

LOGO

Santander UK plc89


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

OTHER BUSINESS SEGMENTS – CREDIT RISK REVIEW

Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL

The following tables show changes in total exposures and ECL in the year. The footnotes to the Santander UK group level table on page 72 also apply to these tables.

  Non–credit impaired  Credit impaired    
  Stage 1
    Subject to 12–month ECL    
  Stage 2
    Subject to lifetime ECL     
  

Stage 3

    Subject to lifetime ECL    

  

Total

 
  Corporate & Commercial Banking 

Exposures(1)

£m

   

ECL

£m

  

Exposures(1)

£m

   

ECL

£m

  

Exposures(1)

£m

   

    ECL

£m

  

    Exposures(1)

£m

   

    ECL

£m

 

At 1 January 2018

  22,417    43   866    33   388    173   23,671    249 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      5       (3             2 

Transfer to lifetime ECL (not–credit impaired)(3)    

  (670   (3  670    3               

Transfer to credit impaired(3)

  (41      (31   (1  72    1        

Transfer to 12–month ECL(3)

  200    8   (200   (8              

Transfer from credit impaired(3)

  2    1   2    1   (4   (2       

Transfers of financial instruments

  (509   6   441    (5  68    (1       

Net remeasurement of ECL on stage transfer(4)

      (7      10       18       21 

New assets originated or purchased (5)

  9,115    12   281    5   3    1   9,399    18 

Other(6)

  879    (3  (58   (3  (2   37   819    31 

Assets derecognised – closed good(7)

  (10,569   (19  (304   (5  (76   (18  (10,949   (42

Assets derecognised – written off(7)

                (105   (97  (105   (97

At 31 December 2018

  21,333    37   1,226    32   276    113   22,835    182 

Net movement in the year

  (1,084   (6  360    (1  (112   (60  (836   (67
                                     

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       (6       (1       37        30 

Recoveries net of collection costs

                       (7       (7

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (6       (1       30        23 
            
  Corporate & Investment Banking £m   £m  £m   £m  £m   £m  £m   £m 

At 1 January 2018

  26,583    16   109       372    242   27,064    258 

Changes to model

                    (9      (9

Transfer to lifetime ECL (not–credit impaired)(3)

  (2      2                   

New assets originated or purchased(5)

  35,926    4   133    3          36,059    7 

Other(6)

  (2,306   (1  83    1   (47   29   (2,270   29 

Assets derecognised – closed good (7)

  (18,817   (14  (193   (1         (19,010   (15

Assets derecognised – written off(7)

                (299   (252  (299   (252

At 31 December 2018

  41,384    5   134    3   26    10   41,544    18 

Net movement in the year

  14,801    (11  25    3   (346   (232  14,480    (240
                                     

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       (11       3        20        12 

Recoveries net of collection costs

                       2        2 

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (11       3        22        14 
            
  Corporate Centre £m   £m  £m   £m  £m   £m  £m   £m 

At 1 January 2018

  57,155    7   250    4   20    8   57,425    19 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      1                     1 

Transfer to lifetime ECL (not–credit impaired)(3)

  (111   (1  111    1               

Transfer to credit impaired(3)

         (4      4            

Transfer to 12–month ECL(3)

  133    3   (133   (3              

Transfer from credit impaired(3)

         3    1   (3   (1       

Transfers of financial instruments

  22    2   (23   (1  1    (1       

Net remeasurement of ECL on stage transfer(4)

      (2             1       (1

New assets originated or purchased(5)

  7,526    1   2       2    1   7,530    2 

Other(6)

  (14,626   (2  (6      3    1   (14,629   (1

Assets derecognised – closed good (7)

  (4,943   (2  (92      (8   (2  (5,043   (4

Assets derecognised – written off (7)

                (3   (3  (3   (3

At 31 December 2018

  45,134    5   131    3   15    5   45,280    13 

Net movement in the year

  (12,021   (2  (119   (1  (5   (3  (12,145   (6
                                     

Charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       (2       (1               (3

Recoveries net of collection costs

                       (4       (4

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (2       (1       (4       (7

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

Non trading reverse repurchase agreements increased to £21,127m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £2,614m), which reflected the revised classification of the majority of our permitted non trading reverse repurchase agreements at amortised cost in line with our ring-fenced business model. We report reverse repurchase agreements in CIB and the movement in the year is reported in the ‘New assets originated or purchased’ and ‘Assets derecognised – closed good’ lines above.

Cash and balances at central banks, which are reported in Corporate Centre, decreased by £13,024m to £19,747m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £32,771m). This movement is reported in the ‘Other’ line above. For more, see the Balance sheet review in the ‘Financial review’ section.

90    Santander UK plc


> Credit risk

Committed exposures

Credit risk arises on both asset balances and off–balance sheet transactions such as guarantees. As a result, committed exposures are typically higher than asset balances. However, committed exposures can be smaller than the asset balances on the balance sheet due to netting. We show Sovereigns and Supranationals net of short positions and Large Corporate reverse repurchase agreement exposures are shown net of repurchase agreement liabilities and include OTC derivatives. In addition, the derivative and other treasury product exposures (which are classified as ‘Financial Institutions’) shown are also typically lower than the asset balances. This is because we show our overall risk exposure which takes into account our procedures to mitigate credit risk. The asset balances on our balance sheet only reflect the more restrictive netting permitted by IAS 32.

Rating distribution

These tables show our credit risk exposure according to our internal rating scale (see ‘Credit quality’ in the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section) for each portfolio. On this scale, the higher the rating, the better the quality of the counterparty.

     Santander UK risk grade       

  2018

 

    

9

£m

 

     

8

£m

 

     

7

£m

 

     

6

£m

 

     

5

£m

 

     

4

£m

 

     

3 to 1
£m

 

     

Other(1)

£m

 

     

Total

£m

 

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                                    

SME and mid corporate

                 66      1,745      5,749      3,426      886      36      11,908 

Commercial Real Estate

                       302      4,564      1,846      31            6,743 

Social Housing

     680      3,899      138                  2      24            4,743 
      680      3,899      204      2,047      10,313      5,274      941      36      23,394 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                                    

Sovereign and Supranational

     393      3,807                                          4,200 

Large Corporate

     12      3,187      5,535      6,361      888      3      78            16,064 

Financial Institutions

     836      1,355      1,479      76                              3,746 
      1,241      8,349      7,014      6,437      888      3      78            24,010 

Corporate Centre

                                    

Sovereign and Supranational

     30,074      91            1                              30,166 

Structured Products

     2,431      2,062      318      24                              4,835 

Social Housing

     1,377      2,839      76      43                              4,335 

Legacy Portfolios in run–off(2)

                       203      35      137      126      357      858 

Derivatives

           147                                          147 
      33,882      5,139      394      271      35      137      126      357      40,341 
                                                                

Total

     35,803      17,387      7,612      8,755      11,236      5,414      1,145      393      87,745 

Of which:

                                    

Stage 1

     35,803      17,387      7,612      8,682      10,788      4,772      521      377      85,942 

Stage 2

                       73      448      635      318      16      1,490 

Stage 3

                                   7      306            313 
                                    
  2017                                                      

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                                    

SME and mid corporate

                 259      2,183      5,402      3,574      998      214      12,630 

Commercial Real Estate

                       395      6,135      2,014      60      2      8,606 

Social Housing

     499      2,600      171                        4            3,274 
      499      2,600      430      2,578      11,537      5,588      1,062      216      24,510 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                                    

Sovereign and Supranational

     590      3,321      444                                    4,355 

Large Corporate

     260      2,979      8,391      8,879      573      2      355            21,439 

Financial Institutions

     2,362      1,463      2,494      33      103                        6,455 
      3,212      7,763      11,329      8,912      676      2      355            32,249 

Corporate Centre

                                    

Sovereign and Supranational

     44,477      18                                          44,495 

Structured Products

     2,487      1,560      300      32                              4,379 

Social Housing

     1,841      3,641      451      43                              5,976 

Legacy Portfolios in run–off(2)

                 1      359      104      124      37      400      1,025 

Derivatives

           212                                          212 

Crown Dependencies

     13      36      115      71      13      8      6            262 
      48,818      5,467      867      505      117      132      43      400      56,349 
                                                                

Total

     52,529      15,830      12,626      11,995      12,330      5,722      1,460      616      113,108 

(1)

Smaller exposures mainly in the commercial mortgage portfolio. We use scorecards for them, instead of a rating model.

(2)

Commercial mortgages and residual structured and asset finance loans (shipping, aviation, and structured finance).

LOGO

Santander UK plc91


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Geographical distribution

We typically classify geographical location according to the counterparty’s country of domicile unless a full risk transfer guarantee is in place, in which case we use the guarantor’s country of domicile instead.

     2018     2017 
     

UK

£m

     

Europe

£m

     

US

£m

     Rest of
World
£m
     

Total

£m

     

UK

£m

     

Europe

£m

     

US

£m

     Rest of
World
£m
     

Total

£m

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                                        

SME and mid corporate

     11,833      74            1      11,908      12,513      116      1            12,630 

Commercial Real Estate

     6,743                        6,743      8,606                        8,606 

Social Housing

     4,743                        4,743      3,274                        3,274 
      23,319      74            1      23,394      24,393      116      1            24,510 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                                        

Sovereign and Supranational

           393            3,807      4,200            1,032      1      3,322      4,355 

Large Corporate

     13,080      2,752      124      108      16,064      17,430      3,699      111      199      21,439 

Financial Institutions

     1,216      1,878      174      478      3,746      3,102      2,121      614      618      6,455 
      14,296      5,023      298      4,393      24,010      20,532      6,852      726      4,139      32,249 

Corporate Centre

                                        

Sovereign and Supranational

     26,154      1,409      960      1,643      30,166      35,659      1,514      6,091      1,231      44,495 

Structured Products

     2,574      1,139            1,122      4,835      2,086      1,217            1,076      4,379 

Social Housing

     4,335                        4,335      5,976                        5,976 

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

     744                  114      858      909                  116      1,025 

Derivatives

                 147            147            63      149            212 

Crown Dependencies

                                   262                        262 
      33,807      2,548      1,107      2,879      40,341      44,892      2,794      6,240      2,423      56,349 

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, we saw solid lending to trading business customers, offset by active management of our Commercial Real Estate (CRE) portfolio. Committed exposures remained broadly flat. Our CRE portfolio decreased by 21% as we continue to manage our exposure in line with proactive risk management policies. Our Social Housing portfolio increased by 45% driven by refinancing of longer–dated loans, previously managed in Corporate Centre, onto shorter maturities and current market terms.

In CIB, our committed exposures decreased by 26% mainly due to decreases in our Large Corporate and Financial institutions portfolios driven by the transfer of prohibited activity to Banco Santander London Branch as part of ring–fencing. Credit quality was relatively stable overall, mainly driven by the write-offs of Carillion plc and another CIB customer, both of which moved tonon-performing in 2017. Sovereign and Supranational exposures decreased by 4%. The portfolio profile remained short-term, reflecting the purpose of the holdings.

In Corporate Centre, committed exposures decreased by 28% mainly driven by our Sovereign and Supranational portfolio as part of normal liquid asset portfolio management. Legacy Portfolios in run–off reduced by 16%. Social Housing exposures also reduced as we continue to refinance longer–dated loans onto shorter maturities and current market terms that we then manage in Corporate & Commercial Banking.

Credit risk mitigation

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, we hold collateral on CRE loans and on our healthcare and hotels portfolios. Credit–impaired loans in these portfolios reduced from 2017, resulting in a decrease in the collateral we held against credit–impaired loans. At 31 December 2018, the collateral we held against credit–impaired loans was 43% (2017: 56%) of the carrying amount of the credit–impaired loan exposures. At 31 December 2018, we held collateral of £69m (2017: £134m) against credit–impaired assets of £276m (2017: £393m).

In CIB, the top 20 clients with derivative exposure made up 85% (2017: 65%) of our total derivative exposure, all of which were banks and CCPs. The weighted–average credit rating was 7.1 (2017: 7.2). At 31 December 2018 and 2017, we held no collateral against credit–impaired loans in the Large Corporate portfolio.

In Corporate Centre, we reduce credit risk in derivatives with netting agreements, collateralisation and the use of CCPs.

At 31 December 2018, we had cash collateral of £265m (2017: £348m) held against our performing Legacy Portfolios in run–off. At 31 December 2018, we held collateral of £10m (2017: £13m) against all credit–impaired loan exposure of £16m (2017: £20m).

92    Santander UK plc


> Credit risk

Credit performance

We monitor exposures that show potentially higher risk characteristics using our Watchlist process (described in ‘Monitoring’ in the ‘Credit risk management’ section). The table below shows the exposures we monitor, and those we classify as non–performing by portfolio at 31 December 2018 and 2017.

   

 

Committed exposure

 

       
         

 

Watchlist

 

                   

 2018

 

  

Fully
performing
£m

 

     

Enhanced
monitoring
£m

 

     

Proactive
management
£m

 

     

Non–
performing
exposure(1)
£m

 

     

Total(2) 
£m 

 

     

Loss 
allowances(3) 
£m 

 

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                      

SME and mid corporate

   10,350      972      333      253      11,908       160  

Commercial Real Estate

   6,426      247      47      23      6,743       22  

Social Housing

   4,626      117                  4,743       –  
   

 

 

 

 

21,402

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

1,336

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

380

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

276

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

23,394 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

182 

 

 

 

 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                      

Sovereign and Supranational

   4,200                        4,200       –  

Large Corporate

   15,304      548      186      26      16,064       18  

Financial Institutions

   3,746                        3,746       –  
   

 

 

 

 

23,250

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

548

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

186

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

26

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

24,010 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

18 

 

 

 

 

Corporate Centre

                      

Sovereign and Supranational

   30,166                        30,166       –  

Structured Products

   4,835                        4,835       –  

Social Housing

   4,313      22                  4,335       –  

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

   809      26      7      16      858       13  

Derivatives

   147                        147       –  
   

 

 

 

 

40,270

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

48

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

7

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

16

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

40,341 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

13 

 

 

 

 

Total loss allowances(3)                                     

 

 

 

 

213 

 

 

 

 

                      

 2017

 

                

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                      

SME and mid corporate

   11,185      815      296      334      12,630       128  

Commercial Real Estate

   8,254      160      133      59      8,606       27  

Social Housing

   3,274                        3,274       –  
   

 

 

 

 

22,713

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

975

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

429

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

393

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

24,510 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

155 

 

 

 

 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                      

Sovereign and Supranational

   4,355                        4,355       –  

Large Corporate

   20,757      284      8      390      21,439       236  

Financial Institutions

   6,354      1      100            6,455       –  
   

 

 

 

 

31,466

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

285

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

108

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

390

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

32,249 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

236 

 

 

 

 

Corporate Centre

                      

Sovereign and Supranational

   44,495                        44,495       –  

Structured Products

   4,379                        4,379       –  

Social Housing

   5,972      4                  5,976       –  

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

   977      22      6      20      1,025        

Derivatives

   212                        212       –  

Crown Dependencies

   261                  1      262       –  
   

 

 

 

 

56,296

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

26

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

6

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

21

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

56,349 

 

 

 

 

    

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

 

Total observed impairment loss allowances                                      397  

Allowance for IBNO(4)

                                      

 

52 

 

 

 

Total loss allowances                                      

 

449 

 

 

 

(1)

Non–performing exposure includes committed facilities and derivative exposures. So it can exceed NPLs which only includeon-balance sheet amounts.

(2)

Includes committed facilities and derivatives. We define ‘Enhanced Monitoring’ and ‘Proactive Management’ in the ‘Monitoring‘ section.

(3)

Loss allowances for 2017 were on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on an ECL basis per IFRS 9. The ECL allowance is for both on and off–balance sheet exposures.

(4)

Allowance for IBNO losses as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, the SME and mid corporate portfolio and our CRE portfolio,non-performing exposures (NPEs) reduced, largely due to the workout of a number of smaller loans reaching a conclusion resulting in partial write-offs, without material concentrations across sectors or portfolios. Exposures subject to enhanced monitoring increased due to a social housing case experiencing governance issues plus a small number of CRE cases approaching maturity where repayment or refinance arrangements had yet to be confirmed.

In CIB, Large Corporate exposures subject to enhanced monitoring increased due to a small number of cases that were experiencing performance issues. However, NPEs decreased predominantly due to loan write-offs for Carillion plc and another CIB customer, both of which moved to non–performing in 2017. Financial Institutions exposures subject to proactive monitoring decreased, driven by the transfer of one case to Banco Santander London Branch.

In Corporate Centre, Legacy Portfolios in run–off subject to enhanced monitoring and proactive management remained stable. NPEs reduced driven by continuing exit of the legacy commercial mortgage portfolio.

LOGO

Santander UK plc93


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Loan modifications

The following table provides information on financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at an amount equal to lifetime ECL.

  

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

  

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

  Corporate 
Centre 
£m 
 

Financial assets modified during the period:

            

– Amortised cost before modification

  104       

– Net modification loss

  10      –  

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

            

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the ECL allowance has changed to12-month measurement during the year

  8   7    

Forbearance

We only make forbearance arrangements for lending to customers. The balances at 31 December 2018 and 2017, analysed by their staging (2017: payment status) at the year–end and the forbearance we applied, were:

   

 

2018

 

         

 

2017

 

 
   

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

 

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

 

   

Corporate
Centre
£m

 

        

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

 

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

 

   

Corporate 

Centre(1) 

£m 

 

 

Stock:(1)

               

– Term extension

   67    42           136    55    –  

– Interest–only

   112        8       152        14  

– Other payment rescheduling

   163    26    10         127    299    13  
   

 

 

 

 

342

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

68

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

18

 

 

 

 

       

 

 

 

 

415

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

354

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

27 

 

 

 

 

Of which:

                                   

– Stage 1

   43        3          

– Stage 2

   78    42    8          

– Stage 3

   221    26    7          

– NPL

            273    347    11  

– Performing

                       142    7    16  
   

 

 

 

 

342

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

68

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

18

 

 

       

 

 

 

 

415

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

354

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

27 

 

 

 

 

Proportion of portfolio

  

 

 

 

 

1.5%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

 

0.3%

 

 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2.1%

 

 

 

 

       

 

 

 

 

1.7%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1.1%

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

2.6% 

 

 

 

 

(1)

We base forbearance type on the first forbearance we applied. Tables only show accounts open at the year–end. Amounts are drawn balances and include off balance sheet balances.

2018 compared to 2017(unaudited)

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, the cumulative forbearance stock reduced, mainly due to the resolution of NPL cases, and performing cases exiting forbearance according to defined criteria. Forbearance stock also reduced in CIB, following loan written-offs for Carillion plc and another CIB customer. At 31 December 2018, there were only two forborne cases (2017: five cases) in CIB.

PORTFOLIOS OF PARTICULAR INTEREST

Introduction(unaudited)

Some types of lending have higher risk and others stand out for different reasons. In the section below we provide further details of our CRE and Social Housing portfolios.

ProductDescription

Commercial Real Estate  

The CRE market experienced a challenging environment in the immediate years after the last financial crisis and has previously seen regular cyclical downturns. In addition to the disclosures on the CRE portfolio earlier in this section, we include below more detail on credit performance, LTV analysis, sector analysis, and refinancing risk.

Social Housing

The Social Housing sector in the UK is critical in ensuring the supply of affordable housing across the country. Housing associations now play a prominent role in addressing the UK’s shortage of housing stock across all tenures. The sector benefits from a zero–loss default history aided by its regulated nature. This is a portfolio of particular interest as we hold a significant position in this market. Continued investment in this sector is seen as a direct way to support the UK and, indirectly, the wider community initiatives undertaken by our customers.

We manage and report our Social Housing portfolio in Corporate & Commercial Banking, except for older loans that do not fit our current business strategy, which we manage and report in Corporate Centre. We provide detailed disclosures of our Social Housing portfolios in Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre in the sections above. We provide a summary of our total Social Housing portfolio below, to give a Santander UK–wide view.

Commercial Real Estate

Credit performance

We take a first legal charge on commercial property as collateral. The table below showsloan is subject to strict criteria, including the main CRE credit performance metrics at 31 December 2018property condition, age and 2017

   Customer
loans(1)
£m
   NPLs(2)
£m
   NPL ratio(3)
%
   

Gross write–
offs

£m

   Loss
allowances(4)
£m
 

2018

   6,459    29    0.45    23    26 

2017

   8,144    69    0.85    11    54 

(1)

CRE drawn loans in the business banking portfolio of our Retail Banking segment of £257m (2017: £257m) and in the CRE portfolio of our Corporate & Commercial Banking segment of £6,202m (2017: £7,886m).

location, tenant quality, lease terms and length, and the sponsor’s experience and creditworthiness. Before agreeing the loan, we visit the property and get an independent professional valuation which assesses the property, the tenant and future demand (such as comparing market rent to current rent). Loan agreements typically allow us to view the property each year and get revaluations every two to three years, or more often if it is likely covenants may be breached.
(2)

We define NPLs in the ‘Credit risk management’ section. All NPLs continue accruing interest.

(3)

NPLs as a percentage of customer loans.

(4)

Loss allowances for 2017 were on an incurred loss basis per IAS 39, whilst for 2018 they are on an ECL basis per IFRS 9. The ECL allowance is for both on and off–balance sheet exposures.

94    Santander UK plc


> Credit risk

CRE loans written before 2009 totalled £190m (2017: £380m). The pre–2009 loans were written on market terms which, compared with more recent times and following a significant tightening in our lending criteria, included higher original LTVs, lower interest coverage and exposure to development risk, were more generous.

LTV analysis

The table below shows the LTV distribution for our CRE loan stock and NPL stock (based on the drawn balance and our latest estimate of the property’s current value) of the portfolio at 31 December 2018 and 2017.

     2018           2017       
               Total stock                        NPL stock                     Total Stock                      NPL stock       
 Loans and advances to customers    £m              £m       %       £m                %    £m             % 

<=50%

     3,663        56       3                11       4,146                51    6             9 

>50–70%

     2,039        32       4                14       3,035                37    2             3 

>70–100%

     47        1       1                3       36                    1             1 

>100% i.e. negative equity

     18               16                55       52                1    48             70 

Standardised portfolio(1)

     631        10       5                17       629                8    12             17 

Total with collateral

     6,398        99       29                100       7,898                97    69             100 

Development loans

     61        1       –                       246                3    –              
      6,459        100        29                100        8,144                100     69             100 

(1)

Smaller value transactions, mainly commercial mortgages.

Sector analysis

                     2018                                              2017                      
 Sector    £m         %         £m         % 

Office

     1,556         24        2,181         27 

Retail

     1,004         16        1,389         17 

Industrial

     888         14        1,176         14 

Residential

     927         14        1,001         12 

Mixed use

     932         14        1,146         14 

Student accommodation

     123         2        133         2 

Hotels and leisure

     309         5        304         4 

Other

     89         1        185         2 

Standardised portfolio(1)

     631         10        629         8 
      6,459         100        8,144         100 

(1)

Smaller value transactions, mainly commercial mortgages.

The CRE portfolio is well diversified across sectors, with no significant regional or single name concentration, representing 27% (2017: 30%) of our total lending to corporates and 3% (2017: 4%) of total customer loans. At 31 December 2018, the LTV profile of the portfolio remained conservative with £5,702m (2017: £7,181m) of the non–standardised portfolio assets at or below 70% LTV.

Loans with development risk were only 1% (2017: 3%) of the total CRE portfolio. Development lending is typically on a non–speculative basis with significant pre–lets and/or pre–sales in place. The average loan balance at 31 December 2018 was £3.2m (2017: £4.7m) and the top ten exposures made up 11% (2017: 10%) of the total CRE portfolio exposure.

Refinancing risk

At 31 December 2018, CRE loans of £1,144m (2017: £1,090m) were due to mature within 12 months. Of these, £30m, i.e. 3% (2017: £59m, i.e. 5%) had an LTV ratio higher than is acceptable under our current credit policy. At 31 December 2018, £10m of this (2017: £53m) had been put on our Watchlist or recorded as Stage 3 and NPL, and had an impairment loss allowance of £5m (2017: £27m).

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

In our CRE portfolio, customer loans decreased by 21% as we continue to manage our exposure in line with proactive risk management policies. In 2018, we maintained a prudent lending approach, with no new business written above 70% LTV (2017: nil) and all new business (2017: 91%) written at or below 60% LTV. The weighted average LTV on the CRE portfolio was 47% (2017: 48%).

Exposures subject to enhanced monitoring increased to £247m (2017: £160m). Exposures subject to proactive management decreased by 65% to £47m (2017: £133m) largely driven by a number of successful exits. Non–performing exposures reduced by 61% to £23m (2017: £59m). CRE credit quality remained good with the improvement in the NPL ratio to 0.45% (2017: 0.85%) reflecting loan write-offs.

Social Housing

We take a first legal charge on portfolios of residential real estate owned and let by UK Housing Associations as collateral, in most cases. We revalue this every three to five years (in line with industry practice), using the standard methods for property used for Social Housing. The value would be considerably higher if we based it on normal residential use. On average, the loan balance is 25% to 50% of the implied market value, using our LGD methodology. We have not had a default, loss or repossession on Social Housing. We manage older Social Housing loans that do not fit our current business strategy in Corporate Centre.

Corporate & Investment Banking:

   PortfolioDescription

Large Corporate

Most of these corporate loans and products are unsecured. We also have a structured finance portfolio, where we typically hold legal charges over the assets we finance. For all customer segments, the bank monitors borrowers are in line with expected performance and (where applicable) documented covenants so we detect any financial distress early.

Financial Institutions

We manage the risk on derivatives in this portfolio in the same way as for the derivatives in Financial Institutions in Corporate Centre.

106Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Corporate Centre:

   PortfolioDescription

Sovereign and Supranational

In line with market practice, there is no collateral against these assets.

Structured Products

These are our HQLA and Legacy Treasury asset portfolios. These assets are primarily ABS and covered bonds, which benefit from senior positions in the creditor hierarchy. Their credit rating reflects the over-collateralisation in the structure, and the assets that underpin their cash flows and repayment schedules. We use a detailed expected cash flow analysis to assess the portfolios and we consider the structure and assets backing each individual security.

Social Housing

We manage the risk on this portfolio in the same way as for the Social Housing portfolio in Corporate & Commercial Banking.

Financial Institutions

We use standard legal agreements to reduce credit risk on derivatives, repos and reverse repos, and stock borrowing/lending. We also hold collateral and trade through central counterparties (CCPs) to reduce risk.

Netting – We use netting agreements where they have legal force, mainly in the UK, the rest of Europe and the US. This means that if a counterparty defaults, we can legally offset what we owe them and what they owe us and settle the net amount. However, netting arrangements often do not mean we can offset assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis. In line with market practice, we use standard legal agreements. For derivatives, we use ISDA Master Agreements; for repos and reverse repos, we use Global Master Repurchase Agreements; and for stock borrowing/lending and other securities financing, we use Global Master Securities Lending Agreements.

Collateral – We use the Credit Support Annex with the ISDA Master Agreement. This gives us collateral for our net exposures. The collateral can be cash, securities or equities. For stock borrowing/lending and repos and reverse repos, it includes high quality liquid debt securities and highly liquid equities listed on major developed markets. We revalue our exposures and collateral daily, adjusting the collateral to reflect deficits or surpluses. We have processes to control how we value and manage collateral, including documentation reviews and reporting. Collateral has to meet our ‘Liquid Assets and Eligible Collateral’ policy, which controls the quality and how much of any one kind of collateral we can hold. That gives us confidence we will be able to cash in the collateral if a client defaults. We have these controls for equities and debt securities. The collateral held for reverse repos is worth at least 100% of our exposure.

CCPs – These are intermediaries between a buyer and a seller – generally a clearing house. We use CCPs to reduce counterparty credit risk in derivatives.

Legacy Portfolios inrun-off

We often hold collateral through a first legal charge over the underlying asset or cash. We get independent third-party valuations on fixed charge security in line with industry guidelines. We then review our impairment loss allowance. To do that, we bear in mind:

– The borrower’s ability to generate cash flow

– The age of the assets

– Whether the loan is still performing satisfactorily

– Whether or not the reduction in value is likely to be temporary

– Whether there are other ways to solve the problem.

Where a borrower gets into difficulty we look to dispose of the collateral, either with agreement or through the insolvency process. We do this as early as possible, to minimise any loss. We rarely take ownership of collateral.

Derivatives

We manage the risk on this portfolio in the same way as for the derivatives in Financial Institutions in Corporate Centre.

3. Monitoring

We regularly monitor and report our credit risk by portfolio, segment, industry, location and customer. We give our ERCC a detailed analysis of our credit exposures and risk trends every month. We also report our larger exposures and risks to the Board Risk Committee every month.

Our Watchlist

We also use a Watchlist to help us identify potential problem debt early. Just because a customer is on our Watchlist does not mean they have defaulted. It just means that something has happened that has increased the probability of default. There are several reasons we might put customers on this list. For example, if they suffer a downturn in trade, breach a covenant, lose a major contract, slip into early arrears, or their key management resign. Whatever the trigger, we review the case to assess the potential financial impact.

We classify Watchlist cases as:

Enhanced monitoring:for less urgent cases. If they are significant, we monitor them more often

Proactive management:for more urgent or serious cases. We may take steps to restructure debt including extending the term, taking more collateral, agreeing alower credit limit or seeking repayment of the loan through refinancing or other means.

We assess cases on the Watchlist for impairment in accordance with IFRS 9 as explained in ‘Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SCIR)’ in ‘Santander UK group level – Credit risk management’ section.

When a customer is included in enhanced monitoring, we do not consider that it has suffered a SICR for ECL purposes, so it remains in Stage 1 for purposes of our loss allowance calculations. When a customer is included in proactive management, we consider that it has suffered a SICR. This means we transfer it to Stage 2 and subject it to a lifetime ECL assessment to calculate the new loss allowance. We take into account any forbearance we offer. This includes whether any extra security or guarantees are available, the likelihood of more equity and the potential to enhance value through asset management.

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, as part of our client review process, for loans approaching maturity, we look at the prospects of refinancing the loan on current market terms and applicable credit policy. Where this seems unlikely, we put the case on our Watchlist.

In CIB and Corporate Centre, we monitor the credit quality of our exposures daily. We use both internal and third-party data to detect any potential credit deterioration.

Santander UK plc107


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

4. Arrears management

We identify problem debt by close monitoring, supported by our Watchlist process. When there is a problem, our relationship managers are the first to act, supported by the relevant credit risk expert. If a case becomes more urgent or needs specialist attention, and if it transfers to Stage 3, we transfer it to our Restructuring & Recoveries team.

We aim to act before a customer defaults (to prevent it, if possible). The strategy we use depends on the type of customer, their circumstances and the level of risk. We use restructuring and rehabilitation tools to try to help our customers find their own way out of financial difficulty and agree on a plan that works for both of us. We aim to identify warning signs early by monitoring customers’ financial and trading data, checking to make sure they are not breaching any covenants, and by having regular dialogue with them. We hold regular Watchlist meetings to agree a strategy for each portfolio.

Our Restructuring & Recoveries team are engaged as appropriate on Watchlist cases and we may hand over more serious cases to them.

5. Debt recovery

Consensual arrangements

Where we cannot find a solution like any of the ones we describe above, we look for an exit. If we can, we aim to do this by agreeing with the borrower that they will sell some or all of their assets on a voluntary basis or agreeing to give them time to refinance their debt with another lender.

Enforcement and recovery

Where we cannot find a way forward or reach a consensual arrangement, we consider recovery options. This can be through:

The insolvency process

Enforcing over any collateral

Selling the debt on the secondary market

Considering other legal action available to recover what we are owed from debtors and guarantors.

If there is a shortfall, we write it off against loss allowances we hold. In certain very rare instances, we may act as mortgagee in possession of assets held as collateral againstnon-performing commercial lending. In such cases the assets are carried on our balance sheet and are classified according to our accounting policies.

Loan modifications

Forbearance

If a customer is having financial difficulty, we will work with them before they default to see if the difficulty can be addressed through forbearance. Their problems might be clear from the results of covenant testing, reviews of trading and other data they give us under the terms of their loan or as part of our ongoing conversations with them.

We may offer the following types of forbearance. We only do this if our assessments indicate the customer can meet the revised payments:

   ActionDescription

Term extension

We can extend the term of the loan. At a minimum, we expect the customer to be able to pay the interest in the short-term and have a realistic chance of repaying the full balance in the long-term. We may offer this option if the customer is up to date with their payments but showing signs of financial difficulties. We may also offer this option where the loan is about to mature and near-term refinancing is not possible on market terms.

Interest-only

We can agree to let a customer pay only the interest on the loan for a short time – usually less than a year. We only agree to this if we believe their financial problems are temporary and they are going to recover. After the interest-only period, we expect the customer to go back to making full payments of interest and capital once they are in a stronger financial position. We regularly look at the customer’s financial situation to see when they can afford to do that.

Other payment

rescheduling (including

capitalisation)

If a customer is having cash flow issues, we may agree to lower or stop their payments until they have had time to recover. We may:

–  Reschedule payments to better match the customer’s cash flow – for example if the business is seasonal

–  Provide a temporary increase in facilities to cover peak demand ahead of the customer’s trading improving.

We might do this by adding their arrears to their loan balance (we call this arrears capitalisation) or drawing from an overdraft.

We may also offer other types of forbearance, including providing new facilities, interest rate concessions, seasonal profiling and interestroll-up. In rare cases, we agree to forgive or reduce part of the debt.

Other forms of debt management

When customers are in financial difficulty, we can also manage debt in other ways, depending on the facts of the specific case:

   ActionDescription

Waiving or changing covenants

If a borrower breaks a covenant, we can either waive it or change it, taking their latest and future financial position into account. We may also add a condition on the use of any surplus cash (after operating costs) to pay down their debt to us.

Asking for more collateral or guarantees

If a borrower has unencumbered assets, we may accept new or extra collateral in return for revised financing terms. We may also take a guarantee from other companies in the same group and/or major shareholders. We only do this where we believe the guarantor will be able to meet their commitment.

Asking for more equity

Where a borrower can no longer pay the interest on their debt, we may accept fresh equity capital from new or existing investors to change the capital structure in return for better terms on the existing debt.

Risk measurement and control

We measure the credit risk on treasury products by adding their potential future exposure to market movements over their lives to their fair value. Then we add it to any other exposure and measure the total against our credit limits for each client.

We assess our loss allowances regularly and have them independently reviewed. We look at a number of factors, including the:

Cash flow available to service debt

Value of collateral based on third-party professional valuations.

108Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

OTHER BUSINESS SEGMENTS – CREDIT RISK REVIEW

Movement in total exposures and the corresponding ECL

The following tables show changes in total on andoff-balance sheet exposures and ECL in the year. The footnotes to the Santander UK group level table on page 90 also apply to these tables.

   Stage 1       Stage 2       Stage 3  Total 
  Corporate & Commercial Banking      Exposures(1)
£m
              ECL
£m
          Exposures(1)
£m
              ECL
£m
              Exposures(1)
£m
              ECL
£m
      Exposures(1)
£m
              ECL
£m
 

At 1 January 2019

   21,333   37        1,226   32        276   113   22,835   182 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (747  (3    747   3               

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   120   5     (120  (5              

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   (33       (92  (3    125   3       

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

              6           (6         

Transfers of financial instruments

   (660  2        541   (5       119   3       

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (4       17        32      45 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      7        9              16 

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   5,129   4     350   6     2   1   5,481   11 

Other(6)

   1,293   4     63   (11    49   29   1,405   22 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (7,778  (9    (4  (7    (3  (9  (7,785  (25

Assets written off(7)

                         (81  (41  (81  (41

At 31 December 2019

   19,317   41        2,176   41        362   128   21,855   210 

Net movement in the year

   (2,016  4        950   9        86   15   (980  28 
                                            

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       4            9            56       69 

Less: ECL relating to derecognised income

                (4   (4

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

       (8           (8           (12      (28

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (4           1            40       37 
                                            
  Corporate & Investment Banking  £m  £m      £m  £m      £m  £m  £m  £m 

At 1 January 2019

   17,458   5        134   3        26   10   17,618   18 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (208       208                  

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   41        (41                 

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

                             

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

                                   

Transfers of financial instruments

   (167          167                     

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

              37              37 

Changes to model

                             

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   54                      54    

Other(6)

   376        171   (1    (6  (1  541   (2

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (4,676       (76  (3    (5     (4,757  (3

Assets written off(7)

                                   

At 31 December 2019

   13,045   5        396   36        15   9   13,456   50 

Net movement in the year

   (4,413          262   33        (11  (1  (4,162  32 
                                            

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

                   33            (1      32 

Less: ECL relating to derecognised income

                     

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                   (8           (2      (10

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

                   25            (3      22 
                                            
  Corporate Centre  £m  £m      £m  £m      £m  £m  £m  £m 

At 1 January 2019

   69,060   5        131   3        15   5   69,206   13 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (15       15                  

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   7        (7                 

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   (3       (4       7          

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

                                   

Transfers of financial instruments

   (11          4           7          

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

                      2      2 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      1                      1 

Changes to model

                             

New lending and assets purchased(5) (8)

                             

Other(6)

   (827  (3    (9          1   (836  (2

Redemptions and repayments(7)

                             

Assets written off(7)

                         (5  (2  (5  (2

At 31 December 2019

   68,222   3        126   3        17   6   68,365   12 

Net movement in the year

   (838  (2       (5          2   1   (841  (1
                                            

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

       (2                       3       1 

Less: ECL relating to derecognised income

                (1   (1

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                                       

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (2                       2        

Santander UK plc109


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

   Stage 1      Stage 2      Stage 3  Total 
  Corporate & Commercial Banking          Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
               Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
               Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
          Exposures(1)
£m
          ECL
£m
 

At 1 January 2018

   22,417   43        866   33        388   173   23,671   249 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (670  (3    670   3               

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   200   8     (200  (8              

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

   (41       (31  (1    72   1       

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

   2   1        2   1        (4  (2      

Transfers of financial instruments

   (509  6        441   (5       68   (1      

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (7       10        18      21 

Change in economic scenarios(2)

      5        (3             2 

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   9,115   12     281   5     3   1   9,399   18 

Other(6)

   1,642   (5    (37  (4    23   33   1,628   24 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (11,332  (17    (325  (4    (101  (14  (11,758  (35

Assets written off(7)

                         (105  (97  (105  (97

At 31 December 2018

   21,333   37        1,226   32        276   113   22,835   182 

Net movement in the year

   (1,084  (6       360   (1       (112  (60  (836  (67
                                            

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

    (6     (1     37    30 

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                               (7      (7

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (6           (1           30       23 
                                            
  Corporate & Investment Banking  £m  £m      £m  £m      £m  £m  £m  £m 

At 1 January 2018

   20,503   16        109           372   242   20,984   258 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (2          2                     

Changes to model

                      (10     (10

New lending and assets purchased(5)

   14,799   4     133   3           14,932   7 

Other(6)

   (1,876  (1    83   1     103   76   (1,690  76 

Redemptions and repayments(7)

   (15,966  (14    (193  (1    (150  (46  (16,309  (61

Assets written off(7)

                         (299  (252  (299  (252

At 31 December 2018

   17,458   5        134   3        26   10   17,618   18 

Net movement in the year

   (3,045  (11       25   3        (346  (232  (3,366  (240
                                            

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

    (11     3      20    12 

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                               2       2 

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (11           3            22       14 
                                            
  Corporate Centre  £m  £m      £m  £m      £m  £m  £m  £m 

At 1 January 2018

   63,236   7        250   4        20   8   63,506   19 

Transfers from Stage 1 to Stage 2(3)

   (111  (1    111   1               

Transfers from Stage 2 to Stage 1((3)

   133   3     (133  (3              

Transfers to Stage 3(3)

           (4       4          

Transfers from Stage 3(3)

              3   1        (3  (1      

Transfers of financial instruments

   22   2        (23  (1       1   (1      

Net ECL remeasurement on stage transfer(4)

      (2               1      (1

Change in economic scenarios(2)

                             

Changes to model

                             

New lending and assets purchased(5) (8)

                             

Other(6)

   5,802   (2    (96       (3     5,703   (2

Redemptions and repayments(7)

                             

Assets written off(7)

                         (3  (3  (3  (3

At 31 December 2018

   69,060   5        131   3        15   5   69,206   13 

Net movement in the year

   5,824   (2       (119  (1       (5  (3  5,700   (6
                                            

ECL charge/(release) to the Income Statement

    (2     (1         (3

Less: Recoveries net of collection costs

                               (3      (3

Income statement charge/(release) for the year

       (2           (1           (3      (6

110Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Committed exposures

Credit risk arises on both asset balances and off–balance sheet transactions such as guarantees. As a result, committed exposures are typically higher than asset balances. However, committed exposures can be smaller than the asset balances on the balance sheet due to netting. We show Sovereigns and Supranationals net of short positions and Large Corporate reverse repurchase agreement exposures are shown net of repurchase agreement liabilities and include OTC derivatives. The derivative and other treasury product exposures (which are classified as ‘Financial Institutions’) shown are also typically lower than the asset balances. This is because we show our overall risk exposure which takes into account our procedures to mitigate credit risk. The balances on our balance sheet only reflect the more restrictive netting permitted by IAS 32.

Rating distribution

These tables show our credit risk exposure according to our internal rating scale (see ‘Credit quality’ in the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section) for each portfolio. On this scale, the higher the rating, the better the quality of the counterparty.

   Santander UK risk grade     
  2019  

9

£m

   

8

£m

   

7

£m

   

6

£m

   

5

£m

   

4

£m

   3 to 1
£m
   Other(1)
£m
   

Total

£m

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                  

SME and mid corporate

       25    790    1,914    4,414    3,348    946    32    11,469 

Commercial Real Estate

               426    3,708    1,363    94        5,591 

Social Housing

   1,231    3,650    26            2    4        4,913 
    1,231    3,675    816    2,340    8,122    4,713    1,044    32    21,973 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                  

Large Corporate

   281    2,356    4,419    4,558    842    75    115        12,646 

Financial Institutions

   383    822    703    11                    1,919 
    664    3,178    5,122    4,569    842    75    115        14,565 

Corporate Centre

                  

Sovereign and Supranational

   32,145    2,255                            34,400 

Structured Products

   1,166    981    396    29                    2,572 

Social Housing

   934    3,036    90                        4,060 

Financial Institutions

   542    246    43    25    1                857 

Legacy Portfolios in run–off(2)

               130    27    98    140    303    698 
    34,787    6,518    529    184    28    98    140    303    42,587 
                                              

Total

   36,682    13,371    6,467    7,093    8,992    4,886    1,299    335    79,125 

Of which:

                  

Stage 1

   36,682    13,371    6,441    6,901    8,263    3,586    465    320    76,029 

Stage 2

           26    192    729    1,300    439    15    2,701 

Stage 3

                           395        395 
                  
  2018                                    

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                  

SME and mid corporate

           66    1,745    5,749    3,426    886    36    11,908 

Commercial Real Estate

               302    4,564    1,846    31        6,743 

Social Housing

   680    3,899    138            2    24        4,743 
    680    3,899    204    2,047    10,313    5,274    941    36    23,394 

Corporate & Investment Banking

                  

Large Corporate

   12    3,187    5,535    6,361    888    3    78        16,064 

Financial Institutions

   480    1,010    1,432    55                    2,977 
    492    4,197    6,967    6,416    888    3    78        19,041 

Corporate Centre

                  

Sovereign and Supranational

   30,467    3,898        1                    34,366 

Structured Products

   2,431    2,062    318    24                    4,835 

Social Housing

   1,377    2,839    76    43                    4,335 

Financial Institutions

   356    345    47    21                    769 

Legacy Portfolios in run–off(2)

               203    35    137    126    357    858 

Derivatives

       147                            147 
    34,631    9,291    441    292    35    137    126    357    45,310 
                                              

Total

   35,803    17,387    7,612    8,755    11,236    5,414    1,145    393    87,745 

Of which:

                  

Stage 1

   35,803    17,387    7,612    8,682    10,788    4,772    521    377    85,942 

Stage 2

               73    448    635    318    16    1,490 

Stage 3

                       7    306        313 

(1)

Smaller exposures mainly in the commercial mortgage portfolio. We use scorecards for them, instead of a rating model.

(2)

Commercial mortgages and residual structured and asset finance loans (shipping, aviation, and structured finance).

Santander UK plc111


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Geographical distribution

We typically classify geographical location according to the counterparty’s country of domicile unless a full risk transfer guarantee is in place, in which case we use the guarantor’s country of domicile instead.

     2019        2018 
     UK
£m
     Europe
£m
     US
£m
     Rest of
World
£m
     Total
£m
         

UK

£m

     Europe
£m
     US
£m
     Rest of
World
£m
     Total  
£m  
 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

                                         

SME and mid corporate

     11,384��     84            1      11,469       11,833      74            1      11,908  

Commercial Real Estate

     5,591                        5,591       6,743                        6,743  

Social Housing

     4,913                        4,913          4,743                        4,743  
      21,888      84            1      21,973          23,319      74            1      23,394  

Corporate & Investment Banking

                                         

Large Corporate

     10,665      1,922      2      57      12,646       13,080      2,752      124      108      16,064  

Financial Institutions

     604      841      169      305      1,919          870      1,520      163      424      2,977  
      11,269      2,763      171      362      14,565          13,950      4,272      287      532      19,041  

Corporate Centre

                                         

Sovereign and Supranational

     27,987      1,549      856      4,008      34,400       26,154      1,802      960      5,450      34,366  

Structured Products

     1,710      811            51      2,572       2,574      1,139            1,122      4,835  

Social Housing

     4,060                        4,060       4,335                        4,335  

Financial Institutions

     329      335      157      36      857       346      358      11      54      769  

Legacy Portfolios inrun-off

     587                  111      698       744                  114      858  

Derivatives

                                                   147            147  
      34,673      2,695      1,013      4,206      42,587          34,153      3,299      1,118      6,740      45,310  

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, we saw a 6% reduction in committed exposure, mainly driven by active management of our Commercial Real Estate (CRE) portfolio. Our CRE portfolio decreased by 17% as we continue to manage our exposure in line with proactive risk management policies.

In CIB, committed exposures decreased by 24% mainly due to reductions in our Large Corporate portfolio, driven by facilities that werere-booked in Banco Santander London Branch. Credit quality was stable.

In Corporate Centre, committed exposures decreased by 4% mainly driven by our Structured Products portfolio due to sale of assets following an ALCO strategy change in H219. Sovereign and Supranational exposures decreased by 2% as part of normal liquid asset portfolio management. The portfolio profile remained short-term, reflecting the purpose of the holdings. Legacy Portfolios in run–off reduced by 19%. Social Housing exposures also reduced.

112Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Credit risk mitigation

  2019  Gross
Exposure
Stage 3
£m
     Collateral
Stage 3
£m
     Net
Exposure
Stage 3
£m
 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

          

SME and mid corporate

   279      51      228 

Commercial Real Estate

   83      56      27 
    362      107      255 

Corporate & Investment Banking

          

Large Corporate

   15            15 
    15            15 

Corporate Centre

          

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

   17      11      6 
    17      11      6 
                    
  2018                

Corporate & Commercial Banking

          

SME and mid corporate

   253      55      198 

Commercial Real Estate

   23      14      9 
    276      69      207 

Corporate & Investment Banking

          

Large Corporate

   26            26 
    26            26 

Corporate Centre

          

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

   16      9      6 
    16      9      6 

In CIB, the top 20 clients with derivative exposure made up 90% (2018: 85%) of our total derivative exposure. The weighted–average credit rating of these top 20 clients was 6.1 (2018: 7.1).

Santander UK plc113


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Credit performance

We monitor exposures that show potentially higher risk characteristics using our Watchlist process (described in ‘Monitoring’ in the ‘Credit risk management’ section). The table below shows the exposures we monitor, and those we classify as Stage 3 by portfolio at 31 December 2019 and 2018.

        Committed exposure               
       Watchlist             
 2019  Fully
performing
£m
   Enhanced
    monitoring
£m
   Proactive
management
£m
           Stage 3
£m
   

        Total(1)

£m

   Loss
    allowances
£m
 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

            

SME and mid corporate

   9,864    1,056    270    279    11,469    164 

Commercial Real Estate

   5,338    89    81    83    5,591    46 

Social Housing

   4,823    90            4,913     
    20,025    1,235    351    362    21,973    210 

Corporate & Investment Banking

            

Large Corporate

   11,833    252    546    15    12,646    50 

Financial Institutions

   1,909        10        1,919     
    13,742    252    556    15    14,565    50 

Corporate Centre

            

Sovereign and Supranational

   34,400                34,400     

Structured Products

   2,572                2,572     

Social Housing

   4,047    13            4,060     

Financial Institutions

   854        3        857     

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

   656    17    8    17    698    12 

Derivatives

                        
    42,529    30    11    17    42,587    12 

Total loss allowances

                            272 
                
 2018                        

Corporate & Commercial Banking

            

SME and mid corporate

   10,350    972    333    253    11,908    160 

Commercial Real Estate

   6,426    247    47    23    6,743    22 

Social Housing

   4,626    117            4,743     
    21,402    1,336    380    276    23,394    182 

Corporate & Investment Banking

            

Large Corporate

   15,304    548    186    26    16,064    18 

Financial Institutions

   2,977                2,977     
    18,281    548    186    26    19,041    18 

Corporate Centre

            

Sovereign and Supranational

   34,366                34,366     

Structured Products

   4,835                4,835     

Social Housing

   4,313    22            4,335     

Financial Institutions

   769                769     

Legacy Portfolios in run–off

   809    26    7    16    858    13 

Derivatives

   147                147     
    45,239    48    7    16    45,310    13 

Total loss allowances

                            213 

(1) Includes committed facilities and derivatives. We define ‘Enhanced Monitoring’ and ‘Proactive Management’ in the ‘Monitoring‘ section.

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, Stage 3 exposures increased in the ‘SME and mid Corporate’ portfolio and our ‘CRE’ portfolio, largely due to underlying structural changes impacting some sectors. Exposures subject to enhanced monitoring were broadly unchanged, with increases in the SME and mid Corporate portfolio offset by reductions in the CRE and Social Housing portfolios.

In CIB, Large Corporate exposures subject to enhanced monitoring reduced. Exposures subject to proactive management increased, due to the downgrade of a number of cases that were experiencing performance issues. Stage 3 exposure decreased following a reduction in exposure of a single deal. Financial Institutions exposures subject to enhanced monitoring were unchanged. Exposures subject to proactive management increased due to the downgrade of a single case.

In Corporate Centre, exposures subject to enhanced monitoring and proactive management reduced slightly as the related portfolios continued to be managed for value.

114Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

Loan modifications

The following table sets out the financial assets that were forborne while they had a loss allowance measured at lifetime ECL.

        2019                 2018      
   

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

   Corporate
Centre
£m
      

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

   Corporate
Centre
£m
 

Financial assets modified in the year:

             

– Amortised cost before modification

   135        10     104        2 

– Net modification loss

   8        1        10         

Financial assets modified since initial recognition:

             

– Gross carrying amount of financial assets for which the loss allowance changed to 12m ECL in the year

   34        2        8    7    4 

Forbearance

We only make forbearance arrangements for lending to customers. The balances at 31 December 2019 and 2018, analysed by their staging at the year–end and the forbearance we applied, were:

        2019                2018      
   

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

   Corporate
Centre
£m
  

  

   

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

   Corporate
Centre
£m
 

Stock:(1)

             

– Term extension

   60    42         67    42     

– Interest–only

   110        13     112        8 

– Other payment rescheduling

   192    15    9        163    26    10 
    362    57    22        342    68    18 

Of which:

             

– Stage 1

   57    42    1     43        3 

– Stage 2

   75        11     78    42    8 

– Stage 3

   230    15    10        221    26    7 
    362    57    22        342    68    18 

Proportion of portfolio

   1.6%    0.4%    3.2%        1.5%    0.4%    2.1% 

(1)  We base forbearance type on the first forbearance we applied. Tables only show accounts open at theyear-end. Amounts are drawn balances and include off balance sheet balances.

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In Corporate & Commercial Banking, the cumulative forbearance stock increased slightly. Forbearance stock reduced in CIB, following a reduction in exposure for the one forborne customer in Stage 3. At 31 December 2019, there were only two forborne cases (2018: two cases) in CIB.

Santander UK plc115


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

PORTFOLIOS OF PARTICULAR INTEREST (UNAUDITED)

Introduction

Some types of lending have higher risk and others stand out for other reasons. We give more detail below on two areas of particular interest.

 PortfolioDescription
Commercial Real Estate

The CRE market experienced a challenging environment in the immediate years after the last financial crisis and has previously seen regular cyclical downturns. For those reasons, this is a portfolio of particular interest. We manage and report our Commercial Real Estate portfolio in Corporate & Commercial Banking and Retail Banking.

Social Housing

The Social Housing sector in the UK is critical in ensuring the supply of affordable housing across the country. Housing associations play a prominent role in addressing the UK’s shortage of housing across all tenures. The sector benefits from a zero–loss default history aided by its regulated nature. This is a portfolio of particular interest as we hold a significant position in the market.

We see continued investment in this sector as a direct way to support the UK and, indirectly, the wider community initiatives undertaken by our customers. We manage and report our Social Housing portfolio in Corporate & Commercial Banking, except for older Social Housing loans that do not fit our current business strategy, which we manage and report in Corporate Centre. We provide detailed disclosures of our Social Housing portfolios in in the sections above. We provide a summary of our total Social Housing portfolio below, to give a Santander
UK–wide view.

Commercial Real Estate

Credit performance

The table below shows the main CRE credit performance metrics at 31 December 2019 and 2018.

   

Customer

loans(1)

£m

   

Stage 3(2)

£m

   Stage 3
Ratio(3)
%
   Gross
write–offs
£m
   Total loss
allowance
£m
 

2019

   5,350    89    1.55    8    49 

2018

   6,459    29    0.41    23    26 

(1)

CRE drawn loans in the business banking portfolio of our Retail Banking segment of £241m (2018: £257m) and in the CRE portfolio of our Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centresegment of £5,109m (2018: £6,202m).

(2)

We define Stage 3 in the sections above. At 31 December‘Credit risk management’ section.

(3)

Total Stage 3 exposure as a percentage of customer loans plus undrawn Stage 3 exposures. The way we calculate the Stage 3 ratio was changed from 1 January 2019, and 2018 and 2017, our total Social Housing exposurerestated for consistency. See ‘Key metrics’ in Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre was:the ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’ section.

LTV analysis

The table below shows the LTV distribution for our CRE total stock and Stage 3 stock (based on the drawn balance and our latest estimate of the property’s current value) of the portfolio at 31 December 2019 and 2018.

   2019       2018 
   Stock       Stage 3       Stock       Stage 3 
 LTV          Total
£m
           ECL
£m
               Total
£m
           ECL
£m
               Total
£m
           ECL
£m
               Total
£m
           ECL
£m
 

Up to 50%

   3,133    17      15    8      3,663    5      3     

>50–70%

   1,557    24      63    17      2,039    4      4     

>70–100%

   29    1      1          47    2      1    1 

>100%

   9    1      3    1      18    7      16    7 

Standardised portfolio(1)

   617    6      7    3      631    7      5    2 

Total with collateral

   5,345    49      89    29      6,398    25      29    10 

Development loans

   5                    61    1           
    5,350    49      89    29      6,459    26      29    10 

 

     2018       2017 
     

On-balance
sheet

£m

     

Total 

exposure 

£m 

       

On-balance
sheet

£m

     

Total 

exposure 

£m 

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

     2,844      4,743        2,118      3,274  

Corporate Centre

     3,780      4,335        5,060      5,976  
      6,624      9,078         7,178      9,250  
(1)

Smaller value transactions, mainly commercial mortgages.

LOGO

Santander UK plc95

 

116Santander UK plc


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Credit risk

 

Sector analysis

   2019      2018 
 Sector  

£m

           %      

£m

               % 

Office

   1,262    24     1,556    24 

Retail

   850    16     1,004    16 

Industrial

   699    13     888    14 

Residential

   757    14     927    14 

Mixed use

   759    14     932    14 

Student accommodation

   85    2     123    2 

Hotels and leisure

   268    5     309    5 

Other

   53    1     89    1 

Standardised portfolio(1)

   617    11     631    10 
                5,350                100             6,459                100 

(1)

Smaller value transactions, mainly commercial mortgages.

The CRE portfolio is well diversified across sectors, with no significant regional or single name concentration, representing 24% (2018: 27%) of our total lending to corporates and 3% (2018: 3%) of total customer loans. At 31 December 2019, the LTV profile of the portfolio remained conservative with £4,690m (2018: £5,702m) of the non–standardised portfolio at or below 70% LTV.

Refinancing risk

At 31 December 2019, CRE loans of £1,157m (2018: £1,144m) were due to mature within 12 months. Of these, £2m or 0.2% (2018: £30m or 3%) had an LTV ratio higher than is acceptable under our current credit policy, all of which was reported as Stage 3 (2018: £5m).

2019 compared to 2018

In our CRE portfolio, customer loans decreased by £1.1bn, as we focus on risk-weighted returns to manage our exposure in line with proactive risk management policies. In 2019, we maintained a prudent lending approach, with all new business (2018: 70%) written at or below 60% LTV. The weighted average LTV on the CRE portfolio was 45% (2018: 47%).

Exposures subject to enhanced monitoring decreased to £100m (2018: £247m). Exposures subject to proactive management increased by 70% to £80m (2018: £47m) largely driven by our exposure to the retail sector. Stage 3 exposures increased to £89m (2018: £23m) as a result of deterioration in the retailsub-sector.

Social Housing

We manage and report our Social Housing portfolio in Corporate & Commercial Banking, except for older Social Housing loans that do not fit our current business strategy, which we manage and report in Corporate Centre. We provide detailed disclosures of our Social Housing portfolios in the sections above. At 31 December 2019 and 2018, our total Social Housing exposure was:

   2019   2018 
   

      On-balance

sheet

£m

   

Total

    exposure

£m

   

          Total loss

allowances

£m

   

      On-balance

sheet

£m

   

Total

      exposure

£m

   

Total loss

      allowances

£m

 

Corporate & Commercial Banking

   2,794    4,913        2,844    4,743     

Corporate Centre

   3,585    4,060        3,780    4,335     
    6,379    8,973        6,624    9,078     

Santander UK plc117


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Market risk

Overview(unaudited)

 

Market risk

Overview(unaudited)

Key metrics(unaudited)

Market risk comprises banking market risk and trading market risk. Banking market risk is the risk of loss of income or economic value due to changes to interest rates in the banking book or to changes in exchange rates, where such changes would affect our net worth through an adjustment to revenues, assets, liabilities andoff-balance sheet exposures in the banking book. Trading market risk is the risk of losses in trading positions, both on andoff-balance sheet, due to movements in market prices or other external factors.

In this section, we set out which of our assets and liabilities are exposed to banking and trading market risk. Then we explain how we manage these risks and discuss our key market risk metrics. We also explain how the implementation of our ring-fencing plans in 2018 changed our exposure to trading market risk.

 

Net Interest Margin (NIM) sensitivity to +50bps decreased to £207m and to -50bps decreased to £(23)m (2017: £212m and £(125)m)

Economic Value of Equity (EVE) sensitivity to +50bps increased to £162m and to -50bps decreased to £(124)m (2017: £95m and £(213)m)

BALANCE SHEET ALLOCATION BY MARKET RISK CLASSIFICATION

We analyse our assets and liabilities exposed to market risk between banking and trading market risk as follows:

  

 

2018      

 

      

 

2017      

 

  

 

      Banking 
£m 

   

 

Trading
£m

   

 

Total 
£m 

      

 

Banking
£m

   

 

Trading
£m

   

Total 

£m 

  Key risk factors

 

Assets subject to market risk

     

 

 

 

 

 

 

        

Cash and balances at central banks

  19,747    –     19,747      32,771        32,771   FX, Interest rate

Financial assets at FVTPL:

                

– Trading assets

  –     –     –      –     30,555    30,555   Equity, FX, interest rate

– Derivative financial instruments

  4,559    700    5,259      5,198    14,744    19,942   Equity, FX, interest rate

– Other financial assets at FVTPL

  5,617    –     5,617      2,096        2,096   Interest rate, credit spread

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                

– Loans and advances to customers(1)

  201,289    –     201,289      199,340        199,340   Interest rate

– Loans and advances to banks(1)

  2,799    –     2,799      3,463        3,463   FX, interest rate

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(1)    

  21,127    –     21,127      2,614        2,614   FX, Interest rate

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

  7,229    –     7,229          FX, interest rate, inflation, credit spread

Financial assets at FVOCI

  13,302    –     13,302          FX, interest rate, inflation, credit spread

Financial investments

         17,611        17,611   FX, interest rate, inflation, credit spread

Macro hedge of interest rate risk(2)

  697    –     697      833        833   Interest rate

Retirement benefit assets

  

 

842

 

 

 

   

 

– 

 

 

 

   

 

842 

 

 

 

       

 

449

 

 

 

   

 

 

 

 

   

 

449 

 

 

 

 Equity, FX, interest rate, inflation, credit spread

 

Total assets

 

 

 

 

 

277,208

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

700

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

277,908 

 

 

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

264,375

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

45,299

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

309,674 

 

 

 

 

  

 

Liabilities subject to market risk

                                   

 

Financial liabilities at FVTPL:

 

                                   

 

– Trading liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

 

– 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

– 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

– 

 

 

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

– 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

31,109

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

31,109 

 

 

 

 

 Equity, FX, interest rate

 

– Derivative financial instruments

 

 

 

 

 

 

650

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

719

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

1,369 

 

 

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

722

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

16,891

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

17,613 

 

 

 

 

 Equity, FX, interest rate

 

– Other financial liabilities at FVTPL

 

  

 

6,286

 

 

 

   

 

– 

 

 

 

   

 

6,286 

 

 

 

       

 

703

 

 

 

   

 

1,612

 

 

 

   

 

2,315 

 

 

 

 Interest rate, credit spread

Financial Liabilities at amortised cost:

             

– Deposits by customers

  178,090    –     178,090      183,648        183,648   Interest rate

– Deposits by banks(1)

  17,221    –     17,221      12,708        12,708   FX, interest rate

– Repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

  10,910    –     10,910      1,076        1,076   FX, Interest rate

– Debt securities in issue

  46,692    –     46,692      42,633        42,633   FX, interest rate

– Subordinated liabilities

  3,601    –     3,601      3,793        3,793   FX, interest rate

Macro hedge of interest rate risk(3)

  242    –     242              –   Interest rate

Retirement benefit obligations

  114    –     114         286        286   Equity, FX, interest rate, inflation, credit spread

 

Total liabilities

 

 

 

 

 

263,806

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

719 

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

264,525 

 

 

 

 

      

 

 

 

 

    245,569

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

    49,612

 

 

 

 

  

 

 

 

 

    295,181 

 

 

 

 

  

(1)

From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives are represented accordingly.

(2)

This is included in Other assets of £2,280m (2017: £2,511m).

(3)

This is included in Other liabilities of £2,448m (2017: £2,730m).

96    Santander UK plc


> Market risk

We classify assets or liabilities as trading market risk (in total or just in part) as follows:

Balance sheet classification

Market risk classification

Trading assets and liabilities

We classify all our trading portfolios as trading market risk. Following the implementation of our ring-fencing plans in 2018, the level of trading activity significantly reduced. Since then, we only classify exposures from product sales or other activities with anticipated short holding periods, as well as any related hedging, as trading market risk. For more, see Notes 11 and 23 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Other financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

We classify all our financial assets designated at fair value as banking market risk. We classify our warrant programmes and structured customer deposits as trading market risk. This is because we manage them on a fair value basis. We classify all our other financial liabilities designated at fair value as banking market risk. For more, see Notes 13 and 24 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Derivative financial instruments 

For accounting purposes, we classify derivatives as held for trading unless they are designated as being in a hedging relationship. We treat derivatives that we do not manage on a trading intent basis as banking market risk. For more, see Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

BANKING MARKET RISK

OUR KEY BANKING MARKET RISKS (UNAUDITED)

Banking market risk mainly comes from providingis the risk of loss of income or economic value due to changes to interest rates in the banking productsbook or to changes in exchange rates, where such changes would affect our net worth through an adjustment to revenues, assets, liabilities and servicesoff-balance sheet exposures in the banking book.

Trading market risk is the risk of losses in trading positions, both on andoff-balance sheet, due to movements in market prices or other external factors.

In this section, we set out which of our customers, as well as our structural balance sheet exposures. It arises in all our business segments. In Retail Bankingassets and Corporate & Commercial Banking, it is aby-product of us writing customer businessliabilities are exposed to banking and trading market risk. Then we transfer most ofexplain how we manage these risks to Corporate Centre to manage. The only types of bankingand discuss our key market risk that we keep in Retail Bankingmetrics. We also provide some insight into the process of replacing LIBOR and Corporate & Commercial Banking are short-term mismatches due to forecasting variances in prepayment and launch risk. This is where customers repay their loans at a different point than their expected maturity date or do not take the expected volume of new products. In Corporate & Investment Banking, it arises from short-term markets and lending to corporates, which we also transfer to Corporate Centre to manage. Corporate Centre also manages our structural balance sheet exposures, such as foreign exchange and Income Statement volatility risk.

Our key banking market risks are:other Interbank Offered Rates.

 

Key risksDescription
Interest rate risk  

Key metrics(unaudited)

Net Interest Margin (NIM) sensitivity to +50bps was £99m and to -50bps was £56m (2018: £207m and £(23)m)

Economic Value of Equity (EVE) sensitivity to +50bps was £10m and to -50bps was £(88)m (2018: £162m and £(124)m)

BALANCE SHEET ALLOCATION BY MARKET RISK CLASSIFICATION

We manage our assets and liabilities exposed to market risk as either banking or trading market risk. We classify all our assets and liabilities exposed to market risk as banking market risk, except for certain derivatives that we manage on a trading intent basis. For accounting purposes, we classify all derivatives as held for trading unless they are designated as being in a hedging relationship. The derivatives that we manage on a trading intent basis are a small proportion of the derivatives that we classify as held for trading for accounting purposes. For more, see Note 12 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

BANKING MARKET RISK

OUR KEY BANKING MARKET RISKS(UNAUDITED)

Banking market risk mainly comes from providing banking products and services to our customers, as well as our structural balance sheet exposures. It arises in all our business segments.

In Retail Banking and Corporate & Commercial Banking, it is aby-product of us writing customer business and we transfer most of these risks to Corporate Centre to manage. The only types of banking market risk that we keep in Retail Banking and Corporate & Commercial Banking are short-term mismatches due to forecasting variances in prepayment and launch risk. This is where customers repay their loans earlier than their expected maturity date or do not take the expected volume of new products.

In Corporate & Investment Banking, it arises from short-term markets and lending to corporates, which we also transfer to Corporate Centre to manage. Corporate Centre also manages our structural balance sheet exposures, such as foreign exchange and Income Statement volatility risk.

Our key banking market risks are:

 

Yield curve risk:

  Key risks

Description

Interest rate risk

Yield curve risk: comes from timing mismatches in repricing fixed and variable rate assets, liabilities andoff-balance sheet instruments. It also comes from investingnon-rate sensitive liabilities in interest-earning assets. We mainly measure yield curve risk with NIM and EVE sensitivities, which are measures that are commonly used in the financial services industry. We also use other risk measures, like stress testing and VaR, which we explain in the ‘Trading market risk management’ section that follows. Our NIM and EVE sensitivities cover all the material yield curve risk in our banking book balance sheet.

Basis risk: comes from pricing assets using a different rate index to the liabilities that fund them. We are exposed to basis risks associated with Base Rate, reserve rate linked assets we deposit with central banks, the Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) rate, and LIBOR rates of different terms.

Spread risks

Spread risk arises when the value of assets or liabilities which are accounted for at fair value (either through Other Comprehensive Income or though Profit and Loss) are affected by changes in the spread. We measure these spreads as the difference between the discount rate we use to value the asset or liability, and an underlying interest rate curve. Spread risks can be split into Swap Spread (where the instrument has been issued by a Sovereign counterparty) and Credit Spread (where the instrument has been issued by for example a corporate or bank counterparty). It principally arises in the bond portfolios we hold for liquidity purposes.

We measure spread risk with sensitivities, stress tests, and VaR measures.

Foreign exchange risk        

Ournon-trading businesses operate mainly in sterling markets, so we do not create significant foreign exchange exposures. The only exception to this is money we raise in foreign currencies. For more on this, see ‘Wholesale funding’ in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.

Income statement volatility risk

We measure most of the assets and liabilities in our banking book balance sheet at amortised cost. We sometimes manage their risk profile by using derivatives. As all derivatives are accounted for at fair value, the mismatch in their accounting treatment can lead to volatility in our Income Statement. This happens even if the derivative is an economic hedge of the asset or liability.

BANKING MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk appetite

Our framework for dealing with market risk is part of our overall Risk Framework. The banking market risk framework sets out our high-level arrangements and standards to manage, control and oversee banking market risk. Our Risk Appetite sets the controls, risk limits and key risk metrics for banking market risk. We articulate risk appetite by the income and value sensitivity limits we set in our Risk Appetite, at both Santander UK and Banco Santander group levels.

Risk measurement(unaudited)

For banking market risk, we mainly measure our exposures with NIM and EVE sensitivity analysis.sensitivities, which are measures that are commonly used in the financial services industry. We support this with thealso use other risk measures, we explain in the ‘Trading market risk management’ section that follows. We also monitor our interest rate repricing gap.

LOGO

Santander UK plc97


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

NIMlike Value at Risk (VaR) which is a statistical measure based on a historical simulation of events, and EVE sensitivities

The calculations forstress testing. Our NIM and EVE sensitivities involve many assumptions, including expected customer behaviour (suchcover all the material yield curve risk in our banking book balance sheet.

Basis risk: comes from pricing assets using a different rate index to the liabilities that fund them. We are exposed to basis risks associated with Base Rate, reserve rate linked assets we deposit with central banks, the Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) rate, and LIBOR rates of different terms. As LIBOR and other Interbank Offered Rates are in the process of being replaced, we continue to engage with stakeholders across the business to ensure we capture and understand new risks as early repaymentthey emerge.

Spread risks

Spread risk arises when the value of loans)assets or liabilities which are accounted for at fair value (either through Other Comprehensive Income or though Profit and howLoss) are affected by changes in the spread. We measure these spreads as the difference between the discount rate we use to value the asset or liability, and an underlying interest rates may move. These assumptions arerate curve.

Spread risks can be split into Swap Spread (where the instrument has been issued by a key part of our overall control framework,Sovereign counterparty) and Credit Spread (where the instrument has been issued by for example a corporate or bank counterparty). It principally arises in the bond portfolios we hold for liquidity purposes. We measure spread risk with sensitivities, stress tests and VaR measures.

Foreign exchange risk

Ournon-trading businesses operate mainly in sterling markets, so we updatedo not create significant foreign exchange exposures. The only exception to this is money we raise in foreign currencies. For more on this, see ‘Wholesale funding’ in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.

Income statement volatility risk

We measure most of the assets and liabilities in our banking book balance sheet at amortised cost. We sometimes manage their risk profile by using derivatives. As all derivatives are accounted for at fair value, the mismatch in their accounting treatment can lead to volatility in our Income Statement. This happens even if the derivative is an economic hedge of the asset or liability.

118Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial review them regularly. GovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Market risk

BANKING MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk appetite

Our framework for dealing with market risk is part of our overall Risk Framework. The banking market risk framework sets out our high-level arrangements and standards to manage, control and oversee banking market risk. Our Risk Appetite sets the controls, risk limits and key risk metrics for banking market risk. We articulate risk appetite by the income and value sensitivity limits we set in our Risk Appetite, at both Santander UK and Banco Santander group levels.

Risk measurement(unaudited)

For banking market risk, we mainly measure our exposures with NIM and EVE sensitivity analysis. We support this with VaR risk measures and stress testing. We also monitor our interest rate repricing gap.

NIM and EVE sensitivities

The calculations for NIM and EVE sensitivities involve many assumptions, including expected customer behaviour (such as early repayment of loans) and how interest rates may move. These assumptions are a key part of our overall control framework, so we update and review them regularly.

Our NIM and EVE sensitivities include the interest rate risk from all our banking book positions. Our banking book positions generate almost all our reported net interest income.

 

  NIM sensitivity

–  NIM sensitivity is an income-based measure we use to forecast the changes to interest income and interest expense in different scenarios. It gives us a combined impact on net interest income over a given period – usually 12 or 36 months.

–  We calculate NIM sensitivity by simulating the NIM using two yield curves. The difference between the two NIM totals is the NIM sensitivity.

–  Our main model assumptions are that:

–  The balance sheet is dynamic. This means that it includes therun-off of current assets and liabilities as well as retained and new business

–  We use a behavioural balance sheet rather than contractual one. This means that we adjust balances for behavioural or assumed profile. We do this with most retail products whose behavioural maturity is different to the contractual maturity. This is usually because customers are exercising the option to withdraw or prepay early, or there is no contractual maturity.

  EVE sensitivity

–  We calculate EVE as the change in the net present value of all the interest rate sensitive items in the banking book balance sheet for a defined set of instantaneous parallel andnon-parallel shifts in the yield curve.

–  We use a static balance sheet. This means that all balance sheet itemsrun-off according to their contractual, behavioural or assumedrun-off behaviour (whichever is appropriate), and there is no retained or new business.

 

 NIM sensitivity

 –

NIM sensitivity is an income-based measure we use to forecast the changes to interest income and interest expense in different scenarios. It gives us a combined impact on net interest income over a given period – usually 12 or 36 months.

 –

We calculate NIM sensitivity by simulating the NIM using two yield curves. The difference between the two NIM totals is the NIM sensitivity.

 –

Our main model assumptions are that:

 –

The balance sheet is dynamic. This means that it includes therun-off of current assets and liabilities as well as retained and new business

 –

We use a behavioural balance sheet rather than contractual one. This means that we adjust balances for behavioural or assumed profile. We do this with most retail products whose behavioural maturity is different to the contractual maturity. This is usually because customers are exercising the option to withdraw or prepay early, or there is no contractual maturity.

 EVE sensitivity

 –

We calculate EVE as the change in the net present value of all the interest rate sensitive items in the banking book balance sheet for a defined set of instantaneous parallel andnon-parallel shifts in the yield curve.

 –

We use a static balance sheet. This means that all balance sheet itemsrun-off according to their contractual, behavioural or assumedrun-off behaviour (whichever is appropriate), and there is no retained or new business.

The limitations of sensitivities

We use sensitivities to measure the impact of standard, instantaneous, parallel shifts in relevant yield curves. The advantage of using standard parallel shifts is they generally give us a constant measure of the size of our market risk exposure, with a simple and consistent stress. This compares to specific scenarios like ‘flat rates’. The magnitude of flat rates depends on the shape of the current curve and the shift required to reach the flat rate scenario.

There is one exception to the relative simplicity of parallel shifts. In order to limit negative interest rates, the yield curve may be ‘floored’. Using material parallel shocks does not always seem realistic, or it might not necessarily test the scenarios that have the most impact on us. So we runnon-parallel stress tests too, to calculate the impact of some plausiblenon-parallel scenarios, and over various time periods for income stresses (usually one or three years).

VaR

  VaR

Other ways–  VaR indicates the losses that we might suffer because of measuring riskunfavourable changes in the markets under normal(non-stressed) market conditions.

As well as–  We run a historical simulation using sensitivities and stress tests,the past two years of daily price moves, at a 99% confidence level, to find how much we can measure banking market risk using net notional positions.might lose – the Value at Risk.

–  For any given day’s position, we expect to suffer losses greater than the VaR estimate 1% of the time – once every 100 trading days, or two to three times a year.

  This can givegives us a simple expressionconsistent way of our exposure, although it generally needs to be combined with otherassessing risk measures to coverfor all aspects of a risk profile, such as projected changes over time.

Other metrics we can use include VaR and Earnings at Risk (EaR). VaR can be useful because it captures changes in economic values, as we describe in the Trading market risk section below. However, VaR will not reflect the actual impact of most of our banking book assets and liabilities on our Income Statement. This is because we account for them at amortised cost rather than fair value. EaR is similar to VaR but captures changes in income rather than value. We use this approach mainly to generate aone-year EaR measure to assess Basis risk.

Stress testing

We use stress testing ofrelevant market risk factors in our portfolios.

The limitations of VaR

Whilst VaR is a useful and important market standard measure of risk, it does have some limitations. These include:

VaR assumes what happened in the past is a reliable way to complementpredict what will happen in the risk measurement we get from standard sensitivities.future. This may not always be the case

Stress testing scenarios

Simple stress tests (like parallel shifts in relevant curves) giveVaR is based on positions at the end of the business day so it doesn’t includeintra-day positions

VaR does not predict how big the loss could be on the 1% of trading days that it is greater than the VaR

Using a time horizon of one day means VaR does not tell us clear measures of risk control and a consistent starting point for setting limits. More complex, multi-factor and multi-time period stress tests can give us informationeverything about specific potential events. They can also test various outcomesexposures that we might not capture through parallel stressescannot liquidate or VaR-type measures because of datahedge within a day, or model limitations. We can also use stress tests to estimate losses in extreme market events beyond the confidence level used in VaR models. We can adapt our stress tests to reflect current concerns such as Brexit and other macroeconomic events or changing market conditions quicker than we canproducts with other risk measures, like VaR. We can include both individual business area stresses and SantanderUK-wide scenarios.infrequent pricing.

Back-testing – comparing VaR estimates with reality

To check that the way we estimate VaR is reasonable, we back-test our VaR by comparing it against both actual and hypothetical profits and losses, using aone-day time horizon. Back-testing allows us to identify exceptions – times when the predictions were out of line with what happened. We can then look for trends in these exceptions, which can help us decide whether we need to recalibrate our VaR model.

Other ways of measuring risk

As well as using sensitivities and stress tests, we can measure banking market risk using net notional positions. This can give us a simple expression of our exposure, although we generally need to combine it with other risk measures to cover all aspects of a risk profile, such as projected changes over time.

Other metrics we can use include Earnings at Risk (EaR). Although VaR can be useful as it captures changes in economic values, as we describe above, VaR will not reflect the actual Income Statement impact of most of our banking book positions. This is because we account for them at amortised cost rather than fair value. EaR is like VaR but captures changes in income rather than value. We use this approach mainly to generate aone-year EaR measure to assess Basis risk.

Santander UK plc119


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Stress testing

Stress testing is an essential part of our risk management. It helps us to measure and evaluate the potential impact on portfolio values of more extreme, although plausible, events or market moves. We express limits as on how much we could lose in a stress event, and this restricts how much risk we take.

Stress testing scenarios

Simple stress tests (like parallel shifts in relevant curves) give us clear measures of risk control and a consistent starting point for setting limits. More complex, multi-factor and multi-time period stress tests can give us information about specific potential events. They can also test various outcomes that we might not capture through parallel stresses orVaR-type measures because of data or model limitations. We can also use stress tests to estimate losses in extreme market events beyond the confidence level used in VaR models.

We can adapt our stress tests to reflect current concerns such as Brexit and other macroeconomic events or changing market conditions quicker than we can with other risk measures, like VaR. We can include both individual business area stresses and SantanderUK-wide scenarios. We can produce stress tests using either income or value measures. They cover one or more categories of exposures accounted for on an accruals basis or at fair value. We use expert judgement to define appropriate hypothetical stress tests and any adjusting assumptions based on the balance sheet, management actions and customer behaviour.

How we use stress testing

We discuss stress testing results at senior management committees. They affect Corporate Centre’s decisions by highlighting possible risks in the banking book and the effectiveness of remedial actions we could take. We compare stress test results with stress limits and triggers set by our internal committees, or against metrics set by the PRA. If the results are over our limits or triggers, we take remedial actions and follow an escalation process.

Risk mitigation(unaudited)

We mitigate Income Statement volatility mainly through hedge accounting. We monitor any hedge accounting ineffectiveness that might lead to Income Statement volatility with a VaR measure and trigger, reported monthly. For our accounting policies for derivatives and hedge accounting, see Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

We typically hedge the interest rate risk of the securities we hold for liquidity and investment purposes with interest rate swaps, retaining spread exposures. These retained exposures are the key drivers of the VaR and stress tests we use to assess the risk of the portfolio.

We hedge our foreign currency funding positions back to sterling, so our foreign exchange positions tend to be residual exposures that remain after hedging. These positions could be, for example, to ‘spot’ foreign exchange rates or to cross currency basis. We monitor foreign exchange risk against absolute net exposures andVaR-based limits and triggers.

For more on this, see ‘Funding strategy‘ and ‘Term issuance’ in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.

Risk monitoring and reporting(unaudited)

We monitor the banking market risks of the portfolios we hold for liquidity and investment purposes using sensitivities, VaR and stress tests. We report them against limits and triggers to senior management daily and to ALCO and ERCC each month. The VaR we report captures all key sources of volatility (including interest rate and spread risks) to fully reflect the potential volatility.

LOGO

We have dedicated considerable bank-wide resources to prepare ourselves, and our customers, for the cessation of LIBOR and other legacy interest rate benchmarks. In 2019, our work involved significant contributions from colleagues across all Business Units, Risk Control Areas, our Conduct & Compliance Unit and other support functions:

–  We have a fully established LIBOR transition governance structure, including Senior Management Forums meeting monthly, and thematic and product-level working groups. In addition, regular reports are received by ALCO and Board Risk Committee.

–  We recognise that LIBOR transitioning presents potential risks for our customers. We completed a first phase of customer communication with the website publication of an education statement on the replacement of LIBOR, and we are actively planning a second phase, tailored to individual customer needs.

–  We rolled out LIBOR transition training to all our staff. We supported this with regular internal publications and communications, and dedicated workshops to help colleagues work together and share insights on LIBOR transitioning.

–  We have also been a highly active contributor to discussions on LIBOR transitioning through direct participation at a wide range of industry forums.

This approach allowed us to execute several targeted initiatives, including becoming the first UK bank to switch an existing LIBOR referencing securitisation to SONIA, switching our pension scheme derivative exposures from LIBOR-linked swaps to gilts, and completing a series of derivative trade compressions to reduce our gross LIBOR exposure.

Our most significant exposures are to GBP LIBOR, and mainly represent derivatives transacted to hedge our balance sheet risks, corporate loans and medium-term funding. At 31 December 2019, we estimate our notional value of contracts referencing post-2021 LIBOR benchmarks to be £88bn (unaudited). For details of the notional value of derivative hedging instruments by benchmark interest rate, see Note 11 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. We typically hedge the interest rate risk of the securities we hold for liquidity and investment purposes with interest rate swaps, retaining spread exposures. These retained exposures are the key drivers of the VaR and stress tests we use to assess the risk of the portfolio.

We hedge our foreign currency funding positions back to sterling, so our foreign exchange positions tend to be residual exposures that remain after hedging. These positions could be, for example, to ‘spot’ foreign exchange rates or to cross currency basis. We monitor foreign exchange risk against absolute net exposures and VaR-based limits and triggers. For more, see ‘Our funding strategy and structure’ and ‘Term issuance’ in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.

Risk monitoring and reporting(unaudited)

We monitor the banking market risks of the portfolios we hold for liquidity and investment purposes using sensitivities, VaR and stress tests. We report them against limits and triggers to senior management daily and to ALCO and ERCC each month. The VaR we report captures all key sources of volatility (including interest rate and spread risks) to fully reflect the potential volatility.

 

98    Santander UK plc


120Santander UK plc


 > Market risk

BANKING MARKET RISK REVIEW

2018 compared to 2017 (unaudited)

The reduction in NIM sensitivities in 2018 was largely driven by higher levels of the yield curve over the year and the base rate rise in August 2018. The NIM sensitivities also reflect balance sheet management activities undertaken to manage the net structural position of the business. Each year, we periodically review our risk models and metrics including underlying modelling assumptions to ensure they continue to reflect the risks inherent in the current rate environment and incorporate regulatory expectations. These changes in our underlying assumptions for risk measurement purposes also contributed to the movements in 2018.

The movement in EVE sensitivities in 2018 was mainly due to the balance sheet management activities, changes in our underlying modelling assumptions for risk measurement purposes, and the yield curve movements mentioned above.

The basis risk EaR in 2018 remained broadly stable.

Interest rate risk

Yield curve risk

The table below shows how our base case income and valuation would be affected by a 50 basis point parallel shift (both up and down) applied instantaneously to the yield curve at 31 December 2018 and 2017. Sensitivity to parallel shifts represents the amount of risk in a way that we think is both simple and scalable. 50 basis points is the stress we typically focus on for banking market risk controls, although we also monitor sensitivities to other parallel andnon-parallel shifts as well as scenarios.

     2018                 2017           
     +50bps     -50bps       +50bps     -50bps 
     £m     £m       £m     £m 

NIM sensitivity

     207      (23      212      (125

EVE sensitivity (unaudited)

     162      (124       95      (213

Basis risk(unaudited)

We report basis risk using the EaR approach.

     2018     2017 
     £m     £m 

Basis risk EaR

     25      24 

Interest rate repricing gap(unaudited)

The table below shows the interest rate repricing gap of our balance sheet by repricing buckets.

     3 months   1 year   3 years   5 years     >5 years   Not sensitive   Total 
 2018    £m   £m   £m   £m     £m   £m   £m 

Assets

     128,173    46,354    61,946    26,048      13,705    16,607    292,833 

Liabilities

     194,362    16,762    23,987    13,508      23,345    23,845    295,809 

Off-balance sheet

     11,096    (12,204   (2,731   6,870      (55       2,976 

Net gap

     (55,093   17,388    35,228    19,410      (9,695   (7,238    
                  
 2017                                

Assets

     142,195    34,661    59,253    18,746      15,453    16,782    287,090 

Liabilities

     178,179    18,003    25,487    17,746      25,559    24,801    289,775 

Off-balance sheet

     (10,383   (3,025   4,364    5,636      6,093        2,685 

Net gap

     (46,367   13,633    38,130    6,636      (4,013   (8,019    

Spread risks(unaudited)

The table below shows the risk metrics covering the portfolios of securities held for liquidity and investment purposes.

     2018     2017 
     £m     £m 

VaR

     4      3 

Worst three month stressed loss

     190      193 

LOGO

Santander UK plc99


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

Market risk

 

TRADING MARKET RISK

OUR KEY TRADING MARKET RISKS(UNAUDITED)

Our main exposure to trading market risk is in Corporate & Investment Banking and it is an inherent part of providing financial services for our customers. Our exposures are mainly

BANKING MARKET RISK REVIEW

Interest rate risk

Yield curve risk

The table below shows how our base case income and valuation would be affected by market movements in interest rates, credit spreads, and foreign exchange. We have no exposures in Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking or Corporate Centre. Trading market risk can reduce our net income. Its effect can be seen in our Consolidated Income Statement, where it appears in the ‘Net trading and other income’ line, under ‘Net trading and funding of other items by the trading book’.

The impact of ring-fencing

As part of our ring-fencing plans, activities that can no longer be served by a ring-fenced bank were migrated to the Banco Santander London Branch in 2018. This resulted in most of our market-making activity and the associated trading market risk being transferred outside of the Santander UK group. The implementation of ring-fencing changed our trading market risk profile at 31 December 2018, which can be seen in our VaR disclosures. At 31 December 2018, only a small amount of trading market risk from permitted products and permitted customers remains in the Santander UK ring-fenced bank.

The ring-fenced bank has two trading desks, the Link Desk and Retailed Structured Products (RSP) Desk. The Link Desk is a multi-asset trading desk facilitating the trading of ring-fenced bank permissible products (vanilla products) for those clients served by our CIB division. The aim of the desk is to provide a platform for CIB activity within the ring-fenced bank. The desk operates under an appropriate governance framework to ensure all activity adheres to ring-fencing legislation. The Link Desk will enter into hedging transactions with Relevant Financial Institutions, in accordance with ring-fencing legislation. The RSP desk provides a channel to sell CIB hedged investments (such as ISAs and other notes) to retail investors, through our UK branches and elsewhere. Notes are issued by a 50 basis point parallel shift (both up and down) applied instantaneously to the yield curve at 31 December 2019 and 2018. Sensitivity to parallel shifts represents the amount of risk in a way that we think is both simple and scalable. 50 basis points is the stress we typically focus on for banking market risk controls, although we also monitor sensitivities to other parallel andnon-parallel shifts as well as scenarios.

   2019      2018 
                   +50bps                   -50bps                      +50bps                   -50bps 
   £m   £m      £m   £m 

NIM sensitivity

   99    56     207    (23

EVE sensitivity (unaudited)

   10    (88    162    (124

Basis risk(unaudited)

We report basis risk using the EaR approach.

                   2019                       2018     
   £m       £m     

    Basis risk EaR

   18        25     

Interest rate repricing gap(unaudited)

The table below shows the interest rate repricing gap of our balance sheet by repricing buckets.

               3 months              1 year              3 years              5 years              >5years              Not sensitive              Total 
  2019  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 

Assets

   107,155   50,284   67,439   32,918   12,561   16,539   286,896 

Liabilities

   188,773   17,513   22,774   12,892   21,900   24,064   287,916 

Off-balance sheet

   14,945   (18,495  4,481   (1,516  1,605      1,020 

Net gap

   (66,673  14,276   49,146   18,510   (7,734  (7,525   
        
  2018                      

Assets

   128,173   46,354   61,946   26,048   13,705   16,607   292,833 

Liabilities

   194,362   16,762   23,987   13,508   23,345   23,845   295,809 

Off-balance sheet

   11,096   (12,204  (2,731  6,870   (55     2,976 

Net gap

   (55,093  17,388   35,228   19,410   (9,695  (7,238   

Spread risks (unaudited)

The table below shows the risk metrics covering the portfolios of securities we hold for liquidity and investment purposes.

                   2019                   2018 
   £m   £m 

VaR

   3    4 

Worst three month stressed loss

   132    190 

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

The reduction in NIM and EVE sensitivities in 2019 was largely driven by balance sheet management activities. These included leaving fixed rate assets unhedged, increasing the net structural position over the latter end of the year primarily to mitigate further margin compression risk as a result of lower levels of the yield curve. The movement in sensitivities over the year also reflected the separation of SFS exposures from the ring-fenced bank group sensitivities following the implementation of our ring-fencing plans.

In 2019, the worst three month stressed loss decreased more compared to the decrease in VaR in the year due to the sale of £2bn of liquidity assets in Q4 2019. The assets that were sold had a greater impact on the stress results than the VaR. This was due to the conservative nature of the stress scenarios that we use.

The basis risk EaR in 2019 decreased due to the natural evolution of the balance sheet leading to a reduced underlying net basis position, as well as methodology updates to ensure we fully capture LIBOR transition risks.

We continue to periodically review our risk models and metrics including underlying modelling assumptions to ensure they continue to reflect the risks inherent in the current rate environment and incorporate regulatory expectations.

In addition, as discussed earlier, climate-related risks could eventually manifest in risks for financial institutions. During 2020, we will review the appropriate parts of the Risk Framework, Risk Type Frameworks (in particular Credit and Operational risk, but also market risk) and the Risk Appetite Statement to explicitly include climate-related risks.

Santander UK plc and hedged with Relevant Financial Institutions, in accordance with ring-fencing legislation. This RSP activity raises funding for the Santander UK group. There is low trading market risk associated with the trading activity as notes are hedged and a price is made before any client transaction which reflects the live execution prices of all hedge and funding unwinds.121


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

TRADING MARKET RISK

OUR KEY TRADING MARKET RISKS(UNAUDITED)

Our main exposure to trading market risk is in Corporate & Investment Banking and it is an inherent part of providing financial services for our customers. Our exposures are mainly affected by market movements in interest rates, credit spreads, and foreign exchange. We have no exposures in Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking or Corporate Centre. Trading market risk can reduce our net income. Its effect can be seen in our Consolidated Income Statement, where it appears in the ‘Net trading and other income’ line, under ‘Net trading and funding of other items by the trading book’.

Following the implementation of our ring-fencing plans in 2018, only a small amount of trading market risk from permitted products and permitted customers remains. This arises from hedging activity andback-to-back trading, with client trading and negligible position-taking. In all cases, market risk is hedged with Banco Santander SA or CCPs, in accordance with ring-fencing legislation.

We have two trading desks. The Link Desk sells ring-fenced bank permissible products to clients. The Retail Structured Products desk (RSP) sells investments (Santander UK plc issued notes) to retail investors, through our UK branches and elsewhere. The Link Desk has risk exposure to the credit quality of our clients. The adjustment for this is known as the Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA) and feeds our valuations and hence income and expense. The low level of direct market risk in our trading business means that this is the main driver of income statement movements, along with similar factors – principally Debt Valuation Adjustment (DVA) driven by our own credit, and Liquidity Valuation Adjustment (LVA) driven by the market price of liquidity. These valuation adjustments are collectively referred to as XVAs.

Our reduced level of trading market risk after ring-fencing led us to decommission our Internal Model. As a result, from 1 January 2019, we calculate market risk capital using standardised rules.

Following the implementation of our ring-fencing plans, the majority of trading market risk is now from hedging activity andback-to-back trading, with generallysmaller-sized client trading and negligible position-taking. As a result of this reduced activity, we expect to significantly reduce our trading market risk limits for 2019.

As a result of ring-fencing, and in response to the significant reduction in trading market risk in Santander UK and the corresponding reduction in market risk-related capital, we applied for and received approval from the ECB and PRA to decommission our Internal Model effective from 1 January 2019. The permission for an internal model was for certain trading book activity that has now been closed. For more on our Internal Model, see the ‘Capital requirement measures’ section below.

TRADING MARKET RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk appetite

Our framework for dealing with market risk is part of our overall Risk Framework. The market risk Frameworkframework sets out our high-level arrangements and minimum standards for managing, controlling and overseeing trading market risk. Our Risk Appetite sets the controls, risk limits and key risk metrics for trading market risk. The key risk metrics includeis low, so we only report a stress economic loss limit and risk-factor stress scenarios. We report these key metricsqualitative measure to the BRC andBoard. We monitor trading market risk using stress measures which we report to the ERCC each month.

Risk measurement(unaudited)

WeFor trading market risk, we have a range of ways of measuring trading market risk, but one of the most important is a statistical measure based on a historical simulation of events called ‘Value at Risk’ (VaR).

VaR

 VaR

– VaR shows the losses that we might suffer because of unfavourable changes in the markets under normalnon-stressed market conditions.

– To calculate VaR we run a historical simulation, at a given confidence level, over a specified time period. We use one or two years of daily price history, with each day given equal weighting.

– This means we include most market risk factors that could make a difference, and it gives us a consistent way of assessing risk for all these factors in all our portfolios.

– We work with three main types of VaR, which all use the same calculation models. They are Internal VaR, Regulatory VaR and Stressed VaR. We have governance and controls for all forms of VaR, and we regularly review and assess them.

 Internal VaR

– We use this to calculate the total VaR in our trading book. It covers all the risk asset classes: interest rate, equity, credit (spread) and foreign exchange. We use two years of data for this simulation.

– Like the rest of Banco Santander, we use a time horizon of one day and a confidence level of 99%. For any given day’s trading position, we would expect to suffer losses greater than the VaR estimate 1% of the time – once every 100 trading days, or two to three times a year.

– For Internal VaR, we also calculate a time-weighted VaR using Banco Santander’s method. This gives more weight to the most recent days in the last two years, which means VaR changes more quickly in line with current market volatility. That gives us a better indication of how the market’s behaviour is changing, mitigating some limitations of VaR.

– We measure Internal VaR every day, comparing the equally-weighted result with the time-weighted result and report the higher against the Santander UK and business unit level limits. The Santander UK limits were previously approved by the ERCC. Following the completion of the ring-fencing transfer scheme and the significant reduction in trading book activity, the Santander UK limits are now approved by the Market and Structural Risk Control Forum rather than ERCC. We also report our equally weighted VaR against asset class and individual desk level limits. Whenever we find a limit has been exceeded, we report it, following the market risk framework. The main classes of risk that we measure Internal VaR on are interest rate, equity and credit spread risks.

100    Santander UK plc


> Market risk

 Regulatory VaR and Stressed VaR

– We use these VaR models to calculate how much capital we need to hold for trading market risk. For these calculations, we only look at the factors for which we hold approval from the ECB and PRA (as we operate under their joint supervision). For credit and foreign exchange – factors which are not approved by the PRA for our VaR capital models – we use the standardised approach to calculate how much capital to hold. We also use the standardised approach for the ring-fenced bank. For more on this, see the ‘Capital requirement measures’ section.

– For Regulatory VaR, we use a time horizon of ten days and a confidence level of 99%. To calculate theten-day time horizon, we use theone-day VaR multiplied by the square root of ten. This is the industry standard approach to scaling known as the ‘square root of time’ approach. We use the same two years of history as with Internal VaR. Stressed VaR is the same, except that we use only one year of history, from a time when markets were stressed relative to our current portfolio.

The limitations of VaR

Whilstincluding VaR is a useful and important market standard measure of risk it does however have some limitations, these include:

VaR assumes what happened in the past is a reliable way to predict what will happen in the future, which may not always be the case.
VaR is based on positions at the end of the business day so it doesn’t includeintra-day positions.
VaR gives no guide to how big the loss could be on the 1% of trading days that it is greater than the VaR.
Using a time horizon of one day means VaR does not tell us everything about exposures that we cannot liquidate or hedge within a day, or products with infrequent pricing or whose structures are more complex.

Back-testing – comparing VaR estimates with reality

In order to check that the way(which we estimate VaR is reasonable, we back-test our one day 99% Internal and Regulatory VaR each day by comparing them against both actual and hypothetical profits and losses, using aone-day time horizon.

Back-testing allows us to identify exceptions – times when the predictions were out of line with what happened. We can then look for trends in these exceptions, which can help us decide whether we need to recalibrate our VaR model. The CRR sets out criteria for how many exceptions are acceptableexplain in the Regulatory VaR model. The PRA’s Supervisory Statements clarify the requirements further. If there are five or more exceptions in 250 days, then points are added to our capital requirement multiplier.Banking market risk management section above) and detailed sensitivity measures.

It is not normally possible to back-test Stressed VaR, because it is not intended to tell us anything about our performance in normal conditions.

Stress testing

Stress testing is an essential part of our risk management. It helps us to measure and evaluate the potential impact on portfolio values of more extreme, although plausible, events or market moves. We express limits to how much we could lose in a stress event, and this restricts how much risk we take.

Stress testing scenarios

The scenarios we use for stress testing are outlined in our trading market risk appetite and are central to the monthly Board Risk Appetite reporting. The scenarios are also part of our daily processes for setting and monitoring risk management limits. We calculate the impact of over 100 scenarios on our CIB trading books, each day. Over half of these are reported against limits, and we escalate any breaches. This could lead to our front office being asked to reduce risk. The others are not calibrated to the same severity – for instance to a much longer holding period or for a completely artificial scenario - and so are not in the same limit structure.

month. The scenarios we create are partlymay be inspired by past events, like the global financial crisis. They may also include plausible ways that unusual market conditions could occur in the future that impact interest rates, equity prices and exchange ratesrates. Most are reported against limits, and credit spreads. Stress testing helps usso could lead to see how different amountsour front office being asked to reduce risk. Our scenarios are not all calibrated to the same severity – some may be for a much longer holding period or a completely artificial and unrealistic scenario. We therefore do not limit all of liquiditythem in the markets would affect us in a stress event, such as an equity crash. It is important to make sure that the stress result we report is as realistic as possible. For more on how we design our scenarios for stress testing see ‘Stress Testing’ in the Risk Governance section.same way.

How we use stress testing

We use limits to manage how much risk we take. They aretake, expressed as how much we could lose in a stress event. We need to make sure the effects of potential poor market conditionspossible events do not exceed the Risk Appetite set by the Board. We regularly inform senior managers, including the ERCC and BRC, of the BRC about the results of our stress calculations, based on our current positions.results.

Capital requirement measures

Whenever we make changes to our models, we assess their effect on our capital requirements. Sometimes that means we need to tell the PRA and ECB and get their approval before we can make the change.

 MethodDescription

The Internal Models Approach (IMA)

The PRA has given us permission to use the IMA, in line with CRR, and every three months the PRA reviews what we are doing. The IMA means we can use Regulatory and Stressed VaR and RNIV to calculate the trading market risk capital requirement for the risk factors and businesses that we have ECB and PRA approval for.

Following the implementation of the Ring-Fence Transfer Scheme, we applied to the ECB and PRA and received approval for a reverse extension application in order to decommission our IMA model from 1 January 2019. We no longer have any trading book positions on which to calculate IMA capital requirements. All other trading book positions in the ring-fenced bank are calculated using the standardised approach.

The standardised approach 

For risk factors and businesses not included in the IMA, we use the standardised approach set out by the CRR and PRA Supervisory Statements. At 31 December 2018, this amounted to 34% (2017: 11%) of our total market risk capital requirement. The increase is due to the lower level of total market risk capital from the IMA reduction at the year end.

Risk mitigation(unaudited)

We manage and control trading market risk within clear parameters. We measure and monitor our risk exposures against these limits. There are specific levels that trigger relevant teams to take actionact or alert people in other functions. This means we can limit the impact of any negative market movements, while also improving our earnings. We keep the business units that originate trading market risk separate from the functions responsible for managing, controlling and overseeing risk.

Risk monitoring and reporting(unaudited)

We document and maintain a complete set of written policies, procedures and processes to help identify, assess, manage and report trading market risk.

 

LOGO

122Santander UK plc101


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Market risk

 

    

 

TRADING MARKET RISK REVIEW

2018 comparedVaR

This table and graph show our Internal VaR for exposure to 2017(unaudited)

each of the main classes of risk for 2019 and 2018. The VaR figures show how much the fair values of all our tradeable instruments could have changed. Since trading instruments are recorded at fair value, these are also the amounts by which they could have increased or reduced our net income.

As noted earlier, as part of our ring-fencing plans, activities that can no longer be served by a ring-fenced bank were migrated to the Banco Santander London Branch in 2018. This resulted in most of our market-making activity and the associated trading market risk being transferred outside of the Santander UK group. The implementation of ring-fencing changed our trading market risk profile at 31 December 2018, which can be seen in the VaR tables below. With this reduced activity the market risk limits for 2019 will therefore be significantly reduced (VaR has reduced from £6m to £1m). At 31 December 2018, only a small amount of trading market risk from permitted products and permitted customers remains in the Santander UK ring-fenced bank.

There were no total VaR limit breaches in 2018. Following the completion of ring-fencing we saw an increase in the number of regulatory back-testing exceptions. This was due to the profit and losses on the residual activity in the trading book being driven more bynon-market risk drivers, such as fee income, than by market risk drivers, such as changes in interest rates. This meant that VaR fell by more than expected, leading to a higher number of exceptions. For this increase in the number of exceptions (which was over the expected2-3 in a 250 day period) the capital calculations used the associatedCRR-required capital multipliers. As these residual trading books were inrun-off, the number of exceptions reduced in Q4 2018 and from 1 January 2019 there are no longer any trading positions in these portfolios that generate trading market risk.

VaR

This table and graph shows our Internal VaR for exposure to each of the main classes of risk for 2018 and 2017.

         Year-end exposure                     Average exposure                    Highest exposure                    Lowest exposure           Year-end exposure    Average exposure    Highest exposure    Lowest exposure 
 2018   2017   2018   2017   2018   2017   2018   2017  
Trading instruments £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m                    2019
£m
                 2018
£m
                    2019
£m
                 2018
£m
                    2019
£m
                 2018
£m
                    2019
£m
                 2018
£m
 

Interest rate risks

 0.5    2.6    1.4    2.5     3.9    3.5     0.2    1.8     0.2   0.5     0.4   1.4     0.6   3.9     0.1   0.2 

Equity risks

 –    0.3    0.2    0.6     0.6    2.0         0.2     0.0        0.0   0.2     0.1   0.6     0.0    

Foreign exchange risks

 0.1    0.3     0.3    0.4      0.9    1.6          –     0.4   0.1      0.2   0.3      0.4   0.9      0.1    

Diversification offsets(1)

 (0.2)   (0.7    (0.5)   (0.8                   –     (0.3  (0.2     (0.3  (0.5     (0.5        (0.0   

Total correlatedone-day VaR

 0.4    2.5     1.4    2.7      3.8    3.7      0.3    2.0     0.3   0.4      0.3   1.4      0.6   3.8      0.2   0.3 

 

(1)

The highest and lowest exposures for each risk type did not necessarily happen on the same day as the highest and lowest total correlatedone-day VaR. It is impossible to calculate a corresponding correlation offset effect, so we have not included it.

 

LOGOLOGO

2019 compared to 2018 (unaudited)

In 2019, only a small amount of trading market risk from permitted products and permitted customers remained. There were no breaches of the total VaR limit in 2019. Following the completion of ring-fencing in 2018, we saw an increase in the number of back-testing exceptions. This was due to the profit and loss on the residual activity in the trading book being driven bynon-market risk factors, such as fee income and value adjustments. These are not captured in VaR and outweigh the effect of market risk factors such as interest rates, which do affect VaR. These back-testing exceptions have no impact as we no longer calculate capital under an Internal Model Approach.

 

102Santander UK plc


 > Liquidity risk123


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

Liquidity risk

 

 

Overview(unaudited)

  

 

Key metrics(unaudited)

Liquidity risk is the risk that, while still being solvent, we do not have the liquid financial resources to meet our obligations when they fall due, or we can only obtain them at high cost.

 

In this section, we describe our sources and uses of liquidity and how we manage liquidity risk. We also analyse our key liquidity metrics, including our LCRLCRs and our eligible liquidity pool.pools.

 

We then explain our funding strategy and structure and we analyse our wholesale funding. Finally, we analyse how we have encumbered some of our assets to support our funding activities.

 

  

RFB DoLSub LCR increased toof 142% (2018: DoLSub LCR of 164% (2017: 120%)

 

Wholesale funding and AT1 with maturity <1 year up to £16.5bn (2017: £14.9bn)£22.5bn (2018: £16.5bn)

 

RFB DoLSub LCR eligible liquidity pool increased to £54.1bn (2017: £48.5bn)of £42.0bn (2018: DoLSub £54.1bn)

OUR KEY LIQUIDITY RISKS(UNAUDITED)

Through our LRA framework, we manage our funding or structural contingent and market liquidity risks wherever they arise. This can be in retail and corporate deposit outflows, wholesale secured and unsecured liquidity outflows andoff-balance sheet activities. Other risks our framework covers include funding concentrations,intra-day cash flows, intra-group commitments and support, and franchise retention.

Our main sources of liquidity

Customer deposits finance most of our customer lending. Although these funds are mostly callable, in practice they give us a stable and predictable core of funding. This is due to the nature of retail accounts and the breadth of our retail customer relationships.

We have a strong wholesale funding investor base, diversified across product types and geographies. Through the wholesale markets, we have active relationships in many sectors including banks, other financial institutions, corporates and investment funds. We access the wholesale funding markets through the issuance of capital, senior unsecured debt, covered bonds, structured notes and short-term funding. We also access these markets through securitisations of certain assets of Santander UK plc and our operating subsidiaries. For more on our programmes, see Notes 15, 2814, 21 and 2925 in the Consolidated Financial Statements.

We generate funding on the strength of our own balance sheet, our own profitability and our own network of investors. We comply with rules set by the PRA, other regulators, and Banco Santander standards. While we manage, consolidate and monitor liquidity risk centrally, we also manage and monitor it in the business area it comes from. For more on our structural relationship with Banco Santander and how that impacts our liquidity management, see the Directors’ report.

In addition, we have access to UK Government funding schemes.

Our main uses of liquidity

Our main uses of liquidity are to fund our lending in Retail Banking and Corporate & Commercial Banking, to pay interest and dividends, and to repay debt. Our ability to pay dividends depends on various factors. These include our regulatory capital needs, the level of our distributable reserves, and our financial performance. We also use liquidity to pay for business combinations.

LIQUIDITY RISK MANAGEMENT

Introduction(unaudited)

In 2018 we managedWe manage liquidity risk on a consolidated basis in our CFO division, which is our centralised function for managing funding, liquidity and capital. We created our governance, oversight and control frameworks, and our LRA, on the same consolidated basis.

From 1 January 2019, following the implementation of ring-fencing, we monitor and manage liquidity risk for the Santander UK plc group and SFS separately. Under this model, and the PRA’s liquidity rules, Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries ANTS andsubsidiary Cater Allen Limited form the RFB Domestic LiquiditySub-group (DoLSub)(the RFB DoLSub), which allows the entities to collectively meet regulatory requirements.requirements for the purpose of managing liquidity risk. Each member of the RFB DoLSub will support the othersother by transferring surplus liquidity in times of stress.

WithPrior to 1 January 2019, Santander UK plc, SFS and Cater Allen Limited formed the Domestic LiquiditySub-group (the DoLSub), which allowed those entities to collectively meet regulatory liquidity requirements. The RFB DoLSub permission granted with effect from 1 January 2019 and in accordance with our ring-fence structure, Santander UK plc was granted a new DoLSub permission, withdrawing ANTSwithdrew SFS from the existing UKprevious DoLSub.

LOGO

 

124Santander UK plc103


Annual
Strategic Report 2018 | Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Liquidity risk

 

 

Risk appetite

Our LRA statement is based on the principles of liquidity management we use to manage our balance sheet. It also supports our need to meet or exceed the rules of our regulators. In line with our liquidity management principles, we avoid an over-reliance on funding from a single product, customer or counterparty. We also maintain enough unencumbered customer assets to support current and future funding and collateral requirements and maintain enough capacity to monetise liquid assets and other counterbalancing capacity within an appropriate timeframe.

Our LRA is proposed to the Risk division and the Board, which is then approved under advice from the Board Risk Committee. Our LRA, in the context of our overall Risk Appetite, is reviewed and approved by the Board each year, or more often if needed. From 1 January 2019, separate LRAs for Santander UK plc and for ANTS plc have been approved. These are appropriate to their individual business models and consistent with the strategy of Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Risk measurement(unaudited)

We use a number of metrics to manage liquidity risk. These include metrics that show the difference between cash and collateral inflows and outflows in different periods. They also include structural metrics, such as our level of encumbered assets.

Ongoing business management

Within our framework of prudent funding and liquidity management, we manage our activities to minimise our liquidity risk. We have clear responsibilities for short-term funding, medium-term funding, encumbrance, collateral and liquid asset management. This ensures we manage liquidity risks as part of our daily operations, strategy and planning.

Our liquidity management framework is split between short-term and strategic activities. Our short-term activities focus onintra-day collateral; management and maintaining liquid assets to cover unexpected demands on cash in a stress scenario (such as large and unexpected deposit withdrawals by customers and loss of wholesale funding). Our strategic activities focus on ensuring we are not over reliant on any one source for funding and that we avoid excessive concentrations in the maturity of our funding.

We regularly test the liquidity of our eligible liquidity pool, in line with PRA and Basel rules. We do this by realising some of the assets through repurchase or outright sale to the market. We make sure that over any12-month period we realise a significant part of our eligible liquidity pool. As well as our eligible liquidity pool, we always hold a portfolio of unencumbered liquid assets at all times.assets. Our LRA and PRA requirements determine the size and composition of this portfolio. These assets give us a source of contingent liquidity, as we can realise some of them in a time of stress to create liquidity through repurchase or outright sale to the market.

Stress testing

We have a liquidity stress test framework in place which is central to our LRA measurement and monitoring. It includes three severe but plausible stress test scenarios. To fit with our risk appetite, the liquidity outflows that come from these stress tests must be fully covered with high-quality liquid assets, other liquid assets and management actions sanctioned at the right level of governance. Additionally, a funding plan disruption stress scenario forms part of our LRA monitoring.

Our Risk division runs a range of stress tests. Our LRA stress test is a combination of three testtests that cover idiosyncratic, market-wide and combined scenarios.

Our other tests consider scenarios such as a global economic slowdown that results in reduced confidence in the banking industry, a slowdown in one of the major economies or a deterioration in the availability of liquidity. These are considered on both an acute and protracted basis. We also run severe combined stress tests which look at both a deep and prolonged UK recession that results in a reduction in wholesale funding availability and a simultaneous idiosyncratic shock that would lead to retail and commercial outflows.

We also conduct sensitivity analysis and reverse stress testing for instant liquidity shocks by each key liquidity risk. We do this to understand the impacts they would have on our LRA and our regulatory liquidity metrics.

We monitor our LCR to ensure we continue to meet the requirements. Although the Basel Committee published its final Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) standards in October 2014, the NSFR has not yet been implemented within the EU (unlike the LCR). As such, there is no formal NSFR requirement applicable to UK or other EU banks until such time as the European Commission adopts appropriate regulatory and technical standards. Nonetheless, we monitor our NSFR on an ongoing basis and standwill be ready to comply with the standards once agreed.

Risk mitigation(unaudited)

The Board aims to make our balance sheet resilient at all times and for it to be perceived as such by stakeholders. This preserves our short and long-term viability. The Board recognises that as we are involved in maturity transformation, we cannot hold enough liquidity to cover all possible stress scenarios. The Board requires us to hold enough liquidity to make sure we will survive three plausible but severe stress scenarios (our LRA stress). We do this by maintaining a prudent balance sheet structure and approved liquid resources.

Recovery framework

In the event of a liquidity or capital stress, we have developed a series of actions outlined in our Recovery Plan. This enables us to respond to a wide variety of stresses, from mild to severe, in a coordinated and efficient manner. Our Recovery Plan addresses how we would manage a capital or liquidity stress. We would invoke it in response to triggers across a range of metrics falling outside threshold levels, or a qualitative assessment of potential serious risks to our financial position and balance sheet strength. All of these metrics are part of our existing risk management processes. The Recovery Plan would be invoked as early and proactively as possible in order to mitigate a stress with suitable actions.

TheOur Recovery Plan is approved by the Board under advice from the Board Audit Committee and is subject to ongoing review and enhancement. The CFO division manages the Recovery Planrecovery and resolution plans and the operational continuity process.

Risk monitoring and reporting(unaudited)

We monitor liquidity risk daily, weekly and monthly. We do this through different committees and levels of management, including ALCO and the Board Risk Committee.

 

104Santander UK plc


 > Liquidity risk125


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

LIQUIDITY RISK REVIEW(unaudited)(UNAUDITED)

2018 compared to 2017

Throughout 2018 we maintained robust risk management controls to monitor and manage the levels of our eligible liquidity pool and encumbrance. The LCR increased to 164% at 31 December 2018 (2017: 120%), This increase reflects prudent planning and somepre-funding of our 2019 wholesale funding requirements. The lower USD balance reported in the eligible liquidity pool reflects the impact of ring-fencing on our liquidity requirements.
Our LCR eligible liquidity pool significantly exceeded our wholesale funding of less than one year, with a coverage ratio of 322% at 31 December 2018 (2017: 326%). The coverage ratio was broadly flat year on year, but continues to be volatile due to the management of normal short-term business commitments.
The LRA increased 29%, reflecting prudent planning and somepre-funding of our 2019 wholesale funding requirements offsetting an increase in the severity of the stress scenarios.

Liquidity Coverage Ratio

This table shows our LCR and LRA at 31 December 2019 and 2018. The LCR at 31 December 2019 reflects the RFB DoLSub, and at 31 December 2018 and 2017. It reflects the previous DoLSub. The LRA data reflect the stress testing methodology in place at that time.

 

  LCR RFB DoLSub(1)     LRA RFB(2) 
    LCR      LRA(1) 
    

            2018

£bn

               2017  
£bn  
     

             2018

£bn

                  2017  
£bn  
               2019
£bn
               2018
£bn
               2019
£bn
               2018 
£bn 
 

Eligible liquidity pool (liquidity value)

     53.0    47.4         52.2    45.7      41.6   53.0     40.6   52.2 

Net stress outflows

     (32.4   (39.7)         (32.1   (34.7)     (29.3  (32.4    (31.7  (32.1

Surplus

     20.6    7.7          20.1    11.0      12.3   20.6     8.9   20.1 

Eligible liquidity pool as a percentage of anticipated net cash flows

     164%    120%          163%    132%      142%   164%     128%   163% 

 

(1)

For 2019, in accordance with our ring-fence structure, data is for the RFB DoLSub. For 2018, i.e. before the implementation of ring-fencing, data is for the previous DoLSub. The RFB LCR was 146%.

(2)

The LRA is calculated for the Santander UK plc group (the RFB Group) and is a three-month Santander UK specific requirement.

LCR eligible liquidity pool

This table shows the carrying value and liquidity value of our eligible liquidity pool assets at 31 December 2019 for the RFB DoLSub and 31 December 2018 and 2017.for the previous DoLSub. It also shows the weighted average carrying value in the year.

 

                      RFB DoLSub  
  Carrying value   Liquidity value(1)   Weighted average carrying     
value in the year             
 
    Carrying value       Liquidity value(1)           Weighted average carrying    
value in the year
 
    

            2018

£bn

                 2017 
£bn 
     

            2018

£bn

                 2017 
£bn 
     

        2018

£bn

             2017 
£bn 
                   2019
£bn
               2018
£bn
                     2019
£bn
               2018
£bn
                     2019
£bn
   

2018 

£bn 

 

Cash and balances at central banks

     22.4      30.9        22.4      30.9        24.4      23.6     19.3    22.4     19.3    22.4     19.1    24.4 

Government bonds

     26.1      12.5        25.7      12.3        16.8      19.6     17.9    26.1     17.7    25.7     20.8    16.8 

Supranational bonds and multilateral development banks

     1.1      1.0        1.1      1.0        1.1      1.1     2.9    1.1     2.9    1.1     2.9    1.1 

Covered bonds

     2.7      2.7        2.5      2.3        2.6      2.7     1.5    2.7     1.4    2.5     2.4    2.6 

Asset-backed securities

     1.7      0.6        1.3      0.5        1.4      0.8     0.4    1.7     0.3    1.3     1.4    1.4 

Equities

     0.1      0.8               0.4         2.1      1.1         0.1                  2.1 
     54.1      48.5         53.0      47.4         48.4      48.9     42.0    54.1     41.6    53.0     46.6    48.4 

 

(1)

Liquidity value is the carrying value with the applicable LCR haircut applied.

Currency analysis

This table shows the carrying value of our eligible liquidity pool by major currencies at 31 December 2019 for the RFB DoLSub and 31 December 2018 and 2017,for the previous DoLSub. The composition of the pool is consistent with the currency profile of our net liquidity outflows.

 

    

US Dollar

£bn

     Euro
£bn
     Sterling
£bn
     Other
£bn
     Total 
£bn 
 
              US Dollar
£bn
                   Euro
£bn
                  Sterling
£bn
                  Other
£bn
          RFB DoLSub 
Total 
£bn 

2019

   3.6   1.2  36.1  1.1  42.0 

2018

     5.3      3.9      42.2      2.7      54.1     5.3   3.9  42.2  2.7  54.1 

2017

     9.2      1.8      36.7      0.8      48.5  

126Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Liquidity risk

Composition of the eligible liquidity pool

This table shows the allocation of the carrying value of the assets in our eligible liquidity pool for LRA and LCR purposes at 31 December 2019 for the RFB DoLSub and 31 December 2018 and 2017.for the previous DoLSub.

 

                        RFB DoLSub 
  
  2019    2018 
  

2018

      2017 
  LCR eligible liquidity pool     Of which      LCR eligible liquidity pool     Of which    LCR eligible liquidity pool   Of which
LRA eligible
£bn
    LCR eligible liquidity pool      
    Level 1
£bn
     Level 2A
£bn
     Level 2B
£bn
     Total
£bn
   

LRA 

eligible 
£bn 

       Level 1
£bn
     Level 2A
£bn
     Level 2B
£bn
     Total
£bn
   

LRA 

eligible 
£bn 

       Level 1
£bn
       Level 2A
£bn
       Level 2B
£bn
           Total
£bn
       Level 1
£bn
       Level 2A
£bn
       Level 2B
£bn
           Total
£bn
   Of which
LRA eligible
£bn
 

Cash and balances at central banks

   22.4            22.4    21.8      30.9            30.9    30.3     19.3            19.3    19.3     22.4            22.4    21.8  

Government bonds:

                                          

– AAA to AA-

   23.6            23.6    23.3      11.0            11.0    11.0     16.7            16.7    16.7     23.6            23.6    23.3  

– A+ to A

       2.5        2.5    2.5          1.5        1.5    1.5         1.2        1.2    1.2         2.5        2.5    2.5  

Supranational bonds and multilateral development banks:

                                          

– AAA to AA-

   1.1            1.1    1.1      1.0            1.0    1.0     2.9            2.9    2.5     1.1            1.1    1.1  

Covered bonds:

                                          

– AAA to AA-

   1.6    1.1        2.7    2.7      1.5    1.2        2.7    2.7     1.4    0.1        1.5    1.5     1.6    1.1        2.7    2.7  

Asset-backed securities:

                                          

– AAA to AA-

           1.7    1.7    1.7              0.6    0.6    0.6             0.4    0.4    0.4             1.7    1.7    1.7  

Equities

           0.1    0.1    0.1               0.8    0.8    0.8                                 0.1    0.1    0.1  
   48.7    3.6    1.8    54.1    53.2       44.4    2.7    1.4    48.5    47.9     40.3    1.3    0.4    42.0    41.6     48.7    3.6    1.8    54.1    53.2  

2019 compared to 2018

LOGOWhile RFB DoLSub LCR remains high at 142%, it is lower than 2018 reflecting reduced uncertainty.

The RFB DoLSub LCR and LCR eligible liquidity pool both decreased following the transfer of our Isle of Man and Jersey businesses (Crown Dependencies) into SFS in 2018 as part of ring-fencing implementation.

 

Santander UK plc 105127


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

FUNDING RISK MANAGEMENT

Funding strategy(unaudited)

Our funding strategy continues to be based on maintaining a conservatively-structuredconservatively structured balance sheet and diverse sources of funding to meet the needneeds of our business strategy and plans. The CFO Division maintains a funding plan and ensures it is compliant with the LRA and regulatory liquidity and capital requirements.

Most of our funding comes from customer deposits. We source the rest from a mix of secured and unsecured funding in the wholesale markets. Overall, this means that we do not rely too heavily on wholesale funds. We manage funding requirements by targeting a specific Liquidity Coverage Ratio, we ensure maturities are prefunded and capital/TLAC requirements are prioritised. We also have checks and controls to limit our asset encumbrance from our secured funding operations. As part of maintaining a diverse funding base, we raise funding in a number of currencies, including euro and USD, and convert it into sterling through currency swaps to fund our commercial assets which are largely sterling denominated.

Our base of stable retail and corporate deposits is a key funding source for us. We leverage our large and diverse customer base to offer products that give us a long-term sustainable source of funding. We do this by focusing on building long-term relationships. Around 90%Over 85% of our total core retail customer liabilities are covered by the Financial Services Compensation Scheme (the FSCS).

Behavioural maturities

The contractual maturity of our balance sheet assets and liabilities highlights the maturity transformation that underpins the role of banks to lend long term, but to fund themselves mainly with shorter-term liabilities, like customer deposits. We do this by diversifying our funding operations across a wide customer base, both in numbers and by type of depositor. In practice, the behavioural profiles of many liabilities show more stability and longer maturity than their contractual maturity. This is especially true of many types of retail and corporate deposits that, while they may be repayable on demand or at short notice, have shown good stability even in times of stress. We model behaviour profiles using our experience of customer behaviour. We use this data to determine the funds transfer pricing interest rates at which we reward and charge our business units for sources and uses of funds. We apply this rate until a customer changes ontoto a different product or service offered by us or by one of our competitors.

We continue to improve the quality of our retail, commercial and wholesale deposits. We aim to deepen our customer relationships across all customer segments. We do this to lengthen the contractual and behavioural profile of our liability base.

Deposit funding

We mainly fund our Retail Banking and Corporate & Commercial Banking activities by customer deposits. We fund the rest through wholesale markets.

Wholesale funding

Wholesale funding and issuance model(unaudited)

Banco Santander is a multiple point of entry resolution group. This means that should it fail,fail; it would be split up into parts. Healthy parts might be sold or be kept as a residual group without their distressed sister companies. The resolution or recapitalisation of the distressed parts might be effected via ‘bail in’ of bonds that had been issued to the market by a regional intermediate holding company.

Santander UK is a single point of entry resolution group. This means that resolution would work downwards from the group’s holding company (i.e. Santander UK Group Holdings plc). Losses in subsidiaries would first be transferred up to Santander UK Group Holdings plc. If the holding company is bankrupt as a result, the group needs resolving.is deemed to be failing or likely to fail, it will be put into resolution. The ‘bail in’ tool is applied to the holding company, with the equity being written off and bonds written off or converted into equity as needed to recapitalise the group. Those bondholders would become the new owners, and the group would stay together.

Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the immediate holding company of Santander UK plc and offers nobut does not guarantee to them.its debts or other obligations. This structure is a Bank of England recommended configuration which aims to resolve banks without disruptingensure the activities of theirthe operating companies,company are not disrupted as the group goes through resolution, thereby maintaining continuity of services for customers.

Composition of wholesale funding(unaudited)

We are active in the wholesale markets and we have direct access to both money market and long-term investors through our funding programmes. This makes our wholesale funding well diversified by product, maturity, geography and currency. This includes currencies available across a range of channels from money markets, repo markets, senior unsecured, secured, medium-term and capital. For details of our main programmes, see the Funding Information section of our websitewww.santander.co.uk/uk/about-santander-uk/investor-relations/funding-information.

Following the implementation of our ring-fencing plan, Santander UK plc is now our main operating company issuer of senior unsecured debt, structured notes, short-term funding and covered bonds.

Our immediate parent Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the issuer of capital and MREL/Total Loss Absorbing Capacity (TLAC) eligible senior unsecured debt. The Financial Stability Board established the TLAC standard in 2015 and it is applied from 1 January 2019. The standard is designed to enhance the resilience of the global financial system by ensuring that failing Global Systemically Important Banks(G-SIBs) have sufficient capital to absorb losses and recapitalise under resolution, whilst continuing to provide critical banking services. In the EU, the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD) sets out a framework for all European banks and investment firms, not justG-SIBs, to satisfy a Minimum Requirement for own funds and Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The Banking Act 2009 was amended in 2014 as part of the UK implementation of the BRRD and HM Treasury will remediate deficiencies caused by the UK’s withdrawal from the EU in the Bank Recovery and Resolution (Amendment) (EU Exit) Regulations 2018. MREL is designed to ensure that banks have sufficient liabilities to prevent broader financial disruption or use of public funds in resolution. Since the implementation of CRR II in June 2019,G-SIBs have been subject to the MREL standard. Since 1 January 2019, UK resolution entities that areG-SIBs or are part of aG-SIB , including our immediate parent Santander UK Group Holdings plc, have been required to meet the TLAC minimum requirements, implemented through the Bank of England Statement of Policy on MREL in the UK. The TLAC requirement is the higher of 16% of RWAs on a consolidated basis or 6% of leverage exposures on a consolidated basis. The Company is subject to internal MREL as it meets the requirements of a material subsidiary of our ultimate parent Banco Santander SA.

We also access the wholesale markets through securitisations of certain assets of the Santander UK group’sour operating subsidiaries. In addition, we have access to UK Government funding schemes. Eligible collateral for these schemes includes all collateral that is eligible in the Bank of England’s Discount Window Facility. We ensure that sufficientenough collateral is placed and available at the Discount Window.

 

106128 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Liquidity risk

 

FUNDING RISK REVIEW

20182019 compared to 20172018 (unaudited)

Together with our immediate parent, Santander UK Group Holdings plc, our overall funding strategy remains to develop and sustain a diversified funding base. We also need to fulfil regulatory requirements as well as support our credit ratings. 2018 presented a challenging market environment for issuance, debt capital markets experienced pockets of volatility throughout the year. However, despite the continuing backdrop of globalgeo-political turbulence and the ongoing concerns around Brexit, the credit markets remained open and we saw good demand from investors for high quality paper, though at wider credit spreads. The bulk of funding in 2018 was done in the first half of the year, taking advantage of the more positive market conditions.

2019 had a much lower funding requirement than average. Wepre-funded 2019 and managed our maturity profile to increase LCR at the end of 2018, ensuring we did not have large requirements when the UK was expected to leave the EU.

In 2018,2019, our total term funding was £17.1bn (2017: £11.8bn)£4.5bn (2018: £17.1bn), of which £14.8bn (2017: £7.3bn)£4.1bn (2018: £14.8bn) was medium-term issuance and £2.3bn (2017: £4.0bn)none (2018: £2.3bn) was from the closed UK Government’s Term Funding Scheme (TFS).

The £14.8bn£4.1bn medium-term funding included £2.7bn of downstreamed funding from issuances by our immediate parent (since 1 January 2019, Santander UK Group Holdings plc has downstreamed c.£8.7bn to Santander UK plc as ‘secondarynon-preferential debt’ in line with the MREL guidelines of the Bank of England, such debt is subordinated to our existing senior unsecured liabilities), £4.5bn£0.9bn of senior unsecured notes, £4.3bn£2.9bn of covered bonds and £3.3bn£0.1bn of securitisations from the Company.securitisations.

Maturities in 20182019 were £6.9bn (2017: £13.1bn)£8.1bn (2018: £6.9bn). At 31 December 2018,2019, 67% (2018: 77% (2017: 75%) of wholesale funding had a maturity of greater than one year, with an overall residual duration of 3733 months (2017: 43(2018: 37 months). The total drawdown outstanding from the TFS was unchanged at £10.8bn (2017: £8.5bn)(2018: £10.8bn) and the total drawdowns of UK Treasury Bills under the FLS were at £1.0bn (2017: £3.2bn)(2018: £1.0bn).

In 2019, c£7bn of medium-term funding was left in US Dollars and a further £1bn in Euro. These balances were used to fund customer assets and our HQLA portfolio.

Our level of encumbrance from external and internal issuance of securitisations and covered bonds remained broadly static in 2018,2019, as planned.

Reconciliation of wholesale funding to the balance sheet

This table reconciles our wholesale funding to our balance sheet at 31 December 20182019 and 2017.2018.

 

   Balance sheet line item 
       Repurchase   Financial             

                Balance sheet line item

 
 Funding Deposits Deposits by 

agreements

– non

 Trading 

liabilities

designated

 

Debt

securities

 Subordinated 

Other equity 

 
 analysis by banks customers(1) trading(2) liabilities at fair value in issue liabilities instruments(3)  
2018 £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn  
2019  Funding
analysis
£bn
   

Deposits

by banks

£bn

   

Deposits

by customers(1)

£bn

   

Repurchase
agreements –

non trading

£bn

   

Financial

liabilities

designated

at fair value

£bn

   

Debt

securities

in issue

£bn

   

Subordinated

liabilities

£bn

   

Other equity

instruments(2)

£bn

 

Deposits

 1.0  1.0                     –     0.3    0.3                        –  

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

 6.4                 6.4      –     5.8                    5.8        –  

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

 21.2     8.6           12.6      –     18.8        8.6            10.2        –  

– privately placed

 4.0     0.1        1.0  2.9      –     2.7        0.1        1.0    1.6        –  

Covered bonds

 16.6                 16.6      –     18.2                    18.2        –  

Securitisation and structured issuance

 7.8     0.5  2.2        5.1      –     5.6            1.4    0.5    3.7        –  

Term Funding Scheme

 10.8  10.8                     –     10.8    10.8                        –  

Subordinated liabilities and equity

 5.0                    3.0  2.0     5.2                        3.0    2.2 

Total wholesale funding

 72.8  11.8  9.2  2.2     1.0  43.6  3.0  2.0     67.4    11.1    8.7    1.4    1.5    39.5    3.0    2.2 

Repos

 10.8        8.7     2.1         –     16.9            16.9                –  

Foreign exchange and hedge accounting

 4.2     0.5           3.1  0.6   –     2.5        0.4            1.6    0.5    –  

Other

 8.6  5.4(4)           3.2         –     3.5    3.3(3)            0.2            –  

Balance sheet total

 96.4  17.2  9.7  10.9     6.3  46.7  3.6  2.0     90.3    14.4    9.1    18.3    1.7    41.1    3.5    2.2 
                         
2017                   
2018                                

Deposits by banks

  0.3   0.2            0.1         –     1.0    1.0                        –  

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

  8.0               0.4   7.6      –     6.4                    6.4        –  

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

  17.8      6.0            11.8      –     21.2        8.6            12.6        –  

– privately placed

  3.1               1.1   2.0      –     4.0        0.1        1.0    2.9        –  

Covered bonds

  14.2                  14.2      –     16.6                    16.6        –  

Securitisation and structured issuance

  5.5      0.5   1.0         4.0      –     7.8        0.5    2.2        5.1        –  

Term Funding Scheme

  8.5   8.5                     –     10.8    10.8                        –  

Subordinated liabilities and equity

  5.5                     3.2   2.3     5.0                        3.0    2.0 

Total wholesale funding

  62.9   8.7   6.5   1.0      1.6   39.6   3.2   2.3     72.8    11.8    9.2    2.2    1.0    43.6    3.0    2.0 

Repos

  25.6         0.1   25.5            –     10.8            8.7    2.1            –  

Foreign exchange and hedge accounting

  3.9      0.3            3.0   0.6   –     4.2        0.5            3.1    0.6    –  

Other

  10.3   4.0(4)         5.6(5)   0.7         –     8.6    5.4(3)            3.2            –  

Balance sheet total

  102.7   12.7   6.8   1.1   31.1   2.3   42.6   3.8   2.3     96.4    17.2    9.7    10.9    6.3    46.7    3.6    2.0 

 

(1)

This is included in our balance sheet total of £178,090m (2017: £183,648m)£181,883 m (2018: £178,090 m).

(2)

From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives arere-presented accordingly.

(3)

Consists of £14m (2017:£nil (2018: £14m) fixed/floating ratenon-cumulative callable preference shares, £235m (2017:(2018: £235m)Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments and £1,756m (2017: £2,046m)£1,956 m (2018: £1,756 m) Perpetual Capital Securities. See Note 34Notes 30 and 31 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(4)(3)

Other consists of items in the course of transmission and other deposits, excluding the TFS. See Note 26 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(5)

Short positions in securities and unsettled trades, cash collateral and short-term deposits. See Note 23 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 107129


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Maturity profile of wholesale funding

This table shows our main sources of wholesale funding. It does not include securities financing repurchasefinance agreements. The table is based on exchange rates at issue and scheduled repayments and call dates. It does not reflect the final contractual maturity of the funding.

 

 < 1 >1 and 

 

>3 and

 >6 and >9 and Sub-total >1 and >2 and     
 month <3 months <6 months <9 months <12 months <1 year <2 years <5 years >5 years Total 
2018 £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn £bn 
2019  £ 1
    month
£bn
   

    >1 and £ 3

months

£bn

   

    >3 and £

6 months

£bn

   

    >6 and £ 9
months

£bn

   

    >9 and £ 12

months

£bn

        Sub-total
£ 1 year
£bn
   

>1 and

    £ 2 years
£bn

   

>2 and

    £ 5 years

£bn

       >5 years
£bn
   

        Total

£bn

 

Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc(1)

Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc(1)

 

      

Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc(1)

 

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

                   0.8  6.2  1.6  8.6                    0.8    0.8    1.8    4.2    1.7    8.5 

– privately placed

                         0.1  0.1                                    0.1    0.1 

Subordinated liabilities and equity (incl. AT1)

       0.2     0.3  0.5     0.8  1.5  2.8                                1.0    2.0    3.0 
       0.2     0.3  0.5  0.8  7.0  3.2  11.5                    0.8    0.8    1.8    5.2    3.8    11.6 

Other Santander UK plc

                              

Deposits by banks

    1.0           1.0           1.0    0.1    

 
       0.2        0.3                0.3 

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

 1.5  3.6  1.1  0.1  0.1  6.4           6.4    0.6    3.1    2.0    0.1        5.8                5.8 

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

 0.8  1.5     0.6     2.9  4.8  3.5  1.4  12.6    0.8    1.4        0.6    1.9    4.7    2.9    1.9    0.8    10.3 

– privately placed

       1.0  0.3     1.3  1.8  0.4  0.4  3.9        0.9        0.9        1.8    0.4    0.1    0.3    2.6 

Covered bonds

          1.4     1.4  2.8  8.4  4.0  16.6            1.8        1.0    2.8    5.6    6.2    3.6    18.2 

Securitisation and structured issuance(2)

 0.8  0.6  0.6  0.2  0.4  2.6  0.8  2.5     5.9    0.2        0.8    0.2    0.2    1.4    1.3    1.3        4.0 

Term Funding Scheme

                   4.5  6.3     10.8                    4.5    4.5    4.0    2.3        10.8 

Subordinated liabilities

                      0.9  1.3  2.2                                0.9    1.3    2.2 
 3.1  6.7  2.7  2.6  0.5  15.6  14.7  22.0  7.1  59.4    1.7    5.4    4.6    2.0    7.6    21.3    14.2    12.7    6.0    54.2 

Other group entities

                              

Securitisation and structured issuance(3)

    0.1  0.1  0.1  0.1  0.4  0.4  1.1     1.9 

Securitisation & structured issuance(3)

       0.1    0.1    0.1    0.1    0.4    0.6    0.6        1.6 
                               

Total at 31 December 2018

 3.1  6.8  3.0  2.7  0.9  16.5  15.9  30.1  10.3  72.8 

Total at 31 December 2019

   1.7    5.5    4.7    2.1    8.5    22.5    16.6    18.5    9.8    67.4 

Of which:

                              

– Secured

 0.8  0.7  0.7  1.7  0.5  4.4  8.5  18.3  4.0  35.2    0.2    0.1    2.7    0.3    5.8    9.1    11.5      3.6    34.6 

– Unsecured

 2.3  6.1  2.3  1.0  0.4  12.1  7.4  11.8  6.3  37.6    1.5    5.4    2.0    1.8    2.7    13.4    5.1    8.1    6.2    32.8 
 3.1  6.8  3.0  2.7  0.9  16.5  15.9  30.1  10.3  72.8    1.7    5.5    4.7    2.1    8.5    22.5    16.6    18.5    9.8    67.4 
                                         

Total at 31 December 2017

  4.8   3.9   3.3   1.4   1.5   14.9   7.9   28.9   11.2   62.9 
2018                                        

Total at 31 December 2018

   3.1    6.8    3.0    2.7    0.9    16.5    15.9    30.1    10.3    72.8 

Of which:

                              

– Secured

  0.9      1.4      1.3   3.6   2.9   18.3   3.4   28.2    0.8    0.7    0.7    1.7    0.5    4.4    8.5    18.3    4.0    35.2 

– Unsecured

  3.9   3.9   1.9   1.4   0.2   11.3   5.0   10.6   7.8   34.7    2.3    6.1    2.3    1.0    0.4    12.1    7.4    11.8    6.3    37.6 
  4.8   3.9   3.3   1.4   1.5   14.9   7.9   28.9   11.2   62.9 

 

(1)

95%94% of Senior Unsecured debt issued from Santander UK Group Holdings plc has been downstreamed to Santander UK plc as ‘secondarynon-preferential debt’ in line with the guidelines from the Bank of England for Internal MREL.

(2)

Includes funding from mortgage-backed securitisation vehicles where Santander UK plc is the asset originator.

(3)

Includes funding from asset-backed securitisation vehicles where entities other than Santander UK plc are the asset originator.

Currency composition of wholesale funds

This table shows our wholesale funding by major currency at 31 December 20182019 and 2017.2018.

 

  2019     2018 
    2018        2017 
    Sterling
%
     US Dollar
%
     Euro
%
     Other
%
       Sterling
%
     US Dollar
%
     Euro
%
     Other
%
   

      Sterling

%

       US Dollar
%
           Euro
%
           Other
%
         Sterling
%
      US Dollar
%
           Euro
%
           Other
%
 

Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc

Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc

 

                 

Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc

 

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

     11      65      22      2       9      67      22      2    11    65    22       11   65    22     

– privately placed

                       100                         100                100               100  

Subordinated liabilities and equity (incl. AT1)

     64      36                   68      32                67    33        –    64   36        –  
     23      57      17      3        28      54      14      4    25    56    16       23   57    17     

Other Santander UK plc

                                                 

Deposits by banks

     3      97                   27      73                3    97        –    3   97        –  

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

     48      52                   89      10            1    45    54    1    –    48   52        –  

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

     11      56      33             9      49      42          14    54    32    –    11   56    33    –  

– privately placed

     13      12      72      3       7      19      70      4    21    15    59       13   12    72     

Covered bonds

     50            49      1       47            52      1    54        45       50       49     

Securitisation and structured issuance

     61      35      4             80      20             

Securitisation & structured issuance

   72    28        –    61   35    4    –  

Term Funding Scheme

     100                         100                      100            –    100           –  

Subordinated liabilities

     49      51                   52      48                49    51        –    49   51        –  
     48      25      26      1        49      19      32          54    22    24    –    48   25    26     

Other group entities

                                                    

Deposits by banks

                                    100             

Certificates of deposit and commercial paper

                              34      65      1       

Securitisation and structured issuance

     89      11                   91            9       

Securitisation & structured issuance

   95    5        –    89   11        –  
     89      11                    47      50      3                              

Total

     46      30      24              45      28      25      2    50    27    22       46   30    24    –  

 

108130 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Liquidity risk

 

Term issuance

In 2018,2019, our external term issuance (sterling equivalent) was:

 

      Sterling   US Dollar       Euro       Other   Total 2019   Total 2018 
    Sterling
£bn
   US Dollar
£bn
     Euro
£bn
     Other
£bn
   Total 2018
£bn
   Total 2017
£bn
   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn   £bn 
Downstreamed from Santander UK Group Holdings plc to Santander UK plc                     

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

     0.5  1.5  0.7     2.7   2.0                        2.7 

– privately placed

                    0.1 

Subordinated debt and equity (incl. AT1)

                    0.5 

Subordinated debt and equity (inc. AT1)

   0.5                0.5     
     0.5  1.5  0.7     2.7   2.6    0.5                0.5    2.7 

Other Santander UK plc

                     

Securitisations and other secured funding

     1.4  1.5        2.9   0.5                        2.9 

Covered bonds

     2.5     1.8     4.3   2.3    2.0        0.9        2.9    4.3 

Senior unsecured – public benchmark

     0.4  2.5        2.9   1.1    0.1    0.8            0.9    2.9 

– privately placed

     0.3     1.3     1.6   0.1                        1.6 

Term Funding Scheme

     2.3           2.3   4.0                        2.3 
     6.9  4.0  3.1     14.0   8.0    2.1    0.8    0.9        3.8    14.0 

Other group entities

                     

Securitisations

     0.4           0.4   1.2    0.2                0.2    0.4 
      

Total gross issuances

     7.8  5.5  3.8     17.1   11.8    2.8    0.8    0.9        4.5    17.1 

Encumbrance(unaudited)

We have encumbered an asset if we have pledged or transferred it as collateral against an existing liability. This means it is no longer available to secure funding, meet our collateral needs or be sold to reduce future funding needs. Being able to pledge or transfer assets as collateral is an integral part of a financial institution’s operations. We do various things that lead to asset encumbrance. These include where we:

 

Enter into securitisation, covered bonds, and repurchase agreements (including central bank programmes) to access medium and long-term funding

Enter into short-term funding transactions. These include repurchase agreements and stock borrowing transactions as part of our operational liquidity management

Pledge collateral as part of participating in payment and settlement systems

Post collateral as part of derivatives activity.

We monitor our mix of secured and unsecured funding sources in our funding plan. We aim to use our available collateral efficiently to raise secured funding and to meet our other collateralised obligations.

Our biggest source of encumbrance is where we use our mortgage portfolio to raise funds through securitisation, covered bonds or other structured borrowing. We control our levels of encumbrance from these by setting a minimum level of unencumbered assets that must be available after we factor in our future funding plans, whether we can use our assets for our future collateral needs, the impact of a possible stress and our current level of encumbrance.

Assets classified as readily available for encumbrance include cash and securities we hold in our eligible liquidity pool. They also include other unencumbered assets that give us a source of contingent liquidity. We do not rely on these extra unencumbered assets in our LRA, but we might use some of them in a time of stress. We can create liquidity by using them as collateral for secured funding or through outright sale.

Loans and advances to customers are only classified as readily available for encumbrance if they are already in a form we can use to raise funding without any other actions on our part. This includes excess collateral that is already in a secured funding structure. It also includes collateral that ispre-positioned at central banks and is available for use in secured funding.

All other loans and advances are classified as not readily available for encumbrance, however, may still be suitable for use in secured funding structures.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 109131


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Encumbrance of customer loans and advances

We have issued prime retail mortgage-backed and other asset-backed securitised products to a diverse investor base through our mortgage-backed and other asset-backed funding programmes.

We have raised funding with mortgage-backed notes, both issued to third parties and retained – the latter being central bank eligible collateral for funding purposes in other Bank of England facilities. We also have a covered bond programme, under which we issue securities to investors secured by a pool of residential mortgages.

For more on thesehow we have issued notes from our secured programmes externally and also retained them, and what we have used them for, see Notes 1514 and 3725 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

On-balance sheet encumbered and unencumbered assets

 

  

Encumbered with counterparties other than

central banks

           

Unencumbered assets not pre-positioned

with central banks

     
                  Assets                     
                  positioned       Other             
  Covered   Securitis-           at central   Readily   available   Cannot be       Total 
  bonds   ations   Other   Total   banks(3)   available   assets   encumbered   Total   assets 
2019  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Cash and balances at central banks(1)(2)

           1,080    1,080    707    19,393            20,100    21,180 

Financial assets at FVTPL:

                    

– Derivative financial instruments

                               3,316    3,316    3,316 

– Other financial assets at FVTPL

                               386    386    386 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                    

– Loans and advances to customers

   23,310    12,915    332    36,557    55,273    76,567    22,875    16,015    170,730    207,287 

– Loans and advances to banks

           403    403                1,452    1,452    1,855 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading

                               23,636    23,636    23,636 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

           3,026    3,026        4,030            4,030    7,056 

Financial assets at FVOCI

           6,009    6,009        3,738            3,738    9,747 

Interests in other entities

                               117    117    117 

Intangible assets

                               1,766    1,766    1,766 

Property, plant and equipment

                           1,967        1,967    1,967 

Current tax assets

                               200    200    200 

Retirement benefit assets

                               669    669    669 

Other assets

                               2,520    2,520    2,520 

Total assets

   23,310    12,915    10,850    47,075    55,980    103,728    24,842    50,077    234,627    281,702 
                    
 Encumbered with counterparties other than
central banks
 Assets Unencumbered assets not pre-positioned with  central
banks
   
2018 

Covered
bonds

£m

 

Securitis-
ations

£m

 Other
£m
 Total
£m
 

    positioned
at central
banks(4)

£m

 Readily
available
£m
 

Other
available
assets

£m

 Cannot be
encumbered
£m
 Total
£m
 

Total
assets

£m

                                         
Cash and balances at central banks(1)(2)       1,080  1,080  636  18,031        18,667  19,747            1,080    1,080    636    18,031            18,667    19,747 
Financial assets at FVTPL:                              

– Derivative financial instruments

                      5,259  5,259  5,259                                5,259    5,259    5,259 

– Other financial assets at FVTPL

                      5,617  5,617  5,617                                5,617    5,617    5,617 
Financial assets at amortised cost:                              

– Loans and advances to customers

 21,240  14,454  256  35,950  52,497  71, 941  20,943  19,958  165,339  201,289    21,240    14,454    256    35,950    52,497    71,941    20,943    19,958    165,339    201,289 

– Loans and advances to banks

       218  218           2,581  2,581  2,799            218    218                2,581    2,581    2,799 

– Repurchase agreements-
non trading(3)

                      21,127  21,127  21,127 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading

                               21,127    21,127    21,127 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

       3,763  3,763     3,466        3,466  7,229            3,763    3,763        3,466            3,466    7,229 
Financial assets at FVOCI       5,825  5,825     7,477        7,477  13,302            5,825    5,825        7,477            7,477    13,302 
Interests in other entities                      88  88  88                                88    88    88 
Intangible assets                      1,808  1,808  1,808                                1,808    1,808    1,808 
Property, plant and equipment                   1,832     1,832  1,832                            1,832        1,832    1,832 
Current tax assets                      153  153  153                                153    153    153 
Retirement benefit assets                      842  842  842                                842    842    842 
Other assets                      2,280  2,280  2,280                                2,280    2,280    2,280 
Total assets 21,240  14,454  11,142  46,836  53,133  100,915  22,775  59,713  236,536        283,372    21,240    14,454    11,142    46,836    53,133    100,915    22,775    59,713    236,536    283,372 
                     
2017(5)                     
Cash and balances at central banks(1)(2)        1,010   1,010   395   31,366         31,761   32,771 
Trading assets        17,092   17,092      903      12,560   13,463   30,555 
Derivative financial instruments                       19,942   19,942   19,942 
Other financial assets at FVTPL                 1,405   691      2,096   2,096 
Loans and advances to banks(3)        105   105            3,358   3,358   3,463 
Loans and advances to customers(3)  18,891   16,530   31   35,452   57,644   64,412   20,459   21,373   163,888   199,340 
Repurchase agreements –
non trading(3)
                       2,614   2,614   2,614 
Financial investments        6,755   6,755      10,856         10,856   17,611 
Interests in other entities                       73   73   73 
Intangible assets                       1,742   1,742   1,742 
Property, plant and equipment                    1,598      1,598   1,598 
Retirement benefit assets                       449   449   449 
Other assets                       2,511   2,511   2,511 

Total assets

  18,891   16,530   24,993   60,414   58,039   108,942   22,748   64,622   254,351   314,765 

 

(1)

Encumbered cash and balances at central banks include minimum cash balances we have to hold at central banks for regulatory purposes.

(2)

Readily realisable cash and balances at central banks are amounts held at central banks as part of our liquidity management activities.

(3)

From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives arere-presented accordingly.

(4)

Comprisespre-positioned assets and encumbered assets.

(5)

2017 data has been restated as a result of enhancement to the internal methodology for reporting encumbered and unencumbered assets.

 

110132 Santander UK plc


> Capital risk

Capital risk

Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

Capital risk

 

 

 

Capital risk

Overview(unaudited)

Key metrics(unaudited)

 

Capital risk is the risk that we do not have an adequate amount or quality of capital to meet our internal business needs, regulatory requirements and market expectations, including dividend and AT1 distributions.

 

In this section, we set out how we are regulated. We also give details of the impact of IFRS 9 on regulatory capital. We explain how we manage capital on a standalone basis as a subsidiary in the Banco Santander group.

We then analyse our capital resources and key capital ratios.

ratios including our leverage and RWAs.

  

Key metrics(unaudited)

 

CET1 capital ratio of 14.3% (2018: 13.2% (2017: 12.2%)

 

Total qualifying regulatory capital resources decreased to £15.9bn (2017: £16.7bn)£15.8bn (2018: £15.9 bn)

THE SCOPE OF OUR CAPITAL ADEQUACY

Regulatory supervision

For capital purposes, we are subject to prudential supervision by the PRA, as a UK banking group, and by the European Central Bank (ECB) as a memberpart of the Banco Santander group. The ECB supervises Banco Santander as part of the Single Supervisory Mechanism (SSM). Although we are part of the Banco Santander group, we do not have a guarantee from our ultimate parent Banco Santander SA and we operate as an autonomousa standalone subsidiary. As we are part of the UKsub-group that is regulated by the PRA, we have to meet the PRA capital requirements on a standalone basis. We also have to show the PRA that we can withstand capital stress tests without the support of our parent. Reinforcing our corporate governance framework, the PRA exercises oversight through its rules and regulations on the Board and senior management appointments. Santander UK Group Holdings plc is the holding company of Santander UK plc and is the head of the Santander UK group for regulatory capital and leverage purposes. The

Our basis of consolidation for our capital disclosures is substantially the same as for our Consolidated Financial Statements. Following the implementation of our ring-fencing, plans, with effect from 1 January 2019, Santander UK plc is now the head of the ring-fenced banksub-group and is subject to regulatory capital and leverage rules.rules in relation to thatsub-group.

CAPITAL RISK MANAGEMENT

The Board is responsible for capital management strategy and policy and ensuring that we monitor and control our capital resources are monitored and controlled within regulatory and internal limits. We manage our funding and maintain capital adequacy on a standalone basis. We operate within the capital risk framework and appetite approved by our Board. This reflects the commercialbusiness environment we operate in, our strategy for each material risk and the potential impact of any adverse scenarios or stresses on our capital position.

Management of capital requirements

Our capital risk appetite aims to maintain capital levels appropriate to the level of stress applied, and the expected regulatory response. In:

 

An adverse economic stress, which we might expect to occur once in 20 years, the firm should remain profitable and exceed all regulatory capital minimums at all times.

A very severe economic stress, which we might expect to occur once in 100 years, and which has been designed to test any specific weaknesses of a firm’s business model, the firm should meet all regulatory capital minimums at all times. This is subject to the use of regulatory buffers designed forto absorb losses in such a stress.

Management of capital resources

We use a mix of regulatory and EC ratios and limits, internal buffers and restrictions to manage our capital resources. We also take account of the costs of differing capital instruments and capital management techniques. We also use these to shape the best structure for our capital needs. We decide how to allocate our capital resources as part of our strategic planning process. We base this in part on the relative returns on capital using both economicEC and regulatory capital measures.

We plan for severe stresses and we set out what action we would take if an extremely severe stress threatened our viability and solvency. This could include not paying dividends, selling assets, reducing our business and issuing more capital.

Risk measurement(unaudited)

We apply Banco Santander’s approach to capital measurement and risk management for CRD IV. As a result, Santander UK plc is classified as a significant subsidiary of Banco Santander SA.

Key metrics(unaudited)

The main metrics we use to measure capital risk are:

 

Key risk metrics Description

CET1 capital ratio

 CET1 capital divided by RWAs.

Total capital ratio

 Total capital divided by RWAs.

UK leverage ratio

CRD IVend-point Tier 1 capital divided by RWAs.leverage exposure.

Stress testing(unaudited)

Each year we create a capital plan, as part of our ICAAP. We share our ICAAP with the PRA. The PRA then tells us how much capital (Pillar 2A), and of what quality, it thinks we should hold on top of our Pillar 1 requirements. We also develop a series of macroeconomiceconomic scenarios to stress test our capital needs and confirm that we have enough regulatory capital to meet our projected and stressed capital needs and to meet our obligations as they fall due. We augment our regulatory minimum capital with internally assignedinternal buffers. We hold buffers to ensure we have enough time to take action against unexpected movements.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 111133


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

Risk mitigation(unaudited)

We have designed our capital risk framework, policies and procedures to ensure that we operate within our risk appetite.Risk Appetite. We manage capital transferability between our subsidiaries in line with our business strategy, our risk and capital management policies, and UK laws and regulations. There are no legal restrictions on us moving capital resources promptly, or repaying liabilities, between the Company and its subsidiaries.subsidiaries except for distributions between Santander UK entities in the ring-fenced banksub-group and Santander UK entities that are not members of the ring-fenced banksub-group, where the PRA is required to assess the impact of proposed distribution prior to payment. For details on our Recovery framework in the event of a capital stress, see the risk mitigation section in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section.

At 31 December 2018,From 1 January 2019, following the implementation of ring-fencing, Santander UK plc, ANTSCater Allen Limited and certain othernon-regulated subsidiaries within the ring-fenced bank entered into a capital support deed dated 13 November 2018 (the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed). The parties to the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed are permitted by the PRA to form a core UK group, as defined in the PRA Rulebook, a permission which will expire on 31 December 2021. Exposures of each of the regulated entities to other members of the core UK group are exempt from large exposure limits that would otherwise apply. The purpose of the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed is to facilitate the prompt transfer of available capital resources from, or repayment of liabilities by, thenon-regulated parties to any of the regulated parties in the event that one of the regulated parties breaches or is at risk of breaching its capital resources requirements or risk concentrations requirements.

Prior to 1 January 2019, Santander UK plc, SFS and Cater Allen Limited, which are the threePRA-regulated entities within the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group, were party to a capital support deed dated 23 December 2015 (the Capital Support Deed 2015) with Santander UK Group Holdings plc and certain othernon-regulated subsidiaries of Santander UK plc. The parties to the Capital Support Deed 2015 were permitted by the PRA to form a core UK group as defined in the PRA Rulebook. Exposures of each of the three regulated entities to other members of the core UK group were exempt from large exposure limits that would otherwise apply. The purpose of the Capital Support Deed 2015 was to facilitate the prompt transfer of available capital resources from, or repayment of liabilities by, thenon-regulated parties to any of the regulated parties in the event that one of the regulated parties breached or was at risk of breaching its capital resources requirements or risk concentrations requirements.

The core UK group permission as supported by the Capital Support Deed 2015 expired on 31 December 2018. With effect from 1 January 2019, and in accordance with our ring-fenced structure, Santander UK plc, Cater Allen Limited and certain other

non-regulated subsidiaries within the ring-fenced bank entered into a new Capital Support Deed dated 13 November 2018 (the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed). From 1 January 2019, the parties to the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed were permitted by the PRA to form a new core UK group, a permission which will expire on 31 December 2021. Other than the change of the entities in scope, the purpose of the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed is the same as the previous Capital Support Deed 2015.

Risk monitoring and reporting(unaudited)

We monitor and report regularly against our capital plan. We do this to identify any change in our business performance that might affect our capital. EveryEach month, we also review the economic assumptions we use to create and stress test our capital plan. We do this to identify any potential reduction in our capital.

112    Santander UK plc


> Capital risk

CAPITAL RISK REVIEW

20182019 compared to 20172018 (unaudited)

Our CET1 capital ratio increased 100bps110bps to 13.2%14.3% at 31 December 2018 (2017: 12.2%2019 (2018: 13.2%), through active RWA management.

CET1 capital was stable at £10.4bn, with ongoing capital accretion and risk management initiatives leaving us strongly capitalised in the current environment. CET1 capital was broadly in line with the prior year at £10.4bn, withthrough profits retained after dividend payments largelypayment, offset by ongoing capital accretion through retained profits. market-driven pension movements.

Our total capital ratio increased to 20.3%21.7% at 31 December 2018 (2017: 19.2%2019 (2018: 20.3%).

Impact of IFRS 9 on regulatory capital

The implementation of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018 resulted in an initial reduction in our CET1 capital ratio by 8 basis points to 12.13% which, following the application of EU transitional arrangements for the capital impact of IFRS 9, reduced to 12.16%. As a result,Although the adoption of IFRS 9 in 2018 did not have a material impact on our capital position.

position, we expect ourAsECL-based provisions to be more volatile than our IAS 39 incurred loss-based provision as our ECL methodology takes account of forward-looking data coveringand covers a range of possible economic outcomes,ECL-based provisioning is expected to be more volatile than IAS 39 incurred loss-based provisioning and consequentlyoutcomes. This is likely to impact our CET1 capital levels, resultingand result in increasedpro-cyclicality of risk-based capital and leverage ratios. However, the impact is currently mitigated by our surplus of expected lossesECL over provisions for exposures using the IRB approaches.approach. For such exposures (which include residential mortgages) the adverse impact toon CET1 capital of provision increases from reserve movements is offset by the associatedrelated reduction of the negative CET1 capital adjustment for regulatory expected loss amounts. Furthermore, the EU transitionaltransition arrangements for the capital impact of IFRS 9 mean that adverse CET1 effects from increases inECL-based provisions from the level of such provisions at 1 January 2018 are partiallypartly reduced until the end of 2022.

We reflect projections ofECL-based ECL provisions in our capital position forecasting under base case and stress scenarios for ICAAP and capital management purposes andpurposes. We also consider the impact of the dynamics of ECL in how we assess, monitor and manage capital risk. We expectThe greater volatility from IFRS 9 ECL charges to be more volatile than IAS 39 incurred losses. This could result in material favourable and unfavourable swings to our Income Statement. Whilst the initial impacts of IFRS 9 were based on estimates prepared in a supportive economic environment, a period of economic instability could significantly impact our Income Statementresults and the net carrying amount of our financial assets. It could also impact the amount of capital we have to hold. We take into account the volatility of ECL in our capital planning strategy.

134Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Capital risk

Meeting evolving capital requirements(unaudited)

We target a CET1 management buffer of sufficient size to absorb volatility in CET1 deductions, capital supply and capital demand whilst remaining above the regulatory CET1 requirement. Distribution restrictions would be expected to be applied if we were unable to meet both our minimum requirement, which consists of the Pillar 1 minimum plus Pillar 2A, and the CRD IV buffers consisting of the Capital Conservation Buffer (CCB), and the Countercyclical Capital Buffer (CCyB) and the Systemic Risk Buffer (SRB).

Distance of our CET1 capital ratio to our current MDA trigger level at 31 December 2019 (unaudited)

At 31 December 2019, the distance of our CET1 capital ratio of 14.3% to our 7% AT1 permanent write down (PWD) securities trigger was 7.3% of total RWAs or £5.3bn (2018: 6.2% of total RWAs or £4.9bn).

The distance of our CET1 capital ratio to our current maximum distributable amount (MDA) trigger level at 31 December 2019 was:

Current MDA

%

Pillar 1

4.5

Pillar 2A(1)

3.2

CCB

2.5

CCyB(2)

1.0

SRB

1.0

Current MDA trigger

12.2

Distance to current MDA

2.1

Total CET1 capital ratio

14.3

(1) Santander UK’s (i.e. the Ring-Fenced Bank’s) Pillar 2 CET1 requirement was 3.24% at 31 December 2019. Pillar 2A guidance is a point in time assessment.

(2) The current applicable UK CCyB rate is 1%. Santander UK’s (i.e. the Ring-Fenced Bank’s) current geographical allocation of the CCyB is 0.99%.

At 1 January 2020, Santander UK plc’s total Pillar 2A requirements reduced to 4.8% and CET1 Pillar 2A requirements reduced to 2.7%.

MREL recapitalisation

We have made major progress to meet MREL requirements. To date, we have down streamed £7.4bn of senior unsecured bonds from Santander UK Group Holdings plc as Internal MREL compliant, secondarynon-preferential debt to Santander UK plc as the ring-fenced bank.

Key capital ratios(unaudited)

 

                      2019                       2018 
    

2018

%

     

2017

%

   %   % 

CET1 capital ratio

     13.2      12.2    14.3    13.2 

AT1

     2.2      2.4    2.7    2.2 

Grandfathered Tier 1

     0.8      0.8    0.7    0.8 

Tier 2

     4.1      3.8    4.0    4.1 

Total capital ratio

             20.3              19.2    21.7    20.3 

The total subordination available to Santander UK plc bondholders was 20.3% (2017: 19.7%) of RWAs.

        

The total subordination available to Santander UK plc bondholders was 21.7% (2018: 20.3%) of RWAs.

Regulatory capital resources

This table shows our qualifying regulatory capital.

 

                      2019                       2018 
    

2018

£m

     

2017

£m

   £m   £m 

CET1 capital

     10,374      10,620    10,419    10,374 

AT1 capital

     2,349      2,762    2,443    2,349 

Tier 1 capital

     12,723      13,382    12,862    12,723 

Tier 2 capital

     3,223      3,334    2,925    3,223 

Total regulatory capital(1)

         15,946          16,716    15,787    15,946 

(1)

Capital resources include a transitional IFRS 9 benefit at 31 December 2018 of £21m (1 January 2018: £18m)(1) Capital resources include a transitional IFRS 9 benefit at 31 December 2019 of £16m (2018: £21m).

AT1 capital

These are preference shares and innovative/hybrid Tier 1 securities. None of the instruments we issued before 1 January 2014 fully meet the CRD IV AT1 capital rules, which apply from that date. These instruments will be phased out by CRD IV rules which restrict their recognition as capital. The £750m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities (net of issuance costs), the £800m Perpetual Capital Securities and the £500m Perpetual Capital Securities we issued since then fully meet the CRD IV AT1 capital rules.

In August 2019, as part of a capital management exercise, the Company purchased and redeemed the £300m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities, and issued a further £500m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities to Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Tier 2 capital

These are fully CRD IV eligible Tier 2 instruments and grandfathered Tier 2 instruments whose recognition as capital is being phased out under CRD IV.

Risk-weighted assets(unaudited)

LOGOThe tables below are consistent with our regulatory filings for 2019 and 2018.

                       2019                       2018 
   £bn   £bn 

Total RWAs

   72.6    78.5 

 

Santander UK plc 113135


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Pension risk(unaudited)(UNAUDITED)

 

Overview

Key metrics

Overview

 

Pension risk is the risk caused by our contractual or other liabilities with respect to a pension scheme (whether establishedset up for our employees or those of a related company or otherwise). It also refers to the risk that we will need to make payments or other contributions with respect to a pension scheme due to a moral obligation or for some other reason.

 

In this section, we explain how we manage and mitigate pension risk, including our investment and hedging strategies. We also discuss the accounting position.provide some insight on how we are monitoring different Brexit scenarios and their potential impact on pension risk.

 

  

Key metrics

 

Funding Deficit at Risk reduced to £1,410m (2017: £1,540m)was £1,520m (2018: £1,410m)

 

Both interest rate and inflation hedge ratios on the Funding basis improved, to 68% (2017: 57%) and 67% (2017: 64%), respectively.Funded defined benefit pension scheme accounting surplus was £430m (2018: £767m)

OUR KEY PENSION RISKS

Sources of risk

Pension risk is one of our key financial risks and arises mainly becauserisks. Santander UK plc is the sponsor of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the Scheme), a defined benefit scheme. Our risk is that over the long-term the Scheme’s assets together with future returns and future contributions, mightare not be enough to meet its liabilities as they fall due. Where the value of the Scheme’s assets is lower than its liabilities,When this happens, we could have to (or choose to) make extra contributions. We might also need to hold more capital to reflect this risk.

The key pension risk factors the Scheme is exposed to are:

 

Key risks Description

Interest rate risk

 

The risk that movementsa decrease in (long-term) interest rates cause changescauses an increase in the value of the Scheme’s liabilities that are not matched by changesan increase in the value of the Scheme’sits assets.

Inflation risk

 
Inflation risk

The Scheme’s liabilities are impacted by inflation as annualAnnual pension increases are directly linked to RPI andor CPI. The risk is that movementsan increase in inflation causes changesan increase in the value of the Scheme’s liabilities that are not matched by changesan increase in the value of the Scheme’sits assets.

Longevity risk

 
Longevity risk

Due to the long-term nature of the obligation, the value of the Scheme’s liabilities are also impacted by changes to the life expectancy of Scheme members over time. The Scheme’s liabilities are mainly in respect of current and past employees and are expected to stretch beyond 2080.

2080 due to the long-term nature of the obligation. Therefore, the value of the Scheme’s liabilities is also impacted by changes to the life expectancy of Scheme members over time.

Investment risk

 
Investment risk

The risk that the return on the Scheme’s assets (relativeis insufficient to Scheme’s liabilities) is less than anticipated.

meet the liabilities.

Both ourThe accounting and regulatory capital positions can be sensitive to changes in key economic data and the assumptions we have used in our valuations. These include our accounting assumptions on discount rates, inflation rates and life expectancy.of these key risk factors.

For more on our defined benefit pension schemes, see Note 3128 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. This includes a sensitivity analysis of our key actuarial assumptions.

Defined contribution schemes

We also have defined contribution schemes for some of our employees. BenefitsThe benefits received at retirement will mainly depend on the contributions made (by both the employees and us) and how wellthe performance of the investments (typicallywhich are typically chosen by employees) perform.employees. These schemes carry far less market risk exposure for us, although we remainare still exposed to operational and reputational risks. To manage these risks, we monitor the administration performance of defined contributionthe provider and the performance of the investment funds and wethe costs met by members. We ensure our employees are given enough information about their investment choices.

For more on our defined contribution pension schemes, see Note 3128 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

The impact of our defined benefit schemes on capital

We take account of the impact of pension risk on our capital as part of our stress testing process. This includes our ICAAPs, PRA stress tests and our quarterly assessment of capital requirements. We also consider the impact of any changes proposed to the Scheme or its investment strategy.

Our defined benefit pension schemes affect capital in two ways:

We treat an IAS 19 deficit as a liability on our balance sheet. We recognise movements in a deficit through Other Comprehensive Income and so this reduces our shareholders’ equity and CET1 capital. Deficit movements on the balance sheet are mainly due tore-measurements, including actuarial losses. We treat an IAS 19 surplus as an asset on our balance sheet. This increases shareholders’ equity. However, it is deducted for the purposes of determining CET1 capital. An IAS 19 surplus or deficit on our balance sheet is partially offset by a deferred tax liability or asset, respectively. These may be recognised for calculating CET1 capital depending on our overall deferred tax position at that time.

The PRA takes pension risk into account in the Pillar 2A capital assessment through the annual ICAAP exercise. The Pillar 2A requirement forms part of our overall regulatory minimum requirement for CET1 capital, Tier 1 capital and total capital. We perform a quarterly assessment internally. For more on our minimum regulatory requirements, see the ‘Capital risk’ section.

 

114136 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Pension risk

 

PENSION RISK MANAGEMENT

Scheme governance

The Scheme operates under a trust deed. The corporate trustee, Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme Trustees Limited (the Trustee), is a wholly owned subsidiary of the Santander UK group. The Trustee is responsible for ensuringensures that the Scheme is run properly, and that members’ benefits are secure. It delegates investment decisions within ranges determined in the Statement of Investment Principles to the board of Santander (CF Trustee) Limited (the CF Trustee) which meets each month.. The CF Trustee meetings are the main forumis responsible for the CF Trustee to analysereviewing, agreeing and agreeimplementing investment management strategies, with our input from us as and when needed.

Our Every month, we discuss pension-related matters at our Pensions Committee and Pension Risk Forum. For example, our Pensions Committee reviews our pension risk appetitethe Scheme’s investment strategies and approves actuarial valuations. It also discusses and forms views on the Scheme’s investment strategy. The Pension Risk Forum is a Risk division management forum that monitors our pension risk within our approved risk framework, risk appetite and policies. Although weWe work with the Trustee to ensure that the Scheme is adequately funded but our responsibilities are clearly segregated from those of the Trustee.Trustee’s.

Risk appetite

Our risk appetite is a key consideration in all decisions and risk management activities related to the Scheme. Our pension risk appetite is reviewed by our Pensions Committee at least once a year. It is then sent to the Board for approval. We ensure that our risk appetite is a key consideration in all decisions and risk management activities related to the Scheme.

We measure pension risk on both a technical provisions (funding) basis and an accounting basis (in line with IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’). We manage and hedge pension risk on both the accounting and the funding basis. However, we also consider the impact on the accounting basis. Both the funding and the accounting bases are inputs into our capital calculations.

Risk measurement

Our key risk metrics include:

 

 
Key risk metrics Description

Funding Deficit at Risk

 

We use a VaR and a forward-looking stress testing framework to model the Scheme’s assets and liabilities to show the potential deterioration in the current funding position. This ensures we adequately capture the risks, diversification benefits and liability matching characteristics of the obligations and investments of the Scheme. We use a time period of 1 year and a 95% confidence interval in our VaR model.

Required Return

 

This estimates the return required from the Scheme’s assets each year to reach apre-defined funding target by a fixed date in the future.

Pensions CET1 Volatility

 

This measuresWe use a VaR and a forward-looking stress testing framework to model the potential forvolatility in the pension-related capital volatility due to the pension risk related capital deduction.

We use a time period of 1 year and a 95% confidence interval in our VaR model.

We perform stress tests for regulators, including for ICAAPs and PRA stress tests. The stress testing framework allows us to also consider how Brexit and other macroeconomic events could impact the Scheme’s assets and liabilities. For more on our stress testing, see the Risk Governance section.

Risk mitigation

The key tools we use to mitigate pensionmaintain the above key risk metrics within appetite are:

 

 
Key tools Description

Investment strategies

 

The Trustee has developed the following investment objectives:

– Toobjectives to reflect their principal duty to act in the best interests of the Scheme by maintainingbeneficiaries:

–  To maintain a diversified portfolio of assets of appropriate suitability, quality, security, liquidity and profitability which will generate income and capital growth to meet, together with new contributions from members and the employers, the cost of current and future benefits which the Scheme provides, as set out in the Rules of the Scheme

–  To limit the risk that the assets fail to meet the liabilities

–  To achieveinvest in a manner appropriate to the investment targets for each section, as agreed betweennature and duration of the Trustee andexpected future retirement benefit payments under the employer at the most recent actuarial valuation or subsequent updates agreed by Santander UK and the TrusteeScheme

–  To minimise the Scheme’s long-term costs to us by maximising the return on the assets net of fees and expenses, whilst having regard to the objectives above

–  To seek to control the long-term costs of the Scheme by achieving value for money inmaximising asset returns net of fees and expenses whilst reflecting the fees paid to investment managers and advisers and by minimising transaction costs.objectives above.

The assets of the funded plans are held independently of the Santander UK group’s assets in separate trustee-administered funds.

The investment strategy is kept under review.

regularly reviewed. The Trustee investsimpact of the Scheme’s assets in a diversified portfolioinvestment strategy on Funding Deficit at Risk is considered. This assessment includes the changing impact of UK and overseas equities, corporate and government bonds, property, infrastructure development opportunities and other assets.

different forward-looking stress tests as the asset allocation evolves over time, as the profile of the Scheme evolves on the journey to lower dependence on Santander UK. Fund managers are also reviewed annually to ensure the investments remain appropriate for the Scheme.

Hedging strategies

 

The Trustee has a hedging strategy to reduce key market risks. Hedging decisions are made, following discussions between the Trustee, CF Trustee and us, and executed by the CF Trustee.

The main reason for hedging liabilities is to manage the exposure of each of the Scheme’s sections torisks, mainly interest rate and inflation risk. This includes investing in suitable fixed income and inflation-linked assets and entering into inflation and interest rate hedging instruments. and inflation hedges.

The CF Trustee may also adopthedges some of its equity and currency risk. This is achieved by using equity put options, equity collars and other derivatives that provide downside protection. Currency hedging to mitigate specific risks, such as equity hedging strategies which areis used to reduce market risks from investing in public market equities.assets denominated in currencies other than sterling. The latter can be achieved by using a rangehedging of derivatives strategies such as an equity put option, equity collar or other combinations of derivatives that provide downside protection.

interest rate and inflation risk in particular reduce Funding Deficit at Risk.

We look at the impact on our risk metrics when determining the appropriateness of the investment and hedging strategies. We also use the impact on our risk metrics to propose changes to optimise these strategies.

Risk monitoring and reporting

We monitor pension risk each month and report on our metricsit at Pension Risk Forum, ERCC, Pensions Committee and, also, where thresholds are exceeded (or likely to be), to the Board Risk Committee and the Board in accordanceline with our pension risk appetite. Senior management will then decide what, ifWe discuss any remedial action should be recommended, which we then discuss with the TrusteeTrustee. For all key risk metrics, we determine tolerance levels for deterioration based on our risk appetite. We use red, amber, green triggers to indicate our position relative to those risks. Green means the risk level is acceptable, amber means that close monitoring is required and red means action is needed. We report all key risk metrics against these triggers to Pensions Committee and Pension Risk Forum each month. We take actions to reduce risk to an acceptable level where relevant, the CF Trustee.position looks likely to exceed the red trigger level.

In addition, we monitor the performance of third parties who support the valuation of the Scheme’s assets and liabilities. The models they use are reviewed and validated by our internal model validation team and approved by the model risk committee. Every year, we carry out a full analysis of the assumptions we use which is considered by the Board Audit Committee and Pensions Committee. We ensure that we carry out consistency checks for all liability calculations supplied by third parties. We obtain audited figures of the asset values from the appointed investment manager. Independent audits are then carried out on behalf of the custodian. We also apply our own checks to make sure that the asset values provided are consistent with expectations.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 115137


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

PENSION RISK REVIEW

20182019 compared to 20172018

TheFollowing significant interest rate hedging in 2018, the underlying level of pension risk in the Scheme reducedremained broadly stable in 2018 and 2017. In 2017, this was due to the implementation of a number of mitigating strategies including, reducing exposure to equity markets by transacting an equity collar. The trend of reducing risk continued in 2018 due to a significant increase in the level of2019. No further interest rate or inflation hedging took place, and asset allocation changes were relatively small. The focus was mainly on agreeing the 31 March 2019 actuarial valuation and the future plans for further hedging and the retentionasset allocation in light of the equity market protection.results of that valuation. However, the reported risk figures increased marginally as falling gilt and corporate bond yields increased the overall size of the Scheme.

On 26 October 2018, the High Court handed down a judgement that defined benefit schemes should equalise pension benefits for men and women in relation to GMP, and concluded on the methods that were appropriate. The resulting increase in the liabilities at theyear-end has been reflected in the risk metrics calculated on an accounting basis (in line with IAS 19 ‘Employee Benefits’), although it did not have a significant impact.

Risk monitoring and measurement

We continueOur main focus is to focus on achievingensure the scheme achieves the right balance between risk and reward.reward whilst minimising the impact on our capital and financial position. In 2018,2019, overall asset returns were slightly negativepositive with positive performance from private equity and alternatives offset by falls in the value of gilts and corporate bonds.all major asset classes. The Funding Deficit at Risk increased to £1,520m (2018: £1,410m). Our long-term objective is to reduce the risk of the Scheme and eliminate the deficit on the funding basis. The Funding Deficit at Risk decreased to £1,410m (2017: £1,540m).

In 2018,On the CF Trustee extendedfunding basis, the equity collar that was in place, adjusting it for changes in the underlying holdings, and the level of interest rate hedging in the Scheme was increased. In addition, the Scheme moved from using LIBOR-based instruments to gilt-backed instruments, including through the use of total return swaps and repurchase agreements.

In 2018, interest rate and inflation hedging increased. The interest rate hedging ratio was 64% (2018: 68% at 31 December 2018 (2017: 57%) on the funding basis, and the inflation hedging ratio was 63% (2018: 67% (2017: 64%). at 31 December 2019.

We also monitor the potential impact from variations in the IAS 19 position on CET1 capital. This metric was broadly stable over 2019. For more on the impact of our defined benefit schemes on capital in 2019, see the ‘Capital risk’ section.

Accounting position

In 2018,2019, the accounting surplus of the Scheme and other funded arrangements increased, withschemes decreased. Some sections in the Scheme had a surplus of £842m£669m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £449m) and2019 (2018: £842m) whilst other sections inhad a deficit of £75m (2017: £245m)£239m (2018: £75m). The overall position was £767m£430m surplus (2017: £204m(2018: £767m surplus). There were also unfunded scheme liabilities of £39m£41m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £41m)2019 (2018: £39m). The improvementdeterioration in the overall position was mainly driven by an increasea decrease in the discount rate overin the year resulting from risingyear. This was due to falling corporate bond yields which reducedincreased the value placed onof liabilities. ThisHowever, this was partially offset by the higher assumed inflation rate which acted to increase the value placed on liabilities and the falla rise in overall asset values over the year.values. For more on our pension schemes, including the current asset allocation and our accounting assumptions, see Note 3128 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Maturity profile of undiscounted benefit payments

The Scheme’s obligation to make benefit payments extends over the long-term, andlong-term. This is expected to stretch beyond 2080.

The graph below shows the maturity profile of the estimated undiscounted benefit payments expected to be paid from the Scheme over its life at 31 December 20182019 was:

 

LOGOLOGO

 

116

LOGO

      Santander UK plc

In 2019, as part of our pension risk monitoring process we considered different scenarios and how they might impact the funding level in the Scheme. This allowed us to identify a risk of deterioration in the funding level which was beyond our risk tolerance.

The potential deterioration in the funding level was due to a number of factors, one of which was the risk of falls in equity values. The downside protection the Scheme employs on its equity portfolio reduced the equity volatility in this scenario. This protection includes the use of equity put options, equity collars and other derivatives.

Another factor we identified from our analysis was that some exposure to overseas currencies brings diversification benefits in some stress scenarios because this analysis is then input into the CF Trustees foreign exchange hedging strategy.

Both these actions reduced our Funding Deficit at Risk in our scenarios.


138 > Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Conduct and

regulatory risk

 

Conduct and regulatory risk(unaudited)(UNAUDITED)

 

Overview

Key metrics

Overview

 

We manage the conduct andnon-financial regulatory risk types in one framework. We do this to reflect their similarities.

 

Conduct risk is the risk that our decisions and behaviours lead to a detriment or poor outcome for our customers. It also refers to the risk that we fail to hold and maintain high standards of market integrity.

 

Regulatory risk is the risk of financial or reputational loss, imposition of or conditions on regulatory permission, as a result of failing to comply with applicable codes, regulator’s rules, guidance and regulatory expectations.

 

We are committed to ensuring conduct strategy is embedded in our business and that the fair treatment of our customers is at the heart of what we do.

 

In this section, we explain how we manage conduct and regulatory risk. We also describe our main conduct provisions, with a focus on PPI, and give some insight into how we are helpingour work to combat financial abuse.protect younger consumers from fraud and scams, by raising awareness through a social media campaign with Kurupt FM.

 

  

Key metrics

 

Our PPI provision at 31 December 2018 amounted to £246m (2017: £356m)was £189m (2018: £246m)

 

Other conduct provisions at 31 December 2018 amounted to £30m (2017: £47m)provision was £25m (2018: £30m)

 

Regulatory provisions principally comprised £68m (2018: £58m)

OUR KEY CONDUCT AND REGULATORY RISKS

We believe that delivering a Simple, Personal and Fair bank starts with meeting the needs and expectations of our customers. To achieve this, we are committed to making sure that our strategy, proposition and initiative approval process, and systems, operations and controls are well designed and delivered.

We see our key exposure to conduct and regulatory risk through (i) the risk of errors in our product design, sales practices, post-sale servicing, operational processes, complaint handling and (ii) failure to supervise, monitor and control the activities of our employees. through:

the risk of errors in our product design, sales practices, post-sale servicing, operational processes, complaint handling, and

failure to supervise, monitor and control the activities of our employees.

All of these may result in the risk that we do not meet our customers’ needs, align to the expectations of our regulators or deliver the expected outcomes or observe required standards of market behaviour.

Our Conduct and Regulatory Framework is built on the following underlying types of risk:

 

Key risks Description
Regulatory 

The risk that we fail to adhere withto relevant laws, regulations and codes which could have serious financial, reputational and customer impacts. This includes the risk that we may be adversely impacted by changes and related uncertainty around UK and international regulations. We categorise regulatory risk into financial andnon-financial risk. This is aligned to our main regulators who are the PRA and FCA.FCA but also includes other regulators and authorities such as the CMA, Payment Systems Regulator, Lending Standards Board, Financial Ombudsman Service and Information Commissioner’s Office.

 

As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, we are impacted indirectly through regulation by the Banco de España (the Bank of Spain) and, at a corporate level, by the ECB through the SSM. We also fall within the scope of US regulation, including the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reform and Consumer Protection Act. This restricts our activities both in the UK and the US. We must also have to adhere to the rules and guidance of other regulators and voluntary codes in the UK.

Product 

The risk that we offer products and services that do not result in the right outcomes for our customers.

Sales 

The risk that we sell products and services to our customers without giving them enough information to make an informed decision or we do not provide correct advice.

After-sale and servicing 

The risk that failures of our operations, processes, servicing activity, IT or controls result in poor outcomes for our customers. This includes the risks that:

–   We do not give appropriate after-sale communications to customers, making it difficult for them to contact us, or we fail to take account of a customer’s vulnerability

–   We do not have robust systems and controls to detect and prevent fraud or errors in the customer experience.

Culture 

The risk that we do not maintain a culture that encourages the right behaviour and puts the customer at the heart of what we do.

Competition 

The risk of financial harm, criminal liability, customer harm or reputational damage that we may incur because we fail to comply with relevant competition law or being involved in any competition law investigation or proceedings.

Controls 

The risk that we do not supervise and monitor our employees effectively or do not have robust systems and controls in place to prevent and detect misconduct.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 117139


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

CONDUCT AND REGULATORY RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk appetite

We aim to comply with all regulatory requirements, and we have no appetite to make decisions or operate in a way that leads to unfair outcomes for our customers or negatively impacts the market.

Our Board approves our risk appetite on an annual basis, or more often if events mean that we need to revise it,needed, and we cascade it to our business units through our risk framework and policies. We also have lower level risk tolerance thresholds that are agreed at least annually by the ERCC.annually. Our material conduct and regulatory risk exposures are subject to, and reported against, our conduct and regulatory risk appetite statements, as well as lower level triggers and thresholds for management action.

Risk measurement

Due to the close links between our conduct, regulatory and operational risk frameworks, our tools to identify, assess, manage and report operational risks also apply where such exposures and risks have a conduct and/or regulatory risk impact.

We support our conduct and regulatory risk framework and policies with tools that aim to identify and assess new and emerging conduct risks. These include:

 

 
Key tools Description

Strategy and business planning

 

Our Strategy and Corporate Development team help align our overall corporate strategy, financial plans, risk appetite and operational capabilities through our annual process to set our strategy. We derive our business unit plans from our overall corporate strategy and they contain a view of conduct and regulatory risk along with our other key risk types.

Sales quality assurance

 

We subject our retail sales to internal quality assurance and, as appropriate,needed, external monitoring to ensure the quality of our sales and practices.

Operational risk and
control assessments

 

Our business and business support units assess our operational risks, systems and controls to give us a consolidated risk view across all our business areas. We complete the assessments through a central tool to evaluate and manage our residual risk exposures.

Scenario testing and horizon scanning

 

We consider conduct and regulatory risk in our scenario testing. This reviews possible root causes and assumptions to determine the likelihood and size of the impact, and actions to enhance our controls where required.

Conduct risk reporting

 

We use dashboards to give us anend-to-end view of our conduct risks across our business. This allows us to apply a lens to manage conduct risk and understand if it is in line with our risk appetite.

Compliance monitoring

 

We carry out an annual assurance programme for conduct and regulatory risk assurance programme which is approved by the Board and tracked through the year.

 

Risk mitigation

Our conduct and regulatory risk framework and policies set out the principles, standards, roles and responsibilities and governance for conduct and regulatory risk, such as:

 

 
Policies Description

Product approval

 

Our product approval process aims to minimise our exposure to conduct, legal, regulatory or reputational risks in the design, marketing, sales and service of new products and services. We assess all our products and services within a formal framework to make sure they are within our risk appetite and agreed metrics, and to ensure that processes and controls are in place.

Suitable advice for customers

 

We give guidance to advisers and staff on the key principles, minimum requirements and ethical behaviours they must follow. This ensures our customersourcustomers are sufficiently informed when they make a buying decision. In our Retail Banking division, the main products we cover are mortgages, investments, savings and protection.

Training and competence

 

In line with the expectations of our regulators, we train our staff and require them to maintain an appropriate level of competence (in line with their role and responsibilities) to ensure customers achieve fair outcomes. We invest in all our people to ensure that we achieve our mandatory risk objectives and that everyone acknowledges their personal responsibility for risk management through our I AM Risk approach.

 

We place a specific focus on:

–  Vulnerability: Ensuring that our colleagues are trained to help customers who may be vulnerable (see below).

–  Financial abuse: We work closely with other members of UK Finance, as part of the Financial Abuse Working Party, with a shared vision to help victims regain control of their finances. Through this collaboration we have adopted a Financial Abuse Code of Practice as part of our overall vulnerable customer strategy. We have specific training material for colleagues to raise awareness and improve understanding around the devastating impacts of financial abuse and how we can help. Due to the very complex nature of situations involving financial abuse, we also have a dedicated Specialist Support Team that offers guidance to colleagues dealing with customers who are victims and need tailored solutions to help them regain control of their finances.

Treating vulnerable customers fairly

 

Some customers may be impacted financially or personally as a result of their circumstances. Our Vulnerable Customer Policy gives business areas a clear and consistent understanding of what vulnerability can mean and the types of situations when customers may need more support. Our guidelines focus on identifying vulnerable customers, and the support we can give to help them avoid financial difficulty. We work with key charities, authorities, trade associations and other specialists to develop our understanding of vulnerability.

 

In addition to mandatory training, we train our customer-facing colleagues using real customer scenarios to highlight different vulnerable situations. This enables our colleagues to deal with a wide range of sensitive issues. We have also developedhave an online Vulnerable Customer Support Tool for our colleagues to give them more informationguidance and guidance.support. Our colleagues have access to our Specialist Support Team who can providegive specific help and guidance for the most complex vulnerable customer situations.

 

We consider vulnerability in every new initiative. Adapting our technology to the needs of customers with physical disabilities is a key part of our design and testing stages and we work closely with the Digital Accessibility Centre. We have seen the impactalso developed our training approach through a series of this in areas such as the roll out of our voice-guided, contactless-enabled ATMs and the development of our Mobile Banking app.real-life customer stories available to colleagues to access anytime to develop their skills.

 

Risk monitoring and reporting

We consider conduct and regulatory risk as part of the governance around all our business decisions. We have specific forumsfora and committees such as the Conduct and Compliance Forum, and business specific risk management fora to make decisions on conduct and regulatory risk matters and we ultimately report to the ERCC and Board Responsible Banking Committee.

The data we report to senior management contains essential information thatand Committees gives them a clear understanding of current and potential emerging conduct and regulatory risks and issues.

Our risk and control forumsfora support management to control risks in their business units. Reporting includes conduct risk dashboards, which take into accountset out a range of metrics across common areas. These include policy breaches logged, mystery shopping, quality assurance and complaints, as well as commentary on trends and root causes. The dashboardThis approach enables managementus to take effective action.

As well as the reports issued by the business, our Legal and Regulatory functionDivision reports directly to the Board to give a view on legal, conduct and regulatory, reputational and financial crime risks, and to escalate issues or any breach of our risk appetite.

 

118140 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Conduct and

regulatory risk

 

CONDUCT AND REGULATORY RISK REVIEW

20182019 compared to 20172018

To make sureIn 2019, to ensure we fully considerconsidered customer and conduct impacts across our business, we maintainedcontinued to maintain a strong focus on robust oversight and control over our proposition, and maintainingof the full customer journey. We maintain Compliance teams across all our key business lines. We also embedded conductdivisions and on key cross functional areas such as fraud and data protection. Conduct and regulatory risk frameworks are in place across all business divisions and worked closely with Operationalthat operate alongside our wider Risk leveraging the risk toolkitFramework to identify, assess, manage and report conduct and regulatory risk.

In 2019, we continued to build on our progress in 2018 we developed tailored propositions across all of ourand remained vigilant in taking a customer-focused approach in developing strategy, products and policies that support fair customer segments.outcomes and market integrity. As part of this, we:

 

Removed unarranged overdraft fees fromfee-paying personal current accounts

Assessed the views and reducednew policy areas in the monthly maximum charge for unarranged feesFCA’s 2019/20 Business Plan and built them into our three-year business planning activities, in addition to considering regulatory developments that arose during the course of the year

Set up a Mortgage Taskforce to better support positive customer outcomes by empowering customer facing teams to deal with customer queries at first point of contact
Supported our colleagues with the introduction of the 1I2I3 Business Current Account, in line with our objective to help businesses prosper
Supported the launch of our Digital Investment Adviser which is a tool to make investment advice more accessible for our customers.

We also continued to build on the progress we made in 2017. As part of this, we:

Continued to strengthen our governance from the top down following the establishment of the Board Responsible Banking Committee in 2017
Managedmanage technological change and increased digitalisation in line with new regulatory initiatives including Open Banking and PSD2

Supported

Delivered change to meet the integration of Santanderevolving regulatory landscape, including changes brought about by Second Payment Services Directive (PSD2) and Santander Technology following their acquisition by Santander UK in 2018 to better partner with colleagues acrossOpen Banking; General Data Protection Regulation; Banking Reform and implementing the businessBanking Reform compliance model; and truly deliver for our customersthe FCA Consumer Protection Agenda

Developed a standardised

Continued to prepare for the transition from LIBOR to risk-free rates at the end of 2021, including planning for customer communications and recognition of potential conduct risk framework across our Corporate & Commercial Bankingrisks, and Corporate & Investment Banking divisions to ensure we manage theend-to-end client journey and potential market impacts more consistently

Helped to support and implement our Ring-Fenced Bank business model, by performing

Developed specific conduct risk assessments, tracking mitigating actionstraining to completion and delivering a Compliance Framework forstrengthen the new ring-fence model

Enhanced our systems and processes due to the implementation of MiFID II, which introduced significant changes in financial market infrastructure and practices. MiFID II requires more trading to take place on trading venues, greater price transparency, more detailed reporting to regulators, and changes to investor protection practices. We continued to enhance these areas throughout 2018 in line with further regulatory guidance. Senior management remains focused on this area
Took steps to ensure we are well prepared for a likely end of LIBOR in 2021 and the transition away from LIBOR to (near)business wide I AM Risk Free Reference Rates (RFR). We set up a Senior Management Steering Committee to ensure we are operationally ready for the transition. The LIBOR Transition Programme Office supports the committee, and coordinates and facilitates the work of specific working groups, and monitors how the LIBOR transition challenges and risks evolve. We participated in the first phase of the Sterling Risk Free Reference Rate Working Group, facilitated by the regulatory authorities. We continue to support this initiative through participating in RFR working groups and industry associations.training.

Conduct remediationFollowing the launch of the Contingent Reimbursement Model, a voluntary code of good practice for dealing with authorised push payment fraud, we agreed along with seven other banks to a funding loan forno-blame cases. We continue to engage with the industry and authorities in developing the code.

Like all UK banks we continue to see a demanding regulatory agenda focused on addressing customer detriment, price regulation and vulnerability. A major conduct issue that has impacted UK banks over the past few years related to PPI. A deadline for customer complaints of 29 August 2019 was set by the FCA, and in the run up to this date we saw an uplift in the volume of claims to unprecedented levels, which resulted in us making additional provisions to cover this. When implementing regulatory change, we are focused on ensuring that our strategy, leadership, governance arrangements, and approach to managing and rewarding staff does not lead to a detrimental impact on our customers, competition, or to market integrity. We expect all people in our organisation to take responsibility for managing risk through our I AM Risk programme.

Accounting position

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs was £246m (2017: £356m)£189m (2018: £246m). In 2019, we charged an additional £169m in respect of PPI. We made noan additional PPI chargesprovision of £70m in the year, based on our recentQ2 2019 reflecting an increase of claims experience,volumes and additional industry activities and having considered guidance provided by the FCA’s Consultation Paper 18/33 issued on 7 November 2018. We will continueFCA and our specific approach to monitor our provision levels, and take accountPPI claims, in advance of the impactPPI claims deadline on 29 August 2019. In Q3 2019, and in line with industry experience, we received unprecedented volumes of any further changeinformation requests in claims receivedAugust 2019 and FCA guidance.saw a significant spike in both these requests and complaints in the final days prior to the complaint deadline. Our best estimate of the additional provision required was £99m.

The remaining provision for other conduct issues was £30m (2017: £47m)£25m (2018: £30m), which primarily relates to the sale of interest rate derivatives, followingderivatives.

Regulatory and other provisions included an ongoing reviewamount of £68m (2018: £58m) that arose from a systems related historical issue identified by Santander UK, relating to compliance with certain requirements, of the Consumer Credit Act. This provision is based on detailed reviews of relevant systems related to customer credit business operations, supported by external legal and regulatory classificationadvice, and reflects our best estimate at 31 December 2019 of customers potentially eligible for redress. Following further analysis, management assessedpotential costs in respect to the provision requirements resulting in a release of £11m in Q2 2018.

Regulatory provisions

A £32.8m fine was levied by the FCA in December 2018. The fine relates to an investigation by the FCA into our historical probate and bereavement practices. For details on how we have responded to this, see the ‘Operational risk’ section.identified issue.

For more on our provisions, including sensitivities, see Note 3027 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

For more on our contingent liabilities, see Note 29 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

LOGO

LOGO

  

 

Combatting financial abuseWe continue to focus on protecting customers against fraud and scams. In 2019, we launched a social media campaign MC Grindah’s Deadliest Dupes. We partnered with Kurupt FM – the stars of the British Academy of Film and Television Awards (BAFTA)-winning BBC mockumentary programme ‘People Just Do Nothing’ .

 

Financial abuse is a very realStatistics show that Generation Z are among the most likely to fall victim to scams, and damaging form of abuse for many people in the UK and commonly involves financial control or the exploitation of atheir behaviours online can make them vulnerable person. We are working hard to look at different ways we can better help and support victims and limit a customer’s exposure to further abuse of this kind.fraudsters.

 

Since March 2017 we have worked closely with other members of UK Finance, as part of the Financial Abuse Working Party, with a shared visionThe campaign aimed to help victims regain control of their finances. Through this collaboration we have agreed a Financial Abuse Code of Practice, which we are now working to embed within our business as part of our overall vulnerable customer strategy. As part of our work in this area, we have designed specific training material for colleagues to raise awarenessreach and improve understanding around the devastating impacts of financial abuseeducate younger people about fraud and how we can help. We are also looking to make it easier for victims to ask for helpscams and get the support they need to be released from joint accounts they may hold with their abuser. Due to the very complex nature of situations involving financial abuse, we also have a dedicated Specialist Support Team that offers guidance to colleagues dealing with customers who are victims and need tailored solutions to help them regain controlspot the early signs. Deadliest Dupes is now live on social media. We have reached more than four million people on Instagram at least 19 times. This represents 99% of their finances.our target – up to 76% of 18 to 24 year-olds on Instagram, Snapchat and YouTube in the UK.

 

This kind of abuse can take a variety of forms within different relationships including family, partner and carer relationships. While financial abuse can happenWe have also partnered with the charity Barnardo’s to anyone, women are more likelydeliver the content we created with Kurupt FM to experience it and amongst older people, those with dementia or reduced cognitive function are the most vulnerable. Research shows that over one third of victims don’t tell anyone at the time and that is why we are fully committed to raising awareness and providing the right support so that customers feel able to speak with us about their personal situation.vulnerable young people.

 

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 119141


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Other key risksOperational risk(unaudited)(UNAUDITED)

 

Overview

In this section, we describe how we manage our other key risks and discuss developments in the year.Overview

 

Our other key risks are:

–   Operational risk:risk is the risk of direct, or indirect, loss due to inadequate or failed internal processes, people and systems, or external events.

–   Financial crime risk:

In this section, we explain how we manage operational risk, with a focus on our top three key operational risks. We also describe our operational risk event losses and developments in the risk thatyear, and give some insight into how we are used to further financial crime, including money laundering, sanctions evasion, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption.

–   Strategic risk: the risk of loss or damage due to decisions that impact the long-term interests ofprotecting our key stakeholders, or from an inability to adapt to external developments.

– Legal risk: the risk of loss due to legal deficiencies in contracts; failure to take appropriate measures to protect assets; failure to manage legal disputes appropriately; failure to assess or implement the requirements of a change of law; or failure to comply with law or regulation or to discharge duties or responsibilities created by law or regulation.

– Reputational risk: the risk of damage to the way our reputation and brand are perceived by the public, clients, government, colleagues, investors, or any other interested party.

– Model risk: the risk of loss from decisions mainly based on results of models due to errors in their design, application or use.

customers.

 

  

Key metrics

Operational risk losses (over £10,000, and excluding PPI) decreased by 63%

OPERATIONAL RISK

OUR KEY OPERATIONAL RISKS

Operational risk is inherent in our business. As a result, we aim to manage it down to as low a level as possible, rather than eliminate it entirely. Operational risk events can have a financial impact and can also affect our business objectives, customer service and regulatory obligations. These events can include product misselling, fraud, process failures, system downtime and damage to assets.

Our top three key operational risks are:

 

Key risks

Description
Process and change management 

Description

  ProcessWe have to constantly change to keep up with the latest regulatory requirements, and with an increasing rate of change

  management

in technological innovation, evolving business models and the competitive landscape. A key part of our business strategy is to develop and deliver new banking channelsproducts and products. These include mobile bankingservices, while making our processes and thirdsystems more efficient and resilient. Third party payment products. The scale and paceinvolvement is increasing as part of our plans increases our operational risk.this strategy.

 

We are also implementing a large number of regulatory and legal changes, impacting all areas of our business. There is more on this in the ‘Regulatory risk’ section. Our business units are reporting

The scale and pace of our plans, and the potential compound effect of various changes happening at the same time increases our operational issues due to the volume and complexity of these changes.risk. These changes could have financial, customer, reputational and regulatory impacts if we do not manage them properly.

Outsourced and third

  partythird-party supplier

management

 

We rely extensively on third parties, both within the Banco Santander group and outside of it, for a range of goods, services and goods.activities. These include outsourced services, such as IT infrastructure and public cloud, software development, and banking operations. Regulations require us toIn line with regulatory requirements, we classify other legal entities in the Banco Santander group as external suppliers so weand manage them as third parties.parties and on an arms-length basis.

 

Third party risk is a key operational risk for us due to the number, complexity and criticality of the services provided by our third parties. Many are also shared acrossparties, as well as reflecting our increasing use of the sector and this could increase risk due to complexity and capacity issues at the suppliers.public cloud. The failure of a supplier may cause operational disruption, breach of data security or regulations, negative customer impact, financial loss or reputational damage.

In addition, regulatory requirements around how we manage our outsourced services increased significantly in 2019, with the European Banking Authority (EBA) Outsourcing Guidelines that became effective on 30 September 2019. These affirm the need for strong internal governance and oversight arrangements, including sound risk management, whenever we outsource functions.

Cyber risk 

We rely extensively on the use of technology across our business. This includes internal platforms, such as our core banking systems, mortgage platforms, telecommunications and finance systems, and customer-facing platforms such as our mobile app and online banking websites. The use of technology and the internet have changed the way we live and work. They have allowed us to develop and improve the way we deal with our customers. It is critically important that we protect our customers’ data and give our customers a secure environment in which to deal with us, especially when the threat from cyber criminals is so prevalent and more sophisticated than ever.

Failure to protect the data assets of Santander UK and its customers against theft, damage or destruction from cyber-attacks could result in damage to our reputation and directcause operational disruption, breach of data security or regulations, negative customer impact, financial losses.loss or reputational damage. Even small periods of disruption that deny access to our digital services can erode our customers’ trust in us. This applies not only to our own systems but also to those of our third partythird-party providers and counterparties in the market. The value of data itself, especially the personal details of customers and staff, has increased considerably and is a core focus of cyber criminals along with systems, such as payments and ATM networks, that enable the monetisation of cyber system breaches. It is therefore critical that we are resilient to cyber-attacks and can withstand and quickly recover from those events that doshould they occur.

 

The UK referendum vote in June 2016 to leaveFollowing the UK’s exit from the EU was followed by Article 50 being triggered in March 2017. This markedon 31 January 2020, our Brexit planning is now focused on the startpotential outcomes of the Brexit process, scheduled for March 2019. As anticipated, the process is impacting the economic, legalUK and regulatory environment for consumers, businessesEU negotiations in respect of a Free Trade Agreement (FTA) and theequivalence in financial services, industry. Givenby the complexityend of the process, we have put in place robust contingency2020. We are also maintaining and refining existing plans and mitigating actions to address the potential risks that could arise across our business. We continue to actively monitor the key risks including operational, credit, market, liquidity, conduct and regulatory, legal, and reputational. As the process becomes clearer, we will update our plans and actions, and implement them if and when we need to.

While uncertainty around Brexit remains we are preparing for a number of outcomes in order to minimise the impact on our business. Our Brexit preparations are comprehensive and we have dedicated significant focus to ensure we can continue to serve our customers whatever the outcome. In particular we have taken account of the nationality and location of our people and customers, contract continuity,areas requiring cross-divisional communication including financial markets infrastructure, such as clearing, access to Euro payment systems as well as third partydata, payments, third-party services, cyber, and flowsinternal and external communications.

Our Brexit planning is overseen by the Board and Senior Management Committee. Our Brexit Working Group, comprised of data intorepresentatives from across the business and outsupport functions, completed our preparations and ensured operational readiness ahead of the European Economic Area.

We expect the direct impact on our business to be somewhat lower than for other more diversified UK banks and corporates, given our UK focus. We also expect to benefit from being part of the Banco Santander group, the largest bankprevious potential ‘no deal’ risk junctures in the eurozone with major subsidiaries outside Europe, which will help us to continue to serve our customers’ domestic and international banking needs. The indirect impact on our business remains uncertain and2019. These plans will be linked tomaintained should they be required again in preparation for a‘no-deal’ scenario later this year. Further plans will be developed when there is clarity on the wider UK economic outturn infuture trading arrangements and their potential impacts on the years ahead. Nonetheless, we believe we are well preparedbank and continue to be positioned prudently.its customers.

We are also exposed to tax risk which, even though it is a lower risk for us, is still a high profilehigh-profile risk and may include legacy items. We define tax risk as the risk that we fail to comply with domestic and international tax regulations because we misinterpret legislation, regulations or guidance, or we report to the tax authorities inaccurately or late. This could lead to financial penalties, additional tax charges or reputational damage. Santander UK adopted the Code of Practice on Taxation for Banks in 2010. For more on this, see our Tax Strategy.

 

120142 Santander UK plc


 > Other key risks
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Operational risk

 

OPERATIONAL RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk appetite

We set our operational risk appetite at a Santander UK level and we express it through measures approved by the Board. These include risk statements and metrics set against the seven CRD IV loss event types. We cascade our appetite across our business areas by setting out clear lower level triggers, qualitative parameters and quantitative thresholds, and processes by which risks and events must be managed and escalated, and by which they may be formally accepted.

Coverage across the seven CRD IV loss event types is comprehensive and aligns to Principal Risk Areas approved by ERCC. As a result, we have specific embedded monitoring and measurement of our operational risks, including our top three key operational risks as follows:

Process and change management: We monitor our risk profile and performance against risk appetite under several Principal Risk Areas, which reflects the different ways that this risk can manifest. Change is one of our core risk appetite areas of focus, ensuring we can specifically monitor risk appetite in relation to Change via a clearly defined suite of statements and metrics. In addition, we monitor this risk via statements, metrics and limits within our Compliance consideration, as this incorporates a view of regulatory change. We also consider key elements within our IT & Cyber Risk appetite, specifically in relation to ensuring that we address obsolescence considerations as part of our change agenda, and as part of our third party risk appetite consideration, in line with their increasing involvement in process and change management related activities.

Outsourced and third-party supplier management: We have a directly aligned suite of defined Risk Appetite statements and metrics which have been agreed by the Board, and which allow ongoing measurement of our risk profile in this area. These statements and metrics reflect core principles which are set out in our Third-Party Risk Framework, as well as reflecting regulatory standards and developments.

Cyber risk: We have a comprehensive set of Risk Appetite statements and metrics which have been agreed by the Board, and which allow us to measure our cyber risk. We have defined statements and metrics with key subject matter experts in our Cyber and IT teams, and we incorporate Banco Santander group principles and standards, regulatory requirements and industry best practice, where applicable.

We report against all the Principal Risk Areas defined in our risk appetite each month to ERCC, and formal actions are required to address and mitigate any measures which are reported out of tolerance. We communicate, action, and escalate as needed, any material issues identified to the Board.

Risk measurement and mitigation

The key components of the operational risk toolset we use to measure and mitigate risk are:

 

Operational risk toolset

 

Description

Operational risk and

control assessments

 

Our business units identify and assess their operational risks to ensure they manage and control them within our operational risk appetite. They also ensure that we prioritise any actions needed. Every area has to identify their risks, assess their controls for adequacy and then accept the risk or formulate a plan to address any deficiencies.

Risk scenario analysis

 

We perform this across all of our business units. It involves a top down assessment of our most significant operational risks. Each business unit hasWe have a set of scenarios that it reviewswe review and updatesupdate each year. The analysis gives us insight into rare but high impact events. It also allows us to better understand the potential impacts and to address any issues.

Key indicators

 

Key indicators and their tolerance levels give us an objective view of the degree of risk exposure or the strength of a control at any point in time. They also show trends over time and give us early warning of potential increasing risk exposures. Our most common key indicatorsOf primary importance are keybusiness-wide risk appetite indicators which highlight the degree ofmeasure our adherence to our defined risk and key control indicators which show how strong and effective the controls are.appetite statements.

Operational risk losses

 

Our operational risk loss appetite sets the level of total operational risk loss (expected and unexpected) in any given year (on a 12 month12-month rolling basis) that we consider to be acceptable. We track actual losses against our appetite, and we escalate as needed.

Operational risk event management

 

Operational risk events occur when our controls do not operate as we planned and this leads to customer impact, financial loss, regulatory impacts and/or damage to our reputation. We have processes to capture and analyse loss events. We use data from these processes to identify and correct any control weaknesses. We also use root cause analysis to identify emerging themes, to prevent or reduce the impacts of recurrence and to support risk and control assessments, scenario analysis and risk reporting.

Risk based insurance

 

Where appropriate, we use insurance to complement other risk mitigation measures.

For process and change management risk, we track and monitor the number of regulatory projects with a red risk status (under our Transformation Office’s Execution Risk Management Framework). We give priority to our regulatory change projects for funding and delivery. All our change initiatives must have an operational risk assessment in place. We track these using a coverage metric.

For third-party risks, we identify and assess the inherent risk profile of each third-party arrangement prior to onboarding. We continue to measure this throughout the relationship. The inherent risk level drives the required governance and oversight of the third-party arrangement – the higher the inherent risk profile, the greater the governance we put in place. In addition, we identify and measure key third-party risks and the related control environment as part of our operational risk and control assessments. We do this both as part of business as usual activities and within related change initiatives. We have processes to capture and assess related events, as well as operational risk indicators in place which measure the ongoing third-party risk profile of the business.

For cyber risk, our Security and Information Technology teams continually identify and assess technological risks. They are guided by standardised, industry-leading control frameworks to ensure that we remain within our operational risk appetite. We measure the maturity of our controls in terms of their design and effectiveness and when combined with our cyber threat intelligence, we use it to define and prioritise our programmes of mitigation. We have processes to capture and analyse events from our security systems with tolerances derived from our risk appetite that drives escalation processes as needed. We operate a layered defence approach to cyber risk which we test and assess continually to ensure that it addresses the prevailing threats. Our comprehensive approach to validating our controls includes tests designed to replicate real-world cyber-attacks with test findings driving our ongoing improvement plans. As part of this, we participate in industry wide cyber security stress tests, such as CBEST, through to weekly cyber testing of our internet facing digital services that enables us to compare against our peers.

Santander UK plc143


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

We also mitigate our key operational risks in the following ways:

 

Key risks

Risk mitigation
Process and change management 

Risk mitigation

 ProcessWe have to constantly change to keep up with the latest regulatory requirements, and change

 management

an increasing rate of technological innovation, evolving business models and the competitive landscape. Changes can arise from a number of factors. These include the introduction of new third-party suppliers, the adoption of new technologies and business models, organisational changes, and dealing with legacy systems and processes. Our operational risk exposure increases when we engage in new activities, develop new products, enter new markets ormake changes, and the risks can compound when several changes happen at the same time.

In order to support the constant need for change processes or systems. As a result,whilst minimising the operational risk, we review:

–  The risk management of individual projects

–  The risk management of the aggregate change from our portfolio of projects

–  Our capacity and capability to deliver the overall change agenda.

For individual projects, we assess the operational risk for all material change programmeschanges in each new project, product and new productssupplier, before they are allowed to go ahead. At the portfolio level, we monitor our portfolio for concentrations of change which can compound a risk or place high demands for our teams to deliver several changes at once. In terms of our overall capacity and capability, we constantly recruit, train and upskill more dedicated project managers to support the delivery of our overall change agenda.

 Outsourced and third

 party supplier

 management

 

Our Risk and Control Self-Assessment (RCSA) captures the risks related to process and change management that are identified by the business, alongside an assessment of the effectiveness of the controls, and the residual risk exposure. We log any operational risk events that occur and escalate them through our operational risk Santander Early Escalation Notification (SEEN) process.

Outsourced and third-party supplier management

We place emphasis on a carefully controlled and managed Third Party Supplier Risk Framework and are enhancing our resources in this area in order to manage this risk.

We aim to ensure that those with whom we intend to conductdo business meet our risk and control standards throughoutacross the life of our relationship with them. them:

On-boarding:We ensure that all third-party suppliers meet our needs before we enter into any agreement with them to mitigate the risksinherent to the process, function or activity they may provide. As part of this, we:

–  Verify that the third-party supplier has enough capacity to perform and/or supply the goods, services or activities we need

–  Make sure that each third-party provider meets minimum conditions we require in legal, compliance, financial crime and technical terms

–  Analyse the economic viability of the third-party provider in the short and medium term.

In-service management:We assign all third-party services an accountable Service Director and appoint a Service Manager to manage theservice and key risks on aday-to-day basis. We provide training to these colleagues to ensure they understand their responsibilities. Through these roles we also monitor and manage our ongoing supplier relationships to ensure our standards and contracted service performance continue to be met. As part of this we:

 Cyber risk

 

–  Follow up and analyse third-party provider performance. This includes periodic service review meetings to monitor performance against contractual service level agreements and other key risk indicators

–  Follow up and analyse broader risks associated with the third-party arrangement, by establishing key risk and control indicators. These can relate to areas such as data protection, information security, anti-bribery & corruption, conduct, operational resiliency and reputational risks

–  Monitor how third-party providers comply with their obligations and commitments under the contract

–  Monitor and manage any third-party incidents that arise. Where incidents impact our business, we report and manage them in line with our Operational Risk Event Escalation, Management & Reporting Policy

–  Set and review mitigation actions with the third-party provider to improve performance, manage incidents, or mitigate key risks.

Off-boarding and exit management:When we decide to exit a third-party arrangement, we aim to do so without undue disruption or adverseimpact on their compliance with the regulatory framework and without detriment to the continuity and quality of services provided to customers. We aim to mitigate the related risks through:

–  Comprehensive and documented Exit Strategies and Exit Plans for our most critical services

–  Review and testing of these Exit Plans to ensure they are adequate. This includes an analysis of the potential costs, impact, resource and timing implications of moving to a different provider, and

–  Completing Operational Risk Assessments to ensure that we identify, assess, manage, and report the risks of exit.

Cyber risk

Protecting our customers, systems and data remains a top priority for us. Online security and data breachesbreach stories, along with many reports of scams and online fraud, continue to feature strongly in headlines and political debate. As criminals become more sophisticated in their approach,headlines. All organisations, including banks, and other organisations are in an ongoing race to keep ahead of them. Cyber criminals who are becoming ever more sophisticated and destructive in their approach. Criminals persist in attempts to deny our customers access to our digital channels, target our online services and data, or steal online credentials by various methods, including social engineering.

 

Protecting our customers, systems and data remains a top priority for us. In 2018, we undertook a large programmeWe continue to enhance our resilience to cyber-disruption. This includescyber disruption. Keeping our systems secure is everybody’s responsibility and we continue to enhance our training programmes for staff to support this. We have Board-level expertise and supervision in cyber security matters to ensure robust monitoring and challenge, with at least one Director who has significant experience in this area. We also have targeted training customer educationfor Board members and IT improvements. Oursenior management as well as those staff who may be singled out by criminals, such as those facilitating payments. New cyber security training ensures that all our staff understand the threats we face, and that we all have the expertise through practical assessment, to spot criminals’ emails from criminals and attacks on our IT systems. We continue to work with other banks as members of the Cyber Defence Alliance, where we share intelligence on cyber threats and effective mitigation strategies.strategies to counter them.

 

In 2018, we also launched a successful ‘Scam Avoidance School’We campaign to raise awareness and give customers the knowledge they need to avoid becoming victims of fraud. We use robust technology to protect our customers, in particular to look for anomalous behaviour or malicious software on customer devices, and we continually invest in the fight to counter scams. As part of this, we run customer education campaigns, and we offer advice on our online security centre. We successfully prevent the vast majority of fraud and protect our customers’ money. For more, see the ‘protecting our customers’ case study.

 

We operate a layered defence approach to cyber risk. This aims to prevent, detect, respond to and recover from cyber-attack. We continually review how effectiveimprove and test our controlscyber security risk management and ensure we focus on priority areas and drive action. This includes the security due diligence of existing systems as well as new products, services and our third parties. We regularly perform independent and internal security testing and are against globally-recognisedsubject to rigorous cyber simulation exercises by our regulator. We take these exercises very seriously and use the lessons learnt to continually adapt and improve our cyber defences. There have been no material security standards.breaches to date, although we are highly vigilant at all times. We have a Cyber insurance policy to provide us with immediate response to assess and control the impact of a breach.

Analysis of our security posture drives an ongoing discussion about cyber risks across the business. This includes individual business areas who must include cyber risk when they make business continuity decisions. We also make use of maturity assessments and both internal and external threat analysis.analyses. Our comprehensive approachcyber security experts assess our overall security posture and make recommendations to validating our controls includes tests designedboth management and Risk fora on a monthly basis, with onward reporting to replicate real-world cyber-attacks. Our test findings drive our ongoing improvement plans.the Executive Committee, ERCC, BRC and Board at least four times a year.

144Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Operational risk

Risk monitoring and reporting

Reporting is a key part of how we manage risk. It ensures we identify, escalate and manage issues on a timely basis. We can identify exposures through our operational risk and control assessments, risk scenario analysis, key indicators and incidents. We report exposures for each business unit through regular risk and control reports. These include details on risk exposures and how we plan to mitigate them. We prioritise and highlight events that have a material impact on our finances, reputation or customers by reporting them to key executives and committees. These include changes in our cyber risk profile.

We have a crisis management framework that covers all levels of the business. This includes the Board, Executive Committee, senior management and business and support functions. Our framework identifies possible trigger events and sets out how we will manage a crisis or major incident and we test it at least annually. If an event occurs, we have business continuity plans in place to recover as quickly as possible. These are aligned with our key customer journeys and delivery of critical IT services.

We use the standardised approachThe Standardised Approach (TSA) for Pillar 1 operational risk capital needs. We use an internal model aligned to the CRD IV advanced measurement approach to assess our Pillar 2 capital needs.

Process and change management risk

We monitor and report process and change management risk in the relevant governance stream for the type of change. For example, changes from products and services and technological changes have specific governance which have their own operational risk reporting requirements. We report an aggregated view of change risk by every business division, at least each quarter, using our Principal Operational Risk Dashboard. We capture risks related to process and change management identified by the business in our RCSAs, and we report operational risk events related to change using the SEEN process

Outsourced and third-party supplier management

We set up a Third-Party Risk Management Team in 2018 to more effectively manage this risk. It operates as a Line 1 Control Function responsible for the identification, assessment, management, and reporting of third-party risks across Santander UK. Part of this remit includes developing and maintaining an effective Third-Party Risk Management Framework.

Our Third-Party Outsourcing & Risk Management Policy, supported by a series of Standards, sets out detailed requirements and guidance to support our colleagues through theend-to-end third-party lifecycle. We have specific Standards forOn-Boarding Management, Risk Provider Certification,In-Service Management,Off-Boarding & Exit Management and Outsourcing of Critical Services.

We formally track our third-party risk profile against our risk appetite through a monthly risk and control forum. This includes monitoring compliance with our policy and standards. We use key risk indicators to support our monitoring activity and we report them to this forum. We escalate any significant risks, or changes in the risk profile, to the relevant senior risk committees such as ERCC, BRC and the Board.

We also updated our Third-Party Risk Management System to improve the completeness and quality of data that we capture and use itfor the Operational Risk Indicators we report to modelsenior management. This also supports central oversight of our supplier portfolio.

Cyber risk

We base our monitoring and reporting on the metrics and operational dashboards in our cyber security and IT functions. Our Cyber Threat Unit and experts carry out analysis within the worldwide Santander Security Operations Centre in Madrid. We use a wide range of key risk losses we might incurindicators, threat intelligence reports and results from security testing to identify improvements to our cyber defences. Our operational teams, with input from Risk, review these trends and steer management activity where required.

We also formally track our cyber and technological risks against our risk appetite through a monthly risk control forum. Part of the forum’s remit is to identify changes in risk posture and to inform senior risk committees of any significant changes. Issues such as technological obsolescence and the challenges in keeping our technologies free from known vulnerabilities, are examples of where a stress.metric driven approach to reporting through our risk management frameworks has led to proactive mitigation of risk.

 

LOGO

LOGO

To raise awareness of fraud and educate younger adults about how to avoid becoming victims of scams, we launched ‘For Your Eyes Alone’, a campaign designed to reach the under 25 (Generation Z) audience via the outlets and channels they use the most.

This age group love to share: 40% have shared their online banking passwords, and 85% have shared personal data on social media that could leave them vulnerable to scammers.

To underline the importance of keeping personal data ‘for your eyes alone’ we launched the world’s first invisible cinema – only visible through special polarised glasses – and toured it around UK universities.

We teamed up with Love Islander, Wes Nelson to create a scam awareness film to be screened at cinema events and used on his social media channels. Alongside the social reach that Wes achieved, the campaign attracted wide media coverage and we were able to provide detail directly, either via the film or supporting materials, to over 560,000 students through our university activity.

 

Santander UK plc 121145


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

OPERATIONAL RISK REVIEW

Operational risk event losses

The table below shows our operational losses in 20182019 and 20172018 for reportable events with an impact over £10,000, excluding conduct risk events (which we discuss separately in the ‘Conduct and regulatory risk’ section), by CRD IV loss event types. We manage some of these risks using frameworks for other risk types, including regulatory and financial crime risk even though we report them here.

 

  2019    2018 
    

 

2018

 

     

 

2017

 

 
    

 

            Value  

%  

     

 

        Volume 

     

 

Value  

%  

     

 

        Volume 

   

                Value

%

   

                Volume

%

   

                Value

%

   

                Volume

%

 

Internal fraud

     1              5                     1    2 

External fraud

     4        48       37        49     30    80     4    48 

Employment practices and workplace safety

     –              –                         2 

Clients, products, and business practices

     3        18       24        22     39    6     3    18 

Business disruption and system failures

     1              1        –  

Business disruption and systemsfailures

   2    1     1    1 

Execution, delivery, and process management

                 91        29       33        27     29    13      91    29 
    

 

 

 

100  

 

 

     100                       100        100     100    100      100    100 

20182019 compared to 20172018

We experiencedIn 2019, we did not experience material losses similar to those in 2018, such as the FCA fine of £32m and the Consumer Credit Act breach of £58m. As a general upliftresult, the value of our operational risk losses (Events over £10,000 but excluding PPI) fell by 63%year-on-year. However, we saw a significant increase of 103% in the volume ofnon-financial events in 2018, largely due to new regulations and breach reporting requirements relating to GDPR. Theoverall volume of losses against each category was broadlydue to external fraud. This reflects trends and industry direction in line with 2017. We saw an overall reduction in the volume of financial losses in 2018 comparedrelation to 2017, although the proportion attributedscams and we continue to each category was broadly unchanged. In particular, enhancements toenhance our anti-fraud controls have ledmeasures to help protect our customers. We also saw a reductionrise in the number of external fraud losses. In 2018 we also invested in delivering improved solutions to help protect our customers from Authorised Push Payment (APP) fraudevents and scams. These initiatives will support the new requirements set out by our regulators to help prevent customers from falling victim to APP fraud. The value of losses showed a significant change in 2018, with a move away from conduct-related losses (such as PPI) to those involving Execution, delivery and process management (events relating to historical system functionality and process issues).

The £32.8m fine leviedprompted by the FCAincreasing level of change, due to enhanced regulation, industry developments and the need to digitalise the business. We discuss developments on PPI in December 2018, contributed to this. The fine relates to an investigation by the FCA into our historical probateconduct and bereavement practices. We acknowledgedregulatory risk section of this Risk review.

In addition, as discussed earlier, climate-related risks could eventually manifest in risks for financial institutions. During 2020, we will review the findingsappropriate parts of the FCARisk Framework, Risk Type Frameworks (in particular Credit and apologisedOperational risk) and the Risk Appetite Statement to the familiesexplicitly include climate-related risks.

Process and beneficiaries of deceased customers affected by these failings. We have completedchange management risk

Business, regulatory and legal change continues to gather pace and 2019 saw a comprehensive tracing exercise and transferred the majority of funds in deceased customers’ accounts to their rightful beneficiaries, with compensatory interest where appropriate. We have also conducted a fullsubstantial review of our bereavement processesportfolio of change initiatives tore-focus, concentrate and made a number of significant changes, including a complete overhaul of our processes, and creation of a centralised specialist bereavement team to providere-prioritise scarce capital resources at the best service. We now also facilitate necessary payments from a deceased customer’s accounts to cover funeral bills, probate fees and/or inheritance tax.

In 2018 we also provided £58m in relation to a systems-related historical issue, which has also contributed to the shift to losses relating to Execution, Delivery and Process Management. As noted elsewhere, the provision is based on detailed reviews of systems regarding consumer credit business operations, and relates to compliance with certain aspects of the Consumer Credit Act. For more, see Notes 30 and 32 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

We implemented cheque imaging ahead of the industry milestone of 30 November 2018. With cheque clearing activities in association with other UK banks expected to increase during Q1 2019, our focus is on managing the related risks.

most pressing initiatives. The Open Banking Initiative and the new PSD2, both of which introduced newfurther requirements during 2018,in 2019, together bring significant opportunity for us to develop new products and services to enhance the ways customers use their data and pay for services. However, they also introduce a new layer of risk to both customers and Santander UK.us. We continued to carry out detailed operational risk assessments in relation to these initiatives, in order to identify, assess, manage and report the key risks involved. Our focus on managing these risks continues, with further assessments planned for 2019. In 2018 we introduced aThese regulatory requirements were enhanced by significant new early escalation process which has supported more proactive and coordinated incident management within the bank. We conducted one internal crisis exercise and participated in the Bank of England regulatory Simulated Crisis Exercise, which was designed to test the resilience capabilities of the UK financial sector. Additionally we increased our concurrent remote access capability to provide greater resiliency for staff to work away from their office in the event of adverse weather or similar situations. We have also reviewed and responded to the joint regulatory discussion paper titled ‘Building the UK financial sector’s operational resilience’.

In common with the whole financial services industry, change has been a constant feature in 2018 as it continues to gather pace and complexity. Key parts of our change programme include the design and issue to market of innovative new products and services,initiatives such as the 1I2I3 Account for Small Businesses;high cost of credit review and the changes necessarymigration of a certain segment of customers across to meet regulatory requirements, not least GDPR;a new banking platform. As we must deliver new and that relatedinnovative solutions to keeping Santander UK safe and running, and delivering formarket faster than ever before, we recognise the need to manage the risks associated with change as a priority in our customers.design processes. We have continuedconcentrated effort on further refining our Operational Risk Management identification and assessment methodologies to develop our governance processes to ensure that operationalstreamline, remove inefficiency, and focus on risk.

Third party risk is limited to the absolute minimum and we maintain strong mechanisms for oversight and challenge. A significant proportion of our governance is focused on our customers and doing for them what we consider to be Simple, Personal and Fair.

Change is alsoThird Party Risk Management remains a key factor in the management of our relationshipswhen we engage with our key outsourcing partners (Third Party Service Providers), who form an essential part of the service supply chain to our customers. Here too, the pace of change is dramatic.. The demand for innovative solutions and the provision of digital services which deliver on demand and at the right time and place for our customers means we must benefit from sharing intellectual development with the best in business. This approach will ensure that we develop and prosper, particularly for our customers, the communities in which we operate, and our staff. This brings additional risks, new technologies, widening spans of control across the supply chain, innovation and cyber threats. To enable us to manage these challenges we have focused on further reviewingcontinue to review our governance processes and introducingintroduce new systems solutions which provide informationdata and focus on our supplier relationships and performance. This work will continue, develop and strengthen asin 2020, aligned with the requirements of the EBA Outsourcing Guidelines that became effective on 30 September 2019. In 2019, we progress throughenhanced our Third Party Risk Management Framework and our resources in this area in order to manage this increased risk. We also updated our Third-Party Risk Management system to improve the coming year.completeness and quality of data that we capture and use for the Operational Risk Indicators we report to senior management. This also supports central oversight of our supplier portfolio.

Cyber risk

Cyber and information security also remains a top priority for us, especially in light of the new GDPR regulations for which we completed a programme of work to be able to manage related events.us. We continue to invest to ensure we have the right skills and resources to manage cyber and information security risk effectively across all our lines of defence. In September 2018, we appointed a new Chief Information Security Officer to help enhanceOur cyber transformation programme enhances our capabilities and ensure continued delivery ofwe deliver secure products and solutions for our customers and the communities that we serve.

Whilst we continue to be subject to cyber-attack, we did not suffer any material cyber or information security events during 2018in 2019 and we continue to actively participate in the Cyber Defence Alliance along with industry peers to share cyber threat intelligence, expertise and experience to help identify common features of cyber-attacks and effective mitigation strategies.

In 2019, threats from the external cyber environment continued to evolve, due to heightenedgeo-political tension, and active well-established cyber-crime groups. We monitor a range of cyber threats including; attacks on payment systems, ATM networks and customer data where insider threat and network intrusion are the most common attack methods; an emerging threat from a new method, aimed at breaching organisations’on-line customer services, (such as internet banking) and causing denial of service; and in addition Data Security and GDPR compliance continue to be key areas of concern. We have taken mitigating actions against these various threats including deploying a Cyber threat intelligence platform; increased intelligence through chairing the Geopolitical Financial Services working group; robust online service access construction utilising anti Distributed Denial of Service techniques. The mitigants implemented in our Cyber Security Plans are proving effective and we have experienced no significant disruption to date.

Data Management continues to be an increasingly important risk factor for us. We are progressing with our strategy to develop our core data management systems and capabilities and improve our level of Data Management risk by investing in the capabilities identified to support the maturity of Data Management Strategy programme. We have implemented a data governance model including a Senior Data Forum which reports to the Senior Management Committee, Board Audit Committee and Board Risk Committee. The programme is designed to support our Digital Transformation and meet the objectives of our data maturity capabilities, including a business owned data domain view, a common data architecture and enhanced and consistent data quality.

The Bank of England, PRA and FCA recently published a consultation paper, following their 2018 joint discussion paper to help financial firms evolve their approach to operational resilience. They expect firms to assume disruptive operational incidents will occur, and be able to show that they can withstand, absorb, recover and manage these in a way which considers the needs of all affected parties. We are improving our operational resilience by enhancing our operational risk framework and implementing a Board-approved strategy. This will focus on defining our key business services, providing enriched management data, and mapping our dependenciesend-to-end. It will also set, approve and test the impact tolerances of our ability to provide those services to the limit. In addition to regulatory compliance, this will achieve business and operational benefits through a programme of work in 2020 designed to embed operational resilience in our Digital Transformation programme as well asbusiness-as-usual activities.

 

122146 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Other key risks

 

Other key risks(UNAUDITED)

 

LOGO

Overview

In this section, we describe how we manage our other key risks and discuss developments in the year. Our other key risks are:

–  Financial crime risk: the risk that we are used to further financial crime, including money laundering, sanctions evasion, terrorist financing, bribery and corruption.

–  Legal risk: the risk of loss due to legal deficiencies in contracts; failure to take appropriate measures to protect assets; failure to manage legal disputes appropriately; failure to assess or implement the requirements of a change of law; or failure to comply with law or regulation or to discharge duties or responsibilities created by law or regulation.

  

 

Protecting our customers – Scam Avoidance School

We believe consumer awareness and education are key to tackling scams and fraud. While we continue to enhance our systems and processes to support our customers, talking to people about protecting themselves is vital to address the issue effectively. We have an ongoing customer communication programme on fraud and scams. Alongside this we have developed initiatives to raise awareness with consumers, as well as across media, government and other authorities.

 

In March 2018, we launched–  Strategic and business risk: the risk of loss or damage due to decisions that impact the long-term interests of our Scam Avoidance School. Our plan waskey stakeholders, or from an inability to educate customers aged over 60adapt to external developments.

–  Reputational risk: the risk of damage to the way our reputation and brand are perceived by the public, clients, government, colleagues, investors, or any other interested party.

–  Model risk: the risk of loss from decisions mainly based on howresults of models due to avoid becoming a victim of scams and fraud. We chose this age group as it is one of the more vulnerable when it comes to scam targets – data from the charity Age UK suggests 53% have been targeted by scammers at an average cost to victims of £401. We challenged stafferrors in our branches to deliver a bespoke anti-fraud lesson targeted at theover-60s.their design, application or use. We gave each branch a lesson plan and worksheets for ‘pupils’ as well as take away leaflets. We developed the lesson plans with Age UK and a psychologist from Lancashire University. The content and structure of the lesson also took account of independent consumer research carried out with 1,000over-60s. Subjects covered included email, text and phone scams, social engineering methods and psychology as well as cashpoint and contactless fraud.

We recruited Len Goodman, of TV’s Strictly Come Dancing, to front the campaign as our first ‘pupil’. He appears in a video and supporting materials. He also joined us at adrop-in event in Parliament where he helped us explain our Scam Avoidance School to 26 Members of Parliament.

Our staff carried out 620 events, reaching over 10,000 people, in March 2018. Since then, we have held hundreds more events, and thousands more people have learnt about how to avoid scams. Staff in our branches continue to run events, and we have adapted our lesson plan and literature for other audiences.

FINANCIAL CRIME RISK

OUR KEY FINANCIAL CRIME RISKS

Santander UK hasFinancial crime is a high priority risk for us. We recognise that financial crime activities can have a significant impact on our customers. Criminals are also increasingly using the financial system to launder the profits of illegal activity such as human trafficking and terrorism. We may be adversely affected if we fail to effectively mitigate the risk that third parties or our employees facilitate, or that our products and services are used to facilitate financial crime. This includes money laundering, terrorist financing and proliferation financing, breaches of economic and financial sanctions, bribery and corruption, and the facilitation of tax evasion. Therefore, we are committed to deter, detect‘Deter, Detect and disruptDisrupt’ criminality as a core pillar of itsour anti-financial crime (AFC) strategy. Our AFC strategy is a vehicle for change, initiating new ways of working to deliver this vision. We adopt a risk-based approach in line with UK and international laws and standards, and we target our resources in a proportionate and effective manner againstat the highest priority risks. We recognise the damage that financial crime does to our customers and communities and we are actively workingwork with government, law enforcement and the private sector stakeholders to help meet our commitments.

We launched a new anti-financial crime strategy across the business in 2018, endorsed by our senior leadership. Our Board has supported investment in our anti-financial crime capability which will deliver key elements of the strategy, from improved systems and controls to operational efficiencies through automation, as well as promoting an anti-financial crime culture across Santander UK.

Our key financial crime risks are:

 

Key risks

 

Description

Money laundering

 

The risk that weWe are used by criminals to transform the proceeds of crime into seemingly legitimate money or other assets.

Terrorist financing

 

The risk that weWe are used by terrorists to deposit, distribute or collect funds that are used to fund their activity.

Sanctions

 

The risk that weWe do not identify payments, customers or entities that are subject to economic or financial sanctions.

Bribery and corruption

 

The risk that weWe fail to put in place effective controls to prevent or detect bribery and corruption.

FINANCIAL CRIME RISK MANAGEMENT

Risk appetite

Financial Crime risk appetite is the level of risk which we are prepared to accept in carrying out our activities in respect to financial crime risk. This is approved and disseminated across legal entities and businesses, with limits specified to control exposures and activities that have material concentration risk implications for us and the communities we are part of. Our customers and shareholders will be impacted if we do not mitigate the risks of Santander UK being used to facilitate financial crime. We comply with applicable UK law, international sanctions and other applicable regulations and make sure our risk appetite adapts to external events as appropriate.

events. We have minimal tolerance for residual financial crime risk and zero tolerance for sanctions, and bribery and corruption risk. We also have no appetite for risks associated with employees who do not act with integrity, due diligence or care, or those who breach our policy and regulatory requirements.

Risk measurement

We measure our exposure to financial crime risk regularly. Our anti-financial crime strategy along with frameworks sets the strategic direction for risk management by defining standards, objectives and responsibilities for all areas of the business. It supports senior management in effective risk management and developing a strong risk culture. We screen and risk rate all our customers and monitor activity to identify potential suspicious behaviour. We completead-hoc reviews based on key trigger events. Our Financial Intelligence Unit conducts assessments of particularassesses specific types of threat, including drawing on data provided byfrom law enforcement and public authorities.

LOGO

Santander UK plc123


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

Risk mitigation

We take a proactive approach to mitigating financial crime risk. Our Financial Crime Risk Framework isfinancial crime risk frameworks are supported by policies and standards which explain the requirements for mitigating money laundering, terrorist financing, sanctions, facilitation of tax evasion and bribery & corruption risks. We update these regularly to ensure they reflect all new external requirements and industry best practice. We support our colleagues to make sure they can make the right decisions at the right time. We raise awareness and provide role specific technicalrole-specific training to build knowledge of emerging risks.

Key elements of our financial crime risk mitigation approach are that we:

 

Complete due diligence ofnew-to-bank new customers, where we seek to understand customers’their activities and banking requirementsneeds

Complete risk assessments of customers, products, businesses, sectors and geographic risks to tailor our mitigation efforts

Ensure all our staff complete mandatory Financial Crime training, supporting specialist training and learning opportunities

Deploy new systems to better capture, analyse and act on data to mitigate bribery and corruption risks

Partner with public authorities, the Home Office and the wider financial services industry to pool expertise and data. We are also operationally involved in partnerships such as the Joint Money Laundering Intelligence Taskforce (JMLIT) which supports public-private collaboration to tackle financial crime.

Santander UK plc147


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

Risk monitoring and reporting

We use key risk indicators to monitor our exposure to financial crime risks, and we maintain strengthened governance across both first and second lines of defence to make sure we report all issues in a timely manner. We work closely with relevant subject matter experts across the business on all risk management and monitoring activities alongside more effective communication of policy changes. Regulators around the world continue to emphasise the importance of effective risk culture, personal accountability and the adoption and enforcement of risk-based requirements and adequate internal reporting processes and procedures. We have enhancedremained focused to enhance our targetfinancial crime operating and governance model, to make sureensure that our control environment evolves at pace, keeping up with new or amended laws, regulations or industry guidance.

Each month we report anWe adhere to a strong governance and reporting schedule to our ERCC and Senior Management Committee, including analysis of the risks on the horizon, key financial crime risk indicators to the ERCC together withand a directional indication of the risk profileprofile. Throughout the year, management continued to update the risk committees on management and any significant deteriorationmitigation of the metrics.financial crime risks. We are currently introducinghave introduced an enhanced set of financial crime risk indicators.indicators for effective risk reporting to senior management. We also regularly report to the Board Responsible Banking Committee on financial crime risk, the impact to Santander UKon the business and the actions we are taking to mitigate the risk.

FINANCIAL CRIME RISK REVIEW

20182019 compared to 2017

In 2018 we launched our new three year Anti-Financial Crime strategy. Our mission is built on three simple principles, committing to deter, detect and disrupt financial crime.

In developing our strategy, we aligned to Santander UK’s commercial strategy and to the external landscape, listening to partners in the public sector, wider industry and communities. We committed to embed our strategy using education, collaboration and innovation. As a result, we increased awareness of financial crime and have encouraged our staff to use their judgement in doing the right thing and have empowered them to make responsible decisions. Our new Anti-Financial Crime Academy seeks to further embed this, supporting colleagues through multiple channels to ensure we have the right tools to tackle financial crime.

We embrace public and private partnership opportunities and actively collaborate with the public sector to address a number of financial crime challenges. These mechanisms provide opportunities to pool our collective knowledge, experiences and skills. We actively participate in these collaborations with industry and the UK Government to combat financial crime risk which also helps us further develop our internal capabilities. For example, in 2018 we analysed external intelligence together with our own data to strengthen our controls for cash deposits.

In May 2018, we took part in the latest FCA Financial Crime ‘TechSprint’ where we won two awards showcasing innovation by using technological advances around data sharing to disrupt criminals, whilst still protecting personal data. We are engaged on an ongoing basis with groups such as the JMLIT and continue to see a real positive impact of our work, contributing to the UK’s security and prosperity.

In 2018, we introduced significant changes to our financial crime control environment and culture. We enhanced our strategic capabilities and supporting infrastructure. Despite challenges, we are well positioned for 2019 where we expect to gain improved data-driven insights from these activities. We are also embedding our new target operating model after restructuring our Financial Crime Compliance teams.

The financial crime landscape continues to be difficult and complex, withgeo-political factors and continually evolving criminal methods influencing the risks we face. We willcontinued embedding our anti-financial crime strategy, policies and training across the business in 2019, endorsed by our senior leaders. Our Board has been supporting investment in our anti-financial crime capabilities that deliver key elements of the strategy, from improved systems and controls to increased efficiency through automation, as well as promoting an anti-financial crime culture across the business. We made a £75m investment in financial crime enhancements in 2019 through our ongoing Financial Crime Transformation Programme.

In 2019, we placed a significant focus on driving an anti-financial crime culture across the business. We increased awareness of financial crime through culture focus programmes and encouraged our staff to use their judgement to do the right thing and make responsible decisions. We aim to redefine the way we all think and behave in ourday-to-day activities by combating financial crime risk. Our vision is that Deterring, Detecting and Disrupting financial crime is part of our DNA. Throughout the year, we continued to raise awareness and provide role-specific training to colleagues to build knowledge of emerging risks to support their effective mitigation.

There are four underlying key messages driving our anti-financial crime culture:

Collaboration: We must work together across business lines. Tacklingfinancial crime is a common goal

Integrity: Act with bravery, integrity and without fear of recrimination

Responsibility: We are all liable at both an individual and organisational level

Instinct: Trust your instinct. If it feels wrong, it probably is.

Our financial crime control environment is evolving but still needs significant enhancement and investment. Our Financial Crime Transformation Programme delivered improvements across the control environment in 2019 and the foundations of key strategic controls are now in place. Enhancements continue to investbe made to our Financial Crime control framework, and to key controls including anti-bribery and corruption measures, customer risk assessment, and screening and transaction monitoring.

In 2019, we continued to drive a culture of AFC across the business and with partners. We ran ten events for the UK police’s regional organised crime units to better work with law enforcement to protect customers. We worked closely with law enforcement to develop an education programme to all financial investigators, explaining the way banks identify, investigate and respond to financial crime. These events were facilitated by SME’s from across Financial Crime and Fraud and led to senior managers presenting at the UK’s National Police Chiefs’ conference. This was a first for a bank to deliver such training to a wide audience and has been significantly welcomed. We also held a series of eight AFC Culture roadshows for colleagues across the UK to drive with 510 colleagues attending, of which 96% better understood the AFC Vision and 69% said they would change behavioural change. We enhanced our governance of AFC by launching a Strategy & Policy forum in our peopleSeptember covering AFC strategy and systems, deterpolicy challenges and developments, anti-money laundering, counter-terrorism financing and sanctions. We also engaged with government and law enforcement stakeholders to shape the usereforms that are part of our services forthe government’s Economic Crime Plan, which aims to improve the resilience of the UK’s overall defences against financial crime.We continued to work with the with industry and the UK Government to combat financial crime detect suspicious activitywhich also helps us further develop our own capabilities. For example, we increased our work with the industry and disrupt those seekinglaw enforcement. We ran a targeted campaign withnon-profit ‘Stop the Traffik’ to benefitraise branch colleagues’ awareness and capability to identify trafficking in branch staff in a location area at high risk for modern slavery and human trafficking (MSHT). Stop the Traffik also held masterclasses at our anti-financial crime roadshows.

We worked closely with law enforcement to develop an education programme to all financial investigators, explaining the way banks identify, investigate and respond to financial crime. This resulted in SME’s from financial crime.across Financial Crime and Fraud conducting ten events for across the UK’s Regional Organised Crime Units and then senior managers presenting at the UK’s National Police Chiefs’ conference. This was a first for a bank to deliver such training to a wide audience and has been significantly welcomed.

 

LOGOLOGO

  

Intelligence Partnerships

 

Our Financial Intelligence Unit works(FIU) continues to work closely with the JMLIT. This is a government initiative for public and private partnership between law enforcement and the financial industry to combat high end money laundering.laundering and share intelligence.

 

In 2018, we worked withThe FIU received intelligence from the Child Sexual Exploitation Unit via the JMLIT that an organised crime group were facilitating child sexual exploitation in a NCA operation to identify weapons being sent to the UK from overseas. and globally. Financial investigations corroborated the intelligence and showed significant sums of money being transferred via money service bureaus, to enable large scale live-streaming of child sexual abuse.

The NCA identifiedFIU worked closely with law enforcement to provide intelligence and analysis of value, enabling a specific weapons supplier from Eastern Europethorough and the information was shared with thecomplete view of members of the JMLIT.

We completed intelligence investigations on transactions linked to this supplier and identified significant resultsorganised crime group, which were fed back to the NCA in real time, allowing swift actionultimately allowed for timely arrests to be taken. Arrests were made alongside the seizure of firearms at UK ports and at addresses of the suspects we supplied data on. The intelligence we provided helpedoffenders, both in the NCA to identifyUK and seize significant amounts of firearms, ammunition and cash.

We received significant praise from the JMLIT, including feedback from the case officer stating thatoverseas. Through the intelligence we supplied helped to prevent what they believed would be further seriousdevelopment of the FIU a number of additional suspects were identified and potentially violent crime. We are committed to deterring, detecting and disrupting financial crime. We will continue to work closely with the JMLIT to help prevent and reduce our risk of facilitating organised crime.disclosed.

 

 

124148 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Other key risks

 

LEGAL RISK

Legal risk includes the legal consequences of operational risk (e.g.(such as breach of contract) and operational risk with legal origins (e.g.(such as a legally defective contract). We manage legal risk as a standalone risk-type to reflect the continued pace and breadth of regulatory change across financial services.

We define legal risk as losses or impacts arising from legal deficiencies in contracts or failure to: take appropriate measures to protect assets; manage legal disputes appropriately; assess, implement or comply with law or regulation; or to discharge

Take appropriate measures to protect assets

Manage legal disputes appropriately

Assess, implement or comply with law or regulation

Discharge duties or responsibilities created by law or regulation.

 

Legal risk management

 

Description

Risk appetite 

We have no appetite to make decisions or operate in a way that leads to legal risk, we apply robust controls to manage these risks. We have a low tolerance for residual legal risk.

Risk measurement 

Due to the close links between our legal and operational risk frameworks, our tools to identify, assess, manage and report operational risks also apply where such exposures have a legal risk impact.

Risk mitigation 

The Legal team provides specialist advice and support to all business units to ensure we effectively manage legal risk. They help to implement a strong legal risk culture throughout our business using guidelines, policies and procedures and specific assistancesupport on a product, service, transaction or arrangement basis and make decisions ondecide whether legal advice should be sourced internally or externally.

Risk monitoring and
reporting

 reporting

 

We have developed our internal legal risk reporting framework to improve the visibility of the SantanderUK-wide legal risk profile. We provide regular updates of our key legal risks, issues or breaches, to senior management and the Board through our Legal & Regulatory function. This is in addition to reports issued by the business.

20182019 compared to 20172018

TheOur legal risk profile of the Santander UK group was heightened butremained broadly stable duringin 2019, with continued uncertainty relating to Brexit, LIBOR transition risks, the coursequantum of 2018. In 2018regulation change applicable to our Retail Banking business and an upward trajectory ofPPI-related litigation and ongoing customer remediation issues balancing out the mitigation of existing legal risks we reviewed our panel of law firms we use to obtain external legal advice and services. We also refreshed the process for appointing a firm to the panel, to provide greater control around such engagement. We also made significant progress throughout 2018 to implement or embed new regulation, particularlyreported in the following areas:2018.

Ensuring Santander UK’s structure, governance frameworks, policies and arrangements adhere to ring-fencing rules or, where necessary, ensuring appropriate waivers are in place
Meeting key milestones in the implementation of the PSD2 requirements
The initial margin regime under European Market Infrastructure Regulation (EMIR) was implemented in International Swaps and Derivatives Association (ISDA) master agreements with the applicable financial counterparties
The revision of payment account terms and conditions to address the standardised terminology requirements under the Payment Accounts Regulations.

We plan to continuetook significant steps throughout 2019 to evolve and embed the legal risk framework in 2019, with a particular focus onacross the business. As part of this, we improved our quantitative and qualitative legal risk reporting, legal risk management and accountability.

We also renewed the approved law firm panel inmid-2019, renewing existing contracts and entering into contracts with new specialist firms and legal suppliers in order to diligently manage legal risks. We introduced improved processes to ensure that instructions outside of these panel relationships are on an exceptional basis only and always approved by senior management.

Further, we created a small specialist mortgage panel of law firms and other legal suppliers for secured collections and recoveries work, together with other mortgage related issues such as forfeiture,un-registered charges and professional negligence. The concentration of such issues under a specialist panel mitigates legal risk and increases control and visibility over our processes. This work forms part of a wider collections and recoveries transformation programme which began in 2019 and will continue into 2020.

We also introduced further rigour into the court orders and requests unit, embedding tighter controls, processes and accountability.

STRATEGIC AND BUSINESS RISK

Strategic and business risk can adversely affectcould impact our long-term success asif it could lead tocaused our business model becomingto become out of date, ineffective, or inconsistent with our strategic goals. This could arise if we:

 

Have a partialan incomplete picture of our operating environment. This can includeenvironment, such as the economy, new rules and regulations, shifting customer expectations,regulation, competitor activity and changes in technology and customer expectations

Misjudge our capabilities, or ability to implement our strategy

Pursue initiatives like acquisitions that mightdo not fit with our business model or miss opportunities that we could benefit from.

 

Strategic and business

 Strategic risk management

 

Description

Risk appetite 

We have a low to moderate appetite for strategic and business risk. This limits the risks we are prepared to take to achieve our strategic objectives and is aligned to our balanced, customer-centric business model.

Risk measurement 

Our Board and senior management regularly review potential risks associated with our operations and plans to ensure we stay within our risk appetite.

Risk mitigation 

We manage strategic and business risk by having a clear and consistent strategy that takes account of both external factors and our own capabilities. We have an effective planning process which ensures we refine, strengthen, and adapt our strategy to reflect changes in the environment and identifyother key risks and opportunities.

Risk monitoring and reporting 

We closely track our business environment, including long-term trends that might affect us in the future. As part of this, we report a range of indicators to track our performance.

indicators.

20182019 compared to 20172018

Our business environment is always changing, and this affects how we do business.

 

In 2018,

Throughout 2019 we experienced persistent uncertainty regarding the UK economy continued to perform better than many initial expectations following the EU referendum. However, significant uncertainty still remains and there areoutcome of Brexit with a range of possible outcomes,scenarios, including some which could have an adverse impact.impact on the economy. As the UK’s leading full-service scale challenger, with a resilient balance sheet and a record of achieving consistent profitability, through uncertain times, we believe we are well-placed to continue to deliver our strategy.strategy during these uncertain times.

Competitive pressure remained high in 2018.2019. This was mainly from established players, but newtechnology-led entrants also made progress and could disrupt the market in the longer term. We expect these trends to continue in 2019; however2020, but we believe our customer-focused business model and strategy, together withand our adaptable and innovative approach, will enablesupport our continued success. We continue to embrace new technology, for example through the launch of our new Digital Investment Advisor and by regularly reviewing opportunities to partner with Fintech companies. This includes opportunities identified through Banco Santander’s InnoVentures fund which invests in companies with proven expertise leveraging technology which could benefit our customers.

Overall, we continue to embrace change

Our refined priorities are an integral part of Banco Santander’s European strategy announced in April 2019. focusing on customer outcomes, simplify and have made good progress towardsdigitise the business, invest in our strategic goals.people and deliver sustainable returns.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 125149


Annual Report 2019| Risk review

    


Annual Report 2018 | Risk review

 

REPUTATIONAL RISK

Our key reputational risks arise from failures in corporate governance or management, failing to treat our customers fairly, the actual or perceived way we do business, and the sectors and countries we deal with. They also result from how our clients and those who act for us conduct themselves, and how business is conducted in our industry. External factors may also present a reputational risk to us. These can include the macro environment and the performance of the sector. Sustained damage to our reputation could have a material impact on our ability to operate fully. In turn, this could affect our financial performance and prospects. Reputational risk is not static; today’s decisions may be judged by different standards tomorrow. We build this into our risk culture, evaluation and sanction procedures.

 

 
Reputational risk management Description
Risk appetite 

We have a low appetite for reputational risk, which is agreed by the Board at least annually.each year. We express it in terms of the risk measures set out below.

Risk measurement 

We assess our exposure to reputational risk daily. We base this on professionalexpert judgement and analysis of social, print, and broadcast media, alongsideand the views of political and market commentators. We also commission independent third parties to analyse our activities and those of our UK peers to identify significant reputational events, or a prolonged deteriorationdecline in our reputation and any sector level or thematic issues that may impact our wider business. We also measure the perception of Santander UK amongst key stakeholder groups through regular interactions and perform annual reviews of staff sentiment. We review our reputation daily through media and political interactions and updates, and through weekly reputation reports provided byfrom an external supplier.

Risk mitigation 

Our business units consider reputational risk as part of their operational risk and control assessments. We also consider it as part of our new product assessments. Our Corporate Communications, Legal and Marketing team helps our business units to mitigate reputationalthe risk and agree action plans as needed. They do this as part of their overall role to monitor, build and protect our reputation and brand.

Risk monitoring and
reporting

 reporting

 

We monitor and report reputational risks and issues on a timely basis. Our Reputational Risk Forum is responsible for reviewing, monitoringreviews, monitors and escalatingescalates to Board level key decisions around financial andnon-financialon reputational risks. It also has regular andad-ad-hoc hoc meetings to discuss the risks we face. We escalate them to the ERCC and Board Responsible Banking Committee, as needed. Our Corporate Communications, Legal and Marketing team also reports regularly to our Executive Committee on Corporate Social Responsibility, Sustainability and Public Affairs policies. They do this from an environment, community and sector point of view.

20182019 compared to 20172018

In 2018,2019 we consideredworked with the potential reputational riskbusiness to manage the impact arisingof the UK’s departure from the FCA publishing their Final Notice announcingEU. We developed communications for our customers to advise them how we think Brexit will impact the resultsproducts and services they enjoy, but also to reassure them of their investigation intoour ongoing commitment to serving the UK.

We also handled the communications issues identifiedaround the deadline for customers to make PPI claims. The volume of customer interaction slowed down our website and the subsequent actionsresulted in extended call-waiting times for customers using our contact centre, but we took in relation to our historical probate and bereavement practices. This included the completionadvised media of the operational improvementssteps we were taking to resolve the problem.

In January 2019, we worked with the business to deliver the communication for the restructuring of our branch network. Following a wide-ranging review into how our customers were choosing to do business with us, we announced in March 2019 that started in 2015we would be closing 140 branches. We handled the communications with affected MPs, Members of the Scottish Parliament and Welsh Assembly members as well as national and local media. We highlighted our commitment to our Probate and Bereavement processes and which we describe in more detailinvesting in the ‘Operational risk’ section. We further strengthened our approach to managing reputational risk acrossnetwork, including refurbishing branches and opening a new Work Café in Leeds, as well as the business and have successfully embeddedservices that customers can access through the Reputational Risk Forum and wider framework, which was introduced in 2017. We enhanced our reputational risk appetite and agreed escalation processes. Post Office.

Our Reputational Risk Forum continued to meet regularly to discuss anyour emerging orand material risks, we face. We also formalised abringing together senior representatives from across the business, alongside the use of our formal Reputational Risk Register, which helps us to track and monitor live risks, and we embeddedRegister. This has ensured that reputational risk input intois a leading consideration with both the ERCC and the Board Responsible Banking Committee. This ensure clearmaintains the visibility and discussion of all material reputational risk issues at Board level.

Throughout 2018, we worked closely with the business on communication plans for key events such as preparing for the UK’s exit from the EU and implementing our ring-fencing plans. We have made significant announcements in Milton Keynes and Bootle, Merseyside confirming our commitment to these communities and investing in new campuses in both locations. We have continued to promote the community and wider society support that Santander UK provides through our Corporate Social Responsibility work, and the Santander Cycles Schemes in London and Milton Keynes.

MODEL RISK

Our key model risks arise from potential flawsweaknesses and limitations in our modelling techniques,models, or the incorrect use of a model. They include risks arisingstemming from model data, systems, development, performance and governance. The most material models we use help us calculate our regulatory capital (IRB),and credit losses, and perform stress tests and estimate our credit impairments.tests. Increased regulatory standards have influencedinfluence how we manage model risk. We have respondedcontinue to this by improvingenhance our governance documentation, investing in additionalalign our resources to new, demands and improvingimprove our systems for managementto manage and control our activities.

 

 
Model risk management Description
Risk appetite 

We express our model risk appetite through the risk assessments of our most materialkey risk models. The Board agreesis asked to agree this at least annually.

each year.
Risk measurement 

We consider both the percentage of models that have been independently assessed, as well asand the outcome of those reviews, in our measurementhow we measure model risk. All models have several assumptions and in general the more limitations we have for those assumptions, the higher the levels of model risk.

Risk mitigation 

We mitigate model risk through controls over thehow we use of models throughout their lifecycle.life. We maintain a central model inventory that includes data on owners, uses and key dates.model limitations. We assess how important each model is to our business. Webusiness, and we track recommendationsand resolve actions from independent reviews through to resolution.reviews. We also maintain a clear approval path for new models updates and performance tracking.

updates.

Risk monitoring and

reporting

 

We report model risks and issues using model risk management and control forums. We escalate issues to the ERCC when necessary,needed, or if our risk appetite is breached.

breached or showing adverse trends that could lead to future issues.

20182019 compared to 2017

The introduction of IFRS 9 in 2018 increased the level of model risk in our portfolio due to the development of new models. Our Risk division hadpre-existing Basel and behavioural scorecards. We created new variants of these models to deal with significant credit deterioration, lifetime expected credit losses and forward economic guidance as required by IFRS 9. Our impairment models vary in complexity and inputs depending on the size of the portfolio, the amount of data available and the sophistication of the market concerned. The risk modelling function followed our standard governance processes for developing and independently validating new models.

In addition to our focus on developing new models for IFRS 9 purposes, we performed a self-assessment against the new PRA regulatory policy and supervisory statement issued by the PRA in 2018 related toon stress test models. The principles are closely aligned to our existing model risk framework, so we did not need to make any significant changes. We further clarified the roles of Model Owners and Model Users and supplementedenhanced our Model Risk Appetite with additionalmore performance indicators. We maintain a risk-based approach to both management and control, forcontrol. For example, focusingwe focus independent model reviewreviews on theour more material models, such as those related to IFRS 9,for credit losses, or those with specific regulatory standards defined.

The redevelopment of the suite of regulatory capital models to account for new regulations is a key model project for the Bank. This focuses on several different regulations across both the PRA and ECB including the Hybrid Philosophy for Secured Residential Real Estate and the new Definition of Default requirements. The majority of work for this is expected to complete in 2020 and will then be subject to regulatory review.

 

126150 Santander UK plc


 
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

LOGO


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statementsSantander UK plc 151

 


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

 

Report of Independent Registered Public Accounting Firm

To the Board of Directors and Shareholders of Santander UK plc

Opinion on the Financial Statements

We have audited the accompanying consolidated balance sheetsheets of Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries (the “Company”) as of 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, and the related consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated cash flow statement, and consolidated statement of changes in equity for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 2018,2019, including the related notes (collectively referred to as the “consolidated financial statements”). In our opinion, the consolidated financial statements present fairly, in all material respects, the financial position of the Company as of 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, and the results of its operations and its cash flows for each of the three years in the period ended 31 December 20182019 in conformity with International Financial Reporting Standards as issued by the International Accounting Standards Board and with International Financial Reporting Standards as adopted by the European Union.

ChangeChanges in Accounting PrinciplePrinciples

As discussed in Note 1 to the consolidated financial statements, in 2019 the Company changed the manner in which it accounts for leases and in which it accounts for tax on dividends received on financial instruments classified as equity and in 2018.2018 the manner in which it accounts for financial instruments.

Basis for Opinion

These consolidated financial statements are the responsibility of the Company’s management. Our responsibility is to express an opinion on the Company’s consolidated financial statements based on our audits. We are a public accounting firm registered with the Public Company Accounting Oversight Board (United States) (“PCAOB”) and are required to be independent with respect to the Company in accordance with the U.S. federal securities laws and the applicable rules and regulations of the Securities and Exchange Commission and the PCAOB.

We conducted our audits of these consolidated financial statements in accordance with the standards of the PCAOB. Those standards require that we plan and perform the audit to obtain reasonable assurance about whether the consolidated financial statements are free of material misstatement, whether due to error or fraud. The Company is not required to have, nor were we engaged to perform, an audit of its internal control over financial reporting. As part of our audits we are required to obtain an understanding of internal control over financial reporting but not for the purpose of expressing an opinion on the effectiveness of the Company’s internal control over financial reporting. Accordingly, we express no such opinion.

Our audits included performing procedures to assess the risks of material misstatement of the consolidated financial statements, whether due to error or fraud, and performing procedures that respond to those risks. Such procedures included examining, on a test basis, evidence regarding the amounts and disclosures in the consolidated financial statements. Our audits also included evaluating the accounting principles used and significant estimates made by management, as well as evaluating the overall presentation of the consolidated financial statements. We believe that our audits provide a reasonable basis for our opinion.

/s/ PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP

London, UK

1124 March 20192020

We have served as the Company’s auditorauditors since 2016.

 

128152 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Audit Reportreport

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 129153


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

130154 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Audit Reportreport

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 131155


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

 

132156 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Audit Reportreport

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 133157


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 


This page left intentionally blank

Annual Report 2018 | 158Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Primary financial

statements

 

 

Consolidated Income Statement

For the years ended 31 December

 

    Notes      2018
£m
           2017
£m
           2016
£m
   Notes                       2019
£m
                      2018(1)
£m
                      2017(1)
£m
 

Interest and similar income

     3     6,066    5,905    6,467    3    5,917   6,066   5,905 

Interest expense and similar charges

     3    (2,463   (2,102   (2,885   3    (2,625  (2,463  (2,102

Net interest income

        3,603    3,803    3,582       3,292   3,603   3,803 

Fee and commission income

     4    1,170    1,222    1,188    4    1,112   1,170   1,222 

Fee and commission expense

     4    (421   (415   (418   4    (426  (421  (415

Net fee and commission income

        749    807    770       686   749   807 

Net trading and other income

     5    182    302    443    5    195   182   302 

Total operating income

        4,534    4,912    4,795       4,173   4,534   4,912 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     6    (2,579   (2,499   (2,414   6    (2,499  (2,579  (2,499

Credit impairment losses

     8    (153   (203   (67   8    (221  (153  (203

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     8    (257   (393   (397   8    (441  (257  (393

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

        (410   (596   (464      (662  (410  (596

Profit before tax

       1,545    1,817    1,917      1,012   1,545   1,817 

Tax on profit

     9    (441   (561   (598   9    (279  (399  (515

Profit after tax

        1,104    1,256    1,319       733   1,146   1,302 

Attributable to:

                

Equity holders of the parent

       1,082    1,235    1,292      714   1,124   1,281 

Non-controlling interests

     35    22    21    27    32    19   22   21 

Profit after tax

        1,104    1,256    1,319       733   1,146   1,302 

(1)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

134Santander UK plc


 > Primary financial statements159


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income

For the years ended 31 December

 

                                                                              
    2018
£m
           2017
£m
           2016
£m
   2019
£m
 2018(2)
£m
 2017(2)
£m
 

Profit after tax

     1,104    1,256    1,319    733   1,146   1,302 

Other comprehensive income:

            

Other comprehensive income that may be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently:

        

Available-for-sale securities:(1)

        

Other comprehensive income/(expense) that may be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently:

    

Available-for-sale securities(1)

    

– Change in fair value

       80    127      80 

– Income statement transfers

       (54   (115     (54

– Taxation

        (6   (16       (6
        20    (4       20 

Movement in fair value reserve (debt instruments):(1)

            

– Change in fair value

     (74       147   (74 

– Income statement transfers

     21        (147  21  

– Taxation

     13             13   
     (40            (40  

Cash flow hedges:

            

– Effective portion of changes in fair value

     793    (238   4,365    (857  793   (238

– Income statement transfers

     (752   (94   (4,076   1,013   (752  (94

– Taxation

     (13   89    (72   (41  (13  89 
     28    (243   217    115   28   (243

Currency translation on foreign operations

             (3   (4      

Net other comprehensive income that may be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently

     (12   (223   210 

Other comprehensive income that will not be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently:

           

Net other comprehensive income/(expense) that may be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently

   111   (12  (223

Other comprehensive income/(expense) that will not be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently:

       

Pension remeasurement:

            

– Change in fair value

     470    (103   (528   (522  470   (103

– Taxation

     (118   26    133    131   (118  26 
     352    (77   (395   (391  352   (77

Own credit adjustment:

            

– Change in fair value

     84    (29       (77  84   (29

– Taxation

     (21   7        19   (21  7 
     63    (22       (58  63   (22

Net other comprehensive income that will not be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently

     415    (99   (395

Total other comprehensive income net of tax

     403    (322   (185

Net other comprehensive (expense)/income that will not be reclassified to profit or loss subsequently

   (449  415   (99

Total other comprehensive (expense)/income net of tax

   (338  403   (322

Total comprehensive income

     1,507    934    1,134    395   1,549   980 

Attributable to:

            

Equity holders of the parent

     1,486    913    1,107    374   1,528   959 

Non-controlling interests

     21    21    27    21   21   21 

Total comprehensive income

     1,507    934    1,134    395   1,549   980 

 

(1)

Following the adoption of IFRS 9, a fair value reserve was introduced to replace theavailable-for-sale reserve,reserve.

(2)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

LOGO

160Santander UK plc135


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Primary financial

statements

 

 

Consolidated Balance Sheet

At 31 December

 

     Notes      2018
£m
             2017
£m
 

Assets

          

Cash and balances at central banks

       19,747      32,771 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

          

– Trading assets

     11           30,555 

– Derivative financial instruments

     12    5,259      19,942 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

     13    5,617      2,096 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

          

– Loans and advances to customers(1)

     14    201,289      199,340 

– Loans and advances to banks(1)

       2,799      3,463 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     17    21,127      2,614 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost(2)

     18    7,229     

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(2)

     19    13,302     

Financial investments(2)

     20        17,611 

Interests in other entities

     21    88      73 

Intangible assets

     22    1,808      1,742 

Property, plant and equipment

       1,832      1,598 

Current tax assets

     9    153       

Retirement benefit assets

     31    842      449 

Other assets

          2,280      2,511 

Total assets

          283,372      314,765 

Liabilities

          

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

          

– Trading liabilities

     23          31,109 

– Derivative financial instruments

     12    1,369      17,613 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

     24    6,286      2,315 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

          

– Deposits by customers

     25    178,090      183,648 

– Deposits by banks(1)

     26    17,221      12,708 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     27    10,910      1,076 

– Debt securities in issue

     28    46,692      42,633 

– Subordinated liabilities

     29    3,601      3,793 

Other liabilities

       2,448      2,730 

Provisions

     30    509      558 

Current tax liabilities

     9          3 

Deferred tax liabilities

     9    223      88 

Retirement benefit obligations

     31    114      286 

Total liabilities

          267,463      298,560 

Equity

          

Share capital

     33    3,119      3,119 

Share premium

     33    5,620      5,620 

Other equity instruments

     34    1,991      2,281 

Retained earnings

       4,744      4,732 

Other reserves

          284      301 

Total shareholders’ equity

       15,758      16,053 

Non-controlling interests

     35    151      152 

Total equity

          15,909      16,205 

Total liabilities and equity

          283,372      314,765 

(1)From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives are represented accordingly.
(2)On adoption of IFRS 9, the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item was split between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at FVOCI’. This approach aligns the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position.
                                                                              
   Notes   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

Assets

      

Cash and balances at central banks

     21,180    19,747 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

      

– Derivative financial instruments

   11    3,316    5,259 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   12    386    5,617 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

      

– Loans and advances to customers

   13    207,287    201,289 

– Loans and advances to banks

     1,855    2,799 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

   16    23,636    21,127 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

   17    7,056    7,229 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

   18    9,747    13,302 

Interests in other entities

   19    117    88 

Intangible assets

   20    1,766    1,808 

Property, plant and equipment

     1,967    1,832 

Current tax assets

   9    200    153 

Retirement benefit assets

   28    669    842 

Other assets

        2,520    2,280 

Total assets

        281,702    283,372 

Liabilities

      

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

      

– Derivative financial instruments

   11    1,448    1,369 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   21    1,713    6,286 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

      

– Deposits by customers

   22    181,883    178,090 

– Deposits by banks

   23    14,353    17,221 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading

   24    18,286    10,910 

– Debt securities in issue

   25    41,129    46,692 

– Subordinated liabilities

   26    3,528    3,601 

Other liabilities

     2,344    2,448 

Provisions

   27    572    509 

Deferred tax liabilities

   9    149    223 

Retirement benefit obligations

   28    280    114 

Total liabilities

        265,685    267,463 

Equity

      

Share capital

   30    3,105    3,119 

Share premium

   30    5,620    5,620 

Other equity instruments

   31    2,191    1,991 

Retained earnings

     4,546    4,744 

Other reserves

        395    284 

Total shareholders’ equity

     15,857    15,758 

Non-controlling interests

   32    160    151 

Total equity

        16,017    15,909 

Total liabilities and equity

        281,702    283,372 

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

The Financial Statements were approved and authorised for issue by the Board on 26 February 201924 March 2020 and signed on its behalf by:

 

Nathan Bostock  Antonio RomanMadhukar Dayal    
Chief Executive Officer  Chief Financial Officer    

Company Registered Number: 2294747

 

136Santander UK plc


 > Primary financial statements161


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

Consolidated Cash Flow Statement

For the years ended 31 December

 

                                                                              
    Notes      2018
£m
                   2017
£m
                   2016
£m
   

2019

£m

 

2018(1)

£m

 

2017(1)

£m

 

Cash flows from operating activities

              

Profit after tax

       1,104    1,256  �� 1,319    733   1,146   1,302 

Adjustments for:

              

Non-cash items included in profit:

              

– Depreciation and amortisation

       375    354    322    543   375   354 

– Provisions for other liabilities and charges

       257    393    397    441   257   393 

– Impairment losses

       189    257    132    239   189   257 

– Corporation tax charge

       441    561    598    279   399   515 

– Othernon-cash items

       238    (208   (599   (439  238   (208

– Pension charge for defined benefit pension schemes

        79    32    26    35   79   32 
       1,579    1,389    876    1,098   1,537   1,343 

Net change in operating assets and liabilities:

              

– Cash and balances at central banks

       (255   (25   (30   (71  (255  (25

– Trading assets

       24,528    (941   (2,049      24,528   (941

– Derivative assets

       14,683    5,529    (4,560   1,943   14,683   5,529 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

       (3,635   25    257    1,664   (3,635  25 

– Loans and advances to banks and customers

       (9,129   (1,832   (2,265   170   (9,129  (1,832

– Other assets

       (246   (246   (121   247   (246  (246

– Deposits by banks and customers

       926    10,900    14,434    641   926   10,900 

– Derivative liabilities

       (16,244   (5,490   1,595    79   (16,244  (5,490

– Trading liabilities

       (31,101   15,017    2,837       (31,101  15,017 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

       4,106    717    336    (959  4,106   717 

– Debt securities in issue

       (2,524   132    409    (529  (2,524  132 

– Other liabilities

        (556   (1,397   1,589    (568  (556  (1,397
        (19,447   22,389    12,432    2,617   (19,447  22,389 

Corporation taxes paid

       (391   (484   (507   (292  (391  (484

Effects of exchange rate differences

        1,750    (574   3,885    (1,079  1,750   (574

Net cash flows from operating activities

        (15,405   23,976    18,005    3,077   (15,405  23,976 

Cash flows from investing activities

              

Investments in other entities

     21    (66              (66   

Proceeds from disposal of subsidiaries(1)

       348        149 

Proceeds from disposal of subsidiaries(2)

      348    

Purchase of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

       (696   (542   (374   (505  (696  (542

Proceeds from sale of property, plant and equipment and intangible assets

       26    52    65    108   26   52 

Purchase of financial investments

       (7,002   (726   (9,539

Proceeds from sale and redemption of financial investments

        3,708    2,032    2,359 

Purchase of financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(3)

   (5,013  (7,002  (726

Proceeds from sale and redemption of financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(3)

   8,300   3,708   2,032 

Net cash flows from investing activities

        (3,682   816    (7,340   2,890   (3,682  816 

Cash flows from financing activities

              

Issue of AT1 Capital Securities

     34        500     

Issuance costs of AT1 Capital Securities

           (4    

Issue of other equity instruments

   500      500 

Issuance costs of other equity instruments

         (4

Issue of debt securities and subordinated notes

       10,642    6,645    5,547    4,145   10,642   6,645 

Issuance costs of debt securities and subordinated notes

       (23   (15   (17   (15  (23  (15

Repayment of debt securities and subordinated notes

       (6,281   (13,763   (11,352   (7,969  (6,281  (13,763

Repurchase of preference shares and other equity instruments

     34     (290       (7   (318  (290   

Dividends paid on ordinary shares

     10    (1,139   (829   (419   (315  (1,139  (829

Dividends paid on preference shares and other equity instruments

       (157   (152   (128   (142  (157  (152

Dividends paid onnon-controlling interests

        (22   (19   (12   (12  (22  (19

Net cash flows from financing activities

        2,730    (7,637   (6,388   (4,126  2,730   (7,637

Change in cash and cash equivalents

        (16,357   17,155    4,277    1,841   (16,357  17,155 

Cash and cash equivalents at beginning of the year

       42,226    25,705    20,351    26,029   42,226   25,705 

Effects of exchange rate changes on cash and cash equivalents

        160    (634   1,077    (53  160   (634

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

        26,029    42,226    25,705    27,817   26,029   42,226 

Cash and cash equivalents consist of:

              

Cash and balances at central banks

       19,747    32,771    17,107    21,180   19,747   32,771 

Less: regulatory minimum cash balances

        (636   (395   (370   (707  (636  (395
        19,111    32,376    16,737    20,473   19,111   32,376 

Net trading other cash equivalents

           5,953    6,537          5,953 

Netnon-trading other cash equivalents

        6,918    3,897    2,431    7,344   6,918   3,897 

Cash and cash equivalents at the end of the year

        26,029    42,226    25,705    27,817   26,029   42,226 

 

(1)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

(2)

In 2018, the Santander UK group sold a number of subsidiaries for a cash consideration of £348m, (2017: £nil, 2016: £149m). Thewhich equalled the carrying valueamount of the net assets disposed of was £348m (2017: £nil, 2016: £138m).of.

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

LOGO

(3)
Santander UK plc137

Amounts in 2017, prior to the adoption of IFRS 9, are in respect of financial investments.


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

For the years ended 31 December

           Other reserves        Non-    
  Share
capital
£m
  Share
  premium
£m
  

  Other equity

instruments

£m

  

    Available-

for-sale(1)
£m

  Fair
  value(1)
£m
    Cash flow
hedging
£m
  Currency
  translation
£m
      Retained
earnings
£m
    Total
£m
  

  controlling

interests

£m

    Total
£m
 

At 31 December 2017

  3,119   5,620   2,281   68    228   5   4,732   16,053   152   16,205 
Adoption of IFRS 9 (see Note 1)           (68  63         (187  (192     (192

At 1 January 2018

  3,119   5,620   2,281      63   228   5   4,545   15,861   152   16,013 

Profit after tax

                     1,082   1,082   22   1,104 
Other comprehensive income, net of tax:           

– Fair value reserve (debt instruments)

            (40           (40     (40

– Cash flow hedges

               28         28      28 

– Pension remeasurement

                     353   353   (1  352 

– Own credit adjustment

                        63   63      63 

Total comprehensive income

               (40  28      1,498   1,486   21   1,507 

Other

                     (45  (45     (45
Repurchase of other equity instruments        (290               (290     (290
Dividends on ordinary shares                     (1,139  (1,139     (1,139
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments                     (157  (157     (157
Dividends onnon-controlling interests                           (22  (22
Tax on other equity instruments                        42   42      42 

At 31 December 2018

  3,119   5,620   1,991       23   256   5   4,744   15,758   151   15,909 
                                             

At 1 January 2017

  3,119   5,620   1,785   48    471   5   4,255   15,303   150   15,453 

Profit after tax

                     1,235   1,235   21   1,256 
Other comprehensive income, net of tax:           

Available-for-sale securities

           20             20      20 

– Cash flow hedges

               (243        (243     (243

– Pension remeasurement

                     (77  (77     (77

– Own credit adjustment

                        (22  (22     (22

Total comprehensive income

           20       (243     1,136   913   21   934 
Issue of AT1 Capital Securities        496                496      496 
Dividends on ordinary shares                     (553  (553     (553
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments                     (152  (152     (152
Dividends onnon-controlling interests                           (19  (19
Tax on other equity instruments                        46   46      46 

At 31 December 2017

  3,119   5,620   2,281   68       228   5   4,732   16,053   152   16,205 
                                             

At 1 January 2016

  3,119   5,620   1,792   52    254   8   4,048   14,893   135   15,028 

Profit after tax

                     1,292   1,292   27   1,319 
Other comprehensive income, net of tax:           

Available-for-sale securities

           (4            (4     (4

– Cash flow hedges

               217         217      217 

– Pension remeasurement

                     (395  (395     (395

– Currency translation on foreign operations

                     (3     (3     (3

Total comprehensive income

           (4      217   (3  897   1,107   27   1,134 
Repurchase of other equity instruments        (7               (7     (7
Dividends on ordinary shares                     (593  (593     (593
Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments                     (128  (128     (128
Dividends onnon-controlling interests                           (12  (12
Tax on other equity instruments                        31   31      31 

At 31 December 2016

  3,119   5,620   1,785   48       471   5   4,255   15,303   150   15,453 

(1) Following the adoption of IFRS 9, a fair value reserve was introduced to replace theavailable-for-sale reserve, as described in Note 1.

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

138162 Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 

> Primary financial

statements

 

Consolidated Statement of Changes in Equity

For the years ended 31 December

 

                                                                                                                                                                                                      
             Other reserves             
   Share
capital
  Share
premium
   Other equity
instruments
  Available-
for-
sale(1)
  Fair
value(1)
  Cash flow
hedging
  Currency
translation
  Retained
earnings(2)
  Total  

Non-

controlling
interests

  Total 
   £m  £m   £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 

At January 2019

   3,119   5,620    1,991    23   256   5   4,744   15,758   151   15,909 

Profit after tax

                       714   714   19   733 

Other comprehensive income, net of tax:

             

– Cash flow hedges

                 115         115      115 

– Pension remeasurement

                       (393  (393  2   (391

– Own credit adjustment

                       (58  (58     (58

– Currency translation on foreign operations

                       (4     (4     (4

Total comprehensive income

                    115   (4  263   374   21   395 

Issue of other equity instruments

          500                500      500 

Repurchase of other equity instruments

   (14      (300            (4  (318     (318

Dividends on ordinary shares

                       (315  (315     (315

Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments

                       (142  (142     (142

Dividends onnon-controlling interests

                                (12  (12

At 31 December 2019

   3,105   5,620    2,191       23   371   1   4,546   15,857   160   16,017 
                                               

At 31 December 2017

   3,119   5,620    2,281   68    228   5   4,732   16,053   152   16,205 

Adoption of IFRS 9(3)

             (68  63         (187  (192     (192

At 1 January 2018

   3,119   5,620    2,281      63   228   5   4,545   15,861   152   16,013 

Profit after tax

                       1,124   1,124   22   1,146 

Other comprehensive income, net of tax:

             

– Fair value reserve (debt instruments)

              (40           (40     (40

– Cash flow hedges

                 28         28      28 

– Pension remeasurement

                       353   353   (1  352 

– Own credit adjustment

                          63   63      63 

Total comprehensive income

                 (40  28      1,540   1,528   21   1,549 

Other

                       (45  (45     (45

Repurchase of other equity instruments

          (290               (290     (290

Dividends on ordinary shares

                       (1,139  (1,139     (1,139

Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments

                       (157  (157     (157

Dividends onnon-controlling interests

                                (22  (22

At 31 December 2018

   3,119   5,620    1,991       23   256   5   4,744   15,758   151   15,909 
                                               

At 1 January 2017

   3,119   5,620    1,785   48    471   5   4,255   15,303   150   15,453 

Profit after tax

                       1,281   1,281   21   1,302 

Other comprehensive income, net of tax:

             

Available-for-sale securities

             20             20      20 

– Cash flow hedges

                 (243        (243     (243

– Pension remeasurement

                       (77  (77     (77

– Own credit adjustment

                          (22  (22     (22

Total comprehensive income

             20       (243     1,182   959   21   980 

Issue of other equity instruments

          496                496      496 

Dividends on ordinary shares

                       (553  (553     (553

Dividends on preference shares and other equity instruments

                       (152  (152     (152

Dividends onnon-controlling interests

                                (19  (19

At 31 December 2017

   3,119   5,620    2,281   68       228   5   4,732   16,053   152   16,205 

 

(1)

Following the adoption of IFRS 9, a fair value reserve was introduced to replace theavailable-for-sale reserve.

(2)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

(3)

The adoption of IFRS 9 decreased shareholders’ equity at 1 January 2018 by £192m (net of tax), comprised of a £49m decrease arising from the application of the new classification and measurement requirements for financial assets, and a £211m decrease arising from the application of the new ECL impairment methodology, these amounts being partially offset by the recognition of a deferred tax asset of £68m.

The accompanying Notes to the Financial Statements form an integral part of these Consolidated Financial Statements.

This page left intentionally blank

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 139163


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

 

 

140164 Santander UK plc


> Primary financial statements

    

 

 

 

This page left intentionally blank

 

 

 

 

 

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 141165


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 


This page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2018 | 166Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

1. ACCOUNTING POLICIES

These financial statements are prepared for Santander UK plc (the Company) and the Santander UK plc group (the Santander UK group) under the UK Companies Act 2006. The principal activity of the Santander UK group is the provision of an extensive range of personal financial services, and a wide range of banking and financial services to personal, business and corporate customers. Santander UK plc is a public company, limited by shares and incorporated in England and Wales having a registered office at 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London, NW1 3AN, phone number0870-607-6000. It is an operating company undertaking banking and financial services transactions.

Basis of preparation

These financial statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities controlled by the Company (its subsidiaries) made up to 31 December each year. The Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared on the going concern basis using the historical cost convention, except for financial assets and liabilities that have been measured at fair value. An assessment of the appropriateness of the adoption of the going concern basis of accounting is disclosed in the statement of going concern in the Directors’ Report.

Compliance with International Financial Reporting Standards

The Santander UK group Consolidated Financial Statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as issued by the IASB, including interpretations issued by the IFRS Interpretations Committee (IFRS IC) of the IASB (together IFRS). The Santander UK group has also complied with its legal obligation to comply with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union as there are no applicable differences between the two frameworks for the periods presented.

The Company financial statements have been prepared in accordance with IFRSs as adopted by the European Union and as applied in accordance with the provision of the UK Companies Act 2006. Disclosures required by IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure’ relating to the nature and extent of risks arising from financial instruments, and IAS 1 ‘Presentation of Financial Statements’ relating to objectives, policies and processes for managing capital, can be found in the Risk review. Those disclosures form an integral part of these financial statements.

Recent accounting developments

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ (IFRS 16)

On 1 January 2018,2019 the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’ (IFRS 9)16 and IFRS 15 ‘Revenue from Contracts with Customers’ (IFRS 15). The new orthe revised accounting policies are set out below.

The impact of applying IFRS 9 is disclosed in Note 44. The accounting policy changes for IFRS 9, set out below,as lessee which have been applied from 1 January 2018.2019 are set out below. Comparatives have not been restated. The impact of applying IFRS 16 is disclosed in section (ii).

As a result of the change from IAS 39 todescribed below, IFRS 9, some disclosures presented in respect of certain financial assets are not comparable because their classification may have changed between the two standards. This means that some IFRS 9 disclosures are not directly comparable16 impacted property and some disclosures that relate to information presented on an IAS 39 basis are no longer relevant in the current period. As explained in Note 44, the classification and measurement changes to financial assets that arose on adoption of IFRS 9 have been aligned to the presentation in the balance sheet. The Santander UK group decided to continue adopting IAS 39 hedge accounting and consequently there have been no changes to the hedge accounting policies and practices following the adoption of IFRS 9. However, additional hedge accounting disclosure requirements of IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosures’ (IFRS 7) have been included in these financial statements.

In addition,non-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet. Previously,non-trading reverse repurchase agreements were included in ‘Loans and advances to banks’ and ‘Loans and advances to customers’, andnon-trading repurchase agreements were included in ‘Deposits by banks’. The new presentation, which is considered to be more relevant to an understanding of our financial position, was adopted with effect from 1 January 2018, and comparatives arere-presented accordingly. Forequipment leases where the Santander UK group is the impact of thisre-presentation on the balance sheet at 1 January 2017 was to decrease loans and advances to banks by £1,462m, increasing non trading reverse repurchase agreements by the same amount, and to decrease deposits by banks by £2,384m, increasing non trading repurchase agreements by the same amount. For the Company, the impact of thisre-presentation on the balance sheet at 1 January 2017 was to decrease loans and advances to banks by £476m, increasing non trading reverse repurchase agreements by the same amount, and to decrease deposits by banks by £2,933m, and increase non trading repurchase agreements by the same amount.

The application oflessee. IFRS 1516 had no material impact onfor leases where the Santander UK group as there were no significant changes inis the recognition ofin-scope income. The accountinglessor.

i) Accounting policy changes for IFRS 15 are set out in the Revenue recognition policy below.change

Future accounting developments

At 31 December 2018, the Santander UK group has not yet adopted the following significant new or revised standards and interpretations, and amendments thereto, which have been issued but which are not yet effective for the Santander UK group:

IFRS 16 ‘Leases’ (IFRS 16) – In January 2016, the IASB issued IFRS 16. The standard is effective for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019. IFRS 16 sets out the principles for the recognition, measurement, presentation and disclosure of leases for both lessees and lessors. For lessee accounting, IFRS 16 introduces a single lessee accounting model and requires a lessee to recognise aright-of-use (ROU) asset representing its right to use the underlying leased asset and a lease liability representing its obligation to make lease payments for all leases with a term of more than 12 months, unless the underlying asset is of low value. For lessor accounting, IFRS 16 substantially carries forward the lessor accounting requirements from the existing leasing standard (IAS 17) and a lessor continues to classify its leases as operating leases or finance leases and to account for those two types of leases differently.

The Santander UK group hasas lessee

The Santander UK group assesses whether a contract is or contains a lease at the inception of the contract and recognises aright-of-use (ROU) asset representing its right to use the underlying leased asset and a lease liability representing its obligation to make lease payments for all leases, except for short-term leases, being those with a term of 12 months or less, or leases for which the underlying asset is of low value which are expensed in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the lease terms. Lease payments exclude irrecoverable VAT which is expensed in the income statement as lease payments are made.

The lease liability, which is included within Other liabilities on the balance sheet, is initially measured at the present value of the lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date, discounted using the incremental borrowing rate appropriate to the lease term. The lease liability is subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. Remeasurement of the lease liability occurs if there is a change in the lease payments (when a corresponding adjustment is made to the ROU asset), the lease term or in the assessment of an option to purchase the underlying asset.

At inception, the ROU asset, which is included within Property, plant and equipment on the balance sheet, comprises the lease liability, initial direct costs and the obligations to restore the asset, less any incentives granted by the lessor. The ROU asset is depreciated over the shorter of the lease term or the useful life of the underlying asset and is reviewed for indications of impairment as for owned assets. The obligation to restore the asset is included within Provisions on the balance sheet.

ii) Impact of adoption

The Santander UK group elected to apply the modified retrospective approach whereby the ROU asset at the date of initial application iswas measured at an amount equal to the lease liability. The ROU asset iswas adjusted for any prepaid lease payments and incentives relating to the relevant leases that were recognised on the balance sheet at 31 December 2018. It includes2018 and included an estimate of the estimated costs of restoring the underlying assets to the condition required by the lease terms and conditions.of the lease. In addition, the following practical expedients permitted by the standard were applied:

a single discount rate being the incremental borrowing rate was applied to a portfolio of leases with reasonably similar characteristics; and

operating leases with a remaining lease term of less than 12 months as at 1 January 2019 were treated as short term leases.

For the Santander UK group, the application of IFRS 16 at 1 January 2019 is expected to increaseincreased property, plant and equipment by £210m (being the net increase in ROU assets referred to above), reducereduced other assets by £12m increaseand increased other liabilities by £181m from recognising lease liabilities, and increaseliabilities. In addition, we also increased provisions by £17m.£17m (see Note 27). There is expected to bewas no impact on shareholders’ equity. ForThe amount of the Company, the application of IFRS 16 is expected to increase property, plant and equipment by £223m, reduce other assets by £12m, increase other liabilities by £194m, from recognising lease liabilities above differed from the amount of operating lease commitments at 31 December 2018 and increase provisions by £17m, with no impact on shareholders’ equity. In arriving at the estimated impact,is reconciled as well as excluding leases whose terms end within 12 months, the Santander UK group applies a single discount rate to a portfolio of leases with similar remaining lease terms. follows:

                Group
£m

Rental commitments undernon-cancellable operating leases under IAS 17 at 31 December 2018 (see Note 29)

246

Recognition exemption for short-term leases

(72

Effect from discounting at the incremental borrowing rate at 1 January 2019

7

Additional liabilities recognised based on the initial application of IFRS 16 at 1 January 2019

181

Santander UK plc167


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

In addition to the choice of transition approach, the determination of the discount rate is the most significant area of judgement. The Santander UK group applies an incremental borrowing rate (based on3-month GBP LIBOR plus a credit spread to reflect the cost of raising unsecured funding in the wholesale markets) appropriate to the relevant remaining lease term.

IAS 12

The lease liabilities shown above differ fromSantander UK group has also applied the amountamendment to IAS 12 ‘Income Taxes’ (part of operating lease commitments disclosed‘Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2015-2017 Cycle’) in Note 32 duethese Condensed Consolidated Interim Financial Statements. The amendment clarifies that the income tax consequences of dividends on financial instruments classified as equity should be recognised according to where the past transactions or events that generated distributable profits were recognised. This means that, to the effectsextent that profits from which dividends on equity instruments were recognised in the income statement, the income tax consequences would be similarly recognised in the same statement. The amendment, which has been applied retrospectively, reduces the effective tax rate where the tax relief on dividends in respect of discountingother equity instruments is recognised in the lease liabilitiesincome statement rather than as a separate line item within the statement of changes in equity. Overall, there was no impact on shareholders’ equity for the Santander UK group from applying the amendment to IAS 12 at 1 January 2019. For the Santander UK group, the impact of the amendment to IAS 12 on the income statement for the year ended 31 December 2019 was to reduce tax on profit by £39m (2018: £42m, 2017: £46m), increasing profit after tax by the same amount.

London Inter-Bank Offered Rate (LIBOR) reform

In September 2019, the IASB issued Interest Rate Benchmark Reform: Amendments to IFRS 9 ‘Financial Instruments’, IAS 39 ‘Financial Instruments: Recognition and excluding short-term leasesMeasurement’ and IFRS 7 ‘Financial Instruments: Disclosure’. Santander UK applies IAS 39 hedge accounting so the amendments to IFRS 9 do not apply. The IAS 39 amendments provide temporary exceptions from applying specific hedge accounting requirements to hedging relationships that are outsidedirectly affected by the scope of IFRS 16.reform to LIBOR and other Interbank Offered Rates, hereinafter referred to as LIBOR reform. The exceptions have the effect that LIBOR reform should not generally cause hedge accounting to terminate, however any hedge ineffectiveness continues to be recognised in the income statement. The exceptions end at the earlier of:

142    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

 

when the uncertainty regarding the timing and the amount of interest rate benchmark based cash flows is no longer present, and

Amendment to IAS 12 ‘Income Taxes’ (part

discontinuance of ‘Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2015-2017 Cycle’) – In December 2017, as partthe hedge relationship (or reclassification of its annual improvements project,all amounts from the IASB issued an amendment to IAS 12 to clarifycash flow hedge reserve).

The IAS 39 amendments apply to all hedging relationships directly affected by uncertainties related to LIBOR reform and must be applied for annual periods beginning on or after 1 January 2020. However, following their endorsement for use in the European Union, Santander UK has elected to apply the IAS 39 and IFRS 7 amendments in the preparation of the financial statements for the year ended 31 December 2019. The exceptions given by the IAS 39 amendments mean that LIBOR reform had no impact on hedge relationships for affected hedges at and for the year ended 31 December 2019. The main assumptions or judgements made by Santander UK in applying the IAS 39 amendments are outlined below.

For cash flow hedges affected by LIBOR reform, Santander UK management has assumed that the income tax consequencesinterest rate benchmark on which hedged cash flows are based is not altered as a result of dividends on financial instruments classified as equity should be recognised according to whereLIBOR reform when assessing whether the past transactions or events that generated distributable profits were recognised. This means that, to the extent that profits from which dividends on equity instruments were recognised in the income statement, the income tax consequences would be similarly recognised infuture cash flows are highly probable. For discontinued hedging relationships, the same statement. The amendment, which isassumption has been applied retrospectively and is effective for annual reporting periods beginning on or after 1 January 2019, is awaiting EU endorsement atdetermining whether the time of approving these Consolidated Financial Statements. The effects of the amendmenthedged future cash flows are expected to lead tooccur.

In making its prospective hedge effectiveness assessments, Santander UK has assessed whether the economic relationship between the hedged item and the hedging instrument exists based on the assumption that the interest rate benchmark on which the hedged item and the hedging instrument are based is not altered as a reduction inresult of LIBOR reform.

Santander UK will not discontinue hedge accounting during the effective taxperiod of LIBOR-related uncertainty solely because the retrospective effectiveness falls outside the required80-125% range.

For hedges of anon-contractually specified benchmark portion of an interest rate, whereSantander UK only considers at inception of such a hedging relationship whether the tax relief on coupons in respect of AT1 capital securities would be recognised in the income statement rather than in equity.separately identifiable requirement is met.

Details of the significant interest rate benchmarks to which hedging relationships are exposed, the extent of risk exposure that is affected by LIBOR reform, and how Santander UK’s transition to alternative benchmark interest rates is being managed, are disclosed in the Banking market risk section of the Risk review. The nominal amount of the hedging instruments in hedging relationships directly affected by uncertainties related to LIBOR reform is disclosed in Note 11.

Future accounting developments

At 31 December 2019, for the Santander UK group, there were no significant new or revised standards and interpretations, and amendments thereto, which have been issued but which are not yet effective or which have otherwise not been early adopted where permitted.

Comparative information

As required by US public company reporting requirements, these financial statements include two years of comparative information for the consolidated income statement, consolidated statement of comprehensive income, consolidated statement of changes in equity, consolidated statement of cash flows and related Notes.

Consolidation

a) Subsidiaries

The Consolidated Financial Statements incorporate the financial statements of the Company and entities (including structured entities) controlled by it and its subsidiaries. Control is achieved where the Company (i) has (i) power over the investee; (ii) is exposed, or has rights, to variable returns from its involvement with the investee; and (iii) has the ability to use its power to affect its returns. The Company reassesses whether or not it controls an investee if facts and circumstances indicate that there are changes to one or more of the three elements of control listed above. When the Company has less than a majority of the voting rights of an investee, it has power over the investee when the voting rights are sufficient to give it the practical ability to direct the relevant activities of the investee unilaterally. The Company considers all relevant facts and circumstances in assessing whether or not the Company’s voting rights in an investee are sufficient to give it power, including:

 

The size of the Company’s holding of voting rights relative to the size and dispersion of holdings of the other vote holders

Potential voting rights held by the Company, other vote holders or other parties

Rights arising from other contractual arrangements

Any additional facts and circumstances that indicate that the Company has, or does not have, the current ability to direct the relevant activities at the time that decisions need to be made, including voting patterns at previous shareholders’ meetings.

Consolidation of a subsidiary begins when the Company obtains control over the subsidiary and ceases when the Company loses control of the subsidiary. Specifically, the results of a subsidiary acquired or disposed of during the year are included in the consolidated income statement and the consolidated statement of comprehensive income from the date the Company gains control until the date when the Company ceases to control the subsidiary. Inter-company transactions, balances and unrealised gains on transactions between Santander UK group companies are eliminated; unrealised losses are also eliminated unless the cost cannot be recovered.

168Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

The acquisition method of accounting is used to account for the acquisition of subsidiaries which meet the definition of a business. The cost of an acquisition is measured at the fair value of the assets given up, shares issued or liabilities undertaken at the date of acquisition. Acquisition-related costs are expensed as incurred. The excess of the cost of acquisition, as well as the fair value of any interest previously held, over the fair value of the Santander UK group’s share of the identifiable net assets of the subsidiary at the date of acquisition is recorded as goodwill. When the Santander UK group loses control of a subsidiary, the profit or loss on disposal is calculated as the difference between (i) the aggregate of the fair value of the consideration received and the fair value of any retained interest and (ii) the previous carrying amount of the assets (including goodwill), less liabilities of the subsidiary and anynon-controlling interests. Amounts previously recognised in other comprehensive income in relation to the subsidiary are accounted for (i.e. reclassified to profit or loss or transferred directly to retained earnings) in the same manner as would be required if the relevant assets or liabilities are disposed of. The fair value of any investment retained in a former subsidiary at the date when control is lost is regarded as the fair value on initial recognition for subsequent accounting under IFRS 9 or, when applicable, the costs on initial recognition of an investment in an associate or joint venture.

Business combinations between entities under common control (i.e. fellow subsidiaries of Banco Santander SA, the ultimate parent) are outside the scope of IFRS 3 – ‘Business Combinations’, and there is no other guidance for such transactions under IFRS. The Santander UK group elects to account for business combinations between entities under common control at their book values in the acquired entity by including the acquired entity’s results from the date of the business combination and not restating comparatives. Reorganisations of entities within the Santander UK group are also accounted for at their book values.

Interests in subsidiaries are eliminated during the preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements. Interests in subsidiaries in the Company unconsolidated financial statements are held at cost subject to impairment.

b) Joint ventures

Joint ventures are joint arrangements whereby the parties that have joint control of the arrangement have rights to its net assets. Joint control is the contractually agreed sharing of control of an arrangement, which exists only when decisions about the relevant activities require unanimous consent of the parties sharing control. Accounting policies of joint ventures have been aligned to the extent there are differences from the Santander UK group’s policies. Investments in joint ventures are accounted for by the equity method of accounting and are initially recorded at cost and adjusted each year to reflect the Santander UK group’s share of their post-acquisition results. When the Santander UK group’s share of losses of a joint venture exceed its interest in that joint venture, the Santander UK group discontinues recognising its share of further losses. Further losses are recognised only to the extent that the Santander UK group has incurred legal or constructive obligations or made payments on behalf of the joint venture.

Foreign currency translation

Items included in the financial statements of each entity in the Santander UK group are measured using the currency that best reflects the economic substance of the underlying events and circumstances relevant to that entity (the functional currency). The Consolidated Financial Statements are presented in sterling, which is the functional currency of the Company.

Income statements and cash flows of foreign entities are translated into the Santander UK group’s presentation currency at average exchange rates for the year and their balance sheets are translated at the exchange rates ruling on 31 December. Exchange differences on the translation of the net investment in foreign entities are recognised in other comprehensive income. When a foreign entity is sold, such exchange differences are recognised in the income statement as part of the gain or loss on sale.

Foreign currency transactions are translated into the functional currency of the entity involved at the exchange rates prevailing at the dates of the transactions. Foreign exchange gains and losses resulting from the settlement of such transactions and from the translation of monetary assets and liabilities denominated in foreign currencies are recognised in the income statement unless recognised in other comprehensive income in connection with a cash flow hedge.Non-monetary items denominated in a foreign currency measured at historical cost are not retranslated. Exchange rate differences arising onnon-monetary items measured at fair value are recognised in the consolidated income statement except for differences arising on equity securities measured at FVOCIfair value through other comprehensive income (FVOCI) (2017:available-for-sale)available-for-sale asset measured at fair value), which are recognised in other comprehensive income.

LOGO

Santander UK plc143


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Revenue recognition

a) Interest income and expense

Interest and similar income comprises interest income on financial assets measured at amortised cost, investments in debt instruments measured at FVOCI (2017:available-for-sale)available-for-sale measured at fair value) and interest income on hedging derivatives. Interest expense and similar charges comprises interest expense on financial liabilities measured at amortised cost, and interest expense on hedging derivatives. Interest income on financial assets measured at amortised cost, investments in debt instruments measured at FVOCI (2017:available-for-sale)available-for-sale measured at fair value) and interest expense on financial liabilities other than those at fair value through profit or loss (FVTPL) is determined using the effective interest rate method.

The effective interest rate is the rate that discounts the estimated future cash payments or receipts over the expected life of the instrument or, when appropriate, a shorter period, to the gross carrying amount of the financial asset (i.e. its amortised cost before any impairment allowance) or to the amortised cost of a financial liability. When calculating the effective interest rate, the future cash flows are estimated after considering all the contractual terms of the instrument excluding expected credit losses. The calculation includes all amounts paid or received by the Santander UK group that are an integral part of the overall return, direct incremental transaction costs related to the acquisition, issue or disposal of the financial instrument and all other premiums or discounts.

Interest income is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to the gross carrying amount of financial assets, except for financial assets that have subsequently become credit-impaired (or ‘stage‘Stage 3’), for which interest revenue is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to their amortised cost (i.e. net of the ECL provision). For more information on stage allocations of credit risk exposures, see ‘Significant increase in credit risk’ in the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk management’ section of the Risk ReviewReview.

b) Fee and commission income and expense

Fees and commissions that are not an integral part of the effective interest rate are recognised when the service is performed. Most fee and commission income is recognised at a point in time. Certain commitment, upfront and management fees are recognised over time but are not material. For retail and corporate products, fee and commission income consists principally of collection services fees, commission on foreign currencies, commission and other fees received from retailers for processing credit card transactions, fees received from other credit card issuers for providing cash advances for their customers through the Santander UK group’s branch and ATM networks, annual fees payable by credit card holders and fees fornon-banking financial products.

For insurance products, fee and commission income consists principally of commissions and profit share arising from the sale of building and contents insurance and life protection insurance. Commissions arising from the sale of buildings and contents insurance are recognised over the period of insurance cover, adjusted to take account of cancelled policies. Profit share income from the sale of buildings and contents insurance which is not subject to any adjustment is recognised when the profit share income is earned. Commissions and profit share arising from the sale of life protection insurance is subject to adjustment for cancellations of policies within 3 years from inception.

Santander UK plc169


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

Fee and commission income which forms an integral part of the effective interest rate of a financial instrument (for example certain loan commitment fees) is recognised as an adjustment to the effective interest rate and recorded in ‘Interest income’.

c) Dividend income

Except for equity securities classified as trading assets or financial assets held at fair value through profit or loss, described below, dividend income is recognised when the right to receive payment is established. This is theex-dividend date for equity securities.

d) Net trading and other income

Net trading and other income includes all gains and losses from changes in the fair value of financial assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss (comprising financial assets and liabilities held for trading, trading derivatives and other financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss), together with related interest income, expense, dividends and changes in fair value of any derivatives managed in conjunction with these assets and liabilities. Changes in fair value of derivatives in a fair value hedging relationship are also recognised in net trading and other income. Net trading and other income also includes income from operating lease assets, and profits and losses arising on the sales of property, plant and equipment and subsidiary undertakings.

Borrowing costs

Borrowing costs directly attributable to the acquisition, construction or production of qualifying assets, including computer software, which are assets that necessarily take a substantial period of time to develop for their intended use, are added to the cost of those assets, until the assets are substantially ready for their intended use. All other borrowing costs are recognised in profit or loss in the period in which they occur.

Pensions and other post-retirement benefits

a) Defined benefit schemes

A defined benefit scheme is a pension scheme that guarantees an amount of pension benefit to be provided, usually as a function of one or more factors such as age, years of service or compensation. Pension costs are charged to ‘Administration expenses’, within the line item ‘Operating expenses before impairment losses, provisions and charges’ with the net interest on the defined benefit asset or liability included within ‘Net interest income’ in the income statement. The asset or liability recognised in respect of defined benefit pension schemes is the present value of the defined benefit obligation at the balance sheet date, less the fair value of scheme assets. The defined benefit obligation is calculated annually by independent actuaries using the projected unit credit method. The assets of the schemes are measured at their fair values at the balance sheet date.

The present value of the defined benefit obligation is estimated by projecting forward the growth in current accrued pension benefits to reflect inflation and salary growth to the date of pension payment, then discounted to present value using the yield applicable to high-quality AA rated corporate bonds of the same currency and which have terms to maturity closest to the terms of the scheme liabilities, adjusted where necessary to match those terms. In determining the value of scheme liabilities, demographic and financial assumptions are made by management about life expectancy, inflation, discount rates, pension increases and earnings growth, based on past experience and future expectations. Financial assumptions are based on market conditions at the balance sheet date and can generally be derived objectively.

Demographic assumptions require a greater degree of estimation and judgement to be applied to externally derived data. Any surplus or deficit of scheme assets over liabilities is recognised in the balance sheet as an asset (surplus) or liability (deficit). An asset is only recognised to the extent that the surplus can be recovered through reduced contributions in the future or through refunds from the scheme. The income statement includes the net interest income/expense on the net defined benefit liability/asset, current service cost and any past service cost and gain or loss on settlement. Remeasurement of defined benefit pension schemes, including return on scheme assets (excludes amounts included in net interest), actuarial gains and losses (arising from changes in demographic assumptions, the impact of scheme experience and changes in financial assumptions) and the effect of the changes to the asset ceiling (if applicable), are recognised in other comprehensive income. Remeasurement recognised in other comprehensive income will not be reclassified to the income statement. Past-service costs are recognised as an expense in the income statement at the earlier of when the scheme amendment or curtailment occurs and when the related restructuring costs or termination benefits are recognised. Curtailments include the impact of significant reductions in the number of employees covered by a scheme, or amendments to the terms of the scheme so that a significant element of future service will no longer qualify for benefits or will qualify only for reduced benefits. Curtailment gains and losses on businesses that meet the definition of discontinued operations are included in profit or loss for the year from discontinued operations. Gains and losses on settlements are recognised when the settlement occurs.

144    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

b) Defined contribution plans

A defined contribution plan is a pension scheme under which the Santander UK group pays fixed contributions as they fall due into a separate entity (a fund). The pension paid to the member at retirement is based on the amount in the separate fund for each member. The Santander UK group has no legal or constructive obligations to pay further contributions into the fund to ‘top up’ benefits to a certain guaranteed level. The regular contributions constitute net periodic costs for the year in which they are due and are included in staff costs within Operating expenses in the income statement.

c) Post-retirement medical benefit plans

Post-retirement medical benefit liabilities are determined using the projected unit credit method, with actuarial valuations updated at eachyear-end. The expected benefit costs are accrued over the period of employment using an accounting methodology similar to that for the defined benefit pension scheme.

Share-based payments

The Santander UK group engages in cash-settled and equity-settled share-based payment transactions in respect of services received from certain of its employees. Shares of the Santander UK group’s parent, Banco Santander SA are purchased in the open market by the Santander UK group (for the Employee Sharesave scheme) or are purchased by Banco Santander SA or another Banco Santander company (forsubsidiary (including awards granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Deferred Shares Bonus Plan) to satisfy share options or awards as they vest.

Options granted under the Employee Sharesave scheme are accounted for as cash-settled share-based payment transactions. Awards granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan and Deferred Shares Bonus Plan are accounted for as equity-settled share-based payment transactions.

The fair value of the services received is measured by reference to the fair value of the shares or share options initially on the date of the grant for both the cash and equity settled share-based payments and then subsequently at each reporting date for the cash-settled share-based payments. The cost of the employee services received in respect of the shares or share options granted is recognised in the income statement in administration expenses over the period that the services are received i.e. the vesting period.

170Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

A liability equal to the portion of the services received is recognised at the fair value determined at each balance sheet date for cash-settled share-based payments. A liability equal to the amount to be reimbursed to Banco Santander SA is recognised at the fair value determined at the grant date for equity-settled share-based payments.

The fair value of the options granted under the Employee Sharesave scheme is determined using an option pricing model, which takes into account the exercise price of the option, the current share price, the risk free interest rate, the expected volatility of the Banco Santander SA share price over the life of the option and the dividend growth rate. The fair value of the awards granted for the Long-Term Incentive Plan was determined at the grant date using an option pricing model, which takes into account the share price at grant date, the risk free interest rate, the expected volatility of the Banco Santander SA share price over the life of the award and the dividend growth rate. Vesting conditions included in the terms of the grant are not taken into account in estimating fair value, except for those that include terms related to market conditions.Non-market vesting conditions are taken into account by adjusting the number of shares or share options included in the measurement of the cost of employee service so that, ultimately, the amount recognised in the income statement reflects the number of vested shares or share options. Where vesting conditions are related to market conditions, the charges for the services received are recognised regardless of whether or not the market–related vesting conditions are met, provided that thenon-market vesting conditions are met.

Where an award has been modified, as a minimum, the expense of the original award continues to be recognised as if it had not been modified. Where the effect of a modification is to increase the fair value of an award or increase the number of equity instruments, the incremental fair value of the award or incremental fair value of the modification of the award is recognised in addition to the expense of the original grant, measured at the date of modification, over the modified vesting period.

Cancellations in the vesting period are treated as an acceleration of vesting, and recognised immediately for the amount that would otherwise have been recognised for services over the vesting period.

Goodwill and other intangible assets

Goodwill represents the excess of the cost of an acquisition, as well as the fair value of any interest previously held, over the fair value of the share of the identifiable net assets of the acquired subsidiary, associate, or business at the date of acquisition. Goodwill on the acquisition of subsidiaries and businesses is included in intangible assets. Goodwill on acquisitions of associates is included as part of investment in associates. Goodwill is tested for impairment at each balance sheet date,annually, or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances dictate, and carried at cost less accumulated impairment losses. Gains and losses on the disposal of an entity or business include the carrying amount of goodwill relating to the entity or business sold.

Other intangible assets are recognised if they arise from contractual or other legal rights or if they are capable of being separated or divided from the Santander UK group and sold, transferred, licensed, rented or exchanged. The value of such intangible assets is amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful economic life of three to seven years. Other intangible assets are reviewed annually for impairment indicators and tested for impairment where indicators are present.

Software development costs are capitalised when they are direct costs associated with identifiable and unique software products that are expected to provide future economic benefits and the cost of those products can be measured reliably. These costs include payroll, materials, services and directly attributable overheads. Internally developed software meeting these criteria and externally purchased software are classified in intangible assets on the balance sheet and amortised on a straight-line basis over their useful life of three to seven years, unless the software is an integral part of the related computer hardware, in which case it is treated as property, plant and equipment as described below. Capitalisation of costs ceases when the software is capable of operating as intended. Costs of maintaining software are expensed as incurred.

Property, plant and equipment

Property, plant and equipment include owner-occupied properties (including leasehold properties), office fixtures and equipment and computer software. Property, plant and equipment also includes operating leases where the Santander UK group is the lessor andright-of-use assets where the Santander UK group is the lessee, as described further in ‘Leases’ below. Property, plant and equipment are carried at cost less accumulated depreciation and accumulated impairment losses. A review for indications of impairment is carried out at each reporting date. Gains and losses on disposal are determined by reference to the carrying amount and are reported in net trading and other income. Repairs and renewals are charged to the income statement when the expenditure is incurred. Internally developed software meeting the criteria set out in ‘Goodwill and other intangible assets’ above and externally purchased software are classified in property, plant and equipment where the software is an integral part of the related computer hardware (for example operating system of a computer). Classes of property, plant and equipment are depreciated on a straight-line basis over their useful life, as follows:

 

Owner-occupied properties

  

Not exceeding 50 years

Office fixtures and equipment

  

3 to 15 years

Computer software

  

3 to 7 years

Right-of-use assets (see ‘Leases – The Santander UK group as lessee’ below)

Shorter of the lease term or the useful life of the underlying asset

Depreciation is not charged on freehold land and assets under construction.

LOGO

Santander UK plc145


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Depreciation on operating lease assets where the Santander UK group is the lessor is described in ‘Leases’ below.

Financial instruments

a) Initial recognition and measurement

Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised when the Santander UK group becomes a party to the contractual terms of the instrument. The Santander UK group determines the classification of its financial assets and liabilities at initial recognition and measures a financial asset or financial liability at its fair value plus or minus, in the case of a financial asset or financial liability not at FVTPL, transaction costs that are incremental and directly attributable to the acquisition or issue of the financial asset or financial liability. Transaction costs of financial assets and financial liabilities carried at fair value through profit or lossFVTPL are expensed in profit or loss. Immediately after initial recognition, an expected credit loss (ECL) allowance is recognised for financial assets measured at amortised cost and investments in debt instruments measured at FVOCI.

A regular way purchase is a purchase of a financial asset under a contract whose terms require delivery of the asset within the timeframe established generally by regulation or convention in the market place concerned. Regular way purchases of financial assets classified as loans and receivables, issues of equity or financial liabilities measured at amortised cost are recognised on settlement date; all other regular way purchases and issues are recognised on trade date.

Santander UK plc171


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

b) Financial assets and liabilities

i) Classification and subsequent measurement

From 1 January 2018, theThe Santander UK group has applied IFRS 9 Financial Instruments and classifies its financial assets in the measurement categories of amortised cost, FVOCI and FVTPL.

Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified as FVTPL where there is a requirement to do so or where they are otherwise designated at FVTPL on initial recognition. Financial assets and financial liabilities which are required to be held at FVTPL include:

 

Financial assets and financial liabilities held for trading

���

Debt instruments that do not have solely payments of principal and interest (SPPI) characteristics. Otherwise, such instruments are measured at amortised cost or FVOCI, and

Equity instruments that have not been designated as held at FVOCI.

Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified as held for trading if they are derivatives or if they are acquired or incurred principally for the purpose of selling or repurchasing in the near-term, or form part of a portfolio of financial instruments that are managed together and for which there is evidence of short-term profit taking.

In certain circumstances, other financial assets and financial liabilities are designated at FVTPL where this results in more relevant information. This may arise because it significantly reduces a measurement inconsistency that would otherwise arise from measuring assets or liabilities or recognising the gains or losses on them on a different basis, where the assets and liabilities are managed and their performance evaluated on a fair value basis or, in the case of financial liabilities, where it contains one or more embedded derivatives which are not closely related to the host contract.

The classification and measurement requirements for financial asset debt and equity instruments and financial liabilities are set out below.

a) Financial assets: debt instruments

Debt instruments are those instruments that meet the definition of a financial liability from the issuer’s perspective, such as loans and government and corporate bonds. Classification and subsequent measurement of debt instruments depend on the Santander UK group’s business model for managing the asset, and the cash flow characteristics of the asset.

Business model

The business model reflects how the Santander UK group manages the assets in order to generate cash flows and, specifically, whether the Santander UK group’s objective is solely to collect the contractual cash flows from the assets or is to collect both the contractual cash flows and cash flows arising from the sale of the assets. If neither of these is applicable, such as where the financial assets are held for trading purposes, then the financial assets are classified as part of an ‘other’ business model and measured at FVTPL. Factors considered in determining the business model for a group of assets include past experience on how the cash flows for these assets were collected, how the assets’ performance is evaluated and reported to key management personnel, and how risks are assessed and managed.

SPPI

Where the business model is to hold assets to collect contractual cash flows or to collect contractual cash flows and sell, the Santander UK group assesses whether the assets’ cash flows represent SPPI. In making this assessment, the Santander UK group considers whether the contractual cash flows are consistent with a basic lending arrangement (i.e. interest includes only consideration for the time value of money, credit risk, other basic lending risks and a profit margin that is consistent with a basic lending arrangement). Where the contractual terms introduce exposure to risk or volatility that is inconsistent with a basic lending arrangement, the related asset is classified and measured at FVTPL.

Financial assets with embedded derivatives are considered in their entirety when determining whether their cash flows are SPPI.

Based on these factors, the Santander UK group classifies its debt instruments into one of the following measurement categories:

 

Amortised cost – Financial assets that are held for collection of contractual cash flows where those cash flows represent SPPI, and that are not designated at FVTPL, are measured at amortised cost. The carrying amount of these assets is adjusted by any ECL recognised and measured as presented in Note 14.13. Interest income from these financial assets is included in ‘Interest and similar income’ using the effective interest rate method. When estimates of future cash flows are revised, the carrying amount of the respective financial assets or financial liabilities is adjusted to reflect the new estimate discounted using the original effective interest rate. Any changes are recognised in the income statement.

FVOCI – Financial assets that are held for collection of contractual cash flows and for selling the assets, where the assets’ cash flows represent SPPI, and that are not designated at FVTPL, are measured at FVOCI. Movements in the carrying amount are recognised in OCI, except for the recognition of impairment gains or losses, interest revenue and foreign exchange gains and losses on the instrument’s amortised cost which are recognised in profit or loss. When the financial asset is derecognised, the cumulative gain or loss previously recognised in OCI is reclassified from equity to profit or loss and recognised in ‘Net trading and other income’. Interest income from these financial assets is included in ‘Interest and similar income’ using the effective interest rate method.

FVTPL – Financial assets that do not meet the criteria for amortised cost or FVOCI are measured at FVTPL. A gain or loss on a debt instrument that is subsequently measured at FVTPL, including any debt instruments designated at fair value, is recognised in profit or loss and presented in the income statement in ‘Net trading and other income’ in the period in which it arises.

The Santander UK group reclassifies financial assets when and only when its business model for managing those assets changes. The reclassification takes place from the start of the first reporting period following the change. Such changes are expected to be very infrequent.

146    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

b) Financial assets: equity instruments

Equity instruments are instruments that meet the definition of equity from the issuer’s perspective, being instruments that do not contain a contractual obligation to pay cash and that evidence a residual interest in the issuer’s net assets. All equity investments are subsequently measured at FVTPL, except where management has elected, at initial recognition, to irrevocably designate an equity investment at FVOCI. When this election is used, fair value gains and losses are recognised in OCI and are not subsequently reclassified to profit or loss, including on disposal. ECLs (and reversal of ECLs) are not reported separately from other changes in fair value. Dividends, when representing a return on such investments, continue to be recognised in profit or loss as other income when the right to receive payments is established. Gains and losses on equity investments at FVTPL are included in the ‘Net trading and other income’ line in the income statement.

172Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

c) Financial liabilities

Financial liabilities are classified as subsequently measured at amortised cost, except for:

 

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss: this classification is applied to derivatives financial liabilities held for trading and other financial liabilities designated as such at initial recognition. Gains or losses on financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss are presented partially in other comprehensive income (the amount of change in the fair value of the financial liability that is attributable to changes in the credit risk of that liability) and partially in profit or loss (the remaining amount of change in the fair value of the liability)

Financial liabilities arising from the transfer of financial assets which did not qualify for derecognition, whereby a financial liability is recognised for the consideration received for the transfer. In subsequent periods, the Santander UK group recognises any expense incurred on the financial liability, and

Financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments.

Contracts involving the receipt of cash on which customers receive an index-linked return are accounted for as equity index-linked deposits. The principal products are Capital Guaranteed/Protected Products which give the customers a limited participation in the upside growth of an equity index. In the event the index falls in price, a cash principal element is guaranteed/protected. The equity index-linked deposits contain embedded derivatives. These embedded derivatives, in combination with the principal cash deposit element, are designed to replicate the investment performance profile tailored to the return agreed in the contracts with customers. The cash principal element is accounted for as deposits by customers at amortised cost. The embedded derivatives are separated from the host instrument and are separately accounted for as derivatives.

d) Sale and repurchase agreements (including stock borrowing and lending)

Securities sold subject to a commitment to repurchase them at a predetermined price (repos) under which substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership are retained by the Santander UK group remain on the balance sheet and a liability is recorded in respect of the consideration received. Securities purchased under commitments to resell (reverse repos) are not recognised on the balance sheet and the consideration paid is recorded as an asset. The difference between the sale and repurchase price is treated as trading income in the income statement, except where the repo is not treated as part of the trading book, in which case the difference is recorded in interest income or expense.

Securities lending and borrowing transactions are generally secured, with collateral in the form of securities or cash advanced or received. Securities lent or borrowed are not reflected on the balance sheet. Collateral in the form of cash received or advanced is recorded as a deposit or a loan. Collateral in the form of securities is not recognised.

e) Day One profit adjustments

The fair value of a financial instrument on initial recognition is generally its transaction price (that is, the fair value of the consideration given or received). However, sometimes the fair value will be based on other observable current market transactions in the same instrument, without modification or repackaging, or on a valuation technique whose variables include only data from observable markets, such as interest rate yield curves, option volatilities and currency rates. When such evidence exists, the Santander UK group recognises a trading gain or loss at inception (Day One gain or loss), being the difference between the transaction price and the fair value. When significant unobservable parameters are used, the entire Day One gain or loss is deferred and is recognised in the income statement over the life of the transaction until the transaction matures, is closed out, the valuation inputs become observable or an offsetting transaction is entered into.

ii) Impairment of debt instrument financial assets

The Santander UK group assesses on a forward-looking basis the ECL associated with its debt instrument assets carried at amortised cost and FVOCI and with the exposure arising from financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments. The Santander UK group recognises a loss allowance for such losses at each reporting date. The measurement of ECL reflects:

 

An unbiased and probability-weighted amount that is determined by evaluating a range of possible outcomes

The time value of money, and

Reasonable and supportable information that is available without undue cost or effort at the reporting date about past events, current conditions and forecasts of future economic conditions.

Grouping of instruments for losses measured on a collective basis

We typically group instruments and assess them for impairment collectively where they share risk characteristics (as described in Retail Banking – credit risk management in the Risk review) using one or more statistical models. Where we have used internal capital or similar models as the basis for our IFRS 9 models, this typically results in a large number of relatively small homogenous groups which are determined by the permutations of the underlying characteristics in the statistical models. We calculate separate collective provisions for instruments in Stages 1, 2 and 3 where the instrument is not individually assessed, as described below.

Individually assessed impairments (IAIs)

We assess significant Stage 3 cases individually. We do this for CIB and Corporate & Commercial Banking cases, but not for Business Banking cases in Retail Banking which we assess collectively. To calculate the estimated loss, we estimate the future cash flows under several scenarios each of which uses case-specific factors and circumstances. We then probability-weight the net present value of the cash flows under each scenario to arrive at a weighted average provision requirement. We update our assessment process every quarter and more frequently if there are changes in circumstances that might affect the scenarios, cash flows or probabilities we apply.

For more on how ECL is calculated, see the Credit risk section of the Risk review.

a)Write-off Write-off

For secured loans, awrite-off is only made when all collection procedures have been exhausted and the security has been sold and/or from claiminga claim made on any mortgage indemnity guarantee or other insurance. In the corporate portfolio, there may be occasions where awrite-off occurs for other reasons, such as following a consensual restructure or refinancing of the debt or where the debt is sold for strategic reasons into the secondary market at a value lower than its face value.

LOGO

Santander UK plc147


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

There is no threshold based on past due status beyond which all secured loans are written off as there can be significant variations in the time needed to enforce possession and sale of the security, especially due to the different legal frameworks that apply in different regions of the UK. For unsecured loans, awrite-off is only made when all internal avenues of collecting the debt have been exhausted andexhausted. Where appropriate the debt is passed over to external collection agencies. A past due threshold is applied to unsecured debt where accounts that are 180 days past due are written off unless there is a dispute awaiting resolution. Contact is made with customers with the aim to achieve a realistic and sustainable repayment arrangement. Litigation and/or enforcement of security is usually carried out only when the steps described above have been undertaken without success.

Santander UK plc173


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

All write-offs are assessed / made on acase-by-case basis, taking account of the exposure at the date ofwrite-off, after accounting for the value from any collateral or insurance held against the loan. The exception to this is in cases where fraud has occurred, where the exposure is written off once investigations have been completed and the probability of recovery is minimal. The time span between discovery andwrite-off will be short and may not result in an impairment loss allowance being raised. Thewrite-off policy is regularly reviewed. Write-offs are charged against previously established loss allowances.

b) Recoveries

Recoveries of credit impairment losses are not included in the impairment loss allowance, but are taken to income and offset against credit impairment losses. Recoveries of credit impairment losses are classified in the income statement as ‘Credit impairment losses’.

iii) Modifications of financial assets

The treatment of a renegotiation or modification of the contractual cash flows of a financial asset normally depends upon whether the renegotiation or modification is due to financial difficulties of the borrower or for other commercial reasons.

 

Contractual modifications due to financial difficulties of the borrower:borrower: where Santander UK modifies the contractual conditions to enable the borrower to fulfil their payment obligations, the asset is not derecognised. The gross carrying amount of the financial asset is recalculated as the present value of the renegotiated/modified contractual cash flows that are discounted at the financial asset’s original EIR and any gain or loss arising from the modification is recognised in the income statement.

Contractual modifications for other commercial reasons: such modifications are treated as a new transaction resulting in derecognition of the original financial asset, and the recognition of a ‘new’ financial asset. Any difference between the carrying amount of the derecognised asset and the fair value of the new asset is recognised in the income statement as a gain or loss on derecognition.

Any other contractual modifications, such as where a regulatory authority imposes a change in certain contractual terms or due to legal reasons, are assessed on acase-by-case basis to establish whether or not the financial asset should be derecognised.

iv) Derecognition other than on a modification

Financial assets are derecognised when the rights to receive cash flows have expired or the Santander UK group has transferred its contractual right to receive the cash flows from the assets and either: (1) substantially all the risks and rewards of ownership have been transferred; or (2) the Santander UK group has neither retained nor transferred substantially all of the risks and rewards, but has transferred control.

Financial liabilities are derecognised when extinguished, cancelled or expired.

c) Financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments

Financial guarantee contracts are contracts that require the issuer to make specified payments to reimburse the holder for a loss it incurs because a specified debtor fails to make payments when due, in accordance with the terms of a debt instrument. Such financial guarantees are given to banks, financial institutions and others on behalf of customers to secure loans, overdrafts and other banking facilities.

Financial guarantee contracts are initially measured at fair value and subsequently measured at the higher of the amount of the loss allowance, and the premium received on initial recognition less income recognised in accordance with the principles of IFRS 15. Loan commitments are measured as the amount of the loss allowance.allowance (determined in accordance with IFRS 9 as described in Credit risk section of the Risk review). The Santander UK group has not provided any commitment to provide loans at a below-market interest rate, or that can be settled net in cash or by delivering or issuing another financial instrument.

For financial guarantee contracts and loan commitments, the loss allowance is recognised as a provision and charged to credit impairment losses in the income statement. The loss allowance in respect of revolving facilities is classified in loans and advances to customers to the extent of any drawn balances. The loss allowance in respect of undrawn amounts is classified in provisions. When amounts are drawn, any related loss allowance is transferred from provisions to loans and advances to customers.

Derivative financial instruments (derivatives)

Derivatives are contracts or agreements whose value is derived from one or more underlying indices or asset values inherent in the contract or agreement, which require no or little initial net investment and are settled at a future date. Transactions are undertaken in interest rate, cross currency, equity, residential property and other index-related swaps, forwards, caps, floors, swaptions, as well as credit default and total return swaps, equity index contracts and exchange traded interest rate futures, and equity index options.

Derivatives are held for risk management purposes. Derivatives are classified as held for trading unless they are designated as being in a hedge accounting relationship. The Santander UK group chooses to designate certain derivatives as in a hedging relationship if they meet specific criteria, as further described in ‘Hedge accounting’ below.

Derivatives are recognised initially (on the date on which a derivative contract is entered into), and are subsequently remeasured, at their fair value. Fair values of exchange-traded derivatives are obtained from quoted market prices. Fair values ofover-the-counter derivatives are estimated using valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow and option pricing models.

Certain derivatives may be embedded in hybrid contracts, such as the conversion option in a convertible bond. If the hybrid contract contains a host that is a financial asset, then the Santander UK group assesses the entire contract as described in the financial asset section above for classification and measurement purposes. Otherwise, embedded derivatives are treated as separate derivatives when their economic characteristics and risks are not closely related to those of the host contract; the terms of the embedded derivative would meet the definition of a stand-alone derivative if they were contained in a separate contract; and the combined contract is not held for trading or designated at fair value. These embedded derivatives are measured at fair value with changes in fair value recognised in the income statement.

Contracts containing embedded derivatives are not subsequently reassessed for separation unless either there has been a change in the terms of the contract which significantly modifies the cash flows (in which case the contract is reassessed at the time of modification) or the contract has been reclassified (in which case the contract is reassessed at the time of reclassification).

148    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

All derivatives are carried as assets when their fair value is positive and as liabilities when their fair value is negative, except where netting is permitted. The method of recognising fair value gains and losses depends on whether derivatives are held for trading or are designated as hedging instruments and, if the latter, the nature of the risks being hedged. Gains and losses from changes in the fair value of derivatives held for trading are recognised in the income statement, and included within net trading and other income.

174Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

Offsetting financial assets and liabilities

Financial assets and liabilities including derivatives are offset and the net amount reported in the balance sheet when there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The Santander UK group is party to a number of arrangements, including master netting arrangements under industry standard agreements which facilitate netting of transactions in jurisdictions where netting agreements are recognised and have legal force. The netting arrangements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis.

Hedge accounting

The Santander UK group applies hedge accounting to represent, to the maximum possible extent permitted under accounting standards, the economic effects of its risk management strategies. Derivatives are used to hedge exposures to interest rates, exchange rates and certain indices such as retail price indices.

At the time a financial instrument is designated as a hedge (i.e. at the inception of the hedge), the Santander UK group formally documents the relationship between the hedging instrument(s) and hedged item(s), its risk management objective and strategy for undertaking the hedge. The documentation includes the identification of each hedging instrument and respective hedged item, the nature of the risk being hedged (including the benchmark interest rate being hedged in a hedge of interest rate risk) and how the hedging instrument’s effectiveness in offsetting the exposure to changes in the hedged item’s fair value attributable to the hedged risk is to be assessed. Accordingly, the Santander UK group formally assesses, both at the inception of the hedge and on an ongoing basis, whether the hedging derivatives have been and will be highly effective in offsetting changes in the fair value attributable to the hedged risk during the period that the hedge is designated. A hedge is normally regarded as highly effective if, at inception and throughout its life, the Santander UK group can expect, and actual results indicate, that changes in the fair value or cash flow of the hedged items are effectively offset by changes in the fair value or cash flow of the hedging instrument. If at any point it is concluded that it is no longer highly effective in achieving its documented objective, hedge accounting is discontinued.

Where derivatives are held for risk management purposes, and when transactions meet the required criteria for documentation and hedge effectiveness, the derivatives may be designated as either: (i) hedges of the change in fair value of recognised assets or liabilities or firm commitments (fair value hedges); (ii) hedges of the variability in highly probable future cash flows attributable to a recognised asset or liability, or a forecast transaction (cash flow hedges); or (iii) a hedge of a net investment in a foreign operation (net investment hedges). The Santander UK group applies fair value and cash flow hedge accounting, but not hedging of a net investment in a foreign operation.

a) Fair value hedge accounting

Changes in the fair value of derivatives that are designated and qualify as fair value hedges are recorded in the income statement, together with the changes in the fair value of the hedged asset or liability that are attributable to the hedged risk. Where the hedged item is measured at amortised cost, the fair value changes due to the hedged risk adjust the carrying amount of the hedged asset or liability. Changes in the fair value of portfolio hedged items are presented separately in the consolidated balance sheet in macro hedge of interest rate risk and recognised in the income statement within net trading and other income. If the hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk are no longer recognised in the income statement. For fair value hedges of interest rate risk, the cumulative adjustment that has been made to the carrying amount of the hedged item is amortised to the income statement using the effective interest method over the period to maturity. For portfolio hedged items, the cumulative adjustment is amortised to the income statement using the straight line method over the period to maturity.

b) Cash flow hedge accounting

The effective portion of changes in the fair value of qualifying cash flow hedges is recognised in other comprehensive income in the cash flow hedging reserve. The gain or loss relating to the ineffective portion is recognised immediately in the income statement. Amounts accumulated in equity are reclassified to the income statement in the periods in which the hedged item affects profit or loss. When a hedging instrument expires or is sold, or when a hedge no longer meets the criteria for hedge accounting, any cumulative gain or loss existing in equity at that time remains in equity and is recognised in the income statement when the forecast transaction is ultimately recognised in the income statement. When a forecast transaction is no longer expected to occur, the cumulative gain or loss that was reported in equity is immediately transferred to the income statement. The Santander UK group is exposed to cash flow interest rate risk on its floating rate assets, and foreign currency risk on its fixed rate debt issuances denominated in foreign currency.currency and equity price risk arises from the Santander UK group operating the Employee Sharesave scheme. Cash flow hedging is used to hedge the variability in cash flows arising from both these risks.

Securitisation transactions

The Santander UK group has entered into arrangements where undertakings have issued mortgage-backed and other asset-backed securities or have entered into funding arrangements with lenders in order to finance specific loans and advances to customers. As the Santander UK group has retained substantially all the risks and rewards of the underlying assets, such financial instruments continue to be recognised on the balance sheet, and a liability recognised for the proceeds of the funding transaction.

Impairment ofnon-financial assets

At each balance sheet date, or more frequently when events or changes in circumstances dictate, property plant and equipment (including operating lease assets) and intangible assets (including goodwill) are assessed for indicators of impairment. If indications are present, these assets are subject to an impairment review. The impairment review comprises a comparison of the carrying amount of the asset or cash generating unit with its recoverable amount: the higher of the asset’s or cash-generating unit’s fair value less costs to sell and its value in use. The cash-generating unit represents the lowest level at whichnon-financial assets, including goodwill, isare monitored for internal management purposes and is not larger than an operating segment.

The fair value is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date. Value in use is calculated by discounting management’s expected future cash flows obtainable as a result of the asset’s continued use, including those resulting from its ultimate disposal, at a market basedmarket-based discount rate on apre-tax basis. The recoverable amounts of goodwill have been based on value in use calculations.

The carrying values of property, plant and equipment, goodwill and other intangible assets are written down by the amount of any impairment and the loss is recognised in the income statement in the period in which it occurs. A previously recognised impairment loss relating to property, plant and equipment may be reversed in part or in full when a change in circumstances leads to a change in the estimates used to determine the property, plant and equipment’s recoverable amount. The carrying amount of the property, plant and equipment will only be increased up to the amount that would have been had the original impairment not been recognised. Impairment losses on goodwill are not reversed. For conducting goodwill impairment reviews, cash generating units are the lowest level at which management monitors the return on investment on assets.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 149175


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

 

Leases

a) The Santander UK group as lessor

Operating lease assets are recorded at cost and depreciated over the life of the asset after taking into account anticipated residual value.value (RV). Operating lease rental income and depreciation is recognised on a straight-line basis over the life of the asset. After initial recognition, residual values are reviewed regularly, and any changes are recognised prospectively through remaining depreciation charges.

Amounts due from lessees under finance leases and hire purchase contracts are recorded as receivables at the amount of the Santander UK group’s net investment in the leases. Finance lease income is allocated to accounting periods so as to reflect a constant periodic rate of return on the Santander UK group’s net investment outstanding in respect of the leases and hire purchase contracts. A provision is recognised to reflect a reduction in any anticipated unguaranteed RV. A provision is also recognised for voluntary termination of the contract by the customer, where appropriate.

b) The Santander UK group as lessee

The Santander UK group enters into operatingassesses whether a contract is or contains a lease at the inception of the contract and recognises aright-of-use (ROU) asset representing its right to use the underlying leased asset and a lease liability representing its obligation to make lease payments for all leases, except for the rentalleases with a term of equipment12 months or real estate. Payments made under such leasesless which are charged toexpensed in the income statement on a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. When an operating lease terms. Lease payments exclude irrecoverable VAT which is terminated before the lease period has expired, any payment to be made to the lessor by way of penalty is recognised as an expenseexpensed in the period inincome statement as lease payments are made.

The lease liability, which termination takes place.

Ifis included within Other liabilities on the lease agreement transfers the risk and rewards of the asset, the leasebalance sheet, is recorded as a finance lease and the related asset is capitalised. At inception, the asset is recordedinitially measured at the lower of the present value of the minimum lease payments that are not paid at the commencement date, discounted using the incremental borrowing rate appropriate to the lease term. The lease liability is subsequently measured at amortised cost using the effective interest rate method. Remeasurement of the lease liability occurs if there is a change in the lease payments (when a corresponding adjustment is made to the ROU asset), the lease term or fair valuein the assessment of an option to purchase the underlying asset.

At inception, the ROU asset, which is included within Property, plant and equipment on the balance sheet, comprises the lease liability, initial direct costs and the obligations to restore the asset, less any incentives granted by the lessor. The ROU asset is depreciated over the lowershorter of the estimatedlease term or the useful life and the life of the lease.underlying asset and is reviewed for indications of impairment as for owned assets. The corresponding rental obligations are recorded as borrowings. The aggregate benefit of incentives, if any,obligation to restore the asset is recognised as a reduction of rental expense overincluded within Provisions on the lease term on a straight-line basis.balance sheet.

Income taxes, including deferred taxes

The tax expense represents the sum of the income tax currently payable and deferred income tax.

Income tax payable on profits, based on the applicable tax law in each jurisdiction, is recognised as an expense in the period in which profits arise. Taxable profit differs from net profit as reported in the income statement because it excludes items of income or expense that are taxable or deductible in other years and it further excludes items that are never taxable or deductible. The liability for current tax is calculated using tax rates that have been enacted or substantively enacted by the balance sheet date. Current taxes associated with the repurchase of equity instruments are reported directly in equity.

A current tax liability for the current or prior period is measured at the amount expected to be paid to the tax authorities. Where the amount of the final tax liability is uncertain or where a position is challenged by a taxation authority, the liability recognised is the most likely outcome. Where a most likely outcome cannot be determined, a weighted average basis is applied.

Deferred income tax is the tax expected to be payable or recoverable on income tax losses available to carry forward and on temporary differences arising between the tax bases of assets and liabilities and their carrying amounts in the Consolidated Financial Statements and is accounted for using the balance sheet liability method. Deferred tax liabilities are generally recognised for all taxable temporary differences and deferred tax assets are recognised to the extent that it is probable that taxable profits will be available against which the assets may be utilised as they reverse. Such deferred tax liabilities are not recognised if the temporary difference arises from the initial recognition of goodwill. Deferred tax assets and liabilities are not recognised from the initial recognition of other assets (other than in a business combination) and liabilities in a transaction that affects neither the taxable profit nor the accounting profit.

Deferred tax is calculated at the tax rates that are expected to apply in the period when the liability is settled or the asset is realised based on rates enacted or substantively enacted at the balance sheet date. Deferred tax is charged or credited in the income statement, except when it relates to items recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity, in which case the deferred tax is also recognised in other comprehensive income or directly in equity. Deferred tax liabilities are recognised for taxable temporary differences arising on investments in subsidiaries except where the Santander UK group is able to control reversal of the temporary difference and it is probable that it will not reverse in the foreseeable future. The Santander UK group reviews the carrying amount of deferred tax assets at each balance sheet date and reduces it to the extent that it is no longer probable that sufficient taxable profits will be available to allow all or part of the asset to be recovered.

Deferred tax relating to actuarial gains and losses on defined benefits is recognised in other comprehensive income. Deferred tax relating to fair valuere-measurements of financial instruments accounted for at FVOCI and cash flow hedging instruments is charged or credited directly to other comprehensive income and is subsequently recognised in the income statement when the deferred fair value gain or loss is recognised in the income statement.

Deferred and current tax assets and liabilities are only offset when they arise in the same tax reporting group and where there is both the legal right and the intention to settle on a net basis or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously.

Cash and cash equivalents

For the purposes of the cash flow statement, cash and cash equivalents comprise balances with less than three months maturity from the date of acquisition, including cash andnon-restricted balances with central banks, treasury bills and other eligible bills, loans and advances to banks and short-term investments in securities.

Balances with central banks represent amounts held at the Bank of England and, at 31 December 2017, the US Federal Reserve as part of the Santander UK group’s liquidity management activities. In addition, it includes certain minimum cash balances held for regulatory purposes required to be maintained with the Bank of England.

Provisions

Provisions are recognised for present obligations arising as consequences of past events where it is more likely than not that a transfer of economic benefits will be necessary to settle the obligation, and it can be reliably estimated.

Conduct provisions are made for the estimated cost of making redress payments with respect to the past sales of products, based onusing conclusions regardingsuch as the number of claims that will be received, including the number of those that will be upheld, the estimated average settlement per case and other related costs. Provision is made for the anticipated cost of

176Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

restructuring, including redundancy costs, when an obligation exists. An obligation exists when the Santander UK group has a detailed formal plan for restructuring a business, has raised valid expectations in those affected by the restructuring, and has started to implement the plan or announce its main features.

When a leasehold property ceases to be used in the business, provision is made where the unavoidable costs of the future obligations relating to the lease are expected to exceed anticipated rental income. The net costs are discounted using market rates of interest to reflect the long-term nature of the cash flows.

Provisions include amounts in respect of irrevocable loan commitments. The provision isLoan commitments are measured as the present valueamount of the difference betweenloss allowance (determined in accordance with IFRS 9 as described in Credit risk section of the contractual cash flows based on the expected drawdowns and the cash flows that the Santander UK group expects to receive.Risk review).

Contingent liabilities are possible obligations whose existence will be confirmed only by certain future events or present obligations where the transfer of economic benefit is uncertain or cannot be reliably measured. Contingent liabilities are not recognised but are disclosed unless they are remote.

150    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

Share capital

a) Share issue costs

Incremental external costs directly attributable to the issue of new shares are deducted from equity net of related income taxes.

b) Dividends

Dividends on ordinary shares are recognised in equity in the period in which the right to receive payment is established.

Accounting policies relating to comparatives – IAS 39

On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9, which replaced IAS 39. In accordance with the transition requirements of IFRS 9, comparatives were not restated. The principal accounting policies applied in accordance with IAS 39 for periods before the adoption of IFRS 9 are set out below:

FinancialClassification and measurement of financial assets and liabilities – IAS 39

Financial assets and liabilities are initially recognised when the Santander UK group becomes a party to the contractual terms of the instrument. The Santander UK group determines the classification of its financial assets and liabilities at initial recognition. Financial assets are classified as financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, loans and receivables andavailable-for-sale financial assets andheld-to-maturity investments. Financial assets that are classified at fair value through profit or loss, which have not been designated as such or are not accounted for as derivatives, or assets classified asavailable-for-sale, may subsequently in rare circumstances, be reclassified from the fair value through profit or loss category to the loans and receivables,available-for-sale orheld-to-maturity categories.assets. Financial liabilities are classified as fair value through profit or loss if they are either held for trading or otherwise designated at fair value through profit or loss on initial recognition.

a) Financial assets and liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified as FVTPL if they are either held for trading or otherwise designated at FVTPL on initial recognition. Financial assets and financial liabilities are classified as held for trading if they are derivatives or if they are acquired or incurred principally for the purpose of selling or repurchasing in the near-term, or form part of a portfolio of financial instruments that are managed together and for which there is evidence of short-term profit taking. In certain circumstances, financial assets and financial liabilities other than those that are held for trading are designated at FVTPL where this results in more relevant information because it significantly reduces a measurement inconsistency that would otherwise arise from measuring assets or liabilities or recognising the gains or losses on them on a different basis, where the assets or liabilities are managed and their performance evaluated on a fair value basis, or where a financial asset or financial liability contains one or more embedded derivatives which are not closely related to the host contract.

Financial assets and financial liabilities classified as FVTPL are initially recognised at fair value and transaction costs are taken directly to the income statement. Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are included directly in the income statement except for gains and losses on financial liabilities designated at FVTPL relating to own credit which are presented in other comprehensive income.

Derivative financial instruments, trading assets and liabilities and financial assets and liabilities designated at fair value are classified as FVTPL.

b) Loans and receivables

Loans and receivables arenon-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments, that are not quoted in an active market and which are not classified asavailable-for-sale or FVTPL. They arise when the Santander UK group provides money or services directly to a customer with no intention of trading the loan. Loans and receivables are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs. They are subsequently valued at amortised cost, using the effective interest method. Loans and receivables consist of loans and advances to banks, loans and advances to customers, and loans and receivables securities.

c)Available-for-sale financial assets

Available-for-sale financial assets arenon-derivative financial assets that are designated asavailable-for-sale and are not categorised into any of the other categories described. They are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs, and subsequently held at fair value. Gains and losses arising from changes in fair value are recognised in other comprehensive income until sale or until determined to be impaired when the cumulative gain or loss or impairment losses are transferred to the income statement. Where the financial asset is interest-bearing, interest is determined using the effective interest method. Income on investments in equity shares, debt instruments and other similar interests is recognised in the income statement as and when dividends are declared and interest is accrued. Impairment losses and foreign exchange translation differences on monetary items are recognised in the income statement.

d)Held-to-maturity investments

Held-to-maturity investments arenon-derivative financial assets with fixed or determinable payments and fixed maturities that the Santander UK group’s management has the positive intention and ability to hold to maturity other than those that meet the definition of loans and receivables or that the Santander UK group designates upon initial recognition as at fair value through profit or loss, oravailable-for-sale. They are initially recognised at fair value including direct and incremental transaction costs and measured subsequently at amortised cost, using the effective interest method, less any provision for impairment. A sale or reclassification of a more than insignificant amount ofheld-to-maturity investments would result in the reclassification of allheld-to-maturity investments toavailable-for-sale financial assets.

Impairment of financial assets – IAS 39

At each balance sheet date, the Santander UK group assesses whether there is objective evidence that a financial asset or group of financial assets is impaired. A financial asset or a group of financial assets is impaired and impairment losses are incurred only if there is objective evidence of impairment as a result of one or more events that occurred after the initial recognition of the asset (a loss event) and that loss event (or events) has an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the financial asset or group of financial assets that can be reliably estimated. In the case of equity investments classified asavailable-for-sale, a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the security below its cost is considered an indicator that the assets are impaired.

a) AssetsFor assets carried at amortised cost,

For including loans and advances and loans and receivables securities, andheld-to-maturity investments, the amount of the loss is measured as the difference between the asset’s carrying amount and the present value of estimated future cash flows (excluding future credit losses that have not been incurred) discounted at the financial asset’s original effective interest rate. The carrying amount of the asset is reduced and the amount of the loss is recognised in profit or loss. If a loan or

held-to-maturityForavailable-for-sale investment has a variable interest rate, the discount rate for measuring any impairment loss is the current effective interest rate determined under the contract.

Subsequent to the recognition of an impairment loss on a financial asset or a group of financial assets, interest income continues to be recognised on an effective interest rate basis, on the asset’s carrying value net of impairment provisions. If, in a subsequent period, the amount of the impairment loss decreases and the decrease can be related objectively to an event occurring after the impairment was recognised (such as an improvement in the debtor’s credit rating), the reversal of the previously recognised impairment loss is recognised in profit or loss.

LOGO

Santander UK plc151


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Impairment allowances are assessed individually for financial assets that are individually significant. Impairment allowances for portfolios of smaller balance homogenous loans such as most residential mortgages, personal loans and credit card balances that are below the individual assessment thresholds, and for loan losses that have been incurred but not separately identified at the balance sheet date, are determined on a collective basis.

Individual assessment

For individually assessed assets, the Santander UK group measures the amount of the loss as the difference between the carrying amount of the asset and the present value of the estimated future cash flows from the asset discounted at the asset’s original effective interest rate.

The factors considered in determining whether a loan is individually significant for the purpose of assessingassesses impairment include the size of the loan, the number of loans in the portfolio, the importance of the individual loan relationship and how this is managed. Potential indicators of loss events which may be evidence of impairment for retail borrowers may include missed payments of capital and interest and borrowers notifying the Santander UK group of current or likely financial stress.

For corporate assets, when a specific observed impairment is established, the asset is transferred to the Corporate & Commercial Banking Restructuring & Recoveries team. As part of their impairment reviews, an assessment is undertaken of the expected future cash flows (including, where appropriate, cash flows through enforcement of any applicable security held) in relation to the relevant asset, discounted at the loan’s original effective interest rate. The result is compared to the current carrying value of the asset. Any shortfall evidenced as a result of such a review will be assessed and recorded as an observed specific loss allowance.

Collective assessment

In making a collective assessment for impairment, financial assets are grouped together according to their credit risk characteristics. These can include grouping by product,loan-to-value, brand, geography, type of customer and previous insolvency events. For each such portfolio orsub-segment of the portfolio, future cash flows are estimated through the use of historical loss experience. The historical loss experience is adjusted to include the effects of changes in current economic, behavioural and other conditions that cannot be successfully depicted solely from historical experience. The loss is discounted at the effective interest rate, except where portfolios meet the criteria for short-term receivables. The unwind of the discount over time is reported through interest and other similar income within the income statement, with an increase to the impairment loss allowances on the balance sheet. Loans for which evidence of potential loss have been specifically identified are grouped together for the purpose of calculating an allowance for observed losses. Loans for which no evidence of loss has been specifically identified on an individual basis are grouped together according to their credit risk characteristics for the purpose of calculating an allowance for incurred but not observed (IBNO) losses. Such losses will only be individually identified in the future.

Observed impairment loss allowance

An impairment loss allowance for observed losses is established for all NPLs where it is increasingly probable that some of the capital or interest will not be repaid or recovered through enforcement of any applicable security. The allowance for observed losses is determined on a collective (or portfolio) basis for groups of loans with similar credit risk characteristics. For more on the definition of NPLs, see ‘Credit risk management – risk measurement and control’ in the Risk review.

For mortgages and other secured advances, the allowance for observed losses is calculated as the product of the account outstanding balance (exposure) at the reporting date, the estimated proportion that will be repossessed (the loss propensity) and the percentage of exposure which will result in a loss (the loss ratio). The loss propensities for the observed segment (i.e. where the loan is classified asnon-performing) represent the percentage that will ultimately be written off, or repossessed for secured advances. Loss propensities are based on recent historical experience, typically covering a period of no more than the most recent 12 months in the year under review. The loss ratio is based on actual cases which have been repossessed and sold using the most recent 12 month average data, segmented by LTV, and is then discounted using the effective interest rate.

IBNO impairment loss allowances

An allowance for IBNO losses is established for loans which are either:

Performing and no evidence of loss has been specifically identified on an individual basis but because the loans that are not yet past due are known from past experience to have deteriorated since the initial decision to lend was made (for example, where a borrower has not yet missed a payment but is experiencing financial difficulties at the reporting date, for example due to a loss of employment, divorce or bereavement), or

In arrears and not classified asnon-performing.

The impairment loss calculation resembles the one explained above for the observed segment except that for the IBNO segment, where the account is currently up to date, the loss propensity represents the percentage of such cases that are expected to miss a payment in the appropriate emergence period and which will ultimately be written off. Where the account is delinquent, the loss propensity represents the percentage of such cases that will ultimately be written off.

b) Loans and receivables securities andheld-to-maturity investments

Loans and receivables securities andheld-to-maturity investments are assessed individually for impairment. An impairment loss is incurred if there is objective evidence that a loss event has occurred since initial recognition of the assets that has an impact on the estimated future cash flows of the asset. Potential indicators of loss events include significant financial distress of the issuer and default or delinquency in interest and principal payments (breach of contractual terms).

Loans and receivables securities andheld-to-maturity investments are monitored for potential impairment through a detailed expected cash flow analysis, where appropriate, taking into account the structure and underlying assets of each individual security. Once specific events give rise to a reasonable expectation that future anticipated cash flows may not be received, the asset originating these doubtful cash flows will be deemed to be impaired with the impairment loss being measured as the difference between the expected future cash flows discounted at the original effective interest rate and the carrying value of the asset.

c) Assets classified asavailable-for-sale

The Santander UK group assesses at each balance sheet date, whether there is objective evidence that anavailable-for-sale financial asset is impaired. The assessmentwhich involves reviewing the financial circumstances (including creditworthiness) and future prospects of the issuer, assessing the future cash flows expected to be realised and, in the case of equity shares, considering whether there has been a significant or prolonged decline in the fair value of the security below its cost. The cumulative loss is measured as the difference between the acquisition cost and the current fair value, less any impairment loss previously reported in the income statement and is removed from other comprehensive income and recognised in the income statement. For impaired debt instruments, further impairment losses

IAS 17

On 1 January 2019, Santander UK group adopted IFRS 16, which replaced IAS 17. Having chosen to apply the modified retrospective approach, in accordance with the transition requirements of IFRS 16, comparatives were not restated. The accounting policies for the Santander UK group as lessee applied in accordance with IAS 17 for periods before the adoption of IFRS 16 are recognised where there has been a further negative impact on expected future cash flows.set out below:

If, in a subsequent period,The Santander UK group as lessee – IAS 17

The Santander UK group enters into operating leases for the fair valuerental of a debt instrument classified asavailable-for-sale increases and the increase is dueequipment or real estate. Payments made under such leases are charged to an event occurring after the impairment loss was recognised in the income statement (with objective evidenceon a straight-line basis over the period of the lease. When an operating lease is terminated before the lease period has expired, any payment to support this),be made to the impairment losslessor by way of penalty is reversed throughrecognised as an expense in the income statement.period in which termination takes place. If inthe lease agreement transfers the risk and rewards of the asset, the lease is recorded as a subsequent period,finance lease and the related asset is capitalised. At inception, the asset is recorded at the lower of the present value of the minimum lease payments or fair value and depreciated over the lower of an equity instrument classifiedthe estimated useful life and the life of the lease. The corresponding rental obligations are recorded asavailable-for-sale increases, all such increases in the fair value are treated borrowings. The aggregate benefit of incentives, if any, is recognised as a revaluation, and are recognised in other comprehensive income. Impairment losses recognisedreduction of rental expense over the lease term on equity instruments are not reversed through the income statement.a straight-line basis.

 

152Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements177


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

CRITICAL JUDGEMENTS AND ACCOUNTING ESTIMATES

The preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements requires management to make judgements and accounting estimates that affect the reported amount of assets and liabilities at the date of the Consolidated Financial Statements and the reported amount of income and expenses during the reporting period. Management evaluates its judgements and accounting estimates, which are based on historical experience and on various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, on an ongoing basis. Actual results may differ from these accounting estimates under different assumptions or conditions.

In the course of preparing the Consolidated Financial Statements, no significant judgements have been made in the process of applying the accounting policies, other than those involving estimations about credit impairment losses, conduct remediation and pensions as set out below.

The following accounting estimates, as well as the judgements inherent within them, are considered important to the portrayal of the Santander UK group’s financial results and financial condition because: (i) they are highly susceptible to change from period to period as assumptions are made to calculate the estimates, and (ii) any significant difference between the estimated amounts and actual amounts could have a material impact on the Santander UK group’s future financial results and financial condition.

In calculating each accounting estimate, a range of outcomes was calculated based principally on management’s conclusions regarding the input assumptions relative to historical experience. The actual estimates were based on what management concluded to be the most probable assumptions within the range of reasonably possible assumptions.

a) Credit impairment allowance

The application of the ECL impairment methodology for calculating credit impairment allowances is highly susceptible to change from period to period. The methodology requires management to make a number of judgmental assumptions in determining the estimates. Any significant difference between the estimated amounts and actual amounts could have a material impact on the Santander UK group’s future financial results and financial condition.

Key areas of judgement in accounting estimates

The key judgements made by management in applying the ECL impairment methodology are set out below.

 

Definition of default

Forward-looking information

Probability weights

SICR

Post model adjustments.

For more on each of these key judgements, see the ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level – credit risk management’ section of the Risk review.

Sensitivity of ECL allowance

At 31 December 2018,2019, the probability-weighted ECL allowance totalled £807m,£863m (2018: £807m), of which £789m£813m (2018: £789m) related to exposures in Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre, and £18m£50m (2018: £18m) related to exposures in Corporate & Investment Banking. The ECL allowance is sensitive to the methods, assumptions and estimates underlying its calculation. For example, management could have applied different probability weights to the economic scenarios and, depending on the weights chosen, this could have a material effect on the ECL allowance. In addition, the ECL allowance for residential mortgages, in particular, is significantly affected by the HPI assumptions which determine the valuation of collateral used in the calculations.

Had management used different assumptions on probability weights and HPI, a larger or smaller ECL charge would have resulted that could have had a material impact on the Santander UK group’s reported ECL allowance and profit before tax. Sensitivities to these assumptions are set out below.

178Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

Probability weights

The amounts shown in the tables below illustrate the ECL allowances that would have arisen had management applied a 100% weighting to each economic scenario. The allowances were calculated using a stage allocation appropriate to each economic scenario presented and differs from the probability-weighted stage allocation used to determine the ECL allowance shown above. For exposures subject to individual assessment, the distribution of ECL which could reasonably be expected has also been considered, assuming no change in the number of cases subject to individual assessment, and within the context of a potential best to worst case outcome.

As described in more detail in the ‘Santander UK group level – Credit risk management’ section in the Risk review, our CIB segment uses three forward-looking economic scenarios, whereas our other segments use five scenarios. In order to present a consolidated view in a single table, the data for CIB in the table below presents the CIB Upside scenario in the Upside 2 column, the CIB downside scenario in the Downside 2 column, and interpolated data for CIB in the Upside 1 and Downside 1 columns.

 Retail Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate Centre    Upside 2
£m
     Upside 1
£m
     Base case
£m
     Downside 1
£m
     Downside 2 
£m 
 

ECL

     554      596      648      843      1,930  
                    
 Corporate & Investment Banking(1)                Upside
£m
     Base case
£m
     Downside 
£m 
 

ECL

                   8      17      27  

                                                                                                                                                            
   Weighted   Upside 2   Upside 1   Base case   Downside 1   Downside 2 

2019

  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Exposure

            

Retail Banking

   206,479    206,479    206,479    206,479    206,479    206,479 

– of which: mortgages

   178,788    178,788    178,788    178,788    178,788    178,788 

CCB

   21,855    21,855    21,855    21,855    21,855    21,855 

CIB

   13,456    13,456    13,456    13,456    13,456    13,456 

Corporate Centre

   74,532    74,532    74,532    74,532    74,532    74,532 

ECL

            

Retail Banking

   591    456    467    485    570    1,148 

– of which: mortgages

   218    122    127    137    196    660 

CCB

   210    156    169    183    219    317 

CIB

   50    19    34    48    53    58 

Corporate Centre

   12    9    10    10    13    18 
            
   %   %   %   %   %   % 

Proportion of assets in Stage 2

            

Retail Banking

   4.7    3.2    3.3    3.3    3.7    8.3 

– of which: mortgages

   4.6    3.1    3.1    3.1    3.6    8.7 

CCB

   10.0    7.4    7.4    7.4    8.5    16.3 

CIB

   2.9    1.5    1.5    1.5    1.5    1.5 

Corporate Centre

   0.2    0.1    0.1    0.1    0.2    0.3 
            

2018

  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Exposure

            

Retail Banking

   195,805    195,805    195,805    195,805    195,805    195,805 

– of which: mortgages

   169,170    169,170    169,170    169,170    169,170    169,170 

CCB

   22,835    22,835    22,835    22,835    22,835    22,835 

CIB

   17,618    17,618    17,618    17,618    17,618    17,618 

Corporate Centre

   74,690    74,690    74,690    74,690    74,690    74,690 

ECL

            

Retail Banking

   594    431    452    480    637    1,607 

– of which: mortgages

   237    121    131    137    273    1,105 

CCB

   182    115    135    157    192    302 

CIB

   18    8    12    17    22    27 

Corporate Centre

   13    8    9    11    13    21 
            
   %   %   %   %   %   % 

Proportion of assets in Stage 2

            

Retail Banking

   5.4    3.4    3.5    3.7    4.7    15.1 

– of which: mortgages

   5.6    3.4    3.6    3.7    4.9    16.5 

CCB

   5.5    3.0    3.0    3.1    4.3    10.7 

CIB

   0.8    0.4    0.4    0.4    0.4    0.4 

Corporate Centre

   0.2    0.1    0.1    0.1    0.2    0.4 

Changes to Stage 3 instruments are excluded from the disclosure because they are not specifically sensitive to changes in macroeconomic assumptions.

We have incorporated our post model adjustments into the sensitivity analysis.

 

(1)
Santander UK plc As described in more detail in the ‘Santander UK Group Level – Credit Risk Management’ section, our Corporate & Investment Banking segment uses three forward-looking economic scenarios, whereas our other segments use five scenarios. The results of the 100% weighting ECL for the Corporate & Investment Banking segment are therefore presented separately.179


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

HPI

Given the relative size of our residential mortgage portfolio, management considers that changes in HPI assumptions underpinning the calculation of the ECL allowance for residential mortgages of £237m£218m at 31 December 20182019 (2018: £237m) would have the most significant impact on the ECL allowance. The table below shows the impact on profit before tax of applying an immediate and permanent house price increase / decrease to our base case economic scenario, and assumes no changes to the staging allocation of exposures:

 

     Increase/decrease in house prices 
           +20%     +10%     -10%   -20% 
                 £m     £m   £m 

Increase/(decrease) in profit before tax

            20      12      (20   (52

LOGO

Santander UK plc153


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

                                                                                                
   Increase/decrease in house prices 
   +20%   +10%   -10%  -20% 
  Increase/(decrease) in profit before tax  £m   £m   £m  £m 

31 December 2019

   16    10    (16  (43

31 December 2018

   20    12    (20  (52

b) Provisions and contingent liabilities

Significant judgment may be required when accounting for provisions, including in determining whether a present obligation exists and in estimating the probability and amount of any outflows. These judgments are based on the specific facts available and often require specialist professional advice. There can be a wide range of possible outcomes and uncertainties, particularly in relation to legal actions, and regulatory and consumer credit matters. As a result it is often not possible to make reliable estimates of the likelihood and amount of any potential outflows.

The main areas of judgement relating to provisions and contingent liabilities are set out below. For more details, see Notes 27 and 29.

(i) PPI conduct remediation

The most critical factor in determining the level of PPI provision is the volume of claims that fall in scope for Santander UK. The uphold rate is informed by historical experience and the average cost of redress can be predicted reasonably accurately given that management is dealing with a high volume and reasonably homogeneous population. In setting the provision, management estimated the total claims that were likely to be received to the end of thetime-bar period in August 2019.

Key areas of judgement in accounting estimates

The provision mainly represents management’s best estimate of Santander UK’s future liability in respect of misselling of PPI policies and Plevin complaints. It requires significant judgement by management in determining appropriate assumptions, which includealthough the level of judgement has reduced with the passing of the FCA deadline of 29 August 2019 for PPI complaints. The key assumption in calculating the provision was the estimated number of complaints expected tothat would be received of those, the number that will be upheld and redressed (reflecting legal and regulatory responsibilities, including the determination of liability and the effect of the time bar), as well as the redress costs for each of the different populationsin respect of customers identified. These are described in more detail in the ‘PPI assumptions’ section in Note 30.with successful information requests that were still eligible to make a complaint.

Sensitivity of PPI conduct remediation provision

We made no additional provision charges for PPI conduct remediation relating to past activities and products sold recognised in 2018 (2017: £109m, 2016: £144m). The balance sheet provision amounted to £246m (2017: £356m, 2016: £457m). Detailed disclosures on the provision for PPI conduct remediation can be found in Note 30.

Had management used different assumptions, a larger or smaller provision charge would have resulted that could have had a material impact on the Santander UK group’s reported profit before tax. Detailed disclosures on the assumptions used, including sensitivities,

More details can be found in the PPI section of Note 30.27.

(ii) Other

As set outIncluded in Regulatory and other provisions in Note 30,27 is an amount in respect of £58m (2017: £nil) was charged in 2018 and arose from a systems-related historical issue identified by Santander UK,management’s best estimate of liability relating to compliance with certain requirements of the Consumer Credit Act (CCA). This provision is based on detailed reviews of relevant systems related to consumer credit business operations, supported by external legal and regulatory advice, and reflects our best estimate at 31 December 2018 of potential costsAct. It also includes an amount in respect of management’s best estimate of liability relating to a legal dispute regarding allocation of responsibility for a specific PPI portfolio of complaints. For both items, Note 29 provides disclosure relating to ongoing factual issues and reviews that could impact the identified issue. However, as detailedtiming and amount of any outflows.

In addition, Note 29 includes disclosure relating to an investigation in Note 32, these reviewsrelation to the historical involvement of Santander UK plc, Santander Financial Services plc and Cater Allen International Limited in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions. It also includes disclosure relating to certain leases in which current and former Santander UK group members were the related analysislessor that are not yet complete, such that the approach and timing to any remediation has not yet been finalised, although it is expected to commencecurrently under review by HMRC in 2019.connection with claims for tax allowances.

c) Pensions

The Santander UK group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes as described in Note 3128 and estimates their position as described in the accounting policy ‘Pensions and other post retirement benefits’.

Key areas of judgement in accounting estimates

Accounting for defined benefit pension schemes requires management to make assumptions principally about the discount rate adopted, but also about price inflation, pension increases, life expectancy and earnings growth. Management’s assumptions are based on past experience and current economic trends, which are not necessarily an indication of future experience. These are described in more detail in the ‘Actuarial assumptions’ section in Note 31.28.

Sensitivity of defined benefit pension scheme estimates

The defined benefit pension schemes which were in a net asset position at 31 December 2018 had a surplus of £842m (2017: £449m) and the defined benefit pension schemes which were in a net liability position at 31 December 2018 had a deficit of £114m (2017: £286m).

Had management used different assumptions, a larger or smaller pension remeasurement gain or loss would have resulted that could have had a material impact on the Santander UK group’s reported financial position. Detailed disclosures on the actuarial assumption sensitivities of the schemes can be found in the ‘Actuarial assumption sensitivities’ section in Note 31.28.

 

154180 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

2. SEGMENTS

Santander UK’s principal activity is financial services, mainly in the UK. The business is managed and reported on the basis of the following segments, which are strategic business units that offer different products and services, have different customers and require different technology and marketing strategies:

 

Retail Banking offers a wide range of products and financial services to individuals and small businesses through a network of branches and ATMs, as well as through telephony, digital and intermediary channels. Retail Banking includes business banking customers, small businesses with an annual turnover up to £6.5m, and Santander Consumer Finance, predominantly a vehicle finance business.

Corporate & Commercial Banking To better align reporting to the nature of the business segment following ring-fence transfers, Commercial Banking has beenre-branded as Corporate & Commercial Banking. Corporate & Commercial Banking covers multi-sector businesses with an annual turnover oftypically between £6.5m toand £500m. Corporate & Commercial BankingIt offers a wide range of productsfinancial services and financial servicessolutions provided by relationship teams that areand product specialists based in a network of regional CBCsacross the UK and through digital and telephony and digital channels.

Corporate & Investment Banking As part of a rebrand across the Banco Santander group, Global Corporate Banking (the UK segment of Santander Global Corporate Banking) has been branded as Corporate & Investment Banking. CIB services corporate clients with an annual turnover of £500m and above. CIB clients require specially tailored solutions and value-added services due to their size, complexity and sophistication. We provide these clients with products to manage currency fluctuations, protect against interest rate risk, and arrange capital markets finance and specialist trade finance solutions, as well as providing support to the rest of Santander UK’s business segments.

Corporate Centre mainly includes the treasury,non-core corporate and legacy portfolios, including Crown Dependencies.portfolios. Corporate Centre is also responsible for managing capital and funding, balance sheet composition, structure, pension and strategic liquidity risk. To enable a more targeted and strategically aligned apportionment of capital and other resources, revenues and costs incurred in Corporate Centre are allocated to the three business segments. Thenon-core corporate and legacy portfolios are beingrun-down and/or managed for value.

The segmental data below is presented in a manner consistent with the internal reporting to the committee which is responsible for allocating resources and assessing performance of the segments and has been identified as the chief operating decision maker. The segmental data is prepared on a statutory basis of accounting, in line with the accounting policies set out in Note 1. Transactions between segments are on normal commercial terms and conditions. Internal charges and internal UK transfer pricing adjustments are reflected in the results of each segment. Revenue sharing agreements are used to allocate external customer revenues to a segment on a reasonable basis. Funds are ordinarily reallocated between segments, resulting in funding cost transfers disclosed in operating income. Interest charged for these funds is based on Santander UK’s cost of wholesale funding. Interest income and interest expense have not been reported separately. The majority of segment revenues are interest income in nature and net interest income is relied on primarily to assess segment performance and to make decisions on the allocation of segment resources.

The segmental basis of presentation in this Annual Report has beenwas changed, and the prior periods restated, to report our Jersey and Isle of Man branchesshort term markets business in Corporate Centre rather than in Retail Banking as in previous years, as a result of theirCorporate & Investment Banking. This reflects the run down or transfer from Santander UK plc to ANTS in December 2018. Prior periods have not been restated for the changes in our statutory perimeter in the third quarter of 2018, following the ring-fence transfers to Banco Santander London Branch of the prohibited part of the business in 2018, as described in Note 43.part of the transition to our ring-fenced model, with the remaining permitted business forming part of our liquidity risk management function.

Results by segment

 

                                                                                                                        
2018 Retail
Banking
£m
 

Corporate &

Commercial
Banking

£m

 

Corporate &

investment
Banking

£m

 Corporate
Centre
£m
 Total
£m
 

Net interest income

 3,126  403  69  5  3,603 
    Corporate & Corporate &     
  Retail Commercial Investment Corporate   
  Banking Banking Banking Centre Total 
2019  £m £m £m £m £m 

Net interest income/(expense)

   2,876  359  63  (6 3,292 

Non-interest income/(expense)

 638  82  272  (61 931    698  78  112  (7 881 

Total operating income/(expense)

 3,764  485  341  (56 4,534    3,574  437  175  (13 4,173 
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges (1,929 (258 (262 (130 (2,579   (1,994 (264 (171 (70 (2,499

Credit impairment (losses)/releases

 (124 (23 (14 8  (153

Credit impairment losses

   (160 (37 (22 (2 (221

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

 (230 (14 (8 (5 (257   (292 (20 (17 (112 (441
Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases(1)  (354 (37 (22 3  (410

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges(1)

   (452 (57 (39 (114 (662

Profit/(loss) before tax

 1,481  190  57  (183 1,545    1,128  116  (35 (197 1,012 

Revenue from external customers

 4,421  638  386  (911 4,534    4,311  530  181  (849 4,173 

Inter-segment revenue

 (657 (153 (45 855       (737 (93 (6 836    

Total operating income/(expense)

 3,764  485  341  (56 4,534    3,574  437  175  (13 4,173 
Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income disaggregated by income type:(2)           

– Current account and debit card fees

 697  27  29     753    702  27  29     758 

– Insurance, protection and investments

 105           105    76        1  77 

– Credit cards

 85           85    86           86 

Non-banking and other fees(3)

 75  62  87  3  227    61  56  71  3  191 

Total fee and commission income

 962  89  116  3  1,170    925  83  100  4  1,112 

Fee and commission expense

 (382 (25 (14    (421   (373 (23 (17 (13 (426

Net fee and commission income

 580  64  102  3  749 

Net fee and commission income/(expense)

   552  60  83  (9 686 

Customer loans

 172,747  17,702  4,613  4,524  199,586    180,398  16,297  4,114  4,199  205,008 

Total assets(4)

 201,261  17,702  27,569  36,840  283,372    187,556  16,297  4,727  73,122  281,702 

Customer deposits

 142,065  17,606  4,853  2,791  167,315    145,050  18,234  6,101  2,331  171,716 

Total liabilities

 142,839  17,634  8,480  98,510  267,463    145,917  18,260  6,500  95,008  265,685 

Average number of staff

 20,694  1,732  1,108  111  23,645    20,832  1,796  901  41  23,570 

 

(1)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 and later are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and earlier on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this methodology change, see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44.

(2)

The disaggregation of fees and commission income as shown above is not included in reports provided to the chief operating decision maker but is provided to show the split by reportable segments.

(3)

Non-banking and other fees include mortgages, consumer finance, commitment commission, asset finance, invoice finance and trade finance.

(4)

Includes customer loans, net of credit impairment loss allowances.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 155181


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 

2017    Retail
Banking(5)
£m
   

Corporate &
Commercial
Banking

£m

   

Corporate &
Investment
Banking

£m

   Corporate
Centre(5)
£m
   Total
£m
 
      Corporate &   Corporate &         
  Retail   Commercial   Investment   Corporate     
  Banking   Banking   Banking(5)   Centre(5)   Total 

2018

  £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Net interest income

     3,270    391    74    68    3,803    3,126    403    69    5    3,603 

Non-interest income

     615    74    364    56    1,109    638    82    183    28    931 

Total operating income

     3,885    465    438    124    4,912    3,764    485    252    33    4,534 
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges     (1,856   (223   (304   (116   (2,499   (1,929   (258   (250   (142   (2,579

Credit impairment (losses)/releases(1)

     (36   (13   (174   20    (203

Credit impairment (losses)/releases

   (124   (23   (14   8    (153

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (342   (55   (11   15    (393   (230   (14   (8   (5   (257
Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases     (378   (68   (185   35    (596

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases(1)

   (354   (37   (22   3    (410

Profit/(loss) before tax

     1,651    174    (51   43    1,817    1,481    190    (20   (106   1,545 

Revenue from external customers

    

 

 

 

4,534

 

 

  

 

 

 

639

 

 

  

 

 

 

506

 

 

  

 

 

 

(767

 

  

 

 

 

4,912

 

 

Inter-segment revenue

     (649   (174   (68   891     

Total operating income

     3,885    465    438    124    4,912 

Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income disaggregated by income type:(2)

            

– Current account and debit card fees

     737    27    27        791 

– Insurance, protection and investments

     100                100 

– Credit cards

     92                92 

Non-banking and other fees(3)

     45    63    123    8    239 

Total fee and commission income

     974    90    150    8    1,222 

Fee and commission expense

     (367   (31   (17       (415

Net fee and commission income

     607    59    133    8    807 

Customer loans

     168,729    19,391    6,037    6,167    200,324 

Total assets(4)

     174,524    19,391    51,078    69,772    314,765 

Customer deposits

     143,834    17,760    4,546    9,781    175,921 

Total liabilities

     150,847    18,697    45,603    83,413    298,560 

Average number of staff

     17,194    1,240    1,006    119    19,559 
            

2016

            

Net interest income

     3,117    380    73    12    3,582 

Non-interest income

     559    76    312    266    1,213 

Total operating income

     3,676    456    385    278    4,795 
Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges     (1,785   (215   (281   (133   (2,414

Credit impairment (losses)/releases(1)

     (21   (29   (21   4    (67

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (338   (26   (11   (22   (397

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (359   (55   (32   (18   (464

Profit before tax

     1,532    186    72    127    1,917 

Revenue from external customers

     4,387    651    474    (717   4,795    4,421    638    297    (822   4,534 

Inter-segment revenue

     (711   (195   (89   995        (657   (153   (45   855     

Total operating income

     3,676    456    385    278    4,795    3,764    485    252    33    4,534 
Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income disaggregated by income type:(2)                      

– Current account and debit card fees

     697    27    23        747    697    27    29        753 

– Insurance, protection and investments

     94                94    105                105 

– Credit cards

     95                95    85                85 

Non-banking and other fees(3)

     53    57    132    10    252    75    62    87    3    227 

Total fee and commission income

     939    84    155    10    1,188    962    89    116    3    1,170 

Fee and commission expense

     (369   (31   (17   (1   (418   (382   (25   (14       (421

Net fee and commission income

     570    53    138    9    770    580    64    102    3    749 

Customer loans

     168,389    19,382    5,659    6,726    200,156    172,747    17,702    4,613    4,524    199,586 

Total assets(4)

     175,100    19,381    39,777    68,253    302,511    179,572    17,702    8,607    77,491    283,372 

Customer deposits

     143,996    16,082    4,054    8,219    172,351    142,065    17,606    4,853    2,791    167,315 

Total liabilities

     149,793    17,203    36,506    83,556    287,058    142,839    17,634    8,885    98,105    267,463 

Average number of staff

     17,424    1,435    916    88    19,863    21,215    1,732    1,083    175    24,205 
          
2017                    

Net interest income

   3,270    391    67    75    3,803 

Non-interest income

   615    74    261    159    1,109 

Total operating income

   3,885    465    328    234    4,912 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

   (1,856   (223   (292   (128   (2,499

Credit impairment (losses)/ releases(1)

   (36   (13   (174   20    (203

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

   (342   (55   (11   15    (393

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and (charges)/releases

   (378   (68   (185   35    (596

Profit/(loss) before tax

   1,651    174    (149   141    1,817 

Revenue from external customers

   4,534    639    396    (657   4,912 

Inter-segment revenue

   (649   (174   (68   891     

Total operating income

   3,885    465    328    234    4,912 

Revenue from external customers includes the following fee and commission income disaggregated by income type:(2)

          

– Current account and debit card fees

   737    27    27        791 

– Insurance, protection and investments

   100                100 

– Credit cards

   92                92 

Non-banking and other fees(3)

   45    63    123    8    239 

Total fee and commission income

   974    90    150    8    1,222 

Fee and commission expense

   (367   (31   (17       (415

Net fee and commission income

   607    59    133    8    807 

Customer loans

   168,729    19,391    6,037    6,167    200,324 

Total assets(4)

   174,524    19,391    25,368    95,482    314,765 

Customer deposits

   143,834    17,760    4,546    9,781    175,921 

Total liabilities

   150,847    18,697    24,388    104,628    298,560 

Average number of staff

   17,194    1,240    1,006    119    19,559 

 

(1)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 and later are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and earlier on an IAS 39 basis. For more on this methodology change, see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44.

(2)

The disaggregation of fees and commission income as shown above is not included in reports provided to the chief operating decision maker but is provided to show the split by reportable segments.

(3)

Non-banking and other fees include mortgages, consumer finance, commitment commission, asset finance, invoice finance and trade finance.

(4)

Includes customer loans, net of credit impairment loss allowances.

(5)

There-segmentation to reportof our Jersey and Isle of Man branches in Corporate Centre, rather than in Retail Banking,short term markets business has resulted in profit before tax of £21m£77m beingre-presented in Corporate Centre rather than Corporate & Investment Banking in 2017 (2016: £15m), as well as customer loans of £262m (2016: £248m) and customer deposits of £6,418m (2016: £5,188m)2018 (2017: £98m).

 

156182 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

3. NET INTEREST INCOME

 

                                                                        
        Group 
  2019 2018 2017 
    Group 
    2018
£m
   2017
£m
   2016
£m
   £m £m £m 

Interest and similar income:

            

Loans and advances to customers

     5,458    5,494    6,198    5,230   5,458   5,494 

Loans and advances to banks

     202    164    112    137   202   164 

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

     124    20    15    244   124   20 

Other

     282    227    142    306   282   227 

Total interest and similar income(1)

     6,066    5,905    6,467    5,917   6,066   5,905 

Interest expense and similar charges:

            

Deposits by customers

     (1,433   (1,330   (1,891   (1,540  (1,433  (1,330

Deposits by banks

     (117   (35   (18   (134  (117  (35

Repurchase agreements – non trading

     (42   (5   (38   (126  (42  (5

Debt securities in issue

     (721   (590   (771   (678  (721  (590

Subordinated liabilities

     (142   (134   (143   (137  (142  (134

Other

     (8   (8   (24   (10  (8  (8

Total interest expense and similar charges(2)

     (2,463   (2,102   (2,885   (2,625  (2,463  (2,102

Net interest income

     3,603    3,803    3,582    3,292   3,603   3,803 

 

(1)

This includes £209m£203m (2018: £209m) of interest income on financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.

(2)

This includes £298m£310m (2018: £298m) of interest expense on financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.

In 2017, interest and similar income included £66m (2016: £79m) on impaired loans.

4. NET FEE AND COMMISSION INCOME

 

                                                                  
        Group 
  2019 2018 2017 
    Group 
    2018
£m
     2017
£m
     2016
£m
   £m £m £m 

Fee and commission income:

                

Current account and debit card fees

     753      791      747    758   753   791 

Insurance, protection and investments

     105      100      94    77   105   100 

Credit cards

     85      92      95    86   85   92 

Non-banking and other fees(1)

     227      239      252    191   227   239 

Total fee and commission income

     1,170      1,222      1,188    1,112   1,170   1,222 

Total fee and commission expense

     (421     (415     (418   (426  (421  (415

Net fee and commission income

     749      807      770    686   749   807 

 

(1)

Non-banking and other fees include mortgages, consumer finance, commitment commission, asset finance, invoice finance and trade finance.

5. NET TRADING AND OTHER INCOME

 

                                                                  
        Group 
  2019 2018 2017 
    Group 
    2018
£m
     2017
£m
     2016
£m
   £m £m £m 

Net trading and funding of other items by the trading book

     245      205      75    6   245   205 

Net (losses)/gains on other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

     (6     80      253 

Net (losses)/gains on other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

     (44     (97     28 

Net losses on derivatives managed with assets/liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss

     (128     (17     (135

Net gains/(losses) on other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   19   (6  80 

Net losses on other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   (83  (44  (97

Net gains/(losses) on derivatives managed with assets/liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss

   69   (128  (17

Hedge ineffectiveness

     34      5      28    8   34   5 

Net profit on sale ofavailable-for-sale assets

         54      115      54 

Net profit on sale of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

     19            15   19  

Net income from operating lease assets

     86      44      35 

Income from operating lease assets

   124   86   44 

Other

     (24     28      44    37   (24  28 
     182      302      443    195   182   302 

Following the implementation of our ring-fencing plans in 2018, assets and liabilities held at fair value through profit or loss, including derivatives, are predominantly used to provide customers with risk management solutions, and to manage and hedge the Santander UK group’s own risks, and do not give rise to significant overall net gains/(losses) in the income statement.

‘Net trading and funding of other items by the trading book’ includes fair value losses of £42m (2018: gains of £22m, (2017:2017: losses of £27m, 2016: losses of £50m)£27m) on embedded derivatives bifurcated from certain equity index-linked deposits, as described in the derivatives accounting policy in Note 1. The embedded derivatives are economically hedged, the results of which are also included in this line item, and amounted to gains of £43m (2018: losses of £21m, (2017:2017: gains of £28m, 2016: gains of £51m)£28m). As a result, the net fair value movements recognised on the equity index-linked deposits and the related economic hedges were net gains of £1m (2017:(2018: £1m, 2016:2017: £1m).

In 2019, ‘net profit on sale of financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income’ included additional consideration of £15m in connection with the 2017 Vocalink Holdings Limited shareholding sale. In 2017, ‘Net profit on sale ofavailable-for-sale assets’ included a gain of £48m in respect of the sale of the Vocalink shares. In 2016, ‘Net profit on sale ofavailable-for-sale assets’ included the gain of £119m in respect of the sale of Visa shares.

LOGO

Santander UK plc157


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

In November 2018, pursuant to a Partnership Special Redemption Event, the Abbey National Capital Trust I 8.963%Non-cumulative Trust Preferred Securities were fully redeemed. In September 2017, as part of a capital management exercise, 91% of the 7.375% 20 YearStep-up perpetual callable subordinated notes were purchased and redeemed. In May 2016, as part of a liability management exercise, certain debt instruments were purchased pursuant to a tender offer. These had no significant impact on the income statement.Holdings Limited shareholding.

Exchange rate differences recognised in the Consolidated Income Statement on items not at fair value through profit or loss were £1,102m income (2018: £689m expense, (2017:2017: £109m expense, 2016: £4,051m expense) and are presented in the line ‘Net trading and funding of other items by the trading book.’ These are principally offset by related releases from the cash flow hedge reserve of £1,013m expense (2018: £752m income, (2017:2017: £94m income, 2016: £4,076m income) as set out in the Consolidated Statement of Comprehensive Income, which are also presented in ‘Net trading and funding of other items by the trading book’. Exchange rate differences on items measured at fair value through profit or loss are included in the line items relating to changes in fair value.

Santander UK plc183


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

In 2019, our accounting treatment for residual value risk changed. This resulted in a £24m reversal of RV provisions recognised in other income (of which £22m relates to charges taken in prior periods) which was partially offset by £7.5m accelerated depreciation of the underlying asset (prior periods: £2.3m). The net adjustment is not considered material and therefore the 2018 accounts were not restated.

6. OPERATING EXPENSES BEFORE CREDIT IMPAIRMENT LOSSES, PROVISIONS AND CHARGES

 

                                                                  
            Group   
  2019   2018   2017   
    Group 
    

2018
£m

 

   �� 

2017
£m

 

     

2016
£m

 

   £m   £m   £m   

Staff costs:

                  

Wages and salaries

     898      743      728    852    898    743   

Performance-related payments

     159      157      157    159    159    157   

Social security costs

     111      93      94    111    111    93   

Pensions costs – defined contribution plans

     67      54      52    66    67    54   

– defined benefit plans

     79      32      26    35    79    32   

Other share-based payments

     3      10      3        3    10   

Other personnel costs

     52      45      62    40    52    45   
     1,369      1,134      1,122    1,263    1,369    1,134   

Other administration expenses

     835      1,011      970    693    835    1,011   

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment

     375      354      322    543    375    354   
     2,579      2,499      2,414    2,499    2,579    2,499   

Staff costs

’Performance-related payments’ include bonuses paid in the form of cash and share awards granted under the Long-Term Incentive Plan and the Deferred shares bonus plan, as described in Note 38.35. Included in this are the Santander UK group’s equity-settled share-based payments, none of which related to option-based schemes. These are disclosed in the table below as ‘Share awards’. Performance-related payments above include amounts related to deferred performance awards as follows:

 

  Costs recognised in 2018  Costs expected to be recognised in 2019 or later
  

Arising from

awards in

    current year

£m

  

    Arising from

awards in

prior year

£m

 

        Total 

£m 

  

    Arising from

awards in

current year

£m

 

    Arising from

awards in

prior year

£m

  

        Total 

£m 

 

 

Cash

  4   8   12    10   10   20  

Shares

  3   10   13    8   9   17  
   7   18   25    18   19   37  

 

The following table shows the amount of bonus awarded to employees for the performance year 2018. In the case of deferred cash and share awards, the final amount paid to an employee is influenced by forfeiture provisions and any performance conditions to which these awards are subject. The deferred share award amount is based on the fair value of these awards at the date of grant.

 

 

      Expenses charged in the year          Expenses deferred to future periods      Total 
  

2018

£m

  

2017     

£m      

 

2018

£m

  

2017     

£m      

 

          2018

£m

  

        2017

£m

 

 

Cash award – not deferred

  123   116         123   116 

                     – deferred

  12   13   20   17   32   30 

Share awards – not deferred

  11   12         11   12 

                        – deferred

  13   16   17   18   30   34 

Total discretionary bonus

  159   157    37   35    196   192 
   Costs recognised in 2019      Costs expected to be recognised in 2020 or later 
           Arising from           Arising from                  Arising from           Arising from     
   awards in   awards in          awards in   awards in     
   current year   prior year                   Total      current year   prior year                   Total  
   £m   £m   £m      £m   £m   £m  

Cash

   3    7    10      7    10    17  

Shares

   3    6    9       6    9    15  
    6    13    19       13    19    32  

The following table shows the amount of bonus awarded to employees for the performance year 2019. In the case of deferred cash and share awards, the final amount paid to an employee is influenced by forfeiture provisions and any performance conditions to which these awards are subject. The deferred share award amount is based on the fair value of these awards at the date of grant.

   Expenses charged in the year            Expenses deferred to future periods            Total 
                   2019                   2018                       2019                   2018                       2019                   2018  
   £m   £m       £m   £m       £m   £m  

Cash award – not deferred

   130    123                130    123  

                     – deferred

   10    12      17    20      27    32  

Shares award – not deferred

   10    11                10    11  

                        – deferred

   9    13         15    17         24    30  

Total discretionary bonus

   159    159         32    37         191    196  

On 26 October 2018, the High Court handed down a judgement concluding that defined benefit schemes should equalise pension benefits for men and women in relation to guaranteed minimum pension (GMP),GMP and concluded on the methods that were appropriate. The estimated increase in liabilities at the date of the judgement was £40m and iswas based on a number of assumptions and the actual impact may be different. This has beenwas reflected in ‘Pensions costs – defined benefit plans’the income statement and in the closing net accounting surplus of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme.Scheme in 2018. The allowance included in the Scheme liabilities at 31 December 2019 increased by £5m to £45m (2018: £40m) to reflect the latest assumptions. This change was recognised in other comprehensive income. We continue to await implementation guidance on the judgement from the UK Government and HMRC.

‘Other share-based payments’ consist of options granted under the Employee Sharesave scheme which comprise the Santander UK group’s cash-settled share-based payments. For more, see Note 38.35.

The average number of full-time equivalent staff was 23,645 (2017: 19,559, 2016: 19,863). For the Company, the average number of full-time equivalent staff was 22,745 (2017: 17,759)23,570 (2018: 24,205, 2017: 19,559). The increase in staff numbers in 2018 reflected Santander UK plc’s acquisition of Santander ServicesUK Operations Ltd (formerly Geoban UK Ltd, a subsidiary of Geoban SA) and Santander UK Technology Ltd (formerly Isban UK Ltd, a subsidiary of Ingenieria de Software Bancario SL).

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment

In 2019, depreciation, amortisation and impairment was impacted by operating lease depreciation of £103m (2018: £63m) on operating lease assets (where the Santander UK group is the lessor) with a net book value of £574m at 31 December 2019 (2018: £470m). It was also impacted by depreciation of £60m onright-of-use assets with a net book value of £152m at 31 December 2019, following the adoption of IFRS 16 on 1 January 2018. Following the acquisition, the costs relating to the staff associated with these businesses are now recognised as staff costs. In 2017 and earlier years, the equivalent costs were included in other administrative expenses. For more details, see Note 21.

Depreciation, amortisation and impairment2019.

No impairments were charged in 2018. In 2017, an impairment charge of £32m was recognised that primarily related to capitalised software costs for a credit risk management system, part of which was no longer in use.

 

158184 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

7. AUDIT AND OTHER SERVICES

 

                                                                  
            Group 
  2019   2018   2017 
    Group 
        2018
£m
         2017
£m
         2016
£m
   £m   £m   £m 

Audit fees:

                  
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for the audit of the Santander UK group’s annual accounts     7.2      7.4      4.6    8.0    7.2    7.4 
Fees payable to the Company’s auditor and its associates for other services to the Santander UK group:                  

– Audit of the Santander UK group’s subsidiaries

     1.1      1.4      1.1    1.3    1.1    1.4 

Total audit fees(1)

     8.3      8.8      5.7    9.3    8.3    8.8 

Non-audit fees:

                  

Audit-related assurance services(2)

     0.7      0.7      0.6    0.8    0.7    0.7 

Taxation compliance services

                 0.1 

Other assurance services

     0.1      0.1          0.2    0.1    0.1 

Othernon-audit services

     1.0      0.4      1.9    0.2    1.0    0.4 

Totalnon-audit fees

     1.8      1.2      2.6    1.2    1.8    1.2 

 

(1)

20182019 audit fees included £nil (2017: £0.6m)£0.1m (2018: £nil) which related to the prior year.

(2)

20182019 audit-related assurance services included £0.1m (2017:(2018: £0.1m) which related to the prior year.

Audit-related assurance services relate tomainly comprises services performed in connection with review of the statutory and regulatory filingsinterim financial information of the Company and its associates. reporting to the Company’s UK regulators.

Of this category,the totalnon-audit fees, £0.6m (2018: £0.1m, (2017: £0.1m, 2016:2017: £0.1m) accords with the definition of ‘Audit fees’“Audit Fees” per US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC) guidance. The remainingguidance, £0.4m (2018: £0.6m, (2017: £0.6m, 2016:2017: £0.6m) accords with the definition of “Audit related fees” per that guidance and £0.2m (2018: £1.1m, 2017: £0.5m) accords with the definition of ‘Audit-related fees’“All other fees” per that guidance and relates to services performed in connection with securitisation, debt issuance and related work and reporting to prudential and conduct regulators.

Taxation compliance services accord with the SEC definition of ‘Tax fees’ and relate to compliance services performed in respect of US tax returns and other similar tax compliance services.

Other assurance services and othernon-audit services accord with the SEC definition of ‘All other fees’.guidance.

In 2018,2019, the Company’s auditors also earned no fees of(2018: £150,000, (2017:2017: £45,000) payable by entities outside the Santander UK group for the review of the financial position of corporate and other borrowers.

8. CREDIT IMPAIRMENT LOSSES AND PROVISIONS

 

     Group 
         2018
£m
       2017
£m
       2016
£m
 

Credit impairment losses:

        

Loans and advances to customers (See Note 14)

     189    257    132 

Recoveries of loans and advances, net of collection costs (See Note 14)

     (42   (54   (65

Off-balance sheet exposures (See Note 30)

     6           
      153    203    67 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges (excludingoff-balance sheet credit exposures) (See Note 30)

     257    385    397 

Provisions for RV and voluntary termination (See Note 14)

         8     
      257    393    397 
      410    596    464 
                                                                  
           Group 
   2019  2018  2017 
   £m  £m  £m 

Credit impairment losses:(1)

    

Loans and advances to customers

   239   189   257 

Recoveries of loans and advances, net of collection costs

   (40  (42  (54

Off-balance sheet exposures (See Note 27)

   22   6     
    221   153   203 

Provisions for other liabilities and charges (excludingoff-balance sheet credit exposures) (See Note 27)

   435   257   385 

Provisions for RV and voluntary termination

   6      8 
    441   257   393 
    662   410   596 

(1)

Credit impairment losses for 2018 and later are calculated on an IFRS 9 basis and for 2017 and earlier on an IAS 39 basis.

The credit impairment loss allowance requirements introduced by IFRS 9 mandated a change from recognising impairment losses on an incurred loss basis (as reflected in 2017) to an expected credit loss (ECL) basis (as reflected in 2018). For more on this change in methodology, see the IFRS 9 accounting policy changes in Note 1In 2019 and the IFRS 9 transition disclosures in Note 44. There2018 there were no material credit impairment losses on loans and advances to banks,non-trading reverse repurchase agreements, other financial assets at amortised cost and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 159185


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

 

9. TAXATION

 

                                                                  
        Group 
  2019 2018(1) 2017(1) 
    Group 
                2018
£m
               2017
£m
               2016
£m
   £m £m £m 

Current tax:

            

UK corporation tax on profit for the year

     450    556    611    265   408   510 

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (20   (27   (13   (25  (20  (27

Total current tax

     430    529    598    240   388   483 

Deferred tax:

            

Charge/(credit) for the year

     16    23    (11

Charge for the year

   46   16   23 

Adjustments in respect of prior years

     (5   9    11    (7  (5  9 

Total deferred tax

     11    32        39   11   32 

Tax on profit

     441    561    598    279   399   515 

(1)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

The standard rate of UK corporation tax was 27% for banking entities and 19% fornon-banking entities (2017:(2018: 27% for banking entities and 19% fornon-banking entities; 2017: 27.25% for banking entities and 19.25% fornon-banking entities) following the introduction of an 8% surcharge to be applied to banking companies from 1 January 2016. Taxation for other jurisdictions is calculated at the rates prevailing in the relevant jurisdictions. The Finance (No.2) Act 2015 introduced reductions in the corporation tax rate from 20% to 19% in 2017 and 18% by 2020. The Finance Act 2016 introduced a further reduction in the standard rate of corporation tax rate to 17% from 2020. The effects of the changes in tax rates are included in the deferred tax balances at both 31 December 20182019 and 2017.2018.

The Santander UK group’s effective tax rate for 2018,2019, based on profit before tax, was 28.5% (2017: 30.9%27.6% (2018: 25.8%, 2016: 31.2%2017: 28.3%). The tax on profit before tax differs from the theoretical amount that would arise using the basic corporation tax rate of the Company as follows:

 

                                                                  
        Group 
  2019 2018(1) 2017(1) 
    Group 
                2018
£m
               2017
£m
               2016
£m
   £m £m £m 

Profit before tax

     1,545    1,817    1,917    1,012   1,545   1,817 

Tax calculated at a tax rate of 19% (2017: 19.25%, 2016: 20.00%)

     294    350    384 

Tax calculated at a tax rate of 19% (2018: 19%, 2017: 19.25%)

   192   294   350 

Bank surcharge on profits

     109    132    134    65   109   132 

Non-deductible preference dividends paid

     8    9    8    8   8   9 

Non-deductible UK Bank Levy

     20    25    30    24   20   25 

Non-deductible conduct remediation, fines and penalties

     6    35    39    44   6   35 

Othernon-deductible costs andnon-taxable income

     30    30    7    31   30   30 

Effect of change in tax rate on deferred tax provision

     (1   (2   (2   (14  (1  (2

Tax relief on dividends in respect of other equity instruments

   (39  (42  (46

Adjustment to prior year provisions

     (25   (18   (2   (32  (25  (18

Tax charge

     441    561    598    279   399   515 

(1)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

The decreaseincrease in effective tax rate from 20172018 to 20182019 was largely due to the reduction in the statutory tax rate, reductions in the bank levy, the reducedincreased impact ofnon-deductible conduct remediation, fines and penalties and also the effectnet of releases in accruals for prior periods. It is anticipated that the Santander UK group’s effective tax rate in future periods will continue to be impacted by the 8% surcharge, the level of anynon-deductible conduct remediation, fines and penalties, changes to the cost of the Bank Levy and reductions in the statutory rate as noted above. In addition, the effects of amendments to IAS 12, in accordance with the IASB’s Annual Improvements to IFRS Standards 2015-2017 Cycle, are expected to lead to a reduction in the effective tax rate where the tax relief on coupons in respect of AT1 capital securities would be recognised in the income statement rather than in equity. The adjustment to prior year provisions in 2019 and 2018 principally related to the reassessment of prior year tax provision estimates following the filing of relevant tax returns. In 2017returns and 2016, it also related to the resolution of certain legacy matters with tax authorities.

Current tax assets and liabilities

Movements in current tax assets and liabilities during the year were as follows:

 

                                            
     Group 
  2019 2018(1) 
    Group   
    

            2018 

£m 

    

            2017  

£m  

   £m £m 

Assets

    –      –      153    

Liabilities

    (3)     (54)        (3

At 1 January

    (3)     (54)     153   (3

Income statement charge

    (430)     (529)     (240  (388

Other comprehensive income credit/(charge)

    76      44   

Other comprehensive income (charge)/credit

   (4  34 

Corporate income tax paid

    391      484      292   391 

Other movements

    119      52      (1  119 
    153      (3)     200   153 

Assets

    153      –      200   153 

Liabilities

    –      (3)         

At 31 December

    153      (3)     200   153 

(1)

Adjusted to reflect the amendment to IAS 12, as described in Note 1.

The amount of corporation income tax paid differs from the tax charge for the period as a result of the timing of payments due to the tax authorities together with the effects of movements in deferred tax, adjustments to prior period current tax provisions and current tax recognised directly in other comprehensive income. Other movements in 2018 primarily arose as part ofdue to the transfer of subsidiaries to fellow subsidiaries of Banco Santander SA outside of the Santander UK Groupgroup as part of the move to a ring-fence structure, as detailed in Note 43.our ring-fencing plans.

Santander UK proactively engages with HM Revenue & Customs to resolve tax matters relating to prior years. The accounting policy for recognising provisions for such matters are described in Note 1. It is not expected that there will be any material movement in such provisions within the next 12 months. Santander UK adopted the Code of Practice on Taxation for Banks in 2010.

 

160186 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

Deferred tax

The table below shows the deferred tax assets and liabilities including the movement in the deferred tax account during the year. Deferred tax balances are presented in the balance sheet after offsetting assets and liabilities where the Santander UK group and Company has the legal right to offset and intends to settle on a net basis.

 

 Group 
                          Group 
 

Fair value of

financial

instruments

£m

 

Pension

remeasurement

£m

 

Cash flow

hedges

£m

 

Available-

for-sale

£m

 

Fair value

reserve

£m

 

Tax losses

carried

forward

£m

 

Accelerated

tax

depreciation

£m

 

Other

temporary

differences

£m

 

Total

£m

 
  Fair value of         Tax losses   Other   
  financial Pension Cash flow Available- Fair value carried Accelerated tax temporary   
  instruments remeasurement hedges for-sale reserve forward depreciation differences Total 
  £m £m £m £m £m £m £m £m £m 

At 1 January 2019

   (51 (183 (43  (13 20  (6 53  (223

Income statement (charge)/credit

   (1 (44        (7 23  (10 (39

Transfers/reclassifications

        22   5        (27   

Credited/(charged) to other comprehensive income

     131  (37            19  113 

At 31 December 2019

   (52 (96 (58   (8 13  17  35  (149
   

At 31 December 2017

 (41 (41 3  (26  25  (4 (4 (88   (41  (41  3   (26   25   (4  (4  (88

Adoption of IFRS 9 (see Note 1)

          26  (26       68  68 

Adoption of IFRS 9

            26   (26        68   68 

At 1 January 2018

 (41 (41 3   (26 25  (4 64  (20   (41  (41  3    (26  25   (4  64   (20

Income statement (charge)/credit

 (10 (24        (5    28  (11   (10  (24         (5     28   (11

Transfers/reclassifications

                 (2 (18 (20                   (2  (18  (20
Credited/(charged) to other comprehensive income    (118 (46   13        (21 (172      (118  (46    13         (21  (172

At 31 December 2018

 (51 (183 (43   (13 20  (6 53  (223   (51  (183  (43    (13  20   (6  53   (223
 

At 1 January 2017

  (31  (35  (50  (27   5   (5  15   (128

Income statement (charge)/credit

  (10  (32         20   1   (11  (32

Transfers/reclassifications

           7          (7   
Credited/(charged) to other comprehensive income     26   53   (6          (1  72 

At 31 December 2017

  (41  (41  3   (26    25   (4  (4  (88

The deferred tax assets and liabilities above have been recognised in both the Company and the Santander UK group on the basis that sufficient future taxable profits are forecast within the foreseeable future, in excess of the profits arising from the reversal of existing taxable temporary differences, to allow for the utilisation of the assets as they reverse. Based on the conditions at the balance sheet date, management determined that a reasonably possible change in any of the key assumptions underlying the estimated future taxable profits in the Santander UK group’s five-year plan (described in Note 22)20) would not cause a reduction in the deferred tax assets recognised. At 31 December 2018, both2019, the Santander UK group and the Company had a recognised deferred tax asset in respect of UK capital losses carried forward of £17m (2017: £21m)£11m (2018: £17m) included within tax losses carried forward. There are no unrecognised deferred tax assets on capital losses carried forward (2017:(2018: £nil).

InAs part of the November 2018 budget,election campaign, the UK government proposed changesindicated that could restrictit would look to reverse or defer the usefuture tax rate reduction due to apply from 1 April 2020. The next UK Budget scheduled for 11 March 2020 is likely to clarify the position and give an indication of capital losses. Basedthe possible impact on the changes indicated,deferred tax position. It is estimated that the effect could increase the Santander UK group does not believe that such changes would have a material impact on the recognition ofGroup’s deferred tax assets on such capital losses once enacted.

In addition, the Santander UK group had net operating losses carried forward in the US of $nil (2017: $76m) as such losses expired on the closure of the ANTS US Branch. A deferred tax asset was not previously recognised on these losses as the Santander UK group did not anticipate being ableliability by up to offset the losses against future profits or gains in order to realise any economic benefit in the foreseeable future.£12m.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 161187


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

 

10. DIVIDENDS ON ORDINARY SHARES

Dividends on ordinary shares declared and paid duringin the year were as follows:

 

  Group    Group 
  2018
          Pence per
share
  2017
          Pence per
share
  2016
          Pence per
share
    

          2018

£m

  

          2017

£m

  

          2016

£m

 

In respect of current year – first interim

  0.81   1.04   1.02    250   323   317 

– second interim

  2.15   0.74   0.89    668   230   276 

– third interim

  0.71           221       
   3.67   1.78   1.91     1,139   553   593 

 

In 2018, and in addition to the dividends of £250m and £221m that were made as part of our policy to pay 50% of recurring earnings, we also paid a dividend of £668m that related to the ring-fencing transfers to Banco Santander London Branch. For more on our ring-fencing implementation, see Note 43.

 

11. TRADING ASSETS

 

 

 

                Group 
                

    2018

£m

  

    2017

£m

 

Securities purchased under resale agreements

          8,870 

Debt securities

          5,156 

Equity securities

          9,662 

Cash collateral associated with trading balances

          6,156 

Short-term loans

                       711 
                        30,555 
                                                                                                                                                
           Group           Group 
   2019   2018   2017             
   Pence per   Pence per   Pence per   2019   2018   2017 
   share   share   share   £m   £m   £m 

In respect of current year – first interim

   0.53    0.81    1.04    164    250    323 

                                          – second interim

   0.49    2.15    0.74    151    668    230 

                                          – third interim

       0.71            221     
    1.02    3.67    1.78    315    1,139    553 

In 2018, in addition to the dividends of £250m and £221m that were made as part of our ring-fencing plans, the trading business in the Santander UK group was run down as the prohibited elements movedpolicy to pay 50% of recurring earnings, we also paid a dividend of £668m that related to the ring-fencing transfers to Banco Santander, London Branch. For more on our ring-fence implementation, see Note 43. In 2017, a significant portion of the debt and equity securities were held in our eligible liquidity pool. They consisted mainly of government bonds and quoted stocks. Detailed disclosures can be found in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section of the Risk review.

162    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

12.11. DERIVATIVE FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

a) Use of derivatives

The Santander UK group undertakes derivative activities primarily to provide customers with risk management solutions and to manage and hedge the Santander UK group’s own risks. In 2018, as part of our ring-fencing implementation, we transferred the majority of our derivatives held for trading to the Banco Santander London Branch as these constituted transactions that Santander UK plc would not be able to retain as a ring-fenced bank. For more on our ring-fence implementation, see Note 43.

The Santander UK group’s derivative activities do not give rise to significant open positions in portfolios of derivatives. Any residual position is managed to ensure that it remains within acceptable risk levels, with matching transactions being used to achieve this where necessary. When entering into derivatives, the Santander UK group employs the same credit risk management procedures to assess and approve potential credit exposures that are used for traditional lending.

For information on how the Santander UK group is managing the transition to alternative benchmark interest rates, see ‘Managing LIBOR transition’ in the Banking market risk section of the Risk review.

b) Analysis of derivatives

The table below includes the notional amounts in the tables below indicate the nominal value of transactions outstanding at the balance sheet date; they do not represent actual exposures.

 

 Group 
 2018   2017                           Group 
       Fair value        Fair value 
 Notional amount
£m
     Assets
£m
     Liabilities
£m
 Notional amount
£m
     Assets
£m
     Liabilities
£m
           2019              2018 

Derivatives held for trading

                   
         Fair value             Fair value 
  Notional           Notional       
          amount                 Assets         Liabilities                 amount                 Assets         Liabilities 
  £m   £m £m     £m   £m £m 

Derivatives held for trading:

           

Exchange rate contracts

 13,830      454      351    144,160      2,559      4,130    14,149    134  200     13,830    454   351 

Interest rate contracts

 79,038      1,421      1,105    863,151      22,091      21,619    46,564    718  315     79,038    1,421   1,105 

Equity and credit contracts

 2,762      251      168     19,814      888      693    2,474    283  160      2,762    251   168 

Total derivatives held for trading

 95,630      2,126      1,624     1,027,125      25,538      26,442    63,187    1,135  675      95,630    2,126   1,624 

Derivatives held for hedging

                                            

Designated as fair value hedges:

                              

Exchange rate contracts

 3,010      357          2,641      312      6    1,482    166  2     3,010    357    

Interest rate contracts

 86,422      1,065      1,315    59,610      1,272      1,470    94,550    1,022  1,488      86,422    1,065   1,315 

Equity derivative contracts

                   16            4 
 89,432      1,422      1,315     62,267      1,584      1,480    96,032    1,188  1,490      89,432    1,422   1,315 

Designated as cash flow hedges:

                              

Exchange rate contracts

 33,901      3,537      200    23,117      3,206      55    28,502    2,023  462     33,901    3,537   200 

Interest rate contracts

 18,808      46      102    12,884      84      115    17,451    184  35     18,808    46   102 

Equity derivative contracts

                   26      9                               
 52,709      3,583      302     36,027      3,299      170    45,953    2,207  497      52,709    3,583   302 

Total derivatives held for hedging

 142,141      5,005      1,617     98,294      4,883      1,650    141,985    3,395  1,987      142,141    5,005   1,617 

Derivative netting(1)

       (1,872     (1,872         (10,479     (10,479      (1,214 (1,214        (1,872  (1,872

Total derivatives

 237,771      5,259      1,369     1,125,419      19,942      17,613    205,172    3,316  1,448      237,771    5,259   1,369 

 

(1)

Derivative netting excludes the effect of cash collateral, which is offset against the gross derivative position. The amount of cash collateral received that had been offset against the gross derivative assets was £9m (2017: £333m)£222m (2018: £9m) and the amount of cash collateral paid that had been offset against the gross derivative liabilities was £354m (2017: £706m)£629m (2018: £354m).

188Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

For information about the impact of netting arrangements on derivative assets and liabilities in the table above, see Note 42.39.

LOGO

Santander UK plc163


Annual Report 2018 | Financial Statements

The reduction in the notional value of interest rate derivatives held for trading reflected the completion of a series of derivative trade compressions to reduce our gross LIBOR exposure.

The table below analyses the notional and fair values of derivatives by trading and settlement method.

 

  Notional                         
      Traded over the counter           Asset       Liability 
  Traded on   Settled   Not settled by           Traded on           Traded on     
        recognised   by central   central                 recognised       Traded over         recognised   Traded over 
  exchanges   counterparties   counterparties               Total       exchanges   the counter       exchanges   the counter 
2019  £m   £m   £m   £m       £m   £m       £m   £m 

Exchange rate contracts

           44,133    44,133          2,324          663 

Interest rate contracts

       131,538    27,027    158,565          709          625 

Equity and credit contracts

           2,474    2,474           283           160 
  Notional                        131,538    73,634    205,172           3,316           1,448 
      Traded over the counter       Asset   Liability 
2018  

Traded on

recognised

exchanges

£m

   

Settled

by central

counterparties

£m

   

Not settled

by central

counterparties

£m

   

Total

£m

   

Traded on

recognised

exchanges

£m

   

Traded over

the counter

£m

   

Traded on

recognised

exchanges

£m

   Traded over
the counter
£m
                               

Exchange rate contracts

           50,741    50,741        4,349        551            50,741    50,741          4,349          551 

Interest rate contracts

       154,106    30,162    184,268        659        650        154,106    30,162    184,268          659          650 

Equity and credit contracts

           2,762    2,762        251        168            2,762    2,762           251           168 
       154,106    83,665    237,771        5,259        1,369        154,106    83,665    237,771           5,259           1,369 

2017

                        

Exchange rate contracts

           169,918    169,918        6,077        4,191 

Interest rate contracts

   71,618    626,600    237,427    935,645        12,968        12,725 

Equity and credit contracts

   30        19,826    19,856        897    1    696 
   71,648    626,600    427,171    1,125,419        19,942    1    17,612 

c) Analysis of derivatives designated as hedges

The Santander UK group applies hedge accounting on both a fair value and cash flow basis depending on the nature of the underlying exposure. We establish the hedge ratio by matching the notional of the derivative with the underlying position being hedged. Only the designated risk is hedged and therefore other risks, such as credit risk are managed but not hedged. For interest rate hedges, the designated hedged risk is determined with reference to the underlying benchmark rate.

Fair value hedges

Portfolio hedges of interest rate risk

Santander UK holds various portfolios of fixed rate assets and liabilities which expose it to changes in fair value due to movements in market interest rates. We manage these exposures by entering into interest rate swaps. Each portfolio contains assets or liabilities that are similar in nature and share the risk exposure that is designated as being hedged.

The interest rate risk component is the change in fair value of fixed rate instruments for changes in the designated benchmark rate. Such changes are usually the largest component of the overall change in fair value. Separate hedges are maintained for each underlying currency. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing changes in fair value of the hedged item attributable to changes in the designated benchmark interest rate, with changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps.

The following table shows theSantander UK group is exposed to changes in fair value of financial assets and liabilities due to movements in market interest rates and / or FX rates. These exposures arise from holding either fixed rate instruments hedged, their underlyingassets and liabilities ornon-GBP denominated assets and liabilities. These exposures are managed by entering into interest rate swaps and cross currency and the respective hedged benchmark rates:swaps.

 

  InstrumentSantander UK plc   Currency  Designated benchmark instrument rate

Fixed rate mortgages

GBP3-month LIBOR

Fixed rate loans

GBP, EUR3-month LIBOR & EURIBOR

Reverse repurchase agreements

GBP, USDSONIA, USD Fed Funds

Investment assets

GBP, EUR, USDSONIA, 3-month LIBOR, Eonia & USD Fed Funds            

Fixed rate savings

GBP, USD3-month LIBOR, SONIA189


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

Micro hedges of interest rate risk and foreign currency risk

Santander UK accesses international markets to obtain funding, issuing fixed rate debt in its functional currency and other currencies. We are therefore exposed to changes in fair value due to changes in market interest rates and/or foreign exchange rates, principally in USD and EUR, which we mitigate through the use of receive fixed/pay floating rate interest rate swaps and/or receive fixed/pay floating rate cross currency swaps.

The interest rate risk component is the change in fair value of the fixed rate debt due to changes in the benchmark LIBOR rate. The foreign exchange component is the change in the fair value of the fixed rate debt issuance due to changes in foreign exchange rates prevailing from the time of execution. Effectiveness is assessed by using linear regression techniques to compare changes in the fair value of the debt caused by changes in the benchmark interest rate and foreign exchange rates, with changes in the fair value of the interest rate swaps and/or cross currency swaps.

Cashflow hedges

Hedges of interest rate risk

Santander UK manages its exposure to the variability in cash flows of floating rate assets and liabilities attributable to movements in market interest rates by entering into interest rate swaps. The interest rate risk component is determined with reference to the underlying benchmark rate attributable to the floating rates asset or liability. Designated benchmark rates referenced are currently SONIA or LIBOR. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing changes in the fair value of the interest rate swap with changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to the hedged risk, applying a hypothetical derivative method using linear regression techniques.

Hedges of foreign currency risk

As Santander UK obtains funding in international markets, we assume significant foreign currency risk exposure, mainly in USD and EUR. In addition, the Santander UK group also holds debt securities for liquidity purposes which assumes foreign currency exposure, principally in JPY.

Santander UK manages the exposures to the variability in cash flows of foreign currency denominated assets and liabilities to movements in foreign exchange rates by entering into either foreign exchange contracts (spot, forward and swaps) or cross currency swaps. These instruments are entered into to match the cash flow profile and maturity of the estimated interest and principal repayments of the hedged item.

The foreign currency risk component is the change in cash flows of the foreign currency debt arising from changes in the relevant foreign currency forward exchange rate. Such changes constitute a significant component of the overall changes in cash flows of the instrument. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing changes in the fair value of the cross currency or foreign exchange swaps with changes in the fair value of the hedged debt attributable to the hedged risk applying a hypothetical derivative method using linear regression techniques.

LIBOR Reform

As described above, the Santander UK group designates both fair value and cash flow hedges with reference to the underlying benchmark rate. Where these benchmark rates are subject to uncertainty as a result of LIBOR reform (as explained in Note 1) we have early adopted the amendments to IAS 39 which provide temporary relief from applying specific hedge accounting requirements to those affected hedge relationships. Hedge relationships that are impacted comprise fair value hedges where fixed rate exposures are hedged to a benchmark rate subject to reform and cash flow hedges, where future hedged cash flows are benchmarked to interest rates impacted by the reform. It is assumed that the cash flows will remain highly probable and that the hedge relationship will remain highly effective. The table below shows the notional value of hedging instruments by benchmark interest rate impacted by the reform.

                  Group  
   GBP   USD        
           LIBOR           LIBOR           Other           Total  
  2019  £m   £m   £m   £m  

Total notional value of hedging instruments:

        

– Cash flow hedges

   23,396    8,001       31,397  

– Fair value hedges

   53,244    5,070    1,187   59,501  
    76,640    13,071    1,187   90,898  

Maturing after 31 December 2021:

        

– Cash flow hedges

   11,773    2,644       14,417  

– Fair value hedges

   16,455    1,897    740   19,092  
    28,228    4,541    740   33,509  

 

164190 Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

Equity risk on cash settled share-based transactions

Santander Equity Investments Limited (SEIL) offers employees the chance to buy shares in Banco Santander SA at a discount under Sharesave schemes. This exposes Santander UK to equity price risk. The equity risk is managed by purchasing share options which allow Santander UK to buy shares at a fixed price. These instruments are entered into to match the amount of employee share options expected to be exercised.

The equity price risk is the change in cash flows arising from the change in share price over time. Santander UK established the hedge ratio by matching the notional of the derivative with the notional of the employee share options being hedged. Effectiveness is assessed by comparing the changes in fair value of the share options with changes in the fair value of the employee share options by using a hypothetical derivative method.

Following the acquisition of SEIL by Santander UK Group Holdings plc in 2018, the Santander UK plc group is no longer exposed to equity risk on cash settled share-based transactions.

Possible sources of hedge ineffectiveness

Possible sources of hedge ineffectiveness for each type of hedge relationship are set out below:

   

Fair value hedges

 

Cash flow hedges

 Possible sources of ineffectiveness
Strategic report   

Portfolio hedges

of interest

rate risk

Governance
 

    Micro hedges of

Interest rate

and foreign

currency risk

 

    Micro hedges

of interest

rate risk

Risk review
 

    Micro hedges

of foreign

currency risk

 

    Equity risk on 

cash settled 

share-based 

transactions 

Financial review
Hedging derivatives with anon-zero fair value at date of initial designationFinancial statements   Shareholder information
 ● 
Differences in discounting between hedged item and hedging instrument as cash collateralised swaps discount using Overnight Indexed Swaps (OIS) discount curves, not applied to underlying hedged item      
Counterparty credit risk impacts fair value of derivative but not hedged item        
Differences in expected and actual volume of prepayments      
Differences in discounting between hedged item and hedging instrument as cash collateralised cross currency swaps discount using OIS discount curves, not applied to underlying hedged item  

Notes to the

financial statements

 
Differences in timing of cash flows between hedged item and hedging instrument● 
Differences in basis of cash flows between hedged items and hedging instruments
Changes in the expected number of Sharesave options to be exercised● 

LOGO

Santander UK plc165


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements 

 

Hedge effectiveness measurement and possible sources of hedge ineffectiveness

Hedge effectiveness is assessed by using either dollar offset or linear regression techniques to compare changes in the fair value of the hedged item attributable to changes in the designated hedged risk and the hedging instrument. For cash flow hedges, a hypothetical derivative method is used to model the cash flows of the hedged item.

Possible sources of hedge ineffectiveness arise from differences in discounting and timing of cash flows between the hedged item and hedging instrument, basis risk, hedging derivatives with anon-zero fair value upon designation and counterparty credit risk.

Maturity profile and average price/rate of hedging instruments

The following table sets out the maturity profile and average price/rate of the hedging instruments used in the Santander UK group’s hedging strategies:

 

    Group  
  2018   Hedging Instruments Less than one
month
  Later than one
    month and not later
than three months
  Later than
three months
and not later
    than one year
 Later than
one year
and not later
    than five years
         Later than
five years
              Total  

 

Fair value hedges:

       

Interest rate risk

 Interest rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)  6,162   8,411  14,611 39,508  15,652  84,344  
 Average fixed interest rate – GBP (%)  0.63%   0.79%  1.06% 1.59%  2.85%  
 Average fixed interest rate – EUR (%)  (0.22)%   0.67%  0.91% 1.09%  1.26%  
  Average fixed interest rate – USD (%)  1.51%   1.31%  1.34% 2.68%  2.18%   

Interest rate/foreign

 Exchange rate contracts:      

currency (FX) risk

 – Nominal amount (£m)  392   1,295   1,101  222  3,010  
 Interest rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)  392   1,295   90  301  2,078  
 Average GBP - EUR exchange rate        1.1827  1.1682  
 Average GBP - USD exchange rate  1.5800   1.3325   1.5110    
 Average fixed interest rate – EUR (%)        3.89%  3.92%  
  Average fixed interest rate – USD (%)  3.62%   2.50%   2.38%  7.95%   

Cash flow hedges:

       

Interest rate risk

 Interest rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)     1,715  1,991 3,100    6,806  
  Average fixed interest rate – GBP (%)     0.73%  0.73% 1.33%     

FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)  3,916   2,552  2,961 5,596    15,025  
 Interest rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)        785    785  
 Average GBP – JPY exchange rate     147.2149  146.3718 145.3191    
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate       1.2803 1.1349    
  Average GBP – USD exchange rate  1.3035   1.3067  1.3099 1.3049     

Interest rate/FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)       1,773 11,481  5,622  18,876  
 Interest rate contracts:      
 – Nominal amount (£m)       784 7,562  2,871  11,217  
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate       1.2523 1.2707  1.2167  
 Average GBP – USD exchange rate       1.6333 1.5447  1.5109  
  Average fixed interest rate – GBP (%)           2.34% 2.66%  2.90%   

166    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

This page left intentionally blank

LOGO

                              Group 
  2019 Hedging Instruments      >1 and £3   >3 and £12   >1 and £5         
  £1  month   months   months   years   >5 years           Total 

Fair value hedges:

             

Interest rate risk

 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   4,354    5,804    27,405    43,652    13,099    94,314 
 Average fixed interest rate – GBP   0.77%    0.90%    0.88%    1.33%    3.00%   
 Average fixed interest rate – EUR   (0.41)%    0.29%    2.21%    1.36%    2.36%   
  Average fixed interest rate – USD       1.54%    1.99%    2.69%    4.56%      

Interest rate/FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)       755        317    410    1,482 
 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)               18    218    236 
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate               1.1781    1.1603   
 Average GBP – USD exchange rate       1.5110                  
 Average fixed interest rate – EUR               3.52%    2.12%   
  Average fixed interest rate – USD       2.38%                  

Cash flow hedges:

             

Interest rate risk

 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)       339    1,066    4,671    500    6,576 
  Average fixed interest rate – GBP       0.76%    0.82%    1.46%    0.40%      

FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   1,187    2,119    3,758    5,217        12,281 
 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)               755        755 
 Average GBP – JPY exchange rate       145.9275    143.0857    140.8152       
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate       1.1444    1.1167    1.1526       
  Average GBP – USD exchange rate   1.2856    1.2624    1.2925    1.2991          

Interest rate/FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   812        3,367    8,009    4,033    16,221 
 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)           3,121    4,829    2,170    10,120 
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate   1.2742        1.1689    1.3114    1.2090   
 Average GBP – USD exchange rate           1.5357    1.5811    1.4499      
  Average fixed interest rate – GBP   2.49%        2.16%    2.87%    2.96%      

2018

             

Fair value hedges:

             

Interest rate risk

 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   6,162    8,411    14,611    39,508    15,652    84,344 
 Average fixed interest rate – GBP   0.63%    0.79%    1.06%    1.59%    2.85%   
 Average fixed interest rate – EUR   (0.22)%    0.67%    0.91%    1.09%    1.26%   
  Average fixed interest rate – USD   1.51%    1.31%    1.34%    2.68%    2.18%      

Interest rate/FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   392    1,295        1,101    222    3,010 
 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   392    1,295        90    301    2,078 
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate               1.1827    1.1682   
 Average GBP – USD exchange rate   1.5800    1.3325        1.5110          
 Average fixed interest rate – EUR               3.89%    3.92%   
  Average fixed interest rate – USD   3.62%    2.50%     ��  2.38%    7.95%      

Cash flow hedges:

             

Interest rate risk

 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)       1,715    1,991    3,100        6,806 
  Average fixed interest rate – GBP       0.73%    0.73%    1.33%          

FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)   3,916    2,552    2,961    5,596        15,025 
 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)               785        785 
 Average GBP – JPY exchange rate       147.2149    146.3718    145.3191       
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate           1.2803    1.1349       
  Average GBP – USD exchange rate   1.3035    1.3067    1.3099    1.3049          

Interest rate/FX risk

 Exchange rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)           1,773    11,481    5,622    18,876 
 Interest rate contracts – Notional amount (£m)           784    7,562    2,871    11,217 
 Average GBP – EUR exchange rate           1.2523    1.2707    1.2167   
 Average GBP – USD exchange rate           1.6333    1.5447    1.5109      
  Average fixed interest rate – GBP           2.34%    2.66%    2.90%      

 

Santander UK plc 167191


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 


This page intentionally blank

Annual Report 2018 | 192Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

Net gains or losses arising from fair value and cash flow hedges included in net trading and other income

 

                  Group 
                2019                 2018                 2017 
    Group 
    2018
£m
     2017
£m
     2016
£m
     £m     £m     £m 

Fair value hedging:

                        

Gains/(losses) on hedging instruments

     4      56      (274

(Losses)/gains on hedged items attributable to hedged risks

     75      (2     335 

(Losses)/gains on hedging instruments

     (360     4      56 

Gains/(losses) on hedged items attributable to hedged risks

     414      75      (2

Fair value hedging ineffectiveness

     79      54      61      54      79      54 

Cash flow hedging ineffectiveness

     (45     (49     (33     (46     (45     (49
     34      5      28      8      34      5 

Hedge ineffectiveness can be analysed by risk category as follows:

 

 Group  

2018

 Changes in FV of hedging
instruments to calculate
hedge ineffectiveness
£m
 Changes in FV of hedged
items to calculate hedge
ineffectiveness
£m
 

   Hedge ineffectiveness  
recognised in income  
statement  

£m  

                            Group  
          2019               2018  
  

Change in FV of hedging

 Change in FV of   Recognised in income       Change in FV of hedging Change in FV of   Recognised in income  
  instruments hedged items   statement       instruments hedged items   statement  
  £m £m   £m       £m £m   £m  

Fair value hedges:

               

Interest rate risk

 26  15 41     (264 284    20      26   15    41  

Interest rate/FX risk

 (22 60 38     (96 130    34       (22  60    38  
 4  75 79     (360 414    54       4   75    79  

 

      Group 

2018

    Income statement line item
 affected by the reclassification
   Changes in FV of hedging
instruments to calculate
hedge ineffectiveness
£m
 Changes in value of
hedging instrument
recognised in OCI
£m
 Hedge ineffectiveness
recognised in income
statement
£m
 Amount reclassified from
cash flow hedging reserve
to income statement
£m
 
                               Group 
              2019               2018 
     Hedging Instruments          Hedging Instruments      
                           Reclassified 
         Recognised Reclassified         Recognised from 
       Recognised in income from reserves           Change Recognised in income reserves to 
  Income statement line item  Change in FV in OCI statement to income     in FV in OCI statement income 
  affected by reclassification  £m £m £m £m     £m £m £m £m 

Cash flow hedges:

Cash flow hedges:

                  

Interest rate risk

  Net interest income  20  (14 6  26   

Net interest income

   34  (33 1  13     20   (14  6   26 

FX risk

  Net interest income/net trading and other income  18  (20 (2 9   

Net interest income/net trading and other income

   (333 329  (4 (316    18   (20  (2  9 

Equity risk

  Operating expenses  (12 12     (9  

Operating expenses

                 (12  12      (9

Interest rate/FX risk

   Net interest income/net trading and other income   722  (771 (49 726   

Net interest income/net trading and other income

   (604 561  (43 (709     722   (771  (49  726 
       748  (793 (45 752       (903 857  (46 (1,012     748   (793  (45  752 

In 2018,2019, cash flow hedge accounting of £12m (2017: £nil)£4m (2018: £12m) had to cease due to foreign currency denominated cash flows relating to IT project expenditure no longer being expected to occur.

 

168Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements193


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

The following table provides a reconciliation by risk category of components of equity and analysis of OCI items (before tax) resulting from hedge accounting.

 

Cash flow
hedging
reserve
Group
                                                        
       Group 
   2019  2018 
   £m  £m 

Balance at 1 January

   326   285 

Effective portion of changes in fair value:

   

– Interest rate risk

   33   14 

– Foreign currency risk

   (329  20 

– Equity risk

      (12

– Interest rate/foreign currency risk

   (561  771 
    (857  793 

Income statement transfers:

   

– Interest rate risk

   (13  (26

– Foreign currency risk

   316   (9

– Equity risk

      9 

– Interest rate/foreign currency risk

   709   (726
    1,012   (752

Balance at 31 December

   481   326 

2018

£m

Balance at 1 January 2018

285

Effective portion of changes in fair value:

– Interest rate risk

14

– Foreign currency risk

20

– Equity risk

(12

– Interest rate/foreign currency risk

771
793

Income statement transfers

– Interest rate risk

(26

– Foreign currency risk

(9

– Equity risk

9

– Interest rate/foreign currency risk

(726
(752

Balance at 31 December 2018

326

Hedged exposures

Santander UK hedges its exposures to various risks, including interest rate risk and foreign currency risk, as set out in connection with certain mortgage assets, covered bond issuances, subordinated debt and senior debt securities in issue.

Thethe following table sets out the exposures covered by the Santander UK group’s hedging strategies:table.

 

  

Group

 
  Carrying value    Accumulated amount of FV
hedge adjustments on
hedged item in carrying
value of hedged item
     Accumulated amount of FV
hedge adjustments for
portfolio hedge of interest
rate risks
    Change in
value used
for
calculating
 Accumulated
amount of FV
hedge
adjustments on
 
2018 

Hedged item balance

sheet line item

 

    Assets

£m

     Liabilities
£m
 

Assets

£m

 

Liabilities

£m

   

Assets

£m

 

Liabilities

£m

   

hedge
ineffective-
ness

£m

 

balance sheet for
discontinued
hedges

£m

 

Fair value hedges:

             

Interest rate risk:

 Loans and advances to customers  42,075             638      (149 729 
 Other financial assets at amortised cost  6,640             59      59    
 Reverse repo agreements – non trading  10,954                         
 Other financial assets at FVOCI  7,447      10             (46 123                                        Group 
 Deposits by customers     702             (1       
 Deposits by banks     516      15          9  (23                   2019                  2018 

Interest rate/FX risk:

 Debt securities in issue     15,112      369      191   158  (548
 Subordinated liabilities      685       152       52    44  (214
     67,116  17,015    10  536    697  242    75  67     Accumulated amount of FV hedge   Change in       Accumulated amount of FV hedge Change in 
        adjustments   value to              adjustments  value to 
      Portfolio       calculate         Portfolio   calculate 
      hedge of Of which     hedge         hedge of Of which hedge 
  Carrying Hedged interest Discontinued     ineffective-     Carrying Hedged interest Discontinued ineffective- 
  value item rate risks hedges     ness     value item rate risks hedges ness 
  £m £m £m £m     £m     £m £m £m £m £m 

Fair value hedges

               

Interest rate risk:

               

Loans and advances to customers

   43,098     870  630     258     42,075      638   729   (149

Other financial assets at amortised cost

   6,627     142  121     83     6,640      59      59 

Reverse repos – non trading

   17,121     (2       (2    10,954             

Other financial assets at FVOCI

   5,944  102     82     125     7,429   10      123   (46

Deposits by customers

   (9,944 (85 4  (11    (110    (702     1       

Deposits by banks

   (517 (16    (17    (1    (516  (15     (23  9 

Debt securities in issue

   (8,099 (303 (166 (300    (50    (11,920  (199  (191  (369  121 

Subordinated liabilities

   (707 (181 (48 (204    (19    (694  (161  (52  (223  21 

Interest rate/FX risk:

               

Other financial assets at FVOCI

   241  3           (4    18             

Debt securities in issue

   (1,396 (135    (122    136     (3,192  (170     (179  37 

Subordinated liabilities

   7  7     7      (2     9   9      9   23 
   52,375  (608 800  186      414      50,101   (526  455   67   75 

 

  

Group

 
2018 

Hedged item balance

sheet line item

 

    Change in value used for
calculating hedge
ineffectiveness

£m

 Cash flow
              hedge reserve
£m
 

Balances on cash flow
hedge reserve where
    hedge accounting is  no
longer applied

£m

 
                    Group 
        2019           2018 
     Balances on cash       Balances on cash 
     flow hedge   Change in value   flow hedge 
 Change in value to   reserve for   to calculate Cash flow reserve for 
 calculate hedge Cash flow discontinued   hedge hedge discontinued 
 ineffectiveness hedge reserve hedges   ineffectiveness reserve hedges 
 Hedged item balance sheet line item £m £m £m   £m £m £m 
Cash flow hedges:            

Interest rate risk:

 Loans and advances to customers (19 (4 (2 

Loans and advances to customers

 (34 21  (11   (19  (4  (2
 Loans and advances to banks    (2    

Loans and advances to banks

 (2            (2   
 Deposits by banks 6  (1    

Deposits by banks

 3  (2      6   (1   
 Debt securities in issue (1       

Debt securities in issue

            (1      
FX risk: Other financial assets at FVOCI 199  (1    

Other financial assets at FVOCI

 (122 3       199   (1   
 Not applicable – highly probable forecast transactions (1       

Not applicable – highly probable forecast transactions

 267  2       (1      
 Debt securities in issue (218 22  3  

Deposits by customers

 3                 
 

Deposits by banks

 4                 
 

Debt securities in issue

 177  (3      (218  22   3 
Equity risk: Other liabilities 12        

Other liabilities

       (1   12       
Interest rate/FX risk: Debt securities in issue/loans and advances to customers (564 233  50  

Debt securities in issue/loans and advances to customers

 630  280  20    (564  233   50 
 Subordinated liabilities/loans and advances to customers (207 79     

Subordinated liabilities/loans and advances to customers

 (69 180        (207  79    
   (793 326  51    857  481  8     (793  326   51 

 

194Santander UK plc


LOGO

This page intentionally blank

 

Santander UK plc 169195


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

13.12. OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

 

                                            
       Group 
  2019   2018 
    

Group

 

 
    

2018 
£m 

 

     

2017 
£m 

 

   £m   £m 

Loans and advances to customers:

            

Loans to housing associations

     13       1,034     12    13 

Other loans

     81       515     80    81 
     94       1,549     92    94 

Debt securities

     3,251       547     294    3,251 

Equity securities

     –       –          

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

     2,272       –         2,272 
     5,617(1)       2,096     386    5,617 

For the Santander UK group, other financial assets at FVTPL comprised £12m (2018: £1,095m) of financial assets designated at FVTPL and £374m (2018: £4,522m) of financial assets mandatorily held at FVTPL.

(1)For the Santander UK group, this comprises £1,095m of financial assets designated at FVTPL and £4,522m of financial assets mandatorily at FVTPL. For the Company, this comprises £1,095m of financial assets designated at FVTPL and £4,380m of financial assets mandatorily at FVTPL.

Loans and advances to customers principally represented other loans, being a portfolio ofroll-up mortgages and associated receivables that isdeferred consideration following the partial sale of the portfolio. These are managed, and has itshave their performance evaluated, on a fair value basis in accordance with a documented investment strategy, and information about them is provided on that basis to management. Since 2009, the Santander UK group’s policy has been not to designate similar new loans at fair value through profit or loss. The associated receivables weredeferred consideration was transferred outside the Santander UK group as part of the sale of the share capital of ANTSSFS by Santander UK plc to Santander UK Group Holding plc.plc in 2018. For more, see Note 21.19.

As part of the establishment of credit protection vehicles sponsored by Santander UK, we retained £3,053mIn 2019 £2.1bn of senior tranches of credit linked notes related to an SRT securitisation, which were previously classified as debt securities in the table above. These vehicles provide credit protectionabove, were presented on reference portfoliosa net basis. This followed a deed of Santander UK group loans with junior notes sold to external investors. As these notes do not have SPPI characteristics they are mandatorily held at fair value. Theseamendment, including a legal right ofset-off between the principal amounts of the senior tranches of credit linked notes are valued using the same parameters asand the related cash deposits included as collateral and financial guarantees described in Note 24, such that changes in their respective valuations are offset exactly, and there is no charge or credit to21. At 31 December 2019 the income statement. For more, see ‘Credit protection entities’ in Note 21.amount of this netting was £1.5bn.

The net (loss)/gain in the year attributable to changes in credit risk for loans and advances at fair value through profit or loss was £(1m) (2017: £49m, 2016: £40m)£nil (2018: £(1)m, 2017: £49m). The cumulative net loss attributable to changes in credit risk for loans and advances at fair value through profit or loss at 31 December 20182019 was £2m (2017: £120m)(2018: £2m).

 

170196 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

14.13. LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS

 

                                            
     Group 
  2019 2018 
    

Group

 

 
    

2018 

£m 

   

2017 

£m 

   £m £m 

Loans secured on residential properties

     157,957    155,355    165,356   157,957 

Corporate loans

     27,763    30,856    27,043   27,763 

Finance leases

     6,821    6,710    6,264   6,821 

Secured advances

                 

Other unsecured loans

     7,554    6,230    7,096   7,554 

Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries and joint ventures

     1,997    1,199    2,366   1,997 

Amounts due from Santander UK Group Holdings plc

     17    8    8   17 

Amounts due from subsidiaries

       

Loans and advances to customers

     202,109    200,358    208,133   202,109 

Credit impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

     (751   (940   (785  (751

RV and voluntary termination provisions on finance leases

     (69   (78   (61  (69

Net loans and advances to customers

     201,289    199,340    207,287   201,289 

MovementFor movements in expected credit impairment loss allowances:

   Group 
   

Loans secured
on residential
properties

£m

 

     

Corporate
loans

£m

 

     

Finance
leases
£m

 

         

Other
unsecured
loans

£m

 

     

Total
£m

 

 

At 31 December 2017

   225      490      46        179      940 

Adoption of IFRS 9 (see Note 1)(1)

   47      99      11        54      211 

Re-allocation of ECL onoff-balance sheet exposures(1)

   (3     (25                (22     (50

At 1 January 2018

   269      564      57        211      1,101 

(Release)/charge to the income statement (see Note 8)

   (18     17      51        139      189 

Write-offs and other items(2)(3)

   (17     (355     (23          (144     (539

At 31 December 2018

   234      226      85           206      751 

Recoveries, net of collection costs (see Note 8)

   2      1      6           33      42 
                                       

At 1 January 2017

   279      382      45        215      921 

(Release)/charge to the income statement (see Note 8)

   (37     172      20        102      257 

Write-offs and other items(2)

   (17     (64     (19          (138     (238

At 31 December 2017

   225      490      46           179      940 

Of which:

                    

– Observed

   105      433      12        59      609 

– Incurred but not yet observed

   120      57      34           120      331 
    225      490      46           179      940 

Recoveries, net of collection costs (see Note 8)

   3      1      6           44      54 
                                       

At 1 January 2016

   424      395      20        269      1,108 

(Release)/charge to the income statement (see Note 8)

   (116     59      47        142      132 

Write-offs and other items(2)

   (29     (72     (22          (196     (319

At 31 December 2016

   279      382      45           215      921 

Of which:

                    

– Observed

   130      287      13        73      503 

– Incurred but not yet observed

   149      95      32           142      418 
    279      382      45           215      921 

Recoveries, net of collection costs (see Note 8)

   4      3      2           56      65 

(1)The adjustment for the adoption of IFRS 9 related to there-measurement of loss allowances on loans and advances to customers at amortised cost. There-allocation of ECL onoff-balance sheet exposures was a transfer to provisions following the adoption of a methodology to enable their separate identification from ECL on drawn exposures. See Note 30.
(2)Mortgage write-offs exclude the effect of the unwind over time of the discounting in estimating losses, as described in the accounting policy ‘Financial instruments’ in Note 1. Mortgage write-offs including this effect were £18m (2017: £22m, 2016: £33m)
(3)The contractual amount outstanding on financial assets that were written off in the year, and are still subject to enforcement activity was £76m.

LOGO

Santander UK plc171


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

losses, see the Credit risk section of the Risk review. The contractual amount outstanding on financial assets that were written off in the year and are still subject to enforcement activity was £72m (2018: £76m).

Finance lease and hire purchase contract receivables may be analysed as follows:

 

                                  

 

Group

 

 
     

 

2018

       

 

2017 

 
     Gross
    investment
£m
  

Unearned
finance income

£m

   Net
    investment
£m
       Gross
    investment
£m
   

Unearned
finance income

£m

   

Net 

investment 

£m 

 

Not later than one year

     3,730   (210   3,520       3,633    (177   3,456  

Later than one year and not later than five years

     3,415   (278   3,137       3,316    (226   3,090  

Later than five years

     210   (46   164        214    (50   164  
      7,355   (534   6,821        7,163    (453   6,710  
                               Group 
            2019                2018 
       

 

        Unearned

                      Unearned    
   Gross   finance  Net       Gross   finance  Net 
         investment   income        investment             investment   income        investment 
   £m   £m  £m       £m   £m  £m 

No later than one year

   2,650    (371  2,279      3,730    (210  3,520 

Later than one year and not later than two years

   1,829    (207  1,622      1,839    (148  1,691 

Later than two years and not later than three years

   1,047    (119  928      1,056    (87  969 

Later than three years and not later than four years

   473    (54  419      488    (39  449 

Later than four years and not later than five years

   41    (4  37      32    (4  28 

Later than five years

   1,116    (137  979         210    (46  164 
    7,156    (892  6,264         7,355    (534  6,821 

At 31 December 2018 and 2017, the Company had no finance lease and hire purchase contract receivables. The Santander UK group enters into finance leasing arrangements primarily for the financing of motor vehicles and a range of assets for its corporate customers. Included in the carrying value of net investment in finance leases and hire purchase contracts is £1,034m (2017: £886m)£1,219m (2018: £1,034m) of unguaranteed RV at the end of the current lease terms, which is expected to be recovered through repayment,re-payment,re-financing or sale. Contingent rent income of £nil (2017: £5m, 2016: £4m)(2018: £nil, 2017: £5m) was earned during the year, which was classified in ‘Interest and similar income’. Finance income on the net investment in finance leases was £299m (2018: £346m, 2017: £201m).

Finance lease receivable balances are secured over the asset leased. The Santander UK group is not permitted to sell or repledge the asset in the absence of default by the lessee. The Directors consider that the carrying amount of the finance lease receivables approximates to their fair value.

Included within loans and advances to customers are advances assigned to bankruptcy remote structured entities and Abbey Covered Bonds LLP. These loans provide security to issues of covered bonds and mortgage-backed or other asset-backed securities issued by the Santander UK group. For more, see Note 15.14.

 

172Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements197


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

15.

14. SECURITISATIONS AND COVERED BONDS

The information in this Note relates to securitisations and covered bonds for consolidated structured entities, used to obtain funding or collateral. It excludes structured entities relating to credit protection vehicles that are described in more detail in Note 19.

The Santander UK group uses structured entities to securitise some of the mortgage and other loans to customers that it originates. The Santander UK group also issues covered bonds, which are guaranteed by, and secured against, a pool of the Santander UK group’s mortgage loans transferred to Abbey Covered Bonds LLP. The Santander UK group issues mortgage-backed securities, other asset-backed securities and covered bonds mainly in order to obtain diverse, low cost funding, but also to use as collateral for raising funds via third party bilateral secured funding transactions or for liquidity purposes in the future. The Santander UK group has successfully used bilateral secured transactions as an additional form of medium-term funding; this has allowed the Santander UK group to further diversify its medium-term funding investor base.

Loans and advances to customers include portfolios of residential mortgage loans, and receivables derived from credit agreements with retail customers for the purchases of financed vehicles, which are subject tonon-recourse finance arrangements. These loans and receivables have been purchased by, or assigned to, structured entities or Abbey Covered Bonds LLP, and have been funded primarily through the issue of mortgage-backed securities, other asset-backed securities or covered bonds. No gain or loss has been recognised as a result of these sales. The structured entities and Abbey Covered Bonds LLP are consolidated as subsidiaries. The Company and its subsidiaries do not own directly, or indirectly, any of the share capital of any of the structured entities.

a) Securitisations

i) Master trust structures

The Santander UK group makes use of master trust structures, whereby a pool of residential mortgage loans is assigned to a trust company by the asset originator. A funding entity acquires a beneficial interest in the pool of assets held by the trust company with funds borrowed from qualifying structured entities, which at the same time issue asset-backed securities to third-party investors or the Santander UK group.

Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries receive payments from the securitisation companies in respect of fees for administering the loans, and payment of deferred consideration for the sale of the loans. Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries have no right or obligation to repurchase any securitised loan, except if certain representations and warranties given by Santander UK plc or its subsidiaries at the time of transfer are breached and, in certain cases, if there is a product switch or further advance, if a securitised loan is in arrears for over two months or if a securitised loan does not comply with the liquidity coverage requirements for credit institutions.regulatory requirements.

ii) Other securitisation structures

The Santander UK group issues notes through pass-through stand-alone vehicles for the securitisation of receivables derived from credit agreements with retail customers for the purchase of financed vehicles. Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries are under no obligation to support any losses that may be incurred by the master trust or other structures, securitisation companies or holders of the securities, and do not intend to provide such further support.

b) Covered bonds

Santander UK plc also issues covered bonds, which are its direct, unsecured and unconditional obligation. The covered bonds benefit from a guarantee from Abbey Covered Bonds LLP. Santander UK plc makes a term advance to Abbey Covered Bonds LLP equal to the sterling proceeds of each issue of covered bonds. Abbey Covered Bonds LLP uses the proceeds of the term advance to purchase portfolios of residential mortgage loans and their security from Santander UK plc. Under the terms of the guarantee, Abbey Covered Bonds LLP has agreed to pay an amount equal to the guaranteed amounts when the same shall become due for payment but which would otherwise be unpaid by Santander UK plc.

c) Analysis of securitisations and covered bonds

The Santander UK group’s principal securitisation programmes and covered bond programme, together with the balances of the advances subject to securitisation (or for the covered bond programme assigned) and the carrying value of the notes in issue at 31 December 20182019 and 20172018 are listed below.

 

     Gross assets        External notes in issue        Notes issued to Santander UK
plc/subsidiaries as collateral
 
     2018
£m
     2017
£m
        2018
£m
     2017
£m
        

2018

£m

     

2017

£m

 

Mortgage-backed master trust structures:

                          

– Holmes

     4,414      4,299       3,182      1,400       463      389 

– Fosse

     4,646      5,732       199      616       34      34 

– Langton

     3,034      3,893                          2,354      2,355 
      12,094      13,924          3,381      2,016          2,851      2,778 

Other asset-backed securitisation structures:

                          

– Motor

     1,055      1,318       738      852       374      514 

– Auto ABS UK Loans

     1,468      1,498          1,212      1,240          316      306 
      2,523      2,816          1,950      2,092          690      820 

Total securitisation programmes

     14,617      16,740          5,331      4,108          3,541      3,598 

Covered bond programme:

                          

– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme

     21,578      19,772          18,653      16,866                 
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes     36,195      36,512          23,984      20,974          3,541      3,598 

Less: held by the Santander UK group:

                          

– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme

                       (539     (1,067                  
Total securitisation and covered bond programmes (see Note 28)                       23,445      19,907                   

LOGO

                          Notes issued to Santander UK 
        Gross assets       External notes in issue      plc/subsidiaries as collateral 
                   2019                   2018                       2019                   2018                      2019                   2018 
   £m   £m       £m   £m      £m   £m 

Mortgage-backed master trust structures:

               

– Holmes

   4,262    4,414      1,931    3,182     463    463 

– Fosse

   3,708    4,646      295    199     1,404    34 

– Langton

   3,076    3,034                     2,354    2,354 
    11,046    12,094         2,226    3,381        4,221    2,851 

Other asset-backed securitisation structures:

               

– Motor

   490    1,055      324    738     197    374 

– Auto ABS UK Loans

   1,532    1,468         1,229    1,212        368    316 
    2,022    2,523         1,553    1,950        565    690 

Total securitisation programmes

   13,068    14,617         3,779    5,331        4,786    3,541 

Covered bond programmes:

               

– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme

   23,323    21,578         19,004    18,653             

Total securitisation and covered bond programmes

   36,391    36,195         22,783    23,984        4,786    3,541 

Less: held by Santander UK group:

               

– Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme

                      (539              

Total securitisation and covered bond programmes (See Note 25)

                  22,783    23,445               

 

198Santander UK plc173


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

The following table sets out the internal and external issuances and redemptions in 20182019 and 20172018 for each securitisation and covered bond programme.

 

  Internal issuances       External issuances       Internal redemptions       External redemptions 
          2019           2018               2019           2018               2019           2018               2019           2018 
  Internal issuances          External issuances          Internal  
redemptions  
        External  
redemptions  
 
  2018
£bn
   2017  
£bn  
        2018
£bn
   2017  
£bn  
        

2018

£bn

   2017  
£bn  
        2018
£bn
   2017  
£bn  
   £bn   £bn       £bn   £bn       £bn   £bn       £bn   £bn 

Mortgage-backed master trust structures:

                                                  

– Holmes

           0.1            –                  1.8            0.5                  –            0.2                  0.1            1.8          0.1          1.8                1.1    0.1 

– Fosse

       –              –              0.1          0.4    1.8      1.4          0.1                        0.4 

Other asset-backed securitisation structures:

                                                  

– Motor

       0.1              0.5          0.1    0.1          0.1    0.3                          0.2    0.1      0.4    0.1 

– Auto ABS UK Loans

       0.2          0.4    0.7              –          0.4    0.7      0.1          0.2    0.4      0.1          0.2    0.4 

Covered bond programme

       –           4.3    2.3           0.5    0.3           1.9    3.2                 2.9    4.3       0.5    0.5       1.5    1.9 
   0.1    0.3           6.5    4.0           0.6    0.7           2.9    7.8      1.5    0.1       3.2    6.5       0.8    0.6       3.2    2.9 

Holmes Funding Ltd has a beneficial interest of £3.2bn (2017: £1.7bn)£2.1bn (2018: £3.2bn) in the residential mortgage loans held by Holmes Trustees Ltd. The remaining share of the beneficial interest in residential mortgage loans held by Holmes Trustees Ltd belongs to Santander UK plc.

Fosse Funding (No.1) Ltd has a beneficial interest of £0.2bn (2017: £0.6bn)£1.7bn (2018: £0.2bn) in the residential mortgage loans held by Fosse Trustee (UK) Ltd. The remaining share of the beneficial interest in residential mortgage loans held by Fosse Trustee (UK) Ltd belongs to Santander UK plc.

Langton Funding (No.1) Ltd has a beneficial interest of £2.3bn (2017:£2.4bn (2018: £2.3bn) in the residential mortgage loans held by Langton Mortgage Trustee (UK) Ltd. The remaining share of the beneficial interest in residential mortgage loans held by Langton Mortgage Trustee (UK) Ltd belongs to Santander UK plc.

The Holmes securitisation companies have cash deposits of £218m (2017: £nil)£283m (2018: £218m), which have been accumulated to finance the redemption of a number of securities issued by the Holmes securitisation companies. The share of Holmes Funding Ltd in the trust assets is therefore reduced by this amount.

Fosse Master Issuer plc has cash deposits of £nil (2017: £24m)(2018: £nil), which have been accumulated to finance the redemption of a number of securities issued by Fosse Master Issuer plc. Fosse Funding (No.1) Ltd’s beneficial interest in the assets held by Fosse Trustee (UK) Ltd is therefore reduced by this amount.

16.15. TRANSFERS OF FINANCIAL ASSETS NOT QUALIFYING FOR DERECOGNITION

The Santander UK group enters into transactions in the normal course of business by which it transfers recognised financial assets directly to third parties or to structured entities. These transfers may give rise to the full or partial derecognition of those financial assets. Transferred financial assets that do not qualify for derecognition consist of (i) securities held by counterparties as collateral under repurchase agreements, (ii) securities lent under securities lending agreements, and (iii) loans that have been securitised under arrangements by which the Santander UK group retains a continuing involvement in such transferred assets. As the substance of the sale and repurchase and securities lending transactions is secured borrowings, the asset collateral continues to be recognised in full and the related liability reflecting the Santander UK group’s obligation to repurchase the transferred assets for a fixed price at a future date is recognised in deposits from banks or customers, as appropriate. As a result of these transactions, the Santander UK group is unable to use, sell or pledge the transferred assets for the duration of the transaction. The Santander UK group remains exposed to interest rate risk and credit risk on these pledged instruments. The counterparty’s recourse is not limited to the transferred assets.

The Santander UK group securitisation transfers do not qualify for derecognition. The Santander UK group remains exposed to credit risks arising from the mortgage loans or credit agreements and has retained control of the transferred assets. Circumstances in which the Santander UK group has continuing involvement in the transferred assets may include retention of servicing rights over the transferred assets, entering into a derivative transaction with the securitisation vehicle, retaining an interest in the securitisation vehicle or providing a cash reserve fund. Where the Santander UK group has continuing involvement it continues to recognise the transferred assets to the extent of its continuing involvement and recognises an associated liability. The net carrying amount of the transferred assets and associated liabilities reflects the rights and obligations that the Santander UK group has retained.

The following table analyses the carrying amount of financial assets that did not qualify for derecognition and their associated financial liabilities:

 

                    Group 
       2019           2018 
    Group 
    2018      2017               Assets           Liabilities                 Assets           Liabilities 
    Assets     Liabilities     Assets     Liabilities 
Nature of transaction    £m     £m     £m     £m   £m   £m     £m   £m 

Sale and repurchase agreements

     7,642      (7,188      10,808      (7,734   7,592    (6,739    7,642    (7,188

Securities lending agreements

     144      (120      302      (235   195    (143    144    (120

Securitisations (See Notes 15 and 28)

     11,583      (5,331       12,847      (4,108

Securitisations (See Notes 14 and 25)

   9,992    (3,779     11,583    (5,331
     19,369      (12,639       23,957      (12,077   17,779    (10,661     19,369    (12,639

 

174Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements199


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

17.

16. REVERSE REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS – NON TRADING

 

       Group 
          2019           2018 
    Group   
              2018   
£m   
  

2017   

£m   

  £m   £m 

Agreements with banks

    

 

3,254   

  

 

2,464   

   2,161    3,254 

Agreements with customers

    17,873     150      21,475    17,873 
    21,127     2,614      23,636    21,127 

In 2018, as part of our ring-fencing implementation, Santander UK plc revised the classification of the majority of our permitted non trading reverse repurchase agreements at amortised cost, in line with our ring-fenced business model for managing these assets as part of our overall funding and liquidity plans. For more on our ring-fence implementation, see Note 43.

18.17. OTHER FINANCIAL ASSETS AT AMORTISED COST

 

Group   

2018   

£m   

2017   

£m   

Asset backed securities(1)

720   

Debt securities(2)

6,509   
7,229   

(1)

These securities were previously classified as ‘Financial investments’ under IAS 39. See Note 44.

(2)

These debt securities were previously classified asheld-to-maturity investments within ‘Financial investments’ under IAS 39. See Note 44.

On adoption of IFRS 9, the Santander UK group split the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item (Note 20) between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income’. This aligned the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position. In addition, certainavailable-for-sale securities were mandatorily measured at FVTPL. For more information, see Note 44.

        Group 
           2019           2018 
   £m   £m 

Asset backed securities

   532    720 

Debt securities

   6,524    6,509 
    7,056    7,229 

A significant portion of the debt securities are held in our eligible liquidity pool and consist mainly of government bonds and covered bonds. Detailed disclosures can be found in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section of the Risk review.

The Company’s asset backed securities includes investments in debt securities issued by Santander UK group entities.

19.18. FINANCIAL ASSETS AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH OTHER COMPREHENSIVE INCOME

 

Group   

2018   

£m   

2017   

£m   

Debt securities(1)

13,229   

Loans and advances to customers(2)

73   
13,302   

(1)

These debt securities were previously classified asavailable-for-sale within ‘Financial investments’ under IAS 39. See Note 44.

(2)

These comprise other loans and receivables mainly held within hold to collect and sell business models that were moved from trading assets and loans and advances to customers at amortised cost, to ‘Financial assets at FVOCI’, due to their reclassification to FVOCI on adoption of IFRS 9. See Note 44.

On adoption of IFRS 9, the Santander UK group split the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item (Note 20) between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income’. For more information, see Note 44.

        Group 
           2019           2018 
   £m   £m 

Debt securities

   9,691    13,229 

Loans and advances to customers

   56    73 
    9,747    13,302 

A significant portion of the debt securities are held in our eligible liquidity pool and consist mainly of government bonds and covered bonds. Detailed disclosures can be found in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section of the Risk review.

20. FINANCIAL INVESTMENTS

 

200Santander UK plc


  Group   

2018   

£m   

2017   

£m   

Asset backed securities(1)

  

2,180   

Debt securities:

  
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Available-for-sale(2)Notes to the

financial statements

  8,772   

Held-to-maturity(3)

6,578   

Available-for-sale equity securities(4)

81   
17,611   

(1)

These were reclassified to ‘Other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’ on adoption of IFRS 9. See Note 44.

(2)

These were reclassified to ‘Financial assets at FVOCI’ and ‘Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’ on adoption of IFRS 9. See Note 44.

(3)

These were reclassified to ‘Other financial assets at amortised cost’ on adoption of IFRS 9. See Note 44.

(4)

These were reclassified to ‘Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’ on adoption of IFRS 9. See Note 44.

On adoption of IFRS 9, the Santander UK group split the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at FVOCI’. For more information, see Note 44.

A significant portion of the debt securities were held in our eligible liquidity pool and consist mainly of government bonds and covered bonds. Detailed disclosures can be found in the ‘Liquidity risk’ section of the Risk review.

LOGO

Santander UK plc175

 


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

21.19. INTERESTS IN OTHER ENTITIES

 

     Group   
     

2018   

£m   

  

2017   

£m   

Joint ventures

    88     73   
     88     73   
        Group 
                   2019                   2018 
   £m   £m 

Subsidiaries

        

Joint ventures

   117    88 
    117    88 

The Santander UK group consists of a parent company, Santander UK plc, incorporated and domiciled in the UK and a number of subsidiaries and joint ventures held directly and indirectly by the Company. The Company has no individually significant associates. Details of subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates are set out in the Shareholder Information section and form an integral part of these financial statements.section.

a) Interests in subsidiaries

The Company holds directly or indirectly 100% of the issued ordinary share capital of its principal subsidiaries. All companies operate principally in their country of incorporation or registration.

On 1 January 2018, Santander UK plc acquired 100% of the share capital of Santander UK Operations Ltd (formerly Geoban UK Ltd, a subsidiary of Geoban SA) and Santander UK Technology Ltd (formerly Isban UK Ltd, a subsidiary of Ingenieria de Software Bancario SL), for a final cash consideration of £66m. Immediately prior to this, the UK business of Produban Servicios Informaticos Generales SL was acquired by Santander UK Technology Ltd for a final cash consideration of £13m. These businesses are referred to as Santander Services.

In addition, during the year the following restructures were carried out as part of the Santander UK group’s ring-fencing implementation:

Santander Equity Investments Limited (SEIL), a subsidiary of ANTS plc, acquired 100% of the share capital of a number of subsidiaries of Santander UK plc, with aggregate net assets of £9m at the acquisition date.
Santander UK plc sold 100% of the share capital of ANTS plc to Santander UK Group Holdings plc, for a consideration of £337m, which was equivalent to the book value of the associated assets and liabilities. Prior to this, the prohibited business of ANTS plc was transferred to Banco Santander London Branch, save for a small pool of residual assets, and the permitted business of ANTS plc was transferred to Santander UK plc. ANTS plc paid Santander UK plc dividends of £3,546m relating to these transfers. As a result, the carrying value of Santander UK plc’s investment in ANTS plc was reduced by £2,512m to £337m (2017: £2,849m), and this is included in dissolutions/disposals in the table above.
The business of the Jersey and Isle of Man branches of Santander UK plc was acquired by ANTS plc. No consideration was paid as the book value of the associated assets and liabilities was £nil.

For more on our ring-fencing implementation, see Note 43.

Subsidiaries with significantnon-controlling interests

The only subsidiary with significantnon-controlling interests is PSA Finance UK Limited, which operates in the UK. In 20182019 and 2017,2018, the proportion of ownership interests and voting rights held bynon-controlling interests was 50%.

 

                  2019                   2018 
    

2018   

£m   

  

2017   

£m   

  £m   £m 

Profit attributable tonon-controlling interests

    

 

22   

  

 

21   

   19    22 

Accumulatednon-controlling interests of the subsidiary

    151     152      160    151 

Dividends paid tonon-controlling interests

    22     19      12    22 

Summarised financial information:

          

– Total assets

    3,289     3,215      3,228    3,289 

– Total liabilities

    2,987     2,909      2,905    2,987 

– Profit for the year

    43     43      40    43 

– Total comprehensive income for the year

    43     43      40    43 

 

176Santander UK plc


 

> Notes to the financial statements

201


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

Interests in consolidated structured entities

Structured entities are formed by Santander UK to accomplish specific and well-defined objectives. Santander UK consolidates these structured entities when the substance of the relationship indicates control, as described in Note 1. In addition to the structured entities disclosed in Note 1514 which are used for securitisation and covered bond programmes, the only other structured entities consolidated by Santander UK are described below. All the external assets and liabilities in these entities are included in the financial statements and in relevant Notes. Other than as set out below, no significant judgements were required with respect to control or significant influence.

i) Guaranteed Investment Products 1 PCC Limited (GIP)

GIP is a Guernsey-incorporated, closed-ended, protected cell company. The objective of each cell is to achieve capital growth for retail investors. In order to achieve the investment objective, GIP, on behalf of the respective cells, has entered into transactions with Santander UK plc. Santander Guarantee Company, a Santander UK group company, also guarantees the shareholders of cells a fixed return on their investment and/or the investment amount. GIP has no third party assets. Although the share capital is owned by the retail investors, Santander UK continues to have exposure to variable risks and returns through Santander Guarantee Company’s guarantee and has therefore consolidated this entity.

ii) Motor Securitiesii)2018-1 Designated Activity Company (Motor 2018)

Motor 2018 is a credit protection entity, and a Designated Activity Company limited by shares, incorporated in Ireland. It has issued a series of credit linked notes varying in seniority which reference portfolios of Santander UK Foundation Limited

Santander UK Foundation Limited supports disadvantaged people throughout the UK through the charitable priorities of education and financial capability. The entity was set up by the Company, although its control was transferredgroup loans. Concurrently, these entities sell credit protection to Santander UK Group Holdings plc in June 2018,respect of the referenced loans and, it is therefore no longer consolidated byin return for a fee, are liable to make protection payments to Santander UK plc from that date.upon the occurrence of a credit event in relation to any of the referenced loans. The entity has been consolidated as Santander UK holds a variable interest by retaining the junior tranche of notes issued by the entity.

b) Interests in joint ventures

Santander UK does not have any individually material interests in joint ventures. As set out in the accounting policies in Note 1, interests in joint ventures are accounted for using the equity method. In 2018,2019, Santander UK’s share in the profit after tax of its joint ventures was £15m (2017: £12m)£30m (2018: £15m) before elimination of transactions between Santander UK and the joint ventures. At 31 December 2018,2019, the carrying amount of Santander UK’s interest was £88m (2017: £73m)£117m (2018: £88m). At 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, the joint ventures had no commitments and contingent liabilities.

c) Interests in unconsolidated structured entities

Structured entities sponsored by the Santander UK group

Santander UK has interests in structured entities which it sponsors but does not control. Santander UK considers itself a sponsor of a structured entity when it facilitates the establishment of the structured entity. Other than as set out below, no significant judgements were required with respect to control or significant influence. The structured entities sponsored but not consolidated by Santander UK are as follows.

i) Santander (UK) Common Investment Fund

The Santander (UK) Common Investment Fund (the Fund) is a common investment fund that was established to hold the assets of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme. The Fund is not consolidated by Santander UK, but its assets of £11,433m (2017: £11,626m)£12,446m (2018: £11,433m) are accounted for as part of the defined benefit assets and obligations recognised on Santander UK’s balance sheet. For more on the Fund, see Note 31.28. As the Fund holds the assets of the pension scheme, it is outside the scope of IFRS 10. Santander UK’s maximum exposure to loss is the carrying amount of the assets held.

ii) Trust preferred entities

The trust preferred entities, Abbey National Capital Trust I and Abbey National Capital LP I were 100% owned finance subsidiaries (as defined in RegulationS-X under the US Securities Act 1933, as amended) of Santander UK plc which were set up by Santander UK solely to issue trust preferred securities to third parties and lend the funds on to other Santander UK companies. On 7 February 2000, Abbey National Capital Trust I issued US$1bn of 8.963%Non-cumulative Trust Preferred Securities, which were registered under the US Securities Act 1933, as amended. The trust preferred entities were not consolidated by Santander UK as Santander UK plc was not exposed to variability of returns from them.

In 2018, following a Partnership Special Redemption Event, the outstanding US$104m Abbey National Capital Trust I 8.963%Non-cumulative Trust Preferred Securities were redeemed in full in accordance with their terms. The trust preferred entities were liquidated later in 2018.

iii) Credit protection entities

Santander UK has established three (2017: two)four (2018: three) unconsolidated credit protection entities, which are privateDesignated Activity Companies limited companiesby shares, incorporated in Ireland. Each entity has issued a series of credit linked notes varying in seniority which reference portfolios of Santander UK group loans. Concurrently, these entities sell credit protection to Santander UK in respect of the referenced loans and, in return for a fee, are liable to make protection payments to Santander UK upon the occurrence of a credit event in relation to any of the referenced loans.

Senior credit linked notes, which amounted to £3,053m (2017: £830m)£3,766m (2018: £3,053m), are issued to, and held by, Santander UK. These notes are included within ‘Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’ on the balance sheet (see Note 13). Junior credit linked notes, which amounted to £408m (2017: £187m)£825m (2018: £408m), are all held by third party investors and suffer the first losses incurred in the referenced portfolios. Funds raised by the sale of the credit linked notes are deposited with Santander UK as collateral for the credit protection.

£110m (2018: £3,053m) of the senior credit linked notes are presented on a gross basis and included within ‘Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’ on the balance sheet (see Note 12). Deposits and associated guarantees in respect ofrelating to the senior credit linked notes are included within ‘Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss’ (see Note 24),21). The remainder of the senior credit linked notes, along with the deposits and associated guarantees, are presented on a net basis, to reflect a legal right ofset-off between the principal amounts of senior notes and the cash deposits. Deposits and associated guarantees in respect of the junior credit linked notes are included within ‘Deposits by customers’ (see Note 25)22).

The entities are not consolidated by Santander UK because the third party investors have the exposure, or rights, to all of the variability of returns from the performance of the entities. No assets are transferred to, or income received from, these vehicles. BecauseSince the credit linked notes (including those held by Santander UK) are fully cash collateralised, Santander UK’s maximum exposure to loss is equal to any unamortised fees paid to the credit protection entities in connection with the credit protection outlined above.

Structured entities not sponsored by the Santander UK group

Santander UK also has interests in structured entities which it does not sponsor or control. These largely relate to the legacy treasury asset portfolio and consist of holdings of mortgage and other asset backed securities issued by entities that were established and/or sponsored by other unrelated financial institutions. These securities comprise the asset backed securities included in Note 18.17. Management has concluded that the Santander UK group has no control or significant influence over these entities and that the carrying value of the interests held in these entities represents the maximum exposure to loss.

 

LOGO

202Santander UK plc177


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

22.20. INTANGIBLE ASSETS

a) Goodwill

 

     Group   
     Cost
£m
     Accumulated
impairment
£m
   Net book value  
£m  
 

At 31 December 2017, 1 January 2018 and 31 December 2018

     1,285      (82   1,203   
            Group 
       Accumulated    
   Cost   impairment  Net book value 
   £m   £m  £m 

At 31 December 2018, 1 January 2019 and 31 December 2019

   1,269    (66  1,203 

Impairment of goodwill

In 20182019 and 2017,2018, no impairment of goodwill was recognised. Impairment testing in respect of goodwill allocated to each cash-generating unit (CGU) is performed annually or more frequently if there are impairment indicators present. For the purpose of impairment testing, the CGUs are based on customer groups within the relevant business divisions.

The cash flow projections for each CGU are based on the five-year plan prepared for regulatory purposes, based on Santander UK’s3-Year Plan and approved by the Santander UK plc Board. The assumptions included in the expected future cash flows for each CGU take into consideration the UK economic environment and financial outlook within which the CGU operates. KeyThe base case economic scenario used in the3-Year Plan includes key assumptions includesuch as projected house price and GDP growth rates, the level of interest rates and the level and change in unemployment rates in the UK. UK and the forecast Bank of England base rates. For more on Santander UK’s base case economic scenario, including information on our forecasting approach and the assumptions in place at 31 December 2019, see the Credit risk – Santander UK group level section of the Risk review.

The rate used to discount the cash flows is based on apre-tax rate that reflects the weighted average cost of capital allocated by Santander UK to investments in the business division in which the CGU operates. The growth rate used reflects management’s five-year forecasts, with a terminal growth rate for each year applied thereafter, in line with the estimated long-term average UK GDP growth rate.

Based on the conditions at the balance sheet date, management determined that a reasonably possible change in any of the key assumptions described above would not cause an impairment of goodwill to be recognised.

The following CGUs (all within Retail Banking) include in their carrying values goodwill that comprises the goodwill reported by Santander UK. The CGUs do not carry on their balance sheets any other intangible assets with indefinite useful lives. The calculations have been based on value in use using cash flows based on the five-year plan.

 

       Goodwill            Discount rate            Growth rate(1) 
                      2019                       2018                           2019                       2018                           2019                       2018 
    Goodwill      Discount rate      Growth rate(1)   
CGU            2018
£m
             2017
£m
             2018
%
             2017
%
             2018
%
             2017  
%  
   £m   £m       %   %       %   % 

Personal financial services

     1,169      1,169       10.5      10.8       2      1      1,169    1,169      9.8    10.5      3    2 

Private banking

     30      30       10.5      10.8       2      1      30    30      9.8    10.5      4    2 

Other

     4      4        10.5      10.8        2      1      4    4       9.8    10.5       3    2 
     1,203      1,203                            1,203    1,203                   

 

(1)

Average growth rate based on the five-year plan for the first five years and a growth rate of 2.0 % (2017: 1.5%1.6% (2018: 1.6%) applied thereafter.

In 2018,2019, the discount rate decreased by 0.30.7 percentage points to 9.8% (2018: 10.5% (2017: 10.8%). The decrease reflected changes in current market and economic conditions. In 2018,2019, the change in growth rates reflected Santander UK’s updated strategic priorities in the context of forecast economic conditions.

b) Other intangibles

 

 Group 
        Group 
    Accumulated   
    amortisation/   
                  Cost impairment Net book value 
  £m £m £m 

At January 2019

   1,090  (485 605 

Additions

   173     173 

Disposals

   (14    (14

Charge

     (191 (191

Impairment

     (10 (10

At 31 December 2019

   1,249  (686 563 
       Cost
£m
 Accumulated
amortisation/
impairment
£m
 Net book value
£m
    

At 1 January 2018

 962  (423 539    962   (423  539 

Additions

 204     204    204      204 

Write offs

 (76 76       (76  76    

Charge

    (138 (138      (138  (138

Sales

                   

At 31 December 2018

 1,090  (485 605    1,090   (485  605 

 

At 1 January 2017

  760   (278  482 

Additions

  205      205 

Disposals

  (3  3    

Charge

     (116  (116

Impairment

     (32  (32

At 31 December 2017

  962   (423  539 

Other intangibles consist of computer software. In 2017, impairments primarily related to capitalised software costs for a credit risk management system, part of which was no longer in use.

 

178Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements203


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

23. TRADING LIABILITIES

 

            Group 
     2018
£m
     2017
£m
 

Securities sold under repurchase agreements

           25,504 

Short positions in securities and unsettled trades

           3,694 

Cash collateral

           1,911 
            31,109 

In 2018, as part of our ring-fence plans, the trading business in the Santander UK group was run down, and the gilt-edged market making business was transferred to Banco Santander London Branch. For more on our ring-fencing transition, see Note 43.

24.21. OTHER FINANCIAL LIABILITIES AT FAIR VALUE THROUGH PROFIT OR LOSS

 

           Group 
    2018
£m
     2017
£m
                      Group 

US$10bn Euro Commercial Paper Programme

           387 
                  2019     2018 
  £m     £m 

US$30bn Euro Medium Term Note Programme

     165      169    159      165 

Structured Notes Programmes

     696      932    809      696 

Eurobonds

     129      147    137      129 

Structured deposits

     133      680    435      133 

Collateral and associated financial guarantees

     3,053          173      3,053 

Repurchase agreements – non trading

     2,110                2,110 
     6,286(1)      2,315    1,713          6,286 

For the Santander UK group, all (2018: all) of the other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss were designated as such.

(1)For the Santander UK group, this comprises £6,286m of financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss and £nil of financial liabilities mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss. For the Company, this comprises £6,286m of financial liabilities designated at fair value through profit or loss and £nil of financial liabilities mandatorily at fair value through profit or loss.

The collateralCollateral and associated financial guarantees relates toin the table above represent collateral received, together with associated credit protection guarantees, relating toin respect of the proceeds of the retained senior tranches of credit linked notes described in Note 13, and have been designated at fair value through profit or loss.12. The financial guarantees are valued using the same parameters as the related credit linked notes, such that changes in the respective valuations are offset exactly, and there is no charge or credit to the income statement. In 2019 £2.1bn of cash deposits, which were previously included within collateral and associated financial guarantees in the table above, were presented on a net basis. This followed a deed of amendment, including a legal right ofset-off between the principal amounts of senior tranches of credit linked notes, classified as debt securities in Note 12, and the cash deposits. At 31 December 2019 the amount of this netting was £1.5bn. For more, see ‘Credit protection entities’ in Note 21, and ‘Internal models based on information other than market data (Level 3)’ in Note 41.19.

Gains and losses arising from changes in the credit spread of securities issued by the Santander UK group reverse over the contractual life of the debt, provided that the debt is not repaid at a premium or a discount. The net gainloss during the year attributable to changes in the Santander UK group’s own credit risk on the above securities was £77m (2018: £84m (2017:gain, 2017: £29m loss, 2016: £6m gain)loss). The cumulative net gain attributable to changes in the Santander UK group’s own credit risk on the above securities at 31 December 20182019 was £77m (2017: £7m loss)£nil (2018: £77m).

At 31 December 2018,2019, the amount that would be required to be contractually paid at maturity of the securities above was £128m£4m lower (2017: £4m(2018: £128m lower) than the carrying value.

25.22. DEPOSITS BY CUSTOMERS

 

                   Group 
                  2019   2018 
           Group 
    2018
£m
     2017
£m
   £m   £m 

Current and demand accounts

     86,207      85,751    89,221    86,207 

Savings accounts(1)

     66,039      70,461    65,835    66,039 

Time deposits

     15,485      20,453    16,680    15,485 

Amounts due to other Santander UK Group Holdings plc subsidiaries

     83          44    83 

Amounts due to Santander UK Group Holdings plc(2)

     9,206      6,256    8,869    9,206 

Amounts due to fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries and joint ventures

     1,070      727    1,234    1,070 
     178,090      183,648    181,883    178,090 

 

(1)

Includes equity index-linked deposits of £1,176m (2017: £1,301m)£1,139m (2018: £1,176m). The capital amount guaranteed/protected and the amount of return guaranteed in respect of the equity index-linked deposits were £1,139m and £18m (2018: £1,176m and £28m (2017: £1,301m and £67m)£28m) respectively.

(2)

Includes downstreamed funding from our immediate parent company Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

26.23. DEPOSITS BY BANKS

 

                   Group 
                  2019   2018 
           Group 
    2018
£m
     2017
£m
   £m   £m 

Items in the course of transmission

     262      303    337    262 

Deposits held as collateral

     4,048      1,760    2,169    4,048 

Other deposits(1)

     12,891      10,645    11,847    12,891 

Amounts due to Santander UK subsidiaries

     20              20 
     17,221      12,708    14,353    17,221 

 

(1)

Includes drawdown from the TFS of £10.8bn (2017: £8.5bn)(2018: £10.8bn).

24. REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS – NON TRADING

LOGO

                    Group 
                   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 

Agreements with banks

   10,227    5,865 

Agreements with customers

   8,059    5,045 
    18,286    10,910 

 

204Santander UK plc179


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

27. REPURCHASE AGREEMENTS – NON TRADING

            Group  
     2018
£m
     2017 
£m 
 

Agreements with banks

     5,865      1,076  

Agreements with customers

     5,045      –  
      10,910      1,076  

In 2018, as part of our ring-fencing implementation, Santander UK plc revised the classification of the majority of our permitted non trading repurchase agreements at amortised cost, in line with our ring-fenced business model for managing these liabilities as part of our overall funding and liquidity plans. For more on our ring-fence implementation, see Note 43.

28.25. DEBT SECURITIES IN ISSUE

 

         Group 
  2019     2018 
           Group  
    

2018
£m

 

     

2017 
£m 

 

   £m     £m 

Medium-term notes:

              

– US$30bn Euro Medium Term Note Programme

     7,229      8,816     4,679      7,229 

– Euro 30bn Euro Medium Term Note Programme

     1,975      –     1,896      1,975 

– USSEC-registered – Santander UK plc

     7,649      6,280     5,891      7,649 

– US$20bn Commercial Paper Programmes

     3,131      2,906     3,014      3,131 
     19,984      18,002     15,480      19,984 

Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme (See Note 15)

     18,114      15,799  

Euro 35bn Global Covered Bond Programme (See Note 14)

   19,004      18,114 

Certificates of deposit

     3,221      4,681     2,806      3,221 

Credit linked notes

     42      43     60      42 

Securitisation programmes (See Note 15)

     5,331      4,108  

Securitisation programmes (See Note 14)

   3,779      5,331 
     46,692      42,633                 41,129                  46,692 

The credit linked notes were issued by PSA Finance UK Limited and reference a pool of auto loans and leases originated by PSA Finance UK Limited that, in return for a fee, provides credit protection on the first 7.6% of losses in the reference portfolio.

180    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

29.26. SUBORDINATED LIABILITIES

 

       Group 
  2019   2018 
    Group  
 

2018  £m 

 

 

2017  £m 

 

   £m   £m 

£325m Sterling Preference Shares

 344    344     344    344 

£175m Fixed/Floating Rate Tier One Preferred Income Capital Securities

  –     

Undated subordinated liabilities

 574    584     581    574 

Dated subordinated liabilities

 2,683    2,863     2,603    2,683 
 3,601    3,793                 3,528                3,601 

The above securities will, in the event of the winding up of the issuer, be subordinated to the claims of depositors and all other creditors of the issuer, other than creditors whose claims rank equally with, or are junior to, the claims of the holders of the subordinated liabilities. The subordination amongst each of specificthe subordinated liabilities is determined in respectupon a winding up of the issuer. The claims of holders of preference shares are generally junior to those of the holders of undated subordinated liabilities, whichissuer is specified in turn are generally junior to the claims of holders of the dated subordinated liabilities. The subordination of the preference shares ranks equally with that of the £300m fixed/floating ratenon-cumulative callable preference sharestheir respective terms and £300mStep-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments classified as share capital and/or other equity instruments, as described in Notes 33 and 34.conditions.

In 20182019 and 2017,2018, the Santander UK group had no defaults of principal, interest or other breaches with respect to its subordinated liabilities. No repayment or purchase by the issuer of the subordinated liabilities may be made prior to their stated maturity without the consent of the PRA.

In 2017, Santander UK exercised its option to call the £175m Fixed/Floating Rate Tier One Preferred Income Capital Securities. These were fully redeemed on 9 February 2018.

Undated subordinated liabilities

 

              Group 
      2019     2018 
       Group  
   First call date 

2018 

£m 

 

2017 

£m 

               First call date   £m     £m 

10.0625% Exchangeable capital securities

   n/a  205    205     n/a    205      205 

7.375% 20 YearStep-up perpetual callable subordinated notes

   2020  16    17     2020    15      16 

7.125% 30 YearStep-up perpetual callable subordinated notes

    2030  353    362     2030    361      353 
     574    584                    581                  574 

In common with other debt securities issued by Santander UK group companies and notwithstanding the issuer’s first call dates in the table above, in the event of certain tax changes affecting the treatment of payments of interest on subordinated liabilities in the UK, the 7.375% 20 YearStep-up perpetual callable subordinated notes and the 7.125% 30 YearStep-up perpetual callable subordinated notes are redeemable at any time, and the 10.0625% Exchangeable capital securities are redeemable on any interest payment date – each in whole at the option of Santander UK plc, at their principal amount together with any accrued interest.

The 10.0625% Exchangeable capital securities are exchangeable into fully paid 10.375%non-cumulativenon-redeemable sterling preference shares of £1 each, at the option of Santander UK plc, on the business day immediately following any interest payment date.

Dated subordinated liabilities

 

    

Group 

 
 

Maturity

 

 

2018  £m 

 

 

2017  £m 

 

               Group 

10.125% Subordinated guaranteed bonds

  2023   –    78  

9.625% Subordinated notes

  2023   –    129  
      2019     2018 
                      Maturity   £m     £m 

5% Subordinated notes (US$1,500m)

  2023  1,173    1,103     2023    1,132      1,173 

4.75% Subordinated notes (US$1,000m)

  2025  791    745     2025    763      791 

7.95% Subordinated notes (US$1,000m)

  2029  278    275     2029    280      278 

6.50% Subordinated notes

  2030  38    40     2030    40      38 

8.963% Subordinated notes (US$1,000m)

  2045   –    113  

5.875% Subordinated notes

  2031         2031    9      9 

5.625% Subordinated notes (US$500m)

  2045  394    371     2045    379      394 
   2,683    2,863                    2,603                  2,683 

The dated subordinated liabilities are redeemable in whole at the option of Santander UK plc at any time and, in the case of the 7.95% Subordinated notes, on any interest payment date, in the event of certain tax changes affecting the treatment of payments of interest on the subordinated liabilities in the UK, at their principal amount together with any accrued interest.

In 2018, Santander UK plc exercised its option to call the 9.625% Subordinated notes and 8.963% Subordinated notes. These were fully redeemed on 30 October 2018 and 15 November 2018 respectively.

In 2017, Santander UK plc exercised its option to call the 10.125% Subordinated guaranteed bonds. These were fully redeemed on 4 January 2018.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 181205


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

30.27. PROVISIONS

 

     Group 
     Conduct remediation                       
     

PPI
£m

 

   

Other
products
£m

 

   

FSCS and
Bank Levy
£m

 

   

Vacant
property
£m

 

   

Off-balance
sheet ECL
£m

 

     

Regulatory
and other
£m

 

   

Total
£m

 

 

At 31 December 2017

     356    47    57    39        59    558 

Reallocation of ECL onoff-balance sheet exposures(1)

                     50          50 

At 1 January 2018

     356    47    57    39    50      59    608 

Additional provisions (see Note 8)

             69    12    6      209    296 

Provisions released (see Note 8)

         (14   (4             (15   (33

Utilisation

     (110   (3   (91   (14         (158   (376

Other

             14(2)                  14 

At 31 December 2018

     246    30    45    37    56      95    509 

To be settled:

                  

– Within 12 months

     246    22    45    22    56      95    486 

– In more than 12 months

         8        15              23 
      246    30    45    37    56      95    509 
                                        

At 1 January 2017

     457    36    96    47        64    700 

Additional provisions

     109    35    93    4        144    385 

Utilisation

     (210   (34   (132   (12       (149   (537

Transfers

         10                       10 

At 31 December 2017

     356    47    57    39           59    558 

To be settled:

                  

– Within 12 months

     167    38    57    23        59    344 

– In more than 12 months

     189    9        16               214 
      356    47    57    39           59    558 
                                                                                                                                                                                      
                            Group 
   Conduct remediation                 
         FSCS and     Off-balance   Regulatory    
   PPI  Other products  Bank Levy  Property  sheet ECL   and other  Total 
   £m  £m  £m  £m  £m   £m  £m 

At 31 December 2018

   246   30   45   37   56    95   509 

Adoption of IFRS 16 (see Note 1)

            17          17 

At 1 January 2019

   246   30   45   54   56    95   526 

Additional provisions (see Note 8)

   169      86   44   22    166   487 

Provisions released (see Note 8)

         (5  (21      (4  (30

Utilisation and other(1)

   (226  (5  (90  (18      (82  (421

Recharge(2)

         10             10 

At 31 December 2019

   189   25   46   59   78    175   572 

To be settled:

         

– Within 12 months

   189   18   46   43   78    171   545 

– In more than 12 months

      7      16       4   27 
    189   25   46   59   78    175   572 

 

(1)ECL

Utilisation and other included a transfer from ‘PPI’ to ‘Regulatory and other’ in respect of an ongoing legal dispute. No further information has been provided onoff-balance sheet exposures following the adoption of a methodology to enable their separate identification from ECL on drawn exposures. See Note 14.basis it would be seriously prejudicial.

(2)Santander UK plc recharged £14m (2017: £nil)

This relates to a recharge in respect of the UK Bank Levy paid on behalf of other UK entities of Banco Santander SA.

a) Conduct remediation

The amounts in respect of conduct remediation comprise the estimated cost of making redress payments, including related costs, with respect to the past sales or administration of products. The provision for conduct remediation represents management’s best estimate of the anticipated costs of related customer contact and/or redress, including related costs.

182    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

(i) Payment Protection Insurance (PPI)

In November 2015, theThe FCA issued a Consultation Paper 15/39 (Rules and guidance on payment protection insurance complaints) which introduced the concept of unfair commission in relation to Plevin decision for customer redress plusset a deadline by which customers would need to make their PPI complaints. On 2of 29 August 2016, the FCA issued Consultation Paper 16/20 (Rules and Guidance on payment protection insurance complaints: Feedback on CP 15/39 and further consultation). The paper outlined the FCA’s proposed approach to PPI in light of the 2014 decision of the Supreme Court in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Ltd (Plevin) and also recommended atwo-year deadline period starting in June 2017, which was later than proposed in CP 15/39. In July 2018 the FCA issued Consultation Paper 18/18 (Guidance on Regular Premium2019 for PPI complaints and recurringnon-disclosure (RND)delivered a nationwide communications campaign to raise awareness of commission). The paper outlined thatthis deadline among consumers. In line with industry experience, we received unprecedented volumes of information requests in August 2019 and saw a significant spike in both these requests and complaints in the final days prior to the extentcomplaint deadline, with the processing of any omission relating to RND occurring on or after April 2007, that aspect of any complaint is within the scope of the FCA complaint handling rules even if the PPI was sold before that date and the firm was not subject to the ombudsman’s jurisdiction before this time. Final guidance was issued in November 2018 under CP18/33 (Regular premium PPI complaints and recurringnon-disclosure of commission – feedback on CP18/18, final guidance, and consultation on proposed mailing requirements) with a further consultation on a previously rejected mailing.these claims ongoing.

PPI assumptions

A provision for conduct remediation has been recognised in respect of the misselling of PPI policies. The provision is calculated based on a number of key assumptions. These are:

Claim volumes – the estimated number of customer complaints received
Plevin in scope rates – the number of rejected misselling claims that will be in scope for Plevin redress
The determination of liability with respect to a specific portfolio of claims.

The assumptions have been based on the following:

Analysis completed of the causes of complaints, uphold rates, industry factors, FCA activity/guidance and how these are likely to vary in the future
Actual claims activity registered to date
The level of redress paid to customers, together with a forecast of how this is likely to change over time
The impact on complaints levels of proactive customer contact
The effect media coverage and the August 2019 time bar are expected to have on the complaints inflows
Commission and profit share earned from Insurance providers over the lifetime of the products and related legal and regulatory guidance
In relation to a specific PPI portfolio of complaints, an analysis of the relevant facts and circumstances including legal and regulatory responsibilities, informed by external legal advice.

The key assumptions are kept under review, and are regularly reassessed and validated against actual customer data. The provision representsto represent management’s best estimate of Santander UK’s future liability in respect of misselling of PPI policies. The most critical factors in determining

Given the passing of the FCA’s August 2019 time bar, the level of judgment required by management in determining appropriate assumptions has reduced. At 31 December 2019, the key assumption in calculating the provision arewas around the volumeestimated number of claims for future inflow levels, and the determinationcustomer complaints that would be received in respect of liabilitycustomers with respectsuccessful information requests that were still eligible to submit a specific portfolio of PPI claims. complaint.

The uphold rate isrates are informed by historical experience and the average cost of redress can be predicted reasonably accurately given that management is dealing with a high volume and reasonably homogeneoushomogenous population. In setting

Cumulative complaints from the provision, management estimatedinception of the total claimsPPI complaints process to 31 December 2019, regardless of the likelihood of Santander UK incurring a liability and including the specific PPI portfolio of complaints referred to below, were 3.5m. This includes c.327,000 that were likely to be received until August 2019 i.e. the date on which the time bar forstill being reviewed. Future expected claims takes effect.

The table below sets out the key drivers of the provision balance and forecast assumptions used in calculating the provision, as well as the sensitivity of the provision to changeswere c.49,000. For every additional 10,000 inbound PPI complaints, we would expect an additional charge in the assumptions. It reflects a blended view across all our retail products and portfolios and includes redress for Plevin-related claims. The PPI misselling redress elementorder of the provision linked£4m.

2019 compared to future claims levels and any associated Plevin redress is £101m. Expected future complaints through to the August2018

In 2019, time bar are estimated to be at a level consistent with the highest individual monthly inflow level in 2018. Were this level to be 20% higher or lower, the impact on the PPI misselling element of the provision of £101m would bewe charged an increase or decrease of £16m.

The remainder of the provision relates to portfolios of complaints which were on hold pending further regulatory clarificationadditional £169m in respect of which utilisation will begin in 2019, and to our best estimate of liability in respect of a legal dispute regarding allocation of responsibility for a specific portfolio further described in Note 32. No further information regarding the best estimate has been provided on the basis it would be seriously prejudicial.

  

Cumulative to
31 December 2018

 

  

Future expected
(unaudited)

 

  

Sensitivity analysis
Increase/decrease
in provision

 

 

Inbound complaints(1)(‘000)

  2,141   415   25 = £7.4m 

Outbound contact (‘000)

  488   217   25 = £5.4m 

Response rate to outbound contact

  54%   64%   1% = £0.8m 

Average uphold rate per claim(2)

  37%   76%   1% = £2.7m 

Average redress per claim(3)

  £1,474   £545   £50 = £16.4m 

PPI:

(1)   Includes allIn Q2 2019 we reported an additional provision of £70m reflecting an increase in PPI claim volumes, additional industry activities and having considered guidance provided by the FCA and our specific approach to PPI claims, including the specific portfolio of complaints referred to above, regardlessin advance of the likelihoodPPI claims deadline on 29 August 2019.

In Q3 2019, and in line with industry experience, we received unprecedented volumes of information requests in August 2019 and saw a significant spike in both these requests and complaints in the final days prior to the complaint deadline. Our best estimate of the Santander UK group incurring a liability. Excludes claims where the complainant has not held a PPI policy.

(2)   Claims include inbound and responses to outbound contact.

(3)   The average redress per claim reduced from the cumulative average value at 31 December 2018 of £1,474 to a future average value of £545 due to the inclusion of Plevin cases in theadditional provision as well as a shift in the complaint mix to a greater proportion of storecards, which typically held lower average balances.required was £99m.

The Santander UK overturn rate at the Financial Ombudsman Service was 16% in the first half of 2018, and 12% in the second half of 2018, reflecting reducing inflows over the same period.

2018 compared to 2017

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs was £246m (2017: £356m). We made no additional PPI charges in the year, based on our recent claims experience and having considered the FCA Consultation paper CP18/33 issued on 7 November 2018. We will continue to monitor our provision levels, and take account of the impact of any further claims received and FCA guidance.

2017 compared to 2016

The remaining provision for PPI redress and related costs amounted to £356m. The total charge for the year was £109m (2016: £144m) and was driven by an increase in estimated future claims driven by the start of the FCA advertising campaign for PPI, offset by an expected decline relating to a specific PPI portfolio review. In 2016, a provision of £114m was made when we applied the principles published in the August 2016 FCA papers, and a further £32m was made in relation to a past business review.

Monthly utilisation increased from the 2016 average following the confirmation of a deadline for customer complaints, broadly in line with our assumptions.

LOGO

Santander UK plc183


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

(ii) Other products

A provision for conduct remediation has also been recognised in respect of sales of other products. A number of uncertainties remain as to the eventual costs with respect to conduct remediation in respect of these products given the inherent difficulties in determining the number of customers involved and the amount of any redress to be provided to them.

The remaining provision for other conduct was £30m (2017: £47m)£25m (2018: £30m), which primarily related to the sale of interest rate derivatives, following an ongoing review of the regulatory classification of certain customers potentially eligible for redress. Following further analysis, management assessed the provision requirements resulting in a release of £11m in the second quarter of 2018.derivatives.

b) FSCSFinancial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) and Bank Levy

(I) Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)(i) FSCS

The FSCS is the UK’s independent statutory compensation fund for customers of authorised financial services firms and pays compensation if a firm is unable to pay claims against it. The FSCS is funded by levies on the industry (and recoveries and borrowings where appropriate).

Following the default of a number of deposit takers since 2008, the FSCS borrowed funds from HM Treasury to meet the compensation costs for customers of those firms. On 25 April 2017, followingThe remaining debt due to the saleFSCS, that related to the failure of certain Bradford & Bingley mortgage assets, the amount thatplc, has now been repaid. This has enabled the FSCS owedto make a corresponding repayment of the balance of its loan to HM Treasury reduced to £4.7bn, from £15.7bn. The interest payable on the loan, and the Santander UK group’s share of that interest, fell accordingly. Based on the latest estimates from the FSCS the balance outstanding will be repaid earlier mostly through recoveries from asset sales, surplus cash flow or other recoveries in relation to the assets of the firms that defaulted. According to the new estimates, the amount to be provided by the Santander UK group for the interest payable on the loan was lower than initially expected.Treasury. As a result, there was a releasethe opening provision of £4m (2017:was released in 2019 (2018: £4m release, 2017: £1m charge, 2016: £34m charge), to bring the provision downbalance to the amount now expected to be charged for the remaining interest. The Santander UK group provided for a liability for the FSCS of £4m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £13m)£nil (2018: £4m).

(ii) UK Bank Levy

In addition to changes in UK corporation tax rates, Finance (No.2) Act 2015 reduced the UK Bank Levy rate from 0.21% via subsequent annual reductions to 0.10% from 1 January 2021. As a result, a rate of 0.16%0.15% applies for 2018 (2017: 0.17%2019 (2018: 0.16%). The cost of the UK Bank Levy for 20182019 was £86m (2018: £69m, (2017: £92m, 2016: £107m)2017: £92m). The Santander UK group paid £86m£90m in 2018 (2017: £109m)2019 (2018: £86m) and provided for a liability of £40m£46m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £44m)2019 (2018: £40m).

206Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

c) Vacant propertyProperty

Property provisions include vacant property provisions and property dilapidation provisions for leased properties within the scope of IFRS 16. Vacant property provisions are made by reference to an estimate of any expectedsub-let income, compared to the head rent, and the possibility of disposing of Santander UK’s interest in the lease, taking into account conditions in the property market. These provisions are reassessed on a semi-annual basis and will normally run off over the period of the leases concerned. Where a property is disposed of earlier than anticipated, any remaining provision relating to that property is released.

Property provisions were impacted by £40m of transformation charges in 2019. These relate to a multi-year project to deliver on our strategic priorities and enhance efficiency in order for us to better serve our customers and meet our medium-term targets. These charges largely related to restructuring of our branch network associated with the announcement made in 2019.

d)Off-balance sheet ECL

Following the adoption of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018, provisionsProvisions include expected credit losses relating to guarantees given to third parties and undrawn loan commitments.

e) Regulatory and other

Regulatory and other provisions principally comprisecomprised amounts in respect of regulatory charges (including fines), operational loss and operational risk provisions, restructuring charges and litigation and related expenses. A number of uncertainties exist with respect to these provisions given the uncertainties inherent in operational, restructuring and litigation matters that affect the amount and timing of any potential outflows with respect to which provisions have been established. These provisions are reviewed periodically.at least quarterly.

At 31 December 2019 the balance included an amount of £68m (2018: £58m) that arose from a systems related historical issue identified by Santander UK, relating to compliance with certain requirements of the Consumer Credit Act. This provision is based on detailed reviews of relevant systems related to consumer credit business operations, supported by external legal and regulatory advice, and reflects our best estimate at 31 December 2019 of potential costs in respect of the identified issue. As detailed in Note 29, there are aspects of the issue which remain under review.

The balance also included an amount in respect of our best estimate of liability relating to a legal dispute regarding allocation of responsibility for a specific PPI portfolio of complaints, further described in Note 29. No further information regarding the best estimate is provided on the basis that it would be seriously prejudicial to Santander UK’s interests in connection with the dispute.

Regulatory and other provisions charged in 20182019 included £65m of transformation charges in 2019, relating to the following items:multi-year project described above in ‘c) Property’. In addition to charges largely related to the restructuring of our branch network, further charges were largely associated with the announced plans to reshape our Corporate & Commercial Banking business. Regulatory and other provisions charged in 2019 also included £68m of operational loss and operational risk provisions.

 

Santander UK plc 

In the fourth quarter of 2018, we were fined £33m by the FCA in relation to an investigation into our historical probate and bereavement practices. We acknowledged the findings of the FCA and apologised to the families and beneficiaries of deceased customers affected by these failings. This amount was charged and paid in the year.

207

An amount of £58m (2017: £nil) that was charged in 2018 and arose from a systems related historical issue identified by Santander UK, relating to compliance with certain requirements of the Consumer Credit Act (CCA). This provision is based on detailed reviews of relevant systems related to consumer credit business operations, supported by external legal and regulatory advice, and reflects our best estimate at 31 December 2018 of potential costs in respect of the identified issue. However, as detailed in Note 32, these reviews and the related analysis are not yet complete, such that the approach and timing to any remediation has not yet been finalised, although it is expected to commence in 2019.

31.


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

28. RETIREMENT BENEFIT PLANS

The amounts recognised in the balance sheet were as follows:

 

                                            
     Group 
  2019 2018 
      Group 
      2018
£m
   2017
£m
   £m £m 

Assets/(liabilities)

         

Funded defined benefit pension scheme – surplus

     842    449    669   842 

Funded defined benefit pension scheme – deficit

     (75   (245   (239  (75

Unfunded defined benefit pension scheme

      (39   (41

Unfunded pension and post retirement medical benefits

   (41  (39

Total net assets

      

 

728

 

 

 

   

 

163

 

 

 

   389   728 

Remeasurement (gains)/losses recognised in other comprehensive income during the year were as follows:

 

  Group 
  

2018

£m

   2017
£m
   2016
£m
 

Pension remeasurement

   (470   103    528 

184    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

Remeasurement losses/(gains) recognised in other comprehensive income during the year were as follows:

 

                                                                  
            Group 
   2019   2018  2017 
   £m   £m  £m 

Pension remeasurement

   522    (470  103 

a) Defined contribution pension plans

The Santander UK group operates a number of defined contribution pension plans. The assets of the defined contribution pension plans are held and administered separately from those of the Santander UK group. In December 2017, the Santander UK group ceased to contribute to the Santander Retirement Plan, an occupational defined contribution plan, and future contributionsThe majority of employees are paid intomembers of a defined contribution Master Trust, LifeSight. This Master Trust is the plan into which eligible employees are enrolled automatically. During the year the Santander Retirement Plan was wound up and all assets were transferred to LifeSight. The assets of the LifeSight Master Trust are held in separate trustee-administered funds.

An expense of £66m (2018: £67m, (2017: £54m, 2016: £52m)2017: £54m) was recognised for defined contribution plans in the year and is included in staff costs classified within operating expenses (see Note 6). None of this amount was recognised in respect of key management personnel for the years ended 31 December 2019, 2018 2017 and 2016.2017.

b) Defined benefit pension schemes

The Santander UK group operates a number of defined benefit pension schemes. The main scheme is the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme (the Scheme). It comprises seven legally segregated sections under the terms of a merger of former schemes operated by Santander UK plc agreed in 2012.sections. The Scheme covers 11% (2018: 13% (2017: 17%) of the Santander UK group’s current employees and is a funded defined benefit scheme which is closed to new members.

The corporate trustee of the Scheme is Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme Trustees Limited (the Trustee), a private limited company incorporated in 1996 and a wholly-owned subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc. During 2017, the Trustee was a wholly-owned subsidiary of Santander UK plc, but was transferred as part of the ring-fencing implementation. The principal duty of the Trustee is to act in the best interests of the members of the Scheme. The Trustee board comprises sixfive (2018: six) Directors selected by Santander UK Group Holdings plc, plus sixfive (2018: six) member-nominated Directors selected from eligible members who apply for the role.

The assets of the funded schemes including the Scheme are held independently of the Santander UK group’s assets in separate trustee administered funds. Investment strategy across the sections of the Scheme remains under regular review. Investment decisions are delegated by the Trustee to a common investment fund, managed by Santander (CF Trustee) Limited, a private limited company owned by five Trustee directors, three appointed by Santander UK plc and two by the Trustee. The Santander (CF Trustee) Limited directors’ principal duty, within the investment powers delegated to them, is to act in the best interest of the members of the Scheme. Ultimate responsibility for investment policy and strategy rests with the Trustee of the Scheme who is required under the Pensions Act 2004 to prepare a statement of investment principles. The defined benefit pension schemes expose the Santander UK group to risks such as investment risk, interest rate risk, longevity risk and inflation risk. The Santander UK group does not hold material insurance policies over the defined benefit pension schemes and has not entered into any significant transactions with them.

Formal actuarial valuations of the assets and liabilities of the defined benefit schemes are carried out on at least a triennial basis by independent professionally-qualified actuaries and valued for accounting purposes at each balance sheet date. Each scheme’s trustee is responsible for the actuarial valuations and in doing so considers, or relies in part on, a report of a third-party expert. The latest formal actuarial valuation for the Scheme at 31 March 20162019 was finalised in March 2017,August 2019, with a deficit to be funded of £1,739m.£1,136m. The next triennial funding valuation will be at 31 March 2019.2022. Any funding surpluses can be recovered by Santander UK plc from the Scheme through refunds as the Scheme is run off over time or could be used to pay for the cost of benefits which are accruing.

The total amount charged to the income statement was as follows:

 

     

Group

 

 
     

 

2018
£m

 

     

2017
£m

 

     

2016
£m

 

 

Net interest income

     (7     (5     (18

Current service cost

     41      31      33 

Past service and GMP costs

     41      1      1 

Administration costs

     8      8      8 
     

 

 

 

83

 

 

    

 

 

 

35

 

 

    

 

 

 

24

 

 

On 26 October 2018, the High Court handed down a judgement concluding that defined benefit schemes should equalise pension benefits for men and women in relation to GMP, and concluded on the methods that were appropriate. The estimated increase in liabilities at the date of the judgement was £40m and is based on a number of assumptions and the actual impact may be different. This has been reflected in the income statement and in the closing net accounting surplus of the Scheme.

 

The amounts recognised in other comprehensive income were as follows:

 

 

     Group 
     

 

2018
£m

 

     

2017
£m

 

     

2016
£m

 

 

Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense)

     246      (435     (1,447

Actuarial (gains)/losses arising from changes in demographic assumptions

     (56     (151     30 

Actuarial gains arising from experience adjustments

     15      (11     (80

Actuarial (gains)/losses arising from changes in financial assumptions

     (675     700      2,025 

 

Pension remeasurement

    

 

 

 

(470

 

    

 

 

 

103

 

 

    

 

 

 

528

 

 

                                                                  
           Group 
   2019  2018  2017 
   £m  £m  £m 

Net interest income

   (23  (7  (5

Current service cost

   34   41   31 

Past service and GMP costs

   1   41   1 

Administration costs

   8   8   8 
    20   83   35 

On 26 October 2018, the High Court handed down a judgement concluding that defined benefit schemes should equalise pension benefits for men and women in relation to GMP and concluded on the methods that were appropriate. The estimated increase in liabilities at the date of the judgement was £40m and was based on a number of assumptions and the actual impact may be different. This was reflected in the income statement and in the closing net accounting surplus of the Scheme in 2018. The allowance included in the Scheme liabilities at 31 December 2019 increased by £5m to £45m (2018: £40m) to reflect the latest assumptions. This change was recognised in other comprehensive income. We continue to await implementation guidance on the judgement from the UK Government and HMRC.

 

208Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

LOGO

The amounts recognised in other comprehensive income were as follows:

                                                                  
           Group 
   2019  2018  2017 
   £m  £m  £m 

Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense)

   (855  246   (435

Actuarial losses/(gains) arising from changes in demographic assumptions

   42   (56  (151

Actuarial (gains)/losses arising from experience adjustments

   (42  15   (11

Actuarial losses/(gains) arising from changes in financial assumptions

   1,377   (675  700 

Pension remeasurement

   522   (470  103 

Movements in the present value of defined benefit scheme obligations were as follows:

                                            
       Group 
   2019  2018 
   £m  £m 

At 1 January

   (10,804  (11,583

Current service cost paid by Santander UK plc

   (22  (27

Current service cost paid by subsidiaries

   (12  (14

Current service cost paid by fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries

       

Interest cost

   (308  (282

Employer salary sacrifice contributions

   (9  (6

Past service cost

   (1  (1

GMP equalisation cost

      (40

Remeasurement due to actuarial movements arising from:

   

– Changes in demographic assumptions

   (42  56 

– Experience adjustments

   42   (15

– Changes in financial assumptions

   (1,377  675 

Benefits paid

   375   433 

At 31 December

   (12,158  (10,804

Movements in the fair value of the schemes’ assets were as follows:

                                            
       Group 
   2019  2018 
   £m  £m 

At 1 January

   11,532   11,746 

Interest income

   331   289 

Contributions paid by employer and scheme members

   212   184 

Contributions paid by fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries

       

Administration costs paid

   (8  (8

Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense)

   855   (246

Benefits paid

   (375  (433

At 31 December

   12,547   11,532 

 

Santander UK plc 185209


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Movements in the present value of defined benefit scheme obligations were as follows:

 

    
     Group 
     2018
£m
     2017
£m
 

At 1 January

     (11,583     (11,082

Current service cost paid by Santander UK plc

     (27     (30

Current service cost paid by subsidiaries

     (14     (1

Current service cost paid by fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries

           (12

Interest cost

     (282     (305

Employer salary sacrifice contributions

     (6     (6

Past service cost

     (1     (1

GMP equalisation cost

     (40      

Remeasurement due to actuarial movements arising from:

        

– Changes in demographic assumptions

     56      151 

– Experience adjustments

     (15     11 

– Changes in financial assumptions

     675      (700

Benefits paid

     433      392 

At 31 December

     (10,804     (11,583

Movements in the fair value of the schemes’ assets were as follows:

 

 

     Group 
     2018
£m
     2017
£m
 

At 1 January

     11,746      11,218 

Interest income

     289      310 

Contributions paid by employer and scheme members

     184      171 

Contributions paid by fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries

           12 

Administration costs paid

     (8     (8

Return on plan assets (excluding amounts included in net interest expense)

     (246     435 

Benefits paid

     (433     (392

At 31 December

     11,532      11,746 

The composition and fair value of the schemes’ assets by category was:

 

    Group 
                               Group 
  Quoted prices in active markets       

Prices not quoted in active

markets

      Total 
2019  £m                           %       £m                     %                         £m                     % 

UK equities

   128    1              128  1 

Overseas equities

   1,742    14      933  7     2,675  21 

Corporate bonds

   1,333    11      444  4     1,777  15 

Government fixed interest bonds

   2,710    22              2,710  22 

Government index-linked bonds

   4,543    35              4,543  35 

Property

             1,332  11     1,332  11 

Derivatives

             94  1     94  1 

Cash

             984  8     984  8 

Repurchase agreements(1)

             (3,263 (26    (3,263 (26

Other

              1,567  12      1,567  12 
    Quoted prices in
active markets
      Prices not quoted in
active markets
      Total    10,456    83       2,091  17      12,547  100 
2018    £m     %     £m     %     £m     %              

UK equities

     159      1                    159      1    159    1              159   1 

Overseas equities

     1,854      16       878      8       2,732      24    1,854    16      878   8     2,732   24 

Corporate bonds

     1,536      13       311      3       1,847      16    1,536    13      311   3     1,847   16 

Government fixed interest bonds

     2,636      23                    2,636      23    2,636    23              2,636   23 

Government index-linked bonds

     4,248      37                    4,248      37    4,248    37              4,248   37 

Property

                  1,143      10       1,143      10              1,143   10     1,143   10 

Derivatives

                  65             65                    65        65    

Cash

                  662      6       662      6              662   6     662   6 

Repurchase agreements

                  (2,981     (26      (2,981     (26

Repurchase agreements(1)

             (2,981  (26    (2,981  (26

Other

                   1,021      9        1,021      9               1,021   9      1,021   9 
     10,433      90        1,099      10        11,532      100    10,433    90       1,099   10      11,532   100 

2017

                                  

UK equities

     187      1                    187      1 

Overseas equities

     2,204      19       706      6       2,910      25 

Corporate bonds

     1,665      14       209      2       1,874      16 

Government fixed interest bonds

     255      2                    255      2 

Government index-linked bonds

     3,506      30                    3,506      30 

Property

                  1,547      13       1,547      13 

Derivatives

                  512      4       512      4 

Cash

                  206      2       206      2 

Other

                   749      7        749      7 
     7,817      66        3,929      34        11,746      100 

 

(1)
186    Santander UK plc

Sale and repurchase agreements net of purchase and resale agreements.


> Notes to the financial statements

Scheme assets are stated at fair value based upon quoted prices in active markets with the exception ofexcept for property, property funds, derivatives, private equity and those classified under ‘Other’. The ‘Other’ category consistsincludes of asset-backed securities, annuities and funds (including private equity funds).hedge funds. The property funds were valued using market valuations prepared by an independent expert. Investments in absolute return funds that are included in the ‘Other’ category, and investments in foreign exchange, inflation, equity and interest rate derivatives that are included in the ��Derivatives’‘Derivatives’ category, were valued by investment managers by reference to market observable data. Private equity funds were valued by reference to their latest published accounts whilst the insured annuities were valued by actuaries based on the liabilities insured.

A strategy is in place to manage interest rate and inflation risk relating to the liabilities. In addition, theThe Scheme entered intoalso has in place an equity collar in 2017 which was extendedto manage equity risk and resized in 2018.hedges a proportion of its foreign exchange exposure to manage currency risk. At 31 December 2018,2019, the equity collar had a notional value of £1,795m (2017: £2,000m)£1,560m (2018: £1,795m) and the currency futures had a notional value of £2,079m (2018: £2,112m). In addition,2018, the level of interest rate hedging in the Scheme was increased, and the Scheme moved from using LIBOR-based instruments to gilt-backed instruments, including through the use of total return swaps and repurchase agreements. At 31 December 2018,In addition, repurchase agreements were entered into by the Scheme over an equivalent value of Government fixed interest and index-linked bonds and haveare therefore been included in the table above. A strategy is also in place to manage currency risk.

The Santander UK group’s pension schemes did not directly hold any equity securities of the Company or any of its related parties at 31 December 20182019 and 2017.2018. The Santander UK group’s pension scheme assets do not include any property or other assets that are occupied or used by the Santander UK group.

Funding

In March 2017,August 2019, in compliance with the Pensions Act 2004, the Trustee and the Santander UK group agreed to a new recovery plan in respect of the Scheme and schedule of contributions following the finalisation of the 31 March 20162019 actuarial valuation. The funding target for this actuarial valuation is for the Scheme to have sufficient assets to make payments to members in respect of the accrued benefits as and when they fall due. In accordance with the terms of the Trustee agreement in place at the time, the Santander UK group contributed £176m£203m in 2018 (2017: £163m)2019 (2018: £176m) to the Scheme, of which £123m (2017:£153m (2018: £123m) was in respect of agreed deficit repair contributions. The agreed schedule of the Santander UK group’s remaining contributions to the Scheme broadly comprises contributions of £119m£187m each year from 1 April 2017 increasing by 5% to 31 March 2026 plus contributions of £28m per annum increasing at 5% from 1 April 2021 to 31 March 2023 followed by £66m per annum increasing at 5% per annum from 1 April 202330 September 2019 to 31 March 2026. In addition, the Santander UK group has agreed to pay further contingent contributions should investment performance be worse than expected, or should the funding position have fallen behind plan at the next formal actuarial valuation.plan.

210Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

Actuarial assumptions

The principal actuarial assumptions used for the defined benefit schemes were:

 

            Group 
              2019               2018               2017 
 Group 
 

2018

%

 

2017

%

 

2016

  %   %   % 

To determine benefit obligations:

      2.1     

– Discount rate for scheme liabilities

 2.9 2.5 2.8    2.9    2.5 

– General price inflation

 3.2 3.2 3.1    3.0    3.2    3.2 

– General salary increase

 1.0 1.0 1.0    1.0    1.0    1.0 

– Expected rate of pension increase

 2.9 2.9 2.9    2.9    2.9    2.9 
       
 Years Years Years 
  Years   Years   Years 

Longevity at 60 for current pensioners, on the valuation date:

         

– Males

 27.3 27.4 27.8    27.3    27.3    27.4 

– Females

 30.1 30.1 30.3    29.8    30.1    30.1 

Longevity at 60 for future pensioners currently aged 40, on the valuation date:

      28.9     

– Males

 28.7 28.9 30.0    28.7    28.9 

– Females

 31.6 31.7 32.2    31.3    31.6    31.7 

LOGO

Santander UK plc187


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Discount rate for scheme liabilities

The rate used to discount the retirement benefit obligation for accounting purposes is based on the annual yield at the balance sheet date of high qualityhigh-quality corporate bonds on that date. There are only a limited number of higher quality Sterling-denominated corporate bonds, particularly those that are longer-dated. Therefore, in order to set a suitable discount rate, we need to construct a corporate bond yield curve. We consider a number of different data sources and methods of projecting forwardThe model which we use for constructing the curve uses corporate bond curve.data but excludes most convertible and asset-backed bonds. The curve is then constructed from this data by extrapolating the horizontal forward curve from 30 years, with the level of this forward rate being the average of the fitted forward rates over the 15 to 30 year range. When considering an appropriate assumption, we project forward the expected cash flows of the Scheme and adopt a single equivalent cash flow weighted discount rate, subject to management judgement.

During 2018 we reduced the level of management adjustment to the discount rate, noting the expanded range of different models used by UK companies, and the relatively higher discount rates being adopted. At 31 December 2018 this increased the discount rate applied and had a positive impact of £104m on the accounting surplus.

General price inflation

Consistent with our discount rate methodology, we set the inflation assumption using the expected cash flows of the Scheme, fitting them to an inflation curve to give a weighted average inflation assumption. We then deduct an inflation risk premium to reflect the compensation holders of fixed rate instruments expect to receive for taking on the inflation risk. This premium is subject to a cap, to better reflect management’s view of inflation expectations.

DuringGeneral salary increase

From 1 March 2015, a cap on pensionable pay increases of 1% each year was applied to staff in the year, the assumptions for setting the inflation risk premium were updated to reflect management’s current views of long term inflation. At 31 December 2018, this had a negative impact of £65m on the accounting surplus.Scheme.

Expected rate of pension increase

During the year, the methodology for setting the expected rate of pension increases was changed to better represent the current expectations for inflation volatility and the impact of caps and collars on pension increases. The revised pension increase assumption methodology uses a stochastic model, which is calibrated to consider both the observed historical volatility term structure and derivative pricing. The model provides an improvement in estimate because it allows for the likelihood that high or low inflation in one yearone-year feeds into inflation remaining high or low in the next year. At 31 December 2018 this had a negative impact of £85m on the accounting surplus.

Mortality assumptions

The mortality assumptions are based on an independent analysis of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme’s actual mortality experience, carried out as part of the triennial actuarial valuations,valuation, together with recent evidence from the Continuous Mortality Investigation Table ‘S2 Light’ mortality tables.Investigation. An allowance is then made for expected future improvements to life expectancy based on the Continuous Mortality Investigation Tables.

During 2018 we Following this review the S3 Medium all pensioner mortality table was adopted with appropriate adjustments to reflect the actual mortality experience. For future improvements, the CMI 20172018 projection model for futurewas adopted, with model parameters selected having had regard to the Scheme’s membership profile with an initial addition to improvements in life expectancyof 0.15% per annum, together with a long-term rate of future improvements to life expectancy of 1.25% for male and female members. This model incorporatesBoth of these are published by the latest available dataContinuous Mortality Investigation.

In 2019, the methodology for setting the demographic assumptions was changed to better represent current expectations, following a review carried out by the Trustee as part of the 2019 triennial valuation and a separate review conducted on trendsearly retirement experience. These reviews resulted in life expectancy.changes in the assumptions for commutation, family statistics and early retirement, in addition to the changes described above for mortality. At 31 December 2018, this2019, these changes combined had a positivenegative impact of £57m£44m on the accounting surplus.

Actuarial assumption sensitivities

The sensitivity analyses below have been determined based on reasonably possible changes of the respective assumptions occurring at the end of the reporting period, while holding all other assumptions constant.

 

      (Decrease)/increase 
     Increase/(decrease) 
Assumption   Change in pension obligation atyear-end from    2018
£m
     2017
£m
    Change in pension obligation atyear-end from  

2019

£m

 

2018

£m

 
Discount rate  25 bps increase     (483     (550 

                         

  25 bps increase   (564  (483
General price inflation  25 bps increase     350      365    25 bps increase   407   350 
General salary increase  25 bps increase     n/a      n/a 
Mortality   Each additional year of longevity assumed     335      367     Each additional year of longevity assumed   419   335 

The sensitivity analysis presented above may not be representative of the actual change in the defined benefit obligation as it is unlikely that the changes in assumptions would occur in isolation of one another as some of the assumptions may be correlated. Furthermore, in presenting the sensitivity analysis, the present value of the defined benefit obligation has been calculated using the projected unit credit method at the end of the reporting period, which is the same method used to calculate the defined benefit obligation recognised in the balance sheet. There were no changes in the methods and assumptions used in preparing the sensitivity analyses from prior years.

Santander UK plc211


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

The benefits expected to be paid in each of the next five years, and in the aggregate for the five years thereafter are:

 

Year ending 31 December

    

£m 

 

   £m 

2019

     266  

2020

     269     332 

2021

     287     308 

2022

     309     330 

2023

     325     343 

Five years ending 2028

     1,903  

2024

   364 

Five years ending 2029

           2,083 

The average duration of the defined benefit obligation at 31 December 20182019 was 19.118.8 years (2017: 20.1(2018: 19.1 years).

188    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

32.29. CONTINGENT LIABILITIES AND COMMITMENTS

 

       Group 
    Group 
    

2018(1) 
£m 

 

     

2017 
£m 

 

   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

Guarantees given to third parties

     1,610       1,557     1,198    1,610 

Formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments with original term to maturity of:

                 18,248    8,550 

– One year or less

     8,550       10,664  

– Later than one year

     31,561       31,278     22,149    31,561 
     41,721       43,499             41,595            41,721 

For segmental and credit risk staging analysis relating tooff-balance sheet exposures, see the credit quality table in the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section.

(1)

For segmental and credit risk staging analysis relating tooff-balance sheet exposures, see the IFRS 9 credit quality table in the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section.

At 31 December 2018,2019, the Santander UK group had credit impairment loss provisions relating to guarantees given to third parties and undrawn loan commitments. See Note 3027 for further details. The Company has no material expectedFor segmental and credit losses on guarantees providedrisk staging analysis relating to fellow Banco Santanderoff-balance sheet exposures, see the credit quality table in the ‘Santander UK group subsidiaries.level – credit risk review’ section.

Where the items set out below can be reliably estimated, they are disclosed in the table above.

Capital support arrangements

Guarantees given byFrom 1 January 2019, following the implementation of ring-fencing, Santander UK plc, to its subsidiaries and fellow subsidiaries of Santander UK Group Holdings plc

Santander UK plc has fully and unconditionally guaranteed the unsubordinated liabilities of Cater Allen Limited and certain othernon-regulated subsidiaries within the ring-fenced bank entered into a wholly owned subsidiary, that have been orcapital support deed dated 13 November 2018 (the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed). The parties to the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed are permitted by the PRA to form a core UK group as defined in the PRA Rulebook, a permission which will be incurred beforeexpire on 31 December 2020. Santander2021. Exposures of each of the regulated entities to other members of the core UK plc had previously fully and unconditionally guaranteedgroup are exempt from large exposure limits that would otherwise apply. The purpose of the unsubordinatedRFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed is to facilitate the prompt transfer of available capital resources from, or repayment of liabilities by, thenon-regulated parties to any of ANTSthe regulated parties in the event that had been incurred before 31 December 2018. As partone of our ring-fencing implementation, this guarantee was terminated and wasthe regulated parties breaches or is at risk of no further force and effect such that, with effect frombreaching its capital resources requirements or risk concentrations requirements.

Prior to 1 January 2019, Santander UK plc, was released and discharged from all related present and future obligations and liabilities.

Capital Support Deed

At 31 December 2018, Santander UK plc, ANTSSFS and Cater Allen Limited, which are the threePRA-regulated entities within the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group, were party to a capital support deed dated 23 December 2015 (the Capital Support Deed 2015) with Santander UK Group Holdings plc and certain othernon-regulated subsidiaries of Santander UK plc. The parties to the Capital Support Deed 2015 were permitted by the PRA to form a core UK group as defined in the PRA Rulebook. Exposures of each of the three regulated entities to other members of the core UK group were exempt from large exposure limits that would otherwise apply. The purpose of the Capital Support Deed 2015 was to facilitate the prompt transfer of available capital resources from, or repayment of liabilities by, thenon-regulated parties to any of the regulated parties in the event that one of the regulated parties breached or was at risk of breaching its capital resources requirements or risk concentrations requirements.

The core UK group permission as supported by the Capital Support Deed 2015 expired on 31 December 2018. With effect from 1 January 2019, and in accordance with our ring-fenced structure, Santander UK plc, Cater Allen Limited and certain other

non-regulated subsidiaries within the ring-fenced bank entered into a new Capital Support Deed dated 13 November 2018 (the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed). From 1 January 2019, the parties to the RFBSub-Group Capital Support Deed were permitted by the PRA to form a new core UK group, a permission which will expire on 31 December 2021. Other than the change of the entities in scope, the purpose of the RFB SubGroupSub-Group Capital Support Deed is the same as the previous Capital Support Deed 2015.

Liquidity support arrangements

From 1 January 2019, following the implementation of ring-fencing, we monitor and manage liquidity risk for the Santander UK plc group and SFS separately. Under this model, and the PRA’s liquidity rules, Santander UK plc and its subsidiary Cater Allen Limited form the RFB Domestic LiquiditySub-group (DoLSub)(the RFB DoLSub), which allows the entities to collectively meet regulatory requirements for the purpose of managing liquidity risk. Each member of the RFB DoLSub will support the other by transferring surplus liquidity in times of stress.

As a firm subjectPrior to the liquidity obligations in the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR),1 January 2019, Santander UK plc, applied for, and was granted, a CRR Article 8 DoLSub CRR permission (DoLSub Article 8 permission). At 31 December 2018, the UK DoLSub comprised the entities Santander UK plc, ANTS plcSFS and Cater Allen Limited. WithLimited formed the Domestic LiquiditySub-group (the DoLSub), which allowed those entities to collectively meet regulatory liquidity requirements. The RFB DoLSub permission granted with effect from 1 January 2019 and in accordance with our ring-fenced structure, Santander UK plc was granted a new DolSub permission, withdrawing ANTS plcwithdrew SFS from the UKprevious DoLSub. The DoLSub waiver replaces the requirement for liquidity adequacy and reporting on an individual basis.

Guarantees given to third parties

Guarantees given to third parties consist primarily of letters of credit, bonds and guarantees granted as part of normal product facilities which are offered to customers.

212Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

Formal standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments

Standby facilities, credit lines and other commitments are also granted as part of normal product facilities which are offered to customers. Retail facilities comprise undrawn facilities granted on flexible mortgages, bank overdrafts and credit cards. On flexible mortgages, the credit limit is set at the point of granting the loan through property value and affordability assessments. Ongoing assessments are made to ensure that credit limits remain appropriate considering any change in the security value or the customer’s financial circumstances. For unsecured overdraft facilities and credit cards, the facilities are granted based on new business risk assessment and are reviewed more frequently based on internal, as well as external data. The delinquency status of the account would result in the withdrawal of the facility. Corporate facilities can comprise standby and revolving facilities which are subject to ongoing compliance with covenants and may require the provision of agreed security. Failure to comply with these terms can result in the withdrawal of the unutilised facility headroom.

FSCS

As described in Note 30,27, the Santander UK group participates in the UK’s national resolution scheme, the FSCS, and is thus subject to levies to fund the FSCS. In the event thatIf the FSCS significantly increase the levies to be paid by firms, the associated costs to the Santander UK group would rise.

Loan representations and warranties

In connection with the securitisations and covered bond transactions described in Note 15,14, the Santander UK group entities selling the relevant loans into the applicable securitisation or covered bond portfolios make representations and warranties with respect to such loans, in each case as of the date of the sale of the loans into the applicable portfolio. These representations and warranties cover, among other things, the ownership of the loan by the relevant Santander UK group entity, absence of a material breach or default by the relevant borrower under the loan, the loan’s compliance with applicable laws and absence of material disputes with respect to the relevant borrower, asset and loan. The specific representations and warranties made by Santander UK group companies which act as sellers of loans in these securitisations and covered bond transactions depend in each case on the nature of the transaction and the requirements of the transaction structure. In addition, market conditions and credit rating agency requirements may affect the representations and warranties required of the relevant Santander UK group companies in these transactions.

In the event that there is a material breach of the representations and warranties given by Santander UK plc as seller of loans under the residential mortgage-backed securitisations or the covered bond transactionprogrammes included in Note 15,14, or if such representations and warranties prove to be materially untrue as at the date when they were given (being the sale date of the relevant mortgage loans), Santander UK plc may be required to repurchase the affected mortgage loans (generally at their outstanding principal balance plus accrued interest). These securitisationsecuritisations and covered bond transactionsprogrammes are collateralised by prime residential mortgage loans. Santander UK plc is principally a retail prime lender and has no appetite or product offering for any type ofsub-prime business. In addition, Santander UK plc’s credit policy explicitly prohibits such lending.

LOGO

Santander UK plc189


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Similarly, under the auto loan securitisations in Note 15,14, in the event that there is a breach or inaccuracy in respect of a representation or warranty relating to the loans, the relevant Santander UK group entity who sold the auto loans into the securitisation portfolio will be required to repurchase such loans from the structure (also at their outstanding principal balance plus accrued interest). In addition to breaches of representation and warranties, under the auto loan securitisations, the seller may also have a repurchase obligation if certain portfolio limits are breached (which include, amongst other things, limits as to the size of a loan given to an individual customer, LTV ratio, average term to maturity and average seasoning).

In the case of a repurchase of a loan from the relevant securitisation or covered bond portfolio,programmes, the Santander UK group may bear any subsequent credit loss on such loan. The Santander UK group manages and monitors its securitisation and covered bond activities closely to minimise potential claims.

Other legal actions and regulatory matters

Santander UK engages in discussion, andco-operates, with the FCA, PRA, CMA and other regulators and government agencies in various jurisdictions in their supervision and review of Santander UK including reviews exercised under statutory powers, regarding its interaction with past and present customers, both as part of general thematic work and in relation to specific products, services and activities. During the ordinary course of business, Santander UK is also subject to complaints and threatened legal proceedings brought by or on behalf of current or former employees, customers, investors or other third parties, in addition to legal and regulatory reviews, challenges and tax or enforcement investigations or proceedings in various jurisdictions. All such matters are assessed periodically to determine the likelihood of Santander UK incurring a liability.

In those instances where it is concluded that it is not yet probable that a quantifiable payment will be made, for example because the facts are unclear or further time is required to fully assess the merits of the case or to reasonably quantify the expected payment, no provision is made. In addition, where it is not currently practicable to estimate the possible financial effect of these matters, no provision is made.

Payment Protection Insurance

Note 30 details our provisions including those in relation to PPI. In relation to a specific PPI portfolio of complaints, a legal dispute regarding allocation of liability is ongoing and remains in its early stages. ThereThe dispute relates to the liability for PPImis-selling complaints relating topre-2005 PPI policies underwritten by Financial Insurance Company Ltd (FICL) and Financial Assurance Company Ltd (FACL) and involves two Santander UK plc subsidiaries, Santander Cards UK Limited and Santander Insurance Services Limited (the Santander Entities). During the relevant period, FICL and FACL were owned by Genworth Financial International Holdings, Inc. In July 2015 AXA S.A. (AXA) acquired FICL and FACL from Genworth. In July 2017, Santander UK plc notified AXA that the Santander Entities did not accept liability for losses on PPI policies relating to this period. Santander UK plc entered into a Complaints Handling Agreement (CHA) with FICL and FACL pursuant to which it agreed to handle complaints on their behalf, and FICL and FACL agreed to pay redress assessed to be due to relevant policyholders on a without prejudice basis.

A related dispute between AXA and (1) Genworth Financial International Holdings, Inc. and (2) Genworth Financial, Inc. (Genworth) concerning, inter alia, the proper construction of an alleged obligation to make payment on demand of a sum equal to 90% of all applicable PPImis-selling losses (the Construction Issue) in a sale and purchase agreement dated 17 September 2015 (SPA) was determined by the High Court (Court) in December 2019. The Santander Entities were joined as third parties in connection with an application for declaratory relief by Genworth. This application related to Genworth’s assertion that upon any payment to AXA under the SPA, Genworth would have rights of subrogation against the Santander Entities (the Subrogation Issue). The Court found against Genworth and in favour of AXA on the Construction Issue, and against Genworth and in favour of the Santander Entities in relation to the Subrogation Issue. In documents before the Court, AXA’s claim was stated to be £265 million as at the end of 2018, noting further significantly larger sums would be demanded. During the Court hearing in November 2019, AXA noted that it had sought further sums, bringing the outstanding sum of its claim against Genworth to around £350 million at that time, with such figure likely to increase significantly.

Genworth’s application for permission to appeal was refused by the Court. Genworth made an application for permission to appeal to the Court of Appeal on 10 January 2020. The application for permission to appeal has not yet been determined. Most recently in its US SEC filing of 27 February 2020, Genworth noted that AXA had at that date submitted invoices claiming aggregate losses of approximately US$560 million.

More generally, there are ongoing factual issues to be resolved which may have legal consequences including in relation to liability. These issues create uncertainties which mean that it is difficultnot currently practicable to reliably predict the resolution of the matter including timing or the significance of the possible impact.

Santander UK plc213


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

The PPIRegulatory and other provision in Note 27 includes our best estimate of Santander UK’s liability to the specific portfolio. Further information has not been provided on the basis that it would be seriously prejudicial.prejudicial to Santander UK’s interests in connection with the dispute.

In addition, and in relation to PPI more generally, there are legal claims being made by Claims Management Companies challenging the FCA’s industry guidance on the treatment of Plevin /recurringnon-disclosure assessments. No provision has been made as it is not possible to make a reliable estimate of the possible outflow of economic resource relating to this risk.

German dividend tax arbitrage transactions

In June 2018 the Cologne Criminal Prosecution Office and the German Federal Tax Office commenced an investigation in relation to the historical involvement of Santander UK plc, ANTSSantander Financial Services plc and Cater Allen International Limited (all subsidiaries of Santander UK Group Holdings plc) are currently under investigation by the Cologne Criminal Prosecution Office and the German Federal Tax Office in relation to historical involvement in German dividend tax arbitrage transactions (known as cum/ex transactions). WeThese transactions allegedly exploited a feature of a specific German settlement mechanism through short-selling and complex derivative structuring which resulted in the German government either refunding withholding tax where such tax had not been paid or refunding it more than once. The German authorities are cooperatinginvestigating numerous institutions and individuals in connection with alleged transactions and practices which may be found to be illegal under German law.

During 2019 we have continued to cooperate with the German authorities and, are conducting our ownwith the assistance of external experts, to progress an internal investigation into the matters in question. From Santander UK plc’s perspective the investigation is focused principally on the period 2009-2011 and remainson-going.There areremain factual issues to be resolved which may have legal consequences including potentially material financial penalties. These issues create uncertainties which mean that it is difficult to predict with reasonable certainty the resolution of the matter including timing or the significance of the possible impact. Any potential losses, claims or expenses suffered or incurred by Santander Financial Services plc in respect of these matters have been fully indemnified by Santander UK plc, as part of the ring-fencing transfer scheme between Santander UK plc, Santander Financial Services plc and Banco Santander SA.

Consumer credit

The Santander UK group’s unsecured lending and other consumer credit business is governed by consumer credit law and related regulations, including the CCA. Claims brought by customers in relation to these requirements, including potential breaches, of these requirements could result in costs to the Santander UK group where such potential breaches are not found to be de minimis. The CCA includes very detailed and prescriptive requirements for lenders, including in relation to post contractual information.

As described in Note 30,27, other provisions includesinclude an amount of £58m£68m arising from a systems relatedsystems-related historical issue identified by Santander UK, relating to compliance with certain requirements of the CCA. This provision has been based on detailed reviews of relevant systems related to consumer credit business operations, supported by external legal and regulatory advice, but these reviewsadvice. Reviews of systems, commercial agreements and the legal and regulatory position are not yet complete,ongoing, such that the approachpotential for additional remedial action is still being determined. The Regulatory and timing to any remediation has not yet been finalised. As a result,other provision in Note 27 includes our best estimate of Santander UK’s liability for the specific issue. The actual cost of customer compensation could differ materially from the amount provided, and itprovided. It is not currently practicable to provide a reliablean estimate of the risk and amount or timing of any additionalfurther financial effects.impact.

Taxation

The Santander UK group engages in discussion, andco-operates, with HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC) in their oversight of the Santander UK group’s tax matters. The Santander UK group adopted the UK’s Code of Practice on Taxation for Banks in 2010.

Certain leases in which the Santander UK group is or was the lessor are currently under review by HMRC in connection with claims for tax allowances. Under the terms of the lease agreements, the Santander UK group is fully indemnified in all material respects by the respective lessees for any liability arising from the disallowance of tax allowances plus accrued interest, which could be up to £146m. Whilst legal opinions have been obtained to support the Santander UK group’s position, the matter remains uncertain pending formal resolution with HMRC and any subsequent litigation. It is anticipated that the matters will move to formal litigation in 2020 as required under the terms of the leases.

Other

On 2 November 2015, Visa Europe Ltd agreed to sell 100% of its share capital to Visa Inc. The deal closed on 21 June 2016. As a member and shareholder of Visa Europe Ltd, Santander UK received upfront consideration made up of cash and convertible preferred stock. Additional deferred cash consideration is also payable following the third anniversary of closing. Conversion of the preferred stock into Class A Common Stock of Visa Inc. depends on the outcome of litigation against Visa involving UK & Ireland (UK&I) multilateral interchange fees (MIFs). Santander UK and certain other UK&I banks have agreed to indemnify Visa Inc. in the event that the preferred stock is insufficient to meet the costs of this litigation. Visa Inc. has recourse to this indemnity once more than1bn of losses relating to UK&I MIFs have arisen or once the total value of the preferred stock issued to UK&I banks on closing has been reduced to nil. In valuing the preferred stock, Santander UK makes adjustments for illiquidity and the potential for changes in conversion. Visa Inc. may have recourse to a general indemnity in place under Visa Europe Operating Regulations for damages not satisfied through the above mechanism.

As part of the sale of subsidiaries, businesses and other entities, and as is normal in such circumstances, Santander UK has given warranties and indemnities to the purchasers.

Obligations under stock borrowing and lending agreements

Obligations under stock borrowing and lending agreements represent contractual commitments to return stock borrowed. These obligations are offset by a contractual right to receive stock under other contractual agreements. See Note 37.34.

190    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

Otheroff-balance sheet commitments

The Santander UK group has commitments to lend at fixed interest rates which expose us to interest rate risk. For more, see the Risk review.

214Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

Operating lease commitments

The table below shows the rental commitments undernon-cancellable operating leases at 31 December 2018. Following the application of IFRS 16 at 1 January 2019, Santander UK now recognises a lease liability on the balance sheet to represent its obligation to make lease payments. For more information, including a reconciliation of operating lease commitments at 31 December 2018 to lease liabilities recognised at 1 January 2019, see Note 1.

 

     Group  
  Rental commitments undernon-cancellable operating leases    2018 
£m 
     2017 
£m 
 

Not later than one year

     72       73  

Later than one year and not later than five years

     114       160  

Later than five years

     60       70  
      246       303  
            Group
2018
  Rental commitments undernon-cancellable operating leases£m

Not later than one year

72

Later than one year and not later than five years

114

Later than five years

60
246

The majority of leases are subject to a third party outsourcing contract wherebywhich expires in December 2020 and the remainder are held directly by the Santander UK group has the right to extend the occupation of properties by a minimum of three years subject to 12 months’ notice and a lease renewal being available from externalwith third party landlords. Where leases subject to the outsourcing contract expire on or after the expiry of the outsourcing contract in December 2020 and occupation is still required, negotiations will be held directly with the landlords of these properties, to agree renewal terms.

Negotiations will be in accordance with a conventional landlord and tenant negotiation on lease expiry, subject to a lease renewal being available from the external landlords. Where a freehold interest in the property is held by the outsourcing company, a notice has been served under the contract confirming the properties where a new lease is required post-2020. The terms for the leases of these properties will also be negotiated during 2020. In 2018, rental expense amounted to £61m (2017: £61m, 2016: £61m), including minimum rentals of £63m (2017: £61m, 2016: £61m), offset bysub-lease rental income of £2m (2017: £nil, 2016: £nil). There was no contingent rent expense included in this amount.

33.30. SHARE CAPITAL

 

                          Group 
  Ordinary shares             £300m Preference shares of     Total 
  Group    of £0.10 each      £1,000 each         
                           Ordinary shares
of £0.10 each
         £300m Preference shares 
of £1,000 each 
             Total  
Issued and fully paid share capital  No.     £m No.     £m  £m    No.   £m     No. £m     £m 
At 1 January 2017, 31 December 2017, 1 January 2018 and 31 December 2018   31,051,768,866      3,105  13,780      14               3,119  

At 1 January 2018, 31 December 2018 and 1 January 2019

   31,051,768,866    3,105     13,780              14     3,119 

Redemption of preference shares

             (13,780 (14     (14

At 31 December 2019

   31,051,768,866                    3,105                           3,105 

 

                   Group 
  2019   2018 
    Group  
Share premium    2018 
£m 
     2017 
£m 
   £m   £m 

At 1 January and 31 December

     5,620       5,620                 5,620    5,620 

The Company has one class of ordinary shares which carries no right to fixed income. The Company’s £325m sterling preference shares are classified as Subordinated Liabilities as described in Note 29.26.

£300m Fixed/Floating RateNon-Cumulative Callable Preference Shares

The remaining preference shares entitle the holders to a fixednon-cumulative dividend, at the discretion of Santander UK plc, of 6.222% per annum payable annually from 24 May 2010 until 24 May 2019 and quarterly thereafter at a rate of 1.13% per annum above three month sterling LIBOR. The preference shares are redeemablewere redeemed at the option of Santander UK plc on 24 May 2019 or on each quarterly dividend payment date thereafter. No such redemption may be made without the consent of the PRA.2019.

LOGO

Santander UK plc191


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

34.31. OTHER EQUITY INSTRUMENTS

 

                                                    Group    
     Initial interest rate
%
     First call date   

2018

£m

     

2017 

£m 

 

£300mStep-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

     7.037      February 2026    235      235  

AT1 securities:

              

– £500m Perpetual Capital Securities

     6.75      June 2024    496      496  

– £750m Perpetual Capital Securities

     7.375      June 2022    750      750  

– £300m Perpetual Capital Securities

     7.60      December 2019    300      300  

– £500m Perpetual Capital Securities

     6.475      June 2019    210      500  
                  1,991      2,281  
                Group 
           Interest rate
%
           Next call date   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

 

£300mStep-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

   7.037    February 2026    235    235 

AT1 securities:

        

– £500m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities

   6.75    June 2024    496    496 

– £750m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities

   7.375    June 2022    750    750 

– £300m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities

   7.60    n/a        300 

– £500m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities

   5.18    March 2020    210    210 

– £500m Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities

   6.30    March 2025    500     
                          2,191                1,991 

Step-up Callable Perpetual Reserve Capital Instruments

These instruments are redeemable by Santander UK plc on 14 February 2026 or on any coupon payment date thereafter, subject to the prior approval of the PRA. They are perpetual and pay interest annually. The coupon rate resets every five years, based on the UK five-year benchmark gilt rate. Interest payments may be deferred by Santander UK plc. The instruments are not redeemable at the option of the holders and the holders do not have any rights against other Santander UK group companies.

Santander UK plc215


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

AT1 securities

The AT1 securities issued by the Company were subscribed by its immediate parent company, Santander UK Group Holdings plc, meet the CRD IV AT1 rules and are fully recognised as AT1 capital.plc. The securities are perpetual and pay a distribution on 24 March, June, September and December. At each distribution payment date, the Company can decide whether to pay the distribution, which isnon-cumulative, in whole or in part. The distribution rate resets every five years based on prevailing 5 year sterling mid swap rates.years. The securities will be automatically written down and the investors will lose their entire investment in the securities should the CET1 capital ratio of the Santander UK prudential consolidation group fall below 7%. They are redeemable at the option of the Company on their first call date or on any reset date thereafter in the cases of the 6.75% and 7.375% Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities, and on any distribution payment date thereafter in the cases of the 7.60%5.18% and 6.475%6.30% Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities. No such redemption may be made without the consent of the PRA.

During 2018,In August 2019, as part of a capital management exercise, Santander UK plcthe Company purchased and redeemed 58% of the 6.475%£300m 7.60% Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital securities.Securities, and issued a further £500m 6.30% Fixed Rate Reset Perpetual AT1 Capital Securities to Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

35.32.NON-CONTROLLING INTERESTS

 

     2018
£m
     2017
£m
 

PSA Finance UK Limited

     151      152 
      151      152 
   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 

PSA Finance UK Limited

   160    151 
                             160                151 

PSA Finance UK Limited is the only subsidiary in the Santander UK group that gives rise to significantnon-controlling interests. See Note 2119 for summarised financial information of PSA Finance UK Limited.

192    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

36.33. CHANGES IN LIABILITIES ARISING FROM FINANCING ACTIVITIES

The table below shows the changes in liabilities arising from financing activities.

 

                               Group 
 Group 
 2018 2017  2019     2018 
 Balance sheet line item     Balance sheet line item     
 

Debt
securities

 Subordinated Other equity Dividends   Debt
   securities
 Subordinated Other equity Dividends    Balance sheet line item         Balance sheet line item      
 in issue liabilities instruments paid Total in issue liabilities instruments paid Total 
 £m £m £m £m £m £m £m £m £m £m  

Debt
securities

in issue

£m

 

Subordinated
liabilities

£m

 Other equity
instruments
£m
 

Dividends
paid

£m

       Total
£m
   Debt
securities
in issue
£m
 

Subordinated
liabilities

£m

 Other equity
instruments
£m
 

Dividends
paid

£m

       Total
£m
 

At 1 January

 42,633  3,793  2,281     48,707   50,346   4,303   1,785      56,434  46,692  3,601  1,991     52,284    42,633   3,793   2,281      48,707 

Cash flows from financing activities

 4,615  (277 (290 (1,318 2,730   (7,081  (52  496   (1,000  (7,637 (3,839    196  (469 (4,112   4,615   (277  (290  (1,318  2,730 

Cash flows from operating activities

 (2,522 69        (2,453  115   254         369  (529          (529   (2,522  69         (2,453

Non-cash changes:

                     

– Unrealised foreign exchange

 1,371  149        1,520   (255  (235        (490 (1,320 (50       (1,370   1,371   149         1,520 

– Other changes

 595  (133    1,318  1,780   (492  (477     1,000   31  125  (23 4  469  575     595   (133     1,318   1,780 

At 31 December

 46,692  3,601  1,991     52,284   42,633   3,793   2,281      48,707              41,129  3,528  2,191     46,848     46,692   3,601   1,991      52,284 

37.

216Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

34. ASSETS CHARGED AS SECURITY FOR LIABILITIES AND COLLATERAL ACCEPTED AS SECURITY FOR ASSETS

The following transactions are conducted under terms that are usual and customary to collateralised transactions including, where relevant, standard securities lending and repurchase agreements.

a) Assets charged as security for liabilities

The financial assets below are analysed between those assets accounted foron-balance sheet andoff-balance sheet.

 

     Group  
     2018
£m
     2017 
£m 
 

On-balance sheet:

        

Cash and balances at central banks

     1,080      1,010  

Trading assets

           17,092  

Loans and advances to customers – securitisations and covered bonds (See Note 15)

     35,694      35,421  

Loans and advances to customers – other

     15,175      15,078  

Loans and advances to banks

     218      105  

Other financial assets at amortised cost

     3,763     

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

     5,825     

Financial investments

            6,755  

Totalon-balance sheet

     61,755      75,461  

Totaloff-balance sheet

     15,220      33,013  

LOGO

Santander UK plc193


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

        Group 
   2019   2018 
   £m   £m 

On-balance sheet:

    

Cash and balances at central banks

   1,080    1,080 

Loans and advances to banks

   403    218 

Loans and advances to customers – securitisations and covered bonds (See Note 14)

   36,225    35,694 

Loans and advances to customers – other

   16,282    15,175 

Other financial assets at amortised cost

   3,026    3,763 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

   6,009    5,825 

Totalon-balance sheet

   63,025    61,755 

Totaloff-balance sheet

           15,098            15,220 

The Santander UK group provides assets as collateral in the following areas of the business.

Sale and repurchase agreements

The Santander UK group enters into sale and repurchase agreements and similar transactions of equity and debt securities, which are accounted for as secured borrowings. Upon entering into such transactions, the Santander UK group provides collateral in excess of the borrowed amount. The carrying amount of assets that were so provided at 31 December 20182019 was £17,485m (2017: £34,310m)£20,686m (2018: £17,485m), of which £2,383m (2017: £2,931m)£2,067m (2018: £2,383m) was classified within ‘Loans and advances to customers – securitisations and covered bonds’ in the table above.

Securitisations and covered bonds

As described in Note 15,14, Santander UK plc and certain of its subsidiaries issue securitisations and covered bonds. At 31 December 2018,2019, there were £36,195m (2017: £36,512m)£36,391m (2018: £36,195m) of gross assets in these secured programmes and £501m (2017: £1,091m)£166m (2018: £501m) of these related to internally retained issuances andthat were available for use as collateral for liquidity purposes in the future.

At 31 December 2018,2019, a total of £4,039m (2017: £4,359m)£4,728m (2018: £4,039m) of notes issued under securitisation and covered bond programmes had been retained internally, a proportion of which had been used as collateral for raising funds via third party bilateral secured funding transactions, which totalled £1,834m£1,581m at 31 December 2018 (2017:2019 (2018: £1,834m), or for use as collateral for liquidity purposes in the future.

Stock borrowing and lending agreements

Asset balances under stock borrowing and lending agreements represent stock lent by the Santander UK group. These balances amounted to £24,714m£21,563m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £38,016m)2019 (2018: £24,714m) and are offset by contractual commitments to return stock borrowed or cash received.

Derivatives business

In addition to the arrangements described, collateral is also provided in the normal course of derivative business to counterparties. At 31 December 2018, £1,465m (2017: £3,658m)2019 £1,716m (2018: £1,465m) of such collateral in the form of cash had been provided by the Santander UK group and is included in the table.

b) Collateral accepted as security for assets

The collateral held as security for assets, analysed between those liabilities accounted for on balance sheet andoff-balance sheet, was:

 

       Group 
  2019   2018 
 

Group 

           2018 
£m 
                2017 
£m 
  £m   £m 

On-balance sheet:

         

Trading liabilities

 –     1,911 

Deposits by customers

 –     

Deposits by banks

 4,048     1,760    2,169    4,048 

Totalon-balance sheet

 4,048     3,679    2,169    4,048 

Totaloff-balance sheet

 23,236     38,655            25,120            23,236 

Purchase and resale agreements

The Santander UK group also enters into purchase and resale agreements and similar transactions of equity and debt securities, which are accounted for as collateralised loans. Upon entering into such transactions, the Santander UK group receives collateral in excess of the loan amount. The level of collateral held is monitored daily and if required, further calls are made to ensure the market values of collateral remains at least equal to the loan balance. The subsidiaries are permitted to sell or repledge the collateral held in the absence of default. At 31 December 2018,2019, the fair value of such collateral received was £15,728m (2017: £16,356m)£20,444m (2018: £15,728m). Of the collateral received, almost all was sold or repledged. The subsidiaries have an obligation to return collateral that they have sold or pledged.

Stock borrowing and lending agreements

Obligations representing contractual commitments to return stock borrowed by the Santander UK group amounted to £7,508m£4,676m at 31 December 2018 (2017: £22,299m)2019 (2018: £7,508m) and are offset by a contractual right to receive stock lent.

Derivatives business

In addition to the arrangements described, collateral is also received from counterparties in the normal course of derivative business. At 31 December 2018, £4,048m (2017: £3,679m)2019, £2,169m (2018: £4,048m) of such collateral in the form of cash had been received by the Santander UK group and is included in the table.

Lending activities

In addition to the collateral held as security for assets, the Santander UK group may obtain a charge over a customer’s property in connection with its lending activities. Details of these arrangements are set out in the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

 

194Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements217


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

38.

35. SHARE-BASED COMPENSATION

The Santander UK group operates share schemes and arrangements for eligible employees. The main current schemes are the Sharesave Schemes, the Long-Term Incentive Plan (the LTIP), the Deferred Shares Bonus Plan and the Partnership Shares scheme. All the share options and awards relate to shares in Banco Santander SA. In 2018, as part of the implementation of our ring-fencing plans, the Sharesave Schemes were transferred to SEIL, which was subsequently transferred outside of the Santander UK group, but remained within the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group.

The amount charged to the income statement in respect of share-based payment transactions is set out in Note 6. The total carrying amount at the end of the year for liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions was £nil (2017: £16.7m), of which £nil had vested at 31 December 2018 (2017: £nil).

a) Sharesave Schemes

The Santander UK group launched its twelfth HM Revenue & Customs approved Sharesave Scheme under Banco Santander SA ownership in September 2019. The first eleven Sharesave Schemes were launched each year from 2008 to 20172018 under broadly similar terms. Under the Sharesave Scheme’s HMRC-approved savings limits, eligible employees may enter into contracts to save between £5 and £500 per month. For all schemes, at the end of a fixed term of three or five years after the grant date, the employees can use these savings to buy shares in Banco Santander SA at a discount, calculated in accordance with the rules of the scheme. The discount is currently 10% of the average middle market quoted price of Banco Santander SA shares over the first three dealing days prior to invitation. The vesting of awards under the scheme depends on continued employment with the Banco Santander SA group. Participants in the scheme have six months from the date of vest to exercise the option.

In 2018, as part of the implementation of our ring-fencing plans, the Sharesave Schemes were transferred to SEIL, which was subsequently transferred outside of the Santander UK group, but remained within the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group. Information relating to the Sharesave Schemes administered by SEIL is presented below as employees of the Santander UK group are participants.

The table below summarises movements in the number of options, during the year, and changes in weighted average exercise price over the same period.

 

     2019         2018 
    2018      2017      2016 
    Number of
options
‘000
   Weighted
average
exercise price
£
     Number of
options
‘000
   Weighted
average
exercise price
£
     Number of
options
‘000
   Weighted
average
exercise price
£
   Number of options
‘000
 

Weighted average
exercise price

£

     Number of options
‘000
 

Weighted average
exercise price

£

 

Outstanding at 1 January

     27,201    3.12       28,916    3.08       24,762    3.53    26,838  3.12     27,201   3.12 

Granted

                3,916    4.02       17,296    4.91    9,594  2.83     6,210   3.46 

Exercised

     (334   3.47       (1,918   3.77       (338   3.67    (7,978 2.83     (3,340  3.16 

Forfeited/expired

     (2,618   3.83       (3,713   3.40       (12,804   3.51    (5,081 3.42      (3,233  3.76 

Transferred to SEIL

     (24,249   3.04                         

Outstanding at 31 December

                 27,201    3.12        28,916    3.08            23,373  3.03      26,838   3.12 

Exercisable at 31 December

     10,370    2.81        5,200    3.17        2,334    4.30    2,519  3.62      10,370   2.81 

The weighted average share price at the date the options were exercised was £4.74 (2017: £4.96, 2016:£3.18 (2018: £3.79).

The following table summarises the range of exercise prices and weighted average remaining contractual life of the options at 31 December 20182019 and 2017.2018.

 

       2019           2018 
  2018     2017 
Range of exercise prices  Weighted average
remaining
contractual life
Years
 Weighted
average
exercise price
£
   Weighted average
remaining
contractual life
Years
     Weighted
average
exercise price
£
   Weighted average
remaining
contractual life
Years
   Weighted
average
exercise price
£
       Weighted average
remaining
contractual life
Years
   Weighted
average
exercise price
£
 

£2 to £3

          3      2.75    3    2.80     2    2.75 

£3 to £4

          1      3.17    2    3.38     3    3.36 

£4 to £5

          3      4.21    2    4.13      3    4.11 

The fair value of each option for 2018, 2017 and 2016 has been estimated at the date of acquisition or grant is estimated using a partial differentiation equation model. This model uses assumptions on the share price, the EUR/GBP FX rate, the risk free interest rate, dividend yields, the expected volatility of the underlying shares and the expected lives of options granted under 3 and 5 year schemes.granted. The weighted average grant-date fair value of options granted during the year was £nil (2017: £1.02, 2016: £0.65)£0.49 (2018: £0.53).

At 31 December 2019, the carrying amount of liabilities arising from share-based payment transactions in the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group was £2.4m (2018: £7.7m), of which £1.4m had vested at 31 December 2019 (2018: £0.7m).

b) LTIP

In 2014 and 2015, conditional cash awards were made to certain Executive Directors, Key Management Personnel (as defined in Note 39)36) and other nominated individuals which are converted into shares in Banco Santander SA at the time of vesting and deferred for three years. There have been no LTIP awards granted since 2015 due to the introduction of a single variable remuneration framework across the Banco Santander group in 2016.

The LTIP plans granted in 2014 and 2015 involveinvolved aone-year performance cycle for vesting, deferred for a further three-year period dependent upon performance conditions applied. Beneficiaries were granted an initial award determined in GBP which was converted into shares in Banco Santander SA in January 2015 and January 2016 respectively based on performance over the performance cycle. The 2014 LTIP vested at 100% in January 2015 based on Banco Santander SA’s relative Total Shareholder Return (TSR) performance in 2014 versus a comparator group and was deferred over three years. The awards lapsed during 2018 due to the performance conditions not being satisfied. The 2015 LTIP vested in January 2016, was deferred over three years and was subject to performance conditions based on Banco Santander SA’s Earnings Per Share (EPS) and Return on Tangible Equity (RoTE) performance against budget. The conditions of the 2015 LTIP have beenwere met and will be paid outpayment was made to the remaining eligible population in the first quarter ofMarch 2019 at 65.78% of the original award.

The following table summarises the movement in the value of conditional awards in the LTIPs in 2018, 20172019 and 2016:2018:

 

     2015 LTIP        2014 LTIP 
     2018
£000
   2017
£000
   2016
£000
        2018
£000
   2017
£000
   2016
£000
 

Outstanding at 1 January

     6,503    6,718    6,769        1,910    3,193    5,102 

Forfeited/cancelled

     (129   (215)(1)     (51       (1,910   (1,283)(1)     (1,909

Outstanding at 31 December

     6,374    6,503    6,718             1,910    3,193 

(1)The outstanding shares have been updated to compensate for the equity dilution caused by the shares issued by Banco Santander SA in July 2017.

See Note 39 for details of conditional share awards made to certain Executive Directors, Other Key Management Personnel and other individuals under the LTIP.

LOGO

       2015 LTIP           2014 LTIP 
   

2019

£000

  

2018

£000

      2019
£000
   

2018

£000

 

Outstanding at 1 January

           6,374           6,503             –            1,910 

Payments made

   (4,578            

Forfeited/cancelled

   (1,796  (129           (1,910

Outstanding at 31 December

      6,374             

 

218Santander UK plc195


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

c) Deferred shares bonus plan

Deferred bonus awards are designed to align employee performance with shareholder value and encourage increased retention of senior employees. During 20172018 and 2018,2019, conditional share awards were made to employees (designated as Material Risk Takers). Such employees receive part of their annual bonus as a deferred award comprising 50% in shares, and 50% in cash. Any deferred awards are dependent on future service.continued employment or subject to Santander’s discretion for leavers. For 20172018 and 20182019 bonus awards, deferral of the award is over a three, five or seven-year period from the anniversary of the initial award. Deferred bonus awards in shares are subject to an additionalone-year retention period from the point of delivery.

Material Risk Takers are required to defer either 40% or 60% of any annual bonus (40% for variable pay of less than £500,000, 60% for variable pay at or above this amount). Vesting of both deferred bonus awards and long-term bonus awards is subject to risk and performance adjustment in the event of deficient performance and prudent financial control provisions.

d) Partnership Shares scheme

A Partnership Shares scheme is operated for eligible employees under the Share Incentive Plan (SIP) umbrella. Participants can choose to invest up to £1,800 per tax year (or no more than 10% of an employee’s salary for the tax year) frompre-tax salary to buy Banco Santander SA shares. Shares are held in trust for the participants. There are no vesting conditions attached to these shares, and no restrictions as to when the shares can be removed from the trust. However, if a participant chooses to sell the shares before the end of five years, they will be liable for the taxable benefit received when the shares are taken out of the trust. The shares can be released from trust after five years free of income tax and national insurance contributions. 2,346,1082,396,909 shares were outstanding at 31 December 2018 (2017: 2,147,3992019 (2018: 2,346,108 shares).

39.36. TRANSACTIONS WITH DIRECTORS AND OTHER KEY MANAGEMENT PERSONNEL

a) Remuneration of Directors and Other Key Management Personnel

The remuneration of the Directors and Other Key Management Personnel of the Santander UK group is set out in aggregate below.

 

Directors’ remuneration    

2018

£

     

2017

£

     

2016

£

   

2019

£

   

2018

£

   

2017

£

 

Salaries and fees

     5,028,434      4,406,908      3,604,999    5,025,665    5,028,434    4,406,908 

Performance-related payments(1)

     5,194,317      3,685,464      2,330,000    3,864,965    5,194,317    3,685,464 

Other fixed remuneration (pension and other allowances &non-cash benefits)

     1,467,011      1,580,321      635,493    1,367,069    1,467,011    1,580,321 

Expenses

     25,198      96,358      120,302    42,526    25,198    96,358 

Total remuneration

     11,714,960      9,769,051      6,690,794    10,300,225    11,714,960    9,769,051 

                  
Directors’ and Other Key Management Personnel compensation    

2018

£

     

2017

£

     

2016

£

   

2019

£

   

2018

£

   

2017

£

 

Short-term employee benefits(2)

     24,445,189      24,642,085      24,757,161        21,925,975        24,445,189        24,642,085 

Post-employment benefits(3)

     2,399,261      2,292,857      1,918,144    3,590,466    2,399,261    2,292,857 

Total compensation

     26,844,450      26,934,942      26,675,305 

Total Compensation

   25,516,441    26,844,450    26,934,942 

 

(1)

In line with the Code, a proportion of the performance-related payment was deferred. Further details can be found in Note 38.35.

(2)

ExcludesThere were nobuy-outs of deferred performance-related payments in 2019. 2018 and 2017 exclude grants of shares in Banco Santander SA made asbuy-outs of deferred performance-related payments in 2018 of 189,381 shares in connection with previous employment for five individuals (2017: 603,614; 2016: nil)(2018: 189,381; 2017: 603,614). Excludes2018 and 2017 exclude payments made asbuy-outs of deferred performance-related payments of £266,667 in connection with previous employment for one individual (2017:(2018: £266,667 for one individual; 2017: £52,100 for one individual; 2016: £2,732,357 for five individuals)individual).

(3)

Termination payments of £847,388£1,076,435 were paid in 20182019 to twoone key management persons (2017: nil)(2018: £847,388 for two individuals; 2017: £nil).

In 2018,2019, the remuneration, excluding pension contributions, of the highest paid Director, was £4,635,497 (2017: £4,714,578)£3,725,993 (2018: £4,635,497) of which £2,317,000 (2017: £2,425,000)£1,989,900 (2018: £2,317,000) was performance related. In 2018,2019, there was no pension benefit accrued for the highest paid Director but in respect of the qualifying past services to Santander UK to 31 May 2009 he has a deferred pension benefit accruing under a defined benefit scheme of £20,402£20,973 p.a. (2017: £15,450(2018: £20,402 p.a.).

b) Retirement benefits

Defined benefit pension schemes are provided to certain employees. See Note 3128 for details of the schemes and the related costs and obligations. As described above, one director, being the highest paid director, has a deferred pension benefit accruing under a defined benefit scheme. Ex gratia pensions paid to former Directors of Santander UK plc in 2018,2019, which have been provided for previously, amounted to £87,300 (2017: £2,482; 2016: £14,893)£335,202 (2018: £87,300; 2017: £2,482). In 1992, the Board decided not to award any new such ex gratia pensions.

c) Transactions with Directors, Other Key Management Personnel and each of their connected persons

Directors, Other Key Management Personnel (Defined as the Executive Committee of Santander UK plc who served during the year) and their connected persons have undertaken the following transactions with the Santander UK group in the ordinary course of business.

 

     2018       2017 
     

        No.

 

     

    £000

 

       

        No.

 

   

    £000

 

 
Secured loans, unsecured loans and overdrafts               

At 1 January

     7      1,216       17    5,195 

Net movements

     9      1,819        (10   (3,979

At 31 December

     16      3,035        7    1,216 

Deposit, bank and instant access accounts and investments

                            

At 1 January

     25      13,184       26    9,138 

Net movements

     5      (2,221       (1   4,046 

At 31 December

     30      10,963        25    13,184 

196    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

        2019           2018 
   No.   £000      No.   £000 

Secured loans, unsecured loans and overdrafts

                        

At 1 January

   16    3,035     7    1,216 

Net movements

   2    1,885        9    1,819 

At 31 December

   18    4,920        16    3,035 

Deposit, bank and instant access accounts and investments

                        

At 1 January

                   30            10,963                     25    13,184 

Net movements

   2    1,012        5    (2,221

At 31 December

   32    11,975        30            10,963 

In 20182019 and 2017,2018, no Director held any interest in the shares of any company in the Santander UK group and no Director exercised or was granted any rights to subscribe for shares in any company in the Santander UK group. In addition, in 20182019 and 2017,2018, no Directors exercised share options over shares in Banco Santander SA, the ultimate parent company of the Company. At 31 December 2018, one interest-free loan from Banco Santander SA had been advanced to a Director, amounting to £344,348 (2017: £510,901). Two Directors and one Key Management Person received benefits in kind from Banco Santander SA totalling £485,334 and £2,024, respectively, in 2018.

Secured loans, unsecured loans and overdrafts are made to Directors, Other Key Management Personnel and their connected persons, in the ordinary course of business, with terms prevailing for comparable transactions and on the same terms and conditions as applicable to other employees in the Santander UK group. Such loans do not involve more than the normal risk of collectability or present any unfavourable features. Amounts deposited by Directors, Other Key Management Management.

Santander UK plc219


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

Personnel and their connected persons earn interest at the same rates as those offered to the market or on the same terms and conditions applicable to other employees in the Santander UK group. Deposits, bank and instant access accounts and investments are entered into by Directors, Other Key Management Personnel and their connected persons on normal market terms and conditions, or on the same terms and conditions as applicable to other employees in Santander UK group.

In 2018,2019, loans were made to eightnine Directors (2017: two(2018: eight Directors), with a principal amount of £65,232£1,767,066 outstanding at 31 December 2018 (2017: £53,452)2019 (2018: £65,232). In 2018,2019, loans were made to eightnine Other Key Management Personnel (2017: five)(2018: eight), with a principal amount of £2,969,462£3,153,343 outstanding at 31 December 2018 (2017: £1,162,384)2019 (2018: £2,969,462).

In 20182019 and 2017,2018, there were no other transactions, arrangements or agreements with Santander UK in which Directors, Other Key Management Personnel or their connected persons had a material interest. In addition, in 20182019 and 2017,2018, no Director had a material interest in any contract of significance with Santander UK other than a service contract.

40.37. RELATED PARTY DISCLOSURES

a) Parent undertaking and controlling party

The Company’s immediate parent is Santander UK Group Holdings plc, a company incorporated in England and Wales. Its ultimate parent and controlling party is Banco Santander SA, a company incorporated in Spain. The smallest and largest groups into which the Santander UK group’s results are included are the group accounts of Santander UK Group Holdings plc and Banco Santander SA, respectively, copies of which may be obtained from Shareholder Relations, 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN.

b) Transactions with related parties

Transactions with related parties during the year and balances outstanding at theyear-end:

 

                                                  Group 
                                     Group   

Interest, fees and

other income received

      

Interest, fees and

other expenses paid

      Amounts owed by
related parties
      

Amounts owed to

related parties

 
 Interest, fees and
    other income received    
       Interest, fees and
other expenses paid
       Amounts owed
    by related parties    
           Amounts owed
    to related parties    
 
 

    2018
£m

 

 

2017
£m

 

 

2016
£m

 

 

        2018
£m

 

 

    2017
£m

 

 

    2016
£m

 

 

2018

£m

 

 

2017

£m

 

 

2018

£m

 

 

2017

£m

 

           2019
£m
         2018
£m
         2017
£m
             2019
£m
           2018
£m
           2017
£m
             2019
£m
           2018
£m
             2019
£m
         2018
£m
 

Ultimate parent

 (72  (60  (81  217   321   188   2,491   4,398   (3,594  (5,079   (130  (72  (60    266    217    321     1,560    2,491     (2,143  (3,594

Immediate parent

 (3  (3  (3  275   207   139       8   (10,392  (7,374   (7  (3  (3    317    275    207     8         (10,012  (10,392

Fellow subsidiaries

 (86  (76  (271  178   491   653   57   102   (689  (981   (66  (86  (76    173    178    491     204    57     (544  (689

Associates & joint ventures

 (28  (20  (27          1    1,986   1,175    (718  (33   (29  (28  (20                   2,194    1,986      (930  (718
 (189  (159  (382   670   1,019   981    4,534   5,683    (15,393  (13,467   (232  (189  (159     756    670    1,019      3,966    4,534      (13,629  (15,393

For more on this, see ‘Balances with other Banco Santander companies’ in the Risk review. In addition, transactions with pension schemes operated by the Santander UK group are described in Note 31.28.

The above transactions were made in the ordinary course of business, except those carried out with Banco Santander SA and subsidiaries of the Company as part of our ring-fencing implementation as described in Note 43,2018, on substantially the same terms as for comparable transactions with third party counterparties, and within limits acceptable to the PRA. Such transactions do not involve more than the normal risk of collectability or present any unfavourable features.

In addition, in July 2018 we transferred £1.4bn of customer loans, £21.5bn of other assets and £20.7bn of liabilities from Santander UK to Banco Santander London Branch. Of these transfers, £19.7bn of assets and £18.8bn of liabilities related to derivatives business. These transfers reduced RWAs by £5.5bn and we paid an associated dividend of £668m. Furthermore and as described in more detail in Note 21,2018, Santander UK plc sold 100% of the share capital of ANTSSFS plc to Santander UK Group Holdings plc, for a consideration of £337m, and the business of the Jersey and Isle of Man branches of Santander UK plc was subsequently acquired by ANTSSFS plc. For more on ring-fencing, see Note 43.

LOGO

 

220Santander UK plc197


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

41.38. FINANCIAL INSTRUMENTS

a) Measurement basis of financial assets and liabilities

Financial assets and financial liabilities are measured on an ongoing basis either at fair value or at amortised cost. Note 1 describes how the classes of financial instruments are measured, and how income and expenses, including fair value gains and losses, are recognised.

b) Fair value measurement and hierarchy

(i) Fair value measurement

The fair value of financial instruments is the price that would be received to sell an asset or paid to transfer a liability in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date in the principal, or in its absence, the most advantageous market to which Santander UK has access at that date. The fair value of a liability reflects itsnon-performance risk.

Financial instruments valued using observable market prices

If a quoted market price in an active market is available for an instrument, the fair value is calculated as the current bid price multiplied by the number of units of the instrument held.

Financial instruments valued using a valuation technique

In the absence of a quoted market price in an active market, management uses internal models to make its best estimate of the price that the market would set for that financial instrument. In order to make these estimations, various techniques are employed, including extrapolation from observable market data and observation of similar financial instruments with similar characteristics. Wherever possible, valuation parameters for each product are based on prices directly observable in active markets or that can be derived from directly observable market prices. Chosen valuation techniques incorporate all the factors that market participants would take into account in pricing transactions.

Santander UK manages certain groups of financial assets and liabilities on the basis of its net exposure to either market risks or credit risk. As a result it has elected to use the exception under IFRS 13 which permits the fair value measurement of a group of financial assets and financial liabilities on the basis of the price that would be received to sell a net long position for a particular risk exposure or paid to transfer a net short position for a particular risk exposure in an orderly transaction between market participants at the measurement date under current market conditions.

(ii) Fair value hierarchy

Santander UK applies the following fair value hierarchy that prioritises the inputs to valuation techniques used in measuring fair value. The hierarchy establishes three categories for valuing financial instruments, giving the highest priority to unadjusted quoted prices in active markets for identical assets or liabilities and the lowest priority to unobservable inputs. The three categories are: quoted prices in active markets (Level 1), internal models based on observable market data (Level 2) and internal models based on other than observable market data (Level 3). If the inputs used to measure an asset or a liability fall to different levels within the hierarchy, the classification of the entire asset or liability will be based on the lowest level input that is significant to the overall fair value measurement of the asset or liability.

Santander UK categorises assets and liabilities measured at fair value within the fair value hierarchy based on the inputs to the valuation techniques as follows:

 

Level 1 Unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in an active market that Santander UK can access at the measurement date. Level 1 positions include debt securities, equity securities, exchange traded derivatives and short positions in securities. Active markets are assessed by reference to average daily trading volumes in absolute terms and, where applicable, by reference to market capitalisation for the instrument.
Level 2 Quoted prices in inactive markets, quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities, recent market transactions, inputs other than quoted market prices for the asset or liability that are observable either directly or indirectly for substantially the full term, and inputs to valuation techniques that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data through correlation or other statistical means for substantially the full term of the asset or liability. Level 2 positions include loans and advances to banks, loans and advances to customers, equity securities, exchange rate derivatives, interest rate derivatives, equity and credit derivatives, debt securities, deposits by banks and debt securities in issue.
Level 3 Significant inputs to the pricing or valuation techniques are unobservable. These unobservable inputs reflect the assumptions that market participants would use when pricing assets or liabilities and are considered significant to the overall valuation. Level 3 positions include exchange rate derivatives, property related derivatives, loans and advances to customers, debt securities, equity securities, deposits by customers and debt securities in issue.

Changes in the observability of significant valuation inputs during the reporting period may result in a transfer of assets and liabilities within the fair value hierarchy. The Santander UK group recognises transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy when there is a significant change in either its principal market or the level of observability of the inputs to the valuation techniques as at the end of the reporting period.

 

198Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements221


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

c) Valuation techniques

The main valuation techniques employed in internal models to measure the fair value of the financial instruments at 31 December 20182019 and 20172018 are set out below. In substantially all cases, the principal inputs into these models are derived from observable market data. Santander UK did not make any material changes to the valuation techniques and internal models it used in 2019, 2018 2017 and 2016.2017.

 

A

In the valuation of financial instruments requiring static hedging (for example interest rate, currency derivatives and commodity swaps)property derivatives) and in the valuation of loans and advances and deposits, the ‘present value’ method is used. Expected future cash flows are discounted using the interest rate curves of the applicable currencies or forward commodity prices,house price index levels, as well as credit spreads. The interest rate curves are generally observable market data and reference yield curves derived from quoted interest rates in appropriate time bandings, which match the timings of the cash flows and maturities of the instruments. The forward commodity priceshouse price index levels are generally observable market data.

 

B

In the valuation of equity financial instruments requiring dynamic hedging (principally equity securities, options and other structured instruments), proprietary local volatility and stochastic volatility models are used. These types of models are widely accepted in the financial services industry. Observable market inputs used in these models include thebid-offer spread, foreign currency exchange rates, volatility and correlation between indices. In limited circumstances, other inputs may be used in these models that are based on unobservable market data, such as the Halifax’s UK HPI volatility, HPI forward growth, HPI spot rate, mortality and mean reversion and contingent litigation risk.reversion.

 

C

In the valuation of financial instruments exposed to interest rate risk that require either static or dynamic hedging (such as interest rate futures, caps and floors, and options), the present value method (futures), Black’s model (caps/floors) and the Hull/White and Markov functional models (Bermudan options) are used. These types of models are widely accepted in the financial services industry. The significant inputs used in these models are observable market data, including appropriate interest rate curves, volatilities, correlations and exchange rates. In limited circumstances, other inputs may be used in these models that are based on unobservable market data, such as HPI volatility, HPI forward growth, HPI spot rate and mortality.

 

D

In the valuation of linear instruments such as credit risk and fixed-income derivatives, credit risk is measured using dynamic models similar to those used in the measurement of interest rate risk. In the case ofnon-linear instruments, if the portfolio is exposed to credit risk such as credit derivatives, the probability of default is determined using the credit default spread market. The main inputs used to determine the underlying cost of credit of credit derivatives are quoted credit risk premiums and the correlation between the quoted credit derivatives of various issuers.

The fair values of the financial instruments arising from Santander UK’s internal models take into account, among other things, contract terms and observable market data, which include such factors asbid-offer spread, interest rates, credit risk, exchange rates, the quoted market price of raw materials and equity securities, volatility and prepayments. In all cases, when it is not possible to derive a valuation for a particular feature of an instrument, management uses judgement to determine the fair value of the particular feature. In exercising this judgement, a variety of tools are used including proxy observable data, historical data and extrapolation techniques. Extrapolation techniques take into account behavioural characteristics of equity markets that have been observed over time, and for which there is a strong case to support an expectation of a continuing trend in the future. Estimates are calibrated to observable market prices when they become available.

Santander UK believes its valuation methods are appropriate and consistent with other market participants. Nevertheless, the use of different valuation methods or assumptions, including imprecision in estimating unobservable market inputs, to determine the fair value of certain financial instruments could result in different estimates of fair value at the reporting date and the amount of gain or loss recorded for a particular instrument. Most of the valuation models are not significantly subjective, because they can be tested and, if necessary, recalibrated by the internal calculation of and subsequent comparison to market prices of actively traded securities, where available.

d) Control framework

Fair values are subject to a control framework designed to ensure that they are either determined or validated by a function independent of the risk-taker. To this end, ultimate responsibility for the determination of fair values lies with the Risk Department. For all financial instruments where fair values are determined by reference to externally quoted prices or observable pricing inputs to models, independent price determination or validation is utilised. In inactive markets, direct observation of a traded price may not be possible. In these circumstances, Santander UK will source alternative market information to validate the financial instrument’s fair value, with greater weight given to information that is considered to be more relevant and reliable.

The factors that are considered in this regard include:

 

The extent to which prices may be expected to represent genuine traded or tradeable prices

The degree of similarity between financial instruments

The degree of consistency between different sources

The process followed by the pricing provider to derive the data

The elapsed time between the date to which the market data relates and the balance sheet date

The manner in which the data was sourced.

The source of pricing data is considered as part of the process that determines the classification of the level of a financial instrument. Consideration is given to the quality of the information available that provides the currentmark-to-model valuation and estimates of how different these valuations could be on an actual trade, taking into consideration how active the market is. For spot assets that cannot be sold due to illiquidity, forward estimates are discounted to estimate a realisable value over time. Adjustments for illiquid positions are regularly reviewed to reflect changing market conditions.

For fair values determined using a valuation model, the control framework may include, as applicable, independent development and / or validation of: (i) the logic within the models; (ii) the inputs to those models; and (iii) any adjustments required outside the models. Internal valuation models are validated independently within the Risk Department. A validation report is produced for each model-derived valuation that assesses the mathematical assumptions behind the model, the implementation of the model and its integration within the trading system. The results of the independent valuation process and any changes to the fair value adjustments methodology are approved in line with the model risk framework and policy.

LOGO

 

222Santander UK plc199


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

e) Fair values of financial instruments carried at amortised cost

The following tables analyse the fair value of the financial instruments carried at amortised cost at 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, including their levels in the fair value hierarchy – Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3. It does not include fair value information for financial assets and financial liabilities carried at amortised cost if the carrying amount is a reasonable approximation of fair value. Cash and balances at central banks, which consist of demand deposits with the Bank of England, and, in 2017, the US Federal Reserve, together with cash in tills and ATMs, have been excluded from the table as the carrying amount is deemed an appropriate approximation of fair value. The fair value of the portfolio of UK Government debt securities, included in other financial assets at amortised cost, is the only material financial instrument categorised in Level 1 of the fair value hierarchy.

 

                               Group 
             

2019

                 

2018

 
                               Group 
             2018                 2017  Fair value  Carrying    Fair value  Carrying 
 Fair value  Carrying    Fair value  Carrying 
 Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 

Total

£m

 value
£m
   Level 1
£m
 Level 2
£m
 Level 3
£m
 

Total

£m

 

value

£m

  

Level 1

£m

 

Level 2

£m

 

Level 3

£m

 

Total

£m

 

value

£m

   

Level 1

£m

 

Level 2

£m

 

Level 3

£m

 

Total

£m

 

value

£m

 

Assets

                      

Loans and advances to customers

       204,061  204,061  201,289       6,331   195,335   201,666   199,340        211,796  211,796  207,287          204,061   204,061   201,289 

Loans and advances to banks

    2,739  60  2,799  2,799       2,894   556   3,450   3,463     1,739  116  1,855  1,855       2,739   60   2,799   2,799 

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

    21,130     21,130  21,127       2,614      2,614   2.614     23,634     23,634  23,636       21,130      21,130   21,127 

Other financial assets at amortised cost

 6,390  721     7,111  7,229        6,575  535     7,110  7,056     6,390   721      7,111   7,229 

Financial investments

                6,435   2,211      8,646   8,758 
 6,390  24,590  204,121  235,101  232,444     6,435   14,050   195,891   216,376   214,175        6,575      25,908    211,912    244,395    239,834           6,390       24,590     204,121     235,101     232,444 

Liabilities

                      

Deposits by customers

    21  178,160  178,181  178,090          183,790   183,790   183,648     95  181,918  182,013  181,883       21   178,160   178,181   178,090 

Deposits by banks

    16,243  989  17,232  17,221       12,164   557   12,721   12,708     13,956  407  14,363  14,353       16,243   989   17,232   17,221 

Repurchase agreements – non trading

    10,923     10,923  10,910       1,085      1,085   1,076     18,292     18,292  18,286       10,923      10,923   10,910 

Debt securities in issue

    47,787     47,787  46,692       44,296      44,296   42,633     42,694     42,694  41,129       47,787      47,787   46,692 

Subordinated liabilities

    3,877     3,877  3,601        4,256      4,256   3,793     4,220     4,220  3,528        3,877      3,877   3,601 
      78,851    179,149    258,000    256,514          61,801     184,347     246,148     243,858     79,257  182,325  261,582  259,179        78,851   179,149   258,000   256,514 

The carrying value above of any financial assets and liabilities that are designated as hedged items in a portfolio (or macro) fair value hedge relationship excludes gains and losses attributable to the hedged risk, as this is included in other assets on the balance sheet.

Santander UK plc223


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

Valuation methodology for financial instruments carried at amortised cost

The fair value exposures set out in the tables above are managed by using a combination of hedging derivatives and offsetting on balance sheet positions. The valuation approach to specific categories of financial instruments is described below.

200    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

Assets:

Assets:

Loans and advances to customers

The approach to estimating the fair value of loans and advances to customers has been determined by discounting expected cash flows to reflect either current market rates for lendingor credit spreads relevant to the specific industry of a similar credit quality.the borrower. The determination of their fair values is an area of considerable estimation and uncertainty as there is no observable market and values are significantly affected by customer behaviour.

i) Advances secured on residential property

The fair value of the mortgage portfolio is calculated by discounting contractual cash flows by different spreads for each representing a LTV band,Band, after taking account of expected customer prepayment rates. The spread is based on new business interest rates derived from competitor market information. Further discounting is applied for certain higher risk mortgage portfolios.

ii) Corporate loans

The corporate loan portfolio is stratified by product. The determination of the fair values of performing loans takes account of the differential between existing margins and estimated new business rates for similar loans in terms of segment maturity and structure.maturity. Provisions are considered appropriate for the book that is not impaired. A discount has been applied to impaired loans. Although exits have generally been achieved at carrying value, this does not reflect the discount a purchaser would require. A discount has therefore been applied based on the target return sought by distressed bond funds, who are the typical purchaser of the assets.

iii) Other loans

These consist of unsecured personal loans, credit cards, overdrafts and consumer (auto) finance. The weighted average lives of these portfolios are short and the business was writtenrelate to relatively recently.new business. As a result, contractual interest rates approximate new business interest rates, and therefore nomark-to-market surplus or deficit has been recorded with respect to the performing book, with the exception of unsecured personal loans and consumer (auto) finance loans, where a small surplus or deficit has been recognised based on the differential between existing portfolio margins and an estimate of new business rates for similar loans. A discount has been applied to the impaired part of the book.current contractual interest rates.

Loans and advances to banks

These comprise secured loans, short-term placements with banks including collateral and unsettled financial transactions. The secured loans have been valued based on the basis of spreads on credit default swapsa discounted spread for the term of the loans using valuation technique A as described above. The carrying amount of the other items is deemed a reasonable approximation of their fair value, as the transactions are very short-term in duration.

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

The fair value of the reverse repurchase agreements – non trading has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above.above, using a spread appropriate to the underlying collateral.

Other financial assets at amortised cost and financial investments

These consist of asset backed securities and debt securities. The asset backed securities arecan be complex products and in some instances are valued with the assistance of an independent, specialist valuation firm. These fair values are determined using industry-standard valuation techniques, including discounted cash flow models. The inputs to these models used in these valuation techniques include quotes from market makers, prices of similar assets, adjustments for differences in credit spreads, and additional quantitative and qualitative research.

The debt security investments consist of a portfolio of government debt securities. The fair value of this portfolio has been determined using valuation technique A as described above.quoted market prices.

Liabilities:

Deposits by customers

The majority of deposit liabilities are payable on demand and therefore can be deemed short-term in nature with the fair value equal to the carrying value. Certain of the deposit liabilities are at a fixed rate until maturity. The deficit/surplus of fair value over carrying value of these liabilities has been estimated by reference to the market rates available at the balance sheet date for similar deposit liabilities of similar maturities. The fair value of such deposit liabilities has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above.

Deposits by banks

The fair value of deposits by banks, including repos, has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above.above, discounted at the appropriate credit spread.

Repurchase agreements – non trading

The fair value of the repurchase agreements – non trading has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above, discounted at a spread appropriate to the underlying collateral.

Debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities

Where reliable prices are available, the fair value of debt securities in issue and subordinated liabilities has been calculated using quoted market prices. Other market values have been determined using valuation technique A as described above.

Repurchase agreements – non trading

The fair value of the repurchase agreements – non trading has been estimated using valuation technique A as described above.

LOGO

 

224Santander UK plc201


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

f) Fair values of financial instruments measured at fair value

The following tables summarise the fair values of the financial assets and liabilities accounted for at fair value at 31 December 20182019 and 2017,2018, analysed by their levels in the fair value hierarchy – Level 1, Level 2 and Level 3.

 

                                             Group 
                   2018                   2017    
     Level 1
£m
       Level 2
£m
      Level 3
£m
   Total
£m
     Level 1
£m
   Level 2
£m
      Level 3
£m
           Total
£m
  Valuation
technique
 

Assets

                 

Trading assets

 Securities purchased under resale                
 agreements                       8,870       8,870   A 
 Debt securities                   5,156           5,156    
 Equity securities                   9,662           9,662    
 Cash collateral                       6,156       6,156   A 
  Short-term loans                    656    55       711   A 
                         15,474      15,081       30,555     

Derivative financial

 Exchange rate contracts       4,323   25    4,348         6,061   16    6,077   A 

instruments

 Interest rate contracts       2,526   6    2,532         23,435   12    23,447   A & C 
 Equity and credit contracts       188   63    251         861   36    897   B & D 
  Netting       (1,872      (1,872         (10,479      (10,479    
          5,165   94    5,259          19,878   64    19,942     

Other financial assets at

 Loans and advances to customers       12   82    94         1,485   64    1,549   A 

FVTPL

 Debt securities   18    2,339   894    3,251     184    187   176    547   A, B & D 
 Equity securities                         B 
 Reverse repurchase agreements –       2,272       2,272                   A 
  non trading                                            
      18    4,623   976    5,617      184    1,672   240    2,096     

Financial assets at

 Debt securities   12,487    742         13,229           D 

FVOCI

 Loans and advances to customers          73    73                        D 
      12,487    742   73    13,302                          

Financial investments

 Available-for-sale – debt securities           8,770    2       8,772   C 
 Available-for-sale – equity           19    9   53    81   B 
  securities                                            
                           8,789    11   53    8,853     

Total assets at fair value

   12,505    10,530   1,143    24,178      24,447    36,642   357    61,446     

 

Liabilities

                 

Trading liabilities

 Securities sold under repurchase                
 agreements                       25,504       25,504   A 
 Short positions in securities and                
 unsettled trades                   3,694           3,694    
 Cash collateral                       1,911       1,911   A 
  Short-term deposits                                   
                       3,694    27,415       31,109     

Derivative financial

 Exchange rate contracts       528   23    551         4,176   15    4,191   A 

instruments

 Interest rate contracts       2,515   7    2,522         23,199   5    23,204   A & C 
 Equity and credit contracts       132   36    168     1    653   43    697   B & D 
  Netting       (1,872      (1,872         (10,479      (10,479    
          1,303   66    1,369      1    17,549   63    17,613     

Other financial liabilities

 Debt securities in issue       983   7    990         1,629   6    1,635   A 

at FVTPL

 Structured deposits       104   29    133         680       680   A 
 Repurchase agreements – non       2,110       2,110                   A 
 trading                
 Collateral and associated financial       3,040   13    3,053           D 
  guarantees                                            
          6,237   49    6,286          2,309   6    2,315     

Total liabilities at fair value

       7,540   115    7,655      3,695    47,273   69    51,037     
                                                    

 

Group  

                     2019                    2018      
      Level 1
£m
   Level 2
£m
   Level 3
£m
   Total
£m
     Level 1
£m
   Level 2
£m
   Level 3
£m
   Total
£m
     Valuation  
technique  

Assets

                      

Derivative financial instruments

  Exchange rate contracts       2,317    6    2,323         4,323    25    4,348    A  
  Interest rate contracts       1,915    9    1,924         2,526    6    2,532    A & C  
  Equity and credit contracts       223    60    283         188    63    251    B & D  
   Netting       (1,214       (1,214         (1,872       (1,872     
           3,241    75    3,316          5,165    94    5,259      

Other financial assets at FVTPL

  Loans and advances to customers           92    92         12    82    94    A  
  Debt securities           294    294     18    2,339    894    3,251    A, B & D  
  Equity securities                                    B  
   

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

                         2,272        2,272     A  
               386    386      18    4,623    976    5,617      

Financial assets at FVOCI

  Debt securities   9,209    482        9,691     12,487    742        13,229    D  
   Loans and advances to customers           56    56              73    73     D  
       9,209    482    56    9,747      12,487    742    73    13,302      

Total assets at fair value

   9,209    3,723    517    13,449      12,505    10,530    1,143    24,178      

Liabilities

                      

Derivative financial instruments

  Exchange rate contracts       660    4    664         528    23    551    A  
  Interest rate contracts       1,836    2    1,838         2,515    7    2,522    A & C  
  Equity and credit contracts       134    26    160         132    36    168    B & D  
   Netting       (1,214       (1,214         (1,872       (1,872     
           1,416    32    1,448          1,303    66    1,369      

Other financial liabilities at FVTPL

  Debt securities in issue       1,099    6    1,105         983    7    990    A  
  Structured deposits       406    29    435         104    29    133    A  
  

Repurchase agreements – non trading

                        2,110        2,110    A  
   

Collateral and associated financial guarantees

       147    26    173          3,040    13    3,053     D  
           1,652    61    1,713          6,237    49    6,286      

Total liabilities at fair value

       3,068    93    3,161          7,540    115    7,655      

 

202Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements225


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

Transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy

Transfers between levels of the fair value hierarchy are reported atregularly throughout the beginning of the period in which they occur.year. In 2018,2019, there were no significant (2017: none) transfers of financial instruments between Levels 1 and 2.2 or between Levels 2 and 3. In 2018, the main transfers of financial instruments between Levels 2 and 3 were DerivativesDerivative assets of £35m and Derivative liabilities of £31m which were transferred from Level 2 to Level 3 following enhancements to the fair value hierarchy classification process.

 

LOGO

226Santander UK plc203


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

g) Fair value adjustments

The internal models incorporate assumptions that Santander UK believes would be made by a market participant to establish fair value. Fair value adjustments are adopted when Santander UK considers that there are additional factors that would be considered by a market participant that are not incorporated in the valuation model.

Santander UK classifies fair value adjustments as either ‘risk-related’ or ‘model-related’. The fair value adjustments form part of the portfolio fair value and are included in the balance sheet values of the product types to which they have been applied. The magnitude and types of fair value adjustment are listed in the following table:

 

    

 

2018
£m

     

 

2017
£m

   

2019

£m

 

2018

£m

 

Risk-related:

           

Bid-offer and trade specific adjustments

     13      34    (12  13 

– Uncertainty

     36      43    17   36 

– Credit risk adjustment

     9      36    6   9 

– Funding fair value adjustment

     4      6    6   4 
     62      119    17   62 

Model-related

     5      8       5 

Day One profit

           1 
     67      128                    17                   67 

Risk-related adjustments

Risk-related adjustments are driven, in part, by the magnitude of Santander UK’s market or credit risk exposure, and by external market factors, such as the size of market spreads.

(i)Bid-offer and trade specific adjustments

Portfolios are marked at bid or offer, as appropriate. Valuation models will typically generatemid-market values. Thebid-offer adjustment reflects the cost that would be incurred if substantially all residual net portfolio market risks were closed using available hedging instruments or by disposing of or unwinding the position. For debt securities, thebid-offer spread is based on a consensus market price at an individual security level. For other products, the major risk types are identified. For each risk type, the net portfolio risks are first classified into buckets, and then abid-offer spread is applied to each risk bucket based upon the marketbid-offer spread for the relevant hedging instrument.

(ii) Uncertainty

Certain model inputs may be less readily determinable from market data, and/or the choice of model itself may be more subjective. In these circumstances, a range of possible values exists that the financial instrument or market parameter may assume, and an adjustment may be needed to reflect the likelihood that in estimating the fair value of the financial instrument, market participants would adopt more conservative values for uncertain parameters and/or model assumptions than those used in the valuation model.

(iii) Credit risk adjustment

Credit risk adjustments comprise credit and debit valuation adjustments. The credit valuation adjustment (CVA) is an adjustment to the valuation of OTC derivative contracts to reflect within fair value the possibility that the counterparty may default, and Santander UK may not receive the full market value of the transactions. The debit valuation adjustment (DVA) is an adjustment to the valuation of the OTC derivative contracts to reflect within the fair value the possibility that Santander UK may default, and that Santander UK may not pay full market value of the transactions.

Santander UK calculates a separate CVA and DVA for each Santander UK legal entity, and within each entity for each counterparty to which the entity has exposure. Santander UK calculates the CVA by applying the probability of default of the counterparty to the expected positive exposure to the counterparty, and multiplying the result by the loss expected in the event of default i.e. LGD. Conversely, Santander UK calculates the DVA by applying the PD of the Santander UK group, conditional on thenon-default of the counterparty, to the expected positive exposure of the counterparty to Santander UK and multiplying the result by the LGD. Both calculations are performed over the life of the potential exposure.

For most products Santander UK uses a simulation methodology to calculate the expected positive exposure to a counterparty. This incorporates a range of potential exposures across the portfolio of transactions with the counterparty over the life of the portfolio. The simulation methodology includes credit mitigants such as counterparty netting agreements and collateral agreements with the counterparty.

For certain types of exotic derivatives where the products are not currently supported by the standard methodology, Santander UK adopts alternative methodologies. These may involve mapping transactions against the results for similar products which are valued using the standard methodology. In other cases, a simplified version of the standard methodology is applied. The calculation is applied at a trade level, with more limited recognition of credit mitigants such as netting or collateral agreements than used in the standard methodology.

The methodologies do not, in general, account forwrong-way risk.Wrong-way risk arises where the underlying value of the derivative prior to any credit risk adjustment is positively correlated to the probability of default of the counterparty. When there is significantwrong-way risk, a trade-specific approach is applied to reflect thewrong-way risk within the valuation. Exposure towrong-way risk is limited via internal governance processes and deal pricing. Santander UK considers that an appropriate adjustment to reflectwrong-way risk is £nil (2017:(2018: £nil).

(iv) Funding fair value adjustment (FFVA)

The FFVA is an adjustment to the valuation of OTC derivative positions to include the net cost of funding uncollateralised derivative positions. This is calculated by applying a suitable funding cost to the expected future funding exposure of any uncollateralised component of the OTC derivative portfolio.

Model-related adjustments

Models used for portfolio valuation purposes may be based upon a simplifying set of assumptions that do not capture all material market characteristics. Additionally, markets evolve, and models that were adequate in the past may require development to capture all material market characteristics in current market conditions. In these circumstances, model limitation adjustments are adopted. As model development progresses, model limitations are addressed within the core revaluation models and a model limitation adjustment is no longer needed.

Day One profit adjustments

Day One profit adjustments are adopted where the fair value estimated by a valuation model is based on one or more significant unobservable inputs. Day One profit adjustments are calculated and reported on a portfolio basis.

 

204Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements227


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

The timing of recognition of deferred Day One profit and loss is determined individually. It is deferred until either the instrument’s fair value can be determined using market observable inputs or is realised through settlement. The financial instrument is subsequently measured at fair value, adjusted for the deferred Day One profit and loss. Subsequent changes in fair value are recognised immediately in the Income Statement without immediate reversal of deferred Day One profits and losses.

h) Internal models based on information other than market data (Level 3)

The table below provides an analysis of financial instruments valued using internal models based on information other than market data together with further details on the valuation techniques used for each type of instrument. Each instrument is initially valued at transaction price:

 

      Balance sheet value    

Fair value movements recognised in

profit/(loss)

 
       Balance sheet value        Fair value movements
recognised in profit/(loss)
 
Balance sheet line item  Category Financial instrument product type    2018
£m
   2017
£m
       2018
£m
   2017
£m
   2016
£m
    Category    Financial instrument product type  

2019

£m

 

2018

£m

   

2019

£m

 2018
£m
 2017
£m
 
1. Derivative assets  Equity and credit contracts Reversionary property interests     54    31       30    (6   12  Equity and credit contracts  Reversionary property interests   52   54     2   30   (6
2. FVTPL assets  Loans and advances to customers Roll-up mortgage portfolio     53    64       8    2    4  Loans and advances to customers      Roll-up mortgage portfolio   51   53        8   2 
3. FVTPL assets  Debt securities Reversionary property securities     142    176       (28   (18     Loans and advances to customers  Other loans   41   29     1   2    
4. FVTPL assets(1)  Equity securities(1) Unlisted equity shares         53                

4. FVTPL assets

 Debt securities  Reversionary property securities   120   142     (17  (28  (18
5. FVTPL assets  Debt securities Credit linked notes     752           13          Debt securities  Credit linked notes   174   752     7   13    
6. FVOCI assets  Loans and advances to customers Other loans     73           (5         Loans and advances to customers  Other loans   56   73     (2  (5   
7. Derivative liabilities  Equity contracts Property-related options and forwards     (35   (43          (5   (5 Equity contracts  Property options and forwards   (26  (35          (5
8. FVTPL liabilities  Financial guarantees Credit protection guarantee     (13           (13         Financial guarantees  Credit protection guarantee   (26  (13     (7  (13   
          1,026    281        5    (27   11         442   1,055      (16  7   (27
Other Level 3 assetsOther Level 3 assets       69    33            (26   6         23   40      16   (2  (26
Other Level 3 liabilitiesOther Level 3 liabilities       (67   (26       1    19    (10        (41  (67     (5  1   19 
Total net assetsTotal net assets       1,028    288                                  424           1,028                  –               –               – 
Total income/(expense)                 6    (34   7 

Total (expense)/income

               (5  6   (34

(1)Prior to 1 January 2018, these unlisted equity shares were classified asavailable-for-sale equity securities and presented in the balance sheet as financial investments.

Valuation techniques

1. Derivative assets – Equity and credit contracts

These are valued using a probability weighted set of HPI forward prices, which are assumed to be a reasonable representation of the increase in value of the Santander UK group’s reversionary interest portfolio underlying the derivatives. The probability used reflects the likelihood of the home owner vacating the property and is calculated from mortality rates and acceleration rates which are a function of age and gender, obtained from the relevant mortality tables. Indexing is felt to be appropriate due to the size and geographical dispersion of the reversionary interest portfolio. These are determined using HPI Spot Ratesspot rates adjusted to reflect estimated forward growth.Non-seasonally adjusted (NSA) national and regional HPI are used in the valuation model to avoid any subjective judgement in the adjustment process which is made by Markit, which publishes the Halifax House Price Index.

The inputs used to determine the value of the reversionary property derivatives are HPI spot, HPI forward growth and mortality rates. The principal pricing parameter is HPI forward growth.

2. FVTPL assets – Loans and advances to customers –roll-up mortgage portfolio

These representroll-up mortgages (sometimes referred to as lifetime mortgages), which are an equity release scheme under which a property owner takes out a loan secured against their home. The owner may not make any interest payments during their lifetime in which case the fixed interest payments are rolled up into the mortgage. The loan or mortgage (capital androlled-up interest) is repaid upon the owner’s vacation of the property and the value of the loan is only repaid from the value of the property. This is known as a ‘no negative equity guarantee’. Santander UK suffers a loss if the sale proceeds from the property are insufficient to repay the loan, as it is unable to pursue the homeowner’s estate or beneficiaries for the shortfall.

The value of the mortgage ‘rolls up’ or accretes until the owner vacates the property. In order to value theroll-up mortgages, Santander UK uses a probability-weighted set of European option prices (puts) determined using the Black-Scholes model, in which the ‘no negative equity guarantee’ are valued as short put options. The probability weighting applied is calculated from mortality rates and acceleration rates as a function of age and gender, taken from mortality tables.

The inputs used to determine the value of these instruments are HPI spot, HPI forward growth, HPI volatility, mortality rates and repayment rates. The principal pricing parameter is HPI forward growth. The HPI forward growth rate used is unobservable and is the same as used in the valuation of Instrument 1 above. The other parameters do not have a significant effect on the value of the instruments.

3. FVTPL assets – Loans and advances to customers – other loans

These relate to loans to transport and education companies. The fair value of these loans is estimated using the ‘present value’ model based on a credit curve derived from current market spreads. Loan specific credit data is unobservable, so a proxy population is applied based on industry sector and credit rating.

4. FVTPL assets – Debt securities

These consist of reversionary property securities and are an equity release scheme, where the property owner receives an upfront lump sum in return for paying a fixed percentage of the sales proceeds of the property when the owner vacates the property. These reversionary property securities are valued using a probability-weighted set of HPI forward prices which are assumed to be a reasonable representation of the increase in value of Santander UK’s reversionary interest portfolio underlying the derivatives. The probability weighting used reflects the probability of the home owner vacating the property through death or moving into care and is calculated from mortality rates and acceleration factors which are a function of age and gender, obtained from the relevant mortality table.

The inputs used to determine the value of these instruments are HPI spot, HPI forward growth and mortality rates. The principal pricing parameter is HPI forward growth. Discussion of the HPI spot rate, HPI forward growth rate and mortality rates for this financial instrument is the same as Instrument 21 above. An adjustment is also made to reflect the specific property risk.

4. FVTPL assets – Equity securities (2017:Available-for-sale equity securities)

These consist Discussion of unquoted equity investments in companies providing infrastructure services to the financial services industry. Inspecific property risk adjustment is the valuation of equity financial instruments requiring dynamic hedging, proprietary local volatility and stochastic volatility models are used. These types of models are widely accepted in the financial services industry. Observable market inputs used in these models include equity prices,bid-offer spread, foreign currency exchange rates. The significant unobservable input is contingent litigation costs and related expenses in respect of convertible preferred stock in Visa Inc,same as described in Note 32. This is estimated by reference to best estimates received from third party legal counsel.Instrument 1 above.

LOGO

 

228Santander UK plc205


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

5. FVTPL assets – Debt securities (Credit linked notes)

These consist of the retained senior tranches of credit linked notes in respect of credit protection vehicles sponsored by Santander UK, and are mandatorily held at fair value through profit or loss. These vehicles provide credit protection on reference portfolios of Santander UK group loans with junior notes sold to external investors. The notes retained by Santander UK are classified as level 3 financial instruments as their valuation depends upon unobservable parameters relating to the underlying reference portfolios of loans, including credit spreads, correlations and prepayment speed, which have a significant effect on the overall valuation. For more information, see ‘Credit protection entities’ in Note 21.19.

6. FVOCI assets – Loans and advances to customers – other loans

The changesThese relate to the classificationshipping and measurement of financial assets on transition to IFRS 9 as set out in Note 44 resulted in some loans and advances to customers, primarily consisting of utilities and shipping counterparties, being reclassified from amortised cost to FVOCI.construction loans. The fair value of these loans is estimated using the ‘present value’ model based on a credit curve derived from current market spreads. Loan specific credit data is unobservable, so a proxy population is applied based on industry sector and credit rating.

7. Derivative liabilities – Equity contracts

There are three types of derivatives withinin this category:

European options – These are valued using a modified Black-Scholes model where the HPI islog-normally distributed with the forward rates determined from the HPI forward growth.

Asian options – Asian (or average value) options are valued using a modified Black-Scholes model, with an amended strike price and volatility assumption to account for the average exercise period, through a closed form adjustment that reflects the strike price relative to the distribution of stock prices at each relevant date. This is also known as the Curran model.

Forward contracts – Forward contracts are valued using a standard forward pricing model.

The inputs used to determine the value of the above instruments are HPI spot rate, HPI forward growth rate and HPI volatility, as described in instrument 1 above.volatility. The principal pricing parameter is HPI forward growth rate.

8. FVTPL liabilities –Financial guarantees

These relate to credit protection guarantees in respect of the proceeds of the retained senior tranches of credit linked notes described in Instrument 5 above, and have been designated at fair value through profit or loss. These instruments are valued using the same unobservable parameters described in Instrument 5 above, such that changes in the valuation of the senior tranches of the credit linked notes are offset by changes in the value of these credit protection guarantees. For more information, see ‘Credit protection entities’ in Note 21.19.

Reconciliation of fair value measurement in Level 3 of the fair value hierarchy

The following table sets out the movements in Level 3 financial instruments in 20182019 and 2017:2018:

 

  Assets    Liabilities 
  

Derivatives
£m

 

   

Other financial
assets at
FVTPL

£m

 

   

Financial
assets at
FVOCI
£m

 

   

Financial
investments
£m

 

 

Total
£m

 

 

Derivatives 
£m 

 

  

Other financial
liabilities at
FVTPL

£m

 

   

Total

£m

 

   Assets    Liabilities 

At 31 December 2017

   64    240      53  357  (63)   (6   (69

Adoption of IFRS 9

       598    199    (53 744   –         
  Derivatives
£m
 Other financial
assets at FVTPL
£m
 Financial
assets at
FVOCI
£m
     Total
£m
   Derivatives
£m
 

Other financial
liabilities at
FVTPL

£m

 

    Total

£m

 

At 1 January 2019

   94  976  73  1,143     (66 (49 (115

Total gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss:

          

– Fair value movements

   18  (9 (2 7     (6 (6 (12

– Foreign exchange and other movements

     6     6       (6 (6

Transfers in

     11     11            

Netting(1)

     (430    (430           

Additions

   2  188     190       (3 (3

Sales

                        

Settlements

   (39 (356 (15 (410     40  3  43 

At 31 December 2019

   75  386  56  517      (32 (61 (93
      

Gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year

   18  (3 (2 13      (6 (12 (18
      

At 1 January 2018

   64    838    199      1,101  (63)   (6   (69   64   838   199   1,101     (63  (6  (69

Total (losses)/gains recognised in profit or loss:

               

Total gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss:

          

– Fair value movements

   28    (5   (5   18     (13   (12   28   (5  (5  18     1   (13  (12

– Foreign exchange and other movements

   (5           (5)     (1   4    (5        (5    5   (1  4 

Transfers in

   35    18        53  (31)   (29   (60   35   18      53     (31  (29  (60

Additions

       280    17    297  –               280   17   297            

Sales

       (95       (95)  –               (95     (95           

Settlements

   (28   (60   (138    (226)   22        22    (28  (60  (138  (226     22      22 

At 31 December 2018

   94    976    73     1,143   (66)   (49   (115   94   976   73   1,143      (66  (49  (115
      
(Losses)/gains recognised in profit or loss relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year   23    (5   (5    13      (14   (8
                  

At 1 January 2017

   103    264      32  399  (74)   (6   (80

Total (losses)/gains recognised in profit or loss:

               

– Fair value movements

   (32   (16       (48)  14        14 

– Foreign exchange and other movements

   32            32  (32)       (32

Gains recognised in other comprehensive income

             21  21  –         

Additions

   9            9  (2)       (2

Sales

       (8       (8)  –         

Settlements

   (48            (48)   31        31 

At 31 December 2017

   64    240       53  357   (63)   (6   (69
(Losses)/gains recognised in profit or loss relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year       (16        (16)   (18)       (18

Gains/(losses) recognised in profit or loss relating to assets and liabilities held at the end of the year

   23   (5  (5  13      6   (14  (8

(1)

This relates to the effect of netting on the fair value of the credit linked notes due to a legal right ofset-off between the principal amounts of the senior notes and the associated cash deposits. For more, see ‘ii) Credit protection entities’ in Note 19.

 

206Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements229


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

Effect of changes in significant unobservable assumptions to reasonably possible alternatives (Level 3)

As discussed above, the fair value of financial instruments are, in certain circumstances, measured using valuation techniques that incorporate assumptions that are not evidenced by prices from observable current market transactions in the same instrument and are not based on observable market data and, as such require the application of a degree of judgement. Changing one or more of the inputs to the valuation models to reasonably possible alternative assumptions would change the fair values significantly. The following table shows the sensitivity of these fair values to reasonably possible alternative assumptions.

Favourable and unfavourable changes are determined on the basis of changes in the value of the instrument as a result of varying the levels of the unobservable input as described in the table below. The potential effects do not take into effect any hedged positions.

 

      Significant unobservable input       Sensitivity 
         Assumption value       Favourable   Unfavourable 

  2018

 

  

Fair value
£m

 

  

Assumption description

 

  

Range(1)

 

   

Weighted
average

 

   

Shift

 

   

changes
£m

 

   

changes

£m

 

 

1. Derivative assets– Equity and credit contracts:

   54  HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.68%    1%    8    (8

– Reversionary property derivatives

      HPI Spot rate   n/a    783    10%    7    (7

2. FVTPL– Loans and advances to customers:

   53  HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.77%    1%    2    (2

Roll-up mortgage portfolio

                                

3. FVTPL – Debt securities:

   142  HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.68%    1%    6    (6

– Reversionary property securities

      HPI Spot rate   n/a    783(2)    10%    10    (10

6. FVOCI– Loans and advances to customers:

   73  Credit spreads   0% – 2%    0.80%    20%         

– Other loans

                                

7. Derivative liabilities – Equity contracts:

   (35 HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.59%    1%    2    (2

– Property-related options and forwards

      HPI Spot rate   n/a    722(2)    10%    3    (4

2017

                                

1. Derivative assets– Equity and credit contracts:

   31  HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.42%    1%    10    (10

– Reversionary property derivatives

      HPI Spot rate   n/a    773    10%    8    (8

2. FVTPL– Loans and advances to customers:

   64  HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.57%    1%    2    (2

Roll-up mortgage portfolio

                                

3. FVTPL – Debt securities:

   176  HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.42%    1%    3    (3

– Reversionary property securities

      HPI Spot rate   n/a    773(2)    10%    11    (11

4. Financial investments– AFS equity securities:

   53  Contingent litigation risk   0% – 100%    35%    20%    6    (6

– Unlisted equity shares

                                

7. Derivative liabilities – Equity contracts:

   (43 HPI Forward growth rate   0% – 5%    2.32%    1%    3    (3

– Property-related options and forwards

      HPI Spot rate   n/a    727(2)    10%    7    (8
       Significant unobservable input            Sensitivity 
         Assumption value       

    Favourable

changes

£m

   Unfavourable 
  2019  Fair value
£m
   Assumption description Range(1)       Weighted
average
           Shift   

changes

£m

 

1.Derivative assets – Equity and credit contracts:

   52   HPI Forward growth rate          0% – 5%    2.57%    1%    8    (8

– Reversionary property derivatives

       HPI Spot rate(2)  n/a    802    10%    7    (7

2.FVTPL – Loans and advances to customers:

   51   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.69%    1%    2    (2

Roll-up mortgage portfolio

                                

3.FVTPL – Loans and advances to customers:

   41   Credit spreads  0% – 1%    0.35%    20%         

– Other loans

                                

4.FVTPL – Debt securities:

   120   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.57%    1%         

– Reversionary property securities

       HPI Spot rate(2)  n/a    802    10%    6    (6

6.FVOCI – Loans and advances to customers:

   56   Credit spreads  0% – 1%    0.51%    20%         

– Other loans

                                

7.Derivative liabilities – Equity contracts:

   (26)   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.44%    1%    2    (2

– Property-related options and forwards

       HPI Spot rate(2)  n/a    758    10%    3    (3

2018

             

1.Derivative assets – Equity and credit contracts:

   54   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.68%    1%    8    (8

– Reversionary property derivatives

       HPI Spot rate(2)  n/a    783    10%    7    (7

2. FVTPL – Loans and advances to customers:

   53   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.77%    1%    2    (2

Roll-up mortgage portfolio

                                

3.FVTPL – Loans and advances to customers:

   29   Credit spreads  0% – 1%    0.52%    20%         

– Other loans

                                

4.FVTPL – Debt securities:

   142   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.68%    1%    6    (6

– Reversionary property securities

       HPI Spot rate(2)  n/a    783    10%    10    (10

6.FVOCI – Loans and advances to customers:

   73   Credit spreads  0% – 2%    0.80%    20%         

– Other loans

                                

7.Derivative liabilities – Equity contracts:

   (35)   HPI Forward growth rate  0% – 5%    2.59%    1%    2    (2

– Property-related options and forwards

       HPI Spot rate(2)  n/a    722    10%    3    (4

 

(1)

The range of actual assumption values used to calculate the weighted average disclosure.

(2)Represents

The HPI spot rate in the weighted average column represents the HPI spot rate index level at 31 December 20182019 and 2017.2018.

No sensitivities are presented for FVTPL assets – Debt securities, Credit linked Notes (instrument 5) and FVTPL liabilities –financial– financial guarantees (instrument 8), as the terms of these instruments are fully matched. As a result, any changes in the valuation of the credit linked notes would be exactly offset by an equal and opposite change in the valuation of the financial guarantees.

 

LOGO

230Santander UK plc207


Annual Report 2018 |
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

 

 

i) Maturities of financial liabilities andoff-balance sheet commitments

The table below analyses the maturities of the undiscounted cash flows relating to financial liabilities andoff-balance sheet commitments of Santander UK based on the remaining period to the contractual maturity date at the balance sheet date. Deposits by customers largely consist of retail deposits. This table is not intended to show the liquidity of Santander UK.

 

                                                                                                            
  Group  
2018  On demand
£m
     

Not later than
3 months

£m

     Later than
3 months
and not later
than 1 year
£m
     Later than
1 year
and not later
than 5 years
£m
     Later than
5 years
£m
     Total 
£m 
 
                           Group  
2019          On demand
£m
   

Not later than 3
months

£m

   

Later than 3
months and
    not later than

1 year

£m

   

Later than 1
        year and not
later than 5
years

£m

   

        Later than 5
years

£m

   

Total 

£m 

 

Financial liabilities

                                  

Trading liabilities

                                  

Derivative financial instruments

         431      57      41      1,003      1,532    9    243    293    418    532    1,495  

Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   11      2,146      76      408      3,855      6,496    1    6    203    617    969    1,796  

Deposits by customers

   159,009      3,422      9,491      5,216      1,305      178,443    160,833    2,531    6,476    9,770    3,045    182,655  

Deposits by banks

   5,096      1,100      90      11,100      52      17,438    2,711    486    4,764    6,338    220    14,519  

Repurchase agreements – non trading

   2      9,101      972      849      517      11,441    6    15,878    1,578    846        18,308  

Debt securities in issue

         9,157      5,520      23,051      10,921      48,649        7,129    8,702    18,100    8,897    42,828  

Subordinated liabilities

         255      134      709      5,279      6,377        239    131    1,539    3,961    5,870  

Total financial liabilities

   164,118      25,612      16,340      41,374      22,932      270,376    163,560    26,512    22,147    37,628    17,624    267,471  

Off-balance sheet commitments given

   1,106      5,843      670      13,413      18,987      40,019    18,907    7,829    840    11,490    1,278    40,344  

2017

                            

2018

            

Financial liabilities

                                  

Trading liabilities

   1,520      26,914      152      161      2,580      31,327 

Derivative financial instruments

   15      631      1,230      2,925      14,001      18,802        431    57    41    1,003    1,532  

Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   7      545      222      789      814      2,377    11    2,146    76    408    3,855    6,496  

Deposits by customers

   154,114      4,764      13,869      6,720      4,604      184,071    159,009    3,422    9,491    5,216    1,305    178,443  

Deposits by banks

   2,452      1,465      82      8,626      208      12,833    5,096    1,100    90    11,100    52    17,438  

Repurchase agreements – non trading

         1      832      248            1,081    2    9,101    972    849    517    11,441  

Debt securities in issue

         8,395      4,821      22,927      7,933      44,076        9,157    5,520    23,051    10,921    48,649  

Subordinated liabilities

         289      147      783      5,571      6,790        255    134    709    5,279    6,377  

Total financial liabilities

   158,108      43,004      21,355      43,179      35,711      301,357    164,118    25,612    16,340    41,374    22,932    270,376  

Off-balance sheet commitments given

   2,082      6,874      1,844      12,399      18,860      42,059    18,667    5,843    670    13,413    1,426    40,019  

As the above table is based on contractual maturities, no account is taken of call features related to subordinated liabilities. In addition, the repayment terms of debt securities may be accelerated in line with the covenants described in Note 29.relevant covenants. Further, no account is taken of the possible early repayment of Santander UK’s mortgage-backednon-recourse finance which is redeemed by Santander UK as funds become available from redemptions of the residential mortgages. Santander UK has no control over the timing and amount of redemptions of residential mortgages.

 

208Santander UK plc


 > Notes to the financial statements231


Annual Report 2019| Financial statements

    

42.

39. OFFSETTING FINANCIAL ASSETS AND LIABILITIES

Financial assets and financial liabilities are reported on a net basis on the balance sheet only if there is a legally enforceable right to set off the recognised amounts and there is an intention to settle on a net basis, or to realise the asset and settle the liability simultaneously. The following table shows the impact of netting arrangements on:

 

All financial assets and liabilities that are reported net on the balance sheet

All derivative financial instruments and repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing agreements that are subject to enforceable master netting arrangements or similar agreements, but do not qualify for balance sheet netting.

The table identifies the amounts that have been offset in the balance sheet and also those amounts that are covered by enforceable netting arrangements (offsetting arrangements and financial collateral) but do not qualify for netting under the requirements described above.

For derivative contracts, the ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as the ISDA Master Agreement or derivative exchange or clearing counterparty agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset andclose-out netting applied across all outstanding transactiontransactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur. Financial collateral refers to cash andnon-cash collateral obtained, typically daily or weekly, to cover the net exposure between counterparties by enabling the collateral to be realised in an event of default or if other predetermined events occur.

For repurchase and reverse repurchase agreements and other similar secured lending and borrowing, the ‘Financial instruments’ column identifies financial assets and liabilities that are subject to set off under netting agreements, such as global master repurchase agreements and global master securities lending agreements, whereby all outstanding transactions with the same counterparty can be offset andclose-out netting applied across all outstanding transactions covered by the agreements if an event of default or other predetermined events occur. Financial collateral typically comprises highly liquid securities which are legally transferred and can be liquidated in the event ofif a counterparty default.defaults.

Santander UK engages in a variety of counterparty credit mitigation strategies in addition to netting and collateral arrangements. Therefore, the net amounts presented in the tables below do not purport to represent Santander UK’s actual credit exposure.

 

  Group 
  

 

Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements

                                  Group 
  Effects of offsetting on balance sheet   Related amounts not offset         

2018

  

Gross
amount
£m

 

   

Amount
offset
£m

 

 

Net amount

on the

balance
sheet

£m

 

 

Financial 
instruments 
£m 

 

  

Financial
collateral(1)
£m

 

 

Net

amount
£m

 

   

Assets not

subject to
enforceable
netting

arrangements(2)

£m

 

   

Balance
sheet
total(3)
£m

 

 
 Amounts subject to enforceable netting arrangements      
 Effects of offsetting on balance sheet   Related amounts not offset  Assets not subject   
2019 

Gross

    amounts

£m

 

      Amounts

offset

£m

 

    Net amounts

on balance
sheet

£m

 

Financial

        instruments

£m

 

Financial

    collateral(1)
£m

 

Net

    amount

£m

 

to enforceable

netting

arrangements(2)
£m

 

        Balance

sheet

total(3)

£m

 

Assets

                       

Derivative financial instruments

   7,026    (1,872 5,154   (933)   (2,133 2,088    105    5,259 

Derivative financial assets

 4,446  (1,214 3,232   (768 (1,915 549  84  3,316 

Reverse repurchase, securities borrowing & similar agreements:

                       

– Amortised cost

   24,733    (3,606 21,127   (2,721)   (18,406          21,127  25,312  (1,676 23,636   (537 (23,099       23,636 

– Fair value

   2,272      2,272   –    (2,272          2,272                          

Loans and advances to customers and banks(4)

   6,021    (1,293 4,728    –      4,728    199,360    204,088  5,247  (1,248 3,999          3,999  205,143  209,142 
   40,052    (6,771 33,281    (3,654)   (22,811 6,816    199,465    232,746  35,005  (4,138 30,867    (1,305 (25,014 4,548  205,227  236,094 

Liabilities

                       

Derivative financial instruments

   3,187    (1,872 1,315   (933)   (303 79    54    1,369 

Derivative financial liabilities

 2,616  (1,214 1,402   (768 (572 62  46  1,448 

Repurchase, securities lending & similar agreements:

                       

– Amortised cost

   14,516    (3,606 10,910   (2,721)   (8,189          10,910  19,962  (1,676 18,286   (537 (17,749       18,286 

– Fair value

   2,110      2,110   –    (2,110          2,110                          

Deposits by customers and banks(4)

   12,174    (1,293 10,881    –    (502 10,379    184,430    195,311  11,395  (1,248 10,147       (502 9,645  186,089  196,236 
   31,987    (6,771 25,216    (3,654)   (11,104 10,458    184,484    209,700  33,973  (4,138 29,835    (1,305 (18,823 9,707  186,135  215,970 

2017

              

2018

         

Assets

                       

Derivative financial instruments

   30,155    (10,479  19,676   (14,772)   (2,785  2,119    266    19,942 

Derivative financial assets

  7,026   (1,872  5,154    (933  (2,133  2,088   105   5,259 

Reverse repurchase, securities borrowing & similar agreements:

                       

– Amortised cost

   2,614       2,614   –    (2,614          2,614   24,733   (3,606  21,127    (2,721  (18,406        21,127 

– Fair value

   15,224    (6,354  8,870   (355)   (8,515          8,870   2,272      2,272       (2,272        2,272 

Loans and advances to customers and banks(4)

   5,971    (1,459  4,512    –       4,512    198,291    202,803   6,021   (1,293  4,728           4,728   199,360   204,088 
   53,964    (18,292  35,672    (15,127)   (13,914  6,631    198,557    234,229   40,052   (6,771  33,281     (3,654  (22,811  6,816   199,465   232,746 

Liabilities

                       

Derivative financial instruments

   27,839    (10,479  17,360   (14,772)   (1,951  637    253    17,613 

Derivative financial liabilities

  3,187   (1,872  1,315    (933  (303  79   54   1,369 

Repurchase, securities lending & similar agreements:

                       

– Amortised cost

   1,076       1,076   –    (1,076          1,076   14,516   (3,606  10,910    (2,721  (8,189        10,910 

– Fair value

   31,858    (6,354  25,504   (355)   (25,149          25,504   2,110      2,110       (2,110        2,110 

Deposits by customers and banks(4)

   8,942    (1,459  7,483    –    (502  6,981    188,873    196,356   12,174   (1,293  10,881        (502  10,379   184,430   195,311 
   69,715    (18,292  51,423    (15,127)   (28,678  7,618    189,126    240,549   31,987   (6,771  25,216     (3,654  (11,104  10,458   184,484   209,700 

 

(1)

Financial collateral is reflected at its fair value, but has been limited to the net balance sheet exposure so as not to include any over-collateralisation.

(2)

This column includes contractual rights ofset-off that are subject to uncertainty under the laws of the relevant jurisdiction.

(3)

The balance sheet total is the sum of ‘Net amounts reported on the balance sheet’ that are subject to enforceable netting arrangements and ‘Amounts not subject to enforceable netting arrangements’.

(4)

The amounts offset within loans and advances to customers/banks or deposits by customers/banks relate to offset mortgages which are classified as either and that are subject to netting.

 

232Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Notes to the

financial statements

LOGO

40. EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

Since the balance sheet date there has been a global pandemic arising from an outbreak of respiratory illness known as COVID-19. This is causing disruption to financial markets and business activity in the UK. While it is too early to accurately estimate the financial and business impact of the COVID-19 outbreak, we expect a negative impact on our 2020 financial results.

 

Santander UK plc 209233


    


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

 

Shareholder information

This page left intentionally blank

 

210    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

43. RING-FENCING

Regulation

The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 inserted provisions into the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA) and related legislation (the Banking Reform Legislation) requiring the Santander UK group amongst a number of other UK banking groups, to operationally and legally separate certain retail banking activities from certain wholesale or investment banking activities by 1 January 2019. This is known as ‘ring-fencing’. The Banking Reform Legislation specifies:

Certain banking services or activities (principally deposit taking from individuals and SMEs) which must be undertaken by a ring-fenced bank.
Certain banking services and activities, along with certain types of credit risk exposure oroff-balance sheet items, which a ring-fenced bank will be prohibited from carrying on or incurring (prohibited business).

As a result, under the ring-fencing regime, a ring-fenced bank is only permitted to carry on banking services or activities that are not prohibited (permitted business).

Santander UK group model

Our ring-fence structure was completed ahead of the 1 January 2019 regulatory deadline. Its implementation involved a ring-fencing transfer scheme (RFTS) between Santander UK plc, ANTS and Banco Santander SA, as well as asset sales and the rundown of certain short-term positions. Under our chosen model:

Santander UK plc is the primary ring-fenced bank within a ring-fenced banksub-group and serves all of our personal customers in the UK, and the majority of our business banking customers. Santander UK plc also broadly, to the extent allowed by the legislation, continues to hold and serve Santander’s corporate banking business in the UK. Any products Santander UK can’t offer, or customers it can’t serve, from within the ring-fenced bank (which includes some Corporate & Investment Banking business and some Corporate & Commercial Banking customers) are, in most cases, provided or served by the wider Banco Santander group, notably through its Banco Santander London Branch. Santander UK plc continues to be a subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc, and is the holding company of the Santander UK ring-fenced banksub-group. Cater Allen Limited is also a ring-fenced bank and part of the Santander UK ring-fenced banksub-group. Neither Santander UK plc nor Cater Allen Limited conduct prohibited business.
ANTS was emptied of most assets and liabilities, except for a small pool of residual assets and liabilities, and became a wholly-owned direct subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc, outside the ring-fenced bank. The prohibited business of ANTS, which principally included our derivatives business with financial institutions, certain corporates and our short term markets business, was either transferred to Banco Santander London Branch or, in the case of the majority of our short term markets business, was run down. The majority of the permitted business of ANTS transferred to Santander UK plc, with a small amount of the permitted business of ANTS transferring to Banco Santander London Branch.
The business of the Crown Dependency branches (Jersey and Isle of Man) of Santander UK plc was sold to ANTS pursuant to transfer schemes effected under relevant Jersey and Isle of Man law, and therefore transferred out of the ring-fenced bank.

Any associated business transfers to Banco Santander London Branch were made for a cash consideration equivalent to the book value of the associated assets and liabilities, which represents a fair value for the Santander UK group. Costs to sell were immaterial. Our ring-fence structure is now in place with all required transfers completed. Compliance with ring-fencing legislation has involved significant effort over a number of years, with a total cost of c£240m.

LOGO

Santander UK plc211


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

44. TRANSITION TO IFRS 9

Statutory balance sheet reconciliation under IAS 39 and IFRS 9

The measurement categories and carrying amounts of financial assets determined in accordance with IAS 39 and IFRS 9 are compared below, illustrating a total net assets decrease of £192m as a result of the application of IFRS 9:

  

 

Group

 
  IAS 39        IFRS 9       
 Assets Measurement
category
 

 

Carrying
amount

(31 December

2017)

£m

  Reclassifications(1)
£m
  

Remeasurement(2)

£m

  

Measurement

category

 

Carrying
amount
(1 January
2018)

£m

  

Re-presentation
(6)

 

£m

  

IFRS 9
Balance Sheet
(1 January
2018)

£m

 

 

Cash and balances with central banks

 Loans & receivables    32,771   –    –   Amortised cost  32,771   –    32,771 

Trading assets

 FVTPL  30,536   –    –   FVTPL (Mandatory)  30,536   –    30,536 
  FVTPL  19   –    –   FVOCI  19   (19)(a)   –  
     30,555   –    –      30,555   (19)   30,536 
Derivative financial instruments FVTPL (Trading)  19,942   –    –   FVTPL (Mandatory)  19,942   –    19,942 
Other financial assets at   FVTPL (Designated)  1,022   (45)(b)   –   Amortised cost  977   (977)(b)   –  

FVTPL(3)

 FVTPL (Designated)  836   –    –   FVTPL (Designated)  836   –    836 
  FVTPL (Designated)  238   –    –   FVTPL (Mandatory)  238(c)   1,181(d)   1,419 
     2,096   (45)   –      2,051   204   2,255 
Loans and advances to Loans & receivables  199,068   –    (211 Amortised cost  198,857   977(b)   199,834 

customers(4)

 Loans & receivables  181   (1)(a)   –   FVOCI  180   (180)(a)   –  
  Loans & receivables  91   –    –   FVTPL (Mandatory)    91   (91)(d)   –  
     199,340   (1)   (211    199,128   706   199,834 
Loans and advances to banks Loans & receivables  3,463   –    –   Amortised cost  3,463   –    3,463 
Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading Loans & receivables  2,614   –    –   Amortised cost  2,614   –    2,614 
Other financial assets at amortised cost               Amortised cost  –    7,776(e)   7,776 
Financial assets at FVOCI               FVOCI  –    8,942(a)(f)   8,942 
Financial investments Loans & receivables  1,198   –    –   Amortised cost  1,198   (1,198)(e)  
 Loans & receivables  982   (2)(d)   –   FVTPL (Mandatory)  980   (980)(d)  
 Available-for-sale  8,743   –    –   FVOCI  8,743   (8,743)(f)  
 Available-for-sale  29   –    –   FVTPL (Mandatory)  29   (29)(d)  
 Held-to-maturity  6,578   –    –   Amortised cost  6,578   (6,578)(e)  
  Available-for-sale  81   –    –   FVTPL (Mandatory)  81   (81)(d)     
     17,611   (2)   –      17,609   (17,609)     

Other assets

 Other assets  6,373   (1)      Other assets  6,372   –    6,372 
Total assets
(pre-deferred tax asset)(5)
    314,765   (49)   (211    314,505   –    314,505 

(1)Gross(pre-tax) impact on assets resulting from facilities impacted by the IFRS 9 classification and measurement rules.
(2)Gross(pre-tax) impact of facilities that were subject to an incurred loss assessment under IAS 39, and are now subject to an ECL assessment under IFRS 9; and facilities that have been reclassified from a non-amortised cost basis to an amortised cost basis. There is no loss allowance movement attributable toheld-to-maturity investments oravailable-for-sale financial assets reclassified to amortised cost.
(3)The balance sheet category for ‘Financial assets designated at fair value’ has been changed to ‘Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss’ following the adoption of IFRS 9.
(4)Of the £211m increase in loss allowance, £50m related tooff-balance sheet exposures which, for presentation purposes, have been aggregated in the assets section. For more on this, see Note 14.
(5)The impact of transition to IFRS 9 gave rise to a deferred tax asset of £68m, of which £14m is attributable to ‘Reclassifications’, and £54m to ‘Remeasurement’. This deferred tax asset was offset against our deferred tax liabilities.
(6)Gross(pre-tax) impact ofre-presentations resulting from the adoption of IFRS 9.

Reclassification andre-presentation

The columns for ‘Reclassifications’ and ‘Re-presentations’ in the table above capture the following changes resulting from the adoption of IFRS 9:

(a)

Of the financial assets at FVOCI of £8,942m, £199m was previously classified as trading assets of £19m (measured at FVTPL) and loans and advances to customers of £180m (measured at amortised cost). As these financial assets were held within hold to collect and sell business models, they werere-measured at FVOCI on adoption of IFRS 9 (which also resulted in a £1m downward remeasurement of loans and receivables).

(b)

The Santander UK group elected tore-measure Social Housing loans from FVTPL to amortised cost to reflect the hold to collect business model. This resulted in a £45m downward remeasurement of the financial asset and a reclassification of the remaining balance of £977m from other financial assets at FVTPL to loans and advances to customers at amortised cost.

(c)

Other financial assets of £238m, previously designated at FVTPL under IAS 39, are now mandatorily held at FVTPL, as there is no longer an option to bifurcate embedded derivatives under IFRS 9 and they fail the SPPI test.

(d)

Other financial assets at FVTPL of £1,181m were previously classified as financial investments of £980m (measured at amortised cost), financial investments of £110m (measured atavailable-for-sale), and loans and advances to customers of £91m (measured at amortised cost). As these financial assets do not have SPPI characteristics, they were mandatorily measured at FVTPL on adoption of IFRS 9 (which also resulted in a £2m downward remeasurement of loans and receivables) and were reclassified to other financial assets at FVTPL.

(e)

Other financial assets at amortised cost of £7,776m were previously classified as financial investments (measured at amortised cost). On adoption of IFRS 9, the Santander UK group split the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at FVOCI’. This aligned the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position.

(f)

Of the financial assets at FVOCI of £8,942m, £8,743m was previously classified as financial investments (and measured atavailable-for-sale). The reclassification was part of the alignment of the balance sheet line items and IFRS 9 accounting classifications described above.

212    Santander UK plc


> Notes to the financial statements

Reclassifications of debt instruments

For financial assets that were reclassified on transition to IFRS 9, the following table shows their fair value at 31 December 2018 and the fair value gain or loss that would have been recognised if these financial assets had not been reclassified:

Group  
2018   
£m   

To amortised cost from FVTPL:

Fair value at 31 December 2018

1,347   

Fair value gain that would have been recognised during the year if the financial asset had not been reclassified

120   

The effective interest rate of these debt instruments on the date of initial application of IFRS 9 was 3.35%. In 2018, interest income of £21m was recognised for these debt instruments.

LOGO

Santander UK plc213


Annual Report 2018 | Financial statements

45. EVENTS AFTER THE BALANCE SHEET DATE

There have been no significant events between 31 December 2018 and the date of approval of these financial statements which would require a change to or additional disclosure in the financial statements, except for the following:

In January 2019, we announced plans to reshape our branch network and close 140 branches in response to changes in how customers are choosing to carry out their banking. Our future branch network, with approximately 615 branches, will be made up of a combination of larger branches offering improved community facilities to support local businesses and customers, and smaller branches using the latest technology to offer customers more convenient access to banking services. Furthermore, in order to deliver a branch network for the future, 100 branches will be refurbished over the next two years through an investment of £55m. At 31 December 2018, no provision was recognised in respect of these plans as the relevant criteria under IAS 37 ‘Provisions, contingent liabilities and contingent assets’ had not been met.

214    Santander UK plc


LOGO

 

 

234 Santander UK plc

 


Annual Report 2018 | Shareholder information 

Selected financial data

The financial information set forth below for the years ended 31 December 2018, 2017 and 2016 and at 31 December 2018 and 2017 has been derived from the audited Consolidated Financial Statements of Santander UK plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (together, the Santander UK group) prepared in accordance with IFRS included elsewhere in this Annual Report. The information should be read in connection with, and is qualified in its entirety by reference to, the Santander UK group’s Consolidated Financial Statements and the Notes thereto.

Financial information set forth below at 31 December 2014 has been derived from the audited Consolidated Financial Statements with adjustment for the adoption of IFRIC 21 of the Santander UK group for 2014 not included in this Annual Report.

BALANCE SHEETS

     

 

2018(2, 3)
£m

 

     

 

2017
£m

 

     

 

2016
£m

 

     

 

2015
£m

 

     

 

2014
£m

 

 

Assets

                    

Cash and balances at central banks

     19,747      32,771      17,107      16,842      22,562 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

                    

– Trading assets

           30,555      30,035      23,961      21,700 

– Derivative financial instruments

     5,259      19,942      25,471      20,911      23,021 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

     5,617      2,096      2,140      2,398      2,881 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                    

– Loans and advances to customers(1)

     201,289      199,340      199,738      198,045      188,691 

– Loans and advances to banks(1)

     2,799      3,463      4,348      3,548      2,057 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     21,127      2,614             

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

     7,229                 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

     13,302                 

Financial investments

         17,611      17,466      9,064      9,062 

Interests in other entities

     88      73      61      48      38 

Intangible assets

     1,808      1,742      1,685      1,600      1,556 

Property, plant and equipment

     1,832      1,598      1,491      1,597      1,624 

Current tax assets

     153                  49       

Retirement benefit assets

     842      449      398      556      315 

Other assets

     2,280      2,511      2,571      2,156      1,839 

Total assets

     283,372      314,765      302,511      280,775      275,346 

Liabilities

                    

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

                    

– Trading liabilities

           31,109      15,560      12,722      15,333 

– Derivative financial instruments

     1,369      17,613      23,103      21,508      22,732 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

     6,286      2,315      2,440      2,016      2,848 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

                    

– Deposits by customers

     178,090      183,648      177,172      164,074      153,606 

– Deposits by banks(1)

     17,221      12,708      9,769      8,278      8,214 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     10,910      1,076             

– Debt securities in issue

     46,692      42,633      50,346      49,615      51,790 

– Subordinated liabilities

     3,601      3,793      4,303      3,885      4,002 

Other liabilities

     2,448      2,730      3,221      2,445      2,441 

Provisions

     509      558      700      870      491 

Current tax liabilities

           3      54      1      69 

Deferred tax liabilities

     223      88      128      223      59 

Retirement benefit obligations

     114      286      262      110      199 

Total liabilities

     267,463      298,560      287,058      265,747      261,784 

Equity

                    

Share capital

     3,119      3,119      3,119      3,119      3,140 

Share premium

     5,620      5,620      5,620      5,620      5,620 

Other equity instruments

     1,991      2,281      1,785      1,792      1,104 

Retained earnings

     4,744      4,732      4,255      4,048      3,425 

Other reserves

     284      301      524      314      273 

Total shareholders’ equity

     15,758      16,053      15,303      14,893      13,562 

Non-controlling interests

     151      152      150      135       

Total equity

     15,909      16,205      15,453      15,028      13,562 

Total liabilities and equity

     283,372      314,765      302,511      280,775      275,346 

(1)

From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives are represented accordingly.

(2)

On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9, as described in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(3)

In 2018, the Santander UK group completed the implementation of its ring-fencing plans, as described in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

216
Strategic Report  Santander UK plc


Financial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 > Selected financial data

INCOME STATEMENTS

     

2018(1, 2)

£m

 

   

2017

£m

 

   

2016

£m

 

   

2015

£m

 

   

2014

£m

 

 

 

Net interest income

     3,603    3,803    3,582    3,575    3,434 

Net fee and commission income

     749    807    770    715    739 

Net trading and other income

     182    302    443    283    297 

Total operating income

        4,534         4,912         4,795         4,573         4,470 

Operating expenses before credit impairment losses,

provisions and charges

     (2,579   (2,499   (2,414   (2,400   (2,397

Credit impairment losses

     (153   (203   (67   (66   (258

Provisions for other liabilities and charges

     (257   (393   (397   (762   (416

Total operating credit impairment losses, provisions and charges

     (410   (596   (464   (828   (674

Profit before tax

     1,545    1,817    1,917    1,345    1,399 

Tax on profit

     (441   (561   (598   (381   (289

Profit after tax

     1,104    1,256    1,319    964    1,110 

Attributable to:

            

Equity holders of the parent

     1,082    1,235    1,292    939    1,110 

Non-controlling interests

     22    21    27    25     

Profit after tax

     1,104    1,256    1,319    964    1,110 

 

(1)  On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9, as described in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(2)  In 2018, the Santander UK group completed the implementation of its ring-fencing plans, as described in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

SELECTED STATISTICAL INFORMATION

 

   

   

 

     

2018(1, 2)

%

 

   

2017

%

 

   

2016

%

 

   

2015

%

 

   

2014

%

 

 

 

Capital ratios:

            

CET1 capital ratio

     13.2    12.2    11.6    11.6    11.9 

Total capital ratio

     20.3    19.2    18.5    18.2    17.9 

Equity to assets ratio(3)

     4.53    4.35    4.40    4.47    4.26 

Profitability ratios:

            

Return on assets(4)

     0.36    0.40    0.44    0.34    0.40 

Return on ordinary shareholders’ equity(5)

     7.9    9.1    9.7    7.3    9.2 

Dividend payout ratio per SEC Guide 3(6)

     105    45    46    51    44 

(1)

On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9, as described in Note 44 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(2)

In 2018, the Santander UK group completed the implementation of its ring-fencing plans, as described in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

(3)

Average ordinary shareholders’ equity divided by average total assets. Average balances are based on monthly data.

(4)

Profit after tax divided by average total assets. Average balances are based on monthly data.

(5)

Profit after tax divided by average ordinary shareholders’ equity.

(6)

Ordinary equity dividends approved divided by profit after tax attributable to equity holders of the parent.

LOGO

Santander UK plc 217

 


Annual Report 2018 | Shareholder information

Subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates

In accordance with Section 409 of the Companies Act 2006, details of Santander UK plc’s subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates at 31 December 20182019 are set out below.

Subsidiaries

All subsidiaries are consolidated by the Santander UK group.

Incorporated and registered in England and Wales:

 

Name of subsidiary

 

Registered
office(1)

 

  

Direct/indirect
ownership

 

  

Share class through
which ownership

is held

 

 

Proportion
of ownership
interest

%

 

   

Ultimate 
proportion of 
ownership 

 

  Registered        
office(1)
 Direct/indirect            
ownership
 

Share class through        

which ownership

is held

  

Proportion
of ownership
interest

%

   

Ultimate    
        proportion of    
ownership    

%    

2 & 3 Triton Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

A & L CF December (1) Limited (in liquidation)

 F  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100  

A & L CF June (3) Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   A Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

A & L CF September (4) Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   A Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

Abbey National Nominees Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Abbey National Property Investments

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Alliance & Leicester Personal Finance Limited

 G  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   G Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Cater Allen Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   A Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

First National Tricity Finance Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   A Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

PSA Finance UK Limited

 H  Indirect  Ordinary £1      50   H Indirect Ordinary £1       50 

Santander Asset Finance (December) Limited

 G  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   G Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

Santander Asset Finance plc

 A  Direct  Ordinary £0.10  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £0.10   100    100 

Santander Cards Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   A Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

Santander Cards UK Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Santander Consumer (UK) plc

 B  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   B Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Santander Consumer Credit Services Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100   A Indirect Ordinary £1       100 

Santander Estates Limited

 G  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   G Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Santander Global Consumer Finance Limited

 A  Indirect  Ordinary £0.0001      100   A Indirect Ordinary £0.0001       100 

Santander Guarantee Company

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Santander Lending Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Santander Private Banking UK Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Santander UK Operations Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary A £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary A £1   100    100 
       Ordinary B £1  100    100       Ordinary B £1   100    100 

Santander UK (Structured Solutions) Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £0.01  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £0.01   100    100 

Santander UK Technology Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

The Alliance & Leicester Corporation Limited

 A  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100   A Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

Time Retail Finance Limited (in liquidation)

 F  Indirect  Ordinary £1      100  

Time Retail Finance Limited (In liquidation)

 F Indirect Ordinary £1       100 
       Ordinary £0.0001      100       Ordinary £0.0001       100 

(1)Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.

Incorporated and registered outside England and Wales:

 

 

Name of subsidiary

 

Registered
office(1)

 

  

Direct/indirect
ownership

 

  

Share class through

which ownership
is held

 

 

Proportion
of ownership
interest

%

 

   

Ultimate 
proportion of 
ownership 

 

 

Santander Cards Ireland Limited

 J  Indirect  Ordinary 1      100  
       Ordinary 1.27     

Santander ISA Managers Limited

 I  Direct  Ordinary £1  100    100  

 

(1)

Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.

Incorporated and registered outside England and Wales:

  Name of subsidiary Registered        
office(1)
 Direct/indirect              
ownership
 

Share class through        

which ownership

is held

  

Proportion
of ownership
interest

%

   

Ultimate    
        proportion of    
ownership    

%    

Santander Cards Ireland Limited

 J Indirect 

Ordinary1

Ordinary1.27

       100 

Santander ISA Managers Limited

 I Direct Ordinary £1   100    100 

(1)

Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address, including the country.

 

218Santander UK plc


 > Subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates235


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

Other subsidiary undertakings

All these entities are registered in England and Wales except where noted.for Guaranteed Investment Products 1 PCC Limited which is registered in Guernsey and Motor Securities2018-1 Designated Activity Company which is registered in Ireland.

The Company and its subsidiaries do not own directly, or indirectly, any of the share capital of any of the entities, however they are consolidated by the Santander UK group because the substance of the relationship indicates control, as described in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

 

  Name of entity

  

Registered                


office(1)

  

Name of entity

  

Registered                


office(1)

Abbey Covered Bonds LLP(Holdings) Limited

  EHolmes Trustees LimitedA

Abbey Covered Bonds (LM) Limited

E  Langton Funding (No.1) Limited  C

Abbey Covered Bonds (LM) LimitedLLP

  EA  Langton Mortgages Trustee (UK) Limited  A

Abbey Covered Bonds (Holdings)Auto ABS UK Loans 2017 Holdings Limited

  EC  Langton PECOH Limited  C

Auto ABS UK Loans 2017 plc

  C  Langton Securities(2008-1) plc  C

Auto ABS UK Loans 20172019 Holdings Limited

  CL  Langton Securities(2010-1) plc  C

Auto ABS UK Loans 20172019 plc

  CL  Langton Securities(2010-2) plc  C

Fosse (Master Issuer)Auto ABS UK Loans Holdings Limited

  C  Langton Securities Holdings Limited  C

Fosse Funding (No.1) LimitedAuto ABS UK Loans plc

  C  MAC No. 1 Limited  A

Fosse (Master Issuer) Holdings Limited

CMotor2015-1 Holdings LimitedC

Fosse Funding (No.1) Limited

CMotor2015-1 plc (In liquidation)D

Fosse Master Issuer plc

  C  Motor2015-12016-1 Holdings Limited  C

Fosse PECOH Limited

  C  Motor2015-12016-1 plc  C

Fosse Trustee (UK) Limited

  A  Motor2016-12017-1 Holdings Limited  C

HCUK Auto Funding2016-1Guaranteed Investment Products 1 PCC Limited (In liquidation)

  DS  Motor2016-12017-1 plc  C

Holmes Funding Limited

  A  Motor Securities2016-1M2018-1 Limited (In liquidation)Designated Activity Company  DT

Holmes Holdings Limited

  A  Motor2017-1 HoldingsPECOH Limited  CA

Holmes Master Issuer plc

  A  Motor2017-1 plc  C

Holmes Trustees Limited

APECOH LimitedA

 

(1)

Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.

Joint ventures and associates

All these entities are registered in England and Wales and are accounted for by the equity method of accounting.

 

Name of joint venture

    

Registered
office(1)

 

  

Direct/indirect
ownership

 

  

Share class through

which ownership
is held

 

 

Proportion
of ownership
interest

%

 

   

Ultimate 
proportion of 
ownership 

 

  Registered        
office(1)
 Direct/indirect     ��      
ownership
 

Share class through        
which ownership

is held

  

Proportion
of ownership
interest

%

   

Ultimate    
    proportion of    
ownership     

%    

Hyundai Capital UK Limited

    K  Indirect  Ordinary £1      50   K Indirect Ordinary £1       50 

PSA UK Number 1 plc

    H  Direct  B Ordinary £1  50    50   H Indirect B Ordinary £1       50 
          C Ordinary £1          C Ordinary £1      

Syntheo Limited

    A  Direct  Ordinary £1  50    50  

 

(1)

Refer to the key at the end of this section for the registered office address.

All entities areHyundai Capital UK Limited is a joint ventures, except forventure and PSA UK Number 1 plc which is an associate.

Overseas branches

The Company has no overseas branches.

Key of registered office addresses

A

2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN

B

Santander House, 86 Station Road, Redhill RH1 1SR

C

35 Great St. Helen’s, London EC3A 6AP

D

40a Station Road, Upminster, Essex RM14 2TR

E

Wilmington Trust SP Services (London) Limited, 1 Kings Arms Yard, London EC2R 7AF

F

Griffins, Tavistock House South, Tavistock Square, London WC1H 9LG

G

Building 3, Floor 2, Carlton Park, Narborough, Leicester LE19 0AL

H

61 London Road, Redhill RH1 1QA

I

287 St. Vincent Street, Glasgow, Scotland G2 5NB

J

25/28 North Wall Quay, Dublin 1, Ireland

K

London Court, 39 London Road, Reigate RH2 9AQ

LOGO
L

Level 37, 25 Canada Square, London E14 5LQ

M

Santander House, 201 Grafton Gate East, Milton Keynes MK9 1AN

N

Fourth Floor, The Albany, South Esplanade, St. Peter Port, Guernsey GY1 4NF

O

19-21 Commercial Street, St. Helier, Jersey JE2 3RU

P

Clarendon House, 2 Church Street, Hamilton HM11, Bermuda

Q

The Residency, 7th Floor, 133/1 Residency Road, Bangalore, KA 560 025, India

R

19/21 Prospect Hill, Douglas, Isle of Man IM99 1RY

S

Ground Floor, Dorey Court, Admiral Park, St Peter Port, Guernsey GY1 2HT

T

3rd Floor, Flemming Court, Flemming’s Place, Dublin 4

 

 

236Santander UK plc219


Annual Report 2018 | Shareholder information 
Strategic ReportFinancial reviewGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

Forward-looking statements

The Company and its subsidiaries (together Santander UKUK) may from time to time make written or oral forward-looking statements. Santander UKThe Company makes written forward-looking statements in this Annual Report and may also make forward-lookingforward- looking statements in its periodic reports to the SEC on Forms20-F and6-K, in its offering circulars and prospectuses, in press releases and in other written materials and in oral statements made by its officers, directors or employees to third parties. Examples of such forward-looking statements include, but are not limited to: projections or expectations of revenues, costs, profit (or loss), earnings (or loss) per share, dividends, capital structure or other financial items or ratios; statements of plans, objectives or goals of Santander UK or its management, including those related to products or services; statements of future economic performance; and statements of assumptions underlying such statements.

projections or expectations of revenues, costs, profit (or loss), earnings (or loss) per share, dividends, capital structure or other financial items or ratios

statements of plans, objectives or goals of Santander UK or its management, including those related to products or services

statements of future economic performance, and

statements of assumptions underlying such statements

Words such as ‘believes’, ‘anticipates’, ‘expects’, ‘intends’, ‘aims’, ‘plans’, ‘targets’ and similar expressions are intended to identify forward-looking statements, but are not the exclusive means of identifying such statements.

By their very nature, forward-looking statements are not statements of historical or current facts; they cannot be objectively verified, are speculative and involve inherent risks and uncertainties, both general and specific, and risks exist that the predictions, forecasts, projections and other forward-looking statements will not be achieved. Santander UK cautions readers that a number of important factors could cause actual results to differ materially from the plans, objectives, expectations, estimates and intentions expressed in such forward-looking statements made by Santander UK or on its behalf. Some of these factors, which could affect Santander UK’s business, financial condition and/or results of operation, are considered in detail in the Risk review, and they include:

 

the effects of disruptions and volatility in the global economy and global financial markets

the effects of UK economic conditions

Santanderthe effects of UK’s exposure to UK political developments, includingwithdrawal from the outcome of the ongoing UK EU Article 50 negotiations on BrexitEuropean Union

the effects of competition with other financial institutions, including new entrants into the financial services laws, regulations, governmental oversight, administrative actionssector

the risk that Santander UK’s new or existing products and policiesservices may not become (or may not continue to be) successful

the risk that Santander UK may be unable to continue offering products and any changes thereto in each location or market inservices from third parties

the extent to which Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to prepayment risk

the risk that Santander UK operatesmay be unable to manage the growth of its operations

the effects of any new reformschanges to the UK mortgage lending market

Santander UK’s exposure to any riskreputation of loss from legal and regulatory proceedings

the power of the FCA, the PRA, the CMA or an overseas regulator to potentially intervene in response to e.g. attempts by customers to seek redress from financial service institutions, including Santander UK in case of industry-wide issues

the effects which the Banking Act 2009 may have on Santander UK’s business and the value of securities issued

the effects which thebail-in and write down powers under the Banking Act 2009 and the BRRD may have on Santander UK’s business and the value of securities issuedor its affiliates

the extent to which regulatory capital, liquidity and leverage requirements, and any changes to these requirements may limit and adversely affect Santander UK’s operations

Santander UK’s ability to access liquidity and funding on acceptable financial terms

the extent to which liquidity requirements and any changes to these requirements may limit and adversely affect Santander UK’s operations

Santander UK’s exposure to UK Government debt

the effects of the ongoing political, economic and sovereign debt tensions in the eurozone

Santander UK’s exposure to risks faced by other financial institutions

the effects of an adverse movement in external credit rating assigned to Santander UK, any Santander UK member or any of their respective debt securities

the effects of any changes in the pension liabilities and obligations of Santander UK

the effects of fluctuations in interest rates and other market risks

risks arising from the integrity and continued existence of reference rates

the extent to which Santander UK may be required to record negative fair value adjustments for its financial assets due to changes in market conditions

Santander UK’s ability to control the level ofnon-performing or poor credit quality loans and whether Santander UK’s loan loss reserves are sufficient to cover loan losses

the risk that the value of the collateral, including real estate, securing Santander UK’s loans may not be sufficient and that Santander UK may be unable to realise the full value of the collateral securing its loan portfolio

the effects of the financial services laws, regulations, government oversight, administrative actions and policies and any changes thereto in each location or market in which Santander UK operates

the risk that Santander UK may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act 2009, including thebail-in and write down powers thereunder

the effects of any failure to comply with anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, anti-corruption,anti-tax evasion or sanctions laws or regulations, or the risk of any failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or timeously

the effects of taxation (and any changes to tax), in each location in which Santander UK operates

Santander UK’s exposure to any risk of loss from civil litigation and/or criminal legal or regulatory proceedings

the risk of failing to successfully implement and continueapply or to improve Santander UK’s credit risk management systems

the risks associated withrisk that Santander UK’s derivative transactionsdata management policies and processes may not be sufficiently robust

the extent to whicheffect of cyber-crime on Santander UK may be exposed to operational risks, including risks relating to data and information collection, processing, storage and securityUK’s business

the risk of third parties using Santander UK as a conduit for illegal or improper activities withoutrisks arising from anynon-compliance with Santander UK’s knowledgepolicies, from any employee misconduct or human error, or from any negligence or fraud

the risk of failing to effectively improve or upgrademanage changes in Santander UK’s information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely manner

Santander UK’s exposure to unidentified or unanticipated risks despite its risk management policies, procedures and methods

the effects of competition with other financial institutions

the various risks facingarising from Santander UK as it expands its range ofUK’s reliance on third parties and affiliates for key infrastructure support, products and services (e.g. risk of new products and services not being responsive to customer demands or successful, risk of changing customer needs)

Santander UK’s ability to control the level ofnon-performing or poor credit quality loans and whether Santander UK’s loan loss reserves are sufficient to cover loan losses

the extent to which Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to prepayment risk

the risk that the value of the collateral, including real estate, securing Santander UK’s loans may not be sufficient and Santander UK may be unable to realise the full value of the collateral securing its loan portfolio

the ability of Santander UK to realise the anticipated benefits of its organic growth or business combinations and the exposure, if any, of Santander UK to any unknown liabilities or goodwill impairments relating to acquired businesses

the extent to which members of Santander UK may be responsible for contributing to compensation schemes in the UK in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers

the effects of taxation requirements and other assessments and any changes thereto in each location in which Santander UK operates

the effects of any changes in the pension liabilities and obligations of Santander UK

the ability of Santander UK to recruit retain and develop appropriate senior management and skilled personnel

the effects of any changes toinaccuracy within the reputationjudgements and accounting estimates which underpin aspects of the financial statements, and the consequent risk of any material misstatement of Santander UK, any Santander UK member or any affiliate operating under the Santander UK brandsUK’s financial results

the basiseffect of the preparation of the Company’s and Santander UK’s financial statements and information available about Santander UK, including the extent to which assumptions and estimates made during such preparation are accurate

the extent to which disclosure controls and procedures over financial reporting may not prevent or detect all errors or acts of fraud

the extent to which changesany change in accounting standards could impact Santander UK’s reported earnings

the extent to which Santander UK relies on third parties and affiliates for important infrastructure support, products and services

the possibility of risk arising in the future in relation to transactions between the Company and its parent, subsidiaries or affiliates

the extent to which different disclosure and accounting principles between the UK and the US may provide you with different or less information about us than you expected

the risk associated with enforcement of judgements in the US.

Please refer to our latest filings with the SEC (including, without limitation, our Annual Report on Form20-F for the year ended 31 December 2018)2019) for a discussion of certain risk factors and forward-looking statements. Undue reliance should not be placed on forward-looking statements when making decisions with respect to any Santander UK member and/or its securities. Investors and others should take into account the inherent risks and uncertainties of forward-lookingforward- looking statements and should carefully consider the foregoingnon-exhaustive list of important factors. Forward-looking statements speak only as of the date on which they are made and are based on the knowledge, information available and views taken on the date on which they are made; such knowledge, information and views may change at any time. Santander UK does not undertake any obligation to update or revise any forward-looking statement, whether as a result of new information, future events or otherwise.

 

220    Santander UK plc



LOGO

Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Risk factors

An investment in Santander UK plc (the Company) and its subsidiaries (us, we, our or the Santander UK group)(Santander UK) involves a number of risks, the material ones of which are set out below.

We are vulnerable to disruptionsGeopolitical and volatility in the global financial marketsmacro-economic risks

Over the past 10 years, financial systems worldwide have experienced difficult credit and liquidity conditions and disruptions leading to periods of reduced liquidity and greater volatility (including volatility in spreads). Uncertainties remain concerning the outlook and the future economic environment despite recent improvements in certain segments of the global economy. Investors remain cautious and a slowing or failing of the global economic recovery would likely aggravate the adverse effects of difficult economic and market conditions on us and on others in the financial services industry.

Financial markets over the past three years have been affected, and still are, by a series of political events, which include the United Kingdom’s (UK) vote in June 2016 to leave the European Union (EU), and the general election in the UK in June 2017, which caused significant volatility in the global stock and foreign exchange markets (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘Exposure to UK political developments, including the ongoing negotiations between the UK and EU, could have a material adverse effect on us’). Further, there continues to be significant uncertainty as to the respective legal and regulatory environments in which we and our subsidiaries will operate going forward as a result of theSantander UK’s vote to leave the EU, as the delay in any agreement continues. Such uncertainties have had, and may continue to have, a negative impact on macroeconomic conditions and our operations, financial condition and prospects, and the global economic environment may continue to be adversely affected by political developments (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We may suffer adverse effects as a result of the political, economic and sovereign debt tensions in the eurozone’).

Continued or worsening disruption and volatility in the global financial markets could have a material adverse effect on us, including our ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to us, if at all. If capital markets financing ceases to become available, or becomes excessively expensive, we may be forced to raise the rates we pay on deposits to attract more customers, particularly if interest rates continue to rise in 2019 following repeated comments by the Bank of England (BoE) to raise rates, “at a gradual pace and to a limited extent”. Any such increase in capital markets funding costs or deposit rates could have a material adverse effect on our interest margins, liquidity and profitability, particularly given the sustained low interest rate environment expected in the medium term.

Our operations, financial condition and prospects may be materially impacted by economic conditions in the UK and disruptions in the global economy and global financial markets

OurSantander UK’s business activities are concentrated in the UK, where we offerit offers a range of banking and financial products and services to UK retail and corporate customers. As a consequence, ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects are significantly affected by the general economic conditions in the UK.

Our financial performance is intrinsically linked to the UK economy and the economic prosperity and confidence of consumers and businesses. The state of the UK economy, along with its related impacts on our profitability, remains a risk. Conversely, a strengthened UK economic performance may increase the possibility of a higher interest rate environment and we note that the BoE has commented that it expects to continue to raise interest rates at a steady pace if the economy performs in line with its expectations. In such a scenario, there is a risk that other market participants might offer more competitive product pricing resulting in increased customer attrition and the potential for an increase in defaults on our mortgage and/or loan repayments.

In particular, weSantander UK may face, among others, the following risks related to any future economic downturn:

 

Increased regulation of our industry. Compliance with such regulation will continue to increase our costs, may affect the pricing of ourReduced demand for Santander UK’s products and services, increase our conduct and regulatory risks related tonon-compliance, reduce investment available to enhance our product offerings, limit our ability to pursue business opportunities and impact our strategyservices.

Reduced demand for our products and services

Inability of ourSantander UK’s borrowers to comply fully or in a timely manner with their existing obligationsobligations.

The process we useSantander UK uses to estimate losses inherent in ourits credit exposure requires complex judgements and assumptions, including forecasts of economic conditions, and howif such economic conditions develop more adversely than Santander UK’s estimates it may impair the ability of ourSantander UK’s borrowers to repay their loansloans.

The degree of uncertainty concerning economic conditions may adversely affect the accuracy of ourSantander UK’s estimates, which may, in turn, impact the reliability of the process and the sufficiency of ourSantander UK’s loan loss allowancesallowances.

Lower or negative interest rates, reducing Santander UK’s interest margins.

The value and liquidity of the portfolio of investment securities that we holdSantander UK holds may be adversely affectedaffected.

The recovery of the international financial industry may be delayed and impact ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospectsprospects.

Adverse macroeconomic shocksdevelopments may negativelyhave a negative impact on the household income of ourSantander UK’s retail customers and the profitability of ourSantander UK’s business customers, which may adversely affect the recoverability of ourSantander UK’s loans and other extensions of credit and result in increased credit losses. In particular, the recent outbreak of COVID-19 and various efforts recommended or put in place for individuals and businesses to contain the spread of the disease in the UK and in other countries, as well as some of the UK government and central bank financial mitigation measures, could adversely affect Santander UK’s profitability and its operations, although it is too early to accurately predict the financial and business impact of the COVID-19 outbreak at this time.

The possibility of a renewed economic downturn resulting in negative economic growth in the UK remains a real risk, particularly given an agreement for exiting the EU has yet to be reached. This has, to a certain extent, been reflected in the downgrade of the Office for Budget Responsibility (OBR) forecasts for economic growth for 2018, published with the Budget at the end of October 2018 and the downgrade of the UK’s sovereign credit rating in September 2017 (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘An adverse movement in our external credit rating would likely increase our cost of funding, require us to post additional collateral or take other actions under some of our derivative contracts and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects’). Uncertainty surrounding the future of the eurozone is less acute than before, but a slow increase in growth may pose a risk of a further slowdown in the UK’s principal export markets which would have an adverse effect on the broader UK economy, and could cause uncertainty in relation to the terms of the UK’s exit from the EU. The future trading arrangements agreed between the EU and the UK could also have an adverse impact, particularly if the UK has to resort to using World Trade Organization (WTO) rules from the EU. The future trading arrangements agreed between the EU and the UK could also have an adverse impact, particularly if the UK has to resort to using WTO rules.

Accommodative monetary policies leading to extended period of low or lower interest rates, particularly the reduction of interest rates to near zero as a mitigating measure in response to the recent COVID-19 outbreak, weaker sterling and potentially higher inflation, any of which could have an adverse effect on Santander UK’s profitability.

Adverse changes in the credit quality of ourSantander UK’s borrowers and counterparties or a general deterioration in UK EU or global economic conditions could reduce the recoverability and value of ourSantander UK’s assets and require an increase in ourits level of provisions for bad and doubtful debts. There can be no assurance that weSantander UK will not have to increase ourits provisions for loan losses in the future as a result of increases innon-performing loans and/or for other reasons beyond ourits control. Material increases in ourSantander UK’s provisions for loan losses and write-offs or charge-offs could have ana material adverse effect on ourits operations, financial condition and prospects. Any significant related reduction in the demand for ourthe its products and services could also have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Economic instability and downturns beyond the UK may also impact the UK economy as a whole. Disruption and volatility in the global financial markets could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK, including Santander UK’s ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to Santander UK, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

The UK’s withdrawal from the European Union could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

On 31 January 2020 the UK ceased to be a member of the EU, on withdrawal terms which establish a transition period until 31 December 2020. During the transition period the UK will be treated as if it were still a member of the European Union for trading purposes. European Union legislation will continue to apply in the UK and negotiations on a trade agreement will be conducted, as well as negotiations on the extent of legislative and regulatory convergence and regulatory cooperation. The European Union will also carry out regulatory equivalence assessments for financial services. Such assessments, even if positive, do not guarantee that equivalence will be granted to the UK as a third country pursuant to equivalence regimes in existing EU financial services legislation. Although the withdrawal agreement foresees the possibility to extend the transition period for two more years after the 31 January 2020, this is not automatic as the UK has enshrined the 31 December 2020 date in domestic legislation passing the withdrawal agreement as the end of the transition period, signalling a current desire not to extend it.

Uncertainty remains around the terms of the UK’s relationship with the EU at the end of the transition period. If the transition period were to end without a comprehensive trade agreement, the UK’s economic growth may be negatively impacted. At the end of the transition period, even if a trade agreement is entered into and/or if equivalence is granted to certain areas of the UK’s financial services, contingency measures may still be necessary in certain economic or financial matters to avoid uncertainty and adverse economic effects and there may be some changes in the products and services that Santander UK can continue to offer into the EEA and to EEA residents or EEA incorporated entities. Where possible, Santander UK would look to service such EEA customers from Banco Santander SA instead.

While the longer term effects of the UK’s anticipated withdrawal from the EU are difficult to predict, there is ongoing political and economic uncertainty, which is likely to continue in the medium term. Management has identified a number of risks to Santander UK as a consequence of this uncertainty and the result of the withdrawal process, including the following:

Increased market volatility: there could be a negative impact on Santander UK’s cost of or access to funding, especially in an environment in which Santander UK’s credit ratings are impacted, it could affect interest and currency exchange rates and the value of assets in Santander UK’s banking book or of securities held by Santander UK for liquidity purposes.

Santander UK is subject to substantialEU-derived regulation and oversight: although legislation has now been passed transferring the EU acquis into UK law, there remains significant uncertainty as to the legal and regulatory environment in which Santander UK and its subsidiaries will operate when the transition period ends.

Uncertainty on cross-border operations: Santander UK and other financial institutions will not be able to rely on the European passporting framework for financial services and may not be able to utilise EU financial markets infrastructure, and it is unclear what alternative regime may be in place following the UK’s departure from the EU, which would limit the ability of Santander UK to carry on cross-border business in the EU.

An adverse effect on the UK economy impacting on Santander UK’s customers and clients.

Were one or more of these risks to arise it could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

238Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Business model risks

Santander UK is exposed to competition from other financial institutions, including new entrants into the financial services sector

The markets for UK financial services are very competitive and Santander UK has seen strong competition from incumbent banks and large building societies. In addition, Santander UK faces competition from a number of new entrants,non-banks and other providers. The UK government and regulators are actively supporting the emergence of new entrants into the UK financial services market. The internet and mobile technologies are also changing customer behaviour and the competitive environment. There has been a steep rise in customer use of mobile banking in recent years. Santander UK faces competition from established providers of financial services as well as from banking business developed bynon-financial companies, including technology companies and large retail companies with strong brand recognition. Management expects such competition to continue or intensify as a result of customer behaviour and trends, technological changes, competitor behaviour, the growth in digital banking, new lending models and changes in regulation (including the recent introduction of Open Banking and changes arising from PSD2). As a result of any restructuring or evolution in the market, there may emerge one or more new viable competitors in the UK banking market or a material strengthening of one or more of Santander UK’s existing competitors in that market, limiting Santander UK’s ability to increase its customer base and expand its operations, increasing competition for investment opportunities and potentially reducing Santander UK’s market share.

Any of these factors or a combination thereof could result in a significant reduction in the profit of Santander UK. Santander UK gives consideration to the competitive position in its management actions, such as pricing, product decisions and our business model. Increasing competition could mean that Santander UK increases rates offered on deposits or lowers the rates it charges on loans, or changes its cost base, any of which could have a material adverse effect on its operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK’s ability to maintain its competitive position depends, in part, on the success of new products and services it offers its customers and its ability to continue offering products and services from third parties

The success of Santander UK’s operations and its profitability depends, in part, on the success of new products and services it offers to customers. However, Santander UK cannot guarantee that its new products and services will meet the needs or preferences of Santander UK’s customers which may change over time, and such changes may render Santander UK’s products and services obsolete, outdated or unattractive, and Santander UK may not be able to develop new products that meet its customers’ changing needs in a timely manner. As Santander UK expands the range of its products and services, some of which may be at an early stage of development in the UK market, it will be exposed to known, new and potentially increasingly complex risks, including conduct risk, and development expenses. Santander UK’s employees and risk management systems, as well as its experience and that of its partners, may not be sufficient or adequate to enable it to properly handle or manage such risks. In addition, the cost of developing products that are not launched is likely to affect its operating results.

Any or all of the above factors, individually or collectively, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to risk of prepayment

Santander UK’s loan portfolio is subject to prepayment risk resulting from the ability of a borrower or issuer to pay a debt obligation prior to maturity. Generally, in a low interest rate environment, prepayment activity increases, which reduces the weighted average lives of Santander UK’s earning assets and could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

As a result Santander UK could be required to amortise net premiums into income over a shorter period of time, thereby reducing the corresponding asset yield and net interest income and there is a risk that Santander UK is not able to accurately forecast amortisation schedules for these purposes which may affect its profitability. Prepayment risk also has a significant adverse impact on credit card and collateralised mortgage loans, since prepayments could shorten the weighted average life of these assets, which may result in a mismatch in Santander UK’s funding obligations and reinvestment at lower yields. The risk of prepayment and its ability to accurately forecast amortisation schedules is inherent in Santander UK’s commercial activity and an increase in prepayments or a failure to accurately forecast amortisation schedules could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

If Santander UK is unable to manage the growth of its operations, this could have a material adverse impact on its profitability

Santander UK allocates management and planning resources to develop strategic plans for organic growth, and to identify possible acquisitions and disposals and areas for restructuring its businesses when necessary. From time to time, Santander UK evaluates acquisition, disposal, and partnership opportunities that it believes could offer additional value to its shareholders and customers, and are consistent with its business strategy. However, Santander UK may not be able to identify suitable acquisition or partnership candidates, and may not be able to acquire promising targets or form partnerships on favourable terms, or at all. Furthermore, preparations for acquisitions that Santander UK does not complete can be disruptive. Santander UK bases its assessment of potential acquisitions and partnerships on limited and potentially inexact information and on assumptions with respect to value, operations, profitability and other matters that may prove to be incorrect. Santander UK’s ability to benefit from any such acquisitions and partnerships will depend in part on its successful integration of those businesses. Such integration entails significant risks such as challenges in retaining the customers and employees of the acquired businesses, unforeseen difficulties in integrating operations and systems and unexpected liabilities or contingencies relating to the acquired businesses, including legal claims and regulatory investigations. Moreover, the success of the acquisition or venture will at least in part be subject to a number of political, economic and other factors that are beyond Santander UK’s control. Santander UK can give no assurances that its expectations with regard to integration and synergies will materialise.

Santander UK cannot provide assurance that it will, in all cases, be able to manage its growth effectively or to implement its strategic growth decisions, including its ability to:

Manage efficiently the operations and employees of expanding businesses

Maintain or grow its existing customer base

Successfully execute its strategy

Fully due diligence and assess the value, strengths and weaknesses of investment or acquisition candidates

Finance strategic opportunities, investments or acquisitions

Fully integrate strategic investments, or newly-established entities or acquisitions, in line with its strategy

Align its current information technology systems adequately with those of an enlarged group

Apply its risk management policy effectively to an enlarged group

Any or all of these factors, individually or collectively, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK plc239


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

Damage to Santander UK’s reputation could cause harm to its business prospects

Maintaining a positive reputation is critical to attracting and retaining customers, investors and employees and conducting business transactions with counterparties. Damage to the reputation of Santander UK or Banco Santander SA (as the ultimate parent of Santander UK), the reputation of affiliates operating under the ‘Santander’ brand or any of its other brands could therefore cause significant harm to Santander UK’s business and prospects. Harm to Santander UK’s reputation can arise directly or indirectly from numerous sources, including, among others, employee misconduct (including the possibility of employee fraud), litigation, regulatory interventions and enforcement action, failure to deliver minimum standards of service and quality, disruption to service due to a cyber-attack, wider IT failures, compliance failures, third party fraud, financial crime, breach of legal or regulatory requirements, unethical behaviour (including adopting inappropriate sales and trading practices), and the activities of customers, suppliers, counterparties and the perception of the financial services industry as a whole. Further, negative publicity regarding Santander UK, whether true or not, may result in harm to Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK could suffer significant reputational harm if it fails to identify and manage potential conflicts of interest properly. The failure, or perceived failure, to adequately address conflicts of interest could affect the willingness of customers to deal with Santander UK, or give rise to litigation or regulatory enforcement actions against Santander UK. Therefore, there can be no assurance that conflicts of interest will not arise in the future that could cause material harm to Santander UK’s financial condition and prospects.

Capital and liquidity risk

Santander UK is subject to regulatory capital, liquidity and leverage requirements that could limit its operations, and changes to these requirements may further limit and could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

Capital Requirements Regulation and Capital Requirements Directive IV

Santander UK is subject to capital adequacy requirements applicable to banks and banking groups under directly applicable EU legislation and as adopted by the PRA. Santander UK is required to maintain a minimum ratio of Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital to risk-weighted assets, Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets, total capital to risk-weighted assets and Tier 1 capital to total adjusted assets for leverage monitoring purposes. Any failure by Santander UK to maintain such ratios above prescribed regulatory minimum levels may result in administrative actions or sanctions. These could potentially include requirements on Santander UK to cease all or certain lines of new business, to raise new capital resources or, in certain circumstances, a requirement for Santander UK existing capital instruments (potentially including Santander UK’s debt securities) to be subjected tobail-in or write down (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘Santander UK may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act, includingbail-in and write down powers’).

The Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV Directive) and the Capital Requirements Regulation (the CRR and together with the CRD IV Directive, CRD IV) implemented changes proposed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the Basel Committee) to the capital adequacy framework, known as ‘Basel III’ in the EU. In implementing CRD IV, the PRA has required the capital resources of UK banks to be maintained at levels which exceed the base capital requirements prescribed by CRD IV and to cover relevant risks in their business. In addition, a series of capital buffers have been established under CRD IV and PRA rules to ensure a bank can withstand a period of stress. Though the results of the PRA’s 2019 stress test did not impact on the level of capital that Santander UK is required to hold, the PRA could, in the future, as a result of stress testing exercises (both in the UK and EU wide) and as part of the exercise of UK macro-prudential capital regulation tools, or through supervisory actions, require Santander UK to increase its capital resources further, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)

The LCR is intended to ensure that a bank maintains an adequate level of unencumbered, high quality liquid assets which can be used to offset the net cash outflows the bank could encounter under a short-term significant liquidity stress scenario. The current minimum requirement for LCR is set at 100%. Santander UK’s current liquidity position is in excess of the minimum requirements set by the PRA, however there can be no assurance that future changes to the applicable liquidity requirements would not have an adverse effect on Santander UK’s financial performance.

Leverage ratios

The Financial Services Act 2012 (the FS Act) also provides the Financial Policy Committee (FPC) of the BoE with certain other macro-prudential tools for the management of systemic risk including quarterly setting of the countercyclical capital buffer rate and powers of direction relating to leverage ratios. All major UK banks and banking groups (including Santander UK) are required to hold enough Tier 1 capital (75% of which must be CET1 capital) to satisfy a minimum leverage ratio requirement of 3.25% and enough CET1 capital to satisfy a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 35% of each bank’s institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate. The PRA require UK globally systemically important banks(G-SIBs) and Ring Fenced Bodies to hold enough CET1 capital to meet a additional leverage ratio buffer of 35% of the institution-specificG-SIB buffer rate or Systemic Risk Buffer (SRB) rate, and for consolidated groups which include a Ring Fenced Body to hold enough CET1 capital to meet Leverage Ratio GroupAdd-on. The FPC can also direct the PRA to adjust capital requirements in relation to particular sectors through the imposition of sectoral capital requirements. Action taken in the future by the FPC in exercise of any of its powers could result in the regulatory capital requirements applied to Santander UK being further increased, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Further regulatory changes

Regulators in the UK and worldwide have also proposed that additional loss absorbency requirements should be applied to systemically important institutions to ensure that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution. The BRRD requires that EU Member States ensure that EU banks meet a Minimum Requirement for Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The BoE is required to set MREL for all institutions. The BoE expects banks to comply withend-state MREL requirements by 1 January 2022.

On 7 June 2019 amendments to CRD IV, BRRD and the single resolution mechanism (SRM) through Regulation (EU) 2019/876 of the European Parliament and of the Council amending CRR (CRR II) and Directive (EU) 2019/878 of the European Parliament and of the Council amending CRD IV (CRD V) were published. CRR II and CRD V introduce changes to the leverage ratio, requirements for own fund and MREL, counterparty credit risk, market risk, exposures to central counterparties, large exposures, reporting and disclosure requirements, remuneration, capital conservation measures and the net stable funding ration (NSFR) amongst others. The NSFR is defined as the amount of available stable funding relative to the amount of required stable funding. The majority of the provisions of CRRII will apply from 28 June 2021, although certain provisions, such as those relating to definition or own funds were implemented from 27 June 2019.

240Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

In addition to the above, regulators in the UK and worldwide have produced a range of proposals for future legislative and regulatory changes which could force Santander UK to comply with certain operational restrictions or take steps to raise further capital, or could increase Santander UK’s expenses and could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. These changes, which could affect Santander UK as a whole, include the EU implementation of the Basel Committee’s new market risk framework, which reflects rules made as a result of the Basel Committee’s fundamental review of the trading book. In addition, in December 2017 the Basel Committee published their finalisation of the Basel III framework, with proposed implementation from 1 January 2022. This includes the following elements:

Revisions to the standardised approach for credit risk, credit valuation adjustment risk and operational risk to address certain weaknesses identified by the Basel Committee

Additional constraints on the use of internal model approaches for credit risk, and removing the use of internal model approaches for credit valuation adjustment risk and operational risk

The use of an output floor based on standardised approaches and

The introduction of a leverage ratio buffer for global systemically important banks and refinements to the definition of the leverage ratio exposure measure.

The foregoing measures could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

There is a risk that changes to the UK’s capital adequacy regime (including any increase to minimum leverage ratios) may result in increased minimum capital requirements, which could reduce available capital for new business purposes and adversely affect Santander UK’s cost of funding, profitability and ability to pay dividends, continued organic growth (including increased lending), or pursue acquisitions or other strategic opportunities (alternatively Santander UK could be required to restructure its balance sheet to reduce the capital charges incurred pursuant to the PRA’s rules in relation to the assets held, or raise additional capital but at increased cost and subject to prevailing market conditions). In addition, changes to the eligibility criteria for Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital may affect Santander UK’s ability to raise Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital and impact the recognition of existing Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital resources in the calculation of Santander UK’s capital position. Furthermore increased capital requirements may negatively affect Santander UK’s return on equity and other financial performance indicators.

Santander UK’s business could be affected if its capital is not managed effectively or if these measures limit Santander UK’s ability to manage its balance sheet and capital resources effectively or to access funding on commercially acceptable terms. Effective management of Santander UK’s capital position is important to Santander UK’s ability to operate its business, to continue to grow organically and to pursue its business strategy. There is a risk that implementing and maintaining existing and new liquidity requirements, such as through enhanced liquidity risk management systems, may incur significant costs, and more stringent requirements to hold liquid assets may materially affect Santander UK’s lending business as more funds may be required to acquire or maintain a liquidity buffer, thereby reducing future profitability. This could in turn adversely impact Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Liquidity and funding risks are inherent in Santander UK’s business and could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

Liquidity risk is the risk that Santander UK either does not have available sufficient financial resources to meet its obligations as they fall due or can secure them only at excessive cost. This risk is inherent in any retail and commercial banking business and can be heightened by a number of enterprise-specific factors, including over-reliance on a particular source of funding, changes in credit ratings or market-wide phenomena such as market dislocation. While Santander UK maintains a liquid asset buffer and implements liquidity management processes to seek to mitigate and control these risks, in particular, unforeseen systemic market factors like those experienced during the last financial crisis make it difficult to eliminate these risks completely. There can be no assurance that such circumstances will not reoccur. Extreme liquidity constraints may affect Santander UK’s operations and its ability to fulfil regulatory liquidity requirements, as well as limit growth possibilities. Disruption and volatility in the global financial markets could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to it. A sudden or unexpected shortage of funds in the banking system could threaten the stability of the banking system, and lead to increased funding costs, a reduction in the term of funding instruments or require Santander UK to liquidate certain assets, thereby impacting Santander UK’s liquidity position and its ability to pay its debts. If these circumstances were to arise, this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s results, operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK’s cost of funding is directly related to prevailing interest rates and to its credit spreads. Increases in interest rates and Santander UK’s credit spreads can significantly increase the cost of its funding. Changes in Santander UK’s credit spreads are market-driven and may be influenced by market perceptions of its creditworthiness. Changes to interest rates and Santander UK’s credit spreads occur continuously and may be unpredictable and highly volatile.

If wholesale markets financing ceases to be available, or becomes excessively expensive, Santander UK may be forced to raise the rates it pays on deposits, with a view to attracting more customers, and/or to sell assets, potentially at depressed prices. The persistence or worsening of these adverse market conditions, significant increases in capital markets funding costs or deposit rates could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s interest margins, its cost of funding, access to liquidity and its profitability and therefore on its operations, financial condition and prospects.

In recent years Santander UK has also made use of central bank funding schemes such as the Bank of England’s Funding for Lending scheme and Term Funding Scheme. As at 31 December 2019, Santander UK had drawn £10.8bn of cash under the Term Funding Scheme and £1.0bn of UK Treasury Bills under Bank of England’s Funding for Lending Scheme. A rapid removal or significant reduction, in outstanding quantitative easing purchase programmes could have an adverse effect on Santander UK’s ability to access liquidity and on its funding costs. Any significant reduction or withdrawal of any central bank funding facilities Santander UK may be utilising at any given time could cause an increased dependence on term funding issues and increase its funding costs.

Each of the factors described above could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK, including its ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to it and, more generally, on its operations, financial condition and prospects.

Further, Santander UK aims for a funding structure that is consistent with its assets, avoids excessive reliance on short-term wholesale funding, attracts enduring retail and commercial deposits and provides diversification in products and tenor. Santander UK therefore relies, and will continue to rely, on retail and commercial deposits to fund a significant proportion of lending activities. Theon-going availability of this type of funding is sensitive to a variety of factors outside Santander UK’s control, such as general economic conditions and the confidence of depositors in the economy, in the financial services industry in general, confidence in Santander UK specifically, Santander UK’s credit rating and the availability and extent of deposit guarantees, as well as competition between banks for deposits or competition with other products, such as mutual funds. A change in any of these factors could significantly increase the amount of commercial deposit withdrawals in a short period of time, thereby reducing its ability to access deposit funding on appropriate terms, or at all, in the future, and therefore have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

 

222Santander UK plc


 > Risk factors241


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

Exposure

Santander UK’s liquidity planning assumes that customers will continue to make a volume of deposits with Santander UK political developments, including(particularly demand deposits and short-term time deposits), and Santander UK intends to maintain its emphasis on the ongoing negotiations betweenuse of deposits as a source of funds. The short-term nature of some deposits could cause liquidity problems for Santander UK in the UK and EU, could havefuture if deposits are not made in the volumes anticipated or are withdrawn at short notice or are not renewed. If a substantial number of depositors withdraw their demand deposits or do not roll over their time deposits upon maturity, there may be a material adverse effect on us

On 23 June 2016, the UK held a referendum (the UK EU Referendum) on its membership of the EU, in which a majority voted for the UK to leave the EU. Immediately following the result, the UKSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and global stock and foreign exchange markets commenced a period of significant volatility, including a steep devaluation of the pound sterling. There remains significant uncertainty relating to the UK’s exit from, and future relationship with, the EU and the basis of the UK’s future trading relationship with the rest of the world.

On 29 March 2017, the UK Prime Minister gave notice under Article 50(2) of the Treaty on European Union of the UK’s intention to withdraw from the EU. The delivery of the Article 50(2) notice triggered a two year period of negotiation to determine the terms on which the UK will exit the EU and the framework for the UK’s future relationship with the EU. Unless extended, the UK’s EU membership will cease after this two year period.

There is a possibility that the UK’s EU membership ends at such time without reaching any agreement on the terms of its relationship with the EU going forward, and currently the Withdrawal Agreement, which provides for a transitional period whilst the Future Relationship is negotiated, has not been ratified by the UK Parliament.

A general election in the UK was held on 8 June 2017 (the General Election). The General Election resulted in a hung parliament with no political party obtaining the majority required to form an outright government. On 26 June 2017 it was announced that the Conservative party had reached an agreement with the Democratic Unionist Party (the DUP) in order for the Conservative party to form a minority government with legislative support (‘confidence and supply’) from the DUP. There is an ongoing possibility of an early general election ahead of 2022 and of a change of government.prospects.

The continuing uncertainty surrounding the Brexit outcome has had an effect on the UK economy, particularly towards the end of 2018, and this may continue into 2019. Consumer and Business confidence indicators have continued to fall, for example the GfK consumer confidence index fell to-14 in January 2019, and this has had a significant impact on consumer spending and investment, both of which are vital components of economic growth.

The outcome of Brexit remains unclear, however, a UK exit from the EU with ano-deal continues to remain a possibility and the consensus view is that this would have a negative impact on the UK economy, affecting its growth prospects, based on scenarios put forward by such institutions as the BoE, HM Government and other economic forecasters.

While the longer term effects of the UK’s imminent departure from the EU are difficult to predict, there is short term political and economic uncertainty. The Governor of the BoE warned that the UK exiting the EU without a deal could lead to considerable financial instability, a very significant fall in property prices, rising unemployment, depressed economic growth, higher inflation and interest rates. The Governor also warned that the Bank would not be able to apply interest rate reductions. This could inevitably affect the UK’s attractiveness as a global investment centre, and would likely have a detrimental impact on UK economic growth.

If ano-deal Brexit did occur it would be likely that the UK’s economic growth would slow significantly, and it would be possible that there would be severely adverse economic effects.

The UK’s imminent departure from the EU has also given rise to further calls for a second referendum on Scottish independence and raised questions over the future status of Northern Ireland. These developments, or the perception that they could occur, could have a material adverse effect on economic conditions and the stability of financial markets, and could significantly reduce market liquidity and restrict the ability of key market participants to operate in certain financial markets (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We are vulnerable to disruptions and volatility in the global financial markets’).

Asset valuations, currency exchange rates and credit ratings may be particularly subject to increased market volatility if the negotiation of the UK’s exit from the EU continues in therun-up to 29 March 2019 as a result of Parliament’snon-ratification of the Withdrawal Agreement. The major credit rating agencies changed their outlook to negative on the UK’s sovereign credit rating following the UK EU Referendum, and that has not changed (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘AnAn adverse movement in ourSantander UK’s external credit rating would likely increase ourits cost of funding, require usSantander UK to post additional collateral or take other actions under some of ourits derivative contracts and adversely affect ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects’).prospects

Credit ratings affect the cost and other terms upon which Santander UK is able to obtain funding. Credit rating agencies regularly evaluate Santander UK, and their credit ratings of Santander UK and Santander UK’s issued debt are based on a number of factors, including Santander UK’s financial strength, the strength of the UK economy and conditions affecting the financial services industry generally.

Any downgrade in the external credit ratings assigned to Santander UK or any of Santander UK’s debt securities could have an adverse impact on Santander UK. In addition, weparticular, such downgrade in Santander UK’s credit ratings could increase its borrowing costs and could require it to post additional collateral or take other actions under some of derivatives, loan facilities or other financial contracts, and could limit its access to capital markets and have a material adverse effect on its operations, financial condition and prospects. For example, a credit rating downgrade could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s ability to sell or market certain products, engage in certain longer-term or derivatives transactions and retain its customers or investors, particularly those who need a minimum rating threshold in order to transact or invest.

Any of these results of a credit rating downgrade could, in turn, result in outflows and reduce Santander UK’s liquidity and have an adverse effect on Santander UK, including its operations, financial condition and prospects. For example, Santander UK estimates that at 31 December 2019 if Fitch, Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s were concurrently to downgrade the long-term credit ratings of Santander UK plc by one notch, and thereby trigger a short-term credit rating downgrade, this could result in an outflow of £1.5bn of cash and collateral. A hypothetical two notch downgrade would result in a further outflow of £1.6bn of cash and collateral at 31 December 2019. These potential outflows are subjectcaptured under the LCR regime. However, while certain potential impacts are contractual and quantifiable, the full consequences of a credit rating downgrade are inherently uncertain, as they depend upon numerous dynamic, complex and inter-related factors and assumptions, including market conditions at the time of any downgrade, whether any downgrade of a firm’s long-term credit rating precipitates downgrades to substantialEU-derived regulation and oversight. Although legislation has now been passed transferring the EU acquis into UK law, there remains significant uncertainty asits short-term credit rating, whether any downgrade precipitates changes to the respective legalway that the financial institutions sector is rated, and regulatory environments in which we and our subsidiaries will operate whenassumptions about the UK is no longer a memberratings of the EU, and the basis on which cross-border financial business will take place after the UK leaves the EU.

Operationally, we and other financial institutions and the potential behaviours of various customers, investors and counterparties. Actual outflows will also depend upon certain other factors including any management or restructuring actions that could be taken to reduce cash outflows and the potential liquidity impact from a loss of unsecured funding (such as from money market funds) or loss of secured funding capacity.

There can be no assurance that the credit rating agencies will maintain Santander UK’s current credit ratings or outlooks. A failure to maintain favourable credit ratings or outlooks could increase Santander UK’s cost of funding, adversely affect Santander UK’s interest margins, and reduce its ability to secure both long-term and short-term funding. If a downgrade of a Santander UK’s member’s long-term credit ratings were to occur, it could also impact the short-term credit ratings of other members of Santander UK. The occurrence of any of these events could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Negative changes to the UK sovereign credit rating, or the perception that further negative changes may no longeroccur, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition, prospects and the marketability and trading value of its securities. This might also have an impact on Santander UK’s own credit rating, borrowing costs and ability to secure funding. Negative changes to the UK sovereign credit rating, or the perception that further negative changes may occur, could also have a material effect in depressing consumer confidence, restricting the availability, and increasing the cost, of funding for individuals and companies, further depressing economic activity, increasing unemployment and reducing asset prices, which could in turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Changes in Santander UK’s pension liabilities and obligations could have a materially adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

The majority of current employees are provided with pension benefits through defined contribution arrangements. Under these arrangements Santander UK’s obligation is limited to the cash contributions paid. Santander UK provides retirement benefits for many of its former and current employees in the UK through a number of defined benefit pension schemes established under trust. Santander UK plc is the principal employer under the majority of these schemes, but it has only limited control over the rate at which it pays into such schemes. Under the UK statutory pension funding requirements employers are usually required to contribute to the schemes at the rate they agree with the scheme trustees although, if they cannot agree, the rate can be ableset by the Pensions Regulator. The scheme trustees may, in the course of discussions about future valuations, seek higher employer contributions. The scheme trustees’ power in relation to relythe payment of pension contributions depends on the European passporting frameworkterms of the trust deed and rules governing the pension schemes, but, in some cases, the scheme trustees may have the unilateral right to set the employer’s relevant contribution.

The Pensions Regulator has the power to issue a financial support direction to companies within a group in respect of the liability of employers participating in the UK defined benefit pension schemes where that employer is a service company, or is otherwise ‘insufficiently resourced’ (as defined for the purposes of the relevant legislation). As some of the employers within Santander UK are service companies, if the Pensions Regulator determines that they have become insufficiently resourced and no suitable mitigating action is undertaken, other companies within Santander UK which are connected with or an associate of those employers are at risk of a financial services, andsupport direction in respect of those employers’ liabilities to the defined benefit pension schemes in circumstances where the Pensions Regulator properly considers it reasonable to issue one. Such a financial support direction could require the companies to guarantee or provide security for the pension liabilities of those employers, or could require additional amounts to be paid into the relevant pension schemes in respect of them.

The Pensions Regulator can also issue contribution notices if it is unclear what alternative regimeof the opinion that an employer has taken actions, or failed to take actions, deliberately designed to avoid meeting its pension promises or which are materially detrimental to the scheme’s ability to meet its pension promises. A contribution notice can be issued to any company or individual that is connected with or an associate of such employer in circumstances where the Pensions Regulator considers it reasonable to issue it and multiple notices could be issued to connected companies or individuals for the full amount of the debt. The risk of a contribution notice being imposed may be in place followinginhibit Santander UK’s freedom to restructure or to undertake certain corporate activities. There is a risk that Santander UK could incur an obligation to make a contribution to the UK’s departure fromscheme by virtue of section 75 or 75A of the EU. This uncertainty, and any actions takenPensions Act 1995 as a result of a reorganisation or disposal of Santander UK’s businesses.

242Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Should the value of assets to liabilities in respect of the defined benefit schemes operated by Santander UK record a deficit or an increased deficit (as appropriate), due to either a reduction in the value of the pension fund assets (depending on the performance of financial markets) not matched by a fall in the pension fund liabilities and/or an increase in the scheme liabilities not matched by an increase in the pension fund assets due to changes in legislation, mortality assumptions, discount rate assumptions, inflation, or other factors, or there is a change in the actual or perceived strength of the employer’s covenant, this uncertainty,could result in Santander UK having to make increased contributions to reduce or satisfy the deficits which would divert resources from use in other areas of its business and reduce its capital resources. While Santander UK can control a number of the above factors, there are some over which Santander UK has no or limited control. Although the trustees of the defined benefit pension schemes are obliged to consult with Santander UK before changing the pension schemes’ investment strategy, the trustees have the final say and ultimate responsibility for investment strategy rests with them.

Changes in UK legislation and regulation to address perceived failings in pension protection following recent high profile company insolvencies with large pension deficits may also affect Santander UK’s position, Specific areas where concerns have been raised are levels of dividends where there is a pension scheme with a deficit and the length of time taken to address deficits. Changes in legislation or regulation could result in Santander UK having to make increased contributions to reduce or satisfy the deficits which would divert resources from use in other areas of its business and reduce its capital resources.

Any increase in Santander UK’s pension liabilities and obligations as well as new or amended rules, maya result of the foregoing factors could have a significant impactmaterial adverse effect on our operating results,Santander UK’s operations, financial conditionconditions and prospects.

Ongoing uncertainty within theMarket risks

Santander UK’s financial results are constantly exposed to market risk. Santander UK Governmentis subject to fluctuations in interest rates and Parliament, and the rejection of the Withdrawal Agreement by the House of Commons, and the risk that this results in the Government falling could cause significantother market and economic disruption,risks, which could have a material adverse effect on ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Continued ambiguity relatingMarket risk refers to the probability of variations in Santander UK’s withdrawal fromnet interest income or in the EU, along with any further changesmarket value of its assets and liabilities due to volatility of interest rates, exchange rates or equity prices.

Changes in government structureinterest rates would affect the following areas, among others, of Santander UK’s business:

Net interest income

The value of Santander UK’s derivatives transactions

The market value of Santander UK securities holdings

The value of Santander UK’s loans and deposits

The volume of loans originated

Interest rates are highly sensitive to many factors beyond Santander UK’s control, including increased regulation of the financial sector, monetary policies, domestic and policies, may leadinternational economic and political conditions and other factors. Variations in interest rates could affect the interest earned on Santander UK’s assets and the interest paid on its borrowings, thereby affecting its net interest income, which comprises the majority of its revenue, reducing its growth rate and profitability and potentially resulting in losses. In addition, costs Santander UK incurs putting into place strategies to further market volatility and changes toreduce interest rate exposure could increase in the fiscal, monetary and regulatory landscape infuture, which we operate and could have a material adverse effect on us, including our ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to us and, more generally, on ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Increases in interest rates may reduce the volume of loans originated by Santander UK. Sustained high interest rates have historically discouraged customers from borrowing and have resulted in increased delinquencies in outstanding loans and deterioration in the quality of assets. Increases in interest rates may also reduce the propensity of Santander UK’s customers to prepay or refinance fixed-rate loans, reduce the value of its financial assets and reduce gains or require Santander UK to record losses on sales of Santander UK’s loans or securities, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

LOGODue to the historically low interest rate environment in the UK in recent years, the rates on many of Santander UK’s interest-bearing deposit products have been priced at or near zero, which may limit Santander UK’s ability to further reduce customer rates in the event of further cuts in BoE Base Rate. If a generally low interest rate environment in the UK persists in the long term, it may be difficult to increase Santander UK’s net interest income, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK is exposed to risks relating to the integrity and continued existence of reference rates

LIBOR and other interest rates are used in securities issued and held by Santander UK and in contracts with its financial counterparts, customers and investors. Reference rates and indices, including LIBOR and other interest rate benchmarks are subject to national, international and other regulatory guidance and proposals for reform and transition to alternative rates. On 29 November 2017, the FCA announced that its Working Group on Sterling Risk-Free Rates was to be mandated with implementing a broad-based transition to the Sterling Overnight Index Average (SONIA) over the next four years across sterling bond, loan and derivative markets, so that SONIA is established as the primary sterling interest rate benchmark and regulators in the United Kingdom continue to seek the replacement of LIBOR by the end of 2021.

Any such changes to, or replacement of benchmarks may cause contracts in which they are used to perform differently than in the past, or may have other consequential effects on any of Santander UK’s rights and obligations which depend on such benchmarks and any fallbacks. In particular, the transition from GBP LIBOR to SONIA and the elimination of the LIBOR benchmark will require an adjustment to the terms of financial contracts to which Santander UK is a party which relate to LIBOR. This could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

It is not yet clear whether LIBOR will cease to exist entirely before the end of 2021, whether the use of LIBOR will be made unlawful or impermissible in future, and whether there will be any transitional arrangements set out either by law, regulation or market practice. The lack of a legal or regulatory framework for the automatic transition of legacy contracts and agreements, makes such transition more complex and subject to risks that could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK has dedicated considerable bank-wide resources to prepare itself, and its customers, for the cessation of LIBOR and other legacy interest rate benchmarks:

Santander UK has a fully established LIBOR transition governance structure, including Senior Management Forums meeting monthly, and thematic and product-level working groups. In addition, regular reports are received by ALCO and Board Risk Committee.

Santander UK recognises that LIBOR transitioning presents potential risks for its customers. Santander UK completed a first phase of customer communication with the website publication of an education statement on the replacement of LIBOR, and is actively planning a second phase, tailored to individual customer needs.

Santander UK rolled out LIBOR transition training to all its staff. Santander UK supported this with regular internal publications and communications, and dedicated workshops to help colleagues work together and share insights on LIBOR transitioning.

Santander UK has been a highly active contributor to discussions on LIBOR transitioning through direct participation at a wide range of industry forums.

This approach allowed Santander UK to execute several targeted initiatives in 2019, including becoming the first UK bank to switch an existing LIBOR referencing securitisation to SONIA, switching Santander UK’s pension scheme derivative exposures from LIBOR-linked swaps to gilts, and completing a series of derivative trade compressions to reduce Santander UK’s gross LIBOR exposure.

Santander UK’s most significant exposures are to GBP LIBOR, and mainly represent derivatives transacted to hedge its balance sheet risks, corporate loans and medium-term funding. At 31 December 2019, Santander estimates the notional value of its contracts referencing post-2021 LIBOR benchmarks to be £88bn. For details of the notional value of derivative hedging instruments by benchmark interest rate, see Note 11 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

When LIBOR is replaced or ceases to exist (or if the methodology for calculating LIBOR or any successor benchmark rate changes for any reason), interest rates on Santander UK’s floating rate obligations, loans, deposits, derivatives, and other financial instruments linked to LIBOR rates, as well as the revenue and expenses associated with those financial instruments, may be adversely affected. In addition, any uncertainty regarding the continued use and reliability of LIBOR as a benchmark interest rate could adversely affect the value of Santander UK’s floating rate obligations, loans, deposits, derivatives, and other financial instruments linked to LIBOR rates. Any such issues relating to LIBOR or other benchmarks or reference rates (including SONIA) could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

 

Santander UK plc 223243


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

We are subjectMarket conditions have resulted in, and could continue to substantial regulation and governmental oversight whichresult in, material changes to the estimated fair values of Santander UK’s financial assets. Negative fair value adjustments could adversely affect ourhave a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

SupervisionSantander UK has material exposures to securities, loans, derivatives and other investments that are recorded at fair value and are therefore exposed to potential negative fair value adjustments. Asset valuations in future periods, reflecting the prevailing market conditions, may result in negative changes in the fair values of Santander UK’s financial assets. In addition, the value ultimately realised by Santander UK on disposal may be lower than the current fair value, during the last global financial crisis, financial markets were subject to periods of significant stress resulting in steep falls in perceived or actual financial asset values, particularly due to volatility in global financial markets and the resulting widening of credit spreads. Any of these factors could require Santander UK to record negative fair value adjustments, which could have a material adverse effect on its operations, financial condition and prospects.

In addition, to the extent that fair values are determined using financial valuation models, such values may be inaccurate or subject to change, as the data used by such models may not be available or may become unavailable due to changes in market conditions, particularly for illiquid assets and in times of economic instability. In such circumstances, Santander UK’s valuation methodologies require it to make assumptions, judgements and estimates in order to establish fair value.

Reliable assumptions are difficult to make and are inherently uncertain. Moreover, valuation models are complex, making them inherently imperfect predictors of actual results. Any consequential impairments or write-downs could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK invests in debt securities of the UK Government largely for liquidity management purposes. At 31 December 2019, approximately 9% of Santander UK’s total assets and 48% of Santander UK’s securities portfolio were comprised of debt securities issued by the UK Government. Any failure by the UK Government to make timely payments under the terms of these securities, or a significant decrease in their market value, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

If the level ofnon-performing loans increases or the credit quality of Santander UK’s loans deteriorates in the future, or if Santander UK’s loan loss reserves are insufficient to cover loan losses, this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

Risks arising from changes in credit quality and the recoverability of loans and amounts due from counterparties are inherent in a wide range of Santander UK’s businesses.Non-performing or low credit quality loans have in the past, and could continue to, have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

In particular, the amount of Santander UK’s reportednon-performing loans may increase in the future as a result of growth in Santander UK’s total loan portfolio, including as a result of loan portfolios that Santander UK may acquire in the future (the credit quality of which may turn out to be worse than Santander UK had anticipated), or factors beyond Santander UK’s control, such as adverse changes in the credit quality of Santander UK’s borrowers and counterparties, a general deterioration in the UK or global economic conditions, the impact of political events, events affecting certain industries or events affecting financial markets and global economies.

There can be no assurance that Santander UK will be able to effectively control the level of impaired loans in, or the credit quality of, its total loan portfolio, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Interest rates payable on a significant portion of Santander UK’s outstanding mortgage loan products fluctuate over time due to, among other factors, changes in the BoE Base Rate. As a result, borrowers with variable interest rate mortgage loans are exposed to increased monthly payments when the related mortgage interest rate adjusts upward. Similarly, borrowers of mortgage loans with fixed or introductory rates adjusting to variable rates after an initial period are exposed to the risk of increased monthly payments at the end of this period. Over the last few years both variable and fixed interest rates have been at historically low levels, which has benefited borrowers of new loans and those repaying existing variable rate loans regardless of special or introductory rates. Future increases in borrowers’ required monthly payments may result in higher delinquency rates and losses related tonon-performing loans in the future. Borrowers seeking to avoid these increased monthly payments by refinancing their mortgage loans may no longer be able to find available replacement loans at comparably low interest rates. These events, alone or in combination, may contribute to higher delinquency rates and losses for Santander UK, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK’s current loan loss reserves may not be adequate to cover an increase in the amount ofnon-performing loans or any future deterioration in the overall credit quality of Santander UK’s total loan portfolio. Santander UK’s loan loss reserves are based on Santander UK’s current assessment of various factors affecting the quality of its loan portfolio, including its borrowers’ financial condition, repayment abilities, the realisable value of any collateral, the prospects for support from any guarantor, government macroeconomic policies, interest rates and the legal and regulatory environment. Many of these factors are beyond Santander UK’s control. As a result, there is no precise method for predicting loan and credit losses, and no assurance can be provided that Santander UK’s current or future loan loss reserves will be sufficient to cover actual losses.

If Santander UK’s assessment of and expectations concerning the above mentioned factors differ from actual developments Santander UK may need to increase its loan loss reserves, which may adversely affect Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. Additionally, in calculating its loan loss reserves, Santander UK employs qualitative tools and statistical models which may not be reliable in all circumstances and which are dependent upon data that may not be complete. If Santander UK is unable to control or reduce the level of itsnon-performing or poor credit quality loans, this could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

The value of the collateral, including real estate, securing Santander UK’s loans may not be sufficient, and Santander UK may be unable to realise the full value of the collateral securing Santander UK’s loan portfolio

The value of the collateral securing Santander UK’s loan portfolio may significantly fluctuate or decline due to factors beyond Santander UK’s control, including macroeconomic factors affecting the UK’s economy. Santander UK’s residential mortgage loan portfolio is one of its principal assets, comprising 81% of Santander UK’s loan portfolio at 31 December 2019. As a result, Santander UK is highly exposed to developments in the residential property market in the UK.

House price growth has slowed since the UK Referendum to exit the EU, most noticeably in London, although UK house prices have generally continued to be supported by certain economic fundamentals including historically low mortgage rates and low unemployment rates. Nevertheless, any increase in house prices may be limited given low levels of consumer confidence and low levels of real earnings growth. The depth of the previous house price declines as well as the continuing uncertainty as to the extent and sustainability of the UK economic recovery will mean that losses could be incurred on loans should they go into possession.

The value of the collateral securing Santander UK’s loan portfolio may also be adversely affected by force majeure events such as natural disasters like floods or landslides exacerbated by climate change trends. Any force majeure event may cause widespread damage and could have an adverse impact on the economy of the affected region and may therefore impair the asset quality of Santander UK’s loan portfolio in that area.

244Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Santander UK may also not have sufficientlyup-to-date information on the value of collateral, which may result in an inaccurate assessment for impairment losses on loans secured by such collateral.

If any of the above events were to occur, Santander UK may need to make additional provisions to cover actual impairment losses of its loans, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Legal & regulatory risks

Santander UK is subject to substantial and evolving regulation and governmental oversight

As a financial services group, we areSantander UK is subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK, the EU and in each other location in which we operate. As well as being subject toSantander UK regulation, as partoperates. For a discussion of the Banco Santander group, we are also impacted through regulation by the Banco de España (the Bank of Spain)principal laws and at a corporate level, by the European Central Bank (ECB), and various legal and regulatory regimes (including the US) that have extra-territorial effect.

The laws, regulations and policies to which we areSantander UK is subject, may be changed at any time. In addition,see “Regulation of the interpretation and the application of those laws, regulations and policies by regulators are also subject to change. Furthermore, thereSantander UK group”. The sector is uncertainty regarding theon-shoring of EU regulations into the UK upon the UK’s exit from the EU and the changes that will be implemented in that process (including the further powers that will be given to UK regulators), as well as regarding the level of convergence or divergence with EU regulations, initiatives and reforms (including during any transitional period). Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect our business, including Spain, the US, the EU, Latin America and other jurisdictions.

The manner in which financial services laws, regulations and policies are applied to the operations of financial institutions is still evolving. Moreover, to the extent these laws, regulations and policies apply to us, we may face higher compliance costs. Any legislative or regulatory actions and any required changes to our business operations resulting from such laws, regulations and policies as well as any deficiencies in our compliance with such laws, regulations and policies, could result in significant loss of revenue, impact our strategy, limit our ability to pursue business opportunities in which we might otherwise consider engaging and limit our ability to provide certain products and services. They may also affect the value of assets that we hold, requiring us to increase our prices and therefore reduce demand for our products, impose additional compliance and other costs on us or otherwise adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects. Accordingly, there can be no assurance that future changes in laws, regulations and policies or in their interpretation or application will not adversely affect us.

During periods of market turmoil in the past 10 years, there have beenfacing unprecedented levels of government and regulatory intervention and scrutiny, and changes to the regulations governing financial institutions and the conduct of business. In addition, regulatory and governmental authorities have continued to consider further enhanced or new legal or regulatory requirements intended to reduce the probability and impact of future crises or(or otherwise assure the stability of institutions under their supervision. Thissupervision), enhance consumer protection and improve controls in relation to financial crime-related risks. Santander UK expect regulatory and government intervention in the banking sector to remain high for the foreseeable future. An intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the United Kingdom by the Prudential Regulation Authority (PRA), the Lending Standards Board (LSB), Financial Conduct Authority (FCA), the Payment Systems Regulator (PSR) and the Competition and Markets Authority (CMA).

As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also affected by other regulators such as the Banco de España (the Bank of Spain) and the European Central Bank (ECB), as well as various legal and regulatory regimes (including the US) that have extra-territorial effect. Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US, the EU and other jurisdictions.

The manner in which financial services laws, regulations and policies are applied to the operations of financial institutions has gone through great change which is still being implemented and reviewed. Recent proposals and measures taken by governmental, tax and regulatory authorities and further future changes in supervision and regulation (in particular in the UK), which are beyond ourSantander UK’s control and could materially affect our business, the value of assets and operations and result in significant increases in operational and compliance costs. Products and services offered by us could also be affected. Santander UK’s business.

Changes in UK legislation and regulation to address the stability of the financial sector may also affect ourSantander UK’s competitive position, particularly if such changes are implemented before international consensus is reached on key issues affecting the industry. Although we work closely

To the extent these laws, regulations and policies apply to it, Santander UK may face higher compliance costs. Santander UK may lack the capacity to readily respond to multiple regulatory or government policy changes simultaneously. Any legislative or regulatory actions and any required changes to Santander UK’s business operations resulting from such laws, regulations and policies as well as any deficiencies in Santander UK’s compliance with our regulatorssuch laws, regulations and continually monitorpolicies could result in significant loss of revenue, could have an impact on Santander UK’s strategy, limit its ability to pursue business opportunities in which Santander UK might otherwise consider engaging, limit Santander UK’s ability to provide certain products and services and result in enforcement action and the situation, future changes in law, regulation, fiscalimposition of financial and other penalties. They may also affect the value of assets that Santander UK holds, requiring Santander UK to increase its prices thereby reducing demand for Santander UK’s products or other policies can be unpredictable and are beyond our control. No assurance can be given generally that laws or regulations will be adopted, enforced or interpreted in a manner that will nototherwise have a material adverse effect on ourits operations, financial condition and prospects. Accordingly, there can be no assurance that future changes in laws, regulations and policies or in their interpretation or application by Santander UK or by regulatory authorities will not adversely affect Santander UK.

Specific examples of areas where regulatory changes and increased regulatory scrutiny could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects include, but are not limited to, the following:

Banking Reform: in accordance with the provisions of the Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 UK banking groups that hold significant retail deposits, including Santander UK, were required to separate or ‘ring-fence’ their retail banking activities from their wholesale banking activities by 1 January 2019. Santander UK completed its ring-fencing plans in advance of the legislative deadline of 1 January 2019. However, given the complexity of the ring-fencing regulatory regime and the material impact on the way Santander UK now conducts its business operations in the UK, there is a risk that Santander UK and/or Santander UK plc may be found to be in breach of one or more ring-fencing requirements. This might occur, for example, if prohibited business activities are found to be taking place within the ring-fence, mandated retail banking activities are found being carried on in a UK entity outside the ring-fenced part of the group or Santander UK breached a PRA ring-fencing rule. From 1 January 2019, if Santander UK were found to be in breach of any of the ring-fencing requirements placed upon it under the ring-fencing regime, it could be subject to supervisory or enforcement action by the PRA, the consequences of which might include substantial financial penalties, imposition of a suspension or restriction on Santander UK’s UK activities or, in the most serious of cases, forced restructuring of the UK group, entitling the PRA (subject to the consent of the UK Government) to require the sale of a Santander ring-fenced bank or other parts of the UK group.

Competition: reviews and investigations by competition authorities (which in the United Kingdom include the CMA, the FCA and the PSR) into any aspect of Santander UK’s operations or the functioning of any markets in which Santander UK operates, including, but not limited to, personal current accounts, mortgages and the SME retail banking market.

Payments: Santander UK has been required to make systems changes and update processes to comply with a number of new payments regulations at a European as well as domestic UK Level. Within the UK, the Payment Systems Regulator has mandated Santander UK build systems and processes for both Confirmation of Payee as well as the Contingent Reimbursement Model Code (“CRM”) which both aim to reduce the level of customer fraud (particularly through our customer’s manipulation into making payments known as “Authorised Push Payment” fraud). Under these standards, Santander UK will assume responsibility for certain categories of customer losses and any inherent failing in system design may lead to fines from regulators and/or compensation being paid to customers. Any requirement to make such changes, any liability to customers, any regulatory fines, or any reputational damage, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. At a European level, the Second Payment Services Directive (PSD2) is a fundamental piece of payments-related legislation in Europe, the first part of which came into force in January 2018. The regulation aims to harmonise payment processing across Europe, and is being implemented in the UK by the FCA. In the UK, PSD2 introduced Open Banking, which opened up access to customers’ online account and payments data to third party providers (TPPs). Customers are able to give secure access to certain TPPs authorised by the FCA or other European regulators to access account information and to make payments from current accounts. Following the CMA’s retail banking market investigation, the nine largest current account providers in the UK (theCMA-9), including Santander UK, were required to accelerate certain of the PSD2 requirements and implement Open Banking by 13 January 2018. Open Banking and PSD2 both have the potential to exacerbate a number of existing risks including data loss/data protection, cyber security, fraud and wider financial crime risk, which in turn could give rise to increased costs, litigation risk and risk of regulatory investigation and enforcement activity. Examples of the heightened risk include the risk of fraud relating to activities of a TPP pursuant to which funds are redirected to a third party not chosen by the customer; and the risk of data misuse by a TPP/ other third party. If the arrangements that Santander UK has made to comply with Santander UK’s Open Banking obligation prove to be inadequate or incompatible with legal and regulatory requirements or expectations, Santander UK could be required to make extensive and costly changes to Santander UK’s systems and controls, policies and practices. Santander UK might also be fined by regulators, be subject to compensation claimed by customers and might suffer reputational damage. Any requirement to make such changes, any liability to customers, any regulatory fines, or any reputational damage, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK plc245


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

Data Privacy: Failure to comply with emerging and recently implemented laws and regulations concerning data privacy and localisation in a number of jurisdictions across the globe may result in regulatory sanctions. In particular, the coming into effect of GDPR on 25 May 2018 has introduced new obligations on data controllers and rights for data subjects. The implementation of the GDPR has required substantial amendments to Santander UK’s procedures and policies. The changes have had, and could continue to have, an adverse impact on Santander UK’s business by increasing its operational and compliance costs. If there are breaches of the GDPR obligations, Santander UK could face significant administrative and monetary sanctions as well as reputational damage. The occurrence of any of these events could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

LIBOR: There is uncertainty as to whether LIBOR will cease to exist entirely before the end of 2021, whether the use of LIBOR will be made unlawful or impermissible in future, and whether there will be any transitional arrangements set out either by law, regulation or market practice. The lack of a legal or regulatory framework for the automatic transition of legacy contracts and agreements makes such transition more complex and subject to risks that could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Evolving conduct and regulatory policy: the FCA is currently at various stages (from finalised rules and guidance through to consultation and implementation) in respect of a number of initiatives which could impact or require changes to Santander UK’s approach to products and services. This includes but is not limited to a debate in relation to a Duty of Care for financial services firms or potential changes to the Principles for Business, Price discrimination and Fair Pricing initiatives, Guidance on the Variation of Terms in Financial Services Contracts, and reforms to the overdraft market through the High Cost Credit Review. In parallel, the CMA is developing its role and responsibilities in relation to consumer protection and considering the impact of ‘loyalty penalties’ on consumers, which could result in changes for firms, including those in the financial services sector. Regulatory changes arising from these initiatives could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK may become subject to the provisions of the Banking Act, includingbail-in and write down powers

The special resolution regime set out in the Banking Act 2009 provides HM Treasury, the BoE, the PRA and the FCA with a variety of powers for dealing with UK deposit taking institutions (and, in certain circumstances, their holding companies) that are failing or likely to fail, including: (i) to take a bank or bank holding company into temporary public ownership; (ii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a private sector purchaser; or (iii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a ‘bridge bank’. The special resolution regime also comprises a separate insolvency procedure and administration procedure each of which is of specific application to banks. These insolvency and administration measures may be invoked prior to the point at which an application for insolvency proceedings with respect to a relevant institution could be made.

If an instrument or order were made under the Banking ReformAct in respect of an entity in Santander UK, such instrument or order (as the case may be) may, among other things: (i) result in a compulsory transfer of shares or other securities or property of such entity; (ii) have an impact on the rights of the holders of shares or other securities issued by Santander UK or such entity or result in the nullification or modification of the terms and conditions of such shares or securities; or (iii) result in thede-listing of the shares and/or other securities of such entity. In addition, such an order may affect matters in respect of Santander UK or such entity and/or other aspects of the shares or other securities of Santander UK or such entity, which may negatively affect the ability of Santander UK or such entity to meet its obligations in respect of such shares or securities.

Further, amendments to the Insolvency Act 1986 and secondary legislation have introduced changes to the treatment and ranking of certain debts with the result that certain eligible deposits will rank in priority to the claims of ordinary (i.e.non-preferred) unsecured creditors in the event of an insolvency. This may negatively affect the ability of unsecured creditors to recover sums due to them in an insolvency scenario.

If a‘bail-in’ order were made under the Banking Act 2009 as amended by The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 (the Banking Reform Act) established a ring-fencing framework under the Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (FSMA) pursuant(as to which, UK banking groups that hold significant retail deposits were required to separate or ‘ring-fence’ their retail banking activities from their wholesale banking activities by 1 January 2019. Thesee further ‘Regulation of Santander UK group is subject- The Banking Act’). Such an order would be based on the principle that such creditors should receive no less favourable treatment than they would have received had the bank entered into insolvency immediately before the coming into effect of thebail-in power. Thebail-in power includes the power to cancel or write down (in whole or in part) certain liabilities or to modify the ring-fencing regulatory regime introducedterms of certain contracts for the purposes of reducing or deferring the liabilities of a bank under resolution and the power to convert certain liabilities into shares (or other instruments of ownership) of the bank. Thebail-in power under the Banking Reform Act may potentially be exercised in respect of any unsecured debt securities issued by a bank under resolution or an entity in Santander UK, regardless of when they were issued. Accordingly, thebail-in power under the Banking Act could be exercised in respect of Santander UK’s debt securities. Public financial support would only be used as a last resort, if at all, after having assessed and adopted through secondary legislationutilised, to the maximum extent practicable, the resolution tools including thebail-in tool and the occurrence of circumstances in which itbail-in powers would need to be exercised in respect of Santander UK or any entity in Santander UK would have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

The PRA also has the power to make rules requiring a parent undertaking of a bank to make arrangements to facilitate the exercise of resolution powers, including a power to require a member of a banking group to issue debt instruments. The exercise of such powers could have an impact on the liquidity of Santander UK’s debt instruments and could materially increase Santander UK’s cost of funding.

In addition, the BRRD provides for resolution authorities to have the power to require institutions and groups to make structural changes to ensure legal and operational separation of ‘critical functions’ from other functions where necessary, or to require institutions to limit or cease existing or proposed activities in certain circumstances. As a result of changes to the PRA Rulebook made to implement the BRRD, Santander UK is now required to identify such ‘critical functions’ as part of its resolution and recovery planning. If used in respect of Santander UK, these ex ante powers could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK must comply with anti-money laundering, anti-terrorism, anti-bribery and corruption, sanctions andanti-tax evasion laws and regulations and a failure to prevent or detect any illegal or improper activities fully or on a timely basis could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition or prospects

Santander UK is required to comply with from 1 January 2019. Accordingly,applicable anti-money laundering (AML), counter-terrorism financing (CTF), anti-bribery and corruption, sanctions,anti-tax evasion and other laws and regulations in the jurisdictions in which Santander UK group has implemented the separation – or ring-fencing –operates. These laws and regulations require Santander UK, among other things, to conduct customer due diligence (including in respect of sanctions and politically-exposed person screening), ensure account and transaction information is kept up to date and implement effective financial crime policies and procedures detailing what is required from those responsible in order to counter financial crime risks. Santander UK is also required to conduct financial crime training for its core retailstaff and small business deposit taking activities from its wholesale marketsto report suspicious transactions and investment banking activities.activity to appropriate law enforcement.

The Company, beingpolicies and procedures require the main banking entityimplementation and embedding of effective controls and monitoring within the ring-fenced partbusinesses of theSantander UK, group, will serve our retail, commercial and corporate customers. The majority of our customer loans and assets as well as customer deposits and liabilities will remain within the Company or Cater Allen Limited, which is also a ring-fenced bank. Wholesale markets and investment banking activities which, from 1 January 2019, are prohibited from being transacted within the ring-fenced bank principally included our derivatives business with financial institutions and certain corporates, elements of our short term markets business, the Company’s branches in Jersey and the Isle of Man, and the United States (US) branch of Abbey National Treasury Services plc (ANTS).

Implementation of ring-fencing has involved material structuralrequires ongoing changes to systems, technology and operational changes to the Company’sactivities. Comprehensive and risk based financial crime training at a group-wide wide and business and the corporate group structure in the UK during 2018. Following consent from the PRA to the application to the High Courtunit level is a key element of England and Wales (the Court) for approval of our ring-fencing transfer scheme (the Scheme), our Scheme was approved by the Court on 12 June 2018.

In accordancethis, with the Scheme: (i) ANTS has transferred the majority ofFCA providing guidance on expectations within its business; with products, transactions, arrangementsFinancial Crime Guide. Financial crime is continually evolving. This requires proactive and customersadaptable responses from Santander UK so that it is able to deter threats and criminality effectively. Even known threats can never be fully eliminated, and there will be instances where Santander UK may be used by other parties to engage in money laundering and other stakeholders which are permitted in the ring fence transferred to the Company and products, transactions, arrangements and customers and other stakeholders which are prohibited within the ring-fence transferred to the London branch of Bancoillegal or improper activities. In addition, Santander SA; and (ii) the Company has transferred its prohibited business and certain specified business that is permitted within the ring-fence to the London branch of Banco Santander SA. These transfers of business were implemented during July 2018.

On 11 December 2018, the Royal Court of Jersey approved the transfer of the business of the Jersey branch of the Company to a new Jersey branch of ANTS, which is a member of the Santander UK Group Holdings plc group outside the ring-fence, by way of a court-sanctioned transfer scheme under Jersey law (the Jersey Scheme). On 13 December 2018, the Isle of Man High Court of Justice approved the transfer of the business of the Isle of Man branch of the Company to a new Isle of Man branch of ANTS, by way of a court-sanctioned transfer scheme under Isle of Man law (the Isle of Man Scheme). The effective date of the Jersey Scheme and the Isle of Man Scheme was 17 December 2018.

ANTS has ceased the activities of its US branch, and surrendered its US licence with effect from 14 December 2018.

We completed our ring-fencing plans in advance of the legislative deadline of 1 January 2019. However, given the complexity of the ring-fencing regulatory regime and the material impact on the way the group now conducts its business operations in the UK, there is a risk that the Company and/or Cater Allen Limited may be found to be in breach of one or more ring-fencing requirements. This might occur, for example, if prohibited business activities are found to be taking place within the ring-fence or core, mandated retail banking activities are found being carried on in a UK entity outside the ring-fenced part of the group.

 

224246 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk factorsreviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

From 1 January 2019, if therelies heavily on its staff to assist Santander UK group were found to beby identifying such activities and reporting them, and Santander UK’s staff have varying degrees of experience in breachrecognising criminal tactics and understanding the level of sophistication of criminal organisations. Where Santander UK outsources any of the ring-fencing requirements placed uponits customer due diligence, customer screening or anti financial crime operations, it under the ring-fencing regime, it could be subject to enforcement action by the PRA, the consequences of which might include substantial financial penalties, imposition of a suspension or restriction on the group’s UK activities or, in the most serious of cases, forced restructuring of the UK group, entitling the PRA (subject to the consent of the UK Government) to require the sale of a Santander ring-fenced bank or other parts of the UK group. Any of those sanctions could, if imposed, have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial conditionremains responsible and prospects.

The restructuring activitiesaccountable for full compliance and migrations of businesses, assets and customer relationships mentioned above have had a material impact on how theany breaches. If Santander UK group conducts its business. While it has sought to implement each of the required changes with minimal impact on customers, the Santander UK group is unable to predict with certaintyapply the attitudesnecessary scrutiny and reactionoversight, or if such oversight proves insufficient to detect illegal or improper activities, there remains a risk of its customers. The structural changes which have been requiredregulatory breach and this could have a material adverse effect on ourits operations, financial condition and prospects.

EU fiscalOver the last decade, financial crime risk has become the subject of enhanced regulatory scrutiny and banking unionsupervision by regulators globally, and such scrutiny continues to intensify. Consequently, AML, CTF, anti-bribery and corruption and sanctions laws and regulations have become, and may continue to become, increasingly complex and detailed and have become, and may continue to become, the subject of enhanced regulatory supervision, requiring improved systems, sophisticated monitoring and skilled compliance personnel. The complexity in the area of financial crime policy is a significant challenge, involving overlapping requirements between different legislation, and, in some instances, conflicts of laws. The divergence of policy approaches between the EU/UK and US in the area of financial sanctions is exacerbated by the lack of clear guidance from the UK Office of Financial Sanctions Implementation.

The European banking union is expectedimplementation of new UK legislation related to financial crime has required substantial amendments to its AML / CTF procedures and policies, with additional training and guidance required for employees. Further such amendments will likely be achieved through new harmonised banking rules (in a single rulebook)required going forward to reflect changes to UK laws and a new institutional framework with stronger systems for both banking supervisionGovernment policy post-Brexit. Any changes could adversely impact Santander UK’s business by increasing its operational and resolution that will be managed at a European level. Its two main pillars arecompliance costs and reducing the Single Supervisory Mechanism (SSM)value of its assets and the Single Resolution Mechanism (SRM).

The SSM (comprising both the ECB and the national competent authorities) is designed to assistoperations, which would in making the banking sector more transparent, unified and safer. On 4 November 2014, the ECB fully assumed its new supervisory responsibilities within the SSM, in particular direct supervision of 119 significant banks (at 5 December 2017) in the eurozone, including Banco Santander SA.

Regulation (EU) No. 806/2014 of the European Parliament and the Council of the EU (the SRM Regulation) became effective from 1 January 2015 and establishes uniform rules and a uniform procedure for the resolution of credit institutions and certain investment firms in the framework of the SRM and Single Resolution Fund (SRF). The new Single Resolution Board (SRB), which is the central decision-making body of the SRM fully assumed its resolution powers on 1 January 2016. The SRB is responsible for managing the SRF.

Further, regulations adopted towards achieving a banking and/or fiscal union in the EU and decisions adopted by the ECB in its capacity as Banco Santander SA’s main supervisory authority mayturn have a material impactadverse effect on ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospectsprospects.

If Santander UK is unable to fully comply with applicable laws, regulations and mayexpectations, its regulators and relevant law enforcement agencies have the ability and authority to pursue civil and criminal proceedings against it, to impose significant fines and other penalties on it, including requiring a complete review of Santander UK’s business systems,day-to-day supervision by external consultants, imposing restrictions on the conduct of Santander UK’s business and operations and ultimately the revocation of Santander UK’s banking licence. The reputational damage to its business and brand could be impactedsevere if Santander UK were found to have materially breached AML, CTF, anti-bribery and corruption or sanctions requirements. Santander UK’s reputation could also suffer if it were unable to protect Santander UK’s customers or its business from being used by the termscriminals for illegal or improper purposes. Any of the UK’s exit from the EU (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘Exposure to UK political developments, including the ongoing negotiations between the UK and EU,these outcomes could have a material adverse effect on us’).

Other regulatory reforms adopted or proposed in the wake of theSantander UK’s operations, financial crisiscondition and prospects.

The revisedAt an operational level,geo-political, economic andre-enacted Markets in Financial Instruments legislation (MiFID) replaces the existing MiFID framework and comprises the Directive 2014/65 of the European Parliament and of the Council, of 15 May 2014 and amending Directive 2002/92/EC and Directive 2011/61/EU (MiFID2) and the Regulation 600/2014 of the European Parliament and of the Council of 15 May 2014 and amending Regulation (EU) No 648/2012 (MiFIR). The substantive provisions of MiFID came into force on 3 January 2018 and introduced an obligation to trade certain classes ofOver-the-Counter (OTC) derivative contracts on trading venues. Certain details remain to be clarified in further binding technical standards to be adopted by the European Commission (the Commission). MiFID2 and MiFIR may lead to social changes which negatively impact our profit margins, require us to adjust our business practices or increase our costs (including compliance costs). It is possible that the measures and procedures we have introduced might, in future, be deemed to be misaligned with MiFID obligations, or that individuals within the business may not fully comply with the new procedures. If there are breaches of our MiFID obligations or of other existing laws and regulations relatingcan provide opportunities to financial criminals and alter the risks posed to banks. Effective intelligence and monitoring systems within strengthened public/private partnerships to share knowledge on emerging risks are required to help mitigate these risks. However, there can be no guarantee that any intelligence shared by public authorities or other financial institutions will be accurate or effective in helping Santander UK to combat financial crime, we could face significant administrative, regulatory and criminal sanctions and restrictions on the conduct of our business and operations, as well as reputational damage. Therefore, anyif, despite such breachesefforts, Santander UK fails to combat financial crime effectively then this could have a material adverse effect on ourSantander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

In addition, while Santander UK reviews its relevant counterparties’ internal policies and procedures (for example, under its correspondent banking relationships) with respect to such matters, Santander UK, to a large degree, relies upon its relevant counterparties to maintain and properly apply their own appropriate anti-financial-crime procedures. Such measures, procedures and compliance may not be completely effective in preventing third parties from using its (and its relevant counterparties’) services as a conduit for money laundering (including illegal cash operations) without its (or its relevant counterparties’) knowledge. There are also risks that other third parties, such as suppliers, could be involved in financial crime. If Santander UK is associated with, or even accused of being associated with, financial crime (or a business involved in financial crime), then its reputation could suffer and it could become subject to civil or criminal proceedings that could result in penalties, sanctions and legal enforcement (including being added to “black lists” that would prohibit certain parties from engaging in transactions with it), any one of which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK is subject totax-related risks

Santander UK is subject to the substance and interpretation of UK tax laws and is subject to routine review and audit by tax authorities in relation thereto. Santander UK’s interpretation or application of these tax laws may differ from those of the relevant tax authorities. While Santander UK provides for potential tax liabilities that may arise on the basis of the amounts expected to be paid to the tax authorities, the amounts ultimately paid may differ materially from the amounts provided depending on the ultimate resolution of such matters. In general, changes to tax laws and tax rates, including as a result of policy changes by governments and/or regulators, and penalties for failing to comply with such changes, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects. Some of these changes may be specific to the banking/financial services sectors and therefore result in us incurring an additional tax burden when compared to other industry sectors.

Santander UK is exposed to risk of loss and damage from civil litigation and/or criminal legal and regulatory proceedings

Santander UK faces various legal and regulatory issues that may give rise to civil or criminal litigation, arbitration, and/or criminal, tax, administrative and/or regulatory investigations, inquiries or proceedings. Failure to adequately manage the risks arising in connection with legal and regulatory issues, including Santander UK’s obligations under existing applicable laws and regulations or its contractual obligations, including arrangements with its customers and suppliers, or failing to properly implement applicable laws and regulations could result in significant loss or damage including reputational damage, all of which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Additionally, the current regulatory environment, with the continuing heightened supervisory focus and associated enforcement activity, combined with uncertainty about the evolution of the regulatory regime, may lead to material operational and compliance costs. Relevant risks include:

Regulators, agencies and authorities with jurisdiction over Santander UK, including the Bank of England (BoE), the PRA and the FCA, HM Treasury, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC), the CMA, the Commission, the Information Commissioner’s Office, the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS), the PSR, the Serious Fraud Office (SFO), the National Crime Agency (NCA) or the Courts, may determine that certain aspects of Santander UK’s business have not been or are not being conducted in compliance with applicable laws or regulations (or that policies and procedures are inadequate to ensure compliance), or, in the case of the FOS, with what is fair and reasonable in the FOS’s opinion. Changes in policy, laws and regulations including in relation to SME dispute resolution and liability for authorised push payment fraud and unauthorised payment fraud, may have significant consequences and lead to material implementation, operational and compliance costs.

An adverse finding by a regulator, agency or authority could result in the need for extensive changes in systems and controls, business policies, and practices coupled with suspension of sales, restrictions on conduct of business and operations, withdrawal of services, customer redress, fines and reputational damage.

The increased focus on competition law in financial services and concurrent competition enforcement powers for the FCA and PSR may increase the likelihood of competition law related inquiries or investigations initiated by either the CMA or these authorities. In addition, the CMA’s widening focus on market outcomes may result in increased reviews by the CMA of the markets in which Santander UK operates.

Santander UK plc247


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

The alleged historical or current misselling of financial products, such as mortgages, arising from causes such as the alleged overcharging of interest and the inappropriate sale of interest-only mortgages and Payment Protection Insurance (PPI), including as a result of having sales practices and/or rewards structures that are deemed to have been inappropriate, presents a risk of civil litigation (including claims management company driven legal campaigns) and/or enforcement action requiring Santander UK to amend sales processes, withdraw products or provide restitution to affected customers, any of which may require additional provisions to be recorded in Santander UK’s financial statements and could adversely impact future revenues from affected products. In the case of PPI claims specifically, there is an increased risk of litigation as a consequence of the FCA time bar which came into force on 30 August 2019.

Santander UK may hold bank accounts for entities that might be or are subject to scrutiny from various regulators and authorities, including the SFO, the NCA and regulators in the US and elsewhere, which could lead to Santander UK’s conduct being reviewed as part of any such scrutiny.

Santander UK may be liable for damages to third parties harmed by Santander UK’s conduct of business. For competition law, there are efforts by governments across Europe to promote private enforcement as a means of obtaining redress for harm suffered as a result of competition law breaches. Under the Consumer Rights Act 2015, there is scope for class actions to be used to allow the claims of a whole class of claimants to be heard in a single action in bothfollow-on and standalone competition cases.

Santander UK is (and will continue from time to time to be) subject to certain legal or regulatory investigations, inquiries and proceedings, both civil and criminal including in connection with Santander UK’s lending and payment activities, treatment of customers, relationships with Santander UK’s employees, financial crime, and other commercial or tax matters. These may be brought against Santander UK under UK legal or regulatory processes, or under legal or regulatory processes in other jurisdictions, such as the EU and the US, regulationin circumstances where overseas regulators and authorities may have jurisdiction by virtue of its activities or operations.

In view of the US,inherent difficulty of predicting the Dodd-Frank Wall Street Reformoutcome of legal or regulatory proceedings, particularly where opportunistic claimants seek very large or indeterminate damages, cases present novel legal theories, involve a large number of parties or are in the early stages of discovery, or where the approaches of regulators or authorities to legal or regulatory issues and sanctions applied are subject to change, Santander UK cannot state with confidence what the eventual outcome of any pending matters will be and any such pending matters are not disclosed by name because they are under assessment. Santander UK’s provisions in respect of any pending legal or regulatory proceedings are made in accordance with relevant accounting requirements. These provisions are reviewed periodically. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such legal or regulatory proceedings, there can be no assurance that the ultimate resolution of these matters will not exceed the provisions currently accrued by Santander UK. As a result, the outcome of a particular matter (whether currently provided or otherwise) could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

The developing legal and regulatory regime in which Santander UK operates requires it to be compliant across all aspects of its business, including the training, authorisation and supervision of personnel and the development of systems, processes and documentation. If Santander UK fails to be compliant with relevant law or regulation, there is a risk of an adverse impact on its business from more proactive regulatory intervention (including by any overseas regulator which establishes jurisdiction), investigation and enforcement activity leading to sanctions, fines, civil or criminal penalties, or other action imposed by or agreed with the regulatory authorities, as well as increased costs associated with responding to regulatory inquiries and defending regulatory actions. Customers of financial services institutions, including Santander UK’s customers, may seek redress if they consider that they have suffered loss for example as a result of the misselling of a particular product, or through incorrect application or enforcement of the terms and conditions of a particular product or in connection with a competition law infringement and Santander UK’s rights under a contract with its customers may in certain circumstances be unenforceable or otherwise impaired.

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Designated Consumer Protection ActBodies) Order 2013 (the Dodd-Frank Act) enactedDesignated Consumer Bodies Order) was made on 16 December 2013 and came into force on 1 January 2014. The Designated Consumer Bodies Order designates the National Association of Citizens Advice Bureaux, the Consumers’ Association, the General Consumer Council for Northern Ireland and the National Federation of Self Employed and Small Businesses as consumer bodies that may submit a ‘super-complaint’ to the FCA. A ‘super-complaint’ is a complaint made by any of these designated consumer bodies to the FCA on behalf of consumers of financial services where it considers that a feature, or a combination of features, of the market for financial services in 2010,the UK is seriously damaging the interests of these customers. Complaints about damage to the interests of individual consumers will continue to be dealt with by the FOS. If a ‘super-complaint’ were to be made against a Santander UK entity by a designated consumer body under the Designated Consumer Bodies Order, any response published or action taken by the FCA could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Given the: (i) requirement for compliance with an increasing volume of relevant laws and regulations; (ii) more proactive regulatory intervention and enforcement and more punitive sanctions and penalties for infringement; (iii) inherent unpredictability of litigation; (iv) evolution of the jurisdiction of FOS and CMA and related impacts; (v) the development of a voluntary dispute resolution service to oversee the resolution of historic complaints from SMEs that meet the relevant eligibility criteria and new complaints from SMEs that would be outside the FOS’ proposed revised jurisdiction; (vi) the introduction of a voluntary code to enhance protection for customers who are victims of authorised push payment fraud; and (vii) the high volume of new regulations or policy changes from multiple regulators and authorities which Santander UK is mandated to implement within compressed timescales; it is possible that related costs or liabilities could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Operational risks

Failure to successfully apply or to improve Santander UK’s credit risk management systems could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

As a commercial banking group, one of the main types of risks inherent in Santander UK’s business is credit risk. For example, an important feature of Santander UK’s credit risk management system is to employ Santander UK’s own credit rating system to assess the particular risk profile of a customer. This system is primarily generated internally, but, in the case of counterparties with a global presence, also builds off the credit assessment assigned by other Banco Santander group members. As this process involves detailed analysis of the customer or credit risk, taking into account both quantitative and qualitative factors, it is subject to human and IT systems errors. In exercising their judgement on current or future credit risk behaviour of Santander UK’s customers, Santander UK’s employees may not always be able to assign a correct credit rating, which may result in a larger exposure to higher credit risks than indicated by Santander UK’s risk rating system. Santander UK may not be able to detect all possible risks before they occur, or its employees may not be able to effectively apply its credit policies and guidelines due to limited tools available to Santander UK, which may increase its credit risk.

Any failure to effectively apply, consistently monitor and refine Santander UK’s credit risk management systems may result in an increase in the level ofnon-performing loans and higher losses than expected, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

248Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Santander UK‘s data management policies and processes may not be sufficiently robust

Critical business processes across Santander UK rely on large volumes of data from a number of different systems and sources. If data governance (including data retention and deletion, data quality and data architecture policies and procedures) is not sufficiently robust, manual intervention, adjustments and reconciliations may be required to reduce the risk of error in Santander UK ‘s external reports or in reporting to senior management or regulators. Inadequate policies and processes may also affect Santander UK’s ability to use data to service customers more effectively or to improve Santander UK’s product offering. Santander UK must also comply with requirements under law or regulation which require classification of customers, counterparties, financial transactions or instruments. Financial institutions that fail to comply within-country (local) and global regulatory and compliance requirements may face supervisory measures, which could in turn have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK’s business is subject to risks related to cyber-crime

Santander UK’s systems, software and networks may be vulnerable to unauthorised access, misuse, computer viruses or other malicious code and other events that could have a security impact. An interception, misuse or mishandling of personal, confidential or proprietary information sent to or received from a client, vendor, service provider, counterparty or third party could result in legal liability, regulatory action and reputational harm, and therefore have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Furthermore, Santander UK may be required to expend significant additional resources to modify Santander UK’s protective measures or to investigate and remediate vulnerabilities or other exposures. Santander UK expects its programmes of change to have an effect on its risk profile, both technological and regulatory. Whether it is the opportunities from adoption of cloud technology, systems to support important regulatory initiatives, or the desire to identify, prioritise and remove obsolete systems from operations, the operational risk associated with systems change is likely to increase and this will therefore remain an area of key focus in Santander UK’s risk management. There can be no assurance that Santander UK will not suffer material losses from such operational risks in the future, including those relating to any security breaches, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

In particular, in recent years the computer systems of companies and organisations have been targeted by cyber criminals, activists and nation-state-sponsored groups. Like other financial institutions, Santander UK manages and holds confidential personal information of customers in the conduct of its banking operations, as well as a large number of assets. Consequently, Santander UK has been, implemented in part and continues to be, implemented by various US federal regulatory agencies. The Dodd-Frank Act, among other things, imposessubject to a regulatory framework on swap transactions, including swapsrange of cyber-attacks, such as malware, phishing and denial of service.

Cyber-attacks could give rise to the sort that we enter into, requires regulators to adopt new rules governing the retentionloss of credit risk by securitisers or originatorssignificant amounts of securitisations and significantly expands the coverage and scope of regulations that limit affiliate transactions within a banking organisation. The US Commodity Futures Trading Commission (the CFTC)customer data and other US regulators have adopted a host of new regulations for swaps markets, including swap dealer registration, business conduct, mandatory clearing, exchange trading and margin regulations. Most of these regulations are already effective, although regulations applicable to ‘security-based swaps’ (i.e., swaps based on securities or narrow-based security indices) required to be implemented by the US Securities and Exchange Commission (SEC)) are generally not yet effective, but many of those requirements are expected to come into effect in 2019. Abbey National Treasury Services plc, which became provisionally registered as a swap dealer with the CFTC on 4 November 2013, is currently subject to swaps regulations for its US facing swaps activities. These rules have already increased the costs associated with our swaps business, and continued compliance with those rules,sensitive information, as well as pending SEC security-based swaps rules,significant levels of liquid assets (including cash). In addition, cyber-attacks could give rise to the disablement of Santander UK’s electronic systems used to service its customers. Any material disruption or slowdown of Santander UK’s systems could cause information, including data related to customer requests, to be lost or to be delivered to Santander UK’s clients with delays or errors, which could reduce demand for Santander UK’s services and products. As attempted attacks continue to evolve in scope and sophistication, Santander UK may incur significant costs in order to modify or enhance its protective measures against such attacks, or to investigate or remediate any vulnerability or resulting breach, or in communicating cyber-attacks to its customers. If Santander UK fails to effectively manage its cyber security risk, the impact could be significant and may include harm to Santander UK reputation and make Santander UK liable for the payment of customer compensation, regulatory penalties and fines. Factors such as failing to apply critical security patches from its technology providers, to manage out obsolete technology or to update Santander UK’s processes in response to new threats could give rise to these consequences, which, if they occur, could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

In addition, Santander UK may also be affected by cyber-attacks against national critical infrastructures in the UK or elsewhere, for example, the telecommunications network or cloud computing providers used by Santander UK. In common with other financial institutions Santander UK is dependent on such networks and any cyber-attack against these networks could negatively affect its ability to service its customers. As Santander UK does not operate these networks it has limited ability to protect Santander UK’s business from the adverse effects of cyber-attack against them. Further, the domestic and global financial services industry, including key financial market infrastructure, may be the target of cyber disruption and attack by cyber criminals, activists or governments looking to cause economic instability. Santander UK has limited ability to protect its business from the adverse effects of cyber disruption or attack against its counterparties and key national and financial market infrastructure. If such a disruption or attack were to occur it could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK is exposed to risk from potentialnon-compliance with policies, employee misconduct, human error, negligence and fraud

Santander UK is exposed to risk from potentialnon-compliance with policies, employee misconduct, human error, negligence and fraud. It is not always possible to deter or prevent suchnon-compliance, employee misconduct, human error, negligence or fraud and the precautions Santander UK takes to detect and prevent this activity may not always be effective. Any such matters could result in regulatory sanctions and cause reputational or financial harm, which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Any failure to effectively manage changes in Santander UK’s information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely manner could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

Santander UK’s businesses and its ability to remain competitive depends to a significant extent upon the functionality of its information technology systems and on its ability to upgrade and expand the capacity of its information technology infrastructure on a timely and cost-effective basis. The proper functioning of Santander UK’s financial control, risk management, credit analysis and reporting, accounting, customer service, financial crime, conduct and compliance and other information technology systems, as well as the communication networks between branches and main data processing centres, are critical to its businesses and its ability to compete. Investments and improvements in Santander UK’s information technology infrastructure are regularly required in order to remain competitive. It cannot be certain that in the future Santander UK will be able to maintain the level of capital expenditure necessary to support the improvement, expansion or upgrading of its information technology infrastructure as effectively as its competitors; this may result in a loss of any competitive advantages that Santander UK’s information technology systems provide. Any failure to effectively improve, expand or upgrade its information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely manner could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

From time to time Santander UK is required to migrate information relating its customers to new information technology systems. Any failure to manage such migration effectively could have a negative impact on Santander UK’s ability to provide services to its customers and could cause reputational damage to Santander UK which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK plc249


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

Santander UK may be exposed to unidentified or unanticipated risks despite its risk management policies, procedures and methods and may be exposed to risk related to errors in Santander UK’s risk modelling

The management of risk is an integral part of Santander UK’s activities. Santander UK seek to monitor and manage its risk exposure through a variety of risk reporting systems. For a further increasedescription of our risk management framework see the ‘Risk review’ on pages 64 to 150. While Santander UK employs a broad and diversified set of risk monitoring and risk mitigation techniques and strategies, they may not be fully effective in mitigating Santander UK’s risk exposure in all economic market environments or against all types of risk, including risks that Santander UK fails to identify or anticipate.

Some of Santander UK’s tools and metrics for managing risk are based upon its use of observed historical market behaviour. Santander UK applies statistical and other tools to these observations to arrive at quantifications of its risk exposures. These tools and metrics may fail to predict future risk exposures. These risk exposures could, for example, arise from factors Santander UK did not anticipate or correctly evaluate in its statistical models. This would limit its ability to manage its risks. Santander UK losses thus could be significantly greater than the historical measures indicate. In addition, Santander UK’s quantified modelling does not take all risks into account. Santander UK’s more qualitative approach to managing those risks could prove insufficient, exposing it to material, unanticipated losses. Santander UK could face adverse consequences as a result of decisions, which may lead to actions by management, based on models that include errors or are otherwise inadequately developed, implemented or used, or as a result of the modelled outcome being misunderstood. If existing or potential customers or counterparties believe its risk management is inadequate, they could take their business elsewhere or seek to limit their transactions with Santander UK. These occurrences could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK relies on third parties and affiliates for important infrastructure support, products and services

Third party providers and certain affiliates provide key components of Santander UK’s business infrastructure such as loan and deposit servicing systems, back office and business process support, information technology production and support, internet connections and network access. Relying on these third party providers and affiliates is a source of operational and regulatory risk, including with respect to security breaches affecting such parties and other parties that interact with these parties. As the depth of Santander UK’s relationship with these third parties and affiliates increases, including through the use of cloud based services, Santander UK increasingly face the risk of operational failure with respect to their systems. Santander UK may be required to take steps to protect the integrity of its operational systems, thereby increasing its operational costs. In addition, certain cross-border regulatory conflictsany problems caused by these third parties or affiliates, including as a result of them not providing Santander UK their services for any reason, or performing their services poorly, could adversely affect Santander UK’s ability to deliver products and services to customers and otherwise conduct its business, which could lead to reputational damage and regulatory investigations and intervention. Replacing these third party vendors or affiliates could also entail significant delays and expense. Further, the profitabilityoperational and regulatory risk Santander UK faces as a result of our swapsthese arrangements may be increased to the extent that it restructures such arrangements. Any restructuring could involve significant expense to Santander UK and entail significant delivery and execution risk which could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Santander UK relies on recruiting, retaining and developing appropriate senior management and skilled personnel

Santander UK’s continued success depends in part on the continued service of key members of its senior executive team and other key employees. The ability to continue to attract, train, motivate and retain highly qualified and talented professionals is a key element of Santander UK’s strategy. The successful implementation of Santander UK’s strategy depends on the availability of skilled and appropriate management, both at Santander UK’s head office and in each of its business units. There is also an increasing demand for Santander UK to hire individuals with digital skills such as data scientist, engineering and designer skill sets. Such individuals are very sought after by reducingall organisations, not just the banking industry, and thus Santander UK’s ability to attract and hire this talent will determine how quickly the bank is able to respond to technological change. If Santander UK fails to staff its operations appropriately, or loses one or more of its key senior executives or other key employees and fails to replace them in a satisfactory and timely manner, it could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

In addition, the financial services industry has and may continue to experience more stringent regulation of employee compensation, which could have an adverse effect on Santander UK’s ability to hire or retain the most qualified employees. If Santander UK fails or is unable to attract and appropriately train, motivate and retain qualified professionals, it could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Financial reporting risk

Santander UK’s financial statements are based in part on judgements and accounting estimates which, if inaccurate, could cause material misstatement of Santander UK’s future financial results and financial condition.

The preparation of the financial statements requires management to make judgements and accounting estimates that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amount of income and expenses during the reporting period. Management evaluates its judgements and accounting estimates, which are based on historical experience and on various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, on an ongoing basis. Actual amounts may differ from these accounting estimates under different assumptions or conditions. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected.

As explained in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, limited significant judgements have been made in the process of applying Santander UK’s accounting policies. Those accounting estimates, as well as the judgements inherent within them, are considered important to the portrayal of the financial results and financial condition because: (i) they are highly susceptible to change from period to period as assumptions are made to calculate the estimates; and (ii) any significant difference between the estimated amounts and actual amounts could have a material impact on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

Changes in accounting standards could affect reported earnings

The accounting standard setters and other regulatory bodies periodically change the financial accounting and reporting standards that govern the preparation of Santander UK’s consolidated financial statements. These changes can materially affect how Santander UK records and reports its financial condition and operating results. In some cases, Santander UK could be required to apply a new or revised standard retroactively, resulting in the restatement of prior period financial statements. Any change in reported earnings as a result of the foregoing could have a material adverse effect on Santander UK’s operations, financial condition and prospects

250Santander UK plc


Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Regulation of the Santander UK group

As a financial services group, Santander UK is subject to extensive financial services laws, regulations, administrative actions and policies in the UK, the EU and in each other location in which Santander UK operates. This intensive approach to supervision is maintained in the United Kingdom by the PRA and the FCA. As well as being subject to UK regulation, as part of the Banco Santander group, Santander UK is also affected by other regulators, such as the Banco de España and the ECB, as well as various legal and regulatory regimes (including the US) that have extra-territorial effect. Extensive legislation and implementing regulations affecting the financial services industry have recently been adopted in regions that directly or indirectly affect Santander UK’s business, including Spain, the US, the EU and other jurisdictions.

Approach of the Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)

As per the FSMA (amended by the Financial Services Act 2012), the FCA has a strategic objective to ensure that the relevant markets function well. In support of this, the FCA has three operational objectives: to secure an appropriate degree of protection for consumers; to protect and enhance the integrity of the UK financial system and to promote effective competition in the interests of consumers.

The FCA Handbook sets out rules and guidance across a range of counterpartiesconduct issues with which we can trade effectively.financial institutions are required to comply including high level principles of business and detailed conduct of business standards and reporting standards.

In October 2014, US regulators adopted a joint final rule requiring sponsors of asset-backed securitisation transactions, which includes the Company Santander UK plc in relation to its residential mortgage-backed securities programmes, to retain 5%Regulatory Approach of the credit riskPRA

As per the Financial Services Act 2012, the PRA has two statutory objectives: to promote the safety and soundness of the assets subjectfirms which it supervises and, with respect to insurers, to contribute to the securitisation.securing of an appropriate degree of protection for policyholders. The rule permits sponsors to satisfy the risk retention requirement through the acquisition and retention of either 5% (measured by fair value) of the most subordinated interest in the securitisation, or 5% (measured by nominal value) of each tranche of interests issued by the securitisation, or some combination of the two. The rule also permits certain exceptions and methods of compliancePRA has a secondary objective in respect of specific typescompetition. The PRA’s regulatory and supervisory approach incorporates three key characteristics: to take a judgement-based approach, a forward-looking approach, and a focused-approach.

The PRA has largely inherited the prudential aspects of asset-backed securities transactions.the former FSA Handbook (now within the PRA Rulebook), including regulations and guidance relating to capital adequacy and liquidity among several other things.

US regulation

Within the Dodd-Frank Act, theso-called Volcker Rule prohibits ‘banking entities’, including the Santander UK group, from engaging in certain forms of proprietary trading or from sponsoring or investing in certain covered funds, in each case subject to certain exemptions, including exemptions permitting foreign banking entities to engage in trading and fund activities that take place solely outside of the US. The final rules contain exclusions and certain exemptions for market-making, hedging, underwriting, trading in US government and agency obligations as well as certain foreign government obligations, trading solely outside the US, and also permit ownership interests in certain types of funds to be retained. The Santander UK group was generally required to come into compliance with the Volcker Rule by July 2015, although the Federal Reserve extended the conformance deadline forpre-2014 ‘legacy’ investments in and relationships with private equity funds and hedge funds until 21 July 2017 and additional extensions for illiquid funds may be requested. On 30 May 2018,2015. In August 2019, the Federal Reserve and other federal regulators requested comment on proposedapproved certain modifications to the Volcker Rule includingwhich included modifications to the scope of restrictions on proprietary trading and investments in covered funds. It cannot be predicted at this time what, if any, modificationsfunds which generally operated to simplify and reduce compliance requirements. The effective date of these amendments was 1 January 2020 with compliance required by 1 January 2021.

These regulators proposed further amendments to the Volcker RuleRule’s covered funds provisions on 30 January 2020, which would, if adopted, provide important new exclusions from the definition of covered fund and flexibility for banking entities to engage in funds activities. The proposal is currently open for comment, and the timeline for finalisation remains uncertain.

The Banking Act 2009

The special resolution regime set out in the Banking Act 2009 provides HM Treasury, the BoE, the PRA and the FCA with a variety of powers for dealing with UK deposit taking institutions (and, in certain circumstances, their holding companies) that are failing or likely to fail, including: (i) to take a bank or bank holding company into temporary public ownership; (ii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a private sector purchaser; or (iii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a ‘bridge bank’. The special resolution regime also comprises a separate insolvency procedure and administration procedure each of which is of specific application to banks. These insolvency and administration measures may be adopted or whatinvoked prior to the impactpoint at which an application for insolvency proceedings with respect to a relevant institution could be made.

The Financial Services (Banking Reform) Act 2013 further amended the Banking Act to introduce a UK‘bail-in power’ to implement the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD), which contains abail-in power similar to that contained in the Banking Act and requires EU Member States to provide resolution authorities with the power to write down the claims of unsecured creditors of a failing institution and to convert unsecured claims to equity (subject to certain parameters). The UKbail-in power is an additional power available to the UK resolution authorities under the special resolution regime provided for in the Banking Act. This enables them to recapitalise a failed institution by allocating losses to such institution’s shareholders and unsecured creditors, subject to the rights of such changes wouldshareholders and unsecured creditors to be for us.compensated under abail-in

LOGO

Santander UK plc225


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Each of these aspects of the Dodd-Frank Act, as well as the changes in US banking regulations, and increased uncertainty surrounding future changes, may directly and indirectly impact various aspects of our business. The full spectrum of risks that the Dodd-Frank Act (including the Volcker Rule and any modifications to it) poses to us is not yet known, however, such risks could be significant and we could be materially and adversely affected by them. compensation order.

Competition

In the UK and elsewhere, there is continuing political, competitive and regulatory scrutiny of the banking industry. Political involvement in the regulatory process, in the behaviour and governance of the UK banking sector and in the major financial institutions in which the UK Government has a direct financial interest is likely to continue. The Competition and Markets Authority (CMA)CMA is the UK’s main competition authority responsible for ensuring that competition and markets work well for consumers. In addition, under the Banking Reform Act, as of 1 April 2015, the FCA has the power to enforce against breaches of the Competition Act 1998 and to refer markets to the CMA forin-depth investigation in the areas of financial services in the UK. As of 1 April 2015, the PSR also has an objective and powers equivalent to those of the FCA to promote competition in the payments industry.

In August 2016, the CMA published the final report in its market investigation into competition in the personal current account and SME retail banking markets, which identified a number of features of the markets for the supply of personal current accounts, business current accounts and SME lending that, in combination, were having an adverse effect on competition. The CMA is currently implementing a comprehensive package of remedies including, among other things, Open Banking and the introduction of requirements to prompt customers to review the services that they receive from their bank at certain trigger points and to promote customer awareness of account switching.

Further work on overdraft charges – which remain under political scrutiny – is ongoing by the FCA. In December 2018, the FCA published a consultation and policy paper regarding overdraft charges, which included final rules and guidance to address low awareness and engagement in this market and a consultation on proposals to reform the ways banks and building societies charge for overdrafts. The FCA is also undertaking more general work on fair pricing in financial services, including in relation to savings, mortgages and insurance. This is also an area of priority for the CMA, which made recommendations for further work by the FCA in its December 2018 response to a super-complaint by Citizens Advice.

Santander UK plc251


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

The FCA is conducting a Strategic Review of Retail Banking Business Models, looking at the potential effect of technological change, increased digitalisation andfree-if-in-creditPayments banking on firms’ business models. It is also looking to secure an appropriate degree of consumer protection for consumers in vulnerable circumstances. This review will inform the FCA’s ongoing policy work in retail banking and related areas. There can be no assurance that we will not be

Santander UK has been required to make systems changes and update processes to our business model as a result of this review or related work, and that such changes would not materially and adversely affect us.

In addition, the FCA and PSR continue to undertakecomply with a number of competition related studies and reviews acrossnew payments regulations at a number of our businesses. InterventionEuropean as a result of these studies and reviews, in addition to regulatory reforms, investigations and court cases affectingwell as domestic UK Level. Within the UK, financial services industry, could have an adverse effect onthe Payment Systems Regulator has mandated Santander UK build systems and processes for both Confirmation of Payee as well as the Contingent Reimbursement Model Code which both aim to reduce the level of customer fraud (particularly through our operations, financial condition and prospects, or on our relations with our customers and potential customers.customer’s manipulation into making payments known as “Authorised Push Payment” fraud).

Payments

TheAt a European level, the Second Payment Services Directive (PSD2) is a fundamental piece of payments-related legislation in Europe, the first part of which came into force in January 2018. The regulation aims to harmonise payment processing across Europe, and is being implemented in the UK by the FCA.

In the UK, PSD2 introduced Open Banking, which opened up access to customers’ online account and payments data to third party providers (TPPs). Customers are able to give secure access to certain TPPs authorised by the FCA or other European regulators to access account information and to make payments from current accounts. Following the CMA’s retail banking market investigation, the nine largest current account providers in the UK (theCMA-9) were required to accelerate certain of the PSD2 requirements and implement Open Banking by 13 January 2018.

The access method for customer accounts by TPPs is via an established Application Programme Interface (API) and, as one of theCMA-9, we have been required to undertake significant technical build to create these APIs and extend them to all categories of customers, account types and currencies.

Open Banking and PSD2 both have the potential to exacerbate a number of existing risks including data loss/data protection, cyber security, fraud and wider financial crime risk, which in turn could give rise to increased costs, litigation risk and risk of regulatory investigation and enforcement activity. Examples of the heightened risk include the risk of fraud relating to activities of a TPP pursuant to which funds are redirected to a third party not chosen by the customer; and the risk of data misuse by a TPP/other third party where the TPP has requested the data from Santander and this is provided to the TPP.

If the arrangements that we have made to comply with our Open Banking obligation prove to be inadequate or incompatible with legal and regulatory requirements or expectations, we could be required to make extensive and costly changes to our systems and controls, policies, and practices. We might also be fined by regulators, sued by customers, and might suffer reputational damage. Any requirement to make such changes, any liability to customers, any regulatory fines, or any reputational damage suffered, could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Financial Crime

A number of EU and UK regulatory measures targeted at preventing and countering financial crime (including anti-money laundering (AML) and countering the financing of terrorism (CTF) provisions) came into effect in 2017 and 2018.

As part of the EU’s revision of its AML/CTF rules, Directive (EU) No 2015/849 (the Fourth EU Money Laundering Directive) and Regulation (EU) No 847/2015 (the EU Wire Transfer Regulation) came into effect on 26 June 2017. The Fourth EU Money Laundering Directive replaced Directive (EC) No 60/2005 and significantly expanded the existing AML/CTF regime applicable to financial institutions by, among other things:

Increasing the customer due diligence checks required for particular transactions

Introducing a requirement to take appropriate steps to identify and assess the risks of money laundering and terrorist financing and to have in place policies, controls and procedures to mitigate and manage those risks effectively

Having EU Member States hold beneficial ownership details on a central register for entities incorporated within their territory

Applying the UK’s AML/CTF requirements to the branches and majority-owned subsidiaries of financial institutions that are located innon-EEA countries with less strict regimes.

226    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

On 22 June 2017, the final text of the Money Laundering, Terrorist Financing and Transfer of Funds (Information on the Payer) Regulations 2017 was published in the UK, which came into force on 26 June 2017 and implemented the requirements of the Fourth EU Money Laundering Directive and the EU Wire Transfer Regulation into UK law.

On 30 May 2018, the Council of EU and the European Parliament reached a political agreement on the EU Commission’s proposal to amendamended the Fourth Anti-Money Laundering Directive (the Directive). The amended directive, publishing the amending Directive (EU) No 2018 / 843 (5th AMLD) seeks to prevent large scale concealment of funds and to introduce.

The 5th AMLD brought in increased corporate transparency rules, whereby corporate and other legal entities will be required by law to publicly disclose information on beneficial ownership. The amended directive also introducesintroduced the application of AML rules to firms providing services associated with virtual currencies and further extendsextended enhanced due diligence requirements to all transactions with natural persons or legal entities established in third countries identified as high riskhigh-risk countries (HRTCs) pursuant to Article 9(2) of the Directive. The

Shortly after, the UK Government has confirmed their intention to implement the 5th AMLD into UK law asby the EUEU’s transposition deadline of 1010th January 2020, fordespite transposition fallsfalling within the then expected Brexit transition period of Brexit.period. The intention to transpose the Directive was carried out successfully on 20th December 2019, and the Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing (Amendment) Regulations 2019 (‘The Regulations’) came into effect on 10th January 2020. The Regulations:

The

Introduce a requirement to report beneficial ownership discrepancies to Companies House

Extend EDD measures in respect of customers resident in a High-Risk Third Country

Treat new types of transactions, such as those related to cultural artefacts or items of archaeological, historical, cultural or religious significance, as potentially high risk.

To ensure regulatory continuity post-Brexit, the UK Sanctions and AML Act received Royal Assent on 23 May 2018. The Act enables the UK to continue to implement United Nations sanctions regimes.regimes following Brexit. The Act also gives the UK the ability to impose its own sanctions regime plan which is likely to follow the approach of the EU but could deviate in some areas. Separately, the Money Laundering and Transfer of Funds (Information) (Amendment) (EU Exit) Regulations 2019 will ensure that the UK’s current AML Regime continues to operate effectively once the UK ceases to be a member of the EU.

The Act also introduces certain new measuresUK will continue to address money laundering, including in relationfollow EU legislation during the implementation period, which is due to company ownership information. The Act also provides powers to take actions against ‘human rights abusers’.end on 31 December 2020, and no immediate divergence is expected either on sanctions or the AML/CTF regime after this date.

TheAs regards sanctions, the current US administration has increased the use of sanctionscontinues to apply these regularly against individuals, entities and countries, which in many instances have been different to the policy approach of the EU and UK. In particular thecountries. There-introduction of primary and secondary sanctions against Iran which occurred in November 2018, following the US withdrawal from the Joint Comprehensive Plan of Action (JCPOA),Action. Sanctions against Iran have since then increased further and are now targeting construction, manufacturing, textiles and mining. In light of Iran’s recent announcement that it would no longer abide by the nuclear deal with the EU, the EU too could consider reintroducing sanctions against Iran, although this has been most significant. These sanctions are substantially similarnot crystallised.

The banking sector continues to those that were in force in 2013, priorbe subject to the initial Iran nuclear agreement, thoughSuspicious Activity Reporting (‘SAR’) regime laid out in the secondary sanctions are broader in scope in some areas. In response the EU amended the EU Blocking Regulation, reflecting its support for the continuationProceeds of Crime Act 2002. The regime is one of the JCPOA, making it a potential criminal offence inkey tools to inform law enforcement agencies and the National Crime Agencies of suspicious (potentially money laundering) activity. In 2018, the UK to comply with there-introduced US sanctions on Iran. The UK Government has indicated that it will reflect the Blocking Regulation into UK law post-Brexit, though the precise details of this are yet to be seen.

The UK Policing and Crime Act 2017 strengthened the measures for the enforcement of financial sanctions, including in relation to the criminal enforcement and civil powers. Under the Act the Office of Financial Sanctions Implementation (OFSI) has powers to fine institutions a maximum of £1 million or 50% of the estimated value of the funds or resources, whichever is greater. Separately, the Criminal Finances Act 2017 updated the primary UK legislation in respect of investigation and enforcement against money laundering and terrorist financing. The Act provided law enforcement with new powers in regard to asset recovery and introduced ‘Unexplained Wealth Orders’. The Act also created a new corporate offence relating to failure to prevent the criminal facilitation of tax evasion. The UK Government also asked the Law Commission to conduct a review of the legislation relating tounderpinning the ‘Suspicious Activity Reporting’ regime (SAR), whichregime. The review is expected to bewas completed in late 2019.July 2019 and concluded that the breadth of the legal framework, including the pressure to submit SARs that is driven by individual criminal liability for failing to submit one when ‘suspicious’, means that SARs regime suffers from very large SARs volumes.

The UK’s SARs Reform Programme, which operates within the confines of the Government’s Economic Crime Plan 2019-2022, is exploring how banks could, together with government, target their joint efforts to produce and act quickly on higher value intelligence, thereby acting on some of the Law Commission’s findings.

Separately, the UK ParliamentParliament’s Treasury Select Committee is concluding an Inquiryconcluded its inquiry, launched in 2018, into Economic Crime, with the report expectedpublished in two parts, the first part in March and the second part in November 2019. The first part commented primarily on the fragmented approach to AML supervision in the first half of 2019. The Foreign Affairs Committee has also initiated an Inquiry into UK, Sanctions post-Brexit. The Select Committees maywhile the second part focused on the changes required to make recommendationsbanking safer for further legislative change or Government policy change in these areas.

The implementation of new UK legislation related to financial crime has required substantial amendments to our AML/CTF procedures and policies, with additional training and guidance required for employees. Further such amendmentsconsumers from a fraud perspective. Both issues will likely be required in 2019 to reflect changes to UK laws and Government policy post-Brexit. The changes could adversely impact our business by increasing our operational and compliance costs and reducingconsidered through the value of our assets and operations.

The complexity inpublic-private work on the area of financial crime policyGovernment’s Economic Crime Plan 2019-2022 which is a significant challenge, involving overlapping requirements between different legislation, and, in some instances, conflicts of laws. The divergence of policy approaches betweenlooking holistically at the EU/UK and US in the area of financial sanctions is exacerbated by the lack of clear guidance from the OFSI.

The growing complexity increases the risk that the required measures will not be implemented correctly or on time or that individuals within the business will not be fully compliant with the new procedures. If there are breaches of these measures or existing law and regulation relating to financialinternational anti-economic crime we could face significant administrative, regulatory and criminal sanctions and restrictions on the conduct of our business and operations, as well as reputational damage. The civil and criminal penalties for failures have increased and any such breaches could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

EU General Data Protection Regulation

The EU General Data Protection Regulation (the GDPR) came into direct effect in all EU Member States on 25 May 2018, replacing previous EU data privacy laws. Although a number of basic existing principles have remained the same, the GDPR has introduced new obligations on data controllers and rights for data subjects.

The GDPR has also introduced new fines and penalties for a breach of requirements, including fines for systematic breaches of up to the higher of 4% of annual worldwide turnover or20m and fines of up to the higher of 2% of annual worldwide turnover or10m (whichever is highest) for other specified infringements. The GDPR identifies a list of points to consider when imposing fines (including the nature, gravity and duration of the infringement).

The implementation of the GDPR has required substantial and ongoing amendments to our procedures and policies. The changes have impacted, and could further adversely impact, our business by increasing our operational and compliance costs. If there are breaches of the GDPR obligations, we could face significant administrative and monetary sanctions as well as reputational damage which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

LOGO

Santander UK plc227


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Further reforms to the mortgage lending market could require significant implementation costs or changes to our business strategy

Mortgage Lending

The final rules in relation to the FCA Mortgage Market Review (MMR) came into force on 26 April 2014. These rules required a number of material changes to the mortgages sales process, both in terms of advice provision in nearly all scenarios and significantly enhanced affordability assessment and evidencing. The rules permit interest-only loans. However, there is a clear requirement for a clearly understood and credible strategy for repaying the capital (evidence of which the lender must obtain before making the loan).

The Santander UK group has implemented certain changes to implement the MMR requirements. The FCA continues to assess firms’ implementation of the rules introduced as a result of the MMR and commenced a review of responsible lending practices in April 2015, publishing its report in May 2016. This is in addition to regulatory reforms being made as a result of the implementation of the Mortgage Credit Directive from 21 March 2016. In December 2016, the FCA published terms of reference for a market study into competition in the mortgages sector, which will focus on consumers’ ability to make effective decisions and whether commercial arrangements between lenders, brokers and other players leads to conflicts of interest or misaligned incentives to the detriment of consumers. Following a deferral, the FCA published its interim report setting out its preliminary conclusions in May 2018. The FCA has stated that it will publish its final report in Q1 2019.

It is possible that further changes may be made to the FCA’s Mortgage Conduct of Business (MCOB) rules as a result of these reviews and other related future regulatory reforms. To the extent that any new rules do apply to any of the loans, failure to comply with these rules may entitle a borrower to claim damages for loss suffered orset-off the amount of the claim against the amount owing under the loan. Any further changes to the FCA’s MCOB rules or to MCOB or the FSMA or changes in the regulatory structure or the Financial Services Act 2012, may adversely affect the Santander UK group’s operating results, financial condition and prospects. There can be no assurance that the Santander UK group will not make any future changes to its mortgage lending business, whether as a result of the MMR or other mortgage lending reforms, and that such changes would not adversely affect the Santander UK group.

Consumer credit

On 1 April 2014, consumer credit regulation was transferred from the OFT to the FCA in accordance with the Financial Services Act 2012. Firms that held an OFT licence and had registered with the FCA by 31 March 2014, including Santander UK, were granted an interim permission under the new regime and had to apply to the FCA for full authorisation during an application period notified by the FCA. Under the new regime: (i) carrying on certain credit-related activities (including in relation to servicing credit agreements) otherwise than in accordance with permission from the FCA will render the credit agreement unenforceable without FCA approval; and (ii) the FCA has the power to make rules providing that contracts made in contravention of its rules on cost and duration of credit agreements, or in contravention of its product intervention rules, are unenforceable. Santander UK is fully authorised to carry out consumer credit-related regulated activities, however, if the FCA were to impose conditions on that authorisation and/or make changes to the FCA rules applicable to authorised firms with consumer credit permissions, this could have an adverse effect on the Santander UK group’s operations, financial condition and prospects.

We are exposed to risk of loss and damage from civil litigation and/or criminal legal and regulatory proceedings

We face various legal and regulatory issues that may give rise to civil or criminal litigation, arbitration, and/or criminal, tax, administrative and/or regulatory investigations, inquiries or proceedings. Failure to adequately manage the risks arising in connection with legal and regulatory issues, including our obligations under existing applicable law and regulation or our contractual obligations including arrangements with suppliers, or failing to properly implement new applicable law and regulation could result in significant loss or damage including reputational damage, all of which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. Additionally, the current regulatory environment, with the continuing heightened supervisory focus and associated enforcement activity, combined with uncertainty about the evolution of the regulatory regime, may lead to material operational and compliance costs. Relevant risks include:

Regulators, agencies and authorities with jurisdiction over us, including the BoE, the PRA and the FCA, HM Treasury, HM Revenue & Customs (HMRC), the CMA, the Commission, the Information Commissioner’s Office, the Financial Ombudsman Service (FOS), the PSR, the Serious Fraud Office (SFO), the National Crime Agency (NCA) or the Courts, may determine that certain aspects of our business have not been or are not being conducted in accordance with applicable laws or regulations, or, in the case of the FOS, with what is fair and reasonable in the FOS’s opinion. Proposed changes in policy, law and regulation including in relation to SME dispute resolution and liability for authorised push payment fraud and unauthorised payment fraud, may have significant consequences and lead to material operational and compliance costs.

An adverse finding by a regulator, agency or authority could result in the need for extensive changes in systems and controls, business policies, and practices coupled with suspension of sales, restrictions on conduct of business and operations, withdrawal of services, customer redress, fines and reputational damage.

The increased focus on competition law in financial services and concurrent competition enforcement powers for the FCA and PSR may increase the likelihood of competition law related inquiries or investigations.

The alleged historical or current misselling of financial products, such as Payment Protection Insurance (PPI), including as a result of having sales practices and/or rewards structures that are deemed to have been inappropriate, presents a risk of civil litigation (including claims management company driven legal campaigns) and/or in enforcement action or requires us to amend sales processes, withdraw products or provide restitution to affected customers, all of which may require additional provisions to be recorded in our financial statements and could adversely impact future revenues from affected products.

We hold bank accounts for entities that might be or are subject to scrutiny from various regulators and authorities, including the SFO, the NCA and regulators in the US and elsewhere, which could lead to our conduct being reviewed as part of any such scrutiny.

We may be liable for damages to third parties harmed by the conduct of our business. For competition law, there are efforts by governments across Europe to promote private enforcement as a means of obtaining redress for harm suffered as a result of competition law breaches. Under the Consumer Rights Act, there is scope for class actions to be used to allow the claims of a whole class of claimants to be heard in a single action in bothfollow-on and standalone competition cases.

We are from time to time subject to certain legal or regulatory investigations, inquiries or proceedings in the normal course of our business, including in connection with our lending and payment activities, treatment of customers, relationships with our employees, financial crime, and other commercial or tax matters. These may be brought against us under UK legal or regulatory processes, or under legal or regulatory processes in other jurisdictions, such as the EU and the US, where overseas regulators and authorities may have jurisdiction by virtue of our activities or operations. In view of the inherent difficulty of predicting the outcome of legal or regulatory proceedings, particularly where opportunistic claimants seek very large or indeterminate damages, cases present novel legal theories, involve a large number of parties or are in the early stages of discovery, or where the approaches of regulators or authorities to legal or regulatory issues and sanctions applied are subject to change, we cannot state with confidence what the eventual outcome of any pending matters will be and any such pending matters are not disclosed by name because they are under assessment. Our provisions in respect of any pending legal or regulatory proceedings are made in accordance with relevant accounting requirements. These provisions are reviewed periodically. However, in light of the uncertainties involved in such legal or regulatory proceedings, there can be no assurance that the ultimate resolution of these matters will not exceed the provisions currently accrued by us.

As a result, the outcome of a particular matter (whether currently provided or otherwise) may be material to our operating results for a particular period, depending upon, among other factors, the size of the loss or liability imposed and our level of income for that period.

 

228252 Santander UK plc


 > Risk factors

Potential intervention by the FCA, the PRA, the CMA or an overseas regulator may occur, particularly in response to customer complaints

The PRA and the FCA continue to have an outcome-focused regulatory approach. This involves proactive intervention, investigation and enforcement, and punitive penalties for infringement. As a result, we and otherPRA-authorised orFCA-authorised firms continue to face increased supervisory intrusion and scrutiny (resulting in higher costs, including supervision fees), and in the event of a breach of relevant law or regulation, we are likely to face more stringent penalties and regulatory actions.

The developing legal and regulatory regime in which we operate requires us to be compliant across all aspects of our business, including the training, authorisation and supervision of personnel, systems, processes and documentation. If we fail to be compliant with relevant law or regulation, there is a risk of an adverse impact on our business from more proactive regulatory intervention (including by any overseas regulator which establishes jurisdiction), investigation and enforcement activity leading to sanctions, fines, civil or criminal penalties, or other action imposed by or agreed with the regulatory authorities, as well as increased costs associated with responding to regulatory inquiries and defending regulatory actions. Customers of financial services institutions, including our customers, may seek redress if they consider that they have suffered loss for example as a result of the misselling of a particular product, or through incorrect application or enforcement of the terms and conditions of a particular product or in connection with a competition law infringement.

In particular, the FCA has operational objectives to protect consumers and to promote competition, and it is taking a more interventionist approach in its increasing scrutiny of product terms and conditions and monitoring compliance with competition law. FSMA (as amended by the Financial Services Act 2012) gives the FCA the power to make temporary product intervention rules either to improve a firm’s systems and controls in relation to product design, product management and implementation, or to address problems identified with products which may potentially cause significant detriment to consumers because of certain product features or firms’ flawed governance and distribution strategies. Such rules may prevent firms from entering into product agreements with consumers until such problems have been rectified. Since April 2015 the FCA (and the PSR) also has concurrent competition law enforcement powers. This is in addition to the CMA, the UK’s main competition authority, and the Commission which continue to have jurisdiction, respectively, to enforce competition law infringements in the UK or which have an effect on trade between EU Member States. Following a report by the National Audit Office, the CMA has stated it will seek to shift its focus toward enforcement of competition law breaches. As a result, the UK financial services sector now operates in an environment of heightened competition law scrutiny. Under the Financial Services Act 2010, the FCA also has the power to impose its own customer redress scheme on authorised firms, including us, if it considers that consumers have suffered loss or damage as a consequence of a regulatory failing, including misselling.

In recent years there has been FCA focus on the misselling of PPI. In November 2015, the FCA issued a consultation paper (CP15/39) outlining its proposed approach to PPI in light of the 2014 decision of the Supreme Court in Plevin v Paragon Personal Finance Ltd (Plevin) and its proposal to set a two year deadline for PPI claims. In Plevin, the Supreme Court ruled that a failure to disclose a large commission payment on a single premium PPI policy sold in connection with a secured personal loan made the relationship between the lender and the borrower unfair under section 140A of the Consumer Credit Act 1974 (CCA).

On 2 March 2017, the FCA published its policy statement (PS17/3) and final rules and guidance, confirming that there would be a two year deadline for PPI complaints, and that this would take effect from 29 August 2017, and include the commencement of a consumer communications campaign. The FCA’s approach to Plevin/unfair relationships under s140A CCA remains largely as set out in CP16/20, so profit share is included in the FCA’s approach to the assessment of fairness and redress. In addition, firms were required to write to customers whose misselling complaints were previously rejected, and who are within scope of s140A CCA, to inform them of their right to complain again in light of Plevin. The PPI provision was increased by a further £32m in March 2017 to take account of PS17/3 and the FCA’s final rules and guidance. In June 2017, we made a further net charge of £37m, following a review of claims handling procedures in relation to a specific PPI portfolio including the impact of a past business review. In Q4 2017, we made a further PPI provision of £40m, relating to an increase in estimated future claims activity following the commencement of the FCA advertising campaign for PPI. The ultimate financial impact on us of the claims arising from PPI complaints is still uncertain and will depend on a number of factors, including the rate at which new complaints arise, the length of any complaints, the content and quality of the complaints (including the availability of supporting evidence) and the average uphold rates and redress costs. We can make no assurance that expenses associated with PPI complaints will not exceed the provisions made relating to these claims. More generally, we can make no assurance that estimates for potential liabilities, based on the key assumptions used, are correct, and the reserves taken as a result may prove inadequate. If additional expenses that exceed provisions for PPI liabilities or other provisions were to be incurred, these expenses could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. If additional expenses that exceed provisions for PPI liabilities or other provisions were to be incurred, these expenses could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

For further information about the provisions for PPI complaint liabilities and other conduct remediation, see Note 30 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. The potential financial impact may be relevant to any future industry-wide misselling or other infringement that could affect our businesses. Any such issues may lead from time to time to: (i) significant costs or liabilities; and (ii) changes in the practices of such businesses which benefit customers at a cost to shareholders. Decisions taken by the FOS (or any equivalent overseas regulator that has jurisdiction) could, if applied to a wider class or grouping of customers, have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

The Financial Services and Markets Act 2000 (Designated Consumer Bodies) Order 2013 (the Designated Consumer Bodies Order) was made on 16 December 2013 and came into force on 1 January 2014. The Designated Consumer Bodies Order designates the National Association of Citizens Advice Bureaux, the Consumers’ Association, the General Consumer Council for Northern Ireland and the National Federation of Self Employed and Small Businesses as consumer bodies that may submit a ‘super-complaint’ to the FCA. A ‘super-complaint’ is a complaint made by any of these designated consumer bodies to the FCA on behalf of consumers of financial services where it considers that a feature, or a combination of features, of the market for financial services in the UK is seriously damaging the interests of these customers. Complaints about damage to the interests of individual consumers will continue to be dealt with by the FOS. If a ‘super-complaint’ were to be made against a Santander UK group entity by a designated consumer body under the Designated Consumer Bodies Order, any response published or action taken by the FCA could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Given the: (i) requirement for compliance with an increasing volume of relevant laws and regulation; (ii) more proactive regulatory intervention and enforcement and more punitive sanctions and penalties for infringement; (iii) inherent unpredictability of litigation; and (iv) evolution of the jurisdiction of FOS and related impacts (including the changes identified by the FCA in the policy statements (PS 18/21) on 16 October 2018 and (PS18/22) on 14 December 2018, setting out changes to the eligibility criteria to access FOS), it is possible that related costs or liabilities could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

The Banking Act may adversely affect our business

The Banking Act came into force on 21 February 2009. The special resolution regime set out in the Banking Act provides HM Treasury, the BoE, the PRA and the FCA (and their successor bodies) with a variety of powers for dealing with UK deposit taking institutions (and, in certain circumstances, their holding companies) that are failing or likely to fail, including: (i) to take a bank or bank holding company into temporary public ownership; (ii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a private sector purchaser; or (iii) to transfer all or part of the business of a bank to a ‘bridge bank’. The special resolution regime also comprises a separate insolvency procedure and administration procedure each of which is of specific application to banks. These insolvency and administration measures may be invoked prior to the point at which an application for insolvency proceedings with respect to a relevant institution could be made.

LOGO

Santander UK plc 229
Strategic ReportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

In addition, pursuant to amendments made to the Banking Act, which came into force on 1 August 2014, provision has been made for various tools to be used in respect of a wider range of UK entities, including investment firms and certain banking group companies, provided that certain conditions are met. Secondary legislation specifies that the Banking Act powers can be applied to investment firms that are required to hold initial capital of730,000 or more and to certain UK incorporatednon-bank companies in the Santander UK group.

If an instrument or order were made under the Banking Act in respect of the Company or another Santander UK group entity, such instrument or order (as the case may be) may, among other things: (i) result in a compulsory transfer of shares or other securities or property of the Company or such other entity; (ii) impact on the rights of the holders of shares or other securities in the Company or such other entity or result in the nullification or modification of the terms and conditions of such shares or securities; or (iii) result in thede-listing of the shares and/or other securities of the Company or such other entity in the Santander UK group. In addition, such an order may affect matters in respect of the Company or such other entity and/or other aspects of the shares or other securities of the Company or such other entity in the Santander UK group, which may negatively affect the ability of the Company or such other entity to meet its obligations in respect of such shares or securities.

Further, amendments to the Insolvency Act 1986 and secondary legislation have introduced changes to the treatment and ranking of certain debts with the result that certain eligible deposits will rank in priority to the claims of ordinary (i.e.non-preferred) unsecured creditors in the event of an insolvency. This may negatively affect the ability of the Company or another Santander UK group entity to meet its obligations in respect of its unsecured creditors in an insolvency scenario.

Bail-in and write down powers under the Banking Act and the BRRD may adversely affect our business and the value of securities we may issue

The Banking Reform Act as of 31 December 2014 amended the Banking Act to introduce a UK‘bail-in power’. On 6 May 2014, the Council adopted the EU Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive (BRRD), which contains a similarbail-in power and requires EU Member States to provide resolution authorities with the power to write down the claims of unsecured creditors of a failing institution and to convert unsecured claims to equity (subject to certain parameters). The UK Government decided to implement the BRRDbail-in power from 1 January 2015, with the final phase of rules implemented on 1 January 2016.

The UKbail-in power is an additional power available to the UK resolution authorities under the special resolution regime provided for in the Banking Act. This enables them to recapitalise a failed institution by allocating losses to such institution’s shareholders and unsecured creditors, subject to the rights of such shareholders and unsecured creditors to be compensated under abail-in compensation order. Such an order would be based on the principle that such creditors should receive no less favourable treatment than they would have received had the bank entered into insolvency immediately before the coming into effect of thebail-in power. Thebail-in power includes the power to cancel or write down (in whole or in part) certain liabilities or to modify the terms of certain contracts for the purposes of reducing or deferring the liabilities of a relevant institution under resolution and the power to convert certain liabilities into shares (or other instruments of ownership) of the relevant institution. The conditions for use of the UKbail-in power are generally that (i) the regulator determines the relevant institution is failing or likely to fail; (ii) it is not reasonably likely that any other action can be taken to avoid such relevant institution’s failure; and (iii) the relevant UK resolution authority determines that it is in the public interest to exercise thebail-in power. Certain liabilities are excluded from the scope of thebail-in powers, including liabilities to the extent that they are secured.

According to the Banking Act, as well as similar principles in the BRRD, the relevant UK resolution authority should have regard to the insolvency treatment principles when exercising the UKbail-in power. The insolvency treatment principles are that: (i) the exercise of the UKbail-in power should be consistent with treating all liabilities of the relevant bank in accordance with the priority that they would enjoy on a liquidation; and (ii) any creditors who would have equal priority on a liquidation should bear losses on an equal footing with each other. HM Treasury may, by order, specify further matters or principles to which the relevant UK resolution authority must have regard when exercising the UKbail-in power. These principles may be specified in addition to, or instead of, the insolvency treatment principles. If the relevant UK resolution authority departs from the insolvency treatment principles when exercising the UKbail-in power, it must report to the Chancellor of the Exchequer stating the reasons for its departure.

Thebail-in power under the Banking Act and the BRRD may potentially be exercised in respect of any unsecured debt securities issued by a financial institution under resolution or by a relevant member of the Santander UK group, regardless of when they were issued. Accordingly, thebail-in power under the Banking Act and the BRRD could be exercised in respect of our debt securities. Public financial support would only be used as a last resort, if at all, after having assessed and exploited, to the maximum extent practicable, the resolution tools including thebail-in tool, and the occurrence of circumstances in whichbail-in powers would need to be exercised in respect of us would have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

The BRRD also contains a mandatory write down power which requires EU Member States to grant powers to resolution authorities to recapitalise institutions and/or their EEA parent holding companies that are in severe financial difficulty or at the point ofnon-viability by permanently writing down Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments issued by such institutions and/or their EEA parent holding companies, or converting those capital instruments into shares (or other instruments of ownership). The mandatory write down provision has been implemented in the UK through the Banking Act. Before taking any form of resolution action or applying any resolution power set out in the BRRD, the UK resolution authorities have the power (and are obliged when specified conditions are determined to have been met) to write down, or convert Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital instruments issued by the relevant institution into CET1 capital instruments before, or simultaneously with, the entry into resolution of the relevant entity. These measures could be applied to certain of our debt securities. The occurrence of circumstances in which write down powers would need to be exercised in respect of us would be likely to have a negative impact on our business.

In contrast to the creditor protections afforded in the event of thebail-in powers being exercised, holders of capital instruments will not be entitled to the ‘no creditorworse-off’ protections under the Banking Act in the event that their capital instruments are written down or converted to equity under the mandatory write-down tool (unless the mandatory write-down tool were to be used alongside abail-in). Furthermore, in circumstances where capital instruments are converted into equity securities by application of the mandatory write-down tool, those equity securities may be subjected to thebail-in powers in resolution, resulting in their cancellation, significant dilution or transfer away from the investors therein.

In addition, the BRRD provides for resolution authorities to have the power to require institutions and groups to make structural changes to ensure legal and operational separation of ‘critical functions’ from other functions where necessary, or to require institutions to limit or cease existing or proposed activities in certain circumstances. As a result of changes to the PRA Rulebook made to implement the BRRD, the Company is now required to identify such ‘critical functions’ as part of its resolution and recovery planning. If used in respect of us, these ex ante powers would have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

230    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

We are subject to regulatory capital and leverage requirements that could limit our operations, and changes to these requirements may further limit and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects

We are subject to capital adequacy requirements applicable to banks and banking groups under directly applicable EU legislation and as adopted by the PRA. We are required to maintain a minimum ratio of Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital to risk-weighted assets, Tier 1 capital to risk-weighted assets, total capital to risk-weighted assets and Tier 1 capital to total adjusted assets for leverage monitoring purposes. Any failure by us to maintain such ratios above prescribed regulatory minimum levels may result in administrative actions or sanctions. These could potentially include requirements on us to cease all or certain lines of new business, to raise new capital resources or, in certain circumstances, a requirement for our existing capital instruments (potentially including our debt securities) to be subjected tobail-in or write down (for more information, see the risk factor entitled‘Bail-in and write down powers under the Banking Act and the BRRD may adversely affect our business and the value of securities we may issue’).

The Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV Directive) and the Capital Requirements Regulation (the CRR and together with the CRD IV Directive, CRD IV) implemented changes proposed by the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision (the Basel Committee) to the capital adequacy framework, known as ‘Basel III’ in the EU. The CRR is directly applicable in each EU Member State and does not therefore require national implementing measures, whilst the CRD IV Directive has been implemented by EU Member States through national legislative processes. CRD IV was published in the Official Journal on 27 June 2013 and came into effect on 1 January 2014, with particular requirements expected to be fully effective by the end of 2019. CRD IV substantially reflects the Basel III capital and liquidity standards and facilitates the applicable implementation timeframes. On 19 December 2013, the PRA published the initial version of its rules and supervisory statements associated with the implementation of CRD IV, which cover prudential rules for banks, building societies and investment firms. Binding technical standards adopted by the European Commission have also impacted, and may further impact, the capital requirements which apply under CRD IV.

Under the ‘Pillar 2’ framework, the PRA requires the capital resources of UK banks to be maintained at levels which exceed the base capital requirements prescribed by CRD IV and to cover relevant risks in their business. In addition, a series of capital buffers have been established under CRD IV and PRA rules to ensure a bank can withstand a period of stress. These buffers, which must be met by CET1 capital, include the counter-cyclical capital buffer, sectoral capital requirements, a PRA buffer and the capital conservation buffer. The total size of the capital buffers will be informed by the results of the annual concurrent UK stress testing exercises. The BoE’s approach to stress testing the UK banking system was outlined in October 2015. The BoE is aiming to develop an approach that is explicitly counter-cyclical, with the severity of the stress test and the associated regulatory capital buffers varying systematically with the state of the financial cycle. Furthermore, the framework is aiming to support a continued improvement in UK banks’ risk management and capital planning capabilities, and the BoE expects participating UK banks to demonstrate sustained improvements in their capabilities over time. The PRA can take action if a bank fails to meet the required capital ratio hurdle rates in the stress testing exercise, and the banks which fail to do so will be required to take action to strengthen their capital position over an appropriate timeframe. If a bank does not meet expectations in its risk management and capital planning capabilities in the stress testing exercise, this may inform the setting of its capital buffers. In March 2018, the BoE published its guidance on its 2018 stress tests, which contained the annual cyclical scenario. The BoE published results of the stress test in November 2018.

Though the results of the PRA’s 2018 stress test did not impact on the level of capital that we are required to hold, the PRA could, in the future, as a result of stress testing exercises (both in the UK and EU wide) and as part of the exercise of UK macro-prudential capital regulation tools, or through supervisory actions (beyond the changes described below), require UK banks and banking groups, including us, to increase our/their capital resources further.

The Financial Services Act 2012 (the FS Act) empowers the Financial Policy Committee of the BoE (FPC), which is asub-committee of the Court of Directors of the BoE, to give directions to the PRA and the FCA so as to ensure implementation of macroprudential measures intended to manage systemic risk. For the UK, the FPC sets the countercyclical capital buffer rate on a quarterly basis. Following its meeting in June 2017, the FPC announced that the UK countercyclical capital buffer rate would be increased from 0% to 0.5%, with binding effect from June 2018. On 28 November 2017, it further increased the level to 1% with binding effect from November 2018. Following its meetings on 20 and 27 November 2018, the FPC maintained the UK countercyclical buffer rate at 1% and indicated it stood ready to move the rate in either direction as the risk environment evolved.

The FS Act also provides the FPC with certain other macro-prudential tools for the management of systemic risk. Since 6 April 2015, these tools have included powers of direction relating to leverage ratios. In July 2015, the FPC made certain directions to the PRA in relation to the leverage ratio. In December 2015, the PRA issued a policy statement setting out how it would implement the FPC’s direction and recommendations on the leverage ratio. All major UK banks and banking groups (including us) are required to hold enough Tier 1 capital (75% of which must be CET1 capital) to satisfy a minimum leverage requirement of 3.25% (following the PRA’s decision to increase the leverage ratio requirement from 3% to 3.25%, announced in October 2017) and enough CET1 capital to satisfy a countercyclical leverage ratio buffer of 35% of each bank’s institution-specific countercyclical capital buffer rate. The FPC has also previously directed the PRA to require UK globally systemically important banks(G-SIBs) and domestically systemically important banks, building societies andPRA-regulated investment firms (including us) to hold enough CET1 capital to meet a supplementary leverage ratio buffer of 35% of the institution-specificG-SIB buffer rate or Systemic Risk Buffer (SRBF) for domestically systemically important banks. The supplementary leverage ratio buffer was implemented on 1 January 2016, in line with theG-SIB buffer rate imposed by the Financial Stability Board (FSB), with the SRBF to be applicable from 1 January 2019. The FPC finalised and published its SRBF framework on 25 May 2016. Systemic importance is measured using the total assets of ring-fenced banksub-groups in scope of the SRBF, with higher SRBF rates applicable as total assets increase. In December 2016, the PRA published its statement of policy on the SRBF relevant to ring-fenced bodies and in November 2018 published its statement of policy for reflecting the SRBF for the UK Leverage Ratio. The FPC can also direct the PRA to adjust capital requirements in relation to particular sectors through the imposition of sectoral capital requirements. Action taken in the future by the FPC in exercise of any of its powers could result in the regulatory capital requirements applied to us being further increased.

Regulators in the UK and worldwide have also proposed that additional loss absorbency requirements should be applied to systemically important institutions to ensure that there is sufficient loss absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution. The BRRD requires that EU Member States ensure that EU banks meet a Minimum Requirement for Eligible Liabilities (MREL). The BRRD was transposed into UK law in January 2015, with the provisions on MREL taking effect from 1 January 2016.

The BoE’s approach to setting a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL) Policy Statement was published in November 2016 and was subsequently updated in June 2018.

This sets out how the BoE expects to use its power to direct a ‘relevant person’ to maintain a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL). The Bank is required to set MREL for all institutions and will set the loss absorption amount to cover the losses that would need to be absorbed up to and in resolution. MREL eligible liabilities should be issued externally from the resolution entity.

LOGO

Santander UK plc231


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

There are two types of MREL: ‘external MREL’, issued by a resolution entity, and internal MREL, issued by legal entities in a group that are not themselves resolution entities. Should a firm fail, external MREL helps to ensure that the firm’s own financial resources can be used to absorb losses and recapitalise the business, so that it can continue to provide critical functions without relying on public funds. Internal MREL provides for the recapitalisation of subsidiaries and has the effect of passing up losses within the group, so that they can be absorbed by the shareholders and creditors of the resolution entity through the use of resolution tools.

The BoE expects banks to comply withend-state MREL requirements by 1 January 2022, with the following interim transition (noting scalars may apply to internal MREL amounts):

From 1 January 2019 UK resolution entities that areG-SIBs will be required to meet the minimum requirements set out in the FSB TLAC standard, being the higher of 16% of RWAs or 6% of leverage exposures. The Santander UK group is part of aG-SIB Banking Group and as such will need to meet these minimum requirements.

From 1 January 2020 UK resolution entities that areG-SIBs orD-SIBs will be required to maintain MREL equal to the higher of: two times their Pillar 1 capital requirements and one times their Pillar 2Aadd-ons or if subject to a leverage ratio requirement, two times the applicable requirement.

From 1 January 2022:G-SIBs will be required to meet an external MREL equivalent to the higher of: two times the sum of Pillar 1 and Pillar 2A, or the higher of two times the applicable leverage ratio requirement or 6.75% of leverage exposures.

The BoE intends to take forward for internal MREL eligible liabilities the requirement that they be issued with a contractual trigger that provides the resolution authority of the material subsidiary with the opportunity to direct a write-down and/or conversion in the circumstances specified in the Policy Statement.

On 23 November 2016, the European Commission also published legislative proposals for amendments to CRD IV, the BRRD and the SRM and proposed an additional amending directive to facilitate the creation of a new asset class of ‘nonpreferred’ senior debt. The package of reforms is aimed at further strengthening the resilience of EU credit institutions and is expected to be finalised in 2019 with entry into force (with certain exceptions) no earlier than 2020. Among other things, the proposed package of reforms includes proposals to introduce a binding 3% leverage ratio and a requirement for institutions that trade in securities and derivatives to have more risk-sensitive own funds. In line with the BoE’s Policy Statement and the PRA consultation, the proposed reforms also include measures to align the MREL requirements with the FSB TLAC standards. The proposed reforms are to be considered by the European Parliament and the Council of the EU and remain subject to change, although Directive 2017/2399 amending Directive 2014/59/EU, implementing the‘non-preferred’ senior debt class came into force in December 2017. The final package of reforms may not include all elements of the proposals and new or amended elements may be introduced. Until the proposals are in final form, it is uncertain how they will affect us.

Further, since 31 December 2014, the PRA has had the power under the FSMA to make rules requiring a parent undertaking of a bank to make arrangements to facilitate the exercise of resolution powers, including a power to require a group to issue debt instruments. Such powers could have an impact on the liquidity of our debt instruments and could materially increase our cost of funding. Since 1 January 2014, we have also been subject to certain recovery and resolution planning requirements (popularly known as ‘living wills’) for banks and other financial institutions as set out in the PRA Rulebook. These requirements were updated in January 2015 to implement the recovery and resolution framework under the BRRD. The updated requirements impose more regular and detailed reporting obligations, including the requirement to submit recovery plans and resolution packs to the PRA and to keep them up to date.

In addition to the above, regulators in the UK and worldwide have produced a range of proposals for future legislative and regulatory changes which could force us to comply with certain operational restrictions or take steps to raise further capital, or could increase our expenses, or otherwise adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects. These changes, which could affect the Santander UK group as a whole, include the EU implementation of the Basel Committee’s new market risk framework, which reflects rules made as a result of the Basel Committee’s fundamental review of the trading book. In addition, in December 2017 the Basel Committee published their finalisation of the Basel III framework, with proposed implementation from 1 January 2022. This includes the following elements:

Revisions to the standardised approach for credit risk, credit valuation adjustment risk and operational risk to address certain weaknesses identified by the Basel Committee

Additional constraints on the use of internal model approaches for credit risk, and removing the use of internal model approaches for credit valuation adjustment risk and operational risk

The use of an output floor based on standardised approaches

The introduction of a leverage ratio buffer for global systemically important banks and refinements to the definition of the leverage ratio exposure measure.

The foregoing measures could have a material adverse effect on our operating results, and consequently, on our financial condition and prospects. There is a risk that changes to the UK’s capital adequacy regime (including any increase to minimum leverage ratios) may result in increased minimum capital requirements, which could reduce available capital for business purposes and thereby adversely affect our cost of funding, profitability and ability to pay dividends, continue organic growth (including increased lending), or pursue acquisitions or other strategic opportunities (alternatively we could restructure our balance sheet to reduce the capital charges incurred pursuant to the PRA’s rules in relation to the assets held, or raise additional capital but at increased cost and subject to prevailing market conditions). In addition, changes to the eligibility criteria for Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital may affect our ability to raise Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital and impact the recognition of existing Tier 1 and Tier 2 capital resources in the calculation of our capital position. Furthermore increased capital requirements may negatively affect our return on equity and other financial performance indicators.

Our business could be affected if our capital is not managed effectively or if these measures limit our ability to manage our balance sheet and capital resources effectively or to access funding on commercially acceptable terms. Effective management of our capital position is important to our ability to operate our business, to continue to grow organically and to pursue our business strategy. For more on our capital position and capital management, see ‘Risk review – Capital risk’ on pages 111 to 113.

Liquidity and funding risks are inherent in our business and could have a material adverse effect on us

Liquidity risk is the risk that we, although otherwise solvent, either do not have available sufficient financial resources to meet our obligations as they fall due or can secure them only at excessive cost. This risk is inherent in any retail and commercial banking business and can be heightened by a number of enterprise-specific factors, including over-reliance on a particular source of funding, changes in credit ratings or market-wide phenomena such as market dislocation. While we implement liquidity management processes to seek to mitigate and control these risks, unforeseen systemic market factors in particular make it difficult to eliminate completely these risks. During the period 2008 to 2013, continued constraints in the supply of liquidity, including inter-bank lending, materially and adversely affected the cost of

232    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

funding our business. There can be no assurance that such constraints will not reoccur. Extreme liquidity constraints may affect our operations and our ability to fulfil regulatory liquidity requirements, as well as limit growth possibilities. Disruption and volatility in the global financial markets could have a material adverse effect on our ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to us.

Our cost of funding is directly related to prevailing interest rates and to our credit spreads. Increases in interest rates and our credit spreads can significantly increase the cost of our funding. Changes in our credit spreads are market-driven and may be influenced by market perceptions of our creditworthiness. Changes to interest rates and our credit spreads occur continuously and may be unpredictable and highly volatile.

If wholesale markets financing ceases to be available, or becomes excessively expensive, we may be forced to raise the rates we pay on deposits, with a view to attracting more customers, and/or to sell assets, potentially at depressed prices. The persistence or worsening of these adverse market conditions or an increase in base interest rates could have a material adverse effect on our ability to access liquidity and cost of funding (whether directly or indirectly) and therefore on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

In response to the financial crisis, central banks around the world, including the BoE, US Federal Reserve Bank (the Fed) and the ECB, made coordinated efforts to increase liquidity in the financial markets by taking measures such as increasing the amounts they lend directly to financial institutions, lowering interest rates and ensuring that currency swaps markets remain liquid. Over the course of 2018 central banks have either started or continued to unwinding such stimulus, however towards the end of 2018 was that the near-term outlook for global growth had started to show signs of softening, this could lead to a slowdown in the expected tightening of global monetary policy. The BoE increased their Base Rate in August 2018 to 0.75%, this was the only UK rate rise in 2018. Additionally the BoE voted to maintain the stock of the quantitative easing programme of £445bn of assets, comprising £10bn of corporate bonds and £435bn of gilts. In December 2018, the ECB confirmed that it would end its asset purchase programme. In the US, the Fed increased its short-term interest rate by 25 basis points in each of March 2018, June 2018, September 2018 and December 2018 to 2.50%, and has forecast gradual additional interest rate increases in 2019. A rapid removal or significant reduction, in outstanding quantitative easing asset purchase programmes could have an adverse effect on our ability to access liquidity and on our funding costs.

In October 2013, the BoE updated its Sterling Monetary Framework to provide more transparent liquidity insurance support in exceptional circumstances. The Indexed Long-Term Repo Facility will now be available to support regular bank requirements for liquidity while the Discount Window Facility has been reinforced as support for banks experiencing idiosyncratic stress. The Collateralised Term Repo Facility will be made available to support markets in the event of a market wide liquidity stress. On 28 February 2018, the drawdown period closed for the BoE’s Term Funding Scheme(1) (TFS), which allowed participants to borrow central bank reserves in exchange for eligible collateral. At 31 December 2018, we had drawn £10.8bn under the TFS. In addition to the TFS, we participated in the Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS). At 31 December 2018, we had drawn £1.0bn of UK treasury bills under the FLS.

To the extent that we have made use of these BoE facilities described above, any significant reduction or withdrawal of those facilities could increase our funding costs.

Each of the factors described above (the persistence or worsening of adverse market conditions, and the lack of availability, or withdrawal, of such central bank quantitative easing and/or lending schemes or an increase in base interest rates) could have a material adverse effect on us, including our ability to access capital and liquidity on financial terms acceptable to us and, more generally, on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Further, we aim for a funding structure that is consistent with our assets, avoids excessive reliance on short-term wholesale funding, attracts enduring commercial deposits and provides diversification in products and tenor. We therefore rely, and will continue to rely, on commercial deposits to fund a significant proportion of lending activities. The ongoing availability of this type of funding is sensitive to a variety of factors outside our control, such as general economic conditions and the confidence of commercial depositors in the economy in the financial services industry in general, confidence in the company specifically, the Company’s credit rating and the availability and extent of deposit guarantees, as well as competition between banks for deposits or competition with other products, such as mutual funds. A change in any of these factors could significantly increase the amount of commercial deposit withdrawals in a short period of time, thereby reducing our ability to access commercial deposit funding on appropriate terms, or at all, in the future, and therefore have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

In our liquidity planning we assume that our customers will continue to make a volume of deposits with us (particularly demand deposits and short-term time deposits), and we intend to maintain our emphasis on the use of banking deposits as a source of funds. The short-term nature of some deposits could cause liquidity problems for us in the future if deposits are not made in the volumes we expect or are withdrawn at short notice or are not renewed. If a substantial number of our depositors withdraw their demand deposits or do not roll over their time deposits upon maturity, there may be a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. For additional information about our liquidity position and other liquidity matters, including the policies and procedures we use to manage our liquidity risks, see ‘Risk review – Liquidity risk’ on pages 103 to 105.

A sudden or unexpected shortage of funds in the banking system could threaten the stability of the banking system, and lead to increased funding costs, a reduction in the term of funding instruments or require us to liquidate certain assets, thereby impacting our liquidity position and ability to pay our debts. If these circumstances were to arise, this could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We are subject to liquidity requirements that could limit our operations, and changes to these requirements may further limit and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects

The PRA has responsibility for the micro-prudential regulation of banks and certain other financial institutions. In June 2015, the PRA issued its policy statement on the transfer of the liquidity regime to the CRD IV standard, confirming that the existing regime under BIPRU 12 would cease to apply with effect from 1 October 2015, although certain of the BIPRU requirements are reflected in the new regime.

Under CRD IV, banks are, or under transitional measures will be, required to meet two new liquidity standards, consisting of the Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR) and the Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR) metrics, which are aimed to promote:

The short-term resilience of banks’ liquidity risk profiles by ensuring they have sufficient high-quality liquid assets to survive a significant stress scenario
A longer-term resilience by creating incentives for banks to fund their activities with more stable sources of funding on an ongoing basis.

(1)

The drawdown period under the TFS ran from 19 September 2016 to 28 February 2018. The TFS was made available to banks and building societies that are participants in the Bank of England’s Sterling Monetary Framework and signed up to the Discount Window Facility.

LOGO

Santander UK plc233


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

LCR

The LCR is intended to ensure that a bank maintains an adequate level of unencumbered, high quality liquid assets which can be used to offset the net cash outflows the bank could encounter under a short-term significant liquidity stress scenario. The current minimum requirement for LCR is set at 100%. Our current liquidity position is in excess of the minimum requirements set by the PRA, however there can be no assurance that future changes to the applicable liquidity requirements would not have an adverse effect on our financial performance.

NSFR

In October 2014, the Basel Committee published its final NSFR standard. The NSFR has not yet been implemented within Europe (unlike the LCR). As such there is no formal NSFR requirement applicable to UK or other EU banks until such time as the European Commission adopts appropriate regulatory/technical standards. The NSFR is defined as the amount of available stable funding relative to the amount of required stable funding. Banks are expected to hold an NSFR of at least 100% on an ongoing basis and report its NSFR at least quarterly. Ahead of its planned implementation, the NSFR will remain subject to an observation period. Santander UK monitors its NSFR on an ongoing basis and stands ready to comply with the standards once agreed.

There is a risk that implementing and maintaining existing and new liquidity requirements, such as through enhanced liquidity risk management systems, may incur significant costs, and more stringent requirements to hold liquid assets may materially affect our lending business as more funds may be required to acquire or maintain a liquidity buffer, thereby reducing future profitability. This could in turn adversely impact our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Exposure to UK Government debt could have a material adverse effect on us

Like many other UK banks, we invest in debt securities of the UK Government, largely for liquidity purposes. At 31 December 2018, approximately 2% of our total assets and 36% of our securities portfolio were comprised of debt securities issued by the UK Government. Any failure by the UK Government to make timely payments under the terms of these securities, or a significant decrease in their market value, will have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We may suffer adverse effects as a result of the political, economic and sovereign debt tensions in the eurozone

Conditions in the capital markets and the economy generally in the eurozone, though improving recently, continue to show signs of fragility and volatility. Interest rate differentials among eurozone countries are affecting government finance and borrowing rates in those economies. This could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

The UK EU Referendum caused significant volatility in the global stock and foreign exchange markets (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We are vulnerable to disruptions and volatility in the global financial markets’ and ‘Exposure to UK political developments, including the ongoing negotiations between the UK and EU, could have a material adverse effect on us’). This volatility couldre-occur depending on the outcome of the continuing exit negotiations.

In the past, the ECB and European Council have taken actions with the aim of reducing the risk of contagion in the eurozone and beyond and improving economic and financial stability. Notwithstanding these measures, a significant number of financial institutions throughout Europe have substantial exposures to sovereign debt issued by the eurozone (and other) nations, which may be under financial stress. Should any of those nations default on their debt, or experience a significant widening of credit spreads, major financial institutions and banking systems throughout Europe could be adversely affected, with wider possible adverse consequences for global financial market conditions.

Although we conduct the majority of our business in the UK, we have direct and indirect exposure to financial and economic conditions throughout the eurozone economies, including as a result of Banco Santander SA, and other affiliates being situated in the eurozone. Concerns relating to sovereign defaults or a partial or completebreak-up of the European Monetary Union, including potential accompanying redenomination risks and uncertainties, may recur in light of the political and economic factors mentioned above. For a further description of our country risk exposures, including eurozone and peripheral eurozone exposures and redenomination risk, see ‘Risk review – Country risk exposure’ on page 73. In addition, general financial and economic conditions in the UK, which directly affect our operations, financial condition and prospects, may deteriorate as a result of conditions in the eurozone.

We are exposed to risks faced by other financial institutions

We routinely transact with counterparties in the financial services industry, including brokers and dealers, commercial banks, investment banks, mutual funds, hedge funds and other institutional clients. Defaults by, and even rumours or questions about the solvency of certain financial institutions and the financial services industry generally, have led to incidents of market-wide liquidity problems over the last 10 years and could lead to losses or defaults by other institutions. Many of the routine transactions we enter into expose us to significant credit risk in the event of default by one of our significant counterparties. A default by a significant financial counterparty, or liquidity problems in the financial services industry generally, could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

An adverse movement in our external credit rating would likely increase our cost of funding, require us to post additional collateral or take other actions under some of our derivative contracts and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects

Credit ratings affect the cost and other terms upon which we are able to obtain funding. Credit rating agencies regularly evaluate us, and their credit ratings of our institution and our debt in issue are based on a number of factors, including our financial strength, the strength of the UK economy and conditions affecting the financial services industry generally.

Any downgrade in the external credit ratings assigned to us or any of our debt securities could have an adverse impact on us. In particular, such downgrade in our credit ratings could increase our borrowing costs and could require us to post additional collateral or take other actions under some of our derivative contracts, and could limit our access to capital markets and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects. For example, a credit rating downgrade could have a material adverse effect on our ability to sell or market certain of our products, engage in certain longer-term transactions and derivatives transactions and retain our customers, particularly customers who need a minimum rating threshold in order to invest.

In addition, under the terms of certain of our derivative contracts and other financial commitments, we may be required to maintain a minimum credit rating or otherwise our counterparties may be able to terminate such contracts or require the posting of collateral. Any of these results of a credit rating downgrade could, in turn, result in outflows and reduce our liquidity and have an adverse effect on us, including our operations, financial condition and prospects. For example, we estimate that at 31 December 2018, if Fitch, Moody’s and Standard & Poor’s were concurrently to downgrade the long-term credit ratings of the Company by one notch, and thereby trigger a short-term credit rating downgrade, this could result in an outflow of £3.6bn of cash and collateral (2017: £3.9bn). A hypothetical two notch downgrade would result in a further outflow of £0.2bn of cash and collateral at 31 December 2018 (2017: £0.2bn). These potential outflows are captured under the LCR regime. However, while certain potential impacts are contractual and quantifiable, the full consequences of a credit rating downgrade are inherently uncertain, as they

234    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

depend upon numerous dynamic, complex and inter-related factors and assumptions, including market conditions at the time of any downgrade, whether any downgrade of a firm’s long-term credit rating precipitates downgrades to its short-term credit rating, whether any downgrade precipitates changes to the way that the financial institutions sector is rated, and assumptions about the ratings of other financial institutions and the potential behaviours of various customers, investors and counterparties. Actual outflows will also depend upon certain other factors including any management or restructuring actions that could be taken to reduce cash outflows and the potential liquidity impact from a loss of unsecured funding (such as from money market funds) or loss of secured funding capacity.

Although unsecured and secured funding stresses are included in our stress testing scenarios and a portion of our total liquid assets is held against these risks, it is still the case that a credit rating downgrade could have a material adverse effect on us. In addition, if certain counterparties terminated derivative contracts with us and we were unable to replace such contracts, our market risk profile could be altered.

Santander UK Group Holdings plc’s long-term debt is currently rated investment grade by the major rating agencies: Baa1 with positive outlook by Moody’s Investors Service, BBB with stable outlook by S&P Global Ratings and A with stable outlook by Fitch Ratings. The Company’s long-term debt is currently rated investment grade by the major rating agencies: Aa3 with positive outlook by Moody’s Investors Service, A with stable outlook by S&P Global Ratings and A+ with stable outlook by Fitch Ratings. If a downgrade of any Santander UK group member’s long-term credit ratings were to occur, it could also impact the short-term credit ratings of other members of the Santander UK group.

There can be no assurance that the credit rating agencies will maintain our current credit ratings or outlooks. A failure to maintain favourable credit ratings and outlooks could increase our cost of funding, adversely affect our interest margins, and reduce our ability to secure both long term and short term funding, any of which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Negative changes to the UK sovereign credit rating, or the perception that further negative changes may occur, could have a material adverse effect on our operating results, financial condition, prospects and the marketability and trading value of our securities. This might also impact on our own credit rating, borrowing costs and our ability to secure funding. Negative changes to the UK sovereign credit rating, or the perception that further negative changes may occur, could also have a material effect in depressing consumer confidence, restricting the availability, and increasing the cost, of funding for individuals and companies, further depressing economic activity, increasing unemployment and/or reducing asset prices.

Our financial results are constantly exposed to market risk. We are subject to fluctuations in interest rates and other market risks, which may materially adversely affect us and our profitability

Market risk refers to the probability of variations in our net interest income or in the market value of our assets and liabilities due to volatility of interest rates, exchange rates or equity prices.

Changes in interest rates would affect the following areas, among others, of our business:

Net interest income
The value of our derivatives transactions
The market value of our securities holdings
The value of our loans and deposits
The volume of loans originated.

Interest rates are highly sensitive to many factors beyond our control, including increased regulation of the financial sector, monetary policies, domestic and international economic and political conditions and other factors. Variations in interest rates could affect the interest earned on our assets and the interest paid on our borrowings, thereby affecting our net interest income, which comprises the majority of our revenue, reducing our growth rate and potentially resulting in losses. In addition, costs we incur as we implement strategies to reduce interest rate exposure could increase in the future (which, in turn, will impact our results).

Increases in interest rates may reduce the volume of loans we originate. Sustained high interest rates have historically discouraged customers from borrowing and have resulted in increased delinquencies in outstanding loans and deterioration in the quality of assets. Increases in interest rates may also reduce the propensity of our customers to prepay or refinance fixed-rate loans, reduce the value of our financial assets and reduce gains or require us to record losses on sales of our loans or securities.

Due to the historically low interest rate environment in the UK in recent years, the rates on many of our interest-bearing deposit products have been priced at or near zero, which may limit our ability to further reduce customer rates in the event of further cuts in BoE Base Rate and thus negatively impacting our margins. Notwithstanding the August 2018 increase in BoE Base Rate to 0.75%, if a generally low interest rate environment in the UK persists in the long term, it may be difficult to increase our net interest income, which will impact our results.

LIBOR and other benchmarks are subject to national, international and other regulatory guidance and proposals for reform and transition to alternative rates. On 29 November 2017, the FCA announced that its Working Group on Sterling Risk-Free Rates will be mandated with implementing a broad-based transition to the Sterling Overnight Index Average (“SONIA”) over the next four years across sterling bond, loan and derivative markets, so that SONIA is established as the primary sterling interest rate benchmark. As set out in Andrew Bailey’s speech on 12 July 2018, the introduction of SONIA as the primary sterling interest rate benchmark is planned to take place before the end of 2021.

Any such changes to, or replacement of benchmarks may cause them to perform differently than in the past, or may have other consequential effects on any of our rights and obligations which depend on such benchmarks. In particular, the potential transition from LIBOR to SONIA or the elimination of the LIBOR benchmark, or changes in the manner of administration of such benchmark, could require an adjustment to the terms of financial instruments to which the Santander UK group is a party and to such contractual obligations of the Santander UK group which relate to LIBOR. This could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

It is not yet clear whether LIBOR will cease to exist entirely before the end of 2021, whether the use of LIBOR will be made unlawful or impermissible in future, and whether there will be any transitional arrangements set out by law, regulation or market practice. In particular, it is not yet clear what the effect will be on legacy contracts and agreements. If LIBOR were to be discontinued or replaced without the regulators making clear provision for automatically transitioning legacy contracts and agreements, this could have a material adverse effect on our business.

LOGO

Santander UK plc235


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

If LIBOR is replaced, ceases to exist or if the methodology for calculating LIBOR changes for any reason, interest rates on our floating rate obligations, loans, deposits, derivatives, and other financial instruments linked to LIBOR rates, as well as the revenue and expenses associated with those financial instruments, may be adversely affected. In addition, any uncertainty regarding the continued use and reliability of LIBOR as a benchmark interest rate could adversely affect the value of our floating rate obligations, loans, deposits, derivatives, and other financial instruments linked to LIBOR rates. Any such issues relating to LIBOR or other benchmarks (including SONIA) could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We are also exposed to foreign exchange rate risk as a result of mismatches between assets and liabilities denominated in different currencies. Fluctuations in the exchange rate between currencies may negatively affect our earnings and value of our assets and securities. Our capital resource is stated in pounds sterling and we do not fully hedge our capital position against changes in currency exchange rates. Although we seek to hedge most of our currency risk, through hedging and the purchase of cross-currency swaps, these hedges do not eliminate currency risk and we can make no assurance that we will not suffer adverse financial consequences as a result of currency fluctuations. The volatility in the value of the pound sterling following the result of the UK EU Referendum may persist as negotiations for exit continue and continued significant exchange rate volatility and the depreciation of the pound sterling in particular could have an adverse impact on our operating results and our ability to meet our US dollar and euro-denominated obligations, and which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We are also exposed to price risk in our investments in equity and debt securities. The performance of financial markets may cause changes in the value of our investment portfolios. The volatility of world equity markets, due to the continued economic uncertainty and sovereign debt tensions, has had a particularly strong impact on the financial sector.

Continued volatility may affect the value of our investments in equity and debt securities and, depending on their fair value and future recovery expectations, could become a permanent impairment, which would be subject to write-offs against our results. To the extent any of these risks materialise, our net interest income or the market value of our assets and liabilities could be adversely affected.

Market conditions have resulted in, and could continue to result in, material changes to the estimated fair values of our financial assets. Negative fair value adjustments could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

In the past 10 years, financial markets have been subject to periods of significant stress resulting in steep falls in perceived or actual financial asset values, particularly due to volatility in global financial markets and the resulting widening of credit spreads. We have material exposures to securities, loans, derivatives and other investments that are recorded at fair value and are therefore exposed to potential negative fair value adjustments. Asset valuations in future periods, reflecting the prevailing market conditions, may result in negative changes in the fair values of our financial assets. In addition, the value ultimately realised by us on disposal may be lower than the current fair value. Any of these factors could require us to record negative fair value adjustments, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. In addition, to the extent that fair values are determined using financial valuation models, such values may be inaccurate or subject to change, as the data used by such models may not be available or may become unavailable due to changes in market conditions, particularly for illiquid assets and in times of economic instability. In such circumstances, our valuation methodologies require us to make assumptions, judgements and estimates in order to establish fair value.

Reliable assumptions are difficult to make and are inherently uncertain. Moreover, valuation models are complex, making them inherently imperfect predictors of actual results. Any consequential impairments or write-downs could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Failure to successfully implement and continue to improve our credit risk management systems could materially and adversely affect our business

As a commercial banking group, one of the main types of risks inherent in our business is credit risk. For example, an important feature of our credit risk management system is to employ our own credit rating system to assess the particular risk profile of a customer. This system is primarily generated internally, but, in the case of counterparties with a global presence, also builds off the credit assessment assigned by other Banco Santander group members. As this process involves detailed analyses of the customer or credit risk, taking into account both quantitative and qualitative factors, it is subject to human and IT systems errors. In exercising their judgement on current or future credit risk behaviour of our customers, our employees may not always be able to assign a correct credit rating, which may result in a larger exposure to higher credit risks than indicated by our risk rating system.

In addition, we continuously refine our credit policies and guidelines to address potential risks associated with particular industries or types of customers. However, we may not be able to detect all possible risks before they occur, or our employees may not be able to effectively implement our credit policies and guidelines due to limited tools available to us, which may increase our credit risk.

Any failure to effectively implement, consistently monitor and refine our credit risk management systems may result in an increase in the level ofnon-performing loans and higher losses than expected, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We are subject to various risks associated with our derivative transactions that could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

We enter into derivative transactions for trading purposes as well as for hedging purposes. We are subject to various risks associated with these transactions, including market risk, operational risk, basis risk (the risk of loss associated with variations in the spread between the asset yield and the funding and/or hedge cost) and credit or counterparty risk (the risk of insolvency or other inability of the counterparty to a particular transaction to perform its obligations thereunder, including providing sufficient collateral).

Market practices and documentation for derivative transactions in the UK may differ from those in other countries. In addition, the execution and performance of these transactions depend on our ability to develop adequate control and administration systems and to hire and retain qualified personnel. Moreover, our ability to adequately monitor, analyse and report derivative transactions continues to depend, largely, on our information technology systems. These factors further increase the risks associated with these transactions and could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

236    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

Operational risks, including risks relating to data and information collection, processing, storage and security, are inherent in our business

Like other financial institutions with a large customer base, we manage and hold confidential personal information of customers in the conduct of our banking operations, as well as the personal information of other individuals, such as staff, and a large number of assets. Accordingly, our business depends on the ability to process a large number of transactions efficiently and accurately, and on our people, digital technologies, computer and email services, software and networks. We also rely on the secure processing, storage and transmission of confidential, sensitive personal data and other information using our computer systems and networks, and through the adoption of cloud computing services. The proper functioning of financial control, accounting or other data collection and processing systems is critical to our businesses and to our ability to compete effectively. Losses can result from inadequate personnel, human error, inadequate or failed internal control processes and systems or from external events that interrupt normal business operations. We also face the risk that our controls and procedures prove to be designed inadequately or are circumvented such that our data and/or client records are incomplete, not recoverable or not securely stored. Although we work with our clients, vendors, service providers, counterparties and other third parties to develop secure data and information processing, storage and transmission capabilities to prevent against information security risk, we routinely exchange personal, confidential and proprietary information by electronic means, and we may be the target of attempted hacking. Adoption of cloud based computing services in order to improve technological resilience and cost-effectiveness could bring with it risks to the information we process if we do not take care to implement appropriate controls such as strong authentication and encryption. If we cannot maintain an effective and secure electronic data and information, management and processing system or if we fail to maintain complete physical and electronic records, this could result in regulatory sanctions, including under the General Data Protection Regulation, which came into force on 25 May 2018. Any such failures or sanctions could result in serious reputational or financial harm to us, as well as to those whose data we hold, and could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Infrastructure and technology resilience

We take protective measures and continuously monitor and develop our systems to safeguard our technology infrastructure, data and information from misappropriation or corruption, but our systems, software and networks nevertheless may be vulnerable to unauthorised access, misuse, computer viruses or other malicious code and other events that could have a security impact. An interception, misuse or mishandling of personal, confidential or proprietary information sent to or received from a client, vendor, service provider, counterparty or third party could result in legal liability, regulatory action and reputational harm, and therefore have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. Furthermore, we may be required to expend significant additional resources to modify our protective measures or to investigate and remediate vulnerabilities or other exposures. We expect our programmes of change to have an effect on our risk profile, both technological and regulatory. Whether it is the opportunities from adoption of cloud technology, systems to support important regulatory initiatives, or the desire to identify, prioritise and remove obsolete systems from operations, the operational risk associated with systems change is likely to increase and this will therefore remain an area of key focus in our risk management. There can be no assurance that we will not suffer material losses from such operational risks in the future, including those relating to any security breaches, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Cyber security

In particular, we have seen in recent years the computer systems of companies and organisations targeted, not only by cyber criminals, but also by activists and rogue nation states. In common with other financial institutions, we manage and hold confidential personal information of customers in the conduct of our banking operations, as well as a large number of assets. Accordingly we have been and continue to be subject to a range of cyber-attacks, such as malware, phishing and denial of service.

Cyber-attacks could give rise to the loss of significant amounts of customer data and other sensitive information, as well as significant levels of liquid assets (including cash). In addition, cyber-attacks could give rise to the disablement of our electronic systems used to service our customers. As attempted attacks continue to evolve in scope and sophistication, we may incur significant costs in order to modify or enhance our protective measures against such attacks, or to investigate or remediate any vulnerability or resulting breach, or in communicating cyber-attacks to our customers. If we fail to effectively manage our cyber security risk, the impact could be significant and may include harm to our reputation and have an adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects through the payment of customer compensation, regulatory penalties and fines and/or through the loss of assets. Factors such as failing to apply critical security patches from our technology providers, to manage out obsolete technology or to update our processes in response to new threats could give rise to these impacts.

In addition, we may also be impacted by cyber-attacks against national critical infrastructures in the UK, for example, the telecommunications network. In common with other financial institutions we are dependent on such networks and any cyber-attack against these networks could negatively affect our ability to service our customers. As we do not operate these networks, we have limited ability to protect our business from the adverse effects of cyber-attack against them.

Further, the domestic and global financial services industry, including key financial market infrastructure, may be the target of cyber disruption and attack by cyber criminals, activists and rogue states looking to cause economic instability. We have limited ability to protect our business from the adverse effects of cyber disruption or attack against our counterparties and key financial market infrastructure. If such a disruption or attack were to occur it could cause serious operational and financial harm to us.

Procedure and policy compliance

We also manage and hold confidential personal information of customers in the conduct of our banking operations. Although we have procedures and controls to safeguard personal information in our possession, unauthorised disclosures could subject us to legal actions and administrative sanctions as well as damages and reputational harm that could materially and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects. Further, our business is exposed to risk from potentialnon-compliance with policies, employee misconduct or negligence and fraud, which could result in regulatory sanctions and cause serious reputational or financial harm. In recent years, a number of multinational financial institutions have suffered material losses due to the actions of ‘rogue traders’ or other employees. It is not always possible to deter or prevent employee misconduct, and the precautions we take to detect and prevent this activity may not always be effective. We may be required to report events related to information security issues (including any cyber security issues), events where customer information may be compromised, unauthorised access and other security breaches, to the relevant regulatory authorities. Any material disruption or slowdown of our systems could cause information, including data related to customer requests, to be lost or to be delivered to our clients with delays or errors, which could reduce demand for our services and products and could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

LOGO

Santander UK plc237


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

We may fail to detect or prevent money laundering and other financial crime activities due to not correctly identifying our financial crime risks, failing to implement effective systems and controls to mitigate those risks or failing to recruit and retain resource with the necessary skills and experience. This could expose us to significant fines, additional regulatory scrutiny, restrictions on the conduct of our business and operations, increased liability, civil claims, criminal actions and reputational risk

We are obligated to comply with applicable anti-money laundering (AML), anti-terrorism, anti-bribery and corruption, sanctions,anti-tax evasion and other laws and regulations in the jurisdictions in which we operate. These laws and regulations require us, among other things, to conduct customer due diligence (including in respect of sanctions and politically-exposed person screening), ensure account and transaction information is kept up to date and implement effective financial crime policies and procedures detailing what is required from those responsible in order to counter financial crime risks. We are also required to conduct financial crime training for our staff and to report suspicious transactions and activity to appropriate law enforcement.

Over the last decade, financial crime risk has become the subject of enhanced regulatory scrutiny and supervision by regulators globally. AML/CTF, anti-bribery and corruption and sanctions laws and regulations are increasingly complex and detailed and have become the subject of enhanced regulatory supervision, requiring improved systems, sophisticated monitoring and skilled compliance personnel. Political and policy maker focus on the topic in the UK, EU and within international bodies has intensified over the past year. For more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We are subject to substantial regulation and governmental oversight which could adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects’.

We have developed policies and procedures designed to detect and prevent the use of our banking network for money laundering and financial crime related activities, which are reviewed to ensure that all current requirements are fully reflected. The approach is also informed by intelligence assessment and risk assessment, including the recent UK Government National Risk Assessment of Money Laundering and Terrorist Financing.

The policies and procedures require the implementation and embedding within the business of effective controls and monitoring, which requires ongoing changes to systems, technology and operational activities. Comprehensive and risk based financial crime training at a bank wide and business unit level is a key element of this, with the FCA providing guidance on expectations within its Financial Crime Guide. Financial crime is continually evolving, and the expectation of regulators is increasing (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We are subject to substantial regulation and governmental oversight which could adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects’). This requires proactive and adaptable responses from us so that we are able to deter threats and criminality effectively. Even known threats can never be fully eliminated, and there will be instances where we may be used by other parties to engage in money laundering and other illegal or improper activities. In addition, we rely heavily on our staff to assist us by identifying such activities and reporting them, and our staff have varying degrees of experience in recognising criminal tactics and understanding the level of sophistication of criminal organisations. Where we outsource any of our customer due diligence, customer screening or anti financial crime operations, we remain responsible and accountable for full compliance and any breaches. If we are unable to apply the necessary scrutiny and oversight there remains a risk of regulatory breach and this could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

If we are unable to fully comply with applicable laws, regulations and expectations, our regulators and relevant law enforcement agencies have the ability and authority to pursue civil and criminal proceedings against us, to impose significant fines and other penalties on us, including requiring a complete review of our business systems,day-to-day supervision by external consultants, imposing restrictions on the conduct of our business and operations and ultimately the revocation of our banking licence, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. The reputational damage to our business and brand could be severe if we were found to have materially breached AML, anti-bribery and corruption or sanctions requirements. Our reputation could also suffer if we are unable to protect our customers or our business from being used by criminals for illegal or improper purposes.

In addition, while we review our relevant counterparties’ internal policies and procedures (for example, under our correspondent banking relationships) with respect to such matters, we, to a large degree, rely upon our relevant counterparties to maintain and properly apply their own appropriate anti-financial-crime procedures. Such measures, procedures and compliance may not be completely effective in preventing third parties from using our (and our relevant counterparties’) services as a conduit for money laundering (including illegal cash operations) without our (or our relevant counterparties’) knowledge. There are also risks that other third parties, such as suppliers, could be involved in financial crime. If we are associated with, or even accused of being associated with, financial crime (or a business involved in financial crime), then our reputation could suffer and/or we could become subject to civil or criminal proceedings that could result in penalties, sanctions and/or legal enforcement (including being added to ‘black lists’ that would prohibit certain parties from engaging in transactions with us), any one of which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

As described in the risk factor entitled ‘We are subject to substantial regulation and governmental oversight which could adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects’, there were a number of changes and updates to UK law in 2018 for financial crime. The divergence between the UK/EU and the US in regard to sanctions policy adds to the complexity in this area and poses potential risks. Constant monitoring of external laws and regulations is therefore a key area of focus to ensure internal policies, procedures and training are up to date with emerging requirements.

At an operational level,geo-political, economic and social changes can provide opportunities to financial criminals and alter the risks posed to banks. Effective intelligence and monitoring systems within strengthened public/private partnerships to share knowledge on emerging risks are required to help mitigate these risks. However, there can be no guarantee that any intelligence shared by public authorities or other financial institutions will be accurate or effective in helping us to combat financial crime, and if, as a result, we fail to combat financial crime effectively then this could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

238    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

Any failure to effectively improve or upgrade our information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely manner could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

Our businesses and our ability to remain competitive depends to a significant extent upon the functionality of our information technology systems (including Partenon, the global banking information technology platform utilised by the Santander UK group and Banco Santander SA), and on our ability to upgrade and expand the capacity of our information technology on a timely and cost-effective basis. The proper functioning of our financial control, risk management, credit analysis and reporting, accounting, customer service, financial crime, conduct and compliance and other information technology systems, as well as the communication networks between branches and main data processing centres, are critical to our businesses and our ability to compete. Investments and improvements in our information technology infrastructure are regularly required in order to remain competitive. We cannot be certain that in the future we will be able to maintain the level of capital expenditure necessary to support the improvement, expansion or upgrading of our information technology infrastructure as effectively as our competitors; this may result in a loss of any competitive advantages that our information technology systems provide. Any failure to effectively improve, expand or upgrade our information technology infrastructure and management information systems in a timely manner could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We may be exposed to unidentified or unanticipated risks despite our risk management policies, procedures and methods and to risk related to errors in our modelling

The management of risk is an integral part of our activities. We seek to monitor and manage our risk exposure through a variety of risk reporting systems. For a further description of our risk management framework see the ‘Risk review’ on pages 52 to 126. While we employ a broad and diversified set of risk monitoring and risk mitigation techniques, such techniques and strategies may not be fully effective in mitigating our risk exposure in all economic market environments or against all types of risk, including risks that we fail to identify or anticipate.

Some of our tools and metrics for managing risk are based upon our use of observed historical market behaviour. We apply statistical and other tools to these observations to arrive at quantifications of our risk exposures. These tools and metrics may fail to predict future risk exposures. These risk exposures could, for example, arise from factors we did not anticipate or correctly evaluate in our statistical models. This would limit our ability to manage our risks. Our losses thus could be significantly greater than the historical measures indicate. In addition, our quantified modelling does not take all risks into account. Our more qualitative approach to managing those risks could prove insufficient, exposing us to material, unanticipated losses. We could face adverse consequences as a result of decisions, which may lead to actions by management, based on models that include errors or are otherwise poorly developed, implemented or used, or as a result of the modelled outcome being misunderstood. If existing or potential customers or counterparties believe our risk management is inadequate, they could take their business elsewhere or seek to limit their transactions with us. This could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Competition with other financial institutions could adversely affect us

The markets for UK financial services are very competitive and we have seen strong competition from incumbent banks and large building societies. In addition, we face competition from a number of new entrants,non-banks and other providers. Management expects such competition to continue or intensify as a result of customer behaviour and trends, technological changes, competitor behaviour, new entrants (includingnon-traditional financial services providers such as large retail or technology companies or financial technology companies), new lending models and changes in regulation (including the recent introduction of Open Banking and changes arising from PSD2).

We consider our competitive position in our management actions as appropriate, such as pricing and product decisions. Increasing competition could mean that we increase our rates offered on deposits or lower the rates we charge on loans, which could also have a material adverse effect on our profitability, operations, financial condition and prospects. It may also negatively affect our operations, financial condition and prospects by, among other things, limiting our ability to increase our customer base and expand our operations and increasing competition for investment opportunities.

Our ability to maintain our competitive position depends, in part, on the success of new products and services we offer our customers and our ability to continue offering products and services from third parties, and we may not be able to manage various risks we face as we expand our range of products and services that could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

The success of our operations and our profitability depends, in part, on the success of new products and services we offer our customers. However, we cannot guarantee that our new products and services will be responsive to customer demands or that they will be successful once they are offered to our customers. In addition, our customers’ needs or desires may change over time, and such changes may render our products and services obsolete, outdated or unattractive, and we may not be able to develop new products that meet our customers’ changing needs.

Our success is also dependent on our ability to anticipate and leverage new and existing technologies that may have an impact on products and services in the banking industry. Technological changes may further intensify and complicate the competitive landscape and influence customer choices.

If we cannot respond in a timely fashion to the changing needs of our customers, we may lose customers, which could in turn materially and adversely impact our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Further, our customers may raise complaints and seek redress if they consider that they have suffered loss from our products and services; for example, as a result of any alleged misselling or incorrect application of the terms and conditions of a particular product. This could in turn subject us to risks of potential legal action by our customers, or to intervention by our regulators.

As we expand the range of our products and services, some of which may be at an early stage of development in the UK market, we will be exposed to known, new and potentially increasingly complex risks, including conduct risk, and development expenses. Our employees and risk management systems, as well as our experience and that of our partners, may not be sufficient or adequate to enable us to properly handle or manage such risks. In addition, the cost of developing products that are not launched is likely to affect our operating results.

Any or all of the above factors, individually or collectively, could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

LOGO

Santander UK plc239


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

If the level ofnon-performing loans increases or the credit quality of our loans deteriorates in the future, or if our loan loss reserves are insufficient to cover loan losses, this could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

Risks arising from changes in credit quality and the recoverability of loans and amounts due from counterparties are inherent in a wide range of our businesses.Non-performing or low credit quality loans have in the past, and could continue to, negatively impact our operations, financial condition and prospects.

In particular, the amount of our reportednon-performing loans may increase in the future as a result of growth in our total loan portfolio, including as a result of loan portfolios that we may acquire in the future (the credit quality of which may turn out to be worse than we had anticipated), or factors beyond our control, such as adverse changes in the credit quality of our borrowers and counterparties, a general deterioration in the UK or global economic conditions, the impact of political events, events affecting certain industries or events affecting financial markets and global economies.

We cannot be sure that we will be able to effectively control the level of impaired loans in, or the credit quality of, our total loan portfolio, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. Interest rates payable on a significant portion of our outstanding mortgage loan products fluctuate over time due to, among other factors, changes in the BoE Base Rate. As a result, borrowers with variable interest rate mortgage loans are exposed to increased monthly payments when the related mortgage interest rate adjusts upward. Similarly, borrowers of mortgage loans with fixed or introductory rates adjusting to variable rates after an initial period are exposed to the risk of increased monthly payments at the end of this period. This risk may be slightly greater following the BoE Base Rate increases in 2017 and 2018. Over the last few years both variable and fixed interest rates have been at historically low levels, which has benefited borrowers of new loans and those repaying existing variable rate loans regardless of special or introductory rates. Future increases in borrowers’ required monthly payments may result in higher delinquency rates and losses related tonon-performing loans in the future. Borrowers seeking to avoid these increased monthly payments by refinancing their mortgage loans may no longer be able to find available replacement loans at comparably low interest rates. These events, alone or in combination, may contribute to higher delinquency rates and losses for the Santander UK group, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Our current loan loss reserves may not be adequate to cover an increase in the amount ofnon-performing loans or any future deterioration in the overall credit quality of our total loan portfolio. Our loan loss reserves are based on our current assessment of various factors affecting the quality of our loan portfolio, including our borrowers’ financial condition, repayment abilities, the realisable value of any collateral, the prospects for support from any guarantor, government macroeconomic policies, interest rates and the legal and regulatory environment. As the global financial crisis demonstrated, many of these factors are beyond our control. As a result, there is no precise method for predicting loan and credit losses, and we cannot provide any assurance that our current or future loan loss reserves will be sufficient to cover actual losses.

If our assessment of and expectations concerning the above mentioned factors differ from actual developments we may need to increase our loan loss reserves, which may adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects. Additionally, in calculating our loan loss reserves, we employ qualitative tools and statistical models which may not be reliable in all circumstances and which are dependent upon data that may not be complete. If we are unable to control or reduce the level of ournon-performing or poor credit quality loans, this could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Our loan portfolio is subject to risk of prepayment, which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

Our loan portfolio is subject to prepayment risk resulting from the ability of a borrower or issuer to pay a debt obligation prior to maturity. Generally, in a low interest rate environment, prepayment activity increases, which reduces the weighted average lives of our earning assets and could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. As a result we could be required to amortise net premiums into income over a shorter period of time, thereby reducing the corresponding asset yield and net interest income and there is a risk that we are not able to accurately forecast amortisation schedules for these purposes which may affect our profitability. Prepayment risk also has a significant adverse impact on credit card and collateralised mortgage loans, since prepayments could shorten the weighted average life of these assets, which may result in a mismatch in our funding obligations and reinvestment at lower yields. The risk of prepayment and our ability to accurately forecast amortisation schedules is inherent to our commercial activity and an increase in prepayments or a failure to accurately forecast amortisation schedules could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

The value of the collateral, including real estate, securing our loans may not be sufficient, and we may be unable to realise the full value of the collateral securing our loan portfolio

The value of the collateral securing our loan portfolio may significantly fluctuate or decline due to factors beyond our control, including macroeconomic factors affecting the UK’s economy. Our residential mortgage loan portfolio is one of our principal assets, comprising 79% of our loan portfolio at 31 December 2018. As a result, we are highly exposed to developments in the residential property market in the UK.

House price growth has slowed since the UK EU Referendum, most noticeably in London, although UK house prices have generally continued to be supported by certain economic fundamentals including low mortgage rates (notwithstanding the recent BoE Base Rate increase to 0.75%) and low unemployment rates. Nevertheless, any increase in house prices may be limited given low levels of consumer confidence and low levels of real earnings growth. The depth of the previous house price declines as well as the continuing uncertainty as to the extent and sustainability of the UK economic recovery will mean that losses could be incurred on loans should they go into possession.

The value of the collateral securing our loan portfolio may also be adversely affected by force majeure events such as natural disasters like floods or landslides. Any force majeure event may cause widespread damage and could have an adverse impact on the economy of the affected region and may therefore impair the asset quality of our loan portfolio in that area.

We may also not have sufficientlyup-to-date information on the value of collateral, which may result in an inaccurate assessment for impairment losses of our loans secured by such collateral.

If any of the above were to occur, we may need to make additional provisions to cover actual impairment losses of our loans, which may materially and adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects.

240    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

If we are unable to manage the growth of our operations, this could have a material adverse impact on our profitability

We allocate management and planning resources to develop strategic plans for organic growth, and to identify possible acquisitions and disposals and areas for restructuring our businesses when necessary. From time to time, we evaluate acquisition, disposal, and partnership opportunities that we believe could offer additional value to our shareholders and are consistent with our business strategy. However, we may not be able to identify suitable acquisition or partnership candidates, and we may not be able to acquire promising targets or form partnerships on favourable terms, or at all. Furthermore, preparations for acquisitions that we do not complete can be disruptive. We base our assessment of potential acquisitions and partnerships on limited and potentially inexact information and on assumptions with respect to value, operations, profitability and other matters that may prove to be incorrect. Our ability to benefit from any such acquisitions and partnerships will depend in part on our successful integration of those businesses. Such integration entails significant risks such as challenges in retaining the customers and employees of the acquired businesses, unforeseen difficulties in integrating operations and systems and unexpected liabilities or contingencies relating to the acquired businesses, including legal claims and regulatory investigations. We can give no assurances that our expectations with regards to integration and synergies will materialise.

We cannot provide assurance that we will, in all cases, be able to manage our growth effectively or deliver our strategic growth decisions including our ability to:

–  Manage efficiently our operations and employees of expanding businesses

–  Maintain or grow our existing customer base

–  Formulate and execute our strategy

–  Fully due diligence and assess the value, strengths and weaknesses of investment or acquisition candidates

–  Finance strategic opportunities, investments or acquisitions

–  Fully integrate strategic investments, or newly-established entities or acquisitions, in line with our strategy

–  Align our current information technology systems adequately with those of an enlarged group

–  Apply our risk management policy effectively to an enlarged group

–  Manage a growing number of entities without over-committing management or losing key personnel.

Any failure to manage growth effectively, including any or all of the above challenges associated with our growth plans, could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. In addition, any acquisition, disposal or partnership could result in the loss of key employees and inconsistencies in standards, controls, procedures and policies. Moreover, the success of the acquisition or venture will at least in part be subject to a number of political, economic and other factors that are beyond our control. Any or all of these factors, individually or collectively, could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Goodwill impairments may be required in relation to businesses acquired from third parties

We have made business acquisitions from third parties in past years and may make further acquisitions in the future. It is possible that the goodwill which has been attributed, or may be attributed, to these businesses may have to be written-down if our valuation assumptions are required to be reassessed as a result of any deterioration in their underlying profitability, asset quality and other relevant matters. Impairment testing in respect of goodwill is performed annually, and more frequently if there are impairment indicators present, and comprises a comparison of the carrying amount of the cash-generating unit with its recoverable amount. Goodwill impairment does not however affect our regulatory capital. Whilst no impairment of goodwill was recognised in the current period and prior periods presented, there can be no assurances that we will not have to write down the value attributed to goodwill in the future, which could adversely affect our results and net assets.

We are responsible for contributing to compensation schemes in the UK in respect of banks and other authorised financial services firms that are unable to meet their obligations to customers

The UK’s Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS) is the UK’s compensation fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms. It may pay compensation if a firm is unable, or likely to be unable, to pay claims against it. This is usually because it has stopped trading or has been declared in default. The FSCS is funded by levies on firms authorised by the PRA or the FCA (i.e. participant firms), including members of the Santander UK group.

Following the default of a number of authorised financial services firms since 2008, the FSCS borrowed funds totalling approximately £18bn from HM Treasury to meet the compensation costs for customers of those firms. The substantial majority of the principal should be repaid from funds the FSCS levies from asset sales, surplus cash flow or other recoveries in relation to assets of the firms that defaulted. However, the FSCS estimates that the assets of these failed institutions are insufficient, and, to the extent that there remains a shortfall, the FSCS is recovering this shortfall by levying firms authorised by the PRA or the FCA in instalments. The first instalment was in scheme year 2013/14, and we made a capital contribution in each of 2013, 2014, 2015 and 2016. In the year ending 31 December 2017, our contribution was £23m. For the year ended 31 December 2018, we made a contribution of £5m to the interest cost of the levy, and, on our income statement, released £4m of provisions to reflect the reduced amount now expected to be charged for the remaining interest.

However, in the event that the FSCS raises further funds from participant firms or increases the levies to be paid by such firms or the frequency at which the levies are to be paid, the associated cost to us could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects. Since 2008, measures taken to protect the depositors of deposit-taking institutions involving the FSCS, such as the borrowing from HM Treasury mentioned above, have resulted in a significant increase in the levies made by the FSCS on the industry and such levies may continue to go up if similar measures are required to protect depositors of other institutions. In addition, following amendments to the preferred credit status of depositors that came into force on 31 December 2014, the FSCS stands in the place of depositors of a failing institution but has preferred status over an institution’s other creditors.

FSCS levies are collected by the FCA as part of a single payment by firms covering the FCA, the PRA, the FOS and the FSCS fees. It is possible that future policy of the FSCS and future levies on the firms authorised by the FCA or PRA may differ from those at present and that this could lead to a period of some uncertainty for members of the Santander UK group. The levies may also increase. In addition, it is possible that other jurisdictions where we operate could introduce or amend their similar compensation, contributory or reimbursement schemes. As a result of any such developments, we may incur additional costs and liabilities which may adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects.

LOGO

Santander UK plc241


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Changes in taxes and other assessments may adversely affect us

The tax and other assessment regimes to which our customers and we are subject are regularly reformed, or subject to proposed reforms. Such reforms include changes in the rate of assessments and, occasionally, enactment of temporary taxes, the proceeds of which may be earmarked for designated governmental purposes. Some of these changes may be specific to the banking/financial services sectors and therefore result in us incurring an additional tax burden when compared to other industry sectors. The effects of these changes and any other changes that result from enactment of additional tax reforms have not been, and cannot be, quantified and there can be no assurance that these reforms will not, once implemented, have an adverse effect upon our business. Furthermore, such changes may produce uncertainty in the financial system, increasing the cost of borrowing and contributing to the increase in ournon-performing credit portfolio.

The following paragraphs discuss five major reforms (the Bank Levy, Restriction of Tax Deductions for Compensation Payments, Corporation Tax Surcharge and two possible future changes in the taxation of banking groups in the EU) which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects, and the competitive position of UK banking groups, including us.

Bank Levy

HM Treasury introduced an annual UK bank levy (the Bank Levy) via legislation in the Finance Act 2011. The Bank Levy is imposed on (among other entities) UK banking groups and subsidiaries, and therefore applies to us. The amount of the Bank Levy is based on a bank’s total liabilities, excluding (among other things) Tier 1 capital, insured retail deposits and repos secured on sovereign debt. With effect from 1 April 2015, the Finance Act 2015 increased the rate (for short-term liabilities) to 0.21% (a reduced rate is applied to long-term equity and liabilities). Subsequently the Finance (No.2) Act 2015 (Finance No.2 Act), which was enacted on 18 November 2015, reduced the Bank Levy rate from 0.21% to 0.18% from 1 January 2016 with subsequent annual reductions to 0.1% from 1 January 2021.

Restriction of Tax Deductions for Compensation Payments

The Finance (No.2) Act implemented measures so that certain compensation expenditure incurred by banking companies (including ANTS and the Company) on or after 7 July 2015 is: (i) no longer deductible for corporation tax purposes; and (ii) subject to a deemed taxable receipt equivalent to 10% of such compensation expenditure.

Corporation Tax Surcharge

With effect from 1 January 2016, banks (as defined in the Corporation Tax Act 2010 and including the Company, ANTS and Cater Allen Limited) are subject to a surcharge at a rate of 8% on their taxable profits for corporation tax purposes (with certain reliefs added back and subject to annual allowance).

European Taxation

On 14 February 2013, the Commission published a proposal (the Commission Proposal) for a directive for a common system of financial transactions tax (FTT) in Belgium, Germany, Estonia, Greece, Spain, France, Italy, Austria, Portugal, Slovenia and Slovakia (the Participating Member States). However, Estonia has since stated that it will not participate.

The FTT may give rise to tax liabilities for Santander UK plc or Santander UK Group Holdings plc with respect to certain transactions (including concluding swap transactions and/or purchases or sales of securities (such as authorised investments)) if it is adopted based on the Commission’s Proposal.

Under the Commission’s proposal, the FTT could apply in certain circumstances to persons both within and outside of the Participating Member States. Whilst the UK is not a Participating Member State, the Commission’s proposal is broad and as such may impact transactions completed by financial institutions operating innon-Participating Member States.

Media reports have increasingly focused on how revenues raised by the EU FTT could constitute an independent revenue stream for the Participating Member States, potentially offsetting their contributions to the EU and/or providing a new income stream for the EU. This is seen as important in the context of the UK’s financial contributions ceasing in connection with its exit from the EU. Recent reports suggest the European Commission is intending to publish a revised legislative proposal with only share transactions being subject to the EU FTT. As such, the EU FTT appears likely to remain on the ECOFIN agenda for the foreseeable future.

Separately, the European Commission wrote to the Netherlands on 22 June 2018 to inform them that it is their view that the Netherlands domestic tax legislation, which gives tax deductions for coupons paid on conditionally convertible bonds issued by financial institutions, may benon-compliant with the EU’s State Aid regime as the Netherlands legislation only applies to financial institutions and thus gives preference to one sector over others.

Santander UK benefits from tax deductions on certain of its capital instruments under UK domestic law. The relevant UK law also restricts tax deductibility to instruments issued specifically by the regulated sector and thus could be subject to a similar EU challenge. This potential EU State Aid vulnerability has now been largely addressed by the Budget day announcement on the 29 October 2018 and accompanying draft legislation that will repeal the sector specific legislation and replace with new tax rules for hybrid capital instrument that can be issued by any sector. This new legislation should ensure that, subject to these instruments meeting certain specified conditions, any interest payable will be deductible. This should reduce this risk although there can be no guarantee that the EU will not successfully challenge the relevant UK law. Any removal of this tax deductibility might have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Changes in our pension liabilities and obligations could have a materially adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects

The majority of current employees are provided with pension benefits through defined contribution arrangements. Under these arrangements our legal obligation is limited to the cash contributions paid. We provide retirement benefits for many of our former and current employees in the UK through a number of defined benefit pension schemes established under trust. We are the principal employer under the majority of these schemes, but we have only limited control over the rate at which we pay into such schemes. Under the UK statutory funding requirements employers are usually required to contribute to the schemes at the rate they agree with the scheme trustees although, if they cannot agree, the rate can be set by the Pensions Regulator. The scheme trustees may, in the course of discussions about future valuations, seek higher employer contributions. The scheme trustees’ power in relation to the payment of pension contributions depends on the terms of the trust deed and rules governing the pension schemes, but, in some cases, the scheme trustees may have the unilateral right to set our relevant contribution.

The Pensions Regulator has the power to issue a financial support direction to companies within a group in respect of the liability of employers participating in the UK defined benefit pension schemes where that employer is a service company, or is otherwise ‘insufficiently resourced’ (as defined for the purposes of the relevant legislation). As some of the employers within the Santander UK group are service companies, if the Pensions Regulator determines that they have become insufficiently resourced and no suitable mitigating action is undertaken, other companies within the Santander UK group which are connected with or an associate of those employers are at risk of a financial support direction in respect of those employers’ liabilities to the defined benefit pension schemes in circumstances where the Pensions Regulator properly considers it reasonable to issue one. Such a financial support direction could require the companies to guarantee or provide security for the pension liabilities of those employers, or could require additional amounts to be paid into the relevant pension schemes in respect of them.

242    Santander UK plc


> Risk factors

The Pensions Regulator can also issue contribution notices if it is of the opinion that an employer has taken actions, or failed to take actions, deliberately designed to avoid meeting its pension promises or which are materially detrimental to the scheme’s ability to meet its pension promises. A contribution notice can be issued to any company or individual that is connected with or an associate of such employer in circumstances where the Pensions Regulator considers it reasonable to issue and multiple notices could be issued to connected companies or individuals for the full amount of the debt. The risk of a contribution notice being imposed may inhibit our freedom to restructure or to undertake certain corporate activities.

Should the value of assets to liabilities in respect of the defined benefit schemes operated by us record a deficit or an increased deficit (as appropriate), due to either a reduction in the value of the pension fund assets (depending on the performance of financial markets) and/or an increase in the scheme liabilities due to changes in legislation, mortality assumptions, discount rate assumptions, inflation, market variables such as exchange rates or equity prices, the expected rate of return on scheme assets, or other factors, or there is a change in the actual or perceived strength of the employer’s covenant, this could result in us having to make increased contributions to reduce or satisfy the deficits which would divert resources from use in other areas of our business and reduce our capital resources. While we can control a number of the above factors, there are some over which we have no or limited control. Although the trustees of the defined benefit pension schemes are obliged to consult with us before changing the pension schemes’ investment strategy, the trustees have the final say and ultimate responsibility for investment strategy rests with them.

Our principal defined pension scheme is the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme and its corporate trustee is Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme Trustees Limited (the Pension Scheme Trustee), a wholly-owned subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc. Investment decisions are delegated by the Pension Scheme Trustee to Santander (CF Trustee) Limited, a private limited company owned by the Santander (CF Trustee) Limited directors. The Santander (CF Trustee) Limited directors’ principal duty, within the investment powers delegated to them, is to act in the best interest of the members of the Santander (UK) Group Pension Scheme and not that of Santander UK Group Holdings plc. Any increase in our pension liabilities and obligations could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

The ongoing changes in the UK supervision and regulatory regime and particularly the implementation of the ICB’s recommendations may require us to make changes to our structure and business which could have an impact on our pension schemes or liabilities. (For a discussion of the ICB’s recommendations see ‘We are subject to substantial regulation and governmental oversight which could adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects’.)

We rely on recruiting, retaining and developing appropriate senior management and skilled personnel

Our continued success depends in part on the continued service of key members of our senior executive team and other key employees. The ability to continue to attract, train, motivate and retain highly qualified and talented professionals is a key element of our strategy. The successful implementation of our growth strategy and of a culture of Simple, Personal and Fair depends on the availability of skilled and appropriate management, both at our head office and in each of our business units. There is also an increasing demand for Santander to hire individuals with digital skills such as data scientist, engineering and designer skill sets in the future. Such individuals are very sought after by all organisations, not just the banking industry, and thus our ability to attract and hire this talent will determine how quickly we transform to a digital bank. If we or one of our business units or other functions fails to staff its operations appropriately, or loses one or more of its key senior executives or other key employees and fails to replace them in a satisfactory and timely manner, our operations, financial condition and prospects, including control and operational risks, may be adversely affected.

In addition, the financial services industry has and may continue to experience more stringent regulation of employee compensation, which could have an adverse effect on our ability to hire or retain the most qualified employees. If we fail or are unable to attract and appropriately train, motivate and retain qualified professionals, our operations, financial condition and prospects could be adversely affected.

Damage to our reputation could cause harm to our business prospects

Maintaining a positive reputation is critical to attracting and retaining customers, investors and employees and conducting business transactions with counterparties. Damage to the reputation of the Santander UK group or Banco Santander SA (as the majority shareholder in the Company), the reputation of affiliates operating under the ‘Santander’ brand or any of our other brands could therefore cause significant harm to our business and prospects. Harm to our reputation can arise directly or indirectly from numerous sources, including, among others, employee misconduct (including the possibility of employee fraud), litigation, regulatory interventions and enforcement action, failure to deliver minimum standards of service and quality, disruption to service due to a cyber-attack, wider IT failures, compliance failures, third party fraud, financial crime, breach of legal or regulatory requirements, unethical behaviour (including adopting inappropriate sales and trading practices), and the activities of customers, suppliers and counterparties. Further, negative publicity regarding us, whether true or not, may result in harm to our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Actions by the financial services industry generally or by certain members of, or individuals in, the industry can also affect our reputation. For example, the role played by financial services firms in the financial crisis has caused public perception of us and others in the financial services industry to decline.

We could suffer significant reputational harm if we fail to identify and manage potential conflicts of interest properly. The failure, or perceived failure, to adequately address conflicts of interest could affect the willingness of customers to deal with us, or give rise to litigation or regulatory enforcement actions against us. Therefore, there can be no assurance that conflicts of interest will not arise in the future that could cause material harm to our operations, financial condition and prospects.

Our financial statements are based in part on judgements and accounting estimates which, if inaccurate, could cause material misstatement of our future financial results and financial condition

The preparation of the Consolidated Financial Statements requires management to make judgements and accounting estimates that affect the reported amounts of assets and liabilities at the date of the financial statements and the reported amount of income and expenses during the reporting period. Management evaluates its judgements and accounting estimates, which are based on historical experience and on various other factors that are believed to be reasonable under the circumstances, on an ongoing basis. Actual amounts may differ from these accounting estimates under different assumptions or conditions. Revisions to accounting estimates are recognised in the period in which the estimate is revised and in any future periods affected.

As explained in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, no significant judgements have been made in the process of applying our accounting policies, other than those involving estimations about credit impairment losses, conduct remediation and pensions. Those accounting estimates, as well as the judgements inherent within them, are considered important to the portrayal of the financial results and financial condition because: (i) they are highly susceptible to change from period to period as assumptions are made to calculate the estimates; and (ii) any significant difference between the estimated amounts and actual amounts could have a material impact on the future financial results and financial condition.

LOGO

Santander UK plc243


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Disclosure controls and procedures over financial reporting may not prevent or detect all errors or acts of fraud

Disclosure controls and procedures over financial reporting are designed to provide reasonable assurance that information required to be disclosed by us within our financial statements or under other accounting, regulatory, supervisory or listing authority requirements, including in reports filed or submitted under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the Exchange Act), is accumulated and communicated to management, and recorded, processed, summarised and reported within the time periods specified in the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s rules and forms and other applicable accounting, regulatory, supervisory or listing authority requirements. Our control framework is based on the Committee of Sponsoring Organisations of the Treadway Commission 2013 internal control – integrated framework which is designed to recognise the many changes in business and operating environments since the issuance of the original framework and is intended to broaden and enhance the application of controls over financial reporting.

However, there are inherent limitations to the effectiveness of any system of disclosure controls and procedures, including the possibility of human error and the circumvention or overriding of the controls and procedures. Accordingly, even effective disclosure controls and procedures can only provide reasonable assurance of achieving their control objectives.

Consequently, our business is exposed to risk from potentialnon-compliance with policies, employee misconduct or negligence and fraud, which could result in regulatory sanctions, regulatory and law enforcement investigations, civil claims and serious reputational or financial harm. In recent years, a number of multinational financial institutions have suffered material losses due to the actions of ‘rogue traders’ or other employees. It is not always possible to deter or detect employee misconduct in a timely manner and the precautions we take to prevent and detect this activity may not always be effective. As a result of the inherent limitations in the control system, misstatements due to error or fraud may occur and not be detected.

Changes in accounting standards could impact reported earnings

The accounting standard setters and other regulatory bodies periodically change the financial accounting and reporting standards that govern the preparation of our consolidated financial statements. These changes can materially impact how we record and report our financial condition and operating results. In some cases, we could be required to apply a new or revised standard retroactively, resulting in the restatement of prior period financial statements. For further information about future accounting developments, see Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

We rely on third parties and affiliates for important infrastructure support, products and services

TPPs and certain affiliates provide key components of our business infrastructure such as loan and deposit servicing systems, back office and business process support, information technology production and support, internet connections and network access. Relying on these TPPs and affiliates is a source of operational and regulatory risk to us, including with respect to security breaches affecting such parties. We are also subject to risk with respect to security breaches affecting our TPPs and affiliates, and other parties that interact with these parties. As our interconnectivity with these third parties and affiliates increases, including through the use of cloud based services, we increasingly face the risk of operational failure with respect to their systems. We may be required to take steps to protect the integrity of our operational systems, thereby increasing our operational costs and potentially decreasing customer satisfaction. In addition, any problems caused by these third parties or affiliates, including as a result of them not providing us their services for any reason, or performing their services poorly, could adversely affect our ability to deliver products and services to customers and otherwise conduct our business, which could lead to reputational damage and regulatory investigations and intervention. Replacing these third party vendors or affiliates could also entail significant delays and expense. Further, the operational and regulatory risk we face as a result of these arrangements may be increased to the extent that we restructure such arrangements. Any restructuring could involve significant expense to us and entail significant delivery and execution risk which could have a material adverse effect on our operations, financial condition and prospects.

We are part of a group and we may engage in transactions with our subsidiaries or affiliates

We and our subsidiaries and affiliates have entered into a number of services agreements pursuant to which we render services, such as administrative, accounting, finance, treasury, legal and other services. Also, we rely upon certain outsourced services (including information technology support, maintenance, and consultancy services) provided by certain other members of the Banco Santander group (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We rely on third parties and affiliates for important infrastructure support, products and services’). In addition, we are utilising a ring-fencing transfer scheme and other agreements with our subsidiaries and affiliates to implement the ring-fencing requirements of the Banking Reform Act (for more information, see the risk factor entitled ‘We are subject to substantial regulation and governmental oversight which could adversely affect our operations, financial condition and prospects’). The foregoing arrangements may be considered by some not to be on an arms-length basis.

English law applicable to public companies and financial groups and institutions, as well as our articles of association, provide for several procedures designed to ensure that the transactions entered into, with or among our financial subsidiaries, do not deviate from prevailing market conditions for those types of transactions. We are likely to continue to engage in transactions with our subsidiaries or affiliates. Future conflicts of interests between us and any of our subsidiaries or affiliates, or between our subsidiaries and affiliates, may arise, which conflicts are not required to be and may not be resolved in our favour.

Different disclosure and accounting principles between the UK and the US may provide different or less information about us than you expected

There may be less publicly available information about us than is regularly published about companies in the US. Issuers of securities in the UK are required to make public disclosures that are different from, and that may be reported under presentations that are not consistent with, disclosures required in countries with a relatively more developed capital market, including the US. While we are subject to the periodic reporting requirements of the Exchange Act, we are not subject to the same disclosure requirements in the US as a domestic US registrant under the Exchange Act, including the requirements to prepare and issue quarterly reports, or the proxy rules applicable to domestic US registrants under Section 14 of the Exchange Act or the insider reporting and short-swing profit rules under Section 16 of the Exchange Act. Accordingly, the information about us available will not be the same as the information available to holders of securities of a US company and may be reported in a manner that is not familiar.

Risks concerning enforcement of judgements made in the US

The Company is a public limited company registered in England and Wales. Most of the Company’s directors and officers named herein are residents of the UK, and there is no assurance that any director of the Company will live in the US at any given time in the future. As a result, it may not be possible to serve process on such persons in the US or to enforce judgements obtained in US courts against them or us based on the civil liability provisions of the US federal securities laws or other laws of the US or any state thereof.

244    Santander UK plc


> Articles of Association

Articles of Association

The following is a summary of the Articles of Association (the Articles) of the Company.

Santander UK plc is a public limited company incorporated and registered in England and Wales under the Companies Act 2006, with registered number 2294747. The Articles specifically state and limit the objects of the Company which are therefore restricted.

A Director shall not vote on, or be counted in the quorum in relation to, any resolution of the Directors in respect of any contract in which he or she has an interest, except if no conflict of interest could reasonably be expected to arise from that interest, or any resolution of the Directors concerning his or her own appointment, or the settlement or variation of the terms or the termination of his or her appointment. Directors are entitled to such remuneration as the directors determine for their services to the Company as directors and for any other service which they undertake for the Company. Directors may delegate to a person or committee the determination of any fee, remuneration or other benefit which may be paid or provided to any Director. No Director is required to retire by reason of his or her age, nor do any special formalities apply to the appointment orre-election of any Director who is over any age limit. No shareholding qualification for Directors is required.

The Company may issue shares with such rights or restrictions as may be determined by ordinary resolution or, if no such resolution has been passed or so far as the resolution does not make specific provision, as the Directors may decide. The Company may by ordinary resolution declare dividends, and the Directors may decide to declare or pay interim dividends. No dividend may be declared or paid unless it is in accordance with shareholders’ respective rights. If dividends are unclaimed for twelve years, the right to the dividend ceases. All dividends or other sums which are payable in respect of shares, and unclaimed after having been declared or become payable, may be invested or otherwise made use of by the Directors for the benefit of the Company until claimed.

Preference shares entitle the holder to receive a preferential dividend payment at a fixed or variable rate, such dividend to be payable on a date determined by the Board prior to the allotment of the shares. The Board will also determine whether these dividend rights are cumulative ornon-cumulative. The holders of any series of preference shares will only be entitled to receive notice of and to attend any general meeting of the Company if the preference dividend on the preference shares of such series has not, at the date of the notice of the general meeting, been paid in full in respect of such dividend periods as the Board may prior to allotment determine, in which case the holders of the preference shares will be entitled to speak and/or vote upon any resolution proposed; or, if a resolution is proposed at the general meeting for, or in relation to, the winding up of the Company, or varying, altering or abrogating any of the rights, privileges, limitations or restrictions attached to the preference shares of such series, in which case the holders of the preference shares of such series will be entitled to speak and/or vote only upon such resolution; or in such other circumstances, and upon and subject to such terms, as the Board may determine prior to allotment. Unless the Board determines, prior to allotment, that the series of preference shares shall benon-redeemable, each series shall be redeemable at the option of the Company on any date as the Board may determine prior to the date of allotment. On redemption the Company shall pay the amount due. The formula for calculation of any relevant redemption premium is set out in the Articles of Association.

On a distribution of assets on winding up of the Company or return of capital (other than on a redemption or purchase by the Company of any of its share capital), members holding preference shares shall in respect thereof be entitled to receive, out of the surplus assets remaining after payment of the Company’s liabilities, an amount equal to the amount paid up or credited as paid up on the preference shares together with such premium (if any) as may be determined by the Board prior to allotment thereof (and so that the Board may determine that such premium is payable only in specified circumstances).

Ordinary shares are transferable. Holders of ordinary shares are entitled to receive notice of and to attend any general meeting of the Company. Subject to any special terms as to voting upon which any shares may be issued or may for the time being be held, or any suspension or any abrogation of special rights, as set out in the Articles of Association, on a show of hands every member who is present in person at a general meeting of the Company shall have one vote and every proxy present who has been duly appointed by a member shall have one vote. On a poll every member who is present in person or by proxy shall have one vote for every share of which he or she is the holder.

Subject to the prior rights of holders of preference shares, the Company pays dividends on its ordinary shares only out of its distributable profits and not out of share capital. Dividends are determined by the Board.

The Company’s Articles of Association authorise it to issue redeemable shares, but the Company’s ordinary shares are not redeemable. Where the shares are partly paid, the Board may make further calls upon the holders in respect of any sum whether in respect of nominal value or premium that is unpaid on their shares. There are no provisions discriminating against any existing or prospective shareholder as a result of such shareholder owning a substantial number of shares of any class. Subject to the provisions of the UK Companies Act 2006, all or any of the rights attached to any class of shares (whether or not the Company is being wound up) may be varied with the consent in writing of the holders of not less than three-quarters in nominal value of the issued shares of that class or with the sanction of a special resolution passed at a separate general meeting of the holders of those shares. Additional quorum and voting requirements apply to such meeting.

General meetings shall be called by at least 14 clear days’ notice (that is, excluding the day of the general meeting and the day on which the notice is given). A general meeting may be called by shorter notice if it is so agreed, in the case of an annual general meeting, by all the shareholders having a right to attend and vote, or in other cases, by a majority in number of the shareholders having a right to attend and vote, being a majority together holding not less than 95% in nominal value of the shares giving the right. The notice shall specify the date, time and place of the meeting and the general nature of the business to be transacted.

There are no restrictions on the rights to own securities for either resident ornon-resident shareholders, other than those to which they may be subject as a result of laws and regulations in their home jurisdiction.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 245253


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Disclosure pursuant to Section 219 of the Iran Threat

Reduction and Syria Human Rights Act

Pursuant to Section 219 of the Iran Threat Reduction and Syria Human Rights Act of 2012, which added Section 13(r) to the Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (the Exchange Act)“Exchange Act”), an issuer is required to disclose in its annual or quarterly reports, as applicable, whether it or any of its affiliates knowingly engaged in certain activities, transactions or dealings relating to Iran or with individuals or entities designated pursuant to certain Executive Orders. Disclosure is generally required even where the activities, transactions or dealings were conducted in compliance with applicable law.

The following activities are disclosed in response to Section 13(r) with respect to the CompanyGroup and its affiliates within the Banco Santander group:group.

(a) Santander UK holds accounts for two savings accountscustomers, with the first customer holding one GBP Savings Account and one current account for two customers.GBP Current Account, and the second customer holding one GBP Savings Account. Both of the customers, who are resident in the UK, are currently designated by the US under the Specially Designated Global Terrorist (SDGT) sanctions program.programme. Revenues and profits generated by Santander UK on these accounts in the year ended 31 December 20182019 were negligible relative to the overall profits of Santander UK.

(b) During the period covered by this annual report, Santander UK held one savings account with a balance of £1.24, and one current account with a balance of £1,884.53 for another customer resident in the UK who is currently designated by the US under the SDGT sanctions program. The customer relationshippre-dates the designations of the customer under these sanctions. The United Nations and European Union removed this customer from their equivalent sanctions lists in 2008. Santander UK determined to put a block on these accounts, and the accounts were subsequently closed on 14 January 2019.2019, as they were outside of risk appetite. Revenues and profits generated by Santander UK on these accounts in the year ended 31 December 20182019 were negligible relative to the overall profits of Santander UK.

(c) Santander UK holds two frozen current accounts for two UK nationals who are designated by the US under the SDGT sanctions programme. The accounts held by each customer have been frozen since their designation and have remained frozen through 2018.throughout 2019. These accounts are frozen in order to comply with Articles 2, 3 and 7 of Council Regulation (EC) No 881/2002, imposing certain specific restrictive measures directed against certain persons and entities associated with theAl-Qaeda network, by virtue of Commission Implementing Regulation (EU) 2015/1815. The accounts are in arrears (£1,844.73 in debit combined) and are currently being managed by Santander UK Collections & Recoveries department. No revenues or profits were generated by Santander UK on these accounts in the year ended 31 December 2018.2019.

(d) The Banco Santander group also has certain legacy performance guarantees for the benefit of Bank Sepah and Bank Mellat(stand-by letters of credit to guarantee the obligations – either under tender documents or under contracting agreements – of contractors who participated in public bids in Iran) that were in place prior to 27 April 27, 2007.

In the aggregate, all of the transactions described above resulted in gross revenues and net profits in the year ended 31 December 2018 that were negligible relative to the overall revenues and profits of the Banco Santander group. The Banco Santander group has undertaken significant steps to withdraw from the Iranian market such as closing its representative office in Iran and ceasing all banking activities therein, including correspondent relationships, deposit taking from Iranian entities and issuing export letters of credit, except for the legacy transactions described above. The Banco Santander group is not contractually permitted to cancel these arrangements without either: (i) paying the guaranteed amount (in the case of the performance guarantees);, or (ii) forfeiting the outstanding amounts due to it (in the case of the export credits). As such, the Banco Santander group intends to continue to provide the guarantees and hold these assets in accordance with company policy and applicable laws.

In the aggregate, all of the transactions described above resulted in gross revenues and net profits which were negligible relative to the overall revenues and profits of Santander UK and the Banco Santander group in the year ended 31 December 2019.

 

246254 Santander UK plc


 > New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) Corporate
Strategic ReportGovernance – differences in UK and NYSE corporate governance practiceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

 

New York Stock Exchange (NYSE) Corporate Governance – differences in UK and NYSE corporate governance practice

The Company issues notes in the US from time to time pursuant to a shelf registration statement filed with the SEC. As these notes are listed on the NYSE, the Company is required to comply with NYSE corporate governance standards. Under the NYSE corporate governance standards, the Company must disclose any significant ways in which its corporate governance practices differ from those followed by US companies under the NYSE corporate governance standards. We believe the following to be the significant differences between our current corporate governance practices and those applicable to US companies under the NYSE corporate governance standards.

Under the NYSE corporate governance standards, independent directors must comprise a majority of the Board. As at 31 December 2018,2019, our Board was comprised of a Chair (who is also aNon-Executive Director), three Executive Directors and ten otherNon-Executive Directors. The Chair, Shriti Vadera, and six of the otherNon-Executive Directors Julie Chakraverty,(Garrett Curran, Annemarie Durbin, Ed Giera, Chris Jones, Genevieve Shore and Scott Wheway,Wheway) were independent as defined in the NYSE corporate governance standards. The other fourNon-Executive Directors were not independent according to NYSE corporate governance standards as they are representatives of the ultimate parent company, Banco Santander SA. Directors as at 31 December 2018 include Juan Inciarte, who resigned on 31 December 2018, see the ‘Board and Committee membership, tenure, attendance and remuneration’ section. Following his resignation, there will be nine otherNon-Executive Directors in addition to the Chair and threeNon-Executive Directors who are not independent according to NYSE corporate governance standards.

The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies have a nominating or corporate governance committee composed entirely of independent directors and with a written charter addressing certain corporate governance matters. Applicable UK rules do not require companies without equity shares listed on the London Stock Exchange, such as the Company, to have a nominating committee. However, the Company has a Board Nomination Committee, which leads the process for Board appointments. This Committee has written Terms of Reference setting out its role to identify and nominate candidates for Board and Board Committee appointments. As at 31 December 2018,2019, the following Directors made up the Board Nomination Committee: Shriti Vadera (Chair), Ana Botín and Scott Wheway. Of these Directors, Shriti Vadera and Scott Wheway were independent according to NYSE corporate governance standards as at 31 December 2018.2019. On 1 January 2020, Genevieve Shore joined the Board Nomination Committee as an independent Non-Executive Director.

In addition, the Board is responsible for monitoring the effectiveness of the Company’s governance practices and making changes as needed to ensure the alignment of the Company’s governance system with current best practices. The Board monitors and manages potential conflicts of interest of management, Board members, shareholders, external advisors and other service providers, including misuse of corporate assets and abuse in related party transactions.

The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies have a compensation committee composed entirely of independent directors and with a written charter addressing certain corporate governance matters. Under its written Terms of Reference, the Company’s Board Remuneration Committee is primarily responsible for overseeing and supervising Santander UK’s policies and frameworks covering remuneration and reward. As at 31 December 2018,2019, the Board Remuneration Committee was made up of four independentNon-Executive Directors according to NYSE corporate governance standards (Annemarie Durbin (Chair), Chris Jones, Genevieve Shore and Scott Wheway).

The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies have an audit committee that satisfies the requirements of Rule10A-3 under the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934, as amended (Rule10A-3), with a written charter addressing certain corporate governance matters, and whose members are all independent as defined in Rule10A-3. As a wholly-owned subsidiary of a parent that satisfies the requirements of Rule10A-3(c)(2), the Company is exempt from the requirements of Rule10A-3. However, the Company does have a Board Audit Committee. As at 31 December 2018,2019, the Board Audit Committee was made up of fourNon-Executive Directors: Chris Jones (Chair), Julie Chakraverty,Garrett Curran, Ed Giera and Genevieve Shore. All four members were independent in 20182019 as defined in Rule10A-3.

The scope of the Board Audit Committee’s Terms of Reference as well as the duties and responsibilities of such committee are more limited than that required of audit committees under the NYSE corporate governance standards. For example, the Board Audit Committee does not provide an audit committee report as required by the NYSE corporate governance standards to be included in the Company’s annual proxy statement.

The NYSE corporate governance standards require that listed US companies adopt and disclose corporate governance guidelines, including with respect to the qualification, training and evaluation of their Directors. The NYSE corporate governance standards also require that the Board conducts a self-evaluation at least annually to determine whether it and its committees are functioning effectively. The Board has undertaken regular reviews of Board effectiveness primarily through an internal process led by the Chair. The Board undertook an external review of Board effectiveness in 2016 and agreedan internal review of Board effectiveness in 2018, agreeing on a plan for continuous improvement. In 2019, the Board considered feedback gained from the 2018 we reviewedevaluations, which concluded that the progress madeperformance of the Board, its Committees, the Chair and each of the Directors continued to be effective. The areas identified for greater focus in 2019 included business performance, efficiency, in-depth strategic consideration of disruptions/digital on implementing the recommendations from 2016’s extensive external evaluation of Board effectivenessbusiness strategy, customers, people and carried out an internal assessment of effectiveness.wider management with senior management.

A CEO of a US company listed on the NYSE must annually certify that he or she is not aware of any violation by the company of NYSE corporate government standards. In accordance with NYSE corporate governance standards applicable to foreign private issuers, our CEO is not required to provide the NYSE with such an annual compliance certification.

In addition, as a wholly-owned subsidiary of an NYSE-listed company, the Company is exempt from two NYSE listing standards otherwise applicable to foreign companies listed on the NYSE as well as US companies listed on the NYSE. The first requires the CEO of any NYSE-listed foreign company to notify promptly the NYSE in writing after any executive of the issuer becomes aware of any materialnon-compliance with any applicable NYSE corporate governance standards. The second requires NYSE-listed foreign companies to submit executed written affirmations annually to the NYSE.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 247255


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Other information

Designated agent

The designated agent for service of process on Santander UK in the United States is CT Corporation System, 111 Eighth Avenue, New York, New York.

Trustee/paying agent

The names and addresses of the Trustee/Paying Agentpaying agent for each class of security registered with the US Securities and Exchange Commission are set out below:

 

Senior: Wells Fargo Bank, National Association, 150 East 42nd Street, 40th Floor, New York, New York 10017, United States

With respect to certain earlier outstanding senior notes: The Bank of New York Mellon, 240 Greenwich Street, Floor 7E, New York 10286, United States (US80283LAK98, US80283LAL71, US80283LAH69, US80283LAN38, US80283LAJ26)

With respect to 7.95% Term Subordinated Securities due October 26, 2029 (US002920AC09): Trustee: The Bank of New York Mellon, One Canada Square, London, E14 5AL and Paying Agent: Citibank, N.A. 13th Floor, Citigroup Centre, Canada Square, London E14 5LB

Documents on display

The Company is subject to the information requirements of the US Securities Exchange Act of 1934. In accordance with these requirements, the Company files its Annual Report and other related documents with the US Securities and Exchange Commission. These documents may be inspected by US investors at the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s public reference rooms, which are located at 100 F Street NE, Washington, DC 20549. Information on the operation of the public reference rooms can be obtained by calling the US Securities and Exchange Commission on+1-202-551-8090 or by looking at the US Securities and Exchange Commission’s website. The US Securities and Exchange Commission maintains an internet site that contains reports, proxy and information statements, and other information regarding issuers that file electronically with it. This is accessible at www.sec.gov.

None of the websites referred to in this Annual Report on Form20-F for the year ended 31 December 20182019 (the Form20-F), including where a link is provided, nor any of the information contained on such websites is incorporated by reference in the Form20-F.

Legal proceedings

We are party to various legal proceedings in the ordinary course of business. See Notes 3027 and 3229 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Material contracts

We are party to various contracts in the ordinary course of business. For the two years ended 31 December 2018, there have beenThere are no material contracts entered into outside the ordinary course of business.business which are to be performed (or partly-performed) on or after the date of this report.

Audit fees

See Note 7 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Accounting developments under IFRS

See Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Share capital

Details of the Company’s share capital are set out in Note 3330 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

Major shareholders

At 31 December 2018,2019, the Company was a subsidiary of Santander UK Group Holdings plc. On 12 November 2004, Banco Santander SA acquired the then entire issued ordinary share capital of 1,485,893,636 ordinary shares of 10 pence each. On 12 October 2008, a further 10 billion ordinary shares of 10 pence each were issued to Banco Santander SA and an additional 12,631,375,230 ordinary shares of 10 pence each were issued to Banco Santander SA on 9 January 2009. On 3 August 2010, 6,934,500,000 ordinary shares of 10 pence each were issued to Santusa Holding SL. With effect from 10 January 2014, Santander UK Group Holdings Limited, a subsidiary of Banco Santander SA and Santusa Holding SL, became the beneficial owner of 31,051,768,866 of 10 pence each, being the entire issued ordinary share capital of the Company, by virtue of a share exchange agreement between Santander UK Group Holdings Limited, Banco Santander SA and Santusa Holding SL. Santander UK Group Holdings Ltd became the legal owner of the entire issued ordinary share capital of the Company on 1 April 2014 and on 25 March 2015 became a public limited company and changed its name from Santander UK Group Holdings Ltd to Santander UK Group Holdings plc.

Exchange controls

There are no UK laws, decrees or regulations that restrict our export or import of capital, including the availability of cash and cash equivalents for use by us, or that affect the remittance of dividends or other shareholder payments tonon-UK holders of Company shares, except as outlined in the section on Taxation for US Investors below.

 

248256 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Additional balance

sheet analysis

 

Additional balance sheet analysis

RECONCILIATION TO CLASSIFICATIONS IN THE CONSOLIDATED BALANCE SHEET

InExcept where noted, in this section we summarise our assets and liabilities by their nature, rather than by how we classify them in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. These two presentations can be reconciled as follows, including cross references to the Notes to the Consolidated Financial Statements:

 

  2018  Note   Securities
£m
   

Loans and
advances

to banks

£m

   

Loans and
advances to
customers

£m

   

Derivatives

£m

   Other
£m
   Balance 
sheet total 
£m 
 

 

Assets

              

Cash and balances at central banks

                     19,747    19,747  

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

                 

– Trading assets

   11                        –  

– Derivative financial instruments

   12                5,259        5,259  

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   13    3,251    1,458    908            5,617  

Financial assets at amortised cost:

              

– Loans and advances to customers(1)

   14            201,289            201,289  

– Loans and advances to banks(1)

         2,799                2,799  

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

   17        3,254    17,873            21,127  

– Other financial assets at amortised cost(2)

   18    7,229                    7,229  

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(2)

   19    13,229        73            13,302  

Financial investments(2)

   20                

Interests in other entities

   21                    88    88  

Property, plant and equipment

                     1,832    1,832  

Retirement benefit assets

   31                    842    842  

Tax, intangibles and other assets

                        4,241    4,241  
         23,709    7,511    220,143    5,259    26,750    283,372  
              
           

Deposits by
banks

£m

   Deposits by
customers
£m
   Derivatives
£m
   Other
£m
   Balance 
sheet total 
£m 
 

Liabilities

              
Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:              

– Trading liabilities

   23                      –  

– Derivative financial instruments

   12              1,369        1,369  

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   24          5,296        990    6,286  

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

              

– Deposits by customers

   25          178,090            178,090  

– Deposits by banks(1)

   26      17,221                17,221  

– Repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

   27      1,535    9,375            10,910  

– Debt securities in issue

   28                  46,692    46,692  

– Subordinated liabilities

   29                  3,601    3,601  

Retirement benefit obligations

   31                  114    114  

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

                         3,180    3,180  
              18,756    192,761    1,369    54,577    267,463  

(1)

From 1 January 2018, thenon-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements that are held at amortised cost are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives arere-presented accordingly.

(2)

On adoption of IFRS 9, the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item was split between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income’. This approach aligns the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position.

LOGO

               Loans and
advances to
   Loans and
    advances to
       Balance sheet 
           Securities   banks   customers               Other           total 
  2019  Note   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Assets

            

Cash and balances at central banks

                 21,180    21,180 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

            

– Derivative financial instruments

   11                3,316    3,316 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   12    294        92        386 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

            

– Loans and advances to customers

   13            207,287        207,287 

– Loans and advances to banks

         1,855            1,855 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

   16        2,161    21,475        23,636 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

   17    7,056                7,056 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income:

   18    9,691        56        9,747 

Interests in other entities

   19                117    117 

Property, plant and equipment

                 1,967    1,967 

Retirement benefit assets

   28                669    669 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

                    4,486    4,486 
         17,041    4,016    228,910    31,735    281,702 
            
           

Deposits by
banks

£m

   

Deposits by
customers

£m

   

Other

£m

   

Balance sheet
total

£m

 

Liabilities

            

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

            

– Derivative financial instruments

   11              1,448    1,448 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   21          609    1,104    1,713 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

            

– Deposits by customers

   22          181,883        181,883 

– Deposits by banks

   23      14,353            14,353 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading

   24      880    17,406        18,286 

– Debt securities in issue

   25              41,129    41,129 

– Subordinated liabilities

   26              3,528    3,528 

Retirement benefit obligations

   28              280    280 

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

                     3,065    3,065 
              15,233    199,898    50,554    265,685 

 

Santander UK plc 249257


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 

  2017    Note     Securities
£m
     Loans and
advances
to banks
£m
     Loans and
advances to
customers
£m
     Derivatives
£m
     Other
£m
     Balance 
sheet total 
£m 
 

 

Assets

                            

Cash and balances at central banks

                                 32,771      32,771  

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

                            

– Trading assets

     11      14,818      6,897      8,840                  30,555  

– Derivative financial instruments

     12                        19,942            19,942  

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

     13      547            1,549                  2,096  

Financial assets at amortised cost:

                            

– Loans and advances to customers(1)

     14                  199,340                  199,340  

– Loans and advances to banks(1)

               3,463                        3,463  

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     17            2,464      150                  2,614  

– Other financial assets at amortised cost(2)

     18                         
Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income(2)     19                         

Financial investments(2)

     20      15,431            2,180                  17,611  

Interests in other entities

     21                              73      73  

Property, plant and equipment

                                 1,598      1,598  

Retirement benefit assets

     31                              449      449  

Tax, intangibles and other assets

                                    4,253      4,253  
             30,796      12,824      212,059      19,942      39,144      314,765  
                            
                 

Deposits by
banks

£m

     Deposits by
customers
£m
     Derivatives
£m
     Other
£m
     Balance 
sheet total 
£m 
 

 

Liabilities

                            

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

                            

– Trading liabilities

     23          1,885      25,530            3,694      31,109  

– Derivative financial instruments

     12                      17,613            17,613  

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

     24               ��680            1,635      2,315  

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

                            

– Deposits by customers

     25                183,648                  183,648  

– Deposits by banks(1)

     26          12,708                        12,708  

– Repurchase agreements – non trading(1)

     27          1,076                        1,076  

– Debt securities in issue

     28                            42,633      42,633  

– Subordinated liabilities

     29                            3,793      3,793  

Retirement benefit obligations

     31                            286      286  

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

                                     3,379      3,379  
                    15,669      209,858      17,613      55,420      298,560  

(1)

From 1 January 2018,non-trading repurchase agreements andnon-trading reverse repurchase agreements are now presented as separate lines in the balance sheet, as described in Note 1. Comparatives arere-presented accordingly.

(2)

On adoption of IFRS 9, the ‘financial investments’ balance sheet line item was split between ‘other financial assets at amortised cost’ and ‘financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income’. This approach aligns the balance sheet line items to the IFRS 9 accounting classifications and provides a clearer understanding of our financial position.

               Securities       Loans and
advances to
banks
   Loans and advances
to customers
                   Other   Balance
            sheet total
 
  2018  Note   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Assets

            

Cash and balances at central banks

                 19,747    19,747 

Financial assets at fair value through profit or loss:

            

– Derivative financial instruments

   11                5,259    5,259 

– Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss

   12    3,251    1,458    908        5,617 

Financial assets at amortised cost:

            

– Loans and advances to customers

   13            201,289        201,289 

– Loans and advances to banks

         2,799            2,799 

– Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

   16        3,254    17,873        21,127 

– Other financial assets at amortised cost

   17    7,229                7,229 

Financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income

   18    13,229        73        13,302 

Interests in other entities

   19                88    88 

Property, plant and equipment

                 1,832    1,832 

Retirement benefit assets

   28                842    842 

Tax, intangibles and other assets

                    4,241    4,241 
         23,709    7,511    220,143    32,009    283,372 

        

            
           

Deposits by
banks

£m

   

Deposits by
customers

£m

   

Other

£m

   

Balance
sheet total

£m

 

Liabilities

            

Financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss:

            

– Derivative financial instruments

   11              1,369    1,369 

– Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss

   21          5,296    990    6,286 

Financial liabilities at amortised cost:

            

– Deposits by customers

   22          178,090        178,090 

– Deposits by banks

   23      17,221            17,221 

– Repurchase agreements – non trading

   24      1,535    9,375        10,910 

– Debt securities in issue

   25              46,692    46,692 

– Subordinated liabilities

   26              3,601    3,601 

Retirement benefit obligations

   28              114    114 

Tax, other liabilities and provisions

                     3,180    3,180 
              18,756    192,761    55,946    267,463 

 

250258 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Additional balance

sheet analysis

 

SECURITIES

Securities are a small proportion of our total assets, held mainly within other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, other financial assets at amortised cost or financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income.

Analysis by type of issuer

The following table sets out our securities at 31 December 2019, 2018 2017 and 2016.2017. We hold these securities for liquidity purposes. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure, as described in Note 43 to the Consolidated Financial Statements, we also held these securities for trading purposes.

For more information, see ‘Country risk exposures’ in the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

 

  2019   2018   2017 
    2018
£m
                 2017
£m
               2016
£m
   £m   £m   £m 

UK Government

     7,479      9,449    10,014    7,474    7,479    9,449 

US Treasury and other US Government agencies and corporations

     916      1,155    1,268    853    916    1,155 

Other OECD governments

     4,162      4,091    4,504    3,097    4,162    4,091 

Bank and Building Society:

          

– Bonds

     5,278      4,395    5,051 

Other issuers:

             3,852     

– Bank and Building Society Bonds

   5,278    4,395 

– Fixed and floating rate notes – Government guaranteed

           426    898            426 

– Mortgage-backed securities

     3,748      107    133    602    3,748    107 

– Other asset-backed securities

     69      38    36        69    38 

– Other securities

     2,056      1,392    1,850    1,163    2,056    1,392 

Ordinary shares and similar securities

           9,743    6,098 

– Ordinary shares and similar securities

           9,743 
     23,708      30,796    29,852            17,041            23,708            30,796 

Ordinary shares and similar securities mainly comprise of equity securities listed in the UK and other countries. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure these were principally held for trading purposes.

  Debt securities

Description

UK Government

Treasury Bills and UK Government guaranteed issues by other UK banks.

US Treasury and other US Government agencies and corporations

US Treasury Bills, including cash management bills.

Other OECD governments

Issues by OECD governments, other than the US and UK governments.

Bank and Building Society

Bonds are fixed securities with short to medium-term maturities issued by banks and building societies.

Fixed and floating rate notes

Fixed and floating rate notes have regular interest rate profiles and are either managed within the overall position for the relevant book or are hedged into one of the main currencies. We hold these securities for trading and yield purposes.

Mortgage-backed securities

Mainly comprises UK residential mortgage-backed securities. These securities are of good quality and contain nosub-prime element.

Other asset-backed securities

Mainly comprises floating-rate asset-backed securities.

Other securities

Mainly comprises reversionary UK property securities.

Contractual maturities

Debt securities can be analysed by contractual maturity and the related weighted average yield for the year as follows:

 

      Later than   Later than         
      one year   five years         
  Not later   and not later   and not later       Later than     
      than 1 year   than five years   than ten years   ten years                 Total 
    One year
or less
£m
     After one
year through
five years
£m
     

After five
years through
ten years

£m

     After
ten years
£m
     Total
£m
   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Issued by public bodies:

                              

– UK Government

           190      7,120      169      7,479    181    1,333    5,789    171    7,474 

– Other governments

     2,924      2,047      108            5,079 

Banks, Building Societies and Other issuers

     780      3,928      3,803      2,639      11,150 

– US Treasury and other US Government agencies and corporations

       853            853 

– Other OECD governments

   1,516    1,321    260        3,097 

Other issuers

   514    3,152    770    1,181    5,617 
     3,704      6,165      11,031      2,808      23,708    2,211    6,659    6,819    1,352    17,041 

Weighted average yield

     0.39%      1.84%      1.51%      1.60%      1.43%    0.73%    1.96%    1.73%    1.81%    1.70% 

Significant exposures

The following table shows the book value (which equals market value) of securities of individual counterparties where the total amount of those securities exceeded 10% of our shareholders’ funds at 31 December 20182019 as set out in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. The table also shows where we classify the securities in the Consolidated Balance Sheet.

 

  Financial
assets at FVOCI
£m
  

Other financial assets at
amortised cost

£m

  Total
£m
 

UK Government and UK Government guaranteed

  970   6,509   7,479 

Japanese Government

  3,687      3,687 

LOGO

   

    Financial assets at
FVOCI

£m

   

Other financial assets at
amortised cost

£m

           Total
£m
 

UK Government and UK Government guaranteed

   970    6,504    7,474 

Japanese Government

   2,227        2,227 

 

Santander UK plc 251259


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

 

LOANS AND ADVANCES TO BANKS

Loans and advances to banks include loans to banks and building societies and balances with central banks (excluding central bank balances which can be withdrawn on demand). The balances include loans and advances to banks classified in the balance sheet as reverse repurchase agreements – non trading. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure it also included loans and advances to banks classified as trading assets.

 

     

 

2018

     2017     2016     2015           2014 
     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

   

£m

 

 

 

Loans and advances to banks

 

    

 

 

 

 

7,511

 

 

 

 

     

 

12,824

 

 

 

     

 

11,828

 

 

 

     

 

8,982

 

 

 

   

 

8,002

 

 

 

   2019   2018   2017   2016   2015 
   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Loans and advances to banks

               4,016                7,511                12,824                11,828                8,982 

Maturity analysis

The following table shows loans and advances to banks by maturity at 31 December 2018.2019.

 

      Later than         
      one year         
  Not later   and not later   Later than     
          than one year               than five years                   five years                           Total 
  On demand   Not later than
three months
 Later than
three months
and not later
than one year
 Later than
one year
and not later
than five years
 Later than
five years
and not later
than ten years
       Later than
ten years
             Total 
  

£m

 

   

£m

 

 

£m

 

 

£m

 

 

£m

 

   

£m

 

   

£m

 

   £m   £m   £m   £m 

Fixed interest rate

   228    2,637  103  1       52    3,021    803            803 

Variable interest rate

   1,732    251  516  1,983       8    4,490    1,904    1,301    8    3,213 
   1,960    2,888  619  1,984       60    7,511    2,707    1,301    8    4,016 

LOANS AND ADVANCES TO CUSTOMERS

We provide lending facilities primarily to personal customers in the form of mortgages secured on residential properties and lending facilities to corporate customers. Purchase and resale agreements represent business with professionalnon-bank customers as part of the liquidity risk management function. The balances are stated before deducting impairment loss allowances and RV and voluntary termination provisions, and include loans and advances to customers classified in the balance sheet other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss, reverse repurchase agreements – non trading and financial assets at fair value through other comprehensive income. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure they also included loans and advances to customers classified as trading assets.

 

     

 

2018

     2017     2016     2015   2014 
     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

   

£m

 

 

Loans secured on residential properties

     157,957      155,355      154,727      153,261    150,440 

Corporate loans

     27,877      32,555      33,709      33,801    32,262 

Finance leases

     6,821      6,710      6,730      6,306    2,639 

Secured advances

                 10      13    15 

Other unsecured loans

     7,554      7,334      8,533      7,951    7,043 

Purchase and resale agreements

     18,740      7,736      7,955      4,352    2,200 

Loans and receivables securities

           2,180      255      51    109 

Amounts due from immediate parent

     17                       

Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries and joint ventures

     1,997      1,207      1,117      1,369    797 

Loans and advances to customers

     220,963      213,077      213,036      207,104    195,505 

Impairment loss allowances

     (751     (940     (921     (1,108   (1,415

RV and voluntary termination provisions on finance leases

     (69     (78     (68     (49   (24

Net loans and advances to customers

     220,143      212,059      212,047      205,947    194,066 

No single concentration of loans and advances above, except for loans secured on residential properties and corporate loans, is more than 10% of total loans and advances, and no individual country, except the UK, is more than 5% of total loans and advances.

   2019  2018  2017  2016  2015 
   £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 

Loans secured on residential properties

   165,356   157,957   155,355   154,727   153,261 

Corporate loans

   27,191   27,877   32,555   33,709   33,801 

Finance leases

   6,264   6,821   6,710   6,730   6,306 

Secured advances

            10   13 

Other unsecured advances

   7,096   7,554   7,334   8,533   7,951 

Purchase and resale agreements

   21,475   18,740   7,736   7,955   4,352 

Loans and receivables securities

         2,180   255   51 

Amounts due from immediate parent

   8   17          

Amounts due from fellow Banco Santander subsidiaries and joint ventures

   2,366   1,997   1,207   1,117   1,369 

Loans and advances to customers

   229,756   220,963   213,077   213,036   207,104 

Impairment loss allowances

   (785  (751  (940  (921  (1,108

RV and voluntary termination provisions on finance leases

   (61  (69  (78  (68  (49

Net loans and advances to customers

           228,910           220,143           212,059           212,047           205,947 

 

252260 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Additional balance

sheet analysis

 

Maturity analysis

The following table shows loans and advances to customers by maturity at 31 December 2018.2019. Overdrafts are included as‘on-demand’. Loans and advances are included at their contractual maturity; no account is taken of a customer’s ability to repay early where it exists.

 

   On demand   Not later than
three months
   Later than
three months
and not later
than one year
   Later than
one year
and not later
than five years
   Later than
five years
and not later
than ten years
   Later than
ten years
   Total 
   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m   £m 
Loans secured on residential properties   2    655    585    6,914    19,568    130,233    157,957 
Corporate loans   852    1,297    2,894    12,290    4,820    5,724    27,877 
Finance leases       894    2,157    3,600    74    96    6,821 
Other unsecured loans   656    2,597    873    3,195    141    92    7,554 
Purchase and resale agreements       13,674    5,066                18,740 
Amounts due from immediate parent   17                        17 
Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries and joint ventures   2    415    753    827            1,997 
Loans and advances to customers   1,529    19,532    12,328    26,826    24,603    136,145    220,963 
Of which:              
– Fixed interest rate       14,485    8,625    4,100    11,573    101,379    140,162 
– Variable interest rate   1,529    5,047    3,703    22,726    13,030    34,766    80,801 
Total   1,529    19,532    12,328    26,826    24,603    136,145    220,963 
Of which:              

– Interest-only loans secured on residential properties

       321    253    4,211    9,715    33,348    47,848 

Our policy is to hedge fixed-rate loans and advances to customers using derivatives, or by matching with otheron-balance sheet interest rate exposures.

   Not later
            than one year
£m
   

Later than

one year
and not later
            than five years
£m

   

                    Later  than
five years

£m

   

                         Total

£m

 

Loans secured on residential properties

   1,028    7,159    157,169    165,356 

Corporate loans

   3,961    11,011    12,219    27,191 

Finance leases

   2,731    3,426    107    6,264 

Other unsecured loans

   3,431    3,329    336    7,096 

Purchase and resale agreements

   21,355    102    18    21,475 

Amounts due from immediate parent

   8            8 

Amounts due from fellow subsidiaries and joint ventures

   1,358    1,008        2,366 

Loans and advances to customers

   33,872    26,035    169,849    229,756 

Of which:

        

– Fixed interest rate

   23,781    8,891    119,402    152,074 

– Variable interest rate

   10,091    17,144    50,447    77,682 

Total

   33,872    26,035    169,849    229,756 

We manage our balance sheet on a behavioural basis, rather than on the basis of contractual maturity. Many loans are repaid before their legal maturity, particularly advances secured on residential property.

RISK ELEMENTS IN THE LOAN PORTFOLIO

The disclosure of credit risk elements in this section reflects US accounting practice and classifications. The purpose of the disclosure is to present within the US disclosure framework the elements of our loan portfolios with a greater risk of loss. The main classifications of credit risk elements presented are:

– Impaired

Nonaccrual, past due and restructured loans

Potential problem loans

Foreign outstandings

Loan concentrations.

Nonaccrual, past due and restructured loans

– Unimpaired loans contractually past due 90 days or more as to interest or principal(i) Loans accounted for on a nonaccrual basis (credit impaired loans)

– Troubled debt restructurings

– Potential problem loans and advances

– Cross-border outstandings.

Impaired loans

Following adoption of IFRS 9 on 1 January 2018, weWe define a loan as in default (i.e. credit impaired) for purposes of calculating ECL if it is more than three months past due, or if we have data to make us doubt they can keep up with their payments i.e. they are unlikely to pay. We classify credit impaired loans as Stage 3. For details of loans classified as Stage 3, see the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review. PriorInterest income on financial assets that have become credit-impaired (or Stage 3) is calculated by applying the effective interest rate to the adoption of IFRS 9, we used a different definition of default to identify loans as credit impaired (although the two definitions are not significantly different), and we classified credit impaired loans as NPLs. Although we adopted IFRS 9 from 1 January 2018, we continued to monitor NPLs as a key metric in 2018. For more, see ‘Key metrics’ and ‘Definition of default (Credit impaired)’ in ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’ in the ‘Credit risk’ sectiontheir amortised cost (i.e. net of the Risk review.ECL provision).

In accordance with IFRS, we recognise interest income on assets after they have been written down as a resultAn analysis of an impairment loss. Interest continues to be accrued on all loans and the element of interest that is not anticipated to be recovered is provided for. Interest income recognised on impaired loans is set out in the Consolidated Financial Statements. The income adjustment in respect of interest that is not anticipated to be recovered was £8m (2017: £9m, 2016: £11m).included below:

   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

   

2016

£m

   

2015

£m

 

Stage 3on-balance sheet (2015 to 2017: NPLs)

               2,289                2,490                2,848                2,994                3,056 

(ii) Unimpaired loans contractually past due 90 days or more as to interest or principal

We classify all such loans as credit impaired.

(iii) Troubled debt restructurings

Under US accounting practice and classifications, troubled debt restructurings are loans whose terms have been modified by the lender because of the borrower’s financial difficulties, as a concession that the lender would not otherwise consider. We classify such loans as in forbearance. For details of loans in forbearance, see ‘Forbearance’ in ‘Credit risk – Santander UK group level’, ‘Credit risk – Retail Banking’ and ‘Credit risk – Other business segments’ in the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

The table below summarises forborne exposures that were not credit-impaired:

          2019
£m

Non-credit impaired forborne loans and advances to customers

1,220

(iv) Interest foregone on impaired loans

The table below summarises the interest foregone on impaired lending:

          2019
£m

Interest income that would have been recognised under original contract terms

66

Interest income included in profit

(53

Interest foregone

13

Santander UK plc261


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

Potential problem loans and advances

These are loans where information on possible credit problems among borrowers causes management to seriously doubt their ability to comply with the loan repayment terms. Under IFRS 9, we are required to assess whether any loans have suffered a significant increase in credit risk (SICR) since origination. When a loan experiences a SICR since initial recognition, but no credit impairment has materialised, we allocate it into Stage 2, and we consider it within potential problem loans and advances. For more, see the ‘Significant Increase in Credit Risk (SICR)’ section in the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

In order to assess credit quality, we map exposures into a nine point scale, from 9 (lowest risk) to 1 (default). We classify such loans as impaired.show this credit rating distribution in the ‘Santander UK group level – credit risk review’ section of the Risk review.

     2018     2017     2016     2015     2014 
     £m     £m     £m     £m     £m 

Loans and advances to customers(1)of which:

     199,869      200,325      200,156      198,634      190,651 

– Stage 3

     2,491                 

– NPLs

     2,408      2,848      2,994      3,056      3,424 

(1)

Includes Social Housing loans and finance leases, and excludes trading assets.

LOGO

Santander UK plc253


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Cross-borderForeign outstandings

The disclosure of cross border outstandings in this section reflects US accounting practice and classifications. Cross border outstandings, as defined by bank regulatory rules, are amounts payable to us by residents of foreign countries, regardless of the currency in which the claim is denominated, and local country claims in excess of local country obligations. Cross border outstandings consist mainly of loans and advances to customers and banks, finance lease debtors, interest-bearing investments and other monetary assets.

In addition to credit risk, cross border outstandings have the risk that, as a result of political or economic conditions in a country, borrowers may be unable to meet their contractual payment obligations of principal and or interest when due because of the unavailability of, or restrictions on, foreign exchange needed by borrowers to repay their obligations. These cross border outstandings are controlled through a well-developed system of country limits, which are reviewed to avoid concentrations of transfer, economic or political risks.

For more on our country risk exposures, see ‘Country risk exposures’ in the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

(i) Cross border outstandings exceeding 1% of total assets

At 31 December 2019, 2018 2017 and 20162017 cross border outstandings exceeding 1% of total assets were as follows:

 

2019  

        Governments
and official
institutions

£bn

   

Banks and other
financial
institutions

£bn

                   Other
£bn
                   Total
£bn
 

Japan

   2.2    1.6        3.8 

Ireland

       7.5    0.1    7.6 

Luxembourg

       2.8    0.1    2.9 
            
2018    

Governments
and official
institutions
£bn

 

 

Banks and other
financial
institutions

£bn

 

     

Other
£bn

 

     

Total
£bn

 

                 

US

     1.1  3.0      0.2      4.3    1.1    3.0    0.2    4.3 

Japan

     3.8  2.6            6.4    3.8    2.6        6.4 

Ireland

       12.3      0.4      12.7        12.3    0.4    12.7 
                         
2017                                    

US

     6.4   10.5      0.1      17.0    6.4    10.5    0.1    17.0 

Japan

     3.0   2.8      0.8      6.6    3.0    2.8    0.8    6.6 

Spain

        4.8      0.1      4.9        4.8    0.1    4.9 

France

     0.3   2.2      2.2      4.7    0.3    2.2    2.2    4.7 
             
2016                    

US

     5.0   13.1      0.1      18.2 

Japan

     2.8   3.3      1.4      7.5 

(ii) Cross border outstandings between 0.75% and 1% of total assets

At 31 December 2018, 2017 and 2016,2019, Santander UK had cross border outstandings between 0.75% and 1% of total assets were as follows:

     Governments
and official
institutions
  Banks and
other financial
institutions
     Other   Total 
 2018    

£bn

 

  

£bn

 

     

£bn

 

   

£bn

 

 

Spain

        2.5      0.2    2.7 
           
 2017                   

Germany

        2.8      0.1    2.9 
           
 2016                   

Spain

        2.5      0.2    2.7 

Luxembourg

        2.3      0.3    2.6 

Germany

        2.5          2.5 

France

     0.4   2.0      0.1    2.5 

(iii) Crossrelating to the US. The aggregate amount of these cross border outstandings between 0.5% and 0.75% of total assetswas £2.3bn.

At 31 December 2018, 2017 and 2016,Santander UK had cross border outstandings between 0.5%0.75% and 0.75%1% of total assets were as follows:relating to Spain. The aggregate amount of these cross border outstandings was £2.7bn.

     Governments
and official
institutions
  Banks and
other financial
institutions
     Other   Total 
 2018    

£bn

 

  

£bn

 

     

£bn

 

   

£bn

 

 

Germany

        1.6          1.6 
           
 2017                   

Ireland

        1.3      0.8    2.1 

Netherlands

        0.6      1.2    1.8 

Luxembourg

        1.3      0.4    1.7 

There were noAt 31 December 2017, Santander UK had cross border outstandings between 0.5%0.75% and 0.75%1% of total assets at 31 December 2016.relating to Germany. The aggregate amount of these cross border outstandings was £2.9bn.

Loan concentrations

No single concentration of loans and advances above, except for loans secured on residential properties and corporate loans, is more than 10% of total loans and advances, and no individual country, except the UK, is more than 5% of total loans and advances.

 

254262 Santander UK plc


 >
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Additional balance

sheet analysis

 

SUMMARY OF LOAN LOSS EXPERIENCE

Credit impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers is presented below.

 

        2018        2017        2016        2015        2014  
  

£m

 

  

£m

 

  

£m

 

  

£m

 

  

£m 

 

 

Total credit impairment loss allowances:

     

– Loans secured on residential properties

  234   225   279   424   579  

– Corporate loans

  226   490   382   395   558  

– Finance leases

  85   46   45   20   30  

– Other unsecured advances

  206   179   215   269   248  

Total credit impairment loss allowances

      751   940   921   1,108   1,415  

Movements in credit impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of movements in impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers is presented below.

       2018       2017       2016       2015      2014  
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m  

Credit impairment loss allowances at 31 December

  940   921   1,108   1,415   1,538  

Adoption of IFRS 9 (see Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements)

  211     

Reallocation of ECL on off balance sheet exposures(1)

  (50                

Credit impairment loss allowances at 1 January

  1,101   921   1,108   1,415   1,538  

Amounts written off:

     

– Loans secured on residential properties

  (17  (17  (29  (32  (56

– Corporate loans

  (355  (64  (72  (157  (150

– Finance leases

  (23  (19  (22  (30  (14

– Other unsecured advances

  (144  (138  (196  (244  (272

Total amounts written off

  (539  (238  (319  (463  (492

Credit impairment losses (released)/charged against profit:

     

– Loans secured on residential properties

  (18  (37  (116  (123  42  

– Corporate loans

  17   172   59   (6  75  

– Finance leases

  51   20   47   20   17  

– Other unsecured advances

  139   102   142   265   235  

Total credit impairment losses charged against profit

  189   257   132   156   369  

Credit impairment loss allowances at 31 December

      751   940   921   1,108   1,415  

(1)This relates to ECL onoff-balance sheet exposures following the adoption of a methodology to enable their separate identification from ECL on drawn exposures.

  %  %  %  %   

Ratio of amounts written off to average loans during the year

       0.27        0.12        0.15        0.22        0.26  

Recoveries, net of collection costs

An analysis of recoveries, net of collection costs is presented below.

       2018       2017       2016       2015      2014 
  £m  £m  £m  £m  £m 

Loans secured on residential properties

  2   3   4   2   3 

Corporate loans

  1   1   3   3   4 

Finance leases

  6   6   2   2   2 

Other unsecured advances

  33   44   56   83   102 

Total amount recovered

      42   54   65   90   111 

LOGO

   

2019

£m

  

2018(1)

£m

  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 

Total credit impairment loss allowances:

      

– Loans secured on residential properties

   215   234   225   279   424 

– Corporate loans

   262   226   490   382   395 

– Finance leases

   88   85   46   45   20 

– Other unsecured advances

   220   206   179   215   269 

Total credit impairment loss allowances

               785           751           940           921           1,108 

 

(1)  On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9 (2015-2017: IAS 39).

 

Movements in credit impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers

An analysis of movements in impairment loss allowances on loans and advances to customers is presented below.

 

   

 

 

   

2019

£m

  

2018(1)

£m

  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 

Credit impairment loss allowances at 31 December

   751   940   921   1,108   1,415 

Adoption of IFRS 9

    211    

Reallocation of ECL on off balance sheet exposures(2)

       (50            

Credit impairment loss allowances at 1 January

   751   1,101   921   1,108   1,415 

Amounts written off:

      

– Loans secured on residential properties

   (14  (17  (17  (29  (32

– Corporate loans

   (54  (355  (64  (72  (157

– Finance leases

   (34  (23  (19  (22  (30

– Other unsecured advances

   (103  (144  (138  (196  (244

Total amounts written off

   (205  (539  (238  (319  (463

Credit impairment losses (released)/charged against profit:

      

– Loans secured on residential properties

   (5  (18  (37  (116  (123

– Corporate loans

   90   17   172   59   (6

– Finance leases

   37   51   20   47   20 

– Other unsecured advances

   117   139   102   142   265 

Total credit impairment losses charged against profit

   239   189   257   132   156 

Credit impairment loss allowances at 31 December

           785           751           940           921           1,108 

 

(1)  On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9 (2015-2017: IAS 39).

(2)  This relates to ECL onoff-balance sheet exposures following the adoption of a methodology to enable their separate identification from ECL on drawn exposures.

 

   

   

   %  %  %  %  % 

Ratio of amounts written off to average loans during the year

           0.10           0.27           0.12           0.15                0.22 

 

Recoveries, net of collection costs

An analysis of recoveries, net of collection costs is presented below.

 

 

 

   

2019

£m

  

2018

£m

  

2017

£m

  

2016

£m

  

2015

£m

 

Loans secured on residential properties

   2   2   3   4   2 

Corporate loans

   2   1   1   3   3 

Finance leases

   7   6   6   2   2 

Other unsecured advances

   29   33   44   56   83 

Total amount recovered

               40               42               54               65               90 

 

Santander UK plc 255263


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

 

DEPOSITS BY CUSTOMERS

The balances below include deposits by customers classified in the balance sheet as other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and repurchase agreements – non trading. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure they also included deposits by customers classified as trading liabilities. The following tables show the average balances by customer type.product.

 

     2018     2017     2016 
     £m     £m     £m 

Demand deposits

     153,539      150,389      131,521 

Time deposits

     18,310      23,224      29,760 

Other deposits

     30,342      28,267      22,318 

Average balance(1)

     202,191              201,880              183,599 

Average interest rate(1)

     0.79%      0.72%      1.03% 
   

2019

       

2018

       

2017

 
   

Average
Balance

£m

   

Average
Interest
Rate(1)

%

      

Average
Balance

£m

   

Average
Interest
Rate(1)

%

      

Average
Balance

£m

   

      Average
Interest
Rate(1)

%

 

Demand deposits (including savings and current accounts)

   151,367    0.69     153,539    0.67     150,389    0.64 

Time deposits

   16,869    1.32     18,310    0.89     23,224    0.85 

Other deposits

   28,160    1.46        30,342    1.19        28,267    1.02 

Total average balance(1)

           196,396                    0.85                202,191                    0.79                201,880                    0.72 

 

(1)

Calculated using monthly data.

We obtain retail demand and time deposits either through our branch network, cahoot or remotely. They are all interest-bearing and interest rates are varied from time to time in response to competitive conditions.

  Deposits

Description

Demand depositsDemand deposits consist of savings and current accounts. Savings products comprise Individual Savings Accounts, instant saver accounts, remote access accounts, and other accounts which allow the customer a limited number of notice-free withdrawals per year depending on the account balance. These accounts are treated as demand deposits because the entire balance may be withdrawn on demand without penalty as one of the notice-free withdrawals.
Time depositsTime deposits consist of notice accounts, which require customers to give notice before making a withdrawal, and bond accounts, which require a minimum deposit. In each of these accounts there is an interest penalty for early withdrawal.
Other depositsOther deposits are either obtained through the money markets or for which interest rates are quoted on request rather than publicly advertised. These deposits have a fixed maturity and their interest rates reflect inter-bank money market rates.

DEPOSITS BY BANKS

The balances below include deposits by banks classified in the balance sheet as repurchase agreements – non trading. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure they also included deposits by banks classified as trading liabilities.

 

              2018     2017     2016 
              £m     £m     £m   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Average balance(1)

             19,622      15,708      12,634                17,235                19,622                15,708 

Average interest rate(1)

               0.72%      0.46%      0.62%    0.85%    0.72%    0.46% 

 

(1)

Calculated using monthly data.

At 31 December 2018,2019, deposits by foreign banks were £3,283m (2018: £4,593m, (2017: £2,159m, 2016: £1,995m)2017: £2,159m).

 

256264 Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 >

Additional balance

sheet analysis

 

SHORT-TERM BORROWINGS

We include short-term borrowings in other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss, deposits by banks, repurchase agreements – non trading and debt securities in issue. Prior to the implementation of our ring-fence structure short-term borrowings were also included in trading liabilities. We do not show short-term borrowings separately on our balance sheet. Short-term borrowings are amounts payable for short-term obligations that are US Federal funds purchased and securities sold under repurchase agreements, commercial paper, borrowings from banks, borrowing from factors or other financial institutions and any other short-term borrowings reflected on the balance sheet. The table below shows short-term borrowings for each of the years ended 31 December 2019, 2018 2017 and 2016.2017.

 

    

 

2018

     

 

2017

     

 

2016

 
    

£m

 

     

£m

 

     

£m

 

   

2019

£m

   

2018

£m

   

2017

£m

 

Securities sold under repurchase agreements

                  

Year-end balance

     12,175      26,334      10,104    17,441    12,175    26,334 

Year-end interest rate

     0.77%      0.52%      0.11%    0.73%    0.77%    0.52% 

– Average balance(1)

     21,684      23,281      16,109    15,874    21,684    23,281 

– Average interest rate(1)

     0.76%      0.42%      0.44%    0.77%    0.76%    0.42% 

– Maximum balance(1)

     32,550      28,793      23,385            18,253                32,550                28,793 

Commercial paper

                  

Year-end balance

     3,131      3,293      3,132    3,014    3,131    3,293 

Year-end interest rate

     2.43%      0.80%      0.88%    2.00%    2.43%    0.80% 

– Average balance(1)

     4,314      3,592      3,220    3,438    4,314    3,592 

– Average interest rate(1)

     1.71%      0.76%      0.74%    2.08%    1.71%    0.76% 

– Maximum balance(1)

     5,898      4,180      3,858    4,099    5,898    4,180 

Borrowings from banks (Deposits by banks)(2)

                  

Year-end balance

     6,208      3,968      2,619    7,879    6,208    3,968 

Year-end interest rate

     0.72%      0.34%      0.09%    0.55%    0.72%    0.34% 

– Average balance(1)

     5,190      3,278      3,350    5,445    5,190    3,278 

– Average interest rate(1)

     0.54%      0.23%      0.10%    0.53%    0.54%    0.23% 

– Maximum balance(1)

     6,871      4,222      4,861    7,879    6,871    4,222 

Negotiable certificates of deposit

                  

Year-end balance

     3,221      4,706      5,217    2,806    3,221    4,706 

Year-end interest rate

     0.56%      0.69%      0.31%    0.93%    0.56%    0.69% 

– Average balance(1)

     3,914      4,710      3,970    3,225    3,914    4,710 

– Average interest rate(1)

     0.54%      0.66%      0.36%    0.92%    0.54%    0.66% 

– Maximum balance(1)

     6,108      5,335      5,614    3,600    6,108    5,335 

Other debt securities in issue

                  

Year-end balance

     7,378      7,536      7,904    9,925    7,378    7,536 

Year-end interest rate

     1.58%      1.42%      1.57%    1.34%    1.58%    1.42% 

– Average balance(1)

     5,573      9,124      7,806    7,716    5,573    9,124 

– Average interest rate(1)

           1.77%      1.65%      1.76%    1.26%    1.77%    1.65% 

– Maximum balance(1)

     7,378      10,761      8,267    9,925    7,378    10,761 

 

(1)

Calculated using monthly weighted average data.

(2)

Theyear-end deposits by banks balance includesnon-interest bearing items in the course of transmission of £337m (2018: £262m, (2017: £303m, 2016: £308m)2017: £303m).

During 2018 and as part of our ring-fencing plans ANTS and its US Branch ceased issuing commercial paper. All commercial paper is now issued by Santander UK plc. Santander UK plc issues euro commercial paper with a minimum issuance amount of100,000 with a maximum maturity of 364 days, and US$ commercial paper with a minimum denomination of US$250,000, with a maximum maturity of 270 days.

Certificates of deposit and certain time deposits

The following table shows the maturities of our certificates of deposit and other large wholesale time deposits fromnon-banks over £50,000 (or thenon-sterling equivalent of £50,000)US$100,000 at 31 December 2018.2019. A proportion of our retail time deposits also exceeds £50,000US$100,000 at any given date; however, the ease of access and other terms of these accounts means that they may not have been in excess of £50,000US$100,000 throughout 2018.2019. Also, the customers may withdraw their funds on demand by paying an interest penalty. For these reasons, no maturity analysis is presented for such deposits.

 

     

3 months
or less
£m

 

   

 

Over 3
through
6 months
£m

 

   

 

Over 6
through
12 months
£m

 

   

Over
12 months
£m

 

     

Total
£m

 

 

Certificates of deposit

     2,587    394    240          3,221 

Wholesale time deposits

     1,428    219    113          1,760 
      4,015    613    353          4,981 

LOGO

   

    3 months
or less

£m

   Over 3
through
        6 months
£m
   Over 6
through
    12 months
£m
   Over
        12 months
£m
   

Total

£m

 

Certificates of deposit

   1,831    764    119        2,714 

Time deposits

   711    104    166    502    1,483 
            2,542            868            285            502                    4,197 

 

Santander UK plc 257265


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

 

CONTRACTUAL OBLIGATIONS

For the amounts and maturities of contractual obligations in respect of guarantees, see Notes 3229 and 4138 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. Other contractual obligations, including payments of principal and interest where applicable, are shown in the table below. Interest payments are included in the maturity column of the interest payments themselves, and are calculated using current interest rates.

 

  Payments due by period 
    

 

Payments due by period

 

 
    

 

Less than
1 year

£m

 

     

1–3 years
£m

 

     

3–5 years
£m

 

     

 

More than
5 years
£m

 

     

Total
£m

 

   

Less than

1 year

£m

   1–3 years
£m
   

3–5 years

£m

   

More than
5 years

£m

   

Total

£m

 

Derivative financial instruments

     501      70      11      787      1,369    543    146    261    498    1,448 

Deposits by customers(1)

     177,641      4,496      1,132      3,839      187,108    178,610    4,425    4,479    3,036    190,550 

Deposits by banks(1)

     12,559      9,362      2,269      219      24,409    17,260    7,107        213    24,580 

Debt securities in issue(2)

     14,219      18,887      3,757      10,819      47,682    15,528    11,616    6,013    9,077    42,234 

Subordinated liabilities

     –        –        1,173      2,428      3,601            1,136    2,392    3,528 

Retirement benefit obligations

     266      556      634      9,348      10,804    332    638    707    10,481    12,158 

Operating lease obligations

     72      85      29      60      246    43    33    20    41    137 

Purchase obligations

     276      –        –        –        276    414                414 
     205,534      33,456      9,005      27,500      275,495            212,730                23,965                12,616            25,738                275,049 

 

(1)

Includes deposits by banks and deposits by customers classified in the balance sheet as trading liabilities, other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss and financial liabilities at amortised cost (including repurchase agreements – non trading).

(2)

Includes debt securities in issue classified in the balance sheet as trading liabilities and other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss.

The table is based on contractual maturities, so it takes no account of call features in our subordinated liabilities. The repayment terms of the debt securities may be accelerated in line with the covenants in the loan agreements.

For details of deposits by customers, deposits by banks, and repurchase agreements - non trading, see Notes 25, 2622, 23 and 2724 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. We have entered into outsourcing contracts where, in some cases, there is no minimum specified spending requirement. In these cases, anticipated spending volumes have been included in purchase obligations.

Under current conditions, our working capital is expected to be sufficient for our present needs and to pursue our planned business strategies.

OFF-BALANCE SHEET ARRANGEMENTS

In the ordinary course of business, we issue guarantees on behalf of customers. The main guarantees we issue are standby letters of credit and performance bonds under which we take on credit on behalf of customers when actual funding is not required. This is normally because a third party will not accept the credit risk of the customer. We include these guarantees in our impairment loss allowance assessment with other forms of credit exposure. In addition, we give representations, indemnities and warranties on the sale of our subsidiaries, businesses and other assets, as is normal in such activity. The maximum potential amount of any claims made against these is usually much higher than actual settlements. We make provisions for our best estimate of the likely outcome, either at the time of sale, or later if we receive more information. See Note 3229 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for more information on our guarantees, commitments and contingencies. See Note 2119 to the Consolidated Financial Statements for more information on ouroff-balance sheet arrangements.

In the ordinary course of business, we also enter into securitisation transactions as set out in Note 1514 to the Consolidated Financial Statements. We consolidate thethese securitisation companies and we continue to administer the assets. The securitisation companies provide us with an important source of long-term funding and/or the ability to manage capital efficiently.

ADDITIONAL STATISTICAL INFORMATION

   

2019

%

   

2018(1, 2)

%

   

2017

%

   

2016

%

   

2015

%

 

Equity to assets ratio(3)

                 4.86                  4.53                    4.35                4.40                      4.47 

Return on assets(4)

   0.26    0.38    0.42    0.44    0.34 

Return on ordinary shareholders’ equity(5)

   5.2    8.2    9.4    9.7    7.3 

Dividend payout ratio(6)

   44    101    43    46    51 

(1)

On 1 January 2018, the Santander UK group adopted IFRS 9.

(2)

In 2018, the Santander UK group completed the implementation of its ring-fencing plans.

(3)

Average ordinary shareholders’ equity divided by average total assets. Average balances are based on monthly data.

(4)

Profit after tax divided by average total assets. Average balances are based on monthly data.

(5)

Profit after tax due to equity holders of the parent divided by average ordinary shareholders’ equity.

(6)

Ordinary equity dividends approved divided by profit after tax attributable to equity holders of the parent.

 

258266 Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 >

Additional balance

sheet analysis

 

INTEREST RATE SENSITIVITY

Interest rate sensitivity is the relationship between interest rates and net interest income caused by the periodic repricing of assets and liabilities. Our largest administered rate items are residential mortgages and retail deposits, most of which bear interest at variable rates.

We mitigate the impact of interest rate movements on net interest income by repricing our variable rate mortgages and variable rate retail deposits separately, subject to competitive pressures. We also offer fixed-rate mortgages and savings products on which the interest rate is fixed for an agreed period at the start of the contract. We manage the margin on fixed-rate products by using derivatives matching the fixed-rate profiles. We reduce the risk of prepayment by imposing early termination charges if the customers end their contracts early.

We manage the risks from movements in interest rates as part of our overallnon-trading position. We do this within limits as set out in the Risk review.

Changes in net interest income – volume and rate analysis

The following table shows changes in interest income, interest expense and net interest income.income, and is presented using asset and liability classifications in the Consolidated Balance Sheet. It allocates the effects between changes in volume and changes in rate. Volume and rate changes have been calculated on the movement in the average balances and the change in the interest rates on average interest-earning assets and average interest-bearing liabilities. The changes caused by movements in both volume and rate have been allocated to rate changes.

 

     

 

2018/2017

 

       

 

2017/2016

 

 
         Changes due to                

 

Changes due to     

 
     

Total

change

£m

   

 

    increase/(decrease) in     

       

Total

change

£m

   

    increase/(decrease) in     

 

 
   

 

Volume

   

Rate

 

     Volume   Rate 
   £m   £m     £m   £m 

 

Interest income

                 

Loans and advances to customers

     (36   62    (98      (704   (8   (696

Loans and advances to banks

     38    (27   65       52    34    18 

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

     104    118    (14      5    (2   7 

Other interest-earning financial assets

     55    30    25        85    50    35 

Total interest income

     161    183    (22       (562   74    (636

Interest expense

                 

Deposits by customers – demand

     73    20    53       (420   198    (618

Deposits by customers – time

     (30   (41   11       (192   (85   (107

Deposits by customers – other

     60    73    (13      51    (33   84 

Deposits by banks

     82    20    62       17    31    (14

Repurchase agreements – non trading

     37    11    26       (33   (14   (19

Subordinated debt

     8    (14   22       (9   (15   6 

Debt securities in issue

     131    17    114       (181   (104   (77

Other interest-bearing financial liabilities

         (3   3        (16   (6   (10

Total interest expense

     361    83    278        (783   (28   (755

Net interest income

     (200   100    (300       221    102    119 

LOGO

   

2019/2018

       

2018/2017

 
   Total  

Changes due to

        increase/(decrease) in        

      Total  

Changes due to

        increase/(decrease) in        

 
   

change

£m

  

Volume

£m

  

Rate

£m

      

change

£m

  

Volume

£m

  

Rate

£m

 

Interest income

         

Loans and advances to customers

   (228  50   (278    (36  62   (98

Loans and advances to banks

   (65  (56  (9    38   (27  65 

Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading

   120   105   15     104   118   (14

Other interest-earning financial assets

   24   14   10        55   30   25 

Total interest income

               (149              113               (262                   161               183               (22

Interest expense

         

Deposits by customers – demand

   3   (15  18     73   20   53 

Deposits by customers – time

   58   (13  71     (30  (41  11 

Deposits by customers – other

   46   39   7     60   73   (13

Deposits by banks

   17   (2  19     82   20   62 

Repurchase agreements – non trading

   84   37   47     37   11   26 

Subordinated debt

   (5  (3  (2    8   (14  22 

Debt securities in issue

   (43  (29  (14    131   17   114 

Other interest-bearing financial liabilities

   2   16   (14          (3  3 

Total interest expense

   162   30   132        361   83   278 

Net interest income

   (311  83   (394       (200  100   (300

 

Santander UK plc 259267


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

 

AVERAGE BALANCE SHEET

Year-end balances may not reflect activity throughout the year, so we present average balance sheets below.below, using asset and liability classifications from the Consolidated Balance Sheet. They show averages for our significant categories of assets and liabilities, and the related interest income and expense.

 

  2019       2018       2017 
    

 

2018

 

      

 

2017

 

      

 

2016 

 

 
    Average
balance(1)
£m
   Interest(2,3)
£m
   

Average
rate

%

     Average
balance(1)
£m
   Interest(2,3)
£m
   

Average
rate

%

     Average
balance(1)
£m
   Interest(2,3)
£m
   

Average 
rate 

   Average
balance(1)
£m
 Interest(2,3)
£m
 

Average
rate

%

     Average
balance(1)
£m
 Interest(2,3)
£m
 

Average
rate

%

     Average
balance(1)
£m
 Interest(2,3)
£m
 

Average
rate

%

 

Assets

                                        
Loans and advances to customers(4)     202,341    5,458    2.70       200,082    5,494    2.75       200,343    6,198    3.09     204,211  5,230  2.56     202,341   5,458   2.70     200,082   5,494   2.75 
Loans and advances to banks     29,659    202    0.68       35,524    164    0.46       27,161    112    0.41     21,413  137  0.64     29,659   202   0.68     35,524   164   0.46 
Reverse repurchase agreements – non trading     12,759    124    0.97       1,851    20    1.08       2,113    15    0.71     23,558  244  1.04     12,759   124   0.97     1,851   20   1.08 
Debt securities     19,589    282    1.44        17,281    227    1.31        12,792    142    1.11     20,581  306  1.49      19,589   282   1.44      17,281   227   1.31 
Total average interest-earning assets, interest income(5)     264,348    6,066    2.29        254,738    5,905    2.32        242,409    6,467    2.67     269,763  5,917  2.19      264,348   6,066   2.29      254,738   5,905   2.32 
Credit impairment loss allowances and RV & VT provisions     (862              (903              (1,095       –  

Credit loss allowances and RV & VT provisions

   (768          (862          (903      
Trading assets     12,235               25,149               21,798        –                12,235           25,149       
Derivatives and othernon-interest-earning assets     24,151                32,519                36,697        –     14,279            24,151            32,519       
Other financial assets at fair value through profit or loss     4,048                2,158                2,439        –  

Other financial assets at FVTPL

   1,206            4,048            2,158       
Total average assets     303,920                313,661                302,248        –     284,480            303,920            313,661       
Liabilities                                        
Deposits by customers – demand     (153,540   (1,034   0.67       (150,389   (961   0.64       (131,521   (1,381   1.05     (151,367 (1,037 0.69     (153,540  (1,034  0.67     (150,389  (961  0.64 
Deposits by customers – time     (18,310   (164   0.90       (23,224   (194   0.84       (29,760   (386   1.30     (16,869 (222 1.32     (18,310  (164  0.90     (23,224  (194  0.84 
Deposits by customers – other     (10,084   (235   2.33       (7,126   (175   2.46       (9,709   (124   1.28     (11,739 (281 2.39     (10,084  (235  2.33     (7,126  (175  2.46 
Deposits by banks     (15,945   (117   0.73       (10,137   (35   0.35       (3,728   (18   0.48     (15,655 (134 0.86     (15,945  (117  0.73     (10,137  (35  0.35 
Repurchase agreements – non trading     (8,924   (42   0.47       (2,826   (5   0.18       (4,435   (38   0.86     (16,692 (126 0.75     (8,924  (42  0.47     (2,826  (5  0.18 
Debt securities     (45,342   (721   1.59       (44,075   (590   1.34       (50,986   (771   1.51     (43,515 (678 1.56     (45,342  (721  1.59     (44,075  (590  1.34 
Subordinated liabilities     (3,343   (142   4.25       (3,729   (134   3.59       (4,163   (143   3.44     (3,284 (137 4.17     (3,343  (142  4.25     (3,729  (134  3.59 
Other interest-bearing liabilities     (152   (8   5.26        (250   (8   3.20        (340   (24   7.06     (452 (10 2.21      (152  (8  5.26      (250  (8  3.20 
Total average interest-bearing liabilities, interest expense(5)     (255,640   (2,463   0.96        (241,756   (2,102   0.87        (234,642   (2,885   1.23     (259,573 (2,625 1.01      (255,640  (2,463  0.96      (241,756  (2,102  0.87 
Trading liabilities     (12,009              (26,723              (18,491       –                (12,009          (26,723      
Derivatives and othernon-interest-bearing liabilities     (14,436              (25,449              (31,067       –     (6,432          (14,436          (25,449      
Other financial liabilities at fair value through profit or loss     (5,344              (2,592              (2,467       –  

Other financial liabilities at FVTPL

   (2,076          (5,344          (2,592      
Equity     (16,491               (17,141               (15,581       –     (16,399           (16,491           (17,141      
Total average liabilities and equity     (303,920               (313,661               (302,248       –     (284,480           (303,920           (313,661      

 

(1)

Average balances are based on monthly data.

(2)

The NIM for the year ended 31 December 20182019 was 1.22% (2018: 1.36% (2017: 1.49%, 2016: 1.48%2017: 1.49%). NIM is calculated as net interest income divided by average interest earning assets.

(3)

The interest spread for the year ended 31 December 20182019 was 1.18% (2018: 1.33% (2017: 1.45%, 2016: 1.44%2017: 1.45%). Interest spread is the difference between the rate of interest earned on average interest-earning assets and the rate of interest paid on average interest-bearing liabilities.

(4)

Loans and advances to customers include NPLs.Stage 3 assets. See the ‘Credit risk’ section of the Risk review.

(5)

The ratio of average interest-earning assets to interest-bearing liabilities at 31 December 20182019 was 104% (2018: 103% (2017: 106%, 2016: 104%2017: 106%).

 

260268 Santander UK plc


 > Taxation for US investors
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Glossary of financial

services industry terms

 

Taxation for US investors

The following is a summary, under current law, of the main UK tax considerations relating to the beneficial ownership by a US taxpayer of the shares of the Company. This summary is provided for general guidance and does not address investors that are subject to special rules or that do not hold the shares as capital assets. US residents should consult their local tax advisers, particularly in connection with any potential liability to pay US taxes on disposal, lifetime gift or bequest of their shares.

UK taxation on dividends

Under UK law, income tax is not withheld from dividends paid by UK companies. Shareholders, whether resident in the UK or not, receive the full amount of the dividend actually declared.

UK taxation on capital gains

Under UK law, when you sell shares you may be liable to pay either capital gains tax or corporation tax on chargeable gains. However if you are either:

 

An individual who is not resident in the UK or

A company which is not resident in the UK,

you will not be liable to UK tax on any capital gains made on disposal of your shares. The exception is if the shares are held in connection with a trade or business that is conducted in the UK through a branch or agency (for capital gains tax purposes) or a permanent establishment (for corporation tax purposes).

UK inheritance tax

Under the current estate and gift tax convention between the US and the UK, shares held by an individual shareholder who is:

 

Domiciled for the purposes of the convention in the US and

Is not for the purposes of the convention a national of the UK

will not be subject to UK inheritance tax on:

 

The individual’s death or

On a gift of the shares during the individual’s lifetime.

The exception is if the shares are part of the business property of a permanent establishment of the individual in the UK or, in the case of a shareholder who performs independent personal services, pertain to a fixed base situated in the UK.

 

LOGO

Santander UK plc 261269


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Glossary of financial services industry terms

 

Term

  

Definition

  

1I2I3 Business World

  

1I2I3 Business World is the marketing name to describe customers who hold a 1I2I3 Business Account. This will give our 1I2I3 businesses access to preferential rates and special offers, for example on our loans and savings products.

  

1I2I3 World

  

1I2I3 World is the marketing name to describe customers that hold a 1I2I3 Current Account, 1I2I3 Lite Current Account, Select Current Account, Private Current Account, 1I2I3 Student / Graduate / Post-Graduate Current Account, 1I2I3 Mini Current Account or 1I2I3 Credit Card. Customers in 1I2I3 World have access to a range of products with preferential rates and / or special deals such as cashback.

  

Additional Tier 1 (AT1) capital

Active customers
  

Instruments otherActive customers are defined as those having an open account, with more than Common Equity Tier 1 that meeta set minimum balance along with certain specified transactions in the Capital Requirements Regulation (CRR) criteria for inclusion in Tier 1 capital.

prior month.
  

Advanced Internal Rating Based (AIRB) approach

Alternative performance measures (APMs)
  

A methodfinancial measure of calculation using internal estimates for all risk components.

historical or future financial performance, financial position or cashflows, other than a financial measure defined or specified under International Financial Reporting Standards.
  

Any excess in month

  

Accounts that were overdrawn for more than their overdraft for everyday in the previous month.

  

Arrears

  

Customers are said to be in arrears when they are behind in fulfilling their obligations with the result that an outstanding loan is unpaid or overdue. Such a customer is also said to be in a state of delinquency. When a customer is in arrears, his entire outstanding balance is said to be delinquent, meaning that delinquent balances are the total outstanding loans on which payments are overdue.

  

Asset Backed Securities (ABS)

  

Securities that represent an interest in an underlying pool of referenced assets. The referenced pool can comprise any assets which attract a set of associated cash flows but are commonly pools of residential or commercial mortgages but could also include leases, credit card receivables, motor vehicles or student loans.

  

UK Bank Levy

  

The government levy that applies to certain UK banks, UK building societies and the UK operations of foreign banks from 1 January 2011. The levy is payable based on a percentage of the chargeable equity and liabilities of the bank at the balance sheet date.

  

Basel III

  

In December 2010, the Basel Committee on Banking Supervision issued the Basel III rules text, which presents the details of strengthened global regulatory standards on bank capital adequacy and liquidity. The standards were implemented in the EU in January 2014.

  

Basis point (bp)

  

One hundredth of a per cent (i.e. 0.01%), so 100 basis points is 1%. Used in quoting movements in interest rates or yields on securities.

  

Brexit

  

The withdrawal of the United Kingdom from the European Union.

  

Business Banking

  

Division, managed under Retail Banking, serving enterprises with a turnover of up to £6.5m per annum.

  

Colleague engagement

  

Colleague engagement is measured on annual basis in the Group Engagement Survey (GES), conducted by Mercer for Banco Santander. Results are benchmarked against other firms in the UK financial sector and other high performing firms.

  

Collectively assessed loan impairment provisions

  

Impairment losses assessment on a collective basis for loans that are part of homogeneous pools of similar loans and that are not individually significant, using appropriate statistical techniques. See ‘Impairment of financial assets’ in Note 1 to the Consolidated Financial Statements.

  

Commercial Paper

  

An unsecured promissory note issued to finance short-term credit needs. It specifies the face amount paid to investors on the maturity date. Commercial paper can be issued as an unsecured obligation of Santander UK and is usually issued for periods ranging from one week up to nine months. However, the depth and reliability of some CP markets means that issuers can repeatedly roll over CP issuance and effectively achieve longer term funding. CP can be issued in a range of denominations and can be discounted or interest-bearing.

  

Commercial Real Estate (CRE)

  

Lending to UK customers, primarily on tenanted property assets, with a focus on the office, retail, industrial and residential sectors.

  

Common Equity Tier 1 (CET1) capital

  

Thecalled-up share capital and eligible reserves less deductions calculated in accordance with the CRD IV implementation rules as per the PRA Policy Statement PS7/13. CET1 capital ratio is CET1 capital as a percentage of risk-weighted assets.

  

CET1 capital ratio

  

CET1 capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets.

  

Contractual maturity

  

The final payment date of a loan or other financial instrument, at which point all the remaining outstanding principal will be repaid and interest is due to be paid.

  

Corporates

  

The sum of enterprises served by our Business Banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate & Investment Banking.

  

Countercyclical capital buffer

  

A capital buffer required under Basel III to ensure that capital requirements take account of the macro-financial environment in which banks operate.

  

Coverage ratio

Counterparty credit risk
  

Impairment loss allowances asThe risk that the counterparty to a percentagetransaction may default before completing the satisfactory settlement of totalnon-performing loans and advances. Seenon-performing loans and advances tables in the Risk review for industry specific definitions of individual products.

transaction.
  

Covered bonds

  

Debt securities backed by a portfolio of mortgages that is segregated from the issuer’s other assets solely for the benefit of the holders of the covered bonds. The Santander UK group issues covered bonds as part of its funding activities.

  

Credit Default Swap (CDS)

  

A credit derivative contract where the protection seller receives premium or interest-related payments in return for contracting to make payments to the protection buyer in the event of a defined credit event. Credit events normally include bankruptcy, payment default on a reference asset or assets, or downgrades by a rating agency.

  

Credit spread

  

The yield spread between securities with the same coupon rate and maturity structure but with different associated credit risks, with the yield spread rising as the credit rating worsens. It is the premium over the benchmark or risk-free rate required by the market to accept a lower credit quality.

  

Credit Valuation Adjustment (CVA)

  

Adjustments to the fair values of derivative assets to reflect the creditworthiness of the counterparty.

 

270Santander UK plc


Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Glossary of financial

services industry terms

TermDefinition
  

Capital Requirements Directive IV (CRD IV)

  

An EU legislative package covering prudential rules for banks, building societies and investment firms.

  

Cash collection

  

Agents have been instructed to collect cash from the customer.

  

Currency swap

  

An arrangement in which two parties exchange specific principal amounts of different currencies at inception and subsequently interest payments on the principal amounts. Often, one party will pay a fixed interest rate, while the other will pay a floating exchange rate (though there are also fixed-fixed and floating-floating arrangements). At the maturity of the swap, the principal amounts are usuallyre-exchanged.

  

Current Account Switch Service (CASS) guarantee

  

On 16 September 2013, Bacs (previously Payments Council) launched CASS. The service isfree-to-use for consumers, small charities, small businesses and small trusts, and is designed to make switching current accounts from one bank or building society to another, simpler, reliable and hassle-free, thus removing customers’ perceived barriers to switching. The new service is backed by a customer guarantee and aims to increase competition in the high street, support the entry of new banks in the current account marketplace and give customers greater choice if they want to switch.

  

Customer loans / customer deposits

  

Money lent to or deposited by all individuals and companies that are not credit institutions. Such funds are predominantly recorded as assets and liabilities in the balance sheet under Loans and advances to customers and Deposits by customers, respectively.

  

Customer funding gap

  

Customer loans less customer deposits.

  

Days past due

  

One or more days that interest and/or principal payments are overdue based on the contractual terms.

  

Debt restructuring

  

This occurs when the terms and provisions of outstanding debt agreements are changed. This is often done in order to improve cash flow and the ability of the borrower to repay the debt. It can involve altering the repayment schedule as well as reducing the debt or interest charged on the loan.

  

Debt securities

  

Transferable instruments creating or acknowledging indebtedness. They include debentures, bonds, certificates of deposit, notes and commercial paper. The holder of a debt security is typically entitled to the payment of principal and interest, together with other contractual rights under the terms of the issue, such as the right to receive certain information. Debt securities are generally issued for a fixed term and redeemable by the issuer at the end of that term. Debt securities can be secured or unsecured.

  

Debt securities in issue

  

Transferable certificates of indebtedness of the Santander UK group to the bearer of the certificates. These are liabilities of the Santander UK group and include commercial paper, certificates of deposit, bonds and medium-term notes.

  

Default

  

Financial assets in default represent those that are at least 90 days past due in respect of principal or interest and/or where the assets are otherwise considered to be unlikely to pay, including those that are credit impaired.

262    Santander UK plc


> Glossary of financial services industry terms

    Term

Definition

  

Default at proxy origination

  

IFRS 9 requires us to compare lifetime probability of default at origination with our view of lifetime probability of default now. If we do not have data at origination then a proxy origination is defined.

  

Defined benefit obligation

  

The present value of expected future payments required to settle the obligations of a defined benefit plan resulting from employee service.

  
Defined benefit plan  

Defined benefit plan

A pension plan that defines an amount of pension benefit to be provided, usually as a function of one or more factors such as age, years of service or compensation. The employer’s obligation can be more or less than its contributions to the fund.

  

Defined contribution plan

  

A pension plan under which the Santander UK group pays fixed contributions as they fall due into a separate entity (a fund) and will have no legal or constructive obligations to pay further contributions, i.e. the employer’s obligation is limited to its contributions to the fund.

  

Delinquency

  

See ‘Arrears’.

  

Deposits by banks

  

Money deposited by banks and other credit institutions. They include money-market deposits, securities sold under repurchase agreements, and other short-term deposits. Such funds are recorded as liabilities in the Santander UK group’s balance sheet under Deposits by Banks, Trading Liabilities or Financial Liabilities designated at Fair Value.

  

Derivative

  

A contract or agreement whose value changes with changes in an underlying index such as interest rates, foreign exchange rates, share prices or indices and which requires no initial investment or an initial investment that is smaller than would be required for other types of contracts with a similar response to market factors. The principal types of derivatives are: swaps, forwards, futures and options.

  

Digital customers

Distributable items
  

Digital customers reflect the number of customers who have logged onto Retail or Business online banking or mobile app at least once in the month.

Distributable items

Equivalent to distributable profits under the Companies Act 2006.

  

Economic capital

  

An internal measure of the minimum equity and preference capital required for the Santander UK group to maintain its credit rating based upon its risk profile.

  

Effective tax rate

  

The tax on profit/(losses) on ordinary activities as a percentage of profit/(loss) on ordinary activities before taxation.

  

Expected credit loss (ECL)

  

Represents what the credit risk is likely to cost us either over the next 12 months on qualifying exposures, or defaults over the lifetime of the exposure where there is evidence of a significant increase in credit risk since origination.

  

Expected loss

  

The product of the probability of default, exposure at default and loss given default. We calculate each factor in accordance with CRD IV, and include direct and indirect costs. We base them on our risk models and our assessment of each customer’s credit quality.

  

Exposure

  

The maximum loss that a financial institution might suffer if a borrower, counterparty or group fails to meet their obligations or assets andoff-balance sheet positions have to be realised.

 

Santander UK plc 271


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

TermDefinition
  

Exposure at default (EAD)

  

The estimation of the extent to which the Santander UK group may be exposed to a customer or counterparty in the event of, and at the time of, that counterparty’s default. At default, the customer may not have drawn the loan fully or may already have repaid some of the principal, so that exposure is typically less than the approved loan limit. We determine EAD for each month of the forecast period by the expected payment profile, which varies by product type. For amortising products, we base it on the borrower’s contractual repayments over the forecast period. We adjust this for any expected overpayments the borrower may make and for any arrears we expect if the account was to default. For revolving products, or amortising products with an undrawn element, we determine EAD using the balance at default and the contractual exposure limit. We vary these assumptions by product type and base them on analysis of recent default data.

  

Fair value adjustment

  

An adjustment to the fair value of a financial instrument which is determined using a valuation technique (level 2 and level 3) to include additional factors that would be considered by a market participant that are not incorporated within the valuation model.

  

Financial Conduct Authority (FCA)

  

A UK quasi-governmental agency formed as one of the successors to the Financial Services Authority (FSA). The FCA regulates financial firms providing services to UK consumers and maintains the integrity of the UK’s financial markets. It focuses on the regulation of conduct by both retail and wholesale financial services firms.

  

Financial Services Compensation Scheme (FSCS)

  

The UK’s statutory fund of last resort for customers of authorised financial services firms, established under the Financial Services and Markets Act (FSMA) 2000. The FSCS can pay compensation to customers if a UK PRA authorised firm is unable, or likely to be unable, to pay claims against it (for instance, an authorised bank is unable to pay claims by depositors). The FSCS is funded by levies on firms authorised by the PRA, including Santander UK plc and other members of the Santander UK group.

  

First / Second Charge

  

First charge (also known as first lien): debt that places its holder first in line to collect compensation from the sale of the underlying collateral in the event of a default on the loan. Second charge (also known as second lien): debt that is issued against the same collateral as a higher charge debt but that is subordinate to it. In the case of default, compensation for this debt will only be received after the first charge has been repaid and thus represents a riskier investment than the first charge.

  

Follow-on Rate (FoR)

  

A mortgage product that tracks and is directly linked to the Bank of England base rate.

  

Forbearance

  

Forbearance takes place when a concession is made on the contractual terms of a loan in response to an obligor’s financial difficulties.

  

Full time equivalent

  

Full time equivalent employee units are theon-job hours paid for employee services divided by the number of ordinary-time hours normally paid for a full-time staff member when on the job (or contract employee where applicable).

  

Funded / unfunded

  

Exposures where the notional amount of the transaction is either funded or unfunded. Represents exposures where a commitment to provide future funding has been made and the funds have been released / not released.

  

Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS)

  

A scheme designed by the Bank of England and HM Treasury to incentivise banks and building societies to boost their lending to UK households andnon-financial companies. It aims to do this by providing funding to banks and building societies for an extended period, with both the price and quantity of funding provided linked to their performance in lending to the UKnon-financial sector.

  

Home loan (Residential mortgage)

  

A loan to purchase a residential property which is then used as collateral to guarantee repayment of the loan. The borrower gives the lender a lien against the property and the lender can foreclose on the property if the borrower does not repay the loan per the agreed terms. Also known as a residential mortgage.

  

Impaired loans

  

Loans where the Santander UK group does not expect to collect all the contractual cash flows or to collect them when they are contractually due.

  

Impairment loss allowance (Loan loss allowance)

  

An impairment loss allowance held on the balance sheet as a result of the raising of a charge against profit for an expected credit loss in the lending book. An impairment loss allowance may be either individual or collective.

  

Impairment losses

  

For 2017 and prior periods, the IAS 39 definition of impairment losses applies. This is superseded by the IFRS 9 definition of credit impairment losses. The raising of a charge against profit for the incurred loss inherent in the lending book following an impairment review. For financial assets carried at amortised cost, impairment losses are recognised in the income statement and the carrying amount of the financial asset or group of financial assets is reduced by establishing an allowance for impairment losses. Foravailable-for-sale financial assets, the cumulative loss including impairment losses is removed from equity and recognised in the income statement.

  

Individually assessed loan impairment provisions

  

Impairment is measured individually for assets that are individually significant. For these assets, the Santander UK group measures the amount of the impairment loss as the difference between the carrying amount of the asset or group of assets and the present value of the estimated future cash flows from the asset or group of assets discounted at the original effective interest rate of the asset.

  

Internal Capital Adequacy Assessment Process (ICAAP)

  

The Santander UK group’s own assessment of its regulatory capital requirements, as part of CRD IV. It takes into account the regulatory and commercial environment in which the Santander UK group operates, the Santander UK group’s Risk Appetite, the management strategy for each of the Santander UK group’s material risks and the impact of appropriate adverse scenarios and stresses on the Santander UK group’s capital requirements.

  

Internal Liquidity Adequacy Assessment Process (ILAAP)

  

The Santander UK group’s own assessment of the prudent level of liquidity that is consistent with the Santander UK group’s LRA. It documents and demonstrates the Santander UK group’s overall liquidity adequacy – an appropriate level of liquid resources, a prudent funding profile and comprehensive management and control of liquidity and funding risks.

  

Internal ratings-based approach (IRB)

  

The Santander UK group’s method, under the CRD IV framework, for calculating credit risk capital requirements using the Santander UK group’s internal Probability of Default models but with supervisory estimates of Loss Given Default and conversion factors for the calculation of Exposure at Default.

  

International Financial Reporting Standards (IFRS)

  

A set of international accounting standards developed and issued by the International Accounting Standards Board, consisting of principles-based guidance.

  

Investment grade

  

A debt security, treasury bill or similar instrument with a credit rating measured by external agencies of AAA to BBB.

  

ISDA Master agreement

  

Standardised contract developed by ISDA (International Swaps and Derivatives Association) used as an umbrella under which bilateral derivatives contracts are entered into.

  

Lending to corporates

  

The sum of our Business banking, Corporate & Commercial Banking and Corporate & Investment Banking loan balances.

 

272Santander UK plc


 
  

Level 1

Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information
 

Glossary of financial

services industry terms

TermDefinition
Level 1The fair value of these financial instruments is based on unadjusted quoted prices for identical assets or liabilities in an active market that the Santander UK group has the ability to access at the measurement date.

LOGO

Santander UK plc263


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

    Term

Definition

  

Level 2

  

The fair value of these financial instruments is based on quoted prices in markets that are not active or quoted prices for similar assets or liabilities, recent market transactions, inputs other than quoted market prices for the asset or liability that are observable either directly or indirectly for substantially the full term, and inputs to valuation techniques that are derived principally from or corroborated by observable market data through correlation or other statistical means for substantially the full term of the asset or liability.

  

Level 3

  

The fair value of these financial instruments is based on inputs to the pricing or valuation techniques that are significant to the overall fair value measurement of the asset or liability are unobservable.

  

Liquid assets coverage of wholesale funding of less than one year

  

LCR eligible liquidity pool divided by wholesale funding with a residual maturity of less than one year.

  

Liquidity Coverage Ratio (LCR)

  

The LCR is intended to ensure that a bank maintains an adequate level of unencumbered, high quality liquid assets which can be used to offset the net cash outflows the bank could encounter under a short-term significant liquidity stress scenario.

  

LCR eligible liquidity pool

  

Assets eligible for inclusion in the LCR as high quality liquid assets. The LCR eligible liquidity pool also covers both Pillar 1 and Pillar 2 risks.

  

Loan loss rate

Defined as a rolling twelve months impairment charge on loans and advances divided by average loans and advances.

Loan to value ratio (LTV)

  

The amount of a first mortgage charge as a percentage of the total appraised value of real property. The LTV ratio is used in determining the appropriate level of risk for the loan and therefore the price of the loan to the borrower. LTV ratios may be expressed in a number of ways, including origination LTV and indexed LTV.

  

Loss Given Default (LGD)

  

The fraction of Exposure at Default that will not be recovered following default. LGD comprises the actual loss (the part that is not recovered), together with the economic costs associated with the recovery process. It is calculated as the expected loss divided by EAD for each month of the forecast period. We base LGD on factors that impact the likelihood and value of any subsequent write-offs, which vary according to whether the product is secured or unsecured. If the product is secured, we take into account collateral values as well as the historical discounts to market/book values due to forced sales type.

  

Master netting agreement

  

An industry standard agreement which facilitates netting of transactions (such as financial assets and liabilities including derivatives) in jurisdictions where netting agreements are recognised and have legal force. The netting arrangements do not generally result in an offset of balance sheet assets and liabilities for accounting purposes, as transactions are usually settled on a gross basis.

  

Medium-Term Funding (MTF)

  

Shown at a sterling equivalent value. Consists of senior debt issuance, asset-backed issuance (including securitisation and covered bond issuance) and structured issuance (including firm financing repurchase agreements). MTF excludes any collateral received from the Bank of England’s Funding for Lending Scheme (FLS) or Term Funding Scheme (TFS).

  

Medium-Term Notes (MTNs)

  

Corporate notes (or debt securities) continuously offered by a company to investors through a dealer. Investors can choose from differing maturities, ranging from nine months to 30 years. They can be issued on a fixed or floating coupon basis or with an exotic coupon; with a fixed maturity date(non-callable) (non- callable) or with embedded call or put options or early repayment triggers. MTNs are most generally issued as senior, unsecured debt.

  

Minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities (MREL)

  

A requirement under the Bank Recovery and Resolution Directive for EU resolution authorities to set a minimum requirement for own funds and eligible liabilities for banks, implementing the Financial Stability Board’s Total Loss Absorbing Capacity (TLAC) standard. The purpose of MREL is to help ensure that when banks, building societies and investment firms fail, that failure can be managed in an orderly way while minimising risks to financial stability, disruption to critical economic functions, and risks to public funds.

  

Mortgages

  

Refers to residential and buy to let retail mortgages only and excludes social housing and commercial mortgage properties.

  

Mortgage-Backed Securities (MBS)

  

Securities that represent interests in groups of mortgages, which may be on residential or commercial properties. Investors in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and / or principal). When the MBS references mortgages with different risk profiles, the MBS is classified according to the highest risk class.

  

Mortgage retention

n.m.
  

The proportion of customers with a maturing mortgage that remain with Santander. Applied to mortgages four months post maturity and is calculated as a twelve-month average of retention rates.

n.m.

Not meaningful when the change is above 100%.

  

Net fee and commission income

  

Fee and commission income minus other fees paid that are not an integral part of the effective interest rate. For retail and corporate products, fee and commission income consists principally of collection services fees, commission on foreign currencies, commission and other fees received from retailers for processing credit card transactions, fees received from other credit card issuers for providing cash advances for their customers through the Santander UK group’s branch and ATM networks, annual fees payable by credit card holders and fees fornon-banking financial products.

  

Net interest income

  

The difference between interest received on assets and interest paid on liabilities.

  

Net Interest Margin (NIM)

  

Net interest income as a percentage of average interest-earning assets.

Santander UK plc273


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

TermDefinition
  

Net Promoter Score

The ‘Net Promoter score’ is based on11-point scale(0-10). The calculation used here is the percentage top two promoters (customers scoring 9 or 10) minus detractors, defined as percentage bottom seven (customers scoring0-6) and excluding passives (customers scoring 7 or 8). This is scored across mortgages, savings, main current accounts, home insurance, UPLs and credit cards, based on a weighting of those products calculated to reflect the average product distribution across Santander UK and competitor brands.

Net Stable Funding Ratio (NSFR)

  

The ratio of available stable funding resources to stable funding requirements over a one year time horizon, assuming a stressed scenario. The Basel III rules require this ratio to be over 100%.

  

Non-performingOther retail products loans (NPLs)

  

Loans and advances are classified asnon-performing typically when the counterparty fails to make payments when contractually due for three months or longer, although there can be additional qualifying criteria depending upon the business segment and product. For additional information on the definition of NPLs, see ‘Santander UK Group Level - Credit risk management – risk measurement and control’ in the Risk review section of the Annual Report.

NPL ratio

NPLs as a percentage of loans and advances to customers.

Other retail products

Other Retail products include Cater Allen, cahoot and crown dependencies (Jersey branch and Isle of Man).

  

Over the counter (OTC) derivatives

  

Contracts that are traded (and privately negotiated) directly between two parties, without going through an exchange or other intermediary. They offer flexibility because, unlike standardised exchange-traded products, they can be tailored to fit specific needs.

  

Own credit

  

The effect of the Santander UK group’s own credit standing on the fair value of financial liabilities.

  

Past due

  

A financial asset such as a loan is past due when the counterparty has failed to make a payment when contractually due.

  

People Supported

  

People supported through our charity partnerships and sponsored programmes. Employee volunteer activities are organised through our flagship Discovery Project programme, the Santander Foundation and Santander Universities.

  

Pillar 1

  

The first pillar of the Basel III approach which provides the approach to the calculation of the minimum capital requirements. This is 8% of the bank’s risk-weighted assets.

  

Pillar 2

  

The part of the CRD IV Accord which sets out the process by which a bank should review its overall capital adequacy and the processes under which the supervisors evaluate how well financial institutions are assessing their risks and take appropriate actions in response to the assessments.

  

Pillar 3

  

The part of the CRD IV Accord which sets out the disclosure requirements for firms to publish details of their risks, capital and risk management. The aims are greater transparency and strengthening market discipline.

  

Potential problem loans

  

Loans other thannon-accrual loans, accruing loans which are contractually overdue 90 days or more as to principal or interest and troubled debt restructurings where known information about possible credit problems of the borrower causes management to have serious doubts about the borrower’s ability to meet the loan’s repayment terms.

  

Primary banking customers

  

Adult Banking Customers who have a three month average credit turnover of at least £500 and set up a minimum of two Direct Debits (one paid out in the last three months) or at least one Standing Order (paid out in the last three months). Student Banking Customers who have a twelve month average credit turnover of at least £500 and as a minimum three active Debit Card transactions in the last month.

  

Prime / prime mortgage loans

  

A US description for mortgages granted to the most creditworthy category of borrowers.

  

Private customers

  

Customers who have investments or savings of over £500,000 or a gross annual income in excess of £250,000.

  

Private equity investments

  

Equity holdings in operating companies not quoted on a public exchange.

  

Probability of default (PD)

  

The likelihood of a borrower defaulting in the following month, assuming it has not closed or defaulted since the reporting date. For each month in the forecast period, we estimate the monthly PD from a range of factors. These include the current risk grade for the exposure, which becomes less relevant further into the forecast period, as well as the expected evolution of the account risk with maturity and factors for changing economics. We support this with historical data analysis.

  

Prudential Regulation Authority

(PRA)
  

The UK financial services regulator formed as one of the successors to the FSA. The PRA is part of the Bank of England and is responsible for the prudential regulation and supervision of

264    Santander UK plc


> Glossary of financial services industry terms

    Term

Definition

(PRA)

banks, building societies, credit unions, insurers and major investment firms. It sets standards and supervises financial institutions at the level of the individual firm.

  

Regulatory capital

  

The amount of capital that the Santander UK group holds, determined in accordance with rules established by the UK PRA for the consolidated Santander UK group and by local regulators for individual Santander UK group companies.

  

Remuneration Code

  

FCA Remuneration Code for dual regulated firms SYSC19D.3.44 and PRA Rulebook-Remuneration Part 15.7

  

Repurchase agreement (Repo)

  

In a sale and repurchase agreement one party, the seller, sells a financial asset to another party, the buyer, under commitments to reacquire the asset at a later date. The buyer at the same time agrees to resell the asset at the same later date. From the seller’s perspective such agreements are securities sold under repurchase agreements (repos) and from the buyer’s securities purchased under commitments to resell (reverse repos).

  

Residential Mortgage-BackedMortgage- Backed Securities (RMBS)

  

Securities that represent interests in a group of residential mortgages. Investors in these securities have the right to cash received from future mortgage payments (interest and / or principal).

  

Retail deposit spread

  

Retail Banking customer deposit spreads against the relevant swap rate or LIBOR. Retail Banking customer deposits include savings and bank accounts for personal and business banking customers.

  

Retail IRB approach

loans
  

The Santander UK group’s internal method of calculating credit risk capital requirements for its key retail portfolios. The FSA approved the Santander UK group’s application of the Retail IRB approach to the Santander UK group’s credit portfolios with effect from 1 January 2008.

Retail loans

Loans to individuals rather than institutions, including residential mortgage lending and banking and consumer credit.

  

Risk Appetite

  

The level of risk (types and quantum) that the Santander UK group is willing to accept (or not accept) to safeguard the interests of shareholders whilst achieving business objectives.

  

Risk-weighted assets
(RWA)

  

A measure of a bank’s assets adjusted for their associated risks. Risk weightings are established in accordance with the Basel Capital Accord as implemented by the PRA.

  

Santander UK

  

Refers to Santander UK plc and its subsidiaries.

  

Securitisation

  

A process by which a group of assets, usually loans, are aggregated into a pool, which is used to back the issuance of new securities. A company sells assets to a structured entity which then issues securities backed by the assets, based on their value. This allows the credit quality of the assets to be separated from the credit rating of the original company and transfers risk to external investors. Assets used in securitisations include mortgages to create mortgage-backed securities. Santander UK has established securitisation structures as part of its funding and capital management activities.

  

Select customers

  

Customers who have a Select Current Account and pay their main income of at least £5,000 per month into their Select Current Account or keep £75,000 in any Santander investment(s), savings or current account.

 

274Santander UK plc


 
  
Strategic reportGovernanceRisk reviewFinancial reviewFinancial statementsShareholder information

Glossary of financial

services industry terms

TermDefinition
Significant increase in credit risk (SICR)

  

Assessed by comparing the risk of default of an exposure at the reporting date to the risk of default at origination (after considering the passage of time).

  

Small andmedium-sizedSovereign exposures businesses (SMEs)

  

Small andmedium-sized businesses with <£10m turnover or <250 employees.

Sovereign exposures

Exposures to local and central governments, and government guaranteed counterparties.

  

Stage 1

  

Assets have not experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination. A loss allowance equal to a 12 month ECL is applied.

  

Stage 2

  

Assets have experienced a significant increase in credit risk since origination but no credit impairment has materialised. A loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL is applied.

  

Stage 3

  

Assets that are in default and considered credit impaired. A loss allowance equal to the lifetime ECL is applied. Objective evidence of credit impairment is required.

  

Standardised approach

  

In relation to credit risk, a method for calculating credit risk capital requirements under CRD IV, using External Credit Assessment Institutions ratings and supervisory risk weights. The Standardised approach is less risk-sensitive than IRB (see ‘IRB’ above). In relation to operational risk, a method of calculating the operational capital requirement under CRD IV, by the application of a supervisory defined percentage charge to the gross income of eight specified business lines.

  

Stress testing

  

Stress testing is a management tool that facilitates a forward looking perspective on risk management, strategic planning, capital, and liquidity and funding planning.

  

Structured entity

  

An entity that has been designed so that voting or similar rights are not the dominant factor in deciding who controls the entity, such as when any voting rights relate to administrative tasks only and the relevant activities are directed by means of contractual arrangements.

  

Structured finance/notes

  

A structured note is an instrument which pays a return linked to the value or level of a specified asset or index and sometimes offers capital protection if the value declines. Structured notes can be linked to a range of underlying assets, including equities, interest rates, funds, commodities and foreign currency.

  

Subordinated liabilities

  

Liabilities which, in the event of insolvency or liquidation of the issuer, are subordinated to the claims of depositors and other creditors of the issuer.

  

Sub-prime

  

Loans to borrowers typically having weakened credit histories that include payment delinquencies and potentially more severe problems such as court judgements and bankruptcies. They may also display reduced repayment capacity as measured by credit scores, highdebt-to-income ratios, or other criteria indicating heightened risk of default.

  

Supranational

  

An international organisation where member states transcend national boundaries or interests to share in decision-making and vote on issues relating to the organisation’s geographical focus.

  

SVR

  

Standard Variable Rate, for mortgages.

a mortgage product managed by Santander and not directly linked to the Bank of England base rate.
  

Tier 1 capital

  

A measure of a bank’s financial strength defined by the PRA. It captures Core Tier 1 capital plus other Tier 1 securities in issue, but is subject to a deduction in respect of material holdings in financial companies.

  

Tier 12 capital ratio

  

The ratio expresses Tier 1 capital as a percentage of risk weighted assets.

Tier 2 capital

Defined by the PRA. Broadly, it includes qualifying subordinated debt and other Tier 2 securities in issue, eligible collective impairment allowances, unrealised available for sale equity gains and revaluation reserves. It is subject to deductions relating to the excess of expected loss over regulatory impairment allowance, securitisation positions and material holdings in financial companies.

  

Total loss absorbing capacity (TLAC)

  

An international standard for TLAC issued by the Financial Stability Board, which requires global systemically important banks(G-SIBs) to have sufficient loss-absorbing and recapitalisation capacity available in resolution, to minimise impacts on financial stability, maintain the continuity of critical functions and avoid requiring taxpayer support.

  

Total wholesale funding

  

Comprises the sum of all outstanding debt securities, structured issuance (including firm financing repurchase agreements), subordinated debt and capital issuance, TFS and noncustomer deposits. Total wholesale funding excludes any collateral received as part of the FLS.

  

Trading book

  

Positions in financial instruments held either with trading intent or in order to hedge other elements of the trading book, which must be free of restrictive covenants on their tradability or ability to be hedged.

  

Troubled debt restructurings

Unencumbered assets
  

A US description for restructuring a debt whereby the creditor for economicAssets on our balance sheet not used to secure liabilities or legal reasons related to a debtor’s financial difficulties grants a concession to the debtor that it would not otherwise consider.

pledged.
  

Value at Risk (VaR)

  

An estimate of the potential loss which might arise from market movements under normal market conditions, if the current positions were to be held unchanged for one business day, measured to a confidence level.

  

Wholesale funding with a residual maturity of less than one year

  

Wholesale funding which has a residual maturity of less than one year at the balance sheet date.

  

Write-down

  

After an advance has been identified as impaired and is subject to an impairment allowance, the stage may be reached whereby it is concluded that there is no realistic prospect of further recovery. Write-downs will occur when, and to the extent that, the whole or part of a debt is considered irrecoverable.

  

Wrong-way risk

  

An aggravated form of concentration risk and arises when there is an adverse correlation between the counterparty’s probability of default and themark-to-market value of the underlying transaction.

LOGO

 

Santander UK plc 265275


Annual Report 2019| Shareholder information

    

 


Annual Report 2018 | Other information for US investors

Cross-reference to Form20-F

 

Form20-F Item Number and Caption

Form20-F Item Number and Caption

    

 

Page

 

Form20-F Item Number and Caption    Page

PART I

PART I

                   

1

 Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers         *  Identity of Directors, Senior Management and Advisers     *

2

 Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable         *  Offer Statistics and Expected Timetable     *

3

 Key Information    Selected financial data    216  Key Information  Selected financial data  22
      Capitalisation and indebtedness    *     Capitalisation and indebtedness  *
      Reasons for the offer and use of proceeds    *     Reasons for the offer and use of proceeds  *
      Risk factors    222     Risk factors  238

4

 Information on the Company    History and development of the company    48, 142, 176 (Note 21), 248  Information on the Company  History and development of the company  60, 167 (Note 1), 201 (Note 19), 256
      Business overview    9, 10, 11, 12, 13     Business overview  15-21, 181 (Note 2)
      Organisational structure    48, 106, 218     Organisational structure  2, 60, 235
      Property, plant and equipment    Not applicable     Property, plant and equipment  Not applicable

4A

 Unresolved Staff Comments         Not applicable  Unresolved Staff Comments     Not applicable

5

 Operating and Financial Review and Prospects    Operating results    6, 134, 163 (Note 12), 180 (Note 28)  Operating and Financial Review and Prospects  Operating results  15, 16
      Liquidity and capital resources    103, 111, 257     Liquidity and capital resources  21, 126, 134, 265
      Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.    Not applicable     Research and development, patents and licenses, etc.  Not applicable
      Trend information    3, 6, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13     Trend information  4, 5
      Off-balance sheet arrangements    176 (Note 21), 189 (Note 32), 258     Off-balance sheet arrangements  266
      Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations    258     Tabular disclosure of contractual obligations  266
      Safe harbor    Not applicable     Safe harbor  Not applicable

6

 Directors, Senior Management and Employees    Directors and senior management    19  Directors, Senior Management and Employees  Directors and senior management  25
      Compensation    41     Compensation  55
      Board practices    22     Board practices  30
      Employees    48, 158 (Note 6)     Employees  10, 181 (Note 2)
      Share ownership    48, 195 (Note 38)     Share ownership  218 (Note 35)

7

 Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions    Major shareholders    248  Major Shareholders and Related Party Transactions  Major shareholders  256
      Related party transactions    197 (Note 40), 211 (Note 43)     Related party transactions  91, 219 (Note 36), 220 (Note 37)
      Interests of experts and counsel    *     Interests of experts and counsel  *

8

 Financial Information    Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information    134, 135, 136, 137, 138  Financial Information  Consolidated Statements and Other Financial Information  152, 159
      Significant Changes    

214 (Note 45)

     Significant Changes  233 (Note 40)

9

 The Offer and Listing    Offer and listing details    *  The Offer and Listing  Offer and listing details  *
      Plan of distribution    *     Plan of distribution  *
      Markets    Not applicable     Markets  Not applicable
      Selling shareholders    *     Selling shareholders  *
      Dilution    *     Dilution  *
      Expenses of the issue    *     Expenses of the issue  *

10

 Additional Information    Share capital    *  Additional Information  Share capital  *
      Memorandum and articles of association    245     Memorandum and articles of association  253
      Material contracts    248     Material contracts  256
      Exchange controls    248     Exchange controls  256
      Taxation    261     Taxation  269
      Dividends and paying agents    *     Dividends and paying agents  *
      Statements by experts    *     Statements by experts  *
      Documents on display    248     Documents on display  256
      Subsidiary Information    Not applicable     Subsidiary Information  235

11

 Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk         96  Quantitative and Qualitative Disclosures about Market Risk     118

12

 Description of Securities Other Than Equity Securities    Debt Securities    *  Description of Securities Other Than Equity Securities  Debt Securities  *
      Warrants and Rights    *     Warrants and Rights  *
      Other Securities    *     Other Securities  *
      American Depositary Shares    *     American Depositary Shares  *

PART II

PART II

                   

13

 Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies         Not applicable  Defaults, Dividend Arrearages and Delinquencies  Not applicable

14

 Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds    

247

  Material Modifications to the Rights of Security Holders and Use of Proceeds  Not applicable

15

 Controls and Procedures         49  Controls and Procedures     61

16A

 Audit Committee financial expert         33  Audit Committee financial expert     46

16B

 Code of Ethics         49  Code of Ethics     61

16C

 Principal Accountant Fees and Services         159 (Note 7)  Principal Accountant Fees and Services     185 (Note 7)

16D

 Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees         Not applicable  Exemptions from the Listing Standards for Audit Committees  Not applicable

16E

 Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers         Not applicable  Purchases of Equity Securities by the Issuer and Affiliated Purchasers  Not applicable

16F

 Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant         

Not applicable

  Change in Registrant’s Certifying Accountant     Not applicable

16G

 Corporate Governance         247  Corporate Governance     255

16H

 Mine Safety Disclosure         Not applicable  Mine Safety Disclosure     Not applicable

PART III

PART III

                   

17

 Financial Statements         Not applicable  Financial Statements     Not applicable

18

 Financial Statements         6  Financial Statements     159

19

 Exhibits         Filed with SEC  Exhibits     Filed with SEC

* Not required for an Annual Report.

 

266276 Santander UK plc


Further

Information

Designed and produced by

CONRAN DESIGN GROUPContact us

Contact us

Customer services

For more information on our products and services, please visit our website:

LOGO santander.co.ukCustomer servicesCommunity involvement
customerservices@santander.co.ukFor more information on our products and
services, please visit our website:
To find out more about applying for donations and the Santander UK Foundation, please visit our website:
LOGO     +44 (0)800 389 7000

Shareholders

Information for UK shareholders of Banco Santander can be found at our website:

LOGOsantandershareview.com
santandershareholders@equiniti.com

By post, please write to:

Santander Nominee Service

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing BN99 6DA

LOGO+44 (0)371 384 2000
+44 (0)121 415 7188 (From outside the UK)

Key dates

30 April 2019Q1 2019 results
24 July 2019Q2 2019 results
31 October 2019Q3 2019 results

Community involvement

To find out more about applying for donations and the Santander UK Foundation, please visit our website:

LOGOsantanderfoundation.org.uk

Media centre

Contacts for the media relations team are available at our website via the media section:

LOGOaboutsantander.co.uk
mediarelations@santander.co.uk

Investor relations

For financial results and presentations, stock exchange announcements, credit ratings and information for debt investors, please visit the investor relations section of our website:

LOGOaboutsantander.co.uk
ir@santander.co.uk

Registered address

Santander UK

2 Triton Square

Regent’s Place

London NW1 3AN


 

 

LOGOLOGO

santander.co.uk

customerservices@santander.co.uk

LOGO

 

santander.co.uksantanderfoundation.org.uk

Media centre
LOGO+44 (0)800 389 7000Contacts for the media relations team are available at our website via the media section:

 

Shareholders

Information for UK shareholders of Banco
Santander can be found at our website:
LOGO

aboutsantander.co.uk

mediarelations@santander.co.uk

LOGO

santandershareview.com

santandershareholders@equiniti.com

Investor relations

For financial results and presentations, stock exchange announcements, credit ratings and information for debt investors, please visit the investor relations section of our website:

By post, please write to:

Santander Nominee Service

Aspect House

Spencer Road

Lancing BN99 6DA

LOGO

santander.co.uk/about-santander/

investor-relations

ir@santander.co.uk

LOGO

+44 (0)371 384 2000

+44 (0)121 415 7188 (From outside the UK)

Registered address

Santander UK

2 Triton Square

Regent’s Place

London NW1 3AN

 

Key dates  
28 April 2020

Q1 2020 results

29 July 2020

Q2 2020 results

28 October 2020Q3 2020 results

Designed and produced by

LOGO


LOGO

santander.co.uk Santander UK 2 Triton Square
Regent’s Place London NW1 3AN


EXHIBIT INDEX

 

Exhibits1  
  1.1  Articles of Association of Santander UK plc (incorporated by reference to Santander UK plc’s Form6-K furnished with the Securities and Exchange Commission on 10 March 2010)
  2.1Description of the Registrant’s Securities registered pursuant to Section 12 of the Securities Exchange Act of 1934
  8.1  List of Subsidiaries of Santander UK plc - the list of subsidiaries that are consolidated can be found in ‘Subsidiaries, joint ventures and associates’ in the Shareholder information section of the Form20-F 20-F. Details of subsidiaries that are not consolidated can be found in ‘Note 19 ‘Interests in other entities’ in the Financial Statements section of the Form 20-F.
12.1  CEO Certificate pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
12.2  CFO Certificate pursuant to Section 302 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
13.1  Certificate pursuant to Section 906 of the Sarbanes-Oxley Act of 2002
15.1  

Consent of PricewaterhouseCoopers LLP2

101.INS*  XBRL Instance Document
101.SCH*  XBRL Taxonomy Extension Schema Document
101.CAL*  XBRL Taxonomy Extension Calculation Linkbase Document
101.DEF*  XBRL Taxonomy Extension Definition Linkbase Document
101.LAB*  XBRL Taxonomy Extension Label Linkbase Document
101.PRE*  

XBRL Taxonomy Extension Presentation Linkbase Document

 

1

Documents concerning Santander UK plc referred to within the Annual Report on Form20-F for the year ended 31 December, 2018 2019 may be inspected at 2 Triton Square, Regent’s Place, London NW1 3AN, theits principal executive offices and registered address of Santander UK plc.

2

Incorporated by reference into Registration Statement Nos.333-10232,333-190509 and333-213861 on FormF-3.address.

*

In accordance with Rule 402 of Regulation S-T, the information in these exhibits shall not be deemed to be “filed” for purposes of Section 18 of the Exchange Act, or otherwise subject to the liability of that section, and shall not be incorporated by reference into any registration statement or other document filed under the Securities Act, or the Exchange Act, except as shall be expressly set forth by specific reference in such filing.


SIGNATURE

The registrant hereby certifies that it meets all the requirements for filing on Form20-F and that it has duly caused and authorized the undersigned to sign this annual report on its behalf.

 

SANTANDER UK plc
By: 

/s/ Nathan Bostock

 Nathan Bostock
 Chief Executive Officer

Dated: 1124 March, 20192020